Home
Contents
Index
NP 19 RECORD OF AMENDMENTS The table below is to record Section IV Notice to Mariners amendments affecting this volume. Sub paragraph numbers in the margin of the body of the book are to assist the user when making amendments to this to this volume.
Weekly Notices to Mariners (Section IV) 2005
2006
2007
2008
IMPORTANT − SEE RELATED ADMIRALTY PUBLICATIONS This is one of a series of publications produced by the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office which should be consulted by users of Admiralty Charts. The full list of such publications is as follows: Notices to Mariners (Annual, permanent, temporary and preliminary), Chart 5011 (Symbols and abbreviations), The Mariner’s Handbook (especially Chapters 1 and 2 for important information on the use of UKHO products, their accuracy and limitations), Sailing Directions (Pilots), List of Lights and Fog Signals, List of Radio Signals, Tide Tables and their digital equivalents.
All charts and publications should be kept up to date with the latest amendments.
Home
Contents
Index
NP 19
BALTIC PILOT VOLUME II South part of Baltic Sea and Gulf of RØga
THIRTEENTH EDITION 2005
PUBLISHED BY THE UNITED KINGDOM HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE
Home
Contents
Index
E Crown Copyright 2005 To be obtained from Agents for the sale of Admiralty Charts and Publications
Copyright for some of the material in this publication is owned by the authority named under the item and permission for its reproduction must be obtained from the owner.
First Published in Baltic Sea and Gulf of Finland Pilot . . . . . . . Second Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Published as Baltic Pilot Volume II, Third Edition . . . . . . . . . . Fourth Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fifth Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sixth Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seventh Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eighth Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ninth Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tenth Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eleventh Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twelfth Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
1854 1888 1896 1904 1914 1928 1938 1953 1965 1978 1998 2002
Home
Contents
Index
PREFACE
The Thirteenth Edition of Baltic Pilot Volume II has been prepared by Commander G. D. Niven Royal Navy. The United Kingdom Hydrographic Office has used all reasonable endeavours to ensure that this Pilot contains all the information obtained by and assessed by it at the date shown below. Information received or assessed after that date will be included in Admiralty Notices to Mariners where appropriate. If in doubt, see The Mariner’s Handbook for details of what Admiralty Notices to Mariners are and how to use them. The edition supersedes the Twelfth Edition (2002), which is cancelled. Information on climate and currents has been based on data provided by the Met Office, Exeter. The following sources of information, other than UKHO Publications and Ministry of Defence papers, have been consulted: Germany Ostsee-Handbuch III. Teil 2002 Charts Port Handbooks Poland Charts Polish Sailing Directions, Eighth Edition 2001 and Supplement (2004) Polish Port Handbooks Russian Federation USSR 4201, Handbook for ships visiting Soviet ports in Baltic Sea 1990 Charts Lithuania Charts Lithuanian Ports Handbook Latvia Charts Latvian Maritime Administration Pilot of the Baltic Sea, Latvian Coast Estonia Charts Eesti lootsiraamat (2003) Estonian Maritime Administration Sweden Svensk Lots Del A 1992 Svensk Lots Del I 1996 Svensk Lots Del II 1998 Svensk Kusthandbok Del 3 1994 Svensk Kusthandbok − Mälaren 1996 Charts Denmark Den Danske Havnelods 2002 Østersøen omkring Bornholm 2002 Charts Other publications Ports of the World 2005 Fairplay World Ports Directory 2003−2004 The Statesman’s Yearbook 2005 Port Handbooks produced by Port Authorities Dr D W Williams United Kingdom National Hydrographer The United Kingdom Hydrographic Office Admiralty Way Taunton Somerset TA1 2DN England 24 February 2005
iii
Home
Contents
Index
PREFACE
The Eleventh Edition of Baltic Pilot Volume II has been prepared by Captain E.R.T. Little, Master Mariner, and Captain G.B. Ivens, Master Mariner, and contains the latest information received by the UK Hydrographic Office to the date given below. The edition supersedes the Tenth Edition (1978) and Supplement No 9 (1996), which are cancelled. Information on climate and currents has been based on data provided by the Met Office, Bracknell. The following sources of information, other than UK Hydrographic Office Publications and Ministry of Defence papers, have been consulted: Germany Ostsee-Handbuch III. Teil, 1991 Charts Port Handbooks Poland Charts Polish Sailing Directions, Seventh Edition 1994 Polish Port Handbooks Russian Federation USSR 4201, Handbook for ships visiting Soviet ports in Baltic Sea 1990 Charts Lithuania Charts Lithuanian Ports Handbook Latvia Charts Latvian Maritime Administration Estonia Charts Estonian National Maritime Board Sweden Svensk Lots Del A 1992 Svensk Lots Del I 1996 Svensk Lots Del II 1998 Svensk Kusthandbok Del 3 1994 Svensk Kusthandbok − Mälaren 1996 Charts Denmark Den Danske Havnelods 1993 Charts Other publications Ports of the World 1998 Fairplay Ports Guide 1998 Lloyds Maritime Guide 1997 Lloyds List The Statesman’s Yearbook 1998–1999 Whitakers’s Almanack 1998 Encyclopaedia Britannica Port Handbooks produced by Port Authorities J.P. CLARKE CBN LVO MBE Rear Admiral Hydrographer of the Navy The United Kingdom Hydrographic Office Admiralty Way Taunton Somerset TA1 2DN England 3rd December 1998
iv
Home
Contents
Index
CONTENTS Pages Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Preface to the Eleventh edition (1998) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Table for the transliteration of Russian geographical names including the Cyrillic Morse Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii Index chartlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . facing 1 CHAPTER 1 Navigation and regulations Limits of the book (1.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Navigational dangers and hazards (1.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Traffic and operations (1.11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Charts (1.32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Aids to navigation (1.37) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Pilotage (1.49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Radio facilities (1.59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Regulations (1.70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Icebreaking services (1.116) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Signals (1.136) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Distress and rescue (1.153) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Countries and ports Sweden (1.164) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Denmark (1.174) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Federal Republic of Germany (1.182) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Poland (1.190) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Russian Federation (1.199) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lithuania (1.214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Latvia (1.222) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estonia (1.230) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Principal ports (1.238) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port services — summary (1.239) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28 29 30 31 32 34 35 35 36 38
Natural conditions Maritime topography (1.243) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Currents (1.244) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sea level and tides (1.246) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sea and swell (1.247) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sea water characteristics (1.249) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ice conditions (1.253) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate and weather (1.262) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climatic tables (1.284) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meteorological conversion table and scales (1.300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39 39 40 40 40 45 58 64 81
CHAPTER 2 Through Routes to Gulf of Bothnia and Gulf of Finland; and the islands of Bornholm and Gotland together with their adjacent islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 CHAPTER 3 Baltic North Shore — Kullagrund to Kalmarsund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 CHAPTER 4 Kalmarsund and Öland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 CHAPTER 5 Northern Entrance of Kalmarsund to Landsort. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
v
Home
Contents
Index CONTENTS
CHAPTER 6 Mälaren, including Landsort to Stockholm via Södertälje Kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 CHAPTER 7 Stockholms Skärgård from Landsort to Simpnäsklubb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 CHAPTER 8 Baltic South Shore — Kap Arkona to Gulf of Gdask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 CHAPTER 9 Gulf of Gdask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 CHAPTER 10 Gulf of Gdask to Gulf of Rga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 CHAPTER 11 Gulf of Rga and Western Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 CHAPTER 12 Saaremaa, West and North Coasts and Hiiumaa, including Väinameri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 APPENDICES AND INDEX Appendix I — Russia — Regulated areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix II — Poland — Restricted areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
429 431 433 434
Home
Contents
Index
EXPLANATORY NOTES Admiralty Sailing Directions are intended for use by vessels of 12 m or more in length. They amplify charted detail and contain information needed for safe navigation which is not available from Admiralty charts, or other hydrographic publications. They are intended to be read in conjunction with the charts quoted in the text. This volume of the Sailing Directions will be kept up-to-date by the issue of a new edition at intervals of approximately 3 years, without the use of supplements. In addition important amendments which cannot await the new edition are published in Section IV of the weekly editions of Admiralty Notices to Mariners. A list of such amendments and notices in force is published in the last weekly edition for each month. Those still in force at the end of the year are reprinted in the Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners. This volume should not be used without reference to Section IV of the weekly editions of Admiralty Notices to Mariners. CD−ROM Status. A compact disc is provided at the back of this volume. The paper publication of Sailing Directions satisfies the requirements of Chapter V of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea. The CD version does not satisfy these requirements and should only be used in conjunction with the paper publication and any amendments affecting the paper publication. Where any discrepancy exists between data on the CD and in the paper publication of Sailing Directions, the paper publication (inclusive of amendments) is to be relied upon. Disclaimer. Whilst the UKHO has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the data on the CD was accurate at the time of production, it has not verified the data for navigational purposes and the CD is not suitable, and is not to be relied upon, for navigation. The use of the CD for this purpose is at the user’s own risk. The UKHO accepts no liability (except in the case of death or personal injury caused by the negligence of the UKHO) whether in contract, tort, under any statute or otherwise and whether or not arising out of any negligence on the part of the UKHO in respect of any inadequacy of any kind whatsoever in the data on the CD or in the means of distribution. Conditions of release. The material supplied on the CD−ROM is protected by Crown Copyright. No part of the data may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of the UKHO. The copyright material, its derivatives and its outputs may not be sold or distributed or commercially exploited in either an original or derived form without the prior written permission of the UKHO. For the avoidance of doubt, the supplied material, its derivatives and its outputs shall not be placed, or allowed to be placed, on a computer accessible to Third Parties whether via the Internet or otherwise. The release of the supplied material in no way implies that the UKHO will supply further material. References to hydrographic and other publications The Mariner’s Handbook gives general information affecting navigation and is complementary to this volume. Ocean Passages for the World and Routeing Charts contain ocean routeing information and should be consulted for other than coastal passages. Admiralty List of Lights should be consulted for details of lights, lanbys and fog signals, as these are not fully described in this volume. Admiralty List of Radio Signals should be consulted for information relating to coast and port radio stations, radio details of pilotage services, radar beacons and radio direction finding stations, meteorological services, radio aids to navigation, Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) and Differential Global Positioning System (DGPS) stations, as these are only briefly referred to in this volume. Admiralty Maritime Communications is a comprehensive guide on all aspects of maritime communications for the yachtsman and small craft user. It provides general information on Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS), the management of VHF, Maritime Safety Information, NAVTEX, Inmarsat and Radio Facsimile, and detailed information and procedures for marinas and harbours used by small craft. Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners contains in addition to the temporary and preliminary notices, and amendments and notices affecting Sailing Directions, a number of notices giving information of a permanent nature covering radio messages and navigational warnings, distress and rescue at sea and exercise areas. The International Code of Signals should be consulted for details of distress and life-saving signals, international ice-breaker signals as well as international flag signals. Remarks on subject matter Buoys are generally described in detail only when they have special navigational significance, or where the scale of the chart is too small to show all the details clearly. Chart index diagrams in this volume show only those Admiralty charts of a suitable scale to give good coverage of the area. Mariners should consult NP 131 Catalogue of Admiralty Charts and Publications for details of larger scale charts.
vii
Home
Contents
Index EXPLANATORY NOTES
Chart references in the text normally refer to the largest scale Admiralty chart but occasionally a smaller scale chart may be quoted where its use is more appropriate. Firing, practice and exercise areas. Except for submarine exercise areas, details of firing, practice and exercise areas are not mentioned in Sailing Directions, but signals and buoys used in connection with these areas are sometimes mentioned if significant for navigation. Attention is invited to the Annual Notice to Mariners on this subject. Names have been taken from the most authoritative source. When an obsolete name still appears on the chart, it is given in brackets following the proper name at the principal description of the feature in the text and where the name is first mentioned. Tidal information relating the daily vertical movements of the water is not given; for this Admiralty Tide Tables should be consulted. Changes in water level of an abnormal nature are mentioned. Time difference used in the text when applied to the time of High Water found from the Admiralty Tide Tables, gives the time of the event being described in the Standard Time kept in the area of that event. Due allowance must be made for any seasonal daylight saving time which may be kept. Wreck information is included where drying or below-water wrecks are relatively permanent features having significance for navigation or anchoring. Units and terminology used in this volume Latitude and Longitude given in brackets are approximate and are taken from the chart quoted. Bearings and directions are referred to the true compass and when given in degrees are reckoned clockwise from 000° (North) to 359° Bearings used for positioning are given from the reference object. Bearings of objects, alignments and light sectors are given as seen from the vessel. Courses always refer to the course to be made good over the ground. Winds are described by the direction from which they blow. Tidal streams and currents are described by the direction towards which they flow. Distances are expressed in sea miles of 60 to a degree of latitude and sub-divided into cables of one tenth of a sea mile. Depths are given below chart datum, except where otherwise stated. Heights of objects refer to the height of the structure above the ground and are invariably expressed as “... m in height”. Elevations, as distinct from heights, are given above Mean High Water Springs or Mean Higher High Water whichever is quoted in Admiralty Tide Tables, and expressed as, “an elevation of ... m”. However the elevation of natural features such as hills may alternatively be expressed as “... m high” since in this case there can be no confusion between elevation and height. Metric units are used for all measurements of depths, heights and short distances, but where feet/fathoms charts are referred to, these latter units are given in brackets after the metric values for depths and heights shown on the chart. Time is expressed in the four-figure notation beginning at midnight and is given in local time unless otherwise stated. Details of local time kept will be found in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2. Bands is the word used to indicate horizontal marking. Stripes is the word used to indicate markings which are vertical, unless stated to be diagonal. Conspicuous objects are natural and artificial marks which are outstanding, easily identifiable and clearly visible to the mariner over a large area of sea in varying conditions of light. If the scale is large enough they will normally be shown on the chart in bold capitals and may be marked “conspic”. Prominent objects are those which are easily identifiable, but do not justify being classified as conspicuous.
viii
Home
Contents
Index
ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in the text. AIS ALC ALP AMVER
Automatic Indentification System Articulated loading column Articulated loading platform Automated Mutual Assistance Vessel Rescue System
°C CALM CBM CDC CVTS
degrees Celsius Catenary anchor leg mooring Conventional buoy mooring Certain Dangerous Cargo Co−operative Vessel Traffic System
DG DGPS DF DW dwt DZ
degaussing Differential Global Positioning System direction finding Deep Water deadweight tonnage danger zone
E EEZ ESE ELSBM ENE EPIRB ETA ETD EU
east (easterly, eastward, eastern, easternmost) exclusive economic zone east-south-east Exposed location single buoy mooring east-north-east Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon estimated time of arrival estimated time of departure European Union
feu fm FPU FPSO FSO ft
forty foot equivalent unit fathom(s) Floating production unit Floating production storage and offloading vessel Floating storage and offloading vessel foot (feet)
GMDSS GPS GRP g/cm3 grt gt
Global Maritime Distress and Safety System Global Positioning System glass reinforced plastic gram per cubic centimetre gross register tonnage gross tonnage
HAT HF HMS hp hPa HW HSC
Highest Astronomical Tide high frequency Her (His) Majesty’s Ship horse power hectopascal High Water High Speed Craft
IALA IHO IMO ITCZ
International Association of Lighthouse Authorities International Hydrographic Organization International Maritime Organization Intertropical Convergence Zone
JRCC
Joint Rescue Co−ordination Centre
kHz km kn kW
kilohertz kilometre(s) knot(s) kilowatt(s)
Lanby LASH LAT LHG LNG LPG LF LMT LOA LW
Large automatic navigation buoy Lighter Aboard Ship Lowest Astronomical Tide Liquefied Hazardous Gas Liquefied Natural Gas Liquefied Petroleum Gas low frequency Local Mean Time Length overall Low Water
m mm mb MHz MW MHHW MHLW MHW MHWN MHWS MLHW MLLW MLW MLWN MLWS MSL MCTS
metre(s) millimetre(s) millibar(s) megahertz megawatt(s) Mean Higher High Water Mean Higher Low Water Mean High Water Mean High Water Neaps Mean High Water Springs Mean Lower High Water Mean Lower Low Water Mean Low Water Mean Low Water Neaps Mean Low Water Springs Mean Sea Level Marine Communications and Traffic Services Centres medium frequency Maritime Mobile Service Identity Maritime Rescue Co-ordination Centre Maritime Rescue Sub-Centre Motor Vessel Motor Yacht
MF MMSI MRCC MRSC MV MY NATO Navtex N NE NNE NNW No nrt NW
North Atlantic Treaty Organization Navigational Telex System north (northerly, northward, northern, northernmost) north-east north-north-east north-north-west number nett register tonnage north-west
ODAS
Ocean Data Acquisition System
PEL PLEM POL
Port Entry Light Pipe line end manifold Petrol, Oil & Lubricants
RCC RMS Ro-Ro RN RT
Rescue Co−ordination Centre Royal Mail Ship Roll−on, Roll-off Royal Navy radio telephony
S south (southerly, southward, southern, southernmost) SALM Single anchor leg mooring system SALS Single anchored leg storage system SAR Search and Rescue
ix
Home
Contents
Index ABBREVIATIONS
SE SSE SSW SW SBM SPM Satnav sq SS
south-east south-south-east south-south-west south-west Single buoy mooring Single point mooring Satellite navigation square Steamship
teu TSS
twenty foot equivalent unit Traffic Separation Scheme
UKHO UN UHF ULCC UT
United Kingdom Hydrographic Office United Nations ultra high frequency Ultra Large Crude Carrier Universal Time
VLCC UTC VDR VMRS VTC VHF VTS VTMS
Very Large Crude Carrier Co-ordinated Universal Time Voyage Data Recorder Vessel Movement Reporting System Vessel Traffic Centre very high frequency Vessel Traffic Services Vessel Traffic Management System
WGS World Geodetic System W west (westerly, westward, western, westernmost) WNW west-north-west WSW west-south-west WMO World Meteorological Organization WT radio (wireless) telegraphy
x
Home
Contents
Index
GLOSSARY Swedish (S), Danish, (D), German (G), Polish (P), Russian (R), Lithuanian (Li), Latvian (La) and Estonian (E) terms and words found on charts and in the Sailing Directions. Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
å . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . abwärts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . achteraus, achtern . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . alev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . allvett . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . alt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . alumine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . älv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . ankarplats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . ankerplads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . ankerplatz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . ankruplats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . anlægsbro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . anlægsplats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . anleger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . anløbsbro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . ansteurung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . ås . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . asula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . asundus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . au . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . auffällig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . aufschleppstelle . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . aufwärts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . aussen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . .
river, stream downstream astern market town, borough underwater old lower, front river anchorage anchorage anchorage anchorage jetty, pier berth jetty, pier jetty, pier approach, entrance moraine, ridge settlement settlement brook, rivulet conspicuous slipway upstream outer
bäck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . backbord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . backe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . båd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . båda, både . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . bagbord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . baggerrinne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . baggerschüttstelle . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . båk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . bka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La . . . . bake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . båke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . bakke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . baklysh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . balje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . banka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . banke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . basen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . baseins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La . . . . bashnya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . basseyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . bassin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . bæck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . becken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . bedeckt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bel-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . benzin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, G . . . bereg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . berg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G, S . . . bergkulla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . beton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, G . . . bia-y,a,e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . binnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bjerg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . blå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . blau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . blitzen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . .
brook, stream port side hill boat islet, sunken rock port side, porthand dredged channel spoil ground bay astern fixed beacon lighthouse beacon beacon hill rock above water channel between sands bank shoal bank bar basin basin tower basin, wet dock basin brook basin slip covered white petrol shore, river bank mountain hummock concrete (built) white inland mountain blue blue flashes
bliver synligt . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . bodden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . boden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bohranlage, bohrturm . . . . . . . G . . . . bol’sh-oy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . R . . . . bór . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . borg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . bråd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . brandung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bränning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . brant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . braun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bredning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . bredning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . breit, breite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . breitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . broanleg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . brücke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . brun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . brygga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . brygge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . bryuga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . brzeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . brzeg morski . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . bucht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bugor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . bugser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . bugt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . buhne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . bukhta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . bukt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . burg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . burun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . busch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . .
uncovers boulder bay ground drilling rig great, large forest castle, fortified place breakers breakers rock awash steep, precipitous brown broad (water) wide place in river or channel broad, breadth broad (water) bridge, pier wharf bridge brown landing place, wharf, jetty quay, wharf pier, landing stage bank sea shore bay, bight hillock tug bay, bight groyne bay, inlet bay, bight fortified town breaker bush village, town
chaupa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . chern-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . cypel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . czarny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . czerwony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P R P P P
.... .... .... .... ....
hut black point, promontory black red
dag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dalben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . damm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dæmning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . der, die, das . . . . . . . . . . . . . . derevnya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . derevo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diamant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . djup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dlinn-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . dockhafen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dolina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dorf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . doroga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drehbrücke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drempel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . duc d’albe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . düne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . durchfahrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . durchfahrtsbreite . . . . . . . . . .
D S G G D G G R R D S R G R R G R D G G D G G G
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
day valley dolphin embankment embankment dyke the village tree diamond (shape) deep long wet dock, basin valley house village road isthmus swing bridge sill dolphin sandhill passage navigable width
xi
Home
Contents
Index GLOSSARY
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
durchfahrtshöhe . . . . . . . . . . . dworzec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dyb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dybde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dybgående . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
gleichtaktfeure . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . gebia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . glubok-iy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . R . . . . golomyann-yy-aya-oye . . . . . R . . . . gora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . góra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . górn-y, a, e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . gorod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . grå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . grau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . gravede rende . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . grænse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . greben, gryada . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . grenze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . grober, kies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . grön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . grøn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . gross-er,e,es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . grün . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . grund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S, E . . grunklack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . grus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . guba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . gul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . .
equal interval light deep, cut deep open sea mountain, hill hill, mountain upper city, town grey grey dredged channel limit, boundary ridge limit, boundary shingle green green great green ground, shoal shoal head gravel gulf, bay, inlet yellow
hafen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . hafenamt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . haff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . hage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . haken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . halbinsel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . häll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . hals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . halvö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . halvø . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . hamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . hauptfahrwasser . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . haus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . hav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . havn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . havnekontor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . hebebrücke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . hochspannungsleitung . . . . . . G . . . . hochwasser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . høfde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . höft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . hög . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . högslät . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . höhe, höher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . høj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . højvande . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . holm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . holm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . holme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . holz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . hoved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . höved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . hubbrücke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . hügel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . huggeri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . huk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . hus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . huvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . hvid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . .
harbour harbour office bay, gulf headland hooked point peninsula rock neck peninsula peninsula harbour principal channel house ocean, sea harbour, port harbourmaster’s office lifting bridge overhead power cable high water groyne foreland height, hill tableland high, higher hill high water islet high, hill islet a wood head, headland headland lifting bridge hill quarry point house head white
ida . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . ilist-yy-aye-oye . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . indløb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . indre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . indsø . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . inlopp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . innen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . innerst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S, G . . .
east muddy inlet, entrance inner inland lake entrance inner innermost
G P D D D
.... .... .... .... ....
vertical clearance terminus deep depth draught
eck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G edela . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E Efterretninger for søfarende . . G einfahrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G einlauf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G eis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G eisenbahn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G enge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G entwasserungschleuse . . . . . . G ezers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
angle, corner south-west Notices to Mariners entrance entrance, entering ice railway narrows sluicing lock, sluice gates lake
faarvaater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . fähre, fährbett . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . fahrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . fahrwasser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . fahrzeug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . falder tort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . farja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . farled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . fartøj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . farvand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . farvater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . farvatten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . fastland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . færge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . fels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . feuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . feuerschiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . firkantet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . fisch, fischerei . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . fischstaken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . fisk, fiskeri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . fiskehamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . fiskeläge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . fjäll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . fjärd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . fjord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . flach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . flad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . flak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . flød . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . fløjtetonde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . flughafen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . fluss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . fluthafen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . flydedok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . forbudt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . förde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . forst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . fortøjningsplads . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . frei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . friskvand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . fyr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . fyrskib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . .
channel ferry, ferry berth course, passage fairway, channel vessel drying ferry channel, passage vessel, craft waters, fairway channel waters, fairway mainland ferry rock light light-vessel square, rectangular fish, fishery fishing stakes fish, fishery fishing harbour fishing station mountain range, plateau loch firth, inlet flat flat flat, shoal river whistle-buoy airport river harbour that dries floating dock prohibited firth, inlet forest berth, mooring free fresh water light light-vessel
gab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gamla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gasleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gatt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gavan’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gebiet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gelb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gennemseiling . . . . . . . . . . . . geringste tiefe . . . . . . . . . . . . . gezeit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gezeitenstrom . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mouth, opening old mouth, opening gas pipeline gut, narrow inlet, narrows harbour, basin area, zone yellow passage least or shoalest depth tide tidal stream
D S S G S R G G D G G G
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
xii
Home
Contents
Index GLOSSARY
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
inre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . insel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . insjö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S, D . . .
inner island lake ice
jää . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . jäme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . järsk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . järv, -ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . jernbane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . jezioro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . jõe suu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . jõed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . jõgi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . joki . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
ice thick, heavy, course steep lake railway lake river mouth rivers river river
kagu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G, S, E . . kaj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . kalasadam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kalda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kalju . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kallas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kalnas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Li . . . . kalv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . kamen’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . kamien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . kammerschleuse . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . kammersluse . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E, R, S, G . kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . kanls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La . . . . kants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, G . . . kap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . kapell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . kare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kärestik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kärestiku . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kari . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . kegle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . kekur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . kendelig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . kesk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kevad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . khrebet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . kies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . kindlus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kirche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . kirde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kirik, ud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . kitsus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kivi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . klabb, klubb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . klapbro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . klappbrücke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . kleine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . klint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S, D . . . klipp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . klipp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . klippa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . klippe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . klitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . knude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . kobb, kubb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . korga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . kõorge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . kosa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . kocio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . .
south-east quay quay fishing harbour coast rock shore hill calf rock, stone stone, rock lock lock canal, channel channel channel fort cape, head cape chapel grassy islet rapids, cataract waterfalls shoal, reef beacon cone pillar rock conspicuous central, middle spring hill, hillock ridge, chain of hills gravel fort church north-east church church narrows rock, stone islet, rock bascule bridge bascule bridge little, small cliff cliff rock rock above water rock dunes, sandhills point islet, rock rocky shoal high short, chart spit church
kosk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kovsh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . krasn-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . kryazh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . kugel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . kugeltonne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . kugle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . kugletønde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . kuiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . küla, -d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kulle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . külm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kummel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . küngas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . kurhaus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . kurk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . küste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . küstenverkehrszone . . . . . . . . G . . . . küstenwache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . kvarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . kyrka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . kyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . kystvagt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . .
waterfall, rapids cove red chain of mountains ball, sphere spherical buoy ball, sphere spherical buoy dry village hill cold beacon, cairn hill pumproom channel, strait coast, shore inshore traffic zone coastguard station mill church coast coastguard station
lääne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . ladeplatz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . låg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . laguna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . laid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . lainetemurd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . landenge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . landingssted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . landsætingssted . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . landsby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . landungsbrücke . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . landzunge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . lang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, G . . . länge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . lastageplats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . lavvande . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lægter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . awica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . ledeværk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lednik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . leitdamm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . ler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . leuchtfeuer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . leuchtschiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . leuchttonne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . lichter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . liegeplatz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . liiva künkad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . liivakivi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . lilla, liten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . lille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . liman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . ljudpipa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . løb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . lodret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lodsvæsen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lodu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . løftebro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . loode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . löp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . losseplads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . lotse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . .
west wharf low lagoon bay, inlet islet breakers land, shore isthmus landing place harbour that dries village pier, wharf spit or tongue of land long longitude landing place low water lighter, barge shoal, sandbank training wall glacier training wall clay clay light light-vessel light-buoy lighter, barge berth sand dunes sandstone little little, small estuary whistle channel lead vertical pilot pilotage bog, marshland lifting bridge north-west channel, passage castle spoil ground pilot pilot
E E E E D P E E E F
xiii
Home
Contents
Index GLOSSARY
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
lotsenstelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . lotswesen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . lõuna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . lubi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . luda, ludka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . lufthavn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . luftledning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lumi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . lund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . lystbåd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . lystønde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . .
pilot station pilotage south chalk small rocky islet airport overhead cable snow grove pleasure craft light-buoy
maa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . maabumis sild . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . maamärk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . madal vesi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . madalik, ud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . mäed, mägi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . mly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . mal-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . marios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Li . . . . märkpuu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . materik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . meer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . meerbusen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . mel’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . melk-iy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . mellan, mellem . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . mererand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . mererohi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . meresopp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . merevool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . meri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . mets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . middel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . mielizna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . militärisches übungsgebiet . . . G . . . . mindste dydbe . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . minerada området . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . mittlere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . myn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . myn wodny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . mol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . möl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . molo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . mols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La . . . . more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . most, mostu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . muda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . mudder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . mühle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . münde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . mündung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . mun, mynning . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . munakivid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . munding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . mursten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . muul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . mynning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . mys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . .
islet, land landing stage landmark low, shallow low water shoal, shoals mountain, hill small, little little, small lagoon conspicuous tree mainland sea gulf shoal shallow between seashore seaweed creek stream sea, ocean wood, forest middle, mean shallow military practise area controlling depth, least depth mined area middle, mean mill watermill mole mill pier, mole mole sea bridge mud mud mill river mouth, estuary mouth mouth, opening boulders, shingle mouth brick (built) mole mouth, opening cape, point, headland
neu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . niedrig, niedriger . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . niedrigwasser . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . nip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . nipp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . nis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . nizhn-iy-yaya-eye . . . . . . . . . R . . . . nizk-iy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . nödhamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . nødhavn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . nor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . nord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S, D, G . . nordöst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . nordre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . nordväst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . nørre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . nov-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . nowa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . nowe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . nowy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . nukk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . ny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . .
new low, lower low water point neap (tide) neap (tide) cape, point lower low refuge harbour harbour of refuge inlet north north-east north north-west north north new new new new cape, point new
ö ....................... S .... ø ....................... D .... ober - er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . oblast’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . obryv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . odde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . oja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . olieledning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . oljehamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . ölleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . öre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . org . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . ort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . ost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . öst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S, P . . . øst, østre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . osta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La . . . . Östersjön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . Østersøen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . östlich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . ostrov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . ostrovok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . ostrów . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . Ostsee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . osyp’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . otmel’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . ots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . overflydt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . overskylles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . övre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . ozero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . .
island island upper province bluff tongue or spit of land stream oil pipeline oil harbour oil pipeline tongue or spit of land valley place east east east, eastern port, harbour Baltic Sea Baltic Sea eastern eastern island islet island in river Baltic Sea landslide shoal point submerged covers upper lake
nabbe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nabrzee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nachtrichten für seefahrer . . . näs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . navolok, nos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . næs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nebelschallsendestelle . . . . . . nebenfahrwasser . . . . . . . . . . . nedre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . neem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
projection, point quay, wharf (N.f.s.) Notices to Mariners cape, point night cape, point, headland point, headland fog signal station subsidiary channel lower cape, promontory
paak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pakhta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . parre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pæl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pæleværk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pealvett . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . peen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pegel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pehme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . perebor, perekat . . . . . . . . . . . peredn-iy-yaya-eye . . . . . . . . peresheyek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pervyy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . peschan-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . .
beacon bluff, cliff bank, spit bar pile, pillar groyne above-water fine tide gauge soft bar front isthmus first sandy
S P G S D R D G G S E
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
xiv
E R E E D D E E G E R R R R R
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
Home
Contents
Index GLOSSARY
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
pesok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . pfahl, pfeiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . pilsta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La . . . . pirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . plade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . plads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . platt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . plaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . poberezh’ye, pomor’ye . . . . . R . . . . podvodn-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . R . . . . põhi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . põhja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . poudnie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . poluostrov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . pónocny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . pówysep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R, P . . . port morski . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . port rybachi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . poselok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . priel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . pristan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . prokhod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . proliv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . protok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . proviant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . przyladek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . pulle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . punane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . punkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . pynt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . .
sand pile, pillar town, city jetty, pier shoal place offshore platform flat beach coast, sea-shore submerged bottom north, northern south peninsula north, northern peninsula peninsula port seaport fishing port village channel (small) pier, landing stage passage, pass strait creek provisions cape, promontory shoal red point point
rücken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ruiny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rullebro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rullesten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ryg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
raba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . rådhus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . rafa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . ragas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Li . . . . rags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La . . . . rahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . rakentenstelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . raketredningsstation . . . . . . . . D . . . . rand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . räni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . ranna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . ränna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . rathaus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . reda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . redd, red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . reede . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . redningsbåd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . reflektor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . reid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . reka, rechka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . rende . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . rettnungsboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . retungstelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . reyd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . rif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . riff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E, G . . . riffkette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . rinne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . röd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . rød . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . roheline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . rohrleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . rollbrücke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . røn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . rørledning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . rös . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . rot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . rów . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . .
swamp, marsh town hall reef point cape, headland rocky islet, reef rocket station, (line throwing) rocket station, (line throwing) shore, coast pebbles coast, shore pass, channel town hall road, anchorage road, roadstead road, roadstead life-boat (station) reflector roadstead river, stream channel lifeboat lifeboat station reef, sandbank roadstead reef reef ridge channel red red green underwater pipeline drawbridge (rolling) rock, rocky ledge underwater pipeline heap of stones red ditch
G P D D D P
.... .... .... .... .... ....
saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . säär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . sadam, -ad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . såg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . sala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La . . . . salm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . salma, shar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S, G . . . sandhøje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . savi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . schanze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schiffswerft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schlepper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schleuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schlick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schlipp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schloss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schmal, er, st . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schornstein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schüttstelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schwarz, e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . schwimmdock . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . see . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . seefahrer (N.f.s) . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . seegat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . seleniye, selo . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . seljandiku . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . senkrecht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . severn-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . R . . . . signalstelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . silm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . sissesõit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . sjö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . sjöfarande (U.f.s) . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . skala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . skaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . skans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . skanse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . skär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . skärgård . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . skib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . skibsværft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . skog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . skorsten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . skov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . skydeplads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . slæbested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . slott . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . sluse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . sluss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . små . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . snævring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . sø . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . søfarende (E.f.s) . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . sønder, søndre, syd . . . . . . . . . D . . . . suza . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . soo, -d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . sopka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . spidstønde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . spierentonne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . spirtønde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . spitze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . spitztonne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . .
xv
ridge ruin drawbridge shingle ridge river island, peninsula isthmus, spit harbour, port sawmill island strait strait, channel sand sandhills, dunes clay trench, earthworks ship shipyard tug lock mud patent slip castle, palace small chimney dumping ground black floating dock sea, lake Notices to Mariners entrance channel settlement ridge of land vertical northern signal station narrow channel entrance sea Notices to Mariners rock, cliff rock fort fort, redoubt rocky islet, reef, skerry archipelago, islets, skerries ship shipyard a wood chimney a wood firing area slipway, ramp, hard castle lock lock, sluice small, little narrows sea south, southern Notices to Mariners south, southern lock marsh, morass, bog hillock, mound black conical buoy spar buoy spar buoy point, headland conical buoy
Home
Contents
Index GLOSSARY
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
sredn-yy-yaya-eye . . . . . . . . . R . . . . redni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . stad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S, D . . . stadt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . stamik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . stång . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . stänga farvatter . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . starr-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . stary, a, e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . stawa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . stein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . sten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . steuerbord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . stor, stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . strand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S, G . . . strelka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . ström . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . strøm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, G . . . strömmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . strömung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . stumpftonne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . stumptønde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . styrbord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . sud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . süd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . sügavus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . sund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, G, S . . suur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . svart, svarte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . svingbro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . syd, söder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D, S . . . sydöst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . sydväst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . .
middle middle town, city town, city shoal, rock beacon, pole closed waters old old beacon stone stone, stones starboard great shore, beach narrow spit current, stream tidal stream, current rapids current can, cylindrical buoy can, cylindrical buoy starboard south south depth sound large, big black swing bridge south south-east south-west
unter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unterwasserkabel . . . . . . . . . . untief, untiefe . . . . . . . . . . . . . urbkivi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ust’ye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . utes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . utkik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . uus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tågesignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . tång . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . tange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . tårn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . tavla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . tegel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . tief, tiefe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . tiefgang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . toldkontor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . tolst-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . tønde med stage . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . tonk-iy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . tonne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . topbetegnelse . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . toppzeichen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . tør . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . tørdok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . torn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E, S . . . tõusu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . trafikseparering . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . tret-iy-’ya-ye’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . trockendock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . tserkov’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . tulelaev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . tuli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . tulepoi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E . . . . tullhus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . tunga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . turm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . .
fog signal tongue tongue or spit of land tower beacon, board sandy clay deep, depth draught custom station thick clay pillar buoy thin buoy topmarks topmarks dry dry dock tower flood traffic separation scheme third dry dock church light-vessel light, fire light-buoy customs house tongue tower
über . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . überwasserkabel . . . . . . . . . . . udde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . uddybet løb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . üfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ujcie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ülemine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . undersøiske kabler . . . . . . . . .
over, above overhead cable cape, point dredged channel bank of river or canal estuary upper submarine cable
G G S D G P E D
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
G G G E R R S E
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
lower, under submarine cable shallow, shoal boulder river mouth crag, cliff lookout tower new
väderkvarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S vägbrytare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S väike . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E väin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E valge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S vana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E vand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D vandret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D vandstandsbræt . . . . . . . . . . . . D värav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E varemed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E vrti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La varv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S väst, västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S veeneelus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E verboten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G verkehrstrennungsgebiet . . . . G verkhn-iy-aya-eye . . . . . . . . . R vest, vestre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D vette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S vig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D vik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S vilepoi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E vi lauzis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La vindmølle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D vitt, vitte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S vkhod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R vneshn-iy-yaya-eye . . . . . . . . R vnutrenn-iy-yaya-eye . . . . . . . R vodopad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R voolu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E vorota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R vostochn-yy-yaya-eye . . . . . . R vostok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R vrag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D vrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S vtor-oy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . . R
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
windmill breakwater little, small strait white steep coast old water horizontal tide-gauge entrance ruins gates shipyard west, western tide-rip prohibited traffic separation scheme upper west, western hill creek, inlet cove, inlet, creek whistle-buoy breakwater windmill white entrance outer inner waterfall current gap, gate, entrance eastern east wreck wreck second
waagerecht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . wald . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . wasser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . watt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . weiss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . wellenbrecher . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . west . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G, P . . . wiek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . wielk-i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . wies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . wie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . wiea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . wik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . wimpel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . windmühle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . winkbake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . wrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . wrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . wschód . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . wysepka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . wyspa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . . wyny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P . . . .
horizontal wood, forest water coastal drying flat white breakwater west creek, cove large, great meadow village tower bay, inlet pendant windmill signal beacon wreck wreck east islet island upper
ydre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D . . . . outer ytterst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . outermost yttre, ytter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S . . . . outer
xvi
Home
Contents
Index GLOSSARY
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
Foreign word . . . . . . . . . . Language . English meaning
yug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R . . . . south yuzhn-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . R . . . . southern
zastruga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R zatoka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P zavod’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R zelen-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . . . R zemlya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R ziemeli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . La zollamt, zollstelle . . . . . . . . . . G
zadn-iy-yaya-eye . . . . . . . . . . zaimka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . zalew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . zaliv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . zamek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . zapad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . zapadn-yy-aya-oye . . . . . . . . .
R R P R P R R
.... .... .... .... .... .... ....
long, sandy drying shoal bay, gulf cove, creek, inlet green land north custom house, customs station zufahrt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . entrance area zufluchtshafen . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . harbour of refuge zugbrücke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G . . . . drawbridge
rear settlement, farm gulf gulf, bay, inlet castle west western
xvii
.... .... .... .... .... .... ....
Home
Contents
Index GLOSSARY
TABLE FOR THE TRANSLITERATION OF RUSSIAN GEOGRAPHICAL NAMES INCLUDING THE CYRILLIC MORSE CODE Russian (properly “Great Russian”) is the principal Slavonic language using the Cyrillic alphabet, the latter being largely based on the Greek, but including some letters of unknown, possibly Eastern, origin. The rules for pronunciation and accent are so complicated, and contain so many exceptions, that it would be out of place to give them here. For these and other reasons it has been decided, after full consideration, that Russian words will be spelt, not as they are pronounced, but as they are written; in fact, a letter-for-letter transliteration has been adopted. The Permanent Committee on Geographical Names (PCGN), in agreement with the United States Board of Geographical Names (USBGN), approved, on 19th May 1948, the use of the following table for the transliteration of Russian, which has the advantage over previous tables of mechanical applicability. Print
RUSSIAN Script
Transliteration
Cyrillic Morse Code Symbol
”
Notes Seldom initial except in words of non-Russian origin. ye initially, after vowels (a, e, ë, ,o, y, , , , ), and after , ; e elsewhere; when written as ë in Russian, transliterate as yë or ë. 3 is sometimes written as ’ in Russian, but should always be transliterated as ”. 1 2
xviii
Home
Contents
Index NOTES
xix
Home
Contents 9°
Index
10°
11°
Chapter Index Diagram 13°
12°
15°
14°
16°
18°
17°
19°
20°
21°
23°
22°
24°
25°
26°
27°
28°
29°
F I N L A N D
60°
60° S
W
E
D
E
N
6
Norrtälje
NP 20 Baltic Pilot Vol III
2296
7
2297
6
LM älje KHO er t Söd STOC
59° NP 56 Norway Pilot Vol I öp rrk No
ing
Dala
rö
7
2241 Haapsalu
ESTONIA
12
2
2362
59°
HIIUMAA
2222 Gotska Sandön
2
11 SAAREMAA
58°
5 Västervik
NP 55 North Sea (East) Pilot
xx
NP 18 Baltic Pilot Vol I
57°
L AT V I A
Kalmar
4
rls
10
2
a on kr
56°
RØga
2215
2
2817
Sö l ve sb org
Ventspils
2223
ÖLAND Ka
11
GOTLAND
Visby 2361 Oskarshamn
57°
58° GULF OF RIGA
Fårö
Liepºja
LITHUANIA
56° B A LT I C S E A
Ys
3
Klaip4da
tad
2251
D E N M A R K
55°
ne Røn
2
BORNHOLM 2360
8
K. Arkona
Ja 2369 rosła w
RÜGEN 2365
54°
n lsu Stra
8
d
2816
Ro Gdynia Gdamsk
iec
55°
wie ze
9
Kaliningrad
RUSSIA
2288
Ko*obrzeg
54°
2150
GERMANY
POLAND
Szczecin
53° 0205
9° Baltic Pilot Vol II
53° 10°
11°
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
22°
23°
24°
25°
26°
27°
28°
29°
NP 19
Home
Contents
Index
LAWS AND REGULATIONS APPERTAINING TO NAVIGATION While, in the interests of safety of shipping, the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office makes every endeavour to include in its hydrographic publications details of the laws and regulations of all countries appertaining to navigation, it must be clearly understood: (a) that no liability whatever will be accepted for failure to publish details of any particular law or regulation, and (b) that publication of the details of a law or regulation is solely for the safety and convenience of shipping and implies no recognition of the international validity of the law or regulation.
BALTIC PILOT VOLUME II CHAPTER 1 NAVIGATION AND REGULATIONS COUNTRIES AND PORTS NATURAL CONDITIONS
NAVIGATION AND REGULATIONS NAVIGATIONAL DANGERS AND HAZARDS
LIMITS OF THE BOOK
Coastal conditions 1
Charts 2816, 2817
Area covered 1
2
3
1.1 This volume contains Sailing Directions for the central and S portions of Baltic Sea, which includes Gulf of Rga, within the limits defined below: Bounded W by longitude 13°25′E between, on the N side, the Swedish coast in the vicinity of Smygehamn, and on the S side the German coast at Kap Arkona (54°41′N, 13°25′E). Also included is the coast of Germany from Stralsund (54°19′N, 13°06′E) to the Polish border. Thence: ENE and NE to Dirhami neem (59°13′N, 23°30′E), the S entrance point to Gulf of Finland, encompassing the coast of Poland, the extreme W coast of Russia, the coasts of Lithuania and Latvia, and the W coast of Estonia. Thence: WNW to Bogskär (59°31′N, 20°22′E) and NW to Flötjan (59°49′N, 19°47′E). Thence: WNW to the coast of Sweden at Långören (59°57′N, 18°55′E) and SW to the Granösundet/Flottskär narrows (59°55′⋅8N, 18°52′⋅7E). Thence: SSW along the SE coast of Sweden to longitude 13°25′E in the vicinity of Smygehamn. It should be noted that the Danish island of Bornholm (55°08′N, 14°55′E) also lies within the limits of this book.
2
3
1.2 Navigation in the SW part of Baltic Sea requires constant vigilance due to the presence of a number of shallow banks and shoal areas with depths as low as 6 m. Constant vigilance and monitoring are also necessary on the E coast of Sweden, particularly NNE of Hanö and including Stockholms Skärgård, the archipelago stretching from Landsort to Ålands Hav, which is heavily indented, and fronted by areas containing innumerable islands, rocks and shoals which extend up to about 12 miles offshore. The central and N parts have relatively open, deeper water, but care must be exercised in the approaches to Gulf of Rga, which has narrow, shallower channels. Maximum use should be made of all available aids to navigation. In poor visibility, and despite the good coverage provided by navigational aids, it is advisable when approaching the coast to make full use of the echo-sounder. Weather conditions in winter, when storms, fog, ice and snow storms are experienced, place heavy demands on vessels and mariners. During the winter months buoyage may prove unreliable. Many buoys are removed or are replaced by winter buoyage, whilst others may be damaged or break adrift.
Floating hazards 1
1
1.3 In the coastal waters and archipelago areas of Sweden numerous logs may be encountered adrift throughout the
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
year, but particularly after storms and spring freshets. Such a hazard may constitute a serious danger to small and moderate sized craft. In the waters of the W Baltic mariners are advised to navigate with caution and maintain a constant lookout for floating obstructions, fish-traps, pots and sections of damaged piers, especially during the winter ice season and immediately thereafter.
4
Severe weather 1
1.4 As a result of the shipping catastrophes which have occurred in the Baltic due to severe weather conditions and icing, all ship’s captains, particularly those who have not experienced icing, are strongly recommended to contact the nearest Swedish coast station as soon as possible if their ship gets into difficulty off the Swedish coast. They should report these difficulties, together with the ship’s position, course and any other information which may be of importance. As a result their situation will become known to the various bodies included in the Maritime Rescue Service (1.156), allowing early action should the situation worsen. Safety measures of this type are available free of charge to ships.
Overhead cables 1
2
Former mined areas
1.5 Ferry traffic is extensive throughout the area covered by this volume, often crossing routes at high speed, for which a good lookout should be maintained. In general, ferries crossing the main direction of fairways will endeavour to navigate to minimise risk of collision, but if risk of collision arises then International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972) must be observed. Some high speed craft may generate large waves, which can have a serious impact on small craft and their moorings close to the shoreline and on shallow off-lying banks. For further details see Annual Notice to Mariners No 23.
1
2
Navigation in ice General 1
2
3
1.7 Overhead cables are mentioned in the text where the clearance beneath them may be a hazard to navigation. Some of these cables carry high voltages and allowance should be made to ensure sufficient clearance when passing underneath them. In winter, the published clearance may be varied by ice or snow conditions. See The Mariner’s Handbook for information on safety clearances and the radar responses to be expected.
Mine danger areas
High speed ferries 1
areas, and may also contain useful information on traffic restrictions, routes, etc. It should be noted that transmitted ice reports are based on observations at the stations in the morning. Low visibility and darkness may prevent observations, making it difficult to report changes as soon as would be desirable, and therefore reporting stations would welcome reports from vessels at sea. For full details of Baltic Sea Ice Code and reporting services see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(1).
1.6 Conditions. Ice conditions peculiar to Baltic Sea, within the area covered by this volume, are described at 1.253. For a table of ice dates at specified harbours, see 1.261. Accumulation of ice on ships. The concurrence of strong winds, precipitation and spray in sub-zero temperatures may be encountered within the area covered by this volume. The resultant accumulation of ice on a vessel’s hull and superstructure can constitute a serious danger, as described in The Mariner’s Handbook, which also contains advice on the appropriate avoiding action. Icebreaking service. Details are given at 1.116. Regulations for working with icebreakers are given at 1.132. Signals for use with icebreakers are given at 1.134. Ice reports — Baltic Sea Ice Code. The code is intended to be used for the reporting of ice conditions in fairways, harbour areas, coastal areas and selected sea routes. Ice reports are broadcast daily, and on request, by Swedish, Danish, German, Polish, Russian, Latvian, Lithuanian and Estonian coast radio stations, and also on some public radio broadcasts. The reports, in English in addition to the national language, provide details of ice conditions in Baltic Sea areas covered by this volume, the daily positions and availability of icebreakers in those
3
4
2
1.8 Areas dangerous due to mines laid during the war of 1939−1945 were formerly published in NEMEDRI, which publication was discontinued in 1974. Due to the lapse of time the risk to surface navigation from mines in these areas is considered to be no greater than the ordinary hazards of navigation such as striking an uncharted wreck. However, within the danger areas risk still exists with regard to anchoring, fishing or any form of submarine activity close to the seabed. Some of these areas may also present a danger in the form of explosives, gas canisters or aircraft wreckage. In addition, danger may also exist from uncharted wrecks and shoals, as the mine danger will have inhibited hydrographic surveying. Mariners are therefore advised: (1) To keep strictly to any recommended approach routes shown on the chart. (2) To anchor only in port approaches and established anchorages. In an emergency it is better to anchor to one side of a channel or swept route rather than in unswept waters. (3) In darkness, unless entirely confident of navigational accuracy, it is prudent to anchor in a safe area and await daylight. Within the limits of this volume, the main areas regarded as having a residual danger, the limits of which are shown on the charts, are as follows: (1) S and SE of Trelleborg (Baltic Pilot Volume I). (2) A number of small and large areas within about 35 miles of the Danish island of Bornholm (55°08′N, 14°55′E). (3) On the Swedish coast: in the approaches to Västervik, SE and NNE of Kungsgrundet (57°41′N, 16°55′E); SE of Häradskär (58°09′N, 16°59′E); in the approaches to Arkö, SE of Norra Fällbådan (58°26′⋅5N, 17°06′⋅3E). (4) SSE of Gotland centred on 56°00′N, 19°00′E. (5) In the central part of Gulf of Gdask centred on 55°50′N, 19°10′E. (6) In the approaches to Klaip da (55°43′N, 21°08′E) and NW of Klaip da centred on 56°00′N, 20°00′E.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
5
6
7
(7) An area surrounding, and the approaches to Liepja (56°31′N, 21°01′E). (8) A large area extending from the approaches to Ventspils (57°24′N, 21°33′E), NE through the Irbe Strait and the W part of Gulf of Rga. (9) In the N part of Gulf of Rga centred on 58°25′N, 23°30′E. (10) In the approaches to Pärnu Laht centred on 58°10′N, 24°20′E. (11) In the approaches to Rga (56°58′N, 24°06′E). (12) On the W side of Gulf of Rga centred on 57°37′N, 22°52′E. (14) Taga lacht (58°29′N, 22°04′E). (15) W side of Hiiumaa centred on 58°45′N, 22°27′E. These areas are shown on Admiralty charts and mentioned in the geographic text, where appropriate, in accordance with the policy adopted by the coastal state adjacent to the area concerned. Instructions for the disposal of mines picked up at sea are given in the Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.
TRAFFIC AND OPERATIONS Traffic Through routes 1
2
3
Chemical munitions 1
4
1.9 Chemical munitions are known to have been dumped in two areas covered by this volume, 15 miles E of Christiansø (55°20′N, 15°11′E), and 52 miles SSE of Hoburg (56°55′N, 18°09′E). The munitions, which included mustard gas, were primarily dumped within the areas indicated on the charts, but it must be assumed that they were spread over a larger area during dumping, and it is known that some were dumped on passage from Peenemünde to the dumping areas. Also, due to sea-bed activity, it is likely that the munitions have been moved outside the charted areas. The area is intensively trawled, and over the years there have been incidents where fishermen, raising canisters or lumps of viscous mustard gas, have been severely injured. See also Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.
Recommended tracks 1
Swedish defensive minefields 1
2
3
1.11 In general the through routes from the SW Baltic to Gulf of Bothnia and Gulf of Finland follow the deep- water areas which have been surveyed in recent years by the Swedish Hydrographic Service to establish their suitability for navigation by deep-draught vessels. Gulf of Bothnia. The main route, in general terms, follows the outline of the E coast of Sweden from Kullagrund (55°18′N, 13°20′E), thence through Bornholmsgat (55°20′N, 14°25′E), E of Öland, W of Gotland (57°30′N, 18°30′E) and thence to Ålands Hav via Ahvenanmeren Deep Channel, E of Svenska Björn (59°33′N, 20°01′E). Access to the approaches of all the major ports on the E coast of Sweden may be made directly off this route. Gulf of Finland. The route to Gulf of Finland follows the same track from Kullagrund to a position SE of Öland, thence branching NE to pass E of Gotland and entering Gulf of Finland NW of Hiiumaa. From this route direct course may be followed to most of the ports on the SE side of the central Baltic and Gulf of Rga. Each of these routes passes through TSS, the areas of which are given at 1.84. Details and descriptions of through routes are given in Chapter 2.
1.10 Along the Swedish coast there are a number of areas where mines are already laid in peace time. These mined areas, which are shown on the charts, are usually found in harbour entrances and archipelago channels where the waters can be observed and the mines controlled from observation posts on shore. The mines are not activated and may only be detonated remotely from the observation post. Anchoring is prohibited within these areas due to the risk of damage to the equipment, and during thunderstorms, vessels navigate in these areas at their own risk as full security cannot be guaranteed in such conditions. If, owing to an emergency, anchoring in a mined area becomes essential, ships should anchor as near to the outer limit as possible in order to minimise damage to the mine gear. Defensive minefields are laid in the approaches to: Guövik and Järnavik (3.187). Karlskrona: S approach (3.250), E approaches (3.231 and 3.244). Stockholm: Landsort Entrance — Mällsten, Ornö-Utö, Vettskär (7.18). Slite (2.212). Fårösund N and S (2.224).
2
1.12 Along the Swedish coastline, in some inlets and channels and in the approaches to ports, recommended tracks have been established. These are shown on the charts and are normally marked with an indicated authorised draught. These figures indicate the maximum permitted draught of vessels, operating with pilotage assistance, for which the tracks are authorised at MSL. This information is for guidance, and does not carry any guarantee that a vessel with a draught close to the channel draught can safely proceed in the channel under all circumstances. See also 1.32. A recommended track, shown on the chart, is established from the E Baltic for vessels intending to visit ports on the E side of Germany’s Baltic coastline and the W part of Poland. In addition, recommended tracks are established in the approaches to many of the ports on the S and W coasts of the central Baltic, Irbe Strait, and in Gulf of Rga. Some of these tracks run through safety fairways. It is recommended that mariners, where possible, make use of and follow these tracks as they have been covered by modern surveys and searched more comprehensively.
Ship Movement Reporting and Information Systems Sweden 1
3
1.13 Mandatory Reporting and Information Systems are in operation in Stockholm, Mälaren/Landsort and Oxelösund Traffic Information Areas. In each area reports are made to a Traffic Information Centre. Details of limits, reporting points, location of stations, restrictions and other regulations are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
Germany 1
1.14 Mandatory Vessel Traffic Services are in operation at Stralsund East, Sassnitz/Mukran and Wolgast. Details of compulsory reports and other requirements are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
2
Poland 1
1.15 Compulsory Traffic Control and Monitoring Systems, Szczecin VTS and winoujcie VTS, are in operation in the winoujcie/Szczecin waterway area. An obligatory Vessel Traffic Service and Reporting System, VTS Zakota Gdaska, is in operation at Gdynia/Gdask. For details of reports, reporting points, limits and other requirements see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
3
Russia 1
1.16 A mandatory VTS is in operation at Kaliningrad. For details of requirements and regulations see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
4
Lithuania 1
1.17 A mandatory VTMS is in operation at Klaip da controlled by the Traffic Control Service. For details of requirements and regulations see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Latvia 1
1.18 A mandatory VTMS is in operation at Ventspils and a mandatory VTS system operates at Rga. For full details of regulations and requirements see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
5
Gulf of Finland 1
2
1.19 A mandatory ship reporting system for vessels (as listed below) using Gulf of Finland came into force on 1 July 2004. The reporting area covers the international waters between the W reporting line drawn from the Kõpu peninsula (58°55′N, 22°12′E) and the E reporting line at longitude 26°30′E (see Baltic Pilot Volume III). This area is divided into two by the Central reporting line, drawn through the midpoints of the separation zones of the TSS off Kõpu, Hankoniemi, Porkkala and Kalbådagrund to 59°59′N, 26°30′E. The following vessels are required to participate: All vessels of 300 gt or greater. All vessels of under 300 gt in circumstances where they: are not under command or at anchor in the TSS; are restricted in their ability to manoeuvre; have defective navigational aids. Ships may make voice or AIS reports. For further details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
6
7
8
Fishing General remarks 1
1.20 In Baltic Sea there is no international agreement concerning fishing, areas, quotas and regulations, similar to that in force within the European Union. Mariners are requested to navigate with caution in the vicinity of fishing areas and fishing vessels, taking great care to avoid fouling
9
4
or damaging fishing gear. If possible fishing vessels should be given a wide berth. The following information relates mainly to fishing methods in Swedish waters but these methods also apply in other areas as described in the text. Drift net fishing. This type of fishing is used for catching salmon, herring and mackerel. The drift nets may be up to 2 miles in length and be laid in a straight line or on the perimeter of a circle, with their effective depth, usually between 6 and 8 m, being regulated by float lines. Salmon may also be caught, in the same areas, by drift lines which may extend up to about 9 miles from the fishing vessel. The nets are usually marked by radar reflectors, lights, and buoys displaying flags. In shallow water nets are marked by buoys displaying flags but the marks may carry no lights. The salmon season lasts from September to June; the herring season is in the early spring and from June to November; the season for mackerel fishing lasts from the beginning of May to the end of June. Herring drift-net fishing is carried out along the whole of the E coast of Sweden and continues for as long as the water is clear of ice. However, in certain areas within the archipelagos, the nets are also laid beneath the ice. Off the S and W coasts of the Baltic, in German and Polish waters, extensive herring fishing is carried out from May to October. Salmon fishing using drift nets and lines is carried out on the Polish coast, up to 15 miles offshore, from March to June. Trawling takes place all the year round in depths of from 25 to 350 m. The trawl, which may either be dragged along the bottom or set to run at a pre-determined depth, may be towed either by a single vessel using otter-boards, or between two vessels using kites. Danish fishing vessels use a similar system, known as seine net fishing, mainly to catch bottom fish such as cod, haddock and plaice. Long line fishing for cod, haddock and eels, is now mainly limited to the coastal area where the lines are laid on the bottom during the winter half of the year. Whiffing or spinning for mackerel is carried out from July to September; the boats towing a number of lines from out-riggers. Beach seine netting is carried out sporadically along the Swedish coast for herring and bait-fish. It involves the nets being laid some distance from the shore and then hauled towards it. This form of fishing is also carried out below the ice, for which purpose holes are cut in the ice in series extending up to 1 km from the shore. Bottom nets. From May to December, on the Swedish coast between Smygehuk and Karlskrona, eel fishing is carried out using bottom nets. The gear, which may extend several miles from the shore is secured to piles, or by anchors and buoys, and is difficult to detect. The seaward end is marked by a dark flag or basket, and at night by an all round fixed violet light. Mariners should not approach closer than 1½ miles to the land in these areas, and approach harbours with care as eel bottom gear may be laid close to fairways within the leading light or white sectors of entrance lights. Fish traps may be found along the coast of Sweden for the catching of salmon and herring. They are usually in shallow waters but can extend outside the 3 m depth contour and be more than 100 m offshore. For general information on fishing methods see The Mariner’s Handbook.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
Marine farms 1
1.21 Fish farms, areas in shallow water where fish are bred artificially, are found in the waters covered by this volume. They may be on the surface or submerged. They are not necessarily confined to inshore locations and may be moved on occasions. They are usually marked by buoys or beacons (special) which, if lighted, exhibit yellow lights.
1
2
Exercise areas Firing practice and exercise areas 1
1.22 Military exercises and firing practices take place from time to time in certain areas. The more important areas are mentioned briefly in the text; detailed descriptions are not given as warnings of firing practices and exercises are promulgated either by local notices to mariners, coast radio stations, or both. However, warnings concerning the military exercises that take place in Hanöbukten are no longer normally promulgated by coast radio stations, but the area is guarded by patrol vessels during exercises. For general information on such areas see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.
Denmark 1
Submarine exercise areas 1
1.23 Submarines may exercise in the area covered by this volume. Notice of exercises is given only in exceptional circumstances and therefore all vessels should keep a good lookout for submarines. The Mariner’s Handbook and Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners give general information on the characteristics of British submarines and visual signals used to denote their presence; in general, other countries conform to this method of signalling.
1
Presence of submarines Sweden
2
3
4
1.26 Danish naval vessels escorting submarines which are exercising will display the answering pendant and the signal HP of The International Code of Signals. Danish submarines underway on the surface will display, in addition to the prescribed navigation lights, a quick flashing blue light, positioned 1 m above the masthead light, visible at a distance of 5 miles. For submarine distress signals see 1.150.
Russia
2
1
1.25 Swedish submarines which are submerged for a long period, by day, may release a towing buoy, either separately or with a telephone buoy, to indicate their position and to warn vessels which may be in the vicinity that she is about to surface; the towing buoy is cylindrical, painted in white and orange horizontal bands and has a small triangular flag at its forward end. In similar circumstances at night, the submarine, before coming to the surface, may release a telephone buoy, under tow, from the lamp of which short flashes will be made by the submarine. By day, and at night, surface vessels should pass astern of these buoys. See also The Mariner’s Handbook and Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners. For submarine distress signals see 1.149.
1.24 Swedish naval vessels escorting submerged submarines will show a red flag by day. Vessels in the vicinity should proceed with caution and keep a sharp look-out for periscopes, which may be the only visible indication of the submarine. It should be borne in mind that a submarine on surfacing is not always in a condition to manoeuvre immediately or to show the proper signals for a vessel not under control. Should a merchant vessel sight a submarine’s telephone or rescue buoy, the escorting vessel should be informed immediately. Swedish submarines under way may exhibit navigation lights as follows: 1. In the place of the white lights mentioned in Rule 23 of International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972), a blue light on the fore staff and a white top light in another suitable position. Both lights will be constructed as in paragraph 21(a) of the regulations. The white light will be visible for a distance of at least 5 miles and the blue light 2 miles. 2. In addition to the sidelights mentioned in Rule 23, a second light on each side of the submarine, either above or below the first sidelight.
3
1
2
3
5
1.27 Russian naval vessels exercising with, or accompanying, submarines display the appropriate signal from The International Code of Signals. In addition, when possible, the escorting vessel will transmit by radiotelegraph, on the international frequency of 500 khz, a message indicating the presence of submarines. Vessels are requested to give such vessels a wide berth and maintain a constant lookout for submarines, whose presence may only be indicated by their periscopes showing above-water. It must not be inferred from these signals that submarines exercise only when in the company of escorting vessels. Submerged submarines surfacing by night may release light-buoys each exhibiting a white light and may display normal navigation lights. Submerged submarines may release signal cartridges which emit coloured smoke by day, or coloured rockets by night. 1.28 In busy shipping lanes Russian submarines may carry, in addition to the prescribed navigation lights, a flashing orange light, 1⋅5 m above the masthead light. A similar light may be shown at the stern or on the stabiliser fin. Russian Federation submarines carry their navigation lights in special positions as follows: One steaming light on the upper part of the front edge of the fin. Side lights on the relevant side of the fin in its central part. One or two stern lights. When one light is displayed it will be carried on the stern or on the rear edge of the vertical stabiliser. When two lights are carried they are situated on the rear part of the fin. Anchor lights are placed on the bow section and on the stern or vertical stabiliser. On submarines with a high stabiliser the stern anchor light may be
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
4
replaced by two lights set on the sides of the stabiliser which together are visible over 360°. Not Under Command and other all-round visibility lights may be raised on a mast, not less than 2⋅5 m in height, on the fin. Manoeuvring lights are not carried. When in areas of heavy traffic submarines on the surface may also exhibit either one or two orange quick flashing lights. See also The Mariner’s Handbook and Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners. For submarine distress signals see 1.152.
pipelines, generally exhibit Mo (U) lights, aircraft obstruction lights and audible fog signals. Unauthorised navigation is prohibited within 500 m of all such structures, including storage tankers which can swing about their moorings. In some areas the safety zone established around production platforms and associated structures may exceed 500 m and entry into these zones is restricted. Tankers manoeuvring in the vicinity of platforms and moorings should be given a wide berth. For further information see The Mariner’s Handbook.
CHARTS
Special areas
Admiralty charts
Russian regulated areas 1
2
3
4
General
1.29 Russian regulated areas include all areas where navigation, fishing and anchoring are prohibited or restricted. Such areas are normally charted and mentioned in Sailing Directions. Some prohibited areas are designated by the Russian authorities as being temporarily prohibited for navigation. However, as these restrictions are for an indefinite period they are treated in the same way as permanently prohibited areas. Other regulated areas consist of areas declared periodically dangerous for navigation. These areas, which include various firing danger and exercise areas, lie partly or wholly outside Russian territorial waters. Some of these areas are charted. See also Appendix I. Areas established by the Russian authorities where special control of navigation exists on a permanent basis are designated Fortified Zones. Prior permission must be obtained to enter or leave such areas and pilotage is compulsory. Special regulations are in force within these zones and any instructions issued by the pilot must be strictly complied with. Navigation through these zones in fog is normally prohibited. At the present time there are no such areas within the limits of this volume. Responsibility for violation of the limits of the regulated areas rests with the Master of the ship involved. Ignorance of the limits will not serve as a basis to avoid responsibility. Information about Russian regulated areas is announced by PRIP or NAVIP. Similar warnings may occasionally be broadcast concerning areas where navigation is periodically prohibited. Details of PRIP and NAVIP radio broadcasts are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(1). Attention is also drawn to Laws and Regulations Appertaining to Navigation which appears on Page 1 of this volume.
1
2
3
4
Polish regulated areas 1
1.30 Certain areas in Gulf of Gdask are periodically closed to navigation due to military exercises. Limits of these areas may lie outside Polish territorial waters. See also Appendix II. Details and periods of closure of these areas will be announced by coastal radio navigational warnings issued by the Polish authorities. Details are given in Admiralty List of Radio Volume 3(1).
Depth reductions 1
Marine exploitation
1.33 The depths in the central and N Baltic are decreasing gradually due to the general land rise effect in Scandinavia. Mariners should consult the cautionary notes on British Admiralty charts for the MSL year on which the chart is based and for the annual correction factor to be applied to all charted soundings for that area.
Foreign charts
Oil and gas fields 1
1.32 British Admiralty charts covering the area of these Sailing Directions are adequate for use on passage, for entry into the principal ports and harbours, and to reach a required pilot station. The charts are compiled from Swedish, Danish, German, Polish, Latvian, Estonian and Russian Government charts. They are periodically revised and updated from later foreign editions and information received from the charting authority concerned. However, the latest Russian charts and publications give only sufficient information for navigation to the ports open to international trade. In view of this, navigational aids may exist which are not shown on Admiralty charts or mentioned in the Sailing Directions, and caution will be necessary to avoid the possibility of mistaken identification. Similarly, the relevant Admiralty List of Lights will give the latest information available, but it must be assumed that only those lights along the routes to ports open for international trade will be corrected from recent information. Elsewhere the information may not be of recent date. In Swedish waters Admiralty charts show routes through inshore waters, and into ports, which are authorised for use by vessels drawing 3⋅6 m or more, although occasionally routes authorised for less than 3⋅6 m may be shown on charts adopted from other countries. These tracks, together with their adjacent areas, are often the only routes adequately surveyed and marked. Masters are recommended to adhere to them strictly. Caution. Mariners should bear in mind the possibility of the presence of large uncharted boulders, of glacial origin, and note the remarks on land rise described at 1.243. Admiralty charts and publications can be obtained from Admiralty Distributors for Charts and Publications listed in the Catalogue of Admiralty Charts and Publications and other hydrographic publications published annually.
1.31 Production platforms and associated structures including tanker moorings, storage tankers and platforms on
1
6
1.34 In certain areas where British Admiralty charts show insufficient detail for navigation close inshore or within inland channels, these Sailing Directions have been written
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
using foreign charts. The text has been written on the assumption that mariners wishing to navigate in these areas will have provided themselves with suitable charts on which to do so. For the following areas, not covered by Admiralty charts of adequate scale, mariners are advised to obtain the appropriate charts as follows: Chart No
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Area
Sweden 624
Kråkelund and north Öland — ports
Sweden 623
Västervik and inshore channels
Sweden 6231
Västervik and Gamlebyviken
Sweden 621
Slätbaken and approaches
Sweden 622
Slätbaken and Stora Askö
Sweden 6211
Oxelösund and inshore channels
Sweden 6173
Tvären and inshore channels
Germany 1511
Greifswalder Bodden
Germany 1512
Peenestrom nordlicher Teil
Germany 1513
Peenestrom südlicher Teil
Poland 41
Gdask to Baltiysk inland lagoon
Russian 25051
Kaliningradskiy Zaliv
Latvia 2101
Pavilosta and approaches
Estonia 513
Väinameri — Gulf of Rga
11
Klaip da State Seaport Authority Ministry of Transport J. Janonio 24 5799 KLAIP DA Lithuania Biuro Hydrograficzne Marynarki Wojennej 81–912 GDYNIA 12 Poland Bundesamt Für Seeschiffahrt Und Hydrographie Bernhard-Nocht-Strasse 78 Postfach 30 12 20 D20 305 HAMBURG Germany
Datums Horizontal datum 1
2
In addition to the usual navigational charts, yachtsmen and other mariners intending to navigate in Swedish coastal and inland waters are recommended to obtain copies of the appropriate Båtsportkort which are charts produced by the Swedish Hydrographic Department, in convenient loose leaf book form, especially for use by small craft. They cover most of the Swedish coast and inland waters and show extra information not shown on normal commercial nautical charts. Foreign charts may be obtained from the publishing authorities shown below and in the Catalogue of Admiralty Charts and Publications which includes the Admiralty Distributors in the main ports of each country. These charts are not issued by the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office nor are they corrected by Admiralty Notices to Mariners. Publishing authorities: Sjökarteavdelningen S−601 78 NORRKÖPING Sweden Kort & Matrikelstyrelsen Rentemestervej 8 DK−2400 KØBENHAVN K Denmark Glavnoe Oupravlenie Navigatsii I Okeanografii Ministetsva Oborony 8, 11 liniya, B–34 SANKT PETERBURG 199034 Russia Hüdrograafia-ja Navigatsioonimärgistuse Teenistus Lasnamäe 48 11413 TALLINN EE0014 Estonia Latvijas Hidrografijas Dienests Anndrejosta 10 R GA LV–1045 Latvia
3
1.35 Admiralty charts. The datum usually used on Admiralty charts is that of the country whose waters the chart covers. The datums are gradually being changed to WGS84 Datum (World Geodetic System 1984). Correctional information, according to which datum is in use, is shown on the charts. Foreign charts. Within the limits of this volume all the countries which publish charts, with the exception of Russia which uses Russian chart datum, are in the process of (2005), or have completed the changeover from their original datum to WGS84 Datum. Sweden and Denmark have completed the changeover to WGS84 Datum in the area covered by this volume. Germany is in the process of converting to WGS84 Datum but the transition is not yet complete. Poland is in the process of changing to WGS84 Datum which is used on most of the charts. Latvia is now publishing charts on which WGS84 Datum is used. Estonia uses WGS84 Datum and Russia uses Russian chart datum. Note. On charts using WGS84 Datum, positions obtained from satellite navigation systems can normally be plotted direct onto the chart. Any correctional adjustments which may be necessary are usually shown on the chart.
Vertical datum 1
2
1.36 On British Admiralty charts the Chart Datum is MSL. On Swedish charts the datum is the MSL for a specified year, to which corrections for land rise must be applied. The value of the adjustment to be applied is noted on individual charts. On German and Danish charts the datum is MSL with any variations noted under the title of the chart. On Russian and Estonian charts depths are reduced to Sea Level datum. On Polish and Latvian charts depths are reduced to MSL.
AIDS TO NAVIGATION Lights 1
7
1.37 In Baltic Sea generally, where lights have sectors of differing colours, the fairway is usually covered by the white sector with, to a vessel approaching the light, a green sector to starboard and a red sector to port. These white navigational sectors may be very narrow and great care should be exercised to keep on the centreline. For further
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
3
details on lights see the relevant Admiralty List of Lights and Fog Signals. Caution. In the winter season, due to the effects of icing-over, snowfalls or hoar frost, the range of visibility of lights and light-buoys may be greatly reduced or their lights may even become obscured. Lights and light-buoys exhibiting coloured lights may give the appearance of white lights. It may be extremely difficult to distinguish the precise limits between the coloured sectors of lights in such weather conditions. As most of these directional sectors lead close to shoal areas, it is imprudent to place too much reliance on them alone for guidance and the vessel’s position should be constantly checked using other methods.
2
Firing or danger areas are marked by pairs of beacons having triangular topmarks with black and yellow bands; rear point down and front point up.
Landmarks 1
1.41 Caution is necessary when evaluating the descriptions given in this volume concerning landmarks, such as trees, and the colour and shape of buildings etc. New buildings may have been erected and old trees or houses destroyed, so that marks, which may at one time have been conspicuous on account of their isolation, shape or colour, may no longer exist or may now be difficult to identify.
Buoyage Fixed marks and beacons
IALA Maritime Buoyage System
Sweden 1
2
3
4
1
1.38 Sea route marks. Notice boards known as sea route marks are used in Swedish waters. They are boards which, by their markings, indicate a caution, a prohibition, an ordinance, or give advice to the mariner. Cautionary and speed restriction marks have a white background, red border and black symbols; prohibition marks are the same but with the addition of a red diagonal stripe. Advice marks are blue with white symbols. The marks are erected on land at the outer edge of the relevant areas. In exceptional circumstances they may be found on buoys (special) at sea. Submarine cables. These, as a rule, are only marked by beacons or notice boards; if buoys are used, they are painted red and white, with the word “Kabel” in black letters in two places. In channels and especially frequented waters, the cables are marked by two beacons or poles, which in line indicate the position of the cable. The front beacon or pole has a circular topmark and the rear one a circle above a diamond; the circles are red with white edges. When in line, the marks appear as a white diamond between two red circles. Where the beacons are illuminated at night, a red light is displayed on each of the circular marks and a white one on the diamond-shaped mark. Beacons or boards marking power cables usually carry the warnings “Kabel” and “Ankring forbujden”. In some districts power cables are marked by white triangular boards with red edges.
2
Caution 1
1
1.39 Submarine cables. The landing place of cables is marked by a white panel with a black inverted anchor, the whole surrounded by a red border and crossed by a red diagonal. The direction of cables is marked by two beacons, the front having a panel with the same marking as the landing place and surmounted by a red triangle topmark, point up; the rear similar with the triangle point down.
1.44 Within the limits of this volume the main direction of buoyage in Swedish waters runs from N to S. From sea into the harbours the direction is indicated on the charts. Unlit buoys have been fitted with retro-reflective material in accordance with the IALA Comprehensive Code. A full description of this system is given in The Mariner’s Handbook.
Estonia and Russia 1
Denmark 1
1.43 Mariners are warned that they should not absolutely rely on floating aids to navigation, especially during the winter ice period, in stormy weather and when the changeover of markings at the beginning and end of the winter is taking place. It has been reported that all navigation aids in SE Baltic waters, including Gulf Of Rga and the S part of Gulf of Finland, may be unreliable. Extreme caution should be exercised in the identification of navigation aids in these areas.
Sweden
Germany 1
1.42 All the countries described within the limits of this volume have adopted the IALA Maritime Buoyage System (Region A) (red to port), for use in their waters. They are Sweden, Denmark, Germany, Poland, Russia, Lithuania, Latvia and Estonia. Minor variations may occur between countries in the lettering, and colours used on miscellaneous buoys. This system is in use throughout the area covered by this volume. For full details of the system see The Mariner’s Handbook and IALA Maritime Buoyage System. Radar reflectors are not charted. It can be assumed that most major buoys are fitted with radar reflectors.
1.40 Submarine cables are marked by pairs of beacons. The front beacon has a circular board topmark, white with a red centre, and the rear beacon a circular board, white with a red centre, over a diamond, white with red borders. Submarine pipelines are marked by pairs of beacons in line, the front and rear beacons having yellow, diamond-shaped topmarks.
1.45 Temporary marks. In Estonian and Russian waters temporary floating aids to navigation are used to indicate areas that are prohibited for navigation, anchoring, fishing, and those used for naval exercises. Such markings will be promulgated in radio navigational warnings and be published in Russian and Estonian Notices to Mariners.
Winter buoyage 1
8
1.46 Caution. In winter during ice conditions, floating marks should not be relied upon as they may not be in their correct positions. Lights and topmarks may be obscured or
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
3
4
broken by ice and coloured lights may appear white or pale and have a reduced range. Sweden. In Swedish waters light-vessels and light-buoys are kept on their stations, unless withdrawal is necessary on account of ice or weather conditions when the buoys are in some cases replaced by spar buoys. They are replaced in spring as soon as ice conditions permit. Buoys fitted with racons are generally replaced by light-buoys when icing is expected due to the racon equipment being expensive and having sensitive electronics. Denmark has a similar system to that of Sweden in winter conditions. Poland. Many buoys and light-buoys are withdrawn or replaced for the winter season, usually from early November, or when ice threatens. Information on intended changes is promulgated annually by Polish Notices to Mariners and by radio navigational warnings if necessary. Latvia. Many buoys and light-buoys are withdrawn or replaced during the winter season. Details of intended changes and dates are issued through Latvian Notices to Mariners as necessary. Estonia. Many buoys and light-buoys are withdrawn or replaced during the winter season. Details of intended changes and dates are issued through Estonian Notices to Mariners as necessary.
Full details of procedures and other requirements are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Deep-sea Pilots 1
2
National pilotage Sweden
Ocean Data Acquisition System (ODAS) Buoys 1
2
1.47 ODAS buoys (special) may be encountered within the area covered by this volume. These buoy systems, which vary considerably in size, are used for environmental research purposes including collection of weather data. They are coloured yellow and marked “ODAS” with an identification number. If moored they exhibit a flashing yellow light. The large buoys should be given a clearance of at least 1 mile, and in the case of vessels towing underwater gear this distance should be increased to 2½ miles. As the buoys have no navigational significance, and as they are liable to be moved or withdrawn at short notice, they are not normally mentioned in the text of the book. For further information see The Mariner’s Handbook.
1
2
Water level gauges 1
2
1.48 Automatic water level gauges in conjunction with a telephone responder are installed at several Swedish harbours within the limits of this volume in Baltic Sea. Information from the port giving the height of water level, above or below the MSL, can be obtained by means of a centralised telephone service. Mariners are cautioned that no responsibility can be accepted by the Swedish authorities for erroneous replies or other malfunctioning of the apparatus. A service providing information about water levels along the Swedish coast is maintained by Swedish Meteorological and Hydrological Institute (SMHI), and is available on the Internet from www.smhi.se.
3
4
5
PILOTAGE
1.51 General information. Pilotage is compulsory in Swedish coastal waters and along certain routes connecting ports along the coast. The vessels subject to compulsory pilotage vary in size and type according to location. For this purpose vessels are divided into the following categories: Category 1. Vessels carrying, or with unclean tanks which last carried: (a) Liquefied gas. (b) Liquid chemicals defined in Marpol 73 Supplement 2, Annex 2, as Category A, B or, if the vessel does not have a double-skin hull under all cargo tanks, Category C. (c) Liquid chemicals which, according to IMO Bulk Chemical Code, should be carried in Type 1 or 2 vessels. Category 2. All other chemical tankers which are laden, or have unclean tanks, and all laden tankers. Category 3. All other vessels. Large tankers. According to an agreement between the Navigation Authority and a combination of the Swedish Petroleum Institute and Owners Association, loaded oil tankers which are employed by the Swedish oil companies, with a draught of more than 12 m, or carrying more than 50 000 tonnes of petroleum products, must use the services of a Swedish pilot on voyages in Baltic Sea N of latitude 55°25′N. Exemption from the obligation to employ a pilot may be granted by the navigation authority to the Master of a specified vessel, when navigating in specified fairways, depending on his familiarity with, and frequency of use of those fairways, and his fluency in the Swedish language. The coast of Sweden covered by this volume is divided into pilotage districts as follows: Pilot station
General 1
1.50 The services of a licensed deep-sea pilot are strongly recommended by The Baltic Pilotage Authorities Commission, which recommends that: a) Masters of vessels which are constrained by their draught; b) Masters of vessels, other than those registered in one of the Baltic States, and who frequently navigate in the area; c) Masters of loaded oil and chemical tankers and gas tankers, irrespective of their size; should, when bound to or from ports in Baltic Sea, avail themselves of the services of deep sea pilots certified by a competent authority of a Baltic coastal state. Deep-sea pilots are available from various locations and countries. For details of procedures see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2) under the general remarks for each individual country.
1.49 Information on pilotage procedures at individual ports is given in the text at the port concerned.
9
Limits of the district
Stockholm
60°00′N and 59°00′N but excluding Mälaren.
Mälaren
59°00′N and line bearing 154° through 58°48′N, 17°26′E.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
Pilot station Landsort
6
7
8
9
Limits of the district Pipskär 58°55′N 17°44′E to 58°46′N 17°29′E to 58°41′N 17°28′E to 58°36′N 17°53′E to 58°52′N 18°11′E to 58°51′N 18°07′E to 59°00′N 18°23′E to 59°04′N 18°19′E Stora Rotholmen.
Oxelösund
Line bearing 154° through Rågön to 58°00′N.
Kalmarsund
Line bearing 155° through Brömse (56°19′N, 16°03′E) and 58°00′N. Served by Västervik N of 57°25′N, Oskarshamn between 57°25′N and 57°03′N, and Kalmar S of 57°03′N.
Karlshamn
Line through Brömse bearing 155° and 55°25′N.
Gotland
Coastal waters of Gotland (57°38′N, 18°17′E).
3
4
Germany 1
All requests for pilots for Swedish waters, and any subsequent amendments, are to be made to the appropriate combined VTS/Pilot ordering centre. Within the area covered by this volume, Karlshamn/Åhus district is operated from VTS Malmö; Oxelösund, Kalmarsund and Gotland districts from VTS Oxelösund; and Stockholm, Mälaren and Landsort districts from VTS Stockholm. Pilots should be requested from the appropriate VTS at least 5 hours before arrival, with amendments notified at least 3 hours before the original ETA. Requests for Deep-Sea Pilots should be made 24 hours in advance through a pilot station or via the Deep-Sea Pilot central offices in Stockholm. Classification of Pilots. Swedish Pilots are classified as follows: Local pilots. For a particular area or harbour. Long distance pilots. For service in the open sea, including North Sea and English Channel, which connects with Swedish waters. One pilot is normally provided with agreed rest periods. If continuous attendance on the bridge over 12 hours is required then two pilots will attend. Ice pilots. Long distance pilots specially trained for navigation through ice. Ice pilotage. Requests for ice pilotage should be made 24 hours in advance through Stockholm pilot station. The Icebreaker Directorate then decides, with regard to prevailing and expected ice and weather development, and the suitability of the vessel for ice navigation, whether the vessel can expect assistance from an icebreaker, and whether the vessel must then use an ice pilot. For detailed information see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
2
3
2
1.53 Pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels in the German harbours described in this volume: (a) Tankers carrying gas, chemicals, petroleum or petroleum products. (b) Unloaded tankers if not cleaned, gas freed, or completely inerted, after having carried petroleum or petroleum products with a flashpoint below 35°C. (c) Stralsund North Approach — other vessels over 60 m LOA, 10 m beam or 3⋅3 m draught. (d) Stralsund East Approach — other vessels over 85 m LOA, 13 m beam or 5 m draught. These regulations also apply to Sassnitz/Mukran and Wolgast, for which pilotage is provided by Stralsund. Requests for pilots should be sent 6 hours before ETA at pilot boarding position together with vessels details. Licensed Deep-Sea Pilots are also available through the German Pilotage Service. For full details of requirements, and services available see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Poland 1
2
Denmark 1
dredged channels, marked navigation channels into harbours, or at pilot stations (excluding manoeuvres within a harbour). 3. Pilotage is also compulsory for certain vessels within designated Danish harbours, fjords and bridges. Other Danish harbours strongly recommend the use of pilots. Requests for pilots should be sent to the appropriate pilot station at least 12 hours before the expected ETA with confirmation 3 hours before ETA. Within the limits of this volume there are pilot stations located on Bornholm at Rønne (55°06′N, 14°42′E) and Allinge (55°17′N, 14°48′E). Deep-sea pilots should be ordered 18 hours in advance through Bornholm Pilot at Allinge. For full details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
1.52 1. Pilotage is compulsory at all Danish harbours for the following vessels, unless exempted by law: Loaded oil tankers of 1500 dwt or over. Loaded chemical tankers carrying dangerous liquid chemicals covered by the IMO Chemical Code. Gas tankers. Vessels carrying radioactive cargoes. Tankers with uncleaned tanks not secured by inert gas. 2. Pilotage is compulsory for towed/towing vessels of 150 grt and over, or 28 m LOA or more, navigating in
1.54 Pilotage is compulsory in all Polish ports for the following vessels, unless a specific exemption has been granted: (a) All vessels with a length of 40 m or over. (b) All vessels carrying dangerous cargoes regardless of size. (c) Any vessel which is damaged and any vessel, which through exceptional circumstances, may create a danger to navigation or a threat to the environment. Exemptions from the requirement to use a pilot may be granted by the authorities at their sole discretion dependent on certain criteria. Minor local variations to the regulations may be applied which are shown at the individual port. Licensed Deep-Sea Pilots are available through the following pilot stations: winoujcie; Szczecin; Gdynia. For full details of requirements and services see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Russia 1
10
1.55 General information. Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels entering, leaving, or shifting within ports in Russia which are open to foreign trade. Special regulations
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
3
4
5
6
are in force with regard to naval vessels. Deep-Sea Pilots can be requested from Sankt Peterburg. For ports open to foreign trade see 1.104. For regulations applying to naval vessels see 1.102. Signals. The signals for a pilot are those laid down in The International Code of Signals. If a pilot is available the pilot flag will be displayed at the pilot look-out station and, if none is available, a ball will be displayed. Regulations. The following are extracts from the Regulations concerning Government Marine Pilots: 1. Pilotage will be carried out exclusively by Government Marine Pilots. 14. Areas of compulsory and non-compulsory pilotage are published in port regulations, Russian Pilots (Sailing Directions) and Notices to Mariners. 17. The Port Captain has the right to prohibit the movement of ships when safe pilotage is hampered by weather conditions. 25. Pilots are obliged to observe all laws and regulations and are not to allow soundings to be taken in the fairway unless required by the pilot. 26. Pilots must indicate to the Master of the ship all observed breaches of regulations and demand their observance. 31. When embarking or disembarking a pilot, communications must be maintained with the pilot boat. 32. If an accident occurs when embarking or disembarking a pilot, the shipowner is liable to pay compensation. 33. In the event of bad weather the pilot boat, with the agreement of the Master of the ship, may lead the ship. During this operation constant communication must be maintained with the pilot boat. 35. The pilot will provide a copy of the port regulations. 39. The presence of a pilot on a ship does not remove from the Master his responsibility for the safe conduct of the ship. The pilot will act only in an advisory capacity. 40. If the Master refuses the pilot’s advice, the pilot has the right to refuse pilotage, in which event the pilot will demand that this is recorded in the ship’s log and the pilotage account. 42. The pilot does not have the right to leave the ship without the agreement of the Master before it is in a safe anchorage, or mooring, or turned over to another pilot. There is one Russian pilot station within the area covered by this volume, located at Kaliningrad.
Latvia 1
2
Estonia 1
2
2
1.58 The pilot service forms part of the Estonian VTS which is under the administration of the Estonian Maritime Administration. Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels within the inner territorial waters of Estonia. Such vessels may only proceed in established shipping routes or channels. However, within Gulf of Rga, the use of established shipping routes or channels is permissible without the services of a pilot. Pleasure craft with a length under 12 m are exempt from these regulations. Requests for pilots should be made 24 hours before arrival at the pilot boarding position. In addition, vessels are required to request permission to berth 24 hours in advance of arrival at the port. Licensed Deep-Sea Pilots for Baltic Sea are available through Tallinn pilot station.
RADIO FACILITIES Electronic position fixing systems Loran C 1
1.59 Most of the area covered by this volume lies to the E, and outside the proposed coverage provided by the Northwest European Loran C system. As there is a need for a position fixing system of a greater accuracy in this area, and the fact that Loran C charts are not available, its use should be discounted for practical purposes. For further details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Satellite navigation systems 1
Lithuania 1
1.57 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels entering, leaving, or shifting within ports in Latvia. Under normal circumstances and where practicable, an ETA should be sent 12 days, 96 hours and 12 hours in advance. For oil, gas and chemical tankers 14 days, 72 hours and 12 hours is applicable. Requests for pilots should be sent 12 hours in advance, with confirmation 4 hours prior to arrival unless otherwise advised in local port details. Licensed Deep-Sea Pilots are available for Baltic Sea through Ventspils or Rga pilot stations.
1.56 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels entering, leaving, or shifting within ports in Lithuania. Under normal circumstances and where practicable, an ETA should be sent 12 days, 96 hours and 12 hours in advance. For oil, gas and chemical tankers 14 days, 72 hours and 12 hours is applicable. Requests for pilots should be sent 12 hours in advance, with confirmation 4 hours prior to arrival unless otherwise advised in local port details. Licensed Deep-Sea Pilots are available for Baltic Sea through Klaip da pilot station.
2
3
11
1.60 Global positioning system. The Navstar GPS, a military satellite navigation system owned and operated by the United States Department of Defense, provides world wide position fixing. The system is referenced to the datum of the World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS84) and therefore positions obtained must be adjusted, if necessary, to the datum of the chart being used. Global Navigation Satellite System. The Russian Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS) is similar to GPS in that it is a space-based navigation system which provides world wide position fixing. The system is referenced to the Soviet Geocentric Co-ordinate System 1990 (SGS90) and as for GPS positions must be adjusted, if necessary, to the datum of the chart being used. DGPS compares the position of a fixed point, referred to as the reference station, with positions obtained from a
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
4
GPS receiver at that point. The resulting differences are then broadcast as corrections to suitable receivers. The system and services have been developed to overcome the inherent and imposed limitations of GPS. At the present time (2004), within the area covered by this volume, Sweden, Denmark, and Poland operate beacons transmitting DGPS corrections. In addition, Estonia, Russia, Latvia and Lithuania are currently planning operational beacons, or have beacons on trial. Caution. Satellite navigation systems are under the control of the owning nation which can impose selective availability or downgrade the accuracy to levels less than that available from terrestrial radio navigational systems. Therefore, satellite based systems should only be utilised at the user’s risk. For full details of these systems see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
national language only and supplement the coastal warnings by giving information which the ocean-going ship may normally not require. For full broadcast details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(1).
Radio weather and ice services 1
2
Other radio aids to navigation 1
1.61 There are numerous racons transmitting in the area covered by this volume, both as aids to offshore and coastal navigation and entry into harbours. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Volume 2. Those aids which are pertinent to coastal and inshore navigation are included within the navigational text.
Radio medical advice 1
Radio stations 1
1.62 For full details of all coast and port radio stations which transmit within in the area covered by this volume, together with the services provided, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 1(1).
General 1
NAVAREA I warnings
2
1.63 The area covered by this pilot lies within the limits of NAVAREA I. Details of warnings and a list of those in force are issued by the Co-ordinator NAVAREA I, United Kingdom Hydrographic Office through Admiralty Notices to Mariners. The Baltic Sea Sub-Area Co-ordinator is the National Maritime Administration, Hydrographic Department, Sweden. National Co-ordinators within this Sub-Area are located in Latvia, Poland and Russia. NAVAREA I Warnings are broadcast through: 1. SafetyNET (Enhanced Group Calling International SafetyNET). 2. NAVTEX. Depending upon the area affected, NAVAREA I Warnings may also be transmitted through Navtex. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Volume 3(1).
1
1.69 See 1.153.
REGULATIONS International regulations General 1
1.64 Coastal navigational warnings issued by National Co-ordinators, covering a region or portion of the NAVAREA I Baltic Sea Sub-Area, are broadcast in both English and in the national language, through national coast radio stations. For full details of broadcasts see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 1(1) and Volume 3(1).
1.70 Restrictions on anchoring. No vessel, unless in an emergency situation, may anchor, or lie at anchor on the lines of leading lights, in the fixed white sectors of lights, or such that, in the event of swinging may lie in a position which could obstruct safe navigation.
Submarine cables and pipelines 1
Local warnings 1
1.68 AIS is designed to contribute to the safety of navigation, enhance protection of the marine environment and improve the monitoring of passing traffic by coastal states. A phased implementation programme is underway (2004) on various classes of vessel and at certain establishments ashore. For further details see The Mariners Handbook and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volumes 2 and 6(2).
Distress and rescue
Coastal navigational warnings 1
1.67 Requests for medical assistance in the area covered by this volume will be accepted by most of the coast radio stations in Germany, Poland, Russia, Latvia, Denmark and Sweden. For further information, and for details of the coast radio stations which offer this service see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 1(1).
Automatic Identification System
Radio navigational warnings
1
1.66 With the exception of Latvia and Lithuania, and Russia which uses only the Russian language, weather messages, including storm warnings and ice reports, are broadcast both in English and in the national language of the country concerned, through the national coast radio stations of the countries within the area covered by this pilot. Weather bulletins and ice information are also available through telephone, telefax, telex or e-mail from some National Meteorological and Ice Service Authorities within the area covered by this pilot. For coast radio stations and details of these services see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 1(1) and Volume 3(1).
1.65 Local warnings cover the area within the limits of jurisdiction of a harbour or port authority and may be issued by those authorities. They may be issued in the
2
12
1.71 The area covered by this volume is crossed by a number of submarine cables and pipelines connecting different countries, individual islands and the mainland. These are shown on the chart. However, where pipelines are close together, only one may be charted. In Swedish waters it is prohibited to anchor on or in the vicinity of submarine cables and pipelines laid in the water. The positions of cables are usually marked by beacons,
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
3
4
boards or buoys, but the prohibition may not always be indicated on the chart. This prohibition applies equally to both power and telegraph cables. In Danish waters a protection zone is established which extends 200 m on each side of pipelines and cables. Anchoring and bottom fishing is prohibited within this zone. In Russian waters protection zones are established extending 100 m on either side of all submarine pipelines. Within these zones it is prohibited to carry out any type of operation, particularly anchoring, fishing or dredging, which could interfere with the normal operation of the pipeline. Latvian regulations prohibit, in areas where submarine cables and pipelines are located, anchoring, sea-bed trawling, underwater dredging and blasting, and any other activity which could cause damage. Caution. Mariners are advised not to anchor or trawl in the vicinity of pipelines. Gas from a damaged oil or gas pipeline could cause an explosion, loss of a vessel’s buoyancy or other serious hazard. Pipelines are not always buried and may effectively reduce the charted depth by up to 2 m. They may also span seabed undulations and cause fishing gear to become irrecoverably snagged, putting a vessel in severe danger. See Annual Notice to Mariners No 24 and The Mariner’s Handbook.
2
European Community regulations Directive 2002/59/EC 1
2
Pollution 1
2
3
4
1.72 The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, modified by the Protocol of 1978 and known as MARPOL 73/78, is summarised in The Mariner’s Handbook. Annexes I, II and V of the convention are mandatory, Annex III is optional, and Annex IV, having been incorporated in the Helsinki Convention, is mandatory within the limits of this volume. The Baltic Sea is defined as a Special Area for the purposes of the Convention. Annex I prohibits any discharge of oil or oil mixtures into the special area. Annex II deals with Noxious Liquid Substances in bulk. Annex III deals with Harmful Substances carried at sea in Packaged Form. Annex IV prohibits the discharge of sewage into the Special Area. Annex V regulates the discharge of garbage from ships and contains special provisions for the Baltic Sea. Annex VI deals with air pollution from vessels: Baltic Sea is designated as a SOx Emission Control Area. Arrangements for the reception and discharge of oil residues from ships exist in certain ports covered in this volume. Vessels requiring such facilities should give details of requirements at least 24 hours in advance.
Reporting requirements for dangerous and polluting goods 1 1
vessels
territorial and internal waters of Russia, and failure to note the occurrence in the ships log, carries severe penalties. Russian merchant vessels and civil aircraft are instructed to inform Russian authorities of witnessed infringements of the Russian regulations and of the international regulations. Within the territorial and internal waters of Russia vessels suspected of infringing the regulations are liable to be stopped, boarded and inspected. If an infringement has taken place within those waters, the vessel is liable to be detained.
1
2
3
1
carrying
1.73 European Community. See 1.79. 1.74 Russia. Russian pollution regulations prohibit, with severe penalties, discharge within Russian waters of oil, oil products, noxious materials or any other substance which may be harmful to human health and the environment. Failure to inform the nearest Russian authority of accidental or emergency discharge of polluting substances, as described in the MARPOL 73/78 Convention, within the
1
13
1.75 General information. This Directive establishes a common vessel traffic monitoring and information system throughout European Community (EC) waters. The principal provisions are described below. They apply in general to all commercial vessels over 300 grt but the rules concerning the notification of carriage of dangerous and polluting goods applies to all vessels regardless of size. Caution. These extracts are for reference purposes only and are not to be regarded as a statement of the applicable law. The full text of the regulations is the sole authoritative statement of the applicable law and it is recommended that it is consulted. The regulations to which the following refers is Directive 2002/59/EC or the appropriate enabling legislation drafted by individual member states. 1.76 Ship reports. All vessels bound for a port within the EC must report to the port authority at least 24 hours prior arrival, or, if the voyage is less than 24 hours, no later than the time of departure from the previous port. The report shall include the following information: Name, call sign, IMO or MMSI number. Port of destination. ETA and ETD at port of destination. Total number of persons onboard. Upon receipt of a ship’s report, the port authority will notify the national coastguard authority by the quickest means possible. This information will then be pooled in the European-wide telematic network called SafeSeaNet. Any amendments to the initial ship report must be notified immediately. Mandatory ship reporting systems. All vessels shall report to the coastguard authority on entering an IMO adopted mandatory ship reporting system, the report being made in the recognised format (see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2)). The coastguard authority is to be informed of any changes to the initial report. 1.77 VTS. All vessels are to participate in and comply with VTS systems operated by EC member states and also those systems operated by member states in conjunction with co-operating non-member states. This includes those systems operated by member states outside their territorial waters but which are operated in accordance with IMO guidelines. Routeing Schemes. All vessels must comply with IMO recommended TSS and Deep Water route regulations. (See IMO publication Ships’ Routeing Guide). 1.78 AIS and VDR. All vessels are to be equipped with AIS and VDR. The systems shall be in operation at all times. By 2008 individual coastguard stations throughout the EC are required to be able to receive AIS information and to relay it to all other coastguard stations within the EC.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
1.79 Notification of dangerous and polluting goods. All vessels leaving an EC port are to report dangerous and polluting goods as specified within the Directive to the harbour authority. Vessels arriving from outside EC waters must transmit a report to their first EC port or anchorage upon departure from their port of loading. If, at the time of departure, the port of destination in the EC is not known, the report must be forwarded immediately such information becomes known. Where practical, this report is to be made electronically and must include the information described in Annex 1(3) of the Directive. When a harbour authority receives a dangerous or polluting cargo report, it shall retain the report for use in the event of an incident or accident at sea, forwarding it whenever requested by the national coastguard authority. 1.80 Reporting of Incidents and Accidents. Whenever a vessel is involved with one of the following, the coastguard authority of the EC coastal state is to be informed immediately; (a) any incident or accident affecting the safety of the ship; (b) any incident or accident which compromises shipping safety, such as a failure likely to affect a ship’s manoeuverability or seaworthiness; (c) any event liable to pollute the waters or shores of the coastal state; (d) The sighting of a slick of polluting material or drifting containers and packages. The owner of a vessel, who has been informed by the master that one of the above has occured, must inform the coastguard and render any assistance that may be required. 1.81 Measures to be taken in the event of exceptionally bad weather or sea conditions. If, on the advice of the national meteorological office, the coastguard authority deems a threat of pollution or a risk to human life exists due to impending severe weather, the coastguard authority will attempt to inform the master of every vessel about to enter or leave port as to the nature of the weather and the dangers it may cause. Without prejudice to measures taken to give assistance to vessels in distress, the coastguard may take such measures as it considers appropriate to avoid a threat of pollution or a risk to human life. The measures may include: (a) a recommendation or a prohibition on entry or departure from a port; (b) a recommendation limiting, or, if necessary, prohibiting the bunkering of ships in territorial waters. The master is to inform his owners of any measures or recommendations initiated by the coastguard. If, as a result of his professional judgement, the master decides not to act in accordance with measures taken by the coastguard, he shall inform the coastguard of his reasons for not doing so. 1.82 Measures relating to incidents or accidents at sea. The coastguard authority will take measures to ensure the safety of shipping and of persons and to protect the marine and coastal environment. Measures available to EC states include; (a) a restriction on the movement of a ship or an instruction to follow a specific course. (b) a notification to put an end to the threat to the environment or maritime safety;
2
1
(c) send an evaluation team aboard a ship to assess the degree of risk and to help the master remedy the situation; (d) instruct the master to put in at a place of refuge in the event of imminent peril, or, cause the ship to be piloted or towed. The owner of the ship and the owner of the dangerous or polluting goods onboard must cooperate with the coastguard authority when requested to do so. 1.83 Places of refuge. EC states are required to designate places of refuge where a vessel which has undergone an accident or is in distress can receive rapid and effective assistance to avoid environmental pollution. See also 1.155.
Traffic Separation Schemes 1
2
3
1.84 See IMO publication Ships’ Routeing for general provisions on ship routeing. Within the limits of this volume the following TSS are IMO adopted and regulations for navigating in these schemes are contained in Rule 10 of International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972): Off Öland Island (56°04′⋅2N, 16°41′⋅0E). Off Gotland Island (56°47′⋅5N, 18°22′⋅4E). Off Kõpu poolsaar (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅3), the W side of Hiiumaa. Approaches to Stockholm — Sandhamn Entrance: 59°19′⋅3N, 18°48′⋅0E. 59°22′⋅0N, 18°45′⋅6E. 59°22′⋅5N, 18°35′⋅8E. 59°26′⋅2N, 18°23′⋅2E. 59°21′⋅5N, 18°26′⋅5E. There is also a TSS, not adopted by IMO, established by the Government of Poland, in the approaches to Gdask and Gdynia (54°32′⋅0N, 18°48′⋅5E).
Border controls 1
1.85 The Schengen Convention is an association of European Union and Nordic countries established to increase freedom of movement between participating states, while strengthening border controls with other nations. Within the area covered by this volume, Sweden, Denmark and Germany are members of the Convention. Vessels intending to enter a port of a member country are required to give advance notification to the appropriate Coast Guard command centre no later than 24 hours before arrival at the port using the form Notification in Advance (6 hours notice is required for fishing vessels). The form is available from the Coast Guard or on the internet; e.g. for Sweden: www.kustbevakningen.se.
Swedish regulations Sea surveillance centres and traffic areas 1
2
14
1.86 Naval Sea Surveillance Centres. The main duty of these centres is to gather and study information concerning all activities at sea. The centres monitor VHF channel 16 continuously. The area covered by this volume is monitored by the surveillance centres located at: Muskö (59°02′N, 18°07′E), covering the area from Brämön (62°12′N, 17°43′E) to Västervik (57°45′N, 16°39′E). Karlskrona (56°10′N, 15°35′E), covering the area from Västervik to Ystad (55°26′N, 13°50′E). Sea Traffic Areas. The Swedish Navigational Office is organised into 13 Sea Traffic Areas together with four
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
Maritime Inspection Areas. In the area covered by this volume the Maritime Inspection Areas are Stockholm and Malmö. The sea traffic areas comprise Stockholm, controlled from Stockholm; Mälaren, controlled from Södertälje; Bråviken, controlled from Oxelösund; Gotland, controlled from Visby; Kalmarsund, controlled from Oskarshamn and Hanöbukten, controlled from Karlshamn.
for taking into custody such items as cameras and binoculars which could be used for intelligence purposes.
Speed regulations 1
Restricted military areas 1
2
3
4
5
6
1.87 Within Swedish waters several military protected areas have been established to protect defence installations and places which have special significance for the defence of Sweden. Under normal circumstances, in peacetime, foreign citizens and foreign vessels have freedom of access and the right to remain in these areas without the need for special permission. However in times of increased military preparedness, or at other times which may be decreed by the Swedish government, special regulations and restrictions apply. Details of when and where these special regulations are to be applied will be announced in Swedish Notices to Mariners. The restricted and semi-restricted areas within the area covered by this volume, the limits of which are shown on the charts, are as follows: Karlskrona restricted area (3.197), which covers all the approaches to Karlskrona and includes the islands of Hasslö (56°06′N, 15°27′E), on the W side, thence E and SE to include Sturkö (56°06′N, 15°40′E) and Utlängan (56°01′N, 15°47′E). Gotland restricted area (2.203) which includes the NE part of Gotland, E of approximately 18°55′E, Fårösund (57°50′N, 19°00′E), and the SW side of Fårö, excepting the marked channel through Fårösund. Landsort restricted area (58°47′N, 18°00′E) (7.17), which extends NE from the vicinity of Landsort to the N point of Nåttarö (58°53′N, 18°08′E). Muskö restricted area (59°02′N, 18°07′E) (7.17), which encloses the island and the waters W to the mainland. Huvudskär restricted area (58°59′N, 18°29′E) (7.17), which extends WNW from Huvudskär to the N point of Utö (58°57′N, 18°15′E) and the S part of Ornö (59°05′N, 18°26′E). Mörtö-Bunsön restricted area (7.17), bounded N by Mörtö-Bunsön (59°08′N, 18°35′E) and S by Kvarnön (2 miles SSW). The area between the Landsort, Muskö and Huvudskär restricted areas is known as the Utö Semi-restricted Area.
2
Customs 1
2
2
1.90 The Swedish Customs Administration is mainly concerned with external factors connected with the import and export of goods within the excise policies imposed by the State. In the modern era these activities are mainly centred on a control and checking system to implement the regulations for the protection of life, health and the environment. The country is divided into seven customs regions of which Stockholm is the central office for this volume. Each region is subdivided into districts with customs houses at various ports. Customs vessels and boats show, in addition to the Swedish flag, a light-blue standard, with a T under a crown, both in yellow. At night customs vessels show an alternate yellow and blue light from a duplex lantern. If a merchant vessel fails to stop when the above mentioned flag or light is shown, the Customs vessel will hoist flag K of The International Code of Signals, or make the letter K in morse code by signal lamp or searchlight. In addition she may, if the signal is disregarded, fire a blank charge or sound a succession of short blasts on the siren or whistle.
Danish regulations Coastal waters 1
2
Special regulations 1
1.89 Special regulations are in force for passage under certain bascule and fixed bridges, and for speed limits to be observed in certain waterways and fairways. Jetties, harbour installations and moored boats are to be passed at the slowest possible speed compatible with safe navigation in order to minimise risk of wash damage. In the inner coastal waters of Sweden special rules are in force for the marking of ice channels and ice bridges, and speed restrictions normally apply. Details of restrictions are given in the appropriate part of the geographical text of this volume.
1.88 Vessels in Swedish territorial waters, when in company with Swedish warships in daylight or when within 1 mile of restricted or semi-restricted areas, are required to hoist their national flag. When at anchor in company with Swedish warships the national flag must be hauled down. Vessels may be hailed by Swedish maritime, air or defence authorities using signal SO or L of The International Code of Signals, and required to alter course or stop. They may also be boarded or instructed to enter harbour for examination. Restriction may also be ordered on the use of the vessels’ radios. The Master is responsible
1.91 Under certain circumstances regulations governing navigation in Danish coastal waters may be introduced. During military manoeuvres or regular exercises it may be necessary to prohibit entry to inner waters as specified. In these cases a warning signal consisting of three red balls by day, and three red lights vertically disposed by night, will be displayed at conspicuous positions on shore. Patrol vessels will exhibit similar signals and may carry the pilot flag. Vessels in Danish territorial waters must display their national flag, by day and night, and, if wishing to enter or leave territorial waters, on observing the warning signals, display the pilot flag and await the arrival of the patrol or pilot vessel. These vessels will give information on the location of the examination service, areas closed to navigation and any special rules in force within these areas. Vessels leaving harbour should obtain any information on restrictions in force before leaving.
Inner waters 1
15
1.92 Certain additions and modifications are authorised to International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972), in Danish inner waters. The term inner waters includes rivers, lakes, canals, harbour areas, bays and
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
3
4
fjords, and those parts of the territorial waters which inside and between the islands, islets and reefs which are not always covered by the sea. The following variations include the more important: Vessels being towed, when the length of tow does not exceed 200 m may, instead of the lights required by Rule 24 (e), exhibit one all-round white light instead of the prescribed lights, visible for a distance of at least 1 mile. Chain ferries shall exhibit three red lights, in the form of an equilateral triangle, point up. Such ferries must not exhibit any other navigation lights. A vessel navigating stern first, other than for a short manoeuvre, shows two black balls, horizontally disposed, where they can best be seen, and by night, the lights prescribed by the International Regulations, place to conform with the direction in which the vessel is actually proceeding, i.e. the stern of the vessel is considered to be her bow. Dredgers, when anchored or underway in poor visibility shall, in addition to the signals prescribed by the International Regulations, give a signal to indicate on which side they are to be passed: Bell signal
5
6
7
3
Navigable Waterways Ordinance 1
Meaning
At least six strokes
Inbound vessel to leave dredger to port. Outbound vessel to leave dredger to starboard.
At least six double strokes
Inbound vessel to leave dredger to starboard. Outbound vessel to leave dredger to port.
2
1
Vessels must not, except in extreme emergency, anchor, or lie at anchor, on the alignment of leading lights or leading beacons, or in the white fixed sectors of directional lights, nor so close to such alignments and bearings, that by swinging they will hamper the safe navigation of other vessels. A vessel which has grounded or is in a narrow channel, causing a hindrance to navigation, shall make every effort to refloat as soon as possible. Warps which cross the channel must be slackened to allow vessels to pass and the use of the propeller must not cause damage to the banks of the channel. In a very narrow channel, where two meeting vessels are unable to pass each other without danger, the inbound vessel shall stop to allow the other vessel to pass unless there is a local regulation to the contrary.
1
2
1
German regulations Traffic regulations 1
2
crossing or turning within that fairway or leaving an anchorage or berth. In addition, the International Regulations concerning the conduct of vessels in restricted visibility are altered, in that under some circumstances vessels in radar contact are considered as vessels in sight of one another. Attention is drawn to The Mariner’s Handbook which states that publication of the details of a law or regulation is solely for the safety and convenience of shipping and implies no recognition of the international validity of the law or regulation.
2
1.93 Germany claims a Territorial Sea limit of 12 miles, within which International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972) apply. In addition, within the area between the coastline and a limit 3 miles to seaward, including areas covered by buoyed seaways outside the 3 mile limit, German National Traffic Regulations for Navigable Waters (SeeSchStrO) also apply. The main difference between the national regulations and the International Regulations is that vessels navigating in a fairway have the right of way over vessels entering,
3
16
1.94 The Navigable Waterways Ordinance (Publication Seeschiffahrtsttrassen-Ordnung (SeeSchStrO)) comprises special traffic regulations which are in force in the waters of the Federal Republic of Germany. They include a complete section of additional regulations concerning the Nord-Ostsee Kanal, which is described in North Sea (East) Pilot. Mariners navigating in these waters without the aid of a pilot should make themselves familiar with these regulations. The publication Waterways and Shipping Regulations — North (Bekanntmachungen der Wasser-und Schiffarhtsdirektionen Nord (WSD Nord)) lists the applications of SeeSchStrO by the regional authorities to their own areas. 1.95 Area covered. The waters inside the 3 mile limit including Greifswalder Bodden and the E approaches to Stralsund. 1.96 Definitions. The starboard side of a fairway is that which is on the right hand of a vessel when entering from seaward, and the port hand is that which is on the left hand under the same circumstances. If however, a channel connects two areas of sea, or two stretches of water, separated from one another by shallow banks, the side of the channel which will be on the right-hand of the mariner approaching from a N or W direction is defined as the starboard side of the channel. Where doubt may exist, due to the tortuous nature of such a channel, the definition as applied to the most N entrance applies throughout the channel. A “right-of-way vessel” is one which is obliged by her draught, length, or other characteristic to keep to the deepest part of the fairway. 1.97 Extracts from the regulations. Some of the more important regulations are listed below: a) Vessels are normally to navigate on the right of the fairway. In specified places certain vessels, including “right-of-way vessels” are authorised to navigate on the left. b) Overtaking is normally on the left and is only allowed where traffic and space permit. The manoeuvre should only be undertaken on receipt of an acknowledgement from the vessel being overtaken. Overtaking is prohibited in the vicinity of ferry crossings, in narrow channels and at blind bends, in the vicinity of locks and on certain stretches of water designated by the competent shipping police authority. c) Vessels meeting normally give way to the right. On meeting, “right-of-way vessels” and certain other hampered vessels have the right-of-way. On
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
4
d)
e)
5
f)
g)
6
h)
meeting at a narrow place, including a narrow bridge or flood barrage opening, the vessel which is proceeding with the stream or current has the right of way. Where there is no stream or current the vessel which is obliged by the rules to use the starboard side of the fairway has right of way. Vessels navigating in a fairway have right of way of vessels entering, crossing, turning in or getting under way in the fairway. In designated narrow channels the vessel which is proceeding with the stream or current has right of way. Vessels shall proceed at such a speed as is appropriate to the existing traffic conditions and characteristics of the waterway, such that she can be stopped safely and in good time. Other than in the designated roadsteads, anchoring is prohibited in the fairway, in narrow places, within 300 m of wrecks, obstructions, cables and pipelines etc, or (in poor visibility) of overhead cables. In narrow channels, vessels of 20 m or over in length, shall have an anchor cleared for immediate use. The prior approval of the appropriate navigation authority is required for the passage of vessels carrying dangerous cargoes, including tankers carrying gas, chemicals, oil and oil products with a flashpoint below 35°C, unloaded tankers not yet cleaned, degassed or completely inerted, and nuclear-powered vessels.
5
Bell signal
Five single strokes Vessel to leave dredger or other craft and two double to starboard, when viewed from seaward.
Border Guard 1
2
Traffic regulations
2
3
4
Meaning
Five single strokes Vessel to leave dredger or other craft and one double to port, when viewed from seaward.
Polish regulations
1
Dredgers, vessels engaged in underwater operations and other vessels in working in shipping channels, when anchored or underway in poor visibility shall, in addition to the signals prescribed by the International Regulations, give a signal to indicate on which side they are to be passed:
1.98 The following are extracts from the more important navigation regulations: Vessels should show, at all times, such lights or shapes as may be required by International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972). Vessels in Polish territorial waters must display their national flag, by day and night. Vessels entering port must give way to those leaving port unless otherwise directed by the Harbour Master. A vessel which has grounded in a harbour or navigable channel and is making efforts to refloat by herself, or with the aid of a tug must, on the approach of other vessels, cease operations until the other vessel is clear. When two vessels are approaching a bridge, where there is insufficient room for each to pass safely, the inbound vessel must wait for the outbound vessel to pass first. Vessels underway in shipping lanes or channels must have at least one anchor ready for use at all times. Vessels must not, except in extreme emergency, anchor, or lie at anchor, on the alignment of leading lights or leading beacons, or in the white fixed sectors of directional lights, nor so close to such alignments and bearings, that by swinging they will hamper the safe navigation of other vessels. If emergency anchoring is necessary the Harbour Master ’s office must be informed immediately, giving full details, and leave the temporary anchorage as soon as possible.
1.99 The Border Guard is established to uphold the integrity of the national borders, including the territorial and inland waters of Poland, and to monitor and police all mandatory regulations. They have the power to stop and inspect vessels, and if necessary, force any vessel to enter port. Warning signals indicating that a vessel must stop after violations of the regulations are the firing of two green flares, and two green lights, displayed from the mast of the guard vessel. Failure to comply may result in the offending vessel being fired upon. Signals. Vessels belonging to the Border Guard, when on duty, will exhibit by day, the Polish flag and the flag of the Border guard. By night they exhibit two all-round fixed green lights, vertically disposed, above the mast light prescribed in the International Regulations. Vessels which, by reason of their construction, are unable to comply with the regulations, will exhibit an all round flashing green light. In addition, such vessels will have an additional marking consisting of a diagonal red strip with a yellow circle, painted on the hull.
Port closed signals 1
2
3
1.100 Vessels are obliged to obey the following signals which are shown to indicate that entry to a port is closed due to a serious danger to navigational safety: a) By night — three red lights, vertically disposed. b) By day — three black balls, vertically disposed. During normal conditions the following signals are displayed to indicate that port entry or leaving port are prohibited, or in addition, harbour traffic is suspended: Entry prohibited: By night — a white light between two red lights, vertically disposed. By day — three black balls, vertically disposed. Leaving prohibited: By night — white light between two green lights, vertically disposed. By day — black cone, point up, between two black cones, points down, vertically disposed. Entry and leaving prohibited together with suspension of harbour traffic: By night — green, white and red lights, vertically disposed with green uppermost. By day — two black cones, points together, and a black ball, vertically disposed.
Russian regulations Economic zone 1
17
1.101 The Government of Russia claims an economic zone extending 200 miles seaward from the limits of its
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
3
territorial sea. Within this economic zone the Government of Russia issues regulations in connection with, and for the control of the following: Exploitation and conservation of resources found on or below the seabed and in the waters above it, including anadromic fish (those that ascend rivers to spawn). Catching of anadromic types of fish is permitted only as a result of inter-governmental agreement. Marine scientific research. Pollution of the marine environment. These regulations are in accordance with the MARPOL 73/78 Convention. There are also regulations for the inspection of vessels suspected of causing pollution and there are penalties for infringements. See 1.74. Freedom of passage for ships and aircraft through the economic zone is assured. For the latest information see Annual Summary of Notices to Mariners.
Preliminary notice of arrival 1
2
3
Entry into territorial and internal waters 1
2
3
1
2
1.102 Foreign naval vessels. Warships intending to enter the waters of Russia or to visit Russian ports should obtain a copy of Regulations for foreign naval vessels navigating and remaining in the territorial or internal waters of Russia or visiting Russian ports. These regulations are published as a Russian Annual Notice to Mariners. Proposals to visit Russian ports should be forwarded through the Russian Ministry of Affairs not less than 30 days prior to the suggested visit. This rule does not apply to warships on which heads of government or heads of state are embarked, or to ships accompanying them. Ships whose approach is necessitated by foul weather or engine failure which threatens the safety of the ship, must inform the nearest port of the reason for entry, and if possible, go to a recognised port open to foreign merchant vessels or to a point indicated by the vessel sent to aid or meet them. For information on ports open to foreign merchant vessels see 1.104. 1.103 Foreign merchant vessels. Foreign non-military vessels enjoy the right of innocent passage through Russian territorial waters in accordance with Russian laws and international treaties. Innocent passage is effected by crossing them without entering Russia’s internal waters, or by passing through them enroute to or from Russian ports open to foreign vessels. While effecting innocent passage vessels must follow the customary navigational course or course recommended through sea corridors or in accordance with traffic separation schemes. The Master of a foreign non-military vessel which has violated the rules of innocent passage is accountable under Russian legislation. For further information see article concerning territorial waters in The Mariner’s Handbook.
Notification of ETA 1
1.106 Estimated time of arrival should be forwarded to port of destination and agency at least 96 hours in advance followed by confirmation 12 hours before arrival. Oil, gas and chemical tankers should confirm their ETA 72 hours and 12 hours before arrival. See also Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Other reports 1
1.107 A vessels arrival in port must be registered directly with the port authority or with a representative of the Transport Fleet Maintenance Service, within the first 6 hours in port, completing sanitation, quarantine, customs and border formalities. On sailing, the port authority must be informed of intended departure at least 6 hours in advance. During a short term anchorage, less than 6 hours, at least 2 hours notice is required.
Observance of regulations 1
2
1.108 All foreign vessels, when within territorial or internal waters of Russia, must observe radio communication, navigational, port, customs, sanitary and other regulations. For special regulations concerning the use of radio by foreign vessels in Russian territorial waters see Admiralty List of Radio Volume 6(2). In the event of a emergency entry into territorial waters or emergency non-observance of rules for navigation and stay in these waters, foreign vessels must immediately notify the nearest Russian port authority.
Customs 1
Russian ports of entry 1
1.105 The owner or Master of a vessel should send preliminary information concerning his vessel and cargo to the appropriate agency, at the port of destination not less than 12 days (14 days for tankers, gas carriers, and vessels loaded with liquid chemicals) prior to arrival. In this preliminary notice the following information is required by port authorities: 1. Name and flag of vessel. 2. Port of departure (last port of call). 3. Vessels draught at bow and stern. 4. Cargo capacity of vessel, volume of holds etc. 5. Name, quantity and distribution of cargo by hold or tank (in addition, for tankers, type and distribution of ballast). 6. Requirements for port services. Information concerning the vessels sanitation state must be reported in accordance with current sanitation, veterinary and quarantine regulations. See 1.115. In addition Masters must indicate that the vessel has certification which guarantees civil responsibility for damage from oil pollution.
1.104 Foreign merchant vessels are permitted only to call at one of the recognised ports of entry where Customs stations are established. In the area covered by this volume the only port of entry is Kaliningrad.
2
18
1.109 Before customs inspection commences the Master of a vessel must complete or present the following information: (i) A general declaration. (ii) A cargo declaration. (iii) A declaration of the personal effects of the crewmembers. (iv) Crew lists. (v) Passenger lists.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
(vi) A manifest containing a Bill of Lading and list of documents relating to the cargo, plus other ships documents as required by the customs service. (vii) A foreign currency and valuables list. Until the customs inspection is completed no person may enter or leave the ship.
Lithuanian regulations Continental shelf and Economic zone 1
2
Protection of pipelines 1
2
3
1.110 The Russian authorities have established protection zones in the vicinity of underwater pipelines, which transport any types of product, in order to ensure normal operating conditions and to exclude the possibility of damage, within the following parameters: Along the underwater passage of pipelines, namely the section of the water column from the surface to the seabed, lying between parallel planes stretching 100 m from the axis of the pipeline on both sides. Within the protected zones it is prohibited to engage in any type of operation which could interfere with, or endanger the pipeline. In particular these include anchoring, crossing the zone with a trailing anchor, chain or sounding lead, casting nets or trawls and dredging the seabed.
Estonian regulations Continental shelf and Economic zone 1
2
Latvian regulations Continental shelf and economic zone 1
2
3
4
1.111 The continental shelf of Latvia is the surface of the seabed and the deep underwater areas in close proximity to its shoreline, but outside the boundaries of her territorial waters. The Government of Latvia claims an economic zone extending 200 miles seaward from the limits of its territorial waters. The boundaries of the continental shelf and the claimed economic zone are in accordance with the international treaties concluded with Estonia, Lithuania and Sweden. Within these zones Latvia claims sovereign rights and issues regulations to control the following: Exploitation and conservation of resources found on or below the seabed and in the waters above it, including anadromic fish (those that ascend rivers to spawn). Catching of anadromic types of fish is permitted only as a result of inter-governmental agreement. Marine scientific research. Pollution of the marine environment. These regulations are in accordance with the MARPOL 73/78 Convention. There are also regulations for the inspection of vessels suspected of causing pollution and there are penalties for infringements which may include detention of the vessel. Freedom of passage for ships through the economic zone is assured. For the latest information see Annual Summary of Notices to Mariners.
1.114 The continental shelf of Estonia is the surface of the seabed and the deep underwater areas in close proximity to its shoreline, but outside the boundaries of her territorial waters. The Government of Estonia claims an exclusive economic zone extending 200 miles seaward from the limits of its territorial waters. The boundaries of the continental shelf and the claimed economic zone are in accordance with the international treaties concluded with Lithuania, Latvia and Sweden. The maritime boundary between Estonia and Latvia in Gulf of Rga and Irbe Strait is defined by an international treaty between the two countries.
Quarantine 1
2
1.115 Vessels arriving at any of the ports covered by this volume are subject to the national quarantine regulations. Quarantine is enforced in accordance with International Health Regulations, 1969. Vessels entering territorial waters from abroad should hoist the appropriate International Code signal flag by day, and a red light over a white light at night. Communication with the shore is prohibited until the vessel has been visited by a Port Health official and pratique has been granted. A special signal code has been internationally adopted for sending Radio Pratique Messages. This code forms part of The International Code of Signals and is given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 1(1), which also lists the authorities to whom the signal should be addressed. Under normal conditions all vessels, irrespective of flag, proceeding from one port to another within the European Community, need not request pratique.
ICEBREAKING SERVICES General information Sweden 1
Entry into territorial and internal waters 1
1.113 The continental shelf of Lithuania is the surface of the seabed and the deep underwater areas in close proximity to its shoreline, but outside the boundaries of her territorial waters. The Government of Lithuania claims an exclusive economic zone extending 200 miles seaward from the limits of its territorial waters. The boundaries of the continental shelf and the claimed economic zone are in accordance with the international treaties concluded with Estonia, Latvia and Sweden.
1.112 Foreign naval vessels may enter Latvian territorial waters in accordance with the procedures laid down by the government, and may also remain in these waters, on the surface and flying the national flag of its country of origin.
2
19
1.116 Organisation. The Government Icebreaking Service is managed by the National Maritime Administration. Postal address: Sjöfartsverkets Huvudkontoret Isbrytningsavdellingen, S–601 78, Norrköping, Sweden. A telephone answering service provides a brief account of the ice situation for the day, operating areas of the icebreakers and instructions for shipping. A new report is
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
3
4
issued about 1100 daily and a supplementary report, if necessary, is issued about 1630. The telephone number of the Duty Officer can also be obtained from the answering service. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2). Local offices. There are Swedish icebreaker representatives in the area covered by this volume at the following places: Åhus; Karlshamn; Karlskrona; Kalmar; Oskarshamn; Visby; Västervik; Oxelösund; Södertälje; Stockholm. Icebreakers. Sweden operates seven icebreakers. Details of their names, call signs and working frequencies, together with the report required are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2). Swedish icebreakers show the signals in Diagram 1.116.
Poland 1
2
1.119 Organisation. In Polish waters, during the winter navigation period, the responsibility for the control and operation of the ice services and icebreakers is divided between the Harbour Masters at Gydnia and Szczecin and the Maritime Board of Supia as follows: The eastern coastal region, which includes Koobrzeg and ports in Gulf of Gdask, is under the control of the Harbour Master at Gdynia. The central region including the ports of Ustka, Darlowo and Leba is under the control of the Maritime Board of Supia. The western coastal region, including Zatoka Pomorska and winoujcie, is controlled by the Harbour Master at Szczecin. Ice reconnaissance is carried out by aircraft and helicopters. Icebreaking is carried out by specially built tugs assigned exclusively to ice operations in Polish waters.
Latvia 1
Sweden − icebreaker signals (1.116)
Denmark 1
2
3
1.117 Organisation. The Danish Ice Service comes under the authority of the Defence Ministry and management of the service and the State icebreakers is conducted by the Naval Operational Command. Postal address: Soværnets Operative Kommando Operationssektionen, Istjenesten Sumatravej Postboks 483 DK–8100 Århus C, Denmark. Local offices. There are Danish icebreaker representatives in the area covered by this volume on Bornholm at: Rønne; Neksø. Icebreakers. Denmark operates four icebreakers. Details of their names, call signs and working frequencies, together with the report required are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2). Danish icebreakers display the signals in Diagram 1.116.
2
3
Estonia 1
Germany 1
2
1.120 Organisation. In Latvian waters, during the winter navigation season, the responsibility for the control and operation of the ice services and icebreaker is divided between the Harbour Masters at the ports of Liepja, Ventspils and Rga. The dates and implementation of any rules or restrictions imposed are approved by the relevant Port Authority. In addition, the Harbour Master at Rga has responsibility for winter navigation in Irbe Strait, the principal entrance to Gulf of Rga, and Gulf of Rga itself. Certain restrictions on the size, engine capacity and ice class construction apply to vessels intending to pass through Irbe Strait and call at ports in Gulf of Rga, dependent on prevailing ice conditions. Vessels with less than Lloyds Ice Class 3, or equivalent, are prohibited from entering the waters of these two areas during the ice navigation season. Vessels bound for, or leaving the port of Rga, intending to transit Irbe Strait, are obliged to forward a report, giving full details of vessel and cargo, to Rga Harbour Master not less than 24 hours before arrival at the strait or departure from the port. Icebreaker. At present Latvia operates one icebreaker.
1.118 Organisation. The German Ice Service is under the control of the Bundesamt fr Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (German Hydrographic Office) located in Hamburg. When ice poses a threat to navigation and shipping local Ice Service Centres are established to provide information on the position of the ice and the availability of icebreakers. In the area covered by this volume the local Ice Service Centre is located at Stralsund. The primary function of German icebreakers is to ensure that German ports and waterways are kept open to navigation, but will thereafter also support general shipping needs. Icebreakers. Germany operates six icebreakers. Their names, call signs and required operating procedures are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
2
1.121 Organisation. The Estonian Icebreaker Service is administered by the Maritime Administration, and controlled through the Estonian VTS. Postal address: Vessel Traffic Services, Lume 9, EE 004 Tallinn, Estonia. In Estonian waters, vessels which have requested icebreaking assistance and which are bound for Tallinn, Muuga, Kopli or Paldiski, should await the icebreaker in position 59°10′N, 22°00′E, at the E end of the TSS off Kõpu Poolsaar (Hiiumaa) (58°55′N, 22°30′E).
International operations General information 1
20
1.122 International co-operation. Icebreaking services are provided by all countries bordering Baltic Sea. This service is provided by Norway, Finland, Denmark and Sweden under a co-operative agreement with the purpose, through identical regulations, of assisting the maintenance of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
navigation and safety at sea during the winter period. German, Polish, Russian, Latvian, Lithuanian and Estonian icebreakers provide a generally similar service. General information on icebreaker assistance is given in The Mariner’s Handbook.
2
Promulgation of information 1
1.123 General ice conditions are broadcast regularly using the Baltic Sea Ice Code. See 1.6 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(1) for details.
Suitability for winter navigation 1
2
3
1.124 The following are the minimum requirements for a ship to be considered suitable for winter navigation: a) The ship shall be classified as being of the highest class by a Classification Society approved by the state in question, or shall otherwise have demonstrated that it is of a corresponding construction and strength at an inspection of seaworthiness. b) The ship shall be equipped with propulsion machinery powerful enough for the ship to make its way through light ice or through broken channels within the belt of skerries without icebreaker assistance. c) The ship shall be at least 500 dwt. d) The ship shall be provided with an approved radiotelegraph or radiotelephone installation and a VHF installation. e) The stability of the ship shall be such that, even when carrying deck cargo, a certain amount of icing can occur without risk of capsizing.
3
Approaching ice 1
2
Ice-class designations 1
1.125 In setting requirements for ice-strengthening the Executive Board of the Swedish Icebreaking Service, in the restrictions issued for sea traffic, uses the designation of the Swedish-Finnish ice classes, established in 1987, which are as follows: Ice class
For traffic in extreme ice conditions.
1A
For traffic in severe ice conditions.
1B
For traffic in semi-severe ice conditions.
1C
For traffic in light-severe conditions.
II
For traffic in very light ice conditions.
1
Ice-class comparisons 1.126 Norwegian
Lloyds Register of Shipping
1A Super
1A1, Ice A*
100A1, Ice class 1AS
1A
1A1, Ice A
100A1, Ice class 1A
1B
1A1, Ice B
100 A1, Ice class B
1C
1A1, Ice C
100A1, Ice class C
II
1A1
100A1, Ice class 1D
2
Periods of restricted navigation 1
1.129 The State Icebreaking Service decides, with regard to the prevailing and expected ice conditions, when compulsory reporting for ships bound to harbours in a certain area is introduced and when such obligation ceases. Information on this will be given in the daily ice reports. Ship reports, which should be made well before arrival at the ice, should contain the same information as for a request for assistance.
Requests for assistance 1
Swedish-Finnish
1.128 When approaching waters in which ice exists it is prudent to establish radio contact with the icebreaker as soon as possible. In addition, communications should be established with a neighbouring coast radio station. On arriving at the edge of the ice, the Master of each vessel should keep the icebreaker constantly informed of his position until her arrival and, if possible, should await the icebreaker in open water. If a vessel finds herself becoming ice-bound and only able to make slow progress, and if assistance from an icebreaker cannot be expected within a short time, she should not be forced through the ice, but should endeavour to reach ice-free waters, or a large ice-flow, which affords a bay where the vessel can be moored with ice anchors.
Ship reports
Conditions
1A Super
on the SW side. Ice affects Stockholms Skärgård about the turn of the year and in Kalmarsund icing begins about the middle of January. The shallow coastal waters of Gotland are usually frozen by the end of January. The S part of the Baltic, along the Swedish coast, normally remains ice-free but Gulf of Rga is generally iced-up from January to April. Pack ice is sometimes carried S from Bottenhavet and Gulf of Finland in the latter part of winter which may affect navigation in the area between Landsort and Gotska Sandön during February and the middle of March. Unless there is a severe winter most ice in the Baltic has dispersed and melted by the end of April. The inland waters of Mälaren begin to form ice in the W part, W of Kvicksund, about the beginning of December. By the first half of January the Södertälje-Stockholm area on the E side is frozen. Mälaren is normally frozen every year. Break-up of the ice usually starts at the end of March and Mälaren is normally ice-free by the middle of April.
1.127 During normal winters the archipelagos in Baltic Sea freeze between Ålands Hav, on the N side, and Kalmarsund
21
1.130 Requests for assistance should be made direct to an icebreaker, if one is working in the vicinity, or to the local office or headquarters of the State Icebreaking Authority through the nearest coast radio station. Details of procedures and information required are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2). Requests should be made in good time in order that the service can plan its operations in the most efficient way. Vessel at sea. The request must include all the following information: Vessel’s name, nationality, call sign, size/tonnage, draught, engine power, year of construction, ice class, description and tonnage of cargo, destination and ETA area at which icebreaker service will be required. In certain areas, whether an ice pilot is required; see 1.51.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
3
Additional information concerning the vessel and her cargo must be given if requested by the Icebreaking Service. Any changes to this information should be notified immediately. Vessel in harbour. The Master should apply to the local Harbour Master giving the ship’s ETD. If there is no suitable Harbour Authority, requests should be made as for vessels at sea.
6
Icebreaking assistance 1
2
7
1.131 The Icebreaking Service decides whether a reported vessel can expect assistance from the icebreakers. In making this decision regard will be paid to the vessel’s suitability for winter navigation (1.124) and other priorities such as: Vessels in distress or requiring assistance owing to danger to life onboard. Vessels bound to or from Scandinavian ports, with priority given to passenger vessels and vessels carrying special cargoes. Other vessels. Having accepted a vessel as suitable for assistance, directions for the passage will be passed accordingly. These include, if necessary, the requirement for an ice pilot onboard. If icebreaker assistance cannot be made available, Masters of the vessels concerned will be requested to discontinue their passage.
The icebreaker decides whether or not an assisted vessel shall be towed. An assisted vessel must be constantly ready to attach a towing line or release the tow instantly as may be required. Vessels under tow may only use their own propulsion machinery as directed by the icebreaker. Any damage which may affect the continued safe navigation of the vessel must be reported to the icebreaker immediately. By night, any vessel which is part of a convoy and is unable to follow the icebreaker through becoming ice-bound must extinguish its searchlights. Vessels should be maintained in a high state of watertight integrity and repair readiness. See The Mariner’s Handbook for details.
Payment for services 1
1.133 The assistance of State icebreakers and the service, including any towing, is generally free of charge in ordinary traffic routes. However, this does not apply if the service is regarded as salvage, nor does it apply to the services of an ice pilot which may be compulsory in some waters. In Polish waters, vessels of sufficient engine capacity who request towage assistance through ice may be charged for the service.
Signals Conduct of icebreaking operations 1
2
3
4
5
1
1.132 Authority. Each ship receiving icebreaker assistance is subject to the authority of the Captain of the icebreaker and of the Coastal Administration for the duration of the assistance. This means that the Master of each ship receiving such assistance, be it requested or not, shall follow the directives. However, the Authorities accept no responsibility for delay, damage or other loss which may be incurred. Every vessel is responsible for its own safety. Rules. The following rules, which are in general use by all authorities, are to be observed by the Master of any vessel being assisted by icebreakers: All instructions from the icebreaker must be fully implemented, with the alternative that the icebreaker may refuse to give further assistance. Constant attention should be paid to signals from both the icebreaker and assisted vessels in the convoy. The means of displaying or sounding such signals must be ready for immediate use. The specified VHF channel must be monitored continuously. Propulsion machinery must be ready for immediate manoeuvring at all times; e.g. full power astern may be needed to avoid hitting the icebreaker, or the next vessel ahead, if either should become ice-bound. The rudder should normally be amidships when going astern under these circumstances. Vessels in convoy following an icebreaker may not overtake one another, except on the express orders of the icebreaker. Distance between vessels must be carefully maintained with particular attention to own speed and that of the vessel ahead. If own speed decreases the next vessel in line must be warned by means of the attention signal, a series of short blasts.
2
3
1.134 Visual signalling is carried out using the International Icebreaker Signals which are contained in The International Code of Signals. Radio. Icebreakers are all fitted with VHF radio installations and some may carry cellular mobile telephones. Sound signals. Icebreakers are equipped with both bass and treble sirens. Signals made by treble sirens apply only to the vessel nearest to the icebreaker. Signals made by bass siren apply to all vessels being assisted, and may supplemented by a light synchronised with the siren. Bass signals should be repeated, in sequence, by all vessels in the convoy in the order in which they follow the icebreaker. Lights. Finnish icebreakers are equipped with two rotating red warning lights, vertically disposed, which are displayed when the icebreaker is unexpectedly stopped or if its speed significantly decreases. Caution. It should be noted that the use of the above signals between icebreaker and assisted vessels, does not relieve the Master of the responsibility of compliance with International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972).
Use of aircraft in icebreaking services 1
2
22
1.135 Aircraft may be used to assist the icebreaking service and, in the event of this taking place, the following precautions and rules should be followed by all vessels concerned to assist communication with the aircraft: Largest size national flag should flown by day. Ship’s name and port of registry painted on the ship’s side or hatches; letters should be at least 1 m in height. Continuous monitoring watch on 2182 Khz and VHF Ch 16. When contact is established the channel is
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
3
4
5
6
changed to an agreed working frequency or channel. Vessels unable to communicate by radio may hoist signal flags according to the International Code of Signals. However, it is generally accepted that aircraft are unable to see or read hoisted flag signals and in addition, the international signal book is only carried as standard equipment in rescue and fishery inspection aircraft. If a distress signal is displayed, as far as possible, some indication of the nature of the emergency should be included. In cases of a total lack of means of communication, a portable radio may be lowered to the vessel from a helicopter. Confirmation by aircraft that a signal is understood is indicated by rocking the wings or firing a white flare. For signals used by aircraft to direct ships towards an aircraft, vessel or person in distress see the International Code of Signals. Swedish aircraft operating with the joint Icebreaking Service are distinguished by a mark consisting of three yellow crowns on a blue circular ground. Danish aircraft may be distinguished by a red and white cockade on the upper and lower sides of the wings, and both sides of the body, together with a swallowtail Danish flag on both sides of the tail fin.
2
In thick weather or fog: Two strokes on the bell every minute indicates that vessels should pass N or E of the dredger. Three strokes on the bell every minute indicates that vessels should pass S or W of the dredger.
Mine clearance signals 1
1.138 In addition to the signals described in Annual Summary of the Admiralty Notices to Mariners, the flags or lights (Diagram 1.138.1) may also be shown by vessels towing minesweeping apparatus, but not engaged in mine sweeping. Such vessels should not be approached within 1 cable.
Sweden − mine clearance signals (1.138.1) 2
SIGNALS
When engaged in acoustic minesweeping, Morse code “U” flashed to a vessel approaching, indicates that the vessel must not approach closer than 1½ miles. When engaged in firing practice, rendering mines safe, destroying mines or towing mines, the signals (Diagram 1.138.2) will be displayed. Such vessels should be given a wide berth.
International Port traffic signals 1
1.136 The International Port Traffic Signals consist of signals recommended by the International Association of Lighthouse Authorities (IALA), and other international authorities, in 1982. The system of signalling has been progressively introduced at ports as circumstances have permitted. They consist of lights only, shown continuously by day and night, and are recognisable as traffic signals, as the main signals are always three lights in a vertical line. These signals may also be used for controlling movements at bridges and through locks. For a description of this system see The Mariner’s Handbook.
Sweden − mine clearance signals (1.138.2)
Russia Traffic signals 1
Sweden Dredger signals 1
1.137 In Swedish waters, dredgers and vessels at anchor, similarly obstructing navigation, must show the signals (Diagram 1.137) in addition to the lights and signals required by International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972).
Sweden − dredger signals (1.137)
23
1.139 Signals (Diagram 1.139) regulate entry and departure of ships to and from ports in Russia.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2. Vessels passing a dredger must not tow astern a hawser or chain on the bottom; nor may she trail an anchor.
Vessels engaged on special operations 1
2
Russia − traffic signals (1.139)
Tidal and water level signals 1
1.140 The signals (Diagram 1.140) are displayed at ports in Russia to indicate the height of the water level above chart datum, in units of 20 cm. 3
1.142 Russian vessels when engaged in surveying operations, show a blue triangular flag with a rounded point to the fly, having a white circular disc bearing the figure of a lighthouse. Russian vessels, with the exception of dredgers, engaged on special operations in narrow waters, such as cable laying, maintaining navigational aids and surveying, will display the appropriate signals from International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972). Vessels approaching such a ship must reduce speed in good time and, at a distance of at least 5 cables, sound one prolonged blast. She must not pass the ship engaged on special operations until such ship has lowered or extinguished the special signal she is displaying. Vessels engaged on special operations should cease work, and if possible proceed to the edge of the channel, when approached by a vessel showing the shape or lights for a vessel constrained by her draught.
Light-vessel signals 1
1.143 In Russian waters when off station the light-vessel discontinues its characteristic light and fog signal, and if possible, will lower its daymark. It will show instead, two large black balls, one forward and one aft, or two all round red lights, one forward and one aft. In addition it will hoist the international code flags LO or will fire red and white flares simultaneously at least every 15 minutes.
Signals between tugs and towed vessels 1
1.144 The following sound signals are used by the vessel being towed: Signal One long blast.
Russia − tidal and water level signals (1.140)
1
2
Tow straight ahead or astern.
Dredger signals
Two long blasts.
Stop engines.
1.141 Dredgers in Russian waters show the appropriate shapes or lights prescribed by International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972). These signals should be interpreted only as an indication of the side on which the dredger wishes to allow the approaching vessel to pass. The approaching vessel should reduce to the minimum speed necessary for steerage way before arriving at a distance of 5 cables from the dredger, and one prolonged blast should be sounded. The dredger will, in addition to showing the above signals, confirm the side on which she is to be passed as follows:
One long one short blasts.
Reduce speed.
One short one long blasts.
Increase speed.
One long one short one long blasts.
Let go, or take up, tow.
One short blast.
Tow to starboard.
Two short blasts.
Tow to port.
Three short blasts.
Go full speed astern.
Three long one short blasts.
Tug required.
Signal One long blast.
3
Meaning
Meaning
2
Leave me on your port side.
Two long blasts.
Leave me on your starboard side.
Three long blasts.
No passage. Wait until clear.
At least five short blasts. Stop immediately. When two tugs are employed one will be directed by the ship’s whistle and the other by oral whistle signals. All signals are repeated by the tug or tugs.
Examination vessels — special warning services
If there is no answering sound signal from the dredger the approaching vessel must assume that there is no free passage. The following regulations also apply: 1. Vessels passing a dredger must not overtake one another.
1
24
1.145 Occasionally it may be necessary to prohibit entry into certain areas within Russian territorial waters. For certain coastal areas a warning service has been established on special warships, guardships, examination vessels or coastguard stations, which display the signals (Diagram 1.145.1).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
surface. If you do not do so you will be fired upon. Simultaneously, a hydro-acoustic signal may be given which will have the same meaning. The signal will consist of five dashes, each 3 seconds long, with 3 second intervals between dashes. Russia − special warning services (1.145.1) 2
Submarine distress signals General
Should entry to, or navigation within a certain area be prohibited, additional signals (Diagram 1.145.2) will be displayed.
1
1.148 For general information concerning sunken submarines see Annual Summary of Notices to Mariners.
Sweden 1
Russia − special warning services (1.145.2) 3
4
Vessels of the Russian Police Department wishing to stop vessels will hoist, by day, the signal prescribed in The International Code of Signals, and by night, two green lights, vertically disposed, over the masthead light. Should entry or navigation into a given area be unrestricted, and no special signal or instruction regarding further movements have been made or given by the guardship or coastguard station, an incoming vessel is free to proceed to her destination, but she must observe such regulations as may already have been promulgated. If Russian naval vessels are present and if no special instructions have been issued for navigation in this area from the warning service, then mariners must navigate in such a manner as to avoid passing between the naval vessels.
2
Denmark 1
Frontier guardships 1
1.149 Swedish submarines are supplied with telephone buoys for communication in the event of the submarine being sunk. The telephone buoys are can-shaped and painted orange with a white rim on the lid to which a ring is attached. They are fitted with a signal lamp which can be operated from the submarine. Each buoy is also fitted with a plate inscribed with directions for use together with the name of the submarine. On discovery of a telephone buoy the instructions should be followed and attempts made to communicate with the submarine. Any vessel sighting such a buoy should immediately notify any Swedish naval vessel in the vicinity, or a pilot, or the nearest shore authority. Some submarines are also fitted with rising buoys, which are painted red and have a dark green lid. Their purpose is to assist the crew to rise through the water after leaving a sunken submarine.
1.146 The signals (Diagram 1.146) are shown by frontier guardships for stopping non-naval vessels within the territorial or internal waters of Russia. Vessels affected must stop and remain stopped until permission to proceed is granted by the guardship.
2
1.150 Danish submarines are equipped with telephone buoys, for use only in distress, which can be released from a submerged submarine. The buoys are fitted with a flashing light and a green triangular flag. A plate on the upper side gives instructions for use. Vessels sighting such a buoy should make contact with the submarine by means of the telephone, taking care not to moor to the buoy which may damage the attached cable. A report on the sighting together with all relevant information should be sent immediately to the Danish naval authorities.
Poland 1
Russia − special warning services (1.146)
Signals from naval vessels 1
2
1.147 The following warning signals may be made by Russian naval vessels to foreign submarines which are submerged in Russian waters and have violated the Regulations for foreign naval vessels navigating and remaining in Russian territorial waters: Signal: a series of three explosions at 1 minute intervals followed after an interval of 3 minutes by a second series of three explosions. Meaning: you have been found within Russian waters. I demand that you immediately come to the
2
3
25
1.151 Polish submarines are equipped with both salvage and telephone buoys for use in an emergency. The salvage buoys are spherical, red and white chequered, fitted with a double collar forming a drum, painted green, around which the cable is wound. The name is shown on the red part. The telephone buoys are can-shaped and fitted with a similar drum, formed by two collars. Marking and colours are similar to the salvage buoys. They are fitted with two position lights on top. The key to access the telephone box, which is sited between the lights, is located on one of the red sides of the buoy. Instructions for use in Polish, English and German are shown together with the name. Vessels sighting such a buoy should make contact with the submarine by means of the telephone, taking care not to damage it or the attached cable. A report on the sighting together with all relevant information should be sent
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
immediately to the Commander of the Polish Naval Authority at Gdynia.
There are two places of refuge designated for situations which present a low risk of pollution: Vang Pier (2.60) Tejn (2.95)
Russia 1
2
3
1.152 In cases where a Russian submarine is in distress and unable to surface it will indicate its position by releasing: 1. A distress signal buoy. 2. Fuel and lubricating oil. 3. Air bubbles. Russian submarines are equipped with two distress signal buoys, one each in the bow and the stern. Their shapes are; truncated cones with a flat bottom and rounded top, or alternatively, flattened spheres. Details are as follows:
Rescue services Sweden
1.153 For general information concerning distress and rescue, including helicopter assistance, see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners and The Mariner ’s Handbook.
1.156 Sweden has one MRCC, located at Göteborg. In addition, there is a MRSC located at Stockholm. The waters in the area covered by this volume are the responsibility of Stockholm MRSC. The Reporting Centre for Sea Rescue (Sjöfartsveherts Rapport Central) is established within the Maritime Office in Norrköping. All rescues carried out by the local MRCC and MRSC are reported to this centre. Mariners are advised that in case of any emergency, early contact should be made with the MRCC either directly or through a coast radio station. Delay in notification may cause severe difficulty for the rescue services. In cases where the Master judges that the vessel can deal with the emergency situation the MRCC should still be contacted as there may be a need for follow-up. This also allows the sea rescue service to increase its forward preparedness and planning. The MRCC also wishes to be informed of other hazards such as severe weather conditions and icing. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5. Swedish sea rescue operates through the cooperation of nine organisations, the Swedish Maritime Administration, the Coast Guard Service which has local units known as coast stations, the communications authority, the navy, air force, police, civil aviation authority, the Sea Rescue Association and finally Local Authority Rescue Teams. The Sea Rescue Association has 37 rescue stations located around the coasts of Sweden and operates more than 80 rescue craft, most of which are sea-going rescue craft. In addition, other craft suitable for rescue operations are available through the local authorities at all the main maritime centres along the Swedish coast.
Global maritime distress and safety system
Denmark
Diameter
0⋅9 m to 1⋅25 m
Height
0⋅45 m to 0⋅7 m
Freeboard
0⋅4 m to 0⋅6 m
Colour
Red with top part sectored white and red.
Markings
Black H for bow and K for stern buoy on a white sector.
Visibility
1⋅5 to 2 miles.
Light
Quick flash white, 70 flashes per minute, visible 5 miles.
1
2
3
Mariners finding indications of a submarine in distress should determine the position and report to the nearest Russian Port Authority, and establish communication with the submarine through the telephone buoy. See also Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners.
4
DISTRESS AND RESCUE General information 1
1
1.154 The GMDSS enables SAR authorities on shore, in addition to shipping in the immediate vicinity of a vessel in distress, to be rapidly alerted to an incident in order that assistance can be provided with the minimum of delay. Details of the GMDSS and associated coast radio stations are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5.
1
2
Places of refuge Denmark 1
2
1.155 Twenty-two places of refuge, three of which are in this volume, have been designated in Danish waters and Danish harbours for vessels in distress. These have been designated by the Danish Mininstry of the Environment in consultation with the Danish Ministry of Defence, the Ministry of Economic Affairs and in accordance with the EU monitoring directive and the IMO guidelines on places of refuge for ships in distress. There is one port which has been designated for situations where a high risk of pollution exists: Port of Rønne (2.44).
3
1.157 The MRCC for Denmark is located at Århus which has no direct contact with ships in distress. Communication is maintained through the two MRSC under the control of MRCC Århus together with coast radio stations which maintain a continuous listening watch on the international distress frequencies. In the area covered by this volume there is an MRSC located at Bornholm (55°08′N, 14°55′E). The Danish SAR organisation is administered by the Industry Ministry and operated by the Ministry of Defence with the co-operation of the Waterways Authority, the Fisheries Ministry, the Marine Authority, the police, the Communications Authority, the Traffic Ministry, the Customs Authority, the Environment Ministry and with the resources of local communities and other volunteers. Within the limits of this volume there are fully equipped coast rescue stations located at: Rønne (55°06′N, 14°42′E) (2.44). Nexø (55°04′N, 15°09′E) (2.118). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5.
Germany 1
26
1.158 The German Sea Rescue Service is responsible for co-ordinating SAR operations, supported by units of the
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
German Navy. The MRCC for the area covered by this volume is located at Bremen. Fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at the following: Sassnitz (54°31′N, 13°38′E) (8.22). Glowe (54°34′N, 13°28′E) (8.37) Greifswalder Oie (54°15′N, 13°30′E) (8.38). Lauterbach (54°20′N, 13°30′E) (8.69). Stralsund (54°19′N, 13°06′E) (8.98). Freest (54°08′N, 13°44′E) (8.126). Zinnowitz (54°05′N, 13°55′E) (8.171). Ueckermünde (53°44′N, 14°04′E) (8.155). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5.
4
Lithuania 1
Poland 1
2
3
4
2
1.159 The Maritime SAR Service in Poland consists of one MRCC, located at Gdynia, and a MRSC, located at winoujcie. It is managed by the state owned Polish Ship Salvage Company under the supervision of the local maritime authorities. Fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at the following: winoujcie (53°55′N, 14°16′E) (8.175). Trzebie (53°40′N, 14°31′E) (8.234). Dziwnów (54°01′N, 14°46′E) (8.269). Koobrzeg (54°11′N, 15°33′E) (8.281). Darowo (54°26′N, 16°23′E) (8.288). Ustka (54°35′N, 16°52′E) (8.303). eba (54°46′N, 17°33′E) (8.311). Wadysawowo (54°48′N, 18°25′E) (9.24). Hel (54°36′N, 18°48′E) (9.37). Gdynia (54°32′N, 18°33′E) (9.46). Górki Wschodnie (54°21′N, 18°48′E) (9.137). wibno (54°20′N, 18°56′E) (9.144). Tolmicko (54°20′N, 19°32′E) (9.224). Sztutowo (54°20′N, 19°11′E) (9.216). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5.
1
2
3
1.162 The Maritime SAR Service in Latvia consists of one MRCC, located at Rga. MRCC Rga maintains a continuous listening watch on 500 and 2182 kHz and Rga Rescue Radio, also situated at MRCC Rga, keeps watch on emergency frequencies. DSC facilities are also available. Rescue craft and/or inshore rubber rescue boats are stationed at the following: Ventspils (57°24′N, 21°33′E) (10.128). Roja (57°30′N, 22°49′E) (11.33). Rga (56°58′N, 24°06′E) (11.41). Salacgrva (57°45′N, 24°22′E) (11.92). Kolka (57°45′N, 22°36′E) (11.22). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5.
Estonia
Russia
2
1.161 The Maritime SAR Service in Lithuania consists of one MRCC, located at Klaip da. MRCC Klaip da maintains a continuous listening watch on emergency frequencies. The coast radio station at Klaip da also maintains a continuous listening watch on 2182 kHz. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5. Fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at Klaip da (55°43′N, 21°08′E) (10.14) and Liepja (56°31′N, 21°01′E) (10.88).
Latvia
1
1
For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5. Fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at Baltiysk (54°39′N, 19°54′E) (9.150), Mys Taran (54°58′N, 19°59′E) (9.236) and at a rescue station 6 miles NNE of Baltiysk.
1.160 For the Baltic coast the Russian Federation has two MRCC, located at Moscow and Sankt Peterburg, with a MRSC at Kaliningrad. The Moscow MRCC is responsible for co-ordinating SAR operations and for liaising with the SAR services of neighbouring countries in accordance with intergovernmental agreements. Emergency SAR operations in the territorial waters of Russia are normally carried out by Russian rescue units, however, vessels whose governments have an international agreement with Russia will, in exceptional circumstances, be given permission to participate in rescue operations in these waters. Vessels whose governments are not party to such an agreement must make an application, through their national rescue co-ordination centre, to the Russian Rescue Co-ordination Centre in the area in which they intend to operate. When inside the territorial waters of Russia only those ports or anchorages designated as open (1.104), or those points specifically designated by the Russian MRCC, may be used.
2
3
27
1.163 The Maritime SAR Service in Estonia consists of one MRCC, situated at Tallinn, and two MRSC, at Kuressaare and Kärdla. In addition there are two rescue radio stations located at Ruhnu and Kunda. MRCC Tallinn maintains a continuous listening watch on, emergency frequencies for distress calls. The coast radio stations Pärnu (ESP) and Tallinn (ESA) also monitor these international distress frequencies. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5. The Estonian Lifeboat Service, Eesti Vetelpaasteuhingu, has several rescue cruisers stationed at the harbours and coastguard stations along the coast of Estonia. Within the limits of this volume rescue craft are stationed at the following Coastguard Stations: Undva (58°31′N, 21°55′E) (12.32). Sõru (58°42′N, 22°31′E) (12.51). Kõpu (58°55′N, 22°15′E) (12.13). Tahkuna (59°06′N, 22°35′E) (12.65). Dirhami (59°13′N, 23°30′E) (12.72). Haapsalu (58°57′N, 23°30′E) (12.111). Pärnu (58°23′N, 24°29′E) (11.107). Sõrve Säär (57°55′N, 22°02′E) (11.9). Kuressaare (58°15′N, 22°29′E) (11.144). Ruhnu (57°48′N, 23°14′E) (11.25).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
COUNTRIES AND PORTS SWEDEN General description 1
1.164 Sweden, the national name of which is Sverige, occupies the E part of the Scandinavian peninsula in NW Europe. The country, which has a total land area of approximately 449 964 square km, is bounded W and NW by Norway, E by Finland and Gulf of Bothnia, SE by Baltic Sea and SW by the Kattegat. The capital city is Stockholm which, at the end of 2003, had a population of about 758 000. The established national church is the Swedish Lutheran Church.
6
Government 1
National limits 1
1.165 Sweden claims a limit of 12 miles for its Territorial Seas and 200 miles for its Exclusive Economic Zone. For further details see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners and The Mariner’s Handbook.
2
History 1
2
3
4
5
German territories through a merger of the Swedish and Norwegian Crowns in a dual monarchy, which lasted until 1905, when it was peacefully dissolved at Norway’s request. Since 1814 Sweden has followed a policy of non-alignment in peace and neutrality in war. Sweden applied for European Union membership in July 1991 and joined on the 1st January 1995.
1.166 The history of Sweden from Roman times until the eleventh century is largely one of independent tribes of whom the Swedes, inhabiting Uppland, were the most powerful. In 800 AD the first Swedish kingdom was achieved and in succeeding centuries Swedish Vikings, originally, like their Norwegian counterparts farmers and traders, penetrated deeply into Russia, founding Kiev and reaching the Caspian and Black Seas. During the eleventh and twelth centuries, Sweden gradually became a unified Christian kingdom which later included Finland. Queen Margaret of Denmark united all the Nordic lands in the Kalmar Union in 1397. However, continual tension within the countries and within the union led to open conflict between Sweden and Denmark in the fifteenth century. The union finally disintegrated in 1527 bringing on a long and bitter rivalry between Norway and Denmark on one side and Sweden and Finland on the other. Later in the sixteenth century, Gustav Vasa crushed an attempt to restore the Kalmar Union with his fight for an independent Sweden, which laid the foundation for modern Sweden. During the seventeenth century, after winning wars against Denmark, Russia, and Poland, Sweden emerged as a great power. Its contributions during the Thirty Years War under Gustav II Adolf determined the political, as well as the religious balance of power in Europe. After Sweden conquered several provinces from Denmark in 1658, Swedish territory included present day Sweden, Finland, Ingermanland (in which Sankt Peterburg, of the Russian Federation, is now located), Estonia, Latvia and important coastal towns and other areas in N Germany. Sweden’s fortunes were reversed during the eigtheenth and nineteenth centuries when, in bitter disputes with her neighbours, her Baltic empire gradually diminished. Despite this Sweden retained the rich provinces of Skåne, Halland and Bleckinge which had been surrendered by Denmark. In 1809, Sweden suffered further losses during the Napoleonic wars and was forced to cede Finland to Russia, but with its adopted King, French Marshal Bernadotte and his forces, joined the allies in 1813 against Napoleon. The Congress of Vienna compensated Sweden for its lost
3
4
1.167 Sweden is a constitutional monarchy with the monarch retaining the title as Head of State but with purely ceremonial functions. The succession to the throne is hereditary in the House of Bernadotte and, under an amendment to the law in 1979, succession is vested in the monarch’s eldest child, irrespective of sex. The present constitution of Sweden came into force in 1975 and replaced the constitution of 1809. The country is a representative and parliamentary democracy, with the Riksdag, the parliament, the central organ of government. The executive power of the country is vested in the Government, which is responsible to Parliament. The Parliament has one chamber with 349 members who are elected, on a proportional representation basis, for a period of four years in direct elections. There are 29 constituencies from which 310 members are elected. The remaining 39 seats comprise a nation-wide pool which is intended to give absolute proportionality to parties that receive at least 4% of the votes. For the purposes of local government the country is divided into 24 län, or counties, which are subdivided into 288 municipalities, each with an elected council. The Government appoints a Governor to each county who chairs a 14 member elected council. The Lapps have their own parliament called the Sameting which was instituted in 1993. There is an independent judiciary headed by an Attorney-General, appointed by the government, and three judicial Commissioners appointed by Parliament. Authority is exercised through a Supreme Court, six intermediate courts of appeal and 97 district courts.
Population 1
1.168 In 2002 the population of the country was estimated to be about 8 840 000 of which 17 000 are Lapps.
Language 1
1.169 The official language is Swedish which is closely allied to the other Scandinavian languages, Norwegian, Danish and Icelandic. German and English are also widely spoken.
Physical features 1
28
1.170 The interior of Sweden is by no means generally mountainous, and its surface has far less of a highland than a lowland character. The most elevated portion of it commences in the W near the parallel of 62°N, and continues along the frontier of Norway in isolated mountain-masses, known as the Kiölen mountains, rising from an elevated tableland, about 1220 m high. The two highest mountains, both partly within the Norwegian frontier, are Sulitelma in 67° N, about 1903 m in height, and Sylfjellan in 63° N, 1997 m in height.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
3
These mountains and their tableland slope E towards Gulf of Bothnia, sending down numerous torrents, which in their course often expand to form chains of lakes and swamps. The same slope to the E is continued S of 62°N, but there is also a slope to the S which reaches its lowest level near latitude 59°N on the shores of magnificent lakes which stretch almost continuously across the country from E to W. Almost the whole country is composed of gneiss, partially penetrated by granite. Lakes and rivers are more numerous in Sweden than any other European country, with the exception of Finland. There is an extensive system of inland waterways, especially in central Sweden, where Lake Vänern and Lake Vättern are linked by Göta Kanal, the E extension of which provides access to Baltic Sea at Söderköping. On the W side Lake Vänern is linked to the Kattegat by the Trollhätte Kanal thus forming a continuous waterway across Sweden. In addition Lake Mälaren, the third largest inland lake, may be accessed through Södertälje Kanal, which also provides access to the W side of Stockholm, or the lock system at Stockholm.
3
4
DENMARK General description
Flora and fauna
1
Flora 1
1.171 Forests cover about half of the total land area. Over 80% of the standing timber, estimated at 2450 million cubic metres, consists of coniferous wood (pine and spruce), and constitutes Sweden’s greatest natural resource. Forest in which deciduous trees, oak and beech, are the prevailing trees occur only in the S.
2
Fauna 1
2
1.172 In the mountain districts the Lapps still herd flocks of reindeer, which are often attacked by wolves. The bear is dying out. The ptarmigan is the edible bird in these districts. In the huge pine forests the elk is the king of the beasts. The capercaillie, hazel hen and the blackcock are of importance. Roe deer and partridge inhabit the plains in the S of Sweden and ducks frequent the lakes. Hare, fox and mink exist in large quantities in addition to other small mammals, including numerous small birds and birds of prey, which are to be found all over a great part of the country.
2
1.174 Denmark, the national name of which is Danmark, occupies a peninsula in NW Europe known as Jylland and includes the islands of Sjælland, Fyn and Lolland, the island of Bornholm in the Baltic Sea, Føroyar (Færoes) and Greenland. The country, which has a total land area of 43 094 square km is bounded W by North Sea, NW and N by the Skagerrak and Kattegat which separate it from Norway and Sweden, and S by Germany. The capital city is København, on Sjælland, which at the beginning of 2002 had a population of 500 000. The national church is the Evangelical-Lutheran but there is complete religious freedom.
National limits 1
1.175 Denmark claims a limit of 3 miles for its Territorial Seas and 200 miles for its Exclusive Economic Zone. For further details see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners and The Mariner’s Handbook.
History 1
Industry and trade 1
1845–1913) for example, first used in steam turbines, is still in use in space age rocket engines. The most important manufacturing sector is the production of metals, metal products, machinery and transport equipment. Production of high quality steel is an old Swedish speciality, though there is now a decline in the production of ordinary steel. Forestry forms the basis for an important manufacturing sector which includes saw-mills, plywood factories, furniture industries, pulp and paper-mills and wallboard factories. The establishment of a petro-chemical industry has led to a rapid expansion in the output of chemicals and plastics. Agriculture, although relatively small in employment terms, is a major industry and contributes considerably to the economy as Sweden is almost self-sufficient in food. In 2001 Germany was Sweden’s leading trading partner.
1.173 Sweden has become a leading industrial nation within Europe. The country’s prosperity is based on an abundance of natural resources in the form of forests, hydro-electric power and mineral deposits. Sweden is one of the leading exporters of iron ore and aluminium. Lead, copper, zinc and alum shale, containing uranium and oil, are also produced. Although at the beginning of the nineteenth century most of the population lived by agriculture, with the coming of steam power, the Swedish iron industry began to expand dramatically. The wealth gained from her iron exports led to Sweden’s modern engineering industry, much enriched by local technological entrepreneurs, making original contributions in such fields as turbines, electrical machinery, gas accumulators, ball bearings, core drills and pumping equipment. The de Laval nozzle (Gustav de Laval
2
3
4
29
1.176 In early times the Danes, of the same tribal origin as the Swedes, moved W to occupy what is now Jylland, in the fifth and sixth centuries AD. During the Viking period Danish Vikings attacked England, Scotland and Ireland, besieging London in 994. From the Middle Ages to the seventeenth century Denmark was primarily an agricultural country in which the village, rather than the individual farm, dominated. It was the disintegration of the Scandiavian Union in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries which resulted in the lasting Danish interest in the North Atlantic islands, her trade with Iceland, the Færoes and Greenland. In the seventeenth century the Danes became established in the Caribbean and in the eighteenth century sugar refining became a major industry in København. Late in the nineteenth century the opening up of the American prairies grain trade encouraged the Danes to make a rapid transition from grain production to intensive animal husbandry, thus doubling their output and trebling their export of livestock within a period of 20 years. Denmark acquired most of its present boundaries in 1815 after Norway was transferred to the Swedish crown
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
the year before. It became a constitutional monarchy in 1849. During the Second World War Denmark was occupied by Germany from 1940 to 1945 and in postwar years made a marked industrial expansion. Denmark became a member of the European Union on 1st January 1973.
3
Government 1
2
1.177 Under the present constitution, revised in 1953, legislative power lies jointly with the monarch and the Folketing, a single chamber parliament at present composed of 179 members, including two from the Færoes and two from Greenland, whose legislature lasts for 4 years and who are all elected by proportional representation. The monarch must be a member of the Evangelical-Lutheran Church and is advised by a Council of State headed by the Prime Minister. Judicial authority is exercised through a Supreme Court composed of a President and 15 other judges. The lower courts are organised in 82 tribunals which have a single judge. For administrative purposes Denmark is divided into 275 communes, each of which has a district council headed by an elected mayor. All councils are elected for a four year term. There are also about 2100 parishes administered by elected parish councils. The Færoes and Greenland have some degree of home rule.
include shipbuilding, which has declined in recent years, bio-technology, optical and electrical equipment, furniture and chemicals. In recent years tourism has expanded and now forms a notable part of the economy, together with large numbers of cruising yachts visiting the many small harbours in the summer season. In 2001 Germany and Sweden were Denmark’s largest trading partners.
FEDERAL REPUBLIC OF GERMANY General description 1
2
1.182 The Federal Republic of Germany, the national name of which is Bundesrepublik Deutschland, is bounded N by Denmark, North Sea and Baltic Sea, E by Poland, E and SE by the Czech Republic, SE and S by Austria, S by Switzerland and W by France, Luxembourg, Belgium and the Netherlands. It has a total land area of 356 978 square km. The capital city is Berlin which in 2001 had a population of 3 388 000. There is no established national church, Roman Catholics and Protestants forming almost equally large groups. The Evangelical Church consists of 24 member churches, of which some are Lutheran and others Evangelical.
National limits Population 1
1
1.178 In 2002 the population was estimated to be about 5⋅36 million.
Language 1
1
1.179 The official language is Danish, which is closely akin to Swedish and Norwegian. English is the predominant second language and German is widely spoken in the S part of the peninsula adjacent to the border with Germany.
History Recent history
Physical features
1
1.180 The whole of Denmark is low-lying, the greatest elevation being about 180 m. A few streams discharge into the fjords but there are no proper rivers. The interior is largely divided into small holdings and the farming industry is highly developed. The landscape is diversified by fine beech woods. The N part of Jylland consists mainly of moorland and sand dunes, and the E coast is generally low and sandy with several fjords penetrating far inland. The most notable is Limfjord which traverses Jylland from E to W, connecting Kattegat with the North Sea. The largest river, Gudenå, discharges into Randers Fjord and is about 100 miles in length.
2
Industry and trade 1
2
1.183 Germany claims a limit of 12 miles for its Territorial Seas and 200 miles for its Exclusive Economic Zone. In addition there is a special claim which extends the limit to include the deep-water anchorage W of Helgoland (North Sea (East) Pilot). For further details see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners and The Mariner’s Handbook.
1.181 Denmark has large natural resources of oil and gas, in which the country is self-sufficient, large areas of agricultural land and fisheries. In 2001 about 35% of the work force were employed in public and personal services, about 35% in retail/wholesale and manufacturing industries and about 4% in agriculture. The principal industries lie in manufacturing, of which food processing is the largest followed by paper products, metals, textiles and wood products. Smaller industries
3
30
1.184 At the end of the Second World War in 1945, Germany was divided into four occupation zones each controlled by an Allied Power, namely France, United Kingdom (UK), United States of America (USA) and the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (USSR). The territory of Greater Berlin, divided into four sectors, was to be governed as an entity by the four occupying powers. In 1948 the USA, UK and France agreed on a central government for the three western zones, the USSR withdrew from the occupation arrangements and administered the eastern zone through a military government. In 1949 the Federal Republic of Germany formally came into existence under a central government in Bonn and, on 5th May 1955, became a sovereign independent state. The USSR formed their E zone into the German Democratic Republic (GDR) in 1949 with a Soviet-type constitution. The GDR attained sovereignty in 1954 and in 1961 built the mined and guarded “Berlin Wall” to separate East from West Berlin. Treaties were signed with the USSR in August 1970 and with Poland in December 1970, confirming the existing boundaries between West and East Germany. In the autumn of 1989 demands for political liberalization in the GDR gained rapid momentum, leading to calls for the re-unification of Germany, and the dismantling of the Berlin Wall.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
4
After talks with the four war-time Allies, on the 3rd October 1990 the Federal Republic of Germany and the German Democratic Republic were unified in accordance with Article 23 of the Federal Republic’s Basic Law which provided for the Länder of pre-war Germany to accede to the Federal Republic. On 2nd December 1990 all-German elections were held for the first time since 1933. Germany is a member of the European Union and NATO.
2
and root crops, together with viniculture and forest products. The fishing industry also plays an important part in the economy. Germany is the third largest economy in the world after the USA and Japan and the second largest trading nation after the USA.
POLAND General description
Government 1
2
3
1
1.185 The Federal Republic comprises 16 Länder, or States. The Basic Law, previously mentioned, having been approved by the parliaments of the participating Länder, came into force on 23rd May 1949. It decrees that the general rules of international law form part of the federal law. Executive law is vested in the Länder unless the Basic Law dictates otherwise. Federal law takes precedence over state law. The Head of State is the Federal President who is elected for a five year term by a Federal Convention made up of members of the Bundestag and representatives from the Länder. Legislative power is vested in the Bundestag and the Bundesrat, the lower and upper houses respectively. The Bundestag is composed of 603 members and is elected in universal, free, equal and secret elections for a term of four years. Executive power is vested in the Federal Government, which consists of a Federal Chancellor, elected by the Bundestag on the proposal of the Federal President, and the Federal Ministers who are appointed by the Federal President on the recommendation of the Federal Chancellor.
2
National limits 1
History
1
1.186 In 2001 the population of the country was estimated to be about 82⋅44 million. 1
1.187 The national official language throughout the Federal Republic is Modern (or New High) German. English, French, Dutch and Scandinavian languages are also spoken in the coastal areas.
Physical features 1
2
1.188 The area of Germany covered by this volume consists of relatively low land which seldom exceeds an elevation of 200 m. The N part is flat and featureless and the only waterway of any consequence is Peenestrom, which is the W mouth of the Oder delta. It separates Usedom from the mainland and connects Greifswalder Bodden to Stettiner Haff.
3
Industry and trade 1
1.192 The Polish state was founded in 966 during the reign of Mieszko I and became a powerful kingdom following union with Lithuania in 1386. In subsequent centuries the monarchy survived many upheavals before going into a period of long decline culminating in the partition of Poland in 1795 by Russia, Austria and Prussia.
Modern history
Language 1
1.191 Poland claims a limit of 12 miles for its Territorial Seas and 200 miles for its Exclusive Economic Zone. For further details see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners and The Mariner’s Handbook.
Early history
Population 1
1.190 Poland, the national name of which is Rzeczpospolita Polska, is situated in E Europe with its coastline on the S side of Baltic Sea. The country, which has a total area of 312 685 square km, is bounded N by Baltic Sea and Russia, E by Lithuania, Belarus and the Ukraine, S by the Czech Republic and Slovakia and W by Germany. The capital city is Warsaw which, in 2000, had a population of 1 626 100. The predominant religion is Roman Catholicism, practised by about 90% of the population.
1.189 Germany has a number of natural resources including iron ore, coal, oil and natural gas. In the area covered in this volume the principal resource is lignite and large areas of land are devoted to agriculture. Industries include heavy engineering, iron, steel and other metal products of all kinds, chemicals, electronic and electrical products, shipbuilding, vehicle manufacture, textiles and food. Agriculture produces a variety of cereal
4
31
1.193 Following calls for an independent Poland during World War I an independent Polish Republic was proclaimed on 10th November 1918. A turbulent period of parliamentary democracy followed until 1926 when an authoritarian regime was imposed which lasted until September 1939 when Germany invaded Poland, marking the onset of World War II. At the end of World War II in 1945 the country was liberated by Russia and, under the Yalta Conference Agreement, a Polish Provisional Government was formed. Despite this agreement calling for free elections a communist dominated government regime was established in 1947. Following riots in Pozna in June 1956 nationalist anti-Stalinist elements gained control of the Communist Party under the leadership of Wadysaw Gomuka, who retained some communist traditions but also liberalised the internal life in the country. In December 1970 workers discontent over living and working conditions led to riots in the Baltic coast region and Edward Gierek was installed as leader. He improved economic conditions and modernized industry with large amounts of foreign borrowing but much of this was wasted and a period of economic decline followed, culminating in 1980 with nationwide strikes and the formation of Solidarity, the national confederation of independent trade unions.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
5
In 1981 martial law was imposed and Solidarity was banned. This situation lasted until 1988 when, after further unrest, the government resigned. A period of instability followed, with the communists unable to form a stable government, until unconditionally free parliamentary elections were held in October 1991. The 1997 elections resulted in a coalition government being formed by two parties with roots in the Solidarity movement. In 1999 Poland became a member of NATO and, in 2004, a member of the EU.
RUSSIAN FEDERATION General description Extent 1
Government 1
2
1.194 The present constitution was adopted on 2 April 1997. The head of state is the President, who may appoint, but not dismiss, cabinets. The authority of the republic is vested in the Sejm, the parliament of 460 members, elected for a term of 4 years. The Sejm elects a Council of State and a Council of Ministers. There is also an elected upper house of 100 members, the Senate, which has a power of veto which only a two thirds majority of the Sejm may override. For administration purposes the country is divided into 549 voivodships and these in turn are divided into 822 towns and 212 wards. Local government is carried out by councils elected every 4 years at voivodship and community level.
2
Administrative divisions 1
Population 1
1.195 In 2002 the 38.23 million.
population
of
the
country
National limits Territorial waters
1.196 The official national language is Polish which is a western Slavonic tongue.
1
Physical features 1
1.197 In an east-west direction the country forms part of a continuous plain, starting in central Europe and extending to the Ural mountains. The N part, including the coastal area is generally low, partially wooded and has a large number of lakes. The S border is a natural barrier formed by the Carpathian mountain range.
2
1.201 The Government of the Russian Federation claims a limit of 12 miles for its Territorial Seas and 200 miles for its Exclusive Economic Zone. For further details see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners and The Mariner’s Handbook.
Russian internal waters 1
Industry and trade 1
1.200 The Russian Federation is divided into 89 primary administrative units, all of equal status, consisting of 21 republics, 6 krai (territories), 49 oblast (provinces), 10 avtonomny okrug (autonomous areas), two cities of federal status (Moskva and Sankt Peterburg), and one autonomous Jewish region, (Birobijan). The territory of the Russian Federation lying within the area covered by this volume is administered by Sankt Peterburg.
was
Language 1
1.199 The Russian Federation, the national name of which is Rossiiskaya Federatsiya, occupies an area of 17 075 400 square km, three quarters of the total area of the former USSR. It extends from the Arctic Ocean in the N to Black and Caspian Seas in the S, and from the Bering Sea in the E to Gulf of Finland and the exclave of Kaliningrad (54°43′N, 20°31′E), the former East Prussia, on the Baltic in the W. That part of the seaboard of the Russian Federation included in this volume extends from the boundary with Poland, in Zalew Wilany on the E side, to the boundary with Lithuania, in Kurskiy Zaliv on the W side. This encompasses the exclave of Kaliningrad.
1.198 The country is well endowed with natural resources. It has substantial reserves of coal, oil and natural gas. Sulphur, copper, lead and zinc are also produced. There are large forest areas which are mainly coniferous. The country is a leading agricultural nation with a total of 14 million hectares under cultivation in 2000. Principal crops include cereals and root crops and there is a large quantity of livestock produced. In recent years the country has also become intensely industrial. Products include rolled steel, cement, paper, plastics, motor vehicles, cotton fabrics, domestic appliances and other goods. Shipbuilding is also a major industry. The main commodity imports include machines and equipment, electrical and electrotechnical equipment, mineral products. The main commodity exports include machines and equipment, electrical and electrotechnical equipment, non precious metals and textiles. In 2000 the largest trading partner was Germany.
1.202 The internal waters of Russia include: 1. All maritime waters shoreward from straight base lines used to define the width of territorial waters. 2. The waters of Russian ports. 3. The waters of gulfs, bays, inlets, etc, whose shores belong wholly to Russia. 4. The waters of gulfs, bays, inlets, estuaries, seas and straits historically belonging to Russia.
History Early history of Russia 1
2
32
1.203 The races who peopled the area now known as Russia were vaguely known as the Scythians in classical times and a general theory is that the Russians were so-called from the Finnish word ruotsi, a term applied to the Vikings, or Varangians, who visited N Russia before the nineth century AD. One of the first references is to the Varangian Rurik who founded the first Russian state at Novgorod in 862 AD. Thereafter a federation of princely states known as the Kievan Rus controlled most of the E part of European Russia and Christianity was adopted by Prince Vladimir I of Kiyev in 988 AD.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
3
In the eleventh and twelfth centuries the Kievan Rus was weakened by internal feuding and pressure from the nomadic peoples farther E. In 1169 the capital was moved to Vladimir, E of Moscow, after Kiyev was sacked in a civil war. The Mongols defeated the northern states in 1238 and for the next hundred years the principalities were vassal states of the Khan of the Golden Horde.
4
Muscovy and Tsarist Russia 1
2
3
4
The Russian Federation
1.204 Moskva, destined to be the core of the future Russian State, was founded in 1147 by George Dolgorouki, son of Vladimir Monomakh who had married the daughter of Harold II of England and founded the city of Vladimir in 1116. In the mid-fourteenth century the principality of Muscovy, based on Moskva, began to emerge as a leading power in the area, and from 1339 the rulers assumed the title of Grand Princes of Russia. By 1480, having absorbed most of its neighbours, the state was strong enough under the rule of Ivan III, the Great, to gain independence from the Mongols. Ivan had married the niece of the last emperor of Constantinople and, based on this, his grandson, Ivan IV, the Terrible, assumed the title of Tsar in 1547. Russia was formerly created from the principality of Muscovy and its territories by Tsar Peter I, the Great, who ruled from 1682 to 1725 and introduced western ideas of government and organisation. Under Peter and his successors territorial expansion continued and it was as a huge multinational autocratic state that the Russian Empire entered World War I against the Central Powers in 1914. Because of food and fuel shortages, repressive government and lack of competent military leadership a series of mutinies, strikes, and demonstrations culminated in revolution on 12th March 1917, or 27th February in the Julian Calendar which was not replaced by the Gregorian Calendar until February 1918. Three days later Tsar Nicholas II abdicated, a provisional government was formed and a republic declared on 14th September (1st September). A political struggle ensued leading to the October Revolution of 7th November (25th October) 1917 in which the Bolsheviks (Communists) led by V I Lenin (Ulyanov) seized power and created the Council of People’s Commissars as the new governmental authority.
1
2
2
3
1.206 The Russian Soviet Federative Socialist Republic adopted a constitution in April 1978 and in June 1990, pending promulgation of a new constitution, a declaration of republican sovereignty was adopted. In December 1991 it became a founding member of the Commonwealth of Independent States, inherited the Soviet Union’s seat at the United Nations and adopted the name Russian Federation. A new Russian Federal Treaty was signed on 13th March 1992 between the central government and the autonomous republics, and a period of confrontation in 1992–93 between the President and the parliament culminated in a new parliament being elected and a new constitution being adopted in December 1993.
Government Constitution 1
2
1.207 According to the provisions of the constitution, which came into effect on 24th December 1993, the Russian Federation is a democratic, federal, legally-based, secular state with a republican form of government. The state is based upon a separation of powers and upon federal principles which include a 15 member Constitutional Court. The most important matters of state, such as defence, foreign affairs, budget and taxation are reserved for the federal government and other matters, such as education, health, use of land and water are for joint management by the federal and local governments. The President, who is directly elected for a maximum of two 4 year terms, has a central role in defining the basic directions of domestic and foreign policies.
Legislature 1
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (USSR) 1
policies of restructuring (perestroika) and openness (glasnost). This political openness allowed ethnic and nationalist tensions to surface and in order to re-impose Communist control there was an attempted coup in August 1991. The coup was defeated but it could be seen that effective power was in the hands of the leaders of the republics and the Soviet Union began to break up. On 26th December 1991 the USSR formally ceased to exist.
1.205 In March 1918 the Treaty of Brest-Litovsk marked the end of the war with the Central Powers. Armed resistance to Communist rule developed into civil war in the same year, lasting until 1922, when the Red Army finally defeated the anti-revolutionary White Forces. During the civil war Russia was declared a Soviet Republic and other Soviet Republics had been formed in Ukraine, Belarus and Transcaucasia. These four republics merged to form the USSR on 30th December 1922 and by August 1940 the union had been expanded to comprise sixteen Soviet Socialist Republics. In June 1941 Nazi Germany invaded the Soviet Union resulting in the Great Patriotic War in which the USSR lost 26 000 000 combatants and civilians. The Soviet Union played a major part in the defeat of Germany in World War II and afterwards became a major world power with a significant influence on world affairs. The Communist Party remained dominant in all facets of life until 1985 when President Gorbachev introduced
2
1.208 The representative and legislative organ of the Russian Federation is the bicameral Federal Assembly. The upper house is the Council of the Federation and the lower is the State Duma. The former consists of 178 deputies, two from each of the 89 members of the federation, and the latter consists of 450 deputies, chosen for a four-year term. The Council of the Federation considers all matters that apply to the federation as a whole and the Duma adopts federal laws and approves or rejects nominations for Prime Minister.
Regional and local Government 1
33
1.209 The Council of the Heads of the Republics is chaired by the President and includes the Prime Minister. Its function is to provide an interaction between the federal government and regional authorities. A presidential decree of October 1993 established a new regime for local authorities, their membership being limited to 50. During 1996, 47 of the 89 federal units held elections for presidents or governors, these being areas where regional heads had been appointed before elections were instituted in 1995.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
Population 1
2
2
1.210 At the 1989 census the population of the Russian Federation was 147 021 869 and the estimated population in 2002 was 145⋅1 million, of whom about 53% were female and 73% were urban dwellers. The Russian Federation is a multinational state with more than one hundred nationalities and ethnic groupings. The largest of these groups is the Russians, constituting about 82% of the population. The state is secular and religious organisations are independent of state control. The Russian Orthodox Church is the largest of the religious groups in the country but there are a number of other religions.
National limits 1
1
1.211 The Russian language is the state language of the Russian Federation throughout its territory. The language is a branch of the Slavonic family of languages and is written in Cyrillic script.
Physical features 1
2
1.212 In the W, from the Pripet Marshes near the Polish border to the low and rolling Ural Mountains, the Russian Federation stretches over a broad plain broken only by occasional low hills. In the area covered by this volume the coast is mainly low lying and fronted by sandspits. It is fringed by lakes on the landward side. The principal river is Reka Pregolya, on which stands Kaliningrad, about 5 miles from its mouth.
Industry and trade 1
2
3
1.215 Lithuania claims a limit of 12 miles for its Territorial Seas and 200 miles for its Exclusive Economic Zone. For further details see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners and The Mariner’s Handbook.
History
Language 1
Under the constitution the state supports religious groups, which have been active in the country for centuries, the largest of which is the Roman Catholic Church. The capital city is Vilnius, which in 2002, had a population of 553 000.
3
1.213 The Russian Federation is one of the most industrialized of the former Soviet Republics. Alongside its resource based industries, it has developed large manufacturing capacities, notably in machinery. However with the collapse of communism it is now going through great changes. Inflation and a decline in industrial output has caused a number of economic problems including a fall in real incomes. Private ownership and the sale of land is now permitted, as are private commercial enterprises. Some 40% of agricultural production is now accounted for by private ownership and over half the workforce is employed outside the state sector. The Russian Federation has some of the richest mineral deposits in the world including oil, natural gas, coal, ferrous and non-ferrous ores, salt, asbestos, precious metals and gemstones. In 2002, exports were valued at 107 247 million US$ and imports at 60 966 million US$. In 2000, Germany was the main trading partner.
1.216 Lithuanian tribes, organized into state units in the nineth century, unified in the face of encroachment by the German order of Teutonic Knights. Gradually over the next few centuries Lithuania annexed Russian lands until, by the middle of the fifteenth century when its land area stretched as far as Black Sea. Lithuania united with Poland dynastically in 1385 and politically in 1569. In the eigtheenth century Lithuania yielded its Russian territories and was itself absorbed into the Russian empire in 1795. Following occupation by Germany during the First World War a new democratic republic was formed in 1919. This democratic regime was overthrown in 1926 by a coup, the new regime ruling until 1940. Under a secret protocol of the Soviet-German frontier treaty of 1939 the greater part of Lithuania was assigned to the Soviet sphere of influence. In 1940 the country became a Soviet Socialist Republic of the USSR. During the disintegration of the USSR in 1991, and following civil unrest which culminated in Russian army units firing on demonstrators, a referendum on independence was held, which resulted in fully independent status being conceded by the USSR State Council on 6th September 1991. Lithuania became a member of NATO and the EU in 2004.
Government 1
2
1.217 The present constitution was adopted after a referendum held on 25th October 1992. Parliament is the 141 member Seimas, consisting of 70 seats held by parties according to their share of the vote and 71 constituency seats held by candidates who poll more than 50% of the vote. Local government is achieved through ten provinces, administered by governors. The Constitutional Court is empowered to rule on whether proposed laws conflict with the constitution or existing legislation. It comprises nine judges who serve 9 year terms, one third rotating every 3 years. The Supreme Court is the apex of the justice system.
LITHUANIA Population General description 1
1
1.214 Lithuania, the national name of which is Lietuvos Respublika, occupies the E central side of Baltic Sea which forms part of its W boundary. The country, which has a total land area of 65 300 square km and is bounded N by Latvia, E and S by Belarus, W by Poland, the Russian exclave of Kaliningrad and Baltic Sea.
1.218 In 2001 the population of the country was 3⋅48 million.
Language 1
34
1.219 The official language is Lithuanian but ethnic minorities have a right to official use of their language where they form a substantial part of the population.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
1
Physical features
Government
1.220 Generally, Lithuania is a low-lying country with a large number of lakes and swamps. Forests, consisting of mainly conifers, occupy about 19% of the land area. The principal river is the Nemunas, in the S part of the country, which together with its tributaries forms part of about 600 km of inland waterways.
1.225 The declaration of independence of August 1991 states that Latvia is an independent democratic republic whose status is defined by the constitution of 1922. The head of state is the President, elected by parliament for renewable 4 year terms. Legislative power is exercised by the unicameral Parliament, Saeima, which comprises 100 deputies elected from five electoral districts for 3 year terms of office.A seven member Constitutional Court was established in 1996 with powers to invalidate legislation not in conformity with the constitution. Local government consists of local authorities which are two-tiered, regional, which are appointed, and county which are elected for four year terms. The justice system consists of a Supreme Court, regional courts, district courts and administrative courts. Judges are appointed for life.
1
2
Industry and trade 1
2
1.221 Lithuania has few natural resources with the exception of fairly large reserves of peat and a small amount of oil. Agriculture contributes about 7% towards the economy and employs about 17% of the workforce. The main crops include cereals and root crops and a large amount of livestock is also produced. Fishing also plays an important part in the economy. Industrial production includes steel, chemicals, fertilizers, paper, food products and household goods. In 2001 the main trading partners for exports were United Kingdom, Latvia and Germany, and imports Russia and Germany.
Population 1
1.226 In 2001 the population of the country was 2⋅3 million.
Language LATVIA
1
General description 1
2
1.222 Latvia, the national name of which is Latvijas Republika, is situated in E Europe, in the NE part of Baltic Sea. The country, which has a total area of 64 600 square km, is bounded N by Estonia and Baltic Sea, W by Baltic Sea, S by Lithuania and Belarus and E by Russia. The capital city is Rga which, in 2000, had a population of 764 300. Religious organisations must be licensed by the Department of Religious Affairs, attached to the Ministry of Justice. The main religious groups are Lutheran, Roman Catholic and Russian Orthodox.
Physical features 1
1
1.223 Latvia claims a limit of 12 miles for its Territorial Seas and 200 miles for its Exclusive Economic Zone. For further details see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners and The Mariner’s Handbook.
2
History 1
2
1.228 The majority of Latvia is flat or undulating with numerous forests, lakes and peat bogs. Forests cover about 20% of the land area. The principal rivers are the Venta, Daugava, Lielupe and Gauja.
Industry and trade
National limits 1
1.227 The official language is Latvian, which belongs to the Baltic branch of the Indo-European languages, and as such is distinct from Russian with the Latin alphabet being used. Russian is also widely spoken and the right of minorities to use their mother tongue is acknowledged.
1.224 Latvian tribes were under the hegemony of the German Order of Livonian Knights until 1561 when Latvia fell into Polish and Swedish hands. By 1795 it was entirely under Russian control. The country was partially occupied by Germany during the First World War and in 1918 declared its independence under Soviet power. Under a secret protocol of the Soviet-German agreement of 1939 Latvia was assigned to the Soviet sphere of interest, which resulted in occupation by the USSR in 1940 and an application to join the USSR which was accepted on 5th August. On 4th May 1990 the Latvian Supreme Soviet voted overwhelmingly that the Soviet occupation in 1940 was illegal and resolved to re-establish the Constitution of 1922. Fully independent status was conceded and formally recognized by the USSR State Council in September 1991. In 2004, Latvia became a member of NATO and the EU.
3
1.229 The country has extensive reserves of peat deposits, a lesser amount of timber, with minor quantities of gypsum, and amber in the coastal regions. Agriculture forms an important part of the economy with significant livestock production, dairy farming and crops including cereals and vegetables. Industry was largely organised to contribute to the centralized Soviet economy but a programme of reform and privatisation has resulted in the halving of trade with Russia during the period 1997−2000. Trade with the EU has continued to grow, the main products include electric and diesel trains, agricultural machinery, timber, steel, and paper. In 2000 the main export trading country was United Kingdom, followed by Germany, and the main trading partners for imports were Germany and Russia.
ESTONIA General description 1
35
1.230 Estonia, the national name of which is Eesti Vabariik, has a total area of 45 100 square km, is bounded N and W by Baltic Sea, E by Russia, and S by Latvia. There are numerous offshore islands, of which the largest are Saaremaa and Hiiumaa, but few are permanently inhabited. The capital city is Tallinn which, in 2000, had an estimated population of about 408 000. Other large towns are Tartu, Kohtla-Järve, Narva and Pärnu.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
The seaboard of Estonia included in this volume extends from the border with Latvia in Gulf of Rga, to the SW point of Gulf of Finland in the vicinity of Osmussaar (59°18′N, 23°22′E), and includes the islands of Saaremaa and Hiiumaa.
2
state is the President who is elected by the Riigikogu for a term of five years. Local government comprises 273 local councils. There is a three tier justice system with the State Court at its head, together with city and district courts. Judges are appointed for life.
National limits 1
Population
1.231 Estonia claims a limit of 12 miles for its Territorial Seas and 200 miles for its Exclusive Economic Zone. For further details see Annual Summary of Admiralty Notices to Mariners and The Mariner’s Handbook.
1
1.234 In 2000 the population of the country was 1⋅37 million, of whom Estonians accounted for 67⋅9%, Russians 25⋅6%, Ukrainians 2⋅1%, Belorussians 1⋅3%, and Finns 0⋅79%.
Language History 1
2
3
4
5
1
1.232 Estonians are one of the longest settled European peoples whose forebears lived on the southeastern shores of Baltic Sea more than 5000 years ago. During the first century AD Estonia had a population of more than 150 000 people and remained the last corner of medieval Europe to be Christianised. It also managed to remain nominally independent from the Vikings to the W and Kievan Rus to the E. However, the Danes eventually conquered Toompea, the hilled fortress at what is now the centre of Tallinn, and in 1227 the German crusading order of the Sword Brethren defeated the last Estonian stronghold; the people were christianised, colonised, and enserfed. By 1236, the Sword Brethren allied with the Order of the Teutonic Knights and became known as the Livonian Order of the Teutonic Knights. In 1436 the Danes sold their part of Estonia to the Livonian Order. Northern Estonia submitted to Swedish control in 1561 during the Livonian Wars and Southern Estonia became part of Lithuania’s Duchy of Courland. The Swedish were then defeated by Russia and the resulting 1721 Treaty of Nystad imposed Imperial Russian rule in the territory that became modern Estonia, uniting it under one rule. Following the First World War an independent republic was proclaimed in 1919 and this remained so until 1940, when under the terms of a secret protocol of the Soviet-German agreement of 1939, Soviet forces occupied Estonia. The Russians installed a pro-Soviet regime which immediately applied for Estonia’s admission to the Soviet Union. This was effected by decree of the Supreme Soviet on 6th August 1940. On 30th March 1990 the Estonian Supreme Soviet proclaimed that the Soviet occupation of Estonia in 1940 had not disrupted the continuity of the former republic, and adopted a declaration calling for the eventual re-establishment of full sovereignty. A referendum in March 1991 showed a large majority in favour of independence, and while an attempted coup was taking place in the USSR, parliament declared independence on 20th August 1991. Estonia’s fully independent status was conceded and formally recognized by the USSR State Council on 6th September 1991. In 2004, Estonia became a member of NATO and the EU.
Physical features 1
1.236 The coast of Estonia is mostly low, the greatest elevation attained being about 137 m. Inland about 38% of the country is covered with forests, moors, and small lakes, the remainder being arable land. Along the N coast are rich deposits of oil shale. There are also valuable deposits of peat, and in the vicinity of Tallinn, deposits of phosphorite and super-phosphates.
Industry and trade 1
1.237 Agriculture and dairy farming are the main industries. Rye, wheat, barley and potatoes are the main crops, with meat, milk and butter the chief products of dairy farming. Manufactured products include steel, timber, paper, cement, and fabrics. The main export markets in 2000 were Finland, Sweden, and Germany. Main import suppliers were Finland, Sweden and Germany.
PRINCIPAL PORTS 1.238 Place and position
Remarks Sweden
Government 1
1.235 Estonian is the official language but Russian is also widely spoken, and some national newspapers are published in Russian.
1.233 Under the Constitution of 1992 Estonia is a democratic republic. Parliament consists of a single chamber, the Riigikogu or national assembly, of 101 members elected for four year terms by proportional representation. The head of
36
Klintehamn (2.153) (57°23′⋅4N, 18°11′⋅6E)
Small commercial port on Gotland
Visby (2.164) (57°39′N, 18°17′E)
Principal town on Gotland. Small commercial and ferry port
Storugns (2.176) (57°50′⋅5N, 18°48′⋅0E)
Small commercial port in Kappelshamnsviken on Gotland
Slite (2.210) (57°42′N, 18°48′E)
Medium/small commercial and industrial port on Gotland
Ystad (3.20) (55°26′N, 13°50′E)
Medium sized commercial and fishing port
Simrishamn (3.39) (55°33′N, 14°22′E)
Large fishing and small commercial port
Åhus (3.56) (55°56′N, 14°19′E)
Medium/large size commercial port
Sölvesborg (3.77) (56°03′N, 14°35′E)
Medium/large size commercial port
Karlshamn (3.129) (56°10′N, 14°52′E)
Large commercial and industrial harbour
Ronneby (3.170) (56°12′⋅5N, 15°17′⋅0E)
Small commercial port
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
Place and position
Remarks
Place and position
Remarks
Karlskrona (3.250) (56°10′N, 15°35′E)
Large commercial, industrial and naval port and harbour
Kapellskär (7.300) (59°43′N, 19°04′E)
Large ferry port in N of Stockholm archipelago
Degerhamn (4.22) (56°21′N, 16°25′E)
Small industrial port for bulk and oil, on Öland
Norrtälje (7.353) (59°45′⋅5N, 18°43′⋅0E)
Medium sized commercial and ferry port
Bergkvara (4.31) (56°23′N, 16°05′E)
Small commercial and fishing port
Grönhögen (4.43) (56°16′N, 16°24′E)
Small commercial and fishing port, on Öland
Mörbylånga (4.58) (56°31′⋅5N, 16°23′⋅0E)
Small commercial and leisure port, on Öland
Kalmar (4.64) (56°40′N, 16°22′E)
Large commercial and industrial port
Borgholm (4.105) (56°53′N, 16°39′E)
Principal town and commercial port of Öland
Stora Jätterson (4.120) (57°06′N, 16°33′E)
Small commercial port serving industrial complex
Oskarshamn (4.140) (57°16′N, 16°29′E)
Large commercial and industrial port
Byxelkrok (4.183) (57°19′N, 17°00′E)
Ferry and fishing harbour on Öland
Simpevarp (4.186) (57°25′N, 16°40′E)
Artificial industrial harbour for nuclear power station
winoujcie (8.175) (53°55′N, 14°16′E)
Large commercial and fishing port
Gunnebo (5.45) (57°43′⋅4N, 16°32′⋅0E)
Small industrial port for local iron works
Szczecin (8.248) (53°25′N, 14°33′E)
Major large industrial and commercial port
Västervik (5.47) (57°45′N, 16°39′E)
Large commercial and fishing port
Koobrzeg (8.281) (54°11′N, 15°33′E)
Small commercial port
Gamleby (5.88) (57°54′N, 16°25′E)
Small commercial port
Darowo (8.288) (54°26′N, 16°23′E)
Small commercial port
Marviken (5.205) (58°33′⋅3N, 16°50′⋅2E)
Deep-water, single berth port serving power station
Hel (9.37) (54°36′N, 18°48′E)
Fishing and leisure port
Norrköping (5.216) (58°36′N, 16°11′E)
Large maritime centre and commercial port
Gdynia (9.46) (54°32′N, 18°33′E)
Major commercial and industrial port
Oxelösund (5.245) (58°40′N, 17°06′E)
Major industrial and commercial deep-water port
Gdask (9.78) (54°24′N, 18°40′E)
Major industrial port complex
Nyköping (5.280) (58°45′N, 17°01′E)
Medium sized commercial port
Port Pónocny (9.111) (54°24′N, 18°43′E)
Large artificial bulk and oil harbour, part of Gdask
Kagghamra (6.40) (59°06′N, 17°47′E)
Small commercial port
Södertälje (6.73) (59°12′N, 17°38′E)
Medium/Large sized industrial and commercial port
Vårby (6.101) (59°15′⋅5N, 17°52′⋅0E)
Oil terminal in W approach to Stockholm
Bålsta (6.124) (59°33′⋅2N, 17°32′⋅5E)
Small/Medium sized port serving industrial complex
Underås (6.164) (59°15′⋅9N, 17°32′⋅2E)
Industrial loading place serving aggregate quarry
Västerås (6.169) (59°36′N, 16°33′E)
Large inland port in Mälaren serving major industrial area
Denmark — Bornholm Rønne (2.44) (55°06′N, 14°42′E)
Principal town on Bornholm. Small commercial port
Hasle Havn (2.52) (55°01′N, 14°42′E)
Small fishing and commercial port
Nexø (2.118) (55°04′N, 15°09′E)
Small fishing and commercial port Germany
Sassnitz (8.22) (54°31′N, 13°38′E)
Medium sized ferry and commercial port
Mukran (8.29) (54°29′N, 13°35′E)
Large ferry port
Stralsund (8.102) (54°19′N, 13°06′E)
Baltic Pilot Volume I Poland
Russia — Kaliningrad exclave Baltiysk (9.150) (54°39′N, 19°54′E)
Naval harbour and commercial lightening port
Kaliningrad (9.150) (54°43′N, 20°31′E)
Principal city of exclave and large industrial port complex Lithuania
Klaip da (10.14) (55°43′N, 21°08′E)
Large commercial and industrial harbour. Only port of significance
ventoji (10.86) (56°02′N, 21°05′E)
Fishing port close to border with Latvia Medium/large commercial and industrial port
Latvia
Köping (6.195) (59°30′N, 16°01′E)
Medium sized commercial port in W Mälaren
Liepja (10.88) (56°31′N, 21°01′E)
Nynäshamn (7.57) (58°54′N, 17°57′E)
Large oil port and commercial harbour and ferry traffic
Pavilosta (10.122) (56°54′N, 21°11′E)
Small commercial and fishing port
Stockholm (7.190) (59°20′N, 18°04′E)
Capital city and large commercial and industrial port
Ventspils (10.128) (57°24′N, 21°33′E)
Large commercial and industrial port
37
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
Place and position
Other facilities
Remarks
Rga (11.41) (56°58′N, 24°06′E)
Capital city. Major commercial and industrial port
Salacgrva (11.92) (57°45′N, 24°22′E)
Small commercial port
Compass adjustment 1
Estonia Pärnu (11.107) (58°23′N, 24°29′E)
Medium sized commercial and fishing port
Roomassaare (11.138) (58°13′N, 22°31′E)
Small commercial port
Lehtma (12.82) (59°04′N, 22°42′E)
Small commercial and fishing port
2
3
PORT SERVICES — SUMMARY Docking facilities 1
2
3
4
5
6
1.239 Ports with docking facilities and, where available, the size of the largest vessel that can be accommodated, are listed below. Further detail is given at the reference. Denmark Rønne. Two slipways; maximum capacity 400 tonnes (2.51). Nexø. Dry dock; maximum capacity 800 dwt. Hydro lift; maximum capacity 500 tonnes (2.125). Sweden Simrishamn. Slipway; maximum capacity 400 dwt (3.46). Sölvesborg. Dry dock; maximum capacity 5000 dwt (3.91). Karlskrona. Seven repair dry docks. (3.273). Oskarshamn. Floating dock; maximum capacity 2000 tonnes (4.170). Stockholm. Two patent slips; maximum capacity 500 tonnes (7.238). Germany Wolgast. Two mechanical lift docks; maximum capacity 2950 tonnes (8.125). Additional facilities are available at Stralsund, see Baltic Pilot Volume I. Poland winoujcie. Two floating docks; maximum capacity 4500 tonnes (8.210). Szczecin. Seven floating docks; maximum capacity 15 000 tonnes. Four slipways; maximum capacity for repairs 300 tonnes (8.263). Koobrzeg. Lift dock; maximum capacity 200 tonnes (8.287). Gdynia. Several floating docks; maximum lifting capacity 4500 tonnes (9.73). Gdask. Several floating docks; maximum lifting capacity 36 000 tonnes (9.106). Lithuania Klaip da. Five floating docks; maximum capacity 24 000 tonnes (10.48). Latvia Liepja. Two dry docks; maximum capacity 20 000 dwt. Floating dock; maximum capacity 4000 tonnes (10.114). Rga. Six floating docks; maximum capacity 30 000 tonnes (11.75).
4
1.240 Authorized compass adjusters are available at the following places in the area covered by this volume: Sweden Simrishamn (3.46). Karlshamn (3.160). Kalmar (4.86). Oskarshamn (4.170). Oxelösund (5.276). Nynäshamn (7.80). Stockholm (7.239). Denmark Rønne, Bornholm (2.51). Germany Sassnitz (8.28). Lauterbach (8.73). Poland Koobrzeg (8.287). Gdynia (9.74). Gdask (9.107). Russia Kaliningrad (9.187). Lithuania Liepja (10.114).
Deratting 1
2
3
4
1.241 Deratting and deratting certificates: Rønne (2.51). Ystad (3.28). Simrishamn (3.46). Åhus (3.75). Sölvesborg (3.91). Karlshamn (3.160). Karlskrona (3.273). Kalmar (4.86). Oskarshamn (4.170). Västervik (5.77). Norrköping (5.244). Oxelösund (5.276). Nyköping (5.36). Västerås (6.184). Nynäshamn (7.80). Stockholm (7.239). Norrtälje (7.359). Sassnitz (8.28). Lauterbach (8.73). winoujcie (8.210). Koobrzeg (8.287). Gdynia (9.74). Gdask (9.107). Klaip da (10.49). Liepja (10.114). Ventspils (10.161). Rga (11.76).
Measured distances 1
38
1.242 Within the area covered by this volume there are measured distances located at: Mysingen (7.40). Zatoka Pucka (9.14). Kuriu Nerija (10.35).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
NATURAL CONDITIONS MARITIME TOPOGRAPHY Seabed General geology of the area 1
2
3
4
5
6
1.243 The waters of Baltic Sea result from the geological past history of the area. The retreat of the large Baltic Sea glaciers, which during the great Ice Age was interrupted by alternative periods of smaller advances, caused erosion on the one hand and brought various deposits on the other. As recently as 11 000 years ago the ice sheet still covered the whole of Gulf of Bothnia depositing considerable quantities of morainic material in the entrance zone to the gulf between the SW extremity of the Finnish mainland and the Swedish coast. As the large ice mass melted, extensive earth movements began with Scandinavia rising (in the last 10 000 years about 300 m) in the N, while in the S Baltic area the land was sinking at a comparable rate. Present annual rates of land movement vary from a sinkage of 0⋅1 cm on the coast of Poland, to an uplift of 0⋅4 cm in the region of Stockholm and 0⋅9 cm uplift at the head of Gulf of Bothnia. In areas of land uplift the annual increase in charted depths, particularly if taken from older surveys, may need to be considered in the context of under-keel clearances. Mariners should also be aware that discrepancies may arise from minor differences in the vertical datum used for depths on charts drawn from a variety of sources and dates. Attention is drawn to the Note which is included on relevant charts. The general shape of the seabed reflects the great ridigity of the geological crust in this region. The greatest known depth in Baltic Sea is 459 m in Landsortsdjupet, about 15 miles SE of Landsort Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°52′E). Midway between Gotland and the coast of Latvia there is a depth of 238 m, but over most of the area covered by this volume, the mean depth is about 65 m. Most of the hummocky seabed forms, drumlins, eskars and moraine, are of glacial origin, including the submarine eskar between the Swedish mainland and Öland which is 21 miles in length, 135 m wide and rising up to 20 m in height. The combination of the deglaciation process and the numerous large fluctuations in the relative levels of land and sea, in recent geological time, has resulted in the generally irregular shape of the Swedish coastline, fringed by numerous islands and islets. Within this area the seabed consists of a complex mixture of mud, sand gravel, boulders and rock with very irregular depths which tend to defy the normal processes of hydrographic surveying and charting. Where ports are located in such an area, access is sometimes only possible via specially surveyed channels, many of which have necessitated dredging and blasting operations through hard rock. Outside the channel limits there will be numerous uncharted rocks or boulders and navigation without detailed local knowledge is extremely dangerous. On the E and S sides of Baltic Sea however, inshore conditions are less harsh, the seabed in this area being generally sandy. The most widespread material underlying the sea bed throughout the region is boulder clay, otherwise known as till, deposited from the base of ice sheets and containing boulders of varying size, some very large, in a matrix of clay which may itself be quite hard. In many of the deeper
7
8
parts the till is covered with more recent softer deposits, but on the banks and shoals and particularly where exposed to wave action, it tends to form stony ground. Least depths over shoals and banks may always be doubtful due to the many large boulders which may easily escape detection during survey operations. Boulders may also be present in areas not shown as such on the charts and it is therefore advisable to maintain a generous under-keel clearance in these waters. Other than boulders or stones, solid rock is seldom exposed on the seabed except near the shore. Over most of the area the underlying boulder clay is covered by relatively thin layers of superficial deposits, quite widespread, and in various depths, grey or red clay may be found. In the deeper parts, however, this clay is usually covered by recent deposits of mud which in the coastal areas is covered by thin sheets of sand and gravel. Owing to the absence of tidal streams and the relatively weak currents in the region, the various sediments deposited by glacial process remain comparatively static, thus there is a complete absence of the elongated banking effect apparent in North Sea. In Baltic Sea there are two distinct types of mud. The inorganic type, sometimes mixed with sand, is fairly soft and usually grey, brown, or black in colour. The other type present, in sheltered basins, contains a high proportion of partially decomposed organic material and is very soft, slimy and malodorous, between green and black in colour. The latter type is sometimes charted as ooze though it must not be confused with the pelagic deposits which are deep sea deposits formed almost exclusively from the shells and skeletons of planktonic animals and plants.
CURRENTS General remarks 1
2
1.244 Baltic Sea and Gulfs of Bothnia and Finland function in a similar way to large rivers with fresh water draining into them from the surrounding countries, and which results in a mainly S going surface current over the greater part of Baltic Sea. The inflow of fresh water usually reaches a maximum in May when the ice and snow melts, and again during the second half of the year when precipitation is generally at its highest. In addition, a sub-surface current brings salt water from North Sea into Baltic Sea through Store-Bælt and, to a lesser extent, through Lille-Bælt and The Sound (Baltic Pilot Volume I). In the region covered by this volume, the currents are relatively weak except when affected by meteorological disturbances, particularly strong winds. With calm or light winds over Baltic Sea and surrounding regions, there is normally a weak anti-clockwise circulation with an average rate of less than ¼ kn setting SW near the Swedish coast and NE near the coasts of Poland and the other eastern Baltic countries, and with the currents tending to run parallel to the coast. In restricted channels between islands the flow is often complex, and with higher average rates.
Conditions that affect currents 1
39
1.245 After prolonged periods of strong winds from a constant direction, a wind-drift current may be generated where the rate varies according to the speed of the wind and its duration. These wind drift currents may strengthen, weaken or reverse the surface current and cause major irregularities to the set of the current across the region. In general,
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
persistent strong to gale force winds blowing along the length of Baltic Sea can increase rates to around 1 to 2 kn relatively soon after the onset of the wind. However, this soon leads to an increase in the water level along the coast towards which the wind is blowing, and a lowering of the water level in the area from which the wind is coming. This difference in water levels will in turn give rise to an opposing current, and once the gale ceases the difference in the water levels is usually restored by a flow of water across the whole width of Baltic Sea. A large pressure variation, together with strong winds, over one area may lead to an alteration in the water level which, in turn, may result in indirect and sudden changes to both the direction and rate of the current elsewhere in the region. The variation in the currents can be considerable during periods of unsettled weather, and particularly in narrow inlets and channels. For example, a current of 6 to 8 kn has been recorded in Kalmarsund with persistent gale force winds. In the SW part of Baltic Sea, between the coast of S Sweden and Bornholm and Kap Arkona, currents of 4 kn have been reported on some occasions, and in the same area, off Sandhammaren on the Swedish coast, the current sets strongly towards the land with SW gales. Near Hammer Odde, on the NW coast of Bornholm, a strong S set has been recorded with strong to gale force NW winds. Other local characteristics of currents, where known, are described in the geographical chapters as appropriate.
there are no great obstructions to water movements. During autumn, winter, and spring large changes in the sea level occur, but during the summer the changes are confined within quite narrow limits. This is probably explained by the fact that storms very seldom occur in the summer.
SEA AND SWELL General remarks 1
1.247 For general information on sea and swell, see The Mariner’s Handbook.
Sea and swell conditions 1
2
1.248 Sea waves are generated locally by the wind and can be very variable in direction. During January the increasing ice coverage reduces the formation of sea waves but some of the roughest seas, with a moderate swell, are experienced in the E of the area with persistent W to SW winds, and in the SW of the area with E to NE winds. Rough to very rough seas are experienced on around 12 to 14% of occasions in autumn and winter, and 1 to 3% in summer.
SEA WATER CHARACTERISTICS Sea surface temperatures 1
SEA LEVEL AND TIDES 1
2
3
4
5
1.246 Tidal influence in tBaltic Sea is imperceptible. However, considerable differences in the sea level may be caused by strong winds, variation in atmospheric pressure, and the seasonal increase and decrease in the amount of water brought down by the rivers. In the area covered by this volume a combination of these effects raises or lowers the level by about 0⋅6 from the mean, although at times the variation may be much greater. Off the S coast of Sweden the sea level may fall by as much as 1⋅5 m below the mean with strong W gales, while at winoujcie the sea level may rise 2 m above mean level in NE gales. Local variations, where known, are given in the geographical section as appropriate. Atmospheric pressure conditions often give rise to powerful currents which appear to follow the direction of the wind. Alterations to sea level follow on this so that there is usually high water on that coast towards which the wind blows and low water on the opposite side. Appreciable local deviations from this rule can be caused by irregularities in the shape of the coast, such as large bays or reefs. Very severe gales, although seldom occurring, may cause such an accumulation of water that heavy flooding may occur in some localities while, in others, shoals which are normally always covered become dry. The atmospheric pressure has also a direct effect on the sea level. This is weaker than the wind effect, but is more local and felt more quickly. This movement occurs at all seasons, but is more frequent in the autumn and winter. It sometimes lasts for weeks, though more commonly for a few days over a certain area. A rapid rise of the sea level can often be taken to indicate a decrease of atmospheric pressure and consequently as a warning of approaching bad weather. Normally the changes in sea level will be greater in bays and narrow waters than on the open coast, where
2
3
1.249 The mean sea surface temperatures for February, May, August and November are given in the accompanying Diagrams 1.249.1 to 1.249.4. Sea surface temperatures are normally at their lowest between late February and early March, and with extensive coastal ice during this period in Gulf of Rga and in the approaches to Gulf of Bothnia and Gulf of Finland. Baltic Sea is usually ice-free by the end of April, and by mid-May mean sea surface temperatures range from around 5⋅5°C in the N to about 10°C in Gulf of Gdask and off winoujcie. Sea surface temperatures are usually at their highest during August with temperatures of around 16°C in the N and 18°C in the S. Temperatures start to decrease from late August and by November are around 6°C in the NE and 8°C in the S. The central part of Baltic Sea is normally a little warmer than adjacent coastal in winter, and slightly cooler in summer. The overlying air is usually 1° to 2°C warmer than the sea surface temperature between April and July, and the difference is often at its highest in May when sea fogs are most common over the open sea.
Variability 1
1.250 Sea surface temperatures can vary from one occasion to another, especially in Gulfs of Rga and Gdask and off winoujcie in summer. The average variation is normally about 1° to 3°C above or below the average for the time of the year, but can be greater in shallow waters or where there is a major fresh water inflow.
Salinity 1
40
1.251 For an explanation of salinity, as applied to seawater see The Mariner’s Handbook. Salinity diagrams for Baltic Sea are shown in Diagrams 1.251.1 and 1.251.2, for spring (April-June) and autumn (October-December). Variations to these values, especially in the vicinity of large rivers and due mainly to fresh water
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
run off, melting ice and summer evaporation, may be encountered. Average values, in practical salinity values, across the area covered by this volume, range from 6⋅5 in the NE of the area to 8⋅0 in the extreme SW, and varying little throughout the year. In Gulf of Rga values can be considerably less than the average for Baltic Sea, falling to as low as 3⋅0 in the SW of the Gulf with isohalines crossing the gulf NE-SW.
4
Ice development — average winter
Density 1
2
3
1.252 For an explanation of density, as applied to sea water, see The Mariner’s Handbook. The mean density values for the area covered by this volume remain relatively stable throughout the year at 1⋅00525 gm/cm 3 in the NE part of the area, to 1⋅00600 gm/cm3 in the SW part of the area. It should be noted that density values tend to decrease in summer with the increase in temperature, giving values of 1⋅00375 g/cm3 in the NE to 1⋅00475 g/cm3 in the SW. For selected areas density values are as follows, where average density values gm/cm3, relative to pure fresh water at 1⋅000 gm/cm3: Month
Off Bornholm
Off Gotland
Off Hiiumaa
In Gulf of RØga
February
1⋅00675
1⋅00575
1⋅00550
1⋅00525
May
1⋅00575
1⋅00550
1⋅00500
1⋅00400
August
1⋅00450
1⋅00425
1⋅00375
1⋅00250
November
1⋅00575
1⋅00550
1⋅00500
1⋅00425
1
2
Note. The figures quoted above for Gulf of Rga are average values for the central part. Values decrease towards Rga and the SE part of the gulf.
ICE CONDITIONS General remarks
2
3
1.254 On average, severe ice conditions occur about every fourth or fifth year but this must not be interpreted to infer that a regular pattern is normal. Sustained low temperatures are often associated with a higher frequency of winds from E or with spells of frosty weather. In other winters predominately W winds off Atlantic Ocean ameliorate the coldness associated with the continental mass in winter. During the course of a winter season rapid changes in the extent and disposition of ice may occur, thus it is prudent to ascertain the current conditions before proceeding into Baltic Sea. The first formation of ice usually occurs during December and reaches its maximum extent during late February or early March. The melting process is usually complete sometime during April. Mean ice concentration for the months of February, March and April are at Diagrams 1.254a−c. Although ice seasons vary greatly certain common patterns emerge. The central and S parts of Baltic Sea do not generally become extensively covered by ice in a normal winter, whereas the archipelagos, Gulf of Rga and the shallower waters round Hiiumaa and Saaremaa are regularly covered.
Regional ice remarks − Baltic (central part) 1
1
icebreakers and the construction of more ice strengthened vessels, the period of navigation has been considerably extended in the larger ports affected by ice. The comparatively deep waters well offshore in the central Baltic Sea areas provides an effective store of heat from the summer months which must be depleted by prolonged exposure to the cold before ice can build up seawards from the coastal regions to any extent.
1.253 A general account of the nature, development and movement of sea ice is given in The Mariner’s Handbook which also includes a glossary of the recognised ice terms, some of which are illustrated by photographs. The following description is limited to the ice conditions within the region covered by this volume. For a description of icebreaking services and operations see 1.116. The Baltic winter climate is one of marked contrasts, being at times subject to intensely cold weather, and at other times much milder weather prevails. Due to its low salinity (1.251) Baltic Sea freezes at a slightly higher temperature compared with typical saline sea water. Near coasts and within inlets and bays the water temperature is directly influenced by the very cold air from the land mass and it is these coastal areas that are most subject to ice. The severity of the ice season, as evidenced by duration, extent and thickness of the ice, consequently varies greatly from one year to another. Accordingly, while it is convenient to quote average dates for the onset and break-up of ice, or for opening and closing of ports, it must be understood that wide variations occur in individual years; see 1.261. Over much of this region ice may be a threat to navigation in some or all of the months from December, when the first ice usually forms, through to April. At some ports the movement of ships may be suspended for a longer period, but with the use of larger, more powerful
1
2
3
1
45
1.255 December. In December ice of a very low concentration can be found in the archipelagos of the Swedish coast between Vastervik and Stockholm and on the Polish Coast near Swinoujscie, in the NW sector of Gulf of Gdask and in Zalew Wilany. Ice of low concentration exisits in Kuriu Marios and Kurshskiy Zaliv. 1.256 January. At the beginning of the year there is ice of a low concentration in the archipelagos on the Swedish coast between Kalmarsund and Stockholm. Outside the archipelagos, towards the open sea, there is little or no ice. There is ice of a low concentration along the German coast, in the area between Warnemünde and the German/Poland border. Ice may aslo be found in Zalew Wilany, Kuriu Marios and Kurshkiy Zaliv during early January. In the middle of the month, the concentration of ice between the islands of the archipelagos off the Swedish coast and the central part of Kalmarsund is between 25% to 50%. Concentrations above 25% may be found on the German coast E of Warnemünde and in Zalew Wilany, Kuriu Marios and Kurshkiy Zaliv. In the region of Karlskrona, ice concentration can reach 25%. Ice of very low concentration may be found everywhere along the coasts of Germany, Poland Lithuania and Latvia. By the end of January the ice concentration in the central part of Kalmarsund can often be above 50%, decreasing towards the extremities of the sound. 1.257 February. At the beginning of the month ice of very low concentration can be found between Gotland and the coast of mainland Sweden. The German coast E of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
18°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
25°
1 61°
61°
0
60°
60°
0
1
59°
2
59°
58°
58°
<1
57°
57°
56°
56°
>2.5 55°
2
55°
2 54°
54°
53°
53°
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
22°
Mean sea surface temperature (°C) FEBRUARY (1.249.1)
41
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
18°
17°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
25°
4 61°
61°
5 60°
60°
5
59°
59°
10
58°
7
58°
8 9
6 57°
57°
6
>5 56°
56°
55°
55°
7
8
10
8 9 10
54°
9
54°
53° 12°
53° 13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
Mean sea surface temperature (°C) MAY (1.249.2)
42
22°
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
18°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
25°
61°
61°
60°
60°
59°
17
16
59°
18 17
58°
58°
17
18
17
57°
57°
<16 56°
56°
16
55°
18
17
17
>18 55°
18
>18
54°
54°
53° 12°
53° 13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
Mean sea surface temperature (°C) AUGUST (1.249.3)
43
22°
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
13°
12°
14°
15°
16°
18°
17°
61°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
25°
61°
<6 6
60°
59°
59°
7
60°
<6 7
6 58°
<6
58°
7
6 7 57°
8
57°
56°
56°
9
55°
8
55°
8
8 54°
54°
53° 12°
53° 13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
22°
Mean sea surface temperature (°C) NOVEMBER (1.249.4)
44
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
13°
14°
15°
16°
18°
17°
5
61°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
25°
61°
5.5
12°
60°
6
60°
5 6·
59°
59°
58°
3
4
6
5
58°
7
57°
57°
56°
56°
55°
55°
7·5 8
7
<7
54°
54°
53°
53°
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
22°
Surface salinity in parts per thousand APRIL - JUNE (1.251.1)
46
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
13°
12°
14°
15°
16°
17°
18°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
61°
25°
61°
5
5·
60°
60°
6
6
6·5 59°
59°
58°
58°
4
5
6
57°
57°
7 56°
56°
14 12 10 8
abt 7·25
10
55°
7·5
55°
8
54°
54°
53° 12°
53° 13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
22°
23°
Surface salinity in parts per thousand OCTOBER - DECEMBER (1.251.2)
47
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
15°
10°
25°
20°
Luleå
100%
30°
Kemi
90%
65°
65°
Oulo Skellefteå 75%
Umeà
Kokkola
50% Vaasa Härnösand 25%
Hudiksvall 10% Rauma Vyborg
Gävle 50% Oslo
Helsinki
25% 10%
25%
kö
0% pin g
iiu ma a 75%
Arendal Saaremaa
90%
60°
sb ter -Pe t k n Sa
Tallinn
H
Norr
10%
75% 50%
Stoc kho lm
ur g
60°
Pärnu
50%
0% Göteborg Visby
Fredrikshavn
Ve n
tspi
25%
ls
Kalmar
rg Aalbo
Halmstad
RØga
Liepºja
0% Klaip4da
Esbjerg Hammerodde
55°
55°
0%
Kaliningrad Gdamsk
10%
Concentration ©winouj?cie Hamburg
100%
Szczecin
90% 75% 50% 25% 10% 0%
50°
50° 10°
15°
Longitude 20° East from Greenwich 25°
Mean ice concentration FEBRUARY (1.254a)
48
30°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
15°
10°
25°
20°
L ul e å
30°
Kemi 100%
65°
65°
Oulo
90% Skellefteå
Umeà
75%
Kokkola
Vaasa Härnösand
50% Hudiksvall
Rauma 25%
Gävle
Vyborg Helsinki
75% Oslo
50%
25%
kö
75%
100%
60°
sb ter -Pe t k n Sa
Tallinn
iiu ma a
H
Norr
50%
90% 75%
Stoc kho lm
ur g
60°
pin g
10%
Arendal Saaremaa 75%
Pärnu
Göteborg Visby
Fredrikshavn
0% 0%
rg Aalbo
55°
50% tspi
ls
Kalmar Halmstad
RØga
Liepºja
Klaip4da
10%
Esbjerg
Ve n
Hammerodde
10%
55°
0% Kaliningrad Gdamsk Concentration ©winouj?cie Hamburg
100%
Szczecin
90% 75% 50% 25% 10% 0%
50°
50° 10°
15°
Longitude 20° East from Greenwich 25°
Mean ice concentration MARCH (1.254b)
49
30°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
15°
10°
25°
20°
L ul e å
30°
Kemi
100%
90%
65°
65°
Oulo Skellefteå
75% Umeà
Kokkola
Vaasa 50%
Härnösand
Hudiksvall
Rauma
25% Gävle
Vyborg
10% Helsinki 50%
Oslo
25% 10%
Norr
25%
kö
Tallinn
iiu ma a
pin g
Arendal
90%
60°
sb ter -Pe t k n Sa
H
0%
75%
50%
Stoc kho lm
ur g
60°
Saaremaa 75% Pärnu
0%
50% Göteborg Visby
Fredrikshavn
Ve n
tspi
25%
ls
Kalmar
rg Aalbo
Halmstad
RØga
Liepºja
0%
Klaip4da
Esbjerg Hammerodde
55°
55°
10% Kaliningrad Gdamsk
0% Concentration
©winouj?cie Hamburg
100%
Szczecin
90% 75% 50% 25% 10% 0%
50°
50° 10°
15°
Longitude 20° East from Greenwich 25°
Mean ice concentration APRIL (1.254c)
50
30°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
Warnemünde has ice with a concentration above 25% and low concentrations are evident near the Polish coast west of Kolobrzeg. Zalew Wilany, Kuriu Marios and Kurshkiy Zaliv show ice concentrations between 50 and 75%. The coasts of Lithuania and Latvia have typical concnetrations between 10 and 25%. By mid February ice starts to appear in the central part of the Baltic, N of Gotland and the inner parts of the archipelagos between Kalmarsund and Stockholm have concentrations above 50%. In the central part of Kalmarsund, concentration increases to between 50 and 75%. An increase of concentration to between 25 and 50% is evident on the Latvian and Lithuanian coasts. By the end of the month the ice extent is generally at its maximum and there is ice of low concentration over all the Baltic N of Gotland. At latitudes between 59°N and 60°N ice concentrations are between 25 to 50%. Between Simrishamn and Karlskrona, the ice concentration is in the range 25 to 50% close to shore, decreasing to 10% offshore. The N and S entrances to Kalmarsund have concentration levels between 25 to 50%, whereas it is between 50 to 75% in the central part of the sound. In some inner regions of the archipelagos N of Kalmarsund concentrations can be above 50%. In Gulf of Gdask 10 to 25% concentration levels may be found, whereas in Zalew Wilany they are between 25 to 50%. Kuriu Marios and Kurshkiy Zaliv may have levels above 50%. Ice concentration along the Latvian and Lithuanian coasts, close to shore, remains above 25%. 1.258 March. At the begining of the month, ice of a low concentration can still be found all over the Baltic N of Gotland and a level of 25 to 50% between the parallels of 59°N and 60°N. Conditions in Kalmarsund remain as in late February but between Simrishamn and Karlskrona, concentrations close to shore reduce to the range 10 to 25%. In Gulf of Gdask ice concentration is lower than February while in Zalew Wilany it remains 25 to 50% and above 50% in Kuriu Marios and Kurshkiy Zaliv. Ice of a low concnetration can still be found along the coasts of Germany, Poland Latvia and Lithuania; it is still possible to find concentrations above 25% very close to shore. By the middle of the month the concentration of ice surrounding Gotland is very small though there is still some ice in the waters N of Gotland. However, concentrations above 50% may still be found in central Kalmarsund. By the end of March there is still some ice around Karlskrona but the coast W of this point is normally ice-free. Concentration remains above 50% in the vicinity of Kalmar, but the concentrations are much lower at the N and S entrances to Kalmarsund. The channels of the archipelagos N of Kalmarsund may still have areas of relatively high concentration. The coasts of Latvia and Lithuania retain ice of low concentration, whereas, with the exception of the NW part of Gulf of Gdask, Polish and German coasts are essentially free of ice. 1.259 April. By the beginning of April the central Baltic, S of 59°N, is free of ice. Ice remains on the Swedish coast N of Kalmarsund and the sound itself retains concentrations between 25 to 50% in its central part. The coasts of Germany, Poland, Latvia and Lithuania are ice fre though low concnetrations remain in Zalew Wilany, Kuriu Marios and Kurshkiy Zaliv. By mid-April the concentration of ice in the central part of Kalmarsund and in the archipelagos of the Swedish
3
coast S of Norrkoping is below 25%. Between Norrkoping and Stockholm, concentrations above 25% may be found in the inner channels of the archipelagos. Kuriu Marios and Kurshkiy Zaliv still have ice of low concentration but Zalew Wilany is free of ice. At the end of the month, the only part of the area covered by this volume where ice may still be found is in the inner passages of the archipelagos of the Swedish coast between th N entrance of Kalmarsund and Stockholm.
Regional ice remarks − Gulf of RØga 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
51
1.260 General. Sea ice starts forming in the N part of Gulf of Rga and in the waters of Väinameri (which are bound on the NW by Hiiumaa, on the SW by the N coast of Saaremaa and on the E by the mainland coast of Estonia) in the first days of December. By the end of the month, ice can be found everywhere along the shores but the central part of the Gulf remains ice-free. Concentrations higher than 25% exist only in Väinameri, reaching values of above 50% near the coast of mainland Estonia. At this time ice in Väinameri can be greater than 10 cm thick. In the period January to March, the density of the ice in the region increases, the highest being found in Väinmeri and the lowest values being in the S of the Gulf. January. By the beginning of the month, ice can be found everywhere in the Gulf and also along the W coast of Hiiumaa and Saaremaa. The concentrations are very low in its central and S parts but can be as high as 50% in Väinmeri. By the end of the month, Väinamera is covered with ice of concentration above 75%, the central part of the Gulf a range of 50 to 75% and the S part 25 to 50%. At the end of January, the thickness of the ice is between 20 to 30 cm in Väinamera and between 10 to 20 cm in the Gulf of Rga. February. In mid February, Väinamera is covered with very compact ice (concentration above 90%). The S coast of Saaremaa and the S part of the coast of mainland Estonia show ice concentrations above 75%. In the central and S parts of the Gulf the values are between 50 to 75%. Ice thickness values remain as for January. March. In early March, ice concentration in Väinameri and along the S part of the coast of mainland Estonia is above 90%. In the central part of the Gulf, typical values are between 75 to 90%; in the S part these reduce to between 50 to 75%. Ice thickness is between 30 to 50 cm in the E sector of Väinameri and between 20 to 30 cm in the remainder of Väinameri and the Gulf. Ice concentrations begin to reduce throughout the area as the month progresses; by the end of March they are between 50 to 75% in the central part and below 50% in the S. Ice thickness remains as for the beginning of the month with the exception of the S part of the Gulf where it reduces to between 10 to 20 cm. April. At the beginning of the month there are no regions of very compact sea ice though ice is still compact in Väinameri and along the S part of the coast of mainland Estonia. By the end of the month the concentration in the waters of Väinameri does not exceed 50%, in the central part of the Gulf it is less than 25% and below 10% in the S. Thickness of ice is between 10 to 20 cm except in the S where it is below 10 cm. May. In early May ice concentration is below 10% everywhere except Väinameri and near the S coast of mainland Estonia, where it can be as high as 25%. By mid-May all ice has disappeared from the Gulf.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
Ice tables 1
1.261 Ice tables 1−5, give guidance on the commencement and cessation of ice within particular geographical areas and ports.
Table 1: Ice conditions on the coast of Sweden during the winters 1960/61 to 1999/2000 Number of winters
Onset of ice
Clearance of ice
Place Observed
Ice−free
Earliest
Average
Latest
Earliest
Average
Latest
Ystad
40
30
19.12
18.01
22.02
12.02
24.03
04.04
Simrishamn
40
26
29.12
28.01
14.03
12.02
14.03
13.04
Karlshamn
40
29
08.01
23.01
17.02
17.02
19.03
13.04
Karlskrona
40
18
24.12
08.01
26.02
02.02
29.03
18.04
Kalmarsund S of Kalmar
40
15
19.12
13.01
04.03
27.02
24.03
28.04
Kalmarsund N of Kalmar
40
12
14.12
03.01
22.02
04.03
24.03
03.05
Visby – Sea
40
33
07.02
17.02
27.02
09.03
24.03
03.05
Slite – Sea
40
24
03.01
02.02
17.02
02.02
19.03
13.04
Oxelösund
40
14
03.12
18.01
12.02
12.02
24.03
23.04
Norrköping
40
3
24.11
29.12
27.02
13.01
04.04
23.04
Landsort – Sea
40
19
08.01
07.02
27.02
07.02
14.03
28.04
Landsort – Södertälje
40
4
14.12
03.01
27.02
08.01
13.04
08.05
Södert – Stockholm
40
0
28.11
24.12
27.12
02.02
23.04
08.05
Sandhamn – Sea
40
21
13.01
07.02
27.02
07.02
24.03
28.04
Sandhamn – Kanholm
40
12
03.01
28.01
19.03
17.02
04.04
28.04
Kanholm – Stockholm
40
5
14.12
08.01
09.03
04.03
08.04
03.05
Söderarm – Sea
40
15
03.01
17.02
19.03
17.02
04.04
23.05
Söderarm – Trälhavet
40
5
29.11
08.01
09.03
24.12
08.04
03.05
52
Home
Contents
Index
TABLE 2: Ice conditions on the East Coast of Sweden between Kalmarsund and the Åland Sea during the winters 1960/61 to 1989/90 Table 2 – Part 1 Number of winters Harbour or Fairway
Observed
First ice observed
Ice−free
Earliest Date
Average Date (*)
Last ice observed Latest Date
Number of days with ice
Earliest Date
Average Date (*)
Latest Date
minimum
Average
maximum
20
9
18.12
27.01
−
−
10.03
26.03
0
10
48
Ölands Södra Udde, Sea East
30
15
28.12
16.02
−
−
03.03
26.03
0
5
37
Utgrunden South
19
13
27.12
08.01
−
−
22.03
20.04
0
17
98
Utgrunden − Mörbylånga
20
6
22.12
13.01
−
−
22.03
26.04
0
34
109
Mörbylånga – Kalmar
30
6
17.12
07.01
−
−
26.03
03.05
0
52
132
Kalmar − Skäggenäs
20
5
08.12
07.01
−
−
25.03
26.04
0
48
110
Skäggenäs – Dämman
20
5
18.12
14.01
−
−
26.03
26.04
0
42
109
Dämman – Blå Jungfrun
30
10
18.12
24.01
−
−
26.03
27.04
0
33
104
Blå Jungfrun, North
20
9
18.12
24.01
−
−
22.03
27.04
0
20
87
Oskarshamn – Furön
30
9
18.12
28.01
−
−
22.03
25.04
0
34
103
Ölands Norra Udde, North
20
8
28.12
31.01
−
−
17.03
22.04
0
16
63
Ölands Norra Udde, West
20
8
28.12
31.01
−
−
17.03
22.04
0
18
63
Västervik – Marsholmen, Fairway
30
6
09.12
03.01
−
−
04.04
26.04
0
62
127
Marsholmen – Idö
19
10
18.12
08.01
−
−
26.03
24.04
0
29
114
Idö, Sea
30
12
02.01
05.02
−
−
19.03
03.05
0
22
98
Slite, Fairway
19
10
31.12
21.01
−
−
09.03
20.04
0
14
65
Magö, Sea
30
17
10.01
05.02
−
−
12.03
10.04
0
11
70
Hoburg, Sea
30
17
07.01
08.02
−
−
06.03
28.03
0
9
64
Visby, Sea
29
23
07.02
17.02
−
−
30.03
03.05
0
6
61
Gotska Sandön, Sea
29
18
07.02
20.02
−
−
23.03
01.05
0
10
63
Norrköping – Algersgrund
18
0
29.11
24.12
27.02
08.12
01.04
25.04
9
75
128
Algersgrund – Vinterklasen
18
0
02.12
06.01
27.02
08.12
01.04
25.04
4
68
128
CHAPTER 1
53
Ölands Södra Udde, Sea West
Home
Contents
Index
Table 2 – Part 2 Number of winters Harbour or Fairway
First ice observed
Observed
Ice−free
Earliest Date
Average Date (*)
Vinterklasen – Oxelösund
18
5
09.12
16.01
Vinterklasen – Hävringe
19
8
03.01
Hävr–Kränkan–Gustav Dalen
30
11
Södertälje – Fifång
15
Fifång – Landsort
15
Landsort, Sea
Last ice observed Latest Date
Number of days with ice
Earliest Date
Average Date (*)
Latest Date
minimum
Average
maximum
−
−
25.03
23.04
0
34
104
17.01
−
−
27.03
23.04
0
30
96
03.01
26.01
−
−
24.03
28.04
0
28
96
1
14.12
05.01
−
−
14.04
02.05
0
82
133
5
31.12
28.01
−
−
01.04
22.04
0
40
106
30
9
04.01
06.02
−
−
17.03
28.04
0
24
100
18
0
02.11
09.12
14.01
25.02
23.04
09.05
77
128
165
30
0
19.11
15.12
08.02
25.02
24.04
10.05
51
123
168
Grönsö – Södertälje
30
1
28.11
06.01
−
−
24.04
10.05
0
98
143
05.02
24.04
10.05
32
110
154
−
05.04
30.04
0
64
133
17.12
09.04
03.05
3
76
139
Södertälje – Stockholm
30
0
26.11
25.12
24.02
Stockholm − Trälhavet − Klövholmen
20
2
09.12
04.01
−
Trälhavet – Furusund
27
0
28.11
02.01
04.03
Klövholmen – Yxhammarskubb
19
5
18.12
25.01
−
−
03.04
27.04
0
45
108
Yxhammarskubb – Sandhamn
28
6
31.12
27.01
−
−
05.04
12.05
0
46
108
Sandhamn – Revengrundet
28
8
31.12
29.01
−
−
25.03
28.04
0
30
100
Revengrundet, Sea
20
9
31.12
31.01
−
−
25.03
22.04
0
21
96
Svenska Högarna, Sea
30
10
08.01
06.02
−
−
04.04
03.05
0
28
107
Söderarm, Sea
30
6
01.01
28.01
−
−
01.04
21.05
0
41
111
Simpnäsklubb, Sea
29
6
14.12
27.01
−
−
06.04
27.05
0
38
130
(*) Details only valid for winters with ice.
CHAPTER 1
54
Köping – Kvicksund Kvicksund –Västeräs – Grönsö
Home
Contents
Index
TABLE 3: Ice and navigational conditions on the Coast of Germany during the winters 1960/61 to 1989/90 Navigational conditions in severe or extremely severe winters (1960/61−1989/90) (**)
Ice Conditions (1960/61−1989/90) Number of winters
First ice observed
Harbour Or Fairway
Observed
Ice−free
Earliest Date
Average Date (*)
Stralsund−Palmer Ort
30
6
19.11
Palmer Ort – Freesendorfer Haken
30
6
Ruden
30
Ruden, Sea
Average number of Days with ice
Last ice observed
Mild or moderate winters <7/10 7/10−1
Average number of days with navigation restricted for
Severe or very severe winters <7/10 7/10−1
Ships with strong engines
Interruption of Navigation
82
9 (4)
47 (12)
8
9
76
6 (3)
59 (10)
8
10
14
60
7 (2)
44 (7)
7
7
5
12
52
6 (1)
34 (3)
7
30.03
0
0
20
16
7
8
0
07.03
03.04
2
1
24
31
5
3
0
20.01
11.03
02.04
1
1
16
30
5
19
0
08.01
01.03
09.04
8
1
34
33
17
21
1
Latest Date
01.01
13.03
14.04
5
21
6
10.12
07.01
13.03
12.04
6
16
6
11.12
06.01
11.03
06.04
7
30
6
06.12
03.01
07.03
06.04
Arkona, Sea
30
19
08.01
10.01
09.03
Sassnitz, Harbour
30
13
24.12
10.01
Sassnitz, Sea
30
15
24.12
Heringsdorf / Koserow, Sea
30
9
17.12
(*) Details only valid for winters with ice. (**) Navigational conditions in normal winters are given in brackets.
CHAPTER 1
55
Ships with weak engines
Average Date (*)
Home
Contents
Index
TABLE 4: Ice and navigational conditions on the Coast of Poland during the winters 1960/61 to 1989/90 Navigation conditions Number of days
Ice Conditions (1960/61−1989/90) Harbour or
Number of winters
Fairway
Obs. Ice−free
First ice observed
Number of days with ice
Last ice observed
Length of the ice season
Without restrictions to navigation
With restrictions to navigation
With closure of navigation
Earliest Date
Average Date (*)
Average Date (*)
Latest Date
Max.
Av.
Min.
Max.
Av.
Min.
Av.
Max.
Av.
Max.
Av.
Max.
27.03
1
40
100
1
60
106
7
21
32
94
0
0
Szczecin, Harbour
30
4
23.11
28.12
28.02
Zalew Szczeciñski
30
4
23.11
31.12
16.03
16.04
14
69
122
14
78
128
11
41
61
127
0
4
Œwinoujœcie,Harbour
30
4
26.11
31.12
11.03
08.04
10
49
93
11
72
120
21
51
29
76
0
0
Œwinoujœcie, Sea
30
7
16.12
10.01
27.02
05.04
1
30
105
1
51
105
14
57
16
57
0
5
30
6
09.12
06.01
21.02
18.03
2
23
81
2
47
94
13
35
9
52
0
0
Kolobrzeg, Sea
30
11
21.12
21.01
28.02
05.04
1
21
95
1
41
102
8
33
13
51
1
19
Uœtka, Harbour
30
7
05.12
06.01
20.02
25.03
1
23
82
1
45
106
14
49
9
72
0
5
Uœtka, Sea
30
16
27.12
27.01
27.02
31.03
1
25
90
1
32
90
11
43
11
50
3
38
Hel, West
30
18
14.01
07.02
11.03
31.03
2
16
52
2
34
77
6
23
11
43
0
0
Hel, South
30
18
14.01
18.02
09.03
31.03
1
11
49
1
20
77
3
14
8
38
0
0
Hel, East
30
23
13.01
10.02
09.03
31.03
1
14
34
1
28
78
3
9
11
31
0
0
Hel, North
30
24
15.01
05.02
03.03
31.03
1
12
24
1
27
70
4
7
8
18
0
0
Gdynya, Harbour
30
10
26.12
18.01
07.03
08.04
3
29
71
3
47
96
15
43
15
50
0
0
Gdynya, Sea
30
9
22.12
13.01
06.03
06.04
1
25
80
1
48
107
16
60
9
43
0
1
Gdañsk, Harbour
30
12
20.12
16.01
04.03
27.03
2
24
72
2
48
90
13
30
12
46
0
0
Gdañsk, Sea
30
12
28.12
26.01
03.03
09.04
1
19
76
1
36
86
10
32
9
44
0
0
(*) Details only valid for winters with ice.
CHAPTER 1
56
Kolobrzeg, Harbour
Home
Contents
Index
TABLE 5: Ice and navigational conditions on the Coasts of Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania during the winters 1960/61 to 1989/90 Part 1 (Estonia) Number of winters Harbour or Fairway
First ice observed Average Date (*)
Last ice observed
Observed
Ice−free
Earliest Date
Latest Date
Earliest Date
Narvskij Zaliv – Gogland
30
0
17.12
06.01
03.02
24.02
01.05
Gogland – Loksa
30
2
26.12
16.01
−
−
27.04
Number of days with ice
Average Date (*)
Latest Date 19.05
minimum
average
maximum
6
98
136
15.05
0
80
127
Lokska – Tallinn
30
3
29.12
25.01
−
−
20.04
07.05
0
66
121
Tallin – O. Vormsi
30
5
02.01
28.01
−
−
15.04
04.05
0
53
108
O. Vormsi – Ristna
30
7
04.01
31.01
−
−
10.04
04.05
0
34
95
Irbenstraâe – Pärnu Laht
30
3
11.11
11.01
−
−
27.04
09.05
0
82
137
Pärnu, Bay and Harbour
30
0
12.11
09.12
03.02
05.03
24.04
10.05
58
129
171
Part 2 (Latvia) First ice observed
57
Average Date (*)
Last ice observed
Observed
Ice−free
Earliest Date
Latest Date
Earliest Average Date Date (*)
Irbenstraâe
30
4
23.12
18.01
−
−
Irbenstraâe – Mersrags
30
5
13.12
22.01
−
Mersrags – Entrance Riga
30
5
18.12
16.01
Riga, Harbour
30
2
16.11
25.12
Ventspils, Harbour
30
5
16.11
04.01
−
Number of days with ice Latest Date
minimum
average
maximum
17.04
11.05
0
61
120
−
18.04
11.05
0
61
120
−
−
12.04
09.05
0
56
123
−
−
02.04
07.05
0
64
118
−
26.03
14.04
0
45
109
Part 3 (Lithuania) Number of winters Harbour or Fairway
First ice observed Earliest Date
Last ice observed
Average Date (*)
Latest Date
Earliest Date
Number of days with ice
Average Date (*)
Latest Date
minimum
average
maximum
Observed
Ice−free
Liepaja – Klaipeda
29
8
20.11
19.01
06.03
20.02
19.03
15.04
0
30
87
Klaipeda, Harbour
30
0
02.11
10.12
16.02
16.02
27.03
19.04
3
56
103
Klaipeda, See SW
30
0
02.11
10.12
19.02
16.12
26.03
19.04
1
53
101
(*) Details only valid for winters with ice.
CHAPTER 1
Number of winters Harbour or Fairway
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
for several weeks. At the same time E-moving mobile depressions are prevented from approaching until the ridge collapses.
CLIMATE AND WEATHER General information 1
1.262 The following information on climate and weather should be read in conjunction with the information contained in The Mariner’s Handbook which explains in more detail many aspects of meteorology and climatology of importance to the mariner. Weather reports, ice reports and forecasts, which cover the area, are regularly broadcast in a number of different languages. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(1).
Depressions Atlantic depressions 1
General conditions 1
2
3
1.263 The region covered by this volume alternates between a relatively mild maritime climate associated with a W to SW airflow and the continental extremes of Russia with very cold winters and very warm or hot summers. Spells of each type may persist for long periods in all seasons but in the SW part of the Baltic the maritime influence is greatest and in the E and N of the area the continental effects are more dominant. Winds are very variable with strong winds being most frequent in autumn and winter. Rainfall is not high, with the driest period usually occurring in February and March and the wettest in July and August. Snow is common in winter with much of the inland areas in the N and E covered with snow from December to March. The winter months are generally more cloudy with an average of 6 oktas compared with 4 oktas in summer. Fog is most common in winter and early spring and least common in summer. Visibility is often good and, on relatively frequent occasions, exceptional in the N of the area in summer.
2
Fronts Warm and cold fronts 1
Average distribution
Average distribution 1.264 In December and January the average pressure is around 1010 hPa in the N of the region and about 1016 hPa in the SE, but usually increases by about 3 to 5 hPa between February and May in the N. By July the average pressure is generally around 1012 hPa in the N and with little seasonal change in the SE.
1
1
1.265 It is stressed that the actual pressure pattern can be significantly different from the mean for long periods, due to the mobile depressions that affect the area with central pressures as low as 980 hPa. On occasions, but especially in winter and spring, an intense and persistent high pressure cell with a central pressure of up to 1050 hPa may become established over the region. In general daily pressure changes are greater in winter than summer.
2
Anticyclones The Asiatic anticyclone 1
1.269 Wind roses showing the frequency of winds of various directions and speeds for February, May, August and November are in given in Diagrams 1.269.1 to 1.269.4.
Variability
Variability 1
1.268 Warm and cold fronts are frequently occluded by the time they reach the area but are responsible for much of the bad weather in the region. See The Mariner’s Handbook for a full description of warm and cold fronts and occlusions. E-moving occlusions generally become slow moving and weaken over central Scandinavia, whilst those from the S or SW frequently remain more active.
Winds
Pressure
1
1.267 The area lies to the S of the main low pressure belt of the N hemisphere. Depressions that form over the W North Atlantic frequently move NE towards Iceland with secondary depressions forming to their rear. These secondary depressions, often in a family of three to five, frequently move E with increasingly S tracks to affect the region covered by this volume. Most depressions crossing the area from the W move away between E and NE, although the tracks of some depressions can be very erratic. In summer, there is generally an increase in the frequency of E-moving mobile depressions crossing the area, although the number of intense depressions (central pressure less than 980 hPa) is very low compared with the average for autumn and winter. In addition, shallow thundery lows occasionally form over Poland and move N to affect the area covered by this volume.
1.266 The Asiatic anticyclone develops in winter over Siberia and it is not uncommon for a ridge of high pressure to extend W to NW Europe with, on occasions, a separate high pressure cell forming over N Scandinavia. When this occurs, cold dry E to NE winds can affect the area and last
1.270 Due to the mobile depressions that affect the area, and the coastal topography, there are often marked variations in both the speed and direction of the wind during any set period of time. However, if a high pressure cell become established over N Scandinavia, particularly in winter and spring, then E to NE winds over the S of the area may persist for several weeks. The winds in all seasons can be very variable, particularly in the N of the area. In the S of the area, there is a marginally higher frequency of SW winds in the SW of the area and WSW winds in the SE in all seasons, and a high frequency of NE winds in May. In E coastal areas in winter, SE winds are not uncommon. Winds of force 5 and above are recorded on around 49% of occasions in the autumn, 42% in winter, 15% in late spring and 24% in summer.
Land and sea breezes 1
58
1.271 Onshore sea breezes frequently develop around midday during fine summer spells, but these tend to parallel the coast during the course of the afternoon near the Swedish
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
12°
61°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
18°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
EXPLANATION.The frequency of wind from any direction is given according to the scale: 0% 10 20 30 40 50%
25°
61°
This scale is further subdivided to indicate the frequency of winds of different Beaufort force according to the legend:
2 60°
60°
Wind direction is towards the circle centre. The figure within the circle gives the percentage of calms.
59°
59°
1
58°
58°
57°
57°
2
56°
56°
1 55°
55°
2
54°
54°
53°
53°
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
Wind distribution FEBRUARY (1.269.1)
59
22°
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
12°
61°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
18°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
EXPLANATION.The frequency of wind from any direction is given according to the scale: 0% 10 20 30 40 50%
25°
61°
This scale is further subdivided to indicate the frequency of winds of different Beaufort force according to the legend:
2 60°
60°
Wind direction is towards the circle centre. The figure within the circle gives the percentage of calms.
59°
59°
7
58°
58°
57°
57°
8
56°
56°
6 55°
55°
7
54°
54°
53°
53°
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
Wind distribution MAY (1.269.2)
60
22°
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
12°
61°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
18°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
EXPLANATION.The frequency of wind from any direction is given according to the scale: 0% 10 20 30 40 50%
25°
61°
This scale is further subdivided to indicate the frequency of winds of different Beaufort force according to the legend:
2 60°
60°
Wind direction is towards the circle centre. The figure within the circle gives the percentage of calms.
59°
59°
4
58°
58°
57°
57°
4
56°
56°
3 55°
55°
3
54°
54°
53°
53°
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
Wind distribution AUGUST (1.269.3)
61
22°
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
12°
61°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
18°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
EXPLANATION.The frequency of wind from any direction is given according to the scale: 0% 10 20 30 40 50%
25°
61°
This scale is further subdivided to indicate the frequency of winds of different Beaufort force according to the legend:
2 60°
60°
Wind direction is towards the circle centre. The figure within the circle gives the percentage of calms.
59°
59°
1
58°
58°
57°
57°
1
56°
56°
1 55°
55°
1
54°
54°
53°
53°
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
Wind distribution NOVEMBER (1.269.4)
62
22°
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
coast. Offshore land breezes are generally much weaker and relatively infrequent.
increasing less frequent although moderate snowfalls have been recorded in early May.
Gales 1
Fog and visibility
1.272 The frequency of winds, in autumn and winter, of force 7 and above is around 12 to 14% of occasions, and between 1 and 3% in summer. Strong NE winds can persist for relatively long periods in mid-winter and spring, and give rise to rough seas in the vicinity of Bornholm. For the most part, gales blow most frequently from the directions the winds are most frequent. Strong winds from between W and S being the most frequent in the SW of the area.
1
2
Cloud 1
1.273 The average cloud cover is around 6 oktas in winter and about 4 oktas in summer, but is slightly higher in coastal waters in the E. However, on any particular day the actual cloud cover may be very different from the mean. Clear skies most frequently occur to the rear of a cold front or occlusion that crosses the area from the NW, or when an intense anticyclone dominates the area.
3
Precipitation 1
1.274 The climatic tables (1.284) give the average amounts of precipitation for each month at several coastal stations across the region and the mean number of days each month when significant precipitation was recorded. However, the quantity and duration can vary significantly from one day to another and from one year to another.
Air temperature General information 1
Rain 1
1.275 The annual amount of rain, and its equivalent in melted snow, is moderate with most areas averaging between 500 and 750 mm. There is no distinct wet and dry season although the wettest months are usually July and August and the driest February and March, with around 61% of the annual precipitation being recorded during the second half of the year. Rainfall volumes are generally higher in the SE of the area, with a yearly average of around 800 mm at Kaliningrad.
1
1.276 Thunderstorms, sometimes accompanied by hail, may occur in any season but are most common during the period May to September. The average number of thunderstorms each year ranges from around nien in central areas to about 21 near Gdask and Kaliningrad. Hail occurs on about 4 days per year, with the most destructive hail storms in the SE of the area.
1.280 The mean air temperature over the open sea in July is between 16° and 17°C across the whole of the area. Mean daily maximum temperatures along coasts are about 22°C but slightly less at offshore islands, with mean daily minimum temperatures of around 13° to 14°C. On some occasions, mainly in coastal areas in the S, temperatures may exceed 30°C.
Winter 1
Snow 1
1.279 In general the coldest time of the year is January and February and the warmest July and August. Mean air temperatures in winter are generally about 4° to 5°C higher at coastal stations in the SW of the area than in the NE but in summer the differences are small. However, due to the mobile depressions and anticyclones that affect the area, seasonal and day to day temperatures can be very variable.
Summer
Thunderstorms 1
1.278 In winter, fog and poor visibility are more frequent in coastal waters than over the open sea due to the lower coastal sea temperatures and the ice edge. In early winter and late spring, sea fog tends to form near the ice edge with mild S to SW winds and may persist until there is a change of airstream. However, in summer, most coastal fogs usually clear during the morning with rising temperatures. See The Mariner’s Handbook for details on sea, and other types of fog. Fog frequency, over the open sea, reaches a maximum during the period from late April to early June due to the slowly increasing sea temperature lagging behind the normally more rapidly rising air temperature. In March and April, the percentage frequency of visibilities of less than 1 mile is around 25% in the NE of the area, the S tip of Gotland, near the coast of SE Sweden and around 10% elsewhere. In July and August, the figures are around 10% and 2% respectively. Falling or blowing snow is a common cause of poor visibility from December to April, with visibilities falling to around 100 m or less in the heavier snowfalls. Good visibility is, however, relatively common and is more frequent in summer than winter, particularly in the N of the area.
1.277 In winter snow and rain occur in equal proportions over the SW and central parts of the area, with the first snowfalls in October in the N and E, and about a month later in the S and W. At Stockholm, Rga and in the NE of the area, persistent snow cover usually lasts from around mid-December to late March and the coastline is often obscured when the sea is frozen. In the SW, the snow cover in coastal inland areas is much less persistent due to the relatively frequent periods when milder SW maritime air affects the area. From mid-April snow becomes
1.281 The NE of the area is very cold in winter with mean temperatures over the sea of about –2°C in the NE, and around 2°C in the SW. Mean daily maximum temperatures along coasts show a similar range, and with mean daily minimum temperatures of about –4°C in the NE and around –2°C in the SW. However, coastal minimum temperatures of –15°C are not uncommon in the N and E of the area.
Humidity General information 1
63
1.282 Humidity is closely related to temperature and generally decreases as the air temperature increases. During the early
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
morning, around dawn, the humidity normally reaches a maximum and then slowly decreases to a minimum during the early part of the afternoon.
1
2
1
Sea and coastal areas
2
1.283 The mean value of the relative humidity over the open sea shows little variation between winter and summer with an average value of around 83% in the N of the area and 81% in central and S areas. In coastal areas there are often large fluctuations in humidity depending on the exposure of the locality to the prevailing wind and its distance from the open sea. The humidity normally falls to a minium during periods of settled weather in May. Saturation is reached when fog is present, and is most noticeable when mild moist air from the Atlantic is cooled by the cold Baltic sea in spring and early summer. A marked decrease in humidity is likely when a moist SW airflow is replaced by a dry airstream from the continent.
3
Climatic tables
4
1.284 The climatic tables which follow give data for several coastal stations (Diagram 1.284) which regularly undertake
64
weather observations. Some of these stations have been re-sited and, in consequence, the position given is the latest available. It is emphasised that these data are average conditions which refer to the specific location of the observing station, and therefore may not be representative of the conditions to be expected over the open sea or in the approaches to ports in their vicinity. The following comments briefly list some of the differences to be expected between conditions over the open sea and at reporting stations. See The Mariner’s Handbook for details. Wind speeds tend to be higher at sea with more frequent gales than on land, although funnelling in narrow inlets can result in an increase in wind strength. Precipitation along mountainous, wind facing coasts can be considerable higher than at sea to windward. Similarly, precipitation in the lee of high ground is generally less. Air temperature over the sea is less variable than over the land and in the lee of high ground. Topography has a marked effect on local conditions.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 1
12°
13°
14°
15°
16°
18°
17°
19°
20°
21°
22°
23°
24°
25°
61°
61°
60°
60°
SVENSKA HÖGARNA STOCKHOLM / BROMMA
1.290
1.289
59°
59° RISTNA
1.299 1.298 PÄRNU
GOTSKA SANDÖN
1.288
58°
58°
57°
R—GA HOBURG
57°
1.297
1.287 LIEP†JA
1.296
56°
56°
UNGSKÄR
1.286 KLAIPWDA
1.295 1.285 HAMMERODDE
55°
55° KALININGRAD
1.294 GDAMSK
1.293
54°
54°
1.291 ©WINOUJ©CIE
SZCZECIN
1.292
53° 12°
53° 13°
14°
15°
16°
17°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
Location of climatic stations (1.284)
65
22°
23°
24°
25°
Home
Contents
Index
1.285 HAMMER ODDE (55° 18′ N, 14° 47′ E) Height above MSL − 11 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 years observations, 1984 to 2004
1300
°C
%
%
Oktas
Thunder
0700
°C
1300
0
7
−5
86
85
6
6
_
_
9
8
9
8 10 20 30
7
|
7
6
9
9
9 21 33
6
1
18
18
5
3
0
3
0
8
−5
86
84
6
6
_
_
9
7
8
9
9 21 31
5
1
8
7 10
9
5 25 30
6
|
18
18
4
4
|
March
1015
4
1
11
−3
87
82
6
5
_
_
6
5 17 15
6 21 24
6
1
5
5 19 13
3 21 29
5
1
16
16
3
5
0
April
1014
8
3
17
−1
86
79
5
5
_
_
8
6 20 16
6 16 21
4
2
5
7 24 16
4 17 23
5
1
13
14
1
6
|
May
1016
13
7
21
4
86
78
4
4
_
_
6
7 21 17
4 16 24
4
1
3
5 25 18
1 18 27
3
1
12
13
|
4
1
June
1014
17
12
24
8
86
77
4
4
_
_
6
4 10 14
3 16 39
8
1
3
3 14 11
2 17 47
2
|
12
14
1
2
1
July
1014
19
15
26
11
86
77
4
4
_
_
6
4
9 12
5 13 40 10
1
3
4 14
9
2 15 49
3
1
13
14
1
1
2
August
1014
20
15
26
11
85
76
4
4
_
_
7
5 12 12
5 13 35 12
1
4
4 19
7
2 15 45
4
|
13
14
1
1
2
September
1014
16
12
20
9
86
78
5
5
_
_
9
6 14 12
6 13 28 10
1
8
5 20
6
3 13 37
6
1
15
16
2
1
1
October
1014
12
9
17
4
86
80
5
5
_
_
7
5
9 16 11 17 27
9
1
5
4 11 13
6 21 32
8
|
16
16
3
2
|
November
1014
7
5
12
0
86
84
6
6
_
_
7
6 13 14 12 17 21
8
|
8
6 14 11 11 18 25
December
1014
5
2
9
−3
86
85
6
6
_
_
10
6
7
|
11
5
Means
1014
11
7
27*
−6§
86
80
5
5
_
_
7
6 13 13
7 17 29
7
1
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Extreme values
_
_
_
31† −12‡
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
21
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
mm
Knots
9
9 11 20 29
_
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
6
1
16
16
3
1
0
9
8 21 29
8
1
17
17
5
2
0
6
5 16 11
4 18 34
5
1
15
16
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_ 29
32
7
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
9
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_ _
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
66
No. of years observations
1300
3
1015
0700
1015
February
1300
January
hPa
0700
Fog
Mean lowest in each month
°C
0700
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean highest in each month
°C
Mean daily min.
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 0.3 mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 06193
Home
Contents
Index
1.286 UNGSKÄR (56° 02′ N, 15° 48′ E) Height above MSL − 2 m Climatic Table compiled from 14 years observations, 1983 to 1996
1300
%
%
Thunder
0700
°C
1
13
8
5 14 13 38
5
1
19
19
5
3
|
7
1
12 10 15
3 13 13 30
3
1
16
17
2
4
0
March
1013
3
0
7
−5
87
82
6
6
_
_
15
8 14
5 14 13 26
4
1
6 10 19
5 14 16 28
1
2
15
17
2
7
0
April
1013
7
3
12
−2
86
78
5
5
_
_
16 19 14
4 11
6 24
4
2
6 18 18
6 14 15 20
1
1
14
15
1
6
|
May
1016
12
7
17
3
83
76
3
4
_
_
12 23 15
4
7
7 26
5
2
3 18 28
4 13 19 16
|
|
13
15
|
4
1
June
1013
16
12
21
7
83
76
4
4
_
_
11 13 12
1
9 10 35
5
4
2
8 16
6 16 24 25
|
1
11
14
|
3
1
July
1014
19
14
23
11
84
77
4
4
_
_
10
8 12
2
9
5 43
7
4
1
7 13
5 14 15 43
1
1
11
14
|
3
2
August
1013
18
14
22
8
87
76
4
4
_
_
13
8 10
3 11
7 41
5
4
2
7 12
5 12 21 40
1
0
11
13
|
3
2
September
1012
15
11
19
5
88
78
5
5
_
_
18
8 11
4 11
7 33
7
2
5
7 15
4 15 15 36
3
1
14
15
1
3
1
October
1015
11
8
14
1
87
79
5
5
_
_
12
5
9
6 18
9 32
7
2
5
6 12
5 18 14 35
4
1
15
16
2
5
|
November
1014
6
3
10
−3
84
80
6
6
_
_
23
4
8
6 19
8 23
8
2
14
9
9
4 15 11 27
9
2
16
16
2
3
0
December
1013
4
1
8
−6
85
82
6
6
_
_
15
4
8
4 17 12 30
7
2
13
6
9
3 14 14 32
7
2
16
17
3
3
0
Means
1014
10
6
85
79
5
5
_
_
15
9 11
4 13
9 31
6
2
7
9 14
5 14 16 31
3
1
14
16
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_ 18
47
7
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
28† −19‡
14
* §
14
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
14
14
N
0700
Knots
_
14
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
3
14
14
| Rare { All observations
_ _
_
_
14
14
14
CHAPTER 1
67
No. of years observations
23* −11§
mm
1300
9
4 13 14 25
Calm
4 14 14 33
NW
8
6 12
W
4
19
SW
14
_
S
_
_
SE
_
6
E
6
6
NE
6
80
Calm
83
84
NW
85
−8
W
−7
5
SW
6
−1
S
0
2
E
2
1016
SE
1012
February
Oktas
NE
January
hPa
N
Fog
Mean lowest in each month
°C
1300 Gale
Mean highest in each month
°C
0700
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
No. of days with 0.1mm or more
Mean daily min.
°C
1300
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
0700
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 02666
Home
Contents
Index
1.287 HOBURG (56° 55′ N, 18° 09′ E) Height above MSL − 39 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 years observations, 1984 to 2004
Mean lowest in each month
0700
1300
°C
°C
%
%
Thunder
Mean highest in each month
°C
1300
0
5
−7
81
79
6
6
_
_
14
6
6
8 12 24 20 11
1
12
5
6
7 14 25 19 11
1
15
15
1
4
0
1
−1
5
−7
81
76
6
6
_
_
16
8
7
5 11 23 21 10
0
14
7
8
4 15 24 18 10
|
14
14
1
4
|
March
1014
3
0
7
−5
83
72
5
5
_
_
15
8 11
9 12 20 15
9
1
10
4 13 12 14 22 14 10
1
12
13
|
6
0
April
1014
8
2
15
−2
80
65
5
5
_
_
15 15 14
9 10 13 11 11
1
10 12 14 11 15 18
7 13
|
10
12
|
6
|
May
1016
13
6
20
2
74
62
4
4
_
_
13 14 18
9
7 12 17 10
1
9 11 14 12 14 22
8 11
0
10
11
0
4
1
June
1013
17
11
22
6
78
66
4
4
_
_
12
9 11
7 11 17 19 14
1
9
4 10
9 21 24 12 11
0
9
11
0
5
1
July
1013
20
14
24
10
77
64
4
4
_
_
12
7 10
8 11 13 25 14
1
8
4
9 15 30 15 12
|
9
11
0
4
1
August
1014
20
15
24
10
79
63
4
4
_
_
13
9 11
8
9 15 24 10
1
7
5 10 10 16 24 16 12
|
9
11
|
2
2
September
1013
16
11
19
7
82
67
5
5
_
_
16 10 10
9
9 13 21 10
2
10
6 12 12 10 20 17 14
|
11
13
|
1
1
October
1014
10
7
14
2
83
74
5
5
_
_
12
6
9 13 12 15 21 10
1
11
3 10 11 15 23 15 12
|
13
13
|
4
|
November
1014
6
3
9
−1
83
79
6
6
_
_
16
8
8 11 15 18 13 11
|
13
6
8 10 17 18 15 10
1
13
13
1
3
0
December
1013
3
1
7
−5
82
79
6
6
_
_
15
8
6
7 18 17 17 11
1
14
6
8
6 15 22 16 11
1
14
14
1
3
|
Means
1014
10
4
26*
−9§
80
70
5
5
_
_
14
9 10
9 11 16 19 11
1
11
6 10 10 15 23 14 11
|
12
13
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
4
46
7
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
21
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
mm
Knots
_
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
8
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
68
No. of years observations
30† −16‡
1300
2
1013
Oktas
0700
1013
February
1300
January
hPa
0700
Fog
Mean daily min.
°C
0700
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 0.1mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 02680
Home
Contents
Index
1.288 GOTSKA SANDÖN (58° 24′ N, 19° 12′ E) Height above MSL − 12 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 years observations, 1984 to 2004
Mean lowest in each month
0700
1300
°C
°C
%
%
Oktas
Thunder
Mean highest in each month
°C
1300
−1
6
−8
81
78
6
6
_
_
16
5
8
4 20 13 28
7
|
14
4
9
4 19 11 31
7
|
15
15
1
1
|
1
−2
5
−9
81
75
6
6
_
_
15
6 11
4 18 13 25
7
1
16
5 12
3 20 14 25
5
0
14
14
1
2
0
March
1013
3
−1
8
−8
83
72
5
5
_
_
16
7 11
5 25 12 18
5
1
14
6 11
4 26 13 22
3
|
12
12
|
4
0
April
1014
7
1
15
−4
81
69
4
4
_
_
18
9 17
6 21 11 13
5
1
19
9 16
6 21 12 12
4
1
10
11
|
5
0
May
1016
12
5
20
−1
77
64
4
3
_
_
20
8 16
4 21
9 16
4
1
22 11 14
3 21 12 15
2
1
10
10
|
4
|
June
1012
16
10
22
4
79
68
4
4
_
_
20
5 11
3 23 11 21
4
1
21
7 11
3 22 13 21
3
|
9
10
|
4
1
July
1012
20
14
25
8
79
67
4
4
_
_
18
3
3 23 11 24
8
|
19
5
9
2 20 16 26
4
|
9
11
|
2
1
August
1013
20
14
25
8
80
66
5
4
_
_
15
6 13
4 20
9 27
5
2
15
7 12
3 17 15 25
5
|
10
11
|
1
2
September
1013
15
10
19
2
82
68
5
5
_
_
19
7 13
6 17
8 23
7
1
17
8 11
4 15 13 25
6
|
12
12
|
1
1
October
1013
10
7
14
0
82
75
6
6
_
_
15
3 10
6 26 11 22
6
|
14
2 10
5 26 12 23
6
|
13
13
|
3
|
November
1012
6
3
9
−3
82
79
6
6
_
_
16
4 12
6 24
9 21
7
1
16
3 12
6 26 11 22
5
|
13
13
1
2
|
December
1012
3
0
7
−7
81
79
6
6
_
_
15
4 11
4 21 13 23
8
|
16
4 10
4 21 11 27
8
|
14
14
1
1
|
Means
1013
10
5
81
72
5
5
_
_
17
5 12
4 22 11 22
6
1
17
6 11
4 21 13 23
5
|
12
12
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
5
30
5
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
31† −18‡
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
21
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
mm
Knots
9
_
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
69
No. of years observations
26* −10§
1300
2
1012
0700
1012
February
1300
January
hPa
0700
Fog
Mean daily min.
°C
0700
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 0.1mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 02584
Home
Contents
Index
1.289 STOCKHOLM/BROMMA (59° 22′ N, 17° 54′ E) Height above MSL − 14 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2004
Mean lowest in each month
0700
1300
°C
°C
%
%
Oktas
Thunder
Mean highest in each month
°C
1300
−4
6
−16
84
82
5
6
39
10
10
5
3
9 13 17 26 12
6
10
5
4
7 15 17 28 13
2
7
8
|
1
0
1
−5
8
−15
83
75
5
5
27
7
11
5
4
6 15 16 25 13
7
13
6
5
6 14 14 31
9
2
7
8
0
1
|
6
7 11 19 12 24 10
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
1300
0
1011
0700
1011
February
1300
January
hPa
0700
Fog
Mean daily min.
°C
0700
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 0.1mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 02464
mm
Knots
1013
4
−2
11
−11
84
67
6
6
26
7
11
5 13 15 15 16 10
9
13
5
1
6
9
0
2
0
April
1014
10
1
19
−6
80
56
5
5
30
7
18 12
8 11 11 10 14
9
7
15
9 15 12 12
9 21
6
1
6
9
0
2
|
May
1015
16
5
25
0
71
50
4
5
30
7
20 13
7 10 12
7
4
13
7 15 11 13 11 21
9
1
6
9
0
2
1
June
1011
20
10
26
4
73
56
5
5
45
7
21
8
7
7 13 11 18 11
4
14
8
9 11 14 12 22
9
1
6
8
0
2
2
July
1011
22
13
28
8
77
58
4
5
72
10
17
5
6
9 14 14 23
9
3
13
4
9
8
1
6
8
0
2
3
August
1012
21
12
27
6
84
60
5
5
66
10
13
7
6 10 14 16 15 11
8
10
5 10
9 16 14 24 12
|
5
8
0
4
2
September
1012
16
8
21
0
88
64
5
5
55
10
12
8
6 10 10 14 13 16 11
11
7
9
7 15 12 26 12
|
5
9
0
3
1
October
1012
10
4
16
−4
89
74
6
6
50
9
8
4
7 14 14 16 14 15
8
10
4
7 12 18 15 23 11
1
6
9
0
4
0
November
1012
4
0
11
−8
88
82
6
6
53
11
11
5
9 12 15 12 17 13
7
11
7
8 11 14 15 18 15
2
6
8
0
2
0
December
1011
1
−3
7
−14
86
84
6
6
46
10
9
5
4
8 15 16 22 15
6
7
6
4
7 15 17 24 17
3
7
7
0
3
0
Means
1012
10
3
82
67
5
5
_
_
13
7
6 10 13 14 18 12
7
12
6
8
9 15 14 24 11
1
6
8
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
539
105
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
|
28
9
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
No. of years observations
29* −19§ _
_
36† −26‡
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
21
30
9 19
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
9 15 15 26
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
70
March
Home
Contents
Index
1.290 SVENSKA HÖGARNA (59° 27′ N, 19° 30′ E) Height above MSL − 12 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 years observations, 1984 to 2004
1300
0700
%
%
Oktas
Thunder
0700
°C
14
5
4 17 15 28 10
1
19
19
4
3
0
1
18
4 10
3 17 16 26
6
1
18
18
3
4
0
March
1013
2
−1
6
−6
84
77
6
5
_
_
16
5 10
5 20 18 17
8
2
19
4 11
5 25 17 14
5
1
16
16
2
6
0
April
1014
5
1
11
−2
85
74
5
5
_
_
22
9 14
7 15 13 13
6
1
24
8 16
7 23 14
6
2
1
15
14
1
6
0
May
1015
10
5
16
2
83
71
4
4
_
_
26
7 13
4 18 13 13
5
1
31
5 12
5 26 14
4
2
1
13
13
|
4
1
June
1012
15
10
20
6
83
73
4
5
_
_
26
5 13
4 19 13 14
5
2
28
5 12
4 30 13
6
2
1
12
13
|
5
1
July
1012
19
14
23
11
83
72
4
4
_
_
22
4
9
5 17 15 17
8
2
25
3 10
4 30 19
6
3
1
11
13
1
3
1
August
1012
19
15
23
11
83
71
5
5
_
_
17
6 11
5 18 12 20
9
2
22
3 13
6 23 20
9
4
1
13
13
|
1
2
September
1012
14
11
18
6
81
71
5
5
_
_
18
6 13
4 17 11 21
9
2
21
6 12
6 20 15 16
5
1
15
15
2
1
1
October
1012
9
7
13
2
82
77
6
6
_
_
11
4 10
8 20 16 21 10
1
15
4
8 22 17 19
8
1
17
17
2
3
0
November
1012
5
3
8
−2
82
80
6
6
_
_
12
5 13
7 19 13 21 10
|
13
5 12
6 20 12 20 10
1
17
17
3
2
|
December
1011
2
0
6
−6
82
82
6
6
_
_
12
5
4 19 13 23 14
2
14
5
3 18 12 26 13
1
18
19
4
2
0
Means
1012
8
5
24* −10§
83
76
5
5
_
_
18
6 11
5 18 14 19
8
1
20
5 11
5 23 15 15
5
1
15
16
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_ 22
42
6
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
21
21
21
_
29† −22‡
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
mm
21
21
Knots
9
6
7
8
_
21
21
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
| Rare { All observations
CHAPTER 1
71
No. of years observations
_
Calm
1
8
NW
9
4 13 17 26
W
5 16 15 29
SW
5
5 10
S
6
17
E
13
_
SE
_
_
N
_
6
NE
6
6
Calm
6
80
NW
82
82
W
83
−8
SW
−8
4
S
5
−3
E
−2
0
SE
1
1011
NE
1010
February
N
January
hPa
1300
Fog
Mean lowest in each month
°C
Gale
Mean highest in each month
°C
1300 1300
Mean daily min.
°C
0700
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
0700
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 0.1mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 02496
Home
Contents
Index
1.291 ©WINOUJ©CIE (53° 55′ N, 14° 14′ E) Height above MSL − 5 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2004
1300
°C
%
%
Oktas
Thunder
0700
°C
1300
−1
9
−10
88
84
5
5
47
11
6
2
4
9 32 25 17
3
3
5
2
6
7 27 27 18
6
2
7
7
|
3
|
4
0
12
−8
88
79
5
5
38
9
5
3
4
6 24 30 20
4
4
5
5
5
6 19 24 24 11
1
7
8
1
2
|
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
1300
3
1015
0700
1016
February
1300
January
hPa
0700
Fog
Mean lowest in each month
°C
0700
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean highest in each month
°C
Mean daily min.
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 1mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 12200
mm
Knots
1016
7
1
16
−4
88
73
5
5
43
9
6
4 11
9 22 21 20
5
1
12 14
7
9 15 16 19
9
|
7
9
|
2
|
April
1014
12
4
22
−2
87
70
4
4
45
9
8
8 11 10 23 15 13
7
5
17 25
6
8 14 11 11
8
|
6
8
|
2
|
May
1016
16
8
26
3
84
70
4
4
46
9
8
9 13 15 17 11
3
21 30
6
6
6 10
9 10
1
6
8
0
1
2
June
1015
20
12
29
6
83
68
4
5
55
10
6
6
6
7 15 19 29
9
3
17 21
4
5
8 15 21 11
1
6
8
|
|
2
July
1015
22
14
30
10
86
70
4
4
72
11
5 10
5
7 15 22 27
7
3
18 21
3
3
8 16 19 11
1
6
8
0
|
2
August
1015
23
14
31
8
88
68
4
4
70
11
5
4
7 10 17 22 23
5
8
17 21
6
7
9 14 16 11
0
5
7
|
|
2
September
1015
18
11
24
5
91
73
5
5
53
9
7
3
7 12 20 30 15
3
2
14 13
7 12 12 16 17
9
|
6
8
|
1
1
October
1015
13
7
19
0
92
77
5
5
52
10
4
2
7 11 31 25 15
2
3
7
5
7
9 22 24 17
7
2
6
7
|
3
|
November
1015
6
2
12
−4
92
85
5
6
47
10
5
2
8 13 31 24 12
3
4
8
5
9 12 28 21 13
3
2
6
7
|
3
0
December
1015
3
−1
9
−9
89
85
5
5
54
12
4
3
8
9 30 26 13
4
4
6
3
9 11 25 27 16
4
1
7
7
|
3
0
Means
1015
12
6
88
75
5
5
_
_
6
5
7
9 23 23 18
5
4
6
8 16 18 17
8
1
6
8
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
622
120
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
2
20
9
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
No. of years observations
33* −12§ _
_
37† −17‡
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
21
11 12
30
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
12 14
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
72
March
Home
Contents
Index
1.292 SZCZECIN (53° 24′ N, 14° 37′ E) Height above MSL − 7 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 to 30 years observations, 1970 to 2004 Average humidity
0700
1300
°C
°C
%
%
Oktas
−2
10
−12
87
81
6
6
36
10
5
6 10
8
9 45
9
5
4
7
5
9
9
8 42 13
4
4
8
9
|
3
|
4
−1
11
−10
86
76
6
6
28
7
6
6 11
5
6 46 10
4
7
9
6
7
7
7 41 17
4
2
8
10
1
3
|
9
1300
Calm
NW
W
S
SW
SE
E
NE
N
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
SE
E
NE
N
0700
2
1016
Average fall
1017
February
1300
January
hPa
0700
Thunder
Mean lowest in each month
°C
1300 Fog
Mean highest in each month
°C
0700
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean daily min.
Average cloud cover
Mean daily max.
Month
Average pressure at MSL
Temperatures
No. of days with 1mm or more
WMO No 12205
mm
Knots
1016
8
0
17
−7
87
67
5
6
36
8
6 11 15
8
5 35 11
5
4
7 12 11
8 29 17
7
1
7
10
|
3
0
April
1014
14
4
23
−4
85
59
5
5
35
8
9 13 21
3
5 25 10
5
8
16 13 10 11
9 19 14
8
|
6
10
|
3
1
May
1016
19
8
27
1
82
57
4
5
48
9
7 17 16
8
3 23 15
6
6
19 11 10 13
9 17 15
6
|
6
9
|
3
3
June
1015
21
11
30
5
83
62
5
5
62
9
8
8 10
5
4 33 19
7
6
18
8
4
6
8 28 20
8
1
6
8
|
3
3
July
1015
23
13
31
7
85
61
5
5
65
9
4
9
9
4
5 34 20
6
9
17
7
6
6
9 25 20
9
1
5
8
|
3
4
August
1015
24
13
32
7
88
60
4
5
53
8
3
7 13
4
6 36 15
4 14
16
8
5
8 10 26 19
7
1
5
7
|
5
3
September
1015
18
10
24
3
92
68
5
5
44
8
3
6 16
4
5 41 12
4
8
11
6
9 10
8 28 17
8
1
6
8
0
5
1
October
1016
13
6
21
−2
92
74
5
5
37
8
2
4 15
8
8 43
8
3
9
6
4
9 14 10 36 14
5
3
7
9
|
7
|
November
1016
6
2
13
−6
91
83
6
6
40
10
4
4 15 11 10 38
8
3
7
6
5 14 12 11 34 11
December
1016
3
−1
11
−10
89
84
6
6
45
10
4
5 13
8 10 41 11
4
5
7
4 12
Means
1016
13
5
87
69
5
5
_
_
5
8 14
6
6 37 12
5
7
12
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
529
104
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
No. of years observations
33* −16§ _
_
38† −30‡
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
21
30
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
6
3
7
8
0
5
|
8
9 40 11
5
3
8
9
1
4
0
7
9 10
9 30 15
6
2
7
9
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
3
47
15
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
73
March
Home
Contents
Index
1.293 GDAMSK PORT (52° 24′ N, 18° 42′ E) Height above MSL − 8 m Climatic Table compiled from 30 years observations, 1931 to 2000
Mean lowest in each month
0730
1330
°C
°C
%
%
Oktas
Thunder
Mean highest in each month
°C
1330
−4
7
−14
86
82
6
6
25
8
5
3
3 14 26 17 18 11
3
5
4
4 12 22 18 19 12
4
9
10
4
6
|
2
−3
7
−12
85
79
6
6
18
7
5
2
5 13 26 17 17 10
5
7
4
6 13 23 16 16 11
4
8
10
3
5
|
March
1014
4
−1
13
−9
82
72
6
6
22
8
8
8
8 17 21 11 13
6
8
12 12 12 13 18 11 12
6
4
7
10
3
4
|
April
1015
9
3
18
−3
78
66
5
5
30
8
16
9
7 10 14 11 14 12
7
20 20 12
5 11 10 13
8
1
8
11
3
5
1
May
1015
15
7
25
1
71
62
5
5
49
9
22
9
8
7 14
8 13 12
7
28 24 12
5
8
6
9
7
1
7
10
2
3
4
June
1014
19
11
27
6
70
63
4
5
64
9
21
6
8
6 13 11 15 14
6
26 22 13
5
6
8 10
9
1
7
10
1
2
4
July
1013
21
13
28
9
74
65
5
5
67
10
18
7
5
7
9 13 15 20
6
25 20 11
2
5 10 14 11
2
7
9
1
1
5
August
1013
22
13
27
8
77
66
5
5
56
10
10
2
3
7 16 18 23 14
7
16 13 11
4 10 12 21 12
1
7
9
1
1
4
September
1015
17
10
24
4
81
67
5
5
55
9
6
5
6 10 18 17 15 12 11
14 15 11
8 13 13 14 10
2
7
10
2
2
2
October
1013
12
6
18
−1
85
73
5
6
47
9
4
3
8 19 26 14 12
6
8
7
6 12 18 20 16 12
6
3
7
9
3
4
1
November
1013
6
1
12
−7
87
82
6
6
42
9
3
4
3 15 26 21 16
8
4
7
4
5 12 24 20 15
9
4
8
9
2
5
0
December
1015
2
−2
8
−11
87
84
7
6
34
9
4
4
4 15 30 18 13
6
6
4
4
4 15 28 18 14
7
6
9
9
3
6
0
Means
1014
11
5
80
72
5
5
_
_
10
5
6 12 20 15 15 11
6
9 16 13 14
9
3
8
10
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
506
105
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_ 28
44
21
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
34† −27‡
30
* §
30
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
30
30
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
mm
Knots
30
30
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
14 12 10
30
30
| Rare { All observations
_ _
_
_
30
30
30
CHAPTER 1
74
No. of years observations
31∗ −17§
1330
1
1014
0730
1013
February
1330
January
hPa
0730
Fog
Mean daily min.
°C
0730
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 1mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 12140
Home
Contents
Index
1.294 KALININGRAD (54° 43′ N, 20° 33′ E) Height above MSL − 21 m Climatic Table compiled from 30 to 31 years observations, 1960 to 2004
Mean lowest in each month
0800
1400
°C
°C
%
%
Oktas
Thunder
Mean highest in each month
°C
1400
−3
7
−14
84
79
6
6
57
13
4
5
7 13 15 21 22
6
6
6
5
7 13 14 21 27
6
2
5
6
|
2
|
1
−3
8
−13
83
74
6
6
40
9
7
8 10 11 12 16 23
6
7
8
8 13 10 13 17 22
7
1
5
6
0
2
|
6
8 12 14 14 13 19
7
8 13 16 13 15 20
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
1400
1
1016
0800
1014
February
1400
January
hPa
0800
Fog
Mean daily min.
°C
0800
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 0.1mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 26702
mm
Knots
1015
5
−1
14
−9
84
66
6
6
43
10
7
7
8
|
5
7
0
2
|
April
1014
12
3
23
−3
82
57
5
5
37
8
12 11 12 13 10 11 16 11
5
14 10 10 13
9 12 18 12
1
4
6
|
2
|
May
1016
18
7
27
0
76
54
4
5
53
9
12 10 15 15 10 11 15
9
3
16 10 13 12
9
7 18 15
|
4
6
0
2
2
June
1014
20
11
28
5
78
58
5
5
71
9
10
8
9 10 10 13 25 12
4
14
7
8
9
6 11 28 15
1
4
6
0
2
3
July
1013
23
13
30
8
80
59
5
5
80
11
8
7
8 11
9 14 28 11
5
13
7
8
7
5 12 30 16
1
4
6
0
3
3
August
1014
22
13
30
6
84
59
5
5
90
10
6
6 11 14
9 20 19
7
10
9
8 11
9 13 29 13
1
3
6
0
5
3
September
1015
17
9
24
2
90
64
5
6
89
12
5
5 10 13 12 21 18
6 10
9
8
7 11 12 17 25 10
1
4
6
0
5
1
October
1015
12
6
19
−2
90
71
6
6
79
11
4
4 10 18 14 20 18
4
8
5
4
8 18 14 20 22
7
1
4
6
0
4
|
November
1015
5
1
11
−7
88
79
6
6
91
14
5
6
7 17 18 22 15
4
5
4
5
8 16 17 25 17
6
2
5
6
0
3
|
December
1014
1
−2
8
−13
85
81
6
6
73
14
3
5
8 14 18 19 21
7
5
4
5
8 14 18 21 22
7
2
5
6
|
2
|
Means
1015
11
4
84
67
5
6
_
_
7
7 10 13 12 17 20
8
6
9
7
9 13 12 16 23 10
1
4
6
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
803
130
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
|
34
13
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
No. of years observations
32∗ −19§ _
_
38† −28‡
31
* §
31
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
31
31
9
30
31
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
31
31
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
31
31
31
CHAPTER 1
75
March
Home
Contents
Index
1.295 KLAIPÉDA (55° 44′ N, 21° 04′ E) Height above MSL − 7 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2004
|
11
11
1
2
|
9
|
9
11
1
3
|
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
Thunder
Fog
7
4 15
1400
4 21 11 13 13 22
0800
Gale
1400
SW
Oktas
S
%
E
%
SE
1400
°C
NE
0800
°C
0800
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
N
Mean lowest in each month
°C
1400
Mean highest in each month
°C
0800
Mean daily min.
hPa
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 0.1mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 26509
mm
Knots
January
1014
0
−3
5
−14
83
80
6
6
50
12
10
4 24 11 13 11 21
5
1
9
February
1014
1
−3
6
−12
83
77
6
6
31
8
13
5 21
9 16
9 20
6
1
10
9 20 12 21
1015
4
−1
10
−8
81
73
6
5
39
9
11
7 28 12 13
9 15
6
1
8
4 13 11 22 11 19 11
0
9
10
1
4
0
April
1014
10
3
20
−3
78
68
5
5
36
7
13
9 33
8 13
6 10
8
|
7
4 14
8 19 10 20 18
0
8
10
0
4
|
May
1016
15
7
25
1
76
70
4
5
39
7
12
9 24
8 15
5 18
9
|
7
5
9
4 14 12 28 22
0
7
10
0
2
2
June
1013
18
11
26
5
80
74
5
5
56
8
12
5 17
8 14
8 24 11
|
7
2
5
3 14 15 34 20
0
7
9
|
3
2
July
1014
21
14
28
8
79
72
5
5
74
10
10
4 18
7 11 12 26 12
|
4
2
4
3 15 16 34 23
0
8
10
|
1
2
August
1014
21
14
28
7
81
70
5
5
83
11
11
7 26
9
8
9 24
5
|
4
2
8
4 16 12 37 17
0
7
10
|
1
2
September
1014
17
10
22
3
84
71
5
6
89
13
12 11 29
7
7
8 20
5
1
9
5 13
6 13 12 30 13
0
8
10
|
1
2
October
1015
11
7
17
−1
85
75
6
6
80
12
11
8 27 11
8
8 22
5
|
8
2 18 14 16 11 22
9
1
9
11
1
2
|
November
1015
5
2
10
−6
85
81
7
7
90
15
11
6 31 13
8
7 19
5
|
10
4 28 13 13
8 17
6
|
10
11
1
2
|
December
1014
2
−2
7
−11
84
81
6
6
68
14
11
5 28 16 11
8 17
4
1
11
4 21 17 13
7 18
7
|
11
11
1
2
|
Means
1014
10
5
30* −17§
82
74
5
6
_
_
11
7 25 10 11
8 20
7
1
8
3 14
9 16 11 25 14
|
9
10
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
735
126
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
6
27
10
Extreme values
_
_
_
33† −27‡
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
No. of years observations
_
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
21
30
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
76
March
Home
Contents
Index
1.296 LIEPJA (56° 29′ N, 21° 01′ E) Height above MSL − 7 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2004
Mean lowest in each month
0800
1400
°C
°C
%
%
Oktas
Thunder
Mean highest in each month
°C
1400
−3
6
−15
85
83
6
6
48
11
8
8
8 16 15 14 20
9
2
7
9
7 10 17 16 23
8
2
9
9
1
3
|
1
−3
6
−14
85
79
6
6
35
10
9
8 12 11 16 17 18
8
1
10
9
8
8 18 18 20
8
1
9
9
1
4
0
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
1400
0
1013
0800
1014
February
1400
January
hPa
0800
Fog
Mean daily min.
°C
0800
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 1 mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 26406
mm
Knots
1015
4
−2
10
−9
86
74
5
5
23
8
10 10 13 16 16 17 12
6
2
9
7
9
9 14 24 16 11
1
7
9
|
5
0
April
1014
10
3
20
−4
82
66
5
5
35
8
10 14 17 16 13 14
9
5
2
14
7
9
9
8 24 15 13
1
7
9
0
8
|
May
1016
15
7
26
1
77
64
4
4
40
10
8 15 17 15 11 16 13
5
1
16
7
6
5
4 24 20 19
|
6
9
0
7
1
June
1013
18
11
27
5
80
71
5
5
36
7
7
1
12
3
5
4
5 28 24 20
|
6
9
|
7
2
July
1013
21
14
28
9
81
69
5
5
47
9
7
9 11 12 10 18 20 10
2
10
2
5
3
5 25 30 19
1
6
8
|
6
2
August
1014
21
14
28
7
83
68
5
5
76
11
7
9 14 16 13 10 22
September
1014
16
10
22
2
86
69
5
6
81
11
8 13 14 20
October
1014
11
6
17
−3
87
75
6
6
60
10
November
1014
5
1
10
−6
86
81
7
7
58
December
1013
2
−2
7
−12
85
82
6
6
59
Means
1014
10
84
73
5
6
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
598
118
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
No. of years observations
5 −30* −18§ _
_
33† −27‡
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
21
10 12 11
9 13 19 17
7
3
11
3
6
5
7 21 30 16
1
6
9
0
5
2
9 18
6
4
10
7
9
9 11 16 26 13
|
7
9
|
4
1
8
7 12 22 11 13 17
7
4
9
6
8 15 15 18 21
8
1
8
9
|
4
1
12
5
8 13 24 16
8 16
8
1
5
7 10 21 20 12 15
8
2
8
9
|
3
|
11
9
8 11 17 20 10 16
8
2
8
6 10 16 21 11 17
9
1
9
9
1
3
1
8 10 13 16 14 14 16
7
2
10
6
7 10 12 20 21 13
1
7
9
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
4
59
10
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
9
30
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
77
March
Home
Contents
Index
1.297 RGA (56° 58′ N, 24° 03′ E) Height above MSL − 26 m Climatic Table compiled from 30 to 31 years observations, 1960 to 2004 Average humidity
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
1400
Gale
Fog
°C
°C
%
%
Oktas
January
1012
−1
−4
6
−15
83
80
7
7
34
9
6
6
6 15 31 15 10
6
5
9
5
6 15 30 14 12
6
4
9
9
|
2
|
February
1016
−1
−5
6
−16
81
74
6
6
27
7
8
6
9 14 26 14 10
6
6
10
4
7 16 24 13 12 11
3
8
9
|
2
0
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
1400
1400 0800
0800
mm
Thunder
0800
°C
Average fall
Mean lowest in each month
°C
1400
Mean highest in each month
hPa
0800
Mean daily min.
Average cloud cover
Mean daily max.
Month
Average pressure at MSL
Temperatures
No. of days with 0.1mm or more
WMO No 26422
Knots
1015
4
−2
12
−10
83
67
6
6
28
8
7
5 11 19 26 12
7
7
6
12
3
6 18 24 13
9 13
2
8
10
|
3
0
April
1014
11
3
22
−8
79
59
5
5
41
8
12
7 10 17 18 11
8
9
9
24
4
6 13 14
9 10 18
2
7
10
0
3
|
May
1016
17
7
26
0
72
55
5
5
44
8
13
8 12 14 16 10
9 12
6
31
4
6 10 15
7
8 18
2
7
10
|
4
2
June
1013
20
11
28
5
76
60
5
5
63
9
15
4
8
9 17 13 13 13
8
25
3
4
9 13 10 13 21
2
7
9
|
5
3
July
1012
23
14
30
7
80
61
5
5
85
11
10
5
7 11 20 16 12 12
7
22
3
4
7 14 13 12 24
2
6
9
|
6
3
August
1014
22
13
29
7
83
62
5
5
73
11
8
6
8 11 20 19 12
7
8
18
3
5
9 17 12 14 20
2
6
8
0
6
2
September
1014
16
9
23
3
88
66
5
6
75
12
6
7 10 12 27 18 10
5
6
15
4
5 11 22 14 15 13
2
7
9
0
5
1
October
1014
10
5
17
−3
89
73
6
6
60
12
4
6 10 16 30 17
8
4
5
9
3
7 15 27 15 15
9
1
8
9
|
4
|
November
1014
4
0
10
−7
87
81
7
7
57
13
5
5
9 18 34 15
8
3
3
7
5
7 17 33 13 11
5
2
8
9
|
3
|
December
1012
0
−3
6
−14
85
82
6
7
46
12
6
5
8 16 34 14
8
5
3
7
5
7 16 33 15 11
4
3
9
9
|
3
0
Means
1014
10
4
82
68
6
6
_
_
8
6
9 14 25 15 10
7
6
16
4
6 13 22 12 12 13
2
7
9
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
633
120
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
1
46
11
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
No. of years observations
31* −20§ _
_
34† −35‡
31
* §
31
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
31
31
30
31
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
31
31
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
31
31
31
CHAPTER 1
78
March
Home
Contents
Index
1.298 PÄRNU (58° 22′ N, 24° 30′ E) Height above MSL − 8 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 to 30 years observations, 1960 to 2004 Average humidity
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Fog
°C
%
%
Oktas
January
1013
−2
−6
3
−17
84
81
6
6
35
10
8 13 11 16 21 14
7
3
8
8
9 11 18 21 14
8
3
8
9
1
3
0
February
1013
−2
−6
5
−16
84
79
6
6
30
9
6 10 13 11 17 19 13
7
5
8
8
9
9 24 22 12
7
2
8
9
1
4
|
March
1015
3
−3
9
−11
84
74
6
6
25
8
7
6
April
1015
9
1
20
−4
80
65
5
5
29
8
9 15 19 14 16 11
May
1016
16
7
25
1
73
59
4
5
46
9
June
1013
20
11
27
4
77
64
5
5
35
8
July
1013
22
14
28
8
80
66
5
5
57
10
August
1013
21
13
27
5
85
68
5
5
65
11
9
September
1014
16
9
22
2
88
71
5
6
66
11
14
8 15 13 11 13 12
9
6
October
1014
10
4
15
−4
90
78
6
6
76
12
9
6 10 16 15 17 14
8
November
1015
3
0
8
−8
88
84
7
7
56
10
6
6 18 17 18 14 10
December
1013
−1
−4
5
−15
85
83
6
6
40
10
7
7 12 12 20 15 11
Means
1014
10
3
83
73
5
6
_
_
9
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
560
116
_
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
No. of years observations
30* −21§ _
_
33† −33‡
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
1400
0800 Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
mm
21
1400
Thunder
1400
°C
Average fall
0800
°C
1400
Mean lowest in each month
°C
0800
Mean highest in each month
hPa
0800
Knots 8
7
4
8
8
8 26 23 11
8
3
7
9
|
5
0
8
5
5
9 10 10
7 22 24 11
5
2
7
8
0
4
|
10 16 12
9 15 16 11
7
5
8 12
7
5 20 30 12
7
1
7
9
0
1
1
12 10 10
8 18 18 12
8
4
6
8
6
5 21 31 15
6
1
6
8
0
|
3
9 10 10 12 14 20 12
8
5
7
6
5
4 21 37 13
6
1
6
9
0
|
3
8 16 14 11 10
5
6
7
5 17 35 12 10
2
6
8
|
1
3
9
6 11
6 19 26 12
8
3
7
8
|
1
1
4
8
6
8 11 20 24 12
9
2
8
9
|
2
0
7
4
6
9 15 15 17 16 11
8
3
8
8
|
3
0
9
5
7
6 12 11 21 16 13
9
5
8
8
|
3
|
9 13 13 15 16 12
8
5
7
8
9
8 20 26 12
8
2
7
9
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
2
27
12
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
9 13 16 18 15 10
8 13 11
30
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
79
Mean daily min.
Average cloud cover
Mean daily max.
Month
Average pressure at MSL
Temperatures
No. of days with 1 mm or more
WMO No 26231
Home
Contents
Index
1.299 RISTNA (58° 55′ N, 22° 04′ E) Height above MSL − 9 m Climatic Table compiled from 21 years observations, 1983 to 2004
Mean lowest in each month
0800
1400
°C
°C
%
%
Oktas
Thunder
Mean highest in each month
°C
1400
−2
4
−12
84
82
6
7
_
_
12
2
12
7
9 10 12 18 21 11
1
9
10
1
2
|
0
−4
4
−12
84
80
6
6
_
_
13 10 11 10 11 18 19
8
1
10 10
7 13 14 16 19 10
|
9
9
|
2
0
March
1014
2
−2
6
−8
85
77
5
5
_
_
12
9 14 16 12 17 12
9
2
10
8
7 15 15 21 17
7
0
7
8
|
5
|
April
1014
7
1
16
−4
82
72
5
5
_
_
13 16 14 17 12 10 11
6
1
13 20
6 14 11 18 11
8
0
6
7
|
5
|
May
1016
12
5
21
0
78
70
4
4
_
_
18 15
8 16 13 11 11
8
1
13 18
3
8
9 20 17 12
0
6
8
0
4
1
June
1013
16
10
24
4
82
73
5
5
_
_
13 12
8 14 13 17 13
9
1
12 12
3
7 10 25 18 13
0
6
8
0
4
2
July
1013
20
14
25
7
82
73
5
4
_
_
11 10
5 12 15 20 15 11
1
11
9
3
6
8 29 23 11
0
7
8
0
1
2
August
1013
20
14
25
7
83
72
5
5
_
_
14
8 10 12 12 16 17
9
1
11 10
4
9 12 22 23 11
0
7
9
0
1
3
September
1013
15
10
20
2
84
73
5
5
_
_
13
9 13 10 10 14 18
9
2
12 12
7 10 10 19 20 10
1
7
9
|
|
1
October
1013
10
6
14
−1
85
79
6
6
_
_
10
5 14 13 12 16 20 11
|
11
7
6 16 12 19 19 10
|
9
9
1
2
1
November
1013
5
2
10
−5
84
83
7
7
_
_
10
7 18 15 12 13 16
9
1
10
6 15 15 15 12 17
9
|
9
9
1
1
|
December
1012
2
−1
6
−9
83
81
6
7
_
_
13
6 15 10 13 15 19 10
1
12
6 13 10 15 15 17 11
1
9
9
1
1
|
Means
1013
9
4
83
76
5
6
_
_
13
9 12 13 12 15 16
9
1
11 10
7 11 12 20 19 10
|
8
9
_
_
_
Totals
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
5
28
10
Extreme values
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
32† −29‡
21
* §
21
Mean of highest each year Mean of lowest each year
21
21
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
N
NE
Calm
NW
W
SW
S
E
SE
NE
N
mm
Knots 8 10 12 11 15 20 11
_
21
† Highest recorded temperature ‡ Lowest recorded temperature
21
21
| Rare { All observations
_
_
_
21
21
21
CHAPTER 1
80
No. of years observations
27* −15§
1400
0
1011
0800
1012
February
1400
January
hPa
0800
Fog
Mean daily min.
°C
0800
Number of days with
Mean wind speed
Wind distribution − Percentage of observations from
Precipitation
Gale
Mean daily max.
Average pressure at MSL
Month
Average cloud cover
No. of days with 1 mm or more
Average humidity
Temperatures
Average fall
WMO No 26115
Home
Contents
Index
1.300
METEOROLOGICAL CONVERSION TABLE AND SCALES Fahrenheit to Celsius °Fahrenheit 0
1
2
3
4
−73⋅3 −67⋅8 −62⋅2 −56⋅7 −51⋅1 −45⋅6 −40⋅0 −34⋅4 −28⋅9 −23⋅3 −17⋅8 −17⋅8 −12⋅2 −6⋅7 −1⋅1 +4⋅4 10⋅0 15⋅6 21⋅1 26⋅7 32⋅2 37⋅8 43⋅3 48⋅9
−73⋅9 −68⋅3 −62⋅8 −57⋅2 −51⋅7 −46⋅1 −40⋅6 −35⋅0 −29⋅4 −23⋅9 −18⋅3 −17⋅2 −11⋅7 −6⋅1 −0⋅6 +5⋅0 10⋅6 16⋅1 21⋅7 27⋅2 32⋅8 38⋅3 43⋅9 49⋅4
−74⋅4 −68⋅9 −63⋅3 −57⋅8 −52⋅2 −46⋅7 −41⋅1 −35⋅6 −30⋅0 −24⋅4 −18⋅9 −16⋅7 −11⋅1 −5⋅6 0 +5⋅6 11⋅1 16⋅7 22⋅2 27⋅8 33⋅3 38⋅9 44⋅4 50⋅0
−75⋅0 −69⋅4 −63⋅9 −58⋅3 −52⋅8 −47⋅2 −41⋅7 −36⋅1 −30⋅6 −25⋅0 −19⋅4 −16⋅1 −10⋅6 −5⋅0 +0⋅6 6⋅1 11⋅7 17⋅2 22⋅8 28⋅3 33⋅9 39⋅4 45⋅0 50⋅6
°F −100 −90 −80 −70 −60 −50 −40 −30 −20 −10 −0 +0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
5
6
7
8
9
−76⋅1 −70⋅6 −65⋅0 −59⋅4 −53⋅9 −48⋅3 −42⋅8 −37⋅2 −31⋅7 −26⋅1 −20⋅6 −15⋅0 −9⋅4 −3⋅9 +1⋅7 7⋅2 12⋅8 18⋅3 23⋅9 29⋅4 35⋅0 40⋅6 46⋅1 51⋅7
−76⋅7 −71⋅1 −65⋅6 −60⋅0 −54⋅4 −48⋅9 −43⋅3 −37⋅8 −32⋅2 −26⋅7 −21⋅1 −14⋅4 −8⋅9 −3⋅3 +2⋅2 7⋅8 13⋅3 18⋅9 24⋅4 30⋅0 35⋅6 41⋅1 46⋅7 52⋅2
−77⋅2 −71⋅7 −66⋅1 −60⋅6 −55⋅0 −49⋅4 −43⋅9 −38⋅3 −32⋅8 −27⋅2 −21⋅7 −13⋅9 −8⋅3 −2⋅8 +2⋅8 8⋅3 13⋅9 19⋅4 25⋅0 30⋅6 36⋅1 41⋅7 47⋅2 52⋅8
−77⋅8 −72⋅2 −66⋅7 −61⋅1 −55⋅6 −50⋅0 −44⋅4 −38⋅9 −33⋅3 −27⋅8 −22⋅2 −13⋅3 −7⋅8 −2⋅2 +3⋅3 8⋅9 14⋅4 20⋅0 25⋅6 31⋅1 36⋅7 42⋅2 47⋅8 53⋅3
−78⋅3 −72⋅8 −67⋅2 −61⋅7 −56⋅1 −50⋅6 −45⋅0 −39⋅4 −33⋅9 −28⋅3 −22⋅8 −12⋅8 −7⋅2 −1⋅7 +3⋅9 9⋅4 15⋅0 20⋅6 26⋅1 31⋅7 37⋅2 42⋅8 48⋅3 53⋅9
5
6
7
8
9
−103⋅0 −85⋅0 −67⋅0 −49⋅0 −31⋅0 −13⋅0 +5⋅0 23⋅0 41⋅0 59⋅0 77⋅0 95⋅0 113⋅0 131⋅0
−104⋅8 −86⋅8 −68⋅8 −50⋅8 −32⋅8 −14⋅8 +3⋅2 21⋅2 42⋅8 60⋅8 78⋅8 96⋅8 114⋅8 132⋅8
−106⋅6 −88⋅6 −70⋅6 −52⋅6 −34⋅6 −16⋅6 +1⋅4 19⋅4 44⋅6 62⋅6 80⋅6 98⋅6 116⋅6 134⋅6
−108⋅4 −90⋅4 −72⋅4 −54⋅4 −36⋅4 18⋅4 −0⋅4 +17⋅6 46⋅4 64⋅4 82⋅4 100⋅4 118⋅4 136⋅4
−110⋅2 −92⋅2 −74⋅2 −56⋅2 −38⋅2 −20⋅2 −2⋅2 +15⋅8 48⋅2 66⋅2 84⋅2 102⋅2 120⋅2 138⋅2
Degrees Celsius −75⋅6 −70⋅0 −64⋅4 −58⋅9 −53⋅3 −47⋅8 −42⋅2 −36⋅7 −31⋅1 −25⋅6 −20⋅0 −15⋅6 −10⋅0 −4⋅4 +1⋅1 6⋅7 12⋅2 17⋅8 23⋅3 28⋅9 34⋅4 40⋅0 45⋅6 51⋅1
Celsius to Fahrenheit °Celsius 0
1
2
3
°C −70 −60 −50 −40 −30 −20 −10 −0 +0 10 20 30 40 50
4 Degrees Fahrenheit
−94⋅0 −76⋅0 −58⋅0 −40⋅0 −22⋅0 −4⋅0 +14⋅0 32⋅0 32⋅0 50⋅0 68⋅0 86⋅0 104⋅0 122⋅0
−95⋅8 −77⋅8 −59⋅8 −41⋅8 −23⋅8 −5⋅8 +12⋅2 30⋅2 33⋅8 51⋅8 69⋅8 87⋅8 105⋅8 123⋅8
−97⋅6 −79⋅6 −61⋅6 −43⋅6 −25⋅6 −7⋅6 +10⋅4 28⋅4 35⋅6 53⋅6 71⋅6 89⋅6 107⋅6 125⋅6
−99⋅4 −81⋅4 −63⋅4 −45⋅4 −27⋅4 −9⋅4 +8⋅6 26⋅6 37⋅4 55⋅4 73⋅4 91⋅4 109⋅4 127⋅4
−101⋅2 −83⋅2 −65⋅2 −47⋅2 −29⋅2 −11⋅2 +6⋅8 24⋅8 39⋅2 57⋅2 75⋅2 93⋅2 111⋅2 129⋅2
HECTOPASCALS TO INCHES HECTOPASCALS 950
960
970
980
28
29
MILLIMETRES TO INCHES 0
990
10
0
20
0⋅5
500
0 5 10
20
1010
30
1⋅5
2 inches
1020
1030
70
2⋅5
40
50
60 70 inches
80
81
90 3⋅5
3
80
1050
31
(2) (for large values) millimetres 1500 2000 1000 30
1040
30
INCHES (1) (for small values) millimetres 50 60 40
1
0
1000
2500 90
100
100 4
3000 110
120
Home
Contents
Index
Chapter 2 - Through routes to Gulf of Bothnia and Gulf of Finland 15°
14°
16°
17°
18°
20°
19° Ålands
60°
22° 60°
8 2.2
Simpnäsklubb 2337
2296
21°
Hav
Svenska Björn
2222
2297
2.
27
Stockholm
59°
59°
Hiiumaa
2241
SWEDEN Norrköping
2362
2222 Gotska Sandön
21
Saaremaa
2.2
4
Farö
58°
2.
58°
Visby Gotland
2226
2361
Ventspils
LATVIA
2223
57°
57° 2215
Hoburg
2817 Öland Kalmar
Liepºja
0
2.2
LITHUANIA
2360
56°
2231
Ölands Södra Grund
56°
5
2.1
Klaip4da 2251
Ystad 958
2.15
55°
2150
Bornholm
Rønne 2365
RUSSIA Rønne Banke
Kaliningrad
2369
Rügen
0205
14°
15°
16°
POLAND
2288
Gdamsk
Longitude 18° East from Greenwich 20°
82
21°
22°
55°
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 2 THROUGH ROUTES TO GULF OF BOTHNIA AND GULF OF FINLAND; AND THE ISLANDS OF BORNHOLM AND GOTLAND TOGETHER WITH THEIR ADJACENT ISLANDS
GENERAL INFORMATION Chart 259
should be given to the pilotage agency of the requirement for a pilot. Similar arrangements can be made by outward bound vessels and those coasting from port to port in the area. For further details see 1.50 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Scope of the chapter 1
2
2.1 In this chapter are described the islands of Bornholm, Christiansø, Gotland, Fårö and Gotska Sandön. Descriptions of the through routes from longitude 13°30′E to Gulf of Bothnia and Gulf of Finland are also given. It is arranged as follows: Through routes to Gulf of Bothnia and Gulf of Finland (2.5). Bornholm and Christiansø (2.30). Gotland, Fårö and Gotska Sandön (2.133).
Rescue 1
Pilotage 1
2
2.3 In the area covered by this chapter, SAR operations in Danish waters are co-ordinated by MRCC Århus and in Swedish waters by MRCC Göteborg and MRSC Stockholm. See 1.157 and 1.156 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5 for further details.
Natural conditions
2.2 Licensed deep-sea pilots for ports in Gulf of Bothnia and Gulf of Finland, if required, should be requested through the various pilotage agencies based in the countries bordering the Baltic. Deep-sea pilots often have to travel long distances to their point of embarkation and as much notice as possible
1
2.4 Currents and tidal streams. For general remarks see 1.244 and succeeding paragraphs. Climate and weather. For general remarks see 1.262 and succeeding paragraphs. Ice. For general remarks see 1.6. For more detailed information on ice conditions in Baltic Sea see 1.253.
THROUGH ROUTES TO GULF OF BOTHNIA AND GULF OF FINLAND Currents
GENERAL INFORMATION 1
Charts 259, 2816
Routes 1
2.5 The through routes described in this section are as follows: Kullagrund to Öland, including the recommended channel for deep-draught vessels (2.11). Öland to Gulf of Finland (2.17). Öland to Gulf of Bothnia (2.24).
Off-lying banks 2.8 1
Traffic regulations 1
2
2.7 Vessels passing through Bornholmsgat (55°20′N, 14°25′E) (2.6) should take into account the currents off Sandhammaren (55°23′N, 14°12′E), which may run strongly during gales from the S.
2.6 Traffic Separation Schemes, shown on the chart, have been established S of Öland (56°04′N, 16°41′E), SE of Hoburg (56°47′N, 18°22′E) and NW of Phja Ristnanina (59°07′N, 21°41′E). The schemes are IMO adopted and Rule 10 of International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972) applies. Recommended directions of traffic flow, as shown on the chart, are established in Bornholmsgat (55°20′N, 14°25′E), which separates the island of Bornholm from the S Swedish coast. Between Svartgrund (55°14′N, 14°15′E) and Davids Banke (17 miles ENE) NE-bound traffic is recommended to keep to the SE side of the international boundary between Sweden and Denmark, while SW-bound traffic is recommended to keep NW of the boundary.
2
3
4
83
Södra Midsjöbanken (55°39′N, 17°23′E) has depths of 11 to 18 m over it. A wreck with a depth of 15 m over it lies close S of the bank. Norra Midsjöbanken (56°11′N, 17°20′E), with a least depth of 9⋅3 m near its N end. Hoburgs Bank (56°41′N, 18°34′E) extends S from Gotland for about 50 miles. The shoalest spot, with a charted depth of 10⋅3 m over it, lies 19¼ miles SE of Hoburg Lighthouse (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) (2.143). There is a depth of 12 m charted 28 miles S of the lighthouse. Knolls Grund (57°32′N, 17°29′E) has a least charted depth at its N end of 9 m which is marked by a light-buoy (N cardinal). Nielsengrund (58°17′N, 18°00′E), a shoal with a charted depth of 15 m over it. Kopparstenarna (58°34′N, 19°11′E), an extensive bank, with a least depth of 1 m, marked at its N and S ends by buoys (cardinal) and on its W side by a light-buoy (W cardinal). The bank is covered
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
by the red sector of Gotska Sandön NW Point auxiliary light.
Ölands Södra Udde Light (56°11′⋅8N, 16°24′⋅0E) (4.19). Hoburg Light (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) (2.143).
Offshore production platforms 1
Other aid to navigation
2.9 Baltic Beta Oil Production Platform (55°29′N, 18°11′E) stands on Oilfield B−3, about 39 miles N of Rozewie. An SBM is moored about 8 cables SSW of the platform, and Platform PG−1 stands 1¾ miles SW. A security zone is in place, radius 2½ miles, centred on Baltic Beta Platform. A submarine pipeline is laid between Baltic Beta Platform and Wadysawowo (54°48′N, 18°25′E). A safety zone 150m wide is established along the pipeline.
2.14 1
Directions (continued from Baltic Pilot Volume I) 1
Chemical munitions 1
2.10 Chemical munitions have been dumped in two areas covered by this chapter; see 1.9.
KULLAGRUND TO ÖLAND General information
2
Charts 958, 2251 2360
Routes 1
2.11 From a position S of Kullagrund (55°18′N, 13°20′E), the route leads through Bornholmsgat (55°20′N, 14°25′E) (2.6), to the NE-bound lane of the TSS SE of Ölands Södra Grund (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E). Deep-draught vessels. From a position NNE of Christiansø Light (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅2E) a recommended channel for deep-draught vessels and those carrying dangerous cargo, leads ENE for 85 miles to a position 35 miles ESE of Ölands Södra Grund (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E). 1
2.12 Submarine power cables are laid across Bornholmsgat, between the W coast of Bornholm, 4 miles N of Rønne (55°06′N, 14°42′E), and the Swedish coast, 22 miles NW, as shown on the chart. A submarine power cable is laid between Ustka (54°35′N, 16°52′E) and Karlshamn (56°10′N, 14°52′E), as shown on the chart. See 1.71.
Principal marks 1
2
3
2.15 From a position S of Kullagrund (55°18′N, 13°20′E) the track leads E for about 35 miles to a position SE of Svartgrund (55°14′N, 14°15′E) (3.18), then NE for about 15 miles to a position WNW of Davids Banke (55°22′N, 14°41′E) (2.42). Thence the track leads NE for about 85 miles to a position, within the NE-bound lane of the TSS SE of Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse (2.13). The light stands in the middle of Ölands Södra Grund (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E), a shoal area with depths of 12 to 17 m over it, extending 7½ cables NNE and 1½ miles SSE of the lighthouse. For recommended directions of traffic flow in Bornholmsgat, see 2.6. Descriptions of the coastal passages adjacent to this route are given in: Kullagrund to Sandhammaren (3.11). Rønne to Hammer Odde (2.42) (Directions for through route to Gulf of Finland continue at 2.20 and for Gulf of Bothnia at 2.27) (Coastal passage directions for Åhus are given at 3.37, for Sölvesborg at 3.88, for Karlshamn at 3.148, for Karlskrona at 3.208, and for Kalmar at 4.21 and 4.53)
Directions for deep-draught vessels
Submarine power cables 1
Racon: Ölands Södra Grund (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
2.13 Landmarks: Television towers (55°09′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅2E) (2.41). Tower (55°17′⋅2N, 14°45′⋅5E) (2.41). Christiansø Light (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅2E) (2.130). Frederiksø Tower (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅1E) (2.130). Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse (black tower, red bands, grey base, helicopter landing platform, 35 m in height) (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E). Hoburg Lighthouse (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) (2.143). Major lights: Kullagrund Light (55°17′⋅9N, 13°19′⋅5E) (Baltic Pilot Volume I). Sandhammaren Light (55°23′⋅0N, 14°11′⋅8E) (3.15). Hammer Odde Light (55°17′⋅9N, 14°46′⋅4E) (2.41). Christiansø Light (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅2E) (2.130). Hanö Light (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅9E) (3.87). Utklippan Light (55°57′⋅2N, 15°42′⋅2E) (3.206). Utlängan Light (56°00′⋅8N, 15°47′⋅4E) (3.218).
2.16 From a position 18 miles ENE of Christiansø Light (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅2E) (2.130) the recommended channel leads ENE for about 85 miles to a position ESE of Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E) (2.13) passing (with positions from Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse): SSE of Klippbanken (38½ miles WSW); thence: NNW of Södra Midsjöbanken (30 miles SSE) (2.8); thence: Clear of a wreck with a least depth of 21 7 m over it (24 miles ESE), thence: SSE of Norra Midsjöbanken (20 miles ENE) (2.8). Directions continue for deep-draught vessel channel at (2.16)
ÖLAND TO GULF OF FINLAND General information Charts 2251, 2288, 2223, 2222
Routes 1
2
84
2.17 From a position SE of Ölands Södra Grund (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E), in the NE-bound lane of the TSS, the track leads NE, passing through the NE-bound lanes of the TSS SE of Hoburg (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E), and NW of Ristna (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅2E), thence to a position NW of Tahkuna nina (59°46′N, 22°57′E). Deep-draught vessels. From a position ESE of Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E) the
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
recommended channel leads ENE for about 42 miles to a position SSE of Hoburgs Bank (56°41′N, 18°34′E) thence NNE for about 115 miles to a position W of Fårö (57°57′N, 19°10′E). The route passes through a former mined area, see 1.8.
Fårösund S entrance to Gotska Sandön (2.245). Põhja Ristnanina to Tahkuna nina (12.65). (Directions for through routes in the Gulf of Finland continue in Baltic Pilot Volume III) (Directions for KlaipÌda are given at 10.40, for Liepºja at 10.106, for Ventspils at 10.155 and for Irbe Strait at 11.16)
Principal marks 1
2
2.18 Landmarks: Hoburg Lighthouse (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) (2.143). Heligholmen Lighthouse (56°55′⋅4N, 18°17′⋅3E) (2.185). Faludden Lighthouse (56°59′⋅8N, 18°23′⋅7E) (2.185). Mast (56°59′⋅7N, 18°23′⋅5E) (2.185). Windmotors (57°07′⋅1N, 18°25′⋅4E) (2.185). När Lighthouse (57°13′⋅3N, 18°41′⋅0E) (2.185). Torsburgen (57°24′⋅7N, 18°43′⋅2E) (2.185). Major lights: Hoburg Light (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) (2.143). Faludden Light (56°59′⋅8N, 18°23′⋅7E) (2.185). När Light (57°13′⋅3N, 18°41′⋅0E) (2.185). Kpu Light (58°55′⋅0N, 22°12′⋅1E) (12.13).
Directions for deep-draught vessels 1
2
Other aid to navigation 2.19 1
(continued from 2.16) 2.23 From a position about 13 miles SSE of Norra Midsjöbanken (56°11′N, 17°20′E) (2.8) the recommended channel leads ENE for about 42 miles passing (with positions from Hoburg Light (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) (2.13): SE of a wreck, (position doubtful) (42 miles S), with a depth of 23 m over it. From a position about 40 miles SSE of Hoburg Light the recommended channel leads NNE for about 115 miles passing (with positions from Östergarn (57°26′⋅5N, 018°58′⋅5E): SE of Hoburgs Bank (42 miles SSW) (2.8); thence: SE of Klints Bank (20 miles E) (2.21); thence: SE of Fårö (33 miles NNE) (2.237); thence: To a position E of Fårö to join the through route Hoburg to Ristna (2.21).
Racon: Ölands Södra Grund (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
ÖLAND TO GULF OF BOTHNIA General information Charts 2251, 2361, 2362, 2297
Directions
Route
(continued from 2.15) 1
Ölands Södra Grund to Tahkuna nina 1
2
1
1
2
2.20 Öland to Hoburg. From a position about 3 miles SE of Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse, in the NE-bound lane of the TSS, the track leads NE for 72 miles to the TSS SE of Hoburg, passing (with positions from Hoburg Light (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E)): NW of Norra Midsjöbanken (53 miles SSW) (2.8), thence: NW of Hoburgs Bank (24 miles SE) (2.8). Caution. The wreck of a fishing vessel, with a depth over it of 16 m, lies in the SW-bound lane, 9 miles SSE of Hoburg Light. 2.21 Hoburg to Ristna. From a position about 12 miles SE of Hoburg, in the NE-bound lane of the TSS, the track leads NNE for about 180 miles to the TSS off Ristna, passing (with positions from Fårö Lighthouse (57°57′⋅7N, 19°21′⋅1E)): SSE of Östergarn (34 miles SSW) (2.186), thence: NNW of Klints Bank (23 miles SSE), a bank with a least depth of 26 m over it. 2.22 Ristna to Tahkuna nina. From a position 12 miles NW of Põhja Ristna, in the NE-bound lane of the TSS, the track leads NE for about 17 miles to a position NW of Tahkuna nina (59°46′N, 22°57′E). Descriptions of the coastal passages adjacent to this route are given in: Hoburg to Östergarn (2.186). Östergarn to Fårösund (2.206).
2.24 From a position in the NE-bound lane of the TSS, SE of Ölands Södra Grund (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E) (2.15), the track leads initially NNE for about 175 miles to a position ESE of Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E), thence about 72 miles NE to a position E of Svenska Björn (59°32′⋅9N, 20°01′⋅4E). Thence the route leads about 20 miles NW to Ålands Hav (Baltic Pilot Volume III), through Ahvenanmeren Deep Channel, shown on the chart, which has been swept to a least depth of 18⋅0 m, and for which directions are given at 7.257. The route is divided as follows: Ölands Södra Grund to Landsort (2.27). Landsort to Svenska Björn (2.28). Svenska Björn to Ålands Hav (2.29).
Principal marks 1
2
3
85
2.25 Landmarks: Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E) (2.13). Five windmotors (57°02′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅1E) (2.143). Mast (57°35′⋅6N, 18°22′⋅7E) (2.161). Mast (57°49′⋅0N, 18°37′⋅0E) (2.161). Major lights: Ölands Södra Udde Light (56°11′⋅8N, 16°24′⋅0E) (4.19). Hoburg Light (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) (2.143). Stora Karlsö Light (57°17′⋅5N, 17°57′⋅8E) (2.143). Gotska Sandon NW Point Light (58°23′⋅7N, 19°11′⋅8E) (2.244). Landsort Light (58°44′⋅4N, 17°52′⋅1E) (5.171). Almagrundet Light (59°09′⋅3N, 19°07′⋅5E) (7.24). Revengegrundet Light (59°15′⋅1N, 19°00′⋅8E) (7.24).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Svenska Högarna Light (59°26′⋅7N, 19°30′⋅3E) (7.252). Söderarm Light (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅6E) (7.252). Tjärven Light (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅4E) (7.252).
Fårösund N entrance to Gotska Sandön (2.247). Öland to Landsort (5.9, 5.93 and 5.165). (Directions for Oskarshamn are given at 4.161, for Västervik at 5.65, for Norrköping at 5.183, for Oxelösund at 5.183 and for Nyköping at 5.293) (Directions for Södertälje Kanal and ports in Mälaren are given at 6.17)
Other aid to navigation 2.26 1
Racon: Ölands Södra Grund (56°04′⋅2N, 16°40′⋅9E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Landsort to Svenska Björn
Directions
1
(continued from 2.15)
Ölands Södra Grund to Landsort 1
2
3
2.27 From a position in the NE-bound lane of the TSS, SE of Ölands Södra Grund, the track leads NNE passing (with positions from Visby (57°39′N, 18°17′E)): W of Stora Karlsö (24 miles SSW) (2.144), thence: E of Knolls Grund (26 miles WSW) (2.8), thence: E of Nielsengrund (40 miles NNW) (2.8), thence: Clear of a buoy (special) (50 miles N). The buoy marks a survey station, protected by a safety zone with a radius 5 cables, thence:. Clear of a buoy (special) (58 miles N), marking a survey station. Thence to a position ESE of Landsort. Descriptions of the coastal passages adjacent to this route are given in: East coast of Öland (4.198 and 4.206). Hoburg to Nyrevsudden (2.144). Nyrevsudden to Fårösund N entrance (2.162).
2
2.28 From a position ESE of Landsort the track leads NE for about 85 miles passing NW of Kopparstenarna (2.8) and SE of Almagrundet (7.24), to a position E of Svenska Björn at the commencement of the deep-water channel leading to Ålands Hav and Gulf of Bothnia. Descriptions of the coastal passages adjacent to this route are given in: Landsort to Sandhamn Entrance coastal route (7.20). Sandhamn Entrance to Simpnäsklubb coastal passage (7.246). (Directions for Stockholm from Sandhamn Entrance, main deep-water channel, are given at 7.135, from Landsort Entrance at 7.43, from Söderarm Entrance at 7.288 and from Arholma Entrance at 7.335)
Svenska Björn to Ålands Hav 1
2.29 Directions for the Ahvenanmeren Deep-water channel are given at 7.257. (Directions for Ålands Hav and Gulf of Bothnia continue in Baltic Pilot Volume III)
BORNHOLM AND CHRISTIANSØ Hazard
GENERAL INFORMATION 1
Chart 958
Description 1
2
2.32 Anchoring and fishing may be dangerous in several areas, shown on the charts, off the coast of Bornholm, due to mines, gas canisters or aircraft wreckage. See also 1.8.
Pollution of the sea
2.30 The island of Bornholm (55°08′N, 14°55′E), together with Christiansø, a small group of islets 10 miles NE, lie about 20 miles off the Swedish coast. The islands, which belong to Denmark, are principally concerned with agriculture and fishing, though granite, which is a prominent feature of the cliffs, is exported. Bornholm is separated from Sweden by Bornholmsgat (2.6). Though having no natural harbours, it affords shelter either at anchor or under its lee on all sides. The island is moderately high except at its SE end. Its highest point is Rytterknaegten, near the middle of the island. The coast of Bornholm is generally steep-to, except off the SW side and off the S part of the E side.
1
2.33 Due to the non-tidal nature of these waters, the Danish authorities are extremely rigorous in the application of anti-pollution regulations. See 1.72.
Ice 1
2.34 For the Danish ice-breaking service see 1.117.
Deep-sea pilots 1
2.35 Danish long-distance pilots, for ships proceeding to Baltic ports, and for ships leaving Baltic Sea, may be embarked off Hammer Odde, as shown on the chart. For full details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Natural conditions Rønne Banke 1
2.31 Rønne Banke, with general depths of 11 to 17 m over it, extends 28 miles from the SW coast of Bornholm towards the peninsula of Rügen (8.15). For the shoals on the inner part of Rønne Banke see 2.106 and 2.107. For Adlergrund, which lies at the SW end of Rønne Banke, and which is very shallow, see 8.13.
1
86
2.36 Local magnetic anomalies. Caution must be exercised in the vicinity of Bornholm owing to magnetic anomalies. These are most marked NNW of Hammer Odde (55°18′N, 14°47′E) (2.40) where a deflection of 6° has been observed whilst passing this point. Other areas in the vicinity (with positions from Hammer Odde):
Home
Contents
Index Route Index Chartlet - Bornholm 30´
40´
15°
50´
10´
20´
20´
20´
958
Christiansø 2.132
Hammerodde
BORNHOLMSGAT
2.
Allinge 2.78
76
Vang 2.60
2.42
Gudhejem
2.7
Hasle 2.52
6 10´
87 Svaneke 2.85
BORNHOLM
958
2.112
Rønne 2.44
7
10
2.
Nexø 2.118
958
2.1 12
2.106
958
55°
Rønne Banke
2.10
7
958
2.106 0205
30´
40´
50´
55°
Dueodde
Longitude 15° East from Greenwich
10´
20´
CHAPTER 2
10´
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
2
3
Well-marked maxima (5 miles W). Off Svaneke (16 miles SE), on the E coast. Small deviations from the normal SW of Rønne (12 miles S). On the NW coast in the vicinity of Hasle (7 miles SSW). Current. The current round Bornholm is usually weak and is dependent on the direction and force of wind. Off Hammeren (2.40), a strong S-going current has been observed in NW winds.
Principal marks 1
2
Firing practice and exercise areas 1
2.37 Three areas around Bornholm are designated firing areas. They are centred in positions 55°00′N, 13°55′E; 55°20′N, 15°30′E; 55°05′N, 15°40′E. For further information see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3 (1).
3
Submarine cables 1
2.38 Several submarine cables, including power cables, as shown on the chart, are landed on the W and S coasts of Bornholm. Those landing close N of Rønne are marked by telegraph beacons.
4
Passage directions
BORNHOLM WEST COAST — RØNNE TO HAMMER ODDE
1
General information Chart 958 with plan of Rønne
Description 1
2.41 Landmarks: Kongemindet (55°06′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅3E), a monument 12 m in height on the summit of Rytterknaegten (2.30). It is visible above the trees of Almindingen in which it stands. Rø Aero Light (TV mast, elevation 431 m) (55°09′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅2E). Årsballe Aero Light (mast, elevation 290 m) stands 8 cables SSW of Rø Aero Light. Hammershus Ruin (55°16′⋅3N, 14°45′⋅3E) stands above a solitary cliff 2 miles S of the N extremity of Bornholm. It consists of high walls and the remains of towers, the highest being square with embrasures; a building 1½ cables NE of the ruin is prominent from seaward. Rutskirke, (55°12′⋅9N, 14°45′⋅0E), standing on a hill 130 m high has a square granite tower; close SW is a small white square belfry. It is one of the best landmarks on the island. Tower (round granite tower, 21 m in height) (55°17′⋅2N, 14°45′⋅5E), a disused lighthouse obscured from the S by high land. Major lights: Hammer Odde Light (white square tower, 12 m in height) (55°17′⋅9N, 14°46′⋅4E). Sandhammaren Light (55°23′⋅0N, 14°11′⋅6E) (3.15).
2.39 The W coast of Bornholm is the least hospitable on account of the prevailing W winds and the reefs and rocks which front it, especially in the S part.
2
2.42 For the coastal passage from Rønne to Hammer Odde, some 15 miles N, the chart is sufficient guide. Attention is drawn to: Hvideodde Rev, a reef with depths of less than 10 m, which extends 1 mile NNW of Hvideodde, a sandy point 1½ miles N of Rønne. It is marked on its W and S sides by buoys (cardinal). The inner part of the reef has depths of less than 1 m, rock, sand and stones, and extends 6 cables WNW from the point. Kasgård Rev, 8 cables SW of Hvideodde. Davids Banke (55°22′N, 14°41′E), marked by a light-buoy (N cardinal), rock, sand and gravel; its E and W sides are steep-to.
Topography 1
2
3
Useful marks
2.40 Between Rønne (55°06′N, 14°42′E) and Hasle, 4 miles N, the coast is bordered by forest. Between Nyker Rev, 3 miles N of Rønne, and Hasle, the coast is low and steep-to, but the shoreline is covered with large stones. To the N of Hasle there are stretches of steep granite cliffs rising sheer from the sea to a height of 90 m in places. Hammeren, the N and rocky part of Bornholm, consists of a hill 82 m high, named Stejlebjerg, situated 1 mile S of Hammer Odde, the N point of the island; it is steep-to on its SW side, but slopes gradually NE, and is separated from the land in the vicinity by a valley. Hammer Odde (55°18′N, 14°47′E), the N extremity of Bornholm, is composed of sand and when seen from a long distance E or W, appears like a low island; this point is steep-to and great caution is necessary at night as the high land behind it renders it very difficult to distinguish.
2.43 1
2
3
88
Knudskirke (55°06′⋅4N, 14°45′⋅2E), built of granite with a square tower, stands on a hill 70 m high, and is visible from a considerable distance. Vester-Mariekirke, 2½ miles E of Knudskirke, visible only on certain bearings but at a considerable distance from land. Nykirke, 2 miles NNE of Knudskirke, a low whitewashed building, visible only on certain bearings. Chimney (red obstruction light on top, elevation 126 m), and radio mast (red lights), standing 1 and 2¼ miles, respectively, NW of Knudskirke. Hasle Church (55°11′⋅0N, 14°42′⋅5E), standing in the middle of town, has a black steeple. There is a windmill close S of the town, and a wind-motor close N which is not visible from the S.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Ronne Havn from S (2.47) (Original dated 2003) (Photograph − Kort & Matrikelstyrelsen)
Klemenskirke (55°10′⋅5N, 14°48′⋅2E), which has a short steeple; it is best seen from the SW. Simlegaard, a hill 8 cables WNW of Klemenskirke, has a trigonometrical station at its summit. (Directions continue at 2.76)
2
Rønne General information 1
2
3
2.44 Description. Rønne (55°06′N, 14°42′E) is the principal town of Bornholm. Close E of the town is a large kaolin works and stone quarries. The harbour is a good refuge for vessels overtaken by ice. Nørre-kås, a yacht and small craft harbour for vessels up to 20 m in length, is situated close N of Rønne Havn and is under the same administration. Function. The principal exports are clay, granite, grain and bricks. Imports include oil, coal, iron and timber. The population is about 15 000. The port has been designated a place of refuge, see 1.83. Approach and entry. The port is approached from the SW on the alignment of leading lights, and entered between breakwaters through a channel dredged to a depth of 9 m. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 675 vessels totalling 1 054 972 dwt. Port Authority. Rønne Havnekontor, Munch Petersensvej 2, PO Box 47, DK–3700, Rønne, Denmark. website: www.roennehavn.dk
Arrival information 1
2
3
2.46 Anchorage. It is reported that anchorage can be obtained 6 cables W of the N breakwater head in a depth of 15 to 16 m. The anchorage is not safe in strong W winds. Pilotage is available by day and night. At least 1 hours notice is required. Pilotage is compulsory for tankers over 1500 dwt. Pilot boards near Rønne Approach Light-buoy (55°05′⋅1N, 14°38′⋅6E) (2.49), moored 1½ miles SW of the harbour entrance. Tugs are available. Radar assistance. Advice on entering can be obtained from the pilot station at the SW part of Sydhavnen. Speed for vessels in the harbour must not exceed 3 kn.
Harbour 1
Limiting conditions 1
Water level. The normal mean tidal range is 0⋅5 m. Abnormal water level. In exceptional circumstances W winds may lower the level by up to 1 m, and winds from E or N may raise it by up to 1⋅2 m. Density of water: 1⋅005 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled. Length 238 m, beam 32 m, draught 8⋅0 m. Weather. The port may be dangerous to approach in strong W winds.
2.45 Controlling depth. The channel is dredged to a depth of 9 m. Deepest and longest berth. Krydstogtkaj, see 2.50.
89
2.47 General layout. The harbour is protected by inner and outer N and S breakwaters. The outer N breakwater extends about 8 cables SW to enclose Rønne and Nørre-kås harbours, forming part of an extensive land reclamation and development works in progress (2000). Within the inner breakwater the harbour has three main basins around the central area known as Forhavnen. The basins are named Nordhavnen, Vesthavnen and Sydhavnen.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Ronne Havn from NW (2.47) (Original dated 2003) (Photograph − Kort & Matrikelstyrelsen)
1
2
2.48 Landmarks: Rønne Church (55°06′⋅0N, 14°41′⋅8E) (white with a red roof and black steeple), stands on a knoll at the NE end of the harbour. Methodist Church (grey with a red roof and a steeple), stands a short distance NE of Rønne Church. Rønne Castle (55°05′⋅6N, 14°42′⋅0E) (white round building with a red conical roof), 4 cables S of Rønne Church. Chimney (red light, elevation 73 m), stands close NE of the castle.
4
Basins and berths 1
Directions 1
2
3
Rear light (red mast, 12 m in height) (229 m from front light). Lights are displayed at the heads of both the N and S inner and outer breakwaters and from the inner mole. Caution. Care should be taken to remain within the dredged channel, shown on the chart, to avoid Trindelen, a rocky shoal patch on the N side of the channel close W of the inner breakwater.
2.49 North approach. Set course to arrive off Rønne Approach Light-buoy (safe water) (55°05′⋅1N, 14°38′⋅6E), keeping 2½ miles off the coast until clear of Hvideodde Rev (2.42) and Kasgård Rev (2.42). South approach. Set course to arrive off Rønne Approach Light-buoy, keeping W of the shoals which lie up to 5 miles off the SW coast of Bornholm (see 2.107). South-east approach. Local knowledge is required. Vessels of shallow draught can use a buoyed channel inside the shoals off the SW coast (see 2.107). Entry. From the vicinity of Rønne Approach Light-buoy the alignment (064½°) of Rønne Leading Lights leads through the dredged channel between the heads of the breakwaters and into the main harbour: Front light (framework tower, 14 m in height) (55°05′⋅9N, 14°41′⋅8E).
2
3
4
90
2.50 Forhavnen, the central part of the harbour, is dredged to 9 m. Depths decrease to the E of Forhavnen but have been dredged to a depth of 7 m up to a line between the centre part of Øernes Kaj and the seaward end of the Oliekaj on the S side of the harbour. Krydstogtskajen, the passenger berth, lies on the SE side of Forhavnen and has a total length of 240 m with a depth alongside of 9 m. Vesthavnen, on the N side of the harbour E of Trindelen Breakwater, is protected by a spur extending SE from Trindelen. It has 650 m of wharfs with a depth of 7 m alongside. The longest berth is 175 m and has a hydraulic ramp. Nordhavnen is divided into two basins by a broad quay and protected from the S by Øernes Kaj. There are depths of 6 to 7 m in the W basin, and 5⋅5 m in the E basin. It has 750 m of berthing space and two Ro-Ro ramps. The longest berth is 140 m with depths of 5⋅5 to 6⋅5 m alongside. Sydhavnen on the S side of the harbour is enclosed between Tværmolen, which extends NNE from the root of the S breakwater, and Søndre Pier. It has 620 m of berthing space which includes the outside of Søndre Pier which is
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
5
220 m in length, with a depth of 7 m alongside. A basin for fishing vessels opens on the SW side of Sydhavnen. Oliekaj close NE of Søndre Pier has a length of 100 m and a depth alongside of 7 m. Boat camber. Close SE of the root of Øernes Kaj, the S side of which has a sloping stone face and is not suitable for berthing, is a boat camber with a depth of 1⋅8 m. A buoyed channel with a depth of 2⋅4 m leads to the camber. There is a boat pier 80 m ENE of the head of the Oliekaj.
2
Port services 1
2
2.51 Repairs. Engineering workshops for all types of repairs. Largest slip: for vessels up to 400 tons, keel length 40 m LOA, width 7⋅75 m. Diver assistance can be obtained. Other facilities: compass adjustment; deratting; oily and chemical waste reception facilities. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Regional airport 8½ km SE of Rønne. Rescue. A life-saving station equipped with line throwing apparatus, mobile equipment and fast rescue craft is located at Rønne.
1
thence at least 1 mile from the coast until within the white sector of Hasle Havn front light. North approach. Vessels approaching from the N should maintain sufficient distance from the coast until within the white sector of Hasle Havn front light, noting the patch of foul ground with a least depth of 3 m, extending 2½ cables from the shore a short distance N of Hasle Havn. Entry. From a position within the white sector (093°–101°) of the front light, the alignment (097°) of Hasle Havn Leading Lights leads E through a dredged channel to a point N of the entrance through the outer breakwaters where the entrance is 80 m wide: Front light (red triangle, white band on framework tower, 5 m in height) (55°11′⋅4N, 14°42′⋅1E). Rear light (red triangle, white band on framework tower, 6 m in height) (120 m E of front light). 2.57 Useful marks: West Breakwater head (framework tower, green base, 6 m in height). North Breakwater head (grey mast, 5 m in height). Inside Mole head (grey pedestal, 2 m in height).
Basins Hasle Havn 1
General information 1
2.52 Position. Hasle (55°11′N, 14°42′E) is a small harbour situated 5 miles N of Rønne. Approach and entry. The harbour is approached with the aid of leading lights and entered from the N through the outer breakwaters. Port Authority. Hasle Havn, Havnen 23,, DK–3790 Hasle, Denmark. E-Mail
[email protected]
2
Limiting conditions 1
2
2.53 Controlling depths. The charted depth between the inner breakwaters is 5⋅5 m. In Basins 3 and 4 the charted depth is 4⋅5 m, and in Basins 1 and 2 it is 4⋅0 m. Abnormal water levels. Gales from the W may lower the water level by 0⋅8 m, and NE gales tend to raise it by the same amount. Maximum size of vessel. Length 75 m, breadth 12 m and draught 4⋅5 m.
2.58 The harbour consists of five basins: Basin 1, whilst primarily reserved for fishing vessels, is equipped to handle other cargoes and has a depth of 4⋅0 m. Basin 2, which has a depth of 4⋅0 m, is reserved for fishing vessels. Basin 3, which has a depth of 5 m, is reserved for fishing vessels. Basin 4, which has a depth of 5 m, is used for bulk and general cargoes. Basin 5, which has depths of 1⋅5 to 3 m, is a small craft harbour with yacht facilities.
Port services 2.59 1
Repairs. Minor repairs possible. Facilities: reception for oily and chemical waste available. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communication. There is a regional airport at Rønne (2.51).
Arrival information 1
Vang Pier
2.54 Pilotage. The Harbour Master will act as pilot if required. Speed. A speed restriction of 4 kn applies in the harbour area outside Basin 5 where the limit is 3 kn.
General information 1
Harbour 1
2.55 General layout. Hasle Havn is enclosed by outer and inner breakwaters and has five basins. Lights are displayed from the outer breakwaters which are also floodlit. Caution. A submarine cable is laid between the heads of the outer breakwaters.
Limiting conditions
Directions 1
2.60 Position. Vang Pier (55°14′⋅8N, 14°43′⋅7E) is situated about 2 cables SW of Vang (2.70). Function. The pier is used exclusively for the export of granite. It has also been designated a place of refuge, see 1.83. Port Authority. The pier is administratively under the control of Hasle Havn (2.52).
1
2.56 South approach. Vessels approaching from the S should keep W of Kasgård Rev (2.42) and Hvideodde Rev (2.42),
91
2.61 Abnormal water level. N storms can raise the level by 1⋅0 m and W winds lower it by 0⋅5 m. Maximum size of vessel permitted is 100 m long and 15 m breadth.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Entry. The harbour can only be used by day and cannot be entered in onshore gales.
Arrival information 1
2.62 Pilotage. Although not compulsory, the services of a pilot are strongly recommended, especially for larger vessels. Pilots are available from Hasle (2.52). Berthing is possible day and night.
Vang 1
Harbour 1
2.63 General layout. The harbour consists of a pier about 150 m long projecting WNW from the shore with about 80 m of berthing face at the NW corner. A breakwater is constructed from the S side of the pier, curving round to extend N for about 200 m to form protection for the berths from all but N winds. The breakwater head is about 120 m NW of the berths.
2
Directions 1
2.64 Approach. The harbour can be approached from the N, W or S in open water. Entry. The harbour is entered from the N.
3
Berths 1
2.65 The berths lie E-W and N-S with depths alongside of 5⋅7 m on the N face and 7⋅5 m on the W face.
Hammerhavnen 1
Port services 1
2.66 Repairs: minor repairs can be carried out; divers are available. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions.
2
Anchorages and harbours Anchorage 1
2.67 Vessels may obtain anchorage anywhere off the W coast of Bornholm between Hasle (55°11′N, 14°42′E) (2.52), and Hammeren, 6 miles N, in depths of 20 to 30 m, with offshore winds. Should the wind shift to the W then the vessel must proceed to sea. Sæne Bugt (2.71) affords anchorage, 2½ cables offshore, close S of Hammeren. Local knowledge is required. Vessels anchoring farther S on this coast are liable to lose their anchors on account of the uneven rocky bottom.
3
4
Helligpeder 1
2
2.70 General information. Vang (55°14′⋅9N, 14°44′⋅1E), 2 miles NNE of Teglkås, is a fishing village with a small harbour consisting of an outer basin, an inner basin and a boat camber. It is suitable for vessels with a maximum length of 27 m, beam 7 m and draught 3 m. Water level. NE winds can raise the level by 1⋅0 m and SW winds can lower it by 0⋅6 m. Pilots may be obtained from Hasle. Directions. From a position NNW of the harbour the alignment (155°) of Vang Havn Leading Lights (which are extinguished when the port is closed) leads into the entrance, passing close off the E side of the W mole: Front light (white post, 2 m in height) (55°15′⋅0N, 14°42′⋅1E). Rear light (mast, 5 m in height) (56 m from front light). Harbour. There are depths of 3⋅1 m in the outer and inner basins and 2⋅2 m in the boat camber. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
2.68 General information. Helligpeder (55°12′⋅8N, 14°42′⋅4E) 1½ miles N of Hasle, is a small harbour consisting of an inner and outer basin. The maximum draught is 1⋅8 m. Water level. NE winds can raise the level by 1⋅0 m and SW winds can lower it by 0⋅6 m. Entry. The harbour should only be used by day and should not be attempted in onshore gales. Foul ground extends to the N and NW of the harbour. Facilities. Water is available.
2.71 General information. Hammerhavnen (55°16′⋅7N, 14°45′⋅4E) lies at the head of Sæne Bugt. The harbour is formed by two moles. The entrance between the heads faces W and is 30 m wide. The size of vessels which can use the harbour depends on the weather conditions which affect the water level, which may be lowered by 0⋅3 m in SW winds and raised by 1 m in NW gales. In favourable conditions the largest vessel which can enter is 50 m in length, breadth 15 m and draught 2⋅7 m. Silting occurs in both the harbour and the entrance and charted depths may not always be accurate. Pilots are not available. Harbour. The harbour consists of a single basin with a greatest depth of 4⋅5 m just off the middle of the quay which is the inner wall of the N mole. The quay is 120 m long and has depths alongside of 3⋅6 to 1⋅6 m. Directions. The harbour is approached from the WSW and entered between moles. At night, keep within the white sector (073°–077°) of Hammerhavnen Harbour Light (white wooden hut, 3 m in height) displayed from the E side of the harbour. Thence, alter course N round a short spur which projects E into the harbour from the head of the N mole; the depths a short distance from it shoal rapidly. A light (framework tower) is displayed from the head of the N mole. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions.
BORNHOLM NORTH-EAST COAST — HAMMER ODDE TO SVANEKE General information
Teglkås 1
Chart 958
2.69 General information. Teglkås (55°13′⋅4N, 14°42′⋅7E) 2 miles N of Hasle, is a small harbour consisting of an inner and outer basin. It has a depth of 2⋅5 m both at the entrance and in the basins. Water level. North-east winds can raise the level by 1⋅0 m and SW winds can lower it by 0⋅6 m.
Description 1
92
2.72 The coastal bank on the NE side of the island is mostly steep-to, except at Helligdomskipperne, 6½ miles SE of Hammer Odde, where, with two rocks on it, it extends 1 cable from the coast.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Maximum size. The largest vessels which can enter are: Outer basin; length 60 m, beam 11⋅5 m, draught 4⋅3 m. Inner basin; length 50 m, beam 8⋅5 m, draught 4⋅0 m.
Topography 1
2.73 The E side of Hammeren (2.40) is rocky and rises steeply to a height of 91 m. At Rø (55°13′N, 14°55′E), 7 miles SE of Hammer Odde, and near Randkløve, 5½ miles farther SE, cliffs rise vertically from the sea. The NE promontory of Bornholm, on which stands the town of Svaneke (2.85), is comparatively low and rises to an elevation of 61 m, W of the town. The promontory has three salient points of which the N and S are named Møllenakke and Sandkås Odde, respectively.
Arrival information 1
Harbour
Climatic table 1
1
2.74 See 1.284 and 1.285
Principal marks 1
2
1
2.80 The harbour can be used both day and night but during the summer months regular ferry traffic may close the harbour.
2.75 Landmarks: Olskirke (55°14′⋅1N, 14°48′⋅1E), a round white building with a black roof, with an elevation of 110 m. Television towers (55°09′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅2E) (2.41). Kure Mølle (55°08′⋅2N, 15°05′⋅5E), standing on high ground 2 miles W of Svaneke, is an excellent landmark especially from the SE. Kongemindet (55°06′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅3E) (2.41). Major lights: Hammer Odde Light (55°17′⋅9N, 14°46′⋅4E) (2.41). Christiansø Light (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅2E) (2.130). Svaneke Lighthouse (grey square tower, 18 m in height) (55°07′⋅9N, 15°09′⋅1E) on Sandkås Odde (2.73).
2
2.81 General layout. The harbour entrance faces SE but it is protected by a breakwater which extends NE from the shore. The harbour consists of an outer and inner basin, separated by a lock gate. Vessels can lie in safety in the inner basin during onshore gales. Traffic signals. When the harbour is closed to navigation a signal consisting of a black ball by day, or three red lights displayed vertically by night, is shown from the same mast as the front leading light.
Directions
Passage directions
2.82 Allinge Leading Lights: Front light (grey mast, 3 m in height) (55°16′⋅7N, 14°48′⋅1E). Rear light (grey framework tower, 4 m in height) (47 m from front light). The alignment (250°) of these lights leads from seaward to the harbour entrance. 2.83 Useful mark. Allinge Church, which has a red square tower. It can only be distinguished from the other buildings in the village at close range.
(continued from 2.43)
Port services
1
1
2.76 For the coastal passage from Hammer Odde to Svaneke, about 17 miles SE, the chart is sufficient guide.
2.84 1
Useful marks
Repairs: minor repairs only. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions. Communications: Rønne airport is 30 km by road.
Svaneke
2.77 1
Røkirke (55°12′⋅6N, 14°53′⋅8E), with an elevation of 95 m. Its tower is visible from seaward, but only on certain bearings. Øster-Larskirke (55°10′⋅3N, 14°57′⋅7E), with an elevation of 100 m. Svaneke Church (55°08′⋅0N, 15°08′⋅5E), a low building with a black steeple, stands in the middle of the town.
General information 1
Limiting conditions 1
Allinge General information 1
2.78 Position. Allinge (55°16′⋅5N, 14°48′⋅2E) is situated 1¾ miles SSE of Hammer Odde. Port Authority. Allinge Havnekontor, DK–3770 Allinge, Bornholm.
2.86 Controlling depths. The entrance channel and outer harbour have a depth of 4⋅4 m. The inner harbour has a depth of 3⋅5 m. Abnormal water level. Prolonged NE winds can raise the level by 1 m, S and SW winds can lower it by 1 m. Largest vessel which can use the harbour is length 45 m, breadth 8⋅5 m.
Arrival information 1
Limiting conditions 1
2.85 Position. Svaneke (55°08′N, 15°09′E) is situated at the head of a small bay close NW of Sandkås Odde. Port Authority. See Nexø (2.118).
2.79 Depths. The outer basin has a depth of 4⋅5 m and the inner basin a depth of 4⋅3 m. Abnormal water level may be lowered with SW winds or raised with NE winds, in both instances, by up to 1 m.
2.87 Pilotage. Pilots are available by day and require 24, 12 and 4 hours notice prior to arrival. Tugs. Local fishing boats may assist with towage.
Harbour 1
93
2.88 General layout. The harbour consists of two basins, the outer and the inner reached through an entrance channel
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
2
which leads WNW. A small boat harbour lies ESE of the outer harbour and is entered from the N side of the entrance channel. There is a gate between the outer and inner harbour to keep out the swell. Traffic signals. If the harbour is closed due to weather, or no berths are available, a black ball by day, or three red lights vertically disposed by night, will be shown from a mast N of the entrance. If the gate between the inner and outer harbour is closed, a fixed white light will be shown below the front leading light.
2
Kampeløkkehavnen 1
Directions 1
2
3
2.89 Approach. The recommended approach is from the NE, on a line of bearing of about 215° of Svaneke Havn Light (green square wooden building, red band, 4 m in height) (55°08′⋅1N, 15°08′⋅7E), which leads clear of Mågeflak, a cluster of rocks which lie on the S side of the bay, 1 cable offshore. By night approach within the white sector (208½°–222°) of this light. Entry. Svaneke Leading Lights: Front light (grey post) (55°08′⋅2N, 15°08′⋅7E). Rear light (grey post, 3 m in height) (18 m from front light). The alignment (297°) of these lights leads through the entrance into the outer harbour passing close S of the N breakwater head on which stands a light (green metal column, 5 m in height). Caution. Vessels should not approach from the E using the leading line as this leads over Mågeflak.
1
2
2.90 Length of quay 231 m with a depth of 4⋅4 m.
Port services 1
2.91 Repairs. Slip for vessels up to 50 dwt. Minor repairs only. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
3
Anchorages and harbours Anchorages 1
2
2.92 Vessels may anchor off the NE side of Bornholm with offshore winds. Should a fresh wind blow from W of N, a considerable swell is immediately raised along this coast. In Åsand Bugt (55°17′⋅5N, 14°47′⋅0E), close S of Hammer Odde (2.40), anchorage may be obtained in the middle of the bay in depths of 9 to 11 m. Local knowledge is required. In Salene Bugt (55°13′N, 14°57′E), anchorage may be obtained in the middle of the bay in depths of 9 to 11 m. Local knowledge is required.
4
5
Sandvig Havn 1
2.94 Kampeløkkehavnen (55°16′⋅9N, 14°47′⋅9E) is a small harbour, consisting of two basins, situated 1 cable N of Allinge (2.78). It is only suitable for use by day by craft with a length of 7 m, a beam of 2 m and a draught of 1 m. Entry is on the alignment of beacons (white triangles), which lead clear of dangers into the harbour. Depths are 1⋅4 m in the entrance and 1⋅2 m in the basins.
Tejn
Berth 1
Directions. The alignment (175°) of Sandvig Leading Lights leads from seaward to the harbour entrance: Front light (white building) (55°17′⋅4N, 14°47′⋅0E). Rear light (white building) Caution. A below-water rock lies close E of the entrance. Supplies: fresh water; provisions.
2.93 General information. Sandvig Havn (55°17′⋅4N, 14°47′⋅0E) is a boat harbour on the S side of Åsand Bugt. It consists of two basins formed by moles with an entrance facing NNW. It is inaccessible during onshore gales. Depths: entrance 1⋅8 m; outer harbour 1⋅5 m; inner harbour 1⋅0 m. Water level. North and NE winds can raise the water level by 1⋅0 m, W winds can lower it by 0⋅8 m.
2.95 General information. Tejn (55°14′⋅9N, 14°50′⋅2E), is a fishing village 2½ miles SSE of Allinge. The harbour comprises an outer basin and four inner basins. It is protected by a breakwater which extends NW from the coast for about 1¼ cables; a light (red framework tower, 5 m in height) is displayed at its head. The harbour has been designated a place of refuge, see 1.83. Water level. Winds from W and SW lower the water level by 0⋅6 m, and E winds raise it by the same amount. Anchorage may be obtained in depths of 11 to 13 m, 6 cables N of the harbour entrance. Pilotage. Local knowledge is required. The Harbour Master serves as a pilot. Approach. The harbour is approached on a line of bearing, about 182°, of Tejn Sector Light (framework tower on building, 7 m in height) (55°15′⋅0N, 14°50′⋅1E). By night, approach within the white sector (160°–204°) of this light. Entry. Tejn Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, point up, on metal framework tower, 6 m in height) (55°14′⋅9N, 14°50′⋅3E). Rear light (red triangle, point down, on metal framework tower) (42 m from front light). The alignment (144½°) of these lights leads between the breakwaters to the outer harbour. Basins. The outer basin, known as Forhavn, has a depth of 5 m. Shoal water extending into the basin from the east breakwater is marked by three buoys (port hand). Within the inner harbour there are three basins, Vestbassin, Midterbassin and Østbassin, with depths of 4⋅2 m, 5⋅0 m and 3⋅8 to 2⋅4 m respectively. These are reserved exclusively for fishing vessels. To the N of Østbassin within the inner harbour, there is a yacht basin with depths of 2⋅5 to 1⋅5 m. Repair. Slip for vessels up to 400 dwt. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Harbour regulations. Fishing vessels have priority in Vestbassin, Midterbassin and Østbassin.
Nørresand Havn 1
94
2.96 General information. Nørresand Havn (Gudhjem N Harbour) (55°12′⋅9N, 14°58′⋅0E) is a harbour for fishing vessels. It is situated at Sorteodde, the E extremity of a small peninsula, 80 m high, at the E end of Salne Bugt, 4½ miles SE of Tjen. The harbour can be used by day and night.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
2
3
4
Largest vessel which can use the harbour is length about 35 m, beam about 10 m and draught about 3 m. Water level. S and W winds lower the level of water, N and E winds cause it to rise. Pilots are available. Current. The current usually depends upon the direction and force of the wind. Directions. Leading Lights: Front light (post, 3 m in height) (55°12′⋅9N, 14°58′⋅1E). Rear light (mast, 9 m in height) (58 m from front light). The alignment (120°) of these lights leads from seaward into the harbour. Berths. The harbour consists of a single basin with a depth of 3⋅6 m. Repairs. Minor repairs only. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
3
Bølshavn 1
2
3
4
1
2.97 General information. Gudhjem S Harbour (55°12′⋅8N, 14°58′⋅3E) is situated close SE of Sorteodde (2.96). The outer moles are built of granite and are about 2⋅5 m high; they are extended in height to 4 m by a shelter wall built on top. The harbour consists of three basins. The harbour entrance, outer and middle basins have a depth of 4 m and the inner basin a depth of 2 m. In rough weather with onshore winds, the entrance between the outer and middle harbour can be closed by a sliding gate. Largest vessel which can use the harbour is length 40 m and draught 3⋅8 m. Water level. Winds between N and E can raise the water level by about 0⋅5 m and winds between S and W can lower the water level by the same amount. Pilots are available. Traffic signal. When the harbour is closed to navigation, a red ball is hoisted on a mast on the N mole and at night the leading lights are extinguished. Current depends on the force and direction of the wind. Directions. Leading lights: Front light (red triangle, point up, on mast) (55°12′⋅8N, 14°58′⋅3E). Rear light (red triangle, point down, on mast) (30 m from front light). The alignment (202°) of these lights leads from seaward into the harbour. The entrance is 11 m wide. Useful marks. Visible at a short distance are: Gudhjem Church (55°12′⋅7N, 14°58′⋅3E). Windmill (white, without sails) near harbour. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
2
3
2
2.100 General information. Listed Havn (55°08′⋅8N, 15°06′⋅6E), 6 miles SE of Gudhjem, is a safe harbour of refuge for small craft. In its vicinity the coast is fringed with foul ground which extends ½ cable from the shore and is steep-to. Water level. Winds from the NW, through N to E may raise the water level by 0⋅7 m. Winds from the SW through W to NW may lower the water level by the same amount. Pilots. Local fishermen act as pilots. Directions. Listed Havn Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, point up, white band on framework tower, 8 m in height) (55°08′⋅8N, 15°06′⋅5E). Rear light (red triangle, point down, white band on framework tower, 9 m in height) (25 m from front light). From a position not less than 3 cables NNE of the front light, the alignment (201½°) of these lights leads from seaward to the harbour entrance. When clear of the N breakwater alter course to the E through the entrance which is 10 m wide. Caution. There are a number of rocks outside the harbour. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
BORNHOLM SOUTH-WEST COAST — RØNNE TO DUEODDE General information Chart 958
Description
Melsted 1
2.99 Bølshavn (55°09′⋅5N, 15°04′⋅4E), 5 miles SE of Gudhjem, is a small fishing harbour formed by two stone jetties, with depths of 1⋅2 m in and within the entrance.
Listed Havn
Gudhjem South Harbour 1
Front light (red triangle, point up, on mast, 4 m in height) (55°12′⋅3N, 14°58′⋅9E). Rear light (red triangle, point down, on mast, 5 m in height) (30 m from front light). Thence, when about 130 m from the front light, alter course S through a short approach channel leading into the harbour, keeping W of the edge of Melsted Rev which extends 2 cables offshore, close E of the harbour; a 0⋅3 m shoal patch is marked by a buoy (port hand). Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 9 to 11 m, on the flat, SE of Melsted.
1
2.98 General information. Melsted (55°12′⋅3N, 14°59′⋅0E), situated 5 cables SSE of Gudhjem, is a boat harbour, with a depth of 1⋅4 m. It is formed by two moles, each about 3 m wide and 1 m high. The harbour can be used by day and night, but not during onshore storms. Water level. Winds between N and E give high water and winds between S and W low water. Local knowledge is required. Directions. The alignment (208°) of Melsted Leading Lights leads from seaward to the entrance of the approach channel:
2.101 The coastal bank, as can be seen on the chart, extends farther offshore than from the other coasts. In places it is partially obstructed by rocks. Between Raghammer Odde (55°00′⋅9N, 14°55′⋅6E) and Dueodde, the coastal bank extends up to 5 cables from the shore, with a bottom of sand and rock.
Topography 1
95
2.102 The SW coast of Bornholm consists mostly of cliffs, from 12 to 18 m high, except between Rønne and Galgeløkke Odde, about 1 mile SE, where it is higher. Between Galgeløkke Odde and Korsodde, 1½ miles SE, the coast is wooded.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Exercise area 1
2.103 Three buoys (special), marking the limits of a firing practice area, are positioned 2½ miles W, 2¼ miles SSW, and 2¾ miles SE of Raghammer Odde (55°00′⋅9N, 14°55′⋅6E). A signal station stands on the coast about 7 cables N of Raghammer Odde, and a ball is hoisted at each of two signal masts situated 1 mile SE and 8 cables NW of Raghammer Odde when firing is in progress.
4
Prohibited area 1
2.104 An area, in which entry is prohibited, is centred on position 55°02′⋅3N, 14°37′⋅9E, as shown on the chart.
Principal marks 1
2
1
2.105 Landmarks: Kongemindet (55°06′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅3E) (2.41). Television towers (55°09′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅2E) (2.41). Rønne Airport Control Tower (yellow, 24 m in height) (55°04′⋅2N, 14°44′⋅9E), from which an aero light is displayed. Julegård (white building) (55°02′⋅4N, 14°51′⋅8E). Tower (grey, square, 18 m in height) (55°01′⋅4N, 14°56′⋅0E). Dueodde Tower (granite, circular, 39 m in height) (55°00′⋅1N, 15°04′⋅4E), a former lighthouse. Dueodde Lighthouse (white six-sided tower, 47 m in height) (54°59′⋅5N, 15°04′⋅5E). Major light: Dueodde Light — as above.
2
Useful marks 2.109 1
Directions Offshore route 1
2
2.106 From the vicinity of Rønne Approach Light-buoy (55°05′⋅1N, 14°38′⋅6E) (2.49) the track leads SSE for about 8 miles, then E for a farther 12 miles towards Dueodde, passing (with positions from Rønne Aero Light (55°04′⋅2N, 14°44′⋅9E)): WSW of a shoal, with a least depth of 7⋅2 m over it (2½ miles WSW), thence: WSW of Møllebakke (2¼ miles SW), marked by a buoy (W cardinal). Lying SE of Møllebakke are a number of detached shoals which extend approximately 4 miles SE. Thence: WSW and S of Bakkegrund (5½ miles S), a reef with dangerous underwater rocks, marked by a buoy (S cardinal). Bakkebrædt, 3 cables W of Bakkegrund, is a rock with a depth of 6⋅6 m over it. Thence to a position S of Dueodde (12 miles ESE) (2.108).
2
3
Nylarskirke (55°04′⋅4N, 14°48′⋅9E), a white round building with a pointed roof. Aakirkeby (55°04′⋅3N, 14°55′⋅1E), a grey building. Povlskirke (55°01′⋅5N, 15°02′⋅5E), a white building without a tower, but with a detached belfry. Pederskirke Mill, a red windmill 2½ miles W of Povlskirke. (Directions continue at 2.116)
Anchorage and harbour Arnager Bugt 1
2
Inshore route 1
NE of Hvide-Mæhrn (1¼ miles SSW), a shoal with a least depth of 3⋅4 m over it, thence: NE of Højbratter (2 miles S), a shoal with a least depth of 3⋅7 m over it, thence: Clear of a shoal (2¾ miles SSE), with a least depth of 5⋅7 m over it, and: SW of Arnager Rev (3 miles SE), an underwater spit which extends 3 miles SE from Arnager (2.110) with depths of 1⋅2 m near its inner end and 9⋅4 m at its outer end. It is marked on its SW side by a buoy (S cardinal). Caution. The bottom in the vicinity of the above described shoals is so uneven that undiscovered dangers may exist. 2.108 Thence the track leads ESE for about 8 miles, passing (with positions from Dueodde Light (54°59′⋅5N, 15°04′⋅5E)): SSW of Raghammer Odde (5¼ miles WNW), off which the seabed, in depths of less than 10 m, is very irregular, thence: SSW of Gedebak Odde (4 miles WNW), from which a reef, with a depth of 2⋅8 m over it, extends 2½ cables S; an outfall pipe extends seaward the same distance, 5 cables E of this point. Thence: SSW of Dueodde (54°59′N, 15°05′E), on which stands a lighthouse. Shifting sands, which are steep-to, extend 1¾ miles from the point.
2.107 Local knowledge is required. From the vicinity of Rønne Approach Light-buoy (2.49) the track leads generally SE for about 8 miles, passing (with positions from Rønne Aero Light (55°04′⋅2N, 14°44′⋅9E)): SW of Hadderev (2 miles WNW), a reef which extends 5 cables SSW from Galgeløkke Odde, marked by a buoy (S cardinal), and: NE of a shoal, with a least depth of 7⋅2 m over it (2½ miles WSW), thence: NE of Møllebakke (2¼ miles SW) (2.106), thence:
3
4
96
2.110 Description. Arnager Bugt (55°02′⋅9N, 14°47′⋅3E) is the only well-sheltered anchorage on the SW side of Bornholm. It is situated between the coast and Arnager Rev (2.107). Arnager (55°03′N, 14°47′E) is a fishing village standing on a point of the same name. The harbour is a four-sided basin which is entered from the N; it has depths of 1⋅5 to 2⋅4 m and is connected to the land by a pier 200 m long. It can be entered by day and night. Largest craft which can use the harbour is length 20 m, beam 7 m and draught 2⋅4 m. Water level. SW gales may lower the level of the water in Arnager Bugt by 0⋅6 m, while NE gales may raise it by up to 1⋅2 m. Local knowledge is required. Directions. From a position about 2½ miles W of Raghammer Odde the track leads NW for about 3 miles, passing (with positions from Sose Odde (55°02′⋅5N, 14°50′⋅0E)): NE of the SE end of Arnager Rev (1¾ miles SSE) (2.107), thence: SW of Blak (8 cables S), a reef with a least depth of 1⋅5 m at its S end, thence: NE of a 5⋅6 m shoal patch (1 mile SW), on Arnager Rev, marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
5
Directions
NE of Tørt Sand (1¾ miles WNW), a reef with a least depth of 1⋅2 m over it. Storegab (55°02′⋅7N, 14°47′⋅1E), an unmarked narrow channel, which has a depth of 3⋅7 m, leads across the inner end of Arnager Rev into Arnager Bugt. Anchorage may be obtained in a position 1 cable E of the harbour in a depth of 4 m, sand. Caution. The anchorage is not recommended for larger vessels. Winds from the SW, through S to SE, send in a considerable sea. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
(continued from 2.109) 1
2
Bakkerne 1
2
2.111 General information. Bakkerne (55°00′⋅0N, 14°59′⋅5E) is a private harbour which consists of a 1 m high concrete mole behind which boats can lie in a lee. It is connected to the land by an 80 m long approach bridge. Depth in the entrance and at the mole is 1 m. Water level. The range between HW and LW is 1⋅5 m. Leading lights in line bearing 011°, are displayed when required by fishing vessels. They lead to the E side of the mole.
3
2.116 From a position SSE of Dueodde (54°59′N, 15°05′E) (2.108) the track leads NE for about 5 miles, passing (with positions from Dueodde Light): Clear of a dangerous wreck, position approximate, (2 miles SE), thence: SE of Broens Rev (2½ miles NE), a shoal with a least depth of 0⋅6 m over it which extends 4 cables NE from Broens Odde. Thence: SE of Salthammer Rev (3½ miles NNE) which consists of two spits extending ENE from Salthammer Odde, a low point. The S spit, with a depth of 2⋅8 m at its outer end, 5 cables from the coast, is steep-to. The N spit with depths of 3⋅4 to 5⋅3 m is marked at its outer end by a buoy (E cardinal). Thence, when Salthammer Rev bears W, the track leads N for about 6 miles until Svaneke (55°08′N, 15°09′E) bears W.
Useful marks 2.117 1
BORNHOLM SOUTH-EAST COAST — DUEODDE TO SVANEKE General information
White windmill (55°04′⋅4N, 15°08′⋅5E), standing on the coast at Fredriks Stenbrud. White windmill (55°06′⋅2N, 15°08′⋅5E), standing on the coast at Årsdale. Øster Mariekirke (55°08′⋅3N, 15°00′⋅9E) and Ibskirke, 3¼ miles ESE, are visible only from a considerable distance, and then only on certain bearings.
Chart 958
Nexø
Topography 1
2
General information
2.112 Between Dueodde (54°59′N, 15°05′E) and Broens Odde, a low point 2¼ miles NE, there are some partially wooded sand dunes 1 mile inland. South of Nexø (55°04′N, 15°09′E) the land is low and the coast is bordered by sand. The coast between Nexø and Sandkås Odde, 4½ miles N, is rocky but the coastal bank is narrow and steep-to within 7 cables of Nexø. The land S of Sandkås Odde is not so steep as that on the N side of the promontory.
1
Limiting conditions
Prohibited area 1
1
2.113 An area, in which entry is prohibited, is centred on position 55°04′⋅6N, 15°14′⋅1E.
Rescue 1
2.114 A life-saving station equipped with line throwing apparatus, mobile equipment, lifeboat and fast rescue craft, is located at Nexø.
2
Principal marks 1
2.118 Position. Nexø (formerly Neksø) (55°04′N, 15°09′E) is the largest harbour on the SE coast of Bornholm. Function. It is primarily a fishing port with a separate basin for general cargo. The population is about 3300. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 7 vessels totalling 7765 dwt. Port Authority. Nexø Havn, Sdr, Hammer 2,1, DK 3730 Nekso, Denmark. E-Mail
[email protected]
2.115 Landmarks: Kongemindet (55°06′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅3E) (2.41). Television towers (55°09′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅2E) (2.41). Dueodde Tower (55°00′⋅1N, 15°04′⋅4E) (2.105). Dueodde Lighthouse (54°59′⋅5N, 15°04′⋅5E) (2.105). Major lights: Dueodde Light (54°59′⋅5N, 15°04′⋅5E) (2.105). Svaneke Light (55°07′⋅9N, 15°09′⋅1E) (2.75). Christiansø Light (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅2E) (2.130).
2.119 Controlling depths. The entrance channel, commercial basin, S basin and the channel leading to it, all have a depth of 5 m. Water level. Winds between E and SW lower the water level, but it may rise with an E wind if strong W winds have prevailed for a long time previously. With W to N winds, and especially with NE winds, the level of water rises. The difference from MSL is seldom more than 0⋅6 m. Maximum size of vessels handled: length 78 m; beam 21 m; draught 4⋅5 m. Current. There may be a cross current running off the entrance which can affect steering. Weather. With onshore gales the harbour cannot be entered by larger vessels.
Arrival information 1
97
2.120 Anchorage. The best anchorage may be obtained with Bodilskirke (2.123) bearing 274°, and just open S of Nexø harbour, in depths from 13 to 15 m, 4 cables from the NE end of the breakwater; the holding ground is good, but the bottom is rocky and uneven in places.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
2
Pilotage. The Harbour Master acts as pilot in and out of the harbour. ETA at boarding point is required 24, 12 and 4 hours prior to arrival. Tug. The pilot boat is equipped to be used as a tug if required.
2
Divers are available. Other facilities. Limited facilities for reception of oily waste. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Anchorages Harbour 1
2
1
2.121 General layout. The harbour consist of a series of connected basins reached through an entrance channel, protected by two moles and leading NE. The commercial basin lies to the N of the entrance and the fishing basins to the S. Port closed signal. When entry is prohibited, a black ball is hoisted on a flagstaff at the harbour. At night, three red lights (vertically disposed) are displayed from a white silo, 160 m W of the N mole head. Submarine cable. A cable is laid across the rocky bottom of the entrance channel, 60 m from the head of the N mole; the landing place on the N mole is marked by a notice board. Anchoring is prohibited in the vicinity of the cable.
2
2.126 Anchorage may be obtained on the coastal bank between Dueodde (54°59′N, 15°05′E) and Broens Rev, about 2¼ miles NE, over a sandy bottom and in convenient depths. However, winds from W quickly raise a swell. Nexø Red (55°03′⋅8N, 15°09′⋅0E) is the best anchorage for large vessels on the E coast of Bornholm, as there is less swell than at other places. Vessels may anchor in Frenne Rede (55°07′⋅0N, 15°09′⋅1E), N of Årsdale, in depths of 9 to 13 m, 2½ cables offshore. Small craft may anchor closer inshore where the coastal bank, with depths of 5 m over it, extends 1½ cables from the coast; the holding ground is better, and although onshore winds quickly raise a heavy sea, warning is usually given by the swell. Small vessels may also obtain anchorage at Årsdale (2.128).
Directions 1
Harbours
2.122 Leading lights: Front light (green framework tower, 8 m in height) (55°03′⋅8N, 15°08′⋅2E). Rear light (gable of building) (110 m from front light). The alignment (232°) of these lights leads from seaward, through the entrance channel to the basins. Two lights are displayed from the S mole.
Snogebæk Havn 1
Useful marks 2.123 1
Bodilskirke (55°03′⋅7N, 15°04′⋅5E), a white building with a tower. A small belfry stands close S of the church.
2
Basins 1
2.124 The commercial basin, Trafikhavn, lies on the N side of the inshore end of the entrance channel and has depths alongside the main berths of 5 m. The fishing vessel basins which lie to the S of the entrance are collectively known as Fiskerihavn and comprise of: Gamle Bassin and four other connected basins to the S which are numbered from 1 to 4. The largest basin is No 4, which is 190 m long, 120 m wide, and has a depth of 5 m. It has two finger piers 50 m long extending from the E side. The are small craft moorings and facilities in Gamle Bassin.
Årsdale Havn 1
2
Port services 1
2.127 General information. Snogebæk Havn (55°01′⋅5N, 15°07′⋅4E) is a private fishing harbour close S of Salthammer Odde. It consists of a small square basin, with depths of 1⋅5 to 2⋅0 m, connected to the land by a pier 100 m long. It is protected to the E by a breakwater situated 30 m E of the basin. Gales cause silting to take place. The harbour can be used by day and night. Water level. NE winds raise the water level by 1⋅0 m, W winds lower the level by the same amount. Directions. Leading lights: Front light (grey mast, 4 m in height) (55°01′⋅6N, 15°07′⋅4E). Rear light (similar mast, 4 m in height) (50 m from front light). The alignment (318¼°) of these lights leads close N of Broens Rev (2.116) and S of the detached breakwater, to the basin entrance which faces SW. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
2.125 Repairs of all kinds can be carried out. There is a dry dock for vessels up to 54 m in length, 9⋅3 m beam and a draught of 3⋅45 m. A ship elevator is also available for vessels up to 500 dwt, length 45 m, beam 9⋅9 m and draught 5 m.
98
2.128 General information. Årsdale Havn (55°06′⋅5N, 15°08′⋅8E), is a fishing harbour situated at the head of a bight off the village of the same name. It consists of an outer and an inner basin, sheltered from all winds, with depths of 2⋅5 to 3⋅0 m, suitable for vessels of 12 m in length, 4⋅4 m beam and draught 2⋅5 m. Water level may be lowered 0⋅6 m by W winds, and raised 0⋅8 m by E winds. Anchorage. Small craft may anchor S of Årsdale, in depths of 8 to 11 m, with Årsdale windmill (55°06′⋅2N, 15°08′⋅7E) (2.117) bearing 281°. Directions. Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, on mast) (55°06′⋅5N, 15°08′⋅7E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on mast, 5 m in height) (40 m from front light).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
3
Directions
The alignment (248½°) of these lights leads from seaward, clear of rocks, to a position 40 m N of the harbour entrance which faces NNW. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
1
CHRISTIANSØ Chart 958 plan of Christiansø
General information 1
2
3
4
2.129 Description. The small group of islets, named Christiansø (55°20′N, 15°11′E), and which belong to Denmark, lies 10 miles NE of Bornholm, and consists of Christiansø, Frederiksø, Græsholm and Tat, with several surrounding rocks. Only Christiansø and Frederiksø, which are joined by a bridge, are inhabited, the population being about 200. Together they formed a fortress, the towers and walls of which are still visible. Christiansø, the largest islet, is 22 m high; above-water rocks lie 2 cables off its SE end. Græsholm, situated 5 cables NW of Frederiksø, is 10 m high. A rocky patch lies 1½ cables off its NE point. Tårnrende, the channel between Frederiksø and Græsholm, has depths of over 10 m, but is less than ¼ cable wide. Tat, situated nearly 5 cables NNW of Græsholm, is 6 m high. It is surrounded by rocks and shoals which extend 1¾ cables W, though less than 1 cable in other directions. Vesterrende, the channel between Græsholm and Tat, has depths of more than 5 m over a width of 1¾ cables, but that with more than 10 m is less than 1 cable wide. Current. A very considerable current may run between the islets, especially in stormy weather, its direction following that of the wind and current in Baltic Sea.
2
Christiansø Havn 1
2
3
4
Principal marks 1
2
2.131 Vessels not bound for the harbour should keep at least 5 cables from any of the islets forming Christiansø. Vessels should not attempt to pass through any of the channels without a pilot and will require a large scale Danish chart. Note. The area within about 1 mile of the island group has been designated an EEC bird protection zone. Within this area a speed limit of 12 kn applies and vessels should keep at least 100 m from Græsholm and Tat, to which entry is prohibited. Useful mark. Tat Lighthouse (white tower, red band, 2 m in height) (55°19′⋅8N, 15°10′⋅5E).
2.130 Landmarks: Christiansø Lighthouse (white tower, 16 m in height) (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅2E), standing on the SE side of Christiansø Great Tower, which is round and roofless. Frederiksø Tower (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅1E), round with pointed roof. Major lights: Christiansø Light — as above. Hammer Odde Light (55°17′⋅9N, 14°46′⋅4E) (2.41). Svaneke Light (55°07′⋅9N, 15°09′⋅1E) (2.75).
5
6
2.132 General information. Christiansø Havn, between Christiansø and Frederiksø is well sheltered from all winds except S gales and, with local knowledge, is a good refuge for small vessels. The harbour is divided into two parts by a bridge, which opens to allow passage of vessels. The depth of the channel through the bridge is 4⋅0 m. Normally the largest ship allowed to enter the harbour is 20 grt, but with special permission, or in distress, vessels with a length up to 50 m, and with a draught of 3⋅5 m, can use the harbour. Water level. Winds from SSW and W lower the level by 0⋅4 m; N and E winds raise it by 0⋅6 m. Pilotage is available. It is recommended that larger vessels calling for the first time should use the services of a pilot. Pilot vessel comes out on the lee side of the islet. Traffic signal. If the harbour is closed the following signals will be displayed from a mast ½ cable S of Frederiksø Light: By day a black ball and, by night, three red lights vertically disposed. Directions. The harbour may be approached safely from either N or S on a line of bearing of about 190°, from N, or 348½°, from S, of Frederiksø Light (white house, red band, 3 m in height) (55°19′⋅3N, 15°11′⋅1E). By night, approach within the white sectors (186°–194° or 347°–350°), of the light. Berths. In the N harbour vessels secure to ring bolts in the rocks. In the S harbour there are wharves on the E side where vessels with a draught of 3 m can lie alongside. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions in small quantities.
GOTLAND, FÅRÖ AND GOTSKA SANDÖN GENERAL INFORMATION
2
Charts 2251, 2361, 2223, 2816
Description 1
2.133 Gotland (57°30′N, 18°30′E), the largest island in Baltic Sea, is part of Sweden. It lies 45 miles off the Swedish coast. Fårö, a smaller island, lies off its NE end, and Gotska Sandön, which is a nature reserve, lies 20 miles N of Fårö. Today Gotlanders are mainly concerned with agriculture, fishing and a few minor industries, notably the manufacture of cement. There is also a thriving tourist industry.
3
99
Centuries ago, however, Gotland was an island of great commercial importance as it lay on the route from Europe to the East, used by Vikings who wisely preferred the passage through Baltic Sea and the Russian rivers, to that through the Atlantic and pirate infested Mediterranean. German merchants, in the twelfth century, played a large role in the rise of Gotland, many settling in Visby on the W coast. The native farming Gotlanders conducted repeated attacks on Visby’s successful foreign merchants who, in the thirteenth century, built a protective wall which surrounds the town on all sides except that facing the sea. When Mongols closed the passage across Russia, traders took the more direct sea route and Visby declined. In the mid–seventeenth century, Gotland was annexed by Sweden.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Topography 1
Description
2.134 The greater part of the coast rises steeply from the sea and forms a plateau, from 26 to 34 m high. A few detached hills attain a greater height; Torsburgen (57°24′N, 18°44′E), the highest, having an elevation of 68 m. The S end of Gotland forms a peninsula, the W side of which consists of high barren chalk cliffs, but the E side is lower and wooded; to the N of the peninsula there are dense forests of pine trees.
1
2.139 The S half of the W side of Gotland faces the prevailing wind, but there are some small harbours on this stretch of coast where local limestone is loaded.
Rescue 1
2.140 A line-throwing apparatus is kept at Gjaus Häll, on the S side of Stora Karlsö (57°17′N, 17°58′E).
Submarine cables Pollution of the sea 1
2.135 Due to the non-tidal nature of these waters, the Swedish authorities are extremely rigorous in the application of anti-pollution regulations. See 1.72.
1
Prohibited area 1
Fishing 1
2.136 During the period 16th September to 14th June, salmon fishing is carried on with drift nets within 10 miles of the coast of Gotland, extending farther offshore on the E side of the island than the W side. Fishing is carried out from just before sunset to just after sunrise. Special care to avoid damaging nets is necessary when passing through the channel W of Östergarn (57°27′N, 18°59′E) (2.186) and these waters should be avoided, if possible, at night.
Natural conditions 1
2
3
2.137 Local magnetic anomalies. A deflection of the compass of up to 2° has been noted off the W coast of Gotland and off the NW part of the island including Fårö. A deflection of 4½° has been reported NW of Gotland in position 57°59′⋅5N, 17°41′⋅5E. Current. The current between Gotland and the Swedish coast usually sets SW; off the E coast of Gotland it sets S or SW, and is weaker than off the W coast. Water level. South winds usually lower the level, whilst N winds usually cause it to rise. Ice. The harbours of Gotland are, in normal winters, clear of ice, but some of them may occasionally be obstructed between January and March. It is only ocassionally, in severe winters and for a few days, that there is ice off Hoburg Caution is necessary when approaching the small harbours in Gotland as the depths shown on the chart are not always reliable, due to the ice pressure in spring often filling the approach channels with large boulders. Climatic table. See 1.284 and 1.287.
1
2
2.143 Landmarks: Hoburg Lighthouse (white tower, black top, 22 m in height) (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E). Five windmotors (57°02′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅1E), standing at the entrance to Burgsviken, are each 40 m in height, floodlit, and display a red light at the top. Stora Karlsö Lighthouse (white tower on dwelling, 18 m in height) (57°17′⋅5N, 17°57′⋅8E). Major lights: Hoburg Light — as above. Stora Karlsö Light — as above.
Directions 1
2
GOTLAND WEST COAST — HOBURG TO NYREVSUDDEN General information 4
Route 1
2.142 From the 15th April to 31st July annually, a prohibited area exists NE of Lilla Karlsö. Two buoys (special) mark the outer corners, about 7 cables N and E of the island.
Principal marks
3
Charts 2251, 2361
2.141 Submarine cables are laid from the W side of Gotland to Stora Karlsö and Lilla Karlsö.
2.138 From a position SW of Hoburg the route leads N, passing either side of Stora Karlsö, W of Lilla Karlsö and Utholmen, and thence to Nyrevsudden.
100
2.144 From the vicinity of 56°50′N, 18°00′E the track leads N for about 42 miles to Nyrevsudden passing (with positions from Stora Karlsö (57°17′N, 17°58′E)): W of Hoburgs Rev (24 miles SSE), a spit with a least depth of 5⋅5 m over it, marked by a buoy (S cardinal). It extends 1 mile S from Revet, a low point on the S side of Hoburg. Thence: W of Hoburg (22½ miles SSE), a limestone cliff, 35 m high, divided by a deep cleft. Hoburg Light stands on a hill, 37 m in height, about 8 cables ENE of Hoburg. Thence: W of Bockstigen (21 miles SSE) (2.148), thence: W of Näsrevet Light (20 miles SSE) (2.148), thence: W of Deppo (11 miles SSE), a shoal patch with a depth of 3⋅8 m over it, marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: W of Lillbriten, Söderpall and Norderpall (9, 8 and 7½ miles SSE) respectively, all shoal patches, each with a depth of 9 m over them, lying within the red sector of Näsrevet Light. Thence: Clear of Nygrund (3½ miles SSE), a 12 m shoal patch, thence: W of Breidingen (3 miles SE), a 9 m shoal patch, which lies 1¼ miles W of Hammarudd (57°16′N, 18°05′E) a salient point, thence: Clear of Stora Karlsö, from where a light is displayed, and W of Lilla Karlsö, 2½ miles NE. The islands have precipitous light-coloured sides. Both are bird sanctuaries and nature reserves and permission must be obtained to land or to navigate close inshore. A reef with depths of less than 5 m
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
5
6
extends 5 cables N from Stora Karlsö. From Lilla Karlsö, foul ground extends 1 mile on the S side, and 5 cables on the N side. Thence: W of Utholmen (9½ miles NNE), a low islet fringed by a reef. A beacon stands on the NE end of the islet and a white dwelling and a clump of trees stand in the middle. Landing is prohibited without special permission. Thence: W of Scharlakansgrund (11 miles NNE), a rocky shoal, awash in places, marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: W of Gnisvärdsgrund (12½ miles NNE), a shoal with a least depth of 5⋅4 m over it. Thence, to a position NW of Nyrevsudden (57°32′N, 18°07′E), a light coloured headland.
4
1
Useful marks 1
2.145 In addition to the marks listed below there are several churches, the positions of which are shown on the chart, and which are visible from seaward. Radio masts (red lights) (57°01′⋅5N, 18°15′⋅3E). Radio mast (red lights, elevation 149 m) (57°04′⋅4N, 18°13′⋅5E), with a windmotor close E. TV mast (red lights, elevation 69 m) (57°07′⋅5N, 18°15′⋅6E). (Directions continue at 2.162)
1
Anchorages and harbours Revviken 1
2
2.146 Small vessels may obtain anchorage in Revviken (56°54′⋅5N, 18°08′⋅5E), the bight between Revet and Flisviken, 8 cables E. Local knowledge is required.
Djauvik
Burgsvik 1
2
1
2
3
2.147 General information. Burgsvik (57°02′N, 18°16′E) is situated on the S side of Burgsviken, an extensive inlet entered 7 miles NNE of Hoburg on the SE side of Gotland. It is a small harbour, suitable for vessels with a draught of 3⋅4 m and a length of 60 m, where limestone is loaded. It has a population of about 300. The port is approached through a dredged channel on the alignment of leading lights, and entered through a dredged buoyed channel. Local knowledge is required. Pilots should be requested through Oxelösund VTS (2.166); vessels are met outside the shoals. 2.148 Directions. Burgsvik Leading Lights: Front light (white square, red stripe, on post) (57°03′⋅0N, 18°17′⋅4E). Rear light (similar structure) (270 m from front light). From the vicinity of 57°01′N, 18°06′E, the alignment (073°) of these lights leads ENE, through a channel with an authorised draught of 3⋅4 m, into Burgsviken, passing (with positions from front light): SSE of Bockstigen (4½ miles WSW), a shoal with a least depth of 5⋅2 m over it, marked by a buoy (S cardinal). Thence: SSE of a reef, partly above water, partly awash (4 miles W) on which stands Näsrevet Light (red tower, white top, grey base, 9 m in height), thence: SSE of a 5⋅5 m shoal (2¾ miles WSW), which lies close N of the leading line, and:
NNW of Valar Light (white tower, 6 m in height) (2½ miles WSW), displayed from the S entrance point to Burgsviken, thence: SSE of Näsudden, a low and barren point on the N side of the entrance, N and E of which the land rises and is wooded. The islet of Storgrund is situated close W of the point. Thence the leading line leads through a channel, dredged to 4⋅1 m, with a width of 60 m, marked by buoys (lateral), to the inner roadstead. 2.149 Entry. Burgsvik Hamn Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, on white mast) (57°02′⋅0N, 18°15′⋅7E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on white mast) (45 m from front light). The alignment (175°) of these lights leads from the inner roadstead to the harbour through a channel, dredged to 4 m over a width of 30 m, marked by buoys (lateral). 2.150 Anchorage. Local knowledge is required. Vessels with a draught not greater than 5⋅6 m may obtain safe anchorage in the outer roadstead, 1¼ miles WNW of Burgsvik Hamn pier, in a depth of 7 m, sand and clay, with Valar Light bearing 185°. Berth. Burgsvik Hamn consists of a single curved pier, the E side of the outer 135 m being the cargo quay. There are depths alongside of 3⋅0 m at the inner end and 3⋅6 m at the outer end. Berths are available, with depths of 0⋅6 to 3⋅0 m, which have facilities for visiting yachts. Repairs. Small repairs possible. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications: nearest airport at Visby 66 km N. Rescue. A lifeboat and life-saving equipment are maintained at Burgsvik.
1
2
2.151 General information. Djauvik (57°18′⋅5N, 18°09′⋅3E) is a small fishing harbour, formed by two moles and protected by a separate breakwater. It is open to wind and weather from the N and W. The harbour should not be entered by vessels with a draught greater than 1⋅6 m. There are facilities for visiting yachts. Directions. Leading lights: Front light (white triangle point up, on pedestal) (57°18′⋅5N, 18°09′⋅2E). Rear light (white triangle point down, on pedestal) (75 m from front light). The alignment (137°) of these lights leads from seaward into the harbour. Caution. There are shoal banks just N of the leading line, at the harbour entrance.
Valbybodar 1
2.152 Valbybodar (57°20′⋅0N, 18°10′⋅6E) is a small fishing harbour. Leading lights (090°) are displayed, when required by fishing vessels.
Klintehamn 1
101
2.153 General information. Klintehamn (57°23′⋅4N, 18°11′⋅6E) is a commercial harbour formed by a quay built on the N side of a tongue of land extending 4½ cables W from the coast. A mole extending from the inshore end of the quay leads N, then W, forming a basin 400 m long and 100 m wide which is suitable for vessels up 75 m in length
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
2
3
4
5
6
and a draught not greater than 4⋅5 m. Strong W winds raise a sea in the harbour. Function. The harbour is principally concerned with loading limestone and grain. Density: 1⋅005 g/cm3. Pilotage. Pilots can be ordered through Oxelösund VTS (2.166). Pilot boards about 2¾ miles SW of the harbour. Port Authority. See Visby (2.166) Directions. Varvsholmen Leading Lights: Front light (white column) (57°23′⋅5N, 18°11′⋅6E). Rear light (white column) (120 m from front light). The alignment (055°) of these lights leads NE from seaward to the entrance of a channel, dredged to a depth of 5 m over a width of 30 m, marked by buoys (lateral), thence to the entrance of the harbour, passing (with positions from the front light): Close SE of the outer channel buoy (port hand) (1½ miles SW), thence: SE of a stranded wreck (8 cables WSW). Thence, commercial vessels proceed to the basin and small craft to moorings on the N wall of the mole. Useful marks. Fröjel Church (57°20′⋅2N, 18°11′⋅6E). Klinte Church (57°22′⋅7N, 18°14′⋅1E). Anchorages. In good weather or with offshore winds, anchorage may be obtained, in depths from 11⋅0 to 14⋅5 m, sand and clay, close NW of Varvsholmen Leading Line, about 1½ miles from the light-structure which stands on the corner of the quay, with Klinte Church bearing 086°. Vessels with a maximum draught of 5⋅2 m and a length of 75 m may obtain anchorage in the outer roadstead, SE of the Varvsholmen Leading Line, in depths of 6⋅0 to 6⋅7 m, 6 cables SW of the light-structure which stands at the outer end of the quay. Vessels with deeper draughts should not use this anchorage on account of occasional heavy swells. Berth. The quay on the S side of the basin provides 330 m of berthing space with a depth of 5 m, and a Ro-Ro berth. There is a ferry berth on the W end of the mole. On the N side of the mole there are berths for yachts, with depths from 2⋅5 to 3⋅5 m. Port services. Repairs. Minor repairs can be carried out. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Airport at Visby, 28 km N.
Gnisvärd 1
2
GOTLAND WEST COAST — NYREVSUDDEN TO FÅRÖSUND General information Chart 2361
Route 1
2
2.154 General information. Västergarn (57°26′N, 18°09′E) is a small fishing and small craft harbour sheltered from the W by the breakwater which connects Svältholm, an islet, to the shore. Directions. Västergarn Leading Lights: Front light (post) (57°26′⋅3N, 18°08′⋅7E). Rear light (post) (100 m from front light). The alignment (050°) of these lights leads from seaward to the harbour entrance. Useful mark: Skansudde Beacon (white tower, 10 m in height) (57°26′⋅5N, 18°07′⋅4E), a former lighthouse which stands on Skansudde, a point of land. Anchorage. The best anchorage off Västergarn is 9 cables SE of Skansudde in a depth of 3⋅7 m, clay. Anchorage may also be obtained close ESE of Svältholm when the centre of that islet is in line with Skansudde.
2.156 From a position NW of Nyrevsudden (57°32′N, 18°07′E) (2.144), the route leads NE, then E to Fårösund.
Description 1
2.157 The coast between Visby (57°38′N, 18°17′E) and Hallshuk, a high point 23 miles NE, is steep and wooded, with no off-lying dangers outside a distance of 5 cables from the coast, which is steep-to.
Topography 1
2.158 Stavklint (57°34′N, 18°09′E) is a steep cliff, 43 m in height. Korplint and Högklint, 1¾ and 3¼ miles farther NE, are steep light-coloured cliffs, wooded on top, those at Högklint being 43 m in height.
Submarine cables 1
Västergarn 1
2.155 General information. Gnisvärd (57°30′N, 18°07′E) is a well-sheltered fishing harbour suitable for small craft with a draught of 1⋅5 m. In SW gales a considerable current may run in the entrance. Directions. Gnisvärd Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle point up, on mast) (57°30′⋅2N, 18°07′⋅0E). Rear light (white triangle point down, on mast) (100 m from front light). The alignment (100°) of these lights leads from W, through a channel dredged to 1⋅5 m over a width of 20 m, to the harbour entrance.
2.159 Two pairs of cable beacons, 5 cables E and 1¼ miles ENE, respectively, of Högklint, indicate the landing places of submarine cables. A further two pairs of beacons, 3 and 8 cables SW of Högklint, indicate the landing places of high tension submarine cables. Anchoring within 300 m of the high tension cables is prohibited.
Archaeological site 1
2.160 Anchoring and diving is prohibited in the vicinity of an archaeological site on the coastal bank centred on 57°43′⋅1N, 18°22′⋅9E.
Principal marks 1
2
102
2.161 Landmarks: Follingbo Aero Light, (mast, elevation which red lights, vertically disposed, (57°35′⋅6N, 18°22′⋅7E). Ire Aero Light (radio tower, elevation which red lights, vertically disposed, (57°49′⋅0N, 18°37′⋅0E). Major lights: Follingbo Aero Light — as above. Hallshuk Light (57°55′⋅5N, 18°45′⋅3E)
243 m), from are displayed 155 m), from are displayed
(2.162).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Directions (continued from 2.145) 1
2
2.162 From a position NW of Nyrevsudden the route leads NE for about 32 miles, then E for about 11 miles to a position N of Svingrund Lighthouse, passing (with positions from Stenkyrkehuk Lighthouse (57°49′⋅2N, 18°27′⋅8E)): NW of the entrance to Visby (12½ miles SW), thence: NW of Stenkyrkehuk Light (white round metal tower, 15 m in height), exhibited from a point of land, thence: NW and N of Hallshuk Light (white building) (11 miles NE). Thence, the track leads E, passing: N of the approaches to Kappelshamnsviken (12½ miles NE), thence: To a position N of Svingrund Lighthouse (57°56′⋅1N, 19°01′⋅3E).
Useful marks 1
2
2
3
Limiting conditions 1
2.163 In addition to the marks listed below there are several churches, the positions of which are shown on the chart, which are visible from seaward. Lummelunda Church (57°46′⋅1N, 18°27′⋅5E), slender spire. Stenkyrka Church (57°47′⋅6N, 18°32′⋅1E), slender spire. Two windmotors (red lights) (57°48′⋅7N, 18°32′⋅5E). Norsklint (57°54′⋅7N, 18°42′⋅3E), a wooded hill. Svingrund Lighthouse (orange tower, black band, 9 m in height) (57°56′⋅1N, 19°01′⋅3E). (Directions for Fårösund N approach continue at 2.231, and for Gotska Sandön at 2.247)
1
Chart 2361 with plan of Visby
General information 2.164 Description. Visby (57°38′N, 18°17′E) is the principal town and seat of the provincial government of Gotland.
2.165 Channel authorised draughts: Channel to Oljekajen — 7⋅5 m. Channel to Yttre hamnen — 7⋅5 to 6⋅5 m. Channel to Inre hamnen — 6⋅3 m. Water levels. The highest HW is 0⋅88 m above the mean water level and the lowest LW is 0⋅71 m below the mean. Density of water: 1⋅005 g/cm3.
Arrival information
Visby
1
One of the Hanseatic cities, Visby was sacked by the Lübeckers in the sixteenth century and extensive ruins remain to this day. It is surrounded by the longest and best preserved city wall in N Europe. Function. It is a medium-sized harbour with good facilities for handling bulk, liquid, general cargo and Ro-Ro vessels. Principal exports are grain, woodpulp and timber. Principal imports are oil, salt, gravel, molasses and fertilisers. Visiting yachts may use the small boat basins in the outer and inner basins as well as the fishing harbour. Topography. The coastline N and S of Visby is fronted by cliffs. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 152 vessels totalling 447 898 dwt, excluding ferry traffic. Port Authority.Gotland Ports, Farjeleden 2, SE−621 57 Visby, Sweden. Website: www.visbyport.com
2
2.166 Outer anchorage. Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, about 4 cables W of the harbour entrance, in depths of about 40 m, clay and fine gravel. Pilotage. All messages concerning pilot services within the coastal waters of Gotland are handled by Oxelösund VTS, which operates a 24 hour service. At Visby the pilot boards in the roads. For boarding places at other locations in Gotland see individual ports and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Caution. With onshore gales do not attempt to enter Visby harbour without local knowledge, as experience has shown that the danger of stranding in such conditions is
Port of Visby (2.167) (Original dated 2001) (Photograph − Roland Hejstrom)
103
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
very great. Pilots are unable to board in adverse weather conditions. Speed limits. The speed limit in Yttre hamnen, is 12 kn and in Inre hamnen, 5 kn.
Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Visby Airport. Rescue. A line-throwing apparatus is kept at Visby. The pilot vessel acts as a lifeboat when required.
Kappelshamnsviken
Harbour 1
2
2.167 General layout. The harbour comprises an inner and outer basin, formed by breakwaters. The inner basin is divided by Holman, a broad quay projecting SW from the NE side of the harbour. The outer harbour is created by the extension of the N breakwater and a new S breakwater. The entrance to the outer harbour is dredged to 9 m. The harbour is well-sheltered but when a heavy sea prevails at the entrance it is felt in both inner and outer basins. Ice. The harbour is usually free from ice. Current. The current off Visby usually sets with the wind at a maximum rate of 2 to 3 kn. Landmarks: Water tower (57°37′⋅9N, 18°17′⋅9E). Visby Cathedral (57°38′⋅6N, 18°18′⋅1E) with high tower and spires and a chimney close E. Binger Windmill (57°38′⋅8N, 18°19′⋅5E). Radio mast (red light), 4 cables NNW of Binger Windmill.
Chart 2361 (see 1.34)
General information 1
2
Limiting conditions 1
Directions 1
2
2.168 Approach and entry. The harbour can be approached on a line of bearing of about 071° of Visby Approach Light (white round concrete structure, red band, 8 m in height; floodlit), standing at the W end of the S breakwater. By night, approach is made within the white sector (055°–087°) of this light. Thence, on the alignment (055°) of Visby Leading Lights the harbour is entered between the outer breakwaters: Front light (red triangle point up, white vertical band, on pedestal) (57°38′⋅3N, 18°17′⋅0E). Rear light (red triangle point down, white vertical band, on pedestal) (230 m from front light). Useful marks: North Breakwater Light (57°38′⋅1N, 18°16′⋅4E) (white tower, green band, 6 m in height). Radio mast (80 m in height) (red lights) (57°38′⋅5N, 18°20′⋅4E).
2
2
2.169 Yttre hamnen. Oljekajen, situated on the E side of the S breakwater, has a length of 60 m with a depth alongside of 8⋅0 m. Three Ro-Ro berths, situated on the E side of the basin, each have a ramp width of 32 m, and with a total length of 565 m, have depths alongside of 7⋅0 and 8⋅0 m. Inre hamnen. The area NW of Holman (2.167) has 530 m of berthing space and a fixed Ro-Ro ramp with a width of 18 m. The E side of the basin has a depth of 7⋅0 m and the W side depths of 5⋅8 to 6⋅0 m. SW of Holman there is a fishing harbour and two Ro-Ro berths with a quay length of 225 m and a depth alongside of 6⋅0 m lie close NE of the fishing harbour.
1
2
2.170 Repairs: minor repairs only; slip for fishing vessels; engineering workshops. Other facilities: de-ratting; hospital; facilities for the reception of oily and chemical waste.
2.173 Port radio. Storugns Hamnradio (Storugns Harbour Radio). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Anchorage may be obtained, indicated on the chart, in depths of about 13 m, good holding ground, clay and sand, 1 mile N of the harbour, N of the ferry berth at Kappelshamn. Pilotage. Local knowledge is required. Requests for pilots should be made through Oxelösund VTS (2.166). Pilot boards in the outer part of Kappelshamnsviken. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Landmarks 2.174 1
Kappelshamn Lighthouse (framework tower) (57°50′⋅3N, 18°48′⋅1E). Hallshuk Lighthouse (57°55′⋅5N, 18°45′⋅3E) (2.162).
Directions for Kappelshamnsviken 1
Port services 1
2.172 Maximum authorised draught through the Kappelshamnsviken approach and Storugns harbour is 9⋅0 m. In the channel to Kappelshamn harbour it is 6⋅0 m. Largest vessel which can be accommodated in Storugns is 160 m in length, up to 25 000 dwt, loading to a maximum draught of 8⋅8 m. Local weather. Strong winds from NW to NE raise a high and dangerous sea in Kappelshamnsviken, when the anchorages and berths at Kappelshamn and Storugns become unsafe. With strong N winds cargo working is often suspended.
Arrival information
Basins and berths 1
2.171 Position and function. Kappelshamnsviken (57°53′N, 18°48′E) is a long inlet, free from dangers to within 1¾ miles of its head where it shoals to less than 9 m. The shores of Kappelshamnsviken are bordered by a reef, a few cables in width, except near the middle of the E shore, where there is a shallow bay with rocks off its S entrance. It provides the principal outlet for the quarries at Kappelshamn (2.177) and Storugns (2.176). Topography. From Hallshuk the land decreases in height to the head of the inlet. Ice. The harbours and adjacent waters are generally free from ice but strong N winds may impede navigation through the build up of drift ice.
2
104
2.175 From a position in the entrance about 1½ miles NE of Hallshuk Light (57°55′⋅5N, 18°45′⋅3E), the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads S for about 5 miles, by night in the white sector (173°–180½°), ahead, of Kappelshamn Light, passing (with positions from Kappelshamn Light): E of Haruddsrevet (5½ miles NNW), a reef on which there are rocks both above-water and awash, which extends 4 cables from the coast in the vicinity of Hallshuk (2.162), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
3
W of Enrevet (5½ miles NNE), a reef with above-water rocks on it, which extends 2½ cables from Svarvnäset, a light-coloured cliffy point, 3 miles E of and considerably lower than Hallshuk, thence: To a position W of a buoy (port hand) (1¾ miles N), marking the edge of the shoal water close to the mouth of Storugns entrance channel. Thence, directions for Storugns are given at 2.176, and for Kappelshamn at 2.177. Useful marks: Fleringe Church (57°52′⋅2N, 18°52′⋅7E). Lärbro Church (57°47′⋅2N, 18°47′⋅8E). Norsklint (57°54′⋅7N, 18°42′⋅3E) (2.163).
2
3
root. A small craft and fishing harbour lies close W with depths of 1⋅0 to 2⋅7 m. Directions. Vessels may proceed safely to the vicinity of the berths directly off the recommended track for which directions are given at 2.175. In addition, by day, using the line of bearing 182° of Lärbro Church (57°47′⋅2N, 18°47′⋅8E), which leads through the middle of the inlet, and by night, in the white sector of Kappelshamn Light (2.174). Berths. On the E side of the pier there is a total of 150 m berthing space, with Ro-Ro ramp at the root with a ramp width of 33 m, all with a depth alongside of 6⋅5 m. On the W side of the pier there is about 125 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 2⋅5 to 4⋅5 m. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions.
Harbours
Storugns 1
2
3
4
5
2.176 Description. Storugns is a small industrial harbour situated on the E side of Kappelshamnsviken, near its head. Its principal function is the export of limestone and limestone products from the adjacent quarries. Gas oil is imported. Port radio. See 2.173. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 274 vessels totalling 1½ million dwt. Port Authority. Nordalk Storugns AB, S–620 34 Lärbro, Gotland, Sweden. Directions. Storugns Leading Lights: Front light (57°50′⋅7N, 18°48′⋅4E). Rear light (200 m from front light). From a position about 1½ miles N of Kappelshamn Light, at the E edge of the white sector of the light and close W of a light-buoy (port hand), the alignment (169°) of these lights leads through the outer channel for about 5 cables. The outer channel is 90 m wide, marked by buoys (lateral), and dredged to a depth of 9⋅3 m. Thence, the inner channel, 80 m wide, marked by buoys (lateral) and dredged to a depth of 9⋅3 m, leads S for 5 cables to the berthing area. A yellow steering light is displayed from Kappelshamn Light for navigating in the inner channel. For Storugns Old Harbour, vessels continue S towards Kappelshamn Light which stands on the end of the breakwater which forms the harbour. Berths. Storugns New Harbour is formed by a breakwater which extends W from the coast, and a pier extending S from the end of the breakwater. It lies about 4½ cables N of Kappelshamn Light on the E side of Kappelshamnsviken. There is a total of about 420 m of berthing space in the harbour, including the breakwater. The berth on the outside of the pier is 140 m long with depths alongside of 9⋅2 to 10⋅0 m. The old harbour has a berth on the S side of the breakwater, 60 m long with a depth alongside of 4⋅0 m, used for discharging gas oil. Supplies: fuel and fresh water by road tanker; provisions available.
Flundreviken 1
Själsö 1
2
1
2.179 General information. Själsö (57°41′⋅5N, 18°21′⋅5E) is a fishing harbour. It is approached through a channel 20 m wide and 3 m deep with the aid of two pairs of leading lights as follows: Front light (white triangle, point up, on mast) (57°41′⋅5N, 18°21′⋅5E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on mast) (90 m from front light). The alignment (099°) of these lights leads onto the alignment (038°) of the second leg: Front light (white triangle, point up, on mast) (57°41′⋅6N, 18°21′⋅4E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on mast) (110 m from front light). This alignment leads to the harbour entrance.
Lickershamn 1
Kappelshamn 2.177 Description. Kappelshamn (57°51′N, 18°47′E), lying on the W side of the inlet, is a small loading place and the reserve harbour for Visby ferry traffic in poor weather conditions. The harbour consists of a pier, extended to a total length of 150 m, by three breasting dolphins joined by bridges, with berths on each side and on the land at its
2.178 General information. Flundreviken (57°39′⋅8N, 18°19′⋅5E) is a small fishing village. Leading lights; Front light (red triangle, point up, with white band, on post) (57°39′⋅8N, 18°19′⋅5E). Rear light (red triangle, point down, with white band, on post) (27 m from front). The alignment (096°) leads from seaward to the harbour entrance.
2.180 General information. Lickershamn (57°49′⋅7N, 18°30′⋅8E) is a fishing harbour protected by a breakwater. There are three quays with depths of 1⋅5 to 3⋅0 m. The alignment (148°) of leading lights leads from seaward to the harbour entrance: Front light (white triangle, point up, on post) (57°49′⋅7N, 18°30′⋅8E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on post) (40 m from front light). Provisions and water are available.
Ar 1
105
2.181 Ar (57°55′⋅1N, 18°57′⋅1E) is a former harbour, now disused, which lies between Svarvnäset (57°55′N, 18°51′E) and Vialmsudd, a point at the N entrance of Fårösund, 5 miles E. It is protected by the islet of Falholm which lies close off this stretch of coast. No facilities for navigation or berthing now exist.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
GOTLAND EAST COAST — HOBURG TO ÖSTERGARN
Directions 1
General information Charts 2288, 2223
Route 1
2.182 From Hoburg (56°55′N, 18°08′E) the track leads NE for about 26 miles to Östergarn.
2
Topography 1
2
2.183 The coast between Hoburg and Faludden, 10 miles NE, is low and more wooded than that on the W side of the peninsula forming the S end of Gotland. It is fronted by numerous dangers and should not be approached within 3 miles nor in a depth of less than 25 m. Farther NE, past Ronehamn and Ljugarn, 11 and 22 miles NE, respectively, of Faludden, the land is level and more evenly wooded inland than it is near the coast. The coast between Sysneudd (57°23′N, 18°53′E) and Grogarnshuvud, 4 miles N, is almost level, wooded and monotonous in appearance. Grogarnshuvud is steep at its N end and is clearly visible from seaward.
3
4
Traffic regulations 1
2
2.184 A TSS is established 11 miles SE of Hoburg Lighthouse. The area between the landward boundary of the lanes and Gotland is designated as an Inshore Traffic Zone. Details are shown on the chart. The scheme is IMO adopted and Rule 10 of International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972) applies. Caution. In 2001 depths less than charted were reported outside, but near the limits of the traffic separation lanes. Vessels passing between the S end of Gotland and Hoburgs Bank are advised to navigate only within an area bounded by the limits of the appropriate traffic separation lane, extended for 10 miles NE and SW from the end of the lanes as shown on the chart. Deep-draught vessels passing SE of Gotland are advised to use the recommended channel, see 2.11 and 2.17.
5
6
Principal marks 1
2
3
2.185 Landmarks: Hoburg Lighthouse (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) (2.143). Heligholmen Lighthouse (white tower, 9 m in height) (56°55′⋅4N, 18°17′⋅3E), stands on a low rocky islet. Faludden Lighthouse (white metal tower, 17 m in height) (56°59′⋅8N, 18°23′⋅7E), stands on a point of that name. När Lighthouse (red round metal tower, three white bands, 16 m in height) (57°13′⋅3N, 18°41′⋅0E). Torsburgen (57°24′⋅7N, 18°43′⋅2E), a flat topped hill, nearly circular, with steep wooded sides, except on the S. Östergarn Lighthouse (white round stone tower, black bands on upper part, 29 m in height) (57°26′⋅6N, 18°59′⋅3E). Major lights: Hoburg Light (56°55′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) (2.143). Faludden Light — as above. När Light — as above.
7
2.186 From a position S of Hoburg Light the track leads NE, passing (with positions from När Light (57°13′⋅3N, 18°41′⋅0E)): SE of Barshagegrund (26½ miles SSW), marked by a buoy (S cardinal). Attention is drawn to a wreck (28½ miles SSW), with a depth of 16 m over it, lying in the SW-bound lane of the TSS. Thence: SE of Flytan (25¼ miles SW), a 3 m shoal patch which lies at the S edge of a reef, which is partly awash. The reef runs S for 7½ cables from Barshageudd, a point 2½ miles E of Revet (2.144). Thence: SE of Lillgrund (19¾ miles SW), a shoal area awash on its W side; it is marked by a buoy (E cardinal). Thence: SE of Espebådan (18 miles SW), a shoal area which is awash, thence: SE of Briten (16½ miles SW), a reef with depths of less than 5 m over it which extends 1 mile ESE from Faludden and is marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SE of Grötlingbogrund (12½ miles SW), thence: SE of Småbriten (9¾ miles SW), thence: SE of Söderbriten (7 miles SW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: Clear of, depending on draught, a shoal patch with least depth of 12 m over it (7 miles S), thence: SE of Närs Holme, a barren peninsula on which stands När Light (2.185), thence: SE of Virudden (1¾ miles NE), a low and treeless point, thence: SE of Laus Holmar (4½ miles NE), a group of three low grass-covered islets, which lie in foul ground which extends 2½ miles NE from Nyudden (3½ miles NNE). Laus Holmar Light (white tower, 6 m in height) is displayed from the E end of Storholm, the S and largest of the group. The foul ground is marked on its E and N sides by buoys (cardinal). Thence: SE of Blindan (10 miles NE), a rocky shoal awash, thence: SE of Grynghällar (10½ miles NE), a group of rocks, some of which are above water, lying within 1 mile from the shore, thence: To a position SE of Östergarn (16½ miles NE), an island, low on its E side, but rising towards the W side which is steep. Beside the two lighthouses there is a tower close to the W lighthouse. An ODAS light-buoy (special) is moored 2¼ miles ESE of Östergarn.
Useful marks 2.187 1
Ronehamn Lighthouse (57°10′⋅3N, 18°32′⋅7E) (2.192). There are numerous churches, prominent from seaward, as can be seen from the chart. (Directions continue at 2.206)
Ronehamn Chart 2288 (see 1.34)
General information 1
106
2.188 Description. Ronehamn (57°10′N, 18°30′E) is a small commercial and fishing harbour suitable for vessels with a
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
2
draught of 4⋅0 m and length of 70 m. It is well sheltered by islets, rocks and shoals which encumber its approaches. Function. Principal exports are grain and farm produce. Imports are general cargo. There is a guest and small boat harbour on the NE side of the main pier. Approach and entry. The harbour is approached either from N, the main channel, or from S through a secondary channel, to the outer roads. An entrance channel, dredged to 4⋅0 m, 7½ cables long, marked by buoys (lateral), leads from the outer roads to the quays. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 16 vessels totalling 9925 dwt. Port Authority. Port Authority of Ronehamn, Ronehamn Harbour Office, Ronehamn, Sweden.
4
5
6
Limiting conditions 1
2.189 Maximum authorised draught. In the N approach channel and the entrance channel, 4⋅0 m. In the S approach channel, 3⋅0 m. Density of water: 1⋅000 g/cm3. Ice. The harbour is usually closed by ice during January and February.
Arrival information 1
1
2
2.190 Pilotage. Local knowledge is required. Pilots should be requested from Oxelösund VTS (2.166). Pilot boards in position 57°10′⋅3N, 18°38′⋅8E. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. 3
Harbour 1
2.191 General layout. The harbour is formed by a single main pier extending SE from the shore with a short spur breakwater extending from its NE side which provides protection for the small craft berths close NW. A short breakwater extends E from the shore, W of the main pier, forming a basin.
Directions 1
2
3
2.192 Approach from north. From a position about 1¾ miles S of När Lighthouse (57°13′⋅3N, 18°41′⋅0E) (2.185), on a line of bearing of about 256° of Ronehamn Light (black tower, white top, grey base, 11 m in height) (57°10′⋅3N, 18°32′⋅7E), and by night, in the white sector (243°–266½°) of the light, the track leads WSW for about 3½ miles then SW for a further 1½ miles, passing (with positions from Ronehamn Light): NNW of 3⋅8 m shoal patch (1½ miles E), marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: N and W of Ronehamn Light, passing ½ cable clear, and: SE of a 3⋅2 m shoal (1½ cables NW) marked by a buoy (starboard hand). Thence, in the white sector (052°–057°) of Ronehamn Light, astern, the track leads between shoal depths of 4⋅4 and 4⋅6 m, marked by buoys (port and starboard hand respectively) and continues to the leading line of the entrance channel.
4
5
6
1
2
107
Note. Local knowledge is required to proceed beyond Ronehamn Light as the depth in the inner part of the channel is liable to change. Approach from south. Leading marks: Front mark. Grötlingboholm Beacon (white square topmark on white truncated cone, 6 m in height) (57°07′⋅7N, 18°28′⋅2E), standing on the N end of Innerholmen an islet. Rear mark. Rone Church (57°12′⋅4N, 18°26′⋅9E). From a position about 7 miles S of Ronehamn harbour the alignment (350°) of these marks leads from S, for a distance of 4½ miles, on the first leg of the approach, passing (with positions from Grötlingboholm Beacon): E of Grötlingbogrund (4¾ miles S), thence: W of Småbriten (2¼ miles S), thence: E of Espebriten (1½ miles S), a shoal awash, marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: W of the SW edge of a reef (9 cables SSE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand). The reef extends SW from Ytterholmen, an islet (1½ miles E). 2.193 Thence the track leads NE for about 1¾ miles, passing: NW of the reef off the NW coast of Ytterholmen (1 mile E), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SW of Isgrund, a reef awash (1 mile NE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Vinden (1½ miles NE), a shallow bank with a least depth of 2 m extending NE from Isgrund; it is marked by a buoy (port hand). There are depths of 3⋅4 to 4⋅7 m, over a width of 2 cables, between this bank and the shoal bank, extending from the NW side of Ytterholmen. Thence, the track leads NNW for 9 cables, passing the NW end of Södra Skikgrund, marked by a buoy (starboard hand). Thence, the track leads N for about 3 cables to join the entrance leading line. Entry. Leading lights: Front light (white triangle, point up) (57°10′⋅4N, 18°29′⋅5E). Rear light (white triangle, point down) (690 m from front light). From a position 1 mile SSE of the front light, the alignment (325°) of these lights leads for 5 cables through the entrance channel, marked by buoys (lateral), with an authorised draught of 4⋅3 m. Thence: Harbour. Leading lights: Front light (white triangle, point up) (57°10′⋅4N, 18°29′⋅7E). Rear light (white triangle, point down) (150 m from front light). The alignment (332½°) of these lights leads from the end of the buoyed channel into the harbour. Caution. A 3⋅0 m shoal lies very close NE of the alignment of the leading lights, 150 m SSE of the head of the pier. It is marked by two buoys (starboard hand). 2.194 Useful marks: Austergrund Beacon (grey cement pillar) (57°09′⋅0N, 18°32′⋅6E) standing near the NE end of Austergrund, an extensive shoal on which there are above-water rocks. Tomtbod Beacon (white square, on pole, mounted on white truncated cone with red band, 4 m in height) (57°10′⋅8N, 18°31′⋅1E). Radio mast (12 m in height; red light), standing on a silo (57°10′⋅3N, 18°29′⋅7E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Getorskär Beacon (white disc on pole, mounted on white cone, 4 m in height) (57°09′⋅6N, 18°29′⋅7E). Langård Beacon (white truncated cone, 4 m in height) standing on a point 3 cables WNW of Getorskär Beacon.
Anchorage. Local knowledge is required. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in the bay NW of När Light; the shores of the bay are sandy. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions.
Ljugarn
Berths 1
2.195 The main berths lie on the W side of the main pier with a total of 225 m in length and a depth alongside of 4⋅7 m. On the E side of the pier there is 105 m of quay with depths of 3⋅0 to 3⋅5 m alongside. On the N side of the basin formed by the W breakwater there is 85 m of quay with depths of 2⋅4 to 4⋅6 m alongside.
Port services 1
2.196 Repairs. There is a slip suitable for vessels up to 150 displacement. Minor repairs only. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Rescue. The pilot boat acts as a lifeboat if required.
Harbours
1
2
3
Vändburg 1
2
3
4
2.197 Description. Vändburg (56°57′N, 18°19′E) has two small harbours about 400 m apart. The harbour to the N is the old harbour formed by two breakwaters and partially silted. The new harbour, a fishing port, consists of a circular turning basin with three associated basins leading off. The entrance channel has an authorised draught of 4⋅3 m; the turning basin is 4⋅6 m deep. The two S basins have a quay length of 50 and 60 m respectively and a depth of 4⋅6 m, the N basin has a quay length of 60 m and a depth of 3⋅1 m. Directions. Outer Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle point up, on mast) (56°56′⋅9N, 18°18′⋅5E). Rear light (red triangle point down, on mast) (165 m from front light). From a position SE of Vändburg the alignment (322°) of these lights leads to the harbour entrance. Thence, when abeam of the entrance channel, the alignment (222°) of the inner leading lights leads through the entrance channel and into the new harbour: Front light (red triangle point up, on mast) (56°56′⋅7N, 18°18′⋅7E). Rear light (red triangle point down, on mast) (60 m from front light). Caution. The inner leading lights can be seen at long range but should only be used in the channel leading to the harbour. Supplies. Fuel available.
Herrvik 1
2
3
4
Närshamn 1
2
2.198 Description. Närshamn (57°13′⋅5N, 18°40′⋅0E) is a small fishing harbour suitable for vessels with a draught of 3⋅6 m. The harbour is formed by two breakwaters extending E from the shore. The entrance between the breakwater heads is 25 m wide and there is a 100 m long quay on the S side. The depths in the entrance and alongside the quay are 4 m. Directions. From a position S of När Light (57°13′⋅3N, 18°41′⋅0E) (2.185) the harbour is approached within the white sector (344°–358°) of the light (framework tower; floodlit) displayed from Närshamn S pier head.
2.199 Description. Ljugarn (57°20′N, 18°43′E) consists of a single unsheltered pier projecting SSE from Ljugarnsudde, a point on the coast. There is a curved quay about 100 m long on the W side of the pier with depths alongside of 2⋅7 to 3⋅0 m. There is a separate fishing and small craft harbour about 300 m W, protected by two breakwaters; quays on the insides of the breakwaters have depths from 1⋅0 to 1⋅5 m. Directions. Ljugarn can be approached on a line of bearing of about 276° of Ljugarn Light (on water tank, 12 m in height, near the root of the pier). By night, approach in the white sector (251°–301°) of this light. Leading lights (034°) are displayed from the fishing harbour when required. Berth Small craft may berth alongside the pier or in the harbour. Repairs. There is a slip in the fishing harbour. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions. Communications by sea with Visby and other harbours on Gotland.
5
108
2.200 Description. Herrvik (57°25′⋅5N, 18°55′⋅5E) is a small fishing harbour which faces NE. It is formed by two outer and two inner moles. The entrance between the outer moles is 54 m wide and the channel is 30 m wide with a depth of 6 m. Pilotage. Local fishermen can pilot a vessel if required. Caution. Between 15th March and 15th June each year, salmon nets are laid between Östergarn and Gotland. During the hours of darkness there is a great risk of over-running and damaging the fishing equipment. Mariners are advised to avoid passing through this area during this period and at all times during the hours of darkness. See 2.136. Directions. Approach to Herrvik can be made by passing SW or NW of Östergarn (2.186). The approach passing NW is preferable, on a bearing of about 210°, in the white sector (196°–222°) of Herrvik West Breakwater Head Light (lantern on white pedestal) (57°25′⋅5N, 18°55′⋅3E). The strait between Östergarn and Gotland has depths from 11 to 26 m in the fairway which is 1¼ miles in width; on the W side of the fairway is Skåne Reef, which dries over its inner part, and is steep-to, extending 7½ cables from the coast between Herrvik and Grogarnshuvud. Useful mark: Östergarn Västra Light (white octagonal lantern on round concrete base) (57°26′⋅5N, 18°57′⋅9E) displayed from the W point of the island. Anchorage may be obtained by vessels with a draught of 6 m, in a depth of 9 m, sand, 1¾ cables NE of the W mole head. Harbour. Within the harbour there are berths on the inside of the inner moles and on the E and W sides of the basin. On the W side there are two jetties extending E. Depths alongside range from 1 to 4 m. In the SW corner of the harbour, protected by a breakwater and the jetties, there is a small craft basin.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Port services. Repairs:. small slip available. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions. Rescue. A motor lifeboat is based at Herrvik and another patrols off the coast.
2
GOTLAND EAST COAST — ÖSTERGARN TO FÅRÖSUND General information
Coastal route
Chart 2223 (see 1.34)
Route 1
2.201 Offshore. From a position SE of Östergarn (57°27′N, 18°58′E) (2.186) the track leads N for about 25 miles to Fårösund. Coastal. From a position NE of Östergarn the track leads NW for about 14 miles to Slite pilot boarding position. Thence the track leads ENE for about 9 miles to a position SSE of Rutegrund where it joins the offshore route.
1
2
Topography 1
2.202 Between Grogarnshuvud (57°27′N, 18°54′E) and Slite, 16 miles N, the coast is of uniform height and wooded. Between Asunden (57°42′⋅4N, 18°51′⋅0E), see 2.214, and Furillen (2.222), 5¼ miles ENE, the coast is indented and fronted by a number of islands and shoals.
1
Fårösund Restricted Area 1
2.203 The NE end of Gotland, E of approximately 18°55′E, Fårösund, and the SW side of the island of Fårö, lie within a restricted area, shown on the chart. The marked channel to and through Fårösund is excepted from the restricted area.
Ice 1
2.204 The route from Slite to Fårösund can be obstructed by compact pack-ice in normal winters, particularly in February and March. In severe winters, for short periods, ice may be found off Magö (57°41′N, 18°52′E).
2
3
Principal marks 1
2.205 Landmarks: Torsburgen (57°24′⋅7N, 18°43′⋅2E) (2.185). Östergarn Lighthouse (57°26′⋅6N, 18°59′⋅3E) (2.185). Major light: Fårö Light (57°57′⋅7N, 19°21′⋅1E) (2.244).
1
Directions Offshore route 2.206 From a position SE of Östergarn (57°27′N, 18°58′E) (2.186) the track leads N to Fårösund, passing (with positions from Magö Light (57°40′⋅8N, 18°51′⋅4E)): E of Briterne (14½ miles SSE), a shoal patch on the outer edge of foul ground which extends 1¾ miles NE and E from Östergarn. It is covered by the red sector of Östergarn Light and its E limit is marked by a buoy (E cardinal). Thence:
2.207 Östergarn to Slite. From a position NE of Östergarn and clear NE of Briterne (2.206) the track leads NW for about 14½ miles to Slite pilot boarding position, passing (with positions from Magö Light (57°40′⋅8N, 18°51′⋅4E)): NE of Anesbådar (11 miles S), a shoal marked by a buoy (E cardinal). The shoal is the NE limit of Hammargrund, a shoal area which has rocks awash, thence: NE of Sildungen (5½ miles S), an islet situated on the coastal bank 7½ cables E of Botvaldvik. Thence, follow the directions for Slite. 2.208 Slite to Fårösund. From the Slite pilot boarding position, S of Magö Light, the track leads ENE for about 9 miles and then N for a farther 5 miles, passing (with positions from Magö Light (57°40′⋅8N, 18°51′⋅4E)): SSE of Skenalden (2½ miles ENE), a bare rock on which stands a beacon (lattice). A dangerous wreck lies close W of the rock. Thence: SSE of Laugrund (2¾ miles ENE), a rock awash and Hojskär, an above-water rock, 4 cables N of Laugrund. These dangers and Skenalden are covered by a green sector of Magö Light and a red sector of Grauten Light. Thence: SSE of Britgrund (4¾ miles ENE), a shoal with a dangerous wreck on its SW side, thence: SSE of Grautarne (6 miles ENE), two white rocks at the outer end of a reef, awash in places, which extends 1 mile SSE from Furillen (2.222). Grauten Lighthouse (2.209) stands on the E rock. Thence: ESE and E of Rutegrund (8½ miles ENE). Thence, directions are as given in the offshore route.
Useful marks
(continued from 2.187)
1
E of Rutegrund (8½ miles ENE), a shoal marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: E of Rute Missloper (9½ miles NE), a low rock on which stands a beacon (white truncated pyramid, red band, 6 m in height). It lies 1½ miles SE of Skenholmen, a low island which is difficult to identify. Foul ground which extends SSW from Rute Missloper is marked by a buoy (S cardinal). Thence: W of Södergrund (13 miles NE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal).
2.209 In addition to the marks listed below there are several churches, the positions of which are shown on the chart, which are visible from seaward. Mast (57°36′⋅1N, 18°45′⋅1E). Grauten Lighthouse (red tower, 11 m in height) (57°43′⋅7N, 19°01′⋅8E). (Directions for Fårösund S approach continue at 2.229 and for Gotska Sandön at 2.245)
Slite and approaches General information 1
109
2.210 Description. Slite (57°42′N, 18°48′E) is a large industrial town and commercial harbour which lies on the W side of Slite Hamn, an inlet sheltered by several islands, though winds from the S send in some sea. Function. The harbour has good, modern facilities for handling medium sized vessels carrying bulk and liquid
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
2
cargoes. Principal exports include, grain and other agricultural products, timber and cement. Imports include, oil, coal, gypsum, sand and fertiliser. The population is about 2500. Approach and entry. There are two buoyed channels leading into Slite Hamn between the islands which lie off the entrance. The harbour is entered on the alignment of leading lights. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 206 vessels totalling 1⋅7 million dwt. Port Authority. Cementa AB, PO Box 102, S–620 30 Slite, Sweden.
3
4
5
Limiting conditions 1
2.211 Authorised draught for the deep-water channel between Enholmen and Grundet is 7⋅8 m. The maximum draught from the main channel to the berth on the N side of the N mole of Slite Lanthamn is 6⋅7 m. Maximum size of vessel: length 150 m; breadth 15 m; approximately 10 000 dwt. Ice. In severe winters, during February and March ice may obstruct the harbour.
Arrival information 1
2
2.212 Pilotage. Pilots are compulsory for vessels exceeding 1600 grt and should be requested through Oxelösund VTS (2.166) giving at least 5 hours notice. Pilot boards 1 mile S of Magö (57°41′N, 18°52′E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Restricted area. The approaches to Slite Hamn lie partly within the Fårösund Restricted Area (2.203). Minefield. A permanent defensive minefield, shown on the chart, is laid across the entrance to Slite Hamn. Anchoring, fishing, diving and seabed activities are prohibited in this area.
6
7
Anchorage 1
1
1
2
Directions 1
2
2.214 Deep-water channel. Local knowledge is required. From a position W of Magö (57°41′N, 18°52′E) a barren island, 10 m high, and clear of a 5⋅3 m shoal, marked by a buoy (W cardinal), which lies 5 cables to the W, the track leads N in a channel 2 cables wide, marked by light-buoys (lateral), between Enholmen (57°40′⋅8N, 18°49′⋅4E), an island on which there are some fortifications and a house, and Grundet, a low grassy islet, 3 cables to the E. Thence, on the alignment (320½°) of Slite Hamn Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, point up, on framework tower) (57°42′⋅8N, 18°48′⋅6E). Rear light (red triangle, point down, on framework tower) (190 m from front light). The track leads NW through a channel marked by light-buoys (lateral) to Slite Industrihamn.
2.215 Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 6 to 7 m, sand and clay, to the W of Asunden (2.214), N of the mined area and E of the deep-water channel. Anchoring is prohibited within 50 m of the submarine cable which is laid between Asunden and Slite.
Berths
Harbour 2.213 Slite Lanthamn (57°42′⋅4N, 18°48′⋅6E), the commercial harbour, consists of a basin enclosed by two breakwaters. The entrance between the moleheads is 50 m wide, with a depth of 5⋅8 m. Slite Industrihamn lies 3 cables N of the commercial harbour and is mainly used by the cement factory complex but other cargoes are handled. It comprises a jetty running N − S along the shore and two jetties extending E from the shore.
Vessels bound for Slite Lanthamn, leave the channel when abeam of the entrance between the breakwaters and on to the alignment (268°) of a pair of beacons, which stand on the W shore of the harbour. Smällhålet Channel. From a position about 6 cables NE of Magö Light the alignment (312°) of the following marks leads through the channel, with a least depth of 3⋅8 m and marked by buoys (lateral), between Grundet and Asunden (57°42′⋅4N, 18°51′⋅0E), an island covered by grass and connected to the coast N by a reef partly above water: Front mark. Länna Beacon (white diamond on pole, 6 m in height, on white cairn, 3⋅5 m in height) (57°43′⋅0N, 18°48′⋅2E). Rear mark. Othem Church (57°44′⋅9N, 18°44′⋅3E). Thence, the track leads between pairs of buoys (lateral) to the main channel from where the directions to the berths are as given for the deep-water channel. Useful marks: Magö Light (white tower, 6 m in height) (57°40′⋅8N, 18°51′⋅5E). Magö Beacon (horizontal barrel on pole, 4 m in height on white four-sided truncated pyramid about 8 m in height), standing on the summit of Magö, N of the light. Grundet Lighthouse (white lantern) (57°41′⋅8N, 18°50′⋅3E). Group of eight windmotors (between 55 m and 67 m in height) (centred 57°43′⋅7N, 18°56′⋅6E), standing at Smöjen.
3
2.216 Slite Lanthamn. Inside the basin the breakwaters provide 290 m of quay space with depths alongside of 3⋅5 to 6⋅0 m. An inner basin, for fishing boats and small craft, is formed by two smaller jetties which project into the main basin. On the N side of the N mole there is a further 160 m of berthing space with a fixed Ro-Ro ramp at its inshore end and depths alongside of 6⋅5 to 7⋅0 m. Slite Industrihamn. Oceankajen lies in a N-S direction along the shore and is 255 m long with a depth alongside of 6⋅8 m. Cementpiren projects 130 m from the shore at the N end of Oceankajen and has depths along both sides of 8⋅4 m. Silopiren lies immediately N of Cementpiren and projects 100 m in an ENE direction from the shore. It has a depth of 7⋅2 m alongside its S side and a depth alongside its N side of 5⋅5 m. Slite Lännahamnen lies about 3 cables N of Slite Industrihamn and has berths and for visiting yachts.
Port services 1
110
2.217 Repairs: minor repairs only; engineering workshop; slip for small craft. Other facilities: de-ratting, including exemption; doctor. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Communications. Visby airport 28 km WSW. Rescue. The pilot boat acts as a lifeboat when required. 2
Harbours south of Slite Katthammarsvik 1
2
3
4
2.218 General information. Katthammarsvik (57°26′N, 18°51′E), which comprises a large single pier and a small fishing harbour close SW, is situated in the SE corner of a bay of the same name. The greater part of the bay is partially obstructed by shoals and should not be approached without local knowledge. Directions. From a position about 4½ miles NNE of the pier head the track leads SSW, passing (with positions from Östergarn Västra Light (57°26′⋅5N, 18°57′⋅9E)): ESE of Anesbådar (4 miles NW) (2.207), thence: Clear of Kullen (3½ miles W), a shoal with a depth of 4⋅4 m over it. Thence, vessels proceed to the pier, or if bound for the fishing harbour approach on the alignment (188°) of leading lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, on post) (57°26′⋅2N, 18°51′⋅2E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on post) (60 m from front light). Anchorage may be obtained about 4 cables N of the pier in a depth of 6 m sand and clay. Winds from the N send in some sea, but the holding ground is good. Berths. The 70 m quay at the outer end of the pier has depths of 3⋅0 to 3⋅5 m. In the fishing harbour the quay is 40 m long with a depth of 2 m alongside. Small craft may berth alongside the pier; facilities available. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions.
3
Valleviken 1
2
3
4
5
Botvaldvik 1
2
2.219 General information. Botvaldvik (57°35′N, 18°48′E) is a small fishing harbour protected by two moles. The entrance, with a depth of 3⋅5 m, faces ENE. Within the harbour there is an angled jetty, 45 m in length, with a depth of 3 m alongside. There is a boat slip for small craft. Directions. Leading lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, on post) (57°35′⋅2N, 18°48′⋅5E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on post) (195 m from front light). The alignment (255°) of these lights leads to the harbour from seaward, close N of Sildungen (2.207).
General information Charts 2223, 2361 with plan of Fårösund
Fårösund 1
General information 1
1
2.223 Fårösund (57°53′N, 19°03′E) separates the island of Fårö from the NE end of Gotland. It can be entered from the S through a channel with an authorised draught of 5⋅2 m, and from the N through a channel with an authorised draught of 4⋅6 m. Both entrances are well lighted.
Hazards 1
2.224 Minefields. Permanent defensive minefields, shown on the chart, are laid across the N and S entrances to Fårösund. Anchoring, fishing and underwater operations are prohibited. Ferry. A ferry operates between Fårösund and a pier at Broa (57°52′N, 19°05′E), 7 cables ENE, on Fårö.
Pilotage
Sankt Olofsholm 2.221 General information. Sankt Olofsholm (57°43′N, 18°55′E) is a disused loading place now used as a small craft harbour. It lies within the Fårösund Restricted Area and a nature reserve.
2.222 General information. Valleviken (57°47′⋅3N, 18°57′⋅0E) is a disused commercial harbour now in private ownership. The harbour lies near a disused quarry and has a roomy, well-sheltered basin in which depths vary between 3⋅2 and 2⋅2 m. It lies within the Fårösund Restricted Area. Directions. Local knowledge is required. Approach is from the S, passing (with positions from Grauten Light (57°43′⋅7N, 19°01′⋅8E)(2.209)): E of Laugrund (3½ miles SE) (2.208), thence: W of Britgrund (1¾ miles SE) (2.208), thence: E of Lörgeh (2 miles W), an islet close to the coast. Lörjebacke Beacon (painted black on the N side and white on the S side), stands on the coast near the islet. And: W of Söderudd (1 mile NNW), the S point of Furillen, a wooded island with a ridge that is easily identified from the S; the island is joined to the coast NW by a bridge. Thence: E and N of Fjaugen (2 miles NW), an islet. Thence, it is reported that leading marks (white beacons with red triangular boards, supplemented by a flag pole on the leading line) lead to the channel, marked by buoys (private), for the harbour.
FÅRÖSUND
Harbours north of Slite 2.220 On the N and NE coast of Gotland there are several disused limestone harbours which can be used by visiting boats. Quays are often in poor condition and mooring places exposed to the wind and sea. The areas surrounding the harbours and quarries are deserted. The coast between Slite and Fårösund lies within the Fårösund Restricted Area (2.203).
Directions. Approach is from the S, passing (with positions from Magö Light (57°40′⋅8N, 18°51′⋅4E) (2.214)): W of Skenalden (2½ miles ENE) (2.208), thence: Clear of Kittlarna (2½ miles NE), an above-water rock on which stands a beacon (white triangle over a cylinder, 3 m in height), thence: W of Ytterholm (3 miles NE), an islet, and: E of Sankt Olofsholm Point (2¾ miles NNE). Thence through an unmarked channel, 6 m deep, to the quay. Useful mark. There is a windmill on the S side of the harbour. Close S of the windmill are the ruins of a church.
1
111
2.225 Pilots should be requested from Oxelösund VTS (2.166). Pilot boards 8 cables E of Svingrund (57°56′N, 19°01′E) (2.231) for the N entrance, and 1½ miles SSE of Bungeör (57°50′N, 19°07′E) (2.229) for the S entrance. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
Restricted area 1
2.226 The Fårösund Restricted Area, shown on the chart, is a military restricted area. See 1.87.
1
Submarine cables 1
2.227 Several submarine cables are laid across Fårösund, as shown on the chart. They include two power cables, one S of the town of Fårösund (57°52′N, 19°04′E) and the other close S of Fårösund Norra Front leading light (57°52′⋅7N, 19°02′⋅1E). Anchoring is prohibited within 100 m of these cables. The landings of the N cable on Fårö, S of Klintbroviken, and the S cable on Gotland, S of the town of Fårösund are marked by pairs of lighted beacons (yellow triangular notice boards), which indicate the direction of the cable. The Fårö end of the S cable is marked by a pair of beacons (yellow triangular notice boards), 1 cable apart, aligned in the direction of the cable.
Approach and entry from north 1
Natural conditions 1
2.228 Water level. The level of water is highest in autumn with gales from the N or W, when it can reach 0⋅9 m above mean level. It is lowest in spring when a succession of winds from S and E can cause it to fall 0⋅7 m below mean level. Current. In the approach to the N entrance, the current usually sets E or W and in the dredged channel it sets N or S. Ice. Fårösund can be obstructed by compact pack-ice in normal winters, particularly in February and March.
Directions for Fårösund (continued from 2.209 and 2.163)
2
3
4
Approach and entry from south 1
2
3
4
2.229 From a position 1¼ miles S of Bungeör Lighthouse (57°49′⋅5N, 19°07′⋅2E) approach on a line of bearing of about 347° of Fårösund Södra Light (red tower, 7 m in height) (57°50′⋅9N, 19°06′⋅1E). By night, approach in the white sector (344½°–351°) of this light. The track leads NNW for about 2 miles, passing (with positions from Fårösund Södra Light): WSW of Bungeör Light (white tower, black band, 14 m in height) (1½ miles SSE). Bungeör Beacon (grey, castellated, 7 m in height) stands 1½ cables NNE of the light. And: ESE of Bungenäs (1½ miles S), a promontory which extends S from the NE tip of Gotland, thence: WSW of Ördar (1 mile SSE), a reef awash with two islets on it, which extends 4 cables N from Bungeör. Thence, when Ryssudden (9 cables SE), the S point of Fårö, is abeam to starboard, the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads first N then NW to pass close E of Fårösund Södra Lighthouse which stands near the NE edge of Flytan, a shoal extending NE from Skarvgrund, a low rocky islet on which stands Skarvgrund Beacon (white triangle and pole on white conical cairn, 4 m in height) (57°50′⋅9N, 19°05′⋅9E). A 5⋅3 m shoal, marked by a light-buoy (lateral) lies 1½ cables SSE of the light. Thence the recommended track, as shown on the chart, passes between 5⋅5 and 5⋅6 m shoals, marked by buoys (lateral), 3 cables NW of Fårösund Södra Light. The track then leads on a line of bearing, 325½°, of Haurevlar Light (2.231) and by night is followed by keeping in the white
sector (142°–147°), astern, of Fårösund Södra Light, and in the white sector (321°–330°), ahead, of Haurevlar Light. 2.230 Channel north of Bungeör. Local knowledge is required. From a position N or S of Fårö Missloper (57°50′⋅0N, 19°09′⋅3E), a low rocky islet fringed with reefs, the track leads W or NW respectively to a channel, suitable for vessels with a draught of 4 m, which leads between Ryssudden (2.229) and Österflytan, a rock awash lying midway between that point and the NE extremity of Bungeör. Thence NW to join the main track E of Fårösund Södra Light.
5
6
2.231 The following marks, in line bearing 183°, can be used in the N approach to Fårösund: Front mark. Haurevlar Beacon (masonry cairn) (57°54′⋅5N, 19°01′⋅9E). Rear mark. Bunge Church (57°51′⋅3N, 19°01′⋅8E) (red light). Thence, Fårösund N Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, on white pedestal) (57°52′⋅7N, 19°02′⋅1E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on white pedestal) (8¼ cables from front light). From a position about 4½ miles from the front light, the alignment (179°) of these lights leads from seaward, for about 2½ miles passing, (with positions from Haurevlar Light (57°54′⋅3N, 19°01′⋅5E)): E of Svingrund (1¾ miles N), a reef on which rocks are both awash and above water. A light (2.163) stands at the N end. Thence: W of Aurgrund (1¼ mile NNE), an islet lying on the coastal bank and on which stands Aurgrund Lighthouse (white tower, black top, 10 m in height), thence: W of Fårösund Norra Yttre Light-buoy (starboard hand) (6 cables NNE). Thence, for about 9 cables, through a channel 40 m wide, authorised for a draught of 5⋅2 m and marked on each side by buoys (lateral). The channel leads between Haurevlar, a point on which stands a beacon, and Lunsaholm, the W point of Fårö. Thence, the track leads SE through Fårösund, on a line of bearing of about 144½° of Fårösund Södra Light. By night the track is followed by keeping the white sector (321°–330°), astern, of Haurevlar Light (lantern on white framework tower on white pedestal) (57°54′⋅3N, 19°01′⋅5E), and the white sector (142°–147°), ahead, of Fårösund Södra Light.
Harbours in Fårösund 1
2
112
2.232 General information. The town of Fårösund has three harbours, namely, the fishing harbour, Mercurina Marina and the small craft harbour. The marine repair yard has a separate harbour. There are disused piers at Stra and Klintbroviken. Fishing harbour. The harbour (57°52′⋅0N, 19°03′⋅5E) is protected by a curved breakwater 300 m long. A concrete pier 60 m long extends NE from the shore towards the head of the breakwater. The pier has depths of 6⋅5 to 2⋅5 m. A quay 125 m long extends from the root of the NW side of the pier, it has depths of 4⋅5 m on its NE side and 3⋅7 m on its SW side. Close S of the root of the pier lies the ferry berth and ramp.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
3
4
Marine repair yard harbour. The harbour lies 2½ cables WNW of the fishing harbour. There are slips within the yard. Strå. At Strå, 1¾ miles NNW of the fishing harbour, there is a pier which is disused but reportedly in good condition. There is a depth of 5⋅4 m alongside the S side of the pier. Klintbroviken. On the E side of Fårösund, 1½ miles N of the fishing harbour, there is a jetty 70 m in length which is seldom used; vessels with a draught of 4 m can lie alongside its S side.
The E part of the bay, known as Sundersandsvikenand, lies between Askugrund and Avagrund, an above-water rock lying on a shallow spit extending from the point SW of Ava.
Fårö north-west side 1
Port services 1
2.233 Repairs. Slip suitable for vessels up to 700 dwt, length 65 m, beam 11 m. Repair facilities available. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions. Rescue. The pilot vessel acts as a lifeboat if required. Communications. The nearest airport is at Visby, 50 km SW.
2.239 Between Aurgrund (57°54′⋅8N, 19°02′⋅4E) (2.231) and Lauterhorn, 2 miles NE, is a rocky bight. Tälleviken, which has depths of 3⋅8 m in the entrance, is entered between Langshammarshammaren (58°00′⋅0N, 19°11′⋅2E) and Norsholmen, a small peninsula, 1 mile E. Ajkesvik, is entered between Norsholmen and a point 2 miles ESE.
Rescue 1
2.240 A motor lifeboat and line throwing apparatus are kept on the S side of Norsholmen.
Gotska Sandön General information
FÅRÖSUND TO GOTSKA SANDÖN 1
General information Charts 2223, 2361, 2362
Submarine cables 1
2.234 Submarine cables are laid between Gotland, Fårö and Gotska Sandön, as shown on the chart.
Anchorage
Restricted area 1
2.235 The restricted area, shown on the chart, which extends from NE of Fårö and encloses Gotska Sandön and Kopparstenarna Bank, is a nature reserve. Entry is not prohibited except for an area 3½ miles N of Fårö Light, shown on the chart, which is a seal breeding colony. Local regulations are in force.
1
1
2.236 See 1.284 and 1.288.
1
General information 2.237 The island of Fårö (57°57′N, 19°10′E), which lies off the NE coast of Gotland is of even height, its N side being mostly steep and light-coloured, with detached rocks. The SE side is wooded. The NE part of the island forms Avanäs peninsula, the E point of which is Holmudden. Ulahau, a white horseshoe-shaped sand dune, opening to the N, 3 miles W of Holmudden, is visible from the N and S.
2
Fårö south-east side 1
2
2.243 A line throwing apparatus is kept at Gotska Sandön.
Principal marks Fårö
1
2.242 There is no secure anchorage off the island, though shelter from N winds may be obtained, in summer, under its lee, but gales are liable to send in a heavy swell. Anchoring is prohibited between the bearings 244° and 285° from position 58°23′⋅3N, 19°11′⋅3E to a distance of 1000 m from the shore.
Rescue
Climatic table 1
2.241 Gotska Sandön (58°22′N, 19°15′E) is a wooded island 42 m high, with sandhills on the coast. The island which has a national park on the N part of its W side lies within a restricted area (nature reserve) which is regulated by local government laws. Caution. Surveys around Gotska Sandön are unreliable. Vessels should pass the island at a safe distance.
2.238 Between Hammarudden (57°53′⋅5N, 19°10′⋅5E) and the point SW of Ava, a village 5 miles NE, there is a bay, divided into two parts by a reef which extends S for 1½ miles. Askugrund, an above-water rock, stands on the reef 9 cables from the shore. Vinflytegrunden, lies 8 cables SE, with a 3⋅7 m patch a farther 8 cables SE. The W part of the bay is known as Kyrkviken, in the entrance of which is Hammarsgrund, which is awash.
2.244 Landmarks: Fårö Church (57°55′⋅1N, 19°08′⋅1E). Fårö Lighthouse (white round stone tower, 30 m in height) (57°57′⋅7N, 19°21′⋅1E). Mast (201 m in elevation), standing close to Fårö Light, displaying a white light from its top, and three red lights, vertically disposed. Gotska Sandön NW Point Lighthouse (brown wooden tower, 23 m in height) (58°23′⋅7N, 19°11′⋅8E). Major lights: Fårö Light — as above. Gotska Sandön NW Point Light — as above.
Directions (continued from 2.209)
Fårösund south entrance to Gotska Sandön 1
113
2.245 Fårösund south entrance to Kittlarna. From a position close E of Rutegrund (57°44′N, 19°06′E) (2.206) the track leads NE for about 18 miles passing, (with positions from Fåro Light): SE of Södergrund (10¾ miles SSE) (2.206), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 2
2
1
2
SE of Lavergrund (7 miles SSE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SE of Digergrund (4½ miles S), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SE and E of Kittlarna (1½ miles E), marked by a buoy (E cardinal). 2.246 Kittlarna to Gotska Sandön. From a position E of Fårö Light, clear of Kittlarna, the track leads N for about 24 miles, passing (with positions from Fåro Light): E of Salvorev (4½ miles N), foul ground which extends 8½ miles N of Fårö Light. The central part, consists of a ridge of sand gravel and rock, and is liable to shift. After heavy gales, large stretches of the ridge may appear above water but are afterwards washed away. The whole reef is steep-to on both sides, particularly on the W side. Off its N end the depths are very irregular. The N end of the foul ground is marked by Salvorev Light-buoy (N cardinal); the E and W limits are marked by buoys (cardinal), thence: E of Sandö Bank (16½ miles N), with a least depth of 9⋅5 m over it, thence: E of a shoal with a depth of 8⋅5 m over it (24 miles N), marked by a buoy (E cardinal). The shoal lies off Kyrkudden, the E point of Gotska Sandön. Kyrkudden Light (white round tower, 12 m in height) stands on the point.
Fårösund north entrance to Gotska Sandön 1
2
(continued from 2.163) 2.247 From a position on the Fårösund N leading line, about 4½ miles N of the front light, the track leads N for about 27 miles, passing (with positions from Gotska Sandön NW Point Light (58°23′⋅7N, 19°11′⋅8E)): W of Lauterhornsudde (26½ miles S), a low white point, steep-to on its SW side, thence: W of Digerhuvud (25 miles S), the most noticeable point on the NW coast of Fårö, thence: W of Salvorev (22 miles SSE) (2.246), thence:
W of Sandö Bank (12 miles SSE), thence: W of Hamnudden (3¾ miles SSE), the SW point of Gotska Sandön on which stands Hamnrudden Light (white round tower, 15 m in height). A buoy (S cardinal) is moored 1¼ miles S of the light at the limit of shoal water. Thence: W of Gotska Sandön NW Point Light (2.244). A buoy (W cardinal) is moored 1¾ miles NW of the point marking the limit of shoal water. A depth of 10 m lies inside the 20 m depth contour, 3½ miles NW of the light.
3
Channel north of Fårö 1
2
3
2.248 Local knowledge is required. From a position 3 miles NNE of Fårö Light (2.244) the track leads W, on a line of bearing of about 266° of Fårö Norsholm Light (57°59′⋅9N, 19°14′⋅7E) (2.249), and by night in the white sector (265½°–267°) of this light, through a channel, 4 cables wide, and which has a least charted depth of 5⋅4 m, passing (with positions from Fårö Light): N of Tornbullshällan (2¼ miles N), a rock awash, marked by a buoy (N cardinal), at the outer end of a reef extending 1½ miles from the NE end of Fårö, and: S of a shoal, with a least depth of 3⋅8 m over it (2¾ miles N), at the S end of Salvorev. Innerkullen, an above-water rock marked by a buoy (W cardinal) lies on the N side of the fairway, 3½ miles NNW of Fårö Light. Thence, the track leads NW in the white sector (195°–140°) of Fårö Light. This channel should only be used by small craft and passage by night is not recommended.
Useful marks 2.249 1
114
Fårö Norsholm Lighthouse (white framework tower) (57°59′⋅9N, 19°14′⋅7E). Norsholmen Beacon (white rectangle over cone on large white rectangle) stands 1 cable ESE of the light.
Home
Contents
Index NOTES
115
Home
Contents
Index Chapter 3 - Kullagrund to Kalmarsund 13°
14°
30´
15°
30´
16°
30´
2115
3.170 Ronneby
3.129 Karlshamn 2855 Stilleryd
3.77 Sölvesborg
52
3. 1
4 3.1
9
2857
3.250 Karlskrona
Kalmarsund
2857
3.162
Torhamnsudde
56° 98
3.8 8
0
3.
56°
00
3.7
48 3.1
2856
Utklippan 2857
2856
3.32
3.7 2
Åhus 3.56
3.2
Hanö
4. 14
2856
116 Simrishamn 3.39 3.20 Ystad
30´
Sandhammaren
2360
Trelleborg
2251
3.32
30´
32
2360
Christiansø 958
3.
Kullagrund
Hammerodde Bornholmsgat
3.11
958 Rønne
958
2.44
Bornholm Ne xø
958
55°
55° 0205
13°
30´
14°
30´
Longitude 15° East from Greenwich
16°
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 3 BALTIC NORTH SHORE — KULLAGRUND TO KALMARSUND
GENERAL INFORMATION Chart 2360
Recommended tracks
Scope of the chapter 1
2
3.1 The area covered by this chapter comprises the S and SE coasts of Sweden from Kullagrund (55°18′N, 13°20′E), 2½ miles SSW of Smygehamn (55°20′N, 13°21′E), to Torhamnsudde (56°04′⋅5N, 15°51′⋅0E), 100 miles NE, and is divided into the following sections: Kullagrund to Hanö (3.10). Hanö to the approaches to Karlskrona (3.107). Karlskrona and approaches (3.192). Included are the principal commercial ports of Åhus (3.56), Sölvesborg (3.77), Karlshamn (3.129) and Karlskrona (3.250) which is also a major naval base. For the description of Smygehamn see Baltic Pilot Volume I.
1
Pilotage 1
Description 1
3.2 This area of Sweden is famous for farms and old castles, being mainly agricultural and supplying the country with the majority of its arable requirements.
2
Water level 1
3.3 In the area covered by this chapter the coastal waters rise or fall from 0⋅4 to 0⋅6 m above or below the MSL. The variations are usually greater towards the SW end of the area. During winter gales the rise and fall may be over 1⋅0 m above or below MSL. Due to the land rise effect in Scandinavia generally, depths are subject to a yearly reduction, dependent on the geographical location. In this area the land rise is negligible. For further information see 1.33.
3
Restricted areas 1
3.4 Certain areas in Swedish waters within the limits of this chapter have been declared restricted for reasons of navigational safety and national security. These areas are shown on the chart. For details of regulations to be observed within these areas see 1.87.
2
3.5 The coastal waters off the S Swedish provinces of Skåne and Blekinge are important fishing areas. Drift net fishing is intensive, mainly during the hours of darkness. Numerous eel bottom nets, sometimes extending several kilometres from the shore, may be encountered in these waters. For further details see 1.20. Between Kullagrund and Åhus there are numerous small areas, shown on the chart, where fishing is prohibited. Each area is indicated by pairs of beacons standing on the shore. In Hanöbukten (3.10) there are extensive salmon and herring fishing operations.
3.7 Within the limits of this chapter all pilotage, with the minor exceptions of Ystad and Abbekås which are served by Malmö (Baltic Pilot Volume I), is controlled and provided through Karlshamn Pilot Station. See also individual port details. The appropriate pilot ordering centre is VTS Malmö. Pilots are available 24 hours and pilotage is compulsory as follows: (a) All Category 1 vessels. (b) Category 2 and 3 vessels above certain limits. Pilot boarding positions are as follows: (a) Simrishamn: off harbour entrance. (b) Åhus: (i) near Pållagrund (55°55′N, 14°28′E). (ii) near Taggen Light-buoy (55°54′N, 14°35′E). (c) Sölvesborg: (i) about 1 mile SE of Spättgrund (55°58′N, 14°35′E). (ii) near Pållagrund (55°55′N, 14°28′E). (iii) near Taggen Light-buoy (55°54′N, 14°35′E). (d) Karlshamn: (i) at the Outer position (56°05′⋅0N, 14°51′⋅8E). (ii) at the Inner position (56°07′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅4E). (e) Karlskrona: near Karlskrona angöring Light-buoy (56°03′⋅2N, 15°33′⋅5E). For details of categories and further information see 1.51 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Hazards 1
Fishing 1
3.6 Recommended tracks shown on charts may have figures thereon which indicate the maximum permitted draught of a vessel, operating with pilot assistance, for which the track is authorised at MSL.
2
3.8 Defensive minefields. Limits of defensive minefields are shown on the charts. Within the area of this chapter they are laid in the approaches to the following ports: Sölvesborg (3.77). Karlshamn (3.129). Guövik and Järnavik (3.187). Ronneby (3.170). Karlskrona (3.250). For general remarks on defensive minefields see 1.8. Exercise areas. Within the area covered by this chapter, gunnery exercises are frequently carried out at ranges at Kabusa (6 miles E of Ystad), Ravlunda (10 miles S of Åhus) and Rinkaby (1 mile N of Åhus).
Pollution 1
117
3.9 Due to the non-tidal nature of these waters the Swedish authorities are extremely rigorous in the application of anti-pollution regulations. See 1.72.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
KULLAGRUND TO HANÖ GENERAL INFORMATION
2
Charts 2360, 958
Area covered 1
2
3.10 This section covers the waters from a position S of Kullagrund (55°18′N, 13°20′E), E to Bornholmsgat (2.30), thence NE to Simrishamn (3.39) before turning N and E to enclose Hanöbukten, a long, sweeping, open bay stretching from Simrishamn to Åhus. In the N section of Hanöbukten it covers the channels to Åhus (3.56), Sölvesborg (3.77) and other smaller harbours. Hanö (56°00′N, 14°51′E) (3.99), a small island, lies at the NE end of Hanöbukten, 2 miles E of the coast.
Sandhammaren Lighthouse (red metal tower, framework base, 29 m in height) (55°23′⋅2N, 14°11′⋅8E). Major lights: Kullagrund Light (55°18′N, 13°20′E) (see Baltic Pilot Volume I). Sandhammaren Light — as above. Hammer Odde Light (55°17′⋅9N, 14°46′⋅4E) (2.41), on Bornholm.
Other aid to navigation 1
3.16 Racon: Kullagrund Lighthouse (55°18′N, 13°20′E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
KULLAGRUND TO SANDHAMMAREN
Directions (continued from Baltic Pilot Volume I)
General information Chart 2360
1
Route 1
3.11 The route leads from a position S of Kullagrund (55°18′N, 13°20′E), generally E to a position about 11 miles SSE of Sandhammaren (55°23′N, 14°12′E), about 30 miles farther E.
Inshore passage
Topography 1
3.12 The coast between Kullagrund and Sandhammaren is generally low with the exception of Kåsehuvud (55°23′N, 14°03′E), a headland which is high, bare, flat-topped and steep on its seaward side, 5 miles W of Sandhammaren. Sandhammaren is a low, sandy point which slopes SE from the low hills E of Kåsehuvud. Farther inland, to the N, there are some hills which are visible from seaward.
1
2
Current 1
3.13 During SW gales, in the area of the coastal bank S of Sandhammaren, the current sets strongly onshore and in such weather vessels should remain at least 7 miles clear of the coast in this vicinity.
3
Rescue 1
3.14 The Swedish Sea Rescue Association has fully equipped rescue boats stationed at Ystad (55°26′N, 13°50′E) and Kåseberga (55°23′N, 14°04′E). For further information see 1.156. 1
Principal marks 1
3.15 Landmarks: Romeleåsen (55°34′⋅0N, 13°31′⋅5E), a hill (188 m high), situated 17 miles NE of Trelleborg. It has two mounds, the E of which is higher, and joins a lower range of hills, of blue appearance, extending E, and is one of the best landmarks on this coast, particularly from S (chart 2360). TV mast (55°09′⋅7N, 14°53′⋅2E), (2.41), on Bornholm. A second mast stands 8 cables SSW. Kullagrund Lighthouse (55°18′N, 13°20′E) (see Baltic Pilot Volume I).
3.17 Caution. During gales the sea breaks heavily on the coastal bank extending S from Sandhammaren. Depths are liable to change on this bank and in bad weather vessels should keep well offshore, not approaching the coast within 7 miles. Deep-draught vessels should keep at least 7 miles off the coast at all times.
2
118
3.18 From a position S of Kullagrund Lighthouse the route leads generally E for 32 miles to Sandhammaren, passing (with positions from Sandhammaren Light (55°23′⋅2N, 14°11′⋅8E)): Clear of a dangerous wreck (20¾ miles WSW), thence: S of Klostergrund (12 miles W), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), which is moored 1½ miles S of Revnabben, a point 6 cables E of Ystad harbour, thence: Clear of a dangerous wreck (11½ miles WSW) and a 10 m wreck, position approximate (7 miles WSW), thence: N of a dangerous wreck (10 miles SW), thence: S of Osaknallen (55°22′N, 14°08′E) (2¾ miles WSW), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: S of a buoy (S cardinal) (1½ miles S), thence: Clear of Svartgrund (9 miles S), a shoal marked on its S side by a light-buoy (S cardinal), thence: To a position SSE of Sandhammaren. 3.19 Useful marks: Silo and warehouse (55°23′⋅7N, 13°22′⋅8E). Marvinsholm Castle, with two towers (55°27′⋅8N, 13°42′⋅7E). Balkåkra Church, 5 cables S of Marvinsholm Castle (above). Tall chimney, 4½ miles ENE of Ystad (55°26′N, 13°50′E). Radio mast (red obstruction lights), 8 cables NNW of Sandhammaren Light (55°23′⋅2N, 14°11′⋅8E). Radio mast (60 m in height; red light) (55°26′⋅6N, 13°50′⋅3E. (Directions continue at 3.37) (Directions for through route are given at 2.15)
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
A small boat harbour for fishing vessels and yachts lies close W of the main harbour.
Ystad Chart 2360 plan of Ystad
Directions
General information 1
2
3.20 Position. Ystad (55°26′N, 13°50′E), is a small commercial port on the coast of Skåne, the S province of Sweden, and is situated 23 miles E of Trelleborg. Function. The port is a medium sized harbour with good facilities for handling bulk and general cargoes. Train and vehicle ferries operate to Poland and the Danish island of Bornholm. The population is about 25 000. Principal exports are grain and timber. Imports include oil, fertilisers and coke. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 98 vessels totalling 217 800 dwt, excluding ferries. Port Authority. Ystad Hamn Logistik AB, Hamntorget 2, SE−271 39 Ystad, Sweden. Website: wwwport.ystad.se
Limiting conditions 1
2
3.21 Maximum permitted draught in the channel to the harbour is 6⋅7 m. Deepest and longest berth: W Quay (3.27). Water level. The normal range is 0⋅5 m and the maximum 1⋅2 m, above or below MSL. There is a depth gauge in the harbour. Abnormal water level. Sea jump, an abnormal large variation (1 m or more) in water level, can occur at Ystad. It is caused by changes in air pressure or wind usually associated with the passage of a cold weather front off the coast. Local weather and ice. The harbour provides good shelter but S and SW gales cause a heavy sea in the entrance. It is usually kept open to navigation throughout the year, if necessary with the assistance of an icebreaker.
1
2
1
2
1
2
Arrival information 1
2
3.22 Outer anchorage may be obtained in Spanska redden, W of the approach channel, about 1⋅5 miles SW of the outer breakwaters, in depths of 14 to 16 m, sand, clay and stones. The holding ground is good but the anchorage is exposed to S winds. Pilotage is provided by Malmö (Baltic Pilot Volume I). Requests for pilots should be made 5 hours in advance, to VTS Malmö. Pilot boards in Ystads Redd, as indicated on the chart. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Tug available. Speed must not exceed 5 kn within the harbour area.
Berths 1
Harbour
2
3.23 General layout. The harbour is formed by two inner breakwaters with an entrance width of 150 m between the heads, and two protective detached outer breakwaters lying 4 cables seaward. The entrance between the heads of the outer breakwaters is 110 m and the channel through the outer harbour to the inner entrance is marked by buoys and a light-buoy (lateral). Two concrete caissons lie close N of the E outer breakwater, 3 cables E of its head. All berths are situated within the main harbour.
3.27 West part. The principal berth is W Quay; length 235 m; depth alongside 7⋅2 m. There are six other berths with a total length of 768 m and depths alongside of 5 to 7⋅2 m. East part. There are three Ro-Ro berths with a total length of 380 m and a further quay with a length of 450 m; all berths have a depth of 7⋅2 m alongside.
Port services 1
1
3.24 Approach. Approach is from the SW to the close vicinity of Ystads Redd Light-buoy (safe water) (55°23′⋅6N, 13°47′⋅2E), which marks the seaward end of the fairway. Entry. From Ystads Redd Light-buoy the alignment (036°) of the leading lights displayed at the head of the harbour leads through the buoyed (lateral) channel and between the heads of the outer and inner breakwaters to the harbour. Front light (orange triangle point up, on tower, elevation 31 m) (55°25′⋅5N, 13°49′⋅8E). Rear light (similar structure, triangle point down) (250 m NE from front light). Lights (3.26) are displayed from the head of each outer breakwater and the heads of the inner breakwaters are floodlit. 3.25 Boat harbour. From a position in the buoyed channel 6¼ cables SW of the outer breakwater entrance the alignment (019°) of Ystads Båthamn Leading Lights, displayed at the small boat harbour head, leads to the boat harbour entrance, passing close W of the detached breakwater head and Blockgrund, a shoal area 1½ cables SSE of the boat harbour entrance. Front and rear lights (orange triangles on masts, elevations 6 and 11 m respectively, 150 m apart). (55°25′⋅5N, 13°49′⋅2E). 3.26 Useful marks (positions from E outer breakwater head (55°25′⋅0N, 13°49′⋅3E): Silos on W quay (4½ cables NNE). Church (7½ cables N). Water tower (1½ miles NNW). Yttre Östra and Västra Lights (white hut and white lantern respectively) displayed from the heads of the outer breakwaters. Aero light mast (elevation 40 m) (4¾ miles ENE). Radio mast (55°26′⋅6N, 13°50′⋅3E) (3.19).
3.28 Repairs: engineering workshop. Other facilities: deratting; hospital; no facilities for oily waste disposal. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water on the quays; provisions. Communications: nearest airport at Sovdeborg, 18 km NNW.
Anchorage and harbours Anchorage 1
119
3.29 Anchorage, sheltered from NE winds, may be obtained over a clay bottom between Ystad (55°26′N, 13°50′E) and
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Kåsehuvud (8 miles ESE) (3.12). Vessels are recommended to anchor closer to the headland than the town, in depths of 9 to 17 m, clay and sand. Exercise areas. See 3.8.
Submarine power cables 1
3.34 Submarine power cables are landed on the Swedish coast in an area situated 8½ miles SW of Simrishamn, as shown on the chart. See 1.71.
Abbekås 1
2
3
3.30 Description. Abbekås (55°24′N, 13°36′E), a medium sized town and fishing harbour lies 8 miles WSW of Ystad. It is easily identified against the low coastline. Harbour. The fishing harbour is formed by two moles of which the E mole is the outer and the N mole the inner. It is suitable for vessels with a draught of 2 m but is liable to silt. Pilots can be obtained from Malmö (Baltic Pilot Volume I). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Directions for entry. Approach from the SE on the alignment (297°) of the leading lights displayed from the N mole. Front and rear lights (red triangles on pillars, elevations 8 m and 10 m respectively, 85 m apart). This track passes two buoys (lateral) which mark the line of approach and leads clear of the E mole head, on which stands a beacon (white; floodlit), thence into the harbour. A dangerous wreck lies 1 mile NNE of the N mole. Supplies: fuel oil in drums; fresh water.
Rescue 1
3.35 The Swedish Sea Rescue Association has a fully equipped rescue boat stationed at Simrishamn (55°33′N, 14°22′E). A line throwing apparatus is kept at Kivik (55°41′N, 14°14′E) (3.53). See 1.156.
Principal marks 1
3.36 Landmarks: Hörby Aero Light Mast (55°48′N, 13°43′E) (white obstruction light). Radio mast (red lights, 110 m in height) (55°40′⋅0N, 14°09′⋅8E), standing at an elevation of 285 m. Stenshuvud (55°40′N, 14°17′E), a high, steep and wooded headland, visible well to seaward. Major lights: Sandhammaren Light (55°23′⋅2N, 14°11′⋅8E) (3.15). Hammer Odde Light (55°17′⋅9N, 14°46′⋅4E) (2.41), on Bornholm.
Chart 958
Kåseberga 1
2
3.31 Description. Kåseberga (55°23′N, 14°04′E) is a small fishing harbour situated on the E side of Kåsehuvud (3.12), 4½ miles W of Sandhammaren. The harbour is formed by two breakwaters and is suitable for vessels with a draught of 2 m. The channel is liable to silt. A light (red metal framework tower) is displayed from the head of the N breakwater. There are berths available for pleasure craft. Facilities: slip for vessels up to 12 m in length. Supplies: fuel oil; provisions in small quantities; fresh water.
Directions (continued from 3.19) 1
2
SANDHAMMAREN TO ÅHUS General information
3
3.32 The route runs parallel to the coast from a position SSE of Sandhammaren (55°23′N, 14°12′E) (3.12) NNE for about 19 miles to a position E of Simrishamn (55°33′N, 14°22′E) and thence generally N for 20 miles to a position ESE of Åhus.
1
Topography
2
Chart 2360
Route 1
1
3.33 The coastline from Sandhammaren to Åhus is generally low and featureless being part barren, part wooded and bordered by a number of sandy beaches; the one exception is Stenshuvud (55°40′N, 14°17′E) (3.36). In the hinterland to the far N there are a number of prominent hills of medium height.
120
3.37 From a position SSE of Sandhammaren the route leads generally NNE for about 19 miles then N for 20 miles to the vicinity of Taggen Light-buoy (55°53′⋅9N, 14°35′⋅5E) (3.64), passing (positions from Simrishamn Light (55°33′⋅5N, 14°22′⋅0E): ESE of a buoy (E cardinal) (10¼ miles SSW), thence: ESE of Örnhökaknösen, a shoal (8¼ miles SSW), thence: Clear of Långagrund (4½ miles ESE), a shoal patch marked on its SE and SW sides by light-buoys (S cardinal). The shoal is also covered by the red sector of Simrishamn Light (3.43). Thence: E of Stenshuvud (7 miles NNW) (3.36), from where a light (white tower, 9 m in height) is displayed, thence: E of Botildas Knall (16½ miles N), a shoal patch, thence: To the vicinity of Taggen Light-buoy. 3.38 Useful marks: Borrby Church, with a tower and lantern (55°27′⋅4N, 14°10′⋅7E). Östra Hoby Church (55°28′⋅2N, 14°14′⋅0E). Windmill in Brantevik (55°31′N, 14°21′E). Radio mast (red light, elevation 182 m) (55°30′⋅0N, 14°15′⋅8E). Östra Nöbbelöv Church (55°31′⋅0N, 14°18′⋅6E), with a spire, stands on high ground close to a grove of trees 1½ miles W of Brantevik. Simrishamn Church with low tower (55°34′N, 14°21′E). Simrishamn Lighthouse (55°33′⋅5N, 14°21′⋅6E) (3.43). Tall Chimney (55°33′N, 14°21′E), close S of Simrishamn Church.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
3
Södra Mellby Church (55°39′⋅8N, 14°13′⋅3E) with windmill to the N. Lägerholmen Light (55°57′⋅8N, 14°28′⋅4E) (3.69). (Directions continue for Hanösund at 3.98, for Åhus at 3.70, and for Sölvesborg at 3.88)
2
Simrishamn Chart 2360
General information 1
3.39 Position and function. Simrishamn (55°33′N, 14°22′E), is a large fishing and small commercial port on the E coast of the province of Skåne, about 12 miles NE of Sandhammaren and has a population of about 7 700. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 20 vessels totalling 17 035 dwt. Port Authority. Hamnforvaltningen, Tullhustorget, Simrishamn, S–272 31.
3
4
Limiting conditions 1
3.40 Depth in the entrance to the harbour is 6 m. The maximum permitted draught to the quay is 4⋅5 m. Water level. Gales from the W usually lower the level by 1 m. Local weather and ice. With strong winds from the E the harbour entrance is not navigable and no attempt should be made to enter. In these conditions there is a heavy scend in the outer harbour. The harbour is normally free from ice.
5
1
Arrival information 1
2
3.41 Port radio. Simrishamn Hamnradio (Harbour Radio), see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Anchorage may be obtained, with good holding ground, to the N of the harbour in depths of about 14 m, sand and clay. Alternatively, anchorage may be obtained SE of the harbour, in depths of about 25 m, sand and clay. Pilotage is provided from Åhus. Pilots board 1 mile E the harbour entrance. Pilotage in this area is controlled from Karlshamn, and ordered from VTS Malmö. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for full details. Speed must not exceed 5 kn within the outer breakwaters.
Harbour 1
2
3.42 General layout. The harbour consists of two outer breakwaters and two inner moles which together form an outer and inner harbour. The entrance between the outer breakwaters, the heads of which are floodlit, is 50 m wide; buoys (lateral) mark the navigable channel. The E inner mole is an W extension of the S breakwater, and has a spur extending 60 m N at its inner end. A yacht and small craft harbour lies within the breakwaters, close N of the outer harbour. Current. The current is normally weak but in strong winds it may set at a rate of 1 to 2 kn off the harbour.
Berths 1
3.45 The outer harbour has one quay with 100 m of berthing space and a depth of 5⋅0 m alongside. The inner harbour has about 400 m of berthing space with depths of 5⋅0 to 5⋅5 m alongside. The fishing basin has about 470 m of berthing space with a depth of 5 m alongside. In the small boat harbour there are five pontoon jetties with berths for vessels up to 4 m beam and 2⋅5 m draught.
Services 1
3.46 Repairs: minor repairs; one slip, 110 m long with a cradle length of 38 m; boatyard for yachts. Other facilities: authorised compass adjuster; deratting; hospital; no facilities for oily waste disposal. Supplies: provisions; fuel; fresh water. Communications: nearest airport Sturup/Malmö, 70 km; local railway station; ferry to Bornholm in summer.
Anchorage and fishing harbours Anchorage 1
Directions 1
Alternatively, and at night, from the same position the approach is made on the alignment (249½°) of Simrishamn Leading Lights, displayed from the W inner pier: Front light (red triangle on metal framework tower, elevation 10 m) (55°33′⋅5N, 14°21′⋅1E). Rear light (similar structure, elevation 12 m), 105 m WSW of front light. This alignment leads WSW, passing (with positions from Simrishamn Light (white tower, 15 m in height) (55°33′⋅5N, 14°21′⋅6E)): SSE of Nedjan (1¼ miles ENE), a shoal patch marked on by light-buoys (cardinal). A wreck, with a depth of 17 m over it, lies 1¾ miles ENE of the harbour entrance, thence: SSE of a wreck, with a depth of 10 m over it (7 cables NE), thence: Between the buoys (lateral) marking the channel off the entrance. Simrishamn Light may be difficult to identify from seaward due to strong background lighting from the fishing quays. Once inside the outer harbour, in depths of 4⋅0 to 5⋅5 m, the inner harbour is entered through a 30 m wide gap between the heads of the inner moles. This manoeuvre requires a very sharp and difficult turn. The small boat harbour is entered to the NW of the outer harbour, the entrance is marked by buoys (lateral). 3.44 Useful marks (positions from S outer breakwater head (55°33′⋅4N, 14°21′⋅6E): Simrislund Light-beacons in line (1⋅4 miles S) which mark an outfall pipe (charted). Chimney (5 cables SW). Windmill with sails (7 cables WSW). Radio mast (red light) (2⋅2 miles NW).
3.43 Approach and entry. From a position to seaward about 2½ miles ENE of the entrance the approach is made on the line of bearing (252°) between the outer breakwater heads of a windmill in the town.
121
3.47 Anchorage may be obtained either 1 mile or 2 miles off Skillinge (55°28′N, 14°17′E) (3.48) in depths of 12 to 15 m and depths of about 25 m, respectively, sand and clay. The latter anchorage has good holding ground in W gales. Anchorage may also be obtained, in depths of about 15 m, sand and clay, about 1 mile E of Kivik (55°41′N, 14°14′E) (3.53), when Simrishamn is just hidden by Stenshuvud.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Berths. The N basin has a quay 90 m long with a depth of 3 m alongside. The S basin is for small craft and has a depth of 1 m. Supplies: provisions; fresh water.
Skillinge 1
2
1
2
3
4
3.48 General description. Skillinge (55°28′N, 14°17′E) is a fishing and small boat harbour 6 miles NNE of Sandhammaren (3.12). The harbour is formed by two moles, the E having two heads, enclosing an outer and inner basin. The entrance channel is 400 m long with a bottom width of 30 m and dredged to a depth of 4⋅0 m. There is a speed limit of 5 kn in the harbour. Caution. The S part of the approach channel is liable to shoaling. Fixed eel fishing bottom nets may be encountered in the vicinity of the entrance channel. Annually, from May to September, uncharted red buoys are laid in the approaches to Skillinge to mark a regatta track. 3.49 Directions for entry. Skillinge Leading Lights, displayed from the W mole: Front light (red triangle on post, elevation 5 m) (55°28′⋅4N, 14°17′⋅4E). Rear light (red triangle on mast, elevation 9 m) (90 m WNW from front light). The alignment (290°) of these lights leads through the fairway from a position to seaward about 2 miles ESE of the harbour entrance passing (with positions from front light): SSW of a 17 m wreck (1½ miles E), thence: Close to the Fairway Light-buoy (safe water) (1 mile ESE) moored on the leading line for approach. Thence: When ½ cable from a buoy (starboard hand) (3½ cables ESE), marking the entrance to the approach channel, the line of bearing 298° of the front leading light leads between the buoys (lateral) marking the channel. Keep about 15 m off the floodlit pierheads, thence head NE to the inner harbour. Useful marks (positions from the head of the W mole, front leading light, as above): Radio mast, elevation 182 m. (1¾ miles NW). Windmill (2 cables NW). Östra Hoby Church (1¾ miles W). Berths. The outer basin has a total of 180 m berthing space with depths of 2 to 3 m, and some small craft moorings. The inner basin has 290 m of berthing space and is dredged to a depth of 4 m. Repairs. A slip for vessels up to 20 m in length. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions.
Brantevik 1
2
3.50 General description. Brantevik (55°31′N, 14°21′E) is a small fishing harbour situated 3¼ miles NE of Skillinge (3.48). It is formed by two moles enclosed by two outer breakwaters and is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 2⋅5 m. Caution. The entrance of the harbour is not navigable in heavy weather. A current of about 2 to 3 kn may set across the entrance. Directions. Approach from the ENE on the alignment (253°) of Brantevik Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (posts, elevations 7 and 11 m respectively, 85 m apart) (55°30′⋅7N, 14°21′⋅0E), displayed when required from the S pier. This alignment leads through a channel 20 m wide with a depth of 3 m to the harbour entrance.
Baskemölla 1
2
3.51 General description. Baskemölla (55°36′N, 14°19′E) is a small fishing harbour situated 2½ miles NNW of Simrishamn (3.39). It is suitable for small vessels with a draught up to 2⋅1 m and affords good shelter except in winds from the E. The small harbour is formed by a breakwater extending NW from the shore and a jetty projecting NE. There are depths of between 2⋅4 and 2⋅7 m in the harbour. Pilots may be obtained from Åhus. Directions for entry. Approach from the NNE on the alignment (195°) of leading lights: Front and rear lights (wooden posts, elevations 6 and 11 m respectively, 56 m apart) (55°35′⋅7N, 14°19′⋅1E), displayed when required. This alignment leads through the entrance, 15 m wide, to the harbour. Supplies: fuel; fresh water.
Vik 1
3.52 Description. Vik (55°37′N, 14°18′E) is a small fishing harbour suitable for vessels drawing up to 1⋅5 m but is liable to silt. It affords good shelter in all but E gales and entrance to the harbour is not practicable in strong winds from between N and E. There are berths on the inside of the moles with depths of 1⋅5 m alongside. Supplies: provisions; fresh water.
Kivik 1
2
3
3.53 Description. Kivik (55°41′N, 14°14′E) is a small fishing harbour, 2¼ miles NW of Stenshuvud Lighthouse (3.37), formed by two moles. It has depths of 3 m in the entrance and harbour but is liable to silt. It affords good shelter in all winds for vessels with a draught up to 2⋅4 m and has berths for yachts in addition to the fishing boat berths. A speed limit of 5 kn applies within the harbour. Directions for entry. Approach from the NE on the alignment (214°) of leading lights: Front and rear lights (white triangles on masts, elevations 6 and 9 m respectively, 50 m apart) (55°41′⋅3N, 14°13′⋅8E), displayed when required. This alignment leads to the harbour entrance passing clear E of Strandgrund, a shoal area 3½ cables NNW of the entrance. Repairs. A small slip is available. Supplies: small quantities of fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Vitemölla 1
122
3.54 Description. Vitemölla (55°42′⋅0N, 14°12′⋅5E) is a small fishing harbour, formed by two moles with a depth of 2⋅4 m in the harbour, which is liable to silt. Directions. Approach from the NE on the alignment (210°) of leading lights: Front and rear lights (posts, elevations 6 and 10 m respectively, 80 m apart) (55°41′⋅9N, 14°12′⋅8E), displayed when required.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
2
This alignment leads into the harbour passing close to Lillgrund, a shoal patch 5 cables NE of the entrance, and SE of Lindgrund, a shoal patch lying 1 mile NNE of the entrance.
Port Authority 1
3.61 Åhus Hamn and Stuveri AB, Krangatan 2, SE–296 32 Åhus. Website: ahushamn.se
Yngsjö 1
2
3.55 Description. Yngsjö (55°52′N, 14°14′E) fishing harbour lies 5 cables inside the mouth of a river basin, 4½ miles SW of Åhus (3.56). It is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 2⋅0 m but depths are liable to change. Directions. Approach from the E on the alignment (286°) of leading lights: Front and rear lights (masts, elevations 7 and 11 m respectively, 75 m apart) (55°51′⋅6N, 14°14′⋅6E), displayed from the harbour. This alignment leads to the harbour from seaward passing between the breakwater heads, from where lights are exhibited, at Gropahålet (55°51′⋅5N, 14°14′⋅4E), which lies at the river mouth.
Limiting conditions 1
2
ÅHUS
3.62 Controlling depth. The maximum permitted draught in the channel to the harbour is normally 7⋅6 m, but due to silting the Port Authority should be consulted for the latest information on depths in the channel. The deepest and longest berth is in the outer section of the harbour at Berth Nos 23–25A (3.74). Water levels. Strong W winds can lower the mean water level by 0⋅5 m and strong W winds can raise it by 0⋅7 m. Density of water. 1⋅000 g/cm3 Maximum size of vessel handled. The port can accommodate vessels up to 170 m in length and draught 7⋅6 m but note above remark on silting. Local weather. In winter, after continuous E winds accompanied by severe frost, the harbour may close due to ice.
Arrival information
General information Anchorage Charts 2856 plan of Åhus, 2360
Position 1
1
3.56 Åhus (55°56′N, 14°19′E), a sheltered harbour usually open throughout the year, stands on the N bank at the mouth of Helge å, on the E coast of Skåne province. The population is about 5000.
Function 1
3.57 Åhus is a medium sized commercial harbour with good facilities for handling bulk, general and liquid cargoes. Principal exports are grain, alcohol, stone and timber. Principal imports include fertilisers, oil, gypsum and grain.
Pilotage and tugs 1
Topography 1
3.58 The coast in the vicinity of Åhus is low and few significant features. Rocks and shoals extend for about 10 miles. Vannenberga Furor and Tosteberga Furor are tree copses which are prominent, 2 miles and respectively, NE of Åhus.
flat with seawards
1
3.59 The harbour is approached on the alignment of a leading line and leading lights, through a channel marked by buoys and light-buoys, and entered through a dredged channel, marked by buoys and light-buoys. An alternative approach, from the S, for small craft, may be made through a channel, marked by buoys, thence joining the main channel close to the entrance channel.
Traffic 1
2
two pine 6½ miles
Approach and entry
3.63 Anchorage may be obtained in an area 2½ miles S of Lägerholmen (55°57′⋅9N, 14°28′⋅4E), in depths of 11 to 17 m, sand, clay and stone, as indicated on the chart. This anchorage is exposed to strong winds from the S and E. Prohibited anchorage. Anchoring is prohibited in an area within the channel, between two submarine cables, as shown on the plan. 3.64 Pilotage is available 24 hours, and is compulsory for most categories of vessel. There are two pilot boarding places, indicated on the chart: (a) near Pållagrund (55°54′⋅7N, 14°27′⋅6E), (3.70). (b) close S of Taggen Light-buoy, (55°53′⋅9N, 14°35′⋅5E), (3.70). Pilotage in this area is controlled from Karlshamn, and ordered from VTS Malmö. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for full details. Tugs are available.
Traffic regulation 1
3.65 Speed must not exceed 5 kn within the harbour.
Harbour General layout 1
2
3.60 In 2003 the port was used by 338 vessels totalling 968 969 dwt.
123
3.66 The harbour is formed by quays constructed on the N and S banks of the river mouth. Entrance to the outer harbour is between two short moles giving a channel width of 65 m. Depth in the central 45 m of the entrance is 8⋅0 m. The dredged outer harbour is about 70 m wide with a turning basin at each end. The outer turning place is 200 m in diameter with a depth of 8⋅0 m and the inner turning place is 180 m in diameter with a depth of 7⋅2 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
The inner section of the harbour lies to the W of the inner turning place. 5
Exercise area 1
3.67 The approaches to Åhus lie within Rinkaby Firing Range, bounded by a line joining the following points: 55°58′⋅3N, 14°22′⋅9E, 55°58′⋅0N, 14°28′⋅8E, 55°53′⋅5N, 14°21′⋅8E, 55°56′⋅5N, 14°19′⋅3E. 1
Current 1
3.68 A N or S current set may be experienced in the entrance channel at a rate of 1 to 2 kn. The direction and strength can vary in different sections of the channel due to shoals.
Wiltshiregrund, a shoal patch 1¾ miles E of the harbour entrance. Entrance Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on framework mast) (55°55′⋅7N, 14°19′⋅3E). Rear light (red triangle on silo) (265 m from front light). The alignment (275¼°) of these lights leads 1¼ miles W to the entrance, in a channel marked by light-buoys and buoys (lateral), and with a swept depth of 8⋅0 m. 3.71 Approach from SSE. The alignment (348°) of the following marks joins the main channel 1 mile E of Pållagrund, passing E of Botildas Knall (55°49′⋅0N, 14°30′⋅5E) (3.37): Front mark, Lägerholmen Lighthouse (3.69). Rear mark, W side of Iföklack (56°08′N, 14°25′E) (3.69).
Principal marks 1
3.69 Landmarks: Fjälkinge and Lilles backe (56°03′N, 14°18′E), two barren hills connected by a low saddle. A stone tower, situated on Fjälkinge backe gives an excellent radar echo. Ifö Klack (56°08′N, 14°25′E), a prominent hill. Lägerholmen Lighthouse (white concrete tower, 17 m in height) (55°57′⋅8N, 14°28′⋅4E). Major light: Hanö Light (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅8E) (3.87).
Secondary channel 1
2
Directions (continued from 3.38)
Main channel 1
2
3
4
3.70 Båkören Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on white framework tower, elevation 6 m) (55°56′⋅6N, 14°20′⋅5E). Visible on leading line only. Rear light (similar structure, elevation 15 m), (830 m WNW of front light). The leading line lies in the white sector (288½°–290½°) of the rear light. From the vicinity of Taggen Light-buoy (E cardinal), marking Taggen, a shoal patch also marked by another buoy (E cardinal), the alignment (289½°) of these lights leads WNW through the channel, passing (with positions from the harbour entrance): NNE of Pållagrund (4½ miles ESE), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (N cardinal). Thence: S of a buoy (S cardinal) (3½ miles E), thence: N of Bröderna (3 miles E), marked by a buoy (N cardinal). Thence: Between a buoy and a light-buoy (lateral) (2¼ miles ENE), the latter marking Tiofotsgrundet, a shoal patch on the N side of the channel. Thence to the alignment of: Revhaken Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on framework tower, elevation 7 m) (55°55′⋅1N, 14°20′⋅3E). Rear light (similar structure, elevation 14 m), 550 m SE from front light. The alignment (245½°) of these lights leads 1 mile WSW to the entrance channel through a channel marked by light-buoys (lateral) passing between Laxören, a rocky shoal area 1¼ miles ENE of the harbour entrance, and
3
1
3.72 Local knowledge is required for this channel, which is authorised for a draught of 4 m, and is entered from the S in the vicinity of Knuven (55°47′⋅7N, 14°24′⋅2E), a shoal patch 8½ miles SSE of the harbour entrance. Thence the track, as indicated on the chart, leads NNW for about 9 miles to join the main channel 1¼ miles E of the harbour entrance, passing (with positions from the harbour entrance): E of Sänket (7½ miles SSE), and: W of Botildas Knall (9 mile SE) (3.37), thence: E of Kiviksbredan (6 miles SSE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal). Thence: W of Stupet (3½ miles SE), thence: Between Ullersgrund (2¾ miles SE), marked by a buoy (port hand) and: Branta Knalln (3 miles SE), thence: ENE of Stenklintarna (1¾ miles ESE), marked by a buoy (port hand). Thence 7 cables NW to join the main channel. 3.73 Useful marks (with positions from the harbour entrance): Caisson (floodlit) (1 cable E) at the seaward end of the N breakwater. Water tower (1½ miles WNW). Church without spire (1¼ miles WSW). Silo (5 cables W). Nymö Church, white building without spire, (5½ miles N).
Berths Alongside berths 1
2
124
3.74 Outer harbour. The principal berths are Nos 23–25A with a length of 150 m and a depth alongside of 8⋅0 m. There is a further 1330 m of berthing space with depths alongside from 5⋅8 to 7⋅9 m and a short waiting berth with a depth of 4⋅2 m alongside. There is a small shipyard on the S bank of the river mid-way between the turning places. Inner harbour. The inner harbour has one berth, handling alcohol, with a length of 100 m and a depth alongside of 4⋅2 m. There is a small boat harbour at the W end of the inner harbour with 250 m of berthing space with depths alongside
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
of about 3 m. Another small boat harbour lies on the S bank of the river close to the shipyard.
Traffic 1
Port services 1
3.75 Repairs: small repairs only. Other facilities: deratting; hospital; disposal of oily waste. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications: local airport, Everöd, 18 km; ferry services to other ports in Sweden. Rescue: pilot boat acts as rescue craft if required.
Port Authority 1
1
Tosteberga 1
2
2
Port radio 1
1
Position and function 3.77 Sölvesborg (56°03′N, 14°35′E) lies at the head of Sölvesborgsviken, a well sheltered inlet in the N of Hanöbukten (3.10). The population is about 15 000. It is a medium-sized commercial harbour with good facilities for handling a range of general and liquid cargoes. Principal exports include timber, wood pulp, paper and scrap metal. Imports include oil, chemicals, grain and steel plate.
2
3.78 In the vicinity of Sölvesborg the coastline is generally low and indented with several small islands, rocks and shoal areas extending offshore. Ryssberget, a ridge of hills, extends N for about 9 miles, just to the N of the town. On the peninsula to the SE of the town there are low hills.
1
2
Approach and entry 1
2
3.79 The harbour is approached on the alignment of a leading line and leading lights, through a channel marked by buoys and light-buoys and entered through dredged channels, on the alignment of leading lights, and marked by buoys and light-buoys. Alternatively, with local knowledge, approach may be made through the shoal areas, some of which are marked by buoys and on the alignment of leading lines, thence joining the main channel near to the harbour.
3.84 Anchorage may be obtained, as indicated on the chart, in an area 1½ miles S of Sillnäsudde (55°59′⋅8N, 14°36′⋅9E) (3.87), a point 3 miles SSE of Sölvesborg, in depths of about 13 m, sand, but this anchorage is exposed to strong winds from E to SW. In Inre redden anchorage may be obtained, on the E side of the fairway, in an area 1½ cables SSW of Östra Kumlet (56°02′⋅0N, 14°35′⋅2E), an islet, on which stands a beacon, 2 cables W of Ytterhamnen, in depths of about 6 to 7 m, mud and clay.
Pilotage and tugs
Topography 1
3.83 Sölvesborg Hamnradio (harbour radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Anchorages
Charts 2856, plan Sölvesborg, 2360
1
3.82 Controlling depth. The depth in the dredged channel to the outer harbour is 8⋅2 m, and the maximum authorised draught is 7⋅7 m. The dredged channel to the inner harbour has a maximum authorised draught of 5⋅8 m. Deepest and longest berth is in Ytterhamnen (outer harbour) at Berth Nos 52–55 (3.90). Density of water in the harbour is 1⋅007 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled. A vessel with LOA of 170 m and draught of 7⋅7 m. Local weather. Ice may be encountered in January and February. See 1.253.
Arrival information
SÖLVESBORG General information
3.81 Sölvesborg Stuveri & Hamn AB, Lilleviksvägen, S–294 35, Sölvesborg. Website: www.stuverihamn.se
Limiting conditions
Fishing harbour 3.76 General information. Tosteberga (55°59′⋅8N, 14°26′⋅8E) is a small fishing harbour situated on Tostebergaudde, a point 6 miles NE of Åhus. It is formed by breakwaters with an entrance width of 13 m and has a quay in the SW part with a depth alongside of 2⋅3 m. The harbour is approached and entered from the S on the alignment (349°) of leading lights: Front and rear lights (posts, elevations 4 and 7 m), displayed at the harbour when necessary. Local knowledge is necessary.
3.80 In 2003 the port was used by over 225 vessels totalling 509 461 dwt.
3.85 Pilotage is compulsory for most categories of vessel and is provided by Åhus (3.56); ordered from VTS Malmö. There are three pilot boarding places, shown on the chart: (a) about 1¾ mile SE of Spättgrund (55°58′N, 14°35′E) (3.88). (b) near Pållagrund (55°54′⋅7N, 14°27′⋅6E), (3.70). (c) near Taggen Light-buoy (55°54′⋅9N, 14°35′⋅5E). (3.70). Pilotage in this area is controlled from Karlshamn. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for full details. Tug is available, with further tugs from Åhus or Karlshamn if required.
Harbour General layout 1
125
3.86 The harbour lies within Sölvesborgsviken, an inlet about 2 miles long and about 6 cables wide, entered through a dredged channel at its S end.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
2
The port is situated on the W side of the inlet. The inner harbour, abreast the town in the NW section, is dredged to a depth of 7⋅0 m, and is entered through a channel which has a bottom width of 60 m. The outer harbour 1 mile S, near the entrance, is dredged to a depth of 8⋅2 m and is entered through a channel with a bottom width of 60 m and dredged to a depth of 8⋅2 m. Situated between the two cargo berthing areas is a shipyard complex surrounded by a dredged area to the W of the channel.
6
Principal marks 1
2
3.87 Landmarks: Nymölla Factory (56°02′⋅7N, 14°28′⋅3E) and chimney close S. Sillnäsudde Lighthouse (red tower, white top, 11 m in height) (55°59′⋅8N, 14°36′⋅9E) standing on an islet close off the headland of Sillnäsudde. Ifö Klack (56°08′N, 14°25′E) (3.69). Hjärthalla (56°01′⋅5N, 14°38′⋅0E), a small hill. Stibybacke (56°01′⋅3N, 14°41′⋅7E), a small hill. Major lights: Hanö Light (white concrete tower, 16 m in height) (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅8E). Karlshamn-Gungvalla Aero Light (56°13′⋅6N, 14°46′⋅7E).
Directions
7
8
9
1
(continued from 3.38)
Main channel 1
2
3
4
5
3.88 From a position about 5 miles SSE of Sillnäsudde (3.87) the line of bearing 313° of Tunören Light (white framework tower) (56°00′N, 14°32′E), standing on from a group of rocks awash, within the white sector (309°–319°) of the light, leads 6 miles NW, through the buoyed fairway, passing (with positions from Sillnäsudde (55°59′⋅8N, 14°36′⋅9E)): NE of Skintosaflöten (2¾ miles SW), a shoal area marked on its SE side by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NE of Spättgrund (2 miles SSW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SW of a buoy (S cardinal) marking a shoal patch (1½ miles SW), thence: NE of Bulleråsen (2 miles SW), marked on its NE side by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: SW of Revbådorna, a shoal area, (1¾ miles WSW), thence: Close W of a light-buoy (starboard hand) (2 miles WSW). Sölvesborg Leading Lights: Front light (red diamond on white framework tower) (56°02′⋅0N, 14°35′⋅4E). Visible only on leading line. Rear light (similar structure) (6 cables from front), displayed from Ljunganabben, a point on the E side of Sölvesborgsviken. Visible only on leading line. The alignment (026°) of these lights leads 2¼ miles NNE to the entrance at Inre redden through a channel
marked by light-buoys and buoys (lateral), passing (with positions from Sillnäsudde (3.87)): ESE of Ledgrund, a shoal patch, (1¾ miles W), thence: WNW of Kammen, a shoal patch, (1½ miles W), thence: WNW of Västra Näs (2 miles NNW). From Inre redden, entry to Ytterhamnen, and thence to Innerhamnen, is through four short reaches, each indicated by a set of leading lights, and marked by buoys, light-buoys and light-beacons. The limits of the dredged areas within the harbour are marked by buoys (lateral). Alternative approach. Local knowledge is required for this approach which leads from the S through the shoals to the S and E of Lägerholmen Lighthouse (3.69). From the vicinity of Taggen (55°53′⋅9N, 14°35′⋅5E) (3.70) the track leads generally NNW for 4 miles, then NNE for 3½ miles on the alignment (026°) of Sölvesborg Leading Lights, to join the main channel 7 cables SE of Tunören Light, passing (with positions from Lägerholmen Light): E of Labansgrund, a shoal patch (1¾ miles SSE), thence: Close W of Känningen (2 miles SE), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: WNW of Käglan (2 miles ESE), a shoal patch, thence: ESE of Dösen, a shoal patch (1½ miles E), thence: WNW of Bulleråsen (3 miles ENE), thence: ESE of Galtryggen, a shoal patch (2½ miles NE). 3.89 Useful marks (with positions from Tunören Light (3.88): Nymö Church (7 miles W) (3.73). Water tower (4½ miles NNW). Sölvesborg Church (3½ miles NNE).
Berths Alongside berths 1
2
3.90 Ytterhamnen. The principal berths are Nos 52–55 with a total length of 380 m and a depth alongside of 8⋅2 m. There is an oil berth, with breasting dolphins, at the N end of the quay with a length of 25 m and a depth alongside of 8⋅2 m. Maximum recommended size of vessel, 26 000 dwt. Immediately S of the main quay there is Ro-Ro complex with a berth 85 m long and a depth alongside of 7⋅5 m. Innerhamnen. There is a total of 354 m of working berthing space with depths alongside of 6⋅0 to 7⋅5 m, and a further 328 m of general purpose berthing space with depths alongside of 3⋅0 to 5⋅0 m. At the shipyard, 4 cables S of Innerhamnen, there is a quay 150 m in length and a depth alongside of 6 m.
Port services 1
126
3.91 Repairs: machinery and hull; dry dock with a length of 103 m and breadth 16 m. Other facilities: deratting; doctor; oily waste disposal. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications: local airports with domestic services; Everöd, Kristianstad 50 km distant; Kallinge, Ronneby 60 km distant.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Sölvesborg − Ytterhamnen (3.90) (Original dated 2000) (Photograph − Sölvesborgs Stuveri & Hamn AB)
Sölvesborg − Innerhamnen (3.90) (Original dated 2000) (Photograph − Sölvesborgs Stuveri & Hamn AB)
127
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
HANÖSUND AND APPROACHES General information
2
Chart 2856,
Description 1
3.92 Hanösund (56°00′N, 14°49′E), is the channel between the peninsula on the mainland SE of Sölvesborg (3.77) and Hanö (3.99), an island 2½ miles E. It leads to Pukaviksbukten (3.108) and the approaches to Karlshamn (3.129). Included in the description are the small harbours between Sillnäsudde (55°59′⋅8N, 14°36′⋅9E) (3.87) and Listershuvud (56°02′N, 14°47′E) (3.97), at the NW end of Hanösund, and that on Hanö.
4
Topography 1
3
3.93 The coast between Kråknabben (55°59′⋅5N, 14°43′⋅0E) at the S entrance and Listershuvud (3½ miles NE) (3.97) is high and precipitous.
5
Depths 1
2
3.94 Hanöbanken, consisting of a number of shoal patches with depths over them of less than 20 m lies across the S approaches to Hanösund and extends up to 6 miles SE of Hanö. Bredgrund, the shallowest part, with a depth of 9 m over it, lies 5 miles SSE of Hanö. The fairway through Hanösund has charted depths of between 12 and 26 m to the E of the marked shoal patches of Fladingen and Blocket. Between the W shore and these shoals lie other unmarked shoals with depths over them of 5 m or less.
6
Exercise area 1
3.95 Firing practice areas lie to the E and S of Hanösund as shown on the chart; see 1.22.
Hanö Chart 2856
Description
Submarine cables 1
3.96 Submarine power cables are laid across the N end of Hanösund from the mainland to the island and from Nogersund to the NW of the island. The former are marked at each end by a pair of light-beacons. The alignment of each pair of light-beacons marks the landward end of the cable.
1
3.97 Landmarks: Hjärthalla (56°01′⋅5N, 14°38′⋅0E) (3.87). Stibybacke (56°01′⋅3N, 14°41′⋅7E) (3.87). Listershuvud (56°02′⋅1N, 14°46′⋅8E), a hill on the point of that name. Major lights: Hanö Light (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅8E) (3.87). Karlshamn-Gungvalla Aero Light (56°13′⋅6N, 14°46′⋅7E).
1
2
Directions 1
3.100 Anchorage may be obtained off the W side of the island in a depth of about 26 m, clay, in a position with Bönsäcken (56°01′⋅1N, 14°50′⋅3E) in line with Matvikshög Beacon (56°10′⋅3N, 14°57′⋅6E) (3.167), which stands on the mainland 10 miles NNE, bearing 025°. Anchorage may also be obtained off the W of Hanö, in depths of about 26 m, clay, with Malkvarn (56°02′N, 14°52′E) (3.98) open N of Bönsäcken and bearing 070° and, off the NE of the island in depths of about 21 m, with Kråknabben (3.98) visible over Bönsäcken on a bearing of 248°, but this anchorage is exposed and subject to heavy swell in bad weather. There is a third anchorage, in depths of 18 to 26 m, sand and clay, about 3 cables W of the S end of Hanö but this is also exposed and subject to heavy swell.
Harbour
(continued from 3.38) 3.98 From the vicinity of Taggen Light-buoy (55°53′⋅9N, 14°35′⋅5E) (3.70) the approach leads NE in the white sector (020°–054°) of Bönsäcken Light (grey framework tower)
3.99 Hanö (56°01′N, 14°50′E), an island 60 m high, is bare except for a few trees and bushes near the lighthouse.
Anchorages
Principal marks 1
(56°01′⋅1N, 14°50′⋅3E), passing (with positions from Hanö Light (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅8E)): SE of Kråkrevet (5 miles WSW), a shoal area with rocks awash and a dangerous wreck, which extends 1½ miles SSW from Kråknabben (55°59′⋅7N, 14°43′⋅0E). Västeråsgrund, with a depth of 4.4m over it, lies at the S end of the shoal. The extent of the shoal area is marked by a buoy (S cardinal) moored 2 miles S of Kråknabben. Thence: NW of a 9⋅8 m patch (3½ miles SSW), which is covered by the green sector (000°–020°) of Bönsäcken Light. Thence the track continues NE in the white sector (041½°–044°) of Tärnö Light (56°06′⋅7N, 14°58′⋅5E) (3.183) passing: SE of Fladingen (2½ miles WSW), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: SE of Blocket (2 miles W), a shoal with a depth of 4⋅2 m over it marked by a buoy (E cardinal), and: SE of Närgrund (2¼ miles WNW), a shoal area extending 3 cables E of Listershuvud, covered by the red sector (274½°–286°) of Listershuvud Light (white lantern) (56°02′N, 14°47′E), displayed from the point, thence: NW of Bönsäcken (56°01′⋅1N, 14°50′⋅3E), the N point of Hanö, thence: SE of Laxgrund (2½ miles NW), a shoal area which lies 1 mile NE of Listershuvud. The N part of the shoal is awash. It is marked by a buoy (E cardinal) and a buoy (N cardinal). Thence: NW of Malkvarn (1¼ miles NE), an above-water rock. It is covered by the red sector (239°–255°) of Bönsäcken Light. (Directions for Pukaviksbukten are given at 3.116) (Directions for Karlshamn continue at 3.148)
1
128
3.101 There is a small fishing harbour on the W side of the island. It is formed by two moles and is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 3⋅4 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
On the inside of the W breakwater there is a 90 m long quay with a depth alongside of 4 m and in the NE part of the harbour a ferry berth with a depth alongside of 4 m. Other berths have depths of about 2 m.
2
Directions 1
3.102 The harbour is entered from the NW on the alignment (129°) of leading lights: Front and rear lights (red triangles on posts, elevations 6 and 9 m respectively, 140 m apart), displayed from the inner pier. This alignment passes clear of a shoal patch, with a depth of 3⋅8 m over it, lying close off the entrance and immediately NE of the line, through the breakwaters. A light is displayed from the head of the S breakwater.
3
4
Services 1
3.103 Repairs: slip for vessels up to 14 m in length; ramp for small craft. Supplies: diesel oil; fresh water; provisions.
5
Harbours on the mainland
6
Torsö 1
2
3
4
5
3.104 General description. Torsö (56°00′⋅0N, 14°39′⋅1E) is a small fishing harbour which lies at the head of Östra Torsöviken, the E of two bays to the E of Sillnäsudde (55°59′⋅8N, 14°36′⋅9E) (3.87). The harbour is formed by two breakwaters, one extending E from Köskarvet, a small islet close off the coast S of the town and the second extending S from the shore. Together they form an entrance to the outer harbour facing SSE. An inner harbour, formed by two short moles, lies close NW of the entrance. It is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 1 m and has two quays with depths alongside of 2 m. Directions. Östra Torsöviken is entered between two points of land, the W of which has an area of foul ground extending 6 cables SSW marked at its S limit by a buoy (S cardinal), and Björknabben (55°59′N, 14°40′E), the E entrance point from which Björkrevet, an area of foul ground extends 5 cables S, marked on its SE side by a buoy (E cardinal). Torsö Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (posts) 25 m apart, displayed from the harbour. Approach from the SSE on the alignment (346½°) of these lights which leads about 1 mile NNE passing ENE of Flädjan, a rock awash on the W foul ground, thence to the harbour entrance. Useful marks: Radio masts, elevation 138 m. (55°59′⋅6N, 14°40′⋅1E) Sillnäsudde Lighthouse (55°59′⋅8N, 14°36′⋅9E) (3.87). Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions.
7
Nogersund 1
2
3
4
Hällevik 1
The harbour is formed by two moles and a detached breakwater. The entrance channel is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 2⋅3 m. Within the harbour, at the N end there is a small enclosed boat harbour with a depth of 2 m; in the remainder of the harbour there are further berths with depths alongside of 2⋅5 to 3⋅0 m. There is a speed limit of 5 kn within the harbour. Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 4 to 7 m, sand and stones, 4 cables SSE of the light-structure on the head of the S mole, but this is exposed in S to SW winds. With local knowledge anchorage may also be obtained, in a depth of 5⋅5 m, 2 cables SE of the light-structure. Directions. Hälleviksviken is entered between Björknabben (55°59′N, 14°40′E) (3.104), on the W side, and Kråknabben (55°59′⋅7N, 14°43′⋅1E) (3.98), on the E side. Hällevik Directional Light (white concrete tower, copper lantern, 7 m in height) (56°00′⋅8N, 14°42′⋅4E), is displayed from the head of Hälleviksviken. From a position to the SSW the track leads 3 miles NNE to the harbour entrance with the above light ahead on a bearing of 020¾°, in the white sector (016½°–025°) of the light, passing (with positions from Björknabben): WNW of a buoy (S cardinal), (2 miles SE), thence: WNW of Västeråsgrund (3.98) (1⋅1 miles SE), thence: ESE of a buoy (E cardinal) (4 cables S), and: WNW of Kråkrevet (3.98) (1 mile E), marked by a buoy (lateral). Thence the track continues to the head of Hälleviksviken passing W of the buoys (lateral) marking the foul ground extending SW from Kråknabben. Useful marks: Radio masts, elevation 138 m (55°59′⋅6N, 14°40′⋅1E). Light-structure (white metal framework tower, 7 m in height) (56°00′⋅6N, 14°42′⋅1E), displayed from the head of the S mole. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions.
3.105 General description. Hällevik (56°00′⋅6N, 14°42′⋅1E) lies at the head of Hälleviksviken, an inlet close E of Östra Torsöviken (3.104).
129
3.106 Description. Nogersund (56°00′N, 14°44′E) is an artificial fishing harbour situated near the SW entrance to Hanösund, 1¼ miles ESE of Hällevik. It is formed by E and W breakwaters within which lie the S harbour and, in the N part, inner and outer basins. The entrance channel has a depth of 4⋅5 m. The S harbour has 120 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 5⋅0 m. The outer basin has about 130 m of quay length with a depth alongside of 4⋅0 m; the inner basin has about 220 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 4⋅0 m and piers with about 100 berths for small craft with depths of 2⋅0 m. A light is displayed from the head of the E breakwater. Directions. Leading lights: Front and rear lights (red triangles on white framework towers) (56°00′⋅2N, 14°44′⋅3E), 87 m apart, displayed from the W breakwater. From a position to the S, about 6 cables ESE of Kråknabben (55°59′⋅7N, 14°43′⋅1E), the alignment (008°) of the these lights leads N to the harbour entrance through a short channel with an authorised draught of 3⋅5 m, 40 m wide and 4⋅5 m deep, marked by buoys (lateral). Caution. A wind powered generator lies 300 m offshore to the E of Nogersund in position 56°00′⋅2N, 14°44′⋅7E. A
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
5
Hanö Light-structure (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅9E) (3.87). Port services. Repairs: slip for vessels maximum 27 m long, 6⋅0 m wide and 3⋅5 m draught. Supplies: fuel; provisions; fresh water.
light is displayed from the generator tower which is 35 m in height. Useful marks: Listershuvud (56°02′⋅1N, 14°46′⋅8E) (3.97). Light-structure (white mast) on E breakwater head (56°00′⋅3N, 14°44′⋅3E).
HANÖ TO THE APPROACHES TO KARLSKRONA Local knowledge
GENERAL INFORMATION Chart 2360
1
Area covered 1
2
3.107 This section describes the waters in the N part of Hanöbukten from Hanö (3.99) to the E approaches to Karlskrona, about 33 miles ENE. It includes the channels and minor harbours in Pukaviksbukten (3.108), a description of the port of Karlshamn (56°10′N, 14°52′E) (3.129) which includes Stilleryd, the port of Ronneby (56°10′⋅5N, 15°18′⋅0E) (3.170), and the small harbours and inlets along the coast. It is arranged as follows: Pukaviksbukten (3.108). Karlshamn and approaches (3.129). Karlshamn to the approaches to Karlskrona (3.162) including Ronneby (3.170).
Traffic regulations 1
1
2
General information Charts 2856, 2360
Description
2
3.108 Pukaviksbukten, a large open bay situated to the SW of Karlshamn is entered between Listershuvud (56°02′⋅1N, 14°46′⋅8E), and Stärnö Udde (56°08′N, 14°50′E), the S point of the peninsula of Stärnö which lies 6 miles NNE. The bay has numerous shoals and only those which lie close to navigable channels or harbours are described. The main navigable channels lead through the shoals in the central area of the bay and thence to minor harbours in the N part. There are a number of small fishing harbours on the SW side. 3.109 The coastline round the bay is generally low with small headlands on the SW side and a number of inlets on the N side. Ryssberget (3.78) together with Södra Särdelen, a well defined gap in the middle, are prominent inland on the W side.
1
2
1
3.110 The main channel, which leads to Elleholm, is authorised for a draught of 4⋅0 m. Branch channels to other ports have lesser draughts. 1
Pilotage 1
3.115 Landmarks: Norje Böke (56°07′⋅1N, 14°41′⋅7E), a beech wood on a headland 6 miles NNW of Listershuvud. Mörrum pulp factory with chimney (56°09′⋅5N, 14°46′⋅0E), charted but not named. Visible well to seaward. Chimneys (red lights) (56°09′⋅2N, 14°50′⋅0E), on Stärnö. Major light: Hanö Light (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅8E) (3.87).
Directions
Depths 1
3.114 Submarine pipeline. Anchoring is prohibited within 150 m of a submarine pipeline, shown on the chart, laid in the approaches to Pukaviksbukten from a position 4 cables E of Kyrkegrund (56°06′⋅8N, 14°47′⋅3E), 3 miles N and NW to the coast. Its route is marked from the outer end, the first mile by light-buoys (special) and the remainder by buoys (special). Fishing. Intensive salmon fishing takes place in Pukaviksbukten from March to September. During this period fishing limits are marked by light-buoys (special) and two lights, Båknahall Light (56°08′⋅7N, 14°45′⋅3E) and Skåpehåle Light (56°09′⋅3N, 14°44′⋅5E), on the coast. Two boards (white and red rectangular) stand at the latter light-structure; on an alignment of 013½° they form part of the fishing limits.
Principal marks
Topography 1
3.113 A speed restriction of 5 kn applies in most of the harbours within this section. Notice of a speed restriction within a port or waterway is normally shown on boards in the area concerned.
Hazards
PUKAVIKSBUKTEN
1
3.112 Within the inner part of Pukaviksbukten local knowledge is required.
3.111 Pilots for Elleholm (3.127) may be obtained from Karlshamn, and ordered by VTS Malmö. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
130
3.116 Channels. From the central approach area (56°06′⋅5N, 14°49′⋅5E) two channels lead 2½ miles W and WNW respectively then merge for 7 cables NW before branching, one branch leading W and N for 2 miles to Örnavik (3.125) and Pukavik (3.126), the other branch leading 1¼ miles N to Elleholm (3.127). The N approach channel is better marked. 3.117 North-most approach. Norje Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, black border, on post, elevation 7 m) (56°07′⋅1N, 14°42′⋅0E), displayed from Norjegryt, an islet close E of Norje Böke. Rear light (similar structure, elevation 14 m), 375 m W of front light.
Home
Contents
Index Route Index Chartlet - Hanö to Karlskrona 10´
20´
2857
40´
Ronnebyhamn
16°
50´
na ro
Ka
Matvik
10´
2857
86
3.1
3.18 6
Tarnö
3.215
70
Karlshamn
3.1
10´
2855 Stilleryd
30´
rls k
15°
50´
40´
Senoren
Gåsfeten Aspö
Tjurkö Sturkö
8
3.20
22
0
3.
3.129
9
3.12
Hasslö
Torhamnsudde
29
131
3.1
3.2
00
Utlängan
Hanö
56°
CHAPTER 3
3.162
56° 0
20
3. Utklippan
29
3.1 2857
2856 Explanation Coastal route Inshore channels Paragraph numbers refer to directions
50´
0205
40´
50´
Longitude 15° East from Greenwich
20´
30´
40´
50´
50´
16°
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
From a position 1¼ miles SSW of Stärnö Udde (56°08′N, 14°50′E) (3.108) the alignment (272°) of these lights leads 2½ miles W, passing (with positions from Stärnö Udde): Close N of a buoy (N cardinal) (1⋅3 miles SSW), thence: Between two light-buoys (special) (1⋅6 miles SSW) marking a submarine pipeline (3.114), thence: S of Rockegrund (1⋅7 miles SW), a shoal marked on its S side by a buoy (lateral), and: N of Kyrkegrund (2 miles SW), a shoal marked on its N side by a buoy (lateral), thence: W to a position close S of Nypgrund (3⋅2 miles WSW), a shoal marked on its S side by a buoy (lateral) where the S channel merges. 3.118 South-most approach. From a position 2 miles SSW of Stärnö Udde the track leads 2½ miles WNW, passing (with positions as above): NE of Uppgrund (2⋅4 miles SSW) (3.149), thence: SSW of Kyrkegrund (2 miles SW), and: NE of Nyttgrund, a shoal patch (2⋅8 miles SW), thence: WNW to a position close S of Nypgrund. The track then leads 7 cables NW to a position SW of Gyrn, a shoal patch 1 mile NE of Norjegryt (56°07′⋅1N, 14°42′⋅2E) and marked on its SE side by a buoy (lateral). 3.119 West-most branch. From this position the W branch, authorised for a draught of 1⋅8 m, leads W and N for 2 miles to Pukavik entrance passing (with positions from Norjegryt): N of the shoal area extending N from Norrören (2 cables N), thence: Close SW of Hållfast (6½ cables NNW), a shoal marked by a buoy (lateral), thence: Close W of Rönneholm (1⋅4 miles NNW), a shoal marked by a buoy (lateral), and where a short branch channel leads SSW to Örnavik, thence: N to the harbour. 3.120 East-most branch. From the same position off Gyrn a branch leads 1½ miles N to Elleholm entrance channel on the alignment (009°) of Ljungholmen Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white triangles, orange borders, on posts) (56°09′⋅3N, 14°44′⋅0E), 100 m apart and displayed from an islet on the E side of the harbour.
2
3
4
Krokås 1
2
1
1
1
Lörby kladd Light-structure (lantern on grey base, elevation 6 m) (56°06′⋅0N, 14°42′⋅9E).
3.122 Description. Hörvik (56°03′N, 14°46′E), a small fishing harbour, lies at the SW limit of Pukaviksbukten close N of the hill on Listershuvud (3.97). The harbour is formed by a breakwater on the N side and a mole on the S side, with a W facing entrance 27 m wide. It is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 3⋅3 m. The outer section of the harbour has a depth of about 4⋅0 m and about 200 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 2⋅5 to 4⋅0 m. The inner part has a number of
3.125 Anchorage may be obtained off Örnavik (56°08′N, 14°41′E), in depths of 3 to 5 m, sand and clay. This anchorage is restricted by size and vessels may need a line to the shore. Local knowledge is essential.
Pukavik
2
Hörvik 1
3.124 Anchorage may be obtained, with local knowledge, in depths of 6 to 9 m, sand, close W of Norrören (56°07′⋅5N, 14°42′⋅1E), an islet 4 cables N of Norje Böke (3.115).
Örnavik anchorage
1
Anchorages and harbours
3.123 Description. Krokås (56°03′⋅0N, 14°45′⋅5E), a small fishing harbour 6 cables NNW of Hörvik, is formed by breakwaters and is suitable for vessels with a draught of 1⋅8 m. There are depths of 2⋅0 m in the harbour and alongside the quay. Directions. Krokås Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (posts, elevations 9 and 14 m, respectively, 90 m apart), displayed from the harbour. From a position to the NW of Kåsebåden, as described in 3.122, the alignment (256°) of these lights leads about 7 cables WSW to the entrance through a short buoyed and dredged channel.
Norrören anchorage
Useful mark 3.121
small craft berths with depths of about 2⋅5 m. West of the existing fishing harbour is a small craft harbour with minimum depths of 1⋅1 to 2⋅3 m. Anchorage, sheltered from the effects of E winds by shoals to the E, may be obtained in depths of 5 to 9 m, sand, 2 cables N of the harbour entrance. Directions. Hörvik Light (white framework tower, elevation 6 m) (occas), displayed from the N breakwater head. From a position to the NNE, and NW of Kåsebåden, a shoal marked on its NW side by a buoy (W cardinal) and covered by the red sector (101°–167°) of Hörvik Light, approach with the light-structure in line with the crest of Listershuvud on a bearing of 200° or, at night, in the white sector (194°–203½°) of the light. These bearings lead 1 mile SSW to the harbour entrance. Port services. Repairs: slip for vessels up to 12 m in length. Supplies: fuel oil; provisions; fresh water.
3.126 Pukavik (56°09′⋅5N, 14°41′⋅0E), a small commercial loading place lies at the NW corner of Pukaviksbukten. The harbour consists of an open roadstead with two dilapidated jetties projecting E from the shore which are suitable only for small vessels with a draught of 1⋅0 m. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in depths of 3⋅2 to 4⋅2 m, sand and clay, in the harbour area. The harbour is usually ice-bound from January to March. Directions for entry are given at 3.116. Supplies: fuel oil; provisions; fresh water.
Elleholm 1
132
3.127 Elleholm (56°09′N, 14°44′E) is a small loading place situated in a small inlet about 4 miles W of Karlshamn (3.129), and 1¾ miles E of Pukavik (3.126). It is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 4⋅0 m. The harbour consists of an open roadstead and a 20 m long quay with a
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
2
depth alongside of 4⋅5 m and a ramp facility to load stone materials directly into vessels. There is a small, well sheltered anchorage in a depth of about 5⋅0 m, sand and clay, off the loading quay. Directions for approach are given at 3.116. Entry to the harbour is through a short buoyed channel suitable for vessels about 65 m long and 4⋅0 m draught. Supplies of provisions are available from Mörrum, a town 2 miles NNE.
Approach and entry 1
Gunnön 1
2
3.128 Gunnön (56°09′N, 14°47′E) is a small islet with a loading place situated 1¾ miles E of Elleholm. The islet is connected to the mainland by a fixed bridge at its N end under which is a passage 10 m wide, depth 2⋅0 m and vertical clearance 1⋅8 m. There is a small quay 45 m long and with a depth alongside of 4⋅8 m. Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 6 to 10 m, clay, in the bay E of Gunnön. Directions. Local knowledge is required but approach and entry from the S will be assisted by the following: Gunnön Light (56°09′⋅0N, 14°46′⋅7E) (3.149). Hästen Beacon (56°08′⋅7N, 14°47′⋅1E) (3.149).
2
3
KARLSHAMN AND APPROACHES General information
Traffic 1
Charts 2855, 2856, 2360 3.129 Karlshamn (56°10′N, 14°52′E) lies at the mouth of Mie ån which flows into Karlshamnsfjorden in the NE part of Hanöbukten. Included in the port are the jetties and berths at Stilleryd (56°09′⋅5N, 14°49′⋅5E), 1½ miles SW of Karlshamn, at the head of a bay which is separated from Karlshamnsfjorden by the Stärnö peninsula. Also included are the berths at Stärnö Vindhamn (3.159), situated 1 mile SSW of Karlshamn on the E side of the peninsula and Vägga (3.161) fishing harbour, ¾ mile SE of Karlshamn on the E side of Karlshamnsfjorden.
1
2
3.130 The port is a safe, well-sheltered harbour with good anchorages. It is a major commercial port well equipped to handle most types of vessel including large tankers and bulk carriers. Principal imports include copra, oil seed, coal, all types of vegetable and mineral oils, general cargo. Exports include pulp and paper products, stone, grain, timber products and animal feed products. The population of Karlshamn is about 11 100.
Authorised draughts 1
3.131 The coast is generally low and indented with shoal areas extending up to 4 miles offshore in places. Inland, to the W of Pukaviksbukten, a range of hills is visible from well to seaward. The coastline surrounding Karlshamnsfjorden and Stillerydviken is generally low with few significant features.
3.135 The channels into the harbours listed below have the following authorised draughts: Channel to Centralhamnen — 10⋅0 m. Branch channel NE of Kastellet — 9⋅0 m Channel to Stillerydshamnen oil berths — 12⋅6 m. Branch channel cargo berths — 10⋅5 m. Stärnö Vindhamn — 5⋅4 m
Deepest and longest berths 1
Topography 1
3.134 Karlshamns Hamn och Stuveri AB, PO Box 8, S–374 21, Karlshamn. Website: www.karlshamnshamn.se E-Mail:
[email protected]
Limiting conditions
Function 1
3.133 In 2003 the port was used by 1450 vessels totalling 5 451 062 dwt.
Port Authority
Position 1
3.132 The main approach to Karlshamn from the S or SE is from a position E of Hanöbanken (3.94) where the route leads NW through clear water to a position about 5 miles S of Karlshamn. Approach may also be made via Hanösund (3.92), the track leading NNE to a similar position as above. From this position separate channels lead to the main harbour and the associated harbour at Stilleryd. Vessels approaching from the E should pass well S of Tärnö (56°07′⋅0N, 14°58′⋅5E). Karlshamn Centralhamnen. The port is approached on the alignment of a leading line and leading lights through a broad channel marked by buoys which divides 1 mile S of the harbour. The main entrance channel then leads NW on the alignment of leading lights through a channel marked by buoys and light-buoys to enter the harbour between breakwaters on the W side. An alternative branch channel leads NNW on the alignment of leading lights, through a channel marked by buoys, to enter the N part of the harbour but this channel is partially obstructed by a line of dolphins at the DG range N of Kastellet (3.145). Stillerydshamnen. The harbour is approached on the alignment of leading lights through a broad channel marked by buoys and light-buoys and entered through dredged channels marked by buoys and light-buoys.
3.136 Centralhamnen: Sutudden oil jetty (oil) (3.158). Sojakajen (bulk grain) (3.158). Stillerydshamnen: Kölöhamnen oil jetty (oil) (3.157). Western basin (containers and general cargo) (3.157).
Water levels 1
133
3.137 Normal variation in the water level ranges from 0⋅9 m above to 0⋅7 m below mean level. Strong winds may cause the range to vary from 1⋅5 m above to 1⋅0 m below. Winds between N and E raise the level, those between NW and SW cause it to fall.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
3.141 Karlshamn Hamnradio (Karlshamn Port Radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
breakwater extends SW from the S of the islet which, together with a short breakwater from the shore, form the main entrance. A branch channel enters the N part of the harbour to the E of Kastellet. The oil jetty lies immediately inside the breakwaters with the bulk quays farther N. The Ro-Ro berths and small boat harbour lie on the E side of the river mouth. Caution. Several submarine cables are laid across the channels in Karlshamnsfjorden, their positions can be seen on the chart. In addition, several submarine pipelines are present in the bay. Their positions are also shown on the chart. Stillerydshamnen. The harbour lies at the head of Stillerydviken and consists of three berthing areas. Kölöhamnen and Oxhaga nabb, the oil terminals, lie at the entrance to a small inlet on the NE side. The cargo and Ro-Ro area lies at the N end and is entered on the W side. Access to the E side branches off the main channel to the oil berths.
Outer anchorages
Degaussing ranges
Density of water 1
3.138 The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅007 g/cm3. 2
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
3.139 A vessel with a maximum length of 260 m and draught 13⋅5 m. 3
Ice 1
3.140 In general the harbours are normally free from ice but, if necessary, the channels are kept open by ice-breakers. For further details on ice see 1.253 and 1.261.
4
Arrival information Port radio 1
1
2
3.142 Anchorage may be obtained in the outer part of Karlshamnsfjorden in depths of 17 to 24 m, sand and gravel, but this anchorage is exposed to S winds. With local knowledge, anchorage may be obtained in a depth of 11 m, clay, in an area 200 m wide W of Kastellet (56°09′⋅6N, 14°52′⋅0E) (3.145). Anchorage is limited to 24 hours in this area unless permission to extend the stay is granted by the authorities. Prohibited anchorage. Anchorage is prohibited sto the N and E of Kastellet and adjacent to the submarine power cable leading from the Stärnö peninsula as shown on the chart. See also 1.71.
1
Principal marks 1
Pilotage and tugs 1
2
3.143 Pilotage. Pilots are available 24 hours and are compulsory for most categories of vessel. Requests for pilots should be made at least 5 hours in advance, to VTS Malmö. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Pilot boards, as indicated on the chart: (i) at the outer boarding position (56°05′⋅0N, 14°51′⋅6E). (ii) at the inner boarding position (56°07′⋅2N, 14°53′⋅2E). Tugs are available and are compulsory for vessels berthing at Sutudden oil jetty (3.158).
2
(continued from 3.98)
Approach
3.144 Restricted Area. A military protected area is established south of Stärnö as shown on the chart. Degaussing Range. Vessels must pass N of the DG range (3.146), situated N of Kastellet and manoeuvre carefully in its vicinity.
1
Harbour General layout 1
3.147 Landmarks: Listershuvud (56°02′⋅1N, 14°46′⋅8E) (3.97). Mörrum pulp factory with chimney (56°09′⋅5N, 14°46′⋅0E) (3.115). Chimneys (red lights) (56°09′⋅2N, 14°50′⋅0E), on Stärnö. Eneskärv Beacon (white, 3 m in height) (56°08′⋅6N, 14°53′⋅7E), on an islet of that name 1½ miles SE of the harbour. Matvikshög Beacon (56°10′⋅3N, 14°57′⋅6E) (3.167). Major lights: Hanö Light (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅8E) (3.87). Karlshamn-Gungvalla Aero Light (56°13′⋅6N, 14°46′⋅7E) (3.87).
Directions for entering harbour
Traffic Regulations 1
3.146 There are two DG ranges, shown on the chart, within port limits: Close N of Kastellet, marked by a line of dolphins which are joined by aerial cables. In an area centred 1¾ cables E of Kastellet, marked at its SW limit by a light-buoy (special).
3.145 The harbour is divided into two areas, separated geographically by the Stärnö peninsula. Karlshamn Centralhamnen. The harbour is formed by a small bay extending S from the river mouth with the islet of Kastellet situated slightly SW of its central section. A
2
134
3.148 South-east approach. From a position about 10 miles SE of Hanö (56°01′N, 14°51′E) the track leads 13½ miles NW to a position S of Karlshamn in the vicinity of the outer pilot boarding place (56°05′⋅0N, 14°51′⋅6E), passing (with positions from Hanö Light),: NE of the E limit of Hanöbanken (7 miles SE) (3.94), thence: NE of Malkvarn (1¼ miles NE) (3.98), and: SW of Tärnö (7 miles NE). Approach from Hanösund. Follow directions for Hanösund transit given at 3.98, thence the track leads 3¾ miles NNE to the vicinity of the outer pilot boarding place as above, passing (with positions from Hanö Light): WNW of Malkvarn (1¼ miles NE), and: ESE of Laxgrund (2¼ miles NNW) (3.98).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Entry to Stillerydshamnen 1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3.149 Leading marks: Front mark: Hästen Beacon (white cairn, red band, white triangle with red border), standing on a shoal 4 cables SE of the light below. Rear mark: Gunnön Light (triangle on white column, red bands, elevation 11 m) (56°09′⋅0N, 14°46′⋅7E), displayed from the S point of the islet of that name. Windmotors stand 1 cable NW and NNE of the light; a third windmotor stands close SE, and partially obscures the red sector of the light on the bearing of 302°. From the vicinity of the outer pilot boarding position about 3½ miles SSE of Stärnö Udde (56°08′N, 14°50′E) (3.108), the alignment of these marks (324½°) in the white sector (323°–327°) of the light, leads 3 miles NW, through the fairway, to a position 1¼ miles SSW of Stärnö Udde, passing (with positions from Stärnö Udde): NE of Uppgrund (2½ miles SSW), a shoal marked by a buoy (E cardinal), and: Close NE of a buoy (N cardinal) (1⋅3 miles SSW). Thence: 3.150 Kölö Leading Lights: Front light (orange triangle, red border, on metal column, elevation 9 m) (56°09′⋅3N, 14°49′⋅6E). Rear light (similar structure, elevation 17 m), 347 m N from front. The channel leads 2 miles N to the oil jetties on the E side of the harbour on the alignment (010°) of these lights, passing, (with positions from the front light): W of Kasen Light-buoy (W cardinal) (2 miles SSW), thence: ESE of Storbåden (1½ miles SW), and: WNW of Samsabådarna (1¼ miles S), a shoal area marked on its W side by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: E of Bosaflätt (1 mile SSW), rocks awash and an above-water rock, and: E of Böse Light-buoy (port hand) (7 cables SSW), marking a 5 m shoal, thence: W of a buoy (starboard hand) (4 cables S), to enter the dredged area, thence: Round a short breakwater (2 cables S), extending NW from Kölö, a point on the NW side of Stärnö. 3.151 Branch channel to West basin. Stilleryd Leading Lights: Front light (orange triangle, white border, on pole, elevation 8 m) (56°09′⋅6N, 14°49′⋅0E). Rear light (similar structure, elevation 15 m), 132 m NW from front light. From a position NE of Böse Light-buoy, as above, the alignment (346¼°) of these lights leads NNW for 7 cables to enter the W basin, passing through a dredged channel marked by light-buoys (lateral) and a buoy (S cardinal), marking the S limit of a shoal area 2 cables SSW of Kölö front light. A light-buoy (port hand) marks the limit of the 11 m dredged area in the W basin.
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
Entry to Stärnö Vindhamn 1
Entry to Karlshamn Centralhamnen 1
(3.145) and Ortholmen Lighthouse (white lantern, elevation 6 m) (56°09′⋅4N, 14°52′⋅8E), bearing 339°, in the white sector (336½°–359°) of Ortholmen Light, or alternatively, on the alignment (339°) of: Karlshamn Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, white border, on building, elevation 10 m) (56°09′⋅8N, 14°52′⋅2E). Rear light (red triangle, white border, on framework tower, elevation 15 m), 270 m NNW from front. This alignment leads 3½ miles NNW to a position E of the S point of Boön where the channels divide, passing (with positions from front light, above): WSW of Kullarna (3 miles SE), thence: ENE of Lakknallarna (2 miles S), a shoal marked by a light-buoy (E cardinal). Thence: WSW of Gomorrön (2 miles SSE), a shoal patch, marked by a buoy (W cardinal) and: WSW of Eneskärv (1½ miles SE). 3.153 North-west branch. Sutudden Leading Lights: Front light (orange triangle on mast, elevation 18 m) (56°09′⋅5N, 14°51′⋅8E), displayed among oil tanks. Rear light (similar structure, elevation 37 m), 410 m NW from front light. The alignment (318°) of these lights leads 1 mile NW through a buoyed channel to the entrance, passing (with positions from front light, as above): NE of Åshuvudet (8 cables SE), a shoal area marked on its NE side by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: NE of Lassebåden (4 cables SE), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (port hand), and: SW of a buoy (S cardinal), marking the S end of Svartaskärv (4 cables SE), thence: Close SW of Knekten Light-buoy (starboard hand) (2½ cables SE), thence: NNW for 2 cables to pass between the breakwaters, each of which displays a light from its head. The width of the entrance is 100 m. 3.154 Branch channel — East of Kastellet. From the position E of the S point of Boön described above, the branch channel, continues 1 mile NNW to enter Centralhamnen N of Kastellet on the alignment (339°) of Karlshamn Leading Lights, passing (with positions from Ortholmen Light): WSW of Ortholmen Lighthouse, thence: ENE of a buoy (port hand) marking the E limit of Flataskärv shoal area (2 cables W), thence: WSW of the DG range (2½ cables NNW) (3.146), marked on its W side by a light-buoy (special), thence: E of Kastellet (4 cables NNW), and: E of the dolphins (5 cables NNW), marking the second DG range (3.146), N of Kastellet.
3.152 Main channel — West of Kastellet. From a position 3½ miles S of Eneskärv (3.147), in the vicinity of the outer pilot boarding position, approach with Karlshamn Church (56°10′⋅3N, 14°51′⋅7E) visible midway between Kastellet
135
3.155 Vindhamn Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (orange triangles, elevations 14 and 17 m respectively, 60 m apart) (56°08′⋅7N, 14°51′⋅3E), displayed from the head of the harbour. The alignment (206½°) of these lights leads 6 cables SSW from a position between the buoys marking the NE limit of the buoyed channnel, through a buoyed (lateral) channel to the quays on the W side of the harbour.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
1
2
3.156 Useful marks: Chimney (red light) (56°10′⋅0N, 14°49′⋅1E). Silo (56°09′⋅7N, 14°51′⋅5E), on W side of Centralhamnen. Karlshamn Church (56°10′⋅3N, 14°51′⋅7E). Beacon (white) (56°09′⋅7N, 14°51′⋅9E), on rock close N of Kastellet (3.145). Vägga Södra Light-structure (white mast, elevation 5 m) (56°09′⋅1N, 14°53′⋅1E), which stands on the islet of Ytter Ortholmen.
Stärnö Vindhamn 1
Port services 1
Basins and berths 2
Stillerydshamnen 1
2
3
4
3.157 The principal berths lie in the W basin, in the S part, with 230 m of berthing space and a depth alongside of 11 m. They are well equipped to handle containers and general cargo. At the SW tip there is a Ro-Ro terminal and berth, with a depth alongside of 11⋅0 m. In the N part there is further berthing space, including another two Ro-Ro terminals, with depths of about 8 m. In the E basin there is a further Ro-Ro berth, at the S end, formed by two breasting dolphins and a 13⋅4 m wide ramp, with a depth alongside of 8 m. A further 500 m of berthing space is available in the inner part. Oxhaga Nabb Oil Jetty lies on a point close E of the E basin and is 80 m long with a depth alongside of 13⋅0 m. It can receive vessels up to 220 m in length. Kölöhamnen Oil Jetty, the principal oil berth, lies 1 cable SSE of Oxhaga Nabb. It is privately owned by Sydkraft to serve the nearby power station and has a length of 100 m, including the breasting dolphins, with a depth alongside of 14⋅0 m. It can receive vessels up to 260 m in length. Caution. Mariners should note that the E limit of the dredged area in the vicinity of these oil berths is marked by two beacons, with triangular white boards, on an alignment of about 328°, standing close NE of Oxhaga Nabb jetty. Vessels should not overrun the berths on approach.
3.159 The harbour contains four quays with a total length of 400 m and a depth alongside of 6⋅0 m. Its principal use is the export of forest products. In the S part of the harbour several jetties for the use of small craft extend up to 150 m from the shore.
3.160 Repairs. Minor repairs only. At Stärnö Vindhamn there is patent slip 43 m in length with a lifting capacity of 500 tonnes. Other facilities. Deratting; oily waste disposal; authorised compass adjusters; degaussing; hospital. Supplies. Fuel; fresh water at all berths; provisions. Rescue. The pilot boat acts as a lifeboat when required. Communications. Nearest airport at Ronneby, 30 km distant. Regular ferry services to Denmark, Germany and other Swedish ports.
Fishing harbour Vägga 1
2
3
3.161 Vägga (56°09′⋅5N, 14°53′⋅2E), a small fishing harbour, lies in an inlet on the E side of Karlshamnsfjorden 1 mile SSE of Karlshamn. The harbour is protected by breakwaters to the W and S and is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 3⋅7 m. There is a total of 237 m of berthing space with depths of 3 to 4 m alongside and a number of small boat berths with depths alongside of 1⋅0 to 2⋅5 m. Entry. From the S the harbour is approached and entered between Ytter Ortholmen (56°09′⋅1N, 14°53′⋅0E), an islet from which Vägga Södra Light (3.156) is displayed, and Vägga udde, a point 2 cables farther E, through a channel which leads for 4 cables in the white sector (344°–354°) of Vägga Light (white framework tower), displayed from the head of the E breakwater. An alternative entry, suitable for a draught of 3⋅2 m, is through a channel from the W, leading from close S of Ortholmen Lighthouse (3.152) to the W breakwater. Facilities. A slip and a boatyard within the harbour.
KARLSHAMN TO THE APPROACHES TO KARLSKRONA General information
Karlshamn Centralhamnen 1
2
3.158 Sutudden Oil Jetty is the principal oil berth which lies close inside the breakwaters on the W side. It is 70 m in length and has a depth alongside of 11⋅0 m. Vessels of up to 190 m in length can be received. Sojakajen together with Oceankajen are the principal cargo quays, and have a total berthing space of 400 m with a depth alongside of 8⋅5 m. They are well equipped to handle bulk grain and other cargo. In the N part of the harbour, on the W bank of the river mouth there is a further 400 m of berthing space. On the E bank there is 200 m of berthing space, mainly for small craft. Depths are from 5⋅0 to 6⋅0 m. On the E pier, 1 cable N of Kastellet, there is a ferry terminal and Ro-Ro berth with 15 m wide ramp and a depth alongside of 7⋅5 m.
Charts 2855, 2856, 2857, 2360.
Route 1
3.162 The route follows the coast from a position S of Karlshamn (56°10′N, 14°52′E) (3.129), E for about 23 miles to a position SSW of Karlskrona (56°10′N, 15°36′E) (3.250), in the vicinity of the main entrance channel.
Topography 1
136
3.163 The coast between Karlshamn and Karlskrona is generally low with few significant features and some wooded areas. The coastline is indented with numerous inlets. Shoal areas and many small islands extend about 3 miles offshore.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Exercise area 1
Ronneby
3.164 Firing practice areas lie within the area covered by this route as shown on the chart; see 1.22.
General information 1
Dumping ground 1
Charts 2857 with plan of Ronneby Hamn
3.165 An explosives dumping ground, shown on the chart, is centred 1½ miles SE of Utklippan (55°57′⋅3N, 15°42′⋅4E). Anchoring and underwater operations are prohibited within the area.
Natural conditions 1
3.166 Local magnetic anomaly. Local magnetic anomalies have been reported in an area about 8 miles SE of Gåsfeten (56°07′⋅3N, 15°13′⋅5E), an islet in the approaches to Ronnebyhamn (3.170). Currents. Unpredictable currents exist in the vicinity of Utklippan (55°57′⋅3N, 15°42′⋅4E). The position of the vessel should be checked frequently.
2
Principal marks 1
2
3.167 Landmarks: Matvikshög Beacon (black square on red pole, 18 m in height) (56°10′⋅3N, 14°57′⋅6E), standing on the summit of a sparsely wooded hill. Ronneby Water Tower (56°12′⋅6N, 15°17′⋅0E). Karlskrona Water Tower (56°10′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅0E), standing on an island close N of Karlskrona. Major lights: Hanö Light (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅8E) (3.87). Karlshamn-Gungvalla Aero Light (56°13′⋅6N, 14°46′⋅7E). Ronneby Kallinge Aero Light (56°16′N, 15°16′E). (chart 2816). Tving Aero Light (56°17′⋅0N, 15°29′⋅6E) (chart 2816). Utklippan Light (55°57′⋅2N, 15°42′⋅0E) (3.206).
Limiting conditions 1
2
Other aids to navigation 1
3.168 Racons: Gåsfeten Lighthouse (white tower, red roof, 10 m in height) (56°07′⋅3N, 15°13′⋅4E). Västra Försänkningen Light (56°06′⋅5N, 15°34′⋅5E) (3.211). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
1
2
2
3.169 From a position S of Karlshamn in the vicinity of the outer pilot boarding place (56°05′⋅0N, 14°51′⋅8E) the route leads 23 miles E to the vicinity of Karlskrona angöring Light-buoy (56°03′⋅2N, 15°33′⋅5E), passing (with positions from Gåsfeten Lighthouse (56°07′⋅3N, 15°13′⋅4E): S of Tärnö (8½ miles W) (3.183), thence: S of Tånghällan (3 miles WSW), the S end of a shoal patch, marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: S of Sättekullarna (6¼ miles ESE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: S of Ytterknuven (8¼ miles ESE), a 10 m shoal patch, marked by a buoy (S cardinal), and: Clear of a dangerous wreck (10 miles ESE). (Directions for Karlskrona main entrance are at 3.208, for W entrance at 3.219 and for E entrance at 3.235)
3.171 Deepest and longest berths. W side — Quay No 5 (oil) (3.180). E side — Quay No 6–7 (timber and general). Water levels. The normal variation is 0⋅7 m above or below MSL but strong W winds may cause the level to fall by up to 1⋅0 m. Density of water: 1⋅000 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled. A vessel with LOA of 152 m and draught 6⋅1 m. Ice. The harbour is normally free from ice but severe winters may cause ice during February and March. See 1.253. Current. At times, manoeuvring in the harbour may be difficult due to currents in Ronnebyån, caused by heavy outflow.
Arrival information
Directions 1
3.170 Position. Ronneby (56°12′⋅5N, 15°17′⋅0E) lies on the Ronnebyån, 2½ miles N of the harbour area. The population is about 35 000. Ronnebyhamn (56°10′⋅5N, 15°18′⋅0E) lies at the mouth of the river in the N end of Ronnebyfjärden. Function. The port is a small commercial harbour with facilities for handling general and liquid cargoes. Principal imports include chemicals, oils and steel plate. Exports include wood pulp, timber products and ingots. Approach and entry. The harbour is approached on the alignment of leading lights, through a channel marked by buoys and light-buoys and authorised for a draught of 5⋅5 m, and entered on the alignment of leading lights, through a dredged channel marked by buoys and light-buoys. A secondary channel lies to the E of the main channel. Port Authority. Ronneby Hamnkontoret, PO Box 3160, S–37203, Ronneby.
3
3.172 Port radio. Ronneby Hamnradio (Harbour radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Anchorage may be obtained, as indicated on the chart, in an area to the N of Stora Ekön (56°08′⋅5N, 15°13′⋅3E), an islet 3½ miles SW of the harbour, in depths of 7 to 10 m, clay. Small vessels may obtain anchorage, in areas each side of the fairway, 2 cables S of Ronnebyhamn, in depths of between 3⋅8 to 5⋅0 m. Anchoring is prohibited on the leading light alignments and in the narrow white sectors of the fairway lights. Pilotage and tugs. Pilots may be obtained from Karlshamn (3.129), and ordered from VTS Malmö. Tugs must be ordered from Karlshamn or Karlskrona. Speed. A speed restriction of 5 kn is in force in the harbour entrance and the river. This limit also applies in the small craft channels to the W of the harbour.
Harbour 1
137
3.173 Description. The harbour is formed by quays constructed on the W and E banks of the river mouth. A rail swing bridge spans the river 1½ cables N of the entrance. It has a vertical clearance of 2⋅0 m when closed
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
and a navigable opening 10 m wide in the open position. A road bridge spans the river close S of the rail bridge. There are general depths of 6⋅5 m in the harbour area.
1
Landmark 3.174 1
Ronneby Water Tower (56°12′⋅6N, 15°17′⋅0E).
Directions 1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
3.175 Saxemara Leading Lights: Front light (brown lantern, white on side facing alignment) (56°09′⋅2N, 15°14′⋅1E), displayed from a rock 2 miles NNE of Gåsfeten Lighthouse (56°07′⋅3N, 15°13′⋅4E). Rear light (brown lantern, white with two red bands on side facing alignment, elevation 10 m) (56°09′⋅8N, 15°14′⋅4E), displayed from a rock 7 cables NNE of front light. From a position about 2¼ miles SSW of Gåsfeten Light the alignment (018½°) of these lights leads 3 miles NNE through the fairway to a position close NNE of Eskelen Beacon, passing (with positions from Gåsfeten Light): WNW of Slånakullen, a shoal patch marked by a buoy (S cardinal) (8 cables S), thence: ESE of Sommargrund, a shoal patch marked by a buoy (port hand) (9 cables SSW), thence: ESE of Östra Fittjakullen, a shoal marked on its E side by a buoy (port hand) (4 cables W), and: WNW of Gåsfeten, on which stands Gåsfeten Light (3.168), thence: ESE of Eskelen (6 cables NNW), on which stands a beacon (red, 2⋅6 m in height). It is prudent to deviate slightly E of the leading line passing Eskelen in order to pass well clear of the shoal area. 3.176 Central section. Svanvik Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on orange pedestal, elevation 5 m) (56°09′⋅4N, 15°14′⋅8E), displayed from the SE side of Funkön, the islet close W of Harön. Rear light (similar structure, elevation 10 m) (56°09′⋅7N, 15°15′⋅1E), displayed from the W side of Harön. Harön Leading Beacons (white triangles, 50 m apart), standing on the S end of Harön. The alignment (029½°) of the above lights, and the alignment (042½°) of the beacons leads initially 1 mile NNE, thence a further 5 cables NE to a position 3 cables NE of Dunsön (3.189), passing (with positions from Eskelen Beacon): Over an 8⋅4 m patch in the middle of the track (3 cables NNE). In unfavourable weather conditions deep-draught vessels should monitor the depth and pass clear of the patch if possible. Thence: ESE of a 4⋅7 m shoal (4 cables NNE), and: NW of 5 m shoal (5 cables NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: E of a 2⋅0 m shoal (1⋅1 miles NNE), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), and: NW of the shoal area extending W from Dunsön (1⋅3 miles NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SSE of the S limit of the shoal area S of Funkön (1½ miles NNE), marked by a light-buoy (port hand).
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
Thence to the alignment of: 3.177 North section. Aspan Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on framework tower, elevation 5 m) (56°09′⋅4N, 15°18′⋅4E). Rear light (similar structure, elevation 8 m) (56°09′⋅4N, 15°19′⋅0E), 662 m E from front light. The alignment (087°) of these lights leads 1¼ miles E through a channel, marked by buoys and a light-buoy (lateral), to a position 6 cables from the front light, passing (with positions from Aspan rear light): N of Ulvask (2 mile W), thence: S of Stekö Lighthouse (white diamond on orange pedestal) (1¾ mile W), thence: S of Lilla Ekön Beacon (1½ miles W), and: N of Lindesk (1¼ miles W). The white sector (266°–269°), astern, of Svanviksudde Light (grey framework tower), displayed close SW of Svanvik Front Light described above, forms a reciprocal lead for Aspan Leading Lights through the above channel. Thence the track leads 8 cables NNE to the entrance channel, through a channel marked by buoys and a light-buoy, in the white sector (030°–033°) of Sandviken Light (white diamond on orange pedestal) (56°10′⋅4N, 15°18′⋅4E). Thence the harbour entrance channel leads 3½ cables N on the alignment (358°) of Ronneby Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on post, elevation 14 m), displayed from the E side of the harbour. Rear light (similar structure) (150 m N from front light). 3.178 Eastern channel. A channel, suitable for vessels with a draught up to 3 m, runs through Danziger gatt, about 3 miles S of Ronnebyhamn. Gökalv Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on framework tower) (56°08′⋅3N, 15°16′⋅9E) on an islet, Norra Kråken. Rear light (similar structure) (1½ cables from front light) at Mulaholmen. From a position close E of the buoy (W cardinal), moored 1½ miles SW of Göudde (56°07′⋅5N, 15°18′⋅7E), the S point of the Gö peninsula, the track initially leads N on the alignment (358½°) of these lights, thence NNW within the white sector (329°−331°) of Högaskär Light (mast) (56°08′⋅8N, 15°16′⋅1E)) and NNE to join the main channel 7 cables W of Aspan front light (3.177) passing (with positions from Göudde): W of Rafflorna (1 mile WSW), thence: Through the channel, marked by buoys (lateral), in Danziger gatt (1 mile NW), thence: W of Gökalv (1½ miles NW), the W point of the peninsula, and: SE of Högaskär (2 miles NW), an islet on which stands Hogstar Light, thence: NNE for 1 mile to join the main channel as described above. 3.179 Useful mark: Saxemara Church (56°10′⋅1N, 15°13′⋅9E).
Berths 1
138
3.180 On the W side the principal berth is Quay No 3 which has a length of 100 m, and a depth alongside of 6⋅0 m. It is the oil jetty.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
2
There is further berthing space amounting to a length of 200 m with depths alongside of 3⋅5 to 6⋅5 m. At the W end of the S jetty, a pontoon extends 48 m S into the harbour; a marine farm lies W of the pontoon. On the E side the principal berth is Quay No 6–7 with a length of 100 m and a depth alongside of 4⋅5 m and a small boat quay with a length of 70 m.
Port services 1
3.181 Repairs: minor repairs. Other facilities: oily waste reception; authorised compass adjuster; customs office; doctor. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Nearest international airport at Ronneby, 10 km N of Ronnebyhamn.
Vettekulla 1
2
Matvik 1
Anchorages and harbours
1
Charts 2856, 2857, 2360 (see 1.34) 3.182 General information. Between Karlshamn and Ronnebyhamn, 14 miles E, there are a number of anchorage loading places and small anchorages which are briefly described but should not be approached without local knowledge or the assistance of a pilot. See 1.32.
2
Tärnö 1
2
3
4
5
3.183 Description. Tärnö (56°07′⋅0N, 14°58′⋅5E), a small island which lies 4 miles SE of Karlshamn (3.129), has a bare summit surrounded by trees. Harbour. Tärnöhamn lies in a bay on the N coast and is a fishing harbour suitable for vessels with a draught up to about 4⋅0 m. It has a small pier with a depth alongside of 3⋅5 m. The bay does not afford good anchorage. Local knowledge is required. Ice may be expected from January to March. Pilots may be obtained from Karlshamn. Directions for entry. The main channel, authorised for a draught of 5⋅3 m, leads between the NE point of Tärnö, from where a light (white lantern, elevation 5 m) is displayed when required, and Harö, an islet 2 cables NE. Approach from the SE with Matvikshög Beacon (56°10′⋅3N, 14°57′⋅6E) (3.167) bearing 344°, or alternatively, with Joppö Beacon (orange post) (56°08′⋅6N, 14°58′⋅5E), standing on a rock 1⋅2 miles N of the above light, in line with Baggahegna Light (56°09′⋅2N, 14°58′⋅1E) (lantern on post, orange rectangle), displayed from an islet 7 cables NNW of the beacon, bearing 343½°. This alignment and bearing leads about 1 mile NNW to the entrance channel, marked by buoys (lateral), which then leads a further 9 cables NW and S through the channel to the harbour passing (with positions from the NE point light described above): Clear E of Tjuvnabbsrevet (1½ cables SSE), and: Clear W of the shoal area extending SW from Harö, thence: NE of Ebbaskär (3 cables NW), and: SE of Hästkläpp (5 cables NW). Approach may be made from the W but this channel is poorly marked and twisted. Enter from a position close N of Skallöragrund, a shoal patch 3 cables NW of the NW point of Tärnö, marked by a buoy (starboard hand). Thence follow the buoys (lateral), marking the channel to the bay. Useful mark. Tärnö Lighthouse (white lantern, elevation 31 m), standing close N of the S point of the island. Supplies: fuel oil; provisions; fresh water.
3.184 Vettekulla (56°09′⋅6N, 14°55′⋅1E), a small anchorage and loading place lies in an inlet 2 miles ESE of Karlshamn. There is a small pier with a depth alongside of 3⋅5 m. Pilots may be obtained from Karlshamn. Anchorage may be obtained for small vessels, in depths of 5⋅0 m, sand. Local knowledge is required. Approach and entry are made from the inshore traffic route E of Karlshamn, shown on the chart, leading NE for about 1 mile, thence through a channel suitable for a draught of 3⋅5 m.
1
2
3
4
3.185 Description. Matvik (56°10′N, 14°58′E), is a small loading place and anchorage area situated 3½ miles E of Karlshamn (3.129), in the N part of Matviksfjärden near the mouth of Tränsum Å. Ice. The inlet is usually closed by ice from January to March. Anchorage may be obtained in a position 7 cables SSE of Matvikshög Beacon (56°10′⋅3N, 14°57′⋅6E) (3.167), in depths of 9 to 14 m, clay. Submarine power cable is laid close E of the anchorage, as shown on the plan. Pilots may be obtained from Karlshamn. Speed limit of 7 kn is in force in Matviksfjärden. 3.186 Directions — Main channel — from west. Follow the directions for Karlshamn approach given at 3.152 to embark a pilot 1 mile SSE of Lakknallarna (3.152). Thence, from a position 5 cables WSW of Eneskärv Beacon (56°08′⋅6N, 14°53′⋅9E) (3.147), follow the recommended track, as shown on the plan and authorised for a draught of 8⋅2 m, 3 miles ENE to Matvik, passing through the narrow channel marked by buoys (lateral) N of Nästensö, an islet 1½ miles SW of Matvikshög Beacon. Secondary channel — from east. Local knowledge is required. From a position to seaward about 2 miles E of Tärnö (56°07′⋅0N, 14°58′⋅5E) (3.183), approach with Matvikshög Beacon in line with Fåröholm (56°09′⋅6N, 14°58′⋅7E), an islet close W of Fårö, on which stands a beacon (white cairn, white cask topmark, 4 m in height), on a bearing of 320°. This alignment (320°) leads 2½ miles NW, through a channel authorised for a draught of 5 m. Thence the channel leads a further 9 cables WNW to Matvik, passing (with positions from Baggahegna Light-structure (56°09′⋅2N, 14°58′⋅1E) (3.183)): NE of Vitaskär, a small bare rock (1½ miles SSE), thence: SW of Mjöö, an islet on which stand two beacons (1½ miles SE), and: NE of Bockö, an islet on which stands a beacon (1 mile SSE), thence: WNW through the narrow channel, marked by a buoy (port hand), SW of Fårö (6 cables NE).
Guövik and Järnavik 1
139
3.187 Description. Guövik (56°11′⋅7N, 15°00′⋅8E), together with Järnavik (56°10′⋅8N, 15°04′⋅3E), are two loading places which lie in inlets on the NW and NE sides of a large bay, containing a number of islets, situated and entered about 6 miles E of Karlshamn (3.129).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
2
1
2
3
There are two jetties at Guövik with depths alongside of 2⋅3 and 2⋅6 m, respectively, and a jetty at Järnavik with a depth alongside of 3⋅0 m. Ice. The bay is often closed by ice from January to March. See 1.255. Minefield. A permanent minefield, shown on Swedish charts, is laid in the approaches to the bay. Anchorage may be obtained, with local knowledge, in a position about 9 cables NNW of Tjärö Beacon (56°09′⋅6N, 15°03′⋅1E), in charted depths of about 12 m. 3.188 Approach and entry. Approach to both harbours from seaward is through a common entrance channel, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m, which divides, the W branch leading to Guövik, the E branch to Järnavik. From a position to seaward about 2 miles ENE of Tärnö (56°07′⋅0N, 14°58′⋅5E), the track leads initially 1¼ miles NNE to a position 2½ cables SE of the islet of Gråskär (56°09′⋅0N, 15°02′⋅5E) where the channel divides. The W channel leads 2½ miles NNW through Guöviken passing E of Skiftesön, an islet 5 cables NNW of Gråskär and W of Tjärö, an island 5 cables NNE of Gråskär, to the entrance channel, suitable for a draught of 2⋅3 m. The E branch channel leads 2 miles NNE to Järnavik with the entrance of Järnaviksfjärden bearing 022°, to pass close E of Ytter Gåse, a small dark rock 3 cables NE of Tjärö Beacon (56°09′⋅6N, 15°03′⋅1E), thence keeping the entrance ahead on that bearing. Supplies: fuel oil; provisions; fresh water at Guövik.
1
Göholm 1
2
Inshore channel 1
3.189 An inshore channel, marked by buoys (lateral), narrow and twisting, for small craft only, leads from the
approaches to Järnavik about 8 miles E to join the main Ronnebyhamn approach channel close W of Dunsön (56°09′N, 15°15′E), an islet 2½ miles SW of Ronnebyhamn. A list of useful marks close to this channel is given below. 3.190 Useful marks: Tvegöl Beacon (white conical cairn) (56°08′⋅0N, 15°05′⋅4E), standing on an islet 4 miles ENE of Tärnö Lighthouse (3.183). Vitaskär Light-structure (white lantern, elevation 7 m) (56°08′⋅4N, 15°06′⋅0E). Saltärna Light-structure (white lantern, elevation 7 m) (56°08′⋅7N, 15°10′⋅5E), displayed from the E point of the island.
3
3.191 Göholm (56°07′⋅7N, 15°19′⋅0E), a small fishing harbour, lies 3½ cables NNE of Göudde (3.178) on the W side of Kålviken, an inlet at the SE end of Gö peninsula. The harbour is formed by two breakwaters and is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 2 m; the entrance faces NE between the breakwaters. A quay in the S part of the harbour has depths alongside of 2⋅5 to 3⋅0 m. Approach from seaward in the white sector (011°–026°) of Millegarne Light (white rectangle on framework tower, elevation 8 m) (56°07′⋅7N, 15°19′⋅5E), displayed when required 5½ cables ENE of Göudde. This track clears all charted dangers, passing (with positions from Göudde (56°07′⋅5N, 15°18′⋅7E)): W of Kullarna (1 mile S), and: E of Rännbåden Rock (4 cables S), thence: NNE for 7 cables to the harbour entrance.
KARLSKRONA AND APPROACHES GENERAL INFORMATION Chart 2857 with plan of Karlskrona
Pilotage 1
Area covered 1
3.192 The area covered by this section comprises the whole of the Karlskrona archipelago including entrance channels, minor harbours within the area, and a description of the port of Karlskrona. It is arranged as follows: Main entrance and approaches (3.200). Western approaches (3.215). Eastern approaches (3.228). Karlskrona (3.250).
3.194 Pilotage is provided by Karlshamn and is available 24 hours. The appropriate pilot ordering centre is VTS Malmö. Pilot boards close to Karlskrona angöring Light-buoy (56°03′⋅2N, 15°33′⋅5E). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Rescue 1
3.195 The Swedish Sea Rescue Association has a fully equipped station with two rescue craft stationed at Garpahamnen (56°06′N, 15°29′E) (3.226), on the SE side of Hasslö (3.215). See 1.156.
Submarine barriers Topography 1
2
3.193 The coastline of the mainland is mainly low with extensive wooded areas. Farther inland the land rises gradually. Islands are generally low and difficult to identify although some have clumps of trees. Tångalund (56°06′⋅2N, 15°27′⋅2E), is a sharply defined, prominent clump of trees on the SW part of Hasslö. In the E part of the archipelago the island of Utlängan is low and bare but there are several houses and a lighthouse which are clearly visible from seaward. Two rivers, Nättrabyån (3.227) and Lyckebyån, flow into the inlets which lie to the NW and NE of Karlskrona.
1
2
140
3.196 The navigable channels to the inner fjords in the Karlskrona archipelago are fitted with submarine barriers which may, if necessary for military reasons, be used to close each channel. Anchoring, fishing and underwater operations are prohibited in the channels affected. Barriers are fitted in the following channels: Hasslöbron (3.217). Channel between Hasslö (3.226) and N Bollö (56°06′⋅4N, 15°29′⋅6E). Djupasundsbron (3.239). Skällöbron (3.237). Möcklöbron (3.235).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
A pipeline is laid from Drottningskär to Kungsholmen, passing 4 cables N of Västra Försänkningen Light.
Restricted area 1
3.197 The majority of the islands and channels in the approaches to Karlskrona lie within a restricted military area, the limits of which are shown on the chart. For details of regulations within these areas see 1.87.
Ice 1
Exercise areas 1
3.198 Certain areas within the Karlskrona archipelago are designated firing areas. Warning signals may be posted at the following locations when firing is taking place: Långören Front Leading Light (56°03′⋅9N, 15°49′⋅4E) (3.235). Västra Försänkningen Light (56°06′⋅5N, 15°34′⋅5E) (3.211). Äspeskär Light (56°08′⋅5N, 15°37′⋅8E) (3.212). For details see Admiralty List of Lights Volume C. See also 1.22.
Principal marks 1
2
Submarine cables 1
3.199 Numerous submarine cables, shown on the chart, are laid across the channels in the Karlskrona archipelago.
1
Charts 2857 with plan of Karlslrona, 2360
Description 1
2
3.200 The main approach and entrance to Karlskrona archipelago is from the S. The entrance to the bay lies between the islands of Aspö (56°07′N, 15°33′E) and Tjurkö (56°07′N, 15°37′E). Numerous shoals extend up to 3 miles S of the main entrance but the majority of these are well marked by buoys and their positions can be seen on the plan. Two channels lead to the entrance, the main channel and a secondary alternative which runs parallel and 5 cables W of the main channel. These channels merge close S of the entrance which lies between Drottningskär (56°06′⋅7N, 15°34′⋅0E) on the W side, and Kungsholmen 8 cables farther E. Thence, the channel leads through Yttre redden to various areas of the harbour.
Directions 1
2
3.201 The maximum authorised draught in the entrance channel to the outer roads is 10⋅0 m. 3
Minefield 1
3.202 A permanent minefield, shown on the chart, is laid in the main entrance to Karlskrona within which anchoring, fishing and other underwater activities are prohibited. 4
Pilotage 1
3.203 See 3.194.
Submarine cables and pipelines 1
3.204 Numerous submarine cables and power cables, shown on the chart, are laid across the channels in this area.
3.207 Racon: Västra Försänkningen Light (56°06′⋅5N, 15°34′⋅5E) (3.211). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
(continued from 3.169)
Draught 1
3.206 Landmarks: Karlskrona Water Tower (56°10′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅0E), standing on Vämö close N of Karlskrona. Aspö Pilot Lookout (disused) (56°06′⋅5N, 15°33′⋅3E). Major lights: Ronneby Kallinge Aero Light (56°16′N, 15°16′E) (chart 2816). Tving Aero Light (56°17′⋅0N, 15°29′⋅6E) (chart 2816). Karlskrona Leading Lights, rear light (56°10′⋅2N, 15°36′⋅2E) (3.209). Utklippan Light (red framework tower on old fort, 30 m in height) (55°57′⋅2N, 15°42′⋅0E). Utlängan Light (56°00′⋅8N, 15°47′⋅2E) (3.218).
Other aid to navigation
MAIN ENTRANCE AND APPROACHES General information
3.205 Sea ice is present during January, February and occasionally March, in the archipelago during normal winters. In severe winters it can be quite compact.
5
141
3.208 Approach from southeast and east. Vessels approaching with a draught exceeding 8 m should pass S of Utklippan (55°57′⋅5N, 15°42′⋅3E), the S islet of the archipelago surrounded by rocks and shoals, due to the many shoals which exist in the channel between Utklippan and Utlängan (56°01′⋅5N, 15°47′⋅5E) (3.193), an island 5 miles NE. Large vessels should keep 4 miles off the coast between Utlängan and Karlskrona main entrance. An additional useful indication of position for vessels from the S or SE is sounding from the 40 m contour which runs about 3½ miles to 5 miles off Utklippan. For vessels with lesser draughts; from a position about 3 miles SSE of Utlängan the channel between Utlängan and Utklippan leads about 5 miles WNW to a position about 2½ miles SW of Eldsten Beacon (56°02′⋅2N, 15°44′⋅9E) (3.244), passing (with positions from Utlängan Light (3.218)): SSW of Klotet Light-buoy (S cardinal), moored 7 cables SSE of the shoal awash, and another buoy (S cardinal) moored close W, (1¼ miles SSE), thence: NNE of Rosenklintsgrunden (4 miles SSW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: NNE of a buoy (N cardinal), marking Holmebåden, (3 miles SSW), and: SSW of Saltbåden (5 cables SW), which is awash, marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NNE of Utmylingen, a shoal patch (3 miles SW) with a least depth of 7⋅0 m. Thence the track leads 6 miles WNW, clear of any charted dangers, to the vicinity of Karlskrona angöring Light-buoy (safewater) (56°03′⋅2N, 15°33′⋅5E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Caution. Submarine power cables, shown on the chart, are laid across the channel between Utlängan and Utklippan.
Main channel 1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
3.209 Karlskrona Leading Lights: Front light (white round concrete tower, 24 m in height) (56°09′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅0E), displayed from Stumholmen. Rear light (similar structure, 15 m in height), displayed from Vämö, 7 cables NNE from front light. From a position SSW of Karlskrona angöring Light-buoy (3.208), which lies on the leading line, the alignment (012½°) of these lights leads, in the white sector (003°–015½°) of Västra Försänkningen Light, 4 miles NNE to the entrance passing (with positions from the light): Either side of Karlskrona angöring Light-buoy (3½ miles SSW), thence: E of Farstugrund (2½ miles SSW), thence: WNW of Esten (2¼ miles S), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: ESE of Saltknölen (1¾ miles SSW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: WNW of Sundsbåden (1½ miles S), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), and: ESE of Ällebåden (1 mile SSW), marked on its E side by a buoy (port hand), thence: W of Yttre Hjortgrundet (1 mile S), marked on its NW side by a light-buoy (starboard hand). Thence, to avoid passing too close to Västra Försänkningen Light-structure, bring Godnatt Fort ahead on a bearing of 015°, or by night, into the white sector (013½°–017½°) of Godnatt Light (grey fort) (56°08′⋅5N, 15°35′⋅9E). These alignments lead clear through the entrance. 3.210 Alternative channel. From a position about 5 cables W of Karlskrona angöring Light-buoy the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads 2¼ miles NNE thence 1 mile NE to join the main channel 4 cables S of the entrance, passing (with positions from Busören (56°04′⋅8N, 15°30′⋅1E)): ESE of Flaggrund (1 mile SE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: ESE of Aspösten (1¼ miles E), on which stands a beacon, thence: WNW of Saltknölen (2 miles E), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), and: WNW of Allebåden (2¼ miles ENE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal). Thence 1 mile NE with the NW edge of Kungsholmen Fort ahead bearing about 045° to join the main channel 4 cables S of the entrance. Thence follow the directions for that channel.
3
night, in the white sector (023°–029°) of the light, the track leads 2½ miles NNE through Yttre redden to the anchorage area E of Godnatt passing (with positions from Västra Försänkningen Light): WNW of Kungsholmen Breakwater Light (framework tower; floodlit) (5 cables E), thence: ESE of Gärskullen (7 cables N), marked at its E extremity by a buoy (port hand), thence: ESE of Lindelövsgrund (1½ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: E of Godnatt (2 miles NNE), and: W of a 5⋅1 m shoal patch (2¼ miles NE), marked by a buoy (N cardinal).
Useful marks 3.212 1
2
Tjurkösten Beacon, standing on a low rock (56°04′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅2E). Aspösten Beacon (rectangle, black over white), standing on a low rock (56°04′⋅9N, 15°32′⋅0E). Drottningskär Fort, situated on the W side of the entrance (56°06′⋅6N, 15°33′⋅8E). Kungsholmen Fort, situated on the E side of the entrance, 8 cables E of the fort above. Godnatt Fort and Light-structure (56°08′⋅5N, 15°35′⋅7E) (3.209). Fredrikskyrkan, the tallest church in Karlskrona, with twin towers (56°09′⋅7N, 15°35′⋅3E). Tower (red light; 88 m in height) (56°10′⋅1N, 15°38′⋅2E). Radio mast (56°10′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅1E), close E of Karlskrona Water Tower (3.206). Äspeskär Light (post) (56°08′⋅5N, 15°37′⋅8E). (Directions continue at 3.265)
Anchorage and harbours Anchorage 1
1
3.213 Anchorage may be obtained in an area to the E of Godnatt (3.209), between the islets of Getskär (56°08′⋅8N, 15°36′⋅2E) (3.265) and Äspeskär, 1 mile ESE, in depths of 15 m to 19 m, clay. Anchorage is prohibited in the mined area (3.202) in the entrance to Karlskrona and also within the channels fitted with submarine barriers (3.196). 3.214 Drottningskär (56°06′⋅7N, 15°34′⋅0E) is a small fishing harbour, formed by moles, with depths up to 2⋅8 m, situated on the E coast of Aspö close to the entrance to Karlskrona.
WESTERN APPROACHES General information Chart 2857 with plan of Karlskrona
Description Entrance and Yttre redden 1
2
3.211 The entrance, which is 1½ cables wide, lies between obstructions extending from Drottningskär (56°06′⋅7N, 15°34′⋅0E) (3.214), and Kungsholmen 8 cables farther E. The seaward ends of the obstructions are marked, on the W side by Västra Försänkningen Light (white and red dolphin; floodlit) (56°06′⋅5N, 15°34′⋅5E), and on the E side by Östra Försänkningen Light, 1½ cables farther E. Thence, with Verkö Light (white rectangle on framework tower) (56°10′⋅2N, 15°38′⋅0E) ahead bearing 025°, or, by
1
2
142
3.215 The W approach lies between Lindö (56°07′⋅1N, 15°21′⋅0E), a point 1½ miles ESE of Göudde (3.178) and Hasslö (56°06′⋅5N, 15°28′⋅0E), an island 5 miles SW of Karlskrona. The first part of the channel, from sea to the bridge at the N end of Hasslö, is narrow and tortuous. Local knowledge is required. Thence the second section of the channel leads E through the more open waters of Västrafjärden to join the main channel S of Karlskrona.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Depths 1
Light exhibited
Meaning
Isophase red.
Bridge closed or closing.
Isophase red and white.
Vessel signal understood.
SSE of Nålsten (2½ miles SW), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: SSE of Hyperionsgrund (1¼ miles SSW), marked by a buoy (port hand), and: SSE of Lilla Kråkan (8 cables SSW), which breaks and on which stands a beacon (ten red reflectors in a row, on posts in metal barrels, 3 m in height), thence: To a position at the W end of the buoyed channel. 3.220 Leading beacons: Kåsaskär Beacons (orange with white triangular daymarks) (56°07′⋅0N, 15°25′⋅8E). From a position at the W end of the buoyed channel the alignment (087°) of the above beacons leads 1 mile E through the buoyed (lateral) channel, passing: N of Stångskär (1¼ miles SSE), a rocky islet on which stands a beacon (white cairn with red band, 4 m in height), thence: S of the 3⋅8 m shoal (1½ miles SE), lying 3 cables W of the beacons on Kåsaskär, marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: ENE for 1½ miles through Hästholmsfjärden to the bridge passing: NNW of Kåsaskär (1¾ miles ESE), and: NNW of Västra Hastholmen (2¼ miles ESE), thence: Through the navigation span of Hasslöbron (3.217).
Isophase red and fixed white.
Bridge about to open.
Hasslöbron to Karlskrona
Isophase green.
Bridge open. Transit permitted.
Fixed red.
Passage closed.
2
3.216 The W channel is authorised for a draught of 4⋅2 m.
Hasslöbron 1
2
3
4
3
3.217 Hasslöbron is a swing bridge which spans the channel between the S end of Almö (56°08′⋅0N, 15°27′⋅5E) and Västra Hästholmen, an islet 3 cables S. It has a navigable opening 20 m wide and a vertical clearance of 4⋅0 m under the span when closed. The channel passes through the N span of the bridge. Lights are displayed at each side of the W and E approaches to the bridge and the passage is illuminated. Operation and signals. The channel and bridge are TV monitored and remotely controlled from the coastguard centre on Kungsholmen (Kungsholms Fort) (56°06′⋅3N, 15°35′⋅3E), situated in the main entrance to Karlskrona. Requests for opening may be made by giving the sound signal Morse letter G, or alternatively calling Kungsholmen direct via VHF channels. Passage is regulated by light signals displayed from the control cabin at the bridge as follows:
Westbound traffic has precedence for transit. Speed through the bridge must not exceed 5 kn. A submarine power cable is laid across the channel at the bridge.
1
2
3
1
2
Principal marks 1
2
3.218 Landmarks: Ronneby Water Tower (56°‘12′⋅6N, 15°17′⋅0E). Almö Tower (high stone tower, hut on top) (56°08′⋅2N, 15°27′⋅7E). Karlskrona Water Tower (56°10′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅0E), standing on Vämö close N of Karlskrona. Major lights: Hanö Light (56°00′⋅8N, 14°50′⋅8E) (3.87). Ronneby Kallinge Aero Light (56°16′N, 15°16′E). (chart 2816). Tving Aero Light (56°17′⋅0N, 15°29′⋅6E). (chart 2816). Utklippan Light (55°57′⋅2N, 15°42′⋅0E) (3.206). Utlängan Light (white tower, black top, elevation 13 m) (56°00′⋅8N, 15°47′⋅2E).
Directions
3
4
Anchorage and harbours General information 1
Sea to Hasslöbron 1
3.219 Leading marks: Almö Tower (56°08′⋅7N, 15°27′⋅7E) (3.218). Karlskrona Water Tower (56°10′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅0E). From a position about 2 miles S of Göudde (56°07′⋅5N, 15°18′⋅7E) (3.178) the recommended track, leads initially 2½ miles ENE on the alignment (064°) of the above marks, passing (with positions from Rönneskär Light (white tower, 8 m in height) (56°07′⋅8N, 15°22′⋅9E)):
3.221 From the E side of the bridge the track, shown on the plan, leads 5 miles ENE through Västrafjärden to join the main approach channel E of Getskär (56°08′⋅8N, 15°36′⋅2E) (3.265), passing (with positions from Bergaholmen Light (lantern on white pedestal) (56°08′⋅7N, 15°33′⋅3E)): N of Valkyriagrund (3 miles WSW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SSE of Utögrund (2 miles WSW), marked by a buoy (port hand), and: NNW of a buoy (E cardinal) (2¼ miles SW), thence: SSE of Lövgrund (1¼ miles WSW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NNW of Trashallan Beacons (1 mile SW), thence: N of Länsman (8 cables SSE) on which stand two beacons, thence: S of Bergaholmen on which stands the light above, thence: S of Gastaskär (1 mile ESE), and: NW of Godnatt (1½ miles ESE) where the route joins with the main approach channel.
3.222 Local knowledge is required for all harbours and loading places described in this section. Pilotage. Pilots are available from Karlshamn.
Anchorage 1
143
3.223 Anchorage may be obtained in a position about 4 cables N of Eneholmen (56°08′⋅1N, 15°23′⋅0E), an islet 5 cables N of Rönneskär Light (3.219), in depths of 4 to 8 m, mud. The anchorage is sheltered from all winds. Anchorage is prohibited in an area off the NW side of Aspö (3.200).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Torkö and Kuggeboda 1
2
3
3.224 Torkö (56°09′⋅0N, 15°24′⋅6E), a small island lying at the head of Torköfjärden, has a small harbour suitable for a draught of 4 m with a jetty 80 m long and a depth alongside of 3 m. Kuggeboda (56°08′⋅5N, 15°22′⋅7E), a small loading place, lies on the mainland 6 cables SW of Torkö. It has a small pier with a depth alongside of 1⋅5 m. Approach and entry. Follow the directions given at 3.219 for Karlskrona W entrance to a position 3 cables SE of Lilla Kråkan (3.219) where the track divides and a branch channel, authorised for a draught of 6 m, leads 2 miles NNE to Kuggeboda and Torkö passing close E of Rönneskär Light (3.219). An alternative approach channel, suitable for a draught of 3 m, leads from a position NW of Hasslö, 4 cables NNW of Kåsaskär (3.220), through a narrow channel marked by buoys (lateral), thence 1¼ miles NW to join the main channel described above, passing close SW of Arpö (56°08′N, 15°25′E) and close NE of Ljungskär, an islet close W of Arpö. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
3
4
5
6
Hallarna 1
2
3
4
3.225 Description. Hallarna (56°07′N, 15°27′E), a fishing harbour, lies on the NW side of Hasslö. It is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 3⋅3 m. The harbour is formed by two moles with the entrance from the N. Directions for entry. Normal approach and entry is from Hästholmsfjärden using the directions given at 3.219. With local knowledge approach may be made from seaward through a narrow channel, marked by buoys (lateral), on the W side of Hasslö. Kåsaskär Leading Lights: Front light (lantern on white pedestal, elevation 5 m) (occas, fishing) (56°06′⋅6N, 15°25′⋅8E). Rear light (mast, elevation 10 m), displayed 500 m N of front light. The alignment (355½°) of these lights leads about 1 mile N through a buoyed channel passing close E of Asla (56°05′⋅6N, 15°25′⋅8E), an islet from which is displayed a light (white lantern, elevation 6 m), shown when required. Thence the track leads about 1 mile NNE to the harbour passing close NW of the NW point of Hasslö from which is displayed a light (white lantern) (56°06′⋅8N, 15°26′⋅4E), shown when required. Berths. The W quay has a length of about 100 m with depths alongside of 4⋅0 to 4⋅2 m. Repairs: slip in small boat harbour. Supplies: provisions available. Communications: road to mainland via Hasslöbron.
Garpahamnen (Garpaviken) 1
2
3.226 Garpahamnen (56°06′N, 15°29′E), a fishing harbour, lies on the SE side of Hasslö near the head of Rönnfjärden. The harbour is formed by two breakwaters at the entrance to a small inlet and the approach channel is suitable for a draught of 3⋅3 m. Within the harbour the fish quay is a total of 140 m long with depths alongside between 4⋅0 and 4⋅2 m. There is a total of 120 m berthing space for the use of the shipyard and a further 100 m of berthing space for small craft.
Approach and entry. The main approach is from seaward on the alignment of leading lights, through a channel marked by buoys (lateral), to the harbour entrance which is 18 m wide. A light is displayed from the head of the E breakwater. Approach from SSE on the alignment (343°) of Rönnfjärdsleden Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on post, elevation 8 m) (56°06′⋅0N, 15°28′⋅5E), displayed from the harbour. Rear light (similar structure, elevation 12 m), exhibited 250 m NNW from front light. This alignment leads about 2½ miles NNW to the harbour passing between the SW point of Södra Bollö (56°05′⋅8N, 15°29′⋅5E), from where a light (white rectangle on framework tower, elevation 9 m), is displayed when required and Rönneskär, a small islet 2 cables W. An alternative approach may be made from the N via a narrow channel, marked at its N end by a buoy (starboard hand), which leads through the barrier (3.196) between Hasslö and N Bollö (56°06′⋅5N, 15°29′⋅5E). A light is displayed from a small jetty (56°06′⋅4N, 15°29′⋅1E) on the E side of Hasslö, close NW of the channel buoy above. Repairs: shipyard. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Nättrabyån 1
3.227 Nättrabyån (56°11′⋅5N, 15°32′⋅5E) flows into the bay to the NW of Karlskrona. A small pier lies immediately outside the river mouth on the W side. Nättraby Light (red framework tower on dolphin, elevation 2 m) is displayed from a dolphin close to the pier. A quay, 30 m long with a depth alongside of 2 m, and a small jetty lie within the river 5 cables S of Nättraby Church (56°12′⋅0N, 15°32′⋅2E).
EASTERN APPROACHES General information Charts 2857 with plan of Karlskrona, 2360
Description 1
2
3
3.228 The E approach channel to Karlskrona is entered between Torhamnsudde (56°04′⋅5N, 15°51′⋅0E) and Långören, an island situated 1 mile SW. The channel is narrow and twisted, and despite being well marked by buoys is difficult for navigation. It is only suitable for small craft and local knowledge is required. Initially the channel leads generally NNW and N, passing E of Senoren (56°07′⋅5N, 15°45′⋅0E), thence WNW off the N part of Senoren to pass under the bridge spanning Möcklösund leading to the more open waters of Östrafjärden. The final section of the channel leads WNW through Östrafjärden to join the main channel N of Skallholmen (3.265). Between Tjurkö (56°07′N, 15°37′E) (3.200) and Utlängan (56°01′⋅5N, 15°47′⋅5E) (3.193), 7 miles SE, there are a number of inlets, approached from the open sea, which can afford shelter, and in some cases access to Karlskrona, via the inner channels through the islands for shallow draught vessels. Local knowledge is essential.
Depths 1
144
3.229 The E approach channel has a maximum authorised draught of 2⋅3 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Restricted area 1
3.230 The approach channel passes through a restricted area. See 3.197.
5
Minefields 1
1
3.231 Permanent minefields, shown on the national chart, are laid in the E entrance S of Torhamnsudde (56°04′⋅5N, 15°51′⋅0E) and in the entrance to Kållafjärden (3.244), NW of Eldsten Beacon (56°02′⋅2N, 15°44′⋅9E) (3.244).
1
Möcklösundsbron
1
3.232 Möcklösundsbron (56°08′⋅3N, 15°44′⋅9E) is a fixed bridge, with a vertical clearance of 18 m over a navigable channel width of 35 m, which spans the channel between the N end of Senoren (3.228) and the mainland on the Möcklö peninsula. The channel through the bridge is marked by three pairs of buoys.
2
Climatic table 1
3.233 See 1.284 and 1.286.
2
Useful marks 3.238
Principal marks 1
3.234 Landmarks: Karlskrona Water Tower (56°10′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅0E) (3.206). Radio mast (red light) (elevation 132 m) (56°08′⋅3N, 15°49′⋅80E). Radio mast (elevation 63 m) (56°06′⋅3N, 15°49′⋅6E). Major lights: Tving Aero Light (56°17′⋅0N, 15°29′⋅6E) (chart 2816). Utklippan Light (55°57′⋅2N, 15°42′⋅0E) (3.206). Utlängan Light (56°00′⋅8N, 15°47′⋅2E) (3.218). Ölands Södra Udde Light (56°11′⋅8N, 16°23′⋅8E) (4.19).
1
2
Djupasund 1
Sea to Möcklösundsbron
2
3
4
3.235 From the SE in a position about 1½ miles SSE of Torhamnsudde (56°04′⋅5N, 15°51′⋅0E) approach on the alignment (307°) of Långören Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle on framework tower elevation 5 m) (56°03′⋅9N, 15°49′⋅4E), displayed from the N point of Långören. Rear light (similar structure), displayed from an islet 300 m NW from front light. This alignment leads about 1½ miles NW to the N point of Långören passing SW of a buoy (S cardinal) moored 1¼ miles SSE of Torhamnsudde and between two buoys (lateral) marking the entrance to the channel. Thence the track leads 1½ miles NNW through a narrow buoyed channel to Torhamnsfjärden with Hommenabben Leading Lights astern bearing 160°: Front light (red triangle on framework tower, elevation 5 m), displayed from the NE point of Långören. Rear light (similar structure), exhibited 375 m SSE from front light. Follow the buoyed channel NW through Torhamnsfjärden to pass through Ytterösund (56°05′⋅9N, 15°47′⋅0E) which is crossed by a line driven car ferry. Care
Långören Beacon (black rectangle on white mast, white triangle halfway up mast, 21 m in height) (56°03′⋅8N, 15°49′⋅2E). Ytterön Beacon (black square on pole) (56°05′⋅4N, 15°46′⋅2E), standing on the NE end of Hästholmen. Torhamn Light (white rectangle on framework tower, elevation 6 m) (56°05′⋅6N, 15°49′⋅4E), displayed from the E breakwater head.
Harbours and inlets
Directions
1
should be exercised not to pass when the ferry is crossing. Speed is restricted to 7 kn within 150 m of the ferry crossing. Thence the buoyed channel leads E and N of Senoren to pass through the bridge across Möcklösund (3.232) and enter the E part of Östrafjärden. 3.236 Möcklösundsbron to Karlskrona. The track leads 4 miles WNW through Östrafjärden to join the main channel N of Skallholmen. Shoal dangers in the channel are marked by buoys. 3.237 Alternative channel 1V8 m. Follow directions above to Ytterösund. Thence small craft may take a channel, marked by buoys, S of Senoren, which leads through Skällösund, between Senoren and Sturkö, which is spanned by a fixed bridge with a navigable width of 12 m and vertical clearance of 5⋅5 m under the span. Speed is restricted to 5 kn through the sound. Thence the track leads across Kyrkfjärden, through a channel marked by buoys (lateral), to pass S of Äspeskär (3.213) and join the main channel SW of Skallholmen.
1
2
1
145
3.239 Description. Djupasund (56°06′⋅5N, 15°38′⋅5E) lies between Tjurkö (3.200) and Sturkö, an island close E. The channel between the islands is spanned by a fixed road bridge with a vertical clearance of 3 m underneath and a depth of 4 m in the channel under the bridge. The approach and entry channel also leads to Ekenabben fishing harbour which lies 5 cables S of the bridge. 3.240 Directions. From a position about 1 mile SSE of Tjurkösten Beacon (56°04′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅2E) (3.212) the fairway leads 3 miles NNE to the bridge, through a buoyed channel suitable for a draught of 3⋅5 m, with Djupasund Bridge Light (lantern on white pedestal), displayed from the W side of the bridge, ahead bearing about 012° in the white sector (011½°–013½°) of the light, passing (with positions from Tjurkösten Beacon): E of Rågrund (5 cables SE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: Close W of a buoy (starboard hand) (9 cables NE) marking the W limit of a shoal area, thence: E of Skälören (1 mile NNE), marked on its E side by a light-buoy (port hand). Thence, through the centre of the channel, passing under the bridge into Djupasund. 3.241 Useful marks: Tjurkö Leading Lights: (white triangles on posts, 120 m apart) (56°06′⋅3N, 15°37′⋅8E), displayed (occasionally). The alignment (009°) in the white
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
2
sector is an additional aid through the channel to the bridge described above. Kråkan Beacon (white triangle, point down, over tapered board) (56°05′⋅3N, 15°38′⋅4E), standing on a rock 6 cables E of Skälören. Sturkö Church with tall steeple (56°05′⋅3N, 15°41′⋅8E).
1
Ekenabben 1
2
3
3.242 Description. Ekenabben (56°06′⋅1N, 15°38′⋅5E), a small fishing harbour on the E side of Sturkö is formed and enclosed by moles. The entrance channel is suitable for a draught of 3⋅5 m and harbour has depths between 2 and 4 m. Approach and entry. Directions for approach channel are given at 3.239. Ekenabben Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white triangles on posts, elevations 6 and 8 m respectively) (56°06′⋅1N, 15°38′⋅5E), displayed from the harbour. The alignment (143°) of these lights leads through the channel to the harbour from a beacon situated in the approach channel in a position 3 cables S of Djupasund bridge. Approach may also be made from the N through Djupasund and the bridge. Facilities. Slip with a capacity of 100 tonnes.
2
3
4
Sanda 1
3.243 Description. Sanda (56°07′N, 15°39′E), a small fishing harbour lies on the NW side of Sturkö. The harbour is formed and enclosed by moles with depths of between 2⋅5 to 3⋅8 m in the two basins and an entrance channel suitable for a draught of 3⋅0 m. Entry to the harbour from the N part of Djupasund is from the W. Facilities. Small slip with 10 tonne capacity.
Ungskär 1
Kållafjärden 1
2
3
3.244 Kållafjärden is a large, well sheltered inlet situated S of Hästholmen (56°05′N, 15°45′E), a barren island 3 miles NNW of Utlängan. Minefield. A permanent minefield is laid in the approaches to Kållafjärden and Gåsefjärden close W. Directions. The channel is authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m. Approach from a position about 1 mile SW of Eldsten Beacon (pole, 13 m in height, arm points E along channel to Inlängan) (56°02′⋅2N, 15°44′⋅9E), with Hästholmen Beacon (black triangle on red pole, 12 m in height) (56°04′⋅8N, 15°45′⋅7E) and Ytterön Beacon (3.238) in line bearing 022°. This alignment leads about 3 miles NNE into Kållafjärden through a channel marked by buoys, and ensuring that the rocks extending W of Gåsfeten, 3 cables W of Eldsten Beacon, are clear to the E. From the N part of Kållafjärden, with local knowledge, small vessels may reach Karlskrona via the inner channels. Useful mark: Handskarna Beacon (56°03′⋅3N, 15°43′⋅3E).
2
3
3.247 Description. Ungskär (56°02′⋅5N, 15°48′⋅2E), a small fishing harbour lies on the SW side of the island of that name 1 mile NNE of Utlängan (3.193). The harbour is formed by two breakwaters and contains 130 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 1⋅8 m. It is suitable for vessels with a draught of 2⋅1 m. Approach and entry. Approach from the SE on the alignment (300°) of Ungskär Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (posts, elevations 6 and 8 m respectively, 50 m apart) (56°02′⋅4N, 15°48′⋅4E), displayed from the S point of the island. This alignment leads through the outer shoals, marked by buoys, and thence, following the buoyed channel, to the harbour. Anchorage may be obtained, with local knowledge, in a position off the SE side of Ungskär, in charted depths of about 3⋅5 m, mud. Entry to the anchorage from seaward is through a channel with a depth of 3 m, marked by buoys, on the alignment (266°) of two leading beacons (poles, 2 m in height, over white cairns, 4 m in height; topmarks: front, triangle; rear, cross) (56°02′⋅5N, 15°48′⋅4E). The channel lies N of Stora Baljan, a rocky patch 3½ cables ESE of the beacons.
Torhamn 1
Stenshamn 1
The harbour is formed by two outer breakwaters, within which are a pier and a quay. It is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 2⋅0 m but local knowledge is required for entry. The berths have a depth alongside of 1⋅8 m. 3.246 Directions. The approach and entry channels form part of a channel which leads from seaward to the W side of Inlängan, an island 2 miles NNW of Utlängan, and thence to the inner channels to Karlskrona. From a position 1 mile SW of Eldsten Beacon (3.244) approach with Kuggaskär Beacon (black triangle on black pole over white cairn, 2 m in height) (56°02′⋅9N, 15°47′⋅1E) and Långören Beacon (3.238) in line bearing 052°. This alignment leads 2 mile NE to a position 8 cables N of the harbour where the channel divides, through a buoyed channel, passing (with positions from Eldsten Beacon (56°02′⋅2N, 15°44′⋅9E)): SE of Eldsten Beacon, thence: NW of the 5 m rocky patch (3 cables ESE), thence: SE of Flötjen (7 cables NE) from where a light (white tower, 10 m in height) is displayed, thence: N of Flundrebådan (1 mile NE), from where a light (lantern on white pedestal, elevation 6 m) is displayed. Thence to the alignment (178°) of Stenshamn Leading Lights: Common front light and rear light (masts, elevations 7 and 10 m respectively) (56°01′⋅8N, 15°46′⋅8E), rear light 200 m S of front light; displayed from the harbour when required. This alignment leads 8 cables S to the harbour through a channel marked by buoys.
3.245 Description. Stenshamn (56°01′⋅8N, 15°46′⋅7E), a small fishing harbour, lies on the NW side of an islet, close NW of and connected by causeway to Utlängan (3.193).
146
3.248 Description. Torhamn (56°05′⋅6N, 15°49′⋅5E), a small fishing harbour lies in the NE part of Torhamnsfjärden, 1½ miles NNW of Torhamnsudde (3.228). The harbour is formed by a mole and a detached breakwater within which there are quays and berthing pontoons. The approach channel is suitable for a draught of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
2
3
4
2⋅8 m and the depths in the harbour are between 2⋅0 and 3⋅5 m. There are numerous berths for small and pleasure craft throughout the harbour. Anchorage may be obtained off the harbour in a depth of 4⋅0 m, mud. Directions. For entry to Torhamnsfjärden directions are given at 3.235. From a position on the track through Torhamnsfjärden 1 mile SSW of Torhamn a branch channel leads NNE to the harbour in the white sector (009°–016½°) of Torhamn E breakwater light (3.238), or by day, with the light-structure ahead bearing 014°. Useful mark: Torhamn Church with tall spire (56°05′⋅7N, 15°50′⋅0E). Facilities: small slip. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions.
buoys, branching off the main channel at the S and N ends of the harbour.
Traffic 1
Port Authority 1
2
3.249 Description. Utklippanshamn fishing harbour (55°57′⋅3N, 15°42′⋅2E) lies between the two largest islets and rocks which form Utklippan (3.208). The harbour is formed by two breakwaters on each side of the islets and is suitable for draughts up to 2⋅5 m. There are berths for small craft in the harbour. Entry may be made from either E or W, through the breakwaters. Lights (white columns on white pedestals), are displayed from the S breakwater head, on the E side, and the N breakwater head on the W side. Approach should be guided by the white sectors of these lights.
Controlling depths 1
2
1
1
Position 3.250 Karlskrona (56°10′N, 15°35′E) is situated on the SE coast of Sweden in the province of Blekinge. Included in the port are the berths at Verköhamnen on the W side of Verkön, an island 1 mile E of the town.
Function 1
2
3.251 The port is a well sheltered, large natural harbour, surrounded by islands. It is a major naval base and port with separate commercial harbour facilities equipped to handle a variety of vessels. It also contains a large shipyard capable of both naval and commercial work. Principal exports include vehicles, timber products, ships and power plants. Imports include petroleum products, oils, construction materials and general cargoes. In 2003 the population of Karlskrona was 60 676.
1
2
3.257 Normal rise above or below mean level is 0⋅6 m to 0⋅9 m. Winds between NW and SW lower the level and those between N and E raise it but prolonged E winds in spring may lower the level. For suitably equipped vessels an automatic telephone responder is fitted to a depth gauge in the harbour, at Kungsholmen.
Density of water 1
3.258 The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅000 g/cm3.
Ice 1
3.259 The harbour is usually free from ice but is kept open by ice-breakers if necessary.
Arrival information Port radio 1
Approach and entry 3.252 Approach to Karlskrona from the W and E is through narrow channels marked by buoys and thence through bridges and the outer fjords to the harbour. The main approach to Karlskrona is from the S on the alignment of leading lights through an entrance channel, marked by buoys, thence on the alignment of leading lines through the outer roads to the harbour. Entry to the harbour is on the alignment of leading lights through dredged channels, marked by light-buoys and
3.256 Handelshamnen — Östra Kajen — N part (Ro-Ro) (3.269). Hattholmen Oljehamnen — Concrete jetty (oil) (3.270). Verköhamnen — Quay 1 or 2 (bulk) (3.271).
Water levels
Chart 2857 with plan of Karlskrona
1
3.255 The controlling depths are those authorised in the channels to the various parts of the harbour as follows: Main entrance channel to anchorage — 10⋅0 m. Channel to Verköhamnen — 9⋅4 m. Channel to Oljehamnen at Hattholmen — 8⋅1 m. N channel to Handelshamnen — 7⋅2 m. S channel to Handelshamnen — 6⋅0 m. Channel to Karlskronavarvet shipyard — 7⋅3 m.
Deepest and longest berths
KARLSKRONA General information
3.254 Karlskrona Hamn, Ostra Hamngatan 7B, SE−371 83 Karlskrona, Sweden.
Limiting conditions
Utklippanshamn 1
3.253 In 2003 the port was used by 538 vessels total 2 051 262 dwt.
3.260 Karlskrona Hamnradio (Karlskrona Port Radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Anchorage 1
3.261 In addition to the main anchorage (3.211), anchorage may be obtained in an area about 4 cables SSW of Verköhamnen (56°09′⋅8N, 15°37′⋅8E) in depths of about 13 m, clay.
Pilotage and tugs 1
147
3.262 Pilotage details are given at 3.194. Tugs with icebreaking capacity are available.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Traffic regulations 1
3.263 Tankers may not be underway in the harbour when passenger vessels over 50 m in length, or other vessels over 70 m in length, are underway in the harbour. Tankers may not be berthed on the same quay as a passenger vessel.
3
Harbour General layout 1
2
3
3.264 The naval harbour, to which entry is prohibited, lies to the S of the town and is enclosed by the islet of Lindholmen to the S and SW and by breakwaters on its E side. Handelshamnen, the main commercial area for general cargo, Ro-Ro and passenger traffic, lies to the NE of the town and is entered via a channel from the SSE. A branch channel to the naval harbour leads SW from this channel. The oil harbour is situated at Hattholmen, a small peninsula close N of Handelshamnen and is entered via a dredged channel which leads from the main channel N of Mjölnareholmen, a small islet close NE of the town. This channel is also the main channel to the N part of Handelshamnen. Verköhamnen, mainly for bulk cargo and with a specialist jetty to handle heavy lifts, lies 1 mile E of the town and is approached and entered by the main channel leading NNE from Yttre redden and the main anchorage. The shipyard lies on the SW side of the town and a fishing harbour at Saltö, close W of the town. A buoyed channel leads NNW from close N of Godnatt to these areas.
1
2
3
1
Directions for harbour channels 1
2
1
2
(continued from 3.212) 3.265 Main channel 9V4 m. From a position in the anchorage area about 2 cables E of Getskär (56°08′⋅8N, 15°36′⋅1E) the track leads 1½ miles NNE to Verköhamnen with Verkö Light (56°10′⋅2N, 15°37′⋅8E) ahead bearing 025°, in the white sector (023°–029°) of the light, passing (with positions from the light): WNW of a light-buoy (1 mile SSW) marking the limit of the shoal area NW of Skallholmen, thence: E of Koholmen, an islet (8 cables SW) on which stands a beacon. Thence to Verköhamnen. A buoy (S cardinal), moored 4 cables S of the light, marks the NW limit of the 10 m dredged area. 3.266 Channel north of Mjölnareholmen. The channel is entered 7 cables SSW of Verkö Light on the alignment (321°) of Vämöviken Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on white dolphin) (56°10′⋅2N, 15°36′⋅5E). Rear light (red triangle on mast) (172 m NW from front light), displayed from the SE corner of Vämö. On this alignment the track leads 6 cables NNW through a channel marked by buoys and light-buoys (lateral), thence to the alignment (279½°) of Karlskrona Oil Harbour Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on post) (56°10′⋅1N, 15°35′⋅9E), displayed from the S end of Hattholmen.
Rear light (red triangle on mast) (92 m from front light). This alignment leads a further 3 cables WNW through the buoyed channel and thence to the oil jetty at the S end of Hattholmen. Thence, with reduced depth, the channel enters the dredged area including a turning basin in the N part of Handelshamnen, the limits of which are marked by buoys. 3.267 Channel south of Mjölnareholmen 6 m. The channel is entered, off the main channel 3 cables ENE of Getskär (3.265), with Laboratorieholmen Light-structure (white tower, 11 m in height) ahead bearing 334° or, by night, in the white sector (326°–338°) of the light. These alignments lead about 6 cables through the first part of the channel, marked by buoys (lateral), between Basareholmen (56°09′⋅5N, 15°36′⋅7E) and Stumholmen, 2 cables W. From a position about 2 cables from the light the track then leads N for 2 cables with Mjölnareholmen ahead and thence to the alignment (300°) of Kofferdihamnen Leading Lights: Front light (post) (56°09′⋅9N, 15°35′⋅9E), displayed from Handelshamn Östra Kajen. Rear light (post) (95 m WNW from front light). This alignment leads about 2 cables WNW to Handelshamnen through a channel marked by a light-buoy and buoys (lateral). The limits of the dredged area within Handelshamnen are marked by buoys. A short channel, shown on the plan, close S of Mjölnareholmen and in the white sector (240°–247½°) of Laboratorieholmen Light, links the N and S channels described above. 3.268 Other channel. From a position close N of Godnatt (3.209) a buoyed channel leads about 1½ miles NNW to the shipyard and Saltö Fiskehamn (3.272), the fishing harbour close W of the town. Saltöhammar Light (framework tower) (56°09′⋅6N, 15°34′⋅2E), displayed from the S end of Saltö, is used by local small craft for a narrow channel through the rocks and islets.
Berths Handelshamnen 1
2
3.269 The principal berth lies on the N part of Östra Kajen (E quay) with a length of 230 m and a depth alongside of 7⋅7 m. It is a Ro-Ro berth with a ferry ramp 17⋅5 m wide. In the central part of the E quay there is a further 360 m of berthing space with depths alongside of between 6⋅5 to 7⋅2 m and in the S part 75 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 5⋅0 to 6⋅5 m, fitted with ramps and a sliding jetty, for the use of local archipelago traffic. The E part of N quay is 140 m long with a depth alongside of 7⋅5 m, fitted with a mobile Ro-Ro ramp, 6⋅5 m wide, and a rail track.
Hattholmen Oljehamnen 1
148
3.270 The main oil berth lies at the S end of Hattholmen and is a concrete jetty 65 m long with a depth alongside of 9⋅0 m. The recommended maximum length of vessel is 160 m. Buoys are moored off each end to assist with mooring. Another berth, with a length of 50 m lies on the W side of Hattholmen. Charted depth in the vicinity of the berth is about 7 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 3
Verköhamnen 1
2
3.271 There are four berths in Verköhamnen. The two principal berths are Nos 1 and 2, each of which is 70 m long and with a depth alongside of 10 m. A third berth lies close N with a length of 50 m and a depth alongside of 8 m. ABB-kajen, 2 cables SE of Verkö Light, is 80 m long with a depth alongside of 5⋅6 m. Its short approach channel is authorised for a draught of 5⋅5 m. It is a specialist heavy lift berth fitted with an 800 tonnes capacity traverse crane, the head of which projects 8 m outside the quay line at a height of 21⋅3 m above mean water level.
Port services 1
2
Saltö Fiskehamn 1
3.272 Saltö Fiskehamn (56°10′N, 15°34′E), the fishing harbour, lies 1 mile W of Handelshamnen on the W side of Saltö and has 515 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 4 m.
149
3.273 Repairs of all kinds can be undertaken at the shipyard of Karlskronavarvet. Seven drydocks are available, the largest of which can receive a vessel with a length of 200 m, breadth of 26⋅2 m and a maximum draught of 7⋅5 m. Other facilities. Oily waste reception; deratting; hospital. Karlskrona is a regional control centre for the customs authority coast watch. See 1.156 for details. Supplies. Marine fuels; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Nearest airport at Kallinge, 28 km distant. Regular ferry services to Poland, Germany and other Swedish ports. Rescue. The pilot vessel acts as a lifeboat if required, and a line-throwing apparatus is kept at Aspö.
Home
Contents
Index Chapter 4 - Kalmarsund and Öland 16°
17°
30´
30´
30´
30´ 2251
Kråkelund
2846
4.174
Ölands Norra Udde
8
4.20
2846 2361
Oskarshamn 4.140
2846
Blå Jungfrun
Böda 4.214
2844
4.2 03
4.112
Kalmarsund
2844 Mönsterås
Sandvik
2844
57°
57°
4.88
Kårehamn 4.210
2844
Borgholm 2844 4.105
Kapelludden 2817
Stora Rör 2843
ÖLAND
4.64 Kalmar
2843
4.45
2843
2842 Ekenäs
30´
4.19
1
30´
2842
Mörbylånga 4.58
2842
Bergkvara 4.31
Kalmarsund
Degerhamn 2842 4.22
Kristianopel
2842
Grönhögen 2842 4.43 2360
4.1
4
2857 2842 Ölands Södra Udde Ölands Södra Grund Torhamnsudde
56°
56°
0205
16°
Longitude 17° East from Greenwich
30´
150
30´
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 4 KALMARSUND AND ÖLAND
GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2842, 2843, 2844, 2360, 2251
Hazards
Scope of the chapter 1
2
4.1 The area covered by this chapter comprises the SE coast of Sweden from Torhamnsudde (56°04′⋅5N, 15°51′⋅0E) (3.228) to Kråkelund (57°27′N, 16°44′E), about 87 miles NNE. Included in the description is the island of Öland and Kalmarsund, the navigable passage which separates Öland from the mainland. Also included are the major ports of Kalmar (4.64) and Oskarshamn (4.140) together with other minor harbours. It is divided into the following sections: Kalmarsund — Southern Part (4.12). Kalmarsund — Northern Part (4.87). Öland — East coast (4.190). Brief details of approach to Kalmarsund from N are given at 4.180.
Description 1
2
4.2 The fairway through Kalmarsund is about 85 miles long with its narrowest part, 1¾miles wide, N of Kalmar between Skäggenäs (56°47′N, 16°28′E) and Öland. The central section, the narrows, in the vicinity of Kalmar, has numerous shoal areas and islets through which a navigable channel, known as Kalmarsunds Djupränna (4.54) is maintained by dredging. Throughout the whole area covered by this chapter the 10 m depth contour is marked at regular intervals by cardinal buoys. They are described in the various sections where appropriate.
1
Pilotage 1
2
3
Topography 1
2
4.3 The coastline throughout Kalmarsund, both on Öland and the mainland, is generally low with few significant natural features, being partly barren and partly covered in forest. The majority of the coastline on the mainland, and small sections on the W coast of Öland, is fringed by rocks and shoals extending up to about 2½ miles offshore.
4.6 Mariners transiting Kalmarsund should maintain a close watch and monitor the high volume of ferry traffic which crosses the channel, mainly in the vicinity of Kalmar and the N section of the fairway. Traffic is heaviest in the summer months.
4
4.7 Within the limits of this chapter all pilotage is controlled and coordinated through Oxelösund VTS to which all requests for pilots should be sent. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) and also individual port details. Pilots are available 24 hours and provided by Västervik, Oskarshamn and Kalmar Pilot Stations as appropriate. Requests for Kalmarsund pilots should be made 5 hours in advance. Pilotage is compulsory for certain categories of vessels. Pilot boarding positions are as follows: Kalmarsund: (i) S part — 1 mile SSW of Utgrunden (56°22′⋅5N, 16°15′⋅6E). (ii) N part — 1 mile E of Västervik Approach Light-buoy (57°45′N, 16°55′E) or 4 miles SSW of Kungsgrundet (57°41′N, 16°55′E) or S of Furö (57°17′N, 16°38′E). Kalmar: (i) S entrance — near Trädgårdsgrund (56°37′⋅5N, 16°21′⋅5E). (ii) N entrance — near Sillåsen (56°46′N, 16°30′E) or NE of Krongrundet (56°41′⋅6N, 16°25′⋅0E). Västervik: (i) 1 mile E of Västervik Approach Light-buoy, as above. (ii) 4 miles SSW of Kungsgrundet — as above. (iii) In position (57°44′⋅9N, 16°47′⋅3E). For details of categories and further information see 1.51 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Vessel Traffic Service 1
4.8 A mandatory VTS is in the central part of Kalmarsund, operated by Oxelösund VTS. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Kalmarsund draught 1
4.4 The authorised maximum draught through Kalmarsund fairway is 6⋅8 m.
Traffic regulation 1
Water level 1
4.5 In Kalmarsund the difference between mean water level and normal low water level is about 0⋅4 m. Winds from the S usually lower the level with winds from the N and E causing it to rise.
4.9 Speed restrictions are in force for a number of areas within the limits of this chapter. The limits are indicated by boards standing on the sides of the channel.
Rescue 1
151
4.10 The MRCC for this area is located at Stockholm. See 1.156 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5 for
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
details. Details of rescue craft and facilities are given in the text.
Natural conditions 1
4.11 Local magnetic anomalies are reported to exist in the N part of Kalmarsund in an area between Oskarshamn (57°16′N, 16°27′E) and Blå Jungfrun (57°15′N, 16°48′E).
2
Currents in Kalmarsund are influenced mainly by the wind and rates may reach 6 kn or more during gales. Near the N and S points of Öland the current may set E or W while within the sound it is running N or S. Details of current in Kalmarsunds Djupränna are given at 4.50. Ice may affect navigation in Kalmarsund at times, mainly from January to March, but in severe winters this period may be extended to early May. Ice-breaking services are available. See 1.6 and 1.253.
KALMARSUND — SOUTHERN PART GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2843, 2360, 2251
Area covered 1
4.12 This section covers the waters of Kalmarsund from a position SSE of Torhamnsudde (56°04′⋅5N, 15°51′⋅0E) to Norra Skallö (56°40′⋅6N, 16°24′⋅2E), an islet 1 mile NE of Kalmar where the bridge spanning Kalmarsund crosses the fairway. It includes the channels to Kalmar and other smaller harbours on each side of the fairway between the mainland and the W side of Öland.
Exercise areas 1
Submarine power cable 1
4.13 In general anchorage may be obtained in most areas of the southern part of Kalmarsund in various depths, sand and clay bottom. Specific anchorages are given in the description of the various harbours. Anchoring is prohibited in the vicinity of a group of windmotors standing from 1½ to 2½ miles SSE of Utgrunden Lighthouse (56°22′⋅4N, 16°15′⋅4E).
1
1
General information Charts 2842, 2360, 2251
Route
2
4.14 From a position SE of Torhamnsudde the route leads NNE for about 25 miles to the vicinity of Utgrunden (56°23′N, 16°16′E), a shoal area, entering Kalmarsund between the mainland and the S end of Öland. Caution. Due to the existence of currents (4.11) care should be exercised on approach at night or in thick weather to avoid being set in towards the shoals and land on each side of the entrance. Use of soundings can be an aid to constantly monitoring the position in these conditions.
Topography 1
2
4.15 On the W side the coast between Torhamnsudde and Bergkvara, 21 miles NNE, is of uniform height and generally wooded but with breaks visible on a ridge, running parallel with the coast, near the village of Orranäs (56°11′⋅3N, 15°57′⋅0E). On the E side the S extremity of Öland is bare but Ottenbylund, a wooded area shown on the chart, extends about 3 miles N and E from Ölands Södra Udde (56°12′N, 16°24′E). From seaward the trees near the village of Ottenby appear higher than those of Ottenbylund.
4.18 The Swedish Sea Rescue Association has fully equipped rescue boats stationed at Grönhögen (56°16′N, 16°24′E) (4.43) and Bergkvara (56°23′N, 16°05′E) (4.31).
Principal marks
TORHAMNSUDDE TO UTGRUNDEN
1
4.17 A submarine power cable is laid from the coast of Öland close N of Degerhamn (56°21′N, 16°25′E) to the centre structure of a group of windmotors situated SSE of Utgrunden Lighthouse (4.19).
Rescue
Anchorage 1
4.16 A number of practice firing areas are found within the area covered by this chapter. See 1.22.
2
3
4
152
4.19 Landmarks: Group of five windmotors (each 60 m in height, red obstruction lights) (centred 56°10′N, 16°01′E) standing 2 miles offshore in a line 8 cables long and orientated N/S. Radio mast (red light, elevation 132 m) (56°08′⋅4N, 15°48′⋅8E), NW of Torhamnsudde. Radio mast (red light, elevation 112 m) (56°14′⋅0N, 16°27′⋅3E), NE of Ölands Södra Udde. Windmill at Olsäng (56°12′⋅8N, 15°59′⋅0E). Kristianopel Church (56°15′⋅4N, 16°02′⋅5E), white stepped-gable tower, conspicuous. Group of seven windmotors (each 65 m in height, red obstruction lights) (centred 56°20′⋅6N, 16°16′⋅9E) in a line 1 mile long and orientated SSE/NNW; the N windmotor stands 1½ miles SSE of Utgrunden Lighthouse (below). It is reported that the radar echoes from the windmotors may merge to appear as a single target from a distance greater than 4 miles. Utgrunden Lighthouse (black tower, white band and lantern, grey conical base, 28 m in height) (56°22′⋅4N, 16°15′⋅4E), standing at the N limit of the shoal area. Major lights: Utklippan Light (55°57′⋅2N, 15°42′⋅0E) (3.206). Utlängan Light (56°00′⋅8N, 15°47′⋅2E) (3.218). Ölands Södra Udde Light (white round stone tower, black band, 42 m in height. Floodlit.) (56°11′⋅8N, 16°23′⋅8E). Garpen Light (grey concrete tower, 27 m in height) (56°23′⋅4N, 16°07′⋅7E), displayed from an islet.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
Other aids to navigation 1
4.20 Racons: Utgrunden Lighthouse (56°22′⋅4N, 16°15′⋅4E) (4.19). Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse (56°04′⋅2N, 16°41′⋅0E) (2.13). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
2
Principal export is cement with the principal imports being gypsum, coal, sand and oil products. Traffic. In 2003, 9 vessels totalling 28 638 dwt used the port. Port Authority. Cementa AB, S–380 65 Degerhamn, Öland.
Limiting conditions Directions 1
2
3
4
5
6
4.21 From a position SE of Torhamnsudde (56°04′⋅5N, 15°51′⋅0E) the track leads initially NNE, then generally N in the white sector (348°–020°) of Utgrunden Light, passing (with positions from Ölands Södra Udde Light (56°11′⋅8N, 16°23′⋅8E) (4.19)): ESE of a buoy (E cardinal) (17 miles SW), moored in a depth of 12 m, thence: ESE of a buoy (E cardinal) marking a 6 m patch (13¼ miles WSW), thence: ESE of Olsängs Yttre Kulle (11½ miles W), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), and: WNW of the bank extending 5 miles S from Ölands Södra Udde Light and which is marked at its extremities by buoys (cardinal). Ölandsrev, a shoal which breaks and which is steep-to on its W and SW sides, lies on the N part of this bank. The bank should not be crossed at any time. Vessels approaching from E should pass S of Ölandsrev Buoy (E cardinal) moored 6 miles S of the lighthouse. Thence: ESE of a buoy (safe water) (10 miles W), moored in the approaches to Kristianopel, thence: ESE of Tummen (11 miles WNW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: ESE of Röret (12¾ miles NW); a buoy (E cardinal) marks the 10 m depth contour 1¼ miles SSE of the shoal. Thence: WNW of Utgrunden (11½ miles NNW), a chain of rocky shoals with depths of less than 10 m over them, from the N end of which a light (4.19) is displayed. The main channel leads W of Utgrunden but the shoal area may be passed on either side. Passage E of Utgrunden is made in the white sector (159°–167½°) of Ölands Södra Udde Light with the light bearing 165°, astern, passing E of the 3⋅5 m patch on the S part of Utgrunden and W of a buoy (W cardinal) moored on the 10 m depth contour 3 miles E of Utgrunden to rejoin the main fairway about 4 miles N of Utgrunden. (Directions continue at 4.53) (Directions for Degerhamn are given at 4.27 and for Bergkvara at 4.36)
1
Arrival information 1
1
2
4.25 The harbour is approached and entered on the alignment of leading lights, through a buoyed and dredged channel to the harbour entrance. It is formed by a long W breakwater and a short E mole to give a SSW facing entrance 55 m wide. It is entered through a channel 40 m wide and dredged to a depth of 6⋅5 m. The dredged area of the harbour, marked by buoys, has depths from 3⋅0 to 6⋅4 m. The main berths are on the E side and a small boat harbour, with lesser depths, lies in the N part of the harbour. A short quay for the use of fishing boats lies in the S of the harbour on the inside of the E mole.
Landmarks 4.26 1
Södra Möckleby Church (56°21′⋅4N, 16°25′⋅4E), standing on Alvaret. Chimney at Alunbruket (56°20′⋅5N, 16°24′⋅6E). Two chimneys at cement factory (56°21′⋅1N, 16°24′⋅5E).
Directions
Degerhamn Chart 2842 with plan of Degerhamn
General information 4.22 Position. Degerhamn (56°21′N, 16°25′E) lies on the W coast of Öland, 9 miles N of Ölands Södra Udde. Function. It is a small, well sheltered, industrial harbour with facilities to handle bulk and oil cargoes. There are some facilities for small craft and fishing boats. In 1995 the population of the central built-up area was about 700.
4.24 Anchorage. The most suitable anchorage may be obtained in a position 2 miles SW of the harbour entrance in a depth of 9 m, clay, but this anchorage should be vacated in winds from the W semicircle. Pilotage is provided by Kalmar. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Harbour
1
1
4.23 Maximum permitted draught in the channel to the harbour is 5⋅9 m but caution should be exercised as the channel is liable to silting. Deepest and longest berth. No 4 Yttre Hamnen (4.29). Largest vessel handled. A vessel 85 m in length, draught 5⋅9 m and 3500 dwt. Ice. Continuous W winds may cause a build-up of loose drift ice in the approach channel and harbour.
2
153
4.27 From a position to seaward about 2 miles SW of the harbour, approach on the alignment (052°) of Degerhamn Södra Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, black border, on mast) (56°20′⋅7N, 16°24′⋅4E), displayed from the shore. Rear light (similar structure) (215 m NE of front light). This alignment leads 1½ miles NE to a position 6 cables from the front light above, entering the dredged channel, marked by light-buoys and buoys (lateral), 1 mile SW of the front light. Vessels close to the limiting draught for the channel should note a 7⋅5 m shoal patch, on the leading line
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
3
4
1½ miles from the front light, and pass well to the NW of the alignment until clear of the shoal. Thence to the alignment (018°) of Degerhamn Leading Lights: Front light (yellow triangle, red border, on post) (56°21′⋅2N, 16°24′⋅4E), displayed from the main quay. Rear light (similar structure) (85 m NNE of front light). This alignment leads 5 cables NNE, through the centre of the buoyed channel to the harbour entrance, between the breakwater heads which are floodlit and which must not be passed closer than 10 m. Each side of the buoyed channel is also indicated by a pair of lights, in line bearing 018°, displayed from the quay each side of the leading lights. The W pair show red lights and the E pair show green lights.
2
Arrival information 1
2
Useful marks 4.28 1
Silos on quay in harbour, close W of chimneys (4.26). Windmotors (3) (56°21′⋅2N, 16°24′⋅2E), standing on main quay. The centre of the boss of each is 34⋅5 m above MSL. Smedby Church (56°24′⋅4N, 16°26′⋅1E).
4.29 The largest berth in the harbour is No 4 with a length of 140 m and a depth alongside of 6⋅4 m. The inner harbour has a further 112 m of berthing space suitable only for small boats.
1
2
Port services 1
4.30 Repairs: minor repairs only. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
1
Bergkvara Chart 2342 with plan of Bergkvara
General information 1
2
4.31 Position. Bergkvara (56°23′N, 16°05′E) lies on the mainland 20 miles SSW of Kalmar and is regarded as the best natural harbour in the S part of Kalmarsund. Function. It is a small commercial and fishing harbour with facilities for handling bulk and general cargoes. Principal exports are woodpulp, timber products and grain. Principal imports are fertilisers, cattle fodder and building materials. Traffic. In 2003, 8 vessels totalling 21 279 dwt used the port. Port Authority. Bergkvara Hamn & Stuveri AB, Hamngatan 1, 385 25 Bergkvara. Website: www.bergkvarahamn.se
Limiting conditions 1
4.33 Anchorage is available 1¼ miles SE of Garpen Lighthouse. Power cable. A submarine power cable is laid between Garpen Lighthouse and Dalskär, close N of the town. Pilotage. Pilots are available from Kalmar. Pilot boards about 1¾ miles SE of Garpen Lighthouse (56°23′⋅4N, 16°07′⋅6E) (4.19), as indicated on the chart. Tug. A harbour tug is available. Local knowledge. Due to the sharp bends in the E channel vessels with deeper draughts may find manoeuvring difficult, especially at night. Local knowledge and use of a pilot is required to enter this channel.
Harbour
Berths 1
Water level. Strong winds from N or E may, exceptionally, raise the level by 1⋅3 m. Strong winds from W or SW may lower the level by 0⋅9 m. Ice. The harbour is occasionally closed by ice in January and February.
4.34 General layout. The harbour is approached and entered, from the E main channel, on the alignment of leading lights through a buoyed channel to the harbour. A secondary approach channel from the N, marked by buoys, is for small craft only. It has a maximum authorised draught of 3⋅0 m, is narrow and twisted and should not be entered without local knowledge. The harbour consists of an open roadstead partially sheltered and protected by islets and rocks. The commercial harbour lies on the shore with three berthing areas. A fishing and small boat harbour lies close N, formed and protected by a spit of land and breakwaters. 4.35 Landmarks. Utgrunden Lighthouse (56°22′⋅4N, 16°15′⋅4E) (4.19). Silo in Bergkvara (56°23′⋅1N, 16°05′⋅5E), 32 m in height and visible well to seaward. Söderåkra Church (56°26′⋅8N, 16°04′⋅3E), white tower. Garpen Lighthouse (4.19).
Directions 1
2
3
4.32 Maximum permitted draught in the main E channel to the harbour, which is swept to a depth of 6⋅1 m, is 5⋅5 m. Deepest and longest berths. Viktoria Quay, deepest. Silokajen, longest (4.38). Largest vessel permissible. A vessel up to 150 m in length, with a draught of 5⋅5 m.
154
4.36 From a position about 2 miles SE of Garpen Lighthouse approach on the alignment (302°) of Dalskär Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on grey framework tower) (56°23′⋅5N, 16°05′⋅4E), displayed from the head of the small boat harbour. Rear light (similar structure), 300 m NW from front light. This alignment leads 2 miles NW to the buoyed channel entrance passing SSW of a light-buoy (S cardinal), moored 6 cables S of Garpen Lighthouse, which marks the S limit of Norra Garpegrundet; and NNE of a buoy (port hand) marking a shoal with a least depth of 5⋅8m (1 cable farther S). Thence the channel is entered on the alignment (263½°) of Bergkvara S Leading Lights displayed close NNW of Långörsudde (56°22′⋅6N, 16°05′⋅5E): Front light (white square on cairn) (56°22′⋅8N, 16°05′⋅5E). Rear light (black and white square over white triangle, on grey metal framework tower) (200 m W of front light).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
4
5
1
This alignment leads 6 cables W through the buoyed channel to the alignment (331°) of Bergkvara N Leading Lights, displayed from Silokajen in the commercial harbour: Front light (building) (56°23′⋅1N, 16°05′⋅5E). Rear light (building) (35 m NNW from front light). This alignment, and in the white sector (334°–344°) of Dalskär Front Light, above, leads to the commercial harbour area and the small craft harbour through a channel marked by buoys (lateral). 4.37 Clearing marks. The alignment (345°) of Kårö Beacon (white cairn 2⋅7 m in height) (56°23′⋅2N, 16°06′⋅0E) standing on an islet of the same name and Söderåkra Church (56°26′⋅8N, 16°04′⋅3E) (4.35), clears well ENE of Röret (56°20′⋅3N, 16°06′⋅5E) (4.21).
4
5
6
Berths 1
4.38 The deepest berth is Viktoria Quay (previously known as Södra kajen) which has a length of 110 m and a depth alongside of 6⋅1 m. Silokajen, which lies 2 cables N, is the longest berth with a length of 175 m and a depth alongside of 5⋅1 m. Modoquay, formerly North Quay, with a length of 110 m and a depth of 3⋅4 m lies further N, and there are a number of berths in the small boat harbour with depths of 2⋅4 m.
Svanhalla 1
Port services 1
4.39 Repairs: minor engine repairs. Other facilities. Oily waste reception; limited facilities, using road tanker. Supplies: fuel oil supplied by road tanker; fresh water; provisions. Rescue. A fully equipped rescue craft is stationed at Bergkvara.
Harbours
Kristianopel 1
2
Sandhamn
2
3
4.40 General description. Sandhamn (56°05′⋅6N, 15°51′⋅5E), a fishing and small craft harbour, lies on the W side of a small bay 1½ miles NNE of Torhamnsudde. The harbour lies within the Karlskrona administrative area. It is formed by a breakwater extending from the shore and a detached breakwater close E making an entrance about 30 m wide. Within the harbour there are two piers forming two basins, the inner of which contains a small craft harbour. Depths. In the channel to the anchorage the maximum draught is 4⋅5 m and in the channel to the harbour the maximum draught is 3⋅4 m. The harbour is dredged to a depth of 4 m. Anchorage may be obtained, as indicated on the chart and with local knowledge, in an area 4 cables SSE of the harbour entrance, in depths of 8 to 11 m, clay and mud. It is exposed to winds from NE through E to SSW. Directions. From a position about 2½ miles SE of Torhamnsudde (56°04′⋅5N, 15°51′⋅0E) the approach is made on the alignment (344½°) of Sandhamn Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle on post) (56°05′⋅6N, 15°51′⋅5E), displayed from the W breakwater head. Rear light (similar structure) (500 m NNW from front light).
4.41 General description. Svanhalla (56°07′⋅2N, 15°53′⋅2E), a small fishing harbour, lies in a small inlet 1¾ miles NNE of Sandhamn (4.40). The harbour is protected by a breakwater and contains a quay 65 m in length with a depth alongside of 2⋅0 m. Local knowledge is required for entry. Supplies: fresh water; provisions. Chart 2842 with plan of Kristianopel
Chart 2360
1
This alignment leads 3¼ miles through the fairway, firstly to the anchorage thence continuing to the harbour entrance passing ENE of a buoy (S cardinal) moored 1¼ miles SSE of Torhamnsudde and close SW of a buoy (starboard hand) marking Revet, a shoal area 7 cables NE of Torhamnsudde. Thence to the entrance channel marked by a buoy (starboard hand) and between the breakwaters. Caution. Vessels may experience a heavy swell with S or SE gales. Useful marks: Torhamn Church (56°05′⋅7N, 15°50′⋅0E) (3.248) Radio mast (red light) (56°08′⋅3N, 15°50′⋅0E). Berths. There is a total of 265 m of berthing space in the two basins with depths alongside of 4⋅0 m. The small boat harbour in the inner basin has pontoon berths available with depths between 1⋅0 to 3⋅5 m. Facilities: slip for vessels up to 70 tonnes. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
3
4
5
155
4.42 General description. Kristianopel (56°15′⋅4N, 16°02′⋅6E), with a population of about 100, lies on the E side of a narrow spit of land 8 miles SSW of Bergkvara (4.31). The harbour, formed by breakwaters, is very narrow and only suitable for small vessels with a draught up to 2⋅2 m. It is exposed to winds from the S and SE and is usually free from ice throughout the winter. It contains a quay 150 m in length with a depth alongside of 2⋅5 m and also berths with all the usual facilities for small pleasure craft. Landmark. Kristianopel Church (56°15′⋅4N, 16°03′⋅7E) (4.19). Directions. Approach from a position in the vicinity of the approach buoy (safewater) moored 2½ miles SE of Kristianopel Church on the alignment (312°) of Kristianopel Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, red border, on post) (56°15′⋅5N, 16°02′⋅7E), displayed from the N breakwater head. Rear light (similar structure) (340 m from front light). This alignment leads 2½ miles NW to the harbour through the fairway and a channel marked by buoys (lateral) through the offshore shoals, passing SW of Lassakullen, a shoal marked on its S side by a buoy (starboard hand). The buoyed channel is entered 8 cables S of Långaskär Beacon (white stone cairn, 2⋅5 m in height) (56°15′⋅7N, 16°03′⋅7E), standing on the S end of the island of the same name, thence follow the above alignment to a position about 3 cables from the harbour entrance where it is prudent, to avoid passing too close to the shoals, to deviate NE of the alignment, being guided by the channel buoys to the entrance. Useful marks: Windmill at Olsäng (56°12′⋅8N, 15°59′⋅0E). Windmill at Rörsäng (56°15′⋅1N, 16°01′⋅5E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
Grönhögen (4.43) (Original dated 1996) (Photograph − Swedish Maritime Administration)
Kristianopel Beacon (white stone cairn, 2⋅5 m in height), 2½ cables N of the church. Supplies: fresh water; provisions.
5
Chart 2842 with, plan of Grönhögen
Grönhögen 1
2
3
4
4.43 General description. Grönhögen (56°16′N, 16°24′E), a small commercial and fishing harbour, lies on the W coast of Öland 4 miles N of Ölands Södra Udde. Principal exports include chalk, limestone and grain with imports including cattle fodder, fertilisers and oils. It is formed by two breakwaters extending S and W from the shore with a SW facing entrance, 50 m wide between the breakwater heads which are illuminated. The harbour is dredged to a depth of 4 m, the limits of which are marked by buoys, and is suitable for a draught up to 3⋅5 m. Pilots are available from Kalmar. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Landmarks: Radio mast (red light) (56°14′⋅0N, 16°27′⋅5E), NE of Ölands Södra Udde. Chimney, tall, at factory close N of harbour. Ventlinge Church (56°17′⋅0N, 16°24′⋅5E), N of town. The church is white with a red roof. Directions. Approach from the SW in a position about 2 miles from the harbour entrance on the alignment (054°) of Grönhögen Leading Lights: Front light (yellow triangle, red border, on post) (56°15′⋅9N, 16°24′⋅0E), displayed from the E side of the harbour.
6
1
Rear light (similar structure) (80 m NE from front light). This alignment leads 1¾ miles NE to the entrance, through the fairway and a short buoyed entrance channel, noting a buoy (W cardinal) moored 3½ cables W of the N breakwater, marking shoal water extending NW from the harbour. Once inside the entrance a sharp turn to the N is required to avoid the E limit of the 4 m dredged area in the harbour. Useful marks (positions from Ölands Södra Udde Light (56°11′⋅8N, 16°23′⋅8E) (4.19)): Orminge rör Beacon (grey truncated cone, 3⋅5 m in height) (1½ miles N). Ås Church (56°14′⋅3N, 16°26′⋅9E) (3 miles NE). Two radio masts (red lights), charted, (about 4 miles NE). 4.44 Berths. On the W side of the harbour there is a total of 240 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 3⋅5 m, of which 80 m is on the inside of the breakwater with the remainder on both sides of a jetty. In the N part there is a single jetty 20 m long with a depth alongside of 3⋅1 m. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Rescue. A fully equipped rescue craft is stationed at Grönhögen.
UTGRUNDEN TO KALMAR General information Charts 2251, 2842, 2843 with plan of Kalmar and Approaches
Route 1
156
4.45 From a position W of Utgrunden (56°23′N, 16°16′E) the route leads generally NNE for about 19 miles to Norra
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
Skallö (56°40′⋅6N, 16°24′⋅2E), 1 mile NE of Kalmar where Ölandsbron, a fixed bridge, spans the fairway. It includes Kalmarsunds Djupränna (4.54), the dredged deep-water channel through the narrows between the mainland and Öland in the vicinity of Kalmar.
Principal marks 1
Draught limitation 1
4.46 The maximum authorised draught in the S approach channel to Kalmar, as shown on the chart, is 7⋅3 m.
2
Pilotage 1
4.47 See 4.7.
Vessel Traffic Service 1
4.48 A VTS is in operation within Kalmarsund. See 4.8.
3
Ölandsbron 1
2
4.49 Ölandsbron is the fixed bridge, 3½ miles long, which spans the channel, 1 mile NNE of Kalmar harbour, connecting the mainland to Öland at Möllstorp, the navigable span being between the islets of Svinö and Norra Skallö. The navigable span has a vertical clearance of 36 m over a width of 80 m. The bridge pillars on each side of the fairway are floodlit and painted to a height of 10 m above the water, the W being red and the E green. A light, visible from both sides, is displayed from the underside of the span to indicate the centre of the channel. Lights, showing fixed green on the E side of the channel and fixed red on the W side, are displayed from each side of the bridge to indicate the limits of the deep-water channel and the vertical clearance limits.
Natural conditions 1
2
3
4
4.50 Current. In the vicinity of Kalmarsunds Djupränna the current does not always run in the direction of the channel. With a general S flow there is a SW set across the channel within 3 cables N and S of Skansgrundet Lighthouse (56°39′⋅1N, 16°22′⋅5E) at the S end; in the central part, within 2 cables N and S of Huvudet Lighthouse (56°40′⋅1N, 16°23′⋅1E), the set is slightly E of S; in the N part 6½ cables S of Krongrundet Lighthouse (56°41′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅3E), the set is SW. With a general N flow, from 5 cables S to 2½ cables N of Skansgrundet Lighthouse, there is a NE set, gradually changing to an ENE set across the channel; from 1 cable S to 4 cables N of Huvudet Lighthouse the set is N; within 7 cables S of Krongrundet Lighthouse the set is NE. In the vicinity of Prästör, an islet 2 cables NE of Skansgrundet Lighthouse, a race is occasionally formed in the channel with a S flow, the latter also being strong in the channel within 5 cables SSW of Ölandsbron. Currents can be variable dependent on the strength and direction of the wind. Caution should be exercised when navigating in this vicinity. Ice. The S part of Kalmarsund, especially between Kalmar and Mörbylånga, is likely to have some days of ice even in mild winters. In a normal winter ice can exist for periods longer than 30 days, especially in February and March. In severe winters the S part of the sound can be covered with ice for long periods from January to March.
4.51 Landmarks: Utgrunden Lighthouse (56°22′⋅4N, 16°15′⋅4E) (4.19). Kastlösa Church (56°27′⋅5N, 16°26′⋅0E), on Öland. Radio mast (56°31′⋅0N, 16°26′⋅3E) (elevation 93 m), on Öland. Hagby Church (56°33′⋅3N, 16°10′⋅8E), on the mainland. Kalmar Water Tower (56°39′⋅8N, 16°21′⋅6E). Castle (Kalmar Slott) (56°39′⋅5N, 16°21′⋅3E), the old castle with five towers. Major lights: Garpen Light (56°23′⋅4N, 16°07′⋅7E) (4.19). Skansgrundet Light (black tower, green band, grey conical base, white lantern, 19 m in height; floodlit) (56°39′⋅1N, 16°22′⋅5E). Krongrundet Light (white tower, green and black stripe, 11 m in height, floodlit) (56°41′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅3E). Berga Aero Light (56°41′⋅7N, 16°20′⋅4E) (4.80).
Other aid to navigation 1
4.52 Racon: Centre of Ölandsbron (4.49) navigable span. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Directions (continued from 4.21)
Utgrunden to Skansgrundet 1
2
3
4
4.53 From a position W of Utgrunden the fairway leads initially N for about 8 miles to join the recommended track, as shown on the chart, passing (with positions from Utgrunden Light): E of the buoy (E cardinal) (2¾ miles N), marking the S end of Mittgrunden and into the white sector (185°–193°) astern of Utgrunden Light, thence: E of the buoy (E cardinal), marking the N end of Mittgrunden (6½ miles N), joining the recommended track close N, thence: E of Hagbygrundet (10½ miles N), marked by a buoy (E cardinal). Thence the recommended track continues NNE for about 6½ miles, in the white sector (019°–024½°) of Skansgrundet Light, to the entrance to Kalmarsunds Djupränna, passing (with positions from Skansgrundet Light): ESE of Södra Hossmogrund, marked by a buoy (E cardinal) at its S end (5½ miles SSW), thence: ESE of Stensögrund (3 miles SSW), thence: WNW of Trädgårdsgrund, marked by a light-buoy (W cardinal), noting a buoy (E cardinal), 5 cables WSW, marking shoal water on the W side of the fairway, thence: To Skansgrundet Light (4.51).
Kalmarsunds Djupränna 1
2
157
4.54 Kalmarsunds Djupränna, the dredged deep-water channel which has a bottom width of 80 m and a least depth of 7⋅7 m over a width of 60 m, is marked on each side by lighthouses, light-buoys, buoys and beacons. The main channels to Kalmar and Färjestaden branch off from this channel. Kalmarsunds Djupränna is entered between Skansgrundet Lighthouse (4.51) and Grimskär Beacon (white
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
3
4
5
6
7
quadrangular daymark on iron framework) (56°39′⋅1N, 16°22′⋅5E), standing on a small islet. Grimskärsgrund Light-buoy (port hand) is moored 2 cables ESE of the beacon. Thence the track leads 2½ miles NNE through the centre of the channel to its N limit at Krongrundet Light (56°41′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅3E) (4.51), passing (with positions from Skansgrundet Light): WNW of Prästör Beacon (white cairn) (1¾ cables NNE), standing on a rock, thence: WNW of Grytan (4 cables NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: WNW of Omböjningen Beacon (yellow floodlit board on grey base, 2 m in height) (5½ cables NNE), thence: ESE of Gillburen Light-buoy (port hand) (7 cables NNE), and: WNW of Döden, a shoal patch (8 cables NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: ESE of Huvudet Light (red tower, black band at base, 7 m in height, floodlit) (1 mile NNE), thence: ESE of Osvallsgrundet Light (red and black tower, 7 m in height, floodlit) (1¼ miles NNE), and: WNW of Mellgrund (1¼ miles NNE), a shoal marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: Under the navigable span of Ölandsbron (4.49), thence: ESE of Nyckeln (2¼ miles NNE), the shoal on which there is a least depth of 2⋅6 m, marked at its NE limit by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: WNW of Krongrundet Light (4.51) which marks a shoal of the same name. Cautions. The lighthouses marking each side of the channel are so placed that their respective lights are positioned vertically directly above the edges of the channel. Their bases however, extend underwater into the channel for 5⋅0 m and must not be passed at a distance of less than 10 m. Vessels should note several submarine power cables, shown on the plan.
2
3
Chart 2842 with plan of Ekenäs
Ekenäs 1
2
3
4
Useful marks 4.55 1
2
Vickleby Church (56°34′⋅6N, 16°27′⋅6E), on Öland. Kalmar Pilot Lookout, on Tjärhovet (56°39′⋅6N, 16°22′⋅7E). Kalmar Cathedral (56°39′⋅9N, 16°21′⋅9E), with four towers. Beacon (white cairn) (56°39′⋅8N, 16°22′⋅6E) standing 3½ cables SW of Huvudet Lighthouse (56°40′⋅1N, 16°23′⋅1E). Södra Skallö Beacon (cairn) (56°40′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅3E), standing on E end of islet. Skallörev Beacon (56°40′⋅5N, 16°23′⋅9E). (Directions continue at 4.97) (Directions for Ekenäs are given at 4.57, for Mörbylånga at 4.58, for Färjestaden at 4.59 and for Kalmar at 4.82)
Anchorages and harbours
4.57 General description. Ekenäs (56°30′⋅7N, 16°10′⋅8E) is a small harbour situated on the W side of Kalmarsund about 10 miles SW of Kalmar. The harbour lies at the NE limit of a small bay and consists of a pier extending 30 m ESE from the shore with charted depths of about 2⋅7 to 4⋅0 m alongside its N side. A slip lies close S of the pier and a finger pier lies close NE. Anchorage may be obtained in the roads in a position about 2½ cables ENE of the harbour, depth about 3⋅5 m, good holding ground of mud and clay. Local knowledge is required. Ice. The harbour is usually icebound from January to March. Directions. Approach from the SE, in the vicinity of Ekenäsgrunden (56°30′N, 16°12′E), on the alignment (298°) of leading beacons: Front beacon (truncated cone, surmounted by a staff and truncated cone small end up) (56°30′⋅7N, 16°11′⋅0E). Rear beacon (similar structure, similar cone inverted) (40 m WNW from front beacon). This alignment leads 7 cables WNW through a channel, suitable for draughts up to 3⋅0 m and marked by buoys (lateral), to a position 2 cables from the front beacon. Thence leave the alignment and follow the buoys for about 2 cables W to the harbour entrance. Facilities. Small shipyard with a patent slip for vessels up to 150 tonnes. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Chart 2842 with plan of Mörbylånga
Mörbylånga 1
2
Anchorages 1
about 12 m, fine sand. A wreck with a depth of 7⋅9 m over it lying 5 cables S of the light-buoy should be avoided. (b) In a position, shown on the plan, about 5 cables SSE of Grimskär Beacon (56°39′⋅1N, 16°22′⋅5E) (4.54), in depths of about 8 to 11 m, clay. However, vessels should not anchor ENE of a line with the W point of Grimskär in line with Kalmar Water Tower (4.51) bearing about 335°. (c) In a position, shown on the plan, about 2 cables SW of Huvudet Lighthouse (56°40′⋅1N, 16°23′⋅1E) (4.54), in depths of 5 to 6 m, clay. Caution. Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of the submarine power cables shown on the plans.
4.56 Anchorage may be obtained in a number of areas in the vicinity of Kalmarsunds Djupränna and Kalmar as follows: (a) For vessels with draughts exceeding 6⋅0 m in a position about 1 mile S of Trädgårdsgrund Light-buoy (56°37′⋅6N, 16°21′⋅8E), in depths of
158
4.58 General information. Mörbylånga (56°31′⋅5N, 16°23′⋅0E) is a small commercial and leisure harbour situated on the W coast of Öland. It is generally well sheltered except in W gales when a swell may be experienced. The buildings in the town are visible well to seaward. Principal exports are sugar, grain and stone. Principal imports are fertilisers, limestone and oils. The population was about 1800 in 1993. Ice. The harbour is usually affected by ice from January to March but is kept open by icebreakers. Pilots are available from Kalmar. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Anchorage may be obtained in positions 8 cables WNW to WSW of the harbour entrance in depths of 7 to 9 m, sand and clay.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
Mörbylånga (4.58) (Original dated 1996) (Photograph − Swedish Maritime Administration)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Harbour. The channel to the harbour entrance is dredged to a depth of 3⋅8 m over a bottom width of about 40 m but is liable to silting. Maximum draught in the channel is 3⋅3 m and vessels close to this draught should monitor the depth carefully. The harbour comprises two breakwaters which form a NW facing entrance 35 m wide between the heads of the breakwaters, which are floodlit, and enclosing a single basin with a general dredged depth of 3⋅8 m. A shallow water area close inside the N breakwater is marked by buoys (port hand). The principal quay, Östra Kajen, is about 170 m long with a depth alongside of 3⋅8 m. In the remainder of the harbour there is a further 230 m of berthing space, including a floating pontoon jetty for pleasure craft, with depths alongside of 2⋅5 to 3⋅6 m. Landmarks: Mörbylånga Church (56°31′⋅4N, 16°23′⋅8E). Radio mast (elevation 93 m) (56°31′⋅0N, 16°26′⋅3E), about 1½ miles E of the church. Resmo Church (56°32′⋅7N, 16°26′⋅7E), 2¼ miles NE of the harbour. Directions. Mörbylånga Leading Lights: Front light (orange triangle, black border, on roof of shed) (56°31′⋅8N, 16°22′⋅5E), displayed from the E side of the harbour. Rear light (orange triangle, black border, on metal framework tower) (200 m SE from front light). From the vicinity of the buoy (W cardinal) (56°32′⋅6N, 16°20′⋅6E), marking the 10 m contour, the alignment (127½°) of these lights leads 1¼ miles SE to the harbour passing SW of a buoy (port hand) marking the SW limit of Mölngrund, a rocky patch NNW of the entrance and thence through a short buoyed entrance channel to the harbour. A useful aid to entry, by day, is to approach from the NW with Mörbylånga Church in line with the centre of the harbour entrance bearing 130° until the leading lights are identified. Facilities: doctor.
Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Regular sea services with Kalmar and Degerhamn. Chart 2843 plan of Kalmar and Approaches
Färjestaden 1
2
3
1
159
4.59 General information. Färjestaden (56°39′N, 16°28′E) lies 3½ miles ESE of Kalmar on the W coast of Öland. Before completion of Ölandsbron, the bridge joining the mainland to Öland, Färjestaden was the terminal harbour for the ferry service between the two ports. Its present function is that of a general purpose small harbour handling commercial, fishing and other small craft. Farm produce and stone are exported. Local knowledge or the assistance of a pilot is required for entry if the vessels draught exceeds 3⋅4 m. Pilots are available from Kalmar. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Currents. See 4.50. Harbour. The harbour comprises N and S breakwaters forming a W facing entrance 55 m wide between their heads. Depths in the central part of the harbour are about 4⋅2 m and maximum permitted draught in the harbour is 3⋅4 m. Chimney (56°39′⋅2N, 16°31′⋅2E), 1¾ miles E of harbour. 4.60 Directions. The main channel to Färjestaden is marked by buoys (lateral) and cairns which are the remains of the lighthouses formerly marking the sides of the ferry channel between Kalmar and Öland. Leading beacons in Kalmar: Kalmar Norra Beacon, front (56°39′⋅8N, 16°22′⋅4E), displayed from the S end of a detached breakwater 2½ cables E of Kalmar Cathedral. Kavaljeren Beacon, rear (360 m WNW of front beacon), displayed from the head of Tullhamnen.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
2
3
4
5
6
7
From a position close N of Omböjningen Beacon (56°39′⋅6N, 16°22′⋅9E) in Kalmarsunds Djupränna, on the alignment (286°) astern, of the above beacons, the track leads initially 1 mile ESE through the channel to a position 1 cable ESE of Norra Midsundsgrundet Beacon (cairn) (56°39′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅5E), passing firstly, close SSE of the buoy (port hand) marking the SW limit of Hattkullen, thence close NNE of Kalmar Södra Tredingsgrund Beacon (cairn), standing 6 cables ESE of Omböjningen Beacon, and close SSE of Norra Midsundsgrundet Beacon. Thence to the alignment (103°) of Färjestaden Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle on post) (56°39′⋅0N, 16°27′⋅8E), displayed from the rear of the harbour. Rear light (white triangle on post) (140 m ESE from front light). This alignment leads 1⋅6 miles ESE through the centre of the channel to the harbour entrance passing close SSE of Ölands Norra Tredingsgrund Beacon (cairn), standing 1 mile WNW of the entrance, and close SSE of Lassegrunden Beacon (cairn) which stands 4 cables WNW of the breakwaters at the outward end of the short buoyed entrance channel. Side channels. From a position 7½ cables SSE of Skansgrundet Light (4.51), a side channel leads NNE and E to join the main channel, as shown on the chart. From a position 5 cables N of Svansholmarna (56°37′N, 16°24′E), a small craft channel, with a least depth of 2⋅5 m and marked by buoys (lateral) leads 2¾ miles NE to Färjestaden, passing NW of Södra Ersörsgrundet (56°37′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅7E) and SE of Norra Ersörsgrundet (1 mile farther N). Useful marks: Färjestaden N and S Breakwater Lights (white posts) (56°39′⋅0N, 16°27′⋅6E), displayed from each breakwater head. Berths. Within the harbour there are N and S basins partially divided by the N quay which is about 80 m long with a depth of 4⋅0 m on its S face. The S basin has 70 m of berthing space for fishing boats with depths of 3⋅8 to 4⋅0 m alongside. The N basin contains a number of finger piers providing numerous berths for small craft with depths of 2⋅0 to 2⋅5 m. There are also berths for small craft just inside the S breakwater. Facilities. Engine repairs. Two Ro-Ro ramps in NE part of harbour. All usual facilities for small craft. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
3
1
2
KALMAR General information Chart 2843 with plan of Kalmar and Approaches
Position 1
1
2
1
2
4.61 Description. Stensö (56°39′N, 16°20′E), a small fishing harbour, lies on the SW side of Kalmar, 9 cables SW of Kalmar Castle, at the N end of the Stensö peninsula. Approach and entry. There are two approach channels, one from S and the other from E. Both approaches are through short buoyed (lateral) channels on the alignment of the following sets of leading lights. 4.62 Approach from S is as follows: Stensö Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (orange diamonds, black borders, on posts, 54 m apart) (56°39′⋅1N, 16°20′⋅0E), displayed from the NW part of the harbour, in line bearing 004½°. Ängen Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white circles, orange and black borders, respectively, on posts, 32 m apart)
4.64 Kalmar (56°40′N, 16°22′E), one of the largest cities in the SE part of Sweden is the provincial capital of Kalmar province, a region famous for its glassworks. The central heart of the city which contains the cathedral and some of the port area lies on Kvarnholmen which is connected to the mainland by several bridges.
Function
Stensö 1
(56°39′⋅0N, 16°19′⋅9E), displayed close W of the entrance, in line bearing 351°. Långviken Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white triangles, orange borders, on posts, 32 m apart) (56°39′⋅1N, 16°20′⋅0E), displayed at the head of the harbour, in line bearing 016¾°. The alignments of the above lights and use of the buoys leads N to the entrance. 4.63 Approach from E is as follows: Stensö Yttre Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white rectangles, black borders, on posts, 23 m apart) (56°38′⋅9N, 16°19′⋅8E), displayed 1 cable SSW of the entrance, in line bearing 277°. Stensö Inre Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white triangles, black borders, on posts, 20 m apart) (56°39′⋅0N, 16°19′⋅9E), displayed close N of the outer lights, in line bearing 295½°. Långviken Leading Lights: in line bearing 016¾°, as above. The alignments of the above lights and use of the buoys leads WNW to the entrance.
4.65 Kalmar has a long and eminent history as a major trading centre for the Hanseatic League in times past and as a fortified harbour used by the Vikings in the twelth century. In its modern form the present city dates back to the seventeenth century having been rebuilt after a great fire destroyed most of the original city. One of its former functions was that of principal ferry port for the island of Öland before construction of Ölandsbron bridge. It is now a historic and industrial city with a fairly large, well sheltered harbour suitably equipped to handle most types of cargo and medium- sized vessels. Principal exports include grain, piece goods, timber and timber products. Principal imports include fodder, fertilisers, oils, bulk products and iron products. In 2003 the population of Kalmar was 60 066.
Entry 1
4.66 Entry to the harbour areas is directly from Kalmarsunds Djupränna (4.54) through short dredged channels, marked by buoys, on the alignment of leading lights or leading beacons.
Traffic 1
160
4.67 In 2003 the port was used by 394 vessels totalling 1 131 664 dwt.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
Port Authority 1
Harbour
4.68 Kalmar Hamnforvalting, PO Box 810, S–391 28 Kalmar. Website: www.kalmar.se/kalmarhamn E-Mail:
[email protected]
General layout 1
Limiting conditions Controlling depths 1
4.69 The controlling depths are those in the S approach channel and from the N the depth in Kalmarsunds Djupränna. Maximum permitted draughts: Entrance channel — 7⋅0 m Oil harbour and main harbour from S — 7⋅3 m. Oil harbour and main harbour from N — 6⋅8 m.
2
3
Deepest and longest berth 1
4.70 Jetty in oil harbour (4.83). Elevatorkajen S part (4.84) (cruise vessels).
Hazards 1
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
4.71 Oil jetty. With entry from S, by day and with tug assistance, pilots can handle a vessel with maximum length 185 m, beam 22 m, draught 7⋅3 m and 30 000 dwt. By night the figures are reduced to 10 000 dwt and draught 7⋅3 m. Main basin. With entry from S, by day and with tug assistance, pilots can handle a vessel with maximum length 155 m, draught 7⋅3 m and 14 000 dwt. By night these figures are reduced to length 140 m, draught 6⋅9 m and 10 000 dwt.
1
1
2
Anchorages 1
4.73 Details of anchorage areas are given at 4.56.
Pilotage 1
2
4.74 Kalmar is a pilot station providing service 24 hours. Requests for pilots should be sent to Oxelösund VTS 12 hours in advance. See 4.7 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. The pilot lookout and station is located at the NE end of Tjärhovet (4.77). Pilot boards, as shown on chart, as follows: (i) S entrance — near Trädgårdsgrund (56°37′⋅6N, 16°22′⋅1E). (ii) N entrance — near Sillåsen (56°46′N, 16°30′E) or NE of Krongrundet (56°41′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅5E).
1
4.81 Racon: Centre of Ölandsbron (4.49) navigable span. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Directions Approach and entry 1
2
4.75 Available and compulsory for larger vessels. For limits Port Authority should be consulted. 3
Quarantine 1
4.80 Landmarks: Kalmar Water Tower (56°39′⋅8N, 16°21′⋅6E). Kalmar Slott (56°39′⋅5N, 16°21′⋅5E) (4.51). Kalmar Cathedral, with four towers, (56°39′⋅9N, 16°21′⋅9E), near the centre of Kvarnholmen. Major lights: Skansgrundet Light (56°39′⋅1N, 16°22′⋅5E) (4.51). Krongrundet Light (56°41′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅3E) (4.51). Berga Aero Light (water tower) (56°41′⋅7N, 16°20′⋅4E).
Other aid to navigation
Tugs 1
4.79 In winter months the port is normally kept open by icebreakers.
Principal marks
Port radio 4.72 Kalmar Hamnradio (Kalmar Harbour Radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
4.78 Strong currents may cause manoeuvring difficulties in the vicinity of the harbour entrance channel. See 4.50. Sunken timber may be encountered in the S part of Nyahamnen.
Ice
Arrival information
1
4.77 The harbour is formed by Kvarnholmen to the N and Tjärhovet, an artificial peninsula to the SE, connected to Kvarnholmen, and on the E side by a detached breakwater. The entrance which is reached from the E through a short channel off Kalmarsunds Djupränna lies between the S end of the detached breakwater and the NW end of Tjärhovet. The harbour is divided by Barlastholmen, a short peninsula projecting E from its root in the SW part thence NE towards the central part of the harbour. This creates three basins in the N and central part plus a single basin in the S part. The oil harbour lies on the SE side of Tjärhovet 3 cables N of Skansgrundet Light. There are other berthing areas on Varvsholmen, an islet 4 cables N of the harbour entrance and Ängö, close NW of Varvsholmen.
4.76 There is a quarantine station at Kalmar (see 1.115).
161
4.82 Approach from S and N is through Kalmarsunds Djupränna (4.54) with short entrance channels leading off from the main channel. Entry — Oil harbour. Entry to the oil harbour, dredged to a depth of 7⋅9 m, from S is through a short channel marked by buoys (port hand), which leads N off Kalmarsunds Djupränna close inside its S entrance at Skansgrundet Light. From the N follow the track, shown on the plan, to a position about 1 cable SE of the pilot lookout on the NE end of Tjärhovet thence SW to the berth. Entry — Main basin. From S follow the directions given at 4.54 to a position about 0⋅5 cables SW of Omböjningen Beacon (56°39′⋅6N, 16°23′⋅1E). Thence to the alignment (277°) of Kalmar Leading Lights:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
4
5
6
7
Front light (framework tower, red and white daymark, 8 m in height) (56°39′⋅8N, 16°22′⋅3E), displayed from the W side of the harbour. Rear light (similar structure, 11 m in height), displayed 50 m W of front light. This alignment leads 2 cables W to the harbour entrance, on the track shown on the plan, passing N of the buoys (port hand) marking the limits of the dredged area off the NE and N corners of Tjärhovet and S of Inre Gillburen Light-buoy (starboard hand) which marks the N limit of the dredged area off the entrance. From the N follow the reverse of the directions given at 4.54 to a position close S of Gillburen Light-buoy (port hand), moored 2½ cables SSW of Huvudet Light (56°40′⋅1N, 16°23′⋅1E), thence follow the directions given above for the main basin. Entry — Varvsholmen. The channel to the S part of Varvsholmen leads 3 cables WNW from a position about 1 cable SSW of Huvudet Light. The channel to the N part of Varvsholmen is entered from a position 2½ cables SSW of the centre of the navigable span of Ölandsbron to the alignment (248°) of Ängö Boat Harbour Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white triangles, black borders, on posts, 150 m apart) (56°40′⋅3N, 16°22′⋅6E), displayed from the E side of the islet. This alignment leads 6 cables WSW, through a channel marked by buoys (lateral), to the N part of Varvsholmen and also to the small craft harbour on the SE side of Ängö, an islet close NW of Varvsholmen.
2
3
1
Port services
Basins and berths 1
Oil harbour 1
4.83 The oil harbour contains one oil jetty with a length of 90 m and a depth alongside of 7⋅9 m.
Main harbour 1
Tjärhovskajen, the NW side of Tjärhovet and contains a total of 1174 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 4⋅4 to 7⋅7 m. The deepest berths lie at the NW end of Tjärhovet equipped with bulk handling and other cargo handling equipment. Directly opposite these berths, at the centre of the SE face of Barlastholmen there is a fixed Ro-Ro berth 14 m wide and a depth of 6⋅3 m. Gamlahamnen. Gamlahamnen comprises the N central and NW parts of the harbour. The principal berth is Elevatorkajen, situated in the N and close NW of the detached breakwater, with a length of 175 m. It is mainly used for cruise vessels. There is a further 655 m of berthing space within Gamlahamnen with depths alongside of 3⋅9 to 4⋅8 m. Tullhamnen is a small basin on the NW side of the harbour which functions as a museum harbour and contains 245 m of berths. Ölandshamnen lies in the central part close W of Gamlahamnen. It is a pleasure and small craft basin with a total of 285 m of berthing space with depths alongside of about 2⋅5 to 4⋅0 m. 4.85 Varvsholmen has a quay, on its S side, 120 m long with a depth alongside of 3 m. On its NW side there is a quay 108 m long with a depth alongside of 4⋅5 m. There are a number of berths with depths of about 2 m in Ängö Boat Harbour close NW.
4.84 Nyahamnen. Nyahamnen lies in the S and SE part of the harbour. It comprises the SE face of Barlastholmen and
4.86 Repairs. Facilities available. Other facilities. Deratting; oily waste reception; authorised compass adjusters; hospital; customs and bonded warehouse. Supplies. Fuel oil and lubricating oils by barge; fresh water laid on at berths and also by barge; provisions. Communications. International airport located 6 km distant. Rescue. The pilot boat will act as a lifeboat if required.
KALMARSUND — NORTHERN PART GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2843, 2844
Area covered 1
4.87 This section covers the waters of Kalmarsund from Norra Skallö (56°40′⋅6N, 16°24′⋅2E), where Ölandsbron (4.49) spans the fairway NE of Kalmar, to Kråkelund (57°27′N, 16°44′E) (4.178). It includes the channels through the N part of Kalmarsund, the channels to Oskarshamn and other smaller harbours on each side of the fairway between the mainland and the W side of Öland.
2
KALMAR TO DÄMMAN General information
Topography 1
Charts 2843, 2844
Route 1
16°41′⋅6E), following the recommended tracks through the fairway as shown on the charts. The track through the first part of the fairway from W of Krongrundet (56°41′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅5E) to Skäggenäs (56°47′N, 16°28′E), 5 miles NNE, leads through numerous rocks and shoals. From Ölandsbron a short channel with less depth passes E of Krongrundet to rejoin the main channel 2½ miles NE of the bridge. In addition to the main channel there is an alternative channel, for vessels with lesser draughts, which rejoins the main channel E of Skäggenäs. The remainder of the fairway to Dämman leads through more open water with shoal patches adequately marked by lights or buoys.
4.88 From Ölandsbron the route leads generally NNE for about 25 miles to a position E of Dämman (57°03′⋅4N,
162
4.89 The coast on the mainland is mainly low and wooded with no major natural features. The coastline is fringed with rocks, islets and dangers up to 3 miles offshore. Skäggenäs (56°47′N, 16°28′E) is easily identified due to its prominent position, projecting from the coast with dark wooded areas. The E side of the fairway, on the W side of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
Route Index Chartlet - N. Kalmarsund and approaches to Oskarshamn 30´
20´
40´
17°
50´
10´
20´
30´
30´
2251 Kråkelund
Simpevarp 4.186
3.148
9 21 4. Ölands Norra Udde
4.1 4.174
20´
2844
Grankullavik 4.217
84
20´ Byxelkrok 4.183
4
4.16
2361
Furö
4.1
61
4.
Oskarshamn 4.140
Blå Jungfrun
Böda 4.214
5
16
2846
N. KALMARSUND 2846
Påskallavik 4.135
10´
4.112
Runnö
4.
12
6
10´
4.120 Stora Jättersön 2844
Vållö
4.
12
8
4.134 2844
Gåso
Dämman
Sandvik 4.134
2844 Mönsterås
57° 4.88
57°
2843
2844
4.10
6
Borgholm 4.105 2844 Explanation
4.88
50´
ÖLAND
Inshore channels
50´
Through routes Skäggenäs
0205
20´
30´
40´
50´
163
Longitude 17° East from Greenwich
20´
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
Öland, is mainly featureless with occasional steep cliffs. Ölandsbron is visible at long range. 2
Vessel Traffic Service 1
4.90 A VTS is in operation within Kalmarsund. See 4.8.
Controlling draught 1
4.91 The controlling depth in the fairway from Kalmar to Skäggenäs is a maximum authorised draught of 6⋅8m.
Other aid to navigation 1
Submarine power cables 1
2
3
4.92 Cables, including power cables, are laid between Skäggenäs, in the vicinity of Revsudden fishing harbour (56°46′⋅5N, 16°28′⋅5E), and Öland, in the vicinity of Stora Rör (56°45′N, 16°32′E). The limits of the cable area are marked at each end by pairs of lights and beacons as follows: Front and rear lights (yellow triangles on yellow framework towers, 75 m apart) (56°46′⋅8N, 16°29′⋅8E). In line bearing 298° these lights, visible only on the bearing, mark the NE limit on Skäggenäs. Front and rear beacons (yellow triangles on yellow framework towers) (56°45′⋅8N, 16°32′⋅6E). In line bearing 118° these beacons mark the NE limit on Öland. Front and rear lights (yellow triangles on yellow framework towers, 60 m apart) (56°45′⋅0N, 16°31′⋅6E). In line bearing 122° these lights, visible only on the bearing, mark the SW limit on Öland. Front and rear beacons (similar structures to above) (56°46′⋅2N, 16°28′⋅2E). In line bearing 302° these beacons mark the SW limit on Skäggenäs.
4.93 See 4.7 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Directions
Ölandsbron to Skäggenäs 1
2
3
4
Ice 1
4.94 Some areas in the central part of Kalmarsund always freeze in winter. In a severe winter the strait can be obstructed during January, February and March. In the region between Dämman and Skäggenäs it is possible to find hummocked ice, a rare phenomenon in the S part of Sweden.
5
1
Principal marks 1
4.95 Landmarks: Berga Water Tower (56°41′⋅7N, 16°20′⋅4E). Högsrum Church, on Öland (56°46′N, 16°36′E). Borgholm Castle (ruins), standing on a high, steep rock face (56°52′⋅2N, 16°38′⋅6E) and Solliden Castle (large white building, former royal palace) lying 4 cables SW, which is clearly visible from W
4.96 Racon: Dämman Light (57°03′⋅4N, 16°41′⋅4E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
(continued from 4.55)
Pilotage 1
to N. A windmill, shown on the chart, stands close ENE of Solliden Castle. Sillåsen Lighthouse (black tower, white top, grey conical base, 22 m in height, floodlit) (56°45′⋅8N, 16°29′⋅8E). Kävershäll, a wooded hill (57°04′⋅1N, 16°22′⋅7E). Major lights: Krongrundet Light (56°41′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅3E) (4.51). Berga Aero Light (56°41′⋅7N, 16°20′⋅4E) (4.80). Sillåsen Light — as above.
2
164
4.97 Main channel. From Ölandsbron the channel leads initially 7 cables NNE to a position WNW of Krongrundet at the N entrance of Kalmarsunds Djupränna. Directions are given at 4.54. From a position WNW of Krongrundet Light the recommended track, as shown on the plan, leads about 5½ miles NE through the fairway, marked by buoys (lateral), to a position E of Sillåsen Lighthouse (4.95), passing (with positions from Krongrundet Light): NW of a buoy (starboard hand) (3 cables NE), marking the NW limit of Krongrundet, thence: NW of a buoy (starboard hand) (1 mile NE), marking the limit of the coastal shoals, thence: NW of a buoy (starboard hand) (2 miles NE), marking the limit of the coastal shoals, thence: SE of Masknaggen Lighthouse (black tower, orange top, grey base, 11 m in height, floodlit) (56°43′⋅8N, 16°28′⋅3E), standing on a rock on the W side of the fairway (3¼ miles NE), thence: NW of Fäholmsgrund (4¼ miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), 3 cables SW, thence: SE of Östra Bredgrund (4 miles NE), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: W of Ispeudde (5 miles NE), a point of land on which stands a light (white tower, 7 m in height) (56°44′⋅7N, 16°31′⋅0E), thence: To a position E of Sillåsen. This track is also covered as far as Östra Bredgrund, above, by the white sector (222½°–226½°) astern, of Krongrundet Light. 4.98 Secondary channel. Local knowledge is required. From a similar position WNW of Krongrundet, as above, the recommended track shown on the chart and with an authorised draught of 4⋅8 m, leads about 5½ miles NNE to a position close N of Sillåsen Light, passing (with positions from Masknaggen Light (56°43′⋅8N, 16°28′⋅3E)): SE of a buoy (port hand) (2½ miles SW), moored 7 cables NNE of Krongrundet, thence: NW of Masknaggen, marked on its W side by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SE of Bullegrund (8 cables NW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
3
4
1
NW of Ispe Bredgrund (1 mile N), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: Close SE of Bakaregrund (1½ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: W of the central part of Sillåsen (2 miles NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SE of Järngrund (2 miles NNE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Between Sillåsen Lighthouse and a buoy (port hand), marking the SE end of Hatten shoal area close NW. 4.99 Alternative channel. Local knowledge is required. A short alternative channel with no authorised draught, shown on the chart, leads NE and NNE from Ölandsbron passing E of the Krongrundet shoal area, marked by a buoy (port hand), thence NW of Bredgrund, a rocky area which lies 5 cables W of the islet of Nordmannen (56°41′⋅8N, 16°27′⋅8E) to rejoin the main channel about 1¼ miles SW of Masknaggen Lighthouse (4.97).
sectors (018°–022°) and (202°–208°), ahead and astern respectively, of Slottsbredan Light, thence the white sector (021°–024½°) of Dämman Light.
Useful marks 4.101 1
Windmills at Strandtorp (56°50′⋅N, 16°37′E); the N windmill is large and conspicuous. Windmills at Borgehage (56°51′N, 16°38′E); the N windmill has sails and is conpicuous. Köping Church (56°52′⋅7N, 16°43′⋅4E), E of Borgholm. Alböke Church (56°56′⋅8N, 16°47′⋅2E), on Öland. Föra Church (57°00′⋅8N, 16°52′⋅1E), on Öland. Sandvik Windmill (conspicuous) (57°04′⋅3N, 16°51′⋅6E). (Directions continue at 4.118) (Directions for Stora Rör are given at 4.103, for Revsudden at 4.104, for Borgholm at 4.106, for Pataholm at 4.108, for Timmernabben at 4.109 and for Mönsterås at 4.111)
Skäggenäs to Dämman 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4.100 From a position E of Sillåsen the track, shown on the plan and chart, leads 19 miles NNE to a position E of Dämman Light, passing (with positions from Borgholm Castle (56°52′⋅2N, 16°38′⋅6E)): ESE of Själgrundet (7½ miles SW), an islet off Skäggenäs, thence: WNW of Ekerumshamn (5¼ miles SSW), thence: WNW of Ekerumsrevet (4½ miles SSW), thence: ESE of Nygrund (5 miles SW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: WNW of Grebygrunden (4 miles SSW), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: ESE of a 8⋅0 m shoal (3½ miles WSW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal) thence: WNW of Sollidsgrund (1½ miles W), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: WNW of Herr Peder (2 miles NNW), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: ESE of Längan (4 miles NNW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: W of Slottsbredan Lighthouse (black tower, green band and lantern, grey conical base, 21 m in height, floodlit) (56°55′⋅7N, 16°36′⋅0E), standing on a rock on the W side of the shoal area, and ESE of Yttre Bengtsan (4 miles NNW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal). Thence: WNW of Elefanten (4 miles N), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: WNW of Marsgårdskulan (5 miles NNE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), and: ESE of Mannegrund (6½ miles NNW), an extensive reef and islet, marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: WNW of Lars Perssonsgrund (9 miles NNE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: ESE of Flisbotten (10 miles N), and: ESE of Skallen (10½ miles N), thence: To a position E of Dämman Light (orange tower, black band, grey base, 21 m in height) (57°03′⋅4N, 16°41′⋅4E). The former lighthouse stands on Dämman, a rock 5 cables W of Dämman Light. This route is also covered by the white sector (196½°–200°) astern, of Sillåsen Light, leading to the white
Anchorages and harbours Anchorages 1
2
3
4.102 In the area between Kalmar and Skäggenäs (56°47′N, 16°28′E) anchorage may be obtained in the following areas: (a) About 4 cables N of Krongrundet Lighthouse (56°41′⋅4N, 16°24′⋅3E) in depths of 5⋅5 to 11⋅0 m, clay. (b) About 1½ miles W of Masknaggen Lighthouse (56°43′⋅8N, 16°28′⋅3E) in depths of 5⋅6 to 9⋅0 m, mud and clay. This anchorage is suitable for smaller vessels sheltering from N winds. (c) To the NE of Skäggenäs in depths of 15 to 20 m, clay. In poor weather there are no good anchorages in Kalmarsund N of the anchorage NE of Skäggenäs. Charts 2843 with plan of Stora Rör
Stora Rör 1
2
3
165
4.103 Description. Stora Rör (56°45′⋅3N, 16°31′⋅6E) is a small harbour on the W coast of Öland, well sheltered except in SW gales. It is formed by N and S breakwaters with a W facing entrance, about 30 m wide, and is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 3⋅0 m. A short inner mole projects SW from the N part. It is a former ferry terminal from the mainland. The main export is stone, the main import being fertilizer. Directions. The approach is made in a white sector (166°–191°) of Ispeudde Light (4.97) on the alignment (085°) of Stora Rör Leading Lights: Front light (orange triangle, red border, on mast) (56°45′⋅4N, 16°31′⋅7E), displayed from the NE corner of the harbour. Rear light (similar structure), 35 m E of front light. This alignment leads about 6 cables E through the entrance between the breakwater heads to the NW part of the harbour which has depths of 3⋅6 m. The other parts of the harbour are shallow.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
4
Berths. There is a quay 40 m in length with a depth alongside of 3⋅4 m and three former ferry berths now disused and partially demolished. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Regular sea services to Kalmar and other ports in Kalmarsund.
1
2
Chart 2843
Revsudden 1
2
3
4.104 Description. Revsudden (56°46′N, 16°29′E), a small fishing harbour, lies close NNW of Revsudde, the SE point of Skäggenäs, on which stand a number of buildings including a former lighthouse and a pilot lookout. The harbour is situated in a small inlet, protected on its E side by a breakwater. It is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 1⋅8 m and has a depth of 2⋅3 m. Directions. Leave the recommended through track close N of Sillåsen Light (56°45′⋅8N, 16°29′⋅8E) thence approach from the SE on the alignment (305°) of Revsudden Leading Beacons: Front beacon (orange triangle, red border, on post) (56°46′⋅5N, 16°28′⋅8E), standing at the head of the harbour. Rear beacon (similar structure) (110 m WNW of front beacon). This alignment leads about 7 cables WNW to the harbour through a buoyed (lateral) channel between shoal patches off the entrance. Berths. A quay 130 m in length with a depth alongside of 2⋅4 m provides a number of berths for fishing and pleasure craft. Facilities: slip; ramp; all usual facilities for small craft. Supplies: fresh water; provisions.
3
4
5
6
4.106 Directions. There are two approach channels, one from NW which is seldom used, and the main channel from WNW, authorised for a draught of 4⋅0 m. From a position S of Herr Peder shoal (56°54′⋅0N, 16°36′⋅3E), the approach is on the alignment (111°) of Borgholms Inlopp Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, red border, on metal framework tower) (56°52′⋅7N, 16°38′⋅8E), displayed from the SE corner of the harbour close to the NNE end of a large white hotel building. Rear light (similar structure), 200 m ESE of front light. This alignment leads 1¼ miles ESE through the fairway marked by buoys (lateral), passing N of Kråkan, a shoal 3 cables W of the entrance, to a position in the entrance channel at the S end of Hamngrund, marked by a buoy (port hand). Thence to the alignment (081°) of Borgholms Hamn Leading Lights: Front light (green metal framework tower, white top) (56°52′⋅9N, 16°38′⋅9E), displayed from the N part of the harbour. Rear light (similar structure) (80 m E of front light). This alignment leads 2 cables E to the outer harbour basin through the partially dredged buoyed entrance channel. Berths. In the outer industrial basin there is a total of 450 m of berthing space with depths alongside of about 4⋅4 to 5⋅0 m, including the principal quay which is 130 m long, the oil berth and the ferry berth in the NW of the basin. The inner basin, with depths of 2 to 4 m has numerous small craft berths. Repairs: engine repairs can be effected. Facilities: hospital; customs; all usual facilities for small craft. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications: ferries to mainland in summer season.
Chart 2844 with plan of Borgholm
Borgholm 1
2
3
4
4.105 Description. Borgholm (56°53′N, 16°39′E) is the principal town and harbour on Öland situated on the W coast. Two breakwaters protect the harbour which consists of an outer, industrial basin, and an inner basin for small craft formed by a pier and a short breakwater. The harbour is equipped to handle bulk grain, oils and ferry traffic. Principal export is grain. Principal import is fertilizer. The population is about 2500. Port Authority. Borgholms Kommun, Byggnadskontoret, S–38700 Borgholm. Ice. In severe winters the harbour may be closed during January and February. Anchorage may be obtained in the roads, with favourable conditions, in depths of 7 to 11 m. Local knowledge is required. Pilotage. Pilots may be obtained from Kalmar. Landmarks: Borgholm Castle (56°52′⋅2N, 16°38′⋅6E) (4.95), with Solliden Castle, 4 cables SW. Light-coloured silo, 27 m in height, standing on the N side of the harbour. Borgholm Church (white with black pointed spire) (56°52′⋅8N, 16°39′⋅4E). Water Tower (56°52′⋅5N, 16°42′⋅9E), at Köping.
Charts 2843, 2844
Pataholm 1
2
1
2
166
4.107 Description. Pataholm (56°55′N, 16°26′E) is a small timber loading harbour situated in a bay near the mouth of Alster Ån, 7 miles N of Skäggenäs. It is suitable for vessels with a draught of 3⋅5 m and vessels with a draught of 5 m can reach the anchorage in the outer roads. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from January to April. Anchorage may be obtained in an area about 5 cables WNW of Paslan Beacon (white cairn, pole with X topmark, 4 m in height) (56°53′⋅6N, 16°30′⋅6E), standing on an islet on the NE side of the approach channel, in depths of about 10 m, clay. Local knowledge is required. Landmark: Chimney (56°54′⋅5N, 16°26′⋅4E), charted, at Saltor, 5 cables SE of Pataholm. 4.108 Directions. From a position about 2 miles SE of Paslan Beacon (4.107), the track leads 4½ miles NW through a buoyed (lateral) channel to the harbour area, passing (with positions from Paslan Beacon): NE of Eneskärsrevet (1½ miles SSE), thence: Close SW of Yttre Paslan (8 cables SE), thence: NE of Millgrundsrevet (5 cables S), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
3
Close SW of the shoal area extending SW from Paslan Beacon, thence: SW of Pata Eneskär, an islet (6 cables NW), thence: Through the buoyed channel to the harbour at Saltor, close N of the chimney (56°54′⋅5N, 16°26′⋅4E). A speed limit of 5 kn is in force within the area 1 mile SE of Pataholm. Berths. A jetty with a berth 20 m long and a depth alongside of 3⋅7 m. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
2
3
Chart 2844
Timmernabben 1
2
3
4
5
6
4.109 Description. Timmernabben (56°58′N, 16°26′E) together with adjoining Tillingenabben form a town which is a timber loading harbour situated 3 miles N of Pataholm (4.107). The harbour and approach channel are suitable for a vessel with a draught of 3⋅0 m. The population is about 900. Ice. The channel and harbour are usually obstructed by ice from January to March. Landmark: Matge Beacon (white three sided pyramid, inverted triangle topmark, 7 m in height) (56°57′⋅5N, 16°28′⋅2E), standing on an islet 6 cables E of Tillingenabben. Directions. From a position 1 mile WSW and in the green sector (048°–098°) of Slottsbredan Light (56°55′⋅7N, 16°36′⋅0E) (4.100) the fairway leads 4½ miles NW to the harbour, between the shoals, through a buoyed channel (lateral) passing, (with positions from Slottsbredan Light): NE of Längan (1½ miles SW) (4.100), and: SW of Yttre Bengtsan (7 cables W) (4.100), thence: SW of Störgrund (2 miles WNW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NE of Yttre Tången (2 miles W), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NE of Väderöbåden (3 miles WNW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Close NE of Stora Väderön (3¾ miles WNW). Thence follow the buoyed channel to the harbour passing SW of Matge Beacon, as above. Useful mark: Two leading beacons (56°57′⋅7N, 16°26′⋅8E), at Tillingenabben. Berths. A pier, about 92 m in length, has depths of 3⋅0 to 3⋅7 m alongside the outer 30 m of its N side. There is a Ro-Ro berth, marked on the chart, and other finger piers with berths for small pleasure craft. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Chart 2844 with plan of Mönsterås
Mönsterås 1
4.110 Description. Mönsterås (57°02′N, 16°27′E), an industrial town and well-sheltered harbour, lies about 14 miles S of Oskarshamn (4.140). It has an outer harbour situated on Oknö, a peninsula SE of the town which is connected to the mainland by road. The inner harbour lies close SE of the town. Principal exports include timber goods and grain. Imports include fertilizers and cement. The population is about 6000.
6
167
Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from January to March. Anchorage. Anchorage may be obtained in the outer roads in a position W of Råggrund (57°00′⋅4N, 16°32′⋅1E), about 2 cables NNE of Oknö Rear Leading Light, in depths of 5⋅5 to 10⋅0 m, mud and clay. In the inner roads anchorage may be obtained in a position N of the NW part of Oknö, in depths of 5 to 9 m, mud and clay. Anchoring is prohibited within 100 m of a submarine power cable, shown on the chart, laid between Oknö and Björnö Ekleskär (57°01′⋅5N, 16°30′⋅5E), crossing the channel SE of the inner roads. Pilotage. Local knowledge is required and pilot assistance is recommended for vessels with a draught exceeding 2⋅8 m. Pilots are available from Kalmar or Oskarshamn. Landmarks: Kävershäll (57°04′⋅1N, 16°22′⋅7E) (4.95). Water tower (57°03′⋅0N, 16°26′⋅3E). Mönsterås Church (57°02′⋅6N, 16°26′⋅8E). Chimney (57°02′⋅3N, 16°27′⋅0E), close SSE of church. Major lights: Oknö Leading Lights (57°00′⋅2N, 16°32′⋅0E). 4.111 Directions. Outer and inner harbours are approached and entered on the alignment of leading lights through well buoyed channels. The channel to the inner roads is suitable for 4⋅7 m draught and the dredged, partly blasted, channel from the inner roads to the inner harbour has a depth of 3⋅1 m over a width of about 20 m and is suitable for a draught of 2⋅8 m but is liable to silting. Outer harbour — Oknö Leading Lights: Front light (lantern on white hut, red rectangle with white stripe) (57°00′⋅2N, 16°32′⋅0E), displayed from the E point of Oknö. Rear light (similar structure), (300 m W of front light). From a position in the vicinity of the fairway buoy (safewater) moored on the leading line, 2½ miles E of the front light, the alignment (270½°) of these lights, visible only on the leading line, leads 3 miles W to the outer roads and harbour through a buoyed (lateral) channel passing, (with positions from the front light): N of Sjöberget (2½ miles ESE), thence: N of Stengrund (2 miles ESE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: S of Bettysgrund (1¾ miles E), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: N of Blockbåden (1¼ miles ESE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: S of Stora Svartören (6 cables ENE), thence: Close S of Råggrund (2 cables NNE), marked at its S end by a buoy (S cardinal). Thence SW to the outer harbour berths or NW to the anchorage as required. Inner harbour — Mönsteråsredden Leading Lights: Front light (lantern on stone pedestal) (57°00′⋅8N, 16°31′⋅4E), displayed from a rock. Rear light (post) (1⋅1 miles NW of front light). From a position 4 cables E of Oknö Front Light the alignment (309°) of these lights leads about 1 mile NW to a position in the inner roads in the white sector (100°–114½°), astern, of the front light, following the buoys and passing close S of the front light. The leading line does not clear the inner shoals.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
7
8
Thence, marked by buoys, the track leads 2½ miles NW to the inner harbour through the dredged channel which must be transited at reduced speed to lessen suction effect. Berths. In the outer harbour on Oknö there is a T-shaped jetty with a length of 45 m and a depth alongside of 4⋅5 m. A ferry berth with a depth alongside of 4⋅2 m lies immediately S of the jetty. The inner harbour has a total of 380 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of about 3⋅0 m. Södra Kajen, 150 m long, provides berths for small pleasure craft. Repairs. Minor facilities. Facilities: doctor; customs office. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Directions (continued from 4.101) 1
2
Useful marks
DÄMMAN TO BLÅ JUNGFRUN
4.119 1
General information Chart 2844
Route 1
4.118 From a position E of Dämman Light (4.100) the fairway leads 12 miles NNE to Blå Jungfrun, passing (with positions from Dämman Light): E of Kvisslan (3 miles NNW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: WNW of Hornsudde (57°11′⋅8N, 16°54′⋅1E) (11 miles NE), on which stands a beacon (a former lighthouse, elevation 10 m). Thence to a position either W or E of Blå Jungfrun, although passage to the E of the island is recommended to give a more direct track when using the through route N or S.
4.112 From a position E of Dämman (57°03′⋅4N, 16°41′⋅6E) the route to Blå Jungfrun leads NNE for 12 miles through open water.
Finnrevet Lighthouse (57°16′⋅6N, 16°38′⋅1E) (4.159). Light tower (disused) (red tower, white top, 6 m in height), standing on the W side of Blå Jungfrun. (Directions continue at 4.178) (Directions for Sandvik are given at 4.134, for Stora Jättersön at 4.125 and for Påskallavik at 4.136)
Stora Jättersön Chart 2844 with plan of Stora Jättersön
General information
Topography 1
4.113 There are few natural features in this area either on the mainland or on Öland, with the exception of Kävershäll (4.95), NW of Mönsterås. Blå Jungfrun (Blue Virgin) (57°15′N, 16°48′E) is a prominent, evenly conical, steep sided, rocky island which lies in the middle of the fairway 10 miles E of Oskarshamn. Cloud formations around the summit and mirage phenomena often make illusory changes in the appearance of the island. It is a national park area and nature reserve for which local protective regulations are in force.
1
2
Pilotage 1
4.114 See 4.7 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
3
Ice 1
4.115 In severe winters, areas of compact pack-ice may be found in this region of the sound.
Limiting conditions 1
Landmarks 4.116 Kävershäll (57°04′⋅1N, 16°22′⋅7E). Sandvik Windmill (conspicuous) (57°04′⋅3N, 16°51′⋅6E). Oskarshamn Water Tower (57°16′⋅2N, 16°26′⋅5E). A radio mast stands close E. Blå Jungfrun (57°15′N, 16°48′E) (4.113).
4.121 Maximum permitted draught: In N main approach channel — 7⋅5 m. In SE approach channel — 4⋅8 m. Maximum size of vessel. With pilot assistance and visibility not less than 2 miles a vessel of 150 m in length and maximum 7⋅5 m draught may enter through the N channel.
Arrival information 1
Other aids to navigation 1
4.120 Position. Stora Jättersön (57°06′N, 16°33′E) lies on the mainland 10 miles SSE of Oskarshamn (4.140) on a point situated in the sound between the islands of Vållö, Bokö and Norstö and the coast, about 5 miles NW of Dämman Light. Function. A commercial harbour with facilities for handling bulk and liquid cargoes, serving a fairly large industrial complex. Principal exports are cellulose pulp and liquid resin. Principal imports are woodpulp, fuel oil and chemicals in bulk. Topography. Vållöromp (57°06′N, 16°38′E), the SE part of the island of Vållö, is densely wooded and is clearly distinguishable from N or S. Kungsholmen (57°06′N, 16°34′E), an islet 4 cables SW of the SW point of Vållö, is covered with tall pinewoods and is easily identified in the sound when approaching from the SE.
4.117 Racons: Dämman Light (57°03′⋅4N, 16°41′⋅4E) (4.100). Stötbotten Light (57°16′⋅5N, 16°33′⋅2E) (4.159). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
168
4.122 Vållö Anchorage. Anchorage may be obtained in an area about 2 cables NW of Kungsholmen (57°06′N, 16°34′E) in depths of 10 to 12 m, mud and clay. The anchorage is restricted in size and is exposed to strong N winds. Anchorage is prohibited within 100 m of the submarine power cables laid across the channel from Svartö (57°05′N,
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
2
16°34′E) to Vållö and from Ödängla (57°03′N, 16°35′E) to Dämman Light (4.100). Pilotage is compulsory for certain categories of vessel and pilots are available from Kalmar or Oskarshamn and ordered from VTS Oxelösund. Pilot boards, as shown on the charts, 1½ miles NE of Runnö (57°10′N, 16°33′E). See also Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) and 4.7.
1
Harbour 1
1
4.123 General layout. The harbour consists of an open roadstead partially sheltered and protected by islets and islands to the NE and by the land to the S and SW. 4.124 Landmarks: Oskarshamn Water Tower (57°16′⋅2N, 16°26′⋅5E). Påskallavik Church (57°09′⋅5N, 16°27′⋅9E). Emsfors Chimney (57°08′⋅6N, 16°27′⋅0E). Chimneys (three) at factory (57°05′⋅6N, 16°33′⋅1E). Dämman disused lighthouse (57°03′⋅5N, 16°40′⋅5E).
2
3
Directions 1
2
4.125 Clearing marks: NE point of Runnö-Rödskär (57°11′⋅1N, 16°34′⋅5E), an islet. Oskarshamn Water Tower (57°16′⋅2N, 16°26′⋅5E). Approaching the N main entrance channel from the SE the alignment (320°) of these marks, in the white sector (169°–209°) of Dämman Light (4.100), leads clear NE of the following shoals in the approach (with positions from Dämman Light): Kvisslan (3 miles NNW) (4.118). Slätsänkan (3½ miles NNW). Väringen (4½ miles NW). Klockaren (6 miles NNW), marked by a buoy (N cardinal).
4
5
and Storgrundet, marked by a buoy (S cardinal), 6 cables farther W. Two pairs of beacons, standing close W and 2 cables SW of Åsehorn front light respectively, each pair in line bearing 212°, mark the edges of this short channel. 4.127 Boköskär Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on post) (57°06′⋅4N, 16°33′⋅7E), displayed from a rock close off the SW point of Bokö. Kungsholmen. Rear light (red triangle on red and white framework tower), displayed from Kungsholmen, 820 m SSE of front light. Visible only on leading line. Leading beacons: Front beacon (triangular board, white with red edges) (57°08′⋅7N, 16°32′⋅0E), standing on Stora Tärnskär, a rock 2 cables SSE of rear beacon. Rear beacon (similar structure), standing on the NE point of Littlö (57°08′⋅9N, 16°31′⋅9E). The alignment (158°), ahead, of these lights and the alignment (338°), astern, of these leading beacons, leads 9 cables SSE to a position 3 cables from the front light, above, passing (with positions from the front light): ENE of Vasterskär (6 cables NNW), marked on its E side by a buoy (port hand), thence: ENE of Själeviksgrundet (4 cables NNW), marked on its E side by a light-buoy (port hand). Norstö Leading Lights: Front light (framework mast, red, yellow, red board 6 m in height) (57°07′⋅0N, 16°33′⋅7E) displayed from NW of Bokö. Rear light (same structure, 7 m in height) (57°07′⋅1N, 16°33′⋅7E) displayed from SW of Noströ. The alignment (011°), astern of these lights leads about 8 cables S from Själeviksgrundet to a position close to the jetty or alternatively about 5 cables S and E to the anchorage, through a channel marked on each side by buoys (lateral).
Main approach channel from north-east 1
2
3
4
4.126 Åsehorn Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, point up, on red framework tower, 20 m in height) (57°06′⋅9N, 16°32′⋅1E), displayed from a small headland. The structure also carries a red triangular daymark, point down, for use as a leading mark from SE. Rear light (similar structure, daymark point down, 32 m in height), (850 m SSW of front light). From a position 1 mile SE of Runnö-Rödskär (4.125), close to the pilot boarding position and before Oskarshamn Church (57°15′⋅8N, 16°27′⋅0E) is visible clear SE of Runnö-Rödskär, the approach is made on the alignment (212°) of these lights. This alignment leads 4 miles SSW to a position 1 mile from the front light, passing (with positions from the front light, above): SE of Lillgrund (3½ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SE of Inre Runnögrund (3 miles NNE), noting a rock 1½ cables S, marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: NW of Sandögrundet Västra Light-buoy (W cardinal), (2¼ miles NNE), thence NW of Örskärsgrund Västra Light-buoy (W cardinal) (1¾ miles NNE). Thence through a short dredged and blasted channel, 70 m wide with a depth of 8⋅2 m and marked by buoys and light-buoys, between Stora Sandreholm (1¼ miles NNE)
Secondary approach channel from east-south-east 1
2
3
4
169
4.128 From a position about 5 cables N of Dämman Light (57°03′⋅4N, 16°41′⋅4E) approach with Lökskäret Beacon (red triangle, point up) (57°05′⋅2N, 16°35′⋅1E) ahead bearing 290°. This line of bearing leads 2 miles WNW through the fairway, marked by buoys (lateral), passing (with positions from Dämman Light): NNE of Dämman disused light tower (5 cables W), thence: SSW of Nygrund (2¼ miles NW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NNE of Gåsö (2½ miles WNW) on which stands Gåsö Beacon (cross on white cairn, 4 m in height), thence: NNE of Gåsögrund (3 miles WNW), thence: Leading marks: SW point of Kungsholmen (57°06′N, 16°34′E). Åsehorn Front Leading Light (red triangular daymark, point down) (57°06′⋅9N, 16°32′⋅1E). The alignment (311°) of the above marks leads 1½ miles NW to a position close S of Kungsholmen through a narrow channel marked on each side by buoys. Shoal patches, close to the maximum authorised draught, lie in the centre of the channel close to the leading line. Thence the channel leads for about 5 cables to the harbour or anchorage.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
1
2
3
4
Alternative approach channel from south
Chart 2844 with plan of Sandvik
4.129 Gåsöleden, with a depth of about 3⋅9 m, leads from the S to connect with the secondary channel described above at a position 2½ miles NW of Dämman Light but this channel should only be used in good weather and visibility. Approach from a position about 2 miles SW of Dämman Light with Gåsö Beacon (4.128), standing on Gåsö (57°04′⋅3N, 16°36′⋅8E), ahead bearing 340°. This line of bearing leads about 1¼ miles NNW to a position with Dämman disused light tower abeam bearing 070° and 1 mile NE of Svartingsskär (57°02′⋅5N, 16°35′⋅5E). Leading beacons: Front, Lilla Sillekrok Beacon (white cairn, red diagonal stripe) (57°05′⋅5N, 16°37′⋅2E). Rear, Vållöromp Beacon (triangle, point up on white cairn) (57°06′N, 16°37′E), standing on the W end of the island. The alignment (353°) of these beacons leads 1¾ miles N through the shoals to a position 4 cables NNE of Gåsö Beacon to join with the secondary E channel, passing between the buoys marking the E limit of the shoal area off Gåsö and the W limit of Gåsöb, 4 cables E of Gåsö.
Sandvik
Berths 1
1
2
3
4
4.130 A concrete quay is constructed on a point close NE of the factory area running NW-SE. The quay is 140 m in length with a depth alongside of about 8⋅0 m. A breasting dolphin 20 m SE of the SE end, and joined to the quay by a bridge, forms an extension to the quay. There is a mooring buoy moored about 40 m SE of the dolphin to assist in berthing. Liquid cargoes are handled at the SE end of the quay through pipelines.
Chart 2844
Services 1
4.131 All services are located in Mönsterås (4.110), 5 miles SW.
Påskallavik 1
Harbours Chart 2844
Svartö 1
4.132 A small fishing harbour lies in an inlet (57°05′⋅1N, 16°34′⋅4E) in the NE part of Svartö, 1 mile SE of Stora Jättersön (4.120). It is approached and entered on the alignment (182°) of Svartö Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (pedestals, elevations 4 and 7 m respectively), displayed when required.
2
3
1
Chart 2844 with plan of Stora Jättersön
Estenäs 1
4.134 Description. Sandvik (57°04′N, 16°52′E) lies on the coast of Öland about 13 miles NNE of Borgholm (4.105). It is a former loading place which is now a fishing, small craft and pleasure craft harbour suitable for a draught of 3⋅0 m. It is generally well sheltered except in gales from the W. The harbour is formed by two breakwaters, N and S, with an entrance 28 m wide facing W. A speed restriction of 5 kn is in force within the harbour. The population is about 300. Landmark: Sandvik Windmill (57°04′⋅3N, 16°51′⋅6E). Directions. From the W approach is made on the alignment (084°) of Sandvik Leading Lights: Front light (yellow triangle, red border, on post) (57°04′⋅2N, 16°51′⋅3E), displayed from the rear of the harbour. Rear light (yellow triangle, red border, on mast) (85 m E of front light). This alignment leads E to the harbour through a partly dredged channel which is liable to silting in the entrance near the breakwaters. Berths. The NW part of the harbour has depths of about 4⋅0 m. There is a quay, with a length of 35 m and depths alongside of 3⋅4 to 4⋅0 m, on the inside of the N breakwater. The E part contains a number of pleasure craft berths and the S part, which is very shallow, has some small jetties on the inside of the S breakwater. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
4.133 Estenäs (57°06′⋅4N, 16°35′⋅1E) lies at the SW point of Vållö. It is approached and entered on the alignment (026°) of Estenäs Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (pedestals, elevations 4 and 6 m respectively), displayed when required. A pier 25 m in length with a depth alongside of 2⋅4 m extends from the shore.
2
170
4.135 Description. Påskallavik (57°10′N, 16°28′E) is a small harbour situated 6 miles S of Oskarshamn (4.140) and suitable for a draught of 4⋅2 m. It is well sheltered in all but NE gales. Also included in the harbour area are Marseholm, Norra Vånevik and Näset, loading places which lie within 2 miles N of Påskallavik. Entry to the harbour should only be made by day and in good weather due to the narrow and tortuous entrance channels. Local knowledge is essential. Principal exports are paper products and stone. Imports include oil, sulphur and limestone. The population is about 2000. Landmarks: Påskallavik Church (57°09′⋅5N, 16°27′⋅9E). Emsfors Chimney (57°08′⋅6N, 16°27′⋅0E). 4.136 Directions for south entrance This channel is an extension of the Stora Jättersön main entrance channel. Follow the directions given at 4.126 to a position where the channels branch, 7 cables NNE of Åsehorn Front Leading Light (57°06′⋅9N, 16°32′⋅1E) and 5 cables SSE of Storgrundet (4.126). Thence follow the track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys (lateral and cardinal) on each side, leading for about 5 miles through the shoals to the SW of Runnö, to the harbour.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
3
4
1
2
1
2
Directions for north entrance Leading marks. The alignment (226°) of the following marks leads from a position N of Runnö (4.122) through the N part of the channel: Flutan Beacon (white disc on black pole, wooden stays) (57°10′⋅8N, 16°30′⋅3E), standing on a rock 1 mile NW of Runnö. Påskallavik Church (57°09′⋅5N, 16°27′⋅9E). This alignment leads 2 miles SW to Flutan Beacon, entering the buoyed channel close N of Portklappen, marked by a buoy (starboard hand), 7 cables NE of the beacon. Thence follow the track, shown on the chart, between the buoys (lateral), 1½ miles SW through the channel to the harbour. Påskallavik Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (illuminated rectangular boards, elevations 6 and 15 m, 110 m apart) (57°09′⋅7N, 16°27′⋅8E), displayed from the shore close S of the harbour pier when required by fishing vessels. The alignment of these lights is 269½°. Caution. A 2⋅2 m shoal patch exists in the middle of the harbour basin. 4.137 Anchorage. Anchorage may be obtained in depths of 4 to 13 m, mud, clay and rock, in the roadstead to the NNE of the harbour enclosed by Fågelöarna, the islands close NE of the harbour, Vånevik, about 1 mile N of the harbour and the islands of Kuggö and Storö, about 6 cables farther E. Anchorage is prohibited within 100 m of a submarine power cable laid across the channel from Skälevik, 1½ miles SE of the harbour, to the SW point of Runnö. 4.138 Berths. A pier with a length of 100 m and a depth alongside of 4⋅0 to 4⋅6 m extends SE from the shore. Immediately N of the pier there is a quay with a length of 90 m and a depth alongside of 5⋅0 m. At Marseholm, about 7 cables N, there is a jetty with a length of 44 m and a depth alongside of about 4⋅5 m. At Norra Vånevik, about 1½ miles N, there is a jetty with a length of 38 m and a depth alongside of 2⋅4 m. At Näset (chart 2846), 2 mile N, there is a jetty with a depth alongside of 2⋅9 m. Facilities. Medical in Oskarshamn. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
harbours at Ärnemar (4.171) and Kolberga (4.172) together with the loading anchorage at Saltvik (4.173), 2 miles NNE of the harbour.
Function 1
2
Topography 1
4.139 Runnö fishing harbour (57°09′⋅7N, 16°31′⋅7E) lies on the W side of the island, 2 miles E of Påskallavik. The harbour is approached from the W on the alignment (089°) of Runnö Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (posts, elevations 6 and 11 m respectively, 300 m apart) (57°09′⋅7N, 16°31′⋅7E), displayed from the harbour for the use of fishing boats.
1
1
1
4.140 Oskarshamn (57°16′N, 16°27′E) is a fairly large well sheltered natural harbour situated in an inlet in the NW part of Kalmarsund. Also included are the small craft
4.144 In 2003 the port was visited by 312 vessels totalling 1⋅8 million dwt.
Port Authority 1
4.145 Oskarshamns Hamn AB, Norra Strandgatan 50, SE−572 32 Oskarshamn, Sweden. Website: www.port.oskarshamn.se E-Mail:
[email protected]
Limiting conditions Controlling depths 1
4.146 The controlling depths are those in the main channel to the anchorage area and Klubbdjupshamnen, which is dredged to a depth of 11⋅0 m, and the inner harbour which is dredged to a general depth of about 8⋅0 m. Maximum permitted draughts: Channel to Klubbdjupshamnen — 10⋅5 m. Channel to inner harbour — 7⋅6 m.
Deepest and longest berth
General information Position
4.143 The harbour is approached on the alignment of leading lights through channels marked by buoys and light-buoys, and entered on the alignment of leading lights through a dredged channel marked by buoys and light-buoys. An alternative approach from the SE may be made on the alignment of leading lights, through a buoyed channel, directly to the outer harbour area.
Traffic
OSKARSHAMN AND APPROACHES
Charts 2846 with plan of Oskarshamn, 2844
4.142 The area surrounding Oskarshamn is generally low, wooded and featureless. The approaches are protected by numerous reefs and shoals and Furö (57°17′N, 16°37′E), a low almost barren island fringed by reefs and rocks. Örbåden lies on its E side, Blackbåden on the SW side and Finnrevet, on which stands a lighthouse (4.159), on the SE side.
Approach and entry
Runnö 1
4.141 The port is a safe modern harbour with good anchorage. It is a major commercial harbour well equipped for handling most types of vessel including ferries, Ro-Ro, tankers, general cargo and container. A shipbuilding and repair industry is based at the shipyard. Principal exports include timber products, paper, woodpulp, piece goods and stone. Imports include kaolin, oils, plate, pig iron, forestry products and paper. The population of Oskarshamn is about 15 000.
1
4.147 Klubbdjupshamnen berths 51–54 (containers and general cargo) (4.169).
Density of water 1
171
4.148 The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅000 g/cm3.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
Ice
and the second to the N. The main entrance from the NE lies between these breakwaters with a minor entrance off the S end of the E breakwater. The outer part of the harbour, Klubbdjupshamnen, contains the oil jetty and deep-water berths, thence a channel leads to the inner harbour containing the shipyard, ferry, Ro-Ro and small craft berthing areas.
4.150 The harbour is normally free from ice but, if necessary, the channels are kept open by ice-breakers.
Local magnetic anomaly
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
1
4.149 A vessel with a length of 215 m and a draught of 10⋅5 m.
2
1
Arrival information
Landmarks
Port radio 1
4.151 Oskarshamn Hamnradio (Oskarshamn Harbour Radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Outer anchorage 1
4.152 Anchorage may be obtained in Grimskalledjupet (57°16′⋅4N, 16°29′⋅2E), to the NNE of the harbour, in depths of 12 to 20 m, clay and rock.
4.159 1
2
Submarine cables 1
4.153 Submarine power cables are laid in the vicinity of the breakwater NE of Klubbdjupshamnen as shown on the chart. See 1.71.
Pilotage 4.154 Oskarshamn Pilot Station provides service 24 hours. Requests for pilots should be made 12 hours in advance to the cental co-ordinating centre at Oxelösund VTS. The pilot station is located at Grimskallen on the N side of the harbour entrance. Pilots board SSE of Furö (57°17′N, 16°38′E), as shown on the plan. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
4.155 Available and compulsory for larger deep-draught vessels proceeding to the anchorage or berthing, and vessels going to the shipyard.
Main channel from east 1
2
Speed 1
4.156 A speed restriction of 7 kn is in force within the harbour.
3
Harbour 4
General layout 1
4.160 Racon: Stötbotten Light (57°16′⋅5N, 16°33′⋅2E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Directions for entering harbour
Tugs 1
Blå Jungfrun (57°15′N, 16°48′E). Oskarshamn Water Tower (57°16′⋅2N, 16°26′⋅5E). A radio mast stands close NE. Finnrevet Lighthouse (white tower, black band, grey conical base, 16 m in height, floodlit) (57°16′⋅6N, 16°38′⋅1E). Stötbotten Lighthouse (red tower on grey concrete base, 13 m in height, floodlit) (57°16′⋅5N, 16°33′⋅2E). Water tower (57°15′⋅5N, 16°26′⋅6E), in S part of town. Oskarshamn Church (57°15′⋅8N, 16°27′⋅0E). Chimney at Kristineberg heating plant (57°15′⋅0N, 16°28′⋅2E).
Other aid to navigation 1
1
4.158 An anomaly is reported to exist in the area between Oskarshamn and Blå Jungfrun (57°15′N, 16°48′E).
4.157 The harbour is constructed mainly in a natural inlet with shoal areas and islets off the entrance which is formed and protected by two detached breakwaters, one lying to the E
172
4.161 Tillingeö Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, point up) (57°17′⋅0N, 16°30′⋅9E), displayed from Saxskär. Rear light (red triangle, point down), displayed from Tillingeö, 750 m WNW of front light. From a position ESE of the pilot boarding position, about 1½ miles SSE of Finnrevet Light (57°16′⋅6N, 16°38′⋅1E) (4.159), the track, as shown on the plan, leads 3½ miles WNW through the fairway, on the alignment (289½°) of the above lights, to a position 1¼ miles from the front light, passing (with positions from Finnrevet Light): Between a light-buoy (S cardinal) (9 cables SSW), and another buoy (port hand) moored 1¼ cables farther SSW which mark the entrance to the main channel, thence: NNE of a buoy (port hand), (2 miles WSW), marking the S limit of the channel, and: SSW of a buoy (S cardinal), (2¼ miles W), marking the N limit of the channel, thence: Close NNW of Stötbotten Light (57°16′⋅5N, 16°33′⋅2E) (4.159). This section of the fairway is also covered, firstly by the white sector (287°–289½°) of Stötbotten Light, and
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
secondly by the white sector (288°–290½°) of Tillingeö front light. In addition, a fixed white spotlight displayed from Stötbotten Lighthouse marks the limit of the fairway. Ärnemar Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle on pedestal) (57°15′⋅7N, 16°29′⋅4E), displayed from an islet forming part of the small craft harbour to the SE of the main harbour. Rear light (similar structure) (425 m SW of front light). The alignment (245°) of these lights leads 8 cables SW through the buoyed channel to a position 1½ miles from the front light, close N of the light-buoy (port hand) marking the outer end of the entrance channel. Thence: 4.162 Grimskallen West Leading Lights: Common front light (white lantern on red frame) (57°16′⋅3N, 16°28′⋅8E), displayed from the NE part of the harbour. Rear W light (red triangle on framework tower) (600 m W of common front light). The alignment (271°) of these lights leads 1½ miles W to the anchorage in Grimskalledjupet through the first part of the entrance channel, marked by buoys and light-buoys (lateral), passing N of Fidogrund, or alternatively if proceeding to the harbour entrance the same (271°) alignment leads 1 mile through the buoyed channel to a position 6 cables from the common front light above. Thence: Ovädersudden Leading Lights: Front light (orange pole) (57°15′⋅7N, 16°28′⋅5E), displayed from the S of the harbour. Rear light (orange triangle on post) (208 m SW from front light). The alignment (234°) of these lights leads 5 cables SW to the harbour entrance and the outer harbour, through the second part of the buoyed entrance channel, passing (with positions from the SE end of the N breakwater): NW of a beacon (2 cables E) standing on the N end of the E breakwater, thence: SE of Katygrund (1½ cables NE) which is floodlit and on which stands a beacon, thence: NW of M Blackgrundet (1 cable SE), marked on its NW side by two buoys and a light-buoy (all port hand). 4.163 Continuation channel to inner harbour Badholmen Directional Light (white metal framework tower) (57°15′⋅9N, 16°27′⋅3E), displayed from a small islet at the head of the harbour. This light ahead bearing 284° in the white sector (281°–287°) of the light, leads W through the harbour to the head, passing S of Rävenäset, an islet and rocky shoal area extending from the N side of the harbour, marked at its S limits by two light-buoys (starboard hand).
2
Approach from south-east 1
2
3
1
2
3
4.166 A short buoyed channel, authorised for a draught of 7⋅6 m, leads from the anchorage in Grimskalledjupet to the outer and inner harbour. From a position in the anchorage 3 cables E of Grimskallen Common Front Light (57°16′⋅3N, 16°28′⋅8E), the alignment (about 193°) of Klubb Beacon (white disc on white stayed pole, 13 m in height), standing on an islet 2 cables W of the E breakwater, with Ärnemar Rear Light (57°15′⋅5N, 16°29′⋅0E), in the white sector (191½°–195°) of the light, leads 3 cables S to a position 1½ cables N of Klubb Beacon passing W of Katygrund (4.162) and between the light-buoys marking the harbour channel inside the breakwaters. Thence to the alignment (234°) of Ovädersudden Leading Lights, described above, and follow the directions given for the outer and inner harbour. Caution. On passing Katygrund ensure that no traffic is operating in the main channel before entering the harbour.
Useful marks 4.167
Approach from north-east 4.164 This channel, passing N of Furö, is for use by day. Local knowledge is required. From a position about 1 mile NE of Furö (57°17′N, 16°37′E) the approach is made with Oskarshamn Church (57°15′⋅8N, 16°27′⋅0E) ahead bearing 253°. This track leads about 1½ miles WSW through the shoals passing close SSE of Furögrunden (57°17′⋅5N, 16°36′⋅5E), marked by a buoy (S cardinal) and between two buoys (lateral) moored 7 cables NW of Furö.
4.165 Grimskallen North Leading Lights: Common front light (57°16′⋅3N, 16°28′⋅8E) (4.162). Rear light (red triangle, point down, on white framework tower) (400 m NW of common front light). From a position about 3½ miles S of Stötbotten Light (57°16′⋅5N, 16°33′⋅2E) the alignment (321°) of these lights leads 3½ miles NW through the fairway, marked by buoys (lateral), to enter the outer harbour close S of the E breakwater, passing (with positions from Stötbotten Light): NE of Barneskärsgrunden (3¼ miles SSW), thence: SW of Uppgrund (2 miles SSW), thence: NE of Oron (2½ miles SSW), marked by a buoy, thence: SW of Rundeln (2 miles SSW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NE of Garpen (2½ miles SW), thence: NE of Ålgårdsskär Beacon (red and white cairn, 1⋅5 m in height) (2¼ miles SW), thence: SW of Lars-Olsgrunden (2 miles WSW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NE of Tälleskär (2¼ miles WSW), thence: SW of the S end of the E breakwater, marked by a buoy (starboard hand).
Side channel
1
1
Thence to the alignment (245°) of Ärnemar Leading Lights (4.161) which leads 1½ miles SW through the fairway joining the main approach channel close NW of Stötbotten Light. Thence follow the directions for that channel to the harbour.
Mynterhäll Beacon (57°17′⋅3N, 16°33′⋅0E). Gråsjälsbåden Beacon (57°16′⋅7N, 16°30′⋅9E). Ljusberget Beacon (57°15′⋅9N, 16°30′⋅2E). Grimskallen Beacon (57°16′⋅2N, 16°28′⋅5E).
Basins and berths Basins 1
173
4.168 The outer harbour, Klubbdjupshamnen, is the deep-water area of the harbour. The S part of the harbour contains the shipyard in the E and Södra Kajen in the W. The NW part
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
of the harbour contains Norra Kajen and the small boat harbour.
Berths 1
2
3
3
4.169 Klubbdjupshamnen contains a total of 350 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 11⋅0 m for general, timber and container traffic and an oil jetty, in the N part, with a length of 26 m and a depth alongside of 11⋅0 m. The shipyard area contains a total of about 580 m of berthing space with depths of 3⋅0 to 8⋅0 m alongside. About 150 m is being developed for ferry traffic. Södra Kajen has a total berthing space of 445 m with depths alongside of 5⋅0 to 7⋅3 m including a Ro-Ro berth with moveable ramp. The N part of the harbour has a total of about 1100 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 4⋅5 to 8⋅0 m including a large Ro-Ro berth. The small boat harbour contains numerous berths with depths of 2 to 3 m alongside. The former oil jetty, situated at Grimskallen, 2 cables N of the N breakwater, is 40 m long with a depth alongside of 12⋅0 m.
1
2
General information Charts 2844, 2251, 2361
Route 1
1
1
1
Directions 1
2
Saltvik 1
2
4.173 Saltvik (57°18′N, 16°30′E) lies in a small inlet 2 miles NNE of Oskarshamn. It is a timber loading place and provides an anchorage in depths of about 3 to 8 m, clay and mud situated at the mouth of the inlet. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice in January and February. Directions. Follow the directions for Oskarshamn given at 4.161 or 4.164 to a position about 6 cables WNW of Stötbotten Light (57°16′⋅5N, 16°33′⋅2E), in the white sector (288°–290½°) of Tillingeö front light (57°17′⋅0N,
4.177 Landmarks: Blå Jungfrun (57°15′N, 16°48′E). (4.113) Oskarshamn Water Tower (57°16′⋅2N, 16°26′⋅5E). Chimney (red light) at Simpevarp Power Station (57°25′N, 16°40′E). Radio mast (red light) (elevation 113 m) 3 cables WNW of chimney, above. Radio mast (red lights) (elevation 130 m) (57°21′N, 17°04′E), on Öland. Major light: Ölands Norra Udde Light (57°22′⋅1N, 17°05′⋅7E). (continued from 4.119)
Kolberga 4.172 Kolberga (57°16′⋅7N, 16°28′⋅7E), a small craft harbour lies about 1 mile NE of Oskarshamn. It is entered through a buoyed channel in the NW part of Grimskalledjupet, the anchorage area to the NE of Oskarshamn harbour.
4.176 See 4.7 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Principal marks
Ärnemar
1
4.175 The coastline between Oskarshamn and Kråkelund is level, wooded and featureless. It is fringed by numerous islands and dangers extending up to about 3 miles offshore. On the E side, the N part of Öland is steep and mainly wooded with no major natural features.
Pilotage
Anchorages and harbours 4.171 Ärnemar (57°15′⋅6N, 16°29′⋅1E) a small craft and yacht harbour lies at the SE side of Oskarshamn harbour. It is entered from the outer harbour through a buoyed channel and contains a number of berths with depths of 2⋅5 to 5⋅0 m. Facilities: boat and engine repairs; slip; crane.
4.174 From Blå Jungfrun the route leads NNE for 12 miles, firstly through shoals and thence open water, to a position about 5½ miles E of Kråkelund (57°27′N, 16°44′E).
Topography
2
1
shown on the chart, between the channel Tillingeö front light. is laid, extending of the inlet. 250 tonnes.
BLÅ JUNGFRUN TO KRÅKELUND
Port services 4.170 Repairs of all kinds at shipyard. Floating dock with lifting capacity of 2000 tonnes, maximum size of vessel: 81 m long; 14⋅7 m breadth; draught 5⋅0 m. Other facilities. Oily waste reception; hospital; customs station; deratting; authorised compass adjuster. Supplies. All grades of fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Local airport 10 km N of town. Nearest international airport at Kalmar 72 km distant. Ferry services to Gotland and Öland. Rescue. The pilot vessel will act as a lifeboat if required.
16°30′⋅9E). Thence follow the track, 1½ miles NW to the harbour passing buoys (lateral) moored 5 cables N of Caution. A submarine pipeline 3 cables E and ESE from the head Facilities. Slip for vessels up to
3
4
174
4.178 From a position E or W of Blå Jungfrun (57°15′N, 16°48′E) the fairway leads NNE for 12 miles to a position E of Kråkelund, passing (with positions from Blå Jungfrun): ESE of Midbredan (4 miles N), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), and: WNW of Byrumsgrund (3 miles NE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal) and affected by heavy swell in N to NE gales, thence: ESE of Bennen (5 miles NNW), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), and: WNW of Enerumsgrund (5 miles NNE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal) and affected by heavy swell in N to NE gales, thence: WNW of Tokenäsudde Light (white lantern) (57°19′⋅3N, 16°59′⋅8E) (8 miles NE), thence: ESE of Y Rönnerev (7 miles NNW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: ESE of Knallarna (7½ miles NNW), thence: ESE of Bredgrund (10 miles NNW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
To a position E of Kråkelund (11¾ miles NNW), on which stands a beacon (triangle on white pyramid, 12 m in height) which from NE resembles a yacht under sail. 4
Useful mark 4.179 1
Finnrevet Light (57°16′⋅6N, 16°38′⋅1E) (4.159). (Directions continue at 5.18) (Directions for Figeholm are given at 4.182, for Simpevarp at 4.189 and for Byxelkrok at 4.184) 5
Approach to Kalmarsund from north
1
Chart 2361 4.180 Vessels approaching from N or NE should pass clear W of Knolls Grund (57°33′N, 17°28′E) (2.8) and clear W of Ölands Norra Grund (57°28′N, 17°09′E) (4.206) before entering Kalmarsund about 6 miles E of Kråkelund Beacon (57°26′⋅5N, 16°43′⋅5E) (4.178). Thence follow the directions given for the N passage from Kalmar to Kråkelund, in reverse order. Currents. See 4.11.
Chart 2361 (see 1.34)
Byxelkrok 1
Harbours Chart 2846 plan of continuation to Figeholm
Figeholm 1
2
1
2
3
4.181 Description. Figeholm (57°22′N, 16°33′E) a small, former commercial, now recreational harbour lies on the NW side of Fågelöfjärd, 7 miles NNE of Oskarshamn. It is administered by the Oskarshamn port authority and is suitable for vessels with an authorised draught of 3⋅5 m but the approach channel is narrow and tortuous in places. Local knowledge is required. The harbour entrance is usually obstructed by ice from December to March. A speed restriction of 5 kn is in force within the harbour. 4.182 Directions. Leading marks: Hommeskär Beacon (white slatted truncated pyramid on lattice framework, 9 m in height) (57°21′⋅0N, 16°36′⋅5E), standing on a rock about 5 m above sea level. Fågelö former pilot cabin (yellow gable, facing SE) (57°21′⋅8N, 16°35′⋅4E), standing on the islet of that name. The pilot cabin mark may be difficult to identify due to heavy vegetation growth. The alignment (320°) of these marks leads from a position about 2 miles ENE of Furö (57°17′N, 16°37′E), 4½ miles NW through the fairway to a position 2 cables from Hommeskär Beacon, close SE of the entrance channel, passing close SW of V Blackan (57°20′⋅2N, 16°37′⋅8E), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand, seasonal). Thence the fairway leads about 2½ miles NW to the harbour through the entrance channel, marked on each side by buoys (lateral). An alternative approach may be made from the NE through the inshore coastal route which, although well
marked by buoys, is very narrow and tortuous. Local knowledge is required. Useful marks: Finnrevet Light (57°16′⋅6N, 16°38′⋅1E) (4.159). Rödskär Light (white tower, 6 m in height) (57°18′⋅4N, 16°35′⋅4E), displayed when required. Gröttlan Light (57°24′⋅3N, 16°40′⋅0E) (4.189). Lilla Bergö Beacon, standing on a islet 1 cable N of Fågelö, above. Hägnekubben Beacon (white cross on pole) (57°22′⋅5N, 16°35′⋅5E), standing on the N shore of the inlet. Anchorage. Anchorage may be obtained N of Fågelö (57°21′⋅8N, 16°35′⋅4E) in depths of about 12⋅0 m, clay. Berths. The outer harbour has a quay about 50 m long with mooring buoys and a depth of 4⋅0 m. The inner harbour contains a number of yacht and small craft berths with depths of 2⋅0 m. Facilities. Boat lift with truck to a maximum of 8 tonnes. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
1
2
3
1
175
4.183 Description. Byxelkrok (57°19′N, 17°00′E) is a small fishing harbour, with ferry traffic, on the W coast of Öland, about 4 miles SW of Ölands Norra Udde, the N point of the island. The harbour is formed and protected by a long breakwater extending SW and S from the shore and contains two separate piers extending W from the shore. The entrance faces S. The outer part of the harbour to the W end of the S pier is dredged to a depth of 4⋅5 m. The remainder of the harbour has depths between 1⋅5 to 3⋅6 m. 4.184 Directions. Byxelkrok Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on white post) (57°19′⋅6N, 17°00′⋅5E), displayed from the breakwater head which is floodlit. Rear light (red triangle on hut) (242 m SE of front light). From NW approach is made on the alignment (125°) of the above lights. This alignment leads 1 mile SE through the fairway and the entrance channel, to the harbour entrance, passing (with positions from the front light above): SW of Torrbogrund (1¾ miles NNW), thence: Through the buoys (lateral) (1½ cables NW), marking the entrance channel between the coastal shoals, thence: To the harbour entrance close S of the breakwater head and N to the harbour. Useful marks: Ölands Norra Udde Light (57°22′⋅1N, 17°05′⋅7E) (4.205). Tokenäsudde Light (57°19′⋅3N, 16°59′⋅8E) (4.178). Radio masts (red lights), 1⋅4 miles E and 1⋅2 miles ESE respectively, of Tokenäsudde Light, above. 4.185 Berths. The ferry berth, with a length of about 60 m and a depth alongside of 4⋅5 m lies on the S side of the S pier. The central basin between the two piers has a total of about 185 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 2⋅1 to 2⋅4 m. The N part of the harbour and the inside of the
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
2
breakwater have about 70 berths for small craft and visiting yachts with depths between 1 to 2 m. Facilities. Slip for small craft. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Ferry services to Oskarshamn and Västervik.
2
3
Simpevarp 1
2
1
1
1
4.186 Description. Simpevarp (57°25′N, 16°40′E) lies on the mainland 11 miles NNE of Oskarshamn (4.140) and 3 miles SW of Kråkelund. It is an artificial industrial harbour which serves a nuclear power station situated close NW. The harbour is formed and protected by a 200 m long breakwater extending SSW from the shore containing a single basin dredged to a depth of 6⋅0 m. Entry to the harbour is not possible in strong winds from E to S. Pilots are available from Oskarshamn. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. 4.187 Regulations. The harbour is surrounded by a prohibited area and unauthorised entry is prohibited. Unauthorised persons may not enter the harbour area and photography is forbidden. 4.188 Landmarks: Chimney (red light) at Simpevarp Power Station (57°25′N, 16°40′E). Radio mast (red light) 3 cables WNW of chimney, above. Kråkelund Beacon (57°26′⋅5N, 16°43′⋅5E) (4.178). 4.189 Directions. Simpevarp Leading Lights: Front light (red square, yellow stripe, on framework tower) (57°24′⋅6N, 16°40′⋅5E), displayed from the breakwater head. Rear light (similar structure) (370 m W of front light).
4
5
6
Approach from the vicinity of Simpevarps Approach Light-buoy (safewater) (57°24′⋅7N, 16°45′⋅7E), moored 2¼ miles SSE of Kråkelund Beacon, on the alignment (267°) of the above lights. This alignment leads 2¾ miles W to the harbour through the fairway, authorised for a draught of 5⋅5 m and marked by buoys (lateral), passing (with positions from the front light, above): S of Bredgrund (2¾ miles ENE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: S of Rönnbusken (1 mile E), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: N of Lillgrund (6 cables ESE), marked by a buoy (spar), thence: S of a submarine pipeline (2 cables ENE), marked at its outer end by a buoy. Thence to the harbour ensuring that the breakwater head is cleared by at least 25 m. A turning area, the limits of which are marked by buoys, dredged to a depth of 6⋅0 m, lies SW of the harbour. A submarine power cable is laid from the shore to Gröttlan Lighthouse, passing close W of the turning area off the harbour. Anchoring is prohibited within 25 m of the cable. Useful mark: Gröttlan Light (red lantern on white support, 2 m in height, floodlit) (57°24′⋅3N, 16°40′⋅1E), displayed from an islet 4 cables SW of the harbour. Berths. A jetty, with a length of 20 m, lies on the inside of the breakwater. Two breasting dolphins, connected by bridges to the jetty, are situated off both the inner and outer ends to form a total length of 110 m with a depth alongside of 6⋅0 m. On the W side of the harbour there is a quay with a length of 30 m and a depth alongside of 6⋅0 m. A Ro-Ro ramp, 14 m wide and with a 6⋅0 m depth lies at the head of the harbour. It is close N of and placed in line with the main berth described above. Rescue. A fully equipped rescue craft is stationed at Simpevarp.
ÖLAND — EAST COAST depth contour lies at a distance of about 3 miles from the general line of the coast. Vessels navigating in the area SE of Ölands Södra Udde are governed by a TSS (4.195). The Inshore Traffic Zone may only be used by those eligible to do so.
GENERAL INFORMATION Chart 2251
Area covered 1
4.190 This section covers the coastal waters adjacent to the E coast of Öland from a position S of Ölands Södra Udde (56°12′N, 16°24′E) to Ölands Norra Udde (57°22′N, 17°06′E). It includes anchorages, the channels to the small harbours on the E side of Öland and the off-lying shoal areas at the N end of the island.
Topography 1
ÖLANDS SÖDRA UDDE TO KAPELLUDDEN
4.192 The E side of Öland is low, part wooded, part bare with no significant natural features. This creates an illusion causing the land to appear to be more distant than it actually is, especially in hazy conditions. Soundings may be a useful aid for position fixing in poor visibility. The coastline is fringed by rocks and shoals extending about 1 mile offshore.
Restricted areas General information 1
Chart 2251
Route 1
4.191 From a position S of Ölands Södra Udde and clear of Ölandsrev Buoy (4.21), the route leads 50 miles NNE to a position E of Kapelludden (56°49′N, 16°51′E). The 20 m
176
4.193 Anchoring, fishing and underwater operations are prohibited in a restricted area, shown on the chart, established (56°25′⋅5N, 16°41′⋅7E) 4 miles ENE of Skärlöv (4.201), to protect the historic wreck of the Royal Swedish Ship Kronans. A further area in which anchoring, fishing and diving are prohibited, is in the vicinity of a wreck in position 56°10′⋅7N, 16°39′⋅7E, as shown on the chart.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
Fishing 1
4.194 From September to May intensive salmon fishing takes place off the E coast of Öland. See 1.20.
ESE of Pinngrund (8½ miles NNE), thence: ESE of Folkeslundagrund (9 miles NNE), thence: ESE of Bengts backe (13 miles NNE), thence: ESE of a buoy (E cardinal) (15½ miles NNE), marking the 10 m contour, thence: To a position E of Kapelludden Light (4.196).
4
Traffic Separation Scheme 1
2
4.195 A TSS for the use of vessels passing off the S end of Öland is established SE of Ölands Södra Udde and centred on Ölands Södra Grund (56°04′N, 16°41′E), on which stands a light (2.13). The area, shown on the chart, between the inner separation zone boundary of the traffic lanes and the coast, is a designated Inshore Traffic Zone which may be used by vessels allowed to do so, coming from Kalmarsund, and E-bound vessels coming from Swedish harbours between longitudes 14°40′E and 16°00′E, passing between Utklippan Light (3.206) and Ölands Södra Udde. The scheme is IMO adopted and Rule 10 of International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972) applies.
Useful marks 4.199 1
2
Gräsgård Church (56°18′⋅6N, 16°30′⋅5E). Segerstad Church (56°21′⋅7N, 16°32′⋅3E). Hulterstad Church (56°27′⋅0N, 16°34′⋅2E). Stenåsa Church (56°30′⋅8N, 16°36′⋅1E). Gårdby Church (56°36′⋅1N, 16°38′⋅2E). Two radio masts (red lights) (56°38′⋅5N, 16°38′⋅0E). Norra Möckleby Church (56°38′⋅8N, 16°41′⋅0E). Runsten Church (56°42′N, 16°42′E). Långlöt Church (56°44′⋅4N, 16°43′⋅7E). Gärdslösa Church (56°47′⋅6N, 16°44′⋅4E). (Directions continue at 4.206)
Harbours
Principal marks 1
2
4.196 Landmarks: Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse (56°04′⋅2N, 16°41′⋅0E) (2.13). Radio mast (red light) (56°14′⋅0N, 16°27′⋅5E), NE of Ölands Södra Udde. Kapelludden Lighthouse (red framework tower, 32 m in height) (56°49′⋅3N, 16°50′⋅8E), standing on a headland of that name. Radio mast (red light) (elevation 142 m) (56°50′⋅3N, 16°44′⋅0E). Major light: Ölands Södra Udde Light (56°11′⋅8N, 16°23′⋅8E) (4.19).
Gräsgårdshamn 1
2
Other aid to navigation 1
4.197 Racon: Ölands Södra Grund Lighthouse (56°04′⋅2N, 16°41′⋅0E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
3
4.200 Gräsgårdshamn (56°19′N, 16°32′E), a small fishing harbour, lies 3 miles SSW of Segerstad Light. The harbour, formed by two breakwaters with a 12 m wide entrance, has an entrance channel with a least depth of 1⋅5 m. Both the channel, and the harbour which is suitable for a draught of 1⋅3 m, are liable to silt. Local knowledge is required. Directions. Gräsgård Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle on white framework tower) (56°19′N, 16°32′E), displayed when required from the harbour. Rear light (black triangle on black framework tower) (95 m NW of front light). The alignment (322½°) of these lights leads NW to the harbour through a buoyed channel. Anchorage may be obtained 4 cables S of the harbour entrance in a depth of about 4⋅0 m, rock and sand. The anchorage is sheltered from E by a long narrow reef but is open to the S.
Skärlöv Directions 1
2
3
4.198 From a position about 9 miles S of Ölands Södra Udde the route leads 50 miles NNE to a position E of Kapelludden, passing (with positions from Sandby Church (56°35′N, 16°39′E)): ESE of Ölandsrev Buoy (E cardinal) (30 miles SSW) (4.21), thence: ESE of a 7⋅1 m shoal(24 miles SSW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal). A wreck lies 1¾ miles WSW of the buoy. Thence: ESE of two wrecks, with depths of 9 and 15 m over them (18 miles SSW), marked on their E side by a buoy (E cardinal). Össbygrund, a shoal area, lies off the coast NW of the wrecks. Thence: ESE of Segerstad Light (white round stone tower, 22 m in height) (56°22′⋅2N, 16°34′⋅1E) (13 miles SSW), thence: ESE of Sävgrund (6½ miles S), thence: ESE of Hallnäsgrund (3 miles SE), thence: ESE of Hagbygrund (3½ miles NE) and clear of the wreck with a depth of 13 m over it 2 miles E, thence:
1
4.201 Skärlöv (56°25′⋅5N, 16°34′⋅9E) is a small fishing harbour 15 miles NNE of Ölands Södra Udde. The harbour has a depth of 1⋅1 m and is protected by a breakwater. Directions. It is entered on the alignment (295°) of Skärlöv Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (red triangles on pedestals, 73 m apart) (56°25′⋅5N, 16°34′⋅9E), displayed from the harbour when required by fishing vessels.
Bläsinge 1
2
177
4.202 Bläsinge (56°37′⋅2N, 16°42′⋅1E) is a small fishing harbour situated on the E coast of Öland 8 miles ESE of Ölandsbron (4.49) which joins the island to the mainland. It is protected from the S by a breakwater and the harbour has a depth of 2⋅1 m suitable for vessels with a draught up to 1⋅5 m. Directions. Approach from ESE on the alignment (310°) of Bläsinge Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white triangles, black borders, on posts, 95 m apart) (56°37′⋅3N, 16°42′⋅1E) displayed from the harbour.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
The harbour is entered through a dredged channel passing close N of the breakwater head. A quay on the N side of the breakwater has a depth alongside of 2⋅0 m.
KAPELLUDDEN TO ÖLANDS NORRA UDDE
5
1
General information Charts 2251, 2361, Swedish Chart 624 (see 1.34)
Routes 1
4.203 Coastal route. From a position E of Kapelludden (56°49′⋅3N, 16°50′⋅8E) the route leads initially NNE thence NW to a position N of Ölands Norra Grund (57°28′N, 17°09′E), a shoal area 12 miles NE of Ölands Norra Udde. Inshore route. From a position on the coastal route NE of Ängjärnsudden (57°18′⋅5N, 17°09′⋅0E) the fairway leads initially N thence W and NW for 5 miles on the recommended track, shown on the national chart, to a position N of Ölands Norra Udde (57°22′N, 17°06′E).
2
Inshore passage north of Ängjärnsudden 1
Topography 1
4.204 See 4.192.
Landmarks 4.205 1
Borgholm Castle (56°52′⋅2N, 16°38′⋅6E) (4.95), visible over the island bearing 235°–260°. Radio mast (red light) (elevation 142 m) (56°50′⋅3N, 16°44′⋅0E). Ölands Norra Udde Lighthouse (white round stone tower, 32 m in height) (57°22′⋅0N, 17°05′⋅9E) displayed from an islet on Storgrundet at the N point of Öland. Radio mast (red lights) (elevation 130 m) (57°21′N, 17°04′E).
ESE of Tån (5 miles NE), thence: NE of Skansgrund (6½ miles N), an extensive shoal area with a least depth of about 6⋅4 m, thence: SW of Knolls Grund (17 miles NE) (2.8), thence: To a position N of Ölands Norra Grund. 4.207 Useful marks: Bredsätra Church (56°50′⋅7N, 16°47′⋅8E). Egby Church (56°52′⋅5N, 16°49′⋅5E). Löt Church, tower surmounted by a belfry and cross, (56°55′⋅2N, 16°50′⋅4E). Föra Church (57°00′⋅8N, 16°52′⋅1E). Persnäs Church (57°04′⋅1N, 16°56′⋅0E). Källa Church (57°07′⋅3N, 16°58′⋅1E). Höby Church (57°09′⋅9N, 17°01′⋅0E), and radio mast 8 cables W. Böda Church (57°14′⋅7N, 17°03′⋅7E).
2
1
4.208 From a position NE of Ängjärnsudden the track leads N, W then NW for 5 miles to a position N of Ölands Norra Udde, passing (with positions from Ängjärnsudden (57°18′⋅5N, 17°09′⋅0E)): Between Bredgrund (2½ miles NNE), an extensive shoal with a least depth of 6⋅7 m over Laggrund, its S part, and Temman (4 miles NE), another extensive shoal, thence: S of Grytgrund (4½ miles N), thence: NE of Flisgrund (4½ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: To a position N of Ölands Norra Udde. 4.209 Useful marks: Masts (red lights) (57°19′N, 17°02′E). Beacon, standing on shore (57°20′⋅3N, 17°07′⋅7E). (Directions for Kårehamn are given at 4.212, for Böda at 4.215 and for Grankullavik at 4.219)
Directions
1
2
3
4
(continued from 4.199)
Harbours
Coastal passage
Kårehamn
4.206 From a position E of Kapelludden the track leads NNE for 37 miles thence NW for about 9 miles to a position N of Ölands Norra Grund, a rocky shoal marked by a light-buoy (N cardinal) and another buoy (W cardinal), passing (with positions from Ängjärnsudden (57°18′⋅5N, 17°09′⋅0E)): ESE of Marskär (26 miles SSW), thence: ESE of Varholmsudde (23 miles SSW), noting an 8⋅5 m wreck 1½ miles ESE, thence: ESE of Matkroksgrund (21 miles SSW), thence: ESE of Klappervall (19½ miles SSW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: ESE of Yttergrund (18½ miles SSW), and noting a detached bank with a least depth of 20 m (17 miles S), thence: ESE of Högby Light (white framework tower, 23 m in height) (57°08′⋅8N, 17°02′⋅8E), (10½ miles SSW), thence: ESE of Kesnäsudden (8½ miles SSW), a headland, thence: ESE of Sandryggen (6½ miles SSW), thence: ESE of Flatbådan (1¾ miles SW), and: ESE of Knölen (1½ miles SE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence:
4.210 Description. Kårehamn (56°57′N, 16°53′E) is a well sheltered fishing and leisure craft harbour situated on the E coast of Öland 9 miles NE of Borgholm (4.105). The harbour is formed by two breakwaters extending NNE from the shore with a extension spur off the W breakwater creating two basins. The channel to the harbour is authorised for a maximum draught of 3⋅3 m. 4.211 Anchorage. Anchorage may be obtained in a position about 2 cables SW of Kårholm Beacon (56°57′⋅4N, 16°54′⋅2E), S of the entrance channel, in a depth of 4⋅0 m, sand and clay. Local knowledge is required. Vessels may also anchor in the outer roads about 2½ miles E of Varholmsudde, a headland 2 miles SE of the harbour, in a depth of 18 m, sand and clay. 4.212 Directions. The harbour is entered through a channel 30 m wide, dredged to a depth of about 4⋅4 m and marked by buoys (lateral). From ESE approach is made on the alignment (289°) of Kårehamn Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, red border, on post) (56°57′⋅5N, 16°53′⋅0E), displayed close NW of the harbour when required by fishing vessels.
1
1
1
178
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 4
2
3
1
Rear light (white triangle, red border, on mast) (180 m WNW of front light). This alignment leads 3½ miles WNW to the entrance, passing (with positions from the front light, above): NNE of a wreck (2½ miles ESE), with a depth of 8⋅5 m over it, thence: Between the buoys (lateral) (1¼ miles ESE), marking the outer end of the entrance channel, thence: SSW of Kårholm Beacon (white stone cairn, red band, 3⋅9 m in height) (6 cables E), standing on the S end of an islet of that name (56°57′⋅4N, 16°54′⋅2E), thence: To a position about 3 cables W of Kårholm Beacon where the channel turns SSW to the harbour entrance. An alternative approach from seaward to the buoyed channel may be made with Alböke Church (56°56′⋅8N, 16°47′⋅2E) ahead bearing 265°. This track clears all charted dangers to the entrance channel. 4.213 Berths. The outer basin, the fishing harbour, has an entrance about 30 m wide and contains 185 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 3⋅6 m. The inner basin contains a total of about 165 m of berthing space with depths ranging from 3⋅0 m on the E side to 1⋅0 m on the inner W side. Facilities. Slip, capacity 50 tonnes. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
1
2
Grankullavik 1
2
Swedish Chart 624 (see 1.34)
Böda 1
2
1
2
3
4.214 Description. Böda (57°14′N, 17°05′E), a fishing and pleasure craft harbour lies at the SW limit of Bödabukten, a wide, open bay situated 5 miles S of the N point of Öland. The harbour, suitable for a draught up to 3⋅0 m, is formed by two breakwaters extending E from the shore with angled ends giving an entrance 32 m wide with a depth of 3⋅5 m over a width of 18 m. A short central pier and a short spur extending S from the N breakwater form two basins within the harbour. 4.215 Directions. Böda Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white triangles, black borders, 200 m apart) (57°14′⋅4N, 17°04′⋅6E), front displayed from centre of S breakwater when required by fishing vessels. From ESE the alignment (298°) of the above leading lights leads about 8 cables WNW, through the outer part of the buoyed entrance channel, to a position 3½ cables from the front light. Leading light and beacon: S Breakwater Head Light (white triangle, black border) (57°14′⋅5N, 17°04′⋅8E), displayed when required by fishing vessels. Böda Beacon (white triangular board, black edges, on post), standing on the shore 2 cables NW of S breakwater head. Thence, the alignment (315°) of the above light and beacon leads 3 cables NW through the inner part of the buoyed channel to the harbour entrance between the breakwater heads which are floodlit when required. The buoyed entrance channel has a general depth of about 3⋅5 m.
4.216 Berths. The outer E basin has a total of 160 m of berthing space with depths of 3⋅0 to 4⋅0 m alongside. The W inner basin has about 80 m of berthing space, on detached pontoons, with depths of 1⋅9 to 2⋅3 m alongside, mainly for pleasure craft. Facilities. Slip, capacity 30 tonnes. Supplies: fuel oil in small quantities; fresh water; provisions in small quantities. Rescue. Two fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at Böda.
1
2
1
2
1
179
4.217 Description. Grankullavik (57°20′⋅8N, 17°05′⋅5E), a ferry and small craft harbour, lies on the W side of Grankullaviken, a large enclosed bay at the N end of Öland. The harbour basin, which is reached by a channel across the bay, is authorised for a draught up to 4⋅0 m. The harbour is formed by a breakwater projecting ESE from the shore protected by a wooden former cargo pier close N, the head of which is demolished. A piled breakwater runs SSW from a position close S of the N breakwater leaving an entrance to the W part of the basin about 20 m wide. A partially demolished detached stone block lies about 75 m S of the N breakwater and about 65 m E of the piled breakwater. Ice. The bay is usually obstructed by ice during February and March. 4.218 Anchorages. In the outer roads anchorage may be obtained, in good weather or with light S winds, on the coastal shoals N of Ölands Norra Udde in depths of about 6⋅5 m, sand and stone. Alternatively, anchorage may be obtained in a position about 1 mile NE of Ölands Norra Udde Lighthouse in depths of about 18 m, clay. In Grankullaviken well sheltered anchorage may be obtained about 5 cables ENE of the breakwater in depths of about 8 to 9 m, clay. Local knowledge is required. 4.219 Directions. From NE the bay is entered at a point 7 cables ESE of Ölands Norra Udde Lighthouse (57°22′⋅0N, 17°05′⋅9E) through a channel between the chain of islets enclosing the bay on the alignment (219¼°) of Grankullaviken Hamn Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (white triangles, black borders, on masts, 400 m apart) (57°20′⋅6N, 17°05′⋅4E), displayed from the shore S of the harbour. The lights are visible on the leading line only. This alignment leads about 2 miles SW to the harbour, initially 8 cables through open fairway, thence through a narrow buoyed (lateral) channel about 6 cables in length, 40 m wide and finally a farther 8 cables through the fairway to the berths. 4.220 Berths. The wooden 200 m long cargo pier is in poor condition and closed to shipping. A 60 m long jetty with a depth alongside of about 5 m on its N side, extends from the outer end of the breakwater. A fixed ferry ramp lies at the landward end of the jetty. On the S side of the jetty there are a number of berths for fishing vessels with depths of 2 to 3 m. Other berths for pleasure craft lie farther W inside the harbour. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Home
Contents
Index Chapter 5 - Northern entrance of Kalmarsund to Landsort 17°
30´
59°
18°
30´
59°
3168
3143
Nyköping 5.280
3170
Landsort 3191
2362
Bråv
Norrköping 5.216
30´
2361
iken
Oxelösund 5.245 3218
3217
3218 Hävringe Gustaf Dalén
5.1
70
Fläskösund 3217 3217 Gränsösund 3217
Söderköping 5.164
3147 Arkö 3218
2361
30´
5.1
50
Slä
tba
ke n
3217
2362
5.13
0
Sandsänkan
Valdemarsvik 5.125
Häradskär
5.110
58° 5.94
58°
Gamleby 5.88 Storkläppen
2848 Västervik
5.47
5.66
2848
2848 Västervik
Gunnebo 5.45
5.10
Kungsgrundet
30´
30´ 2251
Kråkelund
0205
30´
Longitude 17° East from Greenwich
180
30´
18°
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 5 NORTHERN ENTRANCE OF KALMARSUND TO LANDSORT GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2361, 2362
Water level
Scope of the chapter 1
2
5.1 The area covered by this chapter comprises the E coast of Sweden from Kråkelund (57°27′N, 16°44′E) to Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E), about 86 miles NNE. Included in the description are the principal ports of Västervik (5.47), Norrköping (5.216) which lies some distance inland at the head of Bråviken (5.175), Oxelösund (5.245) and Nyköping (5.280) together with other minor harbours. It is divided into the following sections: Kråkelund to Västervik (5.9). Västervik to Arkö (5.93). Arkö to Landsort (5.165).
1
Pilotage 1
2
Description 1
2
5.2 Inshore channel. Within the limits of this chapter an inshore channel, shown on the charts, leads through the inner parts of the offshore coastal archipelago of islands and shoals from Kråkelund to a position NW of Landsort. Depths vary over the length of this route but if the deeper sections are chosen the channel is navigable throughout its length by vessels with a maximum draught of 5⋅0 m. Generally the route is sheltered from the open sea except for some short stretches. Local knowledge is required. Details of this route and the channels leading into it are given in the various sections. Caution. Within the limits of this chapter certain areas, indicated on the charts, are incompletely surveyed and may contain shoals or other dangers. These areas should not be entered.
5.4 On this section of coast the range in the water level may amount to 1⋅5 m. Winds from N and NE normally raise the level while winds from SW and W lower the level.
3
5.5 Pilotage for all major ports within this chapter is controlled by Oxelösund Pilot Station. Pilotage is available 24 hours and is compulsory for certain categories of vessels. Requests for pilots should be routed through Oxelösund VTS. Pilotage at Landsort is controlled by Mälaren/Landsort Pilot Station, located at Södertälje. Pilot boarding positions are as follows: Västervik: (i) In position 57°44′⋅9N, 16°50′⋅0E. (ii) 4 miles SSW of Kungsgrundet (57°41′N, 16°55′E). Norrköping, Oxelösund and Nyköping: 2 miles N of Gustav Dalén (58°36′N, 17°28′E), or S of Vinterklasen (58°38′N, 17°08′E), by special arrangement. Landsort: From 4 miles S of, and just W of Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E). For details of categories and further information see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Traffic regulation 1
5.6 Speed restrictions are in force for a number of areas within the limits of this chapter. The limits are indicated by boards standing on the sides of the channel or on buoys in the channel.
Topography 1
2
5.3 This section of the Swedish coastline is heavily indented with numerous long narrow inlets, the longest of which extend up to about 20 miles inland. The coast is fronted with innumerable islands, rocks and shoals which can extend up to about 12 miles offshore. There are few natural features which are easily identifiable to seaward. To compensate and assist with navigation, both coastal and within the narrow inshore channels, beacons are established at all the important entrances for identification. Some of these are visible well to seaward and may be used in conjunction with other artificial structures as landmarks.
Rescue 1
5.7 The Swedish Sea Rescue Association has fully equipped rescue craft stationed at Fyrudden/Gryt (58°11′⋅5N, 16°51′⋅2E) (5.142). See 1.156 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5 for details.
Local magnetic anomaly 1
181
5.8 Local magnetic anomalies are reported to exist in various locations. Details are given in the appropriate section.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
KRÅKELUND TO VÄSTERVIK Landmarks
GENERAL INFORMATION
5.16 Chart 2361
Hunö Böte (57°33′⋅4N, 16°38′⋅0E), a wooded hill steepest on its SW side, situated on the SE side of the island of Hunö. Henriksnäsberg (57°35′⋅6N, 16°35′⋅0E), a hill with a mainly flat top and steep sides on two levels. Spårö Beacon (57°42′⋅9N, 16°43′⋅7E) (5.63). Kungsgrundet Lighthouse (white lantern on black tower, red band) (57°41′⋅1N, 16°54′⋅4E), displayed from a rock; helicopter landing platform above lantern.
1
Area covered 1
5.9 This section covers the waters of the E coast of Sweden from Kråkelund (57°27′N, 16°44′E) to Västervik (57°45′N, 16°39′E). It includes a description of the channels to Västervik, including the harbour, and a general description of the coastal inshore channel with its entrances. Also included are the channels, minor harbours and inlets along the coast.
2
Other aids to navigation COASTAL AND INSHORE PASSAGES
1
General information
5.17 Racons: Vinökråkan Light (57°30′⋅8N, 16°44′⋅1E) (5.25). Kungsgrundet Light (5.16). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Chart 2361, Swedish Charts 624, 623 (see 1.34)
Coastal route 1
5.10 From a position E of Kråkelund (57°27′N, 16°44′E) the route leads NNE for 20 miles through open water to a position E of Västervik (57°45′N, 16°39′E), in the vicinity of the main approach channel entrance about 5 miles NE of Kungsgrundet Lighthouse (57°41′⋅1N, 16°54′⋅4E).
Directions for coastal passage 1
Inshore route 1
5.11 Within this section the inshore route leads from close N of Kråkelund, where there are three entrances, about 18 miles N to a position in the main Västervik approach channel.
2
Topography 1
5.12 The coastline, which is generally low and partially wooded, is fronted by numerous rocks, shoals and islands. Vinö (57°31′N, 16°42′E), a wooded island with Vårberget, a small hill 25 m in height on its SE side, lies close off the coast 4 miles NNW of Kråkelund. In clear weather it is easily identified from seaward.
3
(continued from 4.179) 5.18 From a position E of Kråkelund the track leads NNE for 20 miles to a position E of Västervik, passing (with positions from Kråkelund Beacon (57°26′⋅5N, 16°43′⋅5E): ESE of Blackan (3¾ miles ENE), a group of shoals with a least depth of 2⋅7 m, marked on their E side by Blackan Light-buoy (E cardinal), thence: ESE of Ljungskär Approach Light-buoy (safe water) (5½ miles NE), moored 2½ miles E of Strupö Ljungskär, thence: ESE of Vinkelgrundet (9½ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: ESE of Händelöpsgrund (13½ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), and: Clear of an 11⋅4 m shoal patch (15 miles NE), thence: ESE of Kungsgrundet Lighthouse (15½ miles NNE), thence: ESE of Hammarskärsgrund (17 miles NNE), thence: ESE of an 8⋅5 m shoal (17¾ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal).
Useful marks Pilotage 1
5.13 Pilots for the inshore channel are available from Västervik or Oxelösund.
5.19 1
Local magnetic anomalies 1
5.14 Local magnetic anomaly is reported to exist in an area 3 miles ESE of Ljungskär Beacon (57°30′⋅9N, 16°46′⋅5E). A second area of local magnetic anomaly is reported to exist in an area surrounding the submarine power cables laid between the mainland and the island of Gotland, in a position about 4 miles ESE of Kungsgrundet Lighthouse (57°41′⋅1N, 16°54′⋅2E).
Stora Tärnskäret Beacon (cairn), (57°33′⋅7N, 16°46′⋅9E). Lilla Utterklabben Beacon (former lighthouse) (57°34′⋅8N, 16°47′⋅8E), standing on a rock 1 mile NE of Örö. (Directions continue at 5.99)
Approaches to the inshore channel Channel marking 1
5.20 Throughout the length of the inshore channel shoals close to the fairway and narrow sections are marked by buoys (lateral and cardinal).
Former mined area 1
5.15 A former mined area, shown on the chart, within which anchoring, fishing or underwater operations are prohibited, is centred on a position 4½ miles SE of Kungsgrundet Lighthouse, in the S approaches to Västervik. See also 1.8.
Channels 1
182
5.21 There are three approach channels to the S limit of the inshore route (5.2), all of which converge at a position 3½ cables E of Vinökråkan Light (57°30′⋅8N, 16°44′⋅1E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Local knowledge is required for all these channels: (a) Kråkelunds entrance. (b) Ljungskär SE entrance. Should only be used by day. (c) Ljungskär E — main entrance.
Ljungskär east — main entrance 1
Kråkelunds entrance 1
2
3
4
5.22 From a position close E of Bredgrund (57°25′⋅0N, 16°45′⋅5E) (4.178) the track, shown on the chart, leads initially 2½ miles NNW, thence 3½ miles N through a narrow buoyed (lateral) channel to a position E of Vinökråkan Light where the channels merge. Approach with Soen Lighthouse (white lantern, red roof) (57°27′⋅6N, 16°44′⋅2E) ahead bearing 342° and in the white sector (341°–343°) of the light. This bearing ahead leads 2½ miles NNW through the fairway to a position 2 cables SSE of the light, passing (with positions from Soen Lighthouse): ENE of Knutsgrund (2¼ miles S), thence: ENE of Klockargrund (1¾ miles SSE), thence: ENE of Kråkelund Beacon (1¼ miles SSW) (4.178), thence: WSW of Marsbådan (7 cables SSE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), to enter the buoyed channel 6 cables SSE of the light. Thence follow the buoyed channel for 3 miles, initially in the white sector (008°–011°) of Galtbådan Light (lantern on white pedestal) (57°28′⋅7N, 16°44′⋅7E), displayed from a rock, secondly in the white sector (355½°–356½°) of Ekö Light (white lantern) (57°30′⋅2N, 16°44′⋅3E), displayed from the E side of the island of that name, and finally in the white sector (192°–205°) astern of Ekö Light.
2
3
4
Inshore channel Ljungskär to Skavdö 1
Ljungskär south-east entrance — draught 5 m 1
2
3
4
5.23 This entrance, for which local knowledge is required, should be used by day only. From a position about 2½ miles ENE of Kråkelund Beacon (57°26′⋅5N, 16°43′⋅5E) (4.178) the line of bearing 344° of Strupö Ljungskär Lighthouse (57°30′⋅8N, 16°46′⋅2E) (5.25) leads about 2 miles NNW, passing (with positions from Strupö Ljungskär Light): ENE of Gåsstensgrund (3 miles SSE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: WSW of Blackan Light-buoy (E cardinal) (3½ miles SE), thence: ENE of Lilla Örskären (2½ miles SSE), thence: Close WSW of Örskärsbåden (2 miles SSE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: ENE of Boskär (2 miles S), a densely wooded island, thence: NE of Norra Kråkorna (1½ miles S), thence: The track, as shown on the chart, leads NW for about 2 miles to a position E of Vinökråkan Light (57°30′⋅8N, 16°44′⋅1E) (5.25), passing: Close NE of Vinö Bredhäll Light, (white tower, black bands) (7 cables SSW), marked by a buoy (port hand), and: SW of Karten (1¼ miles SE).
2
3
5.26 From the junction of the entrance channels, 3½ cables E of Vinökråkan Light (57°30′⋅8N, 16°44′⋅1E) the inshore channel track, shown on the chart, authorised for a draught of 6⋅8 m and marked by light-buoys and buoys, leads 3½ miles NW, initially through Strupdjupet, to a position SE of Skavdö (57°34′N, 16°39′E) situated close E of Hunö (5.16). The following navigational marks lie within this section of the fairway: Mannen Light (white lantern, green top) (57°32′⋅6N, 16°42′⋅2E), displayed from a rock. Tunnholmen Light (white lantern, floodlit) (57°33′⋅4N, 16°41′⋅1E), displayed from a rock. Lilla Bergö Light (white lantern, floodlit) (57°33′⋅3N, 16°40′⋅6E), displayed from the N end of the island. The white sectors of these lights lead through the fairway in their vicinity.
Skavdö to Västervik 1
2
Useful mark 5.24 1
5.25 From the vicinity of Ljungskär Approach Light-buoy (57°30′⋅4N, 16°50′⋅9E) the channel leads 4 miles NW and W through a channel marked by buoys and light-buoys to a position E of Vinökråkan Light. Leading marks: Ljungskär Beacon (white concrete post, triangular topmark, cone shaped stays, 10 m in height) (57°30′⋅9N, 16°46′⋅5E), standing on the highest part of Ljungskär islet. Hunö Böte (57°33′⋅4N, 16°37′⋅5E) (5.16). The alignment (298°) of these marks by day, and at night in the white sector (271°–291°) of Strupö Ljungskär Light (white concrete tower, black base, 9 m in height) (57°30′⋅8N, 16°46′⋅2E), displayed from an islet, leads 2½ miles NW to a position 4 cables ESE of the light, passing (with positions from the light): Close NE of Engelsmansgrund (1¼ miles SE), marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: NE of Bredhäll (6 cables SE), thence: N of Styrbåden (5 cables SE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: The track leads W for 1¼ miles, through the buoyed channel, in the white sector (273½°–276°) of Vinökråkan Light (white concrete tower, red band, black base, 7 m in height, floodlit) (57°30′⋅8N, 16°44′⋅1E), displayed from a rock, to a position 3½ cables E of the light where the entrance channels merge.
Gåssten (57°27′⋅9N, 16°46′⋅7E), a steep, yellowish islet which is easily identified from N or S.
183
5.27 From a position SE of Skavdö, the track, authorised for a draught of 6⋅8 m, continues generally NE for about 4 miles thence N for about 5 miles to a position in Idöfjärden E of Lilla Rågbåden Beacon (57°41′⋅9N, 16°44′⋅8E) where it joins the Västervik S approach channel (5.68). The following navigational aids are situated along the fairway in this section of the channel: Mellanhäll Light (lantern on white pedestal, floodlit) (57°33′⋅8N, 16°41′⋅0E), displayed from a rock SE of Hamnö (57°34′N, 16°41′E). Eknö Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on white pedestal, floodlit) (57°35′⋅2N, 16°42′⋅5E), displayed from the SE side of Vasträ Eknö.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rear light (similar structure) (250 m SW of front light). The alignment (234°) of these lights, astern, leads through a narrow section of the channel SSE of Östra Eknö (57°37′N, 16°43′E). Alhällan Light (white concrete tower, black base, 6 m in height) (57°35′⋅9N, 16°44′⋅9E), displayed from a rock on the S side of the channel. The white sector (190°–192½°) of the light, astern, leads through the fairway about 1½ miles NNE. Förö Södra Beacon (white cairn), standing on the SE side of Förö (57°36′⋅1N, 16°44′⋅4E), and Förö Norra Beacon (white cairn), 1½ cables farther NNE. A reflector on Förö Södra Beacon is illuminated by a white beam projected from Alhällan Light. Lilla Åklabben Beacon (white cairn) (57°37′⋅4N, 16°45′⋅6E), standing on the E side of the channel 5 cables N of Kälmö, a dark coloured islet (57°37′N, 16°46′E) and 7 cables S of Kråkan, a group of rocks on the E side of the channel which leads N on the W side of Stora Hökhallen (5.40). Beacon (cairn) standing on a rock on the E side of the channel 2 cables N of Bussan (57°39′⋅5N, 16°45′⋅8E). Bussgrund Light (red metal tower, white top, grey concrete base, 10 m in height) (57°39′⋅7N, 16°45′⋅5E), displayed from a rock on the W side of the channel 1 mile WSW of Idö Stångskär (57°40′⋅3N, 16°47′⋅1E). The white sector (179°–183°) of this light astern, leads N to the junction of the channels in Idöfjärden. From this junction the inshore channel trends N through Idösund (5.70) to join the main Västervik E approach channel E of Västerbådan Light (57°44′⋅8N, 16°44′⋅5E). Thence it turns E for a short distance to a position close W of No 3 Light-buoy (57°44′⋅9N, 16°46′⋅9E) in the main approach channel where the inshore channel heads N. This section of the inshore channel is described in the Västervik approach directions at 5.70 and 5.66.
Granholmsfjärden close W of Kalvholmen (57°26′⋅5N, 16°40′⋅0E). Thence the fairway leads 1 mile W through deeper water to the harbour.
Anchorages 1
2
Berth 1
Gåsfjärden and approaches General information 1
1
5.28
3
Kärrsvik and approaches 4
Chart 2361, Swedish Chart 624 (see 1.34)
Description 1
5.29 Kärrsvik (57°26′⋅5N, 16°37′⋅7E), a small harbour, lies on the S side near the head of Granholmsfjärden, a deep inlet 2½ miles W of Kråkelund Beacon. The harbour is suitable for a draught of 2⋅7 m and is usually obstructed by ice from December to April.
Directions 1
2
5.30 Local knowledge is required. From a position E of Kråkelund (57°27′N, 16°44′E) the track, shown on the chart, leads initially 1 mile NW through a channel, marked by buoys (lateral), to the anchorage area described at 5.31. Thence the channel, further marked by buoys, narrows considerably and leads 1¾ miles WSW through Djupesund, N of Upplångö (57°27′N, 16°42′E), to enter
5.33 Gåsfjärden (57°34′N, 16°35′E) is an area of open water almost enclosed from the sea by a number of islands, about 11 miles SSW of Västervik. It is entered via a branch channel leading from the first part of the inshore channel.
Directions
2
Lookout tower (57°32′⋅0N, 16°44′⋅7E) on highest part of Strupö, with group of houses close SE. (Directions continue at 5.100)
5.32 A small pier with a depth alongside of 3⋅0 m.
Chart 2361, Swedish Charts 624, 623 (see 1.34)
Useful mark 1
5.31 Approaches. Anchorage may be obtained in Kråkelund anchorage, an area 7 cables NNW of Kråkelund Beacon and NE of Upplångö (57°27′N, 16°42′E), in depths of about 15 m, sand and clay. Local knowledge is required for this anchorage which is entered through a narrow buoyed channel from SE suitable for a draught of 5⋅4 m. Anchorage may also be obtained in Granholmsfjärden (57°26′N, 16°39′E), in depths of about 16 m. Harbour. Anchorage may be obtained off the harbour in depths of 4 to 6 m.
5.34 The channel to Gåsfjärden, shown on the chart, is a W branch from the first part of the inshore channel. Follow the directions given at 5.25 and 5.26 for the inshore channel to a position 3½ cables SE of Skavdö. Thence the track, marked by light-buoys and buoys (lateral), and authorised for a draught of 5⋅8 m, leads generally W and NW for 6 miles to the harbour, passing: N of Lilla Bergö Light (57°33′⋅3N, 16°40′⋅6E) (5.26), thence: S of Skavdö, thence: NW through Skavdösundet, the channel W of Skavdö and E of Hunö, thence: W across Gåsfjärden, thence: SW of Grytholmen (57°34′⋅8N, 16°33′⋅2E) and: NE of Tvetö, 4 cables WNW of Grytholmen, and: SW of Storö, 2 cables N of Grytholmen, entering the harbour 3 cables from the W end of the island close NE of a buoy (port hand) marking the entrance. Five dolphins stand in the SW part of the outer harbour. A submarine power cable crosses the channel SW of Grytholmen.
Blankaholm 1
2
184
5.35 Description. Blankaholm (57°35′⋅4N, 16°31′⋅6E) lies on the NW side of Gåsfjärden. The harbour, which is suitable for a draught of up to 4⋅8 m, formerly served a large sawmill in the export of timber products but now operates only as a small craft and pleasure boat harbour. Ice is usually present from January to March but the approach channels are normally kept clear by icebreakers. Berths. In the N part of the harbour there is a total of 300 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 3⋅5 to 5⋅0 m which is reserved for repairs and service.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
3
In SW part there are two detached pontoon jetties with a total of 265 m of berthing space mainly for pleasure craft. Facilities: crane with a capacity of 20 tonnes; shipyard; small workshop; tug; oily waste reception. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
2
Solstadström 1
5.36 Solstadström (57°34′⋅5N, 16°30′⋅9E) lies about 1 mile SW of Blankaholm. Deep copper mining, with origins in the thirteenth century, is in operation. There is a small jetty inside the river mouth with a depth of 2⋅2 m alongside.
3
Flivik 1
2
3
5.37 Description. Flivik (57°32′⋅4N, 16°35′⋅2E) is a small loading place situated 5 cables from the head of Fliviken, a narrow inlet in the S of Gåsfjärden. It is suitable for a draught of 4⋅0 m. Flivik’s Wharf, a jetty used for shipment of stone, is located 1 mile N of Flivik at the entrance to Fliviken. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from January to April. Pilots for Flivik board in the vicinity of Ljungskär Approach Light-buoy (57°30′⋅4N, 16°50′⋅9E). Directions. Follow the directions for Gåsfjärden given at 5.34, leaving the track at a position NW of the NW side of Hunö (57°33′⋅4N, 16°37′⋅5E). Thence the fairway leads 1 mile S to Flivik’s Wharf, passing NW of a shoal patch with a least depth of 5⋅3 m, marked by a buoy (57°34′⋅0N, 16°35′⋅4E), and thence to Flivik. Anchorage may be obtained in a position about 5 cables from the head of the inlet, in a depth of 4⋅6 m, mud. It is well sheltered. Berths. Flivik’s Wharf is authorised for a draught of 5⋅8 m. At Flivik, there is a pier, in poor condition, having 50 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 2⋅5 to 4⋅0 m. Facilities: tug from Blankaholm or Västervik. Supplies: fresh water; provisions.
4
5
1
The track leads 8 miles NW through Stora Hökhallen and Lökholmsdjupet to enter Verkebäcksviken 7 cables NW of Måsö (57°40′N, 16°40′E), passing (with positions from Bussgrund Light (57°39′⋅7N, 16°45′⋅5E) (5.27)): NE of Örö Sankor, a small low rock (4 miles SE), thence: NE of Söreskäret, a bare islet (2½ miles SSE), thence: NE of Norrskäret (2 miles SSE), thence: SW of Parolegrund (1 mile SSE), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand) thence: NE of Stora Orskär (1 mile S), thence: SE of Mussehällar (7 cables S), marked by a buoy (isolated danger), thence: NE of Lökholmen (1½ miles W), thence: Between Nävelsö (2½ miles WNW) and Måsö (3 miles WNW). Thence the channel through Verkebäcksviken leads about 4½ miles NW to its head NW of Gunnebo, passing (with positions from Måsö, above): Through the narrow channel between Bogölsholmen and Torrö (2 miles NW), marked by buoys (lateral). An outfall pipe is laid across the channel from a position close E of Gunnebo (57°43′⋅4N, 16°32′⋅0E) to Kläcksvik, 1 mile E. The E and W landward ends of the pipe are marked by light-beacons (white boards, red borders). 5.41 Alternative channel. An alternative approach channel for which local knowledge is required, authorised for a draught of 3⋅8 m, leads 4 miles W from the inshore channel at a position 5 cables N of Bussgrund, to join the main channel at the entrance to Verkebäcksviken. This channel, which is marked at its E end by a buoy (port hand), passes S of Händelöp (57°40′⋅5N, 16°43′⋅5E) and N of Nävelsö, 1 mile W.
Useful mark 5.42
Verkebäcksviken and approaches
1
Charts 2361, 2848, Swedish Charts 623, 6231 (see 1.34)
General information 1
5.38 Verkebäcksviken (57°43′N, 16°34′E) is a deep narrow inlet about 6 miles long situated 3 miles SW of Västervik (57°45′N, 16°39′E). It is approached and entered through a channel, shown on the chart, where shoals, dangers and narrow sections are marked by buoys (cardinal and lateral). It contains the small harbours of Gunnebo (5.45) and Verkebäck (5.46). A branch channel leads to Skaftet (5.44), 5 miles SSE of Gunnebo.
Händelöps Fiskehamn 1
2
Limiting conditions 1
5.39 Authorised draught. The channel to the anchorage area near the head of the inlet is authorised for a draught of 7⋅0 m. Maximum size of vessel permitted: length 105 m; breadth 16 m. Ice. Verkebäcksviken is usually obstructed by ice from January to March.
5.43 A small fishing harbour (57°40′⋅5N, 16°44′⋅7E) lies on the SE side of Händelöp which is connected to the adjacent islet of Stomsö, and thence the mainland, by a fixed road bridge. The approach channel is suitable for a draught up to 2⋅7 m. Directions. Entry is from the E end of the alternative approach channel (5.41) to Verkebäcksviken in a position 2 cables SSE of the harbour on the alignment (320¼°) of Händelöps Leading Lights: Front and rear lights (posts with white triangles, 85 m apart) (57°40′⋅5N, 16°44′⋅7E), displayed from the harbour when required. Berth. A quay with a length of 90 m and a depth alongside most of its length of 3⋅0 m.
Skaftet 1
Directions 1
Radio mast (red light, elevation 258 m) (57°43′⋅2N, 16°25′⋅6E), displayed about 3 miles W of Gunnebo.
5.40 Approach and entry. Approach from a position about 1½ miles NE of Vinkelgrundet (57°36′N, 16°51′E) (5.18).
185
5.44 Description. Skaftet (57°38′⋅8N, 16°35′⋅5E) lies at the head of Skaftviken, a small inlet 5 miles SSE of Gunnebo (5.45), which leads into Västrumsfjärden, close N. The harbour is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 4⋅6 m. Ice usually obstructs the harbour from January to March.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
2
Directions. Follow the directions given at 5.40 to a position close N of Måsö (57°40′N, 16°40′E) where the channel branches to Skaftet. The channel leads 3 miles SW and W to Skaftet through Blåbärssundet and Grönvållsfjärden. Anchorage may be obtained in Grönvållsfjärden, E of Skaftet, in depths of 20 to 30 m, clay. Berths. There is a total of 305 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 3⋅5 to 5⋅0 m.
Gunnebo 1
2
3
Approach and entry 1
Traffic 1
5.45 Description. Gunnebo (57°43′⋅4N, 16°32′⋅0E) lies on the S side near the head of Verkebäcksviken, 4 miles SW of Västervik. It is a small industrial harbour mainly serving the local iron works which exports a variety of metal products. Imports include wire rod and zinc. The harbour is suitable for a draught up to 4⋅0 m. Directions. Directions are given at 5.40. Anchorage may be obtained in the roads in depths of about 40 m, clay. Anchorage is prohibited within 50 m of the outfall pipes (5.40) laid across the channel immediately E of the quay. Berths. The quay has a length of 53⋅0 m and a depth alongside of 4⋅3 to 4⋅8 m. A small craft and yacht jetty with about 115 m of berthing space lies about 100 m W of the industrial quay. Facilities: mast crane; engine workshop. Supplies: fresh water; provisions.
2
5.46 Description. Verkebäck (57°43′⋅6N, 16°32′⋅0E) lies at the head of Verkebäcksviken, 7 cables WNW of Gunnebo. Its principal function is a timber loading harbour and it is suitable for a draught up to 6⋅7 m. Directions. Directions are given at 5.40. Anchorage may be obtained off the harbour in depths of about 40 m, clay. Anchoring is prohibited in the vicinity of a sea collector pipeline laid to the NE of the harbour which can be seen on the chart. Berths. There is a total of 90 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 2⋅4 to 6⋅7 m. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
VÄSTERVIK AND APPROACHES INCLUDING GAMLEBYVIKEN General information
1
Controlling draughts 1
1
1
5.53 Djuphamnen — New quay No 4 (5.75). Inner harbour — Nya Skeppsbrokajen (5.76).
Water level 1
5.54 Under normal conditions the water level varies between 0⋅7 m above mean level to 0⋅5 m below mean level. Winds from the W cause an increase in the level; winds from the NE cause a decrease in level. Prolonged winds from E may lower the level by 0⋅7 m.
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
1
5.47 Västervik (57°45′N, 16°39′E) lies in Skeppsbrofjärden on the W side of the entrance to Gamlebyviken, a long narrow inlet on the E coast of Sweden about 22 miles N of the N entrance to Kalmarsund. 5.48 It is a safe, well-sheltered, commercial harbour well equipped to handle most types of vessel and cargo including bulk, liquid and container traffic, plus fishing and small craft harbours. Principal exports are pulp and paper products, stone and timber. Imports include fodder, iron and steel goods, chemicals and oil.
5.52 The controlling depths are those in the main channels leading to the outer and inner harbours. Maximum permitted draughts: Channel to Djuphamnen on W side of Lusärnafjärden — 8⋅5 m. Channel to inner harbour and also access to Gamlebyviken, Blockholmssundet — 5⋅5 m.
Deepest and longest berths
Position
Function
5.51 Västerviks logistik och industri AB Farjevagen 10, SE−593 50 Västervik,, Sweden. Website: www.vli.nu E-Mail
[email protected]
Limiting conditions
Charts 2848 with plan of Västervik, 2361
1
5.50 In 2000 the port was used by 118 vessels with a total of 480 000 dwt.
Port Authority
Verkebäck 1
5.49 Approach and entry to the harbour area is from the SE and E through channels, marked by buoys and light-buoys, on the alignment of lights, leading lights and beacons. The inner harbour is entered through Blockholmssundet, a narrow channel marked by light-beacons.
5.55 A vessel with a length of 160 m, breadth 25 m and a draught of 8⋅5 m to the outer harbour on the E side of Lusärna. 5.56 Ice may be present in normal winters, and compact ice in severe winters, between Västervik and Idö and Västervik and Marsholmen. Ice breakers ensure year round operation of the port.
Arrival information Port radio 1
5.57 Västervik Hamnradio (Västervik Harbour radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Anchorages 1
186
5.58 Anchorage may be obtained on the E side of the S part of Idösund (57°42′⋅5N, 16°45′⋅5E) in depths of about 10 m, clay. Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of the submarine power cable and other cable laid across the channel in the S part of Idösund.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
2
1
Anchorage may also be obtained on the W side of Lindödjupet (57°42′⋅5N, 16°43′⋅5E), as indicated on the chart, in depths of 12 to 23 m, clay. In Lusärnafjärden anchorage may be obtained SE of Lusärna (57°45′⋅0N, 16°40′⋅5E) in depths of 10 to 25 m, loose mud. In the inner harbour, W of Lusärna, anchorage may be obtained in depths of 10 to 14 m, loose mud. 5.59 A submarine power cable is laid in Lusärnafjärden between 57°44′⋅6N, 16°40′⋅0E and 57°44′⋅2N, 16°42′⋅5E. See 1.71.
Other aids to navigation 1
Directions for approaches Channels 1
Pilotage and tugs 1
5.60 Pilotage is available 24 hours. See 5.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for full details. Tug is available.
Harbour General layout 1
2
3
4
5.61 The harbour area is formed by two natural bays separated by an island, Lusärna, and protected from the sea by several islands. The outer harbour, Djuphamnen, lies on the E side of Lusärna and is entered via the W channel through Lusärnafjärden, the larger of the two bays, authorised for a draught of 8⋅5 m. The inner harbour is in Skeppsbrofjärden, close W, approached via either the W or the secondary channels through Lusärnafjärden and entered through Blockholmssundet. These channels also provide access to Gamlebyviken and are authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m. The limits of Möllegrund, a shoal area in the NW part of the inner harbour are marked by buoys (lateral). Shoal patches on Sälgrundet in the central part are marked by buoys (lateral and isolated danger). A small oil complex is situated on the W side of Lusärna with the remaining commercial and fishing berths situated on the W side of the inner harbour. There are small craft berths in the S of the inner harbour. The channel leading to Gamlebyviken, spanned by a bridge, lies in the NW part of the inner harbour. At the N end of Lusärnafjärden, Gränsö kanal (5.78) provides access to Gudingen (5.112) for small craft.
2
5.62 Local magnetic anomaly. See 5.14. Current. A current of 3 to 4 kn may be experienced in Blockholmssundet (57°45′⋅5N, 16°40′⋅2E) (5.73), the narrow channel N of Lusärna to the inner harbour.
1
2
3
4
Landmarks 5.63 1
2
Kungsgrundet Lighthouse (5.16). Spårö Beacon (white square stone tower, red pointed roof, 24 m in height) (57°42′⋅9N, 16°43′⋅7E). Factory chimney at Örserum (57°43′⋅9N, 16°39′⋅9E). Radio mast (red light) (57°43′⋅6N, 16°39′⋅7E). Water tower in Västervik (57°45′⋅2N, 16°39′⋅0E). Church (redbrick construction), 3 cables WNW of water tower, above. Water tower (57°45′⋅7N, 16°36′⋅5E). Chimney (about 73 m in height, red light) (57°45′⋅0N, 16°39′⋅6E).
5.65 There are two approach channels which lead to the harbour entrance channel in Borgfjärden; the main channel from the E, authorised for a draught of 8⋅5 m, and the S approach through the Idö Stångskär entrance which is authorised for a draught of 6⋅5 m as far as Idöfjärden (5.68) and the anchorage in Lindödjupet (5.58). This S approach then leads to Borgfjärden via Spårösund, authorised for a draught of 4⋅5 m, or Idösund, which forms part of the inshore channel, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m. Alternatively approach may be made via the inshore channel from the N, entering the channel in the vicinity of Storkläppen Light. This channel joins the main approach channel E of Västerbådan Light. Directions for the inshore channel are given at 5.100.
East approach — draught 8V5 m
Natural conditions 1
5.64 Racons: Kungsgrundet Lighthouse (57°41′⋅1N, 16°54′⋅2E). Västerbådan Lighthouse (57°44′⋅8N, 16°44′⋅5E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
5
187
5.66 The track, shown on the chart, leads 7½ miles W and SSW through the fairway to a position close N of Marsholmen (57°43′⋅6N, 16°43′⋅2E) at the entrance to Borgfjärden. From a position about 4 miles N of Kungsgrundet Light (57°41′⋅1N, 16°54′⋅2E), close N of Västerviks angöring Light-buoy (N cardinal), approach with Västerbådan Lighthouse (red tower, black base, 15 m in height, floodlit) (57°44′⋅8N, 16°44′⋅5E) ahead bearing 269°, in the white sector (268°–269½°) of the light. On this bearing the track leads 6 miles W through the fairway, marked by buoys and light-buoys (lateral and cardinal), to a position 2 cables E of the light, passing (with positions from Västerbådan Light): S of Syningsknallen (5½ miles ENE), thence: N of Finnknallen (3¾ miles ESE), thence: N of No 2 Light-buoy (port hand) (2½ miles E), marking the channel, thence: S of No 3 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1¼ miles E), marking the channel and the junction where the inshore channel crosses and continues N, thence: N of Norra Per-Mattsbåden (1 mile ESE), thence: N of a 4⋅9 m shoal (7 cables ESE), marked by a buoy (N cardinal) which also marks the junction where the inshore channel briefly joins the main channel to lead E for 6 cables, thence: NW of No 4 Light-buoy (port hand), 2 cables ESE of the light. Tallskärshålet. Thence, from No 4 Light-buoy the track leads 1¼ miles SSW through Tallskärshålet, the narrow straight channel through the shoals between Lilla Tallskär on the W side and Stångskär, on which stands a beacon (white cairn, red band, 4 m in height) (57°44′⋅0N, 16°44′⋅3E), on the E side. A heading of about 205° leads through the centre of the channel which is marked by buoys and light-buoys (lateral and cardinal) and by the green sector (138°–220°) of the W side, Green Front light described below. The sides of the channel are indicated by two pairs of leading lights:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
6
7
8
1
2
Tallskärshålet Green, W side, Front light (green tower, white band) (57°43′⋅5N, 16°43′⋅5E), displayed from a rock close E of Marsholmen. Rear light (similar structure), 6 cables SSW of front light, displayed from the N side of Grönö, the islet on the W side of Spårösund. In line bearing 205°. Tallskärshålet Red, E side, Front light (lantern on red pedestal) (57°43′⋅4N, 16°43′⋅5E), displayed from an islet 1 cable S of Marsholmen. Rear light (similar structure), 4 cables SSW of front light, displayed close E of the green rear light, above. In line bearing 204½°. All the above lights, with the exception of the W Green Front light which is sectored, are only visible on the leading line. Useful mark. Light, 4 m in height, stands close off the SE point of Gränsö in position 57°44′⋅1N, 16°43′⋅3E. 5.67 Link channel. Leading lights: Stickskär Light. Front light (57°43′⋅3N, 16°45′⋅3E) (5.70). Spårö Light. Common rear light (57°42′⋅8N, 16°43′⋅7E) (5.68), 1 mile SW of front light. The alignment (236°) of these lights leads from NE, close to No 2 Light-buoy in the main approach 2½ miles SW to a position in the inshore channel 5 cables N of Idö Light (57°42′⋅8N, 16°45′⋅5E), passing (with positions from Stickskär Light): SE of Södra Per-Mattsbåden (1 mile NNE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NW of Norrabåden (8 cables NE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: NW of a 5 m shoal patch (6 cables ENE), marked off its N end by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: NW of Norra Karten (5 cables ENE).
5
6
7
8
9
1
South approach — Idö Stångskär entrance — draught 6V5 m 1
2
3
4
5.68 The track, shown on the chart, leads 8 miles NW to Idöfjärden and Lindödjupet before dividing to approach the entrance in Borgfjärden through Spårösund or the branch channel N of Idösund. Leading lights: Idö Stångskär Light. Front light (white lantern, red base) (57°40′⋅3N, 16°47′⋅1E), displayed from the N of the islet. Spårö Light. Common rear light (white tower, 8 m in height) (57°42′⋅8N, 16°43′⋅7E), 3⋅1 miles NW of front light, displayed from the S of the islet. Leading marks: Idö Stångskär Lighthouse — as above. Spårö Beacon (57°42′⋅9N, 16°43′⋅7E) (5.63). From a position to seaward about 5 miles S of Kungsgrundet Light (57°41′⋅1N, 16°54′⋅2E) the alignment (323°), by day, of these marks, and by night the leading lights, and in the white sector (321°–324°) of Idö Stångskär Light, leads 5 miles NW, passing (with positions from Idö Stångskär Light): NE of Vinkelgrundet (5 miles SSE) (5.18), thence: Close NE of Fyrken (1¾ miles SE), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Norra Blacken (1½ miles SE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence:
1
2
3
NE of Simpbåden (7 cables SSE), marked by a buoy (port hand), and: SW of Böskaren (8 cables SE) on which stands a beacon, thence: SW of Hamnklabbshällan Light (4 cables SE) (white tower, green band, 9 m in height) (57°40′⋅1N, 16°47′⋅8E), standing on a rock. Thence deviate slightly E of the track into the white sector (126°–134°) of Hamnklabbshällan Light, astern, which leads into the next part of the channel, passing E of Idö Stångskär, on which a beacon (white rectangle on white boarded triangular lattice mast, 15 m in height) stands close S of the lighthouse, and E of the buoy (port hand) marking the shoal water E of the islet. Västra Algsbåden, a small islet, lies 3 cables NE. Thence with the E end of Finnklabben (57°42′⋅3N, 16°45′⋅0E) ahead bearing 332°, in the white sector (150°–152°) of Idö Stångskär Light astern, the track leads 2 miles NNW to a position in Idöfjärden 3½ cables E of Lilla Rågbåden Beacon (orange round base, red radar reflector on posts) (57°41′⋅9N, 16°44′⋅8E), standing on a rock, passing (with positions from Idö Stångskär Light): ENE of Lekskären (5 cables NNW), through a short channel marked by buoys (lateral and isolated danger), thence: NE of a 1⋅9 m shoal (8 cables NW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of a 5⋅4 m shoal (1½ miles NW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: To a position E of Lilla Rågbåden Beacon. Caution. A submarine power cable and other cables cross the fairway in this vicinity and land at Hornsudde (57°41′⋅8N, 16°43′⋅8E). Their landing points are marked by pairs of beacons on the coastline. 5.69 Spårösund — draught 4V5 m. From a position E of Lilla Rågbåden Beacon the track, shown on the chart, leads 1½ mile NW through Lindödjupet, thence 1 mile N to the E entrance to Borgfjärden, passing through Spårösund the narrow channel between Spårö (57°42′⋅9N, 16°43′⋅7E) and Grönö, close W. A speed restriction of 4 kn is in force. 5.70 Idösund and east branch. Idösund (57°42′⋅7N, 16°45′⋅4E), the narrow channel between Idö on the E side and Krokö on the W side, forms part of the inshore route. The channel is marked on its W side by buoys (lateral) and on its E side by Idö Light (white lantern on lattice mast, green rectangular daymark, floodlit) (57°42′⋅8N, 16°45′⋅5E), displayed from the NW side of the island. From a position E of Lilla Rågbåden Beacon (57°41′⋅9N, 16°44′⋅8E) (5.68) the track, shown on the chart, leads initially 2 miles N to a position 1 mile N of Idö Light. The first part lies in the white sector (354°–358°), ahead, of Stickskär Light (white tower, 8 m in height) (57°43′⋅3N, 16°45′⋅3E), displayed from an islet, and the second part in the white sector (180½°–182½°), astern, of Idö Light. Thence the track leads 1 mile W through the branch channel, marked by buoys (lateral), leading close S of Stångskär Beacon (57°44′⋅0N, 16°44′⋅3E), to the S end of Tallskärshålet (5.66) at the entrance to Borgfjärden.
Useful mark 5.71 1
188
Dämman Beacon (white cairn, red band, 3 m in height) (57°42′⋅0N, 16°50′⋅5E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Directions for entry
2
Main channel 1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
5.72 The main entrance channel leads W through Borgfjärden and NNW on the W side of Lusärnafjärden to Djuphamnen and Blockholmssundet, which then leads to the inner harbour and the entrance to Gamlebyviken. Korphällan Leading Lights: Front light (white lantern) (57°43′⋅9N, 16°41′⋅1E). Rear light (similar structure) (180 m W of front light). From a position close NE of Marsholmen (57°43′⋅6N, 16°43′⋅2E) the alignment (279°) of these lights leads 1 mile W to a position 2½ cables from the front light, passing (with positions from the front light): S of a 5⋅6 m shoal patch (1 mile E), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: N of Borgö Light (3 cables ESE) (white lantern) (57°43′⋅8N, 16°41′⋅6E), displayed from the NW side of Borgö, and: S of a 7⋅6 m shoal (3 cables E), marked by two light-buoys (starboard hand) moored close together. Thence the track leads 1½ miles NNW through the fairway, marked by light-buoys and buoys (lateral), initially in the white sector (154°–158°) of Borgö Light, astern, to a position E of Källarmästaren Beacon (57°44′⋅6N, 16°40′⋅5E) and thence to Djuphamnen on the alignment (347½°) of leading marks: Ekholmsgrundet Beacon (green, floodlit) (57°45′⋅4N, 16°40′⋅6E), standing on a rock on the NE side of the channel. Vitudden Lighthouse (57°45′⋅7N, 16°40′⋅5E). The track also lies in the white sector (347°–350°) of Vitudden Light (white lantern) (57°45′⋅7N, 16°40′⋅5E), displayed from a point 3 cables S of the entrance to Gränsö kanal. From the above beacon the channel leads 2 cables NW to Blockholmssundet entrance, in the white sector (300°–306°) of No 1 Light, exhibited on the N side of the channel. 5.73 Blockholmssundet. Blockholmssundet is the narrow channel lying between the N side of Lusärna and Stora Ringholm, ½ cable N. The channel, which is 30 m wide with a depth of 5⋅7 m, is suitable for vessels up to a maximum of 95 m in length, breadth 14 m and draught 5⋅5 m. It is marked by lights as follows: N side — No 1 (green tower, grey base, 6 m in height) (57°45′⋅5N, 16°40′⋅3E). N side — No 2 (similar structure), 100 m WNW of No 1 light. S side — No 3 and No 4 (red pedestals, grey bases), 100 m apart. All the above light-structures are floodlit. Nos 2, 3, and 4 lights are synchronised. The fairway to Gamlebyviken entrance at Stegeholms kanal in the NW part of Skeppsbrofjärden leads 8 cables WNW from the W end of Blockholmssundet. Caution. Current, see 5.62.
3
4
Berths Djuphamnen — outer harbour 1
2
3
1
2
3
5.74 A secondary channel, shown on the chart and authorised for a draught of 5⋅5 m, leads from Borgfjärden between Skansholmarna (57°44′N, 16°42′E) and the SW side of Gränsö, through the shoals in the middle of Lusärnafjärden to join the main channel close SE of Ekholmsgrundet Beacon.
5.75 Djuphamnen lies on the E side of Lusärna. The principal berth, New Quay No 4, is situated at the N end. It is 150 m in length with a depth alongside of 9⋅5 m and a Ro-Ro ramp at its S end, 20 m wide with a depth of 8⋅3 m. In the central part there is 200 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 8⋅3 m, the N section being the oil berth. The S part has 100 m of berthing space with a depth of 6⋅0 m alongside. A second Ro-Ro berth with a fixed ramp, ferry terminal and harbour authority building are located in this area. Two floating pontoons, each 30 m long, extend seawards at right angles to the shore close S of the second Ro-Ro berth described above. A fishing harbour lies close S with a depth alongside the quay of 7⋅0 m. A small harbour protected by breakwaters and dredged to a depth of 3 m lies on the SE side of Lusärna. It is for the use of pilot boats and rescue craft only.
Inner harbour
Secondary channel 1
Follow the directions for the main channel given at 5.72 to a position about 5 cables E of Borgö Light (57°43′⋅8N, 16°41′⋅6E). Thence the track leads about 5 cables NNW through either of two channels marked by buoys (lateral and isolated danger) and a beacon standing on a rock in the centre of the fairway. Thence the track leads 1¼ miles NNW, in the white sector (330°–333°) of Vitudden Light (5.72), to a position close SE of Ekholmsgrundet Beacon, passing (with positions from the beacon): ENE of Stora Lusärnagrund (6 cables SSE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: WSW of Tärnskärsgrund (6 cables SE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: ENE of Lilla Lusärnagrund (4 cables SSE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: ENE of a 6.4 m shoal (2 cables SSE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal). A branch channel continues NNW to pass N of Stora Ringholm and enter the inner harbour close W of the inner end of Blockholmssundet. Useful mark: Watch tower (57°45′⋅9N, 16°38′⋅8E) (Directions for Gamlebyviken continue at 5.87)
4
189
5.76 The principal quay is Nya Skeppsbrokajen, on the W side, with a length of 240 m and a depth alongside of 5.5 m. The remainder of Skeppsbrokajen has 290 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 5⋅5 m, for fishing craft. The old fishing harbour which is situated 2 cables NE of the water tower (57°45′⋅2N, 16°39′⋅0E), on the W side of the harbour, contains 530 m of berthing space with depths of 1 to 4 m alongside. A further 270 m of berthing space with a depth of about 4⋅5 m alongside is also situated on the W side. On the W side of Lusärna, the E side of the inner harbour, there is a disused oil quay with a length of 15 m and a depth alongside of 6⋅0 m. At Slottsholmen, close NE of the entrance to Gamlebyviken, there is 400 m of berthing space with depths of 1⋅5 to 6⋅0 m alongside. A small craft harbour is situated in Trebrödersundet (57°44′⋅8N, 16°40′⋅3E) which lies at the S end of the inner harbour between Lusärna and the mainland. It is protected
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
by breakwaters and a light is displayed from the S side of the entrance.
one long blast, in good time before arrival at the bridge. The bridge is normally closed but when manned it is open to all traffic during the following periods:
Port services 1
Dates
5.77 Repairs. Engine repairs; boatyard with slip. Other facilities. Oily waste reception available; hospital; deratting and issue of certificates. Supplies. Fuel oils; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Nearest international airport at Linköping, 60 km N.
1st May – 20th June 16th August – 30th September
21st June – 15th August
Days
Canal open
Monday to Friday
0945 1545
Weekends and holidays
0945 1815
Every day
0945
Gränsö kanal 1545 1815
Description 1
1
5.78 Gränsö kanal (57°46′N, 16°41′E) connects the N part of Lusärnafjärden (5.61) with Gudingen on the N side of the Gränsö peninsula. It is about 3½ cables in length with a depth of 1⋅5 m. Midway between the N and S ends of the canal, from which lights are displayed, a fixed bridge spans the channel with a vertical clearance of 3⋅1 m under the span. 5.79 Directions. The canal is approached and entered through Kanalviken (57°45′⋅8N, 16°40′⋅7E), a short inlet extending NNW from the N part of Lusärnafjärden. The channel leads about 5 cables N to the canal entrance from a position close N of Ekholmsgrundet Beacon (57°45′⋅4N, 16°40′⋅6E) (5.72), passing E of Vitudden Light (5.72).
3
4
Outside these hours the bridge will open for commercial traffic after prior notice. Requests should be made by telephoning 0490−25 70 50, 12 hours in advance. Passage is regulated by light signals displayed from the bridge as follows:
Gamlebyviken Chart 2361, Swedish Charts 6231, 623 (see 1.34)
General information 1
5.80 Description. Gamlebyviken is a long narrow inlet extending about 12 miles NW from Västervik. Entry is via either of two channels, both spanned by bridges, close N of Västervik, at the NW end of Skeppsbrofjärden.
Depths 1
5.81 The channel from Västervik to the anchorage near Gamleby is authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m.
Pilotage 1
5.82 See 5.5.
Anchorage 1
5.83 Anchorage may be obtained in Almviken, S of Granö (57°50′⋅4N, 16°27′⋅2E) and N of Almvik, 7 miles NW of Västervik, in depths of 10 to 26 m, clay and mud. See also 5.58.
Stegeholmsbron − bridge signals (5.84) 5
Bridges 1
1
2
5.84 There are two bridges at Strömsholmen (57°45′⋅6N, 16°38′⋅5E), close N of Västervik at the NW end of Skeppsbrofjärden. 5.85 Stegeholmsbron is a bascule bridge with a vertical clearance of 1⋅8 m when closed and an 18 m wide navigational opening, spanning Stegeholms kanal which provides the main access channel to Gamlebyviken. Operation and signals. Requests for opening are made by giving the sound signal Morse letter U, two short and
1
Mooring to the bridge and anchoring in the channel is prohibited. Speed must be kept to a minimum but sufficient to maintain manoeuvrability. Caution. A current of up to 5 kn may be experienced in the opening just through the bridge spanning Stegeholms kanal. 5.86 Lilla Strömsholmsbron, a fixed bridge for use by small craft, with a vertical clearance of 2⋅2 m, spans Strömsholms kanal about 150 m SW of Stegeholms kanal.
Directions (continued from 5.74) 1
190
5.87 The track through Gamlebyviken, shown on the chart, is authorised for vessels up to 75 m in length and 15 m breadth. From Stegeholms kanal, the limits of which are
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
marked by lights, the track trends generally NW for about 11 miles to Gamleby. In narrow sections of the channel shoal patches are marked by buoys (lateral).
Harbour 1
Gamleby General information 1
2
5.88 Description. Gamleby (57°54′N, 16°25′E) lies in the NW part of Gamlebyviken, 2 miles S of its head and about 11 miles NW of Västervik. It is a small commercial harbour situated at the mouth of Gamlebyån. Principal exports are woodpulp, timber products and grain. The main import is artificial fertilizer. The population is about 1500. Ice. In severe winters the harbour is obstructed by ice from January to March.
Directions 1
1
5.91 Directions are those given for Gamlebyviken at 5.87.
Port services
Limiting conditions 5.89 The controlling draught in the channel to the quay is 5⋅0 m.
5.90 Description and berths. Charted depths in the harbour are about 8⋅0 m. The main quay lies on the N side of the river mouth and is 150 m in length with depths alongside of 4.0 to 5.5 m. In 1999 it was reported that this quay was no longer in use for commercial traffic. At the mouth of the river there is a further 60 m of berthing space with depths of 4⋅5 to 5⋅0 m alongside, mainly used for timber products.
1
5.92 Facilities: minor hull and engine repairs. Supplies: fuel oil by road tanker; fresh water; provisions.
VÄSTERVIK TO ARKÖ Former mined areas
GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2361, 2362
1
Area covered 1
5.93 This section covers the waters of the E coast of Sweden from a position E of Västervik (57°45′N, 16°39′E) to a position ESE of Arkö (58°30′N, 16°58′E) (5.155), 40 miles NNE. It includes a description of Valdemarsviken (5.125), Slätbaken (5.150), which includes Söderköping, and other channels, inlets and minor harbours along the coast. Also included is a general description of the inshore channel section from Västervik to Arkö.
5.96 Caution. Two former mined areas, see 1.8, shown on the chart, within which anchoring, fishing or underwater operations are prohibited are positioned as follows: (a) About 5 miles SE of Storkläppen, centred on 57°48′N, 16°59′E. (b) About 5 miles SE of Häradskär, centred on 58°06′N, 17°06′E.
Principal marks 1
VÄSTERVIK TO HÄRADSKÄR 2
General information
5.97 Landmarks: Water tower in Västervik (57°45′⋅2N, 16°39′⋅0E). Radio mast (red light) (elevation 137 m) (57°54′⋅6N, 16°44′⋅6E). Vindåsen, a wooded hill (57°54′⋅8N, 16°47′⋅4E). Häradskär Lighthouse (red tower, framework base, 29 m in height) (58°08′⋅8N, 16°59′⋅4E), displayed from an islet. Major light: Häradskär Light — as above.
Charts 2848, 2361, Swedish Charts 623, 622 (see 1.34)
Route 1
5.94 From a position E of Västervik, in the vicinity of the main approach channel entrance, the route leads NNE for 22 miles through open water to a position ESE of Häradskär (58°09′N, 16°59′E) (5.129).
Other aid to navigation 1
Directions for coastal passage
Topography 1
5.95 The coastline is heavily indented with several deep inlets. It is fronted by numerous islets, rocks and shoals. In general most of the coast and the islets are densely wooded but with few prominent natural features.
5.98 Racon: Kungsgrundet Lighthouse (57°41′⋅1N, 16°54′⋅2E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
1
191
(continued from 5.19) 5.99 From a position E of Västerviks angöring Light-buoy (57°44′⋅9N, 16°55′⋅3E) (5.66), the track leads 22 miles NNE to a position ESE of Häradskär, passing (with positions from Kungsgrundet Light (57°41′⋅1N, 16°54′⋅2E)):
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
2
ESE of Storkläppen Lighthouse (grey and brown tower), standing on an islet, (9½ miles N), thence: ESE of Bredgrund (14 miles N), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: ESE of Blackarna (16½ miles N), thence: ESE of Innergrund (18 miles N), thence: ESE of Melstapeln (20½ miles N), thence: ESE of Ljusgrund (27 miles N), marked by a buoy (E cardinal). (Directions continue at 5.136)
5
Storkläppen to Torrö Stickskär
Directions for inshore passage (continued from 5.28)
Västervik to Storkläppen 1
2
3
4
5.100 From a position close W of No 3 Light-buoy (57°44′⋅9N, 16°46′⋅9E) the track, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m, shown on the chart, leads generally NNE and N for 6 miles to a position E of Aleskär (57°50′⋅4N, 16°48′⋅7E), passing: ESE of Äskeskär (57°46′⋅5N, 16°45′⋅5E), and: E of Ekö (57°49′⋅4N, 16°47′⋅2E) where the track trends N. The following aids to navigation are situated along the fairway in this section of the channel: Finnkarten Light (white concrete tower, green base, 10 m in height) (57°46′⋅7N, 16°48′⋅2E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the channel. Sladö Ask Light (white concrete tower, red base, 9 m in height) (57°47′⋅1N, 16°48′⋅2E), displayed from an islet on the W side of the channel. The white sector (020°–025°) of Finnkarten Light leads into the white sector (012°–017°) of Sladö Ask Light, and thence the white sector (198°–201°), astern, of Finnkarten Light, leads clear through the buoyed shoal area in the vicinity of these lights. Aleskär Light (white tower, black base, 6 m in height) (57°50′⋅5N, 16°48′⋅7E), displayed from an islet on the W side of the channel. (Directions continue at 5.102)
1
2
3
1
Inshore channel — Storkläppen entrance 1
2
3
4
5.101 Directions. Leading marks: Storkläppen Lighthouse (57°50′⋅5N, 16°50′⋅8E), (5.99). Vindåsen (57°54′⋅8N, 16°47′⋅4E) (5.97). From a position about 3 miles SSE of Storklappen Lighthouse the alignment (334°) of the above marks leads 2 miles NNW, thence the track leads 1 mile NW, at night in the white sector (278°–297½°) of Aleskär Light (57°50′⋅5N, 16°48′⋅7E) (5.100), through a channel authorised for a draught of 5⋅0m, to join the inshore channel 4 cables E of Aleskär Light, passing (with positions from Aleskär Light): ENE of Yttre Hasslögrund (3 miles SSE), thence: ENE of Stora Bredgrund (2 miles SE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: ENE of Inre Bredgrund (1½ miles SE), marked on its N side by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: NNE of Jertknallen (1 mile SE), and: S of a 0⋅8 m shoal (1¼ miles E), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), lying close S of Storklappen Lighthouse, thence: SSW of Storkläppen (1 mile E). A mast (white lattice framework, wind blades, 12 m in height) stands 6 m SE of the lighthouse.
Alternative channel. An alternative channel, of no authorised draught, shown on the chart, passes SW of Bredgrund shoal area described above. From a position about 4 cables NE of Yttre Hasslögrund, above, the track leads 2¾ miles NNW to join the main channel E of Aleskär Light, passing W of the Bredgrund shoal area, almost parallel to and SW of the main channel. On this track at night the white sector (322°–328°), ahead, of Aleskär Light leads clear SW of the shoals.
2
3
4
192
(continued from 5.100) 5.102 This section of the inshore channel, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m, is narrow and tortuous over most of its length, passing between numerous shoals and islets. From a position 4 cables E of Aleskär Light (57°50′⋅5N, 16°48′⋅7E) the track, shown on the chart, leads generally N for about 10 miles to Torrö Stickskär (58°00′⋅4N, 16°48′⋅9E). It can be joined from seaward by an entrance channel (5.104) N of Städsholmen, 1½ miles NNW of Storkläppen. The following aids to navigation are situated along the first part of this section of the inshore channel. The white sectors of all these lights lead through the stretches of fairway in their vicinity: Finnhällan Light (white tower, red band, 9 m in height) (57°52′⋅1N, 16°48′⋅3E), displayed from an islet on the E side of the channel. Leading lights: Hommelskär Front Light (lantern on white hut, green band) (57°52′⋅9N, 16°48′⋅2E), from an islet on the E side of the channel. Torröudd Rear Light (lantern on white pedestal, red band) (57°53′⋅1N, 16°48′⋅2E), displayed from the SE side of an island 400 m N of front light. The alignment (353°) of these lights leads through the channel in the vicinity of Finnhällan Light. 5.103 The inshore channel continues N from close E of Torröudd Light. The following aids to navigation are situated along this section of the channel, and in addition to the leading lights described, the white sectors of all these lights lead through the stretches of fairway in their vicinity: Järnklint Light (white lantern) (57°53′⋅5N, 16°48′⋅5E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the channel. Råsumskär Beacon (57°53′⋅6N, 16°48′⋅7E), standing on an islet on the E side of the channel. Caution. A submarine power cable crosses the channel between Stora Grindö (57°54′N, 16°48′E) and a small islet 1 cable SW. Grindö Light (white post on white pedestal, green band) (57°54′⋅3N, 16°47′⋅6E), displayed from the N end of Lilla Grindö. Leading lights: Alen Front Light (white lantern on white pedestal, green band) (57°54′⋅4N, 16°48′⋅8E), displayed from an islet on the N side of the channel. Trädskär Rear Light (white lantern on white concrete tower, black base, 6 m in height) (57°54′⋅4N, 16°49′⋅2E), displayed from an islet 550 m E of front light. The alignment (087°) of these lights leads E through the channel E of Kårö peninsula and N of Fören Light (lantern
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
5
6
7
8
1
2
on white pedestal) (57°54′⋅4N, 16°48′⋅5E), displayed from a rock on the S side of the channel. Prickhällan Light (white concrete tower, green band, black base, 6 m in height) (57°56′⋅6N, 16°49′⋅1E), displayed from a rock close E of the channel. Leading lights: Gråskärshäll Front Light (white lantern) (57°58′N, 16°49′E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the channel. Jungfruskär Rear Light (white square on white pedestal, green band) (57°57′⋅5N, 16°49′⋅1E), displayed from a rock 5 cables S of front light. The alignment (178½°), astern, leads N through the channel between Ålgårdsudde and Olsklabb described below. Sundshäll Beacon, standing on the W side of the channel ½ cable NW of Jungfruskär Lighthouse. Torskklabb Light (white lantern, red band) (57°58′⋅3N, 16°48′⋅7E), displayed from a rock on the W side of the channel. Ålgårdsudde Light (lantern on white pedestal, red band) (57°58′⋅7N, 16°49′⋅0E), displayed from an islet on the W side of the channel. Olsklabb Light (lantern on white pedestal, green band) (57°59′⋅8N, 16°49′⋅0E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the channel. Torrö Stickskär Light (white concrete tower, green band, black base, 6 m in height) (58°00′⋅4N, 16°48′⋅9E), displayed from an islet on the E side of the channel. Torrö Stickskär Beacon (white truncated cone, coloured band, pointed roof) stands close NNE of the lighthouse. Beacon standing on the E side of Torrö, 2 cables NNW of the lighthouse. (Directions continue at 5.107)
3
Städsholmen north entrance
2
5.104 The entrance channel, authorised for a draught of 4⋅0 m, leads N of Städsholmen (57°52′N, 16°49′E). Approach from E with Torröudd Lighthouse (57°53′⋅1N, 16°48′⋅2E) ahead bearing 289°. The track, shown on the chart, leads 2½ miles WNW through the fairway to join the inshore channel close E of Torröudd Lighthouse, passing (with positions from the lighthouse): NNE of Tärnkullen (1¼ miles SE), thence: NNE of a 3⋅3 m shoal area (1 mile ESE), thence: NNE of a 2⋅9 m patch (7 cables ESE), thence: SSW of Stora Klanten (5 cables ESE), thence: NE of Hommelskär (2 cables S). Useful mark: Pilot station (disused) (57°52′⋅0N, 16°49′⋅1E), on Städsholmen.
Valdemarsvik entrance 1
2
3
1
3
4
2
5.105 Directions. Local knowledge is required. Approach from E with Viskär (58°00′⋅5N, 16°50′⋅5E) ahead bearing about 276°. The track, shown on the national chart, leads 3½ miles W to join the inshore channel in Torrödjupet, about 3 cables S of Torrö Stickskär Light, passing (with positions from the light): S of Skallen (3 miles E), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: N of Stapeln (2 miles E), thence: S of Knutsgrund (2 miles E), thence: N of Gaddarna (1 mile ESE), thence:
5.106 Directions. Approach from seaward in the vicinity of Skallen (5.105) with Barbena (58°04′N, 16°49′E), close off the NE side of Kvädö, ahead bearing about 317°. The track, shown on the chart and authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m, leads 3½ miles NW through the fairway to join the inshore channel 5 cables NW of Örskär Beacon (white cairn, green band, 4 m in height) (58°02′⋅8N, 16°52′⋅7E), standing on an islet on the E side of the fairway, passing (with positions from the beacon): NE of Skallen (2½ miles SSE), thence: NE of Knutsgrund (2¼ miles S), thence: SW of Bengtsbåden (1 mile SSE), thence: NE of Stora Knallen (1¼ miles SSW), thence: SW of Nisselklabb (4 cables SSE). The continuation of this track NW leads into Valdemarsviken passing between the buoys marking the shoals E of Själhällan Beacon (58°03′⋅4N, 16°51′⋅3E) (5.107).
Torrö Stickskär to Sandö
Viskär entrance 1
S of Viskär (8 cables E), thence: SE of Jutskär (4 cables E), thence: S of Håmskär (2 cables SSE). The continuation of this track W leads through the fairway to Skeppsgården.
5
193
(continued from 5.103) 5.107 This section of the inshore channel, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m, is mainly through fairly open water with some narrow stretches in shoal areas. From a position close W of Torrö Stickskär Light (5.103) the track, shown on the chart, leads generally NNE for about 12 miles to Sandö, initially through Kvädöfjärden, thence the shoals N, and finally through Flisdjupet. A minor alternative channel, shown on the national chart, passes close W of Stora Källskär, an islet lying close SE of Kvädö (58°04′N, 16°48′E), to rejoin the main fairway 1 mile farther NNE. The following aids to navigation are situated along the fairway in this section of the channel, and in addition to the leading lights described, the white sectors of all these lights lead through the stretches of fairway in their vicinity: Torrö Leading Lights: Front light (white and red daymark on white hut) (58°00′⋅8N, 16°48′⋅3E), displayed from an islet close NE of Torrö. Rear light (similar structure), displayed from the island 500 m SW of front light. The alignment (222°) of these lights, astern, leads through Kvädöfjärden from a position 1 mile N of Torrö Stickskär Light to a position NW of Örskär Beacon. Själhällan Beacon (grey cairn) (58°03′⋅4N, 16°51′⋅3E), standing on W side of the channel. Ljusklabb Light (white lantern on white pedestal) (58°05′⋅0N, 16°50′⋅5E), displayed from a rock on W side of the channel. Svartbådan Light (white tower, red band, black base, 7 m in height) (58°05′⋅5N, 16°51′⋅2E), displayed from an islet on NW side of the channel. Halsöklabb Light (white lantern) (58°07′⋅1N, 16°52′⋅5E), displayed from a rock on NW side of the channel. Hägerökarten Light (white tower, green band, on black base, 10 m in height) (58°07′⋅6N, 16°54′⋅1E), displayed from a rock on E side of the channel. A
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
6
1
2
rock awash, marked by a buoy (S cardinal), lies 5 cables farther S. Flatskär Beacon (white cairn, red band) (58°09′⋅5N, 16°51′⋅7E), standing on an islet 1½ miles W of the channel. Sandö Light (58°10′⋅3N, 16°55′⋅3E) (5.138). 5.108 An alternative inner channel, shown on the national chart, for which local knowledge is essential, suitable only for small craft, branches off from the main track close E of Svartbådan Light (58°05′⋅5N, 16°51′⋅2E) (5.107). The channel, marked at intervals by buoys (lateral), trends N for 6 miles to a position close W of Kättilö (58°12′N, 16°53′E) where it divides, one branch rejoining the main inshore channel, a second leading to Gryt (5.145) and a third leading to Orren (5.147), passing, (with positions from Svartbådan Light): W of Björkskär (1 mile N), thence: E of Stora Ålö (2 miles NW), thence: Through Olsösundet (2½ miles N) between Lilla Olsön and Melön, thence: W of Flatskär Beacon (4 miles N) (5.107), thence: W of Skrakholmen (5 miles NNE), thence: E of Flisö (5 miles N). (Directions for inshore channel continue at 5.138)
4
5
Anchorages in inshore channel 1
2
Bokö entrance 1
2
5.109 Directions. From E, in a position about 3 miles SSE of Häradskär Light (5.97), approach with Svartbådan Lighthouse (58°05′⋅5N, 16°51′⋅2E) (5.107) ahead bearing 263°, in the white sector (261°–264°) of the light. The track, shown on the chart, leads about 4 miles W through the fairway to join the inshore channel 8 cables E of the light, passing (with positions from the light): S of Svartbåden shoal area (3 miles ENE), marked at its SE limit by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: N of Getryggen (2½ miles E), marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: N of Gubben (1½ miles E), marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: N of a 5⋅2 m shoal patch (8 cables E), marked by a buoy (isolated danger).
Häradskär entrance 1
2
3
5.110 Directions. Leading marks: Kättilö Beacon (58°11′⋅5N, 16°54′⋅0E). Custom House (red roof), standing near the E point of Kättilö, NNW of the beacon. From a position about 5 miles S of Häradskär Light (58°08′⋅8N, 16°59′⋅4E) (5.97), approach on the alignment (336°) of the above leading marks seen midway between Sandö (58°10′⋅3N, 16°55′⋅3E) and Barnsö, close W. The track, shown on the chart and authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m, leads 7 miles NNW through the fairway, marked by buoys (lateral), by night in the white sector (336½°–341°) of Sandö Light (5.138), passing (with positions from Häradskär Light): ENE of Getryggen (3½ miles SW) (5.109), thence: ENE of a 5⋅8 m patch (3 miles SW), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: ENE of Nygrund (2 miles SW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: WSW of Görviksgrund (1 mile SW), thence:
WSW of Kuggskärsgrunden (8 cables SW), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: WSW of a shoal with rocks awash (1 mile W), marked by a buoy (lateral) and surrounded by a restricted area, thence: ENE of a 5⋅6 m shoal (1½ miles W), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: WSW of a 1⋅8 m shoal (1¾ miles WNW), thence: ENE of Miagrund (2 miles NW). Alternative channel. An alternative channel leads from E with Hägerökarten Lighthouse (58°07′⋅6N, 16°54′⋅1E) (5.107), ahead on a bearing of 260°, and by night in the white sector (255°–264°), ahead, of the light, passing N of Ljusgrund (5.99), thence S of Kuggskärsgrunden and close N of Gorviksgrund to join the main channel 8 cables N of Nygrund.
5.111 Anchorage may be obtained, as indicated on the national chart, in the following areas: NE of Torrö (5.103), in a position 4 cables WNW of Järnklint Lighthouse (57°53′⋅5N, 16°48′⋅5E) (5.103), in charted depths of about 15 m. In a position 2 cables N of Grindö Lighthouse (57°54′⋅3N, 16°47′⋅6E) (5.103), in a depth of 10 m, clay. In Smedfjärden, a small bay on the NE side of Stora Askö (57°59′N, 16°47′E), 4 cables SW of Olsklabb Lighthouse (5.103), in depths of 10 to 22 m.
Harbours and approaches Swedish Chart 623 (see 1.34)
Helgenäs 1
2
1
1
194
5.112 Description. Helgenäs (57°59′⋅8N, 16°29′⋅7E) is a small harbour, suitable for a draught of 3⋅8 m, lying at the head of Syrsan, a long well-protected bay 12 miles NNW of Västervik (5.47), which is reached through Gudingen and Bergholmsfjärden. Approach to Gudingen is through the first part of the main Vastervik approach channel. Access to Gudingen is also possible, for small craft, via Gränsö kanal (5.78). Grain, timber and woodpulp are exported. The population is about 150. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice during February and March but is kept open by the use of icebreakers. Local knowledge is required. 5.113 Directions. Follow the directions given at 5.66 to a position about 4 cables NW of Västerbådan Light (57°44′⋅8N, 16°44′⋅5E) (5.63). Thence the track, shown on the chart, leads 18 miles NW, N and NW to Helgenäs through the fairway, marked at intervals by buoys (lateral), initially through Gudingen, then through Bergholmsfjärden before entering Syrsan through Bjursund, a narrow passage with extensive shoals through which is a channel, marked by buoys (lateral). 5.114 Bjursundsströmsbron, a fixed bridge with a vertical clearance of 15 m and a navigable opening 22 m wide, spans the channel at its narrowest part between Strömsholmen (57°55′⋅2N, 16°35′⋅0E) and Bjursundsström,
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
2
1
1 cable E. Passage under the bridge is restricted to vessels of 300 grt or under with a maximum breadth of 12 m. Speed is restricted to 5 kn through Bjursund. Caution. Submarine power cables are laid across the channel as shown on the national chart. 5.115 Anchorage may be obtained, as indicated on the national chart, about 2 cables SE of the harbour, in depths of about 17 m, clay. Anchorage may also be obtained 1 cable E of the N entrance to Gränsö kanal. Berths. Two jetties with a total of 117 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 1 to 6⋅2 m. Supplies: fresh water; fuel oil and provisions in small quantities.
Facilities: slip with a capacity of 6 tonnes; crane with 20 tonne capacity; hull and machinery repairs. Supplies: fresh water; fuel oil; provisions
Källvik 1
5.120 Description. Källvik (57°53′⋅5N, 16°43′⋅0E) is a small summer resort which lies at the head of Rågödjup, 1 mile SE of Loftahammar (5.116). Directions. As given for Loftahammar at 5.117 to a position close SSE of Djupsundet thence NNE to the harbour. Berth. A jetty with a length of 20 m and depths alongside of 2⋅4 to 3⋅0 m.
Flatvarp Loftahammar 1
2
1
2
3
4
1
1
5.116 Description. Loftahammar (57°54′⋅2N, 16°42′⋅0E) is a small craft and yacht harbour, suitable for a draught up to 2⋅5 m situated at the N end of Vivassen, a bay with a very narrow entrance which lies near the head of Rågödjup, a long narrow inlet about 7 miles NE of Västervik. The harbour consists of six pontoon jetties and a finger pier, extending from the shore in various directions at the N end of the bay, close N of the shoal area marked by a buoy (S cardinal). 5.117 Directions. Rågödjup is entered from Knöldjupet (57°49′⋅5N, 16°49′⋅0E), 1½ miles SW of Storkläppen Lighthouse (57°50′⋅5N, 16°50′⋅8E) (5.99). Directions for Storklappen entrance are given at 5.101. Thence, from a position S of the limit of the shoal extending S from Aleskär, marked by a buoy (starboard hand), the track, shown on the national chart, leads 5½ miles NW to the harbour, passing (with positions from Storklappen Lighthouse): SW of Jutskär (1½ miles WSW), thence: WSW of a 3⋅2 m shoal (1¾ miles WSW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), and: NE of Kålmålsö (2½ miles WSW), thence: SW of Örarna (1¾ miles W), thence: NE of a 1⋅0 m shoal (2¾ miles WNW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NE of Flåtarna (4 miles NW), where a narrow buoyed channel branches W and leads to Helgenäs (5.112), thence: NE of a shoal, rocks awash (4½ miles NW), marked by a buoy (port hand), and noting a submarine pipeline laid through the centre of the fairway in this vicinity, thence: Through Djupsundet (5 miles NW), the narrow entrance channel to Vivassen, which has a depth of about 2⋅9 m and is marked at its S end by buoys (lateral), thence: NW to the harbour. 5.118 Useful marks: Loftahammar Church (57°54′⋅5N, 16°42′⋅0E). Chimney (57°54′⋅1N, 16°41′⋅7E), standing at the head of the harbour. Windmill (57°54′⋅2N, 16°43′⋅0E), 6 cables E of the harbour. 5.119 Berths. The six pontoon jetties provide numerous berths with depths alongside of 1⋅5 to 2⋅5 m. A finger pier lies in the NW corner of the harbour close to the pontoons.
1
1
2
3
5.121 Description. Flatvarp (57°59′⋅3N, 16°48′⋅6E), a fishing harbour suitable for a draught up to 3⋅5 m, lies on the E side of Stora Askö, at the S end of Smedfjärden, 6 miles NE of Loftahammar (57°54′⋅2N, 16°42′⋅0E) (5.116). 5.122 Directions. The harbour is approached from a position on the inshore route about 1½ cables S of Olsklabb Light (57°59′⋅8N, 16°49′⋅0E) (5.103), thence 4 cables SW through the anchorage in Smedfjärden (5.111) to the entrance channel. Flatvarp Leading Lights: Front light (yellow triangle, red border, on post) (57°59′⋅2N, 16°48′⋅5E), displayed from the harbour when required by fishing vessels. Rear light (similar structure), exhibited 110 m SSE of front light. The harbour is entered on the alignment (159°) of the above lights through a dredged and buoyed (lateral) channel, 15 m wide and with a depth of 3⋅5 m. This alignment leads about 3 cables SSE to the harbour. Anchorage. See 5.111. Berths. A total of 135 m of berthing space with depths of 2 to 5 m alongside. A dredged basin area lies N of the quay. Swedish Chart 622 (see 1.13)
Skeppsgården 1
2
1
2
195
5.123 Description. Skeppsgården (58°02′N, 16°40′E), a small loading place, lies on the W side of Edsviken near the head of Kaggebofjärden, a deep inlet W of Stora Askö (5.111). The harbour is suitable for a draught of about 2⋅5 m alongside and up to about 13 m at the anchorage. A fixed bridge with a vertical clearance of 3 m spans Edsviken at Skeppsgården. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from mid-December to mid-April. Water level. Gales from N to E and persistent winds from W and SW raise the water level. Gales from SW to WNW and persistent winds from E and SE cause a fall in level. The greatest variation from mean level is 1⋅0 m. 5.124 Directions. From seaward approach may be made through Viskär entrance to Torrödjupet, or through Valdemarsvik entrance (5.105) and thence S through the inshore channel to Torrödjupet, about 3 cables SSW of Torrö Stickskär Light (58°00′⋅4N, 16°48′⋅9E). From Torrödjupet the track, shown on the chart, leads generally W and N for 7 miles to the harbour passing through a narrow section, 1 cable wide, on the NW side of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Stora Askö, thence through Lindödjupet and finally through Kaggebofjärden. Anchorage may be obtained in mid-channel, off the harbour, in depths of 5 to 13 m, clay. Berth. A small jetty with a depth alongside of 2⋅5 m.
Häradskär 1
5.129 General information. A former pilot harbour lies on the W side of Häradskär (58°09′N, 16°59′E). Two pairs of leading lights, sharing a common front light, displayed when required, lead into the harbour.
Valdemarsvik 1
2
1
2
3
1
1
2
5.125 Description. Valdemarsvik (58°12′N, 16°36′E) is a small, former commercial, now fishing and small craft harbour, situated at the head of Valdemarsviken, a long narrow inlet about 7 miles SW of Häradskär Lighthouse (58°08′⋅8N, 16°59′⋅2E). There is a least charted depth of 5⋅1 m in the fairway leading to the harbour and charted depths in the harbour are about 4 m. The town has a population of about 3300. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from late December to the middle of March. Landmark: Radio mast (red lights, elevation 75 m) (58°12′⋅0N, 16°36′⋅4E). 5.126 Directions. Approach to Valdemarsviken is made off the inshore channel using directions for Valdemarsvik entrance given at 5.106, or alternatively, Bokö entrance given at 5.109. Thence from a position on the inshore channel 3 cables NE of Själhällan Beacon (58°03′⋅4N, 16°51′⋅3E) (5.107), if using Valdemarsvik entrance, or 1 mile NNW of the beacon if entering via Bokö entrance, the track, shown on the chart, leads about 11 miles NW through the fairway, passing (with positions from Själhällan Beacon): SW of a 1⋅5 m shoal (1¼ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NE of Melskären (1½ miles NW), an area of foul ground, thence: NE of Själhällarna (2 miles NW), thence: NE of Ormö (3 miles NW), thence: NE of Granholmen (5 miles NW), thence: Close S of Grytö (6¾ miles NW), marked off its S end by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: Through Krogsmålaströmmen (7¾ miles NW), a narrow channel marked on each side by buoys (lateral), thence: NW to the harbour. Speed is restricted to 6 kn within 1 mile of the harbour. 5.127 Anchorage may be obtained about 1 mile SE of the harbour in depths of 8 to 20 m, clay. Anchoring is prohibited in the vicinity of a submarine power cable laid across the fairway 1¼ miles SE of the harbour and in the vicinity of a submarine pipeline extending 1½ miles SE through the fairway from the harbour. 5.128 Berths. At the NE end of the harbour there is a total of 200 m of berthing space, known as Ångbåtskajen, with a depth of about 3⋅5 m alongside. Close SW, three floating pontoon jetties extend from the shore, providing numerous berths for yachts and pleasure craft, with depths of 1⋅2 to 3⋅0 m. In the SW part of the harbour there is about 180 m of berthing space for fishing boats with a depth of about 3⋅0 m alongside. Facilities. Boatyard with crane, 1 km distant. All normal domestic facilities available. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
HÄRADSKÄR TO ARKÖ General information Charts 2361, 3217, Swedish Charts 622, 621 (see 1.34)
Routes 1
5.130 Coastal route. From a position ESE of Häradskär (58°09′N, 16°59′E) the route leads NNE for 18 miles through open water to a position ESE of Arkö (58°30′N, 16°58′E), an island 20 miles N of Häradskär. Inshore route. The inshore route leads through the islands and rocky areas of the archipelago from Sandö (58°10′N, 16°55′E), to a position S of Arkö (58°30′N, 16°58′E), 19 miles N.
Topography 1
5.131 The mainland, which is generally low and featureless, is indented by several inlets including Slätbacken which extends about 15 miles inland leading to Söderköping. An extensive shoal area lies off the coast, extending up to 12 miles offshore, containing innumerable islands, islets, rocks and shoals. Caution. A large part of the above area, indicated on the chart, has not been fully surveyed and should be avoided.
Former mined area 1
5.132 A former mined area, shown on the chart, within which anchoring, fishing or underwater operations are prohibited, is centred on a position 6 miles NE of Sandsänkan Lighthouse (58°18′⋅7N, 17°10′⋅0E). See also 1.8.
Rescue 1
5.133 The Swedish Sea Rescue Association has fully equipped rescue craft stationed at Fyrudden (58°11′⋅5N, 16°51′⋅2E) (5.142). The customs coast watch liaison centre is also located at Fyrudden. See 1.156 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5 for further details.
Local magnetic anomaly 1
5.134 An area of local magnetic anomaly, with differences of up to 6° from the normal, is reported to exist about 17 miles E of Norra Fällbådan Lighthouse (58°26′⋅5N, 17°06′⋅3E).
Principal marks 1
2
196
5.135 Landmarks: Häradskär Lighthouse (58°08′⋅8N, 16°59′⋅2E) (5.97). Sandsänkan Lighthouse (black tower with white lantern, grey conical base, 15 m in height, wind generator) (58°18′⋅7N, 17°10′⋅0E), standing on a rock. Norra Fällbådan Lighthouse (black concrete tower, white top, yellow band, grey base, 17 m in height) (58°26′⋅5N, 17°06′⋅3E), standing on a rock 5 miles ESE of Arkö.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Major light: Häradskär Light (58°08′⋅8N, 16°59′⋅2E) (5.97).
Directions for coastal passage 1
2
1
2
(continued from 5.99) 5.136 From a position ESE of Häradskär the track leads 18 miles NNE to a position ESE of Arkö, passing (with positions from Sandsänkan Lighthouse (58°18′⋅7N, 17°10′⋅0E)): ESE of a 10 m shoal (5 miles S), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: ESE of Vikasgrunden (3 miles S), an extensive shoal, thence: ESE of Sänkbåden (1½ miles SSE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: ESE of Sandsänkan Lighthouse, thence: ESE of Juliabåden (1¾ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: To a position ESE of Norra Fällbådan Light (8 miles NNW). 5.137 Useful marks: Gubbö Kupa Beacon (cairn, 4 m in height) (58°11′⋅6N, 16°57′⋅4E), standing on an islet 3 miles NNW of Häradskär Lighthouse (58°08′⋅8N, 16°59′⋅2E) (5.97). Harstena (58°15′⋅5N, 17°00′⋅7E), a flat, wooded island with a group of red buildings near its S end. Stora Tallskär (58°20′⋅5N, 17°01′⋅0E), a dark, wooded island higher than the surrounding islets, lying 5 miles WNW of Sandsänkan Lighthouse (58°18′⋅7N, 17°10′⋅0E). (Directions continue for Arkö entrance at 5.157, and for the coastal passage at 5.173)
4
5
6
1
2
Directions for inshore passage (continued from 5.108) 3
Sandö to Arkö 1
1
2
3
5.138 This section of the inshore channel, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m, is narrow and tortuous over most of its length. From a position close SW of Sandö Light (white concrete tower, green band, on black base, 7 m in height, floodlit) (58°10′⋅3N, 16°55′⋅3E), displayed from the SW side of the islet, the track, shown on the chart, leads generally N for about 20 miles to a position W of Kopparholmen (58°28′⋅3N, 16°57′⋅7E), S of Arkö. 5.139 Sandö to Snuggholmen. The following aids to navigation are situated along the fairway in this section of the channel and, in addition to the leading lights described, the white sectors of all these lights lead through the stretches of fairway in their vicinity: Kättilö Light (white hut, red band, floodlit) (58°11′⋅7N, 16°53′⋅9E), displayed from the E side of the island on the W side of the channel, close W of Fångö. Kvarnholmen Light (white hut, red band) (58°12′⋅5N, 16°53′⋅7E), displayed from a rock on the W side of the channel. Espskärsgrund Light (white lantern, green stripe, black base on grey foundation) (58°14′⋅0N,
4
5
6
197
16°54′⋅0E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the channel. Stora Bockholm Leading Lights: Front light (white and red daymark on white hut) (58°14′⋅6N, 16°53′⋅5E), displayed from a rock close off the NE side of the island of that name. Rear light (similar structure), 500 m SSW of front light. The alignment (207°), astern, of these lights leads 2½ miles through a narrow passage between Håskö (58°15′⋅5N, 16°55′⋅0E) on the E side, and Väggö close W. Beacon (58°14′⋅6N, 16°53′⋅9E), standing on the W side of the channel, 2 cables E of the front leading light described above. Bergholmen Light (lantern on white pedestal, 3 m in height) (58°15′⋅6N, 16°54′⋅1E), displayed from a rock close off the SE side of Väggö. Snuggholmen Light (white hut, red band) (58°17′⋅3N, 16°56′⋅1E), displayed from the E side of Snuggholmen, an islet on the W side of the fairway at the SE end of Finnfjärden (5.161). A branch channel leads NW and NNW from the W side of Snuggholmen, forming the S approach to Slätbaken. A branch channel leads to Frugelöt from the NW end of Finnfjärden. 5.140 Snuggholmen to Arkö. The following aids to navigation are situated along the fairway in this section of the channel and, in addition to the leading lights described, the white sectors of all these lights lead through the stretches of fairway in their vicinity: Andskär Beacon (white post, black rectangular topmark) (58°18′⋅3N, 16°57′⋅5E), standing on the W side of the channel. Enskär Light (white hut, red band) (58°18′⋅8N, 16°58′⋅2E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the channel. Fågelön Light (white hut, green band) (58°19′⋅5N, 16°58′⋅7E), displayed from the W side of an island on the E side of the channel. Kupa Klint Beacon (grey cairn) (58°19′⋅2N, 16°59′⋅9E), standing on an islet 7 cables ESE of Fågelön. Ådkobb Light (lantern on white pedestal) (58°20′⋅6N, 16°59′⋅0E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the channel. Stora Högholmen Leading Lights: Front light (white and red daymark on white tower) (58°21′⋅1N, 16°59′⋅1E), displayed from an islet on the E side of the channel. Rear light (white and red daymark on white hut), 115 m N of front light. The alignment (006½°) of these lights leads through a narrow passage W of Ådkobb Lighthouse. Lammskär Leading Lights: Front light (red square, white stripe, on white structure) (58°23′⋅9N, 16°57′⋅1E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the fairway. Rear light (similar structure, 6 m in height, floodlit), 7 cables NNW of front light. The alignment (338½°) of these lights leads about 2 miles through Hafjärden, a stretch of relatively open water 1 mile N of Ådkobb Light. Horvelsö Light (white lantern, red band, floodlit) (58°24′⋅1N, 16°56′⋅5E), displayed from the E side of Horvelsö, an island on the W side of the channel.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
7
8
Beacon (orange) on Snäppan (58°23′⋅9N, 16°55′⋅5E). Radio mast (red light) (58°25′⋅3N, 16°57′⋅4E), standing on the W side of Aspöja. Jungfrusalen Light (lantern on white hut, red band, 4 m in height) (58°26′⋅6N, 16°56′⋅7E), displayed from a rock on the W side of the fairway. Leading lights: Front light, Kopparholmen W point (lantern on white hut, green band, floodlit) (58°28′⋅3N, 16°57′⋅7E), displayed from Kopparholmen at the S end of Arkösund, Rear light, Kuggviksskär Light (white tower, 12 m in height), 6 cables NNE of front light, displayed from Kuggviksskär, an islet close S of Arkö. The alignment (016°) of these lights leads about 1½ miles through the N part of Aspöfjärden to a position close W of Kopparholmen. (Directions for the inshore passage continue at 5.192)
breakwater there is a total of 60 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 2 to 3⋅6 m for the use of yachts. The W side of the pier on the W side of the harbour is reserved for the rescue and coast watch craft. Rescue. Fully equipped rescue and coast watch craft. Customs coast watch liaison centre. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Gryt 1
1
Anchorages in inshore channel 1
2
5.141 Anchorage may be obtained, as indicated on the national chart, in the following areas: In Barösund, about 6 cables NNW of Sandö Lighthouse (58°10′⋅3N, 16°55′⋅3E), in depths of 6⋅6 to 14 m, sand and gravel. In a position 5 cables N of Fågelön Lighthouse (58°19′⋅5N, 16°58′⋅7E), on the W side of the channel, in depths of 12 to 20 m, clay. In a position 3 cables N of Ådkobb Lighthouse (58°20′⋅6N, 16°59′⋅0E), on the E side of the channel. In a position 4 cables NNW of Horvelsö Lighthouse (58°24′⋅1N, 16°56′⋅5E) in a depth of about 18 m, clay.
2
Fredriksnäs 1
Harbours Chart 2361, Swedish Chart 622 (see 1.34)
Fyrudden 1
1
2
1
5.142 Description. Fyrudden (58°11′⋅5N, 16°51′⋅2E) is a fishing and pleasure craft harbour situated on the mainland about 5 miles WNW of Häradskär (58°09′N, 16°59′E). The harbour, which is suitable for a draught up to 3⋅6 m, is formed by a breakwater and a pier protected by a detached breakwater. 5.143 Directions. From a position on the inner channel (5.108) close NW of Skrakholmen (58°10′⋅5N, 16°52′⋅7E) (5.108) the track leads 1 mile NW to the harbour, passing (with positions from Kättilö Light (58°11′⋅7N, 16°53′⋅9E) (5.139)): E of a rock awash (1¼ miles SSW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Flötskär (1 mile SW), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), and: NE of Grisselholmen (1½ miles SW), thence: To the harbour entrance. Approach may also be made from the inshore channel to the N. 5.144 Berths. There is a total of 260 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 2⋅7 to 4⋅0 m. On the inside of the
5.145 Description. Gryt (58°11′⋅7N, 16°48′⋅5E), a small loading place, suitable for a draught of 4 m, lies at the head of Årsviken, 1 mile WNW of Fyrudden (5.142). Ice. the harbour is usually obstructed by ice from early January to early April. 5.146 Directions. Follow the directions given for Fyrudden at 5.143 to a position NE of Flötskär (58°11′⋅1N, 16°52′⋅2E) (5.143). Thence the track, shown on the national chart, leads about 1¾ miles NW and 1 mile SW to the harbour, passing (with positions from Kättilö Beacon (58°11′⋅5N, 16°54′⋅0E)): NE of Hästgrund (1 mile W), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NNE of Själviksskären (2 miles WNW), thence: S of Fågelö (2 miles NW), thence: SW through Årsviken to the harbour. Useful mark: Radio mast (red light) (58°11′⋅6N, 16°48′⋅5E), standing near the head of the inlet. Berths. A quay with a depth alongside of 1⋅1 m. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
2
1
2
1
198
5.147 Description. Fredriksnäs (58°14′⋅2N, 16°45′⋅0E) is a small, well-sheltered harbour at the S end of Sågviken, an enclosed bay with a narrow entrance on the S shore of Orren, about 6 miles NE of Valdemarsvik (5.125). Its principal function is export of sawn timber. The harbour, suitable for a draught of 3⋅7 m. is approached through a channel branching off the inshore channel 2½ miles NNW of Sandö (58°10′⋅3N, 16°55′⋅3E), or from the S through a continuation of the alternative inner channel described at 5.108. Local knowledge is required. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from early January to early April. 5.148 Directions. From a position in the inshore channel 4 cables N of Kvarnholmen Lighthouse (58°12′⋅5N, 16°53′⋅7E) (5.139) the track, shown on the chart, leads NW for 5 miles then S for 1 mile to the harbour, passing (with positions from Kvarnholmen Lighthouse): NE of Höga Svedsholmen (1 mile NW), thence: NE of a 1⋅9 m shoal (2 miles NW), close off Hässelö, thence: NE of Stora Gåsön (3 miles NW), thence: N of Karholmen (5 miles NW), thence: S through Sågviken to the harbour, noting a 2⋅7 m shoal on the W side of the channel 4 cables SW of Karholmen. 5.149 Anchorage may be obtained 3 cables NNE of the jetty in depths of 8 to 14 m, mud and clay.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Berth. A jetty with a length of 50 m and a depth alongside of 4⋅2 m. Supplies. Fresh water.
4
SLÄTBAKEN AND APPROACHES General information
well to seaward and should not be confused with surrounding beacons or lighthouses. Svarta Utterklabben Beacon (grey triangular tower, 12⋅5 m in height) (58°29′⋅0N, 17°01′⋅9E), standing on a rock 1½ miles ESE of Arkö Beacon. Norra Fällbådan Lighthouse (58°26′⋅5N, 17°06′⋅3E) (5.135). Major lights: Arkö Rear Leading Light. Kälebo (58°28′⋅8N, 16°56′⋅7E) (5.157). Gustaf Dalén Light (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171).
Charts 3217, 2361, Swedish Chart 621 (see 1.34)
Description 1
2
5.150 Slätbaken (58°27′N, 16°35′E) is a long inlet, extending about 27 miles inland from the open sea, lying on the S side of Vikbolandet, a large peninsula between Slätbaken and Bråviken, 11 miles N. The harbours of Söderköping and Mem lie near the head of the inlet. It is approached from E through a channel on the alignment of leading lights and entered, W of Arkö, through channels marked by lights and buoys. An alternative approach from the S branches off the inshore channel at Snuggholmen (58°17′N, 16°56′E) (5.139).
Other aid to navigation 1
Directions (continued from 5.137)
Approach to Slätbaken — Arkö entrance
Topography 1
5.151 The peninsula of Vikbolandet is high and wooded, particularly in the S part.
1
Draughts 1
5.152 The channel from sea to Arkö is authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m and from Arkö to Mem is authorised for a draught of 3⋅0 m.
2
Pilotage 1
5.153 Pilots are available from Västervik or Oxelösund and ordered from VTS Oxelösund. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
3
Local magnetic anomaly 1
5.154 Local magnetic anomaly is reported in Slätbaken.
4
Principal marks 1
2
3
5.155 Landmarks: Lönshuvud (58°26′⋅9N, 16°51′⋅0E), a steep, rocky headland, 4½ miles SW of Arkö, and visible from a considerable distance to seaward. Marviken Power Station Chimney (58°33′⋅2N, 16°50′⋅1E) (5.181). Arkö Beacon (red tower, pointed red roof, lower part facing seaward white, elevation 35 m) (58°29′⋅5N, 16°59′⋅5E), standing on the SE side of Arkö. Caution. The beacon is difficult to identify in bright afternoon sunlight with the sun in the W. Viskär Tower (white octagonal tower with red dwelling, 11 m in height) (former lighthouse) (58°29′⋅3N, 16°59′⋅6E), standing on the N side of Viskär, 400 m SSE of Arkö Beacon. It is visible
5.156 Racon: Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
5
5.157 Arkö Leading Lights: Front light. Östra Kopparholmen (white lantern, red rectangle, white stripe, floodlit) (58°28′⋅4N, 16°58′⋅2E), displayed from N end of Östra Kopparholmen. Rear light. Kälebo (similar structure), 9 cables WNW of front light, displayed from the mainland. From a position about 5 miles ESE of Norra Fällbådan Light the alignment (292°) of these lights leads 10 miles WNW through the fairway, marked by buoys (lateral), to a position S of Arkö, passing (with positions from Norra Fällbådan Lighthouse (58°26′⋅5N, 17°06′⋅3E)): SSW of Prejaren (6½ miles NE), thence: NNE of Klacksten (4¼ miles SSE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SSW of Arköbådan (4 miles NE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NNE of Norra Fällbådan Light, thence: SSW of Galtbrottet (2½ miles WNW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SSW of shoal water, marked by a buoy (starboard hand), which extends S from Södra Skäret (3½ miles WNW), an islet, thence: To a position S of Arkö heading slightly N of the alignment to pass clear of Kopparholmen. Leading marks. The alignment (313°) of the following marks leads from SE towards Norra Fällbådan Light offering an alternative approach which clears the shoals to the SW: Svarta Utterklabben Beacon (58°29′⋅1N, 17°01′⋅9E) (5.155), and: Centre of Lundasund (5.199) (1¼ miles farther NW), the passage between Arkö and Södra Lunda.
Useful marks 5.158 1
199
Marö Kupa Beacon (grey cairn) (58°26′⋅0N, 16°59′⋅4E), standing on a high, bare hill at the S end of Lånjö.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Månggrenarna Beacon (white and grey cairn) (58°24′⋅1N, 17°00′⋅8E), standing on a rock 3½ miles SW of Norra Fällbådan Lighthouse. (Directions for S approach to Norrköping continue at 5.192)
5
Useful mark: Capella Ecumenica, a replica ancient chapel, standing on the N point of Västra Gärdsholm (58°24′⋅8N, 16°43′⋅3E). Chart 2361, Swedish Chart 622 (see 1.34)
Approach to Slätbaken from south Entry to Slätbaken — Arkö to Mem 1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5.159 From the position S of Arkö the track, shown on the chart, leads generally WSW for 9 miles and WNW for 10 miles to Mem through the fairway, marked at intervals by buoys (lateral). There are two very narrow passages, Ettersundet, and Stegeborg at the entrance to Slätbaken, for which use of the Swedish chart, which has large scale inset plans for these passages, is recommended. The following lights and other aids to navigation are situated along the fairway from Arkö to Mem: Lönshuvud Light (white hut, green band, black base) (58°26′⋅7N, 16°51′⋅0E), displayed from the SE point of the headland (5.155). The white sectors (232°–235½°) and (066½°–068½°), ahead and astern respectively, lead through Lönshuvudfjärden. Björkskär Light (white hut, red band, black base) (58°25′⋅5N, 16°47′⋅6E), displayed from an islet on the SE side of the channel. Fårholmen Light (white lantern on white hut, green band) (58°25′⋅2N, 16°45′⋅3E), displayed from the S point of the islet on the N side of the channel. The white sectors of these two lights lead through the passage between Lilla Rimmö (58°26′N, 16°47′E) and Västra Gärdsholm, 2½ miles SW, where the S approach joins the main channel. 5.160 Ettersundet, which has a least charted depth of 3⋅2 m, is marked by: Ettersundet Östra Light (white lantern, red band, on dolphin) (58°26′⋅0N, 16°40′⋅3E), displayed from the NE point of Eknön at the E end of the channel. Ettersundet Västra Light (white lantern, green band, on dolphin), displayed from a rock on the N side of the channel, 2 cables WNW. The channel through Stegeborg, N of Stegeborgs Ruin, standing on an islet on the S side of the passage (58°26′⋅5N, 16°36′⋅0E), is marked on each side by a dolphin, green on the N side and red on the S side, both of which are illuminated. A ferry crosses the channel close E of the dolphins. Hackerstad Light (white lantern, green band) (58°28′⋅2N, 16°31′⋅4E), displayed from a headland. Lundbynäs Light (lantern on white pedestal, green band) (58°28′⋅6N, 16°27′⋅7E), displayed from a headland 1 mile E of Mem. The white sectors of these two lights partially assist in leading through the channel in their vicinity. Mem Tower (former lighthouse), (elevation 4 m, floodlit) (58°28′⋅8N, 16°25′⋅2E), standing at the N entrance to the Göta Kanal. (see Baltic Pilot Volume I for Göta Kanal). Söderköping Light (metal framework tower, 7 m in height) (58°28′⋅5N, 16°24′⋅9E), displayed close S of the mouth of Söderköping Å which runs parallel and S of the Göta Kanal.
1
2
5.161 From a position on the inshore channel W of Snuggholmen (58°17′⋅3N, 16°56′⋅1E) (5.139), the track, with shoals close to it marked by buoys (lateral), shown on the national chart, leads 10 miles generally NW and NNW to a position N of Västra Gärdsholm (58°24′⋅8N, 16°43′⋅3E) where it joins the main channel, passing initially NW through Finnfjärden to a position N of Korsholmen (58°19′N, 16°50′E) at the NW end of Finnfjärden where a channel branches W to Frugelöt (5.162). The fairway then leads NNW through Korsfjärden, on the SW side of Norra Finnö, to pass through Lagnöströmmen (58°22′⋅0N, 16°47′⋅5E), a narrow passage with a draught restriction of 2⋅6 m and a least charted depth of 3⋅2 m lying between Yxnö on the E and Torön on the W. A fixed bridge, with a vertical clearance of 15 m over a navigable width of 35 m, spans the channel at the E point of Torön. From the N end of Lagnöströmmen the fairway leads E of Trännö to join the main channel N of Västra Gärdsholm.
Harbours Frugelöt 1
2
5.162 Description. Frugelöt (58°21′N, 16°38′E) is a small harbour situated near the head of Gropviken, an extension of Lindesfjärden, an inlet leading W from Finnfjärden, 13 miles SW of Arkö. Its principal function is the export of timber. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from late December to early April. Anchorage may be obtained in a well-sheltered area 1 cable ESE of the jetty, in depths of 10 to 13 m, clay. Local knowledge is required. Berth. A jetty with a depth of 3 m at its head. Swedish Chart 621 (see 1.34)
Mem 1
2
200
5.163 Description. Mem (58°29′N, 16°25′E) is a small pleasure craft harbour situated at the E end of the Göta Kanal at the head of Slätbaken. It consists of outer and inner harbours separated by a lock at the end of the canal, the outer harbour being below the lock. Water level in the outer harbour may vary between 0⋅6 m above to 0⋅3 m below mean level. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from the middle of December to the end of March. Directions are given at 5.159. Anchorage may be obtained off Killingholm, an islet 4 cables E of the harbour, in depths of 6 to 12 m, clay. Berths. The outer harbour, which is suitable for draughts up to 2⋅8 m, has a quay with a length of 125 m and depths of 3 to 3⋅5 m alongside. The inner harbour, above the lock, has a quay with a length of 200 m and depths of 2⋅6 to 3 m alongside.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
3
There are two piers on Killingholm with a total length of 100 m and depths alongside of 4 to 4⋅4 m. Facilities. Customs station. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Nearest airport at Linköping, 8 km S.
2
Söderköping 1
5.164 Description. Söderköping (58°29′N, 16°20′E), with a population of about 6000, lies on the S side of the Göta Kanal 3 miles W of the entrance at Mem. It has a small craft and yacht harbour fronting the town on the canal side and a further yacht harbour on the riverside.
3
Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from the middle of December to the middle of April. Directions. For Göta Kanal see Baltic Pilot Volume I. Berths. The quay fronting the town has a length of 90 m and a depth alongside of about 3⋅5 m. At Klevbrinken, 7 cables above the lock at Söderköping on the N bank, there is a basin with a general depth of 2⋅9 m containing a quay with a length of 75 m. Facilities. Hull and machinery repairs. Small drydock suitable for vessel 32 m in length, 7 m breadth and maximum 300 dwt. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. As for Mem (5.163).
ARKÖ TO LANDSORT GENERAL INFORMATION Chart 2362
3
Area covered 1
2
5.165 This section covers the waters of the E coast of Sweden from a position ESE of Arkö (58°30′N, 16°58′E) to a position S of Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E), 25 miles NNE. It includes a description of the major ports of Norrköping (5.216), Oxelösund (5.245) and Nyköping (5.280) with their respective approaches. Also included is a general description of the inshore channel from Arkö to Landsort, where it leads outside the main channels, and Bråviken, together with minor harbours and other channels within the area.
Local magnetic anomalies 1
2
Topography 1
5.166 The mainland has few distinctive natural features and is heavily indented in places, the longest being Bråviken which extends about 35 miles inland and lies on the N side of Vikbolandet. Extensive shoal areas extend up to about 11 miles off the coastline containing innumerable islands, rocks and shoals. Caution. Certain areas, indicated on the chart, have not been fully surveyed and should be avoided.
3
5.167 Pilotage is controlled by Oxelösund Pilot Station for the major ports within this section, and is compulsory for most categories of vessel. Pilots are ordered from VTS Oxelösund. For Landsort, pilotage is controlled by Mälaren/Landsort Pilot Station and pilots are ordered from VTS Södertälje. See 5.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for full details.
General information Charts 2362, 3147
Route 1
Vessel Traffic Services
2
5.168 Oxelösund and Mälaren/Landsort Reporting and Information Systems are established and in force within the area covered by this section of the chapter. Their limits are indicated on the large scale charts. Traffic Information Centres are located at Oxelösund Pilot Station and Södertälje Pilot Station respectively. The systems are mandatory for all vessels. In each system the traffic restrictions apply to all vessels. All other procedures apply to the following vessels: 1. Vessels over 300 grt. 2. Vessels over 50 m in length.
5.170 From a position ESE of Arkö (58°30′N, 16°58′E) the route leads NNE to a position S of Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E), 25 miles NNE.
Principal marks 1
1
5.169 Local magnetic anomalies, with differences from normal as stated, and which are shown on the chart, are reported to exist in the following areas (with positions from Hävringe Beacon (58°36′⋅2N, 17°19′⋅0E)): Up to 20° (3¾ miles SSE). Up to 60° (4¾ miles SSE). Up to 10° (5¼ miles SE). Up to 5° (6 miles SE). Up to 22° (6¾ miles ENE). Other areas of magnetic anomaly: Gupafjärden, 1 mile W of Trätbådan (58°46′⋅8N, 17°33′⋅9E). Yttre Hållsfjärden, close N of Persö (58°47′⋅4N, 17°36′⋅1E). In addition, anomalies have frequently been experienced in Bråviken.
COASTAL PASSAGE
Pilotage 1
3. Towing vessels where the length, including the tow, is greater than 50 m. Details of limits, reporting points, restrictions and other regulations are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
2
201
5.171 Landmarks: Oxelösund Water Tower (58°40′⋅2N, 17°07′⋅3E). Järnverk Chimneys (58°40′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅2E), at Oxelösund. Hävringe Beacon (red hexagon, white band to seaward, 19 m in height) (58°36′⋅2N, 17°19′⋅0E), standing on the W side of Hävringe, a bare islet at the entrance to Bråviken surrounded by rocks and shoals. Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (black round concrete tower, red top, grey base, 26 m in height, floodlit) (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E), standing on a rock. Radio mast (red light) (58°46′⋅4N, 17°23′⋅0E), standing in the N part of Studsvik.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
3
4
Landsort Lighthouse (white tower, red top, 25 m in height) (58°44′⋅4N, 17°52′⋅0E), standing on the S point of Öja. Radio mast (elevation 137 m, red obstruction lights) (58°49′⋅2N, 17°50′⋅7E), standing on Torö (7.48). Major lights: Gustaf Dalén Light — as above. Landsort Light — as above. Landsorts Bredgrund Light (orange tower, floodlit) (58°43′⋅9N, 17°52′⋅5E), displayed from a rock 4 cables S of Stångskär, a small islet close off the S end of Öja.
Other aids to navigation 1
APPROACH AND ENTRY CHANNELS TO NORRKÖPING AND OXELÖSUND General information Charts 3218, 3217, 2362
Description 1
2
5.172 Racons: Norra Kränkan Lighthouse (58°37′⋅0N, 17°23′⋅4E) (5.184). Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E). Landsorts Bredgrund Lighthouse (58°43′⋅9N, 17°52′⋅5E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
5.175 This section describes the main and secondary approach channels to Bråviken, the long narrow inlet which leads to Norrköping, including the short coastal approach from S, the inshore route from Arkösund, and the channels through Bråviken to the harbour area. The main approach to Oxelösund, situated at the outer end of Bråviken, is also covered by the initial sections of the approach channels from seaward in the vicinity of Hävringe. Also included are descriptions of Arkösund, Marviken and the minor harbours within Bråviken. Descriptions are also given for the various connecting and minor branch channels both within and at the outer end of Bråviken.
Pilotage 1
Directions for coastal passage 1
2
3
4
(continued from 5.137) 5.173 From a position ESE of Norra Fällbådan Light (58°26′⋅5N, 17°06′⋅3E) (5.135) the track leads NE for 23 miles to the vicinity of Landsorts Angöring Light-buoy (E cardinal) (58°40′⋅5N, 17°52′⋅0E), moored on the W side of the Landsort approach fairway, 8 cables E of Taget and about 2 miles S of the inner pilot boarding position, indicated on the chart, passing (with positions from Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E)): SE of Prejaren (9 miles SSW), and the 10 m shoal 1 mile SSE, thence: SE of Ursulas grund (5¾ miles SW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SE of Gustaf Dalén Light, thence: SE of Ranten (4½ miles NE), thence: SE of Gäddan (5 miles NE), and: SE of a 9 m shoal (6 miles NE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), and: Passing clear of any vessels using the large vessel anchorage centred 9 miles E, and indicated on the chart, thence: SE of Långgrund (7 miles NE), thence: SE of Östra Rågmoreknösar (9 miles NE), thence: SE of Österknösarna (10 miles NE), thence: To a position SE of Landsorts Angöring Light-buoy. (Directions continue at 7.26) (Directions for Södertälje Kanal and Mälaren continue at 6.17)
Traffic regulations 1
5.177 Speed restriction. Vessels are restricted to 7 kn between the longitudes of 16°38′⋅4E and 16°35′⋅3E in Bråviken. A restriction of 12 kn applies in Bråviken between the island of Brändö (5.187) and Nävekvarnsklint (58°37′⋅4N, 16°47′⋅3E). Restricted area. An area in which anchoring, fishing and underwater operations are prohibited surrounds Mesen Light (58°37′⋅3N, 16°59′⋅5E), as shown on the chart.
Cables 1
5.178 Submarine cables, including power cables, are laid across the Bråviken fairway in various positions which are indicated on the chart.
Ice 1
2
Anchorage 1
5.176 Pilotage is compulsory for some categories of vessel. Pilots are provided from Oxelösund Pilot Station. See 5.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
5.174 A deep-water anchorage for large vessels, shown on the chart, is established centred on a position 9 miles SSW of Landsort Lighthouse (58°44′⋅4N, 17°52′⋅0E).
202
5.179 Bråviken is kept open to navigation in the winter months by the use of icebreakers. In addition, ice-bridges are established across the ice channels at various positions in the section W of Nävekvarn (5.208) when the ice is strong enough to support road traffic. Positions are indicated in the appropriate place in directions. Each bridge is marked by brooms about ½ cable distant on either side which are easily visible. Speed must be reduced in their vicinity but not to less than 7 kn. Illuminated notice boards, indicating the maximum permitted speed, are erected near the brooms. A sound signal consisting of a prolonged blast should be given in good time when approaching an ice-bridge. By night, a red light is displayed if a bridge is in position; a white light if the bridge has been withdrawn.
Home
Contents
Index Route Index Chartlet - Bråviken and approaches 20´
30´
40´
17°
50´
10´
20´
30´
40´
50´
2362
10´
50´
50´ Torö
Tvären
Nyköping 5.280
Landsort
3170
3191
40´
Oxelösund 5.245
3
5.18 5
5.18
3218
Norrköping 5.216
Hävringe
5 .1
5.
18
9
5.1
94
Fläskösund 3217
Gustaf Dalén
70
203
0
iken 5. 1 8 7
3217
Enskär
5.28
Bråv
3217 Gränsösund
30´
3147
5.
19
58°
2
3217
5.164 Söderköping
58° Arkö
30´
3218
5.1
5.15
0
59 5. 1
59
Norra Fällbådan
3217
0205
10´
20´
30´
40´
50´
Longitude 17° East from Greenwich
20´
30´
40´
50´
CHAPTER 5
3218 2362
40´
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
3
The area of Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse, the islet of Hävringe and Vinterklasen is partially covered with sea ice for some weeks in severe winters and can be compact ice in very severe ice seasons.
Directions for Hävringe north — main entrance
Sea to Vinterklasen Bråviken entrance channels 1
2
3
5.180 There are three approaches from seaward into Bråviken: Arkö entrance (5.157), authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m, thence via Arkösund and through the islands and shoals to Bråviken. Hävringe N entrance (5.183), the main deep-water channel entered N of Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (5.171), authorised for a draught of 15⋅3 m to Vinterklasen at the S entrance to Oxelösund, then 12⋅6 m to the anchorage at Norrköping. This also forms part of the main approach channel to Oxelösund. Hävringe S entrance (5.189), authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m, approached S of Gustaf Dalén thence close NE of Hävringe to join the main channel farther WNW. A channel to Oxelösund leads NW from the vicinity of Hävringe.
1
2
3
Principal marks 1
2
3
4
5.181 Landmarks: Hävringe Beacon (58°36′⋅2N, 17°19′⋅0E) (5.171). Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Marviken Power Station Chimney (elevation 142 m, red obstruction lights) (58°33′⋅2N, 16°50′⋅1E). Oxelösund Water Tower (58°40′⋅2N, 17°07′⋅3E) SE of city centre. Water tower (58°40′⋅9N, 17°06′⋅2E), N of city centre. Järnverk Chimneys (58°40′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅2E). Gullängsberget (elevation 64 m) (58°36′⋅8N, 16°56′⋅1E), rises close to N shore and slopes steeply to the shore. Further identifiable by Hargö, an islet 1 mile W, which is steep on its N and S sides. Kummelberget (elevation 80 m) (58°39′⋅0N, 16°54′⋅5E). Major lights: Gustaf Dalén Light (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Hävringe Rear Leading Light (58°36′⋅3N, 17°19′⋅1E) (5.190). Skavsta Aero Light (two masts, obstruction light) (58°47′⋅1N, 16°56′⋅0E). Krokek Aero Light (white and orange metal framework tower, obstruction light) (58°40′⋅6N, 16°28′⋅2E).
1
2
3
4
5
Other aids to navigation 1
5.182 Racons: Norra Kränkan Lighthouse (58°37′⋅0N, 17°23′⋅4E) (5.184). Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
6
204
5.183 Approaches. For vessels approaching from S, by day, Hargberget (58°43′⋅4N, 17°28′⋅1E) (5.304), ahead bearing 355° leads clear E of Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). By night, approach in the white sector (258°–018°), ahead, of the light, passing E of the lighthouse, thence into the white sector (261°–288°), ahead, of Norra Kränkan Light (58°37′⋅0N, 17°23′⋅4E) (5.184), leading to the vicinity of the pilot boarding position. From E, for vessels with a suitable draught, approach may be made, by day, with Norra Kränkan Lighthouse, ahead, bearing about 262° which leads clear of the following dangers, (with positions from the lighthouse): S of a 9 m shoal patch (7¾ miles ENE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: S of Gäddan (7 miles ENE) (5.173), a 5⋅6 m shoal, thence: S of Ranten (6¼ miles ENE) (5.173), an 8 m shoal, thence: S of Köpman (4 miles ENE), a 6⋅4 m patch, and a buoy (S cardinal) moored 3½ cables S. At night, the white sector (261°–288°) of Norra Kränkan Light, ahead, leads through this approach channel. 5.184 Entry channel. From a position in the vicinity of the pilot boarding position, 1½ miles N of Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse, the recommended track, indicated on the chart, leads 11 miles W through the fairway, marked by light-buoys and buoys, to a position S of Vinterklasen (58°38′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅0E), S of Oxelösund, in the vicinity of the alternative pilot boarding position, indicated on the chart, passing (with positions from Hävringe Beacon (58°36′⋅2N, 17°19′⋅0E)): N of Kränkan NO Light-buoy (N cardinal) (3½ miles ENE), thence: N of Norra Kränkan Lighthouse (white tower on grey conical base, 11 m in height, floodlit) (58°37′⋅0N, 17°23′⋅4E), standing on a rock on the S side of the fairway, thence: SSE of Horngrund (2 miles NE), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: NNW of Öster Skåle (2 miles ENE) and Norr Skåle, 2½ cables NW, two islets close together, thence: S of Forsbergsgrund (1 mile N), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), and: N of Västra Korpen Light (white tower, 7 m in height, floodlit) (58°36′⋅3N, 17°19′⋅5E), displayed from a small islet close NE of Hävringe, thence: N of Kopparnageln Lighthouse (white tower, red band, 4 m in height, floodlit) (58°36′⋅5N, 17°17′⋅7E). The white sector (250°–258°) leads through part of the fairway E of the light. Thence: S of Grässkärsgrund (1¼ miles NW), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: S of Grässkären Lighthouse (white tower, green band, 12 m in height, floodlit) (58°37′⋅1N, 17°14′⋅4E), standing on Grässkären, thence: SSW of Grässkärsrevet Light-beacon (white and red) (3 miles WNW), standing on Västra Grässkären, and the dangerous wreck lying close W, thence: SW of Ytterskärsgrundet (5 miles WNW), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
N of Klasgrunden Östra (5½ miles WNW), marked by a light-buoy (E cardinal). The white sector (301°–309°) of Vinterklasen Rear Light (58°38′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅0E) (5.271), leads through the latter part of the channel between Grässkären and Ytterskärsgrundet. (Directions for Oxelösund harbour continue at 5.264)
Vinterklasen to Hargökalv 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5.185 From the position S of Vinterklasen the recommended track, indicated on the chart, and now authorised for a draught of 12⋅6 m, leads 8½ miles W through a channel, marked by buoys and light-buoys, to a position close S of Hargökalv, on the S side of which stands Hargökalv Light (lattice mast, white board with green band, 16 m in height, floodlit) (58°36′⋅5N, 16°52′⋅6E), passing (with positions from the light): N of Klasgrunden Norra (8 miles ENE), marked by a light-buoy (N cardinal), thence: N of Klasgrunden NV (7½ miles ENE), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: S of Mellanskär Beacon (6½ miles ENE), standing on a rock on the N side of the fairway, thence: S of Svinskär (5½ miles ENE), thence: N of Falkens Grund Light (white tower, red top on concrete base, 7 m in height, floodlit) (5 miles ENE), displayed from a rock. The fairway close N is marked by a buoy (port hand). The white sectors (260°–265°) and (263°–266½°) of Kungshamn front and rear leading lights respectively, and the white sector (255°–263°) of Falkens Grund Light lead through the channel to the E of Falkens Grund Light. Thence: SSE of Ålbäcksgrund Light (white lantern, green band, concrete base, floodlit), (4 miles ENE), displayed from a rock on the N side of the fairway. The fairway is marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: N of Mesen Light (white hut, red band, on white base) (3½ miles ENE), displayed from an islet on the S side of the channel, thence: Kungshamn Leading Lights: Front light (white lantern hut, red and white stripes) (58°37′⋅6N, 17°01′⋅4E), displayed from an islet on the N side of the fairway. Rear light (similar structure, 9 m in height), displayed 600 m ENE of front light on Böten. The alignment (069½°), astern, of these lights leads about 2 miles WSW through the fairway from Mesen. Thence: NNW of Munken Beacon (black and white cairn, 4 m in height) (3 miles ENE), standing on above-water rocks on the S side of the fairway, thence: SSE of Guldhällan (2 miles ENE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: S of Gullängsberget (1½ miles E), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: N of a 10⋅6 m shoal (1 mile E), marked by a light-buoy (port hand). The white sectors (087°–080½°) and (062°–067½°), astern, of Falkens Grund and Ålbäcksgrund Lights respectively, lead through the channel W of Falkens Grund. The white sector (270°–276½°) of Hargökalv Light leads through the channel to the E of the islet. Hargökalv may be passed on either side but there is an 8⋅3 m shoal close to the track on the N side and larger vessels should pass S in the main channel.
1
2
3
5.186 Alternative channel. An alternative channel, indicated on the chart and suitable for a draught of 7⋅0 m, runs almost parallel to, and S of the main channel, from S of Vinterklasen, rejoining the main channel close S of Gullängsberget, passing (with positions from Falkens Grund Light (58°37′⋅6N, 17°02′⋅4E)): Between Klasgrunden Norra and Klasgrunden NV light-buoys (2½ miles and 2 miles E respectively), which mark the N and NW limits of Klasgrunden, an extensive shoal awash in many places, thence: SSE of Engelskagrundet (2 cables SSE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NNW of Kungshamnsgrund Light-beacon (red post, 3 m in height) (6 cables S), standing on a rock on the S side of the channel, thence: S of a 5⋅9 m shoal (2 miles WSW), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: To a position close S of Gullängsberget.
Hargökalv to Sandviksfjärden 1
2
3
4
5
6
205
5.187 From a position S of Hargökalv (58°36′⋅5N, 16°52′⋅6E) the recommended track leads W for 17 miles to the anchorage area in Sandviksfjärden, passing (with positions from Hargökalv Light, as above): Between Mögö (5 cables NW) and Brändö (6 cables W), thence: N of Grässkärsgrund, a group of rocks awash, (1½ miles WNW), thence: S of Nävekvarn Light (white hut, green band, 2 m in height, floodlit) (2 miles NW), displayed from a headland. The white sectors (295°–296°), ahead, and (093°–095°), astern respectively, of the light lead through the fairway in the vicinity of the light. In winter an ice-bridge (5.179) is established across the fairway between Nävekvarn (58°37′⋅5N, 16°48′⋅0E) and Stora Krokholmen, 1 mile S. Thence: N of Stora Järkön (4½ miles WNW), through a narrow channel marked by two buoys (lateral), thence: S of Karlslund Light (green hut, white roof and base, 6 m in height, floodlit) (5½ miles WNW), displayed from a headland. The white sector (095°–099°), astern, leads through the fairway W of the light. Thence: N of Djupviksholmarna (6 miles WNW), a group of islets and rocks awash. In winter an ice-bridge (5.179) is established across the fairway, 1 mile W of these islets, between Färjestaden (58°37′N, 16°38′E) and Kvarsebo, 1 mile NNE. Thence: SSW of Säterholmen Light (white lantern, green band on pedestal, floodlit) (9 miles WNW), displayed from the W point of an islet on the N side of the fairway. The white sector (280°–281°) leads through the fairway E of the light. In winter an ice-bridge (5.179) is established across the fairway, 1½ miles W of the light, between Ållonö (58°37′⋅3N, 16°30′⋅6E) and Skvättan, 2 miles NE. Thence: NNE of Skallskär (11 miles WNW), thence: NNE of Åsgrund (13 miles WNW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: N of Algersgrund Light (lantern on white hut, red band, black base, floodlit) (13½ miles WNW),
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
7
8
9
1
displayed from a rock on the S side of the channel, and: S of Lövsgata Light (white tower, green band, 6 m in height, floodlit) (58°39′⋅5N, 16°27′⋅5E) (13½ miles WNW), displayed from a headland, thence: SSW of Bodagrund (15 miles WNW), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: To a position in Sandviksfjärden about 7 cables NE of Stora Juten Light (red lantern on white tower, 6 m in height) (58°38′⋅1N, 16°19′⋅7E), displayed from a small islet in the harbour approaches, in the white sector (251°–254½°) of the light. Caution. A ferry crosses Bråviken from Säter, close E of Säterholmen Light (58°38′⋅3N, 16°35′⋅5E), to Skenäs, 6 cables S. Anchoring is prohibited and speed is restricted in the vicinity of the ferry crossing area. 5.188 Useful mark: Two beacons (58°39′⋅6N, 16°25′⋅3E), standing on the shore close S of Marmorbruket. They mark the N end of a submarine cable laid across the channel to Svintaskär and thence SW to the mainland. (Directions for entering harbour continue at 5.235)
from the N end of Korphålet and through the shoals extending NW.
Useful marks 5.191 1
2
Hargberget (58°43′⋅4N, 17°28′⋅1E), a hill visible to seaward. Stora Byttan (58°35′⋅2N, 17°18′⋅1E), a high rounded islet with a nipple. Lilla Byttan (58°35′⋅4N, 17°18′⋅3E), similar to above but smaller. Beacon (white, red band, 3 m in height, floodlit) (58°36′⋅3N, 17°18′⋅9E), standing on the NW point of Hävringe. Beacon (red with white staff, 3 m in height) (58°36′⋅3N, 17°18′⋅7E), standing on a rock 1 cable W of the beacon above. (Directions for main channel continue at 5.183)
Directions for inshore passage Arkö to Norrköping (continued from 5.158)
Arkö to Granskär 1
Directions for Hävringe south entrance 1
2
3
4
1
2
5.189 Local knowledge is required. From a position about 5 miles S of Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) the recommended track, indicated on the chart and authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m, leads 7½ miles NW and 2 miles WNW to join the main channel 1½ miles WNW of Hävringe, initially in the white sector (312°–321°) of Västra Korpen Light (58°36′⋅3N, 17°19′⋅5E) (5.184), passing (with positions from the light): SW of Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (4½ miles ESE), thence: SW of Grytan (3 miles ESE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NE of Sörgrund (1 mile SSE), thence: SW of Stenen (8 cables SE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NE of Kartbådan (5 cables SSE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Koppargrund (4 cables SE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: The track leads through Korphålet, the narrow channel between Västra Korpen and Hävringe, thence WNW for 2½ miles, to join the main channel, at night, in the white sector (105°–111°), astern, of Västra Korpen Light, passing close NE of Kopparnageln Lighthouse (58°36′⋅5N, 17°17′⋅7E) (5.184). 5.190 Alternatively, approach may be made on the alignment (295½°) of Hävringe Leading Lights: Front light (white square on white pedestal, black band, floodlit) (58°36′⋅2N, 17°19′⋅3E), displayed from the NE side of the islet. Rear light (white tower, black band, 22 m in height, floodlit) (183 m WNW of front light). From a position about 2½ miles SSE of Gustaf Dalén Light this alignment leads about 6½ miles WNW to Hävringe but passes closer to the shoals SE of Hävringe. The secondary approach channel (5.282) to Nyköping is a continuation NW of Hävringe S entrance channel, leading
2
3
4
5
206
5.192 From a position S of Arkö, 1½ cables W of Kuggviksskär Light (58°28′⋅8N, 16°58′⋅1E) (5.140), the track, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m and indicated on the chart, leads 1¼ miles NW through Arkösund to a position W of Hästö (58°29′⋅8N, 16°56′⋅5E), thence it leads 2 miles NW and 2¼ miles NNW to a position about 2 cables S of Granskär (58°33′⋅2N, 16°52′⋅1E). The fairway, marked by buoys (lateral), passes through Gränsösund, a narrow passage on the SW side of Gränsö, an island 1 mile NNW of Hästö. This section also forms part of the inshore route (5.2) which branches off S of Granskär to lead NNE across Bråviken. The following aids to navigation are situated along the fairway in this section of the channel, and in addition to the leading lights described, the white sectors of the lights described lead through the stretches of fairway in their vicinity: Liss Lindö Light (white lantern, floodlit) (58°29′⋅8N, 16°56′⋅2E), displayed from the N point of the peninsula on the W side of Arkösund, close W of Hästö. Gränsösund Leading Lights: Front light (white lantern, red rectangle, white stripe) (58°31′⋅2N, 16°53′⋅7E), displayed from a rock on the W side of the channel. Rear light (red rectangle, white stripe, on white hut), 125 m NW from front light. The alignment (316°) of these lights leads 2 miles NW through the fairway to the NW end of Gränsösund. Ettergrundshällan Light (lantern on white tower, red band, 5 m in height, floodlit) (58°30′⋅9N, 16°54′⋅2E), displayed from a rock on the W side of the channel. Trollholmshällan Light (white lantern) (58°31′⋅7N, 16°53′⋅3E), displayed from a rock in the centre of the fairway. It may be passed on either side, the E track passing closer to the NW point of Gränsö. Norra Gränsö Light (white hut, green band) (58°31′⋅7N, 16°53′⋅7E), displayed from the NW point of Gränsö. The channels E and W of Trollholmshällan Light rejoin at the position 2 cables S of Granskär. The inshore channel branches off to lead NNE across the E end of Bråviken.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Useful mark 5.193 1
Tower (red light), standing on the SW point of Arkö at the entrance to Arkösund. (Directions for inshore passage continue at 5.197) 2
Granskär to Fläskösund 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5.194 From the position S of Granskär the track, authorised for a draught of 5⋅5 m, indicated on the chart, leads 3 miles N through Bosjöfjärden and Fläskösund, a narrow passage marked by lights and buoys, to a position in Bråviken at the N end of Fläskösund about 5 cables NE of Isö (58°35′⋅2N, 16°49′⋅7E), passing (with positions from Marviken Power Station Chimney (58°33′⋅2N, 16°50′⋅1E) (5.181)): NE of Bosösten Light (white lantern) (58°33′⋅2N, 16°51′⋅5E), displayed from a rock on the W side of the fairway (7 cables E), thence: SW of Västra Ramsholmen (9 cables NE), marked off its NW point by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: The white sector (170¾°−172¾°), astern, of Bosösten Light leads partially through Bosjöfjärden, clearing E of Ljungskär (8 cables N), marked off its E side by a buoy (port hand), and W of a 5⋅1 m shoal (1 mile NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: W of Fläsköhällan Light (white hut, green band, black base, 3m in height) (58°34′⋅6N, 16°51′⋅2E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the fairway, 2 cables E of Stora Fläskö. Ramsholmen Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, red border, on red hut, white stripe) (58°33′⋅8N, 16°51′⋅9E), displayed from the W side of Ramsholmen. Rear light (white triangle, red border, with red square, white stripe, on white hut), 250 m SSE from front light. From a position close W of Fläsköhällan Lighthouse, above, the alignment (157°), astern, of these lights leads 6 cables through Fläskösund channel, passing: Close NE of Fläskö Light (lantern on white hut, red band) (58°34′⋅9N, 16°51′⋅0E), displayed from the NE point of Fläskö, and: Close SW of Vivstagrund, ½ cable NE of the light, marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: Close SW and W of Fläskösund Light (white tower, green band on black base, 6 m in height) (58°35′⋅0N, 16°50′⋅9E), displayed from a rock on the E side of the channel, thence: Close E of Fläskögrund Light (white pillar, red band on black base, 4 m in height) (58°35′⋅0N, 16°50′⋅8E), displayed from a rock on the W side of the channel, marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Close W of a buoy (W cardinal), 1½ cables N of the above light, marking the N limit of the shoal area at the N end of Fläskösund. In addition to the leading lights described the white sector of Fläskögrund Light leads through the fairway in its vicinity.
3
Link channels 1
2
3
5.196 Three short channels connect the main route on the N side of Bråviken with the secondary route to the S: From a position close S of Hargökalv Light (58°36′⋅5N, 16°52′⋅6E) (5.185) the track, authorised for a draught of 5⋅5 m, leads 1½ miles SW to join the S route, passing SE of Själhällarna, and shoal with a depth of 5⋅2 m, marked by a buoy (E cardinal), 1 mile SW of Hargökalv. From a position 4 cables SW of Nävekvarn Light (58°37′⋅2N, 16°48′⋅8E) (5.187) the track, authorised for a draught of 5⋅5 m, leads 2 miles WSW to join the S route, passing between Korstagsgrund, marked by a buoy (N cardinal), and Järknögrund, marked by a buoy (starboard hand), 1 mile SW and 2 miles WSW respectively, from Nävekvarn Light. From a position close N of Lilla Järkön (58°37′⋅2N, 16°43′⋅7E) a track leads 1½ miles WSW to join the S route 2 cables SE of Djupviksholmarna (5.187).
Inshore route continuation channel Chart 3217
Directions 1
2
3
Fläskösund to Norrköping 1
Norrköping in a position close E of Säterholmen Lighthouse (58°38′⋅3N, 16°35′⋅5E), passing (with positions from Lönö Light (white hut, red band, 2 m in height, floodlit) (58°36′⋅3N, 16°46′⋅6E), displayed from a headland on the N side of Lönö peninsula): NNE of Råbockarna (1½ miles ESE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NNE of Lönö Lighthouse. The white sectors (287°–290½°), ahead, and (107½°–109°), astern, respectively, lead through the fairway E and W of the light. Thence: NNE of Flinta (2½ miles WNW), a small islet. The white sector (288°–290°), ahead, of Säterholmen Light (58°38′⋅3N, 16°35′⋅5E) (5.187) leads through the section of fairway W of Flinta. Thence: SSW of Djupviksholmarna (3½ miles WNW) (5.187), marked at its S limit by a buoy (starboard hand).
5.195 From a position NE of Isö the track, authorised for a draught of 5⋅5 m, indicated on the chart, leads about 7 miles WNW through the fairway on the S side of Bråviken to join the main channel from Hävringe to
207
(continued from 5.193) 5.197 Across Bråviken. From a position about 2 cables S of Granskär (58°33′⋅2N, 16°52′⋅1E) the track, indicated on the chart, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m leads initially 1 mile E then 4 miles NNE through the fairway to join with the main Hävringe to Norrköping channel close SW of Munken Beacon (58°36′⋅8N, 16°58′⋅3E) (5.185), thence continuing E. Marö Leading Lights: Marö. Front light (red rectangle, white stripe) (58°33′⋅6N, 16°54′⋅9E), displayed from the W point of Marö. Ekö. Rear light (similar structure), displayed from the middle of Ekö, 6 cables SSW of front light. The track leads initially 1 mile E, in the white sector (083½°–090¾°) of Ekö Light, passing N of a 4 m shoal, marked by a buoy (N cardinal), 4 cables NW of Anholmen (58°32′⋅7N, 16°53′⋅2E). Thence, after passing NW of Ekö and close W of Marö, the alignment (203¼°), astern, of the above leading lights leads about 3½ miles NNE through the fairway passing clear of the shoals adjacent to the channel, marked by buoys (lateral) and close W of the W side of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
4
Grässkären (58°36′⋅0N, 16°57′⋅5E), marked by a buoy (W cardinal). The inshore route then leads generally E following the main Hävringe to Norrköping channel in reverse to a position NE of Norra Kränkan Lighthouse. (Directions for inshore route continue at 5.306)
Anchorage and harbours Outer anchorage 1
Other channel across outer Bråviken 2
Charts 3217, 3218, Swedish Chart 621 (see 1.34)
Arkö to Oxelösund 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
5.198 Local knowledge is required together with the large scale Swedish chart with inset. This alternative small craft channel, authorised for a draught of 3⋅6 m, marked by buoys, light-buoys, lights and beacons, is narrow and tortuous and leads NNE across Bråviken, between two areas of incomplete surveys which are shown on the chart, to join with the alternative Norrköping channel (5.186) at a position SW of Vinterklasen. 5.199 Directions. From a position S of Arkö, 3 cables S of Kuggviksskär (58°28′⋅8N, 16°58′⋅1E), the track, shown on the chart, leads 11 miles generally NNE through the fairway to a position 1¼ miles SW of Vinterklasen (58°38′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅0E), passing (with positions from Arkö Beacon (58°29′⋅5N, 16°59′⋅5E)): NW of Brändö (5 cables S), through Brändösund, and: SE of Viskär (2 cables S), thence: NW of Utterklabbarna (5 cables SE), thence: W of Södra Lunda Beacon (metal shed) (58°29′⋅9N, 17°00′⋅3E), standing on the W side of Södra Lunda, passing through Lundasund, a narrow passage between Arkö and Lunda, thence: NW and NNW of Logegrund Light (white pedestal, green band, 2 m in height) (58°32′⋅1N, 17°00′⋅7E), displayed from a rock close E of the channel, thence: NNW of Logen Beacon (white cairn, green band) (2¾ miles NNE), standing on a rock close E of Logegrund Light, thence: NW of Lilla Alen Beacon (white pyramid, rectangular topmark) (4 miles NNE), standing on a rock close E of the channel, thence: NW of Karthällan Beacon (white tower, 8 m in height) (58°33′⋅3N, 17°03′⋅7E), standing on a rocky shoal 4 cables ESE of the channel, thence: ESE of Penningskärsbåden Beacon (red cairn with white stripe and grey base) (5 miles NNE), standing on a rock on the W side of the fairway, thence: WNW of Klasgrunden (8 miles NNE) (5.186), marked on its W side by a buoy (starboard hand), and: ESE of Håldämman Beacon, standing on a rocky shoal on the W side of the fairway 2½ miles SW of Vinterklasen. 5.200 Useful mark: Källskärsrev Beacon, former light tower, (58°33′⋅5N, 17°10′⋅0E). Viskär Tower (58°29′⋅3N, 16°59′⋅6E) (5.155).
5.201 Anchorage Area A, for large vessels, is established centred on a position 2 miles SE of Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E), with general depths of about 45 m. Anchorage Area B, for other vessels, is centred 2¾ miles ENE of Gustav Dalén Lighthouse. Each area is further subdivided into four smaller areas, as shown on the chart. Anchorage may be obtained, with local knowledge, in several areas within the navigable parts of Bråviken W of the entrance. Most are well sheltered with good holding ground.
Arkösund 1
2
1
2
1
2
5.202 Description. Arkösund (58°29′⋅4N, 16°56′⋅7E) is a fishing and small craft harbour situated on the W side of the passage between Arkö and the mainland at the E limit of Vikbolandet (5.150). The Swedish Maritime Authority maintains a sea rescue (sjöräddning) school on the S part of Arkö. The harbour consists of a large breakwater with a broad head, extending ESE from the shore, enclosing other small jetties and pontoons for yachts. Ice. Although the entrance is normally obstructed by ice from early January to the middle of March the harbour area is normally ice-free. 5.203 Directions. From a position on the inshore route about 7 cables NNW of Kuggviksskär Light (58°28′⋅8N, 16°58′⋅1E) at the S entrance to Arkösund, in the white sector (149°–156½°), astern, of Östra Kopparholmen Front Leading Light (58°28′⋅4N, 16°58′⋅2E), the channel, suitable for a draught of 4⋅4 m, leads 2 cables W to the harbour. Useful mark: Pilot Lookout (disused) (high, yellow, narrow three-storeyed house) (58°29′⋅0N, 16°57′⋅9E). 5.204 Anchorage may be obtained in the central part of Arkösund in depths of about 30 m, clay, or alternatively in depths of about 14 m, clay, in the NE part closer to Hästö. Berths. On the N side there is a quay with a length of 35 m and depths alongside of 4⋅8 to 6⋅5 m. Other berths for fishing boats are situated on both sides of the breakwater which forms the harbour. Facilities: slip with a capacity of 30 tonnes; small engine repairs at workshop. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Marviken 1
2
208
5.205 Description. Marviken (58°33′⋅3N, 16°50′⋅2E), is situated at the N end of the Björnö peninsula about 5 miles NW of Arkö. Its principal function is to serve the fuel needs of Marviken Power Station, lying close W. The harbour is approached through a channel suitable for a draught of 5⋅5 m which branches off the main channel to Norrköping thence leading generally SSW to the harbour through Fläskösund (5.194). Regulation concerning entry. Although the harbour may also be approached from the S through the channel
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
1
1
from Arkö, all loaded tankers must use the main approach from the Hävringe to Norrköping channel. 5.206 Directions. Follow the directions given at 5.196 for the link channel SW from Hargökalv (58°36′⋅5N, 16°52′⋅6E) to a position NE of Isö. Thence follow the reverse of the directions given at 5.195 and 5.194 to a position E of Ljungskär (58°34′⋅0N, 16°50′⋅6E) where the channel to Marviken branches off to lead 7 cables SSW to the harbour. Useful mark: Marviken Power Station Chimney (58°33′⋅2N, 16°50′⋅1E) (5.181). 5.207 Anchorage may be obtained in Bosjöfjärden, about 3 cables NE of the harbour, in a depth of about 15 m, clay. Berth. The harbour consists of a T-shaped jetty, extending NNW from the shore, with a length across the head of 45 m and a depth alongside of 12⋅5 m. A moveable oil boom, enclosing the whole harbour, is positioned as required during operations. It is marked at its NE outer limit by a buoy (special).
1
Sandviken 1
2
Nävekvarn 1
2
1
1
5.208 Description. Nävekvarn (58°38′N, 16°48′E), a fishing, small craft and yacht harbour with depths of 4 to 10 m, situated in a small bay on the N side of Bråviken about 10 miles WSW of Oxelösund. The harbour consists of quays with a number of floating jetties for yachts. Although primarily a fishing and pleasure craft harbour a metal foundry has functioned in the town for several hundred years and the harbour is still used to transport goods to and from the factory. Depths in the harbour are about 4⋅0 m. The town has a population of about 1000. 5.209 Directions. The bay and harbour are entered directly off the main channel to Norrköping. From a position in the channel 4 cables W of Nävekvarn Light (58°37′⋅2N, 16°48′⋅8E) the track leads about 4 cables N to the harbour entrance passing E of the islet lying in the middle of the bay and close S of the town. 5.210 Anchorage may be obtained off the loading jetty in the W part in depths of 12 to 15 m, clay. Berths. The loading jetty has a length of 40 m with depths alongside of 2 to 4⋅8 m. Facilities: small slip for vessels up to 12 m in length; minor engine repairs. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
1
2
1
5.211 Description. Färjestaden (58°37′N, 16°38′E) is a small commercial harbour for the export of bulk grain, suitable for a draught of 3⋅9 m, situated on the S side of Bråviken 13 miles ENE of Norrköping. The harbour consists of an artificial jetty extending about 120 m NNE from the shore and a turning basin, dredged to a depth of 4⋅6 m, suitable for a vessel with a maximum length of 60 m. It is entered through a channel, marked by buoys (lateral), about 3 cables in length, 16 m wide and with a dredged depth of 4⋅6 m but which is liable to silting. 5.212 Directions. Färjestaden Leading Lights:
5.214 Description. Sandviken (58°39′⋅6N, 16°24′⋅0E), a small craft and yacht harbour lies at the head of a small open bay on the N side of Bråviken, 7 miles NE of Norrköping, near the E entrance to Sandviksfjärden. The harbour is formed by a breakwater on the W side extending SE from the shore, and a stone pier on the E side extending SW from the shore, each about 70 m in length, enclosing two pontoon jetties extending S from the shore. General depths in the harbour are about 7 m. In winter an ice-bridge (5.179) is established between Sandviken and the S shore of Bråviken. 5.215 Directions. From a position in the main channel close SW of Bodagrund (58°39′⋅1N, 16°25′⋅0E) (5.187) the channel leads about 7 cables NNW to the harbour passing ENE of a 5⋅8 m shoal, 5 cables S of the harbour, marked by a buoy (starboard hand). Berths. There are a number of berths on both sides and the head of the pier with depths of 1 to 5 m. Supplies. Fresh water available.
NORRKÖPING General information Chart 3217
Position 1
Färjestaden 1
Front light (yellow triangle, red border, on building) (58°37′⋅3N, 16°37′⋅6E), displayed from the harbour when required. Rear light (similar structure) (80 m SSW from light). From a position 1¼ miles ESE of Säterholmen Lighthouse (58°38′⋅3N, 16°35′⋅5E) (5.187) the alignment (197½°) of these lights leads about 4 cables SSW, through the buoyed channel to the harbour. 5.213 Berth. There is a quay, with a length of 50 m and an extension of about 45 m formed by 4 dolphins joined by bridges, with depths of 3⋅5 to 4⋅0 m alongside. Supplies: fresh water; provisions from Östra Husby, 3 miles SW.
5.216 Norrköping (58°36′N, 16°11′E) lies about 35 miles inland at the head of Bråviken, a long narrow inlet on the N side of Vikbolandet. It is situated on both banks of Motalaström about 2 miles from its mouth. Included in the port are the berths and jetties at Djurönshamn, situated on Djurön, a peninsula 3 miles ENE of the main harbour, and Bråvikenshamn, situated on the E limit of Malmölandet, a peninsula 1 mile N of the main harbour.
Function 1
209
5.217 Norrköping is a major commercial, industrial and maritime centre, being the home of the Swedish Hydrographic Office. It is a safe, well-sheltered harbour with good anchorage and is well developed with extensive modern equipment to handle all types of traffic and cargo including bulk, liquid, container, Ro-Ro and general goods.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Port of Norrkoping (5.216) (Original dated 2001) (Photograph − Norrkoping Port Authority) 2
Principal exports include paper products, woodpulp, grain, piece goods and timber products. Imports include fertiliser, coal, coke, bulk oils and piece goods. 5.218 The port is approached through channels in Bråviken and entered from Sandviksfjärden through channels in Pampusfjärden, marked by buoys and light-buoys, on the alignment of leading lights or lights. The inner harbour is entered through Lindökanalen (5.238), an artificial canal on the SE side of Händelön (5.231), marked by light-beacons, lights and buoys, on the alignment of leading lights.
Channel to Djurönshamn — 12⋅0 m. Channel to Bråvikenshamn — 8⋅2 m; Ro-Ro berth — 6⋅2 m. Channel to Pampushamnen — 11⋅8 m. Channel to inner harbour Lindökanalen — 8⋅4 m. Inner harbour to Ståthögahamnen — 7⋅9 m. The original river channel, from Pampusfjärden leading W through the Motala river for about 4 miles, is heavily silted up, and is further restricted by a fixed bridge with a vertical clearance of 2⋅9 m spanning the channel 2 miles W of its entrance. Buoyage was withdrawn from the channel in 2002, and the charted dredged depths are no longer maintained.
Traffic
Deepest and longest berths
Approach and entry 1
1
5.219 In 2003 the port was used by 1332 vessels totalling 7⋅6 million dwt.
2
5.222 1
Port Authority 1
5.220 Norrköpings Hamn and Stuveri AB, Stuvaregrand, PO Box 6075, S–600 06, Norrköping. Website: www.norrkoping-port.se E-Mail:
[email protected]
Water level 1
Limiting conditions Controlling draughts 1
5.221 The controlling draughts are those in the channels to the various sections of the harbour. Maximum permitted draughts: Channel to anchorage — 12⋅6 m.
Djurönshamn — bulk grain handling (5.240). Bravikenshamn — paper products and Ro-Ro (5.241). Pampushamnen — Pampuskajen, bulk cargo (5.242). Inner harbour — Berths 59–47 (5.243). 5.223 Under normal conditions the water level varies between 1 m above mean level to 0⋅6 m below mean level. Winds from the E increase the level; winds from the W decrease the level. The strongest winds usually occur between November and April. Depth gauges are established at Norrköping and at Grytsholmen (58°37′⋅9N, 16°16′⋅6E) close N of the river entrance.
Density of water 1
210
5.224 The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅000 g/cm3.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
Harbour
5.225 At the inner harbour a vessel of 34 976 dwt. At Pampushamnen oil jetty a vessel of 78 228 dwt.
General layout 1
Arrival information Vessel Traffic Service 1
5.226 Norrköping lies within the mandatory Oxelösund VTS Area. For details of limits, reporting points and other requirements see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Port radio 1
5.227 Norrköping Hamnradio (Norrköping Harbour radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Anchorages 1
2
3
4
5.228 Anchorage may be obtained in the following areas in the roads, as indicated on the chart: Sandviksfjärden, 7 cables E of Esterön (58°39′N, 16°20′E), in depths of about 22 m, clay. Pampusfjärden, 4 cables SW of Stora Juten Lighthouse (58°38′⋅1N, 16°19′⋅7E), in depths of 12 to 16 m, clay. Anchorage is prohibited in the following areas: On the E side of Pampushamnen in the vicinity of the turning basin. In Lindökanalen on the SE side of Händelön. In the vicinity W and E of Händelöbron. In the vicinity of a submarine pipeline, shown on the chart, laid across the SE parts of Pampusfjärden and Lindöfjärden from the SW side of Djurön to a position on the S side of the yacht harbour at Lindö, close NE of Norrköping. The approximate offshore line (064°–244°) of the pipeline is marked on the shore at each end by a pair of beacons (yellow triangles, red borders), each front beacon also having a yellow warning notice board. In the vicinity of the submarine power cable laid from Djurön to Stora Juten. In the vicinity of the submarine pipeline laid across the channel close NW of Pampushamnen.
2
3
4
5
6
7
5.231 The Motala river flows through Norrköping to discharge into Pampusfjärden at its mouth, about 3 miles NE of the town, between Malmölandet, a peninsula, and Händelön, an island close S. The island is connected to the mainland on its N side by a fixed bridge spanning the river channel, and on its S side by Händelöbron (5.232), a bascule bridge. There are ten sections within the harbour area: Djurönshamn lies on the NW part of the Djurön peninsula on the E side of Pampusfjärden, 5 miles NE of the town. It is entered directly off the main approach channel and is partly protected from the SW by Lilla Juten, a small islet which lies 1 cable W of the harbour. Bravikenshamn lies on the SE side of Malmölandet, 3½ miles NNE of the town, and is fronted by a number of islets including Grytsholmen and Kvistholmen. It is entered through a buoyed channel leading from the SW part of Sandviksfjärden. Pampushamnen lies on the E side of Händelön close to the entrance to Lindökanalen and contains the oil jetties and bulk cargo facilities. It is entered through the main entrance channel in Pampusfjärden. Lindöhamnen, the small craft and yacht harbour in Lindöfjärden, E of the town. The above sections all lie in the outer part of the harbour. The islet of Blixholmen (58°36′⋅2N, 16°13′⋅2E) lies at the junction of the river and the inner end of Lindökanalen at the S end of Händelön. The channel on the W side of the islet is closed to navigation. The remaining sections described below lie within the inner part of the harbour which extends SW to a fixed rail bridge, with a vertical clearance of 2⋅5 m, spanning the channel 7 cables WSW of Blixholmen, and are reached through the main entrance channel to Pampushamnen thence via Lindökanalen: Edstrandskajen at the SE end of Lindökanalen. Öhmanskajen lies in the inner harbour on the S bank of the river and forms part of the inner harbour on both banks of the river SW of Blixholmen. Gästgivarehagen lies close NW of Blixholmen on the S bank of the river. Cementkajen and Ramshällskajen lie on the SW side of Händelön above and below the bridge. Ståthögahamnen is a basin off the S bank of the river close W of the bridge.
Pilotage and tugs 1
5.229 Pilotage is provided by Oxelösund and is available 24 hours. See 5.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Tugs with icebreaking capacity are available.
Händelöbron 1
Traffic regulations 1
5.230 Movement of tankers loaded with over 10 000 tonnes of gasoline and tankers over 15 000 dwt is restricted to daylight hours only. Speed restrictions are in force in various sections of the harbour.
2
211
5.232 A road and rail bascule bridge with a vertical clearance of 2⋅5 m when closed and a 30 m wide navigational opening spans the river channel between Händelön and Alholmen, close NE of the city centre. The NE, fixed section of the bridge, has a vertical clearance of 5⋅0 m and an 11 m wide navigational opening with a depth of 4 m at mean water level. Operation and signals. Commercial vessels may use the bridge at all times having given 1 hours notice to SOS central, Stockholm. Usage by pleasure craft is restricted by time and season; SOS central, Stockholm should be contacted for details.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Passage is regulated by light signals (Diagram 5.232) displayed from the bridge.
1
2
3
4
Händelöbron − bridge signals (5.232) 3
1
Contact with the bridge watch may also be made by VHF. Lights are displayed from the ends of the bridge piers; green on the N side and red on the S side.
Ice 1
5.233 The port is kept open to navigation throughout the winter by the use of icebreakers.
2
3
Principal mark 1
5.234 Landmark: Kungsängen Aero Light (mast, obstruction lights) (58°34′⋅6N, 16°13′⋅7E), displayed 1½ miles SE of the town. Major light: Kungsängen Aero Light — as above.
4
Directions for entering harbour (continued from 5.188)
Entrance channels 1
5
5.235 Djurönshamn. From a position in the main channel in Sandviksfjärden, about 7 cables ENE of Stora Juten Lighthouse (58°38′⋅2N, 16°19′⋅7E) the channel leads 5 cables SW through clear water to the harbour taking care to approach the berth clear of the buoys (lateral and cardinal) marking the narrow channel E of the harbour.
212
5.236 Bravikenshamn. Bråviken Norra Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on post) (58°38′⋅4N, 16°16′⋅9E), displayed from the SE point of Svartskär. Rear light (red triangle on orange and white post), displayed from the shore 700 m W of front light. From a position in Sandviksfjärden 4 cables NE of Stora Juten Lighthouse the alignment (275°) of these lights leads 1½ miles W through the channel, marked by buoys and light-buoys (lateral), to a position 3 cables E of the front light, passing S of Esterön and N of Kvistholmen. Bråviken Södra Leading Lights: Front light (orange triangle, white bands, on orange and white post) (58°38′⋅2N, 16°15′⋅9E), displayed from the SW side of the harbour. Rear light (similar structure) (115 m WSW from front light). Esterön Leading Lights: Front light (orange triangle, white bands, on orange and white post) (58°38′⋅7N, 16°19′⋅4E), displayed from the SW side of Esterön. Rear light (similar structure) (500 m ENE of front light). The alignments (256°) and (076°) of the above leading lights, ahead and astern respectively, lead 6 cables WSW through the middle of the buoyed channel to the turning area off the berths, marked at its limits by buoys and light-buoys (lateral). 5.237 Pampushamnen. Lindökanalen Norra and Södra Lights in line: Front lights (orange triangles, red borders, on white and orange framework towers) (58°37′⋅0N, 16°14′⋅7E), displayed from Händelön close to the canal entrance. Rear lights (similar structures) (443 m and 415 m respectively, SW of front lights). Each pair of the above lights in line bearing 247°, visible only on their alignment, marks the edges of the dredged channel, marked by light-buoys (lateral), leading to Pampushamnen and the entrance to Lindökanalen. From a position about 3 cables NE of Stora Juten Lighthouse (58°38′⋅2N, 16°19′⋅7E) the track leads 2½ miles SW to Pampushamnen entrance, initially passing close NW of Stora Juten NV Light-buoy (port hand), moored 1 cable W of the light, thence through the centre of the buoyed channel, 60 m wide, between the lights in line. The Pampushamnen turning place, with a diameter of 300 m, and the dredged area, are marked at their limits by buoys (lateral). The centre of the short channel through Pampushamnen is indicated by the alignment (295°) of Pampushamnen Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on red post) (58°37′⋅5N, 16°14′⋅3E), displayed from the NE corner of Händelön. Rear light (similar structure) (80 m NW of front light). In addition, the N side of the channel is marked by a pair of lights in line bearing 295° displayed close NE of the above leading lights. These lights are also in line with the line of buoys marking the N side of the dredged area. Caution. In winter an ice-bridge, crossing the entrance channels, is established from Getå (58°40′N, 16°18′E), on the N side, to Marby, 4 miles S and close E of Lindöhamnen.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
1
1
2
3
5.238 Lindökanalen is entered from the S part of Pampushamnen between the alignment of Lindökanalen Norra and Södra Lights in line (5.237). Thence the channel, marked by numbered light-beacons and buoys (lateral), leads 1¼ miles SW to the turning place, 250 m in diameter, close W of Rossviken on the E side of Blixholmen. 5.239 SW side of Händelön. The river channel on the SW side of Händelön, about 40 m wide, marked by buoys and light-buoys, leads 1¼ miles NW, through Händelöbron, and the centreline is indicated by the alignment (301°), ahead, or (121°), astern, respectively, of lights as follows: Marieborg Leading Lights: Front light (triangle on red and white framework tower) (58°37′⋅1N, 16°11′⋅0E), displayed from the W bank of the river 2 cables NW of Karlsro Light (dolphin) (58°37′⋅0N, 16°11′⋅3E), which marks the NW limit of the dredged area at the NW end of the channel. Rear light (similar structure) (540 m from front light). Rossviken Leading Lights: Front light (red and orange framework tower) (58°36′⋅2N, 16°13′⋅7E), displayed close S of the inner end of Lindökanalen. Rear light (similar structure) (220 m from front light).
Port services 1
5.244 Repairs. Workshop for engine repairs. Other facilities. Deratting and issue of certificates; hospital; oily waste disposal facilities available; customs house. Supplies. Fuel oil at some berths and also by bunker barge; fresh water by boat; provisions and chandlery. Communications. Nearest airport Kungsängen, 4 km SE of harbour. Local and international flights to Copenhagen.
OXELÖSUND General information Chart 3218 plan of Oxelösund
Position 1
5.245 Oxelösund (58°40′N, 17°06′E) is situated on the E coast of Sweden on a peninsula about 50 miles SW of Stockholm, 7 miles NW of Hävringe (58°36′⋅2N, 17°19′⋅0E), at the seaward end of Bråviken. Included in the port are the jetties at Järnverkshamnen (5.260) on the E side of the peninsula NE of the main harbour.
Function Berths
1
Alongside berths 1
1
1
1
2
5.240 Djurönshamn. An elevator jetty, 30 m offshore, with a length of 160 m and a depth alongside of 12⋅2 m, connected to the shore by a short bridge at its SW end and an overhead conveyor system. About 130 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of about 7 m is available at a jetty close S of the elevator jetty. 5.241 Bravikenshamn. A privately operated quay with a length of 126 m and a depth alongside of 8⋅8 m. A fixed Ro-Ro berth with a ramp width of 20 m and a depth of 6⋅8 m lies at the SW end of the quay. It consists of two breasting dolphins and a mooring dolphin extending a total of 135 m from the ramp. 5.242 Pampushamnen.The oil harbour has three jetties with depths alongside of 9⋅0 m, 11⋅9 m and 12⋅4 m. Pampuskajen has a length of 460 m with a depth alongside of 12⋅0 m. A Ro-Ro berth 80 m in length is situated on the inside of the SE end of the quay, with a depth of 9 m alongside. A 150 m extension to the main quay at the NW end, with a Ro-Ro ramp, is planned to enter service in 2005. 5.243 Inner harbour area. Berths 59–47 on Öhmanskajen have a length of 600 m with a depth alongside of 9⋅0 m. Two fixed Ro-Ro berths lie at the N end of this quay, the outer having a depth of 8 m. The remainder of this section which includes Edstrandskajen and the river area SW of Blixholmen has a total of 3030 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 5⋅0 to 9⋅0 m. The section on the SW side of Händelön which includes Gästgivarehagen, Cementkajen, Ramshällskajen and Ståthögahamnen contains a total of 450 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 6⋅0 to 9⋅0 m. A fixed Ro-Ro berth with a ramp width of 8 m and a depth of 6 m lies at the S end of Gästgivarehagen.
2
5.246 Oxelösund is a large industrial community and major deep-water commercial port with extensive modern equipment capable of handling large tankers and bulk carriers in particular, but also including container, Ro-Ro and general cargo vessels within the harbour. Principal exports include steel products, iron ore, pig iron, piece goods, timber and oil products. Principal imports include scrap iron, coal ore, oils, piece goods, steel products and limestone. There is a fishing harbour and small boat harbours for pleasure craft within the harbour area. The population of Oxelösund is about 14 000.
Topography 1
5.247 The Oxelö peninsula is wooded. The port is fronted on the E and SE by an extensive offshore bank containing numerous shoals, rocks, islands and islets. Most of the larger islands lie SE of the port and provide good protection for the harbour, which is generally well sheltered but with winds from S some swell may be experienced.
Approach and entry 1
5.248 The main harbour is approached from seaward and entered through channels, marked by buoys, light-buoys, lights and beacons, on the alignment of leading lights. The E part of the harbour at Järnverkshamnen is approached from seaward through a channel, marked by light-buoys, buoys, lights and beacons on the alignment of leading lights and in the sectors of lights. The outer part of the channel also forms part of the main approach to Nyköping. It is entered through a channel in Ålöfjärden (58°41′N, 17°11′E), marked by buoys and a sectored light.
Traffic 1
213
5.249 In 2003 the port was used by 1058 vessels totalling 5⋅5 million dwt.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Port of Oxelösund (5.245) (Photograph − Bo Bjorkdahl)
(Original dated 2001)
Port Authority 1
Arrival information
5.250 Oxelösunds Hamn AB, PO Box 1200, S–613 24, Oxelösund. Website: www.oxhamn.se E-Mail:
[email protected]
Vessel Traffic Service 1
Port radio
Limiting conditions 1
Controlling draughts 1
5.251 The controlling draughts are those in the channels to the various sections of the harbour. Maximum permitted draughts: Channel to Oxelösund main harbour — 15⋅3 m. Channel to Örsbaken anchorage area — 10⋅8 m. Channel to Järnverkshamnen — 8⋅9m. On departure,with permission — 9⋅2 m. Channel to Fiskehamn — 5⋅4 m.
1
5.252 Main harbour Quay No 10 — iron ore and oil (5.272). Järnverkshamnen Quay No 2–3 — steel products (5.275).
Density of water 5.253 The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅005 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled Bulk carrier 110 000 dwt with draught of 14⋅5 m. Oil tanker 109 000 dwt with draught of 12⋅8 m.
5.258 Oxelösund Pilot Station is the co-ordinating centre for all pilotage within the area. Pilots are available 24 hours. The Oxelösund Traffic Information Centre is also located at the pilot station. See 5.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Tugs
5.254 1
5.257 For outer anchorages see 5.201. In the outer harbour area anchorage may be obtained, as indicated on the chart, 5 cables W of Vinterklasen (58°38′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅0E) in depths of about 31 to 39 m, clay. In the approaches to Järnverkshamnen anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, in the S central part of Örsbaken, about 7 cables ENE of Kölhalsen Light (58°41′⋅5N, 17°10′⋅7E), in depths of about 22 m, clay. Anchorage may also be obtained in Ålöfjärden S of Korpholmen (58°40′⋅6N, 17°08′⋅8E), in depths of about 14 m, clay. This anchorage is well sheltered except in strong NE winds.
Pilotage 1
1
5.256 Oxelösund Hamnradio (Oxelösund Harbour radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Outer anchorages
Deepest and longest berths 1
5.255 Oxelösund lies within the mandatory Oxelösund VTS Area. For details of limits, reporting points and other requirements see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
1
214
5.259 Two tugs with icebreaking capacity are available. Extra tugs available with prior notice.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Harbour
Directions for entering harbour (continued from 5.184)
General layout 1
2
3
5.260 The main harbour is formed by an inlet on the SW side of the peninsula between Femöre (58°39′⋅5N, 17°06′⋅0E), a small S extension, and Furö, an islet 5 cables E. The main ore and oil handling area lies on the N shore of the harbour reached through the main entrance channel. Other cargo berths and a small craft harbour lie in the NW part of the harbour with another small craft harbour in the NE part, N of Furö. Oxelösunds fishing harbour (5.273), formed by two breakwaters, lies in Östersviken on the E side of Femöre and is reached through a branch leading W off the main channel. A small craft harbour lies in the S part of Östersviken. Järnverkshamnen, the steelworks harbour, lies at the S end of a small bay on the E side of the peninsula 1 mile NE of the main harbour, and is fronted by the islet of Korpholmen. It is reached through Ålöfjärden by a branch leading W off the main Nyköping approach channel in Örsbaken.
Approach channels 1
Entry channel to main harbour 1
2
3
Natural conditions 1
1
2
3
5.261 Local magnetic anomaly. See 5.169. Ice is formed during the winter months but navigation is kept open by the use of icebreakers.
4
Principal marks
5
5.262 Landmarks: Hävringe Beacon (58°36′⋅2N, 17°19′⋅0E) (5.171). Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Norra Kränkan Lighthouse (58°37′⋅0N, 17°23′⋅4E) (5.184). Lillhammarsgrund Lighthouse (58°39′⋅7N, 17°20′⋅3E) (5.293). Marviken Power Station Chimney (58°33′⋅2N, 16°50′⋅1E) (5.181). Oxelösund Water Tower (58°40′⋅2N, 17°07′⋅3E) (5.181). Oxelösund Church (58°40′⋅3N, 17°06′⋅3E). Järnverk Chimneys (58°40′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅2E). Nyköping Water Tower (58°45′⋅7N, 17°01′⋅0E). Major lights: Gustaf Dalén Light (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Hävringe Rear Leading Light (58°36′⋅3N, 17°19′⋅1E) (5.190). Skavsta Aero Light (58°47′⋅1N, 16°56′⋅0E) (5.181).
1
2
1
Other aids to navigation 1
5.263 Racons: Norra Kränkan Lighthouse (58°37′⋅0N, 17°23′⋅4E) (5.184). Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Lillhammarsgrund Lighthouse (58°39′⋅7N, 17°20′⋅3E) (5.293). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
5.264 Directions for the seaward approach channel through Hävringe N entrance are given at 5.183 and for Hävringe S entrance at 5.189.
2
215
5.265 From a position in the approach channel 3½ cables WNW of Ytterskärsgrundet (58°37′⋅8N, 17°10′⋅3E) (5.184), the line of bearing 325°, or at night in the white sector (323°–327°) of Ljungskär Light (white tower, 6 m in height, floodlit) (58°39′⋅2N, 17°07′⋅9E), leads 1 mile NW through the fairway, marked by light-buoys and buoys, passing (with positions from Ljungskär Light): SW of Sagas Grund (1¼ miles SE), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: SW of Betens S Grund (1 mile SE), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: NE of Klashällen Beacon (former lighthouse, floodlit) (7 cables SE), standing on a rocky shoal, marked on its E side by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Beten Light (white lantern, floodlit) (5½ cables SE), displayed from the W side of Beten, and on to the following alignment of: Oxelösunds Hamn Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle on mast) (58°40′⋅0N, 17°06′⋅5E), displayed from the head of the harbour. Rear light (similar structure) (280 m NW of front light). Both lights visible on the leading line only. The alignment (320½°) of these lights leads about 1 mile NW into the harbour, through the fairway, marked by light-buoys and buoys, passing SW of Ljungskär Light and between Femöre and Furö. The E side of the fairway, in its upper part, is marked by the white sector (134½°–142°), astern, of Ljungskär Light. 5.266 Östersviken. Oxelösunds Fiskehamn. Leading lights: Front light (orange triangle on post, point up) (58°39′⋅5N, 17°06′⋅6E), displayed from the head of the fishing harbour. Rear light (similar structure, point down) (125 m W of front light). From a position in the main channel 3 cables E of the front light the alignment (265°) of the above lights leads W to the fishing harbour, passing between the breakwaters, thence through a short channel, marked by buoys (lateral). 5.267 Side channel from W. From the W part of Bråviken vessels approaching Oxelösund may enter the harbour through an alternative channel, shown on the chart and authorised for a draught of 6 m. From a position in the main channel, S of Mellanskär Beacon (58°38′⋅0N, 17°04′⋅8E), the track leads initially 1½ miles NE, in the white sector (065°–068°) of Vinterklasen Rear Light (white hut, green band, floodlit) (58°38′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅0E), to a position 4 cables SW of the light. Leading marks: Ljungskär Light (58°39′⋅2N, 17°07′⋅9E) (5.265). Furö Beacon (58°39′⋅3N, 17°08′⋅0E), standing on the SW side of Furö. The alignment (018¾°) of these marks leads 8 cables NNE, in the white sector (017½°–022½°) of the light, to
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Port of Oxelösund (5.272) (Photograph − Bo Bjorkdahl)
3
(Original dated 2001)
join the main entrance channel, passing (with positions from Ljungskär Light): ESE of Svartahällsbådan Beacon (5 cables SW), standing on a rocky shoal marked at its E limit by a buoy (port hand), thence: WNW of Prästhällen (4 cables S), an islet marked off its W side by a buoy (starboard hand).
4
Useful mark 1
5.268 1
Femörehuvud House and Beacon (58°38′⋅9N, 17°06′⋅7E), standing on the SE limit of Femöre. The beacon (white with red band) stands close SE of the house structure (red walls with white S wall).
2
Järnverkshamnen entrance channel 1
2
3
5.269 From a position in Örsbaken 7 cables SW of Trutbådan Light (58°41′⋅4N, 17°16′⋅2E) (5.293) the channel to Järnverkshamnen branches off the main Nyköping approach channel from seaward (5.293) to lead 1½ miles WNW then 2 miles WSW to the harbour, initially through Örsbaken then Ålöfjärden, passing (with positions from Trutbådan Light): NNE of Kampensbåde Beacon (red cairn, 3 m in height) (9 cables SW), thence: NNE of Runnskärsgrund (1¼ miles WSW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NNE of Stora Runnskär (1¾ miles W), on which stands a beacon, thence: N of Rundskärsgrund (2¼ miles W), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), and into the white sector (246½°–249½°), of Korpholmen Light (white
3
lantern, floodlit) (58°40′⋅7N, 17°08′⋅9E), displayed from the SE side of Korpholmen, thence: NNW of Trässöhällen Beacon (2¾ miles WSW), standing on a rocky shoal, thence: NNW of Ålöhuvud (3½ miles WSW), the N point of Ålö, thence: The fairway, marked by buoys, leads 5 cables SW to the berthing area. 5.270 Side channel. A narrow channel for small craft, marked by buoys (lateral and cardinal), with a depth of about 3 m, leads W and N from the E side of the main harbour to Järnverkshamnen. The channel passes S of Oxelösund Light (white lantern) (58°39′⋅7N, 17°07′⋅9E), displayed from the SE side of Sandviken small boat harbour, and N of Korsholmen Light (white lantern, floodlit) (58°39′⋅7N, 17°08′⋅2E), displayed from a rock close N of Furö. By night the white sector (054½°–062°), ahead, of Oxelösund Light leads through the initial part of the channel and the white sectors (093°–099°), ahead, and (238°–244°), astern, respectively, of Korsholmen Light lead through the central part of the channel. The latter part of the channel leads N in the white sector (002°–004½°) of Korpholmen Light (5.269). Useful mark: Beacon (concrete post, 1 m in height) (58°39′⋅8N, 17°08′⋅9E), standing on a rock 5 cables E of Oxelösund Light.
Branch channel 1
216
5.271 A branch channel, authorised for a draught of 3⋅9 m, connects the main Oxelösund entrance channel to the secondary Nyköping entrance channel which is the
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
2
continuation NW of Hävringe S entrance channel (5.189). It is entered 1 cable NW of Beten Light (58°38′⋅7N, 17°08′⋅6E) and leads 2½ miles NE through the islands to join the secondary channel 2½ cables W of Låga Mellskär (58°40′⋅5N, 17°12′⋅7E), passing between Ålö and Hasselö. The first part of the channel from Beten leads NE on the alignment (213°), astern, of Vinterklasen Leading Lights: Front light (58°38′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅0E), displayed from the NE side of Vinterklasen. Rear light (5.267) (75 m SW of front light).
2
1
Berths Main harbour 1
5.272 The principal quay is No 10, which lies on the N side of the harbour, with a length of 250 m and a depth of 12⋅8 m for a distance up to 5 m off the quay. However, the official depth limit for this jetty is 16⋅5 m and the port provides pontoon fenders to enable deeper-draught vessels to berth alongside safely. Ore and oil cargoes are handled. There is a further 138 m of berthing space with a depth of 15⋅3 m for a distance up to 5 m off the berth. Pontoon fenders are also used as necessary to enable the berthing of vessels with a draught of 16⋅5 m.
1
The remainder of the harbour in the NW part contains 802 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 2⋅3 to 13⋅5 m. At Berth No 8 there is a Ro-Ro berth with an adjustable ramp and a depth alongside of 6⋅9 m. There is another Ro-Ro berth at Berth No 3 which has a dredged and swept depth of 8⋅0 m. 5.273 Östersviken. The fishing harbour (58°39′⋅5N, 17°07′⋅0E) in the N part has a total of 636 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 2⋅5 to 6⋅0 m. The small craft harbour in the S part contains a number of pontoons providing numerous berths with depths of about 5⋅0 m. 5.274 Sandviken. This small craft harbour in the NE part of the harbour is used by the Maritime Authority and contains the pilot boat quay.
Järnverkshamnen 1
5.275 The principal berth is Quay No 2–3 with a length of 150 m and a depth alongside of 9⋅5 m. There is a further 150 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 9⋅5 m.
Port of Oxelösund − Steel Berth (5.275) (Photograph − Bo Bjorkdahl)
(Original dated 2001)
217
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Principal exports include timber products, grain and vegetable oils. Imports include piece goods, salt, oil and chemicals. In 2003 the population was 49 310.
Port services 1
5.276 Repairs. Minor repairs; engine repairs; slip for vessels up to 200 tonnes with a length of 35 m, breadth 7 m and draught 3⋅8 m. Other facilities. Doctor; authorised compass adjuster; deratting and issue of certificates; oily waste reception; dirty ballast, free of chemicals; customs office. Supplies. Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Internal airport at Nyköping 10 km NW. International airport at Stockholm, about 120 km distant. Regular ferry traffic with Finland and Poland.
Approach and entry 1
Marsviken Charts 3217, 3218 (See 1.34)
2
Buskhyttan 1
1
2
1
5.277 Description. Buskhyttan (58°40′N, 16°57′E), a small harbour, lies in the S part of Närkeviken at the W end of Marsviken, an inlet about 3 miles W of Oxelösund. The large scale Swedish chart, with inset, is necessary for navigation in the W part of Marsviken. 5.278 Directions. Local knowledge is required. The approach channel to Marsviken is entered about 5 cables NW of Mellanskär Beacon (58°38′⋅0N, 17°04′⋅8E). The track, shown on the chart and suitable for a draught of about 4⋅3 m, leads 4¼ miles NW and W through the fairway to the entrance channel. The dredged entrance channel, marked by buoys (lateral) and suitable for a draught of 3⋅5 m, leads 5 cables SW to the harbour which is dredged to a depth of 4⋅4 m. Caution. Vessels should navigate with extreme caution within the harbour due to the presence of several uncharted underwater obstructions. 5.279 Anchorage may be obtained NW of the islet of Bergö (58°40′⋅2N, 16°59′⋅2E) in depths of 7 to 12 m, clay. Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of a submarine pipeline laid close NW of the entrance channel. Berth. A jetty with a length of 70 m and a depth alongside of 3⋅9 m. Supplies: fresh water; provisions.
Port Authority 1
1
2
Vessel Traffic Service
General information
1
5.280 Nyköping (58°45′N, 17°01′E) lies on each bank at the mouth of Nyköping Ån which flows into the NW part of Stadsfjärden, 5 miles NNW of Oxelösund.
5.281 Nyköping is a relatively large industrial and residential town which is also the local provincial seat of government. The port is fairly small and is restricted in the size of vessels it can handle, though vessels of most types are handled including Ro-Ro vessels and small bulk carriers.
5.285 Nyköping lies within the mandatory Oxelösund VTS Area. For details of limits, reporting points and other requirements see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Port radio 1
5.286 Nyköping Hamnradio (Nyköping Harbour radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Outer anchorages 1
Function 1
5.284 Controlling draughts are those in the main approach and entrance channels. Maximum permitted draughts: Channel to anchorage — 10⋅8 m. Dredged entrance channel — 4⋅4 m. Deepest and longest berth: W side — SW Quay, Ro-Ro and general cargo (5.295). Density of water: 1⋅000 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled: up to 4600 dwt. Passage through the dredged channel to the harbour is restricted to a vessel with a length of 100 m, breadth of 15 m and 5⋅1 m draught. By night entry is restricted to vessels up to 1000 dwt.
Arrival information
NYKÖPING
Position
5.283 Nyköping Hamnkontoret, Skeppsbron 11, S–611 35 Nyköping.
Limiting conditions
1
Chart 3218
5.282 The anchorage in Örsbaken (58°42′N, 17°10′E) is approached via the main channel from the SE through the fairway, marked by light-buoys and buoys, on the alignment of leading lights and lights. The harbour is entered through a dredged channel, marked by buoys (lateral) and light-beacons, on the alignment of leading lights, initially NW through the NW part of Örsbaken and Skanssundet, thence W through Mellanfjärden and Stadsfjärden. Local knowledge is required for a secondary approach channel, marked by buoys, light-buoys and beacons, the NW extension of Hävringe S entrance (5.189), which leads NW through the shoals and the E part of Ålöfjärden to join the main channel in the NW part of Örsbaken near the outer end of the entrance channel.
2
218
5.287 In the approaches anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, in the S central part of Örsbaken, about 7 cables ENE of Kölhalsen Light (58°41′⋅5N, 17°10′⋅7E), in depths of about 22 m, clay. Anchorage may also be obtained in the NW part of Örsbaken, SW of the dredged channel entrance, in depths of 6 to 8 m, clay. This anchorage is well sheltered except in SE winds when alternative anchorage may be obtained in the E part of Stjärnholmsviken which leads W off
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Örsbaken, WSW of Drottningskär (58°42′⋅4N, 17°08′⋅7E), in depths of 10 to 13 m, clay. See also 5.201 for large vessel anchorage.
Other aids to navigation 1
Pilotage and tugs 1
5.288 Pilotage is provided from Oxelösund and is available 24 hours. See 5.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Tugs are available. If additional towage is required this can be obtained from Oxelösund.
5.292 Racons: Norra Kränkan Lighthouse (58°37′⋅0N, 17°23′⋅4E) (5.184). Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Lillhammarsgrund Lighthouse (58°39′⋅7N, 17°20′⋅3E) (5.293). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Directions
Harbour General layout 1
2
3
5.289 The main harbour is a single basin, formed by the E and W banks of the river with short piers extending from the S end of each bank. It is reached through a short buoyed channel and the outer basin, formed by the pier extensions, has a turning area, marked by buoys, 123 m in diameter with a depth of 6⋅0 m. The E side contains the general quay for timber loading and the harbour offices. The W side contains the bulk and Ro-Ro quays. A fixed bridge spans the channel at the head of the harbour. Spelhagen, a small craft harbour, lies close W of the harbour entrance and on the E side of the entrance is a second small craft and yacht harbour. Immediately E of the second harbour there is a large water sports stadium, enclosed by a long pier extending 7 cables ESE with a short pier extending NNE at its head. A third small boat harbour is situated at Brandholmen, 7 cables ESE of the main harbour, close N of the entrance to the water sports arena.
Approaches 1
2
3
Natural conditions 1
5.290 Local magnetic anomaly. See 5.169. Current. The river causes a weak current in the harbour which can increase during the spring floods making manoeuvring difficult in the inner part of the harbour. Ice. The entrance channel and the harbour are usually obstructed by ice from January to March but are kept open to navigation by the use of an icebreaker.
4
5
Principal marks 1
2
3
5.291 Landmarks: Hävringe Beacon (58°36′⋅2N, 17°19′⋅0E) (5.171). Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Norra Kränkan Lighthouse (58°37′⋅0N, 17°23′⋅4E) (5.184). Lillhammarsgrund Lighthouse (58°39′⋅7N, 17°20′⋅3E) (5.293). Oxelösund Water Tower (58°40′⋅2N, 17°07′⋅3E) (5.181). Oxelösund Church (58°40′⋅3N, 17°06′⋅3E). Järnverk Chimneys (58°40′⋅5N, 17°08′⋅2E). Nyköping Water Tower (58°45′⋅7N, 17°01′⋅0E). Major lights: Gustaf Dalén Light (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Hävringe Rear Leading Light (58°36′⋅3N, 17°19′⋅1E) (5.190). Skavsta Aero Light (58°47′⋅1N, 16°56′⋅0E) (5.181).
6
7
8
219
5.293 From a position about 2 miles N of Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E), in the vicinity of the pilot boarding position, the fairway, marked by lights, light-buoys and buoys (lateral), leads 12 miles generally NW to the anchorage area close to the outer end of the entrance channel in the NW part of Örsbaken. Norra Lillhammarsgrund Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle, yellow stripe, on concrete base) (58°40′⋅5N, 17°19′⋅4E), displayed from a rock on the N side of the fairway. Rear light, Trutbådan Light (red rectangle, yellow stripe, on framework tower), displayed from the E side of Trutbådan, 3 miles NW of front light. From the initial position above the alignment (301°) of the above lights leads 4½ miles NW, within the white sector (297¾°−304°) of the front light, to a position 4 cables ENE of Lillhammarsgrund Light (white tower, red top, black base, 12 m in height, floodlit) (58°39′⋅7N, 17°20′⋅3E), displayed from a rock on the S side of the fairway, passing (with positions throughout from Lillhammarsgrund Light): NE of Portgrund (2 miles SE), marked by a light-buoy (E cardinal), thence: SW of Västra Ringsögrundet (1¾ miles ESE), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: NE of Omgången (7 cables ESE), marked at its N limit by a light-buoy (port hand), and: SSW of Omgången Norra (7 cables ENE), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand) on its S side and a buoy (N cardinal) on its N side. Thence the track leads WNW for 1¼ miles in the white sector (275½°–279°) of Norra Måsklubbshällan Light (white structure, red band, floodlit) (58°40′⋅2N, 17°17′⋅1E), displayed from an islet on the SW side of the fairway, passing: SSW of Idklubbsgrundet (5 cables NE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), and: SSW of Häggbådan (5 cables NNW), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand). Shoal water close E and N of Lillhammarsgrund Light is marked respectively by buoys (port hand). Thence the track leads NW for 6 miles to the anchorage area and entrance channel, by night in the white sector (113½°–119½°), astern, of Lillhammarsgrund Light, passing: SW of Skrapan (1 mile NW), an 8 m shoal marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Berggrund (1¾ miles NW), a shoal area with a least depth of 2⋅2 m over it closest to the fairway, thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
9
10
NNE of Stöten (2¼ miles WNW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NNE of Kampensbåde Beacon (3 miles WNW), where the channel to Oxelösund Järnverkshamnen branches W, thence: Close SW of Örsbaken S (4 miles NW), marked by a light-buoy (S cardinal), and: SW of Ledskär Light (white lantern) (58°42′⋅1N, 17°13′⋅5E), displayed from an islet on the NE side of the fairway, thence: NE of Kölhalsen Light (white tower, floodlit, 7 m in height) (58°41′⋅5N, 17°10′⋅7E), displayed from a rock at the N side of the entrance to Ålöfjärden, thence: To a position W of Sälgrund Light (green hut, white band) (58°43′⋅0N, 17°08′⋅7E), displayed from an islet at the NW end of Örsbaken.
Supplies. Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. National airport 5 km distant.
ENSKÄR TO LANDSORT General information Charts 3218, 3147, 3170
Routes 1
Entrance channel 1
2
3
5.294 Sjösa Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle on green dolphin) (58°44′⋅3N, 17°06′⋅2E), displayed from a dolphin on the N edge of the channel. Rear light (white triangle on black dolphin) (800 m NW of front light). The channel, well marked by pairs of buoys (lateral) and lights, is entered 3½ cables NW of Sälgrund Light (58°43′⋅0N, 17°08′⋅7E) on the alignment (320°) of the above lights which leads 1¼ miles NW through Skanssundet, passing NE of Näsudden Light (red dolphin) (58°43′⋅7N, 17°07′⋅3E), displayed from the W side of the channel. Thence the channel leads 3 miles through Mellanfjärden and Stadsfjärden to the harbour, on the alignment of a series of leading lights as shown on the chart. Caution. The dredged entrance channel is liable to silting.
2
3
Topography 1
1
Main harbour 1
1
1
1
5.301 The controlling draught in this section of the inshore channel is 5⋅3 m.
Vessel Traffic Service 1
5.302 See 5.168 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Local magnetic anomaly 1
5.303 See 5.169.
Principal marks 1
Port services 5.298 Repairs. Minor repairs; slip with maximum capacity of 40 tonnes. Other facilities. Hospital; deratting and issue of certificates; oily waste reception available.
5.300 An extensive archipelago lies in the N part of the area between Enskär and Landsort. The coastline is heavily indented in places and contains numerous islands, islets, rocks and shoals. The largest area of open deep water is in Tvären (58°46′⋅5N, 17°25′⋅5E) (5.316), a wide bay, well protected by islands to the S, situated N of Enskär.
Depth
Berths 5.295 The principal berth is SW Quay, on the W side, which has a length of 140 m and a depth alongside of 6⋅0 m. There is a Ro-Ro berth at its N end with a ramp width of 6 m. In the remainder of the harbour there is 420 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 3⋅2 to 5⋅4 m. 5.296 Spelhagen small boat harbour has a number of finger piers extending from the shore providing numerous berths with depths of about 2⋅4 m. The small boat harbour E of the entrance is connected directly to the NW end of the pier enclosing the water sports stadium complex. 5.297 Brandholmen small boat harbour, lies about 8 cables ESE of the entrance. There are a number of piers providing numerous berths with depths of about 1⋅9 m.
5.299 This section describes the channels which lead through the archipelago from a position SSW of Enskär (58°41′N, 17°29′E) to a position NW of Landsort in the vicinity of Askö (58°48′N, 17°40′E). It includes the continuation of the Kråkelund to Landsort inshore channel (5.2), the N channel from Örsbaken to Tvären, and other minor channels. Also included is Hållsviken (58°53′⋅5N, 17°27′⋅4E) together with other inlets and minor harbours along the coast. The main channel through the E side of the area is entered W of Landsort, thence it leads N to Södertälje (6.73) and via Mälaren to the W entrance to Stockholm (7.190). On the W side a channel leads W of Enskär, Hartsön and Ringsön which, together with Långön and Sävö, form a chain extending about 6 miles N to the mainland. Thence the channel leads through Tvären and Gupafjärden into Yttre Hållsfjärden from whence channels lead NW to Hållsviken, NE to Himmerfjärden (6.12) and ESE to Landsort.
2
220
5.304 Landmarks: Hargberget (58°43′⋅4N, 17°28′⋅1E), a wooded hill with round summit on the N side of Hartsön. Radio mast (58°46′⋅4N, 17°23′⋅0E). Radio mast (elevation 137 m) (58°49′⋅2N, 17°50′⋅7E). Lacka Torn (high red look-out tower, pointed roof) (58°45′⋅3N, 17°33′⋅7E), standing on the NW side of Lacka. Major lights: Gustaf Dalén Light (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Landsort Light (58°44′⋅4N, 17°52′⋅0E) (5.171). Landsorts Bredgrund Light (58°43′⋅9N, 17°52′⋅5E) (5.171).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Other aids to navigation 1
5.305 Racons: Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Landsorts Bredgrund Lighthouse (58°43′⋅9N, 17°52′⋅5E) (5.171). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
3
Enskär to Sävö 1
Directions for inshore channel (continued from 5.197) 2
Approaches to Enskär 1
2
3
4
5.306 Local knowledge is required. From a position in the main channel 5 cables NE of Norra Kränkan Light (58°37′⋅0N, 17°23′⋅4E), the track, indicated on the chart, leads NNE and N for about 11 miles to a position NW of Sävö (58°46′⋅5N, 17°28′⋅5E). The initial part of the fairway, leading 4 miles to a position NW of Enskär may be entered from seaward, leading almost parallel to, and E of the indicated track. In each case the channel leads NNE or N respectively, passing (with positions from Norra Kränkan Light): NW of Köpman (5.183) and Målaren (3½ miles NE), marked on their S side by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: ESE of Stångskärsgrund (2¾ miles NNE), a 6⋅6 m shoal, and: NW of Luren (3¾ miles NE), thence: ESE of Ringsögrund (4 miles NNE), an extensive shoal area marked at its extremities by buoys (cardinal), thence: WNW of Fällbådan (4½ miles NE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: W of Hartsö Stångskär Light (white tower, black base, 11 m in height) (58°41′⋅5N, 17°27′⋅9E), displayed from the NW side of an islet close W of Enskär. In addition, the white sector (207°–210°), astern, of Norra Kränkan Light and the white sector (023°–035°), ahead, of Hartsö Stångskär Light lead through the fairway on the charted track.
Enskär from west 1
2
5.307 A channel, of no authorised draught, shown on the chart, leads from Lillhammarsgrund (58°39′⋅7N, 17°20′⋅3E) to Hartsö Stångskär (58°41′⋅5N, 17°27′⋅9E). From a position 3 cables ENE of Lillhammarsgrund Light the track leads generally ENE for 4 miles to join the S approach channel close W of Hartsö Stångskär Light, passing (with positions from Lillhammarsgrund Light): Between Idklubbsgrundet (5 cables NE) (5.293) and Omgången Norra (5.293), 4 cables ESE. By night the white sector (237°–240°), astern, of Lillhammarsgrund Light leads 2¼ miles ENE through the fairway. Thence: NW of Ringsögrund (2½ miles ENE) (5.306), and into, by night, the white sector (075°–079°), ahead, of Hartsö Stångskär Light which leads through the latter part of the fairway. Thence:
SSE of a 4⋅9 m patch (3½ miles ENE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: To a position close W of Hartsö Stångskär Light.
3
4
5
6
7
5.308 Ringsön Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle, white stripe, on white tower, green base, 6 m in height) (58°43′⋅5N, 17°26′⋅6E), displayed from the SW side of Ringsön. Rear light (red rectangle, white stripe, lantern on white pedestal) (825 m NNW of front light). The alignment (338½°) of these lights leads through the channel, marked by buoys (lateral), from close NNW of Hartsö Stångskär Light to a position 1½ cables from the front light passing ENE of Örskär, an islet on the W side of the fairway. In addition to the leading lights, the alignment (158½°), astern, of a pair of leading beacons standing at the SSE end of the fairway, lead through the channel. Thence: Griskär Leading Lights: Front light (white tower, red band, 6 m in height) (58°44′⋅1N, 17°25′⋅2E), displayed from the NE side of Griskär. Rear light (red rectangle, white stripe, on lantern on white pedestal), displayed 450 m NW of front light from an islet close SE of Krampö. The alignment (314½°) of these lights leads 1 mile through the channel to a position E of the front light. In addition to the above leading lights the alignment (134½°), astern, of a pair of leading beacons standing at the SE end of the channel lead through the fairway. Thence the track leads 1¼ miles N, in the white sector (175°–177½°), astern, of the front leading light, above, passing W of Håldämman Beacon (white, green band, floodlit) (58°45′⋅1N, 17°25′⋅2E), standing on a rock on the E side of the channel, and entering the S end of Tvären at a position 2 cables NE of Bergö Light (white lantern, floodlit) (58°45′⋅1N, 17°24′⋅7E), displayed from the SE point of Lilla Bergö. Thence: Leading lights: Märholmen. Front light (lantern on white pedestal, red band) (58°46′⋅9N, 17°27′⋅8E), displayed from a rock on the W side of the fairway. Bromdal. Rear light (white square on white pedestal, red band), displayed from the mainland 700 m NE of front light. The alignment (042°) of these lights leads 1¼ miles NE across the SE part of Tvären to a position 4 cables NNW of Ringsö Röskär Beacon (white, floodlit) (58°45′⋅8N, 17°26′⋅8E), standing on an islet close N of Ringsön; thence 1 mile NNE, in the white sector (026°–032°) of Bromdal Light, above, to a position about 2½ cables NW of Sävö.
Sävsundet 1
2
221
5.309 An alternative channel, shown on the chart, with a least charted depth of 5⋅3 m passes through Sävsundet, a narrow passage between the S end of Sävö and Långön. From a position NW of Ringsö Röskär Beacon, above, the track leads about 1½ miles E through the channel to join the main channel E of Sävö, passing close N of Sävösund Light (white hut, green band, 2 m in height) (58°45′⋅9N, 17°28′⋅7E), displayed from the N point of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
Långön on the S side of the channel. In addition the white sectors of the light lead through the channel to the E and W of the light. 5
Sävö to Kockelhällen 1
2
3
4
5.310 From a position NW of Sävö the track leads about 5 miles, initially ESE and SE through the channel N and E of Sävö, then ENE and N through the channel in Gupafjärden, marked by buoys (lateral) and lights, to a position close N of Kockelhällan (58°47′⋅9N, 17°33′⋅9E). The following aids to navigation are situated along the fairway in this section of the channel: Källvik Light (white hut, red band, floodlit) (58°46′⋅8N, 17°28′⋅7E), displayed from the mainland NE of Sävö. The white sectors (113½°–125½°) and (332½°–339½°) of the light lead through the channel adjacent to the light. Herrsäten Light (white hut, green band) (58°45′⋅8N, 17°30′⋅0E), displayed from the N side of Herrsäten which lies 8 cables E of Sävsundet. Trätbådan Light (white tower, green band, 6 m in height) (58°46′⋅7N, 17°33′⋅7E), displayed from the W side of Trätbådan on the E side of the fairway. The white sectors of the light lead through the channel W and N adjacent to the light. Hökö Gupa Light (white lantern, red band) (58°47′⋅6N, 17°32′⋅9E), displayed from the NE side of Hökö Gupa on the W side of the fairway. The white sector (228½°–236½°), astern, of the light leads through the last section of the channel. Kockelhällan Light (white hut, green band) (58°47′⋅9N, 17°33′⋅9E), displayed from a rocky shoal on the S side of the channel.
Kockelhällan to Landsort 1
2
3
4
5.311 From a position close N of Kockelhällan Light the track leads 7 miles E across Yttre Hållsfjärden through a channel marked by buoys (lateral), beacons and lights, to a position WSW of Rökogrundet (6.17), 4 miles NW of Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E) and 2 miles ESE of Askö, where the inshore channel ends and joins the main approach channel from Landsort to Södertälje (6.17). The following aids to navigation are situated along the fairway in this section of the channel: Kockelskär Leading Lights: Front light (white tower, red base, 7 m in height) (58°48′⋅0N, 17°33′⋅3E), displayed from the SE side of Kockelskär. Rear light (red square on white tower) (215 m W of front light). The alignment (276°), astern, of the above lights leads 1½ miles E through the first part of the channel. Leading beacons: Front, Oxeltanden Beacon (red rectangle on red and white lattice framework) (58°48′⋅1N, 17°34′⋅6E), standing on the N side of the fairway. Rear, Hästskär Beacon (similar structure), standing on the NE side of Kockelskär 7 cables WNW of front beacon. The above beacons in line bearing 286°, astern, lead 2½ miles E through the fairway, N of Persö (58°47′⋅5N, 17°36′⋅2E), an islet lying on the S side of the fairway. Gråskär Light (silver hut) (58°47′⋅6N, 17°40′⋅0E), displayed from the W side of Gråskär on the N side of the fairway.
Asenskallen Light (white tower, green band, 9 m in height) (58°47′⋅0N, 17°41′⋅9E), displayed from the N end of Asenskallen on the S side of the fairway. Skvallran Light (white tower, red band, 12 m in height) (58°47′⋅3N, 17°42′⋅6E), displayed from a rock close N of the channel. A branch channel, described at 6.29, leads N from a position close E of the light to join the main 9⋅0 m fairway to Södertälje S of Fifång, 3 miles N. Rökogrundet Light (58°47′⋅2N, 17°46′⋅8E) (6.17).
Side channels Chart 3218, Swedish Charts 6211, 6173 (see 1.34)
Örsbaken to Tvären 1
5.312 Local knowledge is required. A channel, suitable for a draught of 2⋅5 m and which is narrow and tortuous, leads from Örsbaken (58°42′N, 17°10′E) (5.282), NE of Oxelösund, to Tvären, about 7 miles ENE, through the N part of the archipelago. The channel, marked throughout its length by buoys (lateral), beacons and lights, is entered E of Ledskär Lighthouse (58°42′⋅1N, 17°13′⋅5E) (5.293) and enters the S part of Tvären NE of Bergö Lighthouse (58°45′⋅1N, 17°24′⋅7E) (5.308).
Directions 1
2
3
4
5.313 From a position 1 cable E of Ledskär Lighthouse the track, shown on the national chart, leads generally ENE for 8 miles to a position 2 cables NE of Bergö Lighthouse. The following aids to navigation are situated along the fairway: Stora Kampåsen Light (pylon with white hut) (58°42′⋅9N, 17°14′⋅0E), displayed from the S side of the islet on the N side of the fairway. Vålarö Light (white hut) (58°43′⋅3N, 17°15′⋅6E), displayed from the mainland N of the fairway. Örnklubb Light (white hut) (58°42′⋅9N, 17°16′⋅7E), displayed from an islet on the S side of the fairway between Risö and Langö. Espskärsklubb Light (white hut) (58°43′⋅3N, 17°19′⋅0E), displayed from a rock on the N side of the fairway. Rövarskär Beacon (white cairn, red band) (58°44′⋅2N, 17°20′⋅6E), standing on the S end of an islet W of the fairway. Skepna Light (white hut) (58°44′⋅8N, 17°21′⋅2E), displayed from the S end of Skepna on the N side of the fairway. Långskär Light (white lantern) (58°44′⋅2N, 17°23′⋅0E), displayedfrom the N end of an islet on the S side of the fairway. Västra Stendörren Seamark (black hut, white band) (58°44′⋅5N, 17°23′⋅8E), standing on a shoal close S of the channel in the narrow passage between Aspö and Krampö. Charts 3147, 3170 (see 1.34)
Gupafjärden to Himmerfjärden 1
222
5.314 Local knowledge is required. An alternative channel, suitable for a draught of about 3⋅3 m, well marked by buoys (lateral) and lights, branches N off the inshore route E of Hökö Gupa Light (58°47′⋅6N, 17°32′⋅9E) (5.310) to lead about 7 miles NE to Fifångsdjupet passing W of Kockelskär and through Bokösund, a narrow passage between the W side of Bokö (58°50′⋅5N, 17°36′⋅0E) and the mainland. The following lights are situated along the
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
2
3
4
1
length of the fairway and each of their white sectors leads through the fairway in their vicinity: Törnskär Light (white lantern on hut, green band) (58°49′⋅0N, 17°33′⋅0E), displayed from the W side of an islet on the E side of the fairway at the W entrance to Yttre Hållsfjärden (5.311). Bockholmen Light (white lantern on hut, green band) (58°50′⋅2N, 17°34′⋅9E), displayed from an islet close E of the channel. Lysberget Light (white lantern) (58°50′⋅3N, 17°35′⋅8E), displayed from the SW side of Bokö on the E side of the fairway. Bokö Light (white lantern) (58°51′⋅2N, 17°36′⋅2E), displayed from the NW point of Bokö-Oxnö. Svarthäll Light (lantern on white hut, green band) (58°51′⋅8N, 17°40′⋅0E), displayed from a rock on the SE side of the fairway in Fifångsdjupet. From Svarthäll Lighthouse the channel continues, leading NNE for 3 miles to join the main channel from Landsort to Södertälje, E of Stenskär (6.20) in the S part of Himmerfjärden (6.12). 5.315 Useful mark: Askö Leading Lights (orange triangles on posts) (58°49′⋅3N, 17°38′⋅2E), displayed at the head of a small bay on the W side of Askö. The alignment (098°) of these lights leads through the area of incomplete survey within Yttre Hållsfjärden for use by local vessels.
2
3
1
Harbours Chart 3147, Swedish Chart 6173 (see 1.34)
Hållsviken 1
Tvären Charts 3218, 3147
Anchorage 1
1
5.316 Anchorage may be obtained in several parts of Tvären (58°46′⋅5N, 17°25′⋅5E) in various depths, mostly mud but some clay and stones. Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of submarine cables and pipelines laid in the S part, which can be seen on the chart.
Studsvik 1
2
1
1
5.317 Description. Studsvik (58°46′N, 17°24′E) is a small industrial harbour situated in the SW part of Tvären suitable for a vessel with a draught up to 5⋅3 m. The harbour consists of an open roadstead with two jetties extending from the shore. It is reached through the inshore channel which is entered S of Enskär. The harbour is surrounded by a restricted area and is closed to unauthorised traffic. Photography, sketching and possession of explosives is prohibited within the factory area. Studsvik fishing harbour with depths of 2⋅1 to 3⋅5 m lies in a small bay 6 cables SSW of the industrial harbour. 5.318 Pilots are available from Oxelösund. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Landmarks: Water tower (58°46′⋅3N, 17°23′⋅1E). Radio mast (red light) (58°46′⋅4N, 17°23′⋅0E). Chimney (58°46′⋅2N, 17°23′⋅5E). 5.319 Directions. Directions for the inshore channel approach are given at 5.306. Thence, from a position 3 cables NE of Bergö Light (58°45′⋅1N, 17°24′⋅7E) (5.308), the fairway leads 1 mile NNW through Tvären directly to the harbour.
The limits of the restricted area surrounding the harbour are marked by buoys (special). Two submarine pipelines, shown on the chart, are laid close to the harbour. The line of each is marked by a pair of lights in line, visible only on the leading line, displayed from the shore: Front and rear (white triangles, black borders, 82 m apart) (58°46′⋅2N, 17°23′⋅7E), displayed close NNW of the harbour. In line bearing 249° they mark a water intake. Front and rear (white triangles, black borders, 75 m apart) (58°46′⋅5N, 17°23′⋅5E), displayed 5 cables NNW of the harbour. In line bearing 328° they mark an outfall pipe. 5.320 Berths. The oil berth in the N part is a T-shaped jetty, extending E from the shore, with a length of 8 m across its head and a depth alongside of about 8⋅4 m. A Ro-Ro berth with two breasting dolphins, giving a total length of about 66 m and a least depth of 6⋅0 m, lies close SSW of the oil berth. Ramp width is about 12 m. Facilities. All the usual facilities at Nyköping, 11 miles W.
5.321 Description. Hållsviken (58°53′⋅5N, 17°27′⋅4E) is a small loading place lying at the head of Hållsviken, a long inlet extending about 5 miles NNW from Yttre Hållsfjärden. It is reached from a branch leading off the inshore route. 5.322 Directions. From a position close N of Törnskär Light (58°49′⋅0N, 17°33′⋅0E) (5.314) the channel leads 5½ miles NNW to the harbour passing NE of Arnholmsrevet, an islet 1¾ miles NNW of the above light and NE of Stora Kråkholmen, an islet lying 1 mile SSE of the jetty. Anchorage may be obtained in the NW part of Hållsviken in depths of about 8 m, clay. Berth. A jetty with a depth alongside of 2⋅3 m.
Trosa 1
2
3
1
223
5.323 Description. Trosa (58°53′⋅5N, 17°33′⋅3E) is a picturesque tourist resort town situated at the mouth of Trosa Ån about 13 miles NW of Landsort, at the head of an inlet 4 miles NW of Svarthäll Lighthouse (58°51′⋅9N, 17°40′⋅0E). The harbour, suitable for small craft with a draught up to 1⋅8 m, consists of a single inner basin formed by both banks of the river with a long breakwater extending S of the mouth on the E side, and a shorter breakwater extending S on the W side, forming an outer basin. A pontoon jetty, parallel to the W breakwater and farther W, forms a small yacht basin on the W side of the entrance. A weak river current may be experienced when manoeuvring in the narrow inner harbour basin. It is reached through a channel which branches W from the main channel leading N from Landsort. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from the middle of December to March. The population is about 2100. 5.324 Directions. From a position 1½ miles E of Svarthäll Lighthouse (58°51′⋅9N, 17°40′⋅0E) (5.314) the channel leads about 5 miles W to the anchorage area in
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 5
1
Lagnöviken. Thence the harbour is approached through a buoyed channel leading N from Lagnöviken, and entered through a channel on the W side of Öbolandet, an island joined to the mainland by a causeway E of the harbour entrance. 5.325 Anchorage may be obtained in Lagnöviken, E of Lagnöklubb (58°52′N, 17°34′E), in depths of about 7 m, clay. Berths. The inner harbour has a quay with a length of
2
224
85 m and a depth alongside of 2 m. The remainder of the inner harbour has numerous berths for yachts and small craft. In the outer part of the harbour there are numerous berths on both sides of the E breakwater and in the small basin on the W side of the entrance, all with depths of about 1⋅8 m. Facilities: minor engine repairs; slip with a capacity of 3 tonnes. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Home
Contents
Index NOTES
225
Home
Contents
Index
Chapter 6 - Mälaren, including Landsort to Stockholm via Södertälje 16°
10´
20´
30´
40´
50´
17°
10´
20´
30´
40´
50´
40´
40´
Västerås 6.169
3141
3141
6.195 Köping
30´
6.129 Bålsta 3142
3141
Aggarösundet
2362
Hjulstafjärden
30´
3145 3142
Stäket
3145
Kvicksund 6.186
3145
Selaön 3142
3142 3141
Strängnäs 6.156
20´ 2362 3142
Stockholm
Bockholmssundet 3142
Södertälje Kanal
Södertälje 6.73
10´
20´
6.43
10´
3168
6.26 Brandalsund 3168
Kagghamra 6.40
59°
59° 3147
6.18 - 6.24
3218
50´
50´
6.1 2
3170
Landsort 3191
40´
0205
16°
40´
10´
20´
30´
40´
Longitude 17° East from Greenwich
226
30´
40´
50´
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 6 MÄLAREN, INCLUDING LANDSORT TO STOCKHOLM VIA SÖDERTÄLJE KANAL
GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2362, 3142, 3141, 3145
Scope of the chapter 1
2
3
6.1 This chapter describes the waters of Mälaren (6.106), an extensive inland lake in the E part of Sweden extending from the W side of Stockholm harbour area (59°19′N, 18°00′E) about 60 miles WNW to Köping (59°30′N, 16°01′E). Mälaren is largely obstructed by numerous islands, rocks and shoals which make navigation difficult and, generally, local knowledge is required. The description includes the passage and channels through which Mälaren may be reached from the open sea from Landsort via Södertälje Kanal (6.43), together with the channel to the W side of Stockholm harbour, the channels through Mälaren to the ports of Västerås and Köping, and the channels to a number of minor harbours within the area. Also included are descriptions of Södertälje (59°12′N, 17°38′E) (6.73), Västerås (59°36′N, 16°33′E) (6.169) and Köping (59°30′N, 16°01′E) (6.195), together with other minor harbours. Mälaren may also be reached from the open sea from E, via Stockholm, thence, dependent on draught, passing through Hammarbyslussen (7.219) or Karl Johansslussen (7.219), the locks which connect Mälaren to Saltsjön (7.219). The chapter is divided into the following sections: Landsort to Stockholm (6.9). Mälaren (6.106).
3
Vessel Traffic Service 1
2
Depths and draughts 1
2
6.2 The controlling depth in the main channel from Södertälje to Västerås and Köping harbours is 7⋅6 m which gives a maximum draught of 6⋅8 m on the recommended tracks shown on the chart. Vessels with a draught of 7⋅0 m may transit the channels in Mälaren subject to certain restrictions. See 6.109 for details. Figures on recommended tracks on the charts indicate the maximum permitted draught of vessels (operating with pilotage assistance) for which the tracks are authorised at MSL.
2
6.3 Pilotage for the area, which is available 24 hours, is provided by Mälaren/Landsort Pilot Station located at Södertälje or, if coming from the E via Stockholm, by Stockholm Pilot Station. Pilotage is compulsory for the following categories of vessels: All Category 1 vessels. Category 2 vessels of 70 m length, 14 m beam, 4⋅5 m draught and over. Category 3 vessels of 70 m length, 14 m beam, 4⋅5 m draught and over. For details of vessel categories see 1.51. Requests for pilots should be sent 12 hours in advance with confirmation not less then 5 hours in advance. Pilots
6.4 A mandatory Traffic Reporting and Information System is in force throughout the area. The VTS Södertälje Area includes Nynäshamn, the Landsort-Södertälje fairway and Mälaren with its E limit at Hammarbyslussen (59°18′⋅2N, 18°04′⋅8E) and its NE limit at Stäket (59°28′N, 17°47′E). The reports are co-ordinated by the Traffic Information Centre located as follows: Södertälje Pilot Station, located at Slussbron Lock in Södertälje Kanal (59°11′⋅5N, 17°39′⋅5E). Vessels within the Traffic Information Area must, in addition to reporting as required on VHF channel 68, maintain a continuous listening watch on that channel. In addition, vessels transiting the Södertälje Kanal between Fläsklösa (59°07′⋅3N, 17°41′⋅3E) and Bornhuvud (59°16′⋅0N, 17°34′⋅5E), must participate in the Södertälje Kanal Traffic Regulating System (6.46). For full details of the areas covered, information required and reporting points, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Vessel checklist 1
Pilotage 1
board in position 2 miles S of Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E). In adverse weather conditions, an alternative boarding position may be used. Vessels will be advised by VTS Södertälje. Note. Vessels with a draught of 7⋅0 m wishing to navigate through the main channels in Mälaren must request permission not less than 48 hours prior to arrival at Södertälje Pilot Station. For further information see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2) and 6.109.
6.5 Masters of all vessels intending to navigate within Mälaren and which are subject to compulsory use of pilots must complete a special checklist less than 24 hours prior to arrival at the appropriate pilot boarding station or lock. The completed checklist, which forms part of the Swedish Inland Waterway regulations, must be handed to the pilot on boarding or to the lock officials on arrival in the lock. For details the Swedish Maritime Authority should be consulted, and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Traffic regulations 1
227
6.6 Speed restrictions are in force for a number of areas within the limits of this chapter. The limits are indicated on boards standing on the sides of the channel or on buoys/piles in the channel. Restricted area exists in the entrance to the main channel to Mälaren. It is shown on the charts and mentioned in the relevant part of the text. Vessels must keep to the pilotage channels in this area. For further information and for the regulations in force see 1.87.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Rescue 1
6.7 The Swedish Sea Rescue Association has two fully equipped rescue craft stationed at Västerås (59°36′N, 16°33′E) (6.169).
2
Natural conditions 1
6.8 Water levels. At Landsort the normal range in the level of water is 0⋅3 m above or below MSL but the influence of wind may affect the range from 0⋅5 m above, to 0⋅6 m below MSL. The normal water level in Mälaren is about 0⋅5 m higher than the Mean Level in Saltsjön in the E part of Stockholm harbour, but this level may alter due to the season or the
3
effect of wind. In such cases the water level in Mälaren is controlled by the use of sluices. Ice. In winter, when crossable ice is present or forming in Mälaren, vessels must keep within the existing ice channels and must not unnecessarily break up the ice. Information regarding ice channels and their navigational restrictions is broadcast on coast radio stations. Details of dates when restrictions are in force are published in weekly Swedish Notices to Mariners. Ice-bridges are periodically established in channels within Mälaren and are mentioned in the relevant part of the text. In general ice channels are restricted to a width of 25 m. Speed is restricted to 5 kn within 100 m each side of an ice-bridge and vessels should proceed at the lowest possible navigable speed when passing the ice-bridge. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(1).
LANDSORT TO STOCKHOLM GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 3147, 3170, 3168, 3142, 3114
Area covered 1
2
6.9 This section covers the waters on the W side of Södertörn, the area of land extending about 28 miles S from Stockholm which forms the SW part of Stockholms Skärgård, from Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E) to the W side (59°19′N, 18°00′E) of Stockholm harbour. Included in the description is the channel to Södertälje (59°12′N, 17°38′E) and a description of the harbour, Södertälje Kanal, the channel N to the W side of Stockholm harbour, and the channels and minor harbours adjacent to the main fairway. Also described are the channels leading to, and other loading places in the W approaches to Stockholm on the E side of Mälaren. It is arranged as follows: Landsort to Södertälje (6.12). Södertälje Kanal (6.43). Södertälje (6.73). Södertälje to Stockholm (6.88).
2
3
Restricted area 1
6.10 Landsort Restricted Area, the boundaries of which are shown on the chart, extends NW from the vicinity of Landsort to Askö, and has its N limit at Stora Bergholmen (58°49′⋅9N, 17°45′⋅3E). Within this area vessels must keep to the recommended tracks (see also 6.2). Firing practice area. The S approaches to Södertälje pass through the W part of Utö firing practice area, see 7.23 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3(1).
Passage limitations 1
Pilotage 1
1
6.14 See 6.4 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Principal marks 1
General information Charts 3147, 3170, 3168
Routes 1
6.13 See 6.3 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Vessel Traffic Service
6.11 Vessels intending to take passage through Södertälje Kanal to Stockholm, see 6.52 and 6.53.
LANDSORT TO SÖDERTÄLJE
(59°12′N, 17°38′E), passing W of Öja (58°45′N, 17°52′E), E of Fifång (58°51′N, 17°43′E), through Himmerfjärden (59°00′N, 17°44′E) on the E side of Mörkö, thence via Skanssundet (59°03′⋅0N, 17°41′⋅5E) (6.24) through Näslandsfjärden (59°04′N, 17°41′E), and finally through Brandalsund (59°06′N, 17°41′E) (6.26) into Hallsfjärden which leads to Södertälje and the S entrance to the canal. Branch channels. From a position SSE of Fifång a branch channel leads NNE through Svärdsfjärden thence N through Fållnäsviken (6.33) to reach Stora Vika (58°56′⋅4N, 17°47′⋅0E). A second channel, authorised for a draught of 4⋅6 m, leads NE from the N part of Himmerfjärden thence through Mörkarfjärden (6.41) to reach Kagghamra (59°06′N, 17°47′E). Side channel. From a position NE of Fifång a channel, of no authorised draught, leads initially WNW thence NNW through Gälöfjärden to reach Andervik (6.31), and Tullgarn (6.32). Minor channel. From a position close ESE of Skvallran Light (58°47′⋅3N, 17°42′⋅6E) (5.311), a minor channel leads N through Asköfjärden (58°49′N, 17°42′E) to join the main Landsort-Södertälje 9⋅0 m fairway close S of Fifång Light (58°50′⋅5N, 17°43′⋅4E).
6.12 Main channel. From a position in the S approaches to Landsort the main channel, authorised for a draught of 9 m, leads generally N for about 40 miles to Södertälje
228
6.15 Landmarks: Landsort Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°52′E) (5.171). Landsorts Bredgrund Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°53′E) (5.171). Radio mast (elevation 137 m) (58°49′⋅2N, 17°50′⋅7E). Major lights: Gustaf Dalén Light (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E) (5.171). Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E) (5.171). Landsorts Bredgrund Light (58°44′N, 17°53′E) (5.171).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Other aids to navigation 1
6.16 Racons: Gustaf Dalén Lighthouse (58°35′⋅7N, 17°28′⋅2E). Landsorts Bredgrund Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°53′E). For details see the relevant Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
2
Directions for main channel (continued from 5.173)
Landsort to Rökogrundet 1
2
3
4
5
6
6.17 From a position 1 mile SSE of Landsorts Angöring Light-buoy (58°40′⋅5N, 17°52′⋅0E) (5.173), the recommended track, authorised for a draught of 9 m, shown on the chart and marked by buoys, light-buoys and lights, leads initially 4¼ miles N, by night in the white sector (351°–358°), ahead, of Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E), thence 8½ miles NNW to Fifång, passing (with positions from Landsort Light): E of Landsorts Angöring Light-buoy (4 miles S), thence: W of Storpallarn (2¾ miles S), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: E of Bonden (2¼ miles SSW), a shoal area marked on its E side by a buoy (E cardinal), and: W of Lillpallarn (2¼ miles SSE), a shoal patch, thence: W of Bosknösen (1½ miles SSE) (7.43), thence: WSW of Landsorts Bredgrund Light (6 cables SSE), thence: NE of Göjknösen (1 mile WSW), a shoal marked by a buoy (E cardinal). By night the white sector (317½°–320°), ahead, of Granklubben Light (white lantern) (58°47′⋅9N, 17°45′⋅0E), displayed from an islet W of the fairway, leads through the fairway from Landsorts Bredgrund to Rökogrundet. Thence: SW of Åttan Light-buoy (W cardinal) (7 cables NW), marking an 8 m patch, thence: NE of Lillberget (1¼ miles WNW), an islet on which stands a beacon (red with white band, 2 m in height). A 5⋅2 m patch, 3 cables N, is marked by a light-buoy (port hand). Thence: SW of Tiljandersknallt Light (white tower, two black bands, 10 m in height, floodlit) (1¾ miles NW), displayed from a shoal NE of the fairway, thence: NE of Bråtknösen (3¼ miles NW), a shoal patch marked on its N side by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Rökogrundet Light (black tower, white band, green lantern, 9 m in height, floodlit) (4 miles NW), displayed from a shoal on the E side of the fairway.
Rökogrundet to Fifång 1
6.18 Thence the track continues N and NW, passing (with positions from Vattklubben Light (58°49′⋅4N, 17°44′⋅4E)): W of Västra Röko Light (white tower, 8 m in height, floodlit), displayed from an islet close N of Rökogrundet. By night the white sector (001½°–012°), ahead, of Kolguskär Light leads N
3
4
5
1
through this section of fairway. The dangers close to the fairway in the narrow stretch N of Västra Röko, to Kolguskär are marked by buoys, including Inre Triklubbsgrund Light-buoy (port hand) marking a 4⋅2 m shoal area on the W side of the channel. Thence: WSW of Kolguskär Light (white hut, green roof, floodlit), displayed from the SW side of the island (1¾ miles SE), thence: SW of Vattklubben Light (white tower, green band, 6 m in height, floodlit), displayed from the W side of the islet. By night the white sector (135°–138°), astern, of Kolguskär Light leads clear of the dangers close to the channel, marked by buoys (lateral), in this section of fairway. A branch channel leads from close N of Vattklubben Light to Stora Vika. And: NE of Torsken Light (white hut, red band, floodlit), displayed from the E side of Torskklubbshällarna, an extensive shoal area, 3½ cables W of Vattklubben Light. A buoy (port hand) marks the edge of the shoal close ENE of the light and another buoy (N cardinal) marks the NW side of the shoal. Thence: W of Käringhällan Light (green square on metal structure, floodlit), displayed from the NW side of an extensive area of foul ground, about 5 cables NNW of Vattklubben. Buoys (port hand), 2 cables WNW and 2½ cables SW of the light, mark shoal patches on the W side of the channel. Hällan Beacon (framework, 2 m in height) stands on the S side of the foul ground, 1¾ cables SSE of the light. A light-buoy (starboard hand) marks the limit of the shoal, close SSW of the beacon. Thence: To a position 1 cable E of Fifång Light (white hut, red band, floodlit) (58°50′⋅5N, 17°43′⋅4E), displayed from the SE side of Fifång. The white sector (154°–166°), astern, of Torsken Light and the white sector (351½°–359°), ahead, of Fifång Light lead through the latter part of the fairway. 6.19 Useful mark: Drummelberget (58°51′⋅6N, 17°41′⋅9E), a hill on the N part of Fifång.
Charts 3170, 3168
Fifång to Stenskär 1
2
3
229
6.20 From a position 1 cable E of Fifång Light (58°50′⋅5N, 17°43′⋅4E) the recommended track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys and lights, leads generally N for about 15½ miles to a position on the W side of Brandalsund, ESE of Farstanäset, by night, initially in the white sector (340¼°–346°), ahead, of Sankhällan Light (red hut, white base, floodlit), displayed from a rock on the W side of the fairway, 1¾ miles NNW of Fifång Light, passing (with positions from Sankhällan Light): W of a 3⋅4 m patch (1 mile SSE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: W of Kråkskärs Mellgrund (7 cables SSE), a 1⋅4 m shoal area marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: E of Sankhällan Light. Buoys (port hand) mark the channel 1¾ cables S and ¾ cable NNE of the light. Thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
4
5
1
1
WNW of Ramsholmen Light (steel framework tower, yellow daymark, floodlit) (4 cables NNE), and: ESE of Gålklubb Light (white hut, red roof, floodlit), displayed from an islet surrounded by a rocky shoal area (5 cables NNE). A light-buoy (port hand) marking the channel is moored ½ cable NNE of the light. By night the white sector (357°–008°), ahead, of this light leads through the fairway N of Kråkskärs Mellgrund. Thence: W of Skorpan (1¾ miles NNE), an area of islets surrounded by foul ground, marked off its SW side by a light-buoy (starboard hand). By night the white sector (348¼°–354°), ahead, of Stenskär Light leads through the fairway N of Gålklubb. Thence: E of Stenskär Light (white hut, red roof, floodlit), displayed from the SE side of an islet (2 miles N), on the W side of the fairway. 6.21 Useful mark: Kråkskär Beacon (white cairn, red band) (58°51′⋅3N, 17°44′⋅7E), standing on a rock E of the fairway. 6.22 Side channel. From a position in the main channel 5 cables SSE of Sankhällan Light (58°52′⋅3N, 17°42′⋅6E) an alternative route, shown on the chart, suitable for a draught of 6⋅5 m, passes W of Gålklubb Light. The route leads N, almost parallel to the main channel, passing W of the buoy (starboard hand) marking the NW side of the Gålklubb shoal area, and E of the buoy (port hand) marking the SE limit of Hornökultgrund, an extensive rocky shoal area NW of Gålklubb Light, to rejoin the main channel close SSE of Stenskär Light (58°54′⋅4N, 17°42′⋅8E). By night the white sector (180°–185½°), astern, of Sankhällan Light leads through most of this channel.
5
6
Skanssundet to Brandalsund 1
2
3
Stenskär to Skanssundet 1
2
3
4
6.23 The main channel continues N from Stenskär Light (58°54′⋅4N, 17°42′⋅8E), by night in the white sector (180°–184¾°), astern, of the light, passing W of Pipskärsgrund, 1¾ miles NNE, marked on its NW side by a buoy (starboard hand), and W of Regarn Light (lantern on white hut, green band) (58°57′⋅9N, 17°43′⋅5E), displayed from the NW side of Regarn. Speed is restricted to 12 kn in the channel W of Regarn. Thence (with positions from Regarn Light): E of Oaxen Light-buoy (port hand) (1½ cables NW), marking the limit of the shoal water extending SSE from Oaxen, thence: W of a light-buoy (starboard hand) (3 cables N), marking the channel N of Jeppeskär. By night the white sector (338°–353½°), ahead, of Egelsholm Light leads through this section of fairway to Södra Kalkgrund. Thence: E of two beacons (floodlit) (5 and 6 cables NNW, respectively), standing on the E side of Oaxen, thence: W of Södra Kalkgrund (2¼ miles N), on which stands a beacon. A buoy (starboard hand), 1½ cables NNW, marks the channel. Thence: E of Egelsholm Light (lantern on white hut, red top, floodlit), displayed from the E side of Egelsholm (2½ miles NNW), thence: Close W of Flundregrund (3¾ miles NNW), a group of rocks awash, marked on their W side by a light-buoy (starboard hand). By night, the white
sector (170°–171½°), astern, of Egelsholm Light leads through this part of the fairway. Thence: E of a 0⋅7 m patch, 2¼ miles NNW of Egelsholm Light and close ENE of Salsudd, marked by a light-buoy (port hand). As an additional aid, Regarn Light and Egelsholm Light, in line bearing 172°, astern, indicate the E side of the fairway from Flundregrund to the SE approach to Skanssundet, 1 mile farther N. Close W of this alignment Regarn Lighthouse becomes obscured by trees on Egelsholm. Cargo Transhipment Area. A cargo transhipment area centred on 59°02′⋅4N, 17°42′⋅8E, shown on the chart, is established on the E side of the fairway N of Flundregrund, extending about 7 cables N and 6 cables E of the channel.
4
1
2
3
230
6.24 Skanssundet. Skanssundet is the narrow channel, about 1½ cables wide, between the NE side of Mörkö, and Näslandet on the mainland, leading from the N part of Himmerfjärden to Näslandsfjärden. A ferry route, shown on the chart, crosses the channel, and speed is restricted to 7 kn through the passage. From a position close NE of Salsudd (59°02′⋅5N, 17°41′⋅8E) the track trends NW through the middle of Skanssundet, by night in the white sector (307¾°–319¼°), ahead, of Notholmen Light (white lantern on round hut, red roof, floodlit) (59°03′⋅3N, 17°41′⋅1E), displayed from a short spit of land on the NE side of Mörkö, passing NE of the light and clear NE of the rocks awash close NNW. Thence the track leads about 2 miles NNW through Näslandsfjärden in the white sector (160½°–166½°), astern, of Notholmen Light to a position SE of Farstanäs Light (lantern on white hut) (59°05′⋅8N, 17°39′⋅7E), displayed from a headland SW of the entrance to Brandalsund, passing (with positions from the light): ENE of a buoy (port hand) (2 miles SSE), marking the NE limit of the offshore shoal water, thence: E of a shoal, with a least depth of 3⋅4 m over it, marked by a light-buoy (port hand) which lies 3 cables ENE of Skjutholmen Light (lantern on white pedestal), displayed from a small headland (4 cables SW), thence: To a position about 1½ cables ESE of Farstanäs Light. This section of the route is also covered by the white sector (340°−345°) of Farstanäs Light. 6.25 Useful marks: Näslandet Sewage Outfall Lights: Front light (white triangle point up, red border) (59°03′⋅8N, 17°42′⋅7E). Rear light (red square, white band, on white hut), 200 m N of front light. In line bearing 008° they indicate the direction of an outfall pipe extending 8 cables SSW from the shore, marked at its outer end by a buoy (special). Beacon (white, floodlit), standing on a point of land on the S side of the entrance to Skanssundet, 4 cables SE of Notholmen Light. Lights in line: Front light (triangle point up on red and white beacon) (59°04′⋅8N, 17°41′⋅3E), displayed from the W side of Näslandet. Rear light (triangle point down on red and white beacon), 400 m ESE of front light.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
In line bearing 100° they indicate the direction of a submarine pipeline crossing the N part of the channel and which has its W landing on the NW side of Järnafjärden.
Light-beacon, standing on the shore, 4½ cables NNE of Brandalsund Light. (Directions for Södertälje Kanal continue at 6.69, thence for Stockholm at 6.93) (Directions for Stora Vika are given at 6.35 and for Kagghamra at 6.42)
Brandalsund to Södertälje 1
2
1
2
3
1
6.26 Brandalsund is the narrow passage leading from the N part of Näslandsfjärden to Hallsfjärden through a channel dredged to a swept depth of 10⋅2 m (1981), marked by a light, light-buoys, buoys and lighted dolphins. Speed is restricted to 7 kn. Viad Leading Lights: Front light (white metal framework tower) (59°06′⋅3N, 17°42′⋅1E), displayed from the SE side of Hallsfjärden. Rear light (similar structure) (600 m ENE of front light). From a position about 4 cables WSW of Brandalsund Light (lantern on white hut, red band), displayed from a dolphin at the W end of the channel entrance, 8 cables WSW of the front light, above, the alignment (062°) of these lights, which are visible only on the leading line, leads ENE through the centre of the dredged channel to a position in the S part of Hallsfjärden 4 cables WSW of the front light. By night, in addition to the leading lights described, passage through the channel is further marked by the intensive white sector, about 240°–248°, astern, of Skjutholmen Light, and the white sector (243°–251¾°), astern, of Brandalsund Light. 6.27 From a position 4 cables WSW of Viad Front Light (6.26) the track leads generally N for about 3½ miles through Hallsfjärden to the S part of Södertälje harbour, passing: Through the central part of Hallsfjärden from Smörasken, 1 mile NNW of Viad Light, to the vicinity of Fläsklösa (59°07′⋅6N, 17°41′⋅0E), an islet in the middle of the fairway from where a light (white mast, green band) is displayed The light is partially obscured by vegetation from 180°–335°. An extensive area of rocks and shoals lies in this section of the fairway. On the W side of the fairway there is a channel about 3 cables in length, with a swept depth of 9⋅9 m, marked on each side by buoys and light-buoys (lateral). Beacons (white, floodlit), marking the W shore adjacent to the channel stand on small points of land, ¾ cable WSW and 2 cables SSW of Fläsklösa Light, respectively. Speed is restricted to 7 kn in this section. Thence: Under an overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 50 m, spanning the fairway 3½ cables N of Fläsklösa Light, thence: To a position 1 cable W of Halls Holme Light (white concrete tower, green band) (59°09′⋅6N, 17°40′⋅1E), displayed from the W side of an islet on the E side of the fairway at the S entrance to the harbour. No 1 light-buoy (port hand), 1½ cables W, marks the W side of the channel. By night the white sector (344°–350°), ahead, of this light leads through the latter part of the fairway. 6.28 Useful marks: Hallsfjärden Light (lantern on white pedestal) (59°05′⋅9N, 17°41′⋅6E), displayed from a point of land at the S end of Hallsfjärden, 5 cables ESE of Brandalsund Light.
Minor channels Chart 3170
Asköfjärden 1
2
3
6.29 From a position in the inshore channel, described at 5.311, close ESE of Skvallran Light (58°47′⋅3N, 17°42′⋅6E) (5.311), the recommended track, of no authorised draught and shown on the chart, leads N for 3 miles, through the E side of Asköfjärden to join the main 9⋅0 m Landsort-Södertälje fairway 4 cables S of Fifång Light (58°50′⋅5N, 17°43′⋅4E), passing (with positions from Fifång Light): W of Örsankan (2¾ miles S), marked on its SW side by a buoy (starboard hand), and: E of a buoy (port hand), 3½ cables W of Örsankan, marking the limit of the coastal shoal, thence: W of Varslan (1¾ miles S), rocks awash, thence: W of a buoy (starboard hand) (1½ miles S), marking rocks awash, thence: W of Torskklubbshällarna (1 mile S) (6.18) thence: E of two buoys (port hand) (8 cables and 5 cables S, respectively) (6.18), thence: To a position 4 cables S of Fifång Light. This channel lies within the red sector (359°–004°) of Fifång Light. Chart 3168
Pålsundet 1
2
6.30 Local knowledge is required. Pålsundet (58°58′⋅5N, 17°37′⋅2E), a narrow small craft channel with a depth of 3⋅1 m on the W side of Mörkö, leads N from the W side of the N part of Mörköfjärden (6.32) thence into Stavbofjärden and farther N through Järnafjärden to join the main Landsort-Södertälje fairway E of Skjutholmen Light (59°05′⋅5N, 17°39′⋅1E) on the SW side of Brandalsund (6.26). A fixed bridge, with a vertical clearance of 4 m, spans the fairway at the N end of Pålsundet, about 2½ miles NNE of Tullgarn (58°57′⋅0N, 17°35′⋅3E). Speed is restricted to 7 kn through Pålsundet.
Harbours Charts 3170, 3147, Swedish Chart 6172 (see 1.34)
Andervik 1
2
231
6.31 Description. Andervik (58°55′⋅3N, 17°35′⋅2E) is a small loading place situated on the W side of Anderviken, about 14 miles NW of Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E). It is reached via a channel which branches off the main Landsort-Södertälje fairway. Anchorage may be obtained in Anderviken, E of the harbour, in depths of about 8 m, clay. Directions. From a position 5 cables SSE of Sankhällan Light (58°52′⋅3N, 17°42′⋅6E) (6.20) the recommended track, shown on the chart, of no authorised draught, leads about 2 miles WNW, thence 3 miles NNW through Gälöfjärden and about 1 mile generally W to the harbour, passing (with positions from Sankhällan Light):
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
3
4
NNE of Svarthäll Light (1½ miles WSW) (5.314), thence: W of Doftskärshällarna (1½ miles W), a group of islets, thence: E of Doftskärsgrund (2 miles WNW), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Between Gälön (2½ miles NW) and Furskär, 5 cables NE, thence: WSW of Måsklubbarna (3½ miles NW), a group of rocks, thence: Between Marögrundet (4½ miles NW), an islet on the N side of the entrance to Anderviken, and Klubbgrund, 3½ cables SSW, thence: W to the harbour.
2
3
4
Tullgarn 1
2
3
6.32 Description. Tullgarn (58°57′⋅0N, 17°35′⋅3E) is a small loading place situated at the head of Tullgarnsviken, about 1½ miles N of Andervik. It is reached via a channel through the N part of Gälöfjärden and Mörköfjärden which is an extension of the route to Andervik. Directions. Follow the directions given at 6.31 to a position WSW of Måsklubbarna (58°54′⋅9N, 17°38′⋅3E) (6.31). Thence the track, shown on the chart, leads 1½ miles NNW and 1 mile NW to the harbour, passing (with positions from Måsklubbarna): ENE of Skorva (9 cables NW), an islet, thence: WSW of a 1⋅2 m shoal (1¼ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: SW of Janshäll (2 miles NNW), a group of rocks. thence: NW for about 7 cables to the harbour.
5
1
2
Chart 3170
Stora Vika 1
1
2
1
6.33 Description. Stora Vika (58°56′⋅4N, 17°47′⋅0E) lies on the E side of Fållnäsviken, a long narrow inlet about 12 miles NNW of Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E). The harbour, suitable for a draught of about 6⋅5 m, consists of single jetty which serves a cement works close ENE. Note. The cement works was disused (1998). 6.34 Approach and entry — main channel from south. Stora Vika is approached via a channel, with a least charted depth of 8 m, which branches off the main Landsort-Södertälje fairway to lead NE through Svärdsfjärden and the channel off the SE side of Lisö which contains a number of islets and shoals adjacent to the channel, the latter being marked by buoys (lateral). Thence the fairway, marked at intervals by beacons, leads NNW to enter the harbour in the central part of Fållnäsviken. Approach from north-west. A channel for vessels coming from N branches off the main fairway at Gålklubb, thence leads SE through the N part of Svärdsfjärden to join the S approach channel SE of Ekskär. 6.35 Directions for south approach. From a position about 1½ cables NW of Vattklubben Light (58°49′⋅4N, 17°44′⋅4E) (6.18) the track leads 5 miles generally NE and 3 miles NNW to the harbour, passing (with positions from Södra Bergholmen Light (lantern on white pedestal) (58°49′⋅9N, 17°45′⋅4E)), displayed when required from an islet on the NW side of the fairway:
1
SE of Södra Bergholmen Light. By night, the white sectors (056½°–060°) and (232°–291°), ahead and astern respectively, lead through the fairway adjacent to the light. Thence: WNW of Metgrund (1¾ miles NE), marked on its W side by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: ESE of a beacon (black with white band, 3 m in height) (2 miles NE), standing on the S limit of the foul ground extending S from Ekskär, passing between two 5⋅7 m patches, marked by buoys (lateral), 2½ and 3½ cables respectively, E of the beacon. Thence from N of Örskären (2½ miles NE), follow the track through the fairway, marked by buoys and beacons, the positions of which may be seen on the chart, and finally pass through Bredstäk, a narrow channel marked by beacons on each side, to the harbour 1 mile farther N. Useful marks: Two lights (58°53′⋅8N, 17°48′⋅9E), displayed E of Frönäs. In line they indicate the direction of an outfall pipe extending E from the shore. Two beacons standing on the W side of the fairway, 1¼ miles SSE of the harbour. In line they mark the direction of a submarine power cable laid across the fairway. 6.36 North approach. From a position about 2 cables ESE of Gålklubb Light (58°52′⋅8N, 17°42′⋅9E) (6.20) and close ENE of Ramsholmen Light, 1½ cables SE, the track leads 2½ miles SE to join the S approach channel 4½ cables N of Metgrund (6.35), passing (with positions from Gålklubb Light): SW of Knappen (6 cables ESE), an islet surrounded by rocks, thence: NE of Rödko (1½ miles SE), an islet surrounded by a rocky shoal area, thence: SW of a 1⋅3 m shoal (2 miles SE), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NE of Klippgrund (2½ miles SE), a shoal patch, and: SW of the beacon S of Ekskär (2½ miles ESE) (6.35). By night the white sector (297°–299°), astern, of Gålklubb Light leads through this section of the fairway. 6.37 Berth. There is a quay with a length of 200 m and depths alongside of 5⋅3 to 7⋅0 m. A mooring buoy lies close NW of the quay. Supplies: fresh water; provisions in small quantities. Chart 3168
Oaxen 1
2
3
232
6.38 Description. Oaxen (58°58′⋅3N, 17°42′⋅8E) is an island lying on the W side of the S end of Himmerfjärden. The commercial harbour lies on the E side of the island and serves an industrial complex owned by the same company as the cement works at Stora Vika (6.33). The harbour is entered directly off the main Landsort-Södertälje fairway. A small craft and yacht harbour lies in a bay on the SE side of the island, close SSW of the industrial complex. It consists of four pontoon jetties enclosed by a long, angled pontoon breakwater. On the W side there is a ferry berth, used by the ferry between Mörkö and the island, and some small craft jetties. Note. It is reported (1998) that the commercial harbour is currently closed for commercial operations and is being used as a marina.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
1
2
3
6.39 Anchorage may be obtained in the area E of the island in depths of 13 to 27 m, clay. With local knowledge, anchorage may be obtained W of the island, between Oaxen and Mörkö, in depths of about 18 m, clay, and clear of the submarine pipeline and cables laid across the channel. Density of water. The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅000 g/cm3. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from January to the middle of March but icebreakers are available. Berths. There are two berths in the commercial harbour. One has a length of 20 m and a depth alongside of between 4 and 5 m and the second a length of 50 m with a depth alongside of about 6 m. In the small craft harbour there are numerous berths on the pontoons with depths of about 7 m. Supplies: fuel oil and fresh water in the small craft harbour.
Kagghamra 1
1
2
1
2
3
6.40 Description. Kagghamra (59°06′N, 17°47′E) is a loading place situated in a bay on the E side of Kaggfjärden, about 9 miles SE of Södertälje. It is reached via a channel which branches off the main Landsort-Södertälje fairway SE of Skanssundet (59°03′⋅0N, 17°41′⋅7E). Principal exports are sand and gravel. Principal imports are stone chips, peat and timber. 6.41 Approach channel. The harbour is approached through a channel, for use by day, authorised for a draught of 4⋅6 m, which leads about 4 miles from the N part of Himmerfjärden, NE through Uddsundet, N through Mörkarfjärden and Storbosundet, thence NE through the S part of Kaggfjärden to the harbour. Speed is restricted to 5 kn in Mörkarfjärden. Anchorage. Kaggfjärden provides well-sheltered anchorage in depths of about 20 m, clay. Tugs. A tug is available but must be ordered 12 hours in advance. Harbour. The harbour consists of a basin, swept to a depth of 5 m, containing a jetty with two breasting dolphins. It is entered from SW passing S of a mooring buoy marking the W limit of the 5 m basin. 6.42 Directions. From a position about 6 cables ESE of Skanssundet, between the islets of Käringholmen (59°02′⋅9N, 17°42′⋅7E) and Björkholmen, 3 cables E, the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads 1¼ miles NE, 1½ miles N and a farther 1½ miles NE to the harbour, passing (with positions from Käringholmen): NW of a 6 m patch (1 mile NE), thence: Through Uddsundet (1¼ miles NE), a narrow passage with a channel width of about 240 m, thence: Through Storbosundet (2¼ miles NNE), the narrow passage between Mörkarfjärden and Kaggfjärden with a navigable channel, about 150 m in width, marked on each side by buoys (lateral), thence: NW of rocks awash (2¾ miles NE), which form part of the coastal shoal area extending NNW from the shore, thence: To the harbour entrance. A buoy (port hand) marks a 6 m patch close NNW of the entrance. Berth. A jetty with a total berthing length of 120 m and a swept depth of 5 m alongside.
SÖDERTÄLJE KANAL General information Chart 3168
Description 1
2
6.43 Södertälje Kanal (59°12′N, 17°38′E) connects Igelstaviken, an extension of the N end of Hallsfjärden on the Baltic Sea side, with Södertäljeviken at the entrance to Mälaren. It is a dredged, excavated and partly blasted channel, with a lock in its central part, and extends generally NNW for 3 miles, from its S mouth at the head of Igelstaviken (59°10′⋅5N, 17°39′⋅8E), to its N limit in Linaviken, close N of Linasundet (59°13′⋅3N, 17°36′⋅5E). The canal is comprised of five sections: Södra Kanalen, Maren basin, the lock, Norra Kanalen and Linasundet, all of which are monitored by TV cameras in the control tower.
Depths 1
6.44 The canal has depths of 7⋅6 to 8⋅3 m over a least bottom width of 20 m.
Pilotage 1
6.45 See 6.3 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for full details.
Vessel Traffic Service 1
2
3
4
6.46 Details of reporting requirements before entering the canal are given at 6.4. A mandatory Reporting System is in force for vessels intending to navigate in Södertälje Kanal and Linasundet. For the purposes of traffic control the canal is divided by the lock into Södra Kanalen, Norra Kanalen and Linasundet. Reports should be sent to VTS Södertälje. All vessels report on VHF; the call is VTS Södertälje in each case. Vessels should report as follows: N-bound: Passing Fläsklösa (59°07′⋅6N, 17°41′⋅0E). Passing Igelstakajen (59°10′⋅5N, 17°39′⋅8E). Leaving Linasundet (59°13′⋅8N, 17°36′⋅4E), if vessels beam is greater than 8⋅5 m. S-bound: Passing Bornhuvud Light (59°16′⋅1N, 17°34′⋅8E) (chart 3142). Passing Sällskapsholmen (59°12′⋅6N, 17°36′⋅9E). Leaving Södra Kanalen entrance at the head of Igelstaviken, if vessels beam is greater than 8⋅5 m. Vessels carrying dangerous cargoes should inform VTS Södertälje not less than 12 hours in advance of ETA at the canal giving full details of cargo. For full details of reporting points and other requirements see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Water level 1
233
6.47 The average mean water level in Mälaren is about 0⋅5 m above the level in the Baltic sea. These averages are measured by the readings on the scales at the W lock sill in Karl Johansslussen (7.219) and the S side of the lock in Södertälje. Depth values S of Slussbron (59°11′⋅5N, 17°38′⋅1E), based on MSL in 1985, are being reduced at a rate of 0⋅4 cm annually due to the general landrise effect in Scandinavia. See 1.33.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Södertälje Kanal and Lock from S (6.43) (Original dated 1998) (Photograph − Swedish Maritime Administration)
the axis of Igelstaviken and Hallsfjärden, S from Södertälje to Håknäs (59°05′N, 17°37′E). A pipeline, with a cable close E, is laid along the length of Södertäljeviken and Linasundet, N from Snäckvikshamnen (59°12′⋅3N, 7°37′⋅0E) to a position N of Branten. An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 42 m, spans the channel in Igelstaviken, 3½ cables NNW of Igelstabron.
Anchorage 1
6.48 Anchorage may be obtained S of Halls Holme (59°09′⋅6N, 17°40′⋅1E), in the N part of Hallsfjärden, in depths of 13 to 18 m, clay, taking note of the charted cable. Vessels may also use the cargo transhipment area (6.23) S of Skanssundet in the N part of Himmerfjärden. Anchoring is prohibited anywhere within the canal limits.
Limiting conditions
Radio and radar requirement 1
6.49 Vessels exceeding 400 grt and all vessels carrying dangerous goods or towing craft over 30 m in length, must be fitted with a VHF installation for canal transit. In conditions where visibility is reduced below 300 m transit is prohibited unless vessel is fitted with both VHF and radar installations.
Draught 1
6.52 The maximum permitted draught in the channel through the canal is 6⋅8 m. Under certain conditions (see 6.131) this maximum draught may be increased to 7⋅0 m.
Maximum size of vessel Ice 1
1
6.50 Ice usually occurs from January to March which may affect navigation in the canal.
1
Cables and pipelines
2
6.51 A number of submarine power cables and pipelines are laid across the channel through the canal. Some of their positions can be seen on the chart. A cable is laid along
234
6.53 The maximum size of vessel permitted to transit the canal is as follows: A vessel with a length of 124⋅0 m, a beam of 17⋅0 m and a draught of 6⋅8 m (see 6.52), or alternatively with a beam of 18⋅0 m and a draught of 6⋅5 m. Lighters with a length of 60 m, a beam of 10 m and a draught of 3⋅0 m. Towed timber rafts with a width of 10 m and a length of 90 m, measured from the stern of the towing vessel to the end of the tow.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
The maximum permitted air draught in the canal N of Södertälje is 34⋅0 m.
Lock 1
Bridges 1
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
6.54 The canal is spanned by a total of five bridges including the S part of Igelstaviken which is spanned by a fixed rail bridge. All the bridges, with the exception of Igelstabron, are equipped with VHF installations. Full details, together with procedures, are given in Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Caution. Vessels intending to pass under the bridge spans should carefully calculate the air draught before transit. 6.55 Igelstabron is a fixed rail bridge with a vertical clearance of 40 m over a navigable width of 90 m, spanning the channel through Igelstaviken close N of Sydhamnen, the S part of Södertälje harbour. The channel width is marked by boards and lights, and the bridge pillars are floodlit by night. 6.56 Järnvägs-Motorvägsbroarna, rail and road bascule bridges, 80 m apart and operated in unison, span the canal about 3 cables WNW of the S entrance at the N end of Igelstaviken. The rail bridge has a vertical clearance of 26 m at mean water level, when closed, plus 3⋅9 m. The road bridge, close W, has a vertical clearance of 26 m at mean water level, when closed, plus 3⋅9 m, and may be opened to a maximum vertical clearance of 42 m. The navigable channel width through the bridges is 27⋅3 m. Requests for opening these bridges must be made to VTS Södertälje not less than 4 hours in advance. Information on specified bridge opening times may be obtained from the VTS. Requests for opening must be made to the bridge watch, call E4-bron, on VHF at least 30 mins in advance. The station is only manned when a vessel is expected or at specified opening times. Dolphins, illuminated at the E and W limits on each side, mark the channel, extending about 1 cable above and below the bridges. 6.57 Slussbron, a road bascule bridge operated from the lock control tower, spans the channel immediately S of the lock and can be operated in conjunction with the lock gate. Slussbron will not be opened whilst Mälarbron (below) is open. 6.58 Mälarbron, a road bascule bridge with a vertical clearance of 15 m at mean water level in Mälaren, when closed, over a navigable width of 30 m, spans the canal about 4 cables NNW of the lock. It is remotely controlled from the lock. Requests for opening should be made on VHF, call Södertälje Kanal, as follows: N-bound vessels — when in the lock. S-bound vessels — when passing Sällskapsholmen (59°12′⋅6N, 17°36′⋅9E), with confirmation when close N of the quays in Mälarhamnen, about 4 cables NNW of the bridge. Mälarbron is not opened for commercial traffic from Monday to Friday (except public holidays) between 0740 and 0810 hrs, or between 1600 and 1715 hrs. By night the bridge pillars are illuminated by indirect lighting.
6.59 The lock (59°11′⋅6N, 17°37′⋅9E) is situated at the N end of Maren basin, about the mid-point of the canal, and effectively divides the canal into N and S sections. It has the following dimensions: Usable length in chamber — 130 m. Width at gate openings — 19⋅6 m. Depth on sills at mean water level — 8⋅0 m. Traffic signals for the lock and bridge are displayed from masts at each end of the lock.
Traffic regulations and signals 1
2
6.60 For traffic control purposes Södertälje Kanal is divided into sections, Södra Kanalen, Norra Kanalen and Linasundet. Traffic and bridge signals for each section are shown at various locations, shown on the chart and mentioned in the relevant part of the description. Stop signs, consisting of black and white striped piles, stand at short distances from each bridge and the lock. Vessels must not proceed beyond these signs until the appropriate light signal is shown. Ships moor in the lock using crew members, with the assistance of a lock official. Use of ships fenders is prohibited in the lock. Speed is restricted to 6 kn from Halls Holme (6.27) to the N mouth of Linasundet (6.43).
Södra Kanalen 1
6.61 Signals (Diagram 6.61) for N-bound traffic are shown 350 m ESE of canal entrance in N part of Igelstaviken and on the pier at the E side of the canal entrance. For S-bound traffic, signals are shown on W side of Södra Kanalen N entrance at the S end of Maren basin.
Södra Kanalen − traffic signals (6.61)
235
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
1
6.62 Järnvägs-Motorvägsbroarna, signals (Diagram 6.62) shown on E and W sides of respective bridges.
Norra Kanalen 1
6.64 Southbound traffic signals (Diagram 6.64) are shown from W side of Mälarbron control tower.
Norra Kanalen − traffic signals (6.64)
1
6.65 Mälarbron signals (Diagram 6.65) are shown from bridge control tower.
Järnvägs-Motorvägsbroarna − bridge signals (6.62)
Lock and Slussbron 1
Mälarbron − traffic signals (6.65)
6.63 Signals (Diagram 6.63), shown from the control tower, are common for lock and bridge.
Linasundet 1
6.66 South and northbound traffic signals (Diagram 6.66) are shown from N side of Slottsholmen (59°13′⋅1N, 17°36′⋅6E) and 1½ cables WNW of Limpan, respectively.
Linasundet − traffic signals (6.66)
Vessels less than 12 m in length Slussbron − Lock and bridge signals (6.63)
1
236
6.67 For safety reasons additional regulations are in force for small craft less than 12 m in length and a beam less than
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
2
3
4 m. Meeting larger vessels in Södra and Norra Kanalen or transiting the lock together is prohibited. Canal transit under sail is prohibited. In addition, small craft must: Stay clear of the fairway when meeting or being overtaken by commercial vessels. Give precedence to commercial vessels entering the lock, passing through bridges and in traffic controlled passages. Stay clear of the fairway or moor in assigned place when awaiting bridge and lock clearance. Moor at assigned place in lock and tend moorings at all times.
Other aid to navigation 1
1
2
6.68 Racon: Igelstabron (59°10′N, 17°40′E) (6.55), marking the centre of the navigable channel.
6.72 Thence the track leads about 6 cables NNW to Linasundet, initially through Norra Kanalen and the passage through Mälarbron, 4 cables NNW of the lock, to a position at the N end of Södertälje harbour 3 cables NNW of the bridge. Thence the channel, the limits of which are well marked by floodlit dolphins, leads about 7 cables NNW and 6 cables N through the narrow part of Linasundet, to a position at the N entrance to the canal about 3 cables S of Linasundet No 5 Light (post) (59°13′⋅8N, 17°36′⋅6E), displayed from the E bank of the fairway. This light ahead, bearing about 005°, leads through the latter part of Linasundet channel and the fairway. Useful mark: Tegeltorp Light (59°13′⋅9N, 17°36′⋅4E) (6.93). (Directions continue at 6.93)
SÖDERTÄLJE General information Chart 3168
Description
Directions for canal passage (continued from 6.28) 1
1
2
3
1
2
6.69 From a position in the N part of Himmerfjärden, about 1 cable W of Halls Holme Light (59°09′⋅6N, 17°40′⋅1E), the recommended track, authorised to the canal entrance for a draught of 9⋅0 m, marked by numbered light-buoys (lateral), leads 4 cables N and 1 mile NNW through Igelstaviken to the canal entrance at its head, passing E of Sydhamnen, the S part of the harbour, thence through the Igelstabron navigable channel. By night the white sector (165°–167½°), astern, of Halls Holme Light leads through the centre of the bridge channel and thence through Igelstaviken, almost to the canal entrance. 6.70 From the mouth of the canal, which is marked by illuminated dolphins, the track leads about 5 cables WNW through the channel and the passage through Järnvägs-Motorvägsbroarna bridges. A light is shown from the dolphin on the W side of the canal entrance. A light (lantern on post) is displayed from the W side of the canal bank, 2½ cables WNW of the bridges. Ahead, bearing about 290°, this light leads through the channel to provide a useful aid for passage through the bridges. Illuminated dolphins mark the channel width E and W of the bridges. Thence, on passing this light, the track leads about 2 cables NW to enter Maren basin, close S of the lock. Useful marks: Beacon (white octagonal disused light-structure, floodlit), standing on the W side of the fairway, 5 cables NNW of Halls Holme Light. Radio tower, 4 cables NNW of above beacon. Chimney (red light), at the power station 1 mile N of Halls Holme Light. 6.71 The track through Maren basin, passage through the lock and its entrances, which are marked by illuminated dolphins, and the initial part of Norra Kanalen, leads about 4½ cables N. Södertälje Sluss S and N Lights (posts), are displayed 3 cables S and 3 cables N of the lock, respectively. The N light ahead bearing about 354° and the S light, astern, bearing about 174°, leads through the centre of the channel. Beacons (6⋅5 m in height, blue lights), stands at each corner of the lock. They indicate and mark the clear width of the lock chamber, excluding fenders.
1
6.73 Södertälje (59°12′N, 17°38′E) lies on both sides of the Södertälje Kanal about 30 miles NNW of Landsort and 15 miles WSW of Stockholm.
Function 1
2
6.74 Södertälje is an important industrial town with a developed infrastructure and good road and rail links. It has a well-sheltered commercial harbour, lying at the gateway to Mälaren, suitable for fairly large vessels and with modern facilities for handling most types of vessel including bulk carriers, container and Ro-Ro vessels. Principal exports include grain, piece goods, containers and timber products. Imports include coal, oil and oil products, vehicles, containers and general cargo. In 2003 the population was 79 613.
Approach and entry 1
6.75 The port is approached from seaward through a series of channels, certain of which are dredged or swept, marked by lights, light-buoys, leading lights and beacons, and entered through a channel marked by light-buoys.
Traffic 1
6.76 In 2003 the port was used by 527 vessels totalling 2⋅1 million dwt.
Port Authority 1
6.77 Södertälje Hamn AB, S–151 02 Södertälje, Sweden. Website: www.soeport.se E-Mail:
[email protected]
PO
Box
2016,
Limiting conditions 1
237
6.78 Maximum draughts in the channels to the various sections of the harbour: Channel to Sydhamnen — 9⋅0 m. Channel to Oljehamnen and Igelstakajen — 9⋅0 m. Channel to Spannmålskajen, S Uthamnen — 8⋅0 m. Channel to N Uthamnen — 7⋅0 m. Channel in canal and to N harbour — 6⋅8 m, (see 6.52).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Port of Sodertalje (6.73) (Photograph − Sodertalje Port Authority) 2
1
2
(Original dated 2001)
Deepest and longest berth: Igelstakajen — coal and bulk oil (6.84). Sydhamnen No 12 — Ro-Ro (6.82). Density of water 1⋅006 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled. A vessel with a length of 200 m, beam 32 m and draught of 9⋅0 m, with a maximum air draught of 50 m, has used the port. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from January to March but is kept open to navigation by the use of icebreakers.
4
inlet, 5 cables N of the bridge, and is entered directly off the channel. Uthamn, the old harbour, lies close S of the canal entrance on the W side and is entered directly off the main channel. There are small craft berths in Maren, the basin in the central part of the canal close S of the lock, reached directly off the main channel. Mälarhamnen and Snäckvikshamnen are situated on the W side of the canal at its N end and contain mainly canal waiting berths reached directly off the main channel.
Arrival information
Directions for harbour
6.79 Vessel Traffic Service. See Södertälje Kanal 6.46 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Caution. Vessels intending to berth at Mälarhamnen (6.87) to await canal transit must advise the canal control by VHF before berthing. Port Radio. Södertälje Hamn (Södertälje harbour). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Anchorage. See 6.48 and 6.23. Pilotage and tugs. See 6.3. Tugs available.
1
6.81 Directions are the same as those given for Södertälje Kanal at 6.69.
Harbour
Basins and berths Sydhamnen 1
2
General layout 1
2
3
6.80 The harbour consists of several different berthing areas. The main deep water areas lie on each side of the fairway, S of the canal entrance, in Igelstaviken, the inlet leading to the canal entrance: Sydhamnen, the main Ro-Ro and container complex, lies on the W side of the fairway close SSW of Igelstabron, the bridge spanning the S part of the inlet. It is entered directly off the main channel. Oljehamnen, the oil harbour, lies about 4 cables N, close NNW of the bridge and is entered directly off the main channel. Igelstahamnen, the main bulkhandling area lies on the E side of the fairway in the central part of the
6.82 Sydhamnen contains a total of four Ro-Ro berths, two of which allow ships to berth adjacent at the same time. No 12, the S and largest berth, has a length of 160 m with a depth alongside of 9⋅8 m and a stern ramp width of 25 m. Nos 10 and 11 berths each have a length of 130 m with a depth alongside of 7⋅9 m and a ramp width of 40 m, allowing adjacent berthing. No 9, the N berth, has a total length, including mooring dolphins, of 100 m with a depth alongside of 6⋅4 m and a stern ramp width of 15 m. These berths also handle containers.
Oljehamnen 1
238
6.83 Oljehamnen contains two separate detached jetties for handling oil products: The N jetty has a length of 70 m and a depth alongside of 10⋅1 m. Maximum vessel length 200 m. The S jetty has two berths with a total length of 120 m and a depth alongside of 6⋅9 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Igelstahamnen 1
Pilotage
6.84 Igelstakajen which handles bulk cargoes, has two berths with a total of 145 m of berthing space and a depth alongside of 10⋅4 m.
1
Vessel Traffic Service
Uthamnen 1
6.85 Uthamnen contains two berths: Spannmålskajen, in the S part, is a detached jetty, fitted with a conveyor for bulk grain, with a length of 130 m and a depth alongside of 8⋅4 m. The N part has a quay with a length of 90 m and a depth alongside of 7⋅9 m. There is a total of 260 m of quay space, which is no longer in use, close N of this berth.
1
1
1
6.86 Maren basin and Saltsjöhamnen, its extension N, are small craft and yacht harbours which lie on the W side of the canal close S and W of the lock. They contain a number of quays, and in Maren there are four pontoon jetties extending from the shore. There are a large number of berths with depths of 1⋅5 to 4⋅0 m. 6.87 Mälarhamnen contains a total of 280 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 3 to 6 m, used mainly as waiting berths for canal transit. Snäckvikshamnen, close NW, has a quay with a length of 80 m and a depth alongside of 5⋅5 m.
Port services 2
Repairs. Workshop for minor engine repairs. Other facilities. Hospital; dentist; de-ratting and issue of certificates; garbage disposal bins; oily waste reception available. Supplies. Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Nearest international airport Arlanda, Stockholm, distant 85 km NNE.
Directions Linasundet to Långhällsudde 1
2
3
4
Charts 3168, 3142 with plan Bockholmssundet, 3114
Route 1
2
6.88 From the N end of Linasundet (59°13′⋅8N, 17°36′⋅4E) at the N entrance to Södertälje Kanal the channel, the route, authorised for a draught of 6⋅8 m, leads 2½ miles NNW to Bornhuvud Light (59°16′⋅1N, 17°34′⋅8E). Thence the track, authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m to the W approach to Stockholm, leads 1½ miles NE across the SE part of Södra Björkfjärden to pass NW of Långhällsudde Light (59°17′⋅0N, 17°36′⋅5E), before turning to lead about 7 miles ESE through Bockholmssundet (59°16′⋅5N, 17°40′⋅0E), Kyrkfjärden and Rödstensfjärden to Slagstaholme (59°15′⋅8N, 17°50′⋅6E). Thence the track leads about 5½ miles NE through Vårbyfjärden and Fiskarfjärden (59°17′⋅1N, 17°52′⋅3E), thence passing SW of Kungshatt (59°18′N, 17°53′E) and Fågelön, to a position in the W approach to Stockholm SSW of Stora Essingen (59°19′N, 17°59′E).
6.92 Landmark: Hässelbystrand Aero Light (chimney) (59°21′⋅7N, 17°49′⋅5E), standing at a factory W of Stockholm. Major light: Hässelbystrand Aero Light — as above. (continued from 6.72)
SÖDERTÄLJE TO STOCKHOLM General information
6.91 The route from Södertälje to Stockholm always freezes in the winter, normally from January to April.
Principal marks
Maren basin
Mälarhamnen
6.90 See 6.4 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Ice
1
1
6.89 See 6.3 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
5
6
7
239
6.93 From a position about 2 cables S of Linasundet No 5 Light (59°13′⋅8N, 17°36′⋅6E), the track, shown on the chart, marked by lights, buoys and light-buoys, leads initially 2½ miles NNW to Bornhuvud Light (59°16′⋅1N, 17°34′⋅8E), passing (with positions from Viksberg Light (white lantern, green band) (59°14′⋅9N, 17°35′⋅4E), displayed from the W side of a peninsula on the E side of the fairway): WSW of a buoy (starboard hand) (1¼ miles SSE), marking the W limit of the 6 m depth contour, thence: ENE of a beacon (white, floodlit) (about 1 mile SSE), standing on the SE side of Kiholmen, thence: WSW of Tegeltorp Light (lantern on white pedestal), displayed from the E side of the fairway, 1 cable ENE of Kiholmen. An overhead power cable with a vertical clearance of 35 m spans the channel immediately NNW of this light. By night the white sector (337°–338¼°), ahead, of Viksberg Light leads partially through the fairway. Thence: W of Viksberg Light, thence: WSW of a beacon (1½ cables N), marking a rock awash, thence: ENE of Störviksgrundet Light (3½ cables NNW), displayed from a pumping station standing on Branten. A 5⋅2 m shoal lies 1¾ cables E on the E side of the fairway. By night the white sector (153°–162½°), astern, of Viksberg Light leads through the fairway to Bornhuvud. And: WSW of Falkenbergsgrundet (5 cables NNE), rock awash, thence: ENE of a buoy (special) (1 mile NW), marking the seaward end of an outfall pipeline extending NE from the shore, thence: W of Bornhuvud Light (white hut, green daymark) (1¼ miles NNW), displayed from a point on the E side of the fairway. The main channel to the central and W part of Mälaren branches NW from this point. Thence the track trends NE for about 1½ miles to a position about 2 cables NE of Långhällsudde Light (white
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
lantern), passing NW of a buoy (starboard hand), 2½ cables N of Bornhuvud Light, marking the NW side of a rocky shoal with a depth of 5⋅2 m over it, and NW of Långhällsudde Light. Thence ESE to a position close SW of Tyrken, a shoal marked by a buoy (starboard hand), lying 1 mile E of this light. (Directions for the channel from Södra Björkfjärden W through Mälaren continue at 6.142)
2
3
Långhällsudde to Slagstaholme 1
1
2
3
4
5
1
6.94 Buoyage. The direction of buoyage in the channel to Stockholm leads from E to W. From a position NE of Långhällsudde Light (59°17′⋅0N, 17°36′⋅5E) the track, shown on the chart, marked by lights, buoys, light-buoys and leading lights, leads generally ESE for about 7 miles to Slagstaholme (59°15′⋅8N, 17°50′⋅6E). The initial part of the fairway passes through Bockholmssundet, the narrow passage between the mainland and Helgö, close N. 6.95 Bockholmssundet. The current in Bockholmssundet may run at a rate of 1 to 2 kn in either direction, dependent on the wind, but an E-going current predominates. A speed limit of 8 kn is in force through the passage. From a position about 2½ cables NE of Långhällsudde Light the track initially leads 8 cables ESE to the W entrance, passing (with positions from this light): SSW of a buoy (starboard hand) (7 cables ENE), marking the SW limit of the shoals extending from Bergholmarna, and: SSW of a wreck, with a depth of 6⋅6 m over it (7 cables E), lying close to the track, thence: NNE of Bockholmssätra Light (red square, white stripe, on framework tower) (8½ cables ESE), displayed from the land SW of the fairway, thence: Leading marks: Front. Bockholmssund Nedre Light (59°16′⋅4N, 17°39′⋅8E) (6.96). Rear. Beacon (red board, 5 m in height), standing on the shore 1 cable ESE of the light, above. The alignment (about 125°) of these marks, and by night in the white sector (124°–127½°), ahead, of this light, leads 8 cables ESE through the fairway from Tyrken, passing (with positions from the front mark): NE of a light-buoy (port hand) (7½ cables NW), marking the 6 m contour N of Sätrarev, a shoal close S, thence: SW of Kaggen (6 cables NW), a shoal patch, thence: SW of two buoys (starboard hand) marking the shoal water extending 1½ cables SW from the coast of Helgö, thence: To a position close S of Kronotrekant Light-buoy (starboard hand) (1½ cables NW), marking the W side of a shoal area with rocks awash. 6.96 Thence the track leads about 2¾ cables ESE through the buoyed channel, by night in the white sector (109°–114½°), ahead, of Bockholmssund Östra Light (lantern on white hut, red band, black base), displayed from the shore 2 cables E of Bockholmssund Nedre Light, and to the alignment (276¾°), astern, of Bockholmssund Leading Lights: Front light. Bockholmssund Nedre (white hut, red band) (59°16′⋅4N, 17°39′⋅8E), displayed from the S side of the fairway. Rear light. Bockholmssund Övre (red square on white hut, red band) (350 m W of front light).
1
2
3
4
This alignment leads 9 cables E through the centre of the channel in Bockholmssundet to a position 8 cables E of Bockholmssund Östra Light. Overhead power cables, each with a vertical clearance of 35 m, span the fairway 1 cable and 2¾ cables E of this light. Thence the track leads 8 cables ESE through the E part of Bockholmssundet to a position between Kanan (59°16′N, 17°43′E), on the N side and Vällinge Light (white hut, red band, black base), displayed from an islet, about 1 cable S on the S side. 6.97 Thence the track leads 8 cables E and about 1 mile ESE through Kyrkfjärden, by night, initially in the white sector (260°–267°), astern, of Vällinge Light passing (with positions from Vällinge Light): S of a buoy (starboard hand) marking a 1⋅6 m shoal (3 cables ENE); thence: SSW of a light-buoy (starboard hand) marking the shallow water off Fantholmen (1¾ miles E) From a position about 1½ cables SSE of Fantholmen the track leads 1¾ miles E through Rodstenfjärden to a position 2 cables W of Slagstaholme Light (white lantern, red band), displayed from the NW side of an islet 2 miles E of Fantholmen, and by night in the white sector of Slagstaholme Light, passing (with positions from Fantholmen): N of an 0⋅8 m shoal patch (3 cables SSE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: N of a buoy (special) (4 cables SSE), marking a prohibited area, shown on the chart, which fronts Norsborg Waterworks, thence: N of a 0⋅5 m shoal patch (7 cables ESE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: S of a 4 m shoal (1 mile E), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: To a position close NW of Slagstaholme Light. Caution. W-bound traffic is prohibited in the channel S of Slagstaholme (59°15′⋅8N, 17°50′⋅6E).
Slagstaholme to Stockholm 1
2
3
240
6.98 From a position close NW of Slagstaholme Light the final section of the channel to Stockholm leads about 5½ miles NE to a position in the entrance channel close S of Stora Essingen (59°19′N, 17°59′E) (7.218), which then leads under Gröndalsbron (7.218) and thence to Riddarfjärden and the W part of the harbour. Shoals close to the channel, which is narrow in places, are marked by buoys (lateral). The following lights, and other aids to navigation, are shown in the fairway, and by night the white sectors of the lights mark the fairway in their vicinity, as indicated (with all positions from Slagstaholme Light (59°15′⋅8N, 17°50′⋅6E), unless otherwise indicated): A 4 m shoal (7 cables NE), in the middle of the fairway through Vårbyfjärden, marked by buoys, may be passed on either side but the deeper channel lies SE and is marked by Slagstaholme Light (226°–234½°), astern. A branch channel to Vårby Oil Harbour and thence to Tullinge leads SE from the central part of Vårbyfjärden. A ferry service route, shown on the chart, crosses the channel NW-SE from Slagsta to Jungfrusund. Thence: Estbröte Light (white pedestal, green band) (about 1 mile NE), displayed from the E side of an islet close W of the fairway, (005°–020°) ahead, (208°–224°) astern, thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
4
5
1
2
Sätra Light (white hut, red band, black base) (2¼ miles NE), displayed from the E side of the fairway in the channel SE of Kungshatt, (050°–061°) ahead, (227°–233°) astern, thence: Leading lights: Front. Fläsket Light (lantern on white hut, green band) (3¾ miles NE), displayed from an islet close SE of Fågelön. Rear. Kungshatt Light (red rectangle on white hut, green band) (exhibited from the NE side of the island 1 mile SW of front light). The alignment (246°), astern, of these lights leads through the fairway from the NE side of Kungshatt to a position 1 cable W of a beacon (white, floodlit), standing on foul ground N of Ekensberg, on the S side of the entrance channel close W of Gröndalsbron (7.218). An overhead power cable with a vertical clearance of 33 m spans the fairway 6 cables NE of Kungshatt Light. A buoy (port hand) marks the limit of the foul ground extending W from Rotholmen, 3½ cables SW of the SW point of Stora Essingen. 6.99 Useful marks: Slagsta Marina Lights (green and red posts) (59°15′⋅7N, 17°51′⋅6E), displayed from the breakwater heads. Water tower at Sätra, standing 4 cables E of Sätra Light (6.98). Tower (red light), standing at Hägersten, 7 cables ESE of Fläsket Light (6.98). Two chimneys (red lights), standing close SW of Hässelbystrand Aero Light (59°21′⋅7N, 17°49′⋅5E). (Directions for the W part of Stockholm harbour are given at 7.226)
Harbours
1
2
3
1
Chart 3142 (see 1.34)
Tullinge 1
1
Chart 3142
Description 1
1
bridge, forms an extension to the pier. Oil booms are in place which open and close as necessary on arrival or departure. 6.102 Directions. From a position in the main Södertälje-Stockholm channel 6 cables NE of Slagstaholme Light (59°15′⋅8N, 17°50′⋅6E), the harbour is entered through a channel, authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m, leading 8 cables SSE to the pier. The E and W limits of the dredged area surrounding the pier are marked by: Lights in line: Front and rear lights (orange triangles, 15 m apart; point up and point down, respectively) (59°15′⋅5N, 17°51′⋅8E), displayed from the shore close SE of the root of the jetty. In line bearing 200° they mark the E limit of the dredged area. Front and rear lights (orange triangles, 15 m apart; point up and point down, respectively), displayed from the shore close SW of the root of the jetty. In line bearing 170° they mark the W limit of the dredged area. 6.103 Berths. The quay on each side of the pier has a length of 35 m and a least depth alongside of 6⋅6 m. Maximum size of vessel permitted is 4000 dwt.
6.100 There are a number of small harbours or terminals located on the mainland, or on islands in the E part of Mälaren close to Stockholm. Usually they serve factories or industrial areas in the vicinity.
2
Vårby
3
6.101 Description. Vårby (59°15′⋅5N, 17°52′⋅0E) is an oil terminal situated in the S part of Vårbyfjärden, about 5 miles SW of Stockholm. The harbour consists of a single pier, with a length of 125 m, projecting at right angles to the shore, with a quay constructed on each side at its N end. A breasting dolphin, connected to the head by a
241
6.104 Description. Tullinge (59°12′⋅5N, 17°53′⋅5E) is a S suburban district of Stockholm lying on the SE side of Tullingesjön, a narrow enclosed inlet reached through Albysjön from the S part of Vårbyfjärden. 6.105 Directions. From a position about 3 cables E of Vårby lights in line (59°15′⋅5N, 17°51′⋅8E), the channel leads S, initially through a narrow passage with a least depth of 3⋅3 m, spanned by a fixed road bridge with a vertical clearance of 6 m and a navigable width of 9⋅2 m. A swing bridge, close S, has a vertical clearance of 4 m, when closed, and a navigable width of 8⋅9 m. Thence the channel leads about 1 mile S through Albysjön. An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 11 m, spans the channel 5 cables S of the swing bridge. A submarine pipeline and cable are laid across the channel close N of the power cable. Thence, a very narrow channel, with a least depth of 3⋅3 m, leads between the S part of Albysjön and Tullingesjön. It is spanned by a bridge with a vertical clearance of 6 m. An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 20 m, spans the channel 5 cables S of the bridge. Speed is restricted to 5 kn through the two narrows and bridges, and to 12 kn elsewhere.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
MÄLAREN GENERAL INFORMATION
MÄLAREN EAST SIDE — STOCKHOLM TO BÅLSTA
Charts 3142, 3141, 3145
Area covered 1
2
6.106 This section covers the waters of Mälaren from the W approaches to Stockholm, at the extreme E side of Mälaren, to Köping (59°30′N, 16°01′E) about 50 miles WNW, at the W end of Mälaren. The main channels through Mälaren, known as Mälarens djupled or Mälarleden, are described, from Södra Björkfjärden (59°18′N, 17°30′E), about 4½ miles NNW of Södertälje, together with descriptions of the major ports of Västerås (59°36′N, 16°33′E) (6.169) and Köping (6.195). The channel from Södertälje to Södra Björkfjärden is described at 6.93. Also described are the channels leading to Bålsta, Kalmarsand (59°33′N, 17°33′E) and Strängnäs (59°22′N, 17°02′E), together with other minor channels and harbours adjacent to the main channels within the area. It is arranged as follows: Stockholm to Bålsta (6.110). Södra Björkfjärden to Västerås (6.135). Västerås (6.169). Västerås to Köping (6.185). Köping (6.195).
General information Chart 3142
Route 1
2
Draughts 1
Vessel checklist 1
6.107 See 6.5.
Depths 1
6.108 See 6.2.
Traffic regulations 1
2
3
4
6.109 Rules for 7⋅0 m draught in Mälaren. Vessels wishing to use the deep-water channels in Mälaren, for which pilotage is compulsory with a draught of 7⋅0 m, must comply with the following rules and conditions: 1. Requests for permission to transit must be made at least 48 hours prior to arrival at Södertälje Pilot Station. 2. Vessel must be fitted with modern aids to navigational, a variable pitch propeller, bow thruster unit and an active rudder. Visibility from the bridge to be uninterrupted by obstructions. 3. Vessel must be fitted with a bridge wing manoeuvring/control stand. 4. The sides of the vessel must be visible from the extremity of each bridge wing. 5. Vessel must complete a special voyage report issued by the Local Maritime Traffic Department. 6. In addition to the normal navigation lights vessels must exhibit the lights and signals prescribed in Rule 28 of International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972). For full details see the relevant Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). The maximum permitted air draught is 34⋅0 m. Winter speed limits. In the winter months, when ice is present on the surface of the channels, the maximum permitted speed for all vessels with length exceeding 30 m is 12 kn, except where other, slower limits are in force. Further information is available from VTS Södertälje; for details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
6.110 The route from Stockholm to Bålsta leads from the W approach to Stockholm through the islands on the extreme E side of Mälaren. From a position close W of Rotholmen (59°18′⋅7N, 17°58′⋅5E) the channel, shown on the chart, leads about 21 miles NW to join the main channel SSE of Fagerön. It passes NE of Kärsön (59°19′⋅3N, 17°54′⋅6E) through Nockebybron (6.115), NE of Lovön, close NW, through Lövstafjärden (59°23′N, 17°47′E) and Näsfjärden (59°26′N, 17°41′E), thence through Skeppsbackasundet (59°26′N, 17°27′E) and SW of Smidö, 3 miles farther NW. Also included are descriptions of Bålsta and Hässelbyverket, together with other minor routes and harbours within the area. 6.111 The channel to Bålsta has the following authorised draughts: Stockholm W side to Hässelbyverket — 6⋅0 m. Hässelbyverket to W side Skeppsbackasundet — 5⋅3 m. W side Skeppsbackasundet to Fagerön — 6⋅0 m.
Pilotage 1
6.112 See 6.3 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Vessel Traffic Service 1
6.113 See 6.4 and the relevant Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Speed Limits 1
6.114 Throughout the year, a speed limit of 8 kn is in force for a distance of 3 cables each side of the narrows between Hässelbyholme and Hässelbyværket. Between May and September, a speed limit of 12 kn is in force between Nockebybron and Hässelbyholme. Speed is restricted to 5 kn in the channel through Nockebybron.
Nockebybron 1
2
242
6.115 Nockebybron (59°19′⋅6N, 17°54′⋅5E) is a swing bridge spanning the channel between the mainland and Kärsön (6.121), close SW. When closed, it has a vertical clearance of 12⋅5 m over a navigable width of 24 m. The limits of the navigable width are marked at each corner by blue lights (posts, 6 m in height), displayed from the dolphins standing in the passage through the bridge. Obstructions in the fourth span of the bridge, nearest to Kärsön, have reduced the depth of water close SW of the navigable channel to about 1 m. Operation and signals. Requests for opening, should be made by VHF direct to the bridge or by giving the sound signal of two short blasts followed by one prolonged blast.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Passage is regulated by light signals (Diagram 6.115) displayed from the bridge. 3
4
SW of Grytan (1¼ miles NW), a shoal marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NE of Pallen (2¼ miles NW), a shoal marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: N of Eldgarnsö, thence turning SSW to enter Norrsundet (4 miles NW), the narrow channel between Eldgarnsö and Dävensö, on the E side of Skeppsbackasundet, thence: Through Skeppsbackasundet, the narrow channel between Färingsö and Dävensö, marked by buoys and light-buoys, to a position at the W entrance to the buoyed channel, close N of Göholmen.
Skeppsbackasundet to Fagerön 1
2
Nockebybron − signals (6.115) 3
If two vessels are approaching at the same time the S-bound vessel has priority of passage through the bridge. See also Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
3
Principal marks 1
6.116 Landmark: Hässelbystrand Aero Light (59°21′⋅7N, 17°49′⋅5E) (6.92). Major light: Hässelbystrand Aero Light (59°21′⋅7N, 17°49′⋅5E) (6.92).
Hässelbyverket General information 1
Directions Stockholm to Hässelbyverket 1
2
6.117 From a position 4 cables W of Rotholmen (59°18′⋅7N, 17°58′⋅5E) (chart 3114) the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads initially 5 miles NW to a position close S of Hässelbyverket, through a channel, marked by buoys and light-buoys (lateral), passing (with positions from Nockebybron (59°19′⋅6N, 17°54′⋅5E)): Under an overhead power cable with a vertical clearance of 30 m (4 cables SE), thence: Through Nockebybron (6.115), thence: N of Hässelbyholme (3 miles NW).
1
2
Hässelbyverket to Skeppsbackasundet 1
2
6.118 The recommended track continues NW passing the following features and dangers which lie close to the track (with positions from Älghornsudd (59°24′⋅6N, 17°44′⋅3E)): SW of Lambarön (3½ miles SSE), an islet W of Hässelbyverket. In winter an ice-bridge is periodically established across the fairway in a position about 1 mile NW of Lambarön. Thence: NE of Älghornsudd, thence: SW of Väjan (1 mile NW), a shoal marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence:
6.119 The latter part of the track continues 5½ miles farther NW to join the main channel SSE of Fagerön, passing (with positions from Stora Dansaren (59°26′⋅5N, 17°34′⋅4E)): Under an overhead power cable (9 cables SE) with a vertical clearance of 30 m which spans the channel on the W side of Skeppsbackasundet between Dävensö and Göholmen, close SW. The cable is supported at each end by a pylon exhibiting a red light. The cable then continues SW to Munsön, spanning the channel at the NW end of Långtarmen. Thence: WSW of Stora Dansaren, thence: NE of Stora Notskär (1½ miles NNW), thence: NE of Ärtskär (3½ miles NNW), thence: To a position 6 cables SSE of Fagerön and close S of Fageröflisan Light (6.127). (Directions for Bålsta continue at 6.128)
6.120 Description. Hässelbyverket (59°21′⋅7N, 17°49′⋅4E) is an industrial harbour situated in the E part of Mälaren, on the E side of Lambarfjärden and close W of Stockholm. It consists of a single quay extending SW from the shore forming an extension to a factory complex. Bulk cargo and oil products are handled. Ice. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from the middle of December to the beginning of April. 6.121 Main approach channel. The main channel branches off the main Södertälje-Stockholm fairway close W of Rotholmen (59°18′⋅7N, 17°58′⋅5E) (6.98) thence leading NW, passing NE of Kärsön (59°19′⋅3N, 17°54′⋅6E) and NE of Lovön, close NW. The harbour is entered close N of Lovön. Approach channel from north. From a position SSE of Fagerön (59°31′⋅2N, 17°28′⋅5E), on the main route leading through the N part of Norra Björkfjärden, an alternative channel leads SE to Skeppsbackasundet, 6½ miles SE, thence leads farther SE through Näsfjärden and Lövstafjärden (59°23′N, 17°47′E), to the harbour.
Directions 1
243
6.122 The main channel forms the first part of the secondary channel to Bålsta. Directions are given at 6.117. For the N approach channel the directions given at 6.119 and 6.118 should be followed, in reverse order.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Berth 1
6.123 There is a single quay with a length of 160 m and depths alongside of 7⋅0 to 10⋅2 m, fitted with oil discharge and bulk discharge equipment. A portable oil containment boom is in place when oil discharge operations take place.
4
Bålsta and Kalmarsand Chart 3142 with plan of Bålsta
General information 1
2
1
6.124 Description. Bålsta (59°33′⋅2N, 17°32′⋅5E) and Kalmarsand, close E, lie at the head of Kalmarviken, in the NE part of Mälaren about 20 miles NW of Stockholm. Function. The harbour at Bålsta, consisting of two detached jetties, connected to the shore, serves an industrial complex with a factory and a quarry. Imports include packaging materials and piece goods. Main exports are gypsum products, grain and aggregates. At Kalmarsand there is a jetty with an extension consisting of two breasting dolphins, serving a grain storage facility. Grain is loaded using a conveyor system. 6.125 Approach and entry channels. The main channel to the harbours at Bålsta and Kalmarsand, authorised for a draught of 6⋅8 m, extends NNE from the main channel through Norra Björkfjärden, thence SE of Fagerön and through a narrow passage at the entrance to Kalmarviken. The main channel then leads to the jetties at Bålsta and a second channel branches E, leading to Kalmarsand which has a minimum depth of 5⋅5 m alongside. The SE approach channel from Stockholm is described at 6.110.
5
1
2
3
Firing practice area 1
6.126 Veckholms firing practice area extends NE and SE from Portugals Udd (59°30′⋅2N, 17°25′⋅5E). Lights are displayed from the point when firing is taking place.
Directions 1
2
3
(continued from 6.142) 6.127 From a position in the main channel to Västerås, 1 mile SSE of Ytterholm Light (59°26′⋅1N, 17°23′⋅9E) (6.142), the track, shown on the chart, branches off to lead 9 miles generally NNE to the harbours, passing (with positions from Stora Gåsholmen Light (white post, green band) (59°28′⋅3N, 17°27′⋅3E), and initially, by night, in the white sector (018°–032°) of the light): WNW of Sparin (1¾ miles SSW), a rock on which stands a beacon, thence: E of Lastberget Light (white post, red band) (8 cables W), displayed from the mainland, and: W of Stora Gåsholmen Light, thence: W of a buoy (starboard hand) (6 cables N), marking the shoal water extending NW from the islets, thence: WNW of Nybrogrundet (1½ miles N), a rocky shoal area in the middle of the fairway, marked on its W side by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NW of a 3⋅4 m patch (1¾ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand). By night the white sector
(200°–208°), astern, of Lastberget Light marks the SW part of the fairway. Thence: NW of a buoy (starboard hand) (2¼ miles NNE), marking a shoal with a least depth of 7⋅3 m over it. By night the white sector (037½°–065½°), ahead, of Fageröflisan Light marks the fairway. Thence: E of Fageröflisan Light (white post, red band) (2½ miles NNE), displayed from a rock on the W side of the fairway. The secondary channel from Stockholm joins the main channel close S of this light. Alternative side channel. An alternative channel passes E of Nybogrundet. From a position in the main channel, 6 cables NNW of Stora Gåsholmen Light, the track branches to lead about 2¼ miles NE and rejoin the main channel E of Fageröflisan Light. It passes NW of Flisan, 1 mile NE of Stora Gåsholmen Light, a shoal marked by a buoy (starboard hand), and Flisa Tall, close E, a rock marked on its N side by a buoy (starboard hand). By night, the initial part of this section of fairway is marked by the white sector (220½°–226°), astern, of Lastberget Light. 6.128 (continued from 6.119) Thence the track continues (with positions from Fageröflisan Light): NW of Knuten (1 mile NE), a rock. By night this stretch of fairway is marked by the white sector (050½°–063½°) of Toresta Light which leads clear of any dangers. Thence: NW of Toresta Light (white post, green band) (1¾ miles NE), displayed from the E side of the passage. An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 35 m, spans the channel immediately SW of the light. Thence: NNE and N through Kalmarviken to Bålsta harbour where the E side of the entrance channel is marked by a buoy (starboard hand). By night this stretch is marked by the white sector (194½°–207°), astern, of Toresta Light. The channel to Kalmarsand leads NNE through Kalmarviken to the entrance channel, marked by buoys (lateral), close E of the entrance to Bålsta. Useful mark: Silo, 1½ miles NNE of Toresta Light, at Kalmarsand.
Berths 1
6.129 Bålsta. The N jetty has a total length, including breasting dolphins, of 145 m with a swept depth of 6⋅3 m at the N part of the jetty and 5⋅7 m at the S part (1998). The S jetty has a total length, including breasting dolphins, of 75 m with a depth of 5⋅3 m. Kalmarsand. The jetty has a total length, including breasting dolphins, of 42 m and a least depth of 5⋅5 m.
Harbours Löten 1
244
6.130 Description. Löten (59°25′⋅3N, 17°35′⋅1E) is a loading place situated on the NE side of Munsön, an island about 12 miles NW of Stockholm. The harbour, which is privately owned, lies at the NW end of Långtarmen, close SW of the W entrance to Skeppsbackasundet. It is suitable for a
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
1
1
2
1
draught of 5⋅0 m and consists of a single quay serving a large quarry which exports sand. 6.131 Approach channels. The harbour is reached from SE via the channel from Stockholm to Bålsta described at 6.110. From N it is reached via the latter part of the channel from Stockholm to Bålsta leading SE from Fagerön to Skeppsbackasundet. 6.132 Directions. Directions for the channel from SE are similar to those given at 6.117 and 6.118 for the channel as far as the W side of Skeppsbackasundet thence turning S to the harbour. Directions for the channel from N are similar to those given at 6.119, followed in reverse order to the W side of Skeppsbackasundet, thence branching S to lead about 6 cables to the harbour. Caution. The SW extension of the overhead power cable from Göholmen (6.119), with a vertical clearance of 35 m, spans the channel close N of the quay. 6.133 Berths. There is a total of 195 m of berthing space on the quay with depths between 4⋅3 and 5⋅7 m alongside, with the shallowest parts at each end. Depths of 5⋅4 to 7⋅0 m may be obtained about 2⋅5 m off the quay face, with the use of fendering.
Pilotage 1
Vessel Traffic Service 1
1
6.138 Anchorage is prohibited in the bay on the E side of Kuron (6.142) and N of 57°19′⋅3N, 17°30′⋅1E.
Hjulstabron 1
Stäket 6.134 A channel, authorised for a draught of 3⋅0 m and marked by buoys (lateral), leads 4 miles NNE from Älghornsudd (59°24′⋅7N, 17°44′⋅4E) at the NW end of Lövstafjärden (6.121), to reach Stäket (59°28′N, 17°47′E), a small craft harbour in the NE part of Mälaren. Road and rail bridges cross the channel at Staket. There are two swing bridges at the S end of the channel and a road and rail bridge at the N end. The road bridge has a vertical clearance of 16 m. Thence the channel leads farther N to the university town of Uppsala where there is a small harbour.
6.137 See 6.4 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Prohibited anchorage
2
1
6.136 See 6.3 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
3 4
6.139 Hjulstabron (59°31′⋅9N, 17°00′⋅5E), is a road bridge with a swing section, spanning the channel in Hjulstfjärden (6.147) between the mainland and Märsön. It has a vertical clearance, when closed, of 6 m and two navigable openings, each with a width of 35 m, situated either side of a central pier. An area, shown on the chart, within which anchoring is prohibited, surrounds the navigable areas of the bridge. Lights are displayed from the E and W ends of the central pier and also from the ends of the E and W fendering adjacent to each navigable opening. When the swing span is in motion revolving yellow lights are displayed from the short sides of the span. Operation and signals. See 6.115. In normal conditions W-bound vessels pass through the N opening and E-bound vessels pass through the S opening. For further details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2).
Ice 1
SÖDRA BJÖRKFJÄRDEN TO VÄSTERÅS
6.140 See 6.8 and the appropriate part of the text under Directions.
Landmarks 6.141 1
General information
Radio mast (red light) (59°16′⋅9N, 17°14′⋅4E), standing at an elevation of 101 m. Radio mast (red light) (elevation 112 m) (59°21′⋅1N, 17°14′⋅8E).
Charts 3142, 3141
Route 1
6.135 From a position in the SE part of Södra Björkfjärden (59°18′N, 17°30′E), the main channel, authorised for a draught of 6⋅8 m, leads generally WNW for about 42 miles to Västerås entrance channel in Fulleröfjärden (59°32′N, 16°35′E), passing NE of Gåsholm (6.142), W of Adelsön (59°23′N, 17°30′E), NE of Selaön through Grönsöfjärden, thence through Grönsösund, the narrow passage between Grönsö (59°29′N, 17°15′E) and Arnö, close W. Thence it leads N of Oknön, through the narrow channel in Hjulstafjärden (6.147), W of Aspön, S of Hallingen and SW of Fagerön (59°30′N, 16°50′E), and then through Aggarösundet (59°31′N, 16°43′E) (6.153) and Ridöfjärden to Fulleröfjärden.
Directions (continued from 6.93)
Södra Björkfjärden to Ytterholm 1
245
6.142 From a position about 2 cables W of Bornhuvud Light (59°16′⋅1N, 17°34′⋅8E) (6.93), the recommended track, shown on the chart, marked by lights and buoys (lateral and cardinal), leads 11½ miles generally NW to Ytterholm, passing (with positions from Kurön Light (white tower, red band, 8 m in height) (59°20′⋅1N, 17°29′⋅3E), displayed from the N side of the island): ENE of Midsommargrund (3 miles SE), a shoal marked by a buoy (E cardinal), and:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
WSW of a buoy (starboard hand), marking the S limit of Björkö Lera (3 miles ESE). By night, the white sector (160½°–173°), astern, of Bornhuvud Light marks most of this part of the fairway. In addition, the continuation NW of the 6⋅0 m channel from Stockholm, shown on the chart, joins the main channel from Södertälje W of Björkö Lera, by night in the white sector (131½°–136°), astern, of Långhällsudde Light (59°17′⋅0N, 17°36′⋅5E) (6.93). Thence: NE of Björköklack (2¼ miles SE), a shoal marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NE of Gåsholm Light (white rectangle on white mast, red band) (1½ miles SE), displayed from the NE side of the islet. In winter an ice-bridge is periodically established across the channel between Kurön and Adelsön in a position about 6 cables NW of this light. Thence: NE of Kurön. A group of rocks, awash, marked by a buoy (port hand) extend 2 cables E into the channel from the E side of the island. And: SW of Sandviksgrund (4 cables NNE), a shoal marked by a buoy (starboard hand). By night, the white sector (126½°–136°), astern, of Gåsholm Light leads through this part of the fairway. Thence: ENE of Pysen (1½ miles NW), a shoal. By night the fairway through Prästfjärden is marked by the white sector (154½°–159°), astern, of Kurön Light, and the white sector (333½°–336½°), ahead, of Ytterholm Light. Thence: WSW of Toftagrund (2¾ miles NNW), a shoal marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: WSW of Avbäran (3¼ miles NNW), a rock awash, thence: ENE of Bastlagnö (6 miles NW) from where a branch of the 6⋅8 m channel leads NNE to Bålsta, thence: To a position close S of Ytterholm Light (white tower, green band) (6½ miles NW), displayed from the S point of the islet. (Directions for main channel continue at 6.144) (Directions for main channel to Bålsta continue at 6.127) 6.143 Side channel. From a position at the W end of Bockholmssundet (6.95), about 1 mile E of Långhällsudde Light (59°17′⋅0N, 17°36′⋅5E), a side channel, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m and shown on the chart, leads 5 miles NNW, 5 miles NW and 2 miles W to join the main channel close S of Ytterholm Light. It passes initially through Hovgårdsfjärden, between Munsön and Adelsön, thence through Svinsundet (59°23′⋅5N, 17°31′⋅7E), a narrow stretch crossed by a ferry track and a submarine cable close together, which are marked at each end by lighted dolphins, the positions of which may be seen on the chart. From the N side of Svinsundet the track trends W through the S part of Norra Björkfjärden to Ytterholm Light. Shoals close to the fairway are marked by buoys (lateral). Link channel. From a position in the main channel close W of the SW side of Björkö, about 8 cables E of Gåsholm Light (59°19′⋅3N, 17°31′⋅7E), a channel, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m, branches off to lead 4 miles N, passing through Björkösundet and thence through the W side of Hovgårdsfjärden, to join the above side channel close SE of Svinsundet.
Ytterholm to Bryggholmen 1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
246
(continued from 6.142) 6.144 From a position close S of Ytterholm Light the track, marked by lights and buoys (lateral) leads 4 miles WNW, 5 miles generally NW and thence a farther 2½ miles WNW to a position W of Bryggholmen, passing (with all positions from Grönsö Light (59°28′⋅9N, 17°13′⋅8E) unless otherwise indicated): NNE of Tegelgrund (4¼ miles SE), a rocky shoal marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SSW of Våmben Light (lantern on framework tower, green band) (2¾ miles SE), displayed from a rock N of the channel. By night the white sector (284°–289°), ahead, of this light leads through the first part of the fairway and the white sector (098°–102½°), astern, of Ytterholm Light leads through the latter part. Thence: NNE of Selaön Light (white tower, red band, black base, 6 m in height) (2½ miles SE), displayed from the NE side of the island, thence: W of Grönsö Light (white hut, green band), standing on the W side of Grönsö, in the central part of Grönsösund, the narrow channel close W. By night the fairway S of this light is marked by the white sector (327½°–333½°), ahead, of this light, and the white sector (148°–150½°), astern, of Selaön Light. Speed is restricted to 7 kn in Grönsösund. 6.145 Thence the track continues: ENE of Arnö. The fairway N of Grönsö Light is marked by the white sector (153°–163°), astern, of this light. Thence: SW of Flatgarn (2½ miles NNW), by night in the white sector (299½°–308½°), ahead, of Flatgarn Light, thence: SSW of Flatgarn Light (white hut, green band) (3 miles NNW). The narrow channel leading about 6 cables W of this light is marked on each side by buoys and a light-buoy. By night the channel is marked by the white sector (082°–091°), astern, of the light. Thence: N of Husgarn Light (white tower, grey base, 6 m in height) (3¼ miles NW), displayed from the NW side of an islet S of the fairway. A beacon, marking the S side of the channel, stands on a rock, 2½ cables E of this light. An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 35 m, spans the channel 1 mile NW of the light. The pylons supporting this cable display white lights. By night the fairway is marked by the white sector (116°–125½°), astern, of this light. Thence: NNE of Oknö Hälludde Light (white hut, red band) (4¼ miles NW), displayed from the N point of the island, and: SW of Bryggholmen Light (white tower, green band, 6 m in height) (4½ miles NW), displayed from the NW side of the island, thence: To a position close N of Torrgrund, 8½ cables W of Bryggholmen Light, a shoal marked by a buoy (port hand). Useful mark: Windmotor (43 m in height) (59°31′⋅2N, 17°10′⋅6E), on Flatgarn.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
1
2
3
6.146 Alternative channel. From a position in the main channel 3 cables NNW of Selaön Light (59°26′⋅7N, 17°16′⋅4E), an alternative channel, authorised for a draught of 5⋅0 m, shown on the chart and marked by buoys, branches NW to lead 6 miles through Arnöfjärden, passing (with positions from Selaön Light): NE of Hornbyklackar (1 mile NW), a shoal marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NE of Nybbleklack (2¼ miles NW), a shoal marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Oxhagen (4½ miles NW) where a ferry track crosses the fairway. Speed is restricted to 7 kn in the vicinity of the ferry track. Thence: Close SW of Hovmangrundet (5½ miles NW), an area of foul ground, marked on its W side by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NW to rejoin the main channel 4 cables E of Oknö Hälludde Light.
2
3
WNW of Strömskär Light (white house, red roof) (2 miles W), displayed from the NW side of an islet E of the channel, thence: Between Märsön Light (white structure, red band) (2 miles WSW), displayed from the W side of the island, and Tedarö Light (white framework tower, green band), 1½ cables W, displayed from a rock SE of Tedarön. By night the white sector (155°–168°), ahead, of Märsön Light marks the N part of the fairway, and the white sector (358½°–004½°), astern, of Strömskär Light marks the S part. Thence: N of Agneudde Light (white tower, red band, 7 m in height) (about 2½ miles WSW), displayed from the NW point of Aspön, and: S of Biskopsstenarna, 1½ cables N, an islet on which stands a beacon (yellow, floodlit), thence: To a position 1 cable W of Agneudde Light.
Agneudde to Fagerön Hjulstafjärden 1
2
3
4
5
1
6.147 Caution. The fairway through this narrow stretch contains several sharp bends where a full view of the fairway ahead is obscured. In 2002 it was reported that depths in the fairway E of Nybyholm were shoaler than charted. A depth of 7⋅6 m exists 1¾ cables E of the lighthouse (59°31′⋅7N, 17°01′⋅9E). Traffic signal. W-bound vessels must give a sound signal consisting of one prolonged blast before rounding Agneudde (59°31′N, 16°58′E) at the W end of the passage. Directions. From a position close N of Torrgrund (6.145), 8½ cables W of Bryggholmen Light, the track, shown on the chart and well marked on each side by lights, buoys and light-buoys (lateral), leads 3 miles W, 7 cables S and a farther 7 cables W through the buoyed channel, passing (with positions from Koholmsgrund Light (white tower, red band, black base) (59°31′⋅7N, 17°03′⋅0E), displayed from the S side of the channel): N of Koholmsgrund Light, by night in the white sector (261°–269°), ahead, of the light which partially marks the fairway, thence: S of Nybyholm Light (white hut, green band) (5½ cables W), displayed from a point on the mainland close N of the NW side of Koholmen, thence: SW of Ryssgrund Light (lantern on framework tower on white dolphin, red band) (8 cables W), displayed from a dolphin marking the N side of the channel, and: NE of Kyrkegrund Light (similar structure to above, red band) (8½ cables W), displayed from a dolphin marking the S side of the channel. These dolphins also mark the line of a power cable laid in the channel. Thence: Through Hjulstabron (1¼ miles W) (6.139), thence: N of Hjulsta Light (white stone hut, red band) (about 1½ miles WNW), displayed from a rock on the S side of the channel. Speed is restricted to 7 kn in the passage through the bridge. 6.148 Thence the track turns S, then W round Tedarö Light, passing:
1
2
3
1
2
247
6.149 From a position 1 cable W of Agneudde Light the track leads 2½ miles SSW and 3 miles WNW through the fairway, which is very narrow in places, marked by lights, buoys and light-buoys (lateral), passing (with positions from Toppvik Light (framework tower, red band) (59°29′⋅7N, 16°57′⋅4E), displayed from the NW side of Torparudden): Between two buoys (1 mile NNE) marking shoal limits adjacent to the channel. By night the white sector (010°–014°), astern, of Agneudde Light leads clear through these shoals. Thence: ESE of Minsgrundet (5 cables N), marked on its E side by a buoy (starboard hand). By night the white sector (194°–196°), ahead, of Toppvik Light marks the latter part of the fairway. Thence: WNW of a buoy (port hand) (2 cables NNE), marking a rock, thence: Between Toppvik Light and Gisselholmen Light (tripod mast, white pedestal, green band), 1¼ cables SW, displayed from the E side of the islet. This passage is very narrow. Thence: WNW of a 3 m shoal patch (about 1 mile SSE), marked by a buoy (port hand). 6.150 Thence the track continues, turning WNW round Hummelnäs, 1½ miles SW of Toppvik Light, on which stands two beacons (yellow, floodlit): NE of Hästskär Light (white tower, red band) (2½ miles WSW), displayed from the NE side of the islet. By night the white sector (271½°–282½°), ahead, of the light marks the channel through Norrfjärden. Thence: SSW of a light-buoy (starboard hand) (2½ miles WSW), marking the channel limit, thence: SW of Hallingön Light (white tower, green band) (2¾ miles W), displayed from the W side of Hallingen. By night the white sector (121°–127°), astern, of Hästskär Light marks the latter part of channel WNW of this light. A branch channel leads SE to Strängnäs from this position. Thence: NNE of Pilgrundsklack Light-buoy (port hand) (about 3¼ miles W), marking a shoal area with a least depth of 3⋅4 m over it. Another buoy (port hand), 3 cables W, marks a rocky shoal. Thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
3
1
To a position SSW of Fagerö Light (lantern on white tower) (about 3¾ miles W), displayed from a spit of land on the SE side of Fagerön. A light-buoy (starboard hand), moored about 3 cables SSW, marks the limit of the shoal water extending S from the island. By night the latter part of this section of fairway is marked by the white sector (102°–112°), astern, of Hallingön Light.
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
6.151 Useful mark: Beacon (white, floodlit) standing on a point of land 2½ cables SSW of Toppvik Light (59°29′⋅7N, 16°57′⋅4E).
Fagerön to Stora Sandskär 1
1
6.152 The central part of Granfjärden contains an extensive area of foul ground with Gimpelstenarna, a small group of islets, on its SW side. A buoyed channel marks the fairway through the central part of the foul ground. Vretbo Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle on post, white band) (59°31′⋅2N, 16°42′⋅6E), displayed from Mårtensskär, an islet on the NW side of Aggarösundet. Rear light (similar structure) (450 m WNW of front light), standing on the mainland. From a position about 4 cables SSW of Fagerö Light (59°30′⋅1N, 16°50′⋅2E) the alignment (292½°) of the above lights leads 3¼ miles WNW through the fairway to the entrance to Aggarösundet, the passage between Aggarön and the mainland, passing (with positions from Fagerö Light): Between Granfjärdsklack, on the N side, and Jungfrugrund, on the S side (2 miles WNW), the shoal areas between which the main channel leads. The N side of the channel is marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), and the S side by a light-buoy and another buoy, 2½ cables WNW, (both port hand). By night, in addition to the leading lights, the white sector (287°–290°), ahead, of Lilla Aggarö Light marks most of this part of the fairway. Thence: SSW of Snesarboudde Light (white tower, green band) (2¾ miles WNW), displayed from the mainland. Buoys (starboard hand), 2 cables SE and SW of the light respectively, mark the channel. Thence: NNE of Lilla Aggarö Light (white tower, red band) (3¼ miles WNW), displayed from the NE side of the islet. Lilla Aggarö Light-buoy (port hand), close NE, marks the channel. Alternative channel. An alternative channel, of no authorised draught, passes N of Granfjärdsklack and rejoins the main channel S of Snesarboudde Light. From a position about 4 cables SSW of Fagerö Light (59°30′⋅1N, 16°50′⋅2E) the track, shown on the chart leads 1½ miles NW and 1¼ miles W, passing (with positions from Fagerö Light): N of a buoy (port hand) (1¾ miles WNW), marking the NE side of the shoal area, thence: N of a buoy (port hand) (2 miles WNW), marking the NW side of the shoal area, and: S of a 1⋅2 m shoal (2 miles NW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: To a position in the main channel S of Snesarboudde Light.
3
4
5
6
7
6.153 Thence the main track continues, leading 1 mile W through Aggarösundet, thence 2 miles NW and 2 miles WSW through Ridöfjärden to a position S of Stora Sandskär Light, passing (with positions from Stora Aggarö Light (lantern on white hut, red band) (59°30′⋅7N, 16°42′⋅3E)): S of Lindblomsgrund Light-buoy (starboard hand) (7½ cables ENE), marking the edge of the coastal shoal. By night the white sector (084°–087°), astern, of Snesarboudde Light leads through most of this channel. Thence: S of Smedens grund (2 cables N), marked by a buoy (starboard hand). Another buoy (port hand), 1 cable S, marks the S side of the channel. Thence: SSW of Vretboklack Light-buoy (starboard hand) (3 cables NW), marking the channel, thence: NE of Puddingen (6 cables NW), marked by a buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (126°–129°), astern, of Stora Aggarö Light marks this part of the fairway. Thence: NE of Ridö Light (red square on framework tower, white band) (1¼ miles W), displayed from the NE side of Ridön, thence: SW of Fröholmen Light (white hut, green band) (1¼ miles NW), displayed from the mainland, and: NE of Norrskär (1½ miles NW). A buoy (port hand), close N, marks the edge of the shoal area. Thence: S of a buoy (starboard hand) (2 miles NW), marking shoal water extending S from Södra Björnö (6.179), thence: NNW of Hästskogrund Light-buoy (port hand) (2½ miles NW), marking the limit of the shoals on the N side of Hästkogrundet, thence: NNW of a buoy (port hand) (3 miles NW), marking the channel, thence: To a position about 1 cable S of Stora Sandskär Light (white hut, green band) (59°31′⋅8N, 16°35′⋅3E), displayed from the S point of an islet at the S end of Västerås entrance channel. By night the white sector (258°–262½°), ahead, of this light marks part of the fairway. (Directions for main channel continue at 6.188, and for Västerås at 6.178)
Minor channels Chart 3141
Enköping 1
6.154 A channel, authorised for a draught of 3⋅0 m, marked in its narrow stretch by buoys (lateral), branches off the main 6⋅8 m channel in Oknöfjärden (59°31′N, 17°06′E). It leads about 5 miles NNW to Enköping (59°38′N, 17°05′E), an industrial town with a small commercial harbour in the N part of Mälaren.
Granfjärden-Blacken 1
248
6.155 An alternative channel, for vessels of lesser draught, links Granfjärden (59°30′N, 16°46′E) (6.152), and Blacken (8 miles WSW) (6.185). The track, authorised for a draught of 3⋅0 m, marked by buoys in the very narrow stretch S and E of Sundbyholmsön (59°28′N, 16°38′E), leads about
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
13 miles WSW from the E side of Granfjärden to Torshällahuvud, on the SW side of Blacken.
Strängnäs Charts 3142 with plans of Strängnäs and Kolsundet to Stallarholmen, 3141
2 3
Description 1
2
6.156 Strängnäs (59°22′N, 17°02′E) is a small garrison town with a population of about 8000, in the central part of Mälaren, situated at the SE end of Strängnäsfjärden, about 20 miles SE of Västerås. The main harbour, at Gåsskärskajen, lies in the S part of Ulvhällsfjärden, close N of Gorsingeholm and SSE of the town. It is suitable for a draught of 5⋅0 m and serves a grain storage facility. There is a small boat harbour at Västerviken in the NE part of the town.
Directions for main channel 1
Channels 1
2
3
6.157 Main channel. The main channel from NW is narrow and tortuous but well marked by buoys (lateral). From the NW part of Norrfjärden (59°29′N, 16°54′E) it leads about 9 miles SE through Strängnäsfjärden, passing under Nya Strängnäsbron and through Tosteröbron, thence turning S for about 1 mile through Ulvhällsfjärden to the harbour. Secondary channel. The secondary channel from E, for which local knowledge is required, is authorised for a draught of 3⋅5 m. The narrow sections, in the passage S of Selaön (59°24′N, 17°12′E), are marked by buoys (lateral) and shoals adjacent to the channel are also marked by buoys (lateral). From an initial position in the SW part of Prästfjärden, about 5 cables WNW of Ridö Pilskär Light (white tower, green band, 7 m in height) (59°19′⋅6N, 17°23′⋅2E), the track leads generally WNW for about 10 miles, passing through Kolsundet, Flarn (59°21′⋅5N, 17°13′⋅5E), Stallarholmsfjärden and Vaxängsfjärden, thence S of Segerön (59°22′⋅7N, 17°06′⋅2E) before turning S for about 1 mile through the E part of Ulvhällsfjärden to the harbour. On the W side of Flarn the channel is spanned by Stallarholmsbron, a swing bridge with a vertical clearance, when closed, of 3⋅1 m over a navigable width of 20 m.
2
3
1
6.158 Tekniska Namnden, S–152 01 Strängnäs, Sweden.
Anchorage 1
6.159 Anchorage may be obtained: In the SE part of Strängnäsfjärden, NE of Visholmen (59°22′⋅9N, 17°01′⋅5E), in depths of about 8 m, clay. ESE of Ångbåtsbron, a jetty in the NW part of Ulvhällsfjärden, in depths of about 7 m, clay.
6.161 Buoyage. The direction of buoyage in this fairway is from SE to NW. Local knowledge is required. From a position 2 cables S of Hallingön Light (59°29′⋅4N, 16°51′⋅9E) (6.150), the track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys (lateral and cardinal), leads 9 miles SE and about 8 cables S through the fairway which is very narrow in the stretch SW of Tosterön, to the harbour at Gåsskärskajen. The following named features lie along the fairway (with positions from Hallingön Light): Hästskär Light (8 cables SE) (6.150), NE of the track. Lidaholmen (2 miles SE), an islet E of the channel. Vargholmen (4 miles SE), an islet close SW of the channel. Sandaholme (5½ miles SE), an islet close NE of the track. Speed is restricted to 5 kn passing the islet. Nya Strängnäsbron (59°23′⋅8N, 17°00′⋅6E), a fixed bridge with a vertical clearance of 26 m over a navigable span of 50 m. Speed is restricted to 7 kn in the channel through the bridge. Tosteröbron (6.160), about 1½ miles SE of Nya Strängnäsbron. Speed is restricted to 5 kn in the channel through the bridge. Loppan, 1 mile SSE of Tosteröbron, a rock close W of the track and about 4 cables N of the berth.
Berths
Port Authority 1
Speed is limited to a maximum of 5 kn within 50 m of the bridge. Lights are displayed from the E and W ends of the central pier and also from the ends of the E and W fendering adjacent to each navigable opening. Operation and signals. See 6.115. If two vessels are approaching at the same time the E-bound vessel has precedence for passage through the bridge. See also Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
6.162 Gåsskärskajen has a length of 99 m and a depth alongside of about 5⋅5 m. Ångbåtsbron, a small jetty close S of the S end of Tosteröbron, is used by local traffic and has depths of 4⋅5 to 5⋅5 m. Västervikshamnen, the small boat harbour, has several quays and pontoon jetties providing numerous berths with depths of 0⋅5 to 2⋅4 m.
Port services 1
6.163 Repairs: engineering workshop. Supplies: fuel oil; provisions; fresh water in Västervikshamnen. Facilities: doctor and chemist available.
Harbours Chart 3142
Underås Tosteröbron 1
6.160 Tosteröbron is a swing bridge spanning the channel between Strängnäs and the S part of Tosterön, close NE. When closed it has a vertical clearance of 2⋅8 m. Only the passage S of the swing bridge foundations has lights and pile fendering: the N passage is suitable only for pleasure craft.
1
249
6.164 Description. Underås (59°15′⋅9N, 17°32′⋅2E) is a little used industrial loading place situated in the S part of Södra Björkfjärden, about 14 miles SE of Stockholm and close S of the island of Sländon. The harbour consists of a single detached jetty, connected to the shore, and fitted with a conveyor system which serves a quarry producing sand and aggregates.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
2
1
2
1
The harbour is approached and entered through a channel, for day use only, leading from the S part of Södra Björkfjärden. Caution. A submarine power cable from the mainland to Sländon is laid close E of the jetty. 6.165 Directions. From a position in the channel about 1¼ miles SSW of Gåsholm Light (59°19′⋅3N, 17°31′⋅7E) and 8 cables W of Midsommar, the track leads 1 mile SSW then 1 mile SSE to the harbour, passing (with positions from Gåsholm Light): WNW of Slandö kalv (2 miles S). A white house, shown on the chart, stands on the NW tip of the islet. Thence: WNW of the NW side of Slandön (2½ miles S), thence: SW of the SW side of Slandön (2¾ miles S), thence: SW of Högholmen (3¼ miles SSE), thence: To the harbour. 6.166 Berths. There is a total of 180 m of berthing space on the jetty. The W part, for a length of about 110 m, has a swept depth of 5⋅0 m and the remaining 70 m has depths of 4⋅7 to 5⋅0 m. The conveyor loading arm has an outreach of 8⋅2 m from the jetty face and a height of 6 m above mean water level.
general and container cargoes. Principal exports include grain, metal products, piece goods, timber and paper. Imports include fertilisers, coke, coal, feedstuffs, oil products, scrap metal, metal products, piece goods and sand. In 2003 the population of Västerås was 128 902.
Approach and entry 1
2
6.171 The harbour is approached through channels in Mälaren, from Stockholm or Södertälje, and entered from Fulleröfjärden via the fairway in Västeråsfjärden, through a channel, shown on the chart, authorised for a draught of 6⋅8 m, marked by lights and buoys (lateral), which branches in the N part to lead to the different sections of the harbour. An alternative, side entry channel, for vessels of lesser draught, branches off the main approach channel on the E side of Ridöfjärden. It passes E of Almö-Lindö (6.178) and between the islets in the NE part of Västeråsfjärden, entering the harbour close NW.
Traffic 1
6.172 In 2003 a total of 914 vessels of 3⋅4 million dwt used the port.
Ön 1
1
6.167 Description. Ön (59°29′N, 17°22′E) is a loading place situated near the head of Torsviviken, an inlet on the W side of Norra Björkfjärden, about 6 miles SW of Bålsta. The channel to the harbour is suitable for a draught of 4 m. The harbour consists of a single quay with connecting breasting dolphins at each end serving a grain storage facility which exports bulk grain. 6.168 Directions. From a position in the main channel to Bålsta, 8 cables ENE of Ytterholm Light (59°26′⋅1N, 17°23′⋅9E) (6.142), the fairway leads 3½ miles NW through Torsviviken direct to the harbour. Landmark: Silo, standing immediately E of the jetty at Ön.
Port Authority 1
Limiting conditions 1
VÄSTERÅS 2
General information Chart 3141 with plan of Västerås
Position 1
6.169 Västerås (59°36′N, 16°33′E) is situated at the head of Västeråsfjärden, in the W part of Mälaren, about 50 miles WNW of Stockholm. It lies within one of the country’s largest industrial areas which has experienced a great deal of expansion.
6.174 Controlling Depth. The channels leading to the main sections of the harbour are dredged to 7⋅6 m. Deepest and longest berth is Nos 41–50 in Västra hamnen (6.183). Water level. The highest level usually occurs with spring floods during April and May and the lowest level occurs during July and August, but low levels may occur in winter. Strong S winds may raise the level 0⋅1 m above mean level and strong N winds lower the level by the same amount. Density of water: 1⋅000 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled . A vessel of 10 400 dwt with a draught of 6⋅8 m has used the port. The harbour may be obstructed by ice from January to March but is normally kept open to navigation by the use of icebreaking tugs.
Arrival information 1
Function 1
6.173 Malarhamnar AB, Seglargatan 3, SE 721 32 Västerås, Sweden. Website: www.malarhamnar.se E-Mail:
[email protected]
6.170 The port is the largest inland harbour in Sweden with excellent modern facilities and equipment which serve a variety of small to medium-sized vessels carrying bulk, oil,
250
6.175 Port radio. Västerås Hamnradio (Västerås Harbour Radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Anchorage may be obtained in the NW part of Västeråsfjärden, N or NW of Kattskär (59°35′⋅2N, 16°32′⋅5E), in depths of about 7 and 10 m respectively, clay. A submarine pipeline which extends NNW from the NW tip of the islet should be avoided. It follows the line of the shoal water.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
2
Pilotage. See 6.3 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Tug with icebreaking capacity available.
ENE of a buoy (port hand), marking the 10 m contour ESE of Kattskär, thence: To a position 4 cables NE of Kattskär and 6 cables SSE of Västerås Light where a channel branches W to Oljehamnen and Västra hamnen.
Harbour
Alternative approach
General layout 1
2
6.176 The harbour area, which lies around the head of Västeråsfjärden, consists of four commercial basins and three small craft harbours: Västra hamnen, which handles bulk, oil, container and general cargoes, lies on the NW side and is reached through a channel, authorised for a draught of 6⋅8 m, branching W from the main approach from S. Östra hamnen, which contains the ferry terminal, also handles bulk grain and general cargoes. It lies at the N head of the bay, about 1 mile NE of Oljehamnen, and is reached through the main entrance channel from S, authorised for a draught of 6⋅8 m. Kraftverkshamnen, the power station harbour, lies 3 cables E of Östra hamnen. It is entered through a dredged channel leading NNE off the main channel NNW of Amundsgrundet, an islet and shoal area 6 cables NE of Kattskär. Operations in Kraftverkshamnen are discontinued (2001) and the channel is closed to shipping.
1
Östra hamnen 1
2
Landmarks 6.177 1
Water tower (59°36′⋅6N, 16°31′⋅8E) in town. Chimney (red light) (59°35′⋅5N, 16°30′⋅7E), close W of Västra hamnen. A second chimney (red light) stands 1½ cables SSE.
1
Approach 1
2
3
4
6.178 From a position about 1 cable S of Stora Sandskär Light (59°31′⋅7N, 16°35′⋅3E) (6.153), the track, shown on the chart, marked by lights, buoys and light-buoys, leads 4 miles generally NNW through the fairway to the harbour, passing (with positions from Stora Sandskär Light): ENE of a light-buoy (port hand) (5 cables NNW), marking the E side of a shoal area with a least depth of 3 m over it, thence: Between Almö-Lindö (1½ miles N) and the mainland 1 mile W. The channel limits are marked on each side by buoys (lateral). By night the white sector (338°–342°), ahead, of Hovaren Light, and the white sector (149°–159°), astern, of Stora Sandskär Light, mark this channel. Thence: ENE of Hovaren Light (white hut, red band) (3 miles NNW), displayed from a shoal area W of the fairway. A buoy (port hand), 2 cables SSE, marks the channel. By night the white sector (350°–354½°), ahead, of Västerås Light (white hut, red band, floodlit), displayed from the head of a curved breakwater on the W side of the entrance to Östra hamnen, marks the latter part of the fairway. Thence: WSW of Västra Holmen Light (white tower, green band), displayed from the SW side of the islet (3 miles NNW). By night the white sector (152°–171°), astern, of the light marks the last stretch of this fairway. Thence:
6.180 From a position 4 cables NE of Kattskär and 6 cables SSE of Västerås Light the track continues 6 cables NNW to Östra hamnen entrance through a channel, marked at its E and W dredged limits by buoys (lateral). Within Östra hamnen the limit of the dredged area on the E side is marked by buoys (starboard hand). Lights in line: Front lights (red triangle point up, yellow stripe, on mast), displayed from the head of the basin. Rear lights (similar structure, triangle point down) (14 and 41 m NE of front lights), respectively. On the W side the lights show red and on the E side green. In line bearing 030°, each pair of lights indicate the limits of the dredged channel through the basin.
Oljehamnen and Västra hamnen
Directions for entering harbour (continued from 6.153)
6.179 Local knowledge is required. From a position in the main channel 1 mile WNW of Fröholmen Light (59°31′⋅7N, 16°40′⋅6E), the track, shown on the chart, marked in its narrow stretches by buoys (lateral) and authorised for a draught of 3⋅8 m, leads 4 miles NW to the harbour. The channel passes between Almö-Lindö (6.178) and Södra Björnö, 5 cables E, thence across Västeråsfjärden and between Västra Holmen (59°34′⋅7N, 16°33′⋅5E) and Elba, close NE.
2
3
6.181 From a position 4 cables NE of Kattskär and 6 cables SSE of Västerås Light the track to Oljehamnen and Västra hamnen continues 8 cables W to the entrance, with Västerås djuphamn Light, displayed from the silo near the NE end of Västra hamnen, ahead bearing about 275°, and by night in the white sector (268°–282°) of this light. The N and S limits of the dredged area at the entrance are indicated by buoys and light-buoys and in addition, by the following lights in line: Front lights (red triangles points up, yellow stripe, on mast), displayed from the quay at the NE end of Västra hamnen. Rear lights (similar structures, triangles points down) (40 m WSW and 94 m WNW from front lights), respectively. The N pair, showing green lights, in line bearing 260½°, indicate the N limit. The S pair, showing red lights, in line bearing 279°, indicate the S limit. Within the basins the dredged limits are marked by buoys (lateral). In Västra hamnen the E limit of the dredged channel is indicated by lights in line bearing 222°: Front light (red triangle point up, yellow stripe, on mast), displayed from the SW end of the quay. Rear light (similar structure, triangle point down) (90 m SW of front light).
Kraftverkshamnen 1
251
6.182 From a position about 2½ cables W of Amundsgrundet (6.176), marked off its NW side by a buoy (starboard hand), the channel to Kraftverkshamnen, branches NNE, thence it leads about 8 cables to the harbour.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Berths 1
2
3
6.183 Västra hamnen. Djuphamnskajen, at the NE end of the basin, is a multi-purpose berth, with a length of 40 m and a depth alongside of 7⋅6 m, having breasting dolphins off each end. It is fitted with a conveyor system for bulk handling and also handles oil products. The remainder of the basin contains a total of 905 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 7⋅4 to 7⋅6 m. The longest section is Nos 41–50 with a length of 665 m. Oljehamnen contains a total of 125 m of berthing space with a depths alongside of 6⋅0 to 7⋅6 m. Östra hamnen. The small harbour contained by the curved breakwater at the SW end of the basin contains a total of 130 m of berthing space for ferry traffic with depths of 4⋅0 to 4⋅5 m alongside. It also contains another 320 m of berthing space with depths of 3 to 5 m alongside, for the use of lighters and official small craft. The main commercial area of the basin contains a total of 790 m of berthing space with depths alongside between 5⋅0 and 7⋅6 m. This includes Lillåkajen, on the E side which has a length of 120 m and a depth alongside of 7⋅6 m. Kraftverkshamnnen has 210 m of berthing space with a depth of 5⋅5 m. Lögarängshamnen, Mälarparkshamnen and Tegeludden contain berths suitable for small craft.
Kvicksundbron 1
2
6.186 Kvicksundbron (59°27′⋅2N, 16°19′⋅2E) is a combined road and rail bascule bridge spanning the channel between the S end of Nyckelön and the mainland. When closed it has a vertical clearance of 4⋅5 m over a navigable width of 41 m. Lights are displayed from each end of the fenders marking the limits of the channel through the bridge on each side. Operation and signals. Requests for opening should be made in advance, by VHF channel 68 direct to the bridge control, or by giving the sound signal of two short blasts followed by one prolonged blast, to ensure that there is to be an opening at the expected passage time. Confirmation of the opening request must be made 8 minutes before arrival at the bridge. In general the bridge will open at all times after prior request. Passage is regulated by light signals (Diagram 6.186) displayed from the bridge.
Port services 1
6.184 Repairs. Engineering repair workshop available. Facilities. Deratting and issue of certificates; hospital; oily waste disposal available; custom house. Supplies. Fuel oil of all types; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Nearest international airport Arlanda, Stockholm, 90 km distant. Domestic airport at Hässlö, 5 km SE of town. Rescue. Two fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at Västerås.
VÄSTERÅS TO KÖPING General information Charts 3141, 3145
Route 1
2
6.185 From a position on the W side of Ridöfjärden, about 5 miles SSE of Västerås, the route leads about 17 miles through the fairway to Köping entrance channel. The initial stretch leads 4 miles SSW and 6½ miles WSW to Kvicksund (59°27′N, 16°19′E) passing W of Ridön (59°31′N, 16°37′E), through Blacken, N of Torshällahuvud (59°27′⋅6N, 16°27′⋅5E) and thence to Kvicksund, the narrow passage S of Nyckelön, spanned by a bridge. From Kvicksund the W part of Mälaren is largely obstructed by extensive shoal areas and islets in the central part. From the bridge the track leads about 6 miles generally W, passing N of the shoals, thence to the entrance channel at Broken (59°27′⋅5N, 16°07′⋅8E), passing N of Espholmen (2½ miles WSW of the bridge), and N of Skylgrund (59°27′⋅7N, 16°11′⋅5E). An alternative channel, authorised for a draught of 2⋅0 m leads S of the shoals.
Kvicksundbron − signals (6.186) 3
If two vessels are approaching at the same time the E-bound vessel has precedence for passage through the bridge. For further details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Speed is restricted to 5 kn in the channel through the bridge.
Natural conditions 1
252
6.187 Current. The current in Kvicksund (59°27′N, 16°19′E) is dependent on the wind and normally is of little effect. However, with heavy spring floods, an E-going stream of up to about 4 kn may be experienced.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Ice. The inner part of the Mälaren always freezes in winter, and the formation of very compact ice-pack can occur. Freezing normally starts in December and may last until April.
4
Directions (continued from 6.153) Chart 3141
Stora Sandskär to Kvicksund 1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
6.188 From a position 5 cables E of Stora Sandskär Light (59°31′⋅8N, 16°35′⋅3E) (6.153), the track, marked by lights, buoys and light-buoys (lateral), leads initially 4 miles SSE to Stavskallen, passing (with positions from Flaten Light (59°30′⋅7N, 16°35′⋅2E)): WSW of a buoy (port hand) (3 cables NE), marking the edge of the coastal bank NW of Ridön. By night the white sector (187°–212°) of Flaten Light partially marks the fairway. Thence: Between Flaten and Sötskär, 1½ cables SE, where the channel is marked by Sötskär Light-buoy (port hand) (1 cable ESE). Another buoy (port hand) moored ¾ cable SSW, marks the channel. A buoy (starboard hand), 2 cables SSW of Flaten Light, marks the W side of the channel. Thence: SE of Högholm Light (6 cables SSW), thence: NW of Högholmsgrund Light-buoy (port hand), 1½ cables SSE of Högholm Light, marking the E side of the channel, NW of Högholmsskär. Thence: Leading lights: Front light. Högholm (white hut, green band), displayed from the E side of the islet. Rear light. Flaten (white hut, green band) (exhibited from the E side of the islet, 6 cables NNE of front light). The alignment (028°), astern, of these lights leads about 1¾ miles SSW through Blacken to a position 7 cables N of Lilla Blackhäll, a small islet about 2½ miles SSE of Högholm Light, passing SE of a 4⋅5 m patch, marked by a buoy (starboard hand), 3½ cables SSW of Högholm Light. By night this part of the fairway is marked by the white sector (024°–036°), astern, of this light. Thence the track turns SW and leads for 1 mile to a position 1¾ cables S of Stavskallen Light (white tower, green band) (59°28′⋅3N, 16°31′⋅5E), displayed from a rock SE of Stora Jungfrun. 6.189 Thence the track leads 6½ miles WSW to Kvicksund, passing (with positions from Torshälla Light (red hut, white roof, white foundation, 7 m in height) (59°27′⋅6N, 16°28′⋅2E), displayed from the S side of the fairway): Either side of a 7⋅6 m patch (about 1¼ miles ENE), marked by a light-buoy (isolated danger), thence: SSE of Fläskåsen (5 cables NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NNW of Torshälla Light, thence: SSE of Månskulle (5 cables NW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NNW of a rock with a depth of 4⋅2 m over it (1 mile W), marked by a buoy (port hand). Another buoy (port hand), 3 cables WSW, marks a rock awash. Thence: NNW of Österbyklack Light-buoy (port hand) (1¾ miles W), marking a 3⋅7 m patch. By night the white sector (257½°–261°), ahead, of Kattskär Light marks the fairway W of this buoy. Thence:
5
6
SSE of Kumlen (3 miles W), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SSE of a light-buoy (starboard hand) (3 miles W), marking the N side of the channel between Vargholmen and the mainland, close S. Another buoy (port hand), 1½ cables SW, marks the S side of the channel. Thence: S of a beacon (floodlit), standing on the S side of Vargholmen, thence: N of Kattskär Light (white hut, red band) (3½ miles W), displayed from an islet S of the fairway, thence: N of a buoy (port hand), 2 cables W of Kattskär Light, marking a 2⋅2 m shoal, thence: SSE of Flintasten, 1 mile W of Kattskär Light, marked on its SE side by a buoy (starboard hand), and: NNW of a beacon (white, floodlit), standing on an islet 3 cables E of Kvicksundbron. A buoy (port hand), close N, marks the S side of the fairway. By night the white sector (250°–261°), ahead, of Kvicksund Östra Light (lantern on post), displayed from the S fendering on the E side of the bridge, marks the latter part of the fairway to the bridge. Thence to the passage through Kvicksundbron. Chart 3145
Kvicksund to Köping 1
2
3
4
5
6
253
6.190 Kvicksund to Östra Torpet. From the passage through the bridge the main track leads initially 2½ miles WSW and 1½ miles NW to Östra Torpet through the fairway, marked by lights, buoys and light-buoys, passing (with positions from Småholm Light (59°27′⋅1N, 16°16′⋅9E)): N of a beacon (white, floodlit) (8½ cables E), standing on Pottskär. Buoys (lateral), close NNE and 1 cable NNW respectively, mark the sides of the channel. By night the white sector (080°–087°), astern, of Kvicksund Västra Light marks the fairway W of the bridge. Thence: S of Gösholms landgrund Light-buoy (starboard hand) (5½ cables ENE), marking the N side of the channel, thence: NNW of Småholm Light (white tower, red band on pedestal), displayed from the N side of the islet, about 1 mile WSW of the bridge, and to the alignment of: Leading lights: Front light. Småholm Light (59°27′⋅1N, 16°16′⋅9E). Rear light. Kvicksund Västra (daymark on white framework tower) (displayed close E of the N side of the bridge, 2150 m ENE from front light). The alignment 083½°, astern, of these leading lights, leads through the buoyed channel W of Småholm Light to a position about 1¼ cables N of Espholmen Light (white tower, red band) (59°26′⋅8N, 16°14′⋅6E), displayed from a headland S of the fairway where the track turns NW. An alternative channel branches off NW of Espholmen to pass S of the central area of shoals and thence to the entrance channel. Lights in line: Front light. Brobygrund (red daymark on framework tower), displayed from a shoal, 2 miles WSW of the bridge. Rear light. Lövnäsudde (red triangle point down, white stripe on framework mast) (9 cables WSW of front light), displayed from a headland.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
7
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
4
In addition to the leading lights, the above lights in line bearing 253°, ahead, clear S of a rock, with a swept depth of 7⋅6 m, lying in the middle of the fairway 4½ cables W of Småholm Light. The track then passes NNW of Brobygrund Light and S of Galtryggen Light-buoy (starboard hand), 2¼ cables WNW, marking the N side of the channel. 6.191 Thence the track continues NW, passing (with positions from Espholmen Light (59°26′⋅8N, 16°14′⋅6E), and by night in the white sector (127°–130°), astern, of this light): SW of a buoy (starboard hand) (4 cables NNW), marking the channel, thence: SW of a buoy (starboard hand) (1 mile NW), marking the channel, thence: SW of Tallklubben Light (1¼ miles NW) (6.193), and by night into the white sector (305°–314°), ahead, of Östra Torpet Light, thence: SW of Västra Tallklubben N Light-buoy (starboard hand) (about 1½ miles NW), marking the channel S of Stora Aspholmen, thence: NE of Sjöboda Light-buoy (port hand) (about 1¾ miles NW) and another buoy (port hand), close SE, marking the W side of the channel, thence: To a position about 2 cables SE of Östra Torpet Light (white hut, green band on pedestal), displayed from the mainland 8 cables NW of Tallklubben Light. Useful mark: Radio mast (59°30′⋅1N, 16°16′⋅1E), standing on Jordmarken. 6.192 Other aid to navigation: Racon. Fiskarstenarna Beacon (59°27′⋅3N, 16°09′⋅0E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2. 6.193 Östra Torpet to Broken. From Östra Torpet the main track leads about 6 cables SW and 1½ miles WSW to the mouth of the entrance channel S of Broken (6.185). Sandholmen Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, red stripe on white tower) (59°28′⋅3N, 16°12′⋅9E), displayed from the SW side of a peninsula on the mainland. Rear light (red square, white stripe on mast) (300 m NE of front light). The alignment (053°), astern, of these lights leads SW through a narrow stretch of the channel, marked on each side by buoys and light-buoys (lateral), passing: NW of Skylgrund Light (white tower, black base), displayed from a rock SE of the channel, 3 cables SSW of Östra Torpet Light, thence: NW of Gliparna Light, 2 cables farther SSW, thence: To a position 6 cables SW of Östra Torpet Light, and on to the alignment of: Leading lights: Front light. Gliparna (white lantern, red band on white base), displayed from the W side of the islet, 2 cables SW of Skylgrund Light. Rear light. Tallklubben (red and white rectangle on framework tower) (9 cables ENE of front light). The alignment (081°), astern, of these lights leads WSW through the narrow channel, marked on each side by buoys, light-buoys and beacons, to a position in the mouth of the entrance channel about 2½ cables S of Broken, passing (with positions from Gliparna Light): NNW of Grekens grund Light-buoy (4 cables WSW), thence:
5
6
7
1
2
3
SSE of Vissjan (6 cables W), a shoal on which stands a beacon, thence: NNW of Flintagrundet (8 cables WSW), a shoal patch marked by a light-buoy (port hand). By night the channel WSW is marked by the white sector (260½°–262°) of Botten Light (white tower), displayed from the mainland (3¼ miles WSW). Thence: NNW of Bogen Light (white tower, black base), standing on a rock, close NW of Bogstenen (9 cables SW), thence: NNW of Fiskarstenarna Beacon (pole, black and white) (about 1¼ miles WSW), thence: Between Fiskarstenarna N and Fiskarstenarna S Light-buoys (lateral) (about 1½ miles WSW), thence: To the mouth of Köping entrance channel, marked on the N side by Broken Ö Light-buoy (starboard hand) and another buoy (starboard hand), close E, and on the S side by Broken V Light-buoy (port hand). 6.194 Alternative channel. From a position in the main channel 6 cables NW of Espholmen Light (59°26′⋅8N, 16°14′⋅6E), an alternative track leads 2 miles WSW and 1¼ miles NW to Köping entrance channel. The initial 2 miles of channel through the shoals is marked on each side by buoys (lateral) and by night initially in the white sector (250°–253°) of Torpagrund Light (white tower, green band) (59°26′⋅6N, 16°10′⋅1E), displayed from a shoal, 2¼ miles W of Espholmen Light. The track passes (with positions from Torpagrund Light): SSE of Flötena (1¼ miles ENE), a shoal area, and: NNW of Farfarsberget (1 mile ENE), a rocky shoal, thence: S of Torpagrund Light, and: N of Sandudden Light (red square, white stripe on mast), displayed from the mainland (5 cables S). Thence the track turns NW, leading to the entrance channel on the alignment (311½°) of Köping Leading Lights (6.204), passing SW of Bogen Light, 6 cables NW of Torpagrund Light. (Directions for Köping continue at 6.204)
KÖPING General information Chart 3145 with plan of Köping
Position 1
6.195 Köping (59°30′N, 16°01′E) is situated on the extreme W side of Mälaren, about 60 miles W of Stockholm, near the mouth of Köpingsån. The town has a historic reputation as a commercial centre and lies within an important grain producing region.
Function 1
2
254
6.196 The port is a well-sheltered, medium-sized commercial harbour serving the local industrial, and surrounding regional farming communities. It has excellent modern facilities and equipment to handle most types of vessel, including bulk carriers, tankers, container and general cargo. Principal exports include grain, iron goods, fertilisers, piece goods, cement and timber products. Imports include oil products, mineral oils, coal, pig iron, steel scrap, limestone and general cargo. The population is about 22 000.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
Hamnen, mainly handling grain. The inner part of this basin contains a small craft harbour.
Approach and entry 1
6.197 The port is approached via channels through Mälaren, from Södertälje or Stockholm. It is entered through a fairway via a dredged and swept entrance channel, authorised for a draught of 6⋅8 m, marked by buoys (lateral), on the alignment of leading lights, leading NW to the harbour area.
Landmarks 6.203 1
Traffic 1
6.198 In 2003 a total of 482 vessels of 1.8 million dwt used the port.
Directions for entering harbour
Port Authority 1
6.199 Mälarhamnar AB, Gamla Hamnvagen SE−731 36 Koping, Sweden. Website: www.malarhamnar.se E-Mail:
[email protected]
Limiting conditions 1
2
6.200 Controlling depth in the dredged and swept entrance channel to the outer harbour is 7⋅6 m over a bottom width of 60 m. Vertical clearance. An overhead power cable, supported by pylons, the positions of which may be seen on the chart, with a vertical clearance of 35 m, spans the harbour in the outer part of Djuphamnen. Deepest and longest berth is section Nos 1–4 on Djuphamnskajen (6.207). Density of water: 1⋅000 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled. A vessel of 8 800 dwt with a draught of 6⋅8 m has been handled. Ice. The harbour is open to navigation throughout the year using icebreaking tugs in the winter months when ice may obstruct the harbour.
1
2
3
1
Arrival information 1
2
6.201 Port radio. Köping Hamnradio (Köping Harbour Radio). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Anchorage may be obtained off Broken V Light-buoy (6.193), E of the mouth of the entrance channel, in depths of about 8 m, clay. Pilotage. See 6.3 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Tug with icebreaking capacity available. Speed is restricted to 7 kn in the channel from Linlandet to the outer harbour, and a 5 kn restriction applies within the harbour, to the bridges at the inner end of Gamla Hamnen.
1
1
General layout 6.202 The harbour area, which lies on both banks of the river, consists of an outer basin with a turning area, containing the oil harbour. The turning area lies immediately SE of the oil jetty and the NE limit of the dredged area is marked by buoys (starboard hand). From the turning area the channel leads WNW to the central area containing Djuphamnen, handling bulk, general and container cargoes, thence the channel leads W to the inner harbour basin, Gamla
(continued from 6.194) 6.204 Köping Leading Lights: Front light (dolphin) (59°29′⋅3N, 16°03′⋅2E), displayed from the W side of the channel. Rear light (orange rectangle on white mast) (1510 m NW of front light), displayed from the W bank of the river. From a position 2½ cables S of Broken (59°27′⋅5N, 16°07′⋅8E), between the outer light-buoys, the alignment (311½°) of the leading lights leads 3¼ miles NW through the centre of the entrance channel, marked by pairs of named light-buoys, pairs of buoys, and at the NW end by named and numbered light-buoys (all lateral), to enter the outer basin on passing Köping 3 Light-buoy (starboard hand). The channel through the fairway passes NE of Linlandet, an islet 1¼ miles NW of Broken, and NE of Runskär, a long narrow islet, 7 cables farther NW. 6.205 Useful marks: A number of floodlit beacons, the positions of which may be seen on the plan, stand on each river bank within the central part of the harbour. One pair, close NW of the oil jetty, are in line and may be used to assist passage through the harbour.
Berths
Harbour
1
Silo (red light) (59°30′⋅1N, 16°02′⋅0E) and overhead conveyor running SSW to Nedre Silokajen. Chimney at cement works, 2 cables SW of silo. Water tower, standing 9½ cables NW of silo. Silos, standing in the central part of Övre Silokajen on the N side of the inner harbour basin.
1
255
6.206 Outer basin. The oil pier lies on the NE side of the basin. It consists of a detached jetty, connected to the shore at its N end, with breasting dolphins connected to the jetty by bridges extending from each end. It has berths on each side; the outer has a length of 65 m and a depth alongside of 7⋅6 m; the inner berth has the same length with a depth alongside of 5⋅8 m. The total length, including dolphins, is about 150 m. 6.207 Djuphamnen. Nedre Silokajen, serving a grain storage facility, lies on the N bank at the E side of the basin. It has a length of 80 m and a depth alongside of 7⋅6 m. On the S bank the cement works is served by two berths; the quay has a length of 110 m and a depth alongside of 7⋅6 m; the detached pier, close NW, has a length of 50 m and the same depth alongside. Djuphamnskajen lie close NW of the cement works and has a total of 605 m of berthing space with depths of 6⋅2 to 7⋅6 m alongside. The longest section, Nos 1–4, is 325 m long with depths alongside of 7⋅6 m. 6.208 Gamla Hamnen, the old inner harbour, has 194 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 4⋅5 m which serves a grain storage facility on the N bank at the outer part of the basin. The small craft harbour lies in the inner part of Gamla Hamnen, immediately S of the bridges spanning the river
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 6
in the S part of the town. There are numerous berths on the S side with depths of about 3⋅6 m and a few berths on the N bank with the same depths.
workshops available; diver available. Other facilities. Hospital; chemist; oily waste disposal available; garbage disposal. Supplies. Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Nearest domestic airport Hässlö, Västerås, 50 km distant. Nearest international airport Arlanda, Stockholm, 160 km distant.
Port services 1
6.209 Repairs. Minor mechanical and electrical repair
256
Home
Contents
Index NOTES
257
Home
Contents
Index
Chapter 7 - Stockholms Skärgård from Landsort to Simpnäsklubb 18°
60°
19°
30´
3169
20°
30´
60°
3163 Simpnäsklubb Arholma
7.2
58
3163
Norrtälje 7.353
7.300 Kapellskär
Söderarm
3127
7.2
3163
57
Svenska Björn 2222 2337
30´
Bogskär
30´
3155 3156
2297
6
24
7.
Stockholm 7.190 3114
Sandhamn Entrance 7.129
3157
Almagrundet 3143
3143
59° N yn ä
59°
3144
sh
am 7. n 57
20 7.
44
7.
3143
71 7.
7.
31
3170 Landsort 3191
3147
30´
30´ 2361
2223
0205
18°
30´
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
258
20°
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 7 STOCKHOLMS SKÄRGÅRD FROM LANDSORT TO SIMPNÄSKLUBB
GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2362, 2297
Depth reductions
Scope of the chapter 1
2
3
7.1 In this chapter are described the waters of Stockholms Skärgård, an area of numerous islands, islets, rocks and shoals, extending in some parts as much as 30 miles from the coast, which lies between Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E) and Simpnäsklubb, 79 miles NNE. The area has few natural landmarks that can be identified from seaward. The description includes the coastal passages around the archipelago, the four principal entrances to the archipelago, together with the channels leading from them to Stockholm, the ports of Nynäshamn (58°54′N, 17°57′E), Stockholm (59°20′N, 18°04′E), and Norrtälje (59°45′⋅5N, 18°43′⋅0E) and the minor harbours adjacent to the channels. It is divided into the following sections: Landsort to Sandhamn (7.16). Sandhamn to Stockholm (7.121). Sandhamn to Simpnäsklubb (7.242).
1
Pilotage 1
2
Entrances 1
2
3
4
5
7.2 The four principal entrances together with their draughts and distances from Stockholm are: Landsort Entrance (58°42′N, 17°52′E) (7.31); authorised draught 10⋅0 m; distance about 80 miles. The fairway passes through Mysingen (59°00′N, 18°16′E), thence through a seven mile stretch much obstructed by islets and shoals in the vicinity of Dalarö (59°08′N, 18°25′E), after which it leads through Jungfrufjärden (59°09′N, 18°33′E) and Nämdöfjärden (close NE) into Kanholmsfjärden (59°20′N, 18°47′E), where it joins the main channel from Sandhamn to Stockholm. Sandhamn Entrance (59°15′N, 19°02′E) (7.129); authorised draught 11⋅0 m; distance about 42 miles. This fairway is the one used most frequently by large vessels. The most difficult part of the fairway is that between Sandön (59°17′N, 18°55′E) and Skötkobben (close W). Söderarm Entrance (59°46′N, 19°25′E) (7.281); authorised draught 8⋅0 m; distance about 55 miles. The fairway leads through Furusund (59°40′N, 18°56′E) and joins the main channel from Sandhamn in Saxarfjärden (59°26′N, 18°28′E). Arholma Entrance (59°54′N, 19°05′E) (7.327); authorised draught 7⋅0 m; distance about 55 miles. The fairway leads about 10 miles S to Granhamnsfjärden, where it joins the Söderarm fairway leading through Furusund. Caution. In places the channels through the archipelago are extremely narrow and vigilance must be exercised to keep the vessel in the fairway at all times. Certain channels are reserved for one-way traffic and others for dense traffic conditions. In the latter case alternative routes are provided, but in both cases notice boards with appropriate instructions are displayed. Concentrations of pleasure craft can make navigation difficult in the summer months.
7.3 In the S part of this area depths are subject to an annual decrease of about 0⋅35 cm and in the N part about 0⋅50 cm. This reduction is due to the general land rise throughout N Scandinavia. For further information see 1.33.
3
7.4 The area is served by two pilot stations: Mälaren/Landsort Pilot Station which provides pilotage for the Landsort Entrance and Nynäshamn. Stockholm Pilot Station which provides pilotage for the Sandhamn, Söderarm and Arholma Entrances and associated channels in the area between 59°00′N and 60°00′N. The pilot ordering centre is Stockholm VTS. Pilotage, which is available 24 hours, is compulsory for the following categories of vessels: All Category 1 vessels. Category 2 vessels of 70 m length, 14 m beam, and 4⋅5 m draught and over. Category 3 vessels of 70 m length, 14 m beam, and 4⋅5 m draught and over. For details of vessel categories see 1.51. In certain pilot channels to and from Gustavsberg (59°20′N, 18°23′E) and between Landsort and Nynäshamn the requirements for Category 2 and 3 vessels are varied. For further information see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Details of pilot boarding positions are given in the relevant parts of the text.
Vessel Traffic Service 1
2
3
4
259
7.5 Two Traffic Reporting and Information systems, both of which are mandatory, are in force in the channels through Stockholms Skärgård. The S part of the area falls within Mälaren-Landsort Traffic Information Area which includes the Landsort-Södertälje fairway, Mälaren, Nynäshamn and the Landsort Entrance as far as Stora Rotholmen (59°04′N, 18°19′E) with its NE limit at Hammarbyslussen at Stockholm. It is controlled from Södertälje Vessel Traffic Service (59°11′⋅5N, 17°39′⋅5E). Vessels intending to transit the Södertälje Kanal are required to participate in the Reporting System covering the Kanal area which includes Linasundet, at its N end. The N part falls within the Stockholm Vessel Traffic Service Area which extends N from Stora Rotholmen to Simpnäsklubb (59°54′N, 19°05′E) and includes the Sandhamn, Söderarm and Arholma Entrances. The reports are co-ordinated by Stockholm VTS. In each system the regulations to be observed apply to the following vessels: 1. Vessels over 300 grt. 2. Vessels over 50 m in length. 3. Towing vessels where the length, including the tow, is greater than 50 m. Vessels which are not obliged to report but which are fitted with VHF should maintain a continuous listening
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
watch on channel 68 (Mälaren/Landsort), or VHF channel 73 (Stockholm). For full details of the areas covered, the information required and reporting points, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
3
4
Recommended tracks 1
7.6 Figures on recommended tracks on the charts indicate the maximum permitted draught of vessels (operating with pilotage assistance) for which the tracks are authorised at MSL. For further information see 1.12.
Traffic regulations 1
1
7.7 Speed restrictions. In general, speed in the main channels is restricted to a maximum of 12 kn, though local ferries and regular services to Finland may be permitted a speed of 15 kn. Through some of the narrow stretches and in many other parts of the archipelago, as well as in the port of Stockholm, speed is further restricted. The maximum permitted speeds are posted on boards or on buoys and piles. In cases where two speeds appear on a board, the higher value is the maximum permitted speed for vessels with a maximum displacement of 200 nrt. All other vessels must keep within the lower notified speed. Speed limits, where known, are given in the relevant parts of the text. 7.8 Restricted and semi-restricted areas exist in the entrances to all the main channels through the archipelago. They are shown on the charts and are mentioned in the relevant parts of the text. Vessels must keep to the pilotage channels in these areas. For further information and for the regulations in force see 1.87.
Minefields 1
5
6
Ice. The archipelago is usually frozen over from December to March. The sea outside the area is generally free of ice, but with onshore winds drift ice may become a problem. The principal entrances and channels are kept open by icebreakers. When navigating in the inner channels of the archipelago in winter, when crossable ice is present or forming, vessels must keep within the existing ice channels and must not unnecessarily break up the ice. Information regarding ice channels and their navigational restrictions is broadcast through coast radio stations and may also be obtained through Stockholm VTS. Details of dates when restrictions are in force are also published in weekly Swedish Notices to Mariners. In ice conditions, when ice channels are made in specific channels, the TSS within the Stockholm sea traffic area ceases to apply and certain local regulations and recommendations come into force when decided by the head of Stockholm sea traffic area. Details of these regulations and recommendations may be obtained from Stockholm VTS. Ice-bridges are periodically established in channels within the archipelago and are mentioned in the relevant part of the text. See also 1.63 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3 (1). Water levels. The water level may vary as much as 1 m above or below MSL. Prolonged winds from N and NE usually raise the level of the water, whilst winds of long duration from E and SE usually cause it to fall. However, there are exceptions to this rule at several places.
Measured distance 1
7.11 A measured distance is laid down in Mysingen (59°00′N, 18°16′E) (7.40).
Submarine cables and pipelines 1
7.9 Permanent defensive minefields are laid in the fairway within the principal entrances to the archipelago. They are shown on the charts and are mentioned under the appropriate section in the text. Anchoring, fishing and underwater operations are prohibited within these areas. For further information see 1.8.
7.12 A large number of submarine power cables and pipelines are laid in, and across, the channels in Stockholms Skärgård. Their positions are indicated on the charts and in many cases their landing places are marked by beacons or boards. See 1.43. Mariners are cautioned against anchoring on, or in the vicinity of, such cables and pipelines. For further information see 1.71.
Pollution Natural conditions 1
2
7.10 Current. The outflowing current of Baltic Sea runs from Gulf of Bothnia through Ålands Hav in a generally SE direction, thence in a SW direction from Simpnäsklubb, through Stockholms Skärgård, and passing Landsort. At times it attains a rate of 2 kn. Frequently, however, the current near the archipelago, and in the channels, will be found setting in a different direction, sometimes in opposition to the current farther seaward. In the vicinity of Svenska Högarna (59°27′N, 19°30′E) vessels are often set in a W direction when approaching the skerries. At a position 4 miles WNW of Svenska Björn Light (59°32′⋅9N, 20°01′⋅4E) the current has been observed to set W towards the skerries at a rate of 3 kn, especially before gales from N. For general remarks on currents see 1.244.
1
7.13 Due to the non-tidal nature of these waters the Swedish authorities are rigorous in the application of anti-pollution regulations. See 1.72.
Customs stations 1
7.14 There are stations at: Nynäshamn (58°54′N, 17°57′E) (7.57). Stockholm (59°20′N, 18°04′E) (7.190). Kapellskär (59°43′N, 19°04′E) (7.300).
Rescue 1
260
7.15 Distress, search and rescue services are controlled by the MRCC located at Göteborg. A MRSC is located at Stockholm. For further information on distress and rescue see 1.156 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
LANDSORT TO SANDHAMN COASTAL PASSAGE
GENERAL INFORMATION
General information Charts 2362, 3143, 3144
Charts 2362, 3144
Routes 1
2
7.16 This section describes the coastal route from Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E) to the Sandhamn Entrance (59°15′N, 19°02′E), the main route from Landsort to Kanholmsfjärden (59°20′N, 18°47′E) via Mysingen (59°00′N, 18°16′E) and Dalarö (59°08′N, 18°25′E), the routes N from Jungfrufjärden (59°09′N, 18°33′E) and the port of Nynäshamn (58°54′N, 17°57′E) with its approaches. It is arranged as follows: Coastal route (7.20). Landsort Entrance to Mysingen (7.31). Nynäshamn and approaches (7.57). Mysingen to Dalarö (7.82). Dalarö to Kanholmsfjärden, including routes N from Jungfrufjärden (7.103).
Route 1
Topography 1
2
Restricted areas 1
2
3
7.17 There are three restricted areas in the vicinity of the Landsort Entrance and one on the S side of Jungfrufjärden, the boundaries of which are shown on the charts: Landsort Restricted Area (58°47′N, 18°00′E), which extends NE from the vicinity of Landsort to the N point of Nåttarö (58°53′N, 18°08′E). Muskö Restricted Area (59°02′N, 18°07′E), which encloses the island and the waters W to the mainland. Huvudskär Restricted Area (58°59′N, 18°29′E), which extends WNW from Huvudskär to the N point of Utö (58°57′N, 18°15′E) and the S part of Ornö (59°05′N, 18°26′E). Mörtö-Bunsön Restricted Area, bounded N by Mörtö-Bunsön (59°08′N, 18°35′E) and S by Kvarnön (2 miles SSW). The area between the Landsort, Muskö and Huvudskär Restricted Areas is known as the Utö Semi-restricted Area. For further information see 7.8 and 1.87.
2
7.18 Permanent defensive minefields, the limits of which are shown on the charts, are laid in the following areas: Across Landsort Entrance in the vicinity of Mällsten (58°51′N, 18°02′E), extending about 1 mile N and about between 1½ and 2 miles S from the island. Between the N end of Utö (58°57′N, 18°15′E) and the S end of Ornö (2 miles NE). In the vicinity of Vettskär between Gålön (59°05′N, 18°18′E) and Ornö, about 1 mile SE. Anchoring, fishing and diving are prohibited in these areas. For further details see 1.8.
1
7.19 The Swedish Sea Rescue Association has fully equipped rescue craft stationed at the following location: The island of Ornö (59°05′N, 18°26′E) (7.30). See also 1.156.
7.22 Anchoring and trawling are prohibited within an area, approximately 1 mile square, the centre of which lies 2 cables SE of Skallen (58°57′N, 18°21′E), an islet off the SE coast of Utö. Scientific instruments and submarine cables are laid within the area. Mariners are cautioned against fishing in the vicinity of a dumping ground for explosives which lies 15½ miles ESE of Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E).
Utö Firing Practice Area 1
7.23 An extensive area, shown on the chart, lies SE of Utö, and is designated a firing practice area. Inside this is a smaller area of radius 13 miles from Utö Firing Range Light (lantern on building, elevation 69 m) (58°57′N, 18°16′E), bounded N by a line of bearing 097° from the light and W by a line of bearing 194° from the light, which is periodically closed to shipping due to firing exercises. For further information see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 3 (1).
Principal marks 1
Rescue 1
7.21 Between the Landsort Entrance and Huvudskär the only features of any note are the relatively high, wooded islands of Nåttarö (58°53′N, 18°08′E), Alö (58°55′N, 18°13′E) and Utö (close NE). The beaches of Nåttarö are dark, but on the seaward side of Utö there are high light-red cliffs. North of Huvudskär, the islands, numerous and small, are difficult to identify. Those nearest the route include Norsten (59°02′N, 18°39′E), a bare islet surmounted by a rocky hill of moderate height; Biskopsön, 4 miles farther NNE, a low wooded island; Söderö (59°08′⋅2N, 18°47′⋅8E), which has a moderately high hill on its SW side; and Långvikskär, 1 mile farther N. The latter two islets are almost barren but are inhabited.
Prohibited anchorage and fishing areas
Minefields 1
7.20 From the S approaches to Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E) the coastal route leads NE for about 50 miles to the Sandhamn Entrance. The route passes to seaward of shoals with depths over them of 12 m or less which lie as much as 7 miles off the outer islands. An extensive area where surveys are incomplete, shown on the chart, extends N from Huvudskär (58°58′N, 18°34′E).
2
261
7.24 Landmarks: Radio mast (58°49′⋅2N, 17°50′⋅7E) (5.171), on Torö. Landsort Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°52′E) (5.171). Utö Windmill (58°58′⋅0N, 18°19′⋅4E) on the N part of Utö. It is visible up to 25 miles on some bearings. A light (occasional) is displayed when firing practice is taking place. Radio mast (elevation 140 m) (59°01′N, 18°23′E), on the S part of Ornö. Huvudskär Lighthouse (white tower, black band, 15 m in height) (58°58′N, 18°34′E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Route Index Chartlet - Landsort to Simpnäsklubb 18°
60°
19°
30´
30´
60°
3163
7.3 27
Simpnäsklubb Arholma Tjärven
3163
81
Norrtälje 7.348
7.2
Kapellskär 7.300
Remmargrund Söderarm
3127 3163
Vidinge
4
30
7.
7.3
16
30´
26
2
2337
7.
7.156
7.316
Morsken
30´
3155 2297 3114
7.147
7.173 STOCKHOLM
3156
Sandhamn 7.129 Revengegrundet
3157
Fjärdhällen 3143 7.103
Almagrundet
Stora Rotholmen
7.
82
3143
59°
59°
3144
3170
7
Nynäshamn
.4 4
7.57
3143
7.5
7.49
7.3 1
7
Landsort
3147
3191
0205
18°
Longitude 19° East from Greenwich
30´
262
30´
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
3
4
Hut (House on chart 3143) (59°07′⋅3N, 18°34′⋅3E), on the summit near the S side of Mörtö-Bunsön. Almagrundet Lighthouse (black tower, red band, 30 m in height; floodlit) (59°09′N, 19°08′E). Revengegrundet Lighthouse (red tower, black base, 21 m in height; floodlit) 59°15′N, 19°01′E). Major lights: Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E) (5.171). Landsorts Bredgrund Light (58°44′N, 17°53′E) (5.171). Ormsta Aero Light (59°07′N, 18°08′E) (7.41). Almagrundet Light — as above. Revengegrundet Light — as above.
SE of Dämban (7¼ miles NE). Shoal water extending 1½ miles E from this shoal is marked at its extremity by a buoy (E cardinal). Depths of 17 m or less lie along the route between Huvudskär and Dämban. Thence: SE of Själberget (9½ miles NE), two rocks, the N and higher rock is 4 m high and grey in colour. Thence: NW of an ODAS light-buoy (special, conical) (18¼ miles E), surrounded by three special spar buoys, all within 2 cables of the light-buoy, thence: Clear of, depending on draught, a shoal area with a least charted depth of 14 m (18½ miles NE), in the approach to Almagrundet Lighthouse, thence: SE of Almagrundet Lighthouse (59°09′N, 19°08′E) (7.24), and to the Sandhamn Entrance.
6
7
Other aids to navigation 1
7.25 Racons: Landsorts Bredgrund Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°53′E). Almagrundet Lighthouse (59°09′N, 19°08′E). Revengegrundet Lighthouse (59°15′N, 19°01′E). Utkiken Tower (59°17′⋅2N, 19°54′⋅7E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Useful marks 7.27 1
Directions (continued from 5.173) 1
2
3
4
5
7.26 From a position about 9 miles S of Landsort (58°44′N, 17°52′E) the route leads NE for about 55 miles to Sandhamn Entrance approaches, passing (with positions from Huvudskär Light (58°58′N, 18°34′E)): SE of Stuphäll (24½ miles SW), a rocky shoal marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: SE of Nynäshamn Approach Light-buoy (S cardinal) (17¼ miles SW), thence: SE of Ekoknolen (15½ miles SW), a shoal marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: Clear of, depending on draught, a wreck with a depth over it of 20 m (10¾ miles SSW), and: SE of Lågland (11¼ miles SW), an above-water rock lying 4 miles E of Nåttarö. Grän, an area of foul ground on which stand three islets, lies 2 miles WSW of Lågland with an isolated depth of 4⋅5 m lying between the two dangers. Thence: SE of Nygrund (8¼ miles WSW), thence: SE of Storskär (6¼ miles WSW), a rounded rock about 15 m high, yellowish-brown in colour, the outermost charted danger off Utö. Shoal depths extend about 8 cables SSE and 6 cables WSW from the rock. Thence: Clear of, depending on draught, Ålandsbredan (3¾ miles SSW), noting a 17 m patch lying 1 mile SSW, and: SE of Borgsbredan (2¾ miles SW), an area of foul ground marked by buoys (cardinal), thence: Clear of, depending on draught, Vågen (2½ miles SE), and: SE of Huvudskär, a group of islands lying at the outer end of a chain of islands and shoals extending 7 miles E from the NE end of Utö. The numerous rocks and shoals lying within 1½ miles E and S of the group should not be approached without local knowledge. Huvudskär Light (7.24) is displayed from Ålandskär, the S island of the group. On Lökskär, the N and highest of the group, there is a steep round hill with a cairn (black) on its summit. Thence:
2
Gunnarsstenarna Light (58°46′⋅5N, 18°03′⋅1E) (7.71). Mällsten (58°51′N, 18°02′E) (7.41). Utö Firing Range Light (58°57′N, 18°16′E) (7.23), displayed when firing is taking place. Rödkobben Beacon (red framework pyramid surmounted by a ball, 12 m in height; on its NE and SE sides it is covered by boards, upper part black, lower part white), standing on Rödkobben (59°07′N, 18°48′E). Stavsnäs Radio Masts (59°16′⋅7N, 18°42′⋅6E) (7.120). Kalken Beacon (59°11′⋅3N, 18°53′⋅6E). Tower on Bullerön (59°12′N, 18°51′E), a high bare island with a well-defined hummock near its N end.
Fishing lights 1
2
7.28 The following lights are displayed amongst the islands when required by fishing vessels: Vindbådan Light (white metal framework tower, blue band) (59°00′⋅1N, 18°38′⋅2E). Skötrökan Light (white pedestal, blue band) (59°00′⋅8N, 18°31′⋅2E). Tordmulen Light (white lantern, blue band, on red base) (59°06′⋅3N, 18°39′⋅5E). Skepskobben Light (lantern on black base) (59°07′⋅4N, 18°46′⋅2E). Peskobben Light (framework tower) (59°09′⋅7N, 18°49′⋅4E). (Directions continue, for the coastal passage at 7.255 and for Sandhamn Entrance at 7.135)
Anchorage and landing Huvudskärs Hamn 1
7.29 Description. Huvudskärs Hamn (58°58′N, 18°34′E), situated between Ålandskär (7.26) and Lökskär (7.26) and protected E by Manskär, affords well-sheltered anchorage in depths from 9 to 10 m over a bottom comprised mainly of stones and rock but with some clay in places. There is a small pier on the N side of Ålandskär; a rock awash lies 1 cable E of the pier. Local knowledge is required. Chart 3143
Kyrkviken 1
263
7.30 Description. Kyrkviken (59°03′N, 18°26′E), is situated in the central part of the E side of the island of Ornö. A
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
marina, with a minimum depth of 3⋅0 m, is situated abreast Ornö Church on the W side of the inlet, and is approached through a channel marked by buoys (lateral). The channel is 30 m in width, has a depth of 4⋅2 m, and a speed restriction of 8 kn. Local knowledge is required. Rescue. Fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at Ornö.
2
LANDSORT ENTRANCE TO MYSINGEN General information
Submarine cables and pipelines 1
Charts 2362, 3191, 3143
1
2
1
7.32 Mysingen (59°00′N, 18°16′E) is an extensive enclosed area protected from seaward by the islands stretching from Nåttarö (58°53′N, 18°08′E) to Ornö, 12 miles NE.
1
7.33 See 7.4. The pilot boarding position, shown on the chart, is about 2 miles S of Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E). The boarding position for VLCC’s, bound for Nynäshamn, shown on the chart, is 9 miles E of the light. Pilots should be requested from VTS Stockholm at least 12 hours in advance with confirmation of ETA being given at least 5 hours in advance.
1
2
3
Vessel Traffic Service 1
7.34 A mandatory Vessel Traffic Reporting and Information System is in operation for the control of shipping. Positions of reporting points are shown on the chart. For details see 7.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). 7.35 Anchorages for large vessels are situated in two areas, shown on the chart, centred about 9 miles SSW (5.174) and 11 miles ESE, respectively of Landsort. There is reported to be good holding ground near Bredmarsknösen, 7½ cables NNE of Landsort, in depths of from 10 to 30 m.
1
2
Torpedo launching area 1
7.36 In addition to the minefield areas described at 7.18 anchorage is prohibited in an area, shown on the chart, which crosses the fairway from the vicinity of
7.39 See 7.18. 7.40 Between Östra Röko (58°54′⋅4N, 18°04′⋅9E) and a position about 1¾ miles SW of Mysingeholm (59°00′⋅2N, 18°15′⋅5E) there is a measured distance totalling 6⋅175 miles divided by pairs of beacons into three distances of approximately 3½, 1½ and 1 mile. Running track. From a position about 2 cables NW of Östra Röko Light, the alignment (045½°) of a beacon, close SE of Mysingeholm Light (white tower, red roof, 6 m in height), with a beacon on the E side of Björkö (3¼ miles NE) provides the running track. SW limit. Front beacon on Östra Röko; rear beacon on Grönborgen (8 cables SE). SW distance (3⋅554 miles). A pair of beacons on Sandskär (58°56′⋅5N, 18°10′⋅5E). Centre distance (1⋅593 miles). Front beacon on Gubbholmen (58°58′⋅7N, 18°10′⋅7E); rear beacon on Älvsnabben (2¼ cables NW). NE distance (1⋅028 miles). Front beacon on Lesundsholmen (58°59′⋅7N, 18°11′⋅8E); rear beacon on Bjurshagen (3½ cables NW).
Principal marks
Anchorages at the entrance 1
the waters lying NW of Restricted Area, are on the chart. Uncharted exist W of Nåttarö and
Measured distance
Pilotage 1
7.38 See 7.17. The greater part of Mysingen, inside the Muskö incompletely surveyed, as shown dangers may exist. Similar areas between Råno and Alö.
Minefields
Topography 1
7.37 See 7.12.
Restricted areas
Route 7.31 Main channel. From Landsort Entrance (58°42′N, 17°52′E), the main route, authorised for a draught of 10⋅0 m, leads NNE for about 10 miles to Måsknuv passing between Viksten and Skrapan, thence it leads NE for 12 miles to Mysingeholm in Mysingen, passing NW of Östra Röko (58°54′⋅4N, 18°04′⋅9E). Alternative channel. A channel for vessels of lesser draught, in which there is a least charted depth of 6⋅6 m (2001), leads to Måsknuv passing W of Viksten. Danziger Gatt. Vessels can join the main channels to Mysingen or Nynäshamn by passing through Danziger Gatt (58°51′N, 18°04′E), described at 7.72, which leads between Mällsten and Nattarö; depths of 9⋅8 m lie in this fairway.
Långnabbaudde (58°58′N, 18°08′E) on the SE side of Muskö, to that of Västra Runmaren, 6 miles ENE, off the NW side of Utö. This is a torpedo launching area. Operations generally take place from April to November each year. When launchings take place red flags are displayed from the signal station on Långnabbaudde and from guard ships stationed in the area. A long blast on a siren precedes each firing and the track is marked by flashing white searchlights.
3
264
7.41 Landmarks: Radio mast (58°49′⋅2N, 17°50′⋅7E) (5.171). Landsort Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°52′E) (5.171). Mällsten (58°51′N, 18°02′E), a high, mostly bare island, lying in Landsort Entrance. It is steep on its W side and the summit. The S of two elevations on its W side is covered with trees. Utö Windmill (58°58′⋅0N, 18°19′⋅4E) (7.24). Radio mast (59°01′N, 18°23′E) (7.24). Älvsnabben Monument (grey stone pillar, surmounted by an anchor) (58°59′N, 18°11′E), on Kapellön. Major lights: Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E) (5.171). Landsorts Bredgrund Light (58°44′N, 17°53′E) (5.171). Ormsta Aero Light (mast) (59°07′N, 18°08′E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
astern, of Östra Röko Light leads clear of Ventlandsgrund and Rånögrund. Thence: SE of Älvsnabben Light (red hut, white roof, on white base) (5½ miles NE), which is displayed from the SE corner of Kapellön, thence: NW of Mysingsholmsgrund (3 cables SW of Mysingeholm), a rock awash marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: Midway between Mysingeholm (59°00′⋅2N, 18°15′⋅5E), a high bare island from the W side of which a light (white tower, red roof, 16 m in height) is displayed, and Söderhäll (6½ cables NW) from the S side of which a light (red hut) is exhibited. Shoal water extending W from Söderhäll is marked by a buoy (W cardinal), and that extending E by a buoy (port hand). A 10⋅2 m patch lies on the N side of the fairway, 2 cables S of Söderhäll.
Other aid to navigation 1
7.42 Racon: Landsorts Bredgrund Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°53′E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Directions
5
(continued from 5.173)
Main channel 1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
7.43 Landsort to Måsknuv. From the pilot boarding position 2 miles S of Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E), the recommended track, as shown on the chart, leads 8 cables N, by night in the white sector (351°–358°) of the light, until abeam of Bosknösen (1½ miles SSE of the light), marked by a buoy (W cardinal). Thence the track leads NNE for 2½ miles, by night in the white sector (025°–029°) of Viksten Nordvästra Light (white lantern, silver base) (58°47′⋅5N, 17°56′⋅7E) passing (with positions from Landsort Light): ESE of Landsorts Bredgrund (6 cables SSE), and: WNW of an 11 m shoal (1 mile SE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: WNW of Bulan (9½ cables ESE), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: ESE of Bredmarsknösen (7½ cables NNE) and Båtgåsknösen, 3 cables farther NNE. Thence the track leads NE for 2¼ miles in the white sector (037½°–051°) of Skrapan Light (black tower, white band, white lantern, 11 m in height) (58°47′⋅4N, 17°58′⋅4E) and into the white sector (020°–024°) of Måsknuv Light (white tower, 10 m in height) (58°51′⋅4N, 18°00′⋅9E) which leads between Skrapan and Viksten Sydöstra Light (white framework tower, 3 m in height) (7 cables W of Skrapan) to a position WNW of Västergrund Light-buoy (W cardinal) (1¾ miles SSW of Måsknuv Light), moored 5 cables SW of the shoals of Västergrundet. From Västergrund Light-buoy to Måsknuv the fairway is marked by the white sector (190½°–196°), astern, of Skrapan Light. 7.44 Måsknuv to Mysingeholm. From a position about 2¼ cables WNW of Måsknuv Light the track leads generally NE, marked initially by the white sector (036°–043°) of Östra Röko Light (lantern on white hut, green band) (58°54′⋅4N, 18°04′⋅9E), passing (with positions from Östra Röko Light): SE of Måsknuv norra Light-buoy (W cardinal) (3 miles SW), marking a shoal with a depth over it of 17 m, thence: NW of Nygrund (1½ miles SSW). Several shoal depths extend W from Nygrund, the outer being a depth of 10 m. Shoal ground 3 cables E of Nygrund is marked by a buoy (N cardinal). And: SE of Örngrund Light (black GRP tower, red band on concrete base, 11 m in height) (2 miles WSW), thence: NW of Östra Röko Light, thence: SE of Ventlandsgrund (2 miles NE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NW of Rånögrund (3¼ miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand). The white sector (219°–222½°),
1
7.45 Clearing sectors. The white sector (044½°−046½°) of Mysingeholm Light, together with the green sector (005°–038½°) of Söderhäll Light, leads clear NW of Mysingsholmsgrund.
Useful marks 7.46 1
2
Beacon (yellow above black truncated cone, 4 m in height), standing on Yttre Karvasen (58°42′⋅8N, 17°58′⋅3E), a low small rock. Inre Karvasen (1½ miles WNW of Yttre Karvasen), a rock relatively high with a sharply-defined outline. Viksten Beacon (black diamond on grey square stone structure, black patch, 2 m in height) (58°47′⋅3N, 17°57′⋅0E). Tower (disused light) (58°51′⋅4N, 18°01′⋅0E), close E of Måsknuv Lighthouse. Utö Firing Range Light (58°57′N, 18°16′E) (7.23), displayed when firing is taking place. (Directions continue at 7.87)
Alternative channel west of Viksten 1
2
3
265
7.47 From a position on the main channel above, about 1½ miles NE of Landsort Lighthouse, the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads 2 miles NNE, by night in the white sector (025°–029°) of Viksten Nordvästra Light (7.43) to a position within 5 cables of this light. The track passes (with positions from Viksten Nordvästra Light): Over a 9⋅8 m patch (1½ miles SSW), thence: ESE of an 8⋅8 m shoal lying 3 cables E of the islet of Gumman (about 1 mile SW). Thence the track leads between Viksten Nordvästra and Kastbåden, a shoal 2½ cables W, on which stands a beacon (white truncated cone, 2 m in height), and passes over a 6⋅6 m patch lying in the middle of the fairway. When clear of Viksten Nordvästra the track continues NNE, by night in the white sector (201°–208°), astern, of Viksten Nordvästra Light to rejoin the main channel 2¼ cables WNW of Måsknuv passing (with positions from Måsknuv Light): WNW of Västergrund Light-buoy (1¾ miles SSW) (7.43), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
ESE of Gårdgrund (1¼ miles W), marked by a buoy (port hand).
3
Herrhamraleden Charts 3170, 3191
General information 1
2
7.48 Description. Herrhamraleden (58°47′⋅5N, 17°51′⋅0E), which separates the islands and shoals extending from the N end of Öja from those off the S end of Torö, affords anchorage in depths from 10 to 12 m. It can be approached from W, S, SE and E, through channels authorised for a draught of 4⋅3 m. Local knowledge is required. Anchorage may be obtained, as shown on the chart, 2 cables NNE of Krokskär Beacon (white cairn, red band, square topmark on pole, 6 m in height) (58°47′⋅2N, 17°50′⋅7E), standing on the island of that name. Landmarks: Radio mast (58°49′⋅3N, 17°51′⋅0E) (5.171). Windmill (58°48′⋅1N, 17°50′⋅0E); two leading beacons stand close SSE.
4
1
2
Directions 1
2
3
1
1
2
7.49 Approach from south. From a position on the main Landsort-Södertälje channel (6.17) 3 cables WSW of Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E) (5.171), a narrow channel, shown on the chart and authorised for a draught of 4⋅3 m to a position close N of Krokskär, leads W of Öja, thence SW and W of Krokskär, thence rounds the N point of the latter island to the anchorage. The fairway, in its upper reaches, is marked by buoys and in stretches by the white sectors of the following lights (positioned from Grisblänkan Light (58°46′N, 17°51′E)): Grisblänkan Light (white pedestal, black base), (347°–357°). Grisskär Light (framework tower) (8½ cables N), (355°–359°), ahead, and (138°–139°), astern. Bottenholmen Light (framework tower) (1½ miles NNW), (327°–328½°), ahead. Västra Kvarnhällan Light (lantern on white pedestal) (1¾ miles N) (004°–007°). Bottenholmen Light (above); (264°–267°), astern. Useful mark: Tiljandersknallt Light (58°45′⋅5N, 17°49′⋅6E) (6.17). 7.50 Approach from west. From the main Landsort-Södertälje channel (6.17) close S of Rökogrundet (58°47′N, 17°47′E), a channel leads ESE to join the 4⋅3 m channel from S off the N part of Öja. It passes N of Västra Galten (1¾ miles ESE of Rökogrundet), an above-water rock. A 4 m shoal, 2 cables W of the rock, is marked by a buoy (starboard hand). 7.51 Approach from south-east. From a position on the Landsort-Mysingen channel, 1 mile NE of Landsort Light, the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads N for 1½ miles, thence NW for 2 miles to the approach to the anchorage passing (with positions from Österklintshällan Light (post) (58°46′⋅3N, 17°52′⋅0E)): E of Fudden (1 mile SE), an area of rocks awash, marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NE of Vinterskärsbådarna (7½ cables E), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Skomakarskär (8 cables NNE), and:
3
4
NE of Norrklabb (7½ cables N), an islet off the N point of Storpellesholme (Storpellesholmarna); Storpelles Holmes Light (column), stands on the SW point of Storpellesholme. Thence: SW of a 5⋅4 m shoal (1 mile N), marked by a buoy (W cardinal). Thence the track, further marked by buoys and by night in the white sector (264°–267°) of Bottenholmen Light, leads to the anchorage. Clearing marks. The alignment (035°) of the SE extremity of Gumman (58°46′⋅8N, 17°55′⋅1E) with Kastbåden Beacon (1 mile NE) (7.47), leads SE of Fudden. 7.52 Approach from east. From a position on the Landsort-Mysingen channel close W of Viksten Nordvästra Light (58°47′⋅5N, 17°56′⋅7E) (7.43), the recommended track, shown on the chart and authorised for a draught of 4⋅3 m, leads initially W in the white sector (097°–098°), astern, of this light passing (with positions from the light): N of Kastbåden (2½ cables W) (7.47), thence: S of Gräsknösen (8 cables W), marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: N of Norrskär (1½ miles W), on the N side of which stands a beacon (orange). Shoal water N of the island is marked by a buoy (starboard hand). Thence the track leads WSW, by night initially in the white sector (254°–258½°), of Ölandssten Light (silver hut) (58°47′⋅6N, 17°52′⋅1E), passing: SSE of Norrskärshällar (5½ cables ENE of Ölandssten Light), a group of above-water rocks; a rock, awash, marked by a buoy (port hand) lies 1 cable E of the islet. Thence: NNW of Kalkgrund (1½ cables E of Ölandssten Light), marked by a buoy (starboard hand). Thence the track, marked by the white sector (073°–075½°), astern, of Ölandssten Light, leads into the white sector (264°–267°) of Bottenholmen Light.
Landsort Pilot Harbours 1
2
7.53 Small harbours for the use of pilots lie in inlets on the E and W sides of Öja, situated about 2½ cables N of Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E). The entrance channel to each harbour is indicated by a pair of leading lights as follows: E side harbour — alignment 288½°. W side harbour — alignment 130°. A buoy (starboard hand) marks a 1⋅5 m shoal close NW of the entrance on the W side. Anchorage. It is reported that anchorage may be obtained about 6 cables NNW of Landsort Lighthouse and NNW of the W pilot harbour, in depths of 20 to 40 m, good holding ground, but clear of a non-dangerous wreck lying close to that position.
Ankarudden 1
2
266
7.54 Description. Ankarudden (58°48′N, 17°50′E) is a small fishing harbour approached from the fairway N of Krokskär through a narrow buoyed channel marked by a pair of leading beacons and by the white sectors of Västra Kvarnhällan Light (58°47′⋅6N, 17°50′⋅5E) (7.49). A second set of leading beacons leads to the quay. Depths in the dredged channel and harbour are 4⋅0 m; maximum draught is 3⋅5 m. Berths. There is a detached concrete jetty, 62 m long, with a quay, 23 m long at its root; both have depths of 4 m (1996) alongside.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Small craft berth in the N side of the harbour. Anchorage may be obtained in the basin SW of the quay.
3
Anchorages Chart 3143
Östra Röko 1
7.55 Well-sheltered anchorage with good holding ground, may be obtained, as shown on the chart, 1½ miles NE of Östra Röko Light (58°54′⋅4N, 18°04′⋅9E) (7.44) in depths of about 30 m.
Traffic 1
2
3
7.56 Description. Älvsnabben Hamn (58°58′⋅8N, 18°10′⋅7E), on the E side of Muskö, provides good, well-sheltered anchorage in depths of from 3 to 16 m, clay, between the island of Älvsnabben (58°59′N, 18°10′E) and Gubbholmen, close S. The anchorage is approached from S between Gubbholmen and Köpingen, an island 2½ cables SW. Prohibited area. It is forbidden to pass through, or remain in, the waters N of the anchorage in the area bounded by Älvsnabben, Kapellön, close SE, and Bjurshagen, close NE, including the N entrance at Ledsund. The N limit of the anchorage area is marked by notice boards. Useful marks: Älvsnabben Monument (7.41), on Kapellön. Two measured distance beacons, one on the E side of Gubbholmen, the other 2¼ cables NW on Älvsnabben.
7.60 In 2003 the port was used by 529 vessels totalling 3⋅6 million dwt.
Port Authority
Älvsnabben Hamn 1
entrance to Nynäshamn, passing between Örngrund and the dangers lying about 5 cables N of it. South entrance. The S entrance to Nynäshamn may be approached through a channel, authorised for a draught of 4⋅0 m, which leads N for about 6 miles from the vicinity of Viksten Nordvästra (58°47′⋅5N, 17°56′⋅7E), along the E side of Järflotta, thence W of Yttre Gården and Inre Gården to Bedarön.
1
7.61 Nynäshamn Hamn AB, Nynäsvagen 2, Box 1012, SE–149 25 Nynäshamn, Sweden. E-Mail:
[email protected] The oil terminal is operated by Nynäs Petroleum AB, Box 1002 S–149 82 Nynäshamn, Sweden. The port is part of The Ports of Stockholm Group.
Limiting conditions 1
2
NYNÄSHAMN AND APPROACHES General information
7.62 Deepest and longest berths Oil terminal: No 1 Berth (7.77). Ferry harbour: No 1 Quay (7.78). Water levels. Persistent winds from W to NW raise the level of the water by up to 0⋅7 m and winds from the opposite direction may lower it by 0⋅5 m. Density of water is 1⋅010 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled. A vessel with a length of 300 m, draught 15⋅3 m and maximum 200 000 dwt. Berthing at the oil terminal is during daylight hours only. Ice. The port is usually free of ice during the winter.
Chart 3191
Arrival information
Position 1
7.57 Nynäshamn manufacturing the S part of access is not
Vessel Traffic Service (58°54′N, 17°57′E) is an industrial and town situated 25 miles S of Stockholm on Södertörn. The port is well sheltered and difficult.
1
Function 1
7.58 Besides having one of the largest oil refineries in Sweden, Nynäshamn is the northernmost port for ferry traffic between the mainland and Gotland. The town has a population of about 11 000.
Approach and entry 1
2
7.59 North entrance. From the vicinity of the Nynäshamn Approach Light-buoy (58°45′N, 18°11′E), the main route, authorised for a draught of 15⋅3 m, leads from sea, passing NE of Gunnarsstenarna (58°46′⋅5N, 18°02′⋅5E), SW and W of Västergrundet (58°50′N, 18°01′E) and its adjacent dangers, thence W of Måsknuv (58°51′⋅4N, 18°00′⋅9E) and W of Örngrund (2½ miles N) to the N entrance to the harbour. Alternatively Danziger Gatt (58°51′N, 18°04′E) may be used. The 10⋅0 m route from Landsort to Mysingen merges with the 15⋅3 m route 1¾ miles SSW of Måsknuv. Approaching from Mysingen, a route leads WSW, thence WNW, from Östra Röko (58°54′⋅4N, 18°04′⋅9E) to the N
7.63 A mandatory Vessel Traffic Reporting and Information System is in operation for the control of shipping. Positions of reporting points are shown on the chart. For details see 7.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Outer anchorages 1
7.64 See 7.35.
Pilotage and tugs 1
2
7.65 Pilotage is compulsory and is obtained through Mälaren Pilot Station. See 7.4. Pilots should be requested 12 hours in advance with confirmation of ETA at least 5 hours in advance. The pilot boards either 2 miles S of Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E) or, for deep-draught vessels, 9 miles E of the light. For further details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Tugs are available.
Traffic regulations 1
267
7.66 Restricted area. The port approaches lie in a restricted area. See 7.17. Minefield. See 7.18.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Harbour General layout 1
7.67 The W side of the harbour is formed by the E coast of Södertörn. The oil terminal is situated in the N part of the harbour between Brunsviksholmen and Södertörn and the ferry and small craft harbours in the S part between Bedarön and Södertörn.
6
Submarine cables and pipelines 1
7.68 See 7.12
Danziger Gatt
Principal marks 1
2
7.69 Landmarks: Radio mast (58°49′⋅2N, 17°50′⋅7E) (5.171). Landsort Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°52′E) (5.171). Mällsten (58°51′N, 18°02′E) (7.41). Utö Windmill (58°58′⋅0N, 18°19′⋅4E) (7.24). Radio mast (59°01′N, 18°23′E) (7.24). Major lights: Landsort Light (58°44′N, 17°52′E) (5.171). Landsorts Bredgrund Light (58°44′N, 17°53′E) (5.171). Ormsta Aero Light (59°07′N, 18°08′E) (7.41).
1
2
Other aid to navigation 1
7.70 Racon: Landsorts Bredgrund Lighthouse (58°44′N, 17°53′E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
3
Directions for north entrance Main channel 1
2
3
4
5
harbour entrance passing (with positions from Brunsviksholmen Light): SSW of Faran (8 cables E), a shoal on which stands a beacon, thence: N of Finnhällorna (3 cables SSE), an islet close N of which stands a beacon (floodlit). Useful marks (positioned from Brunsviksholmen Light): Tower (1 cable NW). Vårdkasberget Beacon (9 cables W). Örnäsu Beacon (5½ cables SSW). (Directions for entry continue at 7.74)
7.71 From a position about 1 mile SW of the Nynäshamn Approach Light-buoy (58°45′N, 18°11′E) (7.26), the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads NW for about 7¼ miles to the Västergrund Light-buoy (7.43) passing NE of Gunnarsstenarna (58°46′⋅5N, 18°02′⋅5E), a group of moderately high islets; Gunnarsstenarna Light (white structure on grey base) is displayed from Hällorna, the NE islet of the group. The S side of Altarskär, on the E side of the group, is steep and has the appearance of a dark knob rising above the other islets. From a position about 3½ cables W of Västergrund Light-buoy, in the white sector (142½°–152½°) of Gunnarsstenarna Light, where the track is joined by the 10 m route from Landsort described at 7.43, the track leads generally N, then NW, passing (with positions from Måsknuv Light (58°51′⋅4N, 18°00′⋅9E)): W of Måsknuv norra Light-buoy (W cardinal) (7 cables N), marking a 17 m patch, and: E of Ramklövsgrund (1 mile NNW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: E of the islet of Skorvan (2 miles NNW), thence: Between Örngrund Light (about 2½ miles N) (7.44) and Skorvan Light-buoy (E cardinal), moored 4 cables WSW of this light, marking an 18 m patch, thence: NE of a 6 m patch (about 2½ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (port hand). Thence the track leads WNW into the white sector (296½°–306½°) of Brunsviksholmen Light (white tower, 8 m in height) (58°55′⋅1N, 17°58′⋅7E) which leads to the
4
7.72 From the vicinity of 58°49°′N, 18°07′E, the line of bearing 325° in the white sector (323°–327°) of Brunsviksholmen Light (58°55′⋅1N, 17°58′⋅7E) (7.71), leads about 5½ miles NW, through Danziger Gatt to a position on the main channel, passing (with positions from Måsknuv Light (58°51′⋅4N, 18°00′⋅9E)): SW of Vittengen (2¼ miles ESE), the outermost islet off the S extremity of Nattarö, and: NE of Norrgrundet (1½ miles SE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), the shoalest of several shoals extending SSE from Mällsten (7.41). Torksbåden, a rock awash, lies 2½ cables SE of Mällsten. Thence: SW of a 9⋅8 m shoal patch (about 2 miles ESE), thence: NE of a 9⋅8 m shoal patch (1¼ miles E), thence: Between Norrholmen (7 cables ENE), the N extremity of Mällsten, and the foul ground extending SW from Klovskär, 8 cables farther ENE, thence: To a position about 4½ cables E of Skorvan (2 miles NNW), where the track joins the main channel (7.71). Clearing bearing. Östra Röko Light (58°54′⋅4N, 18°04′⋅9E) (7.44) bearing 010° and open well E of Klovskär passes E of the shoals extending up to 1 mile SSE from Mällsten. (Directions for entry continue at 7.74)
Approach from Mysingen 1
2
7.73 From a position about 4 cables W of Östra Röko Light (58°54′⋅4N, 18°04′⋅9E) (7.44), the line of bearing, about 080°, astern, in the white sector (076½°–084°) of this light leads W, passing between Örngrund Light (58°53′⋅8N, 18°01′⋅5E) (7.44) and a buoy (S cardinal) marking a 5⋅8 m patch 5½ cables NNE of Örngrund Light. Fälövsgrundet, a rock awash, lies 3 cables farther N of this patch. From Örngrund Light the fairway to the entrance to the harbour leads WNW marked by the white sector (296½°–306½°) of Brunsviksholmen Light (58°55′⋅1N, 17°58′⋅7E) (7.71), passing SSW of Faran (7.71). (Directions for entry continue at 7.74)
Entry 1
2
268
7.74 From a position 1¾ cables SW of Brunsviksholmen Light the track into the harbour, shown on the chart, leads SW passing (with positions from Brunsviksholmen Light): Clear of, depending on draught, a 13 m shoal (4½ cables SW), thence: SE of an outfall pipe (5 cables WSW), marked at its extremity by a buoy (special). The direction of the outfall is indicated by Stathmos Lights (red
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
3
4
1
2
3
triangles on pillars) in line on the shore bearing 315°. Thence: SE shoal water on the W side of the harbour between Skyttens häll and the outfall pipe, marked by a buoy (starboard hand). And: NW of Ankargrundet (8½ cables SW), a shoal marked on its W side by a buoy (port hand) and on its E side by a light-buoy (starboard hand). In addition, the white sector (039°–043°), astern, of Brunsviksholmen Light marks the fairway between Skyttens häll and Ankargrundet. 7.75 Oil harbour. From N of Finnhällorna the alignment (261½°) of a pair of beacons (lattice masts, red triangular daymarks with black borders), standing on the W shore 5 cables WSW of Brunsviksholmen Light, passes N of the 13 m shoal (7.74). The alignment (002°) of a second pair of beacons (similar marks), standing in the N part of the harbour 3 cables NW of the light, passes E of the 13 m shoal. When large vessels are berthed at the terminal, mooring lines are laid across the oil harbour E to Brunsviksholmen and to floodlit mooring buoys laid S and SW of the S end of the island. Passage for vessels, other than for boats which can pass under the lines, is prohibited. Warning notices, illuminated at night, stand on each side of the harbour and on two floats in the harbour from which lights (red) are displayed.
7
Basins and berths Oil harbour 1
2
Directions for south entrance 1
2
3
4
5
6
7.77 East Quay. Comprises No 1 Berth, 100 m in length with a depth of 17⋅5 m alongside. Vessels up to 300 m in length can be accommodated, berthing starboard side alongside. West Quay. Comprises five berths numbered from N. Nos 2, 3 and 4 berths have a combined length of 155 m with a depth alongside of from 10 m at No 2 berth to 12⋅9 m at No 4 berth. Although normally used for coastal tankers, the combined berths can accommodate one vessel of 65 000 dwt. No 5 berth, a detached berth, is 75 m in length with a depth of 5⋅2 m alongside.
Ferry harbour 1
7.76 Leading marks: Front. Beacon (58°53′⋅4N, 18°56′⋅8E), on an islet off the S side of Trehörningen. Rear. Beacon (white hut; disused light-structure) (3 cables N of front beacon), on the NW side of Trehörningen. From a position 5 cables NNE of Viksten Nordvästra Light (58°47′⋅5N, 17°56′⋅7E) (7.43), the alignment (359°) of these marks, or at night the white sector (358½°–359½°) of Trehörningen Light (white square metal framework tower) (58°53′⋅5N, 17°56′⋅8E), leads N into Gårdsfjärden along a recommended track, passing: E of Lökviks norra häll (58°49′⋅4N, 17°56′⋅8E). A dangerous wreck lies on the E side of the islet. Thence: W of an area of foul ground, marked by a buoy (starboard hand) which extends 2 cables S from Simpgrynnan (58°51′⋅5N, 17°57′⋅3E), thence: E of Pigbåden (5½ cables NNW of Simpgrynnan), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: E of a rocky shoal with a least depth over it of 3 m (1 mile NNW of Simpgrynnan), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: To a position about 2½ cables S of Trehörningen Light. Thence the track leads for about 5 cables NE through a narrow buoyed channel, by night in the white sector (033½°–036°) of Bedarö Light (white lantern) (58°53′⋅8N, 17°57′⋅6E), displayed from an islet close off the W side of Bedarön. Thence this channel turns N, then NNW, in the white sector (163°–177°), astern, of Bedarö Light, and leads into the S part of Nynäshamn harbour, passing: NE of a shoal which extends 2 cables NE from the N end of Trehörningen, marked towards its extremity by three beacons, and:
SW of a shoal with a depth over it of 1⋅6 m, 3½ cables NE of Trehörningen, marked by a buoy (W cardinal) and a light-buoy (N cardinal). Caution. Speed is limited to 7 kn in this narrow channel and to 5 kn in the S part of the harbour. Useful mark: Tower (58°53′⋅5N, 17°57′⋅0E) standing on the S side of Trehörningen.
7.78 The terminal has three berths, all with Ro-Ro facilities. The longest, No 1 berth on Quay No 1, has a length of 210 m and a depth alongside of 8 m. The Ro-Ro ramp has a width of 30 m. The maximum permitted draught is 7⋅5 m. In 2000 a third berth was under construction. A smaller Ro-Ro Berth is situated adjacent to the Fishing Harbour about 2 cables S of the Ferry Harbour.
Fishing harbour 1
7.79 Trehörningsviken, a boat harbour with accommodation for visiting yachts in its N part, is situated, together with the fishing harbour, in the S part of the port as shown on the chart. Depths alongside the berths are about 2 m.
Port services 1
7.80 Repairs. Minor facilities only. Other facilities. Authorised compass adjuster; facilities for the reception of oily waste; customs office; deratting and issue of certificates. Supplies. Fuel oil; fresh water at the quays; provisions. Communications. Nearest airport is Arlanda at Stockholm, distant 100 km. There are regular ferry services to other Swedish ports and to ports in the Gulf of Finland and S Baltic Sea.
Dragets kanal General information 1
269
7.81 From a position in Gårdsfjärden, 3 cables WSW of the S point of Inre Gården (58°53′⋅0N, 17°57′⋅5E), a boat channel, authorised for a draught of 1⋅5 m, marked in places by buoys (lateral) and beacons, leads SW for about
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
3
1¾ miles to pass through the islands between Gummerholmen and the N point of Järflotta, thence into the S part of Nynäsviken (58°52′N, 17°54′E). The channel continues into Dragfjärden through Dragets kanal (58°51′⋅0N, 17°53′⋅5E), thence continues generally S for about 2 miles, similarly marked by buoys, into Konabbsfjärden where it joins the 4⋅3 m route to Herrhamraleden (7.52) about 1 mile E of Ölandssten Light (58°47′⋅6N, 17°52′⋅1E) (7.52). Speed is limited to 8 kn in the narrows N of Järflotta and to 5 kn in the Dragets kanal. An overhead cable with a vertical clearance of 21 m spans the canal.
deflection of up to 10° from the normal has been experienced.
Directions for main channel 1
2
MYSINGEN TO DALARÖ General information
3
Chart 3143
Routes 1
2
7.82 Main channel. From Mysingeholm (59°00′⋅2N, 18°15′⋅5E), the main channel to Stockholm is authorised for a draught of 10⋅0 m to Dalarö, 9¼ miles farther NE. The recommended route, shown on the chart, leads between Långgarn Light and Stora Rotholmen, 5 cables SE, thence NW of Fåglarö (59°06′N, 18°23′E) and SE of Aspön, 1½ miles NE. Alternative channel. A channel in which there is a least charted depth of 7 m close W of Jutholmen Light (59°07′⋅4N, 18°24′⋅4E), leads W and N of Aspön. 5V5 m channel. From Mysingeholm the recommended route, shown on the chart, leads SE of Stora Rotholmen, thence between the islands extending NE from Fåglarö and the NW coast of Ornö.
4
1
Vessel Traffic Service 1
7.83 See 7.5. Vessels come under Stockholm VTS when passing Stora Rotholmen. 2
Submarine cables and pipelines 1
7.84 See 7.12.
3
Traffic regulations 1
7.85 Restricted areas. See 7.17. Minefield. See 7.18. Prohibited area. A naval DG range, marked at its NE and SW corners by buoys (special), is located in an area, shown on the chart, between Lilla Äggskäret (59°03′N, 18°13′E) and Stora Äggskäret, close S. Entry into the area is prohibited.
4
5
Local magnetic anomaly 1
7.86 An area of local magnetic anomaly is reported to exist, with a radius of about 4 cables, centred close SW of Stora Rotholmen (59°04′N, 18°19′E), as shown on the chart. A
270
(continued from 7.46) 7.87 From a position about 6½ cables N of Mysingeholm (59°00′⋅2N, 18°15′⋅5E), the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads about 3½ miles NNE in the white sector (006¼°–022°), ahead, of Långgarn Light (red tower, grey base, 6 m in height) (59°04′⋅4N, 18°17′⋅9E) and the white sector (186°–200°), astern, of Mysingeholm Light, passing (with positions from Mysingeholm): WNW of Ståtbådergrunden (2 miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), and: ESE of Norrhäll (2 miles N), marked by a buoy (port hand). Thence the track leads NE between Långgarn Light and Stora Rotholmen (5 cables SE), a high island, steep-to on its N side, and by night in the white sector (042°–050°) of Gålö Light (red pedestal) (59°05′⋅6N, 18°21′⋅0E), thence into the white sector (046°–048°), ahead, of Aspöskär Light (metal framework tower on red hut) (59°06′⋅9N, 18°23′⋅8E), and the white sector (233½°–235¾°), astern, of Långgarn Light. The latter two sectors mark the fairway between Gålö Light and Johannisgrund (2 cables SE), a shoal marked by a beacon (green cylindrical tower, white band, black base; floodlit) and by a buoy (port hand) at its E extremity. The track continues NE for 1½ miles in the white sector of Aspöskär Light to the vicinity of Dalarö Skans, on the W extremity of which stands a disused lighthouse, passing close SE of an 8⋅4 m patch, marked by a buoy (port hand) (1¼ miles SW of Aspöskär Light), lying between Toklo and Ersholm, and close NW of a light-buoy (starboard hand) marking foul ground extending W from Skraken (3 cables SSW of Aspöskär Light). 7.88 From SW of Dalarö Skans the track leads S and E of Aspön to Genböte, 1¾ miles NE. It is marked by a light-buoy and buoys, and at night by the white sectors, ahead and astern, of the following lights (positioned from Aspöskär Light): Kycklingen Light (red framework tower) (9 cables WSW), (245°–248°), astern. Segelholm Light (white hut, red roof; floodlit) (4 cables E), (071°–080°), ahead. Riksdalerskäret Light (white hut, red roof; floodlit) (1 mile NE), (053°–055½°), ahead. The alignment (054°) of this light with a beacon (yellow board, black stripe) on the SE point of Genböte leads in mid-channel. The edge of this narrow stretch of fairway SE of Aspön is indicated on each side by the alignment of this light with either of two beacons (diamond-shaped boards, red and yellow stripes) standing on each side of the centre beacon. Segelholm Light (222°–227½°), astern. Riksdalerskäret Light (180°–187½°), astern. Genböte Light (white hut, red band; floodlit) (1½ miles NNE) (006°–015½°), ahead. Thence, from a position W of Genböte Light, the track, further marked by light-buoys and buoys, leads NE around Genböte in the white sector (032°–038°), ahead, of Hummelkläpp Light (red tower, 7 m in height) (6 cables NNE of Genböte Light), and the white sector (214°–222°), astern, of Stenholmen Light (framework tower on red hut)
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
1
1
2
3
4
5
1
(3 cables WSW of Genböte Light). From S of Hummelkläpp Light the white sector (243½°–246°), astern, of Dalarö Light (red lantern on grey stone base) (3 cables NW of Genböte Light) leads into Jungfrufjärden passing N of Piltholmsknall Light (green tower, white band) (59°08′⋅6N, 18°27′⋅8E). 7.89 Useful marks (positioned from Piltholmsknall Light): Two beacons (red, cylindrical in shape, orange and black bands), on the NE extremity of Piltholm (2½ cables WSW). Beacon (floodlit) on Nålsögat (1½ cables NNW). (Directions continue at 7.106)
2
Alternative channel
4
7.90 From a position on the main channel about 3 cables S of Kycklingen Light (59°06′⋅4N, 18°22′⋅4E), the recommended track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys (lateral), leads N then generally ENE, passing (with positions from Kycklingen Light): Between Torrbänken (3 cables NNW) and Kycklingarna, 3 cables NNE, thence: NNW of Franska Knallen (1 mile NE), a 4⋅8 m shoal marked by a buoy (starboard hand), and: SSE of Rågholmen (1 mile NE), thence: NW of Jutholmen (1½ miles NE), thence: NNW of Korsholmen (2 miles NE), and: SSE of Dalarö Light (2¼ miles NE) (7.88). The fairway is marked in succession by the white sectors of the following lights (positioned from Kycklingen Light): Torrbänken Light (red tower; floodlit) (3 cables NNW) (326°–342°), ahead, thence (239°–241½°), astern. Aspöskär Light (9 cables ENE) (7.87) (203°–208°), astern. Jutholmen Light (white hut, red roof; floodlit) (1½ miles NE) (030°–038½°), ahead. Hummelkläpp Light (3 miles NE) (7.88) (053½°–055½°), ahead. Speed is limited to 7 kn between Rågholmen and the N part of Korsholmen. Useful marks (positioned from Kycklingen Light): Radio mast (1 mile NE), on Dalarö. Pair of light-beacons (2 miles NE), the alignment (331°) of which mark the line of the submarine telephone cable laid between Dalarö and Aspön. Radio tower (red lights) (3½ miles NE). 7.91 Thence the channel divides, one branch continuing ENE to merge with the main channel SSE of Hummelkläpp Light (3 miles NE of Kycklingen Light), another branch continuing NE, passing NW of Hummelkläpp Light and NW of Edesön (4 miles NE of Kycklingen Light), thence leading into the N part of Jungfrufjärden. (Directions continue for main channel at 7.106 and for minor channel to Gränöfjärden at 7.113)
3
5
1
Anchoragesand harbours 7.94
Anchorages 1
Anchorage may be obtained in the following areas: NE of Mysingeholm (59°00′⋅2N, 18°15′⋅5E), in depths of 12 to 30 m, deep, loose clay. Between Stora Rotholmen (59°04′N, 18°19′E) (7.87) and the SE side of Gålön (8 cables NW), in depths of 20 to 30 m, clay, but clear of the mined area.
Utö 1
2
1
Directions for the 5V5 m channel 1
From a position about 6½ cables N of Mysingeholm (59°00′⋅2N, 18°15′⋅5E), the recommended track, shown on the chart, marked by beacons and buoys (lateral), leads initially NNE for 4 miles to Lilla Rotholmen, then ENE for 5 miles along the NW coast of Ornö to Jungfrufjärden. It passes (positioned from Gålö Light (59°05′⋅6N, 18°21′⋅0E)): ESE of Stenskärsbank (2½ miles SW), thence: SE of Lilla Rotholmen (1½ miles SSW). A depth of 3⋅7 m lies SE of the track, 5 cables S of this islet. And: NW of Oxpelles Grunds Beacon (black and white, rectangular topmark) (1½ miles SSW), thence: Between Vettskär (5 cables S) and Skalkaren, 2¾ cables SE, thence: SSE of Svensgrund (1 mile ESE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Through Ornöströmmen and into Jungfrufjärden passing between Ornö Huvud (59°07′N, 18°29′E), a sparsely wooded hill and the N point of Ornö, and Stora Kaskär, an islet 2¾ cables NW. A beacon stands on Ornö Huvud and two beacons (orange) stand on the N extremity of Stora Kaskär. Useful mark: Mellankobben Light-beacon (post, 2 m in height) (59°07′⋅0N, 18°26′⋅5E) shown between October and March from the SW point of the islet. 7.93 Link channel. From the position SE of Lilla Rotholmen, a branch of the 5⋅5 m channel leads NW of Vettskär, thence SE of Johannisgrund (2 cables SE of Gålö Light), to join both the main channel and the channel leading W and N of Aspön, N of Ersholm (7.87).
7.92 Local knowledge is required. The channel, which is unlit, is used by vessels towing logs or other cargoes which are difficult to manoeuvre and which would be liable to obstruct shipping in the main channel.
271
7.95 Description. Utö Hamn (58°58′N, 18°20′E), situated on the NW side of Utö, is a small harbour, suitable for vessels with a draught up to 2⋅7 m, and is mainly used by local traffic and pleasure craft. The harbour, which lies inside the islet of Stora Persholmen and is generally well sheltered except in strong N winds, is divided into N and S parts by a bridge spanning the channel between Utö and Stora Persholmen, close NW. The navigational opening through the bridge is about 3 m wide with a vertical clearance of about 2 m. The bottom in the harbour is sand and clay. Speed is limited to 5 kn within the harbour. Landmark: Utö Windmill (58°58′⋅0N, 18°19′⋅4E) (7.24). 7.96 Approach from west (with positions from the windmill). From a position about 1½ miles NW of the windmill, clear of the shoal water extending 2 cables NE from Prästgrundet (8 cables NW), the track leads E, passing S of a rock awash (1 mile N), marked by a buoy (S cardinal) and N of a shoal with a depth over it of 1⋅4 m (7½ cables N), marked by buoys (N cardinal and W cardinal) and on to the alignment of:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
3
4
1
Leading lights: Front light (white triangle, apex upwards, on mast) (58°58′⋅2N, 18°19′⋅7E), displayed from the head of the harbour. Rear light (white triangle, apex downwards, on mast) (140 m SSE of front light). The alignment (158°) of these lights, shown when required, leads SSE into the harbour through a buoyed channel dredged to a depth of about 3⋅6 m. Approach from north. From a position off Lindholmen (59°02′N, 18°19′E), an islet off the S extremity of Björkö, the track leads between Lindholmen and Lindholmsgrundet, 2 cables S, marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence it leads about 2½ miles S and 1½ miles WSW, passing E and S of Östra Runmaren, and on to the entry leading line (above). Foul ground close S of Västra Runmaren is marked by a buoy (S cardinal). Caution. The approach E of Östra Runmaren lies in the W part of a mined area. Submarine pipelines are laid in the E side of the entrance channel close E of the leading line. 7.97 Berths. There is a small concrete quay in the N part for ferry traffic with a depth of about 2⋅5 m alongside. The shoreline in the remainder of the harbour is edged by jetties which, together with pontoon jetties, provide berths for small craft in depths of 2 to 2⋅5 m. Facilities. All the usual services are available.
Karlslund 1
2
3
7.98 Karlslund (59°07′⋅3N, 18°18′⋅5E) is a yacht and small craft harbour situated on the N side of Väsbyfjärden 3 miles WSW of Dalarö (7.99). The harbour is open and consists of several pontoon jetties providing berths with depths of 3 to 8 m. Useful mark: Koön Light (metal post) (59°07′⋅1N, 18°19′⋅6E), displayed when required from the SW side of the peninsula. The harbour is approached through a buoyed channel which leads N between Koön Light and Mårbärsskär, an islet 2 cables W, thence turning W to the berths. Speed is limited to 7 kn in the approach and to 5 kn in the vicinity of the harbour. Facilities. All the usual services are available including a slip which can take vessels up to 12 m in length.
Dalarö 1
1
7.99 Description. There is accommodation for small craft at Dalarö (59°08′N, 18°25′E), both at Hotellbryggan on the SE side of the peninsula, and in Askfatshamnen, a marina on the NW side. All the usual services are available including a slip with a capacity of 2 tonnes and several boatyards for repairs. 7.100 Dalarö Canal. A canal, separating Dalarö from the mainland, extends E for about 5 cables from Askfatshamnen into Vadviken, providing access for small craft to Gränöfjärden (59°11′N, 18°26′E) and thence to Stockholm. The depth in the canal is about 1⋅2 m over a bottom width of 6 m and it is spanned by two fixed bridges. The least vertical clearance is 2⋅5 m with an opening of 6 m.
1
1
Speed is limited to 5 kn in the canal section and to 7 kn in Vadviken. 7.101 Vadviken (59°08′⋅5N, 18°25′⋅3E), a well-sheltered small craft and yacht harbour with depths of 2 m to 6 m, lies close N of Dalarö at the E entrance to Dalarö Canal near the S end of Vadviken. It contains a number of pontoon jetties providing numerous berths. Facilities. All the usual facilities are available including a shipyard for repairs and a slip with a capacity of 20 tonnes. 7.102 Anchorage off Dalarö may be obtained in depths of from 13 to 28 m, sand, N of Rågholmen (4 cables S) or in depths of 12 to 15 m, sand, E of Jutholmen (3 cables S). Local knowledge is required. Anchoring and diving are prohibited in a small area, shown on the chart, on the S side of Dalarö, and diving is prohibited in the vicinity of the adjacent jetties.
DALARÖ TO KANHOLMSFJÄRDEN INCLUDING ROUTES NORTH FROM JUNGFRUFJÄRDEN General information Charts 3143, 3156
Routes 1
2
3
4
7.103 Main channel. From Dalarö (59°08′N, 18°25′E) the channel to Stockholm, authorised for a draught of 10 m, leads through Jungfrufjärden and Namdöfjärden to Kanholmsfjärden, 15 miles NE, where it joins the Sandhamn-Stockholm channel described at 7.147. Branch channel. An alternative track, the first part of which is authorised for a draught of 4⋅2 m, branches N from the 10 m channel in Jungfrufjärden, leading N and NE through the narrow passages between the islands NE of Dalarö, thence, passing S of Grönö (59°12′⋅5N, 18°34′⋅0E), rejoins the main channel off Kofotsgrund (59°13′⋅1N, 18°36′⋅8E). Jungfrufjärden to Baggensfjärden, Gustavsberg and Stockholm. From the E part of Jungfrufjärden, a channel, authorised for a draught of 4⋅2 m, leads N into Ingaröfjärden (59°14′N, 18°27′E), thence through Ägnöfjärden into Baggensfjärden (59°18′N, 18°19′E) which leads to Gustavsberg. This channel divides at the S end of Baggensfjärden where a minor channel for small craft branches NNW, leading to Stockholm via Baggensstäket (59°18′⋅5N, 18°17′⋅5E) (7.115). An alternative minor channel leads from Dalarö through the islands N of Jungfrufjärden to join the 4⋅2 m channel at the N end of Ägnöfjärden. Secondary channel leading north-west from Namdöfjärden. A channel, authorised for a draught of 4⋅5 m and used by local traffic, leads from the N end of Namdöfjärden initially W and N of Fågelbrolandet, thence N through Älgöfjärd and Vindöström, joining the main Sandhamn-Stockholm channel at the entrance to Sandöfjärden (59°23′N, 18°34′E) (7.147).
Restricted area 1
272
7.104 An area with a radius of 500 m, the site of an historic wreck, within which anchoring and diving operations are prohibited, is centred on Franska Stenarna Light (59°15′N, 18°40′E), as shown on the chart.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Landmarks 7.105 1
1
Two radio masts (red lights) (59°16′⋅7N, 18°42′⋅6E), on the NE extremity of Hölö; the tallest mast has an elevation of 88 m. Other radio masts (red lights), including one with an elevation of 72 m, stand in the vicinity of Stavsnäs (1 mile NNW). House on the islet of Lilla Finn (59°13′N, 18°36′E), W of Kofotsgrund.
2
Directions for main channel 1
2
1
2
3
4
(continued from 7.89) 7.106 From a position close N of Piltholmsknall Light (59°08′⋅6N, 18°27′⋅8E) (7.88), in the intensified white sector (252°–254½°), astern, of Hummelkläpp Light (7.88), the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads ENE for 3 miles to a position NNE of Fjärdhällan Light (white round tower, black base, 7 m in height), displayed from the E of a group of rocks, passing SE of Engelsgrund (5 cables N of Fjärdhällan Light), a shoal marked by Husarn Light-buoy (port hand). Useful mark: Saltkråkan Beacon (white pole, ball topmark, 9 m in height) (1 mile NW of Fjärdhällan Light). An alternative track may be used, passing S of Piltholm and Fjärdhällan, as shown on the chart. By night it leads in the white sector (254°–257½°), astern, of Genböte Light. Attention is drawn to a 9⋅5 m patch, 1 cable SSE of Piltholmsgrynnan, a shoal with a rock awash, marked by a buoy (port hand), lying 2¼ cables SSW of Piltholmsknall Light, and to a 7⋅8 m patch lying 1½ cables ENE of Fjärdhällan Light. 7.107 Thence the track leads NNE for 3¾ miles in the white sector (202°–205°), astern, of Fjärdhällan Light, passing (with positions from Fjärdhällan Light): ESE of Stora Husarn (1 mile N), thence: ESE of Dalgrensgrund (1½ miles N), marked by a buoy (port hand), and: WNW of a 9⋅2 m patch (1¾ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: ESE of Mariagrundet (2½ miles NNE), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: WNW of Mellskärsgrund Beacon (black cylindrical cairn, square topmark) (3½ miles NNE). Thence the fairway, marked by buoys (lateral), leads NE for 1 mile in the white sector (030°–044°) of Kofoten Light (lantern on white hut, red band; floodlit) (59°13′⋅4N, 18°37′⋅1E), passing close NW of Kofotsgrund Light (green tower, white top, grey base, 8 m in height). It then continues NE for 4½ miles, first in the white sector (213°–220°), astern, of Kofotsgrund Light, then in the white sector (035°–042°), ahead, of Långholmen Light (lantern on white hut, green band, 6 m in height) (59°18′⋅3N, 18°45′⋅5E), to a position off the NE extremity of Hölö, passing (with positions from Kofotsgrund Light): NW of Furuskär (1 mile NE), on the E extremity of which stand two beacons, and: SE of Malmögrund (1 mile NNE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NW of Sandskär (1¾ miles NE), on the N point of which stands a beacon, thence: NW of Franska Stenarna (2½ miles NE), on which stands a light (white lantern, green band).
3
1
2
7.108 From the NE extremity of Hölö the track turns N for about 1 mile in the white sector (357½°–003°), ahead, of Runö Light (white lantern; floodlit) (59°17′⋅8N, 18°42′⋅9E), passing (with positions from the light): E of a light-buoy (port hand) (8 cables S) marking the limit of shoal water on the W side of the fairway, thence: Between Tegelhällan Light (lantern on mast on white hut, red band, 7 m in height) (6 cables SSW) and Södra Berghamn, 2¼ cables E. Thence the track leads NNE for about 7½ cables in the white sector (202½°–209°), astern, of Tegelhällan Light passing (with positions from Tegelhällan Light): ESE of Runö (6 cables NNE). Foul ground extending NE from Runö is marked by a buoy (port hand). And: WNW of Råbocken (1 mile NE). Thence the track leads NE initially in the white sector (221°–224°), astern, of Runö Light, then N through Kanholmsfjärden, joining the main Sandhamn-Stockholm fairway about 1 mile SE of Klövholmen Light (59°22′⋅3N, 18°45′⋅2E) (7.149), passing SE of Trollharan Light (white square on white framework tower, 6 m in height) (59°19′⋅0N, 18°44′⋅9E). The N part of the fairway is marked by the white sector (179½°–194°), astern, of Långholmen Light. (Directions continue at 7.149) 7.109 Alternative channel. From Franska Stenarna, an alternative track into Kanholmsfjärden, shown on the chart, leads between Södra Berghamn and Runmarö, in the white sector (035°–042°), ahead, of Långholmen Light, passing NW of a 1⋅5 m patch (9 cables SW of Långholmen Light), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand). The track then passes between Långholmen Light and an islet close W through a passage only ½ cable wide and continues across Kanholmsfjärden in the white sector (212°–214°), astern, of Långholmen Light, and the white sector (030°–046°), ahead, of Fjärdholmen Light (59°21′⋅4N, 18°49′⋅8E) (7.267), to the junction of Rödlögaleden (7.262) and Husaröleden (7.262). Link to Sandhamn. From a position 6½ cables SW of Långholmen Light a branch of this channel, shown on the chart, leads S of Långholmen and Yxhammarskobben (1½ miles ENE) (7.139). (Directions for Rödlögaleden are given at 7.267 and for Husaröleden at 7.272)
4V2 m branch channel 1
2
273
7.110 From a position about 1 mile E of Piltholmsknall Light (59°08′⋅6N, 18°27′⋅8E) (7.88) the track, shown on the chart, leads N on the line of bearing, 358°, of Östra Stendörren Beacon (red top) (59°11′⋅0N, 18°29′⋅5E), passing W of foul ground marked at its extremity by a buoy (starboard hand) (9 cables S of the beacon). Thence the track turns NE on the line of bearing, 226½°, astern, of this beacon, which leads through a narrow passage, marked by buoys (lateral), between Ramön and Stora Vindåsen, thence it leads N for 1½ miles to join the main 4⋅2 m track to Baggensfjärden off Sandhamns-kobbarna (7.112). A link channel, of no authorised draught, branches off from the above narrow passage thence leads 3¾ miles NE in the white sector (063½°–066°), ahead, of Kofotsgrund Light (59°13′⋅1N, 18°36′⋅8E) (7.107) to join the 10⋅0 m channel off Kofotsgrund, passing:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
3
1
Between Grönö Light (red tower, white top, 8 m in height) (59°12′⋅5N, 18°34′⋅0E), displayed from the S end of the islet, and Grönöknallen, (2 cables SE), a shoal patch, marked by a buoy (starboard hand). 7.111 Useful marks: Two beacons on the E side of Stendörren, 2 cables SW of Östra Stendörren Beacon. Beacon (grey cylindrical cairn, red square topmark) on Klacknäsgrynnan, 1¼ miles W of Grönö Light.
2
3
Jungfrufjärden to Baggensfjärden 4V2 m channel 1
2
3
4
7.112 From a position 1 mile NNE of Fjärdhällan Light (59°09′⋅3N, 18°33′⋅3E) (7.106) the track, shown on the chart, leads initially N for 1 mile, in the white sector (352°–358°), ahead, of Grönö Light (59°12′⋅5N, 18°34′⋅0E) (7.110), thence NW for 10 miles to the S entrance to Baggensfjärden, passing (with positions from Grönö Light): E of Dalgrensgrund (1½ miles S), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NE of Husaröknallen (1½ miles S), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NE of Sandhamns-kobbarna (3 miles W) where it is joined by a branch of the 4⋅2 m channel from the E part of Jungfrufjärden (7.110), thence: Through Ingaröfjärden (3½ miles NW), passing: NE of Grisselholmen (4½ miles NW), thence: Through Ägnöfjärden, passing between Ronnskär (6½ miles NW), and Tallskär, 2 cables SSW, thence: Through Fallström (7½ miles NW), the narrow passage between Ingarö and Älgö. The 4⋅2 m track then leads 2 miles N to Gustavsberg at the head of the inlet, and another track leads NNW to Baggensstäket (7.115) on the W side of the inlet. Speed is limited to 12 kn in Fallström.
Minor channel through Gränöfjärden 1
2
(continued from 7.91) 7.113 From a position between the E extremity of Edesön (59°09′N, 18°28′E) and Munken, 2 cables N, the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads NW, then W, into Gränöfjärden (59°11′N, 18°26′E), passing SW of Måsholmen (4 cables N of Munken), and SW of Stora Brandholmen (1¼ miles NW of Munken). The track leads generally NNW through Gränöfjärden for about 4½ miles, then enters Ägnöfjärden through Ägnösund, a narrow buoyed passage close N of Ägnö (59°14′⋅5N, 18°23′⋅5E), and joins the 4⋅2 m track close N of the E end of Älgö, 2 miles NW.
Baggensstäket 1
1
2
7.116 In Lännerstasundet the track, shown on the national chart, passes S of Mårtensholme, which lies in mid-channel 1¼ miles W of the entrance to Baggensstäket. Passage N of Mårtensholme is prohibited. Speed is limited to 8 kn through Lännerstasundet and thence through Skurusundet to Sverigesholme, except for the wider part of the fairway in the W part of Lännerstasundet where the limit is 12 kn. At Tollare, on the N side of the fairway, there is a factory served by a jetty and a quay. The quay is 100 m in length with a depth of 3 m alongside.
Harbours Chart 3143
Saltsjöbaden 1
2
3
Chart 2362, Swedish Chart 6142 (see 1.34)
Description 7.114 Small craft can reach Stockholm via a channel leading W from Baggensfjärden through Baggensstäket (59°18′⋅5N, 18°17′⋅5E) and Lännerstasundet (close W), thence N through Skurusundet (chart 3155) (about 2¼ miles NW), to join the main channel to Stockholm close N of the islet of Sverigeholmen (59°20′N, 18°13′E). It is reported that
7.115 Baggensstäket, a narrow buoyed channel, leads SW for about 1 mile from the W side of Baggensfjärden. Speed in the channel is limited to 5 kn.
Lännerstasundet
Baggensfjärden to Stockholm
1
N-bound traffic is directed to pass E of the islet and S-bound traffic W. In 1996 the controlling depth in the channel was 3 m in Baggensstäket. The channel is marked by light-buoys and buoys. The least vertical clearance under the bridges and cables which cross this route is one of 30 m. The channel may be affected by ice between December and March. Useful marks: Boo Light (white hut, green band), displayed from the N side of the E entrance to Baggensstäket. Light-beacons (white triangles apex up, red border) (close E of Boo Light). In line bearing 000° they mark the direction of an outfall lying across the entrance.
7.117 Description. Saltsjöbaden (59°17′N, 18°18′E), on the W side of Baggensfjärden, is a holiday resort with a small craft harbour. The harbour is usually affected by ice from December to March. Speed is restricted to 5 kn. Anchorage may be obtained off Hotellviken, a small bay off the SE end of the town, in depths of from 9 to 12 m. The anchorage is approached through a spur from the 4⋅2 m channel, shown on the chart, marked by buoys (lateral), which passes N of Älgö. Local knowledge is required. Berths. There are marinas at Dalaröbryggan, near Hotellviken, and at Pålnäsviken, 8 cables NW, providing numerous berths at floating pontoon jetties and shoreline jetties with depths of 2 to 5 m. Services. All the usual facilities are available including two slips, each with a maximum capacity of 6 tonnes. A further slip and boatyard are located in Moranviken, close N of Pålnäsviken. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Gustavsberg 1
274
7.118 Description. Gustavsberg (59°19′⋅5N, 18°23′⋅0E), is a small commercial and pleasure craft harbour at the E end of Farstaviken, an inlet which is approached through Farstasundet, a narrow buoyed channel leading from the
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
3
4
NE side of Baggensfjärden. Gypsum and china clay are handled and the town is noted principally for its china factory. It has a population of about 8000. The harbour is suitable for vessels with a draught up to 4⋅2 m. A road bridge spans Farstasundet with a vertical clearance of 22 m over a width of 30 m. A submarine cable and pipeline are laid in the middle of the channel through Farstasundet. The assistance of an icebreaker is usually required between January and April. Local knowledge is required. Speed is restricted to 7 kn in Farstasundet and to 5 kn in the harbour. Useful marks: Water Tower (59°19′⋅8N, 18°23′⋅6E), close N of the town. Factory Chimney (59°19′⋅4N, 18°23′⋅0E), at china factory. Anchorage may be obtained off the entrance to Farstasundet in depths of from 10 to 26 m, clay. Berths. In the W part of the harbour there is a quay 74 m in length with a depth of about 4⋅8 m alongside, used mainly for commercial and local traffic. The porcelain factory lies in the E part of the harbour but its quay is in poor condition. There are also several pontoon jetties, providing numerous berths for yachts and small craft, with depths of 2 to 5 m. Supplies: fresh water; provisions.
2
Minor channel leading north-west from Namdöfjärden 1
2
Chart 3156
Bullandö 1
7.119 Description. Bullandö (59°18′N, 18°39′E), which lies on a small peninsula in a bay on the SE side of Värmdölandet is a large small craft harbour containing the largest marina complex in the central archipelago. The pontoon piers
which form the harbour surround the entire perimeter of the peninsula, extending seaward at right angles to the shore. Entry to the harbour is made from the S in a position 6 cables W of the bridge at the S end of Djurönäset (7.120). Thence the channel, marked on its W side by buoys (special), leads 2 cables NNE to the harbour. Berths. There are berths available at the pontoon jetties with depths of between 2 and 5 m.
3
7.120 From a position about 2 cables SE of Tegelhallän Light (59°17′⋅2N, 18°42′⋅6E) (7.108) the track, shown on the chart, authorised for a draught of 4⋅5 m and marked by buoys (lateral), leads initially N between Runö and Stavsnäs thence W along the N side of Fågelbrolandet, passing under a fixed bridge, with a vertical clearance of 20 m, which spans the fairway at the S end of Djurönäset, 5 cables E of Bullandö (59°18′N, 18°39′E) (7.119). Thence the track leads NNE and NNW for a total of 5½ miles to join the main Sandhamn-Stockholm channel close S of Kalvö Light (59°22′⋅4N, 18°36′⋅9E) (7.149), passing (with positions from the bridge): Through Simpströmmen (7 cables N), a narrow passage marked by buoys (lateral), thence: Through Älgöfjärd (2 miles N), passing ENE of Stora Älgön and Lilla Älgön, thence: Through Vindöström (4 miles NNW), the passage leading between Vindö on the E and Värmdölandet on the W, thence: WNW for a short distance to join the main channel as described above. Ice. When Älgöfjärd is ice-bound, notice boards prohibiting navigation are set up, and vessels must use the ice channel through Kanholmsfjärden.
SANDHAMN TO STOCKHOLM Saxarfjärden to Långholmsfjärden (7.156). Långholmsfjärden to Stockholm including Askrikefjärden and Lidingö (7.173). Stockholm (7.190).
GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2362, 3144, 3157, 3156, 3155, 3114
Description 1
2
3
7.121 This section describes the approaches and channels, known as Sandhamnsleden, of the Sandhamn Entrance and the main route to Stockholm via Kanholmsfjärden (59°20′N, 18°47′E), where the channel joins with the main route from Landsort, N of Vindö (59°21′N, 18°42′E) and through Sandöfjärden (59°23′N, 18°34′E), N of Värmdölandet through the S part of Västra Saxarfjärden (59°27′N, 18°27′E), Solöfjärden (59°23′N, 18°27′E), and N of Ormingelandet through Långholmsfjärden. Various secondary and alternative channels within this part of the archipelago are also described. The port of Stockholm, with its various sections, is described together with a number of terminals and berthing areas which lie in the vicinity, but outside the Stockholm harbour limits. Also included are Askrikefjärden and Lidingön, close N of Stockholm, and other minor harbours and channels. It is arranged as follows: Sandhamn Entrance and approaches (7.129). Kanholmsfjärden to Saxarfjärden (7.147).
Pilotage 1
7.122 See 7.4 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Pilotage is provided by Stockholm Pilot Station. Requests for pilots should be sent not less than 5 hours in advance with updates if necessary. Pilot boarding positions, shown on the chart, are 2 miles or 4⋅5 miles SE of Revengegrundet (59°15′N, 19°01′E), dependent on tonnage. The outer position is for vessels over 35 000 dwt and the inner position for vessels under 35 000 dwt.
Vessel Traffic Service 1
275
7.123 A mandatory Reporting and Information System is in force for the control of shipping, located in the Traffic Information Centre at VTS Stockholm. Positions of reporting points are shown on the charts. For full details of the area covered, information required, categories of vessels and reporting points see 7.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Traffic regulations 1
1
2
7.124 Traffic Separation Schemes are established in various areas of the waters within this section. Their positions are mentioned in the appropriate section of the text. 7.125 Restricted areas. There are two restricted areas in the vicinity of Sandhamn Entrance, the limits of which are shown on the chart: Sandhamn Western Restricted Area (59°17′⋅5N, 18°52′⋅0E), extending N from Lilla Hästskär (59°15′⋅3N, 18°52′⋅6E) to Ingboskäret (59°19′⋅3N, 18°54′⋅0E), bounded on the E by the E point of Gjusharan (59°18′⋅2N, 18°55′⋅3E) and on the W by Näsudden (59°18′⋅1N, 18°47′⋅5E). Sandhamn Eastern Restricted Area (59°17′N, 19°00′E) extending NNW from Sandhamns Stångskär (59°16′⋅7N, 19°00′⋅0E) to enclose on the E, Grönskär (59°16′⋅7N, 19°01′⋅4E), on the N, Rönnskäret (59°17′⋅9N, 19°00′⋅0E), and on the W, Kroksö (59°17′⋅4N, 18°56′⋅0E).
3
Secondary channel. A channel with a least charted depth of 9 m leads NW and W from Sandhamns Stångskär (59°16′⋅7N, 19°00′⋅0E), passing ENE of Korsö, N of Björkö and Kroksö thence joining the main channel ESE of Getholmen (59°18′⋅0N, 18°52′⋅5E). Sandhamnssundet. A small vessel channel, 30 m wide and limited to vessels up to 300 grt with a draught of about 5 m, leads WNW through Sandhamnssundet (59°17′⋅4N, 18°55′⋅0E) (7.144), a narrow passage between the NE side of Sandön and Telegrafholmen, close NE, joining the main channel ESE of Getholmen (59°18′⋅0N, 18°52′⋅5E).
Topography 1
7.130 A number of islands and groups of islets lie in the S approaches to Sandhamn Entrance, the southernmost group being Brandskärgården, about 2½ miles S of the S end of Sandön.
Pilotage 1
Rescue 1
7.126 A MRSC is located at Stockholm. For further information on distress and rescue see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5.
Traffic regulations 1
Submarine cables and pipelines 1
7.127 See 7.12.
Unsurveyed areas 1
2
7.128 Sandhamn Entrance lies between two extensive areas, shown on the charts, where the coastal archipelago has been incompletely surveyed and within which uncharted shoals and other dangers may exist.
1
General information Charts 3144, 3157, 3156, 3155
1
2
7.129 Main channel. From a position in the approaches E of Almagrundet (59°09′N, 19°08′E) the main channel, authorised for a draught of 11⋅0 m, leads generally NW for about 19 miles to a position in the S part of Kanholmsfjärden NNW of Yxhammarskobben (59°18′⋅8N, 18°48′⋅6E), passing W of Sandön (59°17′N, 18°55′E) and N of Skarp-Runmarö (59°18′N, 18°50′E). Alternative channel. An alternative channel, with a least charted depth of 21 m, leads N for 6 miles from a position W of Almagrundet to join the main channel close SE of Revengegrundet (59°15′N, 19°01′E).
7.132 Size limitations. Vessels over 300 grt are prohibited from using Sandhamnssundet, the channel between Sandön and Telegrafholmen (59°17′⋅4N, 18°54′⋅9E). Vessels exceeding 800 grt are not allowed to meet in the following channel sections: Skötkobben — Tviskäret on the W side of Sandön, between latitudes 59°17′⋅0N and 59°17′⋅6N. Getholmen — Smörasken about 1 mile WNW of Sandön, between longitudes 18°51′⋅7E and 18°52′⋅6E. Speed restriction. Vessels with a length exceeding 12 m and a beam exceeding 4 m are restricted to a maximum speed of 12 kn in the main channel from Sandhamn to Stockholm.
Principal marks
SANDHAMN ENTRANCE AND APPROACHES
Routes
7.131 See 7.4 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
2
7.133 Landmarks: Almagrundet Lighthouse (59°09′N, 19°08′E) (7.24). Revengegrundet Lighthouse (59°15′N, 19°01′E) (7.24). Radio masts (59°16′⋅7N, 18°42′⋅6E) (7.105). Grönskär Light, standing on Grönskär (59°16′⋅7N, 19°01′⋅4E). Korsö Tower (grey round tower, 22 m in height) (59°17′⋅1N, 18°56′⋅7E), standing on the W part of Korsö. Major lights: Almagrundet Light (59°09′N, 19°08′E) (7.24). Revengegrundet Light (59°15′N, 19°01′E) (7.24).
Other aids to navigation 1
276
7.134 Racons: Almagrundet Light (59°09′N, 19°08′E). Revengegrundet Light (59°15′N, 19°01′E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Utkiken Tower (59°17′⋅2N, 18°54′⋅7E). Västerhålets Light (59°17′⋅5N, 18°52′⋅7E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
1
Directions (continued from 7.28)
2
Main channel 1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
7.135 Almagrundet to Kanholmsfjärden. From a position about 5 miles E of Almagrundet Light (59°09′N, 19°08′E) the track, shown on the chart, leads initially about 10 miles NW, by night in the white sector (295°–307½°) of Revengegrundet Light (59°15′N, 19°01′E), and as an additional aid, on the alignment (305°) of the racons transmitting from Revengegrundet Light and Utkiken Tower (59°17′⋅2N, 18°54′⋅7E) respectively. Thence the track trends a further 9 miles generally NW, leading about 2 miles NW, 2½ miles W round the S end of Sandön, 1½ miles N and finally about 3 miles NW to a position in the S part of Kanholmsfjärden 3 cables NNW of Yxhammarskobben (59°18′⋅8N, 18°48′⋅6E) and W of Gastholmsgrundet, passing (with positions from Revengegrundet Light): NE of Almagrundet Lighthouse (6½ miles SSE), thence: NE of Prejaren (4 miles SE), a shoal marked by a light-buoy (E cardinal), lying close W of the outer pilot boarding position, thence: NE of a 12⋅8 m shoal (3 miles SE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SW of Södergrundan (1 mile ESE), marked by a light-buoy (S cardinal), and: SW of Södergrynnan (1 mile E), rocks awash marked by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NE of Revengegrundet. By night the white sector (326½°–343½°) of Sandhamns Stångskär Light (59°16′⋅7N, 19°00′⋅0E) leads through the fairway NE of Revengegrundet. Thence: NE of Stången (1 mile NNW), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: N of Svängen Light (red tower, black bands, 15 m in height; floodlit) (59°16′⋅2N, 18°58′⋅5E), displayed from a rock on the S side of the channel. 7.136 Leading beacons: Front beacon (red triangular board point up) (59°15′⋅5N, 18°53′⋅6E), standing on Stora Hästskär. Rear beacon (red triangular board point down) (4 cables SW of front beacon), standing on Lilla Hästskär. The alignment (250°) of these beacons leads WSW through the channel W of Svängen Light, and by night in the white sector (070°–074½°), astern, of Sandhamns Stångskär Light, passing (with positions from Svängen Light): NNW of Kröken (5 cables W), marked on its N side by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: NNW of Norra Bådan (7 cables WSW), a shoal marked by a buoy (port hand), and covered by the red sector (191½°–220°) of Österskär Light (7.137), thence: S round Bryntostkobb Light-buoy (isolated danger) (1½ miles WSW), moored on the S limit of the shoal water extending S from Sandön, thence: NE of Hötterskär (1¾ miles WSW), marked by a light-buoy (port hand). Thence:
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
277
7.137 Leading lights: Front light (orange rectangle) (59°16′⋅9N, 18°52′⋅0E), displayed from Svartgrund. Rear light (similar structure) (3½ cables NW of front light), displayed from Vindalsö. The alignment (304½°) of these lights leads through the fairway NW of Hötterskär, and by night in the white sector (118½°–126°), astern, of Österskär Light (red structure) (59°15′⋅4N, 18°56′⋅8E), displayed from an islet SSE of the fairway. The track passes NE of Ädan Light-buoy, marking the SW side of the channel and moored 4 cables NE of Ädkobben Light (red lantern) (59°15′⋅8N, 18°53′⋅8E), standing on the E side of the islet. This alignment (304½°) also leads to the anchorage area (7.145) on the W side of the fairway. Thence: 7.138 Stannkobben Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle, yellow stripe, on white pedestal) (59°18′⋅4N, 18°53′⋅4E), displayed from an islet close off the SE part of Eknö, an island 1½ miles NNW of Sandön. Rear light (similar structure) (350 m N of front light), displayed from the SE part of Eknö. The alignment (352°) of these lights, visible on the leading line only, leads N along the W side of Sandön and through the narrow passage between Skötkobben and Sandö to Farfarsgrundet, on which stands a light (red structure) (59°17′⋅7N, 18°53′⋅3E), passing (with positions from this light): WSW of a beacon (1¼ miles SSE), standing off the SW side of Sandön, thence: WSW of a 1⋅3 m patch (1 mile SSE), at the E limit of the shoal area extending SW from Sandön, marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), and a beacon standing on Oxudden, the SW point of Sandön. Thence: E of Skötkobben Light (orange tower, white top, 8 m in height, floodlit) (5½ cables SSE), displayed from the E side of the islet. In addition to the leading lights the white sectors (346°–357°), ahead, and (172°–183°), astern, of the light lead through the channel S and N of Skötkobben. A strong current may be experienced in the narrow passage E of Skötkobben, the direction of which is generally influenced by, and runs with, the direction of the prevailing wind. Thence: W of Västerudden (3½ cables SSE), the NW point of Sandön on which stands a beacon (cairn, floodlit), and: E of Svarten (2½ cables SSE), a shoal patch marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: E of Tviskäret (1½ cables S), close E of which stands a beacon (mast, red rectangular topmark, 8 m in height, floodlit). A light-buoy (port hand is moored close E of the beacon. Thence: NE of a light-buoy (port hand) moored at the edge of the channel close NE of Farfarsgrundet, marking the limit of the shoal water. The racon transmitting from Västerhålets Light (grey beacon) (3 cables SW), from which a light is also displayed, together form a useful navigational aid when making the turn round Farfarsgrundet. 7.139 Thence the track leads WNW to a position about 1½ cables W of Gastholmsgrundet Light (lantern on green pedestal) (59°19′⋅1N, 18°48′⋅6E), standing on a rock on the
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
3
4
1
NE side of the channel N of Yxhammarskobben Light, passing (with positions from Västerhålets Light): SSW of Getholmen Light (white lantern, green band, on hut; floodlit) (6 cables NNW), displayed from the SW side of Getholmen (6 cables N), thence: NNE of Smörasken Light (red structure; floodlit) (6½ cables NW), displayed close E of Matsholmen (7 cables NW). By night the white sector (102°–110°), astern, of Getholmen Light leads through the fairway WNW of the light. Thence: NNE of Taskobben (1 mile NW), a shoal marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: SSE of a beacon (floodlit) (1¼ miles NW), standing on the SW side of Eknö, and by night into the white sector (292°–298°), ahead, of Yxhammarskobben Light which leads through the fairway. Thence: NNE of a beacon (white cairn, floodlit) (2 miles NW) standing on the N point of Skarp-Runmarö, and: NE of Yxhammarskobben Light (red housing on white base, 7 m in height) (2½ miles NW), standing on the NE point of the islet, thence: To a position in the S part of Kanholmsfjärden close W of Gastholmsgrundet. 7.140 Vessels proceeding S through the narrow channel between Sandön and Skötkobben may find the alignment (177°) of Skötkobben Light and Ådkobben Light useful to lead S through the N part of the channel, thence the alignment (352°), astern, of Stannkobben Leading Lights leads through the S part of the channel.
2
Sandhamnssundet 1
2
3
4
Useful marks 7.141 1
Svartbådan Beacon (cask on pole with stays, 12 m in height) (59°14′⋅7N, 18°57′⋅8E), standing on an islet WSW of Revengegrundet. Heinicke Tower (tall grey structure) (59°17′⋅5N, 18°55′⋅6E), standing on the NE side of Lökholmen. (Directions continue at 7.149)
5
Alternative channel 1
2
3
7.142 From a position in the approaches about 4 miles WSW of Almagrundet Lighthouse (59°09′N, 19°08′E) the track, shown on the chart, leads 6 miles N to join the main channel about 4 cables E of Revengegrundet Light (59°15′N, 19°01′E), and by night in the white sector (000°–005½°), ahead, of the light, passing (with positions from this light): W of Almasgrund (5½ miles S), marked at its W limit by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: E of Högen (3 miles SSW), a shoal, thence: E of an 8⋅3 m patch (9 cables S), marked by a buoy (E cardinal) moored 5 cables ESE of Stålbådan (1 mile SW), thence: SE of Revengegrundet to join the main channel close E of the light.
6
7.143 Local knowledge is required. From a position 3 cables W of Sandhamns Stångskär Light (yellow round tower, white top, 7 m in height) (59°16′⋅7N, 19°00′⋅0E), standing on the SW side of Sandhamns Stångskär, the track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys (lateral), leads initially about 1½ miles NW, passing through the channel between Korsökobben
7.144 Sandhamnssundet (59°17′⋅4N, 18°55′⋅0E), the narrow passage between Sandön and Telegrafholmen, is restricted to vessels of less than 300 grt. Speed is restricted to 5 kn in Sandhamnssundet. From a position in the main channel about 3 cables NW of Svängen Light (59°16′⋅2N, 18°58′⋅5E), the track, shown on the chart and marked by buoys (lateral), leads generally WNW for 3 miles to join the main channel NE of Farfarsgrundet (59°17′⋅7N, 18°53′⋅3E), passing (with positions from Sandhamn Light (yellow tower on corner of pilot house, 10 m in height) (59°17′⋅4N, 18°54′⋅9E), displayed from the NE side of Sandön): NE of Löjtnantsknalt (1¼ miles SE), a shoal marked by a buoy (E cardinal). By night the white sector (304°–307°), ahead, of Sandhamn Light leads through the first part of the fairway. Thence: SW of a 2⋅2 m shoal (1 mile SE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NE of a buoy (port hand) marking the NE limit of the shoal water extending from the E side of Sandön. Thence: SW of Prickgrundet Light (white structure, yellow top), displayed from Prickgrundet (5 cables SE). The shoal water extending SW from the islet is marked by a light-buoy, close W, and another buoy, close S (both starboard hand). Thence: Clear NE of the jetties at the SE end of Sandhamn harbour (2 cables SE), thence: Through the middle of the narrow channel between Sandön and Telegrafholmen, passing close NE of Sandhamn Light, thence: SW of Stora Jutkobben (4 cables NW) on which stands a beacon, thence: NE of Farfarsgrundet Lighthouse (8 cables NW) (7.138), to join the main channel as described above.
Anchorages and harbours 7.145
Anchorages 1
Secondary channel north of Björkö 1
(59°17′⋅4N, 18°58′⋅0E) and the extensive shoal area close NE. Thence the track leads a farther 2½ miles W, joining the main channel 1½ cables ESE of Getholmen Light (59°18′⋅1N, 18°52′⋅5E) and passing (with positions from this light): N of Björkö (2½ miles E), thence: S of Rörskäret (1¾ miles E), thence: S of Långskär (7 cables E), thence: To join the main channel as described above.
2
278
Anchorage may be obtained in four areas, indicated on the chart, in the vicinity of Sandhamn Entrance: On the W side of the main approach channel, centred 1½ miles SE of Revengegrundet Light (59°15′N, 19°01′E), in depths of 28 to 51 m, sand and clay. SW of Sandön in a position 7 cables NNW of Ådkobben (59°15′⋅8N, 18°53′⋅8E) in depths of 22 to 37 m, sand. 2 cables E of Lilla Jutkobben (59°17′⋅7N, 18°54′⋅3E), NW of Telegrafholmen, in depths of about 35 m, sand and clay. Local knowledge is required. N of Eknö in Eknösundet, 1¼ miles E of Yxhammarskobben Light (59°18′⋅8N, 18°48′⋅6E), in depths of about 38 to 52 m, clay.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Chart 3157
Sandhamn 1
2
3
7.146 Description. Sandhamn (59°17′⋅3N, 18°55′⋅3E), a small holiday village with a small craft and pleasure boat harbour lies on the NE side of Sandön. The harbour consists of a small bay with pontoon jetties extending seawards at its SE end, further jetties along the shoreline and a detached pier at its N end joined to the shore by a walkway. The harbour, which has depths of about 8 to 20 m, is entered directly off the channel through Sandhamnssundet (7.144) from a position SE of Sandhamn Light (59°17′⋅4N, 18°54′⋅9E). It is usually free of ice in the winter months. Berths. The N part of the harbour contains the harbour authority berths and a ferry berth with depths of about 1⋅8 to 5 m alongside. The central and SE part has berths on the land and pontoon jetties with depths between 1 to 3 m, and 10 m respectively. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
2
Directions for main channel (continued from 7.108 and 7.141)
Gastholmsgrundet to Kalvön 1
KANHOLMSFJÄRDEN TO SAXARFJÄRDEN 2
General information Charts 3156, 3155
Routes 1
2
3
4
7.147 Main channel. From the S end of Kanholmsfjärden, SW of Gastholmsgrundet (59°19′⋅1N, 18°48′⋅6E), the main Sandhamn-Stockholm channel, authorised for a draught of 11⋅0 m, leads generally NW and W for 15 miles to the SW part of Västra Saxarfjärden (59°27′N, 18°27′E). The track passes through Kanholmsfjärden, N of Vindö (59°21′N, 18°42′E), NW through Sandöfjärden (59°23′N, 18°34′E) and the S part of Östra Saxarfjärden, then W through Västra Saxarfjärden. Alternative channel. An alternative channel, authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m, leads WNW off the main channel N of Sollenkroka Light (59°22′⋅6N, 18°40′⋅4E) (7.149), passing N of Västerholmen (59°23′⋅5N, 18°36′⋅0E), thence between Viggsö (59°24′⋅5N, 18°32′⋅0E) and Grinda, close NE, to rejoin the main channel 5 cables NW of Viggsö. Lindalssundet. A branch channel, authorised for a draught of 8⋅0 m, leads about 1 mile WNW and 3 miles W off the main channel NW of Viggsö, above, passing through Lindalssundet (59°25′⋅5N, 18°27′⋅0E), the passage between the N coast of Värmdölandet and the group of islands close N. This channel joins the main channel at the W end of Lindalssundet. Caution. Passage through Lindalssundet in a westerly direction is restricted. See 7.148. Minor channel. A minor channel leads about 1½ miles NW from the NW part of Kanholmsfjärden to join the main channel close W of Branten Light (59°22′⋅5N, 18°42′⋅9E) (7.149). Other routes, which can be seen on the chart, from the N and NE meet in Kanholmsfjärden and are described in the relevant part of the text.
3
4
5
6
7
Traffic regulations 1
59°19′⋅3N, 18°48′⋅0E — NW of Gastholmsgrundet. 59°22′⋅0N, 18°45′⋅6E — S of Klövholmen. 59°22′⋅5N, 18°35′⋅8E — W of Kalvön. Lindalssundet. Passage through Lindalssundet (59°25′⋅5N, 18°27′⋅0E) (7.155) in a westerly direction is restricted to vessels of 300 grt and less. Ice channel. The winter ice channel from Kanholmsfjärden to Stockholm follows the main 11⋅0 m channel described in this section.
7.148 Traffic separation schemes. See 1.84. The following TSS in the waters covered by this section are IMO adopted and regulations for navigating in these schemes are contained in Rule 10 of International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972):
279
7.149 From a position 1½ cables W of Gastholmsgrundet (59°19′⋅1N, 18°48′⋅6E) the track, shown on the chart, leads initially about 4 miles NNW, thence 4 miles W to Kalvön (59°22′⋅5N, 18°36′⋅5E), passing (with positions from Klövholmen Light (red lantern on red tower, white top) (59°22′⋅3N, 18°45′⋅1E), displayed from the SW side of Klovholmen): Through the E side of the TSS (3½ miles SSE). By night the white sector, (315°–347°), ahead, of Klovholmen Light leads through the initial section of the fairway to Klovholmen. Thence: ENE of Vita Märren (1¼ miles S), on which stands a beacon (pole on white truncated cone, ball topmark), thence: ENE of a 12⋅6 m rocky shoal (7 cables S), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Through the E side of the TSS (4 cables SSE), thence: NNE of Norra Kanholmen Light (white metal post, floodlit), displayed from the NE side of the islet (3 cables SW), and: SSW of Klövholmsgrund (1½ cables W), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: NNE of Inre Kanholmsgrund (9 cables W), marked at its N limit by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: S of Branten Light (white tower, yellow top) (1¼ miles W), standing on the S point of Sollenkroka ö. By night the white sector (285½°–290°), ahead, of the light leads through the channel E of the light. Thence: Between Galten (2 miles W), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand) and Isskär, 1½ cables S, marked by a light-buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (279°–281°), ahead, of Magarna Light (59°22′⋅8N, 18°39′⋅3E) (7.153) leads through this part of the fairway. Thence: N of Sollenkroka Light (white lantern, floodlit) (2½ miles W), displayed from the N side of Vindö. By night the white sector (085°–089°), astern, of the light leads through the fairway W of the light. The 6⋅0 m channel branches WNW from this position. Thence: N of Timmerdalen (3¼ miles W), a shoal marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: S of Kalvö Light (white tower, 10 m in height) (59°22′⋅4N, 18°36′⋅9E), standing on the S point of Kalvön. By night the white sector (263°–266°), ahead, of the light leads partially through the channel to the E of the light. In winter an ice-bridge is periodically established between Kalvön and the NE side of Värmdölandet, 3 cables S.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
1
2
1
2
3
7.150 Useful marks (with positions from Sollenkroka Light, above): Beacon (floodlit) (1 mile E) on Lövk. Two beacons in line (red and yellow boards) (8½ cables E), standing on the SE part of Ängsholmen. Beacon (floodlit) (4 cables W), standing on Svartsvikskär. Two beacons (the W of which is floodlit) (about 1¼ miles W), standing on the NW side of Vindö. 7.151 Minor channel for which local knowledge is required. From a position in the NW part of Kanholmsfjärden close W of Nya Kanholmsgrundet (59°21′⋅5N, 18°45′⋅2E), a 6 m shoal, the track leads 1¾ miles NW to join the main channel 3 cables W of Branten Light (59°22′⋅5N, 18°42′⋅9E), passing (with positions from the light): NE of a 3⋅6 m shoal (9 cables SE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Through the middle of the channel between Stora Kanholmen (7 cables SE) and Lilla Kanholmen, close E, on which stands a beacon, thence: SW of Inre Kanholmsgrund (3 cables SW) (7.149), marked at its S end by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: To a position 3 cables W of Branten Light. A short spur branches from the centre of the channel E of Stora Kanholmen leading NNW to pass NE of Inre Kanholmsgrund and join the main channel close N.
6
7
8
Kalvön to Östra Älgögrundet 1
2
3
4
5
7.152 From a position S of Kalvö Light (59°22′⋅4N, 18°36′⋅9E) the track leads 6 miles NW and 2 miles WNW to Östra Älgögrundet (59°26′⋅7N, 18°24′⋅8E), passing (with positions from Valöarna Light (59°26′⋅0N, 18°29′⋅9E)): N of Boda Light (white framework tower) (59°22′⋅2N, 18°36′⋅4E), displayed from the NE side of Värmdölandet, and S of the shoal area extending S from Kalvön, marked by a buoy (starboard hand). Thence: Through the E side of the TSS (4½ miles SE). By night the white sector (299°–305½°), ahead, of Sandö Sugga Light (59°23′⋅0N, 18°34′⋅3E) leads partially through this section of the channel. Thence: NE of Suggan (4 miles SE), a shoal marked by a light-buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (132°–144°), astern, of Boda Light leads partially through this section of the channel. Thence: NE of Sandö Sugga Light (white framework tower, red band on white hut, 7 m in height) (3¾ miles SE), standing on the E side of the islet, thence: Between Rågholmsgrund (3 miles SE), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), and Sandögrund, 3 cables WSW, marked by a light-buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (309°–313°), ahead, of Nyvarp Light (59°24′⋅3N, 18°31′⋅4E) leads through the fairway SE of the light. Thence: NE of Bolviksnäs Light (red lantern on white hut, red band) (2½ miles SSE), displayed from the mainland, thence: NE of Nyvarp Light (white lantern) (about 2 miles SSE), displayed from the mainland, thence: NE of Mansören (8 cables SSE), on the SE side of which stands a monument. By night the white
sector (147½°–150°), astern, of Bolviksnäs Light leads through this part of the fairway and the white sector (329°–338°), ahead, of Valöarna Light leads partially through the fairway NW of Bolviksnäs Light. Thence: NE of Sippsön (5 cables SW), thence: SW of Valöarna Light (white lantern), displayed from a rock off the NW end of a group of islets, and where a route from the Söderarm and Arholma Entrances joins with the main Sandhamn-Stockholm channel. Thence: NNE of Norrgärdesgrund (9 cables WNW), marked by a light-buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (104½°–107½°), astern, of Valöarna Light leads partially through this section of the channel. Thence: SSW of Västra Saxarfjärden Beacon (cross on black truncated cone) (1½ miles WNW), standing on an area of foul ground which is marked on its S side by a buoy (starboard hand). By night the white sector (283°–286½°), ahead, of Östra Älgögrundet Light (59°26′⋅7N, 18°24′⋅8E) leads partially through this section of the channel. Thence: SSW of Bjurögrund Light (metal framework tower), standing on the S end of a shoal area (2 miles WNW), thence: S of Östra Älgögrundet Light (white tower, green lantern, 8 m in height) (59°26′⋅7N, 18°24′⋅8E), displayed from a rock on the N side of the fairway, where the 8⋅0 m route from the Söderarm and Arholma Entrances joins with the main Sandhamn-Stockholm channel. (Directions for main channel continue at 7.161)
Side channels Alternative channel 1
2
3
4
5
280
7.153 From a position on the main channel N of Sollenkroka Lighthouse (59°22′⋅6N, 18°40′⋅4E), by night, in the white sector (123°–129°), astern, of this light, the track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys (lateral), authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m, leads 5½ miles WNW to rejoin the main channel 2 cables SW of Kungsholmen (59°24′⋅9N, 18°31′⋅5E), passing (with positions from Magarna Lighthouse (59°22′⋅8N, 18°39′⋅3E)): NE of Magarna Light (white lantern), displayed from the SE point of an islet on the SW side of the fairway, thence: NE of a 3⋅5 m shoal (2½ cables NW), marked by a buoy (port hand), by night into the white sector (290°–293°) of Gällnöport Light which partially covers the track W, thence: SW of Portholmen (1½ miles NW), and: NE of Gällnöport Light (white lantern) (1¾ miles NW), displayed from the N end of Västerholmen and passing N of the buoy (port hand) marking the limit of the shoal water extending N from the island. Thence: Through the narrow passage (2 miles NW) between Stora Delholmen and the limit of foul ground extending E from Lilla Delholmen, marked by a buoy (port hand). The white sector (105°–130°) of Gällnöport Light, astern, leads through this passage and the fairway through Grindafjärden to the W. Thence: Through the passage between Grinda and Viggsö (3½ miles NW), passing SW of the buoys
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
(starboard hand) marking the shoals on the N side of the channel. Thence: To a position SW of Kungsholmen.
Link channel — 8V0 m draught 1
7.154 A channel, authorised for a draught of 8⋅0 m, shown on the chart, leads 2 miles N from a position in the main channel SW of Kungsholmen (59°24′⋅9N, 18°31′⋅5E), passing close E of Allmänningsgrund, marked at its SE limit by a buoy (E cardinal), and by night, in the white sector (167°–170°), astern, of Nyvarp Light (59°24′⋅3N, 18°31′⋅4E). The track then joins the 8⋅0 m alternative route from Furusund (7.309) in the S part of Östra Saxarfjärden, 8 cables N of Valöarna Light (59°26′⋅0N, 18°29′⋅9E).
2
3
Lindalssundet 1
2
3
4
5
7.155 Caution. See 7.148. Larger vessels proceeding E through the channel should follow the directions given, in reverse order. Directions. A branch channel, shown on the chart, marked by buoys, authorised for a draught of 8⋅0 m, and which forms an extension WNW of the channel described at 7.153, leads WNW and W from a position on the main channel SW of Kungsholmen, 4 miles through Lindalssundet to join the main channel in a position 2 cables S of Tisterögrund (59°25′⋅8N, 18°23′⋅5E). The track leads initially WNW for 1¼ miles, by night, in the white sector (295°–305½°), ahead, of Lindalen Nedre Light (59°25′⋅3N, 18°29′⋅1E), passing SW of Mansören, to the alignment of Lindalen Leading Lights: Front light. Lindalen Nedre (white lantern on grey base), displayed from a rocky shoal on the NE side of the channel close SW of Sippsön. Rear light. Lindalen Övre (red rectangle, yellow stripe, on white pedestal) (900 m E of front light), standing on the N end of Mansören. The alignment (097°) of these lights, astern, leads W through the channel, passing (with positions from the front light): N of Lindalen Beacon (white, floodlit) (about 1 cable SW), standing on the N side of Värmdölandet, and N of the buoy (port hand) marking the shoal water extending N from the beacon. Thence: N of a 4⋅8 m shoal (6 cables W), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: S of a 6⋅3 m shoal (2 miles W), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: N of Stora Berteln Light (red structure) (2¼ miles W), displayed from the N side of the islet, thence: S of Tisterön (2¾ miles WNW) to a position S of Tisterögrundet, close W. Speed is restricted to 8 kn in the W and E approaches to Lindalssundet and 12 kn within the passage.
Traffic regulations 1
2
1
1
7.159 Permanent defensive minefields, shown on the chart, are laid across the fairway as follows: Extending NW and S of Oxdjupet (59°24′⋅0N, 18°26′⋅3E), on the E side of Rindö. In Resaröström, NW of Resarö (59°26′N, 18°20′E). Anchoring, fishing and underwater operations are prohibited within these areas. For further information see 1.10.
Other aid to navigation
General information 1
Routes 1
7.157 Traffic separation schemes. See 1.84. The following TSS in the waters covered by this section are IMO adopted and regulations for navigating in these schemes are contained in Rule 10 of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972): 59°26′⋅2N, 18°23′⋅2E — NW of Tisterön. 59°21′⋅5N, 18°26′⋅5E — SE of Tynningö. Traffic restrictions. Vessels over 800 grt are not allowed to meet in the following sections of the main channel: Oxdjupet — between latitudes 59°24′⋅2N and 59°23′⋅8N. Tynningö-Bergholmen — between longitudes 18°24′⋅0E and 18°23′⋅0E. 7.158 Kodjupet. Passage through Kodjupet (7.166) is restricted to vessels of 300 grt and under. Vessels less than 12 m in length and 4 m beam must use the E channel when passing Vaxholms Kastell citadel, constructed on an islet (59°24′⋅2N, 18°21′⋅5E) between Vaxholm and Rindö.
Mined areas
SAXARFJÄRDEN TO LÅNGHOLMSFJÄRDEN
Chart 3155
18°24′⋅8E), the track leads a short distance WSW, then SE and S for a total of about 6½ miles through the E part of Trälhavet, then through Oxdjupet (59°24′⋅0N, 18°26′⋅3E) and Solöfjärden (59°23′N, 18°27′E) into the N part of Torsbyfjärden (59°21′N, 18°27′E). Thence the track leads WNW for a farther 5 miles along the SW side of Tynningö and through Långholmsfjärden to a position at its W end, N of Västra Granholmen (59°22′⋅5N, 18°18′⋅0E). Branch channel. From a position in the main channel in the NW part of Torsbyfjärden (7.156) a channel, authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m, branches W to lead 5 miles through the S part of Långholmsfjärden and Höggarnsfjärden to join the main channel S of Älvviksgrundet (59°21′⋅8N, 18°15′⋅6E) (7.175), off the E end of Lidingön. Alternative channel — Kodjupet. A channel, suitable for smaller vessels, restricted to 300 grt or under, authorised for a draught of 3⋅3 m, leads about 5 miles S from the E side of Trälhavet (59°27′N, 18°22′E), passing through Kodjupet (59°25′⋅2N, 18°20′⋅8E) (7.166), E of Vaxholm (7.168), and through Tenösund, W of Tynningö, to join the main channel in the central part of Långholmsfjärden. A short continuation SE joins the 6⋅0 m branch, described above, on the E side of Höggarnsfjärden (59°22′⋅3N, 18°18′⋅3E).
7.156 Main channel. From the SW part of Västra Saxarfjärden, S of Östra Älgögrundet (59°26′⋅7N,
281
7.160 Racon: Tisterö Light-buoy (special) (59°26′N, 18°24′E), moored on the E side of the fairway, 3 cables NE of Tisterögrundet Light (7.161). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
To a position close S of Tynningöudd (59°21′⋅5N, 18°26′⋅0E), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand). (Directions for Vaxholm are given at 7.169)
Directions (continued from 7.152)
Main channel 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7.161 Östra Älgögrundet to Torsbyfjärden. From a position 2 cables S of Östra Älgögrundet Light (59°26′⋅7N, 18°24′⋅8E) the track, shown on the chart, leads a short distance WSW then generally SE and S for 6½ miles to a position close S of Tynningöudd (59°21′⋅5N, 18°26′⋅0E) in the NW part of Torsbyfjärden, passing (with positions from Östra Älgögrundet Light): S of Älgen (3 cables WSW), a shoal marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand). By night the white sector (053½°–065½°), astern, of Östra Älgögrundet Light leads partially through the fairway SW of the light. Thence: SSE of Allegrogrund (9 cables WSW), marked on its SE side by a light-buoy (starboard hand) and through the S-bound lane of the TSS, thence: W of Tisterögrundet Light (white column on black pedestal) (1 mile SW), displayed from a rocky shoal on the E side of the fairway which is marked at its W limit by a buoy (port hand). Thence: NE of a rocky shoal (1½ miles SSW), on which stands a beacon (green, 2⋅5 m in height) and which is marked on its E side by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SW of Brödstycket Light (white lantern, black base, 6 m in height) (1¼ miles S), standing on an islet on the NE side of the channel. By night the white sector (108°–134°), ahead, of the light leads through the channel NW of the light. And: NE of Elidasgrund (1½ miles SSW), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand). By night the white sector (323°–340°), astern, of Tisterögrundet Light leads SSE through this section of the fairway. Thence: SE through Oxdjupet keeping to the centre of the channel, by night, initially in the green sector (138½°–205°), ahead, of Oxdjupet Västra Light (white metal framework tower, 4 m in height) (59°24′⋅0N, 18°26′⋅4E), displayed from the W side of the passage. Thence, S of the passage, by night, in the green sector (shore–345°), astern, of Oxdjupet Östra Light (similar structure to above), displayed from the E side of the passage. Caution. Larger vessels should transit the passage with caution due to a bend in the channel where visibility is restricted by high land. Speed is restricted to 8 kn through Oxdjupet. See also 7.157. A ferry crosses the channel, S of the narrow section, from Oskar-Fredriksborg to the W side of Värmdölandet, 4 cables NE. In reduced visibility vessels must give a sound signal consisting of one long blast when within 5 cables of the ferry track to give warning of their approach. Thence the track continues, passing: W of Solöudd (3¾ miles SSE). By night the white sector (158°–175°), ahead, of Södernäs Light leads through the fairway in this vicinity. Thence: W of Södernäs Light (white lantern) (59°21′⋅7N, 18°27′⋅1E), displayed from a headland on the E side of the fairway. The white sector (055°–072°), astern, of the light leads through the W-bound lane of the TSS SE of Tynningö. Thence:
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7.162 Useful marks: Beacon (red triangle; floodlit) standing on the W side of Muskholmen (59°26′⋅3N, 18°24′⋅0E). Water Tower (red light) (59°23′⋅7N, 18°26′⋅1E), standing in Oskar-Fredriksborg on the E side of Rindö. Beacon (floodlit), standing on the SE side of Hastholmen, 3 cables WNW of Södernäs Light. 7.163 Torsbyfjärden to Långholmsfjärden. From a position close S of Tynningöudd (59°21′⋅5N, 18°26′⋅0E), the track leads about 5 miles W through Långholmsfjärden and the passage between Tynningö and Bergholmen, marked by buoys and light-buoys (lateral), to a position N of Västra Granholmen (59°22′⋅5N, 18°18′⋅0E), passing (with positions from Bogesund Light (59°22′⋅9N, 18°18′⋅2E)): NE of Lagnögrundet Light (white pedestal, black base; floodlit) (3¾ miles ESE), displayed from a rocky shoal on the SW side of the fairway. By night the white sector (306°–311½°), ahead, of Tynningö Light (59°22′⋅3N, 18°23′⋅3E) leads through this section of channel. Thence: NE of a beacon (3 miles ESE), standing close NE of the NE side of Bergholmen, and a buoy (port hand), moored close N. Thence: SW of Tynningö Light (grey tower, white top, 6 m in height, floodlit), standing on a rock on the NE side of the channel, thence: NE of a beacon (floodlit) (2½ miles ESE), standing close to the N end of Bergholmen, thence: SSW of Lången (2 miles ESE), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), and: NNE of Risholmen (2 miles ESE), a 10 m shoal marked by a light-buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (099½°–100¾°), astern, of Tynningö Light leads through the fairway in this vicinity. Thence: SSW of Tobaksgrund (1¼ miles E), on which stands a beacon (triangle point up, over orange cairn), and which is marked at its S limit by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NNE of Östra Granholmen (7 cables ESE), thence: SSW of Bogesund Light (white lantern on grey concrete base), displayed from a shoal on the N side of the fairway, thence: S of a 5⋅8 m shoal (2 cables W), marked by a buoy (starboard hand) moored about 2 cables N of the W end of Västra Granholmen. Link channel. A short channel, of no authorised draught and marked by buoys (lateral), leads about 1¼ miles WSW from close NE of Risholmen, above, passing SE of Gröna Jägarna to join the 6⋅0 m branch channel (7.164) 2 cables NE of Fredan (59°21′⋅9N, 18°19′⋅5E). (Directions for Stockholm continue at 7.175)
Branch channel south of Granholmen 1
282
7.164 A secondary channel, authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m and marked by buoys (lateral), branches off the main channel 1½ cables N of Lagnögrundet Light (59°21′⋅5N, 18°24′⋅9E), to lead 5 miles W through the S part of Långholmsfjärden, rejoining the main channel 4 cables SE
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
3
4
of Älvviksgrundet (59°21′⋅8N, 18°15′⋅5E) (7.175), passing (with positions from Lagnögrundet Light): Clear of a 5⋅6 m shoal (9 cables WNW), marked by a buoy (isolated danger). By night the S route lies in the white sector (270¾°–280°), ahead, of Värmdö-Garpen Light. Thence: N of Värmdö-Garpen Light (white lantern, floodlit) (1¼ miles WNW), displayed from the N side of the islet. A buoy (starboard hand) marks the N side of the channel, and a buoy (port hand) marks the NW limit of the shoal area extending W of the islet. By night the white sector (098¾°–102¾°), astern, of the light leads through the channel W of the light. Thence: Between shoals of 6⋅2 m and 5⋅7 m (1½ miles WNW), lying S and N, respectively, of the channel, and marked by buoys (lateral), thence: S of a 2⋅6 m shoal area (2½ miles WNW), marked at its SE and SW sides by buoys (starboard hand and W cardinal), respectively, thence: NNW of Björnsgrundet Light (white pedestal, red band, on black base) (3¼ miles WNW), displayed from a shoal on the S side of the fairway. By night the white sector (072¼°–081½°), astern, of the light leads through the channel W of the light. Thence: SSE of Stora Höggarn (7.178) (4 miles WNW), thence: To a position in the main channel (7.175) SE of Älvviksgrundet.
4
5
6
Anchorage and harbours Anchorage 1
Branch channel north of Bogesund 7.165 A further secondary channel, authorised for a draught of 9⋅0 m, and marked by buoys, leaves the main channel NNE of Furuholmen (59°22′⋅3N, 18°20′⋅1E), and passes N of Bogesund Light (59°22′⋅9N, 18°18′⋅2E) and a shoal 2 cables farther W, before turning SW to rejoin the main channel E of Stora Höggarnsbank Light (7.175).
2
Alternative channel — Kodjupet 1
2
3
7.166 Local knowledge is required. See also 7.158. A channel, authorised for a draught of 3⋅3 m and marked by buoys (lateral), leads generally SSE and S for about 5½ miles, from the E side of Trälhavet in a position W of Allegrogrund (7.161), marked on its SW side by a buoy (port hand), passing (with positions from Sandgrundet Light (59°23′⋅8N, 18°21′⋅7E)): NW of Västra Rönnholmen Light (lantern on white masonry hut, red band), displayed from the NW side of Lilla Rönnholmen (2 miles N), thence: Through the narrow channel at the S end of Kodjupet (1½ miles NNW), marked on each side by buoys (lateral), illuminated by fixed spotlights shown from the former light-structure standing on the E side of the passage, thence: Through Norra Vaxholmsfjärden (1 mile N) where the shoals are marked by buoys (lateral), thence: Either side of Vaxholms Kastell (5 cables N), a citadel constructed on an islet in the passage between Vaxholm and Rindö, thence: NW of Sandgrundet Light (white lantern), displayed from a rocky shoal in the S part of Södra Vaxholmsfjärden, thence:
7.167 Anchorage may be obtained SE of Österskär (7.325) (59°28′N, 18°19′E) (chart 3127) in the NW part of Trälhavet, in depths of about 30 m, clay, clear of the submarine cables and shoals shown on the chart.
Vaxholm 1
1
WNW of Stora Ekholmen (5 cables WSW). The shoal water extending N and W is marked at its limits by buoys (lateral). Thence: Through Tenösund (7.156) (8 cables SW), thence: W of Tobaksgrundet Beacon (1 mile SSW) to join the main channel 7 cables ESE of Bogesund Light (59°22′⋅9N, 18°18′⋅2E) (7.163). From the above beacon the track also continues S and SW, crossing the main channel, thence passing NW of Furuholmen Light (white lantern, floodlit) (59°22′⋅3N, 18°20′⋅1E), displayed from the W side of the islet, through a narrow channel, marked by buoys (lateral), thence joining the 6⋅0 m channel (7.164) 6 cables SW of Furuholmen Light. Speed is restricted to 8 kn in Kodjupet and the narrow channels E of Vaxholm. Useful mark: Water tower (59°24′⋅3N, 18°20′⋅5E), standing in Vaxholm (7.168).
1
1
1
2
283
7.168 Description. Vaxholm (59°24′N, 18°21′E), a summer resort, lies at the E end of the island of that name about 8 miles NE of Stockholm. It has a population of about 4500. The island is connected to the mainland on its S side by a fixed bridge spanning Pålsundet, with a vertical clearance of 1⋅7 m and a navigable width of 9⋅5 m. The SW part of the harbour, Västerhamnen, is formed by a 200 m long, angled breakwater enclosing the yacht harbour with the entrance from E. The N part of the harbour, Österhamnen, is unprotected and open to the sea. Depths in the harbour vary from about 0⋅5 m in the inner parts to about 8 m in the outer parts. 7.169 Directions. Small vessels may reach the harbour through Kodjupet (7.166) but the main approach is made though Ramsösundet (59°23′⋅5N, 18°24′⋅0E), a narrow channel with a depth of about 6 m, marked by buoys (lateral), on the S side of Rindö. The track, shown on the chart, branches W off the main channel close SE of Oskar-Fredriksborg (59°23′⋅6N, 18°26′⋅1E) to lead about 2¾ miles through the channel to the harbour. 7.170 Anchorage may be obtained S of Vaxholm in Södra Vaxholmsfjärden, in depths of 10 to 18 m, clay. N of Vaxholm, anchorage may be obtained in Norra Vaxholmsfjärden, in depths of 23 to 26 m, clay, but clear of the submarine cables shown on the chart. Anchorage is prohibited in an area, shown on the chart, extending N and S of Vaxholms Kastell in the passage between Vaxholm and Rindö. 7.171 Berths. In the N part of the harbour there is a jetty for regular local traffic, 70 m in length with a depth alongside of 4⋅5 m. There is a further 200 m of berthing space with a depth alongside of 4⋅5 m. In Västerhamnen there is about 350 m of berthing space, including both sides of the breakwater, with depths of 0⋅5
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
to 6 m alongside, and several other berths at the pontoon jetty within the harbour. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Getfoten 1
2
Directions (continued from 7.163)
Main channel 1
7.172 Getfoten (59°22′⋅8N, 18°21′⋅5E) is a small island on the N side of Långholmsfjärden, 1½ miles S of Vaxholm. The harbour, for the use of yachts and small craft, is situated on the N side of the island and consists of a small enclosed harbour at the W end with four finger jetties, at intervals, to the E of the enclosed harbour. Berths. There are numerous berths at all the jetties with depths of between 2 to 7 m. Supplies. Fresh water is not available.
2
LÅNGHOLMSFJÄRDEN TO STOCKHOLM INCLUDING ASKRIKEFJÄRDEN AND LIDINGÖ
General information
3
Charts 3155, 3114
Description 1
2
7.173 This section describes the channels in the E approaches to Stockholm from the W end of Långholmsfjärden. Also described are the cargo terminals, outside the port limits and adjacent to the fairway channels. It also covers the island of Lidingö and its harbours, close NE of Stockholm, together with other minor harbours and channels within the area. Main channel. The main channel leads SW through Halvkakssundet (59°20′⋅5N, 18°13′⋅5E) to the SE entrance, 1 mile ENE of Libertus (59°19′⋅9N, 18°10′⋅6E) (7.222), the NE islet of Fjäderholmarna. Secondary channel. A secondary channel, authorised for a draught of 10⋅0 m, leads W through Askrikefjärden, N of Lidingö, then S on the W side of Lidingö to reach the NW part of the harbour in the vicinity of Lidingöbron (7.216). The principal function of this channel is to provide access to the berths at Gasverkshamnen and Ropsten, close W of the SW end of the bridges, for vessels unable to pass through the bridges.
4
5
6
Principal marks 1
2
7.174 Landmarks: Kaknäs Aero Light (mast on conspicuous concrete tower, 150 m in height) (59°20′⋅1N, 18°07′⋅7E), displayed at an elevation of 172 m in the E part of Stockholm. Nacka Aero Light (mast) (59°17′⋅9N, 18°10′⋅4E), displayed at an elevation of 300 m in the SE part of Stockholm. A second mast stands 250 m SE (chart 3114). Major lights: Kaknäs Aero Light — as above. Five red obstruction lights are also exhibited at lower elevations. Nacka Aero Light — as above. Eight red obstruction lights are also exhibited, the highest at an elevation of 250 m.
7.175 From a position 1½ cables NNE of Granholmen Light (white lantern; floodlit) (59°22′⋅7N, 18°17′⋅7E), displayed from the W end of Västra Granholmen, the track, shown on the chart and marked by buoys and light-buoys (lateral), leads 3¾ miles SW to a position 1 mile ENE of Libertus, close NW of Kungshamn Light (59°20′⋅1N, 18°12′⋅6E) at the SW end of Halvkakssundet, passing (with positions from Granholmen Light): NW of Granholmen Light. By night the white sector (049¾°–054½°), astern, of the light leads through the fairway clear SE of Stora Höggarnsbank, and into the white sector (229°–235¾°), ahead, of Älvviksgrundet Light which leads through the fairway W of Höggarn. Thence: SE of Stora Höggarnsbank Light (white hut, black base; floodlit), displayed from the E side of a shoal area (5 cables SW). The E limit of the shoal water is marked by a buoy (starboard hand) moored close E of the light. Thence: NW of Stora Höggarn (5 cables SSW) (7.178). A beacon stands on the NW side of the islet. In winter an ice-bridge is periodically established between the islet and Lidingö, 8 cables W. Thence: NW of Höggarn (7 cables SW), a shoal marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: NW of Lilla Höggarn (9 cables SW), on which stands a beacon, thence: NW of Lilla Höggarnsbank Light (white hut, red band, black base; floodlit), displayed from the NW side of a shoal area (1 mile SW). A buoy (port hand) is moored close W of the light marking the NW limit of the shoal water. Thence: SE of Älvviksgrundet Light (white tower, red base, 8 m in height; floodlit) (59°21′⋅8N, 18°15′⋅5E), displayed from a rock close off the E point of Lidingö. Älvvik Light-buoy (starboard hand) is moored close E of the light. By night the white sector (032¾°–043¾°), astern, of the light leads through the fairway NW of Rödhällsgrund and into the white sector (219°–227½°), ahead, of Kungshamn Light, which leads through Halvkakssundet. Thence: NW of Rödhällsgrund (1½ miles SW), a shoal marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: SE of a 5⋅9 m shoal (2 miles SW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: To a position 1 cable NW of Kungshamn Light (white lantern) (59°20′⋅1N, 18°12′⋅6E), displayed from a headland at the SW end of Halvkakssundet. (Directions for Stockholm harbour entrance channels continue at 7.222)
Secondary channel — 10V0 m 1
2
284
7.176 From a position 2 cables WSW of Bogesund Light (59°22′⋅9N, 18°18′⋅2E) (7.163) the track, shown on the chart, leads initially 6 miles W through Askrikefjärden to a position S of Djursholmsudde, a headland from which a light (white lantern) (59°23′⋅8N, 18°06′⋅1E) is displayed when required, passing (with positions from Bogesund Light): NNE of Södergarn (2¾ miles W), where stands a beacon (red board, yellow stripe, 5 m in height),
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
3
4
5
1
2
close to the shore. A buoy (port hand) marks the N limit of the shoal water extending from the shore. And: S of a 1⋅7 m shoal (2¾ miles W), marked by a buoy, starboard hand), thence: NNE of Bosögrund (3¼ miles W), a shoal marked by a buoy (port hand) on its NW side, thence: N of Norrängsgrund (4 miles W), an area of foul ground marked at its N limit by a buoy (port hand), thence: S of Västra Haga Light (white lantern) (4 miles W), displayed from a point of land on the SW side of Väderö. By night the white sector (290°–297½°), ahead, of this light leads through the fairway NE of Bosögrund and Norrängsgrund. Thence: N of Prästgrund (4½ miles W), a shoal marked on its N side by a buoy (port hand), thence: Through the passage between the NW side of Lidingö and Tallholmen (5¼ miles W), thence: To a position 1 cable S of Djursholmsudde Light. 7.177 Thence the track leads round the NW side of Lidingö between Aludden Light (white lantern) (59°23′⋅6N, 18°05′⋅6E), displayed from a point SW of Djursholmsudde, and Lilla Bergholmen Light (lantern on white hut), displayed from an islet 1½ cables SE of Aludden Light on the E side of the fairway. Thence the channel leads S, passing E of Tranholmen (59°22′⋅5N, 18°05′⋅5E), to a position at the NW end of Lilla Värtan close NW of Lidingöbron. Useful mark: Radio mast (orange and white, red lights, 47 m in height) (59°26′⋅6N, 18°07′⋅4E), standing close E of Viggbyholm at the NW end of Stora Värtan.
95 m with a depth of about 12 m alongside. Maximum ship length allowed is 125 m. Facilities. All usual facilities available in Stockholm (7.239).
Bergs Oil Harbour 1
2
Lidingö Island Charts 3155, 3114
Lidingö 1
2
Terminals in the approach channels to Stockholm Charts 3155, 3114
1
2
1
2
7.179 Telegrafberget (59°20′⋅5N, 18°14′⋅0E) is a cargo installation lying on the W side of Ormingelandet in the central part of Halvkakssundet, about 4 miles E of Stockholm. It is reached directly from the main channel and is suitable for a draught of 11⋅0 m. Caution. A submarine pipeline crosses the channel immediately SW of the berth. Anchorage is prohibited within its vicinity. Berth. The harbour consists of a quay with a length of 40 m and two breasting dolphins, giving a total length of
7.182 Hustegafjärden is entered off the main 11⋅0 m channel at a position about 6 cables SW of Älvviksgrundet Light (59°21′⋅8N, 18°15′⋅5E) (7.175). Thence the tracks to the berths lead a short distance NW, W, and SW, passing clear of Svanholmen, 5 cables WSW of the light, and the shoal water extending S from this islet.
Harbours on Lidingö Islingeviken 1
Telegrafberget 1
7.181 Description. Lidingö (59°22′N, 18°10′E) is an island and district close NE of Stockholm which has a large residential area and a number of industrial sites. It is linked to the mainland by Gamla and Nya Lidingöbron (7.216), two bridges close together, spanning the channel on the SW side of the island. It is also the home of the world famous AGA company. The largest part of the residential area lies in the W central side of the island and the majority of industrial installations lie on the E side of the island in the SE part of Hustegafjärden, an inlet leading W off the channel at the NE end of Halvkakssundet. The W end of Hustegafjärden leads W into Kyrkviken through Ekholmsnässundet, a narrow passage with a charted depth of 2⋅6 m and marked by buoys (lateral). Small craft and yacht harbours are located in other parts of the island.
Directions for Hustegafjärden
Stora Höggarn 7.178 Stora Höggarn (59°22′⋅2N, 18°17′⋅2E), a small island, lies in the SW part of Höggarnsfjärden close SE of the main channel, about 6 miles NE of Stockholm. The oil harbour, not operational (1998), is situated on the NE side of the island and is approached directly from the main channel, leading 3 cables SE to the berth. Berths. The harbour consists of an offshore jetty, connected to the shore, 120 m in length with a depth alongside of 11⋅7 to 12⋅2 m. Mooring winches are fitted, 100 m from each end of the jetty, on land, to assist with mooring. There are three other jetties in a bay close S of the main berth, the largest being 40 m in length with a depth of 4⋅3 m alongside. Facilities. All usual facilities in Stockholm (7.239).
7.180 Bergs Oil Harbour (59°19′⋅3N, 18°10′⋅3E) is situated in the district of Nacka, E of Stockholm, at the SE end of Lilla Värtan. The harbour, which is suitable for a draught of 11 m, is reached directly off the main channel. Recommended maximum size of vessel at the berth, 200 m in length. Berth. The harbour consists of a quay, with a length of 90 m and a depth of 13 m alongside, which faces the main channel. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
7.183 Islingeviken (59°22′⋅2N, 18°07′⋅0E) is a small inlet on the W side of the island with depths of 12 m. On the NE side there is a quay with a length of 70 m and a depth alongside of 2⋅3 to 3 m. Other berths are available for yachts at the pontoon jetties on the N side of the inlet.
Lidingövarvet 1
285
7.184 Lidingövarvet, a small boat harbour with depths of 2 to 6 m, lies on the N side of a small bay 2½ cables NNW of Islingeviken. The harbour contains two pontoon jetties and a quay at the shipyard providing a number of berths for yachts and other pleasure craft. Facilities. Hull and machinery repairs. Slip for vessels up to 16 tonnes. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Bosön 1
2
7.185 Bosön (59°22′⋅8N, 18°11′⋅6E), a small boat and yacht harbour, lies on the W side of Södergarnsviken, a bay on the N side of Lidingö. The harbour consists of six long pontoon jetties extending from the shore and a concrete quay immediately W. Directions. The bay is entered directly off the main channel in Askrikefjärden from a position 4 cables NNW of Södergarn Beacon (59°22′⋅7N, 18°12′⋅9E), the track leading about 7 cables SW to the harbour. Berths. There are numerous berths at the pontoon jetties with depths of about 3 to 4 m at the outer parts but there is less water at the inner parts. Facilities. Slip with crane. Minor repairs.
3
Ålkistan Kanal 1
Other harbours and channels Viggbyholm 1
2
7.186 Viggbyholm (59°26′⋅1N, 18°06′⋅9E) is a small boat and yacht harbour situated in the NW part of Stora Värtan about 8 miles N of Stockholm. The harbour consists of a large L-shaped breakwater enclosing pontoon jetties extending from the shore. Directions. From a position on the 10 m channel in Askrikefjärden either SE or SW of Storholmen (59°24′N, 18°08′E), the channels lead about 3 miles NNW or 2¾ miles N, respectively, through Stora Värtan to the harbour. Berths. There are a large number of berths both at the pontoon jetties and the inside of the breakwater with a general depth of 2⋅6 m except for some of the berths nearest the shore which have less water. Facilities. All the usual facilities are available. Small yard for minor hull and machinery repairs.
2
1
2
3
General information Charts 3155, 3114
Position 1
1
2
3
Chart 3114
2
7.188 Stockby (59°23′N, 18°03′E) is a small town with a population of about 7000, situated at the head of Lilla Värtan, about 4 miles N of Stockholm. The harbour lies in Stocksundet, a narrow passage with a minimum depth of 4⋅0 m, leading to Edsviken, an inlet farther N. Stocksundet is spanned by three bridges to the N of the harbour at Stockby. The first, close N of the harbour, is a
7.190 Stockholm (59°20′N, 18°04′E) lies at the E end of Mälaren, about 35 miles inland, in the central part of a large archipelago on the E coast of Sweden. The port area is extensive, covering a number of waterways and channels around the city.
Function
Stockby 1
7.189 Ålkistan Kanal (59°22′⋅5N, 18°02′⋅8E) provides access to Brunnsviken, an inlet W of the N end of Lilla Värtan. The canal, which has a depth of 1⋅7 m, is spanned by a road bridge and a rail bridge, having vertical clearances of 7⋅0 m and 5⋅4 m, respectively. The E and W approach channels are marked by buoys (lateral). It is not permitted for vessels to pass in the canal at any time. Passage is regulated between April and October by means of a signalling system using red and green lights.
STOCKHOLM
Djursholm 7.187 Djursholm (59°24′N, 18°05′E), a town with a population of about 12 800, lies on the mainland at the W end of Askrikefjärden. There are berths located at the following places on the shoreline fronting the town: In Framnäsviken, a small inlet 7 cables N of Djursholmsudde Light (59°23′⋅8N, 18°06′⋅1E); there is a quay with a length of 140 m and depths of 2 to 2⋅4 m alongside. At Slottsbryggan, 3½ cables SW of the above light; there is a jetty with a depth alongside of 4 m. At Ekudden, in Sveaviken, about 6 cables SW of the light; there is another jetty with a depth of 5 m alongside. Approach to all the above berths is off the main channel as can be seen on the chart. Facilities. Boatyard with small slip. Minor engine repairs. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
rail bridge with a vertical clearance of 5⋅9 m while the two road bridges farther N each have a vertical clearance of 13 m. Directions. The harbour is reached through a channel extending about 2 miles WNW from a position S of the E end of Tranholmen (59°22′⋅5N, 18°05′⋅5E), and passing NE of Bockholmen, an islet at the entrance to Stocksundet. Berth. A quay with a length of 75 m and depths of 3⋅5 to 5 m alongside. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
4
286
7.191 Stockholm is the capital of Sweden and contains the largest harbour on the E coast. It was founded in the thirteenth century by Birger Jarl when he united the country, and for strategic reasons at that time, the capital was sited and established on the small island now known as Gamla Stan (59°19′⋅5N, 18°04′⋅3E), past which the waters of Mälaren flowed on their way to the Baltic Sea. Until well into the seventeenth century the greater part of the population continued to live within the precincts of this island. The modern city is a large, thriving industrial and cultural community which is also the commercial centre of Sweden, built largely on the mainland but partly on a number of islands at the E end of Mälaren which are interconnected, and also connected to the mainland, by a series of bridges. The area of the city to the N of Gamla Stan is known as Norrmalm and the island area to the S of Gamla Stan is known as Södermalm. It has a large, safe harbour area extending about 10 km from W to E with the most modern facilities and extensive equipment for handling most types of vessel including tankers up to medium size, large passenger vessels, bulk, container, Ro-Ro, ferries and general cargo. Principal exports are timber, paper pulp, paper, iron and steel products, machinery and food products. Imports include grain, coal, bulk mineral oil products, bulk chemicals, edible oils, automobiles and general goods. At the end of 2003 the population of the city of Stockholm was 758 148 with the population of the city and county about 1 850 000.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Port limits 1
2
3
Water level
7.192 The E and N limits, shown on the chart, are defined by a line joining the following positions: E point of Kvarnholmen (59°19′N, 18°09′E) thence NE to enclose Fjäderholmarna (59°19′⋅8N, 18°10′⋅6E), thence: NW through Lilla Värtan (59°21′N, 18°08′E), excluding the SW side of Lidingö, then WNW following the centre of the channel to the E entrance to Ålkistan Kanal (59°22′⋅5N, 18°03′⋅0E), thence: SSE through Brunnsviken to its S end. The W limit, in Mälaren, is a line running NW from the shore at Gröndalshamnen (59°19′⋅1N, 18°00′⋅5E), passing between Stora and Lilla Essingen and ending in the N part of the passage leading to Ulvsundasjön (7.227). The S limit follows the S shoreline of Hammarbyleden (7.224), the channels S of Södermalm (59°18′⋅5N, 18°04′⋅0E), and includes all the berths bordering the channels.
Approach and entry 1
7.193 The port is approached from the W via the channels from Landsort leading to Södertälje Kanal (6.43), thence through the E part of Mälaren to enter the harbour SSW of Stora Essingen (59°19′N, 17°59′E). From the E, approach is made through the channels, marked by lights, buoys and beacons, leading through the archipelago from Landsort (7.31), Sandhamn (7.129), Söderarm (7.281) and Arholma (7.327), thence entering the harbour through the channels leading from the W end of Långholmsfjärden (7.156) to the various sections of the harbour.
2
7.199 The normal range of the level of water in the harbour is from 0⋅6 m above to 0⋅4 m below mean level. The maximum variation reached is 0⋅9 m above and 0⋅7 m below mean level. The normal water level in Mälaren is 0⋅5 m higher than the mean level on the Saltsjön side to the E. Actual levels may be obtained at any time from the automatic telephone responder fitted to a water level gauge at Stockholm mareograph station, telephone (08) 21 88 67. Caution. The Swedish authorities do not accept responsibility for incorrect information or the malfunction of equipment used in this service.
Density of water 1
7.200 The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅005 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
7.201 Cargo or passenger vessel of 245 m in length, 35 m beam with a draught of 11 m. Tanker of 200 m in length, 32 m beam with a draught of 11 m.
Ice 1
7.202 Navigation is maintained throughout the year with the assistance of icebreakers.
Arrival information Vessel Traffic Service 1
Traffic 1
1
7.194 In 2003 the port was used by 580 vessels totalling 4⋅3 million dwt.
7.203 A mandatory Reporting and Information System is in force for the control of shipping, located in the Traffic Information Centre at Stockholm. See 7.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Port radio Port Authority 1
7.195 Stockholms Hamn AB, Magasin 3, PO Box 27314, S–102 54, Stockholm. Website: www.stockholmshamn.se E-Mail:
[email protected]
1
Notice of ETA 1
Limiting conditions Controlling draughts 1
7.196 The controlling draughts are those in the channels to the harbour. Maximum permitted draughts: Channel via Dalarö — See 7.2. Channel via Sandhamn — See 7.2. Channels via Söderarm — See 7.2. Arholma through Furusund — See 7.2. Channel from Mälaren — See 6.111.
7.197 Details and information on bridges is given at 7.215 and for locks at 7.219.
1
2
Deepest and longest berths 1
7.205 The estimated time of arrival at Stockholm harbour should be sent at least 3 hours in advance through the Stockholm Traffic Information Centre. For details of information required and other details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Anchorages
Bridges and locks 1
7.204 Stockholm Hamnradio (Stockholm Harbour radio). See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
7.198 The deepest berths in the harbour are in Loudden Oil Harbour, handling oil products (7.228).
287
7.206 Anchorage is prohibited within the Stockholm harbour area except in indicated authorised places or with special permission. Anchorage may be obtained in the following places: An area, shown on the chart at the SE end of Lilla Värtan, designated for tankers, centred 4 cables W of Libertus (59°19′⋅9N, 18°10′⋅6E), in depths of 16 to 23 m, mud and clay. At the NW end of Lilla Värtan, NE and N of Värtahamnen, and NW of Lidingöbron, in depths of about 12 to 18 m, mud and clay. In Strömmen, 2¼ miles W of Blockhusudden (59°19′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E), in depths of 20 to 30 m, mud and clay. The stern should be secured to the mooring buoy provided.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
3
1
Anchorage is prohibited either side of Lidingöbron, Liljeholmsbron, Tranebergsbron and in Hammarbyhamnen as shown on the chart.
From E it can be entered via the lock from Strömmen or from the W end of Hammarbyleden (7.224). It is entered from the W via a channel from the E side of Mälaren.
Pilotage
Bridges
7.207 See 7.122.
1
Tugs 1
7.208 Tugs available for harbour and ocean-going towage duties. 1
Speed 1
7.209 Speed restrictions are in force in various sections of Stockholm harbour. Details are shown on boards in the applicable areas.
Harbour 2
General layout 1
1
2
1
1
1
7.210 The harbour covers a large area and is constructed in and around the waterways, land and islands which form the greater Stockholm area. It extends about 10 km from W to E and contains a total of 17 700 m berthing space, of which 1800 m is privately owned, situated in a number of different sub-harbours as listed at 7.228, together with their principal function and location. Also included are the berths in Ulvsundasjön (7.227) and Bällstaviken (7.227), which lie W of the city but outside port limits. 7.211 Lilla Värtan contains the major harbour sections: Loudden Oil Harbour — oil products. Frihamnen — containers, bulk grains, Ro-Ro, edible oils. Värtahamnen — oil products, bulk minerals, Ro-Ro and ferry traffic. Gasverkshamnen — bulk coal. It is reached via the approach channel through Halvkakssundet (7.175) thence through the channel in Lilla Värtan to the various basins. Alternatively, the berthing area to the W of Lidingöbron may be reached via the channel (7.176) through Askrikefjärden and W of Lidingö. 7.212 Saltsjön-Strömmen lies on the SE side of the city and is entered from the E through a channel leading SE of Fjäderholmarna from the approach channel described at 7.175. It contains a number of basins and berthing areas handling a variety of general cargo and passengers, plus a repair yard. 7.213 The waterway S of Södermalm, known as Hammarbyleden, provides the main link between Mälaren and Saltsjön. It includes Hammarbyhamnen on the E side, entered through Danvikskanalen (7.224), handling general cargo, with Årstaviken and Liljeholmsviken on the W side, which contain berths handling potable liquids, cement and other products. 7.214 Riddarfjärden (7.226), on the SW side of the city, contains a number of general service and official quays.
3
7.215 Due to the complex layout of the Stockholm harbour area, involving several islands and waterways over a large area, there are numerous bridges linking islands, spanning channels and linking the mainland to the islands. In this context only the bridges of major importance to navigation are described. Those bridges spanning locks and their close vicinity are described at 7.219. 7.216 Lidingöbron are the two main bridges in the harbour, lying close together, which span the NW end of Lilla Värtan, the channel between Stockholm and the island of Lidingö (7.181): Gamla Lidingöbron, the original bridge, has a fixed main arch span of 135 m with a vertical clearance of 5⋅2 m. A bascule bridge at its SW end has a vertical clearance, when closed, of 4⋅3 m and a navigable width of 18⋅7 m. Nya Lidingöbron, the newer bridge close SE and parallel to the old bridge, is a fixed bridge with nine double pillars. At its SW end, in line with the opening span of the old bridge, it has a vertical clearance of 11⋅5 m over a navigable width of 22 m. Mariners should note that the bridge pillars are 2⋅5 m wider below the surface of the water at MSL. A light is displayed from the S pier of the bridge. Operations. Gamla Lidingöbron opens on request as follows: Dates April − October
Days Mondays to Fridays
Weekends and holidays
4
5
288
Notice
Times open
1 hour
0900–1530 1900–2100
3 hours
0530–0630 2100–0000
1 hour
0900–2100
3 hours
0530–0900 2100–0000
Between October and mid-April the bridge is closed to all shipping. Opening times are normally reviewed annually with revised times promulgated in local notices to mariners. For latest details the Port Authority should be consulted. Danviksbron (59°18′⋅8N, 18°06′⋅3E), is a bascule bridge which spans the central part of Danvikskanalen at the E end of Hammarbyleden. When closed it has a vertical clearance of 11⋅7 m over a navigable width of 30 m. Liljeholmsbron (59°18′⋅8N, 18°01′⋅9E) spans the channel in Liljeholmsviken at the W end of Hammarbyleden. When closed, the bascule bridge has a vertical clearance of 13⋅7 m over a navigable width of 24 m. The fixed span has a vertical clearance of 14⋅7 m over a navigable width of 33 m. Operation and signals. Requests for opening of Danviksbron and Liljeholmsbron should be made by VHF or by giving the sound signal of two short blasts followed by one prolonged blast. Passage is regulated by light signals (Diagram 7.216) displayed at both bridges, and at Skansbron.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
1
2
navigable channel width of 24 m, and the S span has a vertical clearance of 25⋅2 m over a navigable channel width of 75 m. 7.218 Gröndalsbron spans the channel between Stora Essingen (59°19′⋅2N, 17°59′⋅5E) and the mainland. It consists of road and rail bridges, close together, and has a vertical clearance of 25⋅2 m over a navigable width of 50 m. Essingbron spans the channel between Stora Essingen and Lilla Essingen, close E. It has a vertical clearance of 15⋅2 m over a navigable width of 30 m. Oxhålsbron is the third bridge on Stora Essingen, from the NW part of the island to the mainland at Alvik. It has a vertical clearance of 24 m.
Locks Danviksbron and Liljeholmsbron − signals (7.216)
1
1
7.217 Årstabron is a fixed bridge spanning Årstaviken across Årstaholmar (59°18′⋅5N, 18°02′⋅5E), an islet in its central part. The N span has a vertical clearance of 20⋅7 m over a
7.219 Hammarbyslussen. Passage between the E and W parts of the harbour, from Saltsjön to Mälaren, may be made by small vessels through Hammarbyslussen (59°18′⋅2N, 18°04′⋅8E), the lock between Årstaviken and Hammarbyhamnen, in Hammarbyleden on the S side of Södermalm.
Hammarbyslussen (7.219) (Original dated 1998) (Photograph − Swedish Maritime Administration)
289
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
Operations and signals. Passage is restricted to vessels with a length of 110 m, beam 15 m and a maximum draught of 5⋅6 m. Vessels intending to transit the lock should give 5 hours advance notice via the appropriate VTS. Requests for opening may be made by VHF or giving the sound signal of two short blasts followed by one prolonged blast. On passing the lock reports must be made to both Södertälje Pilots and Stockholm Pilots. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Passage is regulated by light signals (Diagram 7.219.1) displayed from each side of the lock.
5
Operations and signals. From May to August the lock is operational between 0700–2200 hours daily, and in September and October between 0900–1700 hours daily. At all other times of the year it remains closed. Requests for opening should be made by making the sound signal of two short blasts followed by one prolonged blast. Passage is regulated by light signals (Diagram 7.219.2).
Climatic table 1
7.220 See 1.284 and 1.289.
Principal marks 1
7.221 See 7.174.
Directions for harbour channels (continued from 7.175)
Lilla Värtan 1
Hammarbyslussen − traffic signals (7.219.1) 3
The channel at the lock is spanned by three bridges with vertical clearances, when closed, and navigable widths as follows: Bridge
Vertical
Width
Skanstullsbron — fixed
31⋅3 m
17⋅4 m
Skansbron — bascule bridge
11⋅7 m
17⋅4 m
Johanneshovsbron — fixed
25⋅2 m
17⋅4 m
2
Requests for opening Skansbron may be made by VHF or making the sound signal of two short blasts followed by one prolonged blast. Passage is regulated by light signals displayed from the bridge given at 7.216. 3
4
5
Karl Johansslussen − traffic signals (7.219.2) 4
Karl Johansslussen, a smaller lock, is situated in the channel between Strömmen and Riddarfjärden, at the S end of Gamla Stan. Passage is restricted to vessels with a length of 80 m, beam 10 m and a maximum draught of 3⋅6 m. The channel in way of the lock is spanned by a fixed bridge with a vertical clearance of 3⋅8 m and a navigable width of 10 m. Two fixed rail bridges span the channel close W of the lock, each with a vertical clearance of 4⋅6 m and a navigable width of 13 m.
6
290
7.222 From a position 1 cable NW of Kungshamn Light (59°20′⋅1N, 18°12′⋅6E) at the SW end of Halvkakssundet, the track, partially indicated on the chart and marked by buoys and light-buoys (lateral), leads initially about 1¼ miles W, then 2¼ miles NW to Lidingöbron, passing (with positions from Kungshamn Light): S of an 8⋅2 m shoal (6 cables WNW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: N of Libertus Light (white tower) (59°19′⋅9N, 18°10′⋅6E), displayed from the NW side of Libertus. The N limits of the shoal water surrounding Fjäderholmarna, a group of islands surrounded by shoal water at the E limit of the port of Stockholm, N of the light are marked by buoys (port hand). By night the white sector (091°–098°), astern, of Kungshamn Light leads through this section of the channel. Thence: SW of a buoy (starboard hand) (1½ miles WNW), marking the 10 m contour. By night the white sector (122°–127°), astern, of Libertus Light leads through the channel to the bridges. Attention is drawn to two charted submarine pipelines, one marked by a buoy (special), extending from the shore in a position about 2½ cables NW of the 10 m contour buoy. Thence: NE of Louddsbanken (2 miles WNW), marked at its N limit by a light-buoy (port hand), which also marks the entrance to Loudden Oil Harbour, 2 cables W of the buoy. Thence: SW of two beacons (2 miles WNW), standing on the shore at Larsberg. Their alignment (075°), astern, leads 3 cables WSW into Frihamnen from the main channel. Thence: NE of Frihamnen N pier (2½ miles WNW), from which lights (floodlit boards on poles) are displayed, thence: NE of Värtabassängen N pier (3 miles WNW), from which a light (floodlit board on pole) is displayed. The berths in Värtahamnen are reached from this vicinity. Thence: The fairway leads a further 5 cables NW to the channel through Lidingöbron for vessels intending to pass through the bridges. Branch channel. A short channel, marked by buoys (lateral and cardinal), suitable for a draught of 8⋅0 m, leads across the S part of Louddsbanken to the S berths of Loudden Oil Harbour.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Saltsjön and Hammarbyleden 1
2
3
4
1
2
7.223 From a position 1 cable NW of Kungshamn Light (59°20′⋅1N, 18°12′⋅6E) the track leads about 3½ miles generally SW and W to the entrance to Danvikskanalen, or a farther 1 mile W through Strömmen to Karl Johansslussen and the central area berths, passing (with positions from Libertus Light (59°19′⋅9N, 18°10′⋅6E)): SE of a 7⋅8 m shoal (3 cables E), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SE of a beacon (floodlit) (3 cables S), standing on the SE side of Stora Fjäderholmen (59°19′⋅8N, 18°10′⋅7E), thence: S of Blockhusudden Light (white tower, grey base, 5 m in height) (1 mile SW), displayed from a rock at the limit of the coastal shoal water off Djurgården, thence: N of Kvarnholmen (1½ miles SW), containing a number of berths, thence: Clear of Finnboda (1½ miles SW), a shoal, marked by a light-buoy (N cardinal) and by a buoy (S cardinal), thence: NNW of an outfall pipe (2 miles SW), the line of which is indicated by Danvikshem Sewage Outfall Lights, in line bearing 178°. Thence: W to Karl Johansslussen, Riddarfjärden and the central area berths or direct to the entrance to Danvikskanalen. 7.224 Hammarbyleden is about 3½ miles long from E to W. The channel from Danvikskanalen (59°18′⋅9N, 18°06′⋅5E) to the W end of Liljeholmsviken is marked by light-buoys (lateral) and numbered lights displayed from dolphins at the sides of the channel. It passes through Hammarbyslussen (7.219), spanned by bridges, and other bridges described at 7.216. A narrow alternative channel, marked by buoys (lateral), passes under the N span of Årstabron (7.217). Passage through Danvikskanalen is regulated as follows: Vessels with a beam over 8⋅5 m should report on VHF to Danviksbron or make the sound signal of two short blasts followed by one prolonged blast before entering the canal. Light signals (Diagram 7.224), controlling entry are displayed at the canal entrance. Lock signals are given at 7.219.
2
3
Riddarfjärden and Ulvsundasjön 1
2
1
2
3
4
Danvikskanalen − traffic signals (7.224) 5
Side channel 1
7.225 A short channel, marked by buoys and light-buoys, from the E end of Saltsjön to Lilla Värtan passes W of Fjäderholmarna. From a position about 1 cable ESE of Blockhusudden Light (59°19′⋅3N, 18°09′⋅3E) the channel leads about 8 cables N to the SE end of Lilla Värtan, passing (with positions from the light):
E of two buoys (lateral) (3 cables N), marking the entrance to Djurgårdsbrunnskanalen which leads to Djurgårdsbrunnsviken, an inlet on the NW side of Djurgården, an extensive park and leisure area E of the city centre. Thence: W of Fjäderholmsgrundet (5 cables NE), a shoal area marked at its S end by a buoy (starboard hand), and on its NW side by a light-buoy (starboard hand). Thence: E of a buoy (port hand) (7 cables N), marking the E limit of the shoal water extending E from Lilla Hundudden, thence: To the SE end of Lilla Värtan.
6
291
7.226 Riddarfjärden may be entered from Strömmen, via the lock as described at 7.223, or from the W end of Hammarbyleden. From a position about 4 cables NE of Gröndalsbron (59°19′⋅1N, 17°59′⋅9E) the channel, marked by buoys (lateral), leads about 1¼ miles E through Riddarfjärden passing under Västerbron, a fixed bridge, spanning the channel between Långholmen and Kungsholmen, with a vertical clearance of 23⋅2 m. Approach and entry from Mälaren is given at 6.98. Useful mark: Fountain (59°19′⋅4N, 18°03′⋅4E), standing in the central part of Riddarfjärden at its E end. 7.227 Ulvsundasjön (59°20′⋅5N, 18°00′⋅0E) is an inlet on the NW side of Stockholm. Its NW extension leads to Bällstaviken, a narrow inlet on the W side of which lies Ulvsunda industrial area and Bällstahamnen, both of which contain cargo berths. It is reached via a channel leading N and NW from the vicinity of Stora Essingen. From a position close NE of Gröndalsbron (59°19′⋅1N, 17°59′⋅9E) the channel, marked by buoys (lateral) leads about 2½ miles generally N and NW to Bällstaviken, passing (with positions from the bridge): W of a 4⋅8 m shoal (2 cables NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: Under Essingebron (3 cables N), a fixed bridge spanning the channel with a vertical clearance of 15⋅2 m, thence: Clear E of buoys (special) (about 7 cables NNW), marking the seaward ends of submarine pipelines, thence: Under Tranebergsbron (1 mile N), a fixed bridge with a vertical clearance of 25⋅2 m, spanning the channel on the W side of Kungsholmen, thence: W of a shoal area (1¼ miles N), extending NNW from Hornsberg (59°20′⋅3N, 18°00′⋅0E) (7.236), marked on its NW side by a buoy (starboard hand) and on its SE side, close NW of the shore, by light-buoys (special), thence: NW through Ulvsundasjön to pass under Huvudstabron (2 miles NNW), a fixed bridge, with a vertical clearance of 24 m over a navigable width of 20 m, spanning the channel at the NW end of Ulvsundasjön. Thence: To Bällstaviken through the buoyed channel NW of the bridge. Caution. Work is in progress (2004) to construct another bridge S of Tranebergsbron. Alternative channel. Entry to Ulvsundasjön may also be made via a channel on the W side of Stora Essingen which leads about 1 mile NNE from a position off its SW side to
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
7
join with the main channel described above at a position about 1½ cables S of Tranebergsbron. Side channel. A narrow channel, suitable for small craft only, spanned by a total of eight bridges with various vertical clearances, leads from the NE part of Riddarfjärden to Ulvsundasjön passing N of Kungsholmen.
2
Basins and berths Loudden Oil Harbour 1
7.228 The oil harbour (59°20′⋅5N, 18°08′⋅0E) in Lilla Värtan contains the deepest berths in Stockholm. The deepest berths are Nos 705 and 706 which lie on each side of a pier extending NE from the shore. They each have a length of 66 m and a depth alongside of 11⋅9 m. On the S side of the pier there is a further 94 m of berthing space on jetties with depths of 8⋅9 to 10⋅4 m suitable for a vessel up to 200 m in length. On the N side of the pier there is 98 m of berthing space on jetties with a depth of 10⋅4 m, suitable for a vessel up to 250 m in length.
3
Strömmen — Stadsgårdshamnen 1
Frihamnen 1
2
7.229 Frihamnen lies close W of Loudden Oil Harbour and consists of a broad central pier forming a basin on its S side and other berths on its N side. The basin, which houses the main container base, contains a total of 1162 m of berthing space with depths of 9⋅0 to 11 m. Two fixed Ro-Ro berths lie at the head of the basin. On the N side of the central pier there is a further 530 m of berthing space with depths of 7⋅1 to 8⋅1 m. A moveable Ro-Ro ramp lies at the root of the central pier.
all privately owned, some located within, and some without, the harbour limits. Augustendal lies close E of the E side of Kvarnholmen and has a quay 208 m long with depths of 8⋅3 to 10⋅7 m alongside. Kvarnholmen has a total of 831 m of berthing space at various quays on its perimeter with depths of 3⋅8 to 11⋅4 m. They include oil and bulk grain berths. Gäddviken lies in Svindersviken, an inlet on the S side of Kvarnholmen. It contains a quay with a length of 140 m and a depth alongside of 7⋅3 m used by a coffee factory. Finnboda is the shipyard complex close W of Kvarnholmen. It contains a total of 280 m of berthing space with depths of 4⋅1 to 6 m.
2
3
7.233 Stadsgårdshamnen, which includes Masthamnen, lies on the S side of Strömmen extending from the entrance to Hammarbyleden to the lock at Gamla Stan. It has a total of 1920 m of berthing space with depths of 4⋅7 to 9⋅5 m, including a ferry terminal with a double ramp near its E end. Skeppsbron contains the central city berths on the E side of Gamla Stan. It has a total of 885 m of berthing space with depths of 2⋅5 to 6⋅6 m and is used for cruise vessels, archipelago traffic and city tour traffic. Included in Skeppsbron is Södra Blasieholmshamnen which lies close N. Nybrokajen and Strandvägskajen lie in Ladugårdslandsviken, 3 cables NE of Gamla Stan, at the W end of Djurgården. They have a total of 1345 m of general purpose berthing space with depths of 2⋅1 to 5⋅5 m.
Värtahamnen 1
2
3
7.230 South harbour. The deepest berth, an oil jetty with a length of 32 m and a depth alongside of 10⋅9 m, is constructed 13 m out from the quay line. There is a further 431 m of berthing space, mainly for bulk handling, with a depth of 7⋅5 m. Värtabassängen. The basin lies immediately N of south harbour and contains a total, on both sides, of 675 m of berthing space with depths of 8⋅1 to 9⋅1 m. It includes two Ro-Ro berths with moveable ramps used by international ferry traffic. North harbour. The short pier which is an extension of the N side of the basin, above, has a train ferry berth close to its outer end with a length of 160 m and a depth alongside of 9⋅0 m. The depth at the ramp is 8⋅5 m. The remainder of the north harbour has a total of 805 m of berthing space with depths of 3⋅5 to 11⋅9 m including a combined bulk coal and oil jetty constructed out from the quay line which has a depth alongside of 11⋅9 m.
Gasverkshamnen 1
7.231 Gasverkshamnen, which includes Ropsten, of the SW end of Lidingöbron. It contains with a length of 160 m and a depth alongside at Ropsten a jetty with a length of 75 m alongside of 5⋅7 m.
1
2
3
4
lies close W a main quay of 9⋅2 m, and and a depth
Kvarnholmen area 1
Hammarbyleden and Årstaviken 7.234 Norra Hammarbyhamnen lies on the SE side of Södermalm extending from the lock in Hammarbyleden to near the entrance to Danvikskanalen. It has a total of 2540 m of berthing space with depths of 5⋅9 m except a short space close to the lock with 3⋅9 m. Södra Hammarbyhamnen lies on the S side of the channel directly opposite the N berths. It has a total of 1420 m of berthing space with depths of 3⋅5 to 6 m, and includes Henriksdalshamnen which contains the Stockholm port maintenance complex and Sicklakajen, an extension of Södra Hammarbyhamnen. Årstadalshamnen lies on the SW side of Årstaviken, close W of Årstabron (7.217). Including Marievikskajen it contains a total of 690 m of berthing space, with depths of 5⋅6 to 7 m, handling mainly liquid alcohol products. On the N side of Årstaviken, close E of the bridge, there is a jetty with a length of 30 m and a depth alongside of 6 m, serving a nearby hospital. Liljeholmsviken lies at the W end of Södermalm in the W entrance to Hammarbyleden. It has a total of 430 m of berthing space, with depths of 2⋅5 to 5⋅8 m, for bulk and general purpose use.
Riddarfjärden 1
7.232 Kvarnholmen (59°19′N, 18°08′E) lies on the S side at the E end of Saltsjön. The berths described in this area are
292
7.235 Söder Mälarstrand lies on the NW side of Södermalm in the S part of Riddarfjärden. It has a total of 1490 m of berthing space with depths of 3⋅3 to 4⋅0 m, and is used by ship associations for general purposes.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Stockholm Värtahamnen (7.230) (Original dated 2000) (Photograph − Stockholm Port Authority)
Riddarholmen lies on the W side of Gamla Stan at the E end of Riddarfjärden. It has 305 m of berthing space with a depth of 3⋅6 m used by Göta Kanal (5.163) boats.
2
293
Klara Mälarstrand lies close N of Riddarholmen and contains 185 m of berthing space with a depth of 4 m, for the use of archipelago and tourist craft.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Norr Mälarstrand lies on the SE side of Kungsholmen in the N part of Riddarfjärden. It has 720 m of berthing space with depths of 1⋅4 to 6⋅4 m, and is used by ship associations for general use.
Patent slip No 1 — lift 500 tonnes; length 48 m; breadth 8⋅1 m; draught 3⋅6 m. Patent slip No 2 — lift 80 tonnes; length 27 m; breadth 8⋅1 m; draught 2⋅1 m. Hull and machinery repairs of all kinds available; divers for surveys and underwater repairs.
Hornsberg 1
7.236 Hornsberg lies in the SE part of Ulvsundasjön on the NW side of Kungsholmen (7.226). It contains a quay, used for handling construction aggregates, with a total length of 365 m and depths of 4⋅1 to 6⋅6 m alongside.
Other facilities 1
Bällstahamnen 1
7.237 The berths at Bällstahamnen on the W side of Bällstaviken (59°21′N, 17°58′E) (7.227), and the industrial area close S of the berths where the dredged area is marked by buoys (lateral), have a total of 335 m of berthing space with depths of 4⋅1 to 5⋅3 m alongside respectively.
Supplies 1
7.240 Fuel oil of all grades; fresh water at berths; provisions and chandlery of all kinds.
Communications
Port services Repairs 1
7.239 Hospital; deratting and issue of certificates; oily waste reception available; authorised compass adjusters; customs stations; large floating cranes.
1
7.238 Two slips are available with lifting capacity and maximum ship dimensions as follows:
7.241 Arlanda International Airport, located 45 km distant. Bromma, serving mainly internal flights, 8 km distant. Regular ferry services to Finland, Russia and other Baltic countries.
SANDHAMN TO SIMPNÄSKLUBB GENERAL INFORMATION
Topography 1
Charts 2362, 2337, 2297, 3163
Routes 1
2
3
4
7.242 This section describes the coastal route from the Sandhamn Entrance (59°15′N, 19°02′E) to Simpnäsklubb (59°54′N, 19°05′E), 41 miles N, the Söderarm and Arholma Entrances together with their approaches, the channels leading to Kapellskär (59°43′N, 19°04′E) and thence to Saxarfjärden (59°26′N, 18°28′E) where they join the main channel to Stockholm. Also described are the inner channels through Stockholms Skårgärd leading N from Kanholmsfjärden (59°20′N, 18°47′E) (7.108), known respectively as Husaröleden (7.262), which connects with the waters close NE of Furusund (59°40′N, 18°55′E) (7.309), and Rödlögaleden (7.262), which connects with Granhamsfjärden (59°43′N, 19°08′E). Also included are descriptions of the channels through Norrtäljeviken, and through Björköfjärden to Väddö Kanal (59°57′N, 18°50′E), together with a description of Norrtälje (59°46′N, 18°43′E) and other minor harbours adjacent to the channels. It is arranged as follows: Coastal passage (7.255). Sandhamn Entrance to Söderarm Entrance — Inner channels (7.262). Söderarm Entrance approaches and channels to Kapellskär (7.281). Kapellskär to Växlet (7.304). Växlet to Trälhavet and Saxarfjärden (7.316). Arholma Entrance and approaches (7.327). Arholma Entrance to Kapellskär including Norrtäljeviken and Björköfjärden. (7.340).
7.243 This part of Stockholms Skärgård archipelago is more open than farther S with its numerous islets, rocks and shoals extending seaward from the mainland for distances up to about 30 miles.
Pilotage 1
7.244 See 7.4.
Rescue 1
7.245 The Swedish Sea Rescue Association has two fully equipped rescue craft stationed at each of the following locations: Löka (59°24′⋅7N, 18°53′⋅8E), on the island of Möja (7.278). Fejan (59°44′⋅4N, 18°10′⋅2E) (7.303).
COASTAL PASSAGE General information Charts 2362, 2337
Route 1
294
7.246 From the approaches to Sandhamn Entrance the coastal route leads initially NE for about 33 miles to Svenska Björn (59°33′N, 20°01′E) (7.252), thence 26 miles NW to the vicinity of Söderarm Entrance and a farther 11 miles NW to the vicinity of Arholma Entrance. The route passes to seaward of a number of shoals with depths over them of 10 m or less which lie up to about 8 miles off the outer islands, and through extensive shoals N and E of Svenska Björn through which an area, known as Ahvenanmeren deep-water channel, shown on the charts, has been swept to a least depth of 18⋅0 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
Vessels from Ålands Hav (Baltic Pilot Volume III), of a suitable draught, bound for Stockholm or other ports within the archipelago, may use the channels through Söderarm and Arholma Entrances, but Rödlögaleden (7.262), the inner channel which connects Söderarm Entrance with Kanholmsfjärden, provides little shelter in bad weather.
5
6
Topography 1
7.247 The coastline has no significant features within the area, the majority of the outlying islets being bare, treeless and difficult to identify from seaward. Lillö (59°24′⋅7N, 19°28′⋅2E), the S islet of the Svenska Högarna group, is moderately high and steep-to on its W side.
Other aids to navigation 1
Exercise area 1
7.248 The N part of the route enters a firing practice area as shown on the chart. See 1.21.
Restricted area 1
7.249 A restricted area, shown on the chart, within which diving and anchoring is prohibited, is established about 5½ miles NE of Tjärven Light (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅2E). It is centred on 59°51′N, 19°31′E and contains the wreck of a warship with the associated risk of unexploded ammunition.
2
7.250 An extensive area, shown on the charts, where the coastal archipelago has been incompletely surveyed and within which uncharted shoals and other dangers may exist, extends NE from the vicinity of Sandhamn Entrance.
1
2
Climatic table 1
7.253 Racons: Almagrundet Lighthouse (59°09′N, 19°08′E). Svenska Björn Lighthouse (59°33′N, 20°01′E). Bogskär Lighthouse (59°30′N, 20°21′E). Armbågen Lighthouse (59°38′N, 19°58′E) (7.257). Flötjan Lighthouse (59°49′N, 19°47′E) (Baltic Pilot Volume III). Simpnäsklubb Lighthouse (59°53′⋅6N, 19°04′⋅8E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Fishing lights
Unsurveyed area 1
Simpnäsklubb Lighthouse (white tower, black band, 16 m in height, floodlit) (59°53′⋅6N, 19°04′⋅8E), standing on a rock. Väddö Aero Light (59°58′⋅1N, 18°50′⋅6E) (Baltic Pilot Volume III). Major lights: Almagrundet Lighthouse (59°09′N, 19°08′E) (7.24). Svenska Högarna Light — as above. Söderarm Light — as above. Tjärven Light — as above.
7.254 Between Sandhamn and Svenska Björn the following lights are displayed amongst the islets, when required by fishing vessels: Horssten Light (white hut, 4 m in height) (59°18′N, 19°08′E). Älgerören Light (lantern on white pedestal) (59°20′⋅4N, 18°56′⋅5E). Tvikobb Light (metal framework tower) (59°23′⋅6N, 19°01′⋅9E). Prästkobben Light (grey lantern) (59°24′N, 19°11′E).
7.251 See 1.284 and 1.290.
Directions (continued from 7.28)
Principal marks 1
2
3
4
7.252 Landmarks: Almagrundet Lighthouse (59°09′N, 19°08′E) (7.24). Svenska Högarna Lighthouse (red metal tower, 18 m in height) (59°26′⋅7N, 19°30′⋅3E), standing on the middle of Storön. Svenska Björn Lighthouse (black tower, orange bands, grey base, 32 m in height) (59°33′N, 20°01′E), standing on Södra Klätten, a shoal. The main light is obscured from NE within a distance of 700 m from the lighthouse. Four white lights, one in each quadrant, mark the middle of the tower for vessels passing close to the structure. Bogskär Lighthouse (59°30′N, 20°21′E) (Baltic Pilot Volume III). Flötjan Lighthouse (59°49′N, 19°47′E) (Baltic Pilot Volume III). Söderarm Lighthouse (white round stone tower, red band, 21 m in height, floodlit) (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅4E), standing on an islet. Tjärven Lighthouse (lantern on roof of white castellated building) (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅2E), standing on an islet. Arholma Beacon (red round stone tower, white band, red roof, 16 m in height) (59°50′⋅9N, 19°06′⋅5E), standing on the W and highest part of the island of Arholma.
Sandhamn to Svenska Björn 1
2
7.255 From a position E of Almagrundet Light (59°09′N, 19°08′E) the track leads NE for about 33 miles through open water to a position E of Svenska Björn (59°33′N, 20°01′E), passing (with positions from Svenska Högarna Light (59°26′⋅7N, 19°30′⋅3E)): SE of Timmerman (15 miles SW), a shoal patch, thence: SE of Hemstan (9 miles SW), a shoal patch, thence: SE of Svenska Högarna Light and a 6⋅8 m patch (3½ miles SE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SE of Köpmansgrund (5 miles NE), a shoal patch, thence: SE of a 9⋅3 m patch (6½ miles NE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: To a position E of Svenska Björn.
Useful marks 7.256 1
295
Korskobben Beacon (cross on white cairn) (59°26′⋅1N, 19°30′⋅4E), standing on an islet close SSE of Storön. Kapten Beacon (low cairn) (59°26′⋅4N, 19°29′⋅6E), standing on an islet close SW of Storön.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Charts 2337, 3163
Useful marks
Svenska Björn to Simpnäsklubb 1
2
3
4
5
1
2
7.257 The route described below is the principal channel passing through Ahvenanmeren deep-water channel, shown on the chart, NE of Svenska Björn. Vessels with lesser draughts may choose to pass W of the deep-water channel, W of Svenska Björn and SW of Armbågen Light (59°37′⋅8N, 19°57′⋅8E). From a position E of Svenska Björn the track leads initially NW for about 26 miles to Söderarm Entrance approaches, thence a further 11 miles NW to a position NNW of Simpnäsklubb in the approaches to Arholma Entrance, passing (with positions from Söderarm Light (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅4E), unless stated): NE of Norra Klätten, a 9⋅5 m shoal, 1 mile NNW of Svenska Björn Light, thence: NE of Armbågen, a 6⋅7 m shoal, 4¾ miles NW of Svenska Björn, marked by a buoy (E cardinal), and Armbågen Östra Light-buoy (E cardinal), moored 6 cables ESE. And: NE of Armbågen Light (red round tower, white band, 20 m in height) (59°38′N, 19°58′E), standing on a shoal on the SW side of the fairway, thence: SW of Tröskeln Östra Light (white mast, red band) (59°40′N, 19°55′E), standing on a shoal on the NE side of the fairway, thence: NE of an obstruction, the base of the former Tröskeln Västra Lighthouse (59°40′N, 19°52′E), destroyed in December 2000, and marked by a light-buoy (E cardinal). Thence: SW of Flötjan Light (12 miles ENE) (Baltic Pilot Volume III), and: NE of Storgrund (5½ miles SE), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (E cardinal). (Directions for Ålands Hav continue in Baltic Pilot Volume III) 7.258 Thence the track continues: NE of Hummelgrund (1½ miles ENE), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (N cardinal), and: NE of Söderarm Light (7.252) and Söderbådan, 3 cables NE, the highest of the islets in the group, thence: NE of Tjärven Light (2½ miles NNW) (7.252), thence: NE of Bräsken (4¼ miles NW), a rock on which stands a beacon (white), and Östergrund, 5 cables NW, a shoal area with a least depth of 1⋅6 m over it, thence: NE of Storgrund (10¾ miles NW), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (N cardinal), moored on the SW side of Arholma Entrance, thence: To a position NNW of Simpnäsklubb.
7.260 1
2
Anchorage Styrjan 1
2
7.259 By day, Tjärven Lighthouse (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅2E) bearing less than 298°, when S of Söderarm, and Simpnäsklubb Lighthouse (59°53′⋅6N, 19°04′⋅8E) bearing less than 301°, when N of Söderarm, clears NE of all shoals and dangers NW of Tröskeln Västra Lighthouse (59°39′⋅6N, 19°51′⋅7E) (7.257). By night, the red sector (298°–338°) of Tjärven Light covers the shoals SE of the fomer lighthouse.
7.261 Local knowledge is required. Styrjan (59°43′⋅6N, 19°24′⋅2E) is a small area of open clear water, situated close W of Karskär, among the extensive area of islets, rocks and shoals extending S from Söderarm Lighthouse (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅4E). It is entered through a short narrow passage, the entrance to which may be identified by Landkobben (59°43′⋅6N, 19°26′⋅0E), a high pointed islet which is clearly distinguished from N, and by Gåskobb Beacon, 7 cables SE (7.294). Anchorage may be obtained, by vessels with a draught up to 3⋅5 m, in depths of about 12 to 40 m, stones, sand and clay.
SANDHAMN ENTRANCE TO SÖDERARM ENTRANCE — INNER CHANNELS General information Charts 3156, 3127, 3163
Routes 1
2
3
Clearing bearings 1
Svenska Stenarna Beacon (red, iron framework pyramid, 12 m in height) (59°35′N, 19°35′E), standing on the largest islet of Svenska Stenarna, a small group of high, light-coloured rocky islets. Gåskobb Beacon (59°43′⋅1N, 19°26′⋅9E) (7.294). Leading lights, in line bearing 175½°, displayed when required by pilots from an islet 180 m SSE of Söderarm Light (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅4E). Radio mast (red light) (59°44′⋅1N, 19°20′⋅2E), standing at an elevation of 112 m, on Manskär. (Directions continue for Söderarm Entrance at 7.288, and for Arholma Entrance at 7.335)
7.262 There are two inner channels leading N through the N part of Stockholms Skärgård which connect the inner part of Sandhamn Entrance channel in Kanholmsfjärden (7.108) to the channels WSW of Söderarm Entrance channel in Granhamnsfjärden and NE of Furusund. Main channel. The main channel, Rödlögaleden, also known as Möjaleden, is marked by lights and buoys (lateral). It is authorised for a draught of 7⋅0 m and leads from Kanholmsfjärden generally NNE for about 28 miles to join the main channel in Granhamnsfjärden (59°43′N, 19°08′E), passing through Kobbfjärden (59°32′N, 19°10′E), Kudoxafjärden (59°38′N, 19°09′E) and Ådskärsfjärden (59°41′N, 19°11′E). Secondary channel. The secondary channel, Husaröleden, well marked by buoys (lateral) throughout its length, but unlighted, is generally narrow and tortuous. It is authorised for a draught of 4⋅2 m and leads about 22 miles N from Kanholmsfjärden to join the main channel 2 miles NE of Furusund (59°40′N, 18°55′E), passing through Möja Söderfjärd, Möja Västerfjärd (59°26′N, 18°50′E) and thence through Blidösund (59°37′N, 18°53′E) between Yxlan (7.309) and Blidö.
Pilotage 1
296
7.263 See 7.4, the charts, and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for the boarding places at Söderarm and Sandhamn Entrances.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
NW of a rock awash (1 mile SW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SE of a 6⋅6 m patch (8 cables SW), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: NW of Stenkobbsgrund Light (white tower, green band, 13 m in height), displayed from a rock on the SE side of the fairway, thence: Between a 5 m patch (2¼ miles NE), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), and a 7⋅7 m shoal, 3 cables ESE, marked by a buoy (starboard hand). By night, the white sector (221¾°–224½°) of Stenkobbsgrund Light, astern, leads NE through this part of the fairway. Thence: SE of a 1 m shoal (4¾ miles NE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NW of a 6⋅7 m patch (5¼ miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NW of Draken (5½ miles NE), rocks awash on which stand a beacon (white, red band), at an elevation of 3 m.
Unsurveyed areas 1
1
2
7.264 Each of the inner channels is bordered over most of its length by extensive areas, shown on the charts, where the coastal archipelago has been incompletely surveyed and within which uncharted shoals and other dangers may exist.
2
Ice channel restriction
3
7.265 Within the inner channels, if the fairway is covered in crossable ice, it is prohibited to break the ice channels between the following latitudes: In Rödlögaleden, between latitudes 59°24′⋅4N, at Berg, and 59°25′⋅8N, at Stenkobbsgrund Lighthouse. In Husaröleden, between latitudes 59°30′N, at Husarö, and 59°31′⋅1N, at Långholmen. Details of dates when the restrictions are in force are published in weekly Swedish Notices to Mariners.
4
Dumping ground 1
7.266 An explosives dumping ground, shown on the chart, within which anchoring, fishing and underwater operations are prohibited, is centred about 5 cables E of Stora Fjärdholmen (59°21′N, 18°50′E).
1
Directions
2
Rödlögaleden 1
2
3
4
1
7.267 From a position 1 mile NW of Gastholmsgrundet Light (59°19′⋅1N, 18°48′⋅6E) (7.139) the track, shown on the chart, leads 6 miles NE to the entrance to Norrfjärden, passing (with positions from Fjärdholmen Light (white tower, green band) (59°21′⋅4N, 18°49′⋅8E), displayed from the NW side of Stora Fjärdholmen): SE of Röko (9 cables WSW), thence: NW of Fjärdholmen Light, and: SE of Långkobb (3 cables NW). By night the white sector (036°–038½°), ahead, of Pålkobb Light leads 3 miles through the fairway. Thence: SE of a 1⋅5 m patch (5 cables NNW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Clear of a 9⋅2 m patch (9 cables NNE), thence: SE of a shoal area with a least depth over it of 4⋅3 m (3 miles NNE), marked on its E side by a buoy (port hand), thence: NW of Pålkobb Light (white tower, green band, 11 m in height) (59°24′⋅7N, 18°54′⋅3E), displayed from the N side of an islet on the E side of the fairway. A buoy (starboard hand) marks the W limit of the shoals extending E from the islet. And: SE of Stora Möja Light (red light hut with white band and black plinth) (59°24′⋅8N, 18°54′⋅1E), displayed from the SE side of Möja. The shoals W of the fairway lie in the red sector (028°-shore) of this light. Speed is restricted to 12 kn in Norrfjärden NE of Pålkobb Light. 7.268 Thence the track leads 9 miles NE and 4½ miles N through the fairway to a position NW of Rödlöga (59°35′⋅5N, 19°10′⋅0E), an islet which can be identified by a high, wooded round-topped hummock, passing (with positions from Stenkobbsgrund Light (59°25′⋅8N, 18°57′⋅2E):
3
4
7.269 Thence the track continues, passing (with positions from Morsken Light (red square on white cairn) (59°30′⋅9N, 19°05′⋅3E), standing on from a rock on the NW side of the fairway): SE of Morsken Light. Foul ground extending E from the light is marked by a buoy (port hand), Thence: SE of Blötberget (5 cables NE), a shoal area marked on its E side by a buoy (port hand), thence: W of a 6⋅3 m patch (1½ miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: E of a 5 m patch (2 miles NNE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: E of Tridingskobb (2½ miles NNE), a rock awash on which stands a beacon (white, green band), elevation 3 m. A buoy (port hand), close E, marks the limit of the shoal water. Thence: E of a 7⋅4 m patch (3½ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: W of Enskär (4 miles NNE) and the foul ground extending SW, thence: To a position NW of Rödlöga close E of Hundskärsknuv Light (white tower, red band, 7 m in height) (59°35′⋅9N, 19°07′⋅6E) displayed from an islet on the W side of the fairway. By night, the white sector (001°–003°), ahead, of the light leads through the fairway N and S of Tridingskobb, to Enskär.
Useful mark 7.270 1
1
2
297
Mellgrundsknuv Lighthouse (white framework tower) (59°36′⋅5N, 19°03′⋅5E), displayed when required by fishing vessels from the N side of a rocky shoal area 2 miles WNW of Hundskärsknuv Light. 7.271 Thence the track leads 4¾ miles NNE, 2 miles N and 1½ miles NW through the fairway to join the main channel from Söderarm Entrance in Granhamnsfjärden, 6 cables SE of Fårholmsrevet Light (59°43′⋅8N, 19°06′⋅7E) (7.290), passing (with positions from Årskobben Light (white lantern on stone hut, red band) (59°39′⋅7N, 19°09′⋅7E), displayed from an islet on the W side of the fairway): WNW of a 5⋅8 m patch (2½ miles SSW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: ESE of a buoy (port hand) (6 cables SSW), marking the limit of the shoals SE of Mjölkö, thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
3
4
5
ESE of Årskobben Light, and: WNW of Västerkobb Light (white tower, green band, 7 m in height), displayed from an islet 3 cables E of Årskobben Light, close W of Vidinge, thence: E of a rock awash (1 mile N), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: E of a buoy (port hand) (1½ miles N) marking the edge of the channel. By night, the white sector (180°–183°), astern, of Västerkobb Light leads N through this part of the channel. Thence: E of a 7⋅6 m patch (2½ miles N), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Lilla Rankarögrund (3 miles N) at the S entrance to Rankaröfjärden, a rock on which stands a beacon (white, green band), thence: NE of a rock awash (3¼ miles NNW), marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: To a position 6 cables SE of Fårholmsrevet Light. By night, the white sector (302°–305½°), ahead, of the light leads through the latter part of the fairway.
2
3
4
1
Möja 1
1
1
Husaröleden 1
inlet on the N coast of Ingmarsö, an island W of the S part of Husaröleden. The harbour, which has a least depth of 2⋅5 m, consists of small jetties providing a number of berths with depths of about 2⋅5 m. It is entered off a channel which branches W from Husaröleden to lead N of Lökholmen (59°29′⋅5N, 18°48′⋅5E) (7.273). A buoy (E cardinal) marks a shoal area at the entrance to Norrviken.
7.272 Local knowledge is required. From a position 1½ cables NNW of Fjärdholmen Light (59°21′⋅4N, 18°49′⋅8E), the track, shown on the chart and well marked by buoys, leads about 15 miles N and 7 miles NE to join the main channel close W of Ålandets grund Light (59°40′⋅9N, 18°59′⋅0E) (7.307), passing: E of a 1⋅5 m patch, 5 cables NNW of the light, marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Between Södermöja (59°24′N, 18°51′E) and Tjägö, 4 cables W. A 3⋅2 m patch, marked by a buoy (starboard hand), lies close to the track 2 cables WNW of Västerholmsudden, the NW point of Södermöja. Thence: E of Trulsör (59°25′⋅5N, 18°49′⋅5E), at the S end of Möja Västerfjärd. A buoy (port hand), marks the shoals extending NE from the islet. Thence: Through the narrow passage between Stora Kalholmen (59°27′⋅3N, 18°49′⋅5E) and Segelskäret, 3 cables ESE. A beacon (orange) stands on a rock, close E of Segelskäret. Thence the track leads for about 8 miles through an area of numerous islets, rocks and shoals to the SW end of Blidösund before turning NE through Blidösund to a position close E of Ålandets grund Light. By night the white sector (036½°–039°), ahead, of this light leads through the latter part of the fairway. Speed in Blidösund is restricted to 8 kn between Duvnäs (59°37′⋅7N, 18°53′⋅5E) and Fagernäs, 2 miles NE. 7.273 Useful marks: Beacon (orange) standing on the NE side of Lökholmen (59°29′⋅5N, 18°48′⋅5E), an islet on the W side of the fairway. Beacon (black and white rectangular topmark), close W of the NW point of Siggholmen (59°30′⋅5N, 18°49′⋅5E).
1
1
1
SÖDERARM ENTRANCE APPROACHES AND CHANNELS TO KAPELLSKÄR General information Charts 2337, 3163
Routes 1
2
Harbours Ingmarsö 1
7.275 Möja (59°25′N, 18°53′E) is an island situated between the S entrances to Rödlögaleden and Husaröleden. There are five small craft harbours situated at various locations on Möja as described below. 7.276 Kyrkviken (59°24′⋅4N, 18°53′⋅0E), a fishing and small craft harbour, lies on the W side of an inlet on the S part of the island. It consists of a number of small piers and jetties providing numerous berths with depths of about 2 m. 7.277 Berg lies close E of Kyrkviken on the E side of the inlet. It is principally used as a small general cargo harbour but has a few berths for pleasure craft. Depths at the berths are between 1 to 3 m in the inner part and about 4 m in the outer part. 7.278 Löka (59°24′⋅7N, 18°53′⋅8E) lies in an inlet 5 cables NE of Berg. It is a fishing and pleasure craft harbour containing a number of small quays and jetties providing berths with depths of about 1⋅8 m. Rescue. Two fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at Löka. 7.279 Ramsmora (59°25′⋅7N, 18°54′⋅7E) lies in a small inlet on the SE side of the island. It is a fishing and pleasure craft harbour containing a number of small piers and quays providing several berths. The inner harbour has a least depth of 1⋅6 m, the berths in the outer part have depths up to about 5 m. Facilities. Slip which takes boats up to 8 m in length. 7.280 Långvik (59°26′⋅5N, 18°55′⋅2E) is a small fishing and pleasure craft harbour situated in an inlet on the NE side of the island. It contains a small number of jetties providing berths with depths of about 2 m but the inner part is very shallow.
7.274 Ingmarsö (59°28′⋅6N, 18°45′⋅1E), a small fishing and pleasure craft harbour, lies at the S end of Norrviken, an
298
7.281 The description includes the waters and channels in the approaches to Söderarm Entrance and the channels leading to Kapellskär (59°43′N, 19°04′E) (7.300), a small harbour which is also described. Main channel. The main channel from seaward, known as Söderarmsleden, is authorised for a draught of 8⋅0 m. It is entered E of Tjärven Lighthouse (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅2E) and leads WSW to Kapellskär passing S of Remmargrund (59°45′⋅5N, 19°19′⋅0E), a rocky shoal area in the entrance, through the N part of Rankaröfjärden and thence through Granhamnsfjärden. The channel from Arholma Entrance joins the main channel close SE of Kapellskär.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
3
4
Alternative entrance channel. A channel, authorised for a draught of 8⋅0 m, is entered NNW of Tjärven Lighthouse and leads SSE, passing W of Remmargrund, to join the main channel WSW of Remmargrund. Secondary channel. A secondary channel of no authorised draught, known as the winter channel, is approached and entered from a position ESE of Söderarm Lighthouse (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅4E). Thence the channel, which is unlighted and only for use by day, leads initially SW, thence W round the S end of the Söderarm shoal area, and finally NW through Idskärsfjärden (59°43′N, 19°20′E) to join the main channel WSW of Remmargrund.
Principal marks 1
2
Restricted area 1
2
7.282 The entrance lies within a restricted area within which vessels must keep to the recommended tracks, the boundaries of which are shown on the chart, and which extends NW to Arholma. It is bounded as follows: On the E by Längden (59°44′⋅1N, 19°27′⋅5E), thence NW via Tjärven Lighthouse to its N limit at Högskär Beacon (59°52′⋅3N, 19°06′⋅4E) (7.339). Thence: SSW to its W limit on the W side of Lidön (59°47′⋅0N, 19°04′⋅0E), thence: SE to its S limit at Vättarna (59°40′⋅0N, 19°16′⋅6E), and thence NE to Längden.
Other aid to navigation 1
Directions
Main channel — 8V0 m
Pilotage
2
7.283 Pilots are available through Stockholm Pilot Station giving 5 hours advance notice and ordered from VTS Stockholm. There is a pilot station at Kapellskär (59°43′N, 19°04′E) which is part of the Stockholm pilot area network serving the Söderarm and Arholma Entrances. Pilot boarding places, shown on the chart, are as follows: Main entrance — 1½ miles NNW of Söderarm Lighthouse (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅4E). N entrance — 2½ miles N of Remmargrund Lighthouse (59°45′⋅5N, 19°19′⋅0E). For full details see 7.4 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
2
3
Vessel Traffic Service 1
7.284 Söderarm Entrance and the inner channels lie within the mandatory Reporting and Information System in force for the control of shipping, located at VTS Stockholm. Positions of reporting points are shown on the charts. For full details of the area covered, information required, categories of vessels and reporting points see 7.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Unsurveyed area 1
7.287 Racon: Remmargrund Lighthouse (59°45′⋅5N, 19°19′⋅0E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
(continued from 7.260)
1
1
7.286 Landmarks: Söderarm Lighthouse (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅4E) (7.252). Tjärven Lighthouse (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅2E) (7.252). Remmargrund Lighthouse (black round tower, red bands, floodlit) (59°45′⋅5N, 19°19′⋅0E), standing at an elevation of 20 m on a rock in the middle of the fairway. Radio mast (red light) (59°44′⋅1N, 19°20′⋅2E). Arholma Beacon (59°50′⋅9N, 19°06′⋅5E) (7.252). Väddö Aero Light (59°58′⋅1N, 18°50′⋅6E) (Baltic Pilot Volume III). Major lights: Söderarm Light (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅4E) (7.252). Tjärven Light (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅2E) (7.252).
1
2
7.285 An area, shown on the chart, where the archipelago has been incompletely surveyed and within which uncharted shoals and other dangers may exist, lies W of Söderarm Entrance and N of the inner part of the entrance channel.
299
7.288 The entrance is approached from ENE with Remmargrund Lighthouse (59°45′⋅5N, 19°19′⋅0E), ahead bearing about 247°, and by night in the white sector (237°–256°) of the light. From a position about 3 miles E of Tjärven Light (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅2E) the track, shown on the chart and marked by buoys, light-buoys, beacons and lights, leads about 12½ miles WSW to a position SE of Kapellskär, passing (with all positions from Remmargrund Light): NNW of Hummelgrund (4¼ miles E) (7.258), thence: SSE of Tjärven Lighthouse (2½ miles NE), in the vicinity of the pilot boarding place, and: NNW of Norrgryndan (2 miles E), a shoal patch marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SSE of a shoal with a least depth of 8 m, marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NNW of Båtskärsbådan Beacon (black cairn, 6 m in height) (6 cables ESE), standing on a shoal on the S side of the fairway. A buoy (port hand), 1 cable NW, marks the NW side of the shoal area. Thence: SSE of Remmargrund Lighthouse, which may be passed on either side, but the main channel leads S. The channel N of the light is narrow and marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), moored about 1½ cables N of the light. 7.289 Thence the track continues: NNW of a 6 m patch (5 cables SSW), marked by a buoy (port hand). Västra Tviklovan Beacon (black round concrete tower), the remains of a former lighthouse, 2 cables S, stands on an islet. Thence: NNW of a shoal area (1¼ miles SW) with a least depth over it of 5⋅7 m, marked on its NW side by a light-buoy (port hand). By night, the white sector (245°–250½°), ahead, of Lerskärsgrund Light, below, leads through this part of the fairway. Thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
SSE of Nygrund Light (white and green beacon, 9 m in height) (1¾ miles WSW), displayed from a rock on the NW side of the fairway. Thence: NNW of Pärlaskärsbådan Beacon (black, white band, 4 m in height) (2 miles WSW), thence: NNW or SSE of Lerskärsgrund Lighthouse (black round tower, red bands, 13 m in height) (3 miles WSW), passing NNW of Norra Lerskäret Light (orange pedestal, white top) (2¾ miles WSW), displayed from the N side of the largest islet in the group on the S side of the fairway. If using the channel S of Lerskärsgrund Light pass NNW of a 6⋅7 m patch, close N of Lergrund, rocks awash, 1½ cables SSW. If using the channel N of Lerskärsgrund Light pass SSE of a 3 m patch, 2½ cables NW, marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand). By night, the white sector (249½°–253°), ahead, of Botveskär Light leads through the N channel to a position close NNW of Lerskärsgrund Light. Thence, the white sector (057°–062°), astern, of Nygrund Light leads 1 mile WSW through the fairway and into the white sector (251°–259½°), ahead, of Kapellskär Light which leads through the latter part of the fairway in Granhamnsfjärden (7.262).
3
4
1
2
3
4
7.290 Thence the track continues: NNW of Fjärdgrund Beacon (black cairn, white band, 3 m in height) (3½ miles WSW), standing on a shoal on the S side of the fairway, and: SSE of a buoy (starboard hand), 3 cables NW of Fjärdgrund Beacon, marking the edge of the channel, thence: SSE of Botveskär Light (white lantern, floodlit) (4¼ miles WSW), standing on from the S side of an islet on the N side of the fairway, thence: NNW of Rankarögrund Beacon (white cairn, red band, triangular topmark, floodlit) (4½ miles WSW), standing on a rock on the S side of the fairway, thence: NNW of Plomgrund (6½ miles WSW), a shoal area with a least depth over it of 8⋅9 m, marked on its NW side by a light-buoy (port hand), and on its SE side by a buoy (S cardinal), and: SSE of Fårholmsrevet Light (white hut) (6½ miles WSW), displayed from the N part of Fårholmsrev, an area of foul ground extending S from the islets on the N side of the fairway, marked at its S limit by two buoys (starboard hand), thence: To a position 3 cables SE of Kapellskär Light (white tower, green band, 9 m in height, floodlit) (59°43′⋅1N, 19°04′⋅7E), displayed from a rock close off the SE side of the islet. By night the white sector (251°–259½°) of this light, leads in the fairway between Plomgrund and Fårholmsrev.
2
Alternative entrance channel — 8V0 m 1
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
7.291 Cairn (pile of stones) (59°48′⋅1N, 19°15′⋅3E), standing on the summit of Håkanskär. Beacon (black cairn), standing on the NW point of the islet, 1½ cables SW of Norra Lerskäret Light (59°44′⋅3N, 19°14′⋅1E). Beacon (seamark) (59°44′⋅2N, 19°08′⋅8E), standing on an islet 1 mile WNW of Botveskär Light.
7.292 From a position about 2½ miles NNW of Tjärven Light (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅2E) the track leads SSW for about 5 miles, by night initially in the white sector (176°–207°) of Remmargrund Light (59°45′⋅5N, 19°19′⋅0E) (7.286), to join the main channel 7 cables WSW of Remmargrund Light, passing (with positions from Remmargrund Light): ESE of Bräsken Beacon (white) (2½ miles NNW), standing on a rock on the W side of the fairway, thence: ESE of Långbådan and Marrgrund, shoal patches (about 2¼ miles NNW), and: WNW of Tjärven Light (2½ miles NE), thence: ESE of Norrskären Light (white concrete tower, green band, 6 m in height) (8 cables NW), standing on from a rock on the W side of the fairway, thence: WNW of Remmargrund Norra Light (3½ cables N) (7.293), thence: SE of Österskärsbådan Light (white concrete tower, green band, 6 m in height) (7 cables WNW), thence: To a position 7 cables WSW of Remmargrund Light. 7.293 Lights in line: From the same vicinity, the approach can be made to the vicinity of Norrskären Light with the the following lights in line bearing 183°: Front. Remmargrund Norra Light (white concrete tower, red band, 6 m in height) (59°45′⋅9N, 19°19′⋅0E), displayed from the N part of Remmargrund. Rear. Remmargrund Light (59°45′⋅5N, 19°19′⋅0E) (7.286) (500 m S of front light).
Secondary — Winter channel
Useful marks 1
Beacon (59°43′⋅7N, 19°07′⋅5E), standing on the S side of Granhamn, 4 cables E of Fårholmsrevet Light. Kapellskär Beacon (red cairn, white band, straddled by framework pyramid, triangular topmark point down), standing on the islet about 1 cable NW of Kapellskär Light (59°43′⋅1N, 19°04′⋅7E). (Directions for Furusundsleden continue at 7.307)
4
300
7.294 Approach can be made with Gåskobb Beacon (black rectangle) (59°43′⋅1N, 19°26′⋅9E), standing on an islet SSE of Söderarm Lighthouse (59°45′⋅2N, 19°24′⋅4E), ahead bearing about 234°. From a position about 3½ miles ESE of Söderarm Light the track, shown on the chart, marked at intervals by beacons, and pairs of beacons in line which indicate the limits of the fairway on each side, leads through the middle of the fairway, about 4½ miles SSW, 1½ miles W and about 5 miles NW, to join the main channel, passing (with all positions from Söderarm Light): NW of Storgrund (5½ miles SE) (7.257), thence: SE of Gammelknuven (2 miles ESE), a shoal patch, thence: SE of Längden (2 miles SE), an islet on the W side of the fairway, thence: SE of Gåskobb Beacon (2½ miles SSE), and: NW of Storgrundsbådan (3¾ miles SE), an extensive area of shoals with rocks on its W side, thence: SE of Brusan (3½ miles S), an area of foul ground with rocks awash and a least depth of 1⋅8 m near
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
5
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
its S end. Storharskobb (59°41′⋅0N, 19°18′⋅9E), ahead, bearing 268° leads through this section of the fairway. Thence: The alignment of each pair of the following beacons, described in channel order, marks the fairway limits on each side of the track as indicated on the chart. 7.295 Beacons in line: Common front. Storharskobb, two beacons (short black cylindrical) (59°41′⋅0N, 19°18′⋅9E), standing on a rock W of the channel. Rear. Stora Sunnkobb (black cylinder; topmark triangle point up), standing 5 cables W of front beacon. The beacons in line bearing 274° mark the S limit of the section leading 1½ miles W, and which passes S of Östra Klitaskär Beacon (red square) (3¼ miles S), standing on an islet N of the fairway. Rear. Södra Sunnkobb (similar structure; topmark triangle point up), standing 5 cables WSW of front beacon. The beacons in line bearing 262° mark the N limit. 7.296 Beacons in line: Front. Östra Tomasklabb (red truncated cone; topmark red triangle point up) (59°43′⋅3N, 19°21′⋅5E), standing on a rock on the NE side of the fairway, in line with common rear beacon bearing 331° marks the E limit of the section leading 2 miles NNW. Front. Tomaskobb (similar structure; topmark black triangle point down), standing on an islet 1 cable SW of above beacon, in line with common rear bearing 337° marks the W limit. Common rear. Önskär (black truncated cone; topmark black circle) (on an islet 1 mile NNW of front beacons). 7.297 Beacons in line: Front. Griskobben Norra (red truncated cone; topmark black triangle point up) (59°43′⋅9N, 19°17′⋅7E), standing on an islet on the W side of the fairway, in line with common rear bearing 294° marks the N limit of the section leading 2 miles through Idskärsfjärden. Front. Griskobben Södra (similar structure; topmark black triangle point down), standing close S of the above beacon, in line with common rear bearing 296° marks the S limit. Common rear. Per-Svenskobb (similar structure; topmark black circle) (on an islet 5¾ cables NW of front beacons). 7.298 Beacons in line: Front. Västra Alskärsklabb (red truncated cone; topmark black triangle point up) (59°43′⋅2N, 19°19′⋅8E), standing on a rock SW of the fairway, in line with common rear bearing 126° marks the SW limit of the section leading 8 cables through the NW part of Idskärsfjärden. Front. Östra Alskärsklabb (similar structure; topmark black triangle point down), standing close E of the above beacon, in line with common rear bearing 127½° marks the NE limit. Common rear. Idskäret (black truncated cone; topmark two vertical black circles) (on an islet 5 cables SE of front lights).
1
2
3
7.299 Beacons in line: Common front. Grisen (red truncated cone; topmark black circle) (59°43′⋅9N, 19°17′⋅2E), standing on a rock SW of the fairway, bearing 162°, astern, leads through the middle of the final part of the winter channel to join the main channel 4 cables ESE of Nygrund Light (59°45′⋅1N, 19°15′⋅7E). Rear. Bränd-Hallskärskobben (similar structure; topmark black triangle point down) (on an islet 4 cables SSE of above beacon), in line with Grisen Beacon bearing 155° marks the W limit of the fairway, and also clears E of a 4 m patch 4 cables NNW of Grisen Beacon. Rear. Rammskärskobb (similar structure; topmark black triangle point up) (on an islet about 1½ miles SSE of Grisen Beacon), in line with that beacon bearing 170° marks the E limit, and clears W of a 5 m patch 3 cables NNW of Grisen Beacon.
Harbours Chart 3163
Kapellskär 1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
301
7.300 Description. Kapellskär (59°43′N, 19°04′E) is a major ferry harbour situated on the SE side of Rådmansö at the W end of Granhamnsfjärden and close to the junction of the fairways leading from Söderarm and Arholma Entrances which then enter Furusundsleden, thence leading S to join the main channel to Stockholm. The harbour, suitable for a draught of 8⋅0 m in the approach channel, lies on the W side of an open bay, partially protected at the N and S ends by islets. Port Authority. Roslagshamnar AB, Kapellskär, SE−760 15 Gräddö, Sweden. The port is part of the Ports of Stockholm Group. 7.301 Directions. The harbour is entered from E, from a position at the W end of Granhamnsfjärden, on the alignment of either of two pairs of leading lights as follows: Svedjelandet Leading Lights: Front light (green triangle point up, white vertical stripe, on mast) (59°43′⋅4N, 19°03′⋅8E), displayed, on request, from the W side of the harbour. Rear light (similar structure, triangle point down) (100 m W of front light). The alignment (269¼°) of these lights leads about 7 cables W to the berth in the N part of the harbour, passing close S of a light-buoy (starboard hand), marking the limit of the shoal water extending S from Saltholmen, the islet at the N end of the bay. Örarna Leading Lights: Front light (orange triangle point up, white stripe, on mast) (59°43′⋅3N, 19°03′⋅9E), displayed from the W side of the harbour. Rear light (similar structure, triangle point down) (50 m W of front light). The alignment (269½°) of these lights leads about 7 cables W to the berths in the central part of the harbour, passing close N of a light-buoy (port hand), marking the limit of the shoal water extending N from the islet at the S end of the bay on which stands Kapellskär Beacon (59°43′⋅1N, 19°04′⋅7E) (7.291). The harbour may also be entered from S through a narrow channel, marked by buoys and a light-buoy, leading
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
1
2
3
N from a position in the main channel about 6 cables SSW of Kapellskär Beacon, passing W of Kapellskärsgrund (7.307) and thence through the narrow passage between the islet and the mainland, to enter the S end of the harbour. 7.302 Harbour and berths. The harbour consists of a jetty and two piers extending SE from the shore. In the S part of the harbour, 2 cables S of the N jetty, there is a small harbour for the use of pilot craft. The N jetty, which has a dolphin with a diameter of 12 m close ESE of the jetty head, has two berths: Berth No 4, on the N side, has a length of 150 m with depths alongside of 7⋅5 to 8 m and a ramp width of 10 m, and can accept vessels of up to 190 m in length. Berth No 3, on the S side, has a similar length and depth, with a fixed ramp 28 m in width and a height of 1⋅2 m. The central part has two piers close together: Berth No 2, the inner, has a length of 69 m with a depth of 5⋅5 m and a moveable ramp 9 m in width. Berth No 1 has a length of 115 m and a depth alongside of 7 m with a moveable ramp 9 m in width. Facilities. None available.
Speed restriction 1
Directions (continued from 7.291)
Kapellskär to Furusund 1
2
3
Fejans Hamn 1
7.303 Fejans Hamn (59°44′⋅6N, 19°10′⋅0E) is situated in a small inlet on the NE side of Fejan, 7 cables NNW of Botveskär Light (59°44′⋅0N, 19°11′⋅0E). Anchorage may be obtained in depths of 16 to 22 m, clay and stones. Berths. There is a jetty and a small pier, each with a depth of 3⋅7 m alongside. Rescue. Two fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at Fejan. See also 1.156.
4
KAPELLSKÄR TO VÄXLET General information
5
Chart 3163, 3127
Route 1
2
7.304 Main channel. The main channel, of which the section described here forms the N part, is known as Furusundsleden, which leads from Granhamnsfjärden (59°43′N, 19°08′E), SW to Trälhavet (59°26′N, 18°23′E). This section of the channel, marked by buoys, lights and beacons, is authorised for a draught of 8⋅0 m and leads about 14 miles SW from Kapellskär (59°43′N, 19°04′E) to Växlet (59°35′⋅2N, 18°43′⋅7E). Also described are short branch channels on the main route, Furusund, and other minor harbours within this part of the archipelago.
Ice channel restriction 1
7.305 Within the main channel, if the fairway is covered in crossable ice, it is prohibited to break the ice channel in the section E of Hakholmarna (59°36′N, 18°47′E) (7.309). Details of dates when the restrictions are in force are published in weekly Swedish Notices to Mariners.
7.306 Speed is restricted to 12 kn in the channels described in this section from S of Furusund to Växlet.
6
7
1
302
7.307 From a position 3 cables SE of Kapellskär Light (59°43′⋅1N, 19°04′⋅7E) the track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys, light-buoys and lights, leads 5½ miles SW through the fairway to a position SE of Furusund Light (green framework tower on white round concrete base, 6 m in height; floodlit) (59°39′⋅8N, 18°56′⋅0E), standing on a rock close SE off the NE side of Furusund (7.309), passing (with positions from the light): SE of Kapellskärsgrund (5¼ miles NE), a shoal area marked on its SE side by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: NW of a buoy (port hand) (5 miles NE), marking the N limit of an extensive rocky shoal area on the S side of the fairway, thence: NW of Marö Udde Light (red lantern, white band; floodlit) (59°42′⋅2N, 19°03′⋅7E), displayed from the N point of Marö. By night, the white sector (221½°–230½°), ahead, of the light leads through the initial section of the fairway. Thence: NW of a 3⋅4 m patch (4 miles NE), marked by a light-buoy (port hand). By night, the white sector (241½°–245°), ahead, of Ålandskobb Light leads through the fairway SW of Marö. Thence: SE of a rock awash (3½ miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SE of Rosgrund, a 10 m shoal marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: SE of Ålandskobb Light (green lantern, white band, floodlit) (2 miles NE), displayed from a rock on the N side of the fairway. A 7⋅4 m patch, 2 cables ENE, is marked by a buoy (starboard hand). And: NW of Ålandets Grund Light (red tower, white band, 6 m in height, floodlit) (2 miles NE), displayed from a shoal SE of the fairway. A buoy (port hand), close N, marks the edge of the channel. By night, the white sector (042°–049½°), astern, of Ålandskobb Light leads through the fairway SW of the light. In addition, the white sector (228½°–232°), ahead, of Furusund Light leads through this section of the fairway. Thence: SE of a 3⋅8 m patch (about 1¼ miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand). A 3⋅4 m shoal lies close W. thence: NW of a rocky shoal area (1 mile NE), marked by a buoy (N cardinal) and by a buoy (S cardinal), marking the adjacent channel leading NW from Blidösund (7.272). A further buoy (E cardinal), 7 cables NE, marks an 8 m patch in the same channel. Thence: NW of a 2⋅8 m patch (6 cables ENE), marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: To a position close SE of Furusund Light. 7.308 Useful marks: Kapellskär Beacon (59°43′⋅1N, 19°04′⋅7E) (7.291). Tower (59°42′⋅0N, 19°03′⋅4E), standing on Marö.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Furusund to Växlet 1
2
3
4
5
6
7.309 A ferry crosses the channel from Köpmanholm, 1½ cables S of Furusund Light, NW for 3 cables to Furusund. Speed is restricted to 8 kn in the vicinity. Ice. The passage through Furusundet is navigable throughout the year, maintained by the use of icebreakers. From a position SE of Furusund Light the track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys, light-buoys, beacons and lights, leads 8 miles generally SW to a position S of Växlet Södra Light (lantern on white pedestal, green band, floodlit) (59°35′⋅1N, 18°43′⋅9E), displayed from a shoal on the N side of the fairway, passing (with positions from this light): NW of a former light-structure (white pilot house) (7½ miles NE), standing on the NW side of Yxlan. By night the white sector (046°–049°), astern, of Furusund Light leads SW through the fairway. Thence: SE of Eknogrund (6 miles NE), a rocky shoal on which stands a beacon (green). A buoy (starboard hand) is moored close E, marking the E side of the shoal, and a light-buoy (starboard hand), 1 cable SSW, marks a 6 m patch at the SW end of the shoal area. Thence: SE of Baldersgrund (5 miles NE), a 4⋅8 m patch marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: SE of Gryten Light (white tower, green band, 8 m in height; floodlit) (3¼ miles NE), displayed from a rock close S of the S end of the islet, thence: The track trends further SW to pass SE of Hakholmarna, an extensive area of islets, rocks and shoals in the central part of the fairway, passing, with positions as above: SE of rocks awash (2½ miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand). By night the white sector (210°–216½°), ahead, of Yxlan Light leads SW through this section of the fairway. Thence: SE of Grönholmen (2 miles ENE), an islet, thence: NW of Yxlan Light (red hut, white band; floodlit) (2 miles ENE), displayed from the SW side of Yxlan, thence: SSE of an 8⋅9 m patch (2½ cables E), marked on its W side by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: To a position about 2 cables S of Växlet Södra Light.
1
2
3
1
2
3
7.311 Small vessel channel. A short channel, shown on the chart, suitable for small vessels with shallow draughts up to about 3⋅6 m, extends SW from the branch channel described above to join the main channel about 1½ miles SW of Växlet Norra Light. From a position SE of Stor-Andö the track leads SW to pass through the narrow channel NW of Växlet Norra Light (white concrete tower, red band, 7 m in height), standing on Växlet, a rock close SE of Bergsholmen and 1½ cables NW of Växlet Södra Light. A buoy (starboard hand) moored about ½ cable WNW marks the NW side of the channel. By night, the white sectors (236°–239°) and (068°–072°), ahead and astern respectively, of Växlet Norra Light lead through the fairway for the length of this channel.
Useful marks 7.312 1
Radio tower (red light) (59°39′⋅7N, 18°54′⋅8E), standing on Furusund. Beacon (59°38′⋅6N, 18°51′⋅6E), standing on the S point of Aspö. Seamark, standing on a rock 6 cables SW of the beacon on Aspö. Beacon (orange) (59°36′⋅1N, 18°45′⋅4E), standing on the NE side of Stor-Andö. (Directions continue at 7.320)
Anchorages and harbours Anchorage 1
Branch channel north-west of Hakholmarna 7.310 From a position in the main channel 5 cables NE of Gryten Light (59°37′⋅1N, 18°49′⋅1E) a branch channel of no authorised draught, shown on the chart and marked by buoys and light-buoys, leads 4 miles SW on the NW side of Hakholmarna (7.309) to a position S of Växlet Södra Light, passing (with positions from Gryten Light): SE of Gryten Light, thence: SE of a 4⋅4 m patch (9 cables SW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SE of Askörsgrund (1¼ miles SW), a shoal patch marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand). By night, the white sector (051½°–053°), astern, of Gryten Light leads clear through the fairway SW of Askörsgrund. Thence: NW of a rock awash (1½ miles SW), on the NW side of Hakholmarna, marked by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: NW of a light-buoy (port hand) (2¼ miles SW), marking the SE side of the channel and a group of shoals at the SW end of Hakholmarna, thence:
SE of a buoy (starboard hand) (2½ miles SW), marking the limit of the shoals extending SE from Stor-Andö, thence: SW for about 8 cables, passing between the channel buoys moored E of Växlet Södra Light, to join the main channel S of the light.
4
7.313 Anchorage may be obtained NE of Furusundsskaten, the NE point of Furusund (59°40′N, 18°55′E), in depths of 16 to 26 m, clay.
Furusund 1
2
3
303
7.314 Furusund harbour (59°39′⋅8N, 18°55′⋅5E) lies on the SE side of the island, which is a summer resort area, at the NW end of the ferry track from Köpmanholm, situated 3 cables SE across Furusundset on the NW end of Yxlan. It is principally a ferry harbour for local traffic and is seldom closed by ice in winter. A small craft and yacht harbour is situated 3 cables SW of the ferry harbour. A windmill, shown on the charts, close W of the jetties, acts as a good landmark. Anchorage may be obtained SW of the ferry pier in depths of 9 to 22 m, clay. Local knowledge is required. Berths. The ferry pier has depths of 2⋅3 to 2⋅8 m alongside. There is also a short quay with depths of 1⋅5 to 2⋅7 m alongside. Caution. Two rocks lie close off the middle of the ferry pier with a depth over each of 2⋅7 m. There are a number of pontoon berths in the yacht harbour with depths of 1⋅5 to 4 m. The ferry pier at Köpmanholm has depths of 4 to 5 m alongside. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Högmarsö 1
2
Directions
7.315 Description. There is a small harbour on Högmarsö (59°39′N, 18°50′E), an island 3 miles WSW of Furusund. The harbour, with depths of about 15 m, is entered through an unmarked channel for which local knowledge is required. The harbour is usually obstructed by ice from January to March. Anchorage may be obtained about 1½ cables S of Korsholmen, an islet 4 cables SE of Högmarsö, in a depth of about 13 m, gravel and clay. Berths. There are a number of quays totalling 150 m in length with depths of 2⋅4 to 4⋅4 m alongside.
VÄXLET TO TRÄLHAVET AND SAXARFJÄRDEN
(continued from 7.312)
Växlet to Gullholmen 1
2
3
General information Charts 3127, 3155
Routes 1
2
3
7.316 Main channel. The main channel described here, authorised for a draught of 8⋅0 m, forms the S part of Furusundsleden and leads 10 miles SW and 3 miles SSW to join the main Sandhamn-Stockholm channel in the SW part of Västra Saxarfjärden. Alternative channel. An alternative channel, authorised for a draught of 8⋅0 m leads about 5½ miles S from a position S of Gullholmen Light (59°31′⋅4N, 18°31′⋅2E), passing through Östra Saxarfjärden to join the main Sandhamn-Stockholm channel in the SE part of Västra Saxarfjärden. Branch channel. From a position SSW of Vallersvik Light (59°29′⋅9N, 18°27′⋅6E) a branch channel, authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m, leads SW for 4 miles passing W of Mjölkön (7.321), to join the main channel in the SE part of Trälhavet. Also described is the oil terminal at Flaxenvik (59°28′N, 18°24′E) and other minor harbours within the area.
4
5
6
7
Ice channel restrictions 1
2
7.317 If the fairway is covered in crossable ice, it is prohibited to break the ice channel in the following areas: In the 8⋅0 m channel between Nykvarnsgrund Light (59°30′⋅6N, 18°29′⋅5E) and Östra Älgögrundet Light (59°26′⋅7N, 18°24′⋅8E). In the 6⋅0 m branch channel between Vallersvik Light (7.321) and Flaxenvik (7.324), passing W of Ekören (59°28′⋅1N, 18°25′⋅1E). Details of dates when the restrictions are in force are published in weekly Swedish Notices to Mariners.
8
Gullholmen to Västra Saxarfjärden
Speed restriction 1
7.318 Speed is restricted to 12 kn in the channels described in this section from Växlet to Lerviksudde.
1
Landmark 7.319 1
Building (59°31′⋅6N, 18°31′⋅3E) standing close to the shore on the E side of a short peninsula.
7.320 Main channel — 8V0 m. From a position about 2 cables S of Växlet Södra Light (59°35′⋅1N, 18°43′⋅9E) the track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys, light-buoys, beacons and lights, leads 7½ miles SW through the fairway to a position S of Gullholmen Light (green and white rectangle on mast, 6 m in height, floodlit) (59°31′⋅4N, 18°31′⋅2E), displayed from an islet on the NW side of the fairway, passing (with positions from Gullholmen Light): N of Växelgrund (7 miles NE), on which stands a beacon (floodlit), thence: S of a 0⋅9 m patch (6 miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand); a buoy (starboard hand) is moored 1½ cables SW. And: N of Lunsen Light (lantern on white pedestal, red band, floodlit) (6 miles NE), displayed from a rock on the S side of the fairway, thence: NW of a 7⋅3 m patch (5½ miles NE), marked on its N side by a light-buoy (port hand) and on its SE side by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: NW of a shoal area with a least charted depth of 3⋅7 m (4¼ mile NE), marked at its N end by a buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (064°–082°), astern, of Lunsen Light and the white sector (239½°–244°), ahead, of Staboudde Light, described below, lead through this part of the fairway. Thence: SE of Staboudde Light (white structure, green band; floodlit) (4 miles NE), displayed from the mainland, and: NW of Stabogrund Light (red structure, white band, floodlit) (4 miles NE), displayed from a rock on the SW side of the fairway, thence: SE of a buoy (starboard hand) (2½ miles NE), marking the limit of the channel. A ferry service crosses the fairway from the mainland, 3 cables W of the buoy, SE for 6 cables to Norra Ljusterö. By night the white sector (232°–236½°), ahead, of Ryssmasterna Light leads SW through this part of the fairway. Thence: SE of an 0⋅8 m patch (1½ miles NE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NW of Ryssmasterna Light (red lantern, white roof, floodlit) (1 mile NE), displayed from an islet on the SW side of the fairway. Buoys (port hand) are moored NE and SW of the light, marking the NW side of an extensive shoal area. A buoy (starboard hand) moored 1½ cables N of the light marks the N side of the channel. Thence: To a position 1 cable S of Gullholmen Light. In winter an ice-bridge is periodically established across the channel from Huvön, 5 cables E of the light, and the mainland NW.
2
304
7.321 From a position 1 cable S of Gullholmen Light (59°31′⋅4N, 18°31′⋅2E) the track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys, beacons and lights, leads initially 3 miles SW thence 3 miles SSW to join the main channel close S of Östra Älgögrundet Light (59°26′⋅7N, 18°24′⋅8E), passing (with positions from Gullholmen Light): SE of a 7⋅4 m patch (5 cables SW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand). By night the white sector
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
3
4
5
6
7
(052°–054°), astern, of Ryssmasterna Light (59°31′⋅9N, 18°32′⋅8E), and the white sector (231½°–234½°), ahead, of Vallersvik Light lead through the fairway to a position about 5 cables NE of the latter light. Thence: SE of Nykvarnsholmen Light (green lantern, white band, floodlit) (1 mile SW), displayed from the SE side of an islet NW of the fairway, and: NW of Nykvarnsgrund Light (red lantern, white band, floodlit) (1¼ miles SW), standing on a rock close S of the above islet, thence: SE of an 0⋅8 m patch (1¼ miles SW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NW of a light-buoy (port hand) (1¾ miles SW), marking the NW side of an extensive shoal area, thence: SE of Vallersvik Light (white structure, green band, floodlit) (2½ miles SW), displayed from a point on the mainland, and: NW of a 1⋅3 m patch (2½ miles SW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: Between Stora Blötholmen (3 miles SW), on the SW side of which stands a beacon (floodlit), and the mainland, 2 cables W, on which stands another beacon (floodlit), thence: WNW of a 3⋅9 m patch (3½ miles SW), marked by a buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (019½°–022½°), astern, of Vallersvik Light leads through this part of the fairway, and the white sector (195½°–203½°), ahead, of Mjölkö Light also leads through part of the latter half of this section. Thence: ESE of Mjölkö Light (green structure, white roof and base, floodlit) (59°27′⋅4N, 18°25′⋅7E), standing on a rock close off the SE side of Mjölkön, thence: WNW of Logrundet, 5 cables S of Mjölkö Light, a shoal area with a least depth of 2 m over it, marked by a light-buoy (W cardinal). The white sector (356°–028½°), astern, of Mjölkö Light leads SSW through the latter part of the fairway to the junction with the main Sandhamn-Stockholm channel. Thence: To a position 1½ cables S of Östra Älgögrundet Light. (Directions continue at 7.161)
4
5
Branch channel — 6V0 m 1
2
3
4
Alternative channel to Östra Saxarfjärden — 8V0 m 1
2
3
7.322 From a position 1½ cables S of Gullholmen Light (59°31′⋅4N, 18°31′⋅2E) (7.320) the track, shown on the chart, marked by light-buoys, buoys and lights, leads generally S for about 5½ miles to join the main channel NW of Valöarna Light (59°26′⋅0N, 18°29′⋅9E) (7.152), passing (with positions from Gullholmen Light): W of a light-buoy (port hand) (4 cables S), marking the limit of the shoal water extending W of Kusön, thence: E of a rock awash (1¼ miles S), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand). By night, the fairway in this section is marked by the white sector (001°–008°), astern, of Gullholmen Light. Thence: NW of Sandkullen Light (red lantern, white roof, floodlit) (1¼ miles S), standing on a rock on the E side of the fairway. By night the white sectors (174°–187°) and (028½°–040½°), ahead and astern respectively, of the light lead through the fairway N and S of the light. Thence:
NW of a 3⋅4 m patch (2 miles SSW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SE of Ikorn Light (red tower, white roof, 6 m in height, floodlit) (2¼ miles SSW), displayed from the E side of an islet on the W side of the fairway, thence; W of a 2⋅7 m patch (3 miles SSW), marked by a light-buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (349½°–356°), astern, of Ikorn Light leads SSE through the fairway to Östra Strängarna. Thence: E of Östra Strängarna (5 miles SSW) where the track trends WSW, thence: NNW of Valen Light-buoy (N cardinal), marking a 5⋅5 m patch (5½ miles SSW), thence: WSW to join the main channel 5 cables WNW of Valöarna Light. (Directions continue at 7.152)
5
6
7.323 From a position 7 cables SSW of Vallersvik Light (59°29′⋅9N, 18°27′⋅6E) the track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys, beacons and lights, leads 3 miles SW and about 1 mile SSW to join the main channel W of Tisterögrundet Light (59°25′⋅9N, 18°23′⋅7E) (7.161), passing (with positions from Tisterögrundet Light): SE of a 1⋅6 m patch (3 miles NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand). By night the white sector (223½°–225°), ahead, of Ekören Light leads through the fairway NE of the light. Thence: SE of a shoal area (2½ miles NNE), on which stands a beacon and which is marked on its SE side by a buoy (starboard hand), and: NW of Ekören Light (red lantern, white roof, floodlit) (2½ miles NNE), displayed from a rock close W of the islet of Ekholmen. A beacon stands on the NW side of the islet. Thence: SE of a rocky shoal area (2¼ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (N cardinal) and on its SW side by a buoy (starboard hand), and: NW of a buoy (port hand) (2 miles NNE), marking the edge of the channel close NW of Mjölkön. By night the white sector (222½°–224½°), ahead, of Lerviksudde Light leads through the fairway NE of the light. Thence: SE of Lerviksudde Light (white lantern, green band, floodlit) (1¼ miles N), displayed from a point on the mainland, thence: SE of a 2⋅7 m patch (1¼ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), and: WNW of a 4⋅3 m patch (1 mile NNW), marked by a buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (015½°–027°), astern, of Lerviksudde Light leads SSW through the fairway S of the light. Thence: W of Allegrogrund (7 cables NNW) (7.161), marked by a buoy (N cardinal) and on its SW side by a buoy (port hand). Thence: SSE to join the main channel about 2½ cables W of Tisterögrundet Light. (Directions for main Stockholm-Sandhamn channel are given at 7.161)
Flaxenvik
1
305
Chart 3127 7.324 Description. Flaxenvik (59°28′N, 18°24′E) lies in a small bay off the 6⋅0 m branch channel (7.323) NNE of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
Trälhavet, 5 cables W of Ekören Light. It contains an oil terminal suitable for vessels up to 180 m in length and a maximum draught up to 10⋅5 m. Mooring buoys are laid off the pier to assist in berthing and mooring operations. The terminal is approached from S directly off the recommended track shown on the chart. Prohibited area. A prohibited area, the limits of which are indicated on the chart, surrounds the terminal area. Entry is prohibited to unauthorised vessels.
Harbours
1
Exercise area 1
Österskär 1
2
3
4
7.325 Description. Österskär (59°27′⋅8N, 18°19′⋅4E), a small craft harbour, is situated in the NW part of Trälhavet and lies on the SW side of Sätterfjärden, an enclosed inlet entered through a narrow channel from S. Approach to the harbour is through Trälhavet where vessels should note the existence of shoal patches. Speed is restricted to 5 kn in Sätterfjärden entrance. The harbour consists of five pontoon jetties extending from the shore and a quay which forms part of the shipyard on the shore. Depth in the outer part of the harbour is about 6 m, with about 2 m depth at the shipyard quay. Anchorage may be obtained in Trälhavet, S of the entrance to Sätterfjärden, in various depths, clay. Small craft with a draught of about 2⋅1 m may anchor in Sätterfjärden over a mud bottom. Local knowledge is required in both areas. Berths. Numerous berths for small craft available with depths of 1⋅5 to 6 m. Facilities: slip; hull and machinery repairs at shipyard. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
1
2
7.326 Nykvarn (59°30′⋅8N, 18°29′⋅4E) is a yacht and small craft harbour situated on the mainland, inside Nykvarnsholmen, 3 cables NW of Nykvarnsholmen Light (7.321). Approach and entry may be made from N or S but the N channel is deeper with a least depth of 6 m. The harbour consists of three pontoon jetties and a shipyard. Numerous berths are available with a depth of about 10 m at the outer parts but shallower nearer the shore. Facilities: slip with 8 tonnes capacity; minor hull and machinery repairs.
1
1
7.331 Pilotage is provided through Stockholm Pilot Station. See 7.4 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Pilot boards in a positionr NW of Simpnäsklubb (59°54′N, 19°05′E).
Vessel Traffic Service 1
7.332 Arholma Entrance and the inner channels lie within the mandatory Reporting and Information System in force for the control of shipping, located at VTS Stockholm. Positions of reporting points are shown on the charts. For full details of the area covered, information required, categories of vessels and reporting points see 7.5 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). See also 7.282.
Principal marks
2
7.333 Landmarks: Simpnäsklubb Lighthouse (59°53′⋅6N, 19°04′⋅8E) (7.252). Beacon (white tower, green band, 9 m in height) (former lighthouse) (59°52′⋅3N, 19°06′⋅3E), standing on the NW side of Skrivaren. Arholma Beacon (59°50′⋅9N, 19°06′⋅5E) (7.252). Väddö Aero Light (59°58′⋅1N, 18°50′⋅6E) (Baltic Pilot Volume III). Major light: Tjärven Light (59°47′⋅5N, 19°22′⋅2E) (7.252).
Other aid to navigation
ARHOLMA ENTRANCE AND APPROACHES
7.334 Racon: Simpnäsklubb Lighthouse (59°53′⋅6N, 19°04′⋅8E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
General information
(continued from 7.260)
Directions
Chart 3163
Buoyage
Description
2
7.330 See 7.282.
Pilotage
1
1
7.329 See 7.248.
Restricted area
1
Nykvarn
7⋅0 m, leading from seaward to Dejeudden (59°51′⋅5N, 19°05′⋅1E) where they merge before leading S between the island of Arholma and Björkö, a long peninsula on the W side of the entrance. 7.328 For a description of the coast and any off-lying dangers in Ålands Hav N of Långviken (59°55′N, 18°57′E) see Baltic Pilot Volume III.
7.327 Arholma Entrance (59°54′N, 19°05′E) is the N entrance to Stockholms Skärgård from Ålands Hav. The entrance channel, usually known as Arholmaleden, leads from seaward to Kapellskär (59°43′N, 19°04′E) (7.300) on the W side of Granhamnsfjärden where it joins the main channel from Söderarm and thence through the fairway to Furusundsleden. The description includes the waters in the approaches to Arholma Entrance and the two entrance channels, one from N and the other from NE, each authorised for a draught of
1
7.335 The direction of buoyage in the channels described in this section is from S to N, as can be seen on the chart.
Approach from north 1
306
7.336 Arholma Leading Lights: Front light (red tower, 6 m in height) (59°50′⋅7N, 19°06′⋅2E), displayed from the central part of the W side of Arholma. Rear light (red metal framework tower) (500 m SSE of front light).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
From a position about 1½ miles NNW of Simpnäsklubb Light (59°53′⋅6N, 19°04′⋅8E) the alignment (164½°) of these lights leads about 3 miles SSE through the fairway which is very narrow in places, marked by light-buoys, buoys, beacons and lights, to a position SSE of Näskubben Light (red hut with white roof and base) (59°52′⋅6N, 19°05′⋅0E), displayed from the E side of Björkö, passing (with positions from Näskubben Light): ENE of Banken and Utanågrund (2 miles NNW), an extensive rocky shoal area NE of the entrance to Finnalafjärden, marked by a buoy (E cardinal). By night the white sector (144°–226½°), ahead, of Simpnäsklubb Light leads through the initial section of the fairway. Thence: ENE of a 5⋅7 m patch (1¼ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: WSW of Norrbådan (1¼ miles NNE), a rock awash marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: WSW of Simpnäsklubb Light (1 mile NNW). A submarine cable is laid across the channel from Bofjärden, about 7 cables NE to the lighthouse. Thence: ENE of Bredbådan (7 cables NNW), a shoal with a rock awash, marked on its E side by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: WSW of a 5⋅3 m patch, (5 cables N), marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand), thence: WSW of Gävlehästen Light (black tower, white top, 8 m in height) (4 cables N), displayed from an islet on the E side of the fairway. A 3 m patch, 1 cable S, is marked by a buoy (starboard hand). And: ENE of Bokobben Beacon (red base, white band, red framework top, 3 m in height, floodlit) (4 cables NNW), standing on the E side of the islet, thence: WSW of a 1⋅8 m shoal (2½ cables NNE), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: ENE of Näskubben Light. A 4⋅6 m patch, close SSE, is marked by a buoy (port hand). Thence: WSW of a shoal area with a least depth of 4⋅3 m over it (5 cables SSE), marked on its NW side by a light-buoy (starboard hand). Thence the track trends S for 4 cables, passing E of Simpnäsgrynnan Light (white tower, red base, floodlit) (6 cables S), standing on a rock on the W side of the fairway, to a position 3½ cables NNE of Dejeudden Light (red hut, white base, floodlit) (59°51′⋅5N, 19°05′⋅1E), exhibited from the E side of Björkö, at the junction of the entrance channels.
Useful marks 7.337 1
2
Two beacons standing close to the shore, 1½ cables NW of Näskubben Light (59°52′⋅6N, 19°05′⋅0E). Two beacons, one standing on Källskären (59°52′⋅7N, 19°05′⋅7E), the second about ½ cable SSW on a rock offshore. Beacon (grey cairn), 2½ cables NW of Simpnäsgrynnan Light (59°52′⋅0N, 19°05′⋅1E), on the S side of the entrance to Simpnäsviken. Leading beacons at the head of Simpnäsviken. In line bearing 277° they lead W into the bay.
Approach from north-east 1
2
3
4
ARHOLMA ENTRANCE TO KAPELLSKÄR INCLUDING NORRTÄLJEVIKEN AND BJÖRKÖFJÄRDEN General information Chart 3163
Description 1
2
7.340 The description includes the inner channel from Arholma Entrance, in the vicinity of Dejeudden Light (59°51′⋅5N, 19°05′⋅1E), to Kapellskär on the W side of Granhamnsfjärden, about 9½ miles S, passing W of Arholma, through Granskärsredd (59°49′⋅9N, 19°05′⋅0E), W of Idö (59°48′N, 19°08′E) and E of Lidön (59°47′N, 19°05′E). Also described is the route through Norrtäljeviken to Norrtälje, a description of Norrtälje (7.353), and the route through Björköfjärden to the S entrance to the Väddö Kanal.
Ice channel restriction 1
7.341 If the fairway is covered in crossable ice, it is prohibited to break the ice channel in the section of channel between Arholma (59°51′N, 19°07′E) and Idö (59°48′N, 19°08′E).
Principal marks 1
Fishing light 1
7.339 From a position about 2½ miles NE of Simpnäsgrynnan Light (59°52′⋅0N, 19°05′⋅1E) approach with the beacon on Skrivaren (7.333), ahead on a bearing of about 232°. The track, shown on the chart, marked by buoys and beacons, leads 1 mile SW through the fairway to a position about 6 cables NE of the beacon, passing NW of Storgrund (7.258), 1 mile E. By night the approach is made in the white sector (234°–239°), ahead, of Simpnäsgrynnan Light. Thence the track trends slightly W and leads about 1 mile farther SW with Simpnäsgrynnan Light ahead bearing about 237° and by night in the white sector, ahead, of the light, passing, (with positions from the light): SE of Tallriken (8 cables NE), a rock awash marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NW of the beacon (7.333) on Skrivaren (6½ cables NE), and: SE of a 3⋅5 m patch (6½ cables NE on the N side of the fairway), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: NW of Högskär Beacon (white rectangular beacon, red band, 6 m in height) (4½ cables NE), standing on the W side of Högskär, thence: To a position 3 cables NE of the light and SE of a buoy (S cardinal), marking the S side of a 4⋅3 m shoal area on the NE side of the fairway. The track then trends SSE for about 3½ cables to join the track from N in a position 3½ cables NNE of Dejeudden Light. By night the white sector (187°–197°), ahead, of Svedudden Light (59°50′⋅5N, 19°04′⋅9E) leads through the fairway in this vicinity. (Directions continue at 7.343) (Directions for Norrtälje are given at 7.357)
7.338 Bylehamn Light (white lantern) (59°54′⋅4N, 18°59′⋅1E), displayed when required by fishing vessels.
307
7.342 Landmarks: Arholma Beacon (59°50′⋅9N, 19°06′⋅5E) (7.252). Norrtälje Aero Light (59°45′⋅3N, 18°42′⋅1E) (7.351). Norrtäljenord Aero Light (59°51′N, 18°44′E) (7.351), (chart 2297).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Major lights: Norrtälje Aero Light — as above. Norrtäljenord Aero Light — as above.
2
Directions (continued from 7.339)
Dejeudden to Tyvön 1
2
3
4
5
6
7.343 From a position 3½ cables NNE of Dejeudden Light (59°51′⋅5N, 19°05′⋅1E) the track, authorised for a draught of 7⋅0 m, shown on the chart, marked by buoys, light-buoys and lights, leads initially 2¼ miles S then 3 miles SSE to a position W of Tyvö Light (white lantern, green band; floodlit) (59°46′⋅5N, 19°07′⋅4E), displayed from the W point of Tyvön, passing (with positions from Tyvö Light): E of Dejeudden Light (5 miles NNW), and: W of a shoal area (5 miles N) with a least depth of 5⋅6 m over it, marked on its W side by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: E of a 3 m patch (4½ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: W of a rocky shoal (4 miles NNW), marked on its NW side by a light-buoy (starboard hand), and: E of Svedudden Light (white hut, red base, floodlit) (4 miles NNW), displayed from the E side of Björkö. By night the white sector (187°–197°), ahead, of the light leads SSW through the fairway NNE of the light. Thence: W of a 5 m patch, 2 cables SE of Svedudden Light, marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: E of a 2⋅5 m patch (3¾ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (357°–001°), astern, of Dejeudden Light leads through the fairway S of Svedudden Light. Thence: W of a buoy (starboard hand) (3½ miles NNW), marking the shoals extending SSW from Granö, thence: SW of a 1⋅6 m shoal (2¾ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), and: NE of a buoy (port hand) (2½ miles NNW), marking the W side of the channel, thence: NE of a 1⋅4 m patch (1½ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (port hand); a buoy (port hand), moored 2½ cables S, marks a 1⋅5 m patch. Thence: SW of a 3⋅6 m patch (5½ cables N), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: To a position close W of Tyvö Light. By night the white sector (156°–161°), ahead, of the light leads SSE through the fairway NNW of the light.
3
4
Useful mark 7.346 1
1
Description 1
7.348 Norrtäljeviken is a long, narrow inlet, through which passes the channel leading to Norrtälje, extending about 12 miles generally W from Tjocköfjärden (59°45′⋅7N, 19°06′⋅0E). Its outer part lies between the island of Vätö on the N side, and Rådmansö (7.300) on the S side.
Depths 1
7.349 The channel from Tjocköfjärden to the entrance channel to Norrtälje is authorised for a draught of 6⋅0 m.
Pilots
Two radio masts (red lights) (59°50′⋅3N, 19°03′⋅0E), standing 1 mile W of Svedudden Light. Radio mast (red light) (59°49′⋅9N, 19°03′⋅8E), standing W of Granskärsredd. Kalken Beacon (59°47′⋅5N, 19°09′⋅4E), standing on a rock SE of Idö.
1
7.350 See 7.331.
Principal marks 1
Tyvön to Kapellskär 7.345 From a position 19°07′⋅4E) the track, light-buoys, beacons SSW to a position
7.347 Local knowledge is required. Anchorage may be obtained in Granskärsredd, as indicated on the chart, in a position about 7 cables SSW of Svedudden Light (59°50′⋅5N, 19°04′⋅9E), in depths of about 15 to 20 m, clay.
Norrtäljeviken
7.344
1
Beacon and seamark (59°45′⋅8N, 19°07′⋅9E), standing on the NW side of Stora Enskär.
Anchorage
Useful marks 1
main channel from Söderarm Entrance, passing (with positions from Tyvö Light): Close SE of a 4⋅7 m patch (2½ cables SW), marked by a light-buoy (port hand). By night the white sector (028°–035°), astern, of Tyvö Light leads through the fairway SSW of the light. Thence: SE of Käringen Beacon (white structure and white framework top, red band) (5½ cables SW), standing on an islet NW of the fairway, thence: SE of a 2⋅7 m patch (8 cables SW), marked by a buoy (port hand) in the N part of Tjocköfjärden, thence: W of Tjockö Light (white pedestal, green band; floodlit) (1¼ miles SSW), displayed from the NW point of Tjockö, thence: WNW of a beacon (2¼ miles SSW), standing on the N side of a shoal area SW of Furholmen, thence: WNW of a 5⋅9 m patch (2¾ miles SSW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: To a position 3 cables SE of Kapellskär Light (59°43′⋅1N, 19°04′⋅7E). (Directions for Furusundsleden are given at 7.307, for Norrtäljeviken at 7.352, and for Björköfjärden at 7.363)
close W of Tyvö Light (59°46′⋅5N, shown on the chart, marked by buoys, and lights, leads 3¾ miles generally SE of Kapellskär where it joins the
308
7.351 Landmarks: Norrtälje Aero Light (water tower) (59°45′⋅3N, 18°42′⋅1E), standing in the S part of the town. Norrtäljenord Aero Light (mast) (59°51′N, 18°44′E) (chart 2297), standing at an elevation of 218 m about 5½ miles N of Norrtälje. Major lights: Norrtälje Aero Light — as above. Norrtäljenord Aero Light — as above.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
Approach and entry. through Norrtäljeviken and leading lights through a Norrtäljerännan, marked by
Directions (continued from 7.345) 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7.352 From a position in Tjocköfjärden 2 cables SSW of Tjockö Light (59°45′⋅4N, 19°06′⋅2E), the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads generally W for about 12 miles to Norrtälje entrance channel, 5 cables WSW of Harkö Light (59°45′⋅6N, 18°45′⋅6E). Shoal patches close to the track throughout the fairway are marked by buoys (lateral). The following aids to navigation are situated along the fairway, and in addition to the leading lights described, the white sectors of the lights, where indicated, lead through the stretches of fairway in their vicinity: Gräddö Light (red daymark on white framework tower) (59°46′⋅1N, 19°01′⋅9E), displayed from the NE side of a small bay on the mainland, close SSW of the island of Gräddö-Asken. White sector (273½°–277°). Järnberget Light (white lantern with red band) (59°46′⋅4N, 19°00′⋅5E), displayed from a headland on the S side of the fairway. The white sector (219°–233°) of this light marks an approach to the main channel from NE, from the S part of Lidöfjärden. Eknöudde Light (white lantern on green pedestal) (59°46′⋅5N, 18°59′⋅0E), standing on the S point of Eknö, an islet on the N side of the fairway. White sectors (279°–281°) and (097°–100°). Kobussören Leading Lights: Front light (lantern on white tower, green base) (59°46′⋅7N, 18°57′⋅8E), displayed from an islet 6 cables WNW of Eknösudde Light. Rear light (similar structure) (600 m E of front light), standing on an islet close W of Eknö. The alignment (090½°), astern, of these lights leads about 2½ miles W through the fairway S of Vätö, to the entrance to Vätösundet, the narrow passage leading NNE from Norrtäljeviken, which separates Vätö from the mainland. Tistelö Light (lantern on white tower, green base) (59°46′⋅6N, 18°51′⋅0E), displayed from the S point of an islet about 7 cables W of the entrance to Vätösundet. White sectors (264½°–270°) and (069°–074°). Harkö Light (lantern on white tower, red base) (59°45′⋅6N, 18°45′⋅6E), standing on the NW side of an islet on the S side of the fairway about 1¼ miles E of Norrtälje harbour. White sector (241°–250°). (Directions for Norrtälje harbour continue at 7.357)
Limiting conditions 1
1
1
2
7.356 Layout. The harbour is formed by the N and S river banks and consists of the commercial quays on the N side, and a long quay for leisure craft with an adjacent park on the S side. Landmarks. Norrtälje Church (59°45′⋅5N, 18°42′⋅3E), standing in the centre of the town. Silos, standing on the commercial quay, 2 cables ESE of the church. Water tower (red light) (59°45′⋅9N, 18°42′⋅7E), standing 3½ cables NNE of the church.
Directions for entry 1
2
3
General information
2
7.355 Port radio. Norrtälje Port Radio. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Anchorage may be obtained in the roads W of Harkö Light in depths of 10 to 20 m, clay. Speed in the approach and entrance channel is restricted to 5 kn.
Harbour
Chart 3163 plan of Norrtälje 7.353 Position. Norrtälje (59°45′⋅5N, 18°43′⋅0E) lies at the head of Norrtäljeviken at the mouth of a river, about 8 miles NW of Furusund. Function. It is a well-sheltered industrial town and harbour with facilities for handling bulk, general and Ro-Ro vessels. There are some berths and facilities for yachts and pleasure craft. Principal exports include grain, clinker, limestone and timber. Principal imports include stone chips, fertilisers, calcium chloride and general cargo.
7.354 The entrance channel and outer harbour are dredged to 6⋅6 m. Deepest and longest berth. Ferry berth in NE part of the harbour (7.358).
Arrival information
Norrtälje
1
The harbour is approached entered on the alignment of dredged channel, known as lights, to the harbour.
(continued from 7.352) 7.357 Norrtälje Leading Lights: Front light (orange triangle, point up, on mast) (59°45′⋅4N, 18°43′⋅0E), displayed from the S side of the harbour. Rear light (similar structure, triangle point down) (95 m WSW of front light). From a position about 5 cables WSW of Harkö Light (59°45′⋅6N, 18°45′⋅6E), the alignment (259°) of these lights leads about 7 cables WSW to the harbour, passing (with positions from the light): NNW of Borgmästarholmen (8 cables WSW), to enter the dredged entrance channel, thence: Between No 1 and No 2 Lights (dolphins) (1 mile WSW), displayed 2 cables ENE of the front leading light on the N and S sides of the channel respectively, they mark the entrance to the dredged outer basin. Thence: Clear N of No 3 Light (dolphin), 140 m E of the front leading light, marking the S limit of the dredged area. Submarine power cables, shown on the chart, are laid along the limits of the dredged area to Nos 1 and 2 Lights.
Berths 1
309
7.358 The longest single berth is the ferry berth situated in the NE part of the harbour with a length of 100 m and a depth alongside of 5⋅6 m. A second ferry berth, formed by a number of breasting dolphins, lies close E with a stern ramp 35 m wide and a depth of 6⋅6 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 7
2
On the N side of the harbour, close SW of the ferry terminal, there is a total of 320 m of berthing space on a single quay with depths of 5⋅6 to 3⋅1 m alongside. The inner harbour has a quay with a length of 60 m and depths of 3 to 1⋅5 m alongside. On the S side of the harbour there are a number of small craft berths opposite the commercial quay and two pontoon jetties farther E, outside the river mouth, providing a number of small craft berths with depths of 1 to 4 m.
Björköfjärden Chart 3163
Description 1
Port services 1
7.359 Repairs: small shipyard; slip with a capacity of 3 tonnes; minor hull and engine repairs. Other facilities: hospital; deratting and issue of certificates available. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Airport for domestic flights close S of the town. Nearest international airport Arlanda, Stockholm, about 50 km distant. Regular ferry services to Finland.
Anchorage and harbour
Directions (continued from 7.345) 1
2
Anchorage 1
7.360 Local knowledge is required. Anchorage may be obtained almost anywhere within Norrtäljeviken in various depths. Anchoring is prohibited in the vicinity of an outfall pipe extending about 2 cables S from the shore in a position about 5 cables WNW of Harkö Light (59°45′⋅6N, 18°45′⋅6E).
3
Gräddö 1
2
7.361 Gräddö (59°46′N, 19°02′E) lies in a small bay on the NE side of Rådmansö at the entrance to Norrtäljeviken. It is a small boat and pleasure harbour consisting of a number of pontoon jetties on both sides of the bay. It is entered from N directly off the main channel close N of Gräddö Light (59°46′⋅1N, 19°01′⋅9E). Speed is restricted to 7 kn in the channel close N of the entrance to the bay. Berths. The pontoon jetties provide a large number of berths with depths of 2⋅5 to 8 m. On the NE side, close to Gräddö Light, there is a quay with a length of 18 m and a depth alongside of 3 m used by local traffic and a disused ferry berth with a length of 50 m and a depth of 5⋅5 m.
7.362 Björköfjärden is an inlet on the W side of Björkö forming an extension to Lidöfjärden, between the SW part of Björkö and Vätö, and Tjocköfjärden (59°45′⋅7N, 19°06′⋅0E) in Arholmaleden. The fairway, which extends 12 miles NW from Tjocköfjärden to Granösundet (59°55′⋅8N, 18°52′⋅5E), at the NW end of Bagghusfjärden, forms the channel to the S approaches to Väddö Kanal.
4
5
310
7.363 The recommended track, shown on the chart, of no authorised draught, leads 12 miles NW from a position in the NW part of Tjocköfjärden 1 mile NW of Tjockö Light (59°45′⋅3N, 19°06′⋅2E) to Granösundet, passing (with positions from the light): NE of Gräddö-Asken (2 miles NW), and SW of Lidön, 5 cables NE. By night the white sector (127°–133°), astern, of Tjockö Light leads through the initial part of the fairway clearing the coastal shoals extending NE from Brännäset (9 cables NW). Thence: SW of three rocky shoal patches (3 miles NW) with a least depth of 5 m over the NW patch, thence: SW of foul ground extending about 3 cables SSW of Stor-Askören (3½ miles NW), thence: SW of a rocky shoal area (4½ miles NW) with a least depth of 2⋅4 m over it, thence: NE of rocks awash (5½ miles NW), close off the NE side of Vätö, thence: NE of a shoal area with a least depth of 3⋅2 m over it (7¾ miles NW) which lies close N of Örnarna, thence: Follow the track through Björköfjärden passing SW of a rock awash (9¾ miles NW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: NW through Bagghusfjärden to a position in Granösundet at the SE entrance to the buoyed channel leading to Väddö Kanal. For a description of Väddö Kanal, which links Stockholms Skärgård with Öregrunds Skärgård, see Baltic Pilot Volume III.
Home
Contents
Index NOTES
311
Home
Contents
Index Chapter 8 - Baltic south shore - Kap Arkona to Gulf of Gdamsk
13°
14°
30´
15°
30´
16°
30´
17°
30´
18°
30´
2251
SWEDEN
30´
30´
Bornholm
55°
55°
2360
2365 958
Stolpe Bank Rozewie
Rønne Banke
8.9
9 8.2
8.9
Kap Arkona
4 8.1
312 30´
7
Łeba 8.311
Ustka 8.303
30´
Sassnitz 8.22
Darłowo 8.288
2679
Rügen
2288
2369
.5
2
Stralsund 8.89
8.2
8
3
8.201
8.5
2150
Kołobrzeg 8.281
Wolgast 8.120
54° 2150
54° ©winouj?cie 8.175
2677
2676
2678 . z
rzebie 2678 Por t T 0205
13°
67
30´
14°
30´
Szczecin 8.248
15°
30´
Longitude 16° East from Greenwich
17°
30´
18°
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 8 BALTIC SOUTH SHORE — KAP ARKONA TO GULF OF GDASK
GENERAL INFORMATION Chart 2816
Seabed dangers
Scope of the chapter 1
1
8.1 The area covered by this chapter comprises the waters extending S and E from Kap Arkona (54°41′N, 13°26′E) along the S shore of Baltic Sea to Rozewie (54°50′N, 18°20′E) some 170 miles to the E. It is divided into the following sections: Kap Arkona to Nordperd (8.14). Greifswalder Bodden and east approaches to Stralsund (8.38). Peenestrom and Kleines Haff (8.145). Zatoka Pomorska including winoujcie and Szczecin (8.165). Zatoka Pomorska to Gulf of Gdask (8.265).
1
Depths
1
Vessel Traffic Services 1
8.2 The channels and harbours around Rügen (54°25′N, 13°20′E) are liable to silting and have to be dredged regularly. Charted depths are therefore not always in agreement with the actual values.
2
8.6 Vessels using the territorial waters of Germany must use the shipping routes in accordance with the Law on State Border of the Federal Republic of Germany (1986).
Pollution of the sea
Rescue 8.3 In the area covered by this chapter, MRCC Bremen co-ordinates all SAR operations in the German Baltic coast area. MRCC Gdynia with MRSC winoujcie have similar responsibility for the Polish Baltic coast area. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5, 1.158 and 1.159. On the German coast rescue craft are stationed at Sassnitz (8.22), Greifswalder Oie (8.46), Lauterbach (8.69), Stralsund (8.102), Freest (8.126), Zinnowitz (8.171) and Ueckermünde (8.155). On the Polish coast rescue craft are stationed at winoujcie (8.175), Trzebie (8.234), Dziwnów (8.269), Koobrzeg (8.281), Darowo (8.288), Ustka (8.303) and eba (8.311). See also 1.158 and 1.159.
8.5 A mandatory Vessel Reporting System is in force for the ports of Stralsund, Sassnitz, Mukran and Wolgast. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Traffic regulations
1
1
8.4 In several areas anchoring and fishing are dangerous, as shown on the chart, NE of Kap Arkona (54°41′N, 13°26′E) and SE and E of Bornholm (55°10′N, 14°55′E). For further information see Annual Notice to Mariners No 6.
8.7 Due to the non-tidal nature of these waters, the German and Polish authorities are extremely rigorous in the application of anti-pollution regulations. See (1.72).
Currents 1
2
8.8 The prevailing flow setting along the Polish coastline is E-going. With persistent winds a rate of about 2 kn may be experienced, being strongest about 4½ miles offshore. With onshore winds and a swell from the NW, a dangerous S set may prevail. In the past off this coastline, lack of appreciation of, and allowance for currents, have been the cause of several incidents of grounding, particularly between winoujcie (53°55′N, 14°16′E) and Jarosawiec, about 87 miles NE. With onshore winds, if unsure of the vessels position, it is advisable to keep well offshore until the weather improves before attempting a landfall.
OFFSHORE ROUTE General information Chart 2150, 2369
Currents 1
Route 1
8.9 From the vicinity of Arkona Light-buoy (54°45′N, 13°34′E) the track leads generally E for about 160 miles passing S of Rønne Bank (54°59′N, 14°35′E) (2.31), and S of awica Supska (Stolpe Bank) (54°55′N, 16°39′E) (8.301). Several wrecks, obstructions and foul areas lie at varying distances offshore, the positions of which may be seen on the chart.
8.10 See 8.8.
Hazard 1
8.11 An obstruction (mine), shown on the chart, lies 12¾ miles NE of Kap Arkona Light (54°41′N, 13°26′E).
Principal marks 1
313
8.12 Landmarks: Kap Arkona Lighthouse (54°41′N, 13°26′E) (Baltic Pilot Volume I).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
2
Television towers (55°10′N, 14°53′E) (2.41), on Bornholm. Major lights: Kap Arkona Light (Baltic Pilot Volume I). Dueodde Light (54°59′⋅5N, 15°04′⋅6E) (2.105). Darowo Light (54°26′⋅5N, 16°22′⋅9E) (8.272). Jarosawiec Light (54°32′⋅5N, 16°32′⋅6E) (8.300). Ustka Light (54°35′⋅4N, 16°51′⋅4E) (8.300). Stilo Light (54°47′⋅3N, 17°44′⋅1E) (8.300). Rozewie Light (54°49′⋅9N, 18°20′⋅3E) (8.300). Czopino Lighthouse (54°43′⋅3N, 17°14′⋅6E) (8.300).
2
3
Directions (continued from Baltic Pilot Volume I) 1
8.13 From the vicinity of Arkona Light-buoy (safe water) (54°45′⋅7N, 13°33′⋅8E) the track leads generally E, passing: N of a wave recorder light-buoy (special) (54°43′⋅0N, 13°44′⋅5E), additionally marked close N by a light-buoy (N cardinal), thence:
N of a wreck (54°37′N, 14°13′E), swept to a depth of 10⋅1 m and marked on its N side by a light-buoy (isolated danger), and: S of Adlergrund (54°47′N, 14°24′E), an extensive rocky shoal, foul with rocks and boulders, with a least depth over it of 5⋅1 m, which lies on the SW part of Rønne Bank, an extensive area of shoal water extending about 30 miles SW from Bornholm, thence: S of the S point of Bornholm (54°59′⋅5N, 15°04′⋅6E), from where Dueodde Light (2.105) is displayed, thence: Clear of awica Supska (54°55′N, 16°39′E) (8.301), and clear of a dangerous wreck in position 54°45′⋅9N, 16°33′⋅0E; thence: To a position N of Rozewie (54°49′⋅9N, 18°20′⋅3E) (8.301). (Directions for Gdynia and Gdansk continue at 9.19, and for Kaliningrad at 9.177)
KAP ARKONA TO NORDPERD General information
4
Charts 2365, 2150
Route 1
8.14 From the vicinity of Arkona Light-buoy (safe water) (54°45′⋅7N, 13°33′⋅8E) the recommended route, as shown on the chart, leads about 30 miles SSE to the vicinity of SWIN-N Light-buoy (safe water). The coastal bank along this route is narrow and rocky. Within the 10 m contour it is generally foul with many large boulders. It does not therefore provide good anchorage.
Submarine exercise area 1
1
2
3
8.16 Submarines exercise frequently in the area indicated on the chart, 6½ miles E of Kap Arkona.
Pilotage 1
8.17 Pilotage services for all German ports within this chapter are supplied by Stralsund Pilot Station. For further details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Fishing
Topography 8.15 From Kap Arkona (54°41′N, 13°26′E) (Baltic Pilot Volume I) to Nordperd about 24 miles SE, the E coast of Rügen (54°25′N, 13°20′E) is predominantly high and wooded. The high steep coastline on the E side of the Jasmund peninsula provides a good radar landmark. Tromper Wiek, S of Kap Arkona, is formed by the peninsulas of Wittow and Jasmund which are joined together by a narrow wooded and sandy isthmus named Die Schaabe; this isthmus separates the inland waters of Rügen from Tromper Wiek. Stubnitz, at the E end of Jasmund, consists of wooded chalk cliffs, 134 m high rising to 160 m about 1½ miles inland; the cliffs fall steeply to the sea and the rocky coastal reef is steep-to; in clear weather these wooded heights are visible at a distance of about 25 miles. Prorer Wiek comprises the bay between Jasmund and Granitz, the hilly wooded NW portion of the Monchgut peninsula which terminates in Granitzer Ort (54°24′N, 13°40′E) (8.21). At the head of the bay is Schmale Heide, a low sandy isthmus on which there are several seaside resorts; at the resort of Prora (54°26′N, 13°34′E) several large blocks of houses are prominent on the foreshore, and at Binz, 3 miles SSE (8.36), several large hotels are also prominent.
Between Granitzer Ort and Quitzlaser Ort, about 2 miles SE, the coast is bold and steep, thence almost to Nordperd, which attains an elevation of 60 m about 3 miles farther S, it is more level.
1
2
8.18 On the E coast of Rügen, herring fishing is carried out using unlit fish traps and bottom fixed nets. Fishing and fishery protection areas are shown on the chart. Vessels are requested to maintain sufficient distance when passing fishing areas and not to anchor within them if possible. In Tromper Wiek and Prorer Wiek herring fishing is carried out from January to the end of May using unlit fish traps and bottom fixed nets. During the periods February to May and September to November, fishing nets are laid off the SE side of Jasmund; two buoys (blue barrels with lanterns) are laid about 6 cables from the coast, ice conditions permitting, to mark the E limit of the Sassnitz fishing area. A fishery protection area, marked by buoys, is established 2¼ miles S of Mukran N Mole Light (54°28′⋅6N, 13°35′⋅9E). Marine farms may be found within this area from March to November.
Water levels 1
314
8.19 The water level is generally raised by winds from NW through N to E and is maximised in storms from NE. Conversely, the water level falls in winds from SE through S to W. The average deviations are between plus or minus 0⋅5 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Principal marks 1
2
3
4
8.20 Landmarks: Kap Arkona Lighthouse (54°41′N, 13°26′E) (Baltic Pilot Volume I). Radio mast (73 m high) (3½ miles SW of Kap Arkona Light). Radio masts (121 m high) (54°34′⋅9N, 13°36′⋅8E). Radio mast (226 m) (red lights), (54°31′⋅2N, 13°37′⋅6E). Radio mast (elevation 123 m) (red lights), (54°30⋅6N, 13°34′⋅3E). Chimney (elevation 134 m) (red lights), (54°29′⋅7N, 13°34′⋅3E). Arndt Monument (54°25′N, 13°27′E). Chimney (126 m in height) (red lights) (54°24′⋅5N, 13°35′⋅8E). Tower (54°23′N, 13°38′E), at Granitz Jagdschloss. Two buildings, 3 miles SE of Granitz Jagdschloss Tower, close SSE of Sellin. Radio mast (118 m in height) (red lights) (54°20′⋅5N, 13°45′⋅0E), at Nordperd. Water towers (74 m and 72 m in height) at Göhren, close W of Nordperd. Greifswalder Oie Lighthouse (54°15′⋅0N, 13°55′⋅5E) (8.51). Major lights: Kap Arkona Light (54°41′N, 13°26′E) (Baltic Pilot Volume I). Greifswalder Oie Light (54°15′⋅0N, 13°55′⋅5E) (8.51).
5
Sassnitz Hafen and approaches General information 1
2
1
Directions
2
3
4
8.23 Maximum draught. The maximum permitted draught is 7⋅6 m. Largest berth. Ferry terminal.
Arrival information
(continued from Baltic Pilot Volume I) 8.21 From the vicinity of Kap Arkona Light-buoy (safe water) (54°45′⋅7N, 13°33′⋅8E) the recommended track leads SSE, passing (with positions from Kollicker Ort Light (54°33′⋅8N, 13°40′⋅8E)): ENE of Kap Arkona (11 miles NW). Arkona Riff, comprised of large below-water rocks, extends about 4 cables ENE from the E extremity of the cape. Thence: ENE of Kollicker Ort Light (white round tower, with balcony, 7 m in height). It is reported that the structure is difficult to identify by day. Thence: Clear of Sassnitz Light-buoy (safe water) (3¼ miles ESE), thence: Clear of a wreck (8 miles SE), over which the exact depth is unknown, but which is considered to have a safe clearance of 12 m. Thence: ENE of Granitzer Ort (9¾ miles S). Seehundsriff, a shoal area on which there are several above-water rocks, extends about 1 mile W from the point. Thence: ENE of Quitzlaser Ort (11 miles S). Quitzlasriff, which is dangerous, extends 6 cables offshore about 1 mile N of Quitzlaser Ort. Thence: ENE of Nordperd (13¾ miles SSE). Landtief A Light-buoy (safe water) is moored about 3 miles ENE of Nordperd. Thence: To the vicinity of SWIN-N Light-buoy (safe water) (17 miles SSE). Clearing lines. Small craft navigating along the coast may ensure clearing the navigational dangers off the E coast end of Jasmund by keeping Kap Arkona Lighthouse well open NE of the peninsula bearing 304°, and the tower
8.22 Position and function. Sassnitz (54°31′N, 13°38′E) stands on the SE side of Jasmund peninsula in Prorer Wiek. Sassnitz is an important fishing centre with a highly developed fish processing industry. The chalk industry is also important within the area. It is a major ferry port. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 9 vessels totalling 50 965 dwt. Port Authority. Fahrhafen Sassnitz GmbH, 18546 Sassnitz, Germany. Website: www.fae-hrhafen-sassnitz.de E-Mail:
[email protected]
Limiting conditions
1
1
of Jagdschloss (8.20) kept well open of the peninsula bearing 195°. Useful marks: Bobbin Church (54°33′⋅2N, 13°31′⋅6E). Lietzow Castle (54°29′⋅0N, 13°30′⋅6E). (Directions continue for Greifswalder Bodden at 8.52 and for ©winoujñcie at 8.201)
2
3
4
5
315
8.24 Vessel Traffic Service. The Sassnitz Port Traffic Control Centre regulates all traffic, except leisure craft, in the Sassnitz/Mukran area. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Outer anchorage. Sassnitz Reede provides a good anchorage area, with depths from 10 to 18 m, centred 1½ miles SE of the harbour entrance, as shown on the chart. The N boundary of the anchorage is marked by Nos 1 and 3 Light-buoys (special). Vessels using the roadstead should remain in depths of more than 10 m. Caution. A foul area lies close to the SW corner of the anchorage. Prohibited areas. Anchoring and fishing is prohibited in the entrance to the harbour and in the W part of Sassnitz Hafen. Pilotage. Pilotage is compulsory for all oil, gas, chemical tankers and other vessels over 85 m in length or 13 m beam, or 5 m draught. Pilots are provided by Stralsund and are available 24 hours. Requests for pilots should be sent at least 6 hours before arrival. Pilots board at Landtief B or Osttief 2 Buoys (8.50), or on request, at Sassnitz Light-buoy (54°32′⋅8N, 13°46′⋅0E) or in position54°26′N, 13°43′E. Tugs are available and are compulsory for vessels of more than 400 grt. Traffic regulations. Ferries in the approaches to Sassnitz and Mukran are considered to be vessels constrained by their draught. They display the appropriate signals in accordance with Rule 28 of International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972). When ferries display these signals, the harbour entrance and exit are closed and the ferry turning point off the head of the moles is to be avoided by other vessels. Within the harbour overtaking is prohibited and there is a speed limit of 4 kn in force.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
The quays in the SW part of the harbour are used by the German Navy and berthing is prohibited for commercial vessels. 2
Harbour 1
8.25 General layout. Sassnitz is formed by an E mole about 7½ cables long, running SW, almost parallel to the coast, and a W mole extending a short distance SE. The entrance is approached from SSW. Ferry terminals occupy the W side of the harbour. The E part of the harbour, where there are several wooden piers, is reserved for fishing craft.
Maximum draught 1
2
3
8.26 Approach. Vessels coming from N have a clear approach from Sassnitz Light-buoy (54°32′⋅8N, 13°46′⋅0E), which leads WSW, N of the anchorage to a position S of the harbour entrance. Vessels from S also have a clear approach to the harbour from the pilot boarding position, 54°26′N, 13°43′E. This approach leads NW then NNW and W of the anchorage. By night, the anchorage is marked by the green sector (283½°–357¾°) of the E Mole Light (green octagonal tower, white band with gallery, 12 m in height) (54°30′⋅4N, 13°38′⋅4E). Entry leading lights. From a position about 2 cables SE of Sassnitz No 2 Light-buoy (port hand) (6 cables SSW of the E Mole Light), the alignment (007½°) of the following lights leads to the harbour entrance. Dangers, in the form of large rocks, close to the leading line on the W side of the channel, are marked by light-buoys (port hand): Front light (red lantern on four legs, 11 m in height) (54°30′⋅6N, 13°38′⋅3E), displayed from the head of the W mole. Rear light (white triangle, grey metal framework tower, 14 m in height) (1¾ cables NNE of the front light, standing on the foreshore).
Alongside berths 1
2
1
2
8.28 Repairs. There is a slip in the E part of the harbour capable of taking small craft. Minor repairs can be carried out. Other facilities: hospital; deratting certificates issued; compass adjustment. Supplies. Fresh provisions and fuel oil are normally available and water is laid on to the railway quay. Communications. Regular communication with Trelleborg in Sweden is maintained by rail and passenger ferry. Rescue. Rescue cruiser, motor lifeboat and line-throwing apparatus available.
1
1
2
8.33 Approach. From the vicinity of 54°26′N, 13°52′E the approach leads W for about 7 miles, passing N of Mukran Reede anchorage (8.31). From a position 2½ miles NW of Granitzer Ort (54°24′⋅2N, 13°40′⋅0E), a buoyed channel leads 2¾ miles NNW, passing NE of the fishery protection area (8.18), to a position SW of N mole head. A buoy (isolated danger) is moored 2 cables NE of the molehead. Useful marks: Prora Tower (grey 3-sided structure, 2 galleries, 31 m in height) (54°26′⋅0N, 13°34′⋅5E). N Mole Light (54°28′⋅6N, 13°35′⋅9E) (8.31). Südkai Light (white mast with platform, 9 m in height) (54°28′⋅7N, 13°34′⋅7E), displayed from the W side of the harbour.
Alongside berths 1
General description 1
8.32 General layout. The harbour is entered from S and is protected on the its E side by the N mole, 1320 m in length. The harbour has eight berths including two with Ro-Ro facilities.
Directions
Mukran Ferry Port 8.29 Position and function. Mukran Ferry Port (54°29′N, 13°35′E) lies on the W side of Prorer Wiek, about 2½ miles SW of Sassnitz (8.22).
8.31 Port radio. Sassnitz Port Traffic Control Office controls all traffic in the harbour and roadstead area. Outer anchorage. Mukran Reede anchorage is centred 4¼ miles SE of Mukran N Mole Light (green tower, white band, 14 m in height) (54°28′⋅6N, 13°35′⋅9E), as shown on the chart. The anchoring ground consists of fine sand and mud but offers little protection against winds from NE to SE. Pilotage. Arrival and berthing at Mukran is permitted without pilot assistance. However, if required, the pilot boards at position 54°26′N, 13°43′E. Regulations. Anchorage is prohibited within 50 m of both sides of the ferry berths. Sassnitz Traffic Control will advise if any temporary regulations are in force.
Harbour
8.27 Two ferry terminals, maximum draught 7⋅2 m, plus a berth for the reserve ferry. There is also a quay 100 m in length, for small cargo vessels with a draught not exceeding 4 m.
Port services 1
8.30 The maximum draught in the approach channel is 8⋅0 m. In the turning basin and at both quays it is 9⋅5 m.
Arrival information
Directions 1
The port provides road and rail ferry links to the E Baltic and is the only European port capable of handling Russian and Finnish broad-gauge train wagons. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 23 vessels totalling 108 997 dwt. Port Authority. Fährhafen Sassnitz-Mukran Gmbh, 18546 Sassnitz/Neu Mukran.
8.34 A finger pier, 216 m in length and 26 m wide, with depth of 9⋅5 m alongside, has berthing facilities on either side for ferries. A second ferry pier, 230 m in length, 30 m wide, about 250 m N, has depths on each side of 8.5 m. A pier, with a Ro-Ro berth at its outer end, extends from the shore about 300 m SW of the finger pier.
Port services 1
316
8.35 Repairs can be carried out. Other facilities: deratting and issue of certificates. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Anchorages and harbours Chart 2365
Anchorage 1
8.36 Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels in depths of about 3 to 4 m off Binz, 2 miles W of Granitzer Ort (54°24′N, 13°40′E) (8.21). Local knowledge is required. Useful mark: Ruined pier, extending about 3 cables NE from the shore at Binz.
2
Fishing harbours 1
8.37 Glowe (54°34′N, 13°28′E), situated on S side of
Tromper Wiek, is a small fishing village. A harbour for fishing vessels, with a depth of 3⋅6 m, is formed between two breakwaters extending W from Königshörn, a point close N of the village. Lights are displayed from the head of each breakwater. A resue boat is situated at Glowe. See 1.158. Lohme Hafen (54°35′N, 13°36′E) is only for use by small craft, due to silting within the entrance between the short W mole and the 110 m long E mole. Depths are very shallow within the harbour. A light is displayed from the harbour. Local knowledge is required for these harbours.
GREIFSWALDER BODDEN AND STRALSUND EAST APPROACHES GENERAL INFORMATION
3
Chart 2365, German Chart 1511 (see 1.34)
Description 1
2
8.38 Greifswalder Bodden (54°15′N, 13°30′E) is a shallow bay bounded on the N side by Rügen, and on the S by a stretch of the mainland known as Vorpommern. It provides the main E approach to Stralsund. Included in the description are the approaches to the bay, the E approaches to Stralsund, the harbours of Greifswald-Wieck (54°06′N, 13°27′E) and Lauterbach (54°21′N, 13°30′E). There are several other landing places but these are used principally by local craft and detailed descriptions are not given. The section is arranged as follows: Approaches to Greifswalder Bodden (8.45). Greifswalder Bodden — North side (8.58). Greifswalder Bodden — South side (8.77). Stralsund East Approaches (8.89).
4
Ice conditions 1
Regulations 8.39 Special regulations are in force within the area. In particular vessels are to adhere strictly to the recommended fairways and should not deviate from them without urgent reason.
Currents 1
8.40 The current direction is, in general, dependent on the wind direction. At the E entrance to the Greifswalder Bodden, between Südperd (54°16′N, 13°43′E) (8.46) and Usedom, 6½ miles SSE (8.112), the current sets as follows: Current flow
Wind direction
S to SW.
N to NNE, and to a lesser extent WNW to NNW.
N to NE. 2
1
W to NW.
Any E direction.
E to SE.
Any W direction, particularly with strong SW winds.
8.43 The channels throughout this section are well marked by consecutively numbered buoys and light-buoys. At each change of direction in the channel, the buoy on the side towards which the turn is to be made, is fitted with a topmark.
Fishing 1
At the W entrance to Greifswalder Bodden, through Die Strelasund, the current sets as follows: Wind direction
8.42 With strong SW winds the level of the water may fall 1 m below MSL. The opposite effect is experienced with strong winds from the NE. Exceptional variations may occur several times in the autumn, winter and early part of spring. At Greifswalder-Wieck (8.85) the maximum observed variations have been as much as 2⋅9 m above and 2 m below mean water level.
Buoyage
Any S direction, particularly SW.
Current flow
8.41 Greifswalder Bodden is usually ice-bound during the months of January and February, with an extended period during severe winters when navigation is severely hindered.
Water levels 1
1
Note. With strong wind conditions synchronised with abnormal sea levels, the current may attain a rate of up to 5 kn at the E entrance. Even in calm weather a strong current may run SW when the sea level is low, and run NE when it is high. Similarly, in Palmer Ort Channel (8.90) at the W entrance, rates of up to 5 kn may be experienced. Within Greifswalder Bodden the current rates are generally slow, but with strong winds from the SE a rate of up to 3 kn in a W direction may be experienced in the narrows NE of Vilm (54°20′N, 13°32′E).
2
317
8.44 Extensive fishing takes place in Greifswalder Bodden, between mid-February and mid-June in the N half of the area, and throughout the year in the S half of the area. Fixed net herring fishing takes place from May to March. Mariners are warned to navigate with caution. During the spring fishing season, in the N half of Greifswalder Bodden, additional fishing buoys with orange-coloured balls will be moored clear of the main fairways to mark the fishery protection areas. They have no other navigational significance.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
EASTERN APPROACHES TO GREIFSWALDER BODDEN
Controlling depths 1
General information
8.48 Both the Landtief and Osttief channels are subject to silting. The Landtief channel (8.45) has a dredged depth of 6⋅9 m. The Osttief channel (8.45) has a dredged depth of 6⋅0 m, but owing to narrowing of the channel, caused by shoaling, one-way traffic is in operation and E-bound vessels have right of way over those W-bound.
Chart 2365, German Chart 1511 (see 1.34)
Description 1
8.45 In the E approachs to Greifswalder Bodden, between Südperd (8.46) and the N extremity of Usedom Island (54°05′N, 13°50′E) (8.112), about 6½ miles SSE, there is an extensive sand flat which rises gradually on the seaward side but is steep-to towards Greifswalder Bodden. Landtief Channel, in the NW part of this sandbank, provides access from the NE and is both deeper and wider than Osttief Channel which lies in the S part of the sandbank and is entered from the SE. The channels are normally kept open for navigation by dredging.
Topography 1
2
3
8.46 From Nordperd (54°20′⋅5N, 13°46′⋅0E) to Südperd, about 4¼ miles SSW, the coast is low and sandy, with the exception of Lobber Ort (54°19′N, 13°44′E). Gross Zicker, about 3½ miles SW of Nordperd, rises to a height of 66 m, while Südperd and Klein Zicker, a small peninsula 1¼ miles NW, are both about 38 m in height. From a distance this stretch of coast appears as four separate islands. The coastal bank in the area is extensive and generally foul. The S part of the sandbank between Südperd and Usedom Island (54°05′N, 13°50′E) extends E to the island of Greifswalder Oie (54°15′N, 13°55′E) which rises on all sides to a height of about 15 m. At the NE end the fringing reef is steep-to. Ruden (54°12′N, 13°46′E) lies within the sandbank some 5 miles to the SW of Greifswalder Oie. It is a low island, the N part of which is wooded with a small harbour on the E side. The S end of the island, a long sandy tongue, is very flat but steep-to on its E side. Its extremity can only be seen from two miles. The coast on the S side of the approach is low lying and wooded without any natural features.
Maximum draught 1
Pilotage 1
2
3
1
Traffic regulations
2
8.47 Prohibited areas. A fishing area, shown on the chart, extending E and S of Nordperd (8.21) and lying W of the Landtief approach fairway, is closed to shipping between 1st February and 31st October annually. From August to October each year, herring nets are laid within 5 miles of Greifswalder Oie in directions from N, through E, to SE. Vessels should, as far as possible, avoid the area during this period. An area, marked on the chart, in which fishing and anchoring are prohibited, extends N and E from the NE side of Usedom. It is marked by buoys (special). Speed limit. The maximum permitted speed in both Landtief and Osttief Channels is 10 kn.
8.50 Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant vessels exceeding 85 m in length, 13 m beam or 5 m draught in breadth proceeding to Stralsund and other places via Greifswalder Bodden and through Landtief and Osttief Channels. Requests for pilotage should be made 6 hours prior to ETA at Stralsund Pilot Station. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Weather conditions permitting, pilotage is available day and night for vessels proceeding to Stralsund, but only during daylight for vessels proceeding to other districts. Pilots board at Landtief B Light-buoy (54°17′⋅3N, 13°45′⋅9E) or Osttief 2 Light-buoy (54°12′⋅1N, 13°52′⋅2E). During the ice season the pilot may board in position 54°26′N, 13°43′E). Towage services, provided by passenger vessels running from Stralsund and Greifswald, can be ordered from the pilot station if required.
Principal marks
2
1
8.49 The maximum allowable draught for the Greifswalder Bodden, Landtief and Osttief channels is 5⋅2 m, but, with permission from Stralsund Traffic, ships with draught up to 6⋅0 m may be accepted for Stralsund.
8.51 Landmarks: Radio mast (118 m in height) (red lights) (54°20′⋅5N, 13°45′E), at Nordperd. Water towers (74 and 72 m in height), at Göhren, close W of Nordperd. Greifswalder Oie Lighthouse (red octagonal tower with two galleries, black lantern, brown cupola, 39 m in height) (54°15′⋅0N, 13°55′⋅5E). Gross Zicker (3½ miles SW of Nordperd) (8.46). Radio mast (63 m in height) (red lights) (54°16′⋅5N, 13°43′⋅4E), at Südperd. Ruden Tower (54°12′⋅1N, 13°46′⋅4E). Chimneys (54°08′⋅4N, 13°46′⋅0E), at Peenemünde. Major light: Greifswalder Oie Light — as above.
Directions (continued from 8.21)
Landtief Channel 1
318
8.52 From the vicinity of Landtief A Light-buoy (safe water) (54°21′⋅1N, 13°51′⋅2E), the track leads SW for about 11 miles to the junction with Osttief Channel at the
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
2
3
4
5
6
Landtief 14/Osttief 32 Light-buoy, passing (with positions from Südperd (54°16′⋅5N, 13°43′⋅5E)): SE of Nordperd (4¼ miles NNE). Buhskam, a shoal on which there are above-water rocks, lies about 3 cables offshore NW of Nordperd and an extensive coastal bank, foul in places, extends SSW to Südperd. Thence: SE of Idunagrund (3 miles NNE), thence: SE of Lobber Ort (2¾ miles N) (8.46), a high, steep promontory. Depths of 7⋅7 m or less extend up to 2¼ miles ESE of the promontory. Thence: SE of Dammriff (1½ miles NNE), a group of dangerous below-water rocks, and: Close NW of Landtief B Light-buoy (safe water) (1½ miles NE), the pilot boarding position, thence: NW of Thiessower Steintrendel (1½ miles E), a rocky patch marked by a buoy (W cardinal). Thence, from a position 8 cables E of Südperd, the track continues SW along the recommended track which leads through the dredged channel, marked by light-buoys and buoys (lateral), and continues to the junction with Osttief Channel, passing: SE of Böttchergrund (2½ miles SW), a shoal with a least depth of 2⋅9 m over it, marked on its E side by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: SE of Ellidagrund (3½ miles SW), a dangerous rock, and: NW of Schumacher Grund (3¾ miles SW), a shallow, stony bank, marked on its NE side by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: To the junction with Osttief Channel, marked by L 11 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (4¾ miles SW) and Landtief 14/Osttief 32 Light-buoy (port hand), close S.
6
Useful mark 8.54 1
2
3
4
5
8.53 From the vicinity of Osttief Light-buoy (safe water) (54°13′⋅5N, 13°59′⋅5E) (chart 2150), the approach leads WSW for 4¾ miles to the pilot boarding place in the vicinity of O 2 Light-buoy (port hand), as shown on the chart. From O 2 Light-buoy, a dredged channel, marked throughout its length by light-buoys and buoys, leads initially WNW for about 2 miles to O 6 Light-buoy (port hand), passing between Gänsegrund (54°12′N, 13°51′E), the NE part of Peenemünder Haken, and the bank extending SW from Greifswalder Oie, and onto the following alignment: Ruden Front Light (grey round tower) (54°11′⋅9N, 13°46′⋅5E), a directional light. Ruden Rear Light (grey metal framework tower) (600 m from front light). The alignment (239½°) of these lights leads SW for about 1 mile to O 14/Reede 1 Light-buoy (port hand) at the entrance to the anchorage area, whence the fairway leads SSW for about 8½ cables in the white sector (193°–202°) of Peenemünde Light (white round tower, red band and lantern, 11 m in height) (54°11′⋅2N, 13°46′⋅6E). Having rounded the S point of Ruden, on which stands a sectored light (white metal framework tower, red lantern, 3 m in height), the buoyed fairway continues W for about 1½ miles through Loch (54°11′⋅3N, 13°45′⋅0E), by night in the white sector (094°–096°), astern, of Peenemünde Light thence it leads NNW for about 1 mile to O 30 Light-buoy (port hand), on the alignment (153½°), astern, of Knaakrücken Leading Lights (8.119), passing between two
Freesendorfer Haken Beacon (tower with grey lantern) (54°11′⋅9N, 13°42′⋅4E). (Directions continue for Greifswalder Bodden N side at 8.65, for the S side at 8.81, and for Stralsund East Approaches at 8.100. Directions for Peenestrom and Kleines Haff are given at 8.118)
Anchorages and harbours Anchorages 1
Osttief Channel 1
sets of spherical buoys (special) which lie about 2 cables NE of an offshore platform (54°11′⋅6N, 13°42′⋅9E) from which lights (occas) are displayed, and which mark the point where a submarine power cable crosses the track. From O 30 Light-buoy the fairway leads 2 miles W in the white sector (089½°–090½°), astern, of Ruden N Directional Light (white metal framework tower, red lantern, 23 m in height), to the L 11 Light-buoy (starboard hand) at the junction of the Landtief/Osttief fairways. The fairway passes N of Freesendorfer Haken, a sandy coastal flat which extends over 1½ miles N and W of the peninsula known as Struck, and S of Schumacher Grund (8.52).
8.55 Südperd. Anchorage may be obtained in a depth of 8 m with good holding ground, about 1¼ miles NE of Südperd (8.46), with the tower of Granitz Jagdschloss (54°23′N, 13°38′E) (8.20) bearing about 321°. Ruden SE. Anchorage may be obtained in Ruden Reede, in depths of 7 to 8 m, as shown on the chart. Ruden SW. An anchorage area is designated between 1½ and 9½ cables W of Ruden S Light.
Greifswalder Oie Fishing Harbour 1
2
8.56 Description. A fishing harbour is situated on the SW side of Greifswalder Oie (54°15′N, 13°55′E) (8.46). The harbour is formed by two moles and a detached breakwater. Within the harbour there are depths of about 4 m but this may be reduced by 0⋅5 m in W gales. A rock with a depth of less than 1⋅8 m over it, lies close WNW of the N molehead. Directions. From the vicinity of Greifswalder Oie Light-buoy (safe water) (54°15′⋅3N, 13°51′⋅8E) the line of bearing 110°, in the white sector (108°–112°) of a direction light (white hut, 3 m in height), displayed from the root of the N mole, leads 1¾ miles ESE to the harbour through a channel marked by buoys (lateral). A light (port hand) is displayed from the head of the N mole, and a light (starboard hand) is displayed from the N head of the detached breakwater. Rescue. A fully equipped rescue craft is stationed here.
Ruden 1
319
8.57 The harbour at Ruden (8.46) is situated on the E side of the N part of the island. The harbour and approach channel are maintained by dredging to a depth of 2⋅5 m. From the main channel at O 9/Ru 2 Buoy (preferred channel to port), the short approach channel leads NW to the harbour entrance. A light (green framework tower, 4 m in height) is displayed from the head of the E mole.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
GREIFSWALDER BODDEN — NORTH SIDE
Directions (continued from 8.52)
General information Chart 2365, German Chart 1511 (see 1.34)
Routes 1
8.58 The following routes are described: The approaches to Lauterbach (54°20′N, 13°30′E) from both Landtief and Palmer Ort, including the side channels leading to Zicker See (8.74), Hagensche Wiek (8.75) and Die Having (8.76).
Landtief to Lauterbach 1
2
Topography 1
8.59 Rügischer Bodden, the N part of Greifswalder Bodden, is indented by several bays behind which are some hills and a number of lakes. Zudar peninsula (54°15′N, 13°24′E) the S part of Rügen, forms the N side of the entrance to Die Strelasund, which separates Rügen from the mainland. Palmer Ort (54°13′⋅3N, 13°23′⋅6E) is the S point of the Zudar peninsula.
3
4
Caution 1
8.60 Navigation in the bays by vessels drawing more than 2 m entails the greatest caution due to the existence of numerous rocks. Small craft are also cautioned against passing between the shoals without a pilot. Local knowledge is required.
1
Pilotage 1
8.61 See 8.50.
Water levels 1
8.62 See 8.42.
2
Prohibited areas 1
8.63 A small former explosives dumping area about 1 cable square, situated on the foul ground close W of Vilm Island (54°19′N, 13°32′E), is marked by buoys (special) at each corner.
3
8.65 Landtief to Vilm. From L 10 Light-buoy (port hand) moored 2½ miles SSW of Südperd (54°16′⋅5N, 13°43′⋅5E) the recommended track (315°–135°) leads NW for 6¼ miles in the white sector (312°–316°) of Vilm Light, (white column, red lantern, 3 m in height) (54°19′⋅6N, 13°32′⋅6E), passing (with positions from Südperd): Between Böttchergrund (8.52) (2½ miles SW) and the SW end of Thiessow Haken, marked by Landtief W buoy (W cardinal) (2¼ miles SW), thence: NE of Kleinstubber (3 miles SW), a shoal patch, thence: NE of Rugiagrund (3 miles SW), a shoal patch. Thence: Clear of Thiessow Light-buoy (safe water) (2¾ miles WSW), thence: NE of a shoal patch with a least depth over it of 3⋅2 m (3¾ miles WSW), which lies in the N part of Gross Stubber, an extensive sandbank with rocks awash near its W side. Thence: Clear of Zicker Light-buoy (safe water) (3½ miles W), thence: NE of an obstruction with a depth over it of 4 m, marked by a buoy (isolated danger) (4½ miles WNW), thence: To Reddevitz Light-buoy (safe water) (5¾ miles NW). 8.66 Vilm to Lauterbach. From Reddevitz Light-buoy (safe water) the recommended route (006°–186°) leads N for 1½ miles passing (with positions from Vilm Light (8.65)): E of a prohibited area, marked by buoys (special) (8 cables E), thence: W of a platform (height 6 m) (1½ miles E). An obstruction, with a depth over it of 5 m, lies about 1 cable SW of the platform. Thence the recommended route (306½°) leads 5¾ cables NW and on to the alignment (076°), astern, of Gobbin leading beacons which leads 1½ miles WSW to the Lauterbach approach leading line, 7 cables SE of the harbour entrance: Front beacon (white rectangle, red border, on white metal framework tower, 12 m in height) (54°20′⋅7N, 13°36′⋅2E). Rear beacon (red diamond on white metal framework tower) (6¼ cables from front beacon).
Principal marks 1
2
8.64 Landmarks. In addition to the landmarks on Rügen already mentioned at 8.20 and 8.51, some of which may be seen from inside Greifswalder Bodden, the following are also prominent (with positions from Vilmnitz Church (54°21′⋅5N, 13°31′⋅1E)): Vilmnitz Church, with steeple. Radio mast (1 mile W). Radio mast (red lights) (2½ miles WSW). Pillar-shaped monument at Gros Stresow (2 miles E). Kasnevitz Church, with spire (4 miles WSW). Garz Church, with truncated spire (6 miles WSW). Water tower (close by Garz Church). Major light: Greifswalder Oie Light (54°15′⋅0N, 13°55′⋅5E) (8.51).
Palmer Ort to Lauterbach 1
2
320
8.67 From No 1 Buoy (starboard hand), moored 2 miles SE of Palmer Ort (54°13′⋅3N, 13°23′⋅6E), the recommended track (191°–011°) leads N for 6¼ miles passing (with positions from Palmer Ort (8.59)): Clear of Lauterbach Light-buoy (safe water) (3 miles NNE), thence: W of No 1 buoy (starboard hand) (6 miles NNE). Thence the route leads NNE for 1¼ miles within the white sector (024°–029°) of Lauterbach S Pier Light (white metal framework tower) (54°20′⋅5N, 13°30′⋅3E), through a buoyed channel and onto the alignment (076°) of Gobbin leading beacons (8.66), which leads 9 cables ENE to Lauterbach approach, 7 cables SE of the harbour entrance.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Palmer Ort to Reddevitz Light-buoy 1
2
8.68 From No 1 buoy (starboard hand) moored 2 miles SE of Palmer Ort (8.59), the recommended route (035½°–215½°) leads 7½ miles NNE to Reddevitz Light-buoy (safe water), moored 1¼ miles SE of Vilm Light (54°19′⋅6N, 13°32′⋅6E), passing (positioned from Vilm Light): NW of a dangerous wreck (6 miles SSW), thence: Clear of Vilm Light-buoy (safe water) (3¾ miles SSW), thence: SE of Vilmgrund, a shallow bank extending 2 miles S of Vilm, thence: To Reddevitz Light-buoy.
Bays and harbours Thiessow 1
2
Lauterbach General information 1
8.69 Description. Lauterbach (54°20′N, 13°30′E) harbour is formed by two moles which are protected to the S and E by artificial detached breakwaters. Function. The principal function of the harbour is the import of fertilizer. Traffic. In 2003, 4 vessels totalling 5887 dwt visited the port. Pilotage is compulsory. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Gager 1
2
Directions 1
2
8.70 From a position 7 cables SE of the harbour entrance approach is made on the alignment (313°) of Lauterbach Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, red border, on white metal framework tower, 7 m in height) (54°20′⋅6N, 13°30′⋅1E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, red border, on white metal framework tower, 10 m in height) (54°20′⋅6N, 13°30′⋅0E). The above alignment also marks the fairway leading NW from the ferry jetty on the NW side of Vilm.
Anchorage 1
1
2
8.71 Anchorage may be obtained in the roadstead in a depth of 6 m.
8.72 The S quay, with a length 230 m and a depth alongside of 5 m, is the deep-water berth. A finger pier extends about 200 m E from a position near the head of the N mole. It is surrounded by a number of piles which are for the use of yachts. There are depths of about 3⋅5 m on both sides of the pier. Two more finger piers extend E from the N mole parallel to the first.
3
1
8.76 Description. Die Having (54°20′N, 13°39′E), the bay N of Hagensche Wiek, is connected by narrow waterways to Neuensiener See on the N side, and Selliner See, on the NE side. There are timber loading wharfs at Seedorf, a village at the entrance to Neuensiener See and at Baabe on the SE side of Selliner See. Directions. From a position (54°20′⋅0N, 13°34′⋅5E) the recommended route (111°–291°) leads ESE for 1½ miles to a position N of Reddevitzer Höft, passing (with positions from Vilm Light (8.65)); NNE of platform and associated submarine cables (1½ miles E). The fairway, with a least depth of 4 m, which leads through Die Having, is marked by buoys moored at ¾ mile intervals. Local knowledge is required.
GREIFSWALDER BODDEN — SOUTH SIDE General information Chart 2365, German Chart 1511 (see 1.34)
Routes
Port services 8.73 Repairs: minor repairs possible; divers available from Stralsund. Other facilities: compass adjustment; deratting; hospital at Stralsund; stores are available from Stralsund. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions. Communications. A ferry runs to Vilm. Rescue. A fully equipped inshore rescue craft is stationed here.
8.75 Description. Gager, a small harbour and boat building yard, is situated in the SE corner of Hagensche Wiek which is entered between Zickersches Höft and Reddevitzer Höft (54°19′N, 13°37′E). Depths alongside are from 3⋅7 to 4⋅7 m. Directions. From Zicker Light-buoy (safe water) (54°16′⋅8N, 13°37′⋅3E) the recommended approach leads (036°–216°) for about 1 mile to G2 buoy (port hand). Thence, a buoyed channel, dredged to 4 m, leads NE for 1¼ miles, then E for 8 cables. Gager Light (black column on pedestal) stands on the N end of a molehead extending 200 m NNE from the S side of the harbour.
Die Having
Berths 1
8.74 Description. There is a landing place at Thiessow, situated in the SE corner of Zicker See, a natural inlet on the NW side of Südperd, entered between Klein Zicker (54°17′⋅0N, 13°41′⋅5E) (8.46) and the S extremity of Zickersches Höft, 8 cables WNW. Directions. From Zicker Light-buoy (safe water) (54°16′⋅8N, 13°37′⋅3E) the recommended approach (079°–259°), leads 1½ miles to Kaming Light-buoy, moored 2 cables SE of Zickersches Höft, then ENE for 5 cables to the entrance to a dredged channel, 30 m wide, marked by buoys and light-buoys. Leading beacons on the E shore, standing close together and in line bearing about 084°, mark the section of the channel leading through the narrows. The channel and harbour have a maintained depth of 2.5 m.
1
8.77 The recommended routes to the ports in this section are indicated on the chart.
Topography 1
321
8.78 The S coast of Greifswalder Bodden, between Dänische Wiek (54°07′N, 13°28′E), the principal inlet on the SW side, and Struck (8.53) 8 miles ENE, is generally low and partly wooded.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Prohibited areas 1
8.79 An area prohibited to all vessels except certain local fishing craft, covers most of Freesendorfer Haken (54°11′N, 13°42′E) (8.53). The limits may be seen on the national chart.
3
At G4/L2 Light-buoy vessels bound for Ladebow continue for a further 1 mile. Wieck Hafen — Greifswald Hafen. From G4/L2 Light-buoy the white sector (182¾°–183°) of Eldena Sector Light (54°05′⋅2N, 13°27′⋅6E) leads to the entrance of a dredged channel, marked by buoys (lateral) on each side, which leads to Wieck Hafen/Greifswald Hafen.
Principal marks 1
2
3
8.80 Landmarks: Kröslin Church (54°07′N, 13°45′E), together with Wusterhusen Church, may be seen in clear weather at distances up to 16 miles. Four chimneys (111 m in height) (red lights) (2½ miles NE of Wusterhusen Church). Wusterhusen Church (54°07′N, 13°37′E). Building, at Lubmin (1½ miles N of Wusterhusen Church). Windmill at Gahlkow (2½ miles WNW of Wusterhusen church). Wieck Church (2½ miles E of Greifswald). Chimney (136 m in height) (red lights) (1 mile S of Greifswald). Neuenkirchen Church (1½ miles N of Greifswald). Gristow Church (54°10′⋅4N, 13°20′⋅0E). Chimney (56 m in height) (5 cables NE of Gristow Church). Riems (chimneys and overhead railway) (54°11′N, 13°22′E). Major light: Greifswalder Oie Light (54°15′⋅0N, 13°55′⋅5E) (8.51).
Greifswald Hafen Ladebow 1
2
Wieck Hafen 1
Directions (continued from 8.52 and 8.53)
Landtief/Osttief channels to Dänische Wiek fairway 1
8.81 From Landtief 14/Osttief 32 Light-buoy (54°12′⋅4N, 13°39′⋅3E), the recommended route (244½°–064½°) leads 6 miles SW to Greifswald Light buoy (safe water) (54°10′N, 13°30′E), passing (with positions from Landtief 14/Osttief 32 Light-buoy): Clear of Vierow Light-buoy (safe water) (3 miles WSW).
2
3
Palmer Ort to Dänische Wiek fairway 1
8.82 From No 2 Light-buoy (54°12′⋅4N, 13°26′⋅7E), the recommended route (141½°–321½°) leads 3¼ miles SE to Greifswalder Light-buoy passing, (with positions from Palmer Ort): NE of foul ground (2¼ miles SE), thence: Clear of Koos Light-buoy (3½ miles SE).
4
Dänische Wiek fairway 1
2
8.84 General information. Ladebow (54°06′N, 13°27′E) is part of Greifswald Hafen and is used as a port of transhipment and storage of bulk goods, particularly building materials and bulk liquids. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 52 vessels totalling 116 848 dwt. Port Authority. Greifswalder Hafengesellschaft mbH, Thomas Müntzer Strasse, 17493 Greifswald. Controlling depth. The approach channel is maintained at a depth of 6 m. Depths in the harbour are from 4⋅4 to 5⋅9 m Largest vessel. Can take vessels up to 90 m long with a beam of 13 m. Harbour layout. The harbour has a single wharf providing two berths. 8.85 General description. Wieck Hafen is formed by two moles extending NE from each side of the mouth of the river Ryck. The N mole extends somewhat further into the bay than the S mole. The villages of Wieck, on the N side, and Eldena, on the S side of the river are suburbs of Greifswald. Caution. The speed of vessels intending to turn into Wieck Hafen should be reduced in good time to obviate the danger of running into shoal water S of the N molehead. Controlling draught. The dredged channel leading to the harbour is about 40 m wide and is restricted to vessels with a draught of 3⋅5 m. Harbour layout. On the N side of the harbour is a continuous stone pier. The S side has a quay used for package goods, in front of which is a row of dolphins. Bridge. At the inner end of Wieck Hafen a wooden drawbridge with an opening about 10 m in width, spans the river. The vertical clearance height of the closed bridge at mean water level (5m on the gauge at Wieck) is about 2m. Opening times are promulgated in German Notice to Mariners and differ for summer and winter seasons. In an emergency additional openings may be arranged with Greifswald Town Roads Department. Traffic signals are shown from a mast at the S end of the bridge as follows: Day
8.83 The recommended route leads SSW in the white sector of Ladebow Directional Light (white framework tower, 13 m in height) (54°06′⋅1N, 13°26′⋅7E) for 3 miles from Greifswald Light-buoy (safe water) (54°09′⋅8N, 13°30′⋅2E) to Dänische Wiek, between Gahlkower Haken to the E, and Salzboddengrund to the W, passing (with positions from Ladebow Light): ESE of two platforms (3½ miles N), thence: WNW of a platform (3¾ miles NE), thence: WNW of G2 Light-buoy (port hand) (2¾ miles NNE), thence:
Night
Meaning
No signal
No signal
Entrance free.
Red ball
F.R.
Entrance prohibited.
Two red balls
In the approaches, vessels departing Greifswald should be cautious of vessels arriving from seaward.
Vessels requiring the bridge opening should display, in a prominent position, two flags, vertically disposed. Note. Until the passage is clear vessels must remain at least 200 m from the bridge.
322
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
5
Useful mark: Wieck Light (54°06′⋅0N, 13°27′⋅6E) (green column, 2 m in height), standing on the N molehead.
Ferry 1
Greifswald Hafen 1
2
3
8.86 General description. Greifswald (54°06′N, 13°23′E) is an industrial town situated on the S bank of the river Ryck. It has a university and several other institutes. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 20 vessels totalling 64 330 dwt. Maximum draught. The maximum permitted draught is 2⋅5 m. Largest vessel. Vessels of 1000 nrt and vessels with a length of about 80 m can turn at several places in the river, E of the quays on the N side. Turning in the river should always be with bows N to guard against damage by wash. Speed is restricted to 4 kn in the river. Harbour. The total length of berthing space is 1300 m. A bridge spans the river at the W end of the harbour. Submarine cable and pipelines cross the river in places. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions. Other facilities: hull and engine repairs; divers; passenger vessels can act as tugs; several medical clinics. Communications. Greifswald is linked by rail to Stralsund (8.102), Wolgast (8.120) and Berlin.
8.91 A ferry crosses the fairway between Stahlbrode (8.104) and Glewitzer Fähre (8.105).
Pilotage 1
8.92 Pilotage is compulsory for certain vessels and is arranged through Stralsund Pilot Station. See 8.50.
Speed limit 1
8.93 In Palmer Ort Channel there is a speed limit of 5⋅4 kn. Vessels must navigate in the centre of the channel. Passing and overtaking by vessels over 20 m is prohibited.
Change in direction of buoyage 1
8.94 Buoyage marking changes at Strelasundbrücke, as vessels approaching Stralsund from either direction are travelling with the main stream of flood. See IALA System A.
Waiting areas 1
8.95 A waiting area marked by conical buoys (special) lies 2 cables W of the S extremity of Drigge.
Submarine cables Harbours and landings
1
Anleger Von Vierow 1
8.87 From Vierow Light-buoy (safe water) (54°11′⋅2N, 13°34′⋅7E) the recommended route (183½°–003½°) leads S for 3 miles to Anleger Von Vierow. A short entrance channel leads to a single pier. The white sector (172½°–176½°) of a directional light, operated on request, together with buoys (lateral), mark the channel.
Vertical clearance 1
Lubmin 1
8.88 From Vierow Light-buoy (safe water) the recommended route (157°–337°) leads SE for 3 miles to Lubmin (54°08′N, 13°37′E). There is a pier used only by local passenger craft.
8.96 Submarine cables cross the fairway in several places and are marked by notice boards and cable buoys. Anchoring within these areas is prohibited. 8.97 Cables cross the fairway between the mainland and Rügen, on the Drigge leading line. The supporting masts are prominent and there is a safe overhead clearance of 36 m. An overhead cable crosses the channel SE of the Ziegelgrabenbrücke with a vertical clearance of 42 m.
Rescue 1
8.98 A fully equipped rescue vessel is stationed at Stralsund.
Landmarks 8.99 1
STRALSUND EAST APPROACHES General information Chart 2365, German Chart 1511 (see 1.34)
Description 1
8.89 The main fairway through Die Strelasund is marked by leading lights and buoys from Greifswalder Bodden to Stralsund, a distance of about 14 miles. It should be noted that leading lines do not necessarily lead through the centre of the fairway due to the several turns in the channel, particularly in the inner approaches towards Stralsund.
Directions (continued from 8.52 or 8.53)
Landtief/Osttief channels to Palmer Ort 1
Controlling depth 1
Riems (8.80) (54°11′N, 13°22′E). Gristow Church (54°10′⋅4N, 13°20′⋅0E). Chimney (56 m in height), 5 cables NE of Gristow Church. Reinberg Church (54°13′N, 13°15′E). Poseritz Church (54°18′N, 13°17′E). Gustow Church, 2¼ miles W of Poseritz Church, both on Rügen. Chimney (58 m in height) (54°16′⋅7N, 13°06′⋅3E).
8.90 Palmer Ort Channel leads across Mittelgrund between Palmer Ort and the mainland. It is about 40 m in width and is dredged to a depth of 6 m.
323
8.100 From a position between L 11 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (54°12′⋅4N, 13°39′⋅3E) and Landtief 14/Osttief 32 Light-buoy (port hand) the recommended route (270°–090°) leads W for 7½ miles to the entrance to Palmer Ort Channel, initially in the white sector (089½°–090½°), astern, of Ruden N Light. Thence, on the alignment (269¾°) of Falkenhagen Leading Lights:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
2
3
4
Front light (white rectangle, red border, on grey metal framework tower, 12 m in height) (54°12′⋅4N, 13°18′⋅3E). Rear light (white diamond, red border, on grey metal framework tower, 29 m in height) (1¼ miles from front light). Passing, (with positions from Palmer Ort (54°13′⋅3N, 13°23′⋅6E)): S of rocky patches with a least depth over them of 4⋅7 m (9 miles E), thence: S of Gross Stubber (7 miles E) (8.65), thence: Clear of Ariadne Light-buoy (safe water) (6 miles E) which lies 4 cables N of Ariadnegrund (54°12′N, 13°34′E) an area of less water, thence: S of 4⋅2 m shoal patch (3½ miles E).
Hafen von Stralsund 1
8.102 Directions for entry. From a position 2½ cables SW of Stein Ort (54°17′N, 13°09′E) the approach leads NNW for 1½ miles through Ziegelgraben channel in the white sector (333¼°−334°) of Dänholm Directional Light. The channel is narrow, dredged and buoyed leading to the S entrance to Stralsund Hafen. The N approaches to Hafen von Stralsund and the port are described in Baltic Pilot Volume I. (Directions for the waters W of Stralsund are given in Baltic Pilot Volume I)
Minor channels and harbour Channel to Riems
Die Strelasund 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.101 From a position 2 miles ESE of Palmer Ort (8.59), the entrance to Palmer Ort Channel is marked by No 1 buoy (starboard hand) and No 2 Light-buoy (port hand). The recommended track leads W for about 1½ miles, on the alignment of Falkenhagen Leading Lights (8.100), thence NW for 2 miles, on the alignment (314¼°) of Maltzien Leading Lights: Front light (white round metal tower, black stripes, 12 m in height) (54°14′⋅2N, 13°21′⋅4E). Rear light (white diamond, red border, on white metal framework tower, 18 m in height) (675 m NW of front light). Thence the track leads W for 1½ miles on the alignment (099¼°), astern, of Grabow Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, black border, on white metal framework tower, red bands, 11 m in height) (54°13′⋅8N, 13°24′⋅4E). Rear light (white rectangle, black border, on white metal framework tower, red bands, 17 m in height) (450 m E of front light). Thence the track leads WNW for 4½ miles in the white sector (293°−293¼°) of Devin Light (white metal framework tower, red bands, 9 m in height). Thence the track leads NW for 1½ miles on the alignment (316½°) of Drigge Leading Lights: Front light (white diamond, red border, on white metal framework tower, red bands, 14 m in height) (54°17′⋅4N, 13°10′⋅0E). Rear light (white triangle point up, red border, on white metal framework tower, 23 m in height) (535 m NW of front light). Thence SW for 1¼ miles on the alignment (248½°) of Andershof Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, red border, on white metal framework tower, 20 m in height) (54°16′⋅4N, 13°07′⋅5E). Rear light (white rectangle over white triangle, red border, on white metal framework tower, red bands, 7 m in height) (512 m from front light). Thence the fairway turns in a broad sweep close around Stein Ort, the SW extremity of Drigge Peninsula. Once past the S approach to Stralsund Hafen the track leads NNE in the white sector (194¾°–195¼°) astern of Andershof Sectored Light, mounted on the same structure as the Andershof Front Leading Light. Thence NNW within the white sector (322°–339°) of Strelasundbrücke S Light. After passing under the bridge the recommended track leads NW within the white sector (126°–138°) of the bridge N sector light.
1
2
3
8.103 General description. Riems (54°11′N, 13°22′E) is a quarantine area for contagious diseases; unauthorised entry is prohibited. It is situated in Gristower Wiek and is approached through a buoyed channel passing W of Koos Haken from Greifswalder Bodden. Controlling depth. The channel and harbour have a maintained depth of 2⋅8 m. Caution. There are two stranded wrecks lying between Koos (54°10′N, 13°25′E) and Riems. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in the vicinity of the submarine cables, which are marked by round buoys (special), and connect Riems to the mainland. Local knowledge is required. Directions. From a position 2½ miles E of Falkenhagen Front Light, close by R buoy (safe water), the channel leads SSE for about 2 miles, thence SW and finally NW for a farther 8 cables to the landing place.
Stahlbrode 1
2
3
8.104 Description. Stahlbrode (54°14′N, 13°17′E) is a fishing village with a small harbour basin formed by two moles. A signal station, near the root of the S mole, displays warning signals when the harbour is closed. The channel and S harbour have a maintained depth of 4 m; the fishing harbour, part of which is closed to shipping, also has a maintained depth of 4⋅0 m. Stahlbrode Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, point up, on white framework tower, 10 m in height) (54°14′⋅0N, 13°17′⋅2E). Rear light (red triangle, point down, on white framework tower, 14 m in height) (93 m from front light). The alignment (245¼°) of these lights mark the buoyed channel leading to the vicinity of close E of the harbour entrance.
Glewitzer Fähre 1
2
324
8.105 Glewitzer Fähre (54°14′⋅6N, 13°19′⋅3E) is the ferry terminal on Rügen opposite Stahlbrode. The wharf and channel have a maintained depth of 4 m. Glewitzer Fähre Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, point up, on white framework tower, 9 m in height) (54°14′⋅6N, 13°19′⋅3E). Rear light (red triangle, point down, on white framework tower) (111 m from front light). The alignment (065¼°) of these lights leads directly to the buoyed approach channel and berth.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Deviner See, has a wharf with a maintained depth of 3 m. The approach is marked by buoys.
Gustow Wiek 1
8.106 Gustow (54°18′N, 13°12′E) is a village at the top of the bay. It is reached by a channel which is well marked by buoys and leading beacons. The channel and wharf have a maintained depth of 2⋅5 m.
Puddeminer Wiek 1
Neuhof 1
8.107 Neuhof (54°16′N, 13°11′E), situated at the approaches to
8.108 Puddeminer Wiek (54°16′N, 13°19′E), situated on the N side of Strelasund, is a shallow inlet entered about 1 mile N of Stahlbrode (8.104), and is of little importance to general navigation.
PEENESTROM AND KLEINES HAFF GENERAL INFORMATION
2
Charts 2365, 2150, German Chart 1512 (see 1.34)
Charting 1
8.109 The reference charts which are quoted above do not fully cover the area between Peenestrom (54°11′N, 13°46′E) and Kleines Haff (53°50′N, 13°54′E), and due to their scale are unsuitable for these waters. It is recommended that mariners intending to navigate this area avail themselves of the appropriate charts issued by the Charting Authority of the Federal Republic of Germany.
3
Controlling depths 1
8.110 Caution. Depths in the dredged sections cannot be relied on due to frequent silting which occurs from time to time throughout the length of Peenestrom. The local authorities should be consulted for the current situation. Vessels lying in the channel often restrict the fairway so much that accurate local knowledge is required to avoid grounding.
Topography
Breadth
Depth
Knaakrücken
40 m
5⋅0 m
8.113 Peenestrom is about 31 miles in length. It winds generally through low meadow land and forms several large bays, of which Achterwasser (8.133) on the E side is the largest. The channel leads across numerous banks and shoals over which the necessary depths are maintained by dredging.
Tonnenbank
70 m
6⋅5 m
Current
Peenemünde to Wolgast
40 m
6⋅5 m
Peenestrom, S half incl. Negenmark channel, Moderort channel, Bock channel
40 m
2⋅5 m
Dredged channel
1
1
8.111 Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant vessels. Pilots are arranged through Stralsund Pilot Station (8.50) who will pilot vessels to all loading places in Peenestrom and Kleines Haff. Outward-bound vessels should request the services of a pilot through the Wolgast Harbour Office.
1
PEENESTROM
8.116 The water level sometimes falls up to 0⋅9 m below mean level. The highest observation has been 1⋅4 m above mean level. See also 8.42.
Traffic regulations
General information German Charts 1512, 1513 (see 1.34)
8.115 Ice generally forms earlier in Peenestrom than in Greifswalder Bodden and due to the current it generally breaks up earlier. Strong winds from NNW can cause an ice jam between Ruden and Peenemünde. See also 8.41.
Water level 1
1
Description 1
8.114 With winds from SE through S to W, a current runs N towards Greifswalder Bodden; with winds from NW through N it runs S; it seldom exceeds a rate of 2 kn and runs strongest in the narrows near Peenemünde.
Ice
Pilotage 1
The waterway is entered either by Tonnenbank Channel S of Ruden, or Knaakrücken Channel (54°12′N, 13°44′E) at the W end of the Loch fairway, thence it leads to Bockgrund, at the entrance to Kleines Haff. The main fairway throughout is marked by light-buoys and buoys; in addition, leading lights, lights and beacons mark most of the straight sections. In spite of the fact that the fairway is often narrow and winding, passage by day is not too difficult. Knaakrücken Channel provides an alternative approach for vessels coming from Greifswalder Bodden, but although the fairway is well marked, it is narrow, and at night accurate entry between the buoys may be too difficult for those unfamiliar with the channel.
8.112 Peenestrom is the W mouth of the Oder delta, which latter river is known to the Poles as Rzeka Odra (8.212). It separates the island of Usedom (53°55′N, 14°00′E) from the mainland and connects Greifswalder Bodden (8.38) with Stettiner Haff (53°48′N, 14°15′E) (8.145).
325
8.117 Vessels with an overall length greater than 20 m wishing to navigate the Peenestrom and Oderhaff fairways must report to Wolgast Port Control giving vessel details. Reports are required when entering and leaving and for movements within the area. Speed limit. Within Peenestrom the maximum speed is 10 kn, except for the vicinity of Wolgast Hafen, where it is restricted to 4⋅3 kn.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Ruden to Wolgast (continued from 8.53)
1
Tonnenbank Channel 1
2
8.118 Tonnenbank Leading Lights: Front light (white framework tower, white and red lattice board, 11 m in height) (54°08′⋅5N, 13°43′⋅7E). Rear light (red diamond on white framework tower, 13m in height) (530 m from front light). The alignment (206½°) leads SSW for about 2 miles through Tonnenbank Channel from O 20/PN 2 Light-buoy (port hand) to PN 7 Light-buoy (starboard hand). Thence the buoyed channel leads S for 7 miles to Wolgast, marked in succession by leading lights, all of which structures are white framework towers or beacons with triangular daymarks.
2
3
Knaakrücken Channel 1
2
8.119 From KR 2 buoy (port hand) and KR 3 (starboard hand) moored 1½ miles W of Ruden S Light the alignment (153½°) of these lights leads SSW for 1½ miles, through a fairway marked by buoys (lateral), to join the Tonnenbank leading line at PN 5/KR 13 Light-buoy (starboard hand): Knaakrücken Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, point up, on white metal framework tower, 15 m in height) (54°09′⋅8N, 13°45′⋅8E). Rear light (red triangle, point down, on white metal framework tower, 31 m in height) (6 cables SSE of front light). (Directions continue at 8.130)
8.123 Wolgast Road Bridge spans the Peenestrom between Schloss Insel (8.120) on the W side close NE of the town, and Wolgast Fähre, the terminus of the railway to Ahlbeck (53°56′N, 14°11′E) on Usedom. A short fixed section crosses the N side of the harbour from the island to the mainland. The principal passage under the bascule lifting span is 30 m wide; when the bridge is closed there is an overhead clearance height of 5⋅2 m at mean water level. Passage is also permitted through the 40 m wide fixed span immediately E of the lifting span where there is an overhead clearance of 4⋅2 m. Lights are displayed on both sides of the bridge each side of the lifting span. Bridge opening times. The bridge is normally closed to river traffic, the times of opening varying both in summer and winter. Information may be obtained from the Harbour Master or the Pilot concerning opening times. Vessels intending passage of the bridge must give 6 hours notice to Wolgast Harbour Office. Traffic signals are shown from a mast on the bridge by means of a signal arm (operative arm on the observers right hand) comprising black balls and lights as follows:-
Wolgast − bridge signals (8.123)
Wolgast Hafen 1
1
1
2
8.120 Position. Wolgast (54°03′N, 13°47′E), a town on the W bank of Peenestrom, has a population of about 15 000. Wolgast Hafen comprises the water area between the town and Schloss Insel, and the E side of the island. Port limits. The harbour limits extend on each side of the river about 7½ cables NNE to 1½ miles SSW of the road bridge. Traffic. In 2003 the port was visited by 237 vessels totalling 608 882 dwt. 8.121 Water level fluctuates irregularly, being influenced by the level in Stettiner Haff (8.145), as well as by that in Greifswalder Bodden (8.38) and the open sea. Mean water level is indicated by a reading of 5 m on the gauge at Wolgast. 8.122 Regulations: Speed in the harbour is restricted to 4⋅3 kn. Anchoring is only permitted N of the road bridge, clear of the fairway and of the submarine cable which crosses the river about 6½ cables NNE of the bridge. Vessels are prohibited from anchoring or proceeding with anchors or warps trailing in the water within a distance of 100 m on either side of the bridge, and also from securing to the bridge dolphins or training works.
4
1
2
1
2
326
Any vessel requiring the bridge to be opened should, within a distance of about ½ mile, display two flags disposed vertically, where they may best be seen, and by night, exhibit two white lights similarly disposed. In addition, in both cases, sound two prolonged blasts. Until the passage open signal is displayed vessels should remain at a distance of at least 1 cable from the opening, in order of arrival. 8.124 Berths. Vessels arriving should moor at the outer quay on the E side of the island and await instructions from the Harbour Master. The wharfage on the town side is 360 m in length. On the SW side of Schloss Insel the length is 180 m, and the outer berth on Schloss Insel has a length of 125 m. Depths. Outer wharf: authorised draught of 4 m. SW side of Schloss Insel, 4 m at outer end decreasing to 2 m. Town wharf has various depths. 8.125 Repairs. A large shipyard is situated on the W bank close S of the harbour berthing area. It contains two mechanical lift docks which can be used for shipbuilding and repairs. The largest has a capacity of 2100 tonnes. Additional facilities are available at Stralsund, see Baltic Pilot Volume I. Other facilities: compass adjustment; reception of oily waste; hospital; deratting and issue of certificates. Supplies: fresh water; provisions; diesel oil.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Communications. Wolgast is connected by rail to Stralsund and Berlin. A ferry and a road bridge connect to Usedom.
Zecherin Road Bridge 1
Harbours 1
1
1
1
8.126 Freest (54°08′N, 13°44′E) is a small fishing town on the W side of Peenestrom and on the S side of Spandowerhagener Wiek. It has two small harbours with a dredged depth of 3 m which are approached via a buoyed channel, 30 m wide and dredged to a depth of 4 m. Freest Leading Lights in line bearing 241¾° lead from the Kröslin (N) leading line. Rescue. A fully equipped rescue craft is stationed here. 8.127 Peenemünde (54°08′⋅0N, 13°46′⋅0E), situated on the E bank of the river about 1 mile ESE of Freest, has a large basin used principally for unloading coal for the power station. There is a smaller harbour close SE. Depths are from 3⋅0 to 5⋅0 m. 8.128 Kröslin (54°07′N, 13°45′E), a fishing town, stands at the head of Krösliner See, an inlet on the W side of Peenestrom. Kröslin Leading Lights, in line bearing 224¼°, mark a narrow buoyed channel, with a depth 6 m, leading SW from Kuhler Ort leading line through Krösliner See. The small harbour quay is only for fishing boats and small craft. 8.129 Karlshagen, on the E bank about 2 miles SE of Peenemünde, has a harbour basin about 300 m in length with depths ranging from 2 m at its head to 5 m at the entrance. The permitted draught in the harbour entrance is 4⋅5 m. There are facilities for the reception of oily waste. A signal mast, 12 m high, stands near the entrance on the N side of the harbour.
Wolgast to Zecherin Road Bridge (continued from 8.118)
2
3
4
Achterwasser 1
2
1
Wolgast to Lassan 1
2
8.130 From Wolgast (8.120) a dredged channel, marked by port hand buoys, leads S, SSW then SW for about 1 mile, the fairway lying roughly midway between the banks. At PN 62 buoy (port hand), near the village of Hohendorf, successive pairs of leading lights similar to those previously described at 8.118 mark the fairway to Lassan (53°57′N, 13°51′E). Caution. A submarine gas pipeline crosses the channel about 2 miles SSW of Wolgast. The leading lights between Hohendorf and Kamp (8.140) are extinguished for the winter season from the 15th November to 15th April annually and will only be lit on request to Wolgast Port Radio. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
1
1
2
Lassan to Zecherin Road Bridge 1
8.131 From PN 80 buoy (port hand), moored 3 cables S of Rankwitz (N) Front Light, the fairway is marked in succession by leading lights (see 8.130 for winter season operation). Adherence to the leading lines should be strictly maintained due to shoal water existing close on either side. (Directions continue at 8.139)
8.132 Description. Zecherin Road Bridge, a bascule bridge with a width of 18⋅3 m and an overhead clearance, when closed, of 5 m at MSL, spans Peenestrom between Schwemmort (53°52′N, 13°49′E) and the Usedom shore near Zecherin. Times of opening vary both in summer and in winter. Information may be obtained from the Harbour Master or pilot, on request. Lights are displayed on both sides of the bridge on each side of the bascule opening. There is a second fixed span through which navigation is permitted, directly E of the main opening. It has a width of 56 m and a vertical clearance of 5 m at MSL. Navigation through the remaining spans is prohibited. Signals and regulations. Proceeding with anchors trailing in the water, or allowing tow ropes to sag is prohibited within 100 m either side of the bridge as the bottom is very foul. Bridge traffic signals and regulations are otherwise similar to those described for the bridge at Wolgast (8.120). The rail ferry which runs from the terminal at the S end of Wolgast town wharf and across the fairway S of the bridge must not be obstructed by river traffic.
8.133 Description. Achterwasser, an extensive water area on the E side of Peenestrom, is separated from the sea by a narrow ridge of land protected by dykes. Shoal water extends some distance from the shore in several places. Directions. From the vicinity of PN 76 buoy (port hand) (53°58′⋅4N, 13°52′⋅4E), the recommended route to enter Achterwasser leads NNE for about 2 miles between Der Gnitz and Lieper Winkel, passing ESE of Stein Hohe Schaar, 2 miles SSW, a rocky shoal with a least depth over it of 0⋅8 m, marked by H Sch S Buoy (S cardinal), and Warther Haken bank, marked by a buoy (W cardinal). 8.134 Twelen. From N 1 and N 2 Buoys (lateral),, the track leads NNE for about 1 mile to a bay bounded by the island of Görmitz, the Gnitz peninsula and the causeway which connects them. 8.135 Störlanke. A channel marked by buoys, principally on the E side of the fairway, leads to Störlanke, a bight at the NW end of Achterwasser. There is a landing place 9 cables SSE of the church at Zinnowitz (54°05′N, 13°55′E). Depths in the fairway vary from 4⋅2 to 4⋅5 m in the entrance, reducing to 1⋅7 m in the harbour approaches. 8.136 Stagniess. There are no recognised fairways in the S part of the bay. The approach to Stagniess (54°00′N, 14°03′E), a small harbour, depth 2 m, on the E side of Achterwasser and close S of Ückeritz, passes (positioned from Görmitz island): N of Trokenet N buoy (N cardinal) (1⋅4 miles ESE), thence: S of Wussow W buoy (W cardinal) (2⋅6 miles ESE). The entrance channel is marked by two buoys moored close SW of the landing place.
Harbours 1
327
8.137 Krummin (54°03′N, 13°51′E), a village near the head of Krumminer Wiek, has a pier with a depth of 2 m alongside.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
1
2
8.138 Lassan (53°57′N, 13°51′E), is a fishing town at the head of Lassan Bucht. It has a boatyard and a small harbour with a depth of 1⋅8 m alongside the quay. Lassan Buoy (safe water) moored 9 cables NE of the harbour marks the approach to the buoyed channel, which, with a depth of 2⋅5 m, leads SW to the pier. Care should be taken to avoid the remains of a pile about 15 m off the N side of the pier on either side of which there are stranded wrecks. Fresh water is available.
Anklam 1
2
Zecherin Road Bridge to Kleines Haff (continued from 8.131)
Zecherin Bridge to Karnin 1
8.139 Zecherin Road Bridge S side leading lights, the structures of which are similar to those previously described, mark the fairway (see 8.130 for winter season operation). (Directions continue at 8.141)
Usedom 1
Karnin 1
2
8.140 General information. The fairway passes the village of Karnin (53°51′N, 13°52′E), on the N bank, and Kamp on the S bank. There are small fishing harbours at each place. The harbour at Kamp has a depth of 2 m, whilst that at Karnin has a depth of 2⋅5 m. There is a frontier control and customs office at Karnin. Vertical clearance. Two overhead power cables, with a vertical clearance of 27 m, span the fairway. Prohibited area. The ruins of the old railway bridge supporting structures lie in a marked prohibited area NE of the fairway. Anchoring or paying out of towing hawsers within 100 m of the bridge piers, or within the vicinity of a submarine cable, 2½ cables SE of the bridge, is prohibited. The bottom near the bridge is foul.
2
8.141 After passing the old bridge supports at Karnin the recommended route leads SE for 7½ cables in the white sector (301°–311°), astern, of the bridge light and into Bockgrund Channel, marked by buoys and by Kamp Leading Lights, in line bearing 283°, astern. This channel then leads ESE for 3¼ miles into Kleines Haff. (Directions continue at 8.153)
General information Chart 2677, German Chart 1513 (see 1.34)
Description 1
2
8.142 Description. The mouth of Die Peene between Schwemmort and Jahnkenort (53°51′N, 13°49′E), about ¾ mile SW, is divided by an island into two branches. Bridges span the river at Anklam and at several other places above. Regulations. Special regulations are in force on the river. Route. Richtgraben, the S branch of the river mouth which is navigable and marked by beacons, leads upstream with a least depth of about 3 m, passing through low meadowland to Anklam, about 5 miles from the entrance. Thence it leads to Demmin, about 33 miles farther upriver, where there is a least depth of 2⋅7 m.
8.145 Kleines Haff is the W part of Stettiner Haff, which latter is known to the Poles as Zalew Szczeciski (8.212). It is bordered by the S side of Usedom Island in the N, and the German mainland to the S. The only harbour of any significance is Ueckermünde (8.155).
Topography 1
8.146 The coastline is mostly low-lying and partly wooded, other than a few hills on Usedom.
Route 1
Die Peene 1
8.144 Description. Usedom (53°52′N, 13°55′E) is a small town at the head of Usedomer See, in the SW part of the island of the same name. The harbour has about 190 m of berthing space with depths alongside of between 1⋅7 m and 2⋅5 m. It has a small yard for fishing vessels and minor repairs can be undertaken. Directions. A buoyed channel, about 35 m wide and with a least depth of 1⋅5 m, leads N from the Kamp leading line (8.141), through the narrows between Westklüne and Ostklüne and thence to the Usedomer See.
KLEINES HAFF
Karnin to Kleines Haff 1
8.143 Description. Anklam (53°52′N, 13°41′E), a town with a population of about 20 000, stands on the S bank of Die Peene. The railway bridge crossing the river a short distance below the town, and the road bridge at Anklam, each have openings about 11 m wide. The vertical clearance at the railway bridge is 2⋅4 m. Tugs may be obtained from Szczecin. Berth. There is a wharf 350 m in length with a depth of 3 m alongside. Facilities: minor repairs; hospital. Supplies: fresh water; provisions; fuel oil. Communications. The town is connected to the general railway system and there is regular communication by water with Szczecin and Demmin.
8.147 The recommended route and main fairway through the Kleines Haff is marked by buoys and light-buoys, as shown on the chart.
Depths 1
8.148 The recommended route is for vessels with a maximum draught of 2⋅8 m.
International boundary 1
328
8.149 The international boundary between the Federal Republic of Germany and Poland runs generally SSE across Stettiner Haff from Kamminke (53°52′N, 14°13′E) (8.161) to Altwarp (53°45′N, 14°16′E) (8.164). The boundary is well marked by consecutively numbered buoys and light-buoys running from S to N and beacons at both ends.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Pilotage 1
Directions
8.150 Vessels requiring a pilot in Kleines Haff should contact Stralsund Pilot Station for further information.
1
Vessel Traffic Service 1
8.151 Kleines Haff comes under the control of Wolgast VTS to whom reports should be made. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Berths 1
Landmark 8.152 Der Golm (53°53′N, 14°12′E) (59 m in height), a prominent saddle-shaped hill.
1
Directions (continued from 8.141)
1
8.153 From Peenestrom Sud/H1 Light-buoy (safe water), moored about 3 miles N of Monkebüde (8.162), the recommended route leads E for 8½ miles to H6 Light-buoy, thence SE for 3½ miles to Haff Light-buoy (safe water), and is marked at intervals of 1¾ miles by safe water buoys.
Useful mark
Dargen
8.154
8.160 Dargen (53°53′N, 14°05′E) has a small artificial boat harbour.
Ueckermünde W Mole Light (white square metal framework tower, 11 m in height) (53°45′⋅2N, 14°04′⋅3E). (Directions continue at 8.242)
1
Kamminke
Ueckermünde General information
2
3
8.155 Position. Ueckermünde (53°44′N, 14°04′E), a town with a population of about 13 000, stands on the W bank of the Uecker, about 1¼ miles upstream. A road bridge spans the river farther upstream. The river Uecker enters Kleines Haff via a canal 305 m in length and 30 m in width. The old mouth of the Uecker branches NW from the inner end of the canal and affords berths in depths of 1 to 3 m. The canal and its continuation, a channel which extends 8 cables seaward, is subject to silting and is dredged. Water level. A tide gauge stands on the N bank of the river 1½ cables within the entrance. Maximum draught. The maximum draught in the harbour approach is 2⋅8 m. Speed limit. A speed limit of 4 kn is in force in the river.
8.156 A mandatory Reporting System is in force for Ueckermünde. All vessels must report to Ueckermünde Port on VHF before entering the navigable channel, as follows: Vessels bound inwards — 10 minutes before arrival at Light-buoy UE (54°46′⋅4N, 14°05′⋅9E). Outward bound vessels — before departure. For details of information required see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
8.161 Kamminke (53°52′N, 14°12′E), a village close W of the N end of the international boundary, is a small fishing harbour formed by a breakwater extending about 1 cable SE from the shore. From H6 Light-buoy the recommended route (008°–188°) leads N for 2¼ miles to KA2 Light-buoy. The harbour is only accessible to small craft with a draught of 2 m or less due to continual silting.
Monkebüde 1
8.162 Monkebüde (53°46′N, 13°58′E) is a small fishing harbour protected by a 40 m long breakwater. It is approached through a dredged channel suitable for vessels with a draught of 1⋅8 m. The recommended route (202½°–022½°) from H2 buoy moored 3¼ miles NNE of the harbour leads to M1 buoy. Thence through a buoyed channel to the harbour entrance.
Berndshof 1
Reporting System 1
8.159 Repairs: small shipyard for boats and fishing vessels. Other facilities: small tug. Supplies: fuel oil. Communications: connected to the general railway system and regular communication is maintained by water with Szczecin. Rescue. A rescue craft is stationed at Ueckermünde.
Harbours
1
1
8.158 Between the canal and the town quays the berths have a least depth of 2⋅5 m. The town quays have a length of 625 m, with a depth of 3⋅5 m alongside. There is also a turning basin.
Services 1
1
8.157 From H4 buoy (safe water), moored 5 miles N of Brandshof, the recommended route (183°–003°) leads 4 miles S to UE Light-buoy (safe water). Thence the buoyed entrance channel leads 245° for 1 mile to the channel entrance which is marked by buoys (lateral).
8.163 Berndshof (53°44′⋅6N, 14°05′⋅9E) is a landing place where there is a brickworks. From UE buoy (53°45′⋅4N, 14°05′⋅9E) the route leads in a 161° direction for 7 cables thence SSW to the landing place.
Altwarp 1
329
8.164 Altwarp (53°45′N, 14°16′E) is a small fishing harbour close W of the international boundary. The approach from Haff Light-buoy (safe water) follows the frontier buoyage SSE thence SSW, whence a buoyed and dredged channel, 50 m in width and with a least depth of 3⋅0 m, leads to the harbour.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
ZATOKA POMORSKA, INCLUDING ©WINOUJ©CIE AND SZCZECIN Border marks
GENERAL INFORMATION Chart 2679
1
Description 1
2
8.165 Zatoka Pomorska lies at the head of a broad inlet forming the S-most part of Baltic Sea, between Usedom (53°55′N, 14°00′E) (8.112) in the W and the Polish coast extending E to Dziwna Strait (54°02′N, 14°44′E). Included in the description is the approach to the port of winoujcie, the fairways between winoujcie and Szczecin, and the port of Szczecin. A description of Wielki Zalew and Jezioro Dbie is also given. It is arranged as follows: winoujcie and approaches (8.175). winoujcie to Szczecin (8.212). Szczecin (8.248).
8.170 Two beacons, in line bearing 189°, marking the boundary between Federal German Republic and Poland, stand near the coast about 1½ miles SE of Ahlbeck Church (53°56′⋅5N, 14°11′⋅5E) (8.200).
Rescue 1
8.171 A lifeboat and line throwing apparatus are kept at Zinnowitz (54°05′N, 13°55′E) where a ruined pier extends 2½ cables from the shore.
Submarine cables 1
8.172 Submarine cables (disused) shown on the chart are laid from the shore about 5 cables E of Ahlbeck Church (53°56′⋅5N, 14°11′⋅5E) (8.200).
Navigation in the bay Topography 1
2
3
8.166 The coast along the bay is low and wooded for the most part but is generally higher to the SW and SE than the S. Streckelsberg, which attains an elevation of 60 m about 5 cables SE of Koserow (54°03′N, 14°00′E), is wooded and steep-to on the seaward side. It is the most elevated part of the coast. The coast E of winoujcie is densely wooded. Between winoujcie and the mouth of the Dziwna, about 17 miles NE, the coast is formed by the N side of Wolin Island. The coast NE of Miřdzyzdroje (53°56′N, 14°27′E), a seaside and fishing resort with a pier, is steep and wooded. At wiřta Křpa and Kikut, 2¾ and 5½ miles respectively NE of Miřdzyzdroje, there are cliffs but thence to the mouth of Dziwna Strait the coast is low. In clear weather, winoujcie Lighthouse (8.200) is the first object to be identified, thence on nearer approach the large building of the municipal baths, 1 mile W of the lighthouse, and the spires of the churches become visible.
1
Fishing 1
8.167 The water level is generally raised with winds from the N and lowered with S winds. In autumn and winter the level may vary between 0⋅7 m above and below MSL. Gale force winds from NNE and NE may raise the water level by as much as 2⋅5 m and with similar winds from the SW may lower it as much as 1⋅3 m.
General information Charts 2679, 2677, 2676, 2150
Position 1
1
8.168 The prevailing set is E-going.
Vessel Traffic Service 1
8.169 A VTS is established, mandatory for vessels of more than 20 m LOA, vessels carrying dangerous cargo, vessels not gas-free and all passenger vessels. It is operated by winoujcie VTS, which covers the area from Zatoka Pomorska to Brama Torowa No 1 (8.224), and Szczecin VTS, which covers the main fairway from winoujcie to Szczecin, including the ports of Stepnica and Police, and the harbour of Szczecin. Reporting points are shown on the chart. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
8.175 winoujcie (53°55′N, 14°15′E) is situated on Wolin, Uznam and Karsibór islands at the lower part of wina Strait, which is the central of the three mouths of Rzeka Odra (8.212).
Function
Currents 1
8.174 Fishing is carried out with the use of surface, bottom and submerged equipment fixed in place in a strip 3 miles in width from the shore. It extends from W of 15°20′E to the German/Polish border.
©WINOUJ©CIE AND APPROACHES
Water level 1
8.173 Vessels must adhere closely to the designated directional fairways and recommended courses. It is important to bear in mind that, in addition to wrecks and underwater hazards which have been located, there may be others which have not been discovered and are not indicated on the charts.
8.176 winoujcie, the outer port of Szczecin (8.248), is a deep-sea fishing port and also a seaside resort. Vessels of deep draught can be lightened for onward passage to Szczecin and outward-bound vessels can be completed to a full load. It is also a transhipment base for bulk cargoes and lumber. The fairway from Zatoka Pomorska to Szczecin passes through the port area. The town of winoujcie is situated on the W bank of the river and had a population of 47 100 in 2004.
Topography 1
8.177 The coast to the W of Miřdzyzdroje (53°55′⋅9N, 14°27′⋅2E) is low and is made up of dunes with a broad sandy beach. A high dyke extends along the coast SE of Ahlbeck (53°56′⋅5N, 14°11′⋅5E).
Port limits 1
330
8.178 The port area extends about 10 km S from the harbour entrance to Basen Barkowy (8.209) (53°51′⋅3N, 14°17′⋅2E) on the NW side of Karsibór.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Approach and entry 1
8.179 Reda winoujcie, the inner part of Zatoka Pomorska, is approached from the N or E channels, passing respectively, W or S of Oder Bank (54°21′N, 14°25′E), known to the Poles as awica Odrzana; the shoal area, which is extensive with a least depth of 4⋅8 m, white sand, is fairly steep-to, except on its N side. The port is approached on the recommended route, as shown on the chart, and entered at the mouth of wina Strait.
Local weather and sea state 1
Arrival information Vessel Traffic Service 1
Traffic 1
8.180 In 2003 the port was visited by 705 vessels totalling 8½ million dwt.
1
8.181 See 8.253.
Limiting conditions Controlling depths 1
1
8.183 A high tension cable, with a safe overhead clearance of 69 m, supported by two lattice towers, each 120 m in height and showing three red lights vertically disposed, spans the river about 1½ miles SW of the main lighthouse.
Deepest and longest berth 1
2
8.182 The approach channel is dredged to 14⋅3 m but there are lesser depths inside the port. The depths at winoujcie cannot be relied on due to the fluctuating water level and to silting. See 8.188.
Vertical clearance
3
1
8.184 Deepest and longest berth is Górników Jetty (8.208).
Water levels 1
1
8.185 Under normal conditions the water may rise or fall by 0⋅6 m above or below MSL. In storms from a S direction the water may fall 1 m below mean level, whereas with heavy storms from NE it may rise 2 m above mean level. Such large fluctuations are unusual.
2
Density of water
1
8.186 The density of water in the harbour varies between 1⋅000 and 1⋅016 g/cm3.
8.187 The maximum permitted draught for entry to winoujcie was reported (2004) to be 12⋅8 m; 270 m LOA and 42 m breadth.
2
Ice 1
8.188 Ice. The channel is kept open from the sea through winoujcie to Szczecin by icebreakers, as long as the central and W Baltic areas are not closed by ice. Difficulty may be experienced, however, between the beginning of January and the middle of March.
8.191 There are four anchorage areas in the approaches to winoujcie. The anchorages (positioned from the E breakwater head) are as follows: Area 1, divided into two sections: 1A (2½ miles NNW), maximum draught 7 m. 1B (3 miles N), maximum draught 6 m. Area 2, divided into two sections: 2A, (7 miles N), maximum draught 9⋅5 m. 2B, (8½ miles N), maximum draught 11 m. Area 3, divided into two sections: 3E and 3W (22½ miles NNW), maximum draught 12⋅8m. Quarantine anchorage (11 miles N), maximum draught 11 m. Caution. Anchoring is prohibited within 2 cables either side of the entrance leading line and in the vicinity of the wreck (Schlesien), charted as foul, with a depth of 10⋅5 m over it, about 4½ miles NNE of winoujcie E breakwater head. 8.192 Deep-draught vessels bound for No 3 anchorage area from the N may use the approach fairway, shown on charts 2150 and 2679, entering at the Fairway Light-buoy (safe water) moored in position 54°26′⋅6N, 14°05′⋅7E. The track leads S for about 8 miles to the anchorage. Attention is drawn to the area to the W of Oder Bank (8.179) where less water is charted and also to the swept depth of 11⋅2 m just N of the anchorage. The E and W anchorages are divided by a submarine cable area where anchoring is prohibited.
Pilotage and tugs
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
8.190 All vessels entering the port or transiting the winoujcie − Szczecin waterway are required to report to winoujcie VTS. See 8.169 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Outer anchorages 1
Port Authority
8.189 Strong NE winds cause heavy seas in the bay. In rough weather the topmarks of the buoys in the vicinity of Oder Bank may be carried away and the lights extinguished. In winter, with the onset of ice, light-buoys are withdrawn.
3
331
8.193 Pilotage service is available 24 hours and is compulsory for all vessels exceeding 60 m LOA (exceeding 50 m LOA when mooring in Baltycki or Atlantycki basins and the Maritime Repair Shipyard) or carrying dangerous cargo, and all passenger vessels. Pilots board as follows: Position PILOT 3, in the vicinity of N−2 Light-buoy (54°15′N, 14°11′E), for vessels with fresh water draught from 11⋅0 to 12⋅8 m. Position PILOT 2, between Nos 1 and 2 Light-buoys (lateral) (54°02′N, 14°15′E), for vessels with fresh water draught from 7⋅0 to 11⋅0 m. Position PILOT 1, between Nos 5 and 6 Light-buoys (lateral) (53°59′N, 14°16′E), for vessels with fresh water draught of less than 7⋅0 m. In the anchorage for vessels at anchor. In the vicinity of Brama Torowa No 2 (53°46′N, 14°24′E) for vessels arriving from W within Zalew Szczecinski.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
4
5
For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Information concerning pilots and berthing may be obtained from the pilot station or port duty officer by VHF. Both offices are manned continuously. In winter, at the onset of ice in the roadsteads, vessels arriving should await the pilot at the ice limits, which may only be entered with tug or icebreaker assistance. Tugs are available and may be obtained by radio request to the port office.
Harbour General layout 1
Hazards 1
Traffic regulations 1
8.194 Speed limit in the roadstead is 8 kn for large vessels and 12 kn for vessels of less than 3 m draught. Local regulations. In addition to those shapes or lights required by the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, (1972), all vessels above 160 m in length or of draught in excess of 7⋅32 m, are required to show the lights and shapes prescribed in Rule 28. These regulations apply between the N point of Kosa peninsula in winoujcie to the port of Szczecin.
8.196 The port consists of riverside berths and basins. The entrance is protected by two breakwaters, the E one has a length of 1400 m and the W 300 m. 8.197 Submarine cables are laid across the fairway in many places; their landing places are marked by notice boards. Ferries cross the wina about 8 cables SW of the lighthouse; they connect the town centre, on the W side, with the suburb of Warszów, on the E side; by day the ferry shows a yellow ball, where it may best be seen, and at night in addition to the usual navigation lights, a flashing orange-coloured light visible all round; the ferry landing places are illuminated. High speed ferries operate in this area, see 1.5.
Traffic signals 1
8.198 The Port Captain’s observation post and signal mast stand near the root of the E breakwater.
Natural conditions Quarantine 1
1
8.195 All vessels arriving from infected areas or with suspected infection on board are obliged to report to the port authority before arrival. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 1(1) for details.
8.199 Current. Between the breakwaters and in the harbour, an out-going current prevails during light wind conditions. It can reach speeds of 4 kn during strong S or SW winds. During strong N and NW winds an incoming current prevails, with speeds up to 2 kn. Climatic table. See 1.284 and 1.291.
winoujcie − Basen. Tymerski and winoujcie Lighthouse from SE (8.200) (Original dated prior to 2004) (Photograph − Piotr Domanadzki)
332
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Principal marks 1
2
3
4
Directions
8.200 Landmarks: Greifswalder Oie Lighthouse (54°15′⋅0N, 13°55′⋅5E) (8.51). Zinnowitz Church, (54°05′N, 13°55′E) with two towers. Radio mast (42 m in height) (red lights), standing near the coast E of the village of Koserow (54°03′N, 14°00′E) and about 2 cables NW of the summit of Streckelsberg. Heringsdorf Church which stands in the resort of Heringsdorf (11½ miles SE of Zinnowitz Church). Ahlbeck Church which stands in the resort of Ahlbeck (13½ miles SE of Zinnowitz Church). Tower (2½ miles ESE of Ahlbeck Church). winoujcie Lighthouse (yellow round brick tower, red bands, on square building, 65 m in height) (53°55′⋅0N, 14°17′⋅2E). East Breakwater Head Light-structure (red octagonal metal tower with gallery, 11 m in height) (53°56′⋅0N, 14°16′⋅8E). Lubin Church (6 miles SE of winoujcie Lighthouse). Miřdzyzdroje Church (tall red octagonal tower) (53°56′N, 14°27′E). Kikut Lighthouse (grey round stone tower, white lantern, 18 m in height) (53°59′⋅0N, 14°34′⋅9E). Major lights: Greifswalder Oie Light — as above. winoujcie Light — as above. Kikut Light — as above.
(continued from 8.21)
North approach channel 1
2
3
8.201 Caution. Deep-draught vessels should keep strictly to the leading line in order to remain within the dredged channel. From the vicinity of the SWIN-N Light-buoy (safe water) (54°19′⋅8N, 13°58′⋅2E) the recommended route leads initially SE for 9 miles, passing the N–1 Light-buoy (safe water), to N–2 Light-buoy (safe water). Thence the route, marked by pairs of light-buoys (lateral) and light-buoys (safe water), leads SSE for approximately 19½ miles. ©winoujñcie Outer Leading Lights:, Front. Myny Light (white tower, 11 m in height) (53°55′⋅7N, 14°16′⋅8E). Rear. Galeriowa Light (white triangle, point down, on white round tower, 3 galleries, 24 m in height) (512 m S of front light). The alignment (170¼°) of these lights leads from N–4 Light-buoy (safe water) to the inner approach channel passing E of an ODAS buoy (special) (54°04′⋅6N, 14°09′⋅6E).
East approach channel 1
8.202 From a position about 7½ miles N of Kikut Lighthouse (53°59′⋅0N, 14°34′⋅9E) (8.200) the track leads WSW for 12½ miles passing (with positions from Kikut Lighthouse): SSE of wreck, position approximate, with a depth of 11⋅3 m over it (8 miles N), thence:
winoujcie − Entrance to Swina SS (Traffic) Tower from SE (8.203) (Photograph − Piotr Domanadzki)
(Original dated prior to 2004)
333
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
2
3
NNW of a dangerous wreck (6½ miles N), marked by a light-buoy (N cardinal), and: SSE of a foul patch with a depth of 12 m over it (7½ miles NW), thence: SSE of a foul patch with a depth of 11 m over it (8¾ miles WNW), thence: NNW of an obstruction with a depth of 10⋅4 m over it, a dangerous wreck close SW, and a foul patch with a depth of 11 m over it (9 miles WNW), thence: NNW of two foul patches with depths of 11⋅9 m and 10⋅5 m, respectively, over them (10½ miles WNW), thence: The channel joins the inner approaches close N of No 3 Light-buoy (starboard hand) and No 4 Light-buoy (port hand) (4½ miles N of the entrance).
Useful marks
2
Basins and berths Description 1
8.203 Der Golm (8.152) (53°53′⋅3N, 14°12′⋅7E), 3 miles SSE of Ahlbeck Church (8.200), may be seen when due to dull weather, winoujcie Lighthouse is not easily distinguished. Beacons (53°55′⋅5N, 14°17′⋅2E), standing on the E breakwater. Koczewo Church (53°58′⋅0N, 14°37′⋅1E). SS Traffic Tower (53°55′⋅2N, 14°17′⋅2E).
1
2
3
4
8.204 The inner approach channel, a continuation of the N approach channel, which is dredged to a depth of 14 m over a bottom width of 150 m, leads from the roadstead to the harbour entrance. The fairway is marked with four pairs of light-buoys (lateral) at intervals of about 2 miles. The fairway through wina Strait, 150 m in width, has a least depth of 9⋅6 m. The deepest water lies on the E side of the channel until S of the main lighthouse and thence on the W side following the second bend in the river. Depths of 13 m occur as far as Portowców, about 1½ miles S of the E pier head. Light-buoys mark the W side of the fairway between the entrance and the main lighthouse. The submerged revetment of the old E breakwater head projects into the channel 120 m S of the head of the visible breakwater. At this point vessels with a draught of 1⋅5 m or more should not approach within 20 m of the breakwater. The approach on the outer leading line (170¼°) should be maintained until within 1 cable of the head of the E breakwater; thence, alter course SSE to pass between it and Light-buoy A (starboard hand), marking the W side of the entrance, adjusting course as necessary to follow the line of the fairway which leads along the W side of the E breakwater at a distance of 70 to 80 m from it. When approaching that part of the fairway abreast the main lighthouse, alter course SW as required to remain in the fairway. Thence the fairway turns SSW and then S and into the white sector of the directional light marking the entrance to Stara wina (8.211). The fairway divides here, Stara wina to the E and Kanal Mieliski leading to Szczecin to the W.
1
1
2
3
4
8.208 Berths on the E side of the river (positioned from winoujcie Lighthouse (53°55′⋅0N, 14°17′⋅2E) (8.200)): GPK jetty (2½ cables N). Chemików jetty (close W), 282 m long with a maximum draught alongside of 12⋅8 m. Hutników Jetty (2 cables S), 329 m long with a maximum draught alongside of 12⋅8 m. Górników Jetty (4 cables SW), provides berthing alongside dolphins and is 298 m long with a maximum draught alongside of 12⋅8 m. CPN–2 Jetty (5 cables SSW), 95 m long and with a maximum draught alongside of 9⋅8 m. Portowców Jetty (7 cables SW), 245 m long with a maximum draught alongside of 11⋅8 m. Ocean Ferry Terminal (1¼ miles SSW), a newly completed complex of 5 berths. Berths on the W side of the river: Nabrzee Wadysawa IV (9 cables SW), has depths of 4 to 9⋅3 m alongside. At the S end of the quay are the terminals for the harbour ferry. Nabrzee Pasazerskie (1¾ miles SW) is a continuation of Nabrzee Wadysawa beyond the ferry terminals. Brzeg Kosa (1¼ miles SW), separating wina from Basen Weglowy, provides six moorings at dolphins, which are connected by metal footbridges; there are depths of 9 m alongside.
Basins
Useful marks 8.205 Basen Stoczniowy Light (green metal column on pyramidal base, 8 m in height) (53°54′⋅8N, 14°16′⋅5E).
8.207 There are two turning places in the river. The first, 370 m in diameter, is centred 1 mile S of the E breakwater head with depths of about 11 to 14 m. The second 320 m in diameter, is centred 8 cables SW of the first with a depth of about 11 m.
River berths
1
1
8.206 winoujcie has a number of alongside river berths and harbour basins. Of these, only the main berthing complexes are given in the following paragraphs, in order from seaward. The breaks between jetties are marked by pairs of red lights (vertical).
Turning places
Inner approaches 1
Kosa N Point Light (white metal tower with gallery, 8 m in height) (53°54′⋅4N, 14°15′⋅5E). Kosa S Point Light (green metal framework tower with gallery, 6 m in height) (53°53′⋅8N, 14°15′⋅1E). Stara wina Directional Light displayed from the Port Boatswains building on the S side of Basen Baltycki (53°53′⋅7N, 14°15′⋅8E). Wyspa Mielin N Light (red metal tower with gallery and cross topmark) (53°53′⋅6N, 14°15′⋅4E) stands at the N extremity of Wyspa Mielino 2½ cables S of SE of the S extremity of Kosa. (Directions continue at 8.222)
2
334
8.209 On the east side of the river (positioned from winoujcie Lighthouse (53°55′⋅0N, 14°17′⋅2E)): Trymerski Basin (close S), longest berth 173 m maximum draught alongside 3⋅7 m. Basen Bosmaski (1 mile SSW), longest berth 111 m, maximum draught alongside 2⋅6 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
winoujcie − Ferry terminal at Przysta Promów Morskich from SW (8.208) (Original dated prior to 2004) (Photograph − Piotr Domanadzki)
3
4
Basen Bon (1½ miles SSW), longest berth 100 m, maximum draught alongside 4⋅5 m. Basen Baltycki (1¼ miles SSW), longest berth 500 m, maximum draught alongside 5⋅2 m. Basen Atlantycki (close SE of Basen Baltycki), longest berth 600 m, maximum draught alongside 8⋅0 m. Basen Barkowy, Karsibór (3¾ miles S) lies on the E side of the fairway near the N end of Karsibór and is for barges and similar craft. Within the small basin are depths of between 1⋅7 to 3⋅3 m. On the W side of the river: Basen Jachtowy (2¾ cables WNW). Basen Stoczniowy (4 cables SW), which is not open to the public, has a depth of 4⋅4 m within the 70 m wide entrance. Basen Wglowy (1¼ miles SW), with depths alongside of 4 to 6 m. Basen Zimowy (1¼ miles SW, next to Basen Weglowy), with depths of 3 m alongside and 5 m in the middle.
2
3
Stara ©wina
1
2
Port services 1
8.210 Repairs of all kinds. There are two floating docks, the largest with a lifting capacity of 4500 tonnes which has a length of 118 m and breadth 20 m. Other facilities. Deratting; oily waste reception; divers; salvage work; lighter and pumps. Supplies. Marine fuels, 48 hours notice is required; fresh water; provisions.
Communications. winoujcie is connected to the general railway system. There is a rail and vehicle ferry service with the Swedish port of Ystad (3.20). Harbour regulations. Information concerning harbour regulations for vessels visiting winoujcie and/or Szczecin should be obtained from the harbour authorities on arrival at winoujcie. Rescue. A motor lifeboat with diving equipment operates over a radius of 50 miles from winoujcie Life-saving Station (54°55′N, 14°17′E).
3
335
8.211 General information. Stara wina leads S from winoujcie between Wyspa Mielino (8.205) and the W end of Wolin, thence E passing between low grassy islands to Lubin (53°52′N, 14°26′E), see 8.200; the fairway, marked by buoys and light-buoys, is suitable only for small craft. Local knowledge is required. Caution. A submarine cable lies along the fairway and a further cable lies accross the fairway 1 mile E of Basen Atlantycki. A road bridge crosses Stara wina close E of Przystán Karsibór; there are two navigable passages for small craft, between supports 3 and 4 and also 4 and 5, numbering from the S; minimum overhead clearance at mean water level is 4⋅1 m and each passage is 43 m wide with a least depth of 4⋅2 m. Przystán Karsibór (53°51′⋅5N, 14°17′⋅2E), a small basin with depths of more than 6 m, lies on the S side of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Stara wina; on each side of the entrance to the basin, a light is displayed from a metal column. Caution. A wreck, marked by a buoy, lies 2 cables NNW of the entrance to the basin, between the entrance and the buoy there are several unlit mooring buoys and dolphins.
confined to the marked fairways, particularly in bad visibility in order to avoid fouling fishing gear. Ferries. High speed ferries operate in this area. See 1.5.
Pilotage 1
Vessel Traffic Service
©WINOUJ©CIE TO PORT SZCZECIN General information
1
Chart 2677
1
2
1
2
3
8.213 A system of leading lights with transition lights to mark the curve between the several pairs of leading lights, is adopted as far as possible. Lights and beacons are mentioned in the order in which they are used when proceeding to Szczecin. In addition to the light-beacons, the channel from winoujcie to Szczecin is well marked by paired light-buoys or buoys moored at intervals of about 1¼ miles apart: On the W side of the fairway are buoys and light-buoys (starboard hand) which are odd-numbered. On the E side of the fairway are buoys and light-buoys (port hand) which are even-numbered. Caution. In Wielki Zalew, the channel buoyage moorings are on the sloping sides of the dredged channel. When a cross current or wind prevails this should be taken into consideration in estimating the position of either side of the dredged channel relative to the buoys.
1
8.214 The fairway consists of several dredged channel sections with a depth of 10⋅5 m along the centre-line and with a maximum fairway width of 100 m and bottom width of 60 m.
1
8.215 Variations may occur quite suddenly on changes of wind direction; with winds from NW through N to NE, a rise of about 1 m may be experienced and with winds from SW through S to E it may fall about 0⋅6 m, compared with MSL.
Directions Charts 2676, 2677
KanaÞ Mielimski 1
2
3
Hazards 1
8.216 Fishing. In Zalew Szczecinski, bottom nets between 600 m and 1000 m in length, are laid in depths of more than 5 m, up to 3 km apart; the nets are marked at each end by a white light visible all round. Navigation should be
8.221 Ice. The fairway is usually kept clear of ice by ice-breakers; the assistance of an ice-breaker is essential when ice is in motion in order to prevent being set on to the fairway bank. Salinity. In the NW part of Wielki Zalew the water is saline whereas in Roztoka Odrzaska, in the S part it is always fresh. (continued from 8.204)
Water level 1
8.220 Caution. A power cable with a safe overhead clearance of 57m, supported by two pylons exhibiting fixed red lights, spans the river close NW of Ina S Front Light.
Natural conditions
Depths 1
8.219 Submarine cables, some of which are high-tension cables, are laid across the channel in several places; their positions are marked by cable boards. A submarine cable is laid between winoujcie and Szczecin, and in places lies in, or close to, the fairway, as shown on the chart.
Vertical clearance
Main fairway markings 1
8.218 A mandatory VTS is in operation between winoujcie and Szczecin, see 8.169.
Submarine cables
Description 8.212 The fairway from winoujcie to Szczecin, a distance of about 37 miles, is suitable for vessels with a draught of 9⋅15 m and length not exceeding 160 m. Wielki Zalew is the E part of the extensive inland water area named Zalew Szczecinski, which lies within the deltas of Rzeka Odra, and which flows into Baltic Sea through three branches as follows: Peenestrom, the W branch from Kleines Haff. wina Strait, at winoujcie. Dziwna Strait, E of the village of Wolin.
8.217 See 8.193.
4
336
8.222 Mielin South Leading Lights: Front light (common) (white mast) (53°52′⋅8N, 14°16′⋅4E). Rear light (white metal framework tower, orange bands) (225 m from front light). From a position about 1 cable SW of Wyspa Mielin N Light (53°53′⋅6N, 14°15′⋅3E) the alignment (140°) of these lights leads SE for about 1 mile. The transition to the next leading line is marked by five lights (white framework towers; each 8 m in height) which are displayed about 2½ cables apart on the E bank of the Kana Mieliski and indicate the curve in the channel either side of the Mielin Leading Lights. Paprotno Leading Lights: Front Light (white framework metal tower, 14 m in height) (53°50′⋅8N, 14°17′⋅1E). Rear light (red square framework tower, white bands, 18m in height) (220 m from front light). Mielin North Leading Lights: Front light (common). Rear light (white metal framework tower, orange bands, 20 m in height) (210 m from front light). The alignment (168¼°) ahead, of the Paproto Leading Lights and Mielin N Leading Lights (348¼°) astern, leads SSE for 1¾ miles through the S section of Kana Mieliski. Transition lights (four white framework towers, 8 m in
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
winoujcie − Entrance to Kanal Mieliski from N (8.222) (Photograph − Piotr Domanadzki)
(Original dated prior to 2004)
winoujcie − Entrance to Kanal Piastowski from SE (Zalew Szczecinski) (8.223) (Original dated prior to 2004) (Photograph − Piotr Domanadzki)
337
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
height), standing on the W bank 2 cables apart, indicate the curve in the channel at the junction of Kana Mieliski and Kana Piastowski.
2
KanaÞ Piastowski 1
2
8.223 From the junction, Kana Piastowski leads SE for about 3 miles on the alignment (321¼°) astern of Karsibór Leading Lights: Front light (white tower with gallery, red roof) (53°51′⋅1N, 14°16′⋅8E). Rear light (red metal framework tower, white bands, 38 m in height) (7 cables from front light). The SE end of the canal is marked by Brama Torowa (track gate) No 1 E/W Light-towers; piers from each side reduce the width of the fairway to 120 m.
3
4
Wielki Zalew — main fairway 1
2
3
4
5
6
8.224 The main fairway across Wielki Zalew leads SE for 14 miles and is marked by directional lights displayed from the Brama Torowa (track gate) towers, standing on each side of the fairway at approximately 3½ mile intervals with pairs of light-buoys (lateral) set midway between the towers. Brama Torowa No 1. E tower (red round framework tower, two galleries, 26 m in height) (53°48′⋅5N, 14°20′⋅4E) (visibility 138¼°- 145¼° and 318¼°- 325¼°). W tower (green round metal tower, two galleries, 27 m in height) (1½ cables SW) (visibility as above). Brama Torowa No 2. E tower (red round metal tower, two galleries on concrete base, 21 m in height) (53°45′⋅7N, 14°24′⋅3E) (visibility 136½°- 146° and 316½°326°). W tower (green framework tower, two galleries, 21 m in height) (1½ cables SW) (visibility as above). Brama Torowa No 3. E tower (red round metal tower, two galleries, concrete base, 21 m in height) (53°42′⋅8N, 14°28′⋅1E) (visibility 136½°- 146° and 316½°326°). W tower (green round framework beacon, two galleries, on concrete base, 21 m in height) (1½ cables SW) (visibility as above). Brama Torowa No 4. E tower (red metal framework tower, concrete base, 24 m in height) (53°39′⋅9N, 14°32′⋅1E) (visibility 137¼°-144¾° and 320¼°-327¾°). W tower (green round metal tower, concrete base, 24 m in height) (visibility 138°-145¾° and 315¼°-322¾°). Between Brama Torowa No 1 and No 2, Karsibór Leading Lights (8.223) may be seen which indicates the centre line of the fairway as do Maków Leading Lights (8.225) between Brama Torowa No 3 and No 4.
5
6
Szeroki Nurt — main fairway 1
2
1
Roztoka Odrzamska — main fairway 8.225 Mamków Leading Lights: Front light (white round metal tower, orange top, 17 m in height) (53°37′⋅1N, 14°35′⋅6E). Rear light (white triangular metal tower, orange top, 34 m in height) (7½ cables from front light).
8.226 Krepa/Domamce leading line: Domace Front Light (white round metal tower, with two galleries and conical roof, orange top, 17 m in height) (53°33′⋅1N, 14°35′⋅9E). Domace Rear Light (similar structure, 28 m in height) (660 m from front light). Krepa Front Light (white round metal tower, orange top, 14 m in height) (53°35′⋅9N, 14°35′⋅6E). Krepa Rear Light (similar structure, 25 m in height) (650 m from front light). The alignment (176°) ahead, of Domace Leading Lights and (356°) astern, of Krepa Leading Lights leads S for 1¼ miles from the S end of Roztoka Odrzaska through Szeroki Nurt, the narrows between the mainland to the E and Karw Wielki (53°35′N, 14°35′E) and Dugi Ostrów to the W. The transition point onto the next leading line is marked by the red sector (202¼°–277½°) of Domace Cross Light (white square metal tower and gallery, red top) (53°33′⋅4N, 14°35′⋅8E).
Damiaza — main fairway
Charts 2678, 2676
1
The alignment (141½°) of these lights leads SE for 2¾ miles from Brama Torowa No 4 to the transition point onto the next leading line, which is marked by the red sector of uawy Light (red and white tower with cupola and gallery, 15 m in height) (53°37′⋅9N, 14°35′⋅6E). Caution. A submarine power cable connects Stepnica Leading Light tower, uawy Light tower and Maków Front Leading Light-tower. Stepnica/Radum Leading Lights: Radu Front Light (white round metal tower with two galleries and conical roof, orange top, 15 m in height) (53°34′⋅7N, 14°35′⋅9E). Radu Rear Light (white square tower with two galleries and conical roof, orange top, 28 m in height) (800 m from front light). Stepnica Front Light (white round metal framework tower, orange top, 14 m in height) (53°38′⋅1N, 14°34′⋅7E). Stepnica Rear Light (white round metal framework tower, orange top, 25 m in height) (730 m from front light). From a position 4 cables WSW of uawy Light (53°37′⋅8N, 14°35′⋅4E), the track leads S for about 2½ miles through the S part of Roztoka Odrzaska on the alignment (168°) ahead, of Radu Leading Lights and the alignment (348°) astern, of Stepnica Leading Lights to the transition point onto the next leading line which is marked by Nos 33 and 34 buoys (lateral). Caution. An underwater gas pipeline crosses the fairway in latitude 53°36′⋅4N close to Krepa Rear Light-beacon (below) which stands 6 cables SW of Maków Rear Light.
2
338
8.227 Police/Ina leading line: Ina N Front Light (orange and white round tower, orange cupola and gallery) (3¼ cables NW of common rear light). Ina Common Rear Light (#similar structure) (53°32′⋅0N, 14°38′⋅6E). Police Front Light (orange and white round tower and gallery) (53°33′⋅7N, 14°35′⋅4E). Police Rear Light (orange and white round tower with two galleries, 485 m from front light) (53°34′⋅0N, 14°35′⋅3E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
3
4
5
6
From a position 2 cables E of Domace Cross Light the channel leads SE for 1½ miles on the alignment (132½°) ahead, of Ina Leading Lights and (312½°) astern, of Police Leading Lights. The above alignment marks the fairway leading through the N part of Damiaza, which is that part of the fairway between Szeroki Nurt and the N end of Wyspa Debina (53°31′⋅0N, 14°38′⋅0E) where the red sector (025½°–107°) of Iskie Light (white square tower, red top, conical roof, 14 m in height) (53°32′⋅6N, 14°38′⋅2E) marks the transition point onto the next leading line. Ņki/Bykowo leading line: Bykowo Front Light (white round metal tower, orange top, 16 m in height) (53°30′⋅5N, 14°38′⋅1E). Bykowo Rear Light (white square metal tower, orange top, 25 m in height) (600 m from front light). Ņki Front Light (white round metal tower, two galleries, orange top, conical roof, 17 m in height) (53°32′⋅9N, 14°37′⋅7E). Ņki Rear Light (white square tower, two galleries, orange top, conical roof, 25 m in height) (430 m from front light). From a position 2 cables W of Iskie Light the channel leads S for 1½ miles, on the alignment (174°) ahead, of Bykowo Leading Lights and (354°) astern, of Ņki Leading Lights. This alignment leads to the red sector (058½°–133¾°) of Babina Light (white square tower, red top, with cupola and gallery, 14 m in height) (53°31′⋅0N, 14°38′⋅4E) which stands on the W side of Mewia Wyspa (8.264).
Wyspa Kopina Light-beacon (red tower, 5 m in height) (53°32′⋅6N, 14°37′⋅6E). Rybi Ostrów Light-beacon (black dolphin, yellow top, S cardinal topmark) (53°31′⋅98N, 14°37′⋅8E). (Directions continue at 8.261)
Branch channel KanaÞ Skolwimski 1
Main fairway anchorages Anchorages 1
2
Entrance to Szczecin 1
2
8.228 Ina/©wiřta Leading Line: wiřta Front Light (black and white tower with two galleries) (53°28′⋅1N, 14°36′⋅5E). wiřta Rear Light (similar structure) (850 m from front light). Ina S Front Light (orange and white tower, orange cupola and gallery) (53°31′⋅6N, 14°38′⋅3E). Ina S Rear Light (common with Ina N Light) (730 m from front light). From a position 2 cables WNW of Babina Light the alignment (198°) ahead, of wiřta Leading Lights, and (018°) astern, of Ina S Leading Lights, leads SSW for about 2 miles to the vicinity of Wyspa Debina Light-beacon (red metal framework tower) (53°29′⋅0N, 14°37′⋅0E), which marks the position in the fairway for leaving the wiřta leading line.
Useful marks: 8.229 1
2
3
Wyspa Mielino S Light (red tower, double cross topmark, 8 m in height) (53°52′⋅0N, 14°16′⋅9E). Chelminek N Light (red beacon with gallery, 13 m in height) (53°40′⋅5N, 14°31′⋅4E). Chelminek S Light (red metal tower, 8 m in height) (53°40′⋅2N, 14°32′⋅0E). Karw Wielki Light-beacon (N cardinal mark with two galleries) (53°35′⋅7N, 14°35′⋅2E). Dugi Ostrów Light-beacon (S cardinal mark on black dolphin, yellow top with two galleries, 9 m in height) (53°33′⋅6N, 14°35′⋅8E). Wyspa Redu Light-beacon (red beacon, two galleries) (53°33′⋅5N, 14°36′⋅1E). Wyspa Mnichöw Light-beacon (yellow dolphin, N cardinal topmark) (53°32′⋅7N, 14°37′⋅0E).
8.230 Kana Skolwiski a buoyed branch channel, W of Zurawia Wyspa (53°31′N, 14°38′E), has a wharf 328 m long, authorised for draughts of 3⋅7 to 4⋅3 m; at the end of the wharf is a barge basin.
3
8.231 Anchorage is prohibited in the fairway of the channel; vessels may only anchor as follows: Wielki Zalew. On the NE side of the fairway, in depths of 5⋅8 to 6 m, within the area marked by buoys (special), extending NW and NE from Brama Torowa No 2 (E) Light-beacon (53°45′⋅7N, 14°24′⋅4E). This anchorage is limited to vessels of 4⋅9 m draught and 200 m length. An obstruction was reported (1996) to lie close to the N limit of the anchorage. Chelminek. For vessels up to 4⋅6 m draught and 100 m in length, NE of the fairway from No 8 Light-buoy (port hand) to within 3 cables of the NW extremity of Wyspa Chelminek (53°41′N, 14°32′E); the anchorage is otherwise unmarked. Radu. For vessels up to 6⋅1 m draught and 100 m length; W of the fairway abreast Radu Leading Light (53°34′⋅6N, 14°35′⋅8E). Ina. For vessels up to 4⋅9 m draught and 100 m length; E of the fairway in the entrance to Iski Nurt (53°31′⋅5N, 14°38′⋅4E) (8.264) within an area marked by four conical buoys (special).
Port of Police General information 1
2
8.232 Position. Police (53°34′N, 14°35′E) is situated on the W bank of Rzeka Odra in the secondary channel which runs between the islands of Karw Wielki (8.226) and Dugi Ostrów (8.226), and the mainland to the W. Function. The port serves one of the largest chemical works in Poland which is situated in Police. Approach. The port is approached through a navigation channel 80 m wide and 10 m deep. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 399 vessels totalling 3 million dwt. Port Authority. Zaklady Chemiczne Police S.A., ul. Kuznicka 1,72−010 Police, Poland. E-Mail:
[email protected] Maximum vessel size, length 200 m, draught 9⋅15 m.
Basins and berths 1
339
8.233 Port Mijanka (formerly known as Police Pier) (53°33′⋅3N, 14°36′⋅2E), a tanker berth situated on the main fairway, consists of a T-head jetty projecting 114 m from the shore, with a length of 102 m across its head. A dolphin is situated near each end of the T-head to assist with mooring, the ends of which are illuminated at night.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
2
There is a depth of 8⋅4 m over a distance of 280 m alongside. Port Morski is situated in the secondary channel opposite the S end of Dugi Ostrów (8.226) and consists of a berth 420 m long with a maximum depth alongside of 9⋅15 m. Port Barkowy is approached by a canal, 1300 m long, which leads off the secondary channel near the S end of Karw Wielki (8.226). From N this channel leaves the main fairway at Light-buoy 29 (preferred channel to port), and is 1½ miles long, 70 m wide with a least depth of 4⋅2 m; from S it leaves the main channel at the S end of Dugi Ostrów, and is 9 cables in length, 70 m wide with a least depth of 4⋅2 m. The E side of both these channels is marked by buoys (port hand). The basin has 400 m of berthing space with depths alongside of 3⋅0 to 3⋅8 m.
Stepnica 1
2
3
Harbours
Trzebieÿ 1
2
3
4
5
6
8.234 Description. Trzebie (53°40′N, 14°31′E) is a transit port for barges sailing between Poland and Germany and a fishing harbour with a small population, on the SW side of the entrance to Roztoka Odrzaska. The harbour is protected on its NE side by a broad wooded islet in the form of a breakwater 600 m long lying parallel to the coast. Directions. Trzebie (N) Leading Lights: Front light (white framework tower, red rectangular topmark, 11 m in height) (53°39′⋅6N, 14°31′⋅1E). Rear light (framework tower, red rectangular topmark, 21 m in height) (433 m from front light). The alignment (150¼°) of these lights marks the axis of the 1¼ mile long and 40 m wide N approach channel. The channel, with a least depth of 3⋅5 m, leads from Wielki Zalew to the N entrance of the harbour and is marked on its SW side by buoys and light-buoys (starboard hand). Lights are displayed, one on each side of the N entrance as follows: SW side — from a column. NE side — from a red framework tower. Trzebie (S) Leading Lights: Front light (black framework tower, orange rectangle daymarkt) (53°39′⋅8N, 14°30′⋅9E). Rear light (black framework tower, orange triangle daymark point down) (380 m from front light). The alignment (301¼°) astern, of these lights marks the axis of the 40 m wide S approach channel which leads from the main Szczecin fairway to the S entrance of the harbour. There are depths of 2⋅0 m to 2⋅4 m in the channel which is marked by a pair of buoys (lateral). Lights are displayed, one each side of the S harbour entrance as follows; SE side — from a red tower and gallery. NE side — from a redframework tower. Berths. In the S part of the harbour the quays are of concrete and there are three basins, with depths of 2⋅5 to 3 m, the largest being 94 by 50 m. In the N part is the fishing pier and a yacht basin with depths of 1 m to 3 m. Rescue. A lifeboat is kept at Trzebie.
4
5
8.235 Description. Stepnica (53°39′N, 14°38′E), in the NE corner of Roztoka Odrzaska, is a fishing settlement with a small harbour and a population of about 2000. Directions from north. The approach leads from Roztoka Odrzaska in the vicinity of ST buoy (preferred channel to starboard) on the alignment (067½°) of Stepnica Harbour Leading Lights (below). The approach fairway is 1120 m long, 35 m wide with a least depth of 3⋅0 m. From south. From a position 5 cables SW of uawy Light-beacon (53°37′⋅9N, 14°35′⋅6E) in the vicinity of No 24 Light-beacon, the fairway leads N for 1 mile. It is about 100 m wide, with depths from 4⋅0 to 4⋅5m, to the entrance of the inner channel, marked by ST–1 Light-buoy (starboard hand) and ST–2 Light-buoy (port hand). Thence on the alignment (067½°) of Stepnica Harbour Leading Lights: Front light (framework tower, white triangle daymark, point up, 10 m in height) (53°39′⋅0N, 14°37′⋅5E). Rear light (orange rectangle white stripe, on white framework tower) (154 m from front light). The inner channel is about 1¼ miles long, 100 m wide, with depths of 2⋅5 to 3⋅5 m. The fairway is marked by buoys which are withdrawn at the onset of ice. A turning area, diameter 130 m, depth 4 m, with N and S limits marked by buoys (cardinal), lies close outside the harbour entrance. Berths. Stepnica Harbour, a former railway ferry terminal, is entered between two moles forming a basin 150 by 40 m with a depth of 3⋅1 m inside. Lights are displayed from columns, one at each molehead. Facilities. There are a post office and customs office in the village of Stepnica. Communications. Stepnica is connected by road to Szczecin and by narrow gauge railway with other places. There is a regular summer ferry service from Stepnica to Szczecin and intermediate ports.
Basin Zimowy 1
8.236 Basin Zimowy, (53°39′N, 14°37′E), a natural basin sheltered from the W by a mole, lying close N of the old railway basin is reached via a 150 m long, 30 m wide channel dredged to a depth of 3 m. A light is displayed from a column on the W mole.
KanaÞ Stepnica 1
8.237 Kana Stepnica, (53°39′⋅1N, 14°36′⋅6E), 750 m long, 18 m wide and 2⋅2 m in depth, is entered about 3½ cables WNW of the harbour. It has a mooring pier and anchoring is prohibited in the canal.
Stepnica Zatoka 1
8.238 Stepnica Zatoka, (53°39′⋅2N, 14°36′⋅2E), a small bay close NW of the canal, provides a winter berth for small vessels off the mouth of Rzeka Gowienica.
Gasierzyno 1
340
8.239 Gasierzyno, (53°39′⋅8N, 14°34′⋅2E), is a landing place for small craft, about 2 miles NW of Stepnica. It is reached
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
by a short channel 40 m wide with a depth of 3 m, leading NE between a pair of buoys (cardinal) marking the inner approach.
SW−15 Light-buoy — M−4 buoy
3⋅0 m to 4⋅0 m
Thence, for 4½ cables on the alignment (299°) the fairway leads to another pair of beacons standing on an islet 6 cables W of Lubin Church. Front (red and white with a barrel topmark) (53°52′⋅0N, 14°25′⋅0E). Rear (white triangle topmark). Thence, passing close NE of SW−15 Light-buoy (N cardinal) moored 5½ cables WSW of Lubin Church the fairway leads NNE through a buoyed channel into Jezioro Wicko Wielkie. The inner channel approaches from Wielki Zalew to Lubin, are marked, in addition to the turning buoys, by consecutively numbered channel buoys moored on each side of the fairway. The channel to the sawmill and quay at Zalesie about 2 miles further N at the head of Jezioro Wicko Mae is unmarked. There is a least depth of 3 m in the fairway as far as M–4 buoy, moored 5½ cables WNW of Lubin Church and thence 2⋅5 m to Zalesie.
M−4 buoy — Lubin
less than 2⋅0 m
Wielki Zalew — Dzwina Strait
Wielki Zalew — side channels Chart 2677
4
Depths 1
8.240 For the connecting fairway between Wielki Zalew and Kleines Haff the least charted depth is 5⋅8 m. The depths in the connecting fairway between Wielki Zalew and Lubin (8.246) are as follows: Brama Torowa No 3 — M−1 Light-buoy 5⋅0 m to 6⋅0 m M−1 light-buoy — SW−15 Light-buoy
2
4⋅0 m to 5⋅0 m
The depths in the connecting fairway between Wielki Zalew and Wolin (8.247) are as follows: Brama Torowa No 3 — ME-W buoy
5⋅0 m to 6⋅0 m
ME-W buoy — W−4 buoy
approx 5⋅0 m
W−4 buoy — W−3 buoy (undergoing frequent changes)
3⋅2 m to 3⋅7 m
W−3 buoy — W−1 buoy
2⋅4 m to 3⋅0 m
W−1 buoy — Wolin
2⋅7 m to 7⋅5 m
1
2
Local knowledge 1
8.241 Local knowledge is required.
Wielki Zalew — west part 1
2
8.242 The connecting fairway for vessels proceeding E/W across the Polish/German border between Wielki Zalew and Kleines Haff, leads WNW for about 5 miles, within the white sector (108½°−110½°) astern of a directional light displayed from Brama Torowa No 2 W tower (8.224). Three buoys (safe water), moored about 1 mile apart, mark the recommended track which passes SW of MO-S Light-buoy (S cardinal), moored off the S end of Mielizna Osiecka, and NE of a mooring buoy, connecting to the German recommended track at Haff Light-buoy (safe water) (8.153).
Wielki Zalew — Jezioro Wicko MaÞe 1
2
3
8.243 The recommended track to Jezioro Wicko Mae (53°54′N, 14°26′E) leads N for 8 miles, within the white sector (186¼°–189½°) astern, of a directional light displayed from Brama Torowa No 3 E tower (8.224). The track is indicated by buoys (safe water) moored at 7 cable intervals. Thence, at M−1 Light-buoy, (safe water), moored 2¾ miles ESE of Lubin Church (8.200), the track leads WNW for 2 miles, on the alignment (299¾°) of Lubin Leading Lights: Front light (white metal framework tower, 8 m in height) (53°51′⋅8N, 14°26′⋅4E). Rear light (white rectangle, red border, on white metal framework tower) (208 m from front light). Thence, at M–2 Light-buoy the track leads W for 7 cables on the alignment (270°) of leading beacons standing on an island 7 cables WSW of Lubin Church. Front (white triangle topmark) (53°51′⋅7N, 14°25′⋅0E). Rear (red trapezium topmark).
3
4
5
8.244 From Brama Torowa No 3 to ME-W buoy (safe water), moored 3½ miles to the N, directions are the same as described in 8.243. Thence the track leads ENE for 1½ miles on the alignment (081½°) of Zatoka Skoszewska Leading Lights: Front light (red square on white metal framework tower, 21 m in height) (53°47′⋅1N, 14°37′⋅1E). Rear light (red metal framework tower) (53°47′⋅2N, 14°37′⋅9E). The track passes close S of W–4 Light-buoy (safe water) thence, through a dredged and buoyed channel with a least width of 20 m and a least depth of 2⋅4 m, the fairway continues ENE to W–3 Light-buoy which marks the turn onto the alignment (049°) of Zagórze Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle on white metal framework tower, 16 m in height) (53°48′⋅4N, 14°36′⋅9E). Rear light (red metal framework tower, 14 m in height) (500 m from front light). Thence, the fairway leads N for 1¾ miles on the alignment (002°) of Goorgóra Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, yellow stripes on white metal framework tower, 12 m in height) (53°49′⋅8N, 14°36′⋅2E). Rear light (red building, 5 m in height) (104 m from front light). Thence, the fairway leads ENE and then N, keeping close to the W bank of the river, to the wharf at Wolin. Caution. Due to shoaling, Skoszewo Leading Lights (081½°) do not mark the axis of the buoyed section of the channel. Vessels should therefore be guided principally by the buoys. This channel should not be attempted in poor visibility or in stormy weather.
Wielki Zalew — harbours Nowe Warpno 1
8.245 Nowe Warpno (53°44′N, 14°17′E), a fishing village on the E side entrance to a broad inlet, is approached via the frontier buoyage leading SSW thence S from No 14 Light-buoy (special) (53°46′⋅5N, 14°17′⋅1E) passing close E of Altwarp (8.164); the inner channel is narrow and difficult, being suitable only for small vessels up to 2 m draught. Local knowledge and charts are required.
Lubin 1
341
8.246 Lubin (53°52′N, 14°26′E), and Wapnica, close N on the E side of Jezioro Wicko Wielkie, are small towns,
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
principally concerned with cement production. Wharves extend along the banks of the channel. There are several piers used by fishing vessels and a small basin with a depth of 2⋅5 m. Canals with a least depth of 2⋅3 m lead to loading places at the cement works. Lubin S mole light and Wapnica N mole light are displayed from columns, respectively, at the entrances to the basins about 6 and 9 cables NNW of Lubin Church.
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8.247 Wolin (53°51′N, 14°37′E) with a population of about 3000, stands on the W bank of Dzwina Strait. A road swing bridge and a railway swing bridge N of it, see below, connect the town with the E bank. Between the bridges is a grain elevator and in the town is a sawmill. A concrete wharf 150 m long, with depths alongside of 3 to 4 m, extends along the W bank S of the road bridge, where there is also a fishing pier; a small wreck lies at each end of the wharf. The railway swing bridge, which has an opening 12⋅5 m in width and a closed vertical clearance of 12⋅4 m, is closed in the daytime 20 minutes before the departure of a train from Wolin or Recaw on the opposite bank, and opened after it has passed. The bridge remains closed from 2300 to 0445 and in winter, as long as navigation is suspended. Vessels passing the bridge must use the opening to the right of the direction of travel. The following signals for vessels passing the railway swing bridge are shown from a mast, on each pier head at the bridge. Bridge closed — By day, a red ball; at night, and in poor visibility, a red light. Bridge open — By day, the ball is lowered; at night and in poor visibility, a green light. The road bridge has an opening 12⋅8 m in width and a closed vertical clearance of 3⋅1 m. A vessel approaching must display two flags, disposed vertically, or give two long blasts on the siren. The following signals for vessels passing the road bridge are made by signal arm and black balls: Passage clear — The signal arm at an angle of 45° upwards from the horizontal, to the right of the direction of travel. Passage prohibited — The signal arm horizontal to the right of the direction of travel. Bridge cannot be opened — Two black balls disposed vertically. Facilities. There is a small boat building and repair yard for fishing vessels. Supplies. Small quantities of fuel oil and coal may be obtained. Communications are regularly maintained by water with Szczecin and with Kamie Pomorski (8.280), the town is connected to the general railway system.
2
1
8.251 The port is approached through the main winoujcie-Szczecin channel and entered passing Wyspa Zurawia (53°31′⋅0N, 14°38′⋅0E) lying close W of the turn in the channel at the N end of Wyspa Dřbina.
Traffic 1
8.252 In 2003, the port was used by 2575 vessels, totalling over 11 million dwt.
Port Authority 1
8.253 Zarad Morskich Portow Szczecin- winoujcie Port Authority, Bytomska 7, 70 603 Szczecin, Poland. Website: www.port.szczecin.pl E-mail:
[email protected]
Limiting conditions 1
2
3
8.254 Limiting draughts. Positioned from Ostrów Grabowski Light (53°26′⋅6N, 14°35′⋅7E). Kana Grabowski (2 cables W) — 9⋅1 m. Kana Grodzki (8 cables SW) — 7⋅8 m. Kana Dřbicki (6 cables SSW) — 3 m to 8⋅5 m. W Duczyca (1 mile SW) — 6⋅1 m. E Duczyca (1¼ miles S) — 3⋅3 m. Przekop Mieliski (1 cable E) — 9⋅6 m. Parnica (1¾ miles S) — 7⋅2 m to 10⋅2 m. Kana Wrocawski (1½ miles S) — 4⋅5 m. Deepest and longest berth. Nabrzee Katowickie (53°24′⋅5N, 14°36′⋅8E) (8.262). Water levels. A tide gauge reading of 5⋅0 m is considered MSL. A change in this level will affect the controlling depths. Density of water: 1⋅000 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled. A vessel of 61 000 dwt, LOA 223 m, breadth 32⋅2 m, with a draught of 9⋅15 m has been handled.
Arrival information
General information 1
Position 1
8.250 From the N entrance to Kana Skolwiski, the port area extends about 6 miles S along the banks of Rzeka Odra to the remains of the old Poniatowski Bridge (53°25′⋅7N, 14°34′⋅1E); farther SSW the Sobieski and railway bridges obstruct navigation of the river. The S limit of the port through Parnica (8.262) includes the basins at the S end of Przekop Mieleski known as the industrial harbour. The E limits includes Nabrzee Drzewne (53°24′⋅7N, 14°37′⋅3E) a timber wharf on the W bank of Rzeka Regalica and thence the E bank of Przekop Mieleski and Rzeka Odra to the N end of Wyspa Dřbina.
Approach and entry
SZCZECIN
Charts 2678, 2676
8.249 Imports include ores, scrap iron, fertilizer, grain, oil and timber. Principal exports include coal, iron, timber, cement, sugar, salt and general goods. In 1999 the population was about 417 000.
Port limits 1
Wolin 1
Function
8.248 Szczecin (53°25′N, 14°33′E), is one of the three principal ports of Poland. The city is situated on the W bank of the main W branch of Rzeka Odra (8.212).
342
8.255 Vessel Traffic Service. A mandatory VTS is in operation covering the port of Szczecin. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6(2). Pilotage. See 8.193. Tugs. The use of tugs within the port area is compulsory.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
2
3
Traffic regulations. Navigation is prohibited in Odra Zachodnia which is that part of Rzeka Odra in vicinity of the shipyards in the channel W of Wyspa Okrřtowa (53°27′N, 14°36′E) and Wyspa Gryfia (53°26′⋅7N, 14°35′⋅5E), except for authorised vessels. One way traffic is in force around Wyspa Grodzka (53°26′N, 14°35′E); from Kana Grabowski vessels should proceed S through Kana Grodzki, thence SW through W Duczyca, thence NE along the NW side of Wyspa Grodzka. Sound signals. Vessels approaching the intersection of Przekop Mieleski with Kana Grabowski are obliged to make the appropriate sound signals on the whistle or siren; one long blast if altering course to starboard or two long blasts if altering course to port. Prohibited anchorage. Anchorage within the port is permitted only in the case of necessity and after pilots advice. Quarantine. As winoujcie, see 8.195.
2
Berths and basins General information 1
2
Harbour General layout 1
8.256 The harbour area is triangular in shape formed by the Rzeka Odra to the W and the Przekop Mieleski to the E. Within the harbour are wharves and quayage to a total length of about 19 miles, the locations of which may be seen on the chart.
3
Lights 1
8.257 Numerous lights are displayed within the port at the entrances to basins and along the various canal banks; most are fixed in character and displayed from columns, masts or dolphins; their positions may be seen on the chart.
4
Submarine cables 1
8.258 Submarine cables are numerous across the channels and fairways in the harbour; their positions are marked by notice boards.
Turning areas 1
8.259 Are located within the port as follows: Off S end of Nabrzee Huty (Kra). Off N end of Ostrów Grabowski. At S end of Kana Grabowski. At entrance to basins Wschodni and Zachodni. Basen Górniczi (N end). Basen Górniczi (S end). At the junction of Parnica with Kana Wrocawski.
Climatic table 1
8.260 See 1.284 and 1.292.
5
1
8.262 Szczecin has numerous alongside berths either river fronting, in basins or canals. The main berthing areas which are shown on the chart, are as follows, positioned from Ostrów Grabowski Light (53°26′⋅5N, 14°35′⋅6E): Rzeka Odra W bank. From the N port limits for 3⋅5 miles to Przekop Mieleski (1 mile N). This area has ten berths, the largest being Huty (Kra), 420 m in length with depths of 7⋅5 to 8⋅0 m alongside. From Przekop Mieleski (1 mile N) to the S point of Wyspa Grodzka (1¼ miles SW), there are 14 berths, some of which lie in the Odra Zachodnia (8.255). The longest berth in the part available for free navigation is Odra Stare which is 460 m in length with a depth of 7⋅0 m. Okrřtowa and Gryfia islands (3 cables NW) lie between Rzeka Odra and Przekop Mieleski. The islands have ten berths which are mainly shipyards. Ewa Peninsula (5 cables SW) has nine berths, the largest of which is the Nabrzee Polskie, 260 m in length with depths alongside of 9⋅1 to 9⋅15 m. There is a Ro-Ro/Lo-Lo berth, 58 m in length, on the E side of the peninsula. Central Port or asztownia (1½ miles SSW) is made up of Basin Zachodni and Basin Wschodni, and contains ten berths, the largest being Nabrzee Wřgierskie 611 m in length, with depths of 8⋅5 to 8⋅7 m. Industrial Port (2¼ miles S), made up of the following basins, Górniczy, Górnolaski, Notecki and Warty, which contain 21 berths, the largest being Nabrzee Katowickie, 443 m in length with a depths of 8⋅9 to 9⋅15 m alongside. Parnica (2¼ miles SSW), which includes Kana Wrocawski, Duczyca and Basin Cichy, contains 16 berths. The deepest is Nabrzee CPN−4 with depths of 7⋅1 to 7⋅3 m, and the longest being Nabrzee Parnica with a length of 320 m and depths of 5⋅5 to 6⋅5 m.
Port services 1
Directions for entering harbour (continued from 8.228) 8.261 From the wiřta leading line the main fairway continues about midway between the banks of Rzeka Odra, branching S into Przekop Mieleski which joins the Rzeka Odra N of Wyspa Okrřtowa (53°27′⋅0N, 14°35′⋅5E). The fairway leads S for about 1 mile in the white sector (189°−191°) of Ostrów Grabowski Light (white column, 2 galleries)
(53°26′⋅5N, 14°35′⋅6E), whence it divides abeam Wyspa Gryfia. Vessels bound for Ewa Peninsula, Kana Dřbicki, Central Port and W Duczyca follow Kana Grabowski to the SW. Vessels for the Industrial Port, Parnica and Regalica continue SSE along Przekop Mieleski.
2
343
8.263 Repairs of all kinds. Divers available. Large shipbuilding industry. The largest floating dock is No 5 which has a length of 216 m and can accommodate vessels up to 228m in length, 33 m beam and 15 000 dwt. The largest slipway is ON, length 189 m, breadth 44 m, capacity 12 500 tonnes, but this is for building only. Other facilities. Hospital; oily waste reception; de-ratting. Supplies. Water is laid on to the principal quays; provisions, fuel and other material supplies are available. Communications. Szczecin is connected to the general railway system and also to the surrounding country by an extensive system of waterways.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Jezioro DŅbie General information 1
8.264 Jezioro DŅbie (53°28′N, 14°40′E) is an extensive lake, beyond the E limits of Port Szczecin, with general depths from 3 to 3⋅5 m. It is connected to Odra by the following waterways; Outflowing at the N end are Iski Nurt, Babina and Czapina, the latter two joining SW of Mewia Wyspa (53°31′⋅0N, 14°38′⋅5E) where there is a
2
turning area diameter 150 m and depth of 6 m. Fish traps obstruct the Czapina waterway. Inflowing on the W and S sides are wiřta, Duczyca, Mienia the N mouth of Regalica and Parnica. Beacons and leading beacons, with distinctive topmarks, mark the channel entrances into Jezioro DŅbie and there are dredged channels leading from places across the lake to the mouths of Duczyca and Regalica. Local knowledge is required.
ZATOKA POMORSKA TO GULF OF GDAMSK Tidal observation station
GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2150, 2369
Area covered 1
8.265 This section covers the coast from Dziwna Strait (54°01′N, 14°44′E) to Rozewie, approximately 135 miles ENE. It is arranged as follows: Dziwna Strait to Port Darowo (8.267). Port Darowo to Rozewie (8.297).
1
Submarine cables 1
8.266 During the period 15 March to 15 June annually, fishing vessels with drift nets are engaged in fishing within 15 miles of the coast, from about longitude 15°E to 18°E.
1
DZIWNA STRAIT TO PORT DAROWO General information
2
Charts 2679, 2150
Route 1
8.267 From the vicinity of 54°06′N, 14°35′E, NNW of Dziwna Strait, the coastal passage leads ENE for about 66 miles to the approaches to Port Darowo. The coastal bank is very narrow except off Mrzeyno (54°09′N, 15°18′E) and Dwirzyno (3½ miles E) where there are isolated depths of less than 10 m up to 12 miles offshore, as shown on the chart.
3
Topography 1
2
8.268 The coast between Dzwina Strait and Koobrzeg (31 miles ENE) is wooded in many places and mostly consists of sand dunes which are steep-to on the seaward side. There are several seaside resorts along this coast, including Trzřsacz and Niechorze, 10 and 13 miles ENE respectively of Dzwina Strait. Between Koobrzeg and Gaski Lighthouse, about 12 miles ENE, the coast is similar to that W of Koobrzeg, thence to Darowo, about 21 miles farther ENE, it is mostly low sand dunes and behind the sand dunes are several lakes with shallow entrances from the sea. Behind the lakes are wooded spurs from the hills.
Rescue 1
8.271 Two submarine cables terminate on shore at Mielno and one close W of Kolobrzeg.
Principal marks
Fishing 1
8.270 A tidal observation station in the form of a cylinder projecting about 2 m above the water, lies close offshore near Mielno signal mast.
8.272 Landmarks: Trzřsacz Church (54°04′⋅5N, 14°59′⋅6E). Niechorze Lighthouse (grey octagonal tower with red stripes, on a dwelling, 45 m in height) (54°05′⋅7N, 15°03′⋅9E). Mrzeyno Church (pointed tower) (54°08′⋅7N, 15°117′⋅6E). Korzysno Church (54°08′⋅5N, 15°30′⋅8E). Koobrzeg Lighthouse (red tower, black cupola) (54°11′⋅2N, 15°33′⋅3E). Zalubin z Morzem Monument (54°11′⋅3N, 15°33′⋅6E). Gaski Lighthouse (red round tower, gallery and cupola) (54°14′⋅6N, 15°52′⋅4E). Sarbinowo Church (54°15′⋅0N, 15°57′⋅6E). Darowo Lighthouse (red square tower, white lantern, 21 m in height) (54°26′⋅4N, 16°22′⋅7E). Cisowo Church (54°26′⋅8N, 16°25′⋅8E). Major lights: Kikut Light (53°59′⋅0N, 14°34′⋅9E) (8.200). Niechorze Light — as above. Koobrzeg Light — as above. Gaski Light — as above. Darowo Light — as above.
Directions (continued from 8.202) 1
2
8.269 A lifeboat and line-throwing apparatus are kept at Dziwnów Górny (54°01′N, 14°46′E).
344
8.273 From a position in the approaches to winoujcie, 7½ miles N of Kikut Lighthouse (53°59′⋅0N, 14°34′⋅9E) (8.200), the track leads ENE for about 66 miles to a position NNW of Port Darowo, passing (with positions from Koobrzeg Lighthouse (54°11′⋅3N, 15°33′⋅4E)): NNW of DZI Light-buoy (safe water) (31 miles WSW), thence: Clear of two dangerous wrecks (16½ miles W), noting isolated depths of 10 m and 8⋅8 m lying 3 miles N and 5½ miles NNW respectively of the wrecks, thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
NNW of the coastal bank (9 miles W), which extends up to 5 miles from shore between Mrzeyno (54°09′N, 15°18′E) and Dwirzyno 4 miles E, with depths of less than 10 m, thence: NNW of, depending on draught, an isolated depth of 10 m (5¼ miles NW), thence: NNW of KO Light-buoy (safe water) (3 miles NW), thence: Clear of two dangerous wrecks (11 miles NNE and 9½ miles NE), thence: NNW of a dangerous wreck (26½ miles ENE), marked by a buoy (isolated danger).
3
2
Useful marks
horizontal and vessels with high masts should keep to the E side. When closed the vertical clearance is 2⋅2 m. Vessels requiring the bridge opened should advise the bridge operator of their ETA by VHF. The bridge is opened every even numbered hour, if traffic is expected. When open, one-way traffic is in operation and signals are displayed on the pier which is to starboard of the direction of travel as follows: Request for passage — two red lights set horizontally. Open road — two green lights set horizontally. Caution. A power cable is laid between the piers of the opening span, marked by signs on the barriers which protect the bridge piers. Use of anchors while passing the bridge is prohibited.
8.274 1
Dziwnów Church (54°01′⋅7N, 14°45′⋅6E). Goƕa Sowia, a prominent hill, (54°06′⋅1N, 15°09′⋅0E). Sadno Church (54°03′⋅7N, 15°10′⋅4E). (Directions continue at 8.301)
Harbours Dziwnów Dolny 1
Dziwna Strait Chart 2679
General information 1
2
8.275 Dziwna Strait, the E arm of Rzeka Odra (8.212), flows from Wielki Zalew, past Wolin (8.247) and through Zalew Kamieski, before discharging into Baltic Sea between the breakwaters at Dziwnów Dolny (54°02′N, 14°47′E). Depths. At the entrance between the breakwaters there is a depth of 3 m; at the centre line of the river channel it is 4 m and near the bend in the river it is 5 m. The least depth in the channel between Dziwnów and Wolin was reported to be 1⋅6 m in 2001. Local knowledge. The channel off the mouth of Dziwna Strait and the dredged parts of the river, including the fairway passing W of Wyspa ChrzŅszczewska (53°58′N, 14°44′E), is subject to alteration. Vessels should not enter without local knowledge. Traffic regulations are in force on the river.
Directions 1
2
3
8.276 From a position near DZI light-buoy (safe water) (54°03′⋅6N, 14°41′⋅3E), the alignment (142¾°) of Dziwnów Leading Lights, leads to the entrance: Front light (white diamond, red border, on white metal framework tower) (54°01′⋅3N, 14°43′⋅9E). Rear light (white rectangle on red and white metal framework tower) (130 m from front light). Thence, on entering the river mouth, keep initially to the W bank side turning gradually to steer in the middle of the river. Between Dziwnów and Wolin, 12 miles SSW, there is a buoyed channel, 30 to 40 m wide. Caution. A shoal patch, with a depth of 2⋅5 m over it, lies 2¾ cables off the entrance; it is necessary to diverge from the leading line, leaving the patch to port, thence rejoining the leading line at the entrance. Useful mark: Kamie Pomorski Cathedral (53°58′⋅2N, 14°46′⋅2E).
2
Dziwna 1
8.279 Dziwna, a fishing village, stands on the S bank of the Dziwna Strait, about 8 cables within the entrance.
Kamien Pomorski 1
2
8.280 Kamie Pomorski (53°58′N, 14°46′E), with a population of about 2700, lies on the E side of Zalew Kamieski. It is a small port comprising three small basins and quays, with a least depth of 2⋅2 m alongside. The port is not sheltered and loading is carried out in calm weather, mooring stern to shore with bow dolphins. The channel from Dziwna is marked by buoys and may be used by vessels with a draught not exceeding 2 m. Depths outside the fairway are very shallow and local knowledge is required. A lifting bridge, 5 cables S of the town, connects ChrzŅszczewska with the mainland and has a passage width of 8 m. Regular communication is maintained by water with Szczecin and Dziwnów Górny in summer.
KoÞobrzeg and approaches Chart 2150
General information 1
Bridge 1
8.278 Description. Dziwnów Dolny (54°02′N, 14°47′E) is a fishing port and summer resort on the N bank at the mouth of Dziwna Strait. Dziwnów Górny, also a summer resort, lies 1 mile farther E. The port is protected at the entrance by two breakwaters. A light is displayed from a concrete column at the head of each breakwater. Berths. Basen Portowy, a small square basin with a wooden wharf in the middle, which latter is lit, lies at the W bank close S of Dziwnów front light. On the E bank there is a wooden pier about 40 m long. Basin Zimowy lies on the E bank at the bend of the river. There is a wharf 480 m in length and depths of 2⋅5 to 4⋅5 m in the basin. Several metal dolphins provide moorings for larger fishing vessels. A light is displayed from each side of the basin entrance.
8.277 A bridge spans Dziwna Strait about 8 cables from the entrance. A draw span is located near the W shore, with a navigable width of 14⋅2 m; the bridge rises 75° from the
345
8.281 KoÞobrzeg (54°11′N, 15°33′E) is the sixth largest commercial port in Poland and is also well known as a health spa town with natural springs. In 2000 the population was over 40 000. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 147 vessels totalling 188 102 dwt.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Port Authority. c/o Polish Baltic Shipping Co, ul Portowa 41, 78 100 Koobrzeg, Poland.
Harbour 1
Limiting conditions 1
2
3
4
5
8.282 Least charted depth. The approach is dredged to 8 m and within the breakwaters charted depths are just over 6 m, reducing to 5 m in the harbour. Caution. Prolonged stormy weather causes silting and a reduction in depth is then to be expected. The harbour authorities should be consulted for the latest information on depths. Deepest and longest berth. Nabrzee Barkowskie has a length of 345 m with depths of 6⋅0 m alongside. Water level. With gales from NW, through N, to NE, the level of the water may rise as much as 1 m and with gales from SW, through S, to SSE, may fall by the same amount, with respect to mean water level. These levels only occur in spring, autumn and winter, with heavy gales; at other times the water level varies between about 0⋅3 m above and below mean level. Density of water in the harbour is 1⋅006 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel handled. The port accepts vessels up to 75 m in length, 13 m in breadth, with a maximum draught of 4⋅5 m (vessels up to 2000 dwt). Ice generally starts forming in January. In early and severe winters it can start forming in the last 10 days in December and can last until early March. Ice rarely constitutes a hindrance to navigation except when drifting ice off the coast piles up in the entrance to the port, causing closure for up to 10 days. Winds from the SW and NE have the greatest effect on the drifting ice, while winds from the NW and N cause the ice to pile up on the shore. Information about ice formation and icebreaker assistance can be obtained from the Harbour Master. Weather. In heavy gales from the WSW, through W, to ENE, large vessels are in danger of striking the breakwater when entering due to the high sea and swell in the narrow entrance. Entry is inadvisable in such circumstances and vessels should remain at sea until the weather moderates.
2
3
4
5
Directions 1
Arrival information 1
2
3
8.283 Port operations and radio. The Harbour Masters office, situated near the lighthouse, is equipped with VHF, radar and a signal mast. All movements within the port limits are co-ordinated from there. Vessels which do not have RT must pay special attention to signals displayed on the signal mast. By day, three black balls, and by night, three red lights, indicate that the port is closed. Notice of ETA. One hour prior to arrival, addressed to the Harbour Master. Anchorage. The best anchorage in the roadstead off Koobrzeg, is in depths of between 12 m and 14 m with Koobrzeg Cathedral bearing 133° and Trzebiatów Church (8.274) bearing 228°. By night, in a depth of 12 m with Koobrzeg Light bearing 133° and Gaski Light (8.272) bearing 077°. Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels over 40 m in length. Pilots are available 24 hours and board about 1 mile NW of the breakwater. Tug is available. Prohibited area. Anchoring and fishing is prohibited within a rectangular area, shown on the chart, centred 9 miles N of Koobrzeg.
8.284 General layout. The harbour at the mouth of Rzeka Parsřta has four berths capable of handling general cargo and grain. Its entrance is between two slightly curving breakwaters, the E of which extends 250 m farther seaward. At the head of the W breakwater, the entrance is 47 m wide narrowing to 24 m near the inner end. The E side of the harbour contains the commercial berths, and the W side the fishing berths. Development. In 2004 work was in progress to permit usage by larger vessels and the installation of Ro-Ro facilities at the end of Koszalin Pier. Current. In the vicinity of Koobrzeg, the coastal current sets across the entrance of the harbour; with winds from NE through E to SE, it sets W; with winds from NW through W to SW, it sets E. With winds from NE through N to NW the current may set either E or W. There is very little current with winds from between SE and SSW. The coastal current is strongest with gales which blow parallel with the coast, and may then attain the rate of 3 kn. The current in the river flows continuously outwards, usually at a rate of 1 kn; after heavy rains it often attains a rate of 3 kn; when the ice is in motion, however it may reach 5 kn. Landmarks: Koobrzeg Lighthouse (54°11′⋅3N, 15°33′⋅4E) (8.272). Grain elevators, standing about 2 cables S of the lighthouse. Koobrzeg Cathedral (truncated tower) (54°10′⋅6N, 15°34′⋅6E). Zalubin z Morzem Monument (54°11′⋅3N, 15°33′⋅6E). Old Fort (red circular structure), at foot of E breakwater, on which the lighthouse stands.
2
3
8.285 Approach. From Ko Light-buoy (safe water), moored 2½ miles NW of the entrance, the line of bearing (148°), of the grain elevators, leads 2 mile SE onto the alignment (122½°) of the following marks, which lead to the harbour entrance: Front. E Breakwater Light (red round column, two galleries) (54°11′⋅5N, 15°33′⋅2E). Rear. Zalubin z Morzem Monument, 3 cables SE. A light stands on the head of the W breakwater (green round metal structure, two galleries) (54°11′⋅4N, 15°33′⋅2E). Thence, keeping midway between the breakwaters, enter with sufficient speed to maintain steerage way, being careful not to approach too close to the stone scarp protecting the outer side of the E breakwater head. Caution. Attention must be paid to the current which sets across the entrance (8.284), and the approach must be made so the course made good will lead straight in to the harbour otherwise there is a danger of being set against one of the breakwaters, under the influence of the currents out of the river and along the coast, which meet off the heads of the breakwaters. Hawsers must be ready, and speed reduced inside the breakwaters.
Basins and berths 1
346
8.286 Berthing space on the E side of the harbour is extensive and includes Basen Zbozowe, a quay 203 m in length with depths of 5⋅0 m alongside. There is a turning area of up to
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
80 m diameter off the quay where there is a depth of at least 5⋅9 m. The W side of the port is used by fishing vessels and is provided with cold storage and factory facilities. See 8.284.
Port services 1
2
8.287 Repairs. There are facilities for repairing small craft. Mechanical lift dock with a maximum capacity of 200 tonnes, capable of taking a vessel 28 m in length with a draught of 3⋅5 m. Other facilities: compass adjustment; hospital; oily waste reception; deratting exemption only and issue of certificate. Supplies: fresh water; provisions; fuel oil. Communications. Koobrzeg has road and rail connections with Gdynia, Gdask and Szczecin. Rescue. A motor lifeboat and an all-terrain vehicle carrying rescue equipment are available.
5
6
1
General information
2
8.288 Description. Darowo (54°26′N, 16°23′E) stands on both banks of Rzeka Wieprza, about 1½ miles upstream of the drawbridge (8.289). The river channel, which is dredged, has a surface width of about 38 m, a bottom width of 23 m, and a normal depth of 5⋅5 m. About 4½ cables upstream of the drawbridge the fairway narrows to about 10 m due to shoaling off the mouth of Rzeka Grabówka where it joins the Wieprza. The basin just below the town forms part of the industrial port. Darówko (54°26′N, 16°23′E) is a fishing village and summer resort with a population of about 900 situated on the S side of the mouth of the river. Function. The port has facilities for coal, grain and fish processing.
2
3
4
8.289 Controlling depths. The entrance is dredged to 7⋅5 m. At the point where the river flows into the E part of the outer port, between the root of the NE breakwater and the old S breakwater, it leaves a passage width of 20 m, with an average depth of 4⋅5 m. The average depth within the port is 5⋅0 m. The latest information on depths should be obtained from the Port Authority. Deepest and longest berth. Basen Przemysowy. Water level variation is usually between 0⋅1 m below and 0⋅4 m above the mean level. Gales from the NW and N may raise the level by about 1⋅5 m; and those from S to SW may lower it by about 0⋅6 m; variations of such amounts, however, seldom occur, and then only with extraordinary weather conditions. Maximum size of vessel handled. In 2003, the maximum permitted draught for vessels entering the port was 4 m, LOA 75 m and breadth 12 m. Ice. In winter, the port may be closed for 2 or 3 weeks, usually during February and March but navigation is maintained as long as practicable by the port tug acting as icebreaker. Drawbridge. A drawbridge spans the channel close inside the river mouth with a navigable opening of 14⋅9 m, which is opened on request. For small vessels the bridge is opened hourly on the hour. Vessels requiring the bridge to be opened, should exhibit the following signals, at least 200 m from the bridge:
Signal by day
Signal by night
Preparing to open bridge
-
Yellow light.
Passage clear
Green flag
Green light.
Passage prohibited
Red flag.
Red light.
Bridge cannot be opened
Three red balls (vertical).
Three red lights (vertical).
8.290 Anchorage is available in the roadstead off Darowo in a depth of 16 m, 1½ miles NW of Darowo Lighthouse. Vessels should take care to avoid the foul area about 2½ miles NW of the lighthouse, where there are wreck remains. Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels of 40 m or more. Pilot boards in roads. Requests for pilots should be made at least 2 hours before arrival through Witowo Port Radio at Jarosawiec (8.300).
Harbour 1
2
Limiting conditions 1
Meaning
Arrival information
Port DarÞowo and approaches
1
By day — two white flags. By night — two white lights, vertically disposed. In both cases vessels should give a sound signal consisting of two prolonged blasts. Bridge signals are shown from the E bascule as follows:
3
4
8.291 General layout. Darowo Awanaport is a small outer harbour formed by two breakwaters extending about 400 m from each side of the mouth of Rzeka Wieprza (8.288). The passage between the root of the NE and the old S breakwaters leads to the drawbridge and access to the inner harbour. Traffic signals. There is a signal station at the root of the NE breakwater with which vessels can communicate by means of The International Code of Signals. A brown wooden mast, 23 m high, stands close W of the main lighthouse. The following signals may be displayed: A red pennant displayed at the masthead signifies that the entrance of the harbour is clear. If displayed at the dip the entrance is not clear. Should conditions render entry dangerous or impossible, the red pennant will be hauled down and the appropriate signal from The International Code of Signals will be displayed. Current. The coastal across the entrance of the outer harbour at Port Darowo sets NE with W winds and SW with E winds. With strong gales blowing parallel to the coast it may attain rates of 2 to 3 kn. When the wind is from S and SE, the coastal current is weak and the current from the river is noticeable. The current in the river usually flows outwards and may attain a rate of 3½ kn in the spring thaw.
Directions for entering harbour 1
2
347
8.292 On nearer approach to Darowo, Mariacki Church, standing close SW of another church in town, the high buildings in the vicinity, a grain elevator and a wooden observation tower 5 cables W of the port, may all be recognised. The port should be approached on a SE heading until the entrance is open, then steer to pass midway between the heads of the breakwaters. The entrance 38 m wide has a depth of 5 m. Attention should be paid to the current which usually sets across the entrance and care should be
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
3
taken to avoid passing too close to the head of the SW breakwater as it has been damaged below water. In heavy gales from SSW, through W to NNE, entrance should not be attempted. Darowo Lighthouse (8.272) stands at the root of the E breakwater. Breakwater head lights are displayed as follows: NE side, (red tower with gallery). SW side, (green tower with gallery). The corner dolphin of the old S breakwater is painted white and is surmounted by a white 3-sided pyramid; it is illuminated at night.
Basins and berths 1
Berths. The small harbour, with depths of 1 m, is subject to silting with strong N winds. There is a pier on the E side of the channel and a road bridge across the channel above it.
PORT DAROWO TO ROZEWIE General information Chart 2369
Route 1
8.293 Basen Zimowy, on the W bank of the river near the drawbridge, has depths of about 1⋅5 to 2⋅5 m alongside. Basen Rybacki, on the E bank, 2½ cables above the drawbridge, has depths of 2⋅5 to 3⋅5m alongside. Basen PrzemysÞowy, on the W bank about 1 mile upstream of the drawbridge; the basin is 45 m in width with an average depth of 5 m; the quays have a total length of 650 m. Basen Osadowy, formed by the widened river section near the Basen Przemysowy has depths of 2⋅5 m alongside.
Topography 1
Port services 1
8.294 Repairs. There are repair workshops suitable for fishing craft. A diver may usually be obtained in summer. Other facilities: hospital; customs office; limited facilities for the reception of oily waste. Supplies: fresh water; fuel oil. Rescue. A rescue vessel, inshore lifeboat and rescue equipment are stationed at the port.
2
Harbours Mrzeÿyno 1
2
8.295 Description. Mrzeyno is a small fishing village and resort town near the mouth of Rzeka Rega which may be identified by its church (8.272). The harbour is protected by two breakwaters extending seaward from the banks of the river mouth, forming an entrance 50 m wide. Mrzeyno Light (metal framework tower) (54°08′⋅9N, 15°17′⋅5E) is displayed at the root of the E breakwater. Lights stand on the heads of the E and W breakwaters. Berths. Vessels with a maximum length of 12 m and maximum width of 4 m may use the port which has various berths, situated on the E and W banks of the river with depths alongside of 2⋅7 to 3⋅8 m. These depths are liable to change.
2
8.296 Description. Dwirzyno (54°10′N, 15°24′E), a summer resort and fishing port, lies at the mouth of Kana Resko, a short shallow channel leading into Jezioro Resko. Directions. Two lights, vertically disposed, are displayed from a concrete column on the W side of Kana Resko. The white sector (180°–180½°) of the direction light leads into the channel. A light is displayed from the E side of the entrance. Useful mark: Dwirzyno Beacon, a four-sided wooden structure, standing near the coast about 5 cables ENE of Dwirzyno.
8.298 Near Królewic, about 4 miles E of Jarosawiec Lighthouse (54°32′⋅5N, 16°32′⋅6E), long high wooded sand dunes provide a good landmark. The dunes on the coast E of Ustka (54°35′N, 16°52′E) are higher than those to the W, and behind them are lakes with shallow outlets to the sea. Behind the lakes are wooded hills visible from seaward. The high wooded coast about 1 mile WSW of Rowy is a good landmark. Lena Wydma, is a prominent high sand dune 6 cables from the coast and about 16 miles NE of Ustka Lighthouse. From the mouth of the Rzeka Piasnica, which previously formed the old boundary between Germany and Poland, a continuous ridge of low wooded dunes extend E as far as Karwia (54°50′N, 18°13′E), a small fishing village and summer resort about 4½ miles W of Rozewie. Between Karwia and Rozewie, the wooded coast gradually rises.
Submarine power cable 1
8.299 A submarine power cable between Sweden and Poland is landed on the Polish coast 2¾ miles WSW of Ustka (54°35′N, 16°52′E). See 1.71.
Principal marks 1
Dÿwirzyno 1
8.297 From Port Darowo (54°26′N, 16°23′E) to Rozewie the coastal passage leads generally ENE for about 77 miles, passing S of awica Supska. There are numerous patches of foul ground and wrecks off this part of the coast, the positions of which may be seen on the chart. Depths of 20 m or less extend up to 8½ miles off the coast between Rowy (54°40′N, 17°03′E) and eba, 19 miles ENE. The route enters a former mined area towards its E end; see 1.8.
2
3
348
8.300 Landmarks: Darowo Lighthouse (54°26′⋅4N, 16°22′⋅7E) (8.272). Rusinowo Church (54°30′⋅6N, 16°30′⋅5E). Jarosawiec Lighthouse (red round tower, white dome, 31 m in height) (54°32′⋅4N, 16°32′⋅5E). Ustka Lighthouse (reddish brown octagonal stone tower, white cupola, 22 m in height) (54°35′⋅3N, 16°51′⋅3E). Goƕa Rowokó (115 m in height) (54°39′N, 17°13′E), on the summit of which there is a triangulation tower. Czopino Lighthouse (round brick tower with black cupola, 25 m in height) (54°43′⋅1N, 17°14′⋅4E). Stilo Lighthouse (metal column, red, white and black bands, two galleries, 33 m in height) (54°47′⋅2N, 17°44′⋅0E). Rozewie Lighthouse (red round tower, red top, two galleries) (54°49′⋅9N, 18°20′⋅2E).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Major lights: Darowo Light − as above. Jarosawiec Light − as above. Ustka Light − as above. Czopino Light − as above. Stilo Light − as above. Rozewie Light − as above.
Limiting conditions 1
2
Directions 1
2
3
4
(continued from 8.273) 8.301 From a position NNW of Port Darowo (54°26′N, 16°23′E) the passage leads generally ENE passing: NNW of Jarosawiec (54°32′N, 16°32′E) where the coast is cliffy and on which stands a light; a dangerous wreck lies 13½ miles N of the light. Thence: SSE of awica Supska (Stolpe Bank) (54°55′N, 16°39′E), an extensive bank of brown and grey sand with aleast depth of 8⋅0 m over it, thence: NNW of Rowy (54°40′N, 17°03′E) (8.315) and an offshore shoal, marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: NNW of shallows which extend up to 7 miles offshore between Rowy and eba, thence: NNW of eba Light-buoy (safe water) (54°47′⋅1N, 17°33′⋅8E), thence: Clear of a dangerous wreck lying 7 miles N of Rozewie (54°50′N, 18°20′E), a high, precipitous headland, attaining an elevation of 54 m, from where a light is displayed. The Baltic Beta Oil Platform lies 39 miles N of Rozewie. For details see 2.9. Caution. Lights are displayed from a group of seven dolphins extending up to 3½ cables offshore about 4 miles ENE of Stilo Lighthouse (54°47′N, 17°44′E). The dolphins are linked by an electric cable. Vessels must not approach within 1¼ cables of the dolphins.
3
Arrival information 1
2
Useful marks Dom Wypoczynkomy (54°46′⋅1N, 17°33′⋅8E), a castle with a tower. Tower, 7 cables N of Stilo Lighthouse (54°47′⋅2N, 17°44′⋅0E) (8.300). (Directions for Gdynia and Gdamsk continue at 9.19 and for Kaliningrad at 9.177)
1
Port Ustka and approaches General information 1
2
8.303 Description. Ustka (54°35′N, 16°52′E), with a population of about 17 300, is a small commercial and fishing port standing on both banks at the mouth of Rzeka Supia and is the port for Supsk, a town with a population of about 100 000, 9 miles SE. Function. Exports include grain and general cargo. Topography. On near approach, Ustka Church with its conspicuous spire, 4 cables SSE of the lighthouse, the Port Captains building and pilot lookout, close W of the lighthouse, all serve to identify the port area. Port Authority. Harbour Master’s Office, ul, Marynarki Polskiej 3, 76−270 Ustka, Poland.
8.305 Port operations. The port is radar equipped and can assist vessels in the event of poor visibility. Notice of ETA: 24 hours before arrival in the roads. Anchorage in the roadstead off Ustka is best obtained in a depth of 13⋅5 m, about 6½ miles offshore with Ustka church spire bearing 183°. The Harbour Master’s Office must be informed on anchoring and the vessel must be ready to sail from the anchorage during strong onshore winds. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 40 m LOA and vessels carrying dangerous cargoes. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Local knowledge is required and no attempt should be made to enter without a pilot.
Harbour
8.302 1
8.304 Controlling depths. Depths in the entrance fairway through the outer harbour average 5⋅5 m and in the river between 4 and 5⋅2 m, but both outside and within the harbour silting is liable to take place, especially during continued stormy weather. Deepest and longest berth. Koobrzeskie Quay. Water level. With heavy gales from WNW through N, to ENE, water level may rise up to 1 m above mean level and with gales from ESE to WSW through S, may fall a similar amount, but such variations are unusual. Density of water in the harbour is 1⋅000 g/cm3. Maximum size of vessel: length 58 m; breadth 11⋅5 m; draught 4⋅5 m. Ice. During average winters ice does not generally cause hindrance to navigation. Local weather and sea state. In heavy onshore gales, entry into harbour should not be attempted on account the heavy swell, strong coastal current, heavy breakers and narrow entrance.
2
3
349
8.306 General layout. Ustka Awanaport, the outer harbour, is formed between two nearly parallel concrete breakwaters which extend about 320 m NNW from the coast each side of the mouth of Rzeka Supia. The inner harbour extends as far as the railway bridge, about 6 cables SSE of the entrance, and is contained by the strengthened banks of Rzeka Supia. The river flows into the outer harbour between training walls faced with iron sheeting leaving an entrance from the outer harbour 28 m in width. Traffic signals. If the weather is so stormy that entry becomes dangerous or impossible, the appropriate signal from The International Code of Signals will be displayed at the signal mast close E of the Port Captains building. Current. The current sets W across the entrance of Port Ustka with winds from N through E to SSE, and E with winds from N through W to SSW A rate of 2 kn is general with winds blowing parallel to the coast. With winds from between SSW and SSE, the current flowing out of the river is noticeable, which during the spring thaw may attain a rate of 2 kn. Caution. With strong onshore gales a considerable swell runs into harbour and vessels may have to ride to an anchor with warps to the shore.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
Directions 1
2
Directions
8.307 The port is approached on a SSE heading with Ustka Lighthouse (54°35′⋅3N, 16°51′⋅3E) ahead until the entrance is clearly visible, whence a course midway between the breakwaters should be steered. The entrance is 40 m in width and the channel runs alongside the 350 m long E breakwater. The E and W breakwater heads are painted red and green, repectively. Caution. About ½ cable inside the head of the W breakwater, the old W breakwater extends in a curve about 45 m into the outer harbour almost level with the water. It is marked at its extremity by an iron construction with two horizontal yellow stripes.
1
2
Useful marks 8.308 1
Ustka Church, slender spire, (54°34′⋅8N, 16°51′⋅6E). E breakwater head (red mast, white band, 10 m in height). W breakwater head (green mast, white base, 10 m in height).
3
Basins and berths
Basins and berths 8.309 There are concrete quays on both banks of the river with a total length of 2 500 m, of which the longest is Koobrzeskie Quay (310 m in length with a depth alongside of 5⋅0 m). There are also the following basins (positioned from Ustka Lighthouse (54°35′⋅3N, 16°51′⋅3E)): Basen Weglowy — 110 m long, 55 m wide, depth 4⋅5 m (1 cable SW). Basen Budowlany — 110 m long (3 cables S).
1
2
Port services 1
8.310 Repairs. There is a slip suitable for vessels up to 40 m in length with a beam of 8 m and a draught of 2⋅1 m. Facilities are available to carry out hull and machinery repairs on fishing vessels. Supplies. Fuel oil at the bunker wharf; fresh water, ice factory at Wadysawowskie Quay. Rescue. A rescue vessel, inshore lifeboat and rescue equipment are stationed at the port.
1
General information
2
3
8.311 Description. eba (54°46′N, 17°33′E), a small fishing town with a population of about 4000, lies on the E side of the mouth of Rzeka eba which flows from Jezioro ebsko into Baltic Sea. Entrance is prohibited with stormy winds from W, through N to E, due to the heavy ground swell off the breakwaters which may cause vessels to strike the bottom and lose control. Even in light winds blowing onshore a heavy surf breaks off the breakwaters. A strong current also sets across the entrance, and in such conditions entry should not be attempted. If entrance is prohibited the following signal will be shown from a tower close E of the root of the E breakwater: Day signal — two red triangular flags, one above the other. Night signal — a red light over a green light.
8.313 The harbour extends S to the road bridge and has concrete quays on each river bank providing a total berthing space of about 1700 m. There are three basins as follows: Basen Osadowy — 210 m long, which has a deviation dolphin for compass correction. Basen Gospodarczy — a small basin 130 m long. Basen Rybacki — 400 m long and 25 to 30 m in width, lies at the mouth of a channel leading to Jezioro Sarbsko. Lights are displayed at the breakwater heads and at the basin entrances. Caution. A submarine cable is laid across the entrance to Basen Rybacki.
Port services
Port eba and approaches
1
8.312 Approach the port from a position in the vicinity of eba Light-buoy (safe water), moored about 1¼ miles N of the harbour entrance. Thence the track leads SSW to the harbour entrance, keeping the white sector (202°−204°) of a directional light which stands on the W breakwater showing between the E and W breakwater heads. When ½ cable from the entrance, the centreline of the channel is used. The approach channel has a depth of 3⋅5 m but after storms the channel can become silted and depths reduced to 2⋅0 m. The entrance to the port is 30 m in width and formed by two concrete breakwaters extending each side of the river mouth, with the W breakwater extended N and curved E. A further light stands at the head of this breakwater. Depths at the port entrance are very changeable with the deepest water being on the E side of the fairway. The average depth in the port is 3⋅5 m. Vessels intending to enter the port, especially with a draught of more than 2 m should report to the Harbour Master by radio who will supply information about depths and the current navigational situation.
8.314 Repairs: shipyard with a slip for vessels up to 19 m in length. Compass adjustment. A dolphin which may be used by small vessels up to 17 m in length for compass adjustment stands in a shallow basin, 150 m in length, on the W bank. Supplies: fuel oil available. Rescue. A lifeboat and line-throwing apparatus are kept at eba.
Rowy General information 1
2
350
8.315 Description. Rowy (54°40′N, 17°03′E), a small fishing harbour at the mouth of Rzeka upawa, is also a holiday resort connected by road with Supsk (8.303). The river connects Jezioro Gardno with Baltic Sea and is only navigable by small craft. Local knowledge is required. awica Rowska, about 7 cables off the mouth of Rzeka upawa, is a rock and gravel patch with a depth of 4 m over it. RO buoy (N cardinal), which is withdrawn in winter, is moored about 1 cable N of awica Rowska. In stormy weather or with strong currents awica Rowska may become dangerous due to rough water.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 8
3
4
Fishing with nets and lines takes place on awica Rowska throughout the year except in winter. Nets are marked by flags and at night, by buoys with white lights. Directions. The alignment (144°) of Rowy Leading Lights lead into the harbour: Front light (white triangle, point up, on concrete column, 8 m in height) (54°40′⋅0N, 17°03′⋅2E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on concrete column, 9 m in height) (close SE of front light). The entrance to the river is 12 m in width, narrowing to between 6 and 7 m. There is a depth of about 2 m at the
5
351
entrance but this is liable to considerable variation depending on the wind direction; strong winds cause silting and shoaling off the entrance and an increase in strength of the river current may be expected. Port Authorities should be consulted on each visit for the current depths and navigational situation. A power cable above the entrance channel restricts the port to vessels with a height above the water of less than 6⋅8 m. Berth. There is about 200 m of berthing space on each side of the river.
Home
Contents
Index Chapter 9 - Gulf of Gdamsk
9.2
0
2 23 9.
9.177
9. 19
Port W*adys*awowo
Baltiysk 9.150
Hel 9.37 Gdynia 9.46
Gdamsk 9.78
Port Północny 9.111
Zalew Wi?lany
0205
352
Kaliningrad 9.172 9.178
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 9 GULF OF GDASK GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2369, 2688
Scope of the chapter 1
9.1 This chapter describes Gulf of Gdask, known to the Poles as Zatoka Gdaska, which lies S of a line joining Rozewie (54°50′N, 18°20′E) and Mys Taran, about 57 miles E. On the SW side, the principal ports of Gdynia and Gdask are among the largest in the entire Baltic area. It is divided into the following sections: Gulf of Gdask — West side (9.8). Gulf of Gdask — East side (9.146).
2
proceeding to and from ports on the SW side of the gulf. The schemes are not IMO adopted but the Polish authorities advise that the principles for the use of routeing systems defined in Rule 10 of International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972) apply. Regulated areas. There are a number of regulated areas within Gulf of Gdask, as shown on the charts, which are periodically closed to navigation and fishing. See Appendix II. Pollution. Owing to the non-tidal nature of these waters, Polish and Russian authorities are rigorous in the application of anti-pollution regulations. See 1.72.
Topography 1
2
9.2 The W shore of the gulf between the NW end of Wadysawowo (54°48′N, 18°25′E), at the NW end of Mierzeja Helska (9.10), and Gdynia, 16 miles S, is high and mainly cliffy and is comprised of Zatoka Pucka (9.28). From Gdynia a partly wooded range of hills extends about 10 miles SSE as far as Gdask. Between Gdask and Baltiysk, about 45 miles ENE, the coastline consists of sand dunes which, especially in the W part, are covered with fir trees. Farther inland the high land on the SE side of Zalew Wilany may be seen. From Baltiysk to Mys Taran, the dunes give way to rugged cliffs, above which the land increases in elevation towards Mys Taran.
Rescue 1
Natural conditions 1
International boundary 1
9.3 The boundary between Poland and Russia, shown on the chart, is marked by the alignment (136½°) of light-beacons as follows: Front (white square framework tower, black stripes, 19 m in height) (54°27′⋅5N, 19°38′⋅6E). Rear (similar structure, 21 m in height) (580 m from front light-beacon).
2
Hazards 1
9.4 Fishing is actively carried out in Gulf of Gdask from early in spring to the winter months. Nets and lines are laid out at considerable distances from the coast. Former mined areas. A former mined area, shown on the chart, lies in Gulf of Gdask. The area is open to unrestricted surface navigation, but mines could still present a hazard for vessels anchoring, fishing or engaged in submarine or seabed operations. For further details see 1.8.
3
Traffic regulations 1
9.5 Traffic Separation Schemes. Mandatory TSS, shown on the chart, are established within Gulf of Gdask for ships
9.6 In the area covered by this chapter, SAR operations in Polish waters are co-ordinated by MRCC Gdynia and in Russian waters by MRSC Kaliningrad. See 1.159 and 1.160 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5 for further details.
4
353
9.7 Water level. This may vary by as much as 1 m; strong S winds cause the water level to lower and strong N winds raise the water level. Currents in Gulf of Gdask depend largely on the strength and direction of the wind; in calm conditions there is a weak NW flow along the coast. Ice. On the open coastline from Rozewie to Hel, 22 miles SE, ice is only encountered occasionally and Gulf of Gdask is free of ice in mild winters. In average winters some fast-ice forms round part of the shores of the gulf, particularly the S shore, but this is seldom experienced at any considerable distance from land. In addition, pack ice occurs in the gulf, but navigation is seldom seriously hampered as it is usually possible to work through the drifting ice. At times however, larger masses of broken or compact pack-ice, which may impede navigation, may be encountered. Ice in the gulf appears in the latter half of December or in January, and clears about the middle of March. In one particularly severe winter the ice did not begin to disappear until the beginning of April and drifting ice was encountered as late as the middle of that month. The harbours in the gulf are only rendered difficult for navigation on account of ice in very hard winters. Caution. Mariners are cautioned not to rely on floating navigational aids during the winter when many buoys are withdrawn or replaced.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
GULF OF GDAMSK — WEST SIDE GENERAL INFORMATION
2
Charts 2688, 2369
Area covered 1
9.8 This section describes the Polish waters on the W side of Gulf of Gdask from Rozewie (54°50′N, 18°20′E) (8.301) to the Polish/Russian border (54°27′⋅5N, 19°38′⋅5E). It is arranged as follows: Approaches (9.9). Gdynia (9.46). Gdask (9.78). Port Pónocny (9.111). Rzeka Wisa Delta (9.130).
Traffic regulations 1
APPROACHES 2
General information Charts 2688, 2369
Routes 1
9.9 The routes described are for vessels approaching Gdynia, Gdask and Port Pónocny from the W.
Topography 1
2
3
4
9.10 The coastline is high and bare in the vicinity of Rozewie (54°50′N, 18°20′E), but thence towards Wadysawowo, about 2½ miles SE (9.24), it gradually diminishes in height until it is almost at sea level. Mierzeja Helska, the narrow peninsula on the W side of the gulf, extends SE for about 18 miles from a point about 4 miles SE of Rozewie. On the seaward side of the peninsula, a line of wooded dunes, from 3 to 29 m high, extends along its whole length, and from Jastarnia (54°42′N, 18°41′E) to the SE end there is a dense forest of fir trees. The coastal bank is narrow and fairly steep-to on the NE side of the peninsula. During N and NE winds it is advisable to give the coast a wide berth. Between Wadysawowo and Kuƺnica, about 7 miles SE, the coast is strengthened by lines of sharp pointed groyne posts extending up to 50 m offshore. With on-shore winds blowing it is dangerous to approach close to the coast in this section, where the depths offshore are subject to continual change. From Mikoszewo (54°20′N, 18°58′E) the coast runs E then ENE for about 24 miles to the Polish-Russian border, for a greater part the coastline consists of the Mierzeja Wilana, a narrow strip of land which separates Baltic Sea from Zalew Wilany. The land, fringed with a sandy beach, rises to heights of between 15 and 30 m in places.
Vessel traffic services 1
9.11 A mandatory reporting system is in operation in the approaches to Gdynia/Gdask. The following vessels are required to report to the Harbour Master at the port of destination when crossing the latitude of 54°45′N: Vessels of 50 m LOA and over, bound for Gdask. Vessels over 60 m LOA, bound for Gdynia. Other vessels, bound for either port, in circumstances involving risk of collision or pollution.
In addition to the required reports all vessels should obtain permission to enter the roadstead at either port from the appropriate Harbour Master. Thence control over the safety of navigation and anchoring is exercised by VTS Zakota Gdaska. For details of information required in reports see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). See also 1.15.
9.12 Prohibited areas, due to the presence of munitions, are situated: 8¼ miles NNE of ZN Light-buoy (54°36′⋅8N, 19°06′⋅1E), and centred on position 54°36′N, 18°33′E as shown on the chart. Restricted area. An area with a diameter of 500 m is established, centred on 54°50′N, 18°26′E, in which it is forbidden to establish fishing equipment. GUM Coast Radio Station must be notified before entering the area. Restricted area. Fishing is prohibited in the immediate approaches to, and within, Port Pónocny.
Anchorage 1
9.13 Vessels seeking shelter during SW winds on the E side of Rozewie may obtain good anchorage, as shown on the plan, in a depths of about 10−14 m, sand, 5 cables N of the entrance to Wadysawowo (9.24).
Measured distance 1
2
3
9.14 On the SW side of Mierzeja Helska (9.10), 2½ miles NW of Hel Lighthouse (9.18), there is a measured distance, shown on the chart, in two sections of 1 mile each, marked by three pairs of beacons, each pair in line bearing 050°: South limit marks (triangular topmarks, front, point down, rear, point up). Middle limit marks (common) (front beacon, diamond topmark, rear beacon, ball topmark). North limit marks (triangular topmarks, front, point up, rear point down). Running track: Buoys A, B and C (special) are moored about 1 mile offshore and mark the course 140°–320°. The sea area used for speed trials lies within restricted area No 5 which is periodically closed for navigation and fishing. Commercial vessels may use it after prior agreement with the Polish Navy and the Harbour Master at Gdynia.
Compass adjustment 1
2
354
9.15 Beacons, for the adjustment of compasses, stand near Hel Lighthouse (54°36′⋅0N, 18°48′⋅8E) (9.18). Their relative positions and alignments with the lighthouse are as follows (with positions from the lighthouse): Beacon (double triangle topmark, points up) (2½ cables SE) in line bearing 315°. Beacon (diamond shaped topmark) (3 cables SW) in line bearing 045°. Beacon (double diamond topmark) (1½ cables W) in line bearing 090°.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Dumping ground 1
Approaches to Port PóÞnocny from west
9.16 Vessels are warned against anchoring or trawling near a position 3 mile ENE of Jastarnia (54°42′N, 18°41′E) which is used as an ammunition dumping ground.
1
Rescue 1
9.17 In the area covered by this section there are rescue craft stationed at Wadysawowo (9.24), Hel (9.37), Gdynia (9.46), Górki Wschodnie (9.137), wibno (9.144), Tolkmicko (9.216) and Sztutowo (9.216). See also 1.159.
2
Connecting routes
Principal marks 1
2
3
9.18 Landmarks: Rozewie Lighthouse (54°49′⋅8N, 18°20′⋅2E) (8.300). Swarzewo Church (54°45′⋅6N, 18°24′⋅0E). Jastarnia Church (54°42′⋅2N, 18°40′⋅2E). Jastarnia Lighthouse (white round tower, red bands and cupola, 13 m in height) (54°42′⋅0N, 18°40′⋅9E). Góra Szwedow Beacon (grey metal framework tower with gallery) (54°37′⋅6N, 18°49′⋅1E). Hel Lighthouse (red octagonal masonry tower, 38 m in height) (54°36′⋅0N, 18°48′⋅8E). Major lights: Rozewie Light — as above. Wadysawowo Domu Rybaka fishery building, (tower, 78 m in height) (54°47′⋅8N, 18°24′⋅6E). Jastarnia Light — as above. Hel Light — as above. Port Pónocny Light (54°24′⋅0N, 18°41′⋅8E) (9.124). Krynica Morska Light (red round tower, white gallery) (54°23′⋅1N, 19°27′⋅0E).
1
1
2
3
Directions
2
3
9.22 Caution. An obstruction to navigation lies in a depth of 10⋅6 m about 1¼ miles E of Cypel Redowski (54°29′N, 18°34′E) (9.48), off which point and inside the 10 m contour, there are dangerous rocks. Restricted area. An area extending up to 1½ miles from the coast, lying between the S entrance to Gdynia harbour and a position 1 mile NW of the entrance to the Port of Gdask is a fish sanctuary, and is closed to normal coastal navigation. Vessels bound for Sopot (54°27′N, 18°34′E), a seaside and health resort, must proceed there direct from 54°27′⋅7N, 18°36′⋅7E. Fishing. Salmon nets are laid annually from mid January to mid May, in the area between the Gdynia inner anchorage and Orowo, within 2 miles of the coast; in order to avoid damage to the nets during that period vessels should keep clear of the area.
Useful marks
Approaches to Gdynia and Gdamsk from west 9.19 From a position N of Rozewie (54°50′N, 18°20′E) (8.301), clear of the dangerous wreck (7 miles N), the track leads SE for about 28 miles to the N end of the TSS leading to Gdynia and Gdask, about 5 miles N of Hel Light-buoy (safe water) (54°35′⋅5N, 18°53′⋅4E) passing (with positions from Hel Lighthouse (9.18)): NE of a wreck with a depth of 12 m over it (19 miles NW), thence: NE of a dangerous wreck (position doubtful) (10 miles NNW), thence: NE of an area, shown on the chart, from Jastarnia to the SW tip of Hel sandspit, which is temporarily closed to foreign shipping. Thence the track follows the SW-bound lane of the TSS for 10 miles to the vicinity of GN Light-buoy (safe water) (54°32′N, 18°48′E) where the scheme divides. The W-bound lane leads about 4½ miles to the Gdynia pilot boarding place at GD Light-buoy (safe water), passing S of a light-buoy (special), marking a spoil ground on the N side of the fairway. The SW-bound lane continues for about 5½ miles to the Gdask pilot boarding place at NP Light-buoy (safe water), passing NW of a light-buoy (special), marking a spoil ground on the E side of the fairway.
9.21 Two-way recommended traffic routes connect GD Light-buoy with NP Light-buoy, GN Light-buoy with ZS Light-buoy and Hel Light-buoy with ZN Light buoy. Vessels moving between the approaches to Gdynia and the approaches to Gdask should use the former link or navigate in the main traffic separation lanes.
Gdynia/Gdamsk — inshore traffic zone
(continued from 8.13 or 8.302)
1
9.20 From a position N of Rozewie (54°50′N, 18°20′E) (8.301), clear of the dangerous wreck (7 miles N), the track leads ESE for about 32 miles to the N end of the TSS leading to Port Pónocny, 4 miles NNW of ZN Light-buoy (special) (54°37′N, 19°06′E). Thence the track leads SSE in the inbound lane for about 4 miles then SSW for a further 11 miles to ZS Light-buoy (special) (54°26′⋅5N, 18°57′⋅6E). The track continues WSW for about 2¼ miles to PP Light-buoy,(safe water) (54°25′⋅8N, 18°53′⋅9E) which is the pilot boarding position.
9.23 1
Kuƺnica Church (54°44′⋅2N, 18°34′⋅8E). Góra Donas Beacon (elevation 206 m) (54°28′N, 18°26′E). Sopot Mole Root Light (white tower) (54°26′⋅8N, 18°34′⋅4E). (Directions for Gdynia continue at 9.69, for Gdamsk at 9.103 and for Port PóÞnocny at 9.126)
Fishing ports Chart 2688 plan of WÞadysÞawowo
WÞadysÞawowo 1
2
355
9.24 Description. Wadysawowo (54°48′N, 18°25′E) is a fishing port. The small harbour is enclosed by an E mole and a curved N mole, respectively, about 400 and 700 m in length, with an entrance between them, facing E, about 70 m wide. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 6 vessels totalling 5291 dwt. Port Authority. PPiUR Szkuner Dzial Administracji, ul, Portowa 22 84−120 Wadysawowo. Depths. In the harbour the depths are subject to change and vary between 2⋅5 and 5⋅0 m, the least depths being along the N mole. The permitted draught for vessels using
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
3
1
2
3
1
the harbour is 4 m; depths of less than 5 m lie close N of the approach leading line. Anchorage. See 9.13. Port radio. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 2) for details. 9.25 Directions. From the vicinity of WA Light-buoy (safe water) the track leads W for about 8 cables on the alignment (260°) of Wadysawowo Leading Lights: Front light (yellow framework tower) (54°47′⋅7N, 18°25′⋅2E). Rear light (on roof of ice building) (245 m from front light). Maintain this alignment until course can be altered to pass between the mole-heads. The width of the fairway is about 60 m at this point. Lights are displayed from each outer mole head; a green 8-sided tower stands on the N mole, and a red column with gallery, 10 m in height, stands on the E mole. A buoy (port hand) marks the extremity of the shallow water SW of the N mole. Caution. During the approach, continuous soundings should be obtained in view of the frequent variations of depths off the harbour, particularly within 1 cable of the entrance. Berths. Within the harbour there is an inner basin in the W corner protected by two inner moles. A light is displayed from the head of the N inner mole. Vessels may lie alongside the N inner mole. There are three fishing piers within the basin. 9.26 Repairs: repair workshop; small slipway for fishing vessels. Other facilities: medical facilities. Supplies: fuel oil; provisions. Communications. Connected by rail with Puck and Hel. Rescue. Rescue craft are stationed at a coast rescue station in Wadysawowo which is also equipped with vehicles carrying rescue equipment.
4
Kana Gebinka is the only deepened fairway leading to the inner part of Zatoka Pucka; the channel passes about 3 cables N of the extremity of Cypel Rewski, a narrow tongue of land extending about 7 cables N of Rewa (54°38′N, 18°30′E). The width of the channel is between 80 to 100 m and has a least depth of 2⋅8 m. Maximum recommended draught for vessels is 2⋅0 m. Storms from the NW and SE may cause silting.
Topography 1
9.29 The W coast of Zatoka Pucka, between Cypel Oksywski (54°33′N, 18°34′E) and Wadysawowo (16 miles NW) (9.24), is made up of three flat relatively high cape areas: Oksywie, Puck and Swarzewska. The shores in these areas are craggy and cliff like. The capes are divided by the wide boggy lowlands of the Reda and Putnica rivers. Mierzeja Helska (9.10) is low and covered with conifer forests.
Fishing 1
2
Chart 2688
9.30 There are several protected fish spawning areas in the bay whose boundaries and protected periods are shown on the chart. In addition on the W side close offshore N of Puck (9.45) and in the area between Cypel Rzucewo (54°42′N, 18°28′E) and Cypel Rewski, 3½ miles SSE. Fishing is prohibited these areas from mid April to mid July annually. Fishing is prohibited within the charted area centred 1½ miles WSW of Hel. See also 9.31. Fish trading area. An area with a diameter of 500 m is established, centred on 54°35′N, 18°47′E, in which: It is forbidden to lay out fishing equipment; GUM Coast Radio Station must be notified before entering the area. Caution. Buoys (black and yellow), some of which are fitted with radar reflectors, are periodically laid across the entrance to Zatoka Pucka; they are for fishery purposes and have no navigational significance.
ChaÞupy 1
9.27 Chaupy is a small fishing village about 3½ miles SE of Wadysawowo (54°48′N, 18°25′E).
Hazards 1
Zatoka Pucka Description 1
2
3
9.28 Zatoka Pucka lies in the NW part of Gulf of Gdask, N of a line connecting Cape Hel (54°35′⋅6N, 18°48′⋅5E) and Cypel Oksywski, 9 miles SW (9.48). The bay is divided into two parts by Rybitwia Mielizna, a shoal which, with strong SW winds, dries in parts and extends from Kuƺnica (54°44′N, 18°35′E) to Rewa (9.44) on the mainland 6½ miles SW. The outer part of the bay is generally deep. On the NE side, from the Hel sandspit to Kuƺnica a narrow coastal flat extends up to 1½ miles offshore in places; it is steep-to and drops sharply to depth of 20 m. The SE portion is called Duga Mielizna and the NW part is called Mielizna Bórzyska. The inner part of the bay, NW of Rybitwia Mielizna, is generally shallow, with depths of less than 2 m, except for two deep patches at the S end known as Kuƺnica Jama and Chaupska Jama. These are separated by the shoal area known as Piasek Dziewiczy.
2
9.31 There are several obstructions, areas of foul ground, and wrecks dangerous to navigation, within the bay, the positions of which are shown on the chart. Navigation is prohibited within an area, radius 1 cable, centred on 54°42′⋅1N, 18°37′⋅0E, in which lies a wreck containing ammunition. Permanent surface nets have been set up in the bay to the NW of the Gdynia-Jastarnia fairway particularly within the following positions: 54°39′⋅3N, 18°33′⋅0E; 54°41′⋅1N, 18°35′⋅6E; 54°39′⋅8N, 18°39′⋅6E; 54°38′⋅1N, 18°37′⋅5E. The area is not buoyed and mariners are advised to navigate with caution.
Prohibited Area 1
9.32 Prohibited areas are established, as shown on the chart, as follows: Centred on 54°41′⋅4N 18°33′⋅0E. This area contains numerous wrecks. SW of Zatoka Pucka, centred on 54°35′N, 18°34′E.
Measured distance 1
356
9.33 See 9.14.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Ice 1
Jastarnia
9.34 Ice in Zatoka Pucka occurs on average 63 to 72 days per year; in harsh winters it can last 120 to 125 days. With the first appearance of ice, markers for the shallows and fairways leading into ports are removed. During the entire ice season, the ports of Puck and Jastarnia are closed to navigation.
1
Anchorage 1
9.35 During onshore storms anchorage Zatoka Pucka, in depths of 11 to prohibited area in the SW part (9.32) cables extending across the entrance 9.59.
1
may be obtained in 40 m, clear of the and of the submarine to the bay. See also
2
Useful marks 9.36 Hel Church (54°36′⋅5N, 18°48′⋅2E). Jastarnia Church (54°42′⋅2N, 18°40′⋅2E). Jastarnia Lighthouse (54°42′⋅0N, 18°40′⋅9E) (9.18). Jastrzřbia Góra (54°49′⋅3N, 18°21′⋅3E). Swarzewo Church (54°45′⋅6N, 18°24′⋅0E). Tower and chimney, (54°41′⋅2N, 18°28′⋅0E and 1 cable farther S, respectively).
1
3
Hel 1
2
1
2
1
9.37 Description. Hel (54°36′N, 18°48′E), a summer resort and important fishing base, is situated on the W side of the S end of Mierzeja Helska. The harbour is formed by two outer and two inner moles and the entrances between the mole-heads are 80 and 50 m wide, respectively. Lights are displayed from the outer and inner mole-heads. Port Authority. Boatswain’s Office, Zeglarska 1 St, PL 84−150 Hel. Depths. The outer basin has depths of 6 m or more, with depths at the berths ranging from 4 to 6 m. The inner basin has depths ranging from 2 to 5 m. 9.38 Directions. From a position 2¾ miles SE of Hel Lighthouse the track leads WNW for about 2½ miles, passing (with positions from Hel Lighthouse (9.18)): SSE of the boundary of the area temporarily closed to foreign shipping (8 cables SSE), thence: SSE of HL-S Light-buoy (S cardinal) which marks the S edge of the coastal shoal. Once clear of HL−S Light-buoy, and within the green sector (000°−290°) of the outer harbour E Mole Light, the track leads N for about 1 mile staying clear of the coastal bank, which is covered by the white sector of the light. Naval harbour. Ruiny Stary Hel, the naval harbour, is situated about 1 mile NNW of Hel. A pair of beacons stand 1 mile NW of Hel Lighthouse, in line they bear 000° and lead to the harbour. 9.39 Berths. On the E side of the outer basin there is a cargo berth, 146 m long with a depth alongside of 6 m. 9.40 Repairs: workshops; repair facilities for fishing vessels. Other facilities: medical centre. Supplies: provisions; fuel oil. Communications. In summer a passenger ferry connects the resort with Gdynia and Gdask. Rescue. A motor lifeboat is stationed at Hel.
9.41 Description. Jastarnia (54°42′N, 18°41′E) is a fishing village, with a population of about 3400, situated on Mierzeja Helska, with its harbour in Zatoka Pucka. The harbour is protected by two breakwaters about 100 m long; the entrance is 60 m wide. The harbour has a depth of about 4⋅5 to 5⋅0 m. 9.42 Directions. Jastarnia Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, red border, on red pipe with white bands (54°41′⋅8N, 18°40′⋅56E). Rear light (red square in corner of town hall tower) (188 m from front light). From the vicinity of JAS Light-buoy (safe water) (54°39′⋅6N, 18°40′⋅3E) the alignment (000½°) of these lights lead N for about 2 miles to the harbour entrance passing Jastarnia Light-beacon (white column, red bands, concrete base) (5½ cables S of the harbour entrance), which marks the W side of the entrance to the buoyed channel, dredged to 4⋅5 m and about 60 m wide. The coloured sector of the light-beacon marks the shallow water on either side of the entrance. Caution. The channel is subject to narrowing as a result of silting from the adjacent shallow patches. During bad weather it is important to adhere closely to the leading line. In 2001, owing to shoaling, vessels were advised to keep at least 25 m from the W breakwater head. Berths. The harbour has about 620 m of concrete wharves; at the N wharf is a passenger ferry pier, 50 m in length and in the NW part is a pier for fishing vessels. Supplies. Provisions are available.
Kuƺnica 1
2
3
9.43 Description. Kuƺnica (54°44′N, 18°35′E), 4 miles NW of Jastarnia and administratively part of it, has a pier suitable for fishing vessels on its E side. Depths near the pier are 2 m, but are variable on the approach, extra care should be used. Local knowledge. The inner approach to the harbour requires local knowledge. Directions. From the JAS Light-buoy (9.42) the track leads NW for about 2½ miles, within the white sector of the Jastarnia Light-beacon, passing clear of the W edge of the coastal bank, marked by MB Buoy (W cardinal), moored about 2 miles SW of Jastarnia Church. Thence NNW for about 2¼ miles to KUZ Light-buoy (safe water) (54°43′⋅0N, 18°35′⋅5E). Kuƺnica Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, red border, on grey framework tower) (54°44′⋅0N, 18°34′⋅9E). Rear light (white triangle, point down on grey framework tower) (188 m from front light). The alignment (339°) of these lights, leads about 1 mile to the pier. Note. The harbour is subordinate to the Harbour Master at Hel.
Rewa 1
357
9.44 Description. Rewa (54°38′N, 18°30′E) is a fishing village in the inner part of Zatoka Pucka. Directions. From G Light-buoy (safe water) moored 7½ cables ENE of Cypel Rewski, which marks the S end of Kana Gebinka, the fairway leads generally W for about 1 mile.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
2
Thence, from the inner end of Kana Gebinka the track leads S to the harbour, in the white sector (167°–177°), ahead, of Rewa Light (orange lattice beacon, white trapezium, orange frame) (54°38′⋅0N, 18°30′⋅7E). 3
Puck 1
2
3
9.45 Description. Puck (54°43′N, 18°25′E), situated near the head of the Zatoka Pucka, is a fishing and yachting harbour. The population is about 6800. The harbour, a small basin about 60 m long and 40 m wide, with a depth of 3 m, is approached by a short buoyed channel. Local knowledge is required. Port Authority. Boatswain’s Office, Zeglarzy 1 St, PL 84−100 Puck. Directions. The directions given at 9.44 should be followed until N of Rewa. Thence, from a position about 1¼ miles N of Rewa Light (9.44), the track leads NNW for about 2½ miles, in the white sector (167°–177°), astern, of the light, passing WSW of a prohibited area 9.32 until Cypel Rzucewo (54°41′⋅7N, 18°28′⋅4E) bears 270° whence the track leads NW, passing clear of a buoy (safe water), 8 cables E of Cypel Rzucewo, for about 3¼ miles to the vicinity of P−K Light-buoy (safe water), moored about 1 mile ENE of the harbour, and thence to the following alignment: Puck-Reda Leading Marks. The alignment (238¼°) of these marks leads 8 cables WSW to the buoyed inner channel: Front mark (red square with white stripe on metal framework tower) (54°43′⋅4N, 18°24′⋅4E). Rear mark (similar to front structure) (close SW of front mark).
by wave action. Between this high land and Orowo, 7 cables S, and also a suburb of Gdynia, a valley runs inland. The wooded coast here is formed of steep cliffs and is fringed by rocks, some of which dry. A pier extends about 240 m from the shore at Orowo, and S of the pier the coast rises to a height of about 30 m. Farther S the coast becomes bare, gradually decreasing in height, but rises again about 1 mile S of Orowo to about 20 m and beyond that to over 40 m.
Approach and entry 1
2
9.49 The port is approached along the recommended routes, as shown on the chart. Awanport, Basen 3 and the inner harbour are entered on the alignment of leading lights, through the main harbour entrance (54°32′⋅2N, 18°34′⋅0E). Basins Nos 1 and 2 are entered via the S entrance, 1 mile S of the main entrance, and the Kanal Puudniowy which runs inside the outer breakwater. The N entrance is for the exclusive use of the Polish Navy.
Traffic 1
9.50 In 2003 the port was visited by 3291 vessels totalling 18⋅1 million dwt.
Port Authority 1
9.51 Port of Gdynia S.A., Rotterdamska 9 st, 81 337 Gdynia, Poland. Website: www.port.gdynia.pl E-Mail:
[email protected]
Limiting conditions
GDYNIA
Maximum draught General information 1
Charts 2688, 2680
9.52 In 2000 the approach channel had a depth of 14⋅1 m; the maximum draught for vessels entering Gdynia was 13⋅0 m.
Position 1
9.46 Gdynia (54°32′N, 18°33′E), a large industrial and commercial centre, is situated on the W side of Gulf of Gdask.
Deepest and longest berths 1
Function 1
9.47 The harbour is one of the largest and most modern ports within the Baltic area, handling all kinds of cargo, but in particular, general cargo, cars, containers, grain and coal. There is a considerable shipbuilding industry at Gdynia. The city of Gdynia with a population of 253 400 (1999) is situated at the S end of the harbour.
9.53 Deepest berth — Francuskie (9.71). Longest berth — Polskie (9.72).
Abnormal water levels 1
9.54 During long periods of W winds the water level increases up to 0⋅6 m, E winds can decrease the water level by 0⋅5 m.
Density of water 1
9.55 The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅006 g/cm3.
Topography 1
2
9.48 The port of Gdynia lies between Cypel Oksywski (54°33′N, 18°34′E) and Kamienna Góra (9.68), about 2 miles S, both of which coastal sections are moderately high. A pier extends for about 3 cables ENE from Cypel Oksywski and there are groynes extending from the coast for about 3 cables N of it. The coast S of Gdynia is steep and in places cliffy. At Redowo, a S suburb of Gdynia, the land rises and attains an elevation of 91 m surmounted by trees. Cypel Redowski (54°29′N, 18°34′E) is steep and continually being eroded
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
9.56 Length 245 m, maximum draught 13⋅0 m.
Ice 1
358
9.57 The port and roadstead are generally free of ice. Ice formation can occur from February to March. Winds from the N, E and S can cause shifting icefields in the roadstead which may create problems for small and medium sized vessels. Icebreakers keep the channels and roadsteads clear.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Arrival information Port radio 1
9.58 There is port radio station, located at Gdynia Port Control. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). For VTS in the approaches see 9.11.
2
Outer anchorages 1
2
9.59 The roadstead E of the harbour provides good anchorage, sheltered from all but E winds and in varying depths according to draught; the nature of the bottom being fine good holding sand. There are three anchorage areas, shown on the chart, with positions centred from the main harbour entrance: No 1 (1½ miles SE), for small vessels. No 2 (2¾ miles ESE), for medium-sized vessels. No 3 (4¾ miles ESE), for tankers. A speed limit of 7 kn applies in the roads. Anchoring is prohibited in Regulated Areas Nos 3 and 15. See Appendix II.
3
Traffic signals
Submarine cables 1
9.60 Submarine cables are laid in several places, as shown on the chart. Their positions are marked by boards and anchoring is prohibited in their vicinity.
1
Pilotage 1
2
of Cypel Oksywski, for about 1¾ miles, and has three entrances. The main entrance (54°32′⋅2N, 18°34′⋅0E) lies between detached breakwaters and is 150 m in width. The harbour is divided into outer and inner harbours. The former consists of Awanport and three basins to the S. Access to these basins is from Kanal Poudniowy which runs inside the outer breakwater, between the main entrance and the S entrance. Basen eglarski, a yacht harbour, open throughout the year, adjoins the S side of the S pier of Basen No 1 and is entered 2½ cables WSW of the S entrance to the main harbour The inner harbour comprises the basins and berths on the S side and the W end of Kana Portowy. The naval harbour comprises Basen 9 on the N side of the inner harbour and Basen 10 and 11 on the N side of Awanport. Lights, which are numerous within the harbour, are displayed, at the entrance to basins, on dolphins and at some pier-heads.
9.65 Traffic signals are shown, for the main entrance, from a white mast on the tower of the Harbour Master’s building, and for the S entrance, from a mast on the S end of Nabrzee Wejciowe; shapes and lights are disposed as shown in Diagram 9.65:
9.61 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 60 m LOA, vessels carrying hazardous cargoes, vessels not gas free, vessels overloaded or exceeding trim or with a dangerous list and vessels which are damaged. Pilot boards as follows: Vessels with a draught greater than 9 m or with hazardous cargoes close to GD Light-buoy, about 3½ miles E of the harbour entrance. Vessels with a draught less than 9 m, before Light-buoys G1−G2 about 1 mile E of the harbour entrance. Requests for pilots should be made as early as possible but not later than not later than 2 hours prior to arrival at the pilot boarding position, with confirmation 1 hour before arrival. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Tugs 1
9.62 Use of tugs is compulsory as follows: Vessels 90 to 130 m in length — one tug. Vessels 130 to 170 m in length — two tugs. Vessels 170 and upward in length — three tugs.
Regulations concerning entry 1
9.63 Commercial vessels must enter and leave the port through the main entrance, the S entrance can only be used with the Harbour Master’s permission. Commercial vessels are prohibited from using the N entrance. Gdynia − traffic signals (9.65)
Harbour General layout 1
2
9.64 The harbour at Gdynia is protected on its seaward side by breakwaters extending S from the coast, in the vicinity
359
Note. These traffic signals do not affect entry to, or exit from Basen eglarski. Vessels leaving the harbour have right of way over vessels entering.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Turning areas 1
9.66 Turning areas are located within the port as follows: Awanport — 500 m in diameter. Kana Portowy, opposite Basin 4 — 300 m in diameter. Kana Portowy, opposite Basin 8 — 270 m in diameter.
2
Useful marks
Current 1
9.67 There is generally a weak N set off the entrance to Gdynia Harbour. During winds from N to NE the set may turn to the S. Depending on the strength of the wind, the current may attain a rate of 2 kn.
Landmarks 1
2
1
2
9.68 Positioned from the main harbour entrance (54°32′⋅2N, 18°34′⋅0E): Three radio masts (red lights) (1¼ miles NW). Water Tower at Oksywski (8½ cables NNW). Harbour Master’s building (square buff-coloured observation and signal tower, 28 m in height) (5 cables W). Lattice tower (1 mile SW) at the Meterological Office. Kamienna Góra (48 m in height) (1½ miles SSW), surmounted by a metal cross, which is illuminated at night and clearly visible from the bay. Church (1¾ miles SSW). Chimney (2½ miles S) at Redowo. (continued from 9.23) 9.69 Gdynia Leading Lights: Front light (white metal framework tower, 15 m in height) (54°32′⋅2N, 18°32′⋅9E). Rear light (white metal framework tower, black stripe, 24 m in height) (5½ cables from front light). The alignment (271½°) of these lights leads W from GD Light-buoy (safe water) for about 3½ miles, passing between G1 and G2 Light-buoys (lateral), marking each Tower
9.70 Gdynia Harbour Breakwater Lights: S end of S detached breakwater (concrete tower, glass cupola, 11 m in height). N breakwater head light (black framework tower, 6 m in height). N detached breakwater, N end (red framework tower, white band, 8 m in height). Góra Donas Beacon (54°28′N, 18°26′E) (9.23).
Basins and berths Outer harbour 1
2
Directions for entering harbour 1
side of the 200 m wide channel leading to the main entrance. Lights are displayed, one each side of the main entrance as follows: N side (concrete tower, 13 m in height) at the S end of the N detached breakwater. S side (similar structure) at the N end of the S detached breakwater.
3
9.71 Awanport. The area between the outer and inner entrances and Basen No 3, is entered from the main entrance. The largest berth, Nabrzee Francuskie, is 512 m in length, maximum draught 12⋅8 m. Basen 10 and Basen 11 are for the use of naval vessels. Basen No 3. The N-most of the three basins, is entered through Awanport. It contains the Maritime and Baltic Bulk Terminals. Largest berths, Nabrzee Szwedzkie, 713 m long, maximum draught 10⋅5 m; Nabrzee Holenderskie, 500 m long, maximum draught 10⋅8 m. Basen No 2 is entered from Kana Poudniowy which leads to Awanport from the S entrance. In the NW corner is the Nauta Repair Yard and the LPG terminal is at the NE corner. Largest berth, Nabrzee lŅskie, is 589 m long, maximum draught 8⋅5 m. Basen No 1 is entered from Kana Poudniowy via the S entrance. Largest berth, Nabrzee Pomorskie, 626 m long, with depths of 5⋅0 to 6⋅9 m.
Front Leading light (2715V5)
Gdynia from E (9.69) (Photograph − Gareth J Kirk, MV Logos II)
(Original dated 2001)
360
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Inner harbour 1
2
3
9.72 Known as Kana Portowy, it is entered from Awanport via the inner breakwaters. The commercial berths lie on the S and W side. Basen No 9 on the N side is for naval vessels. Basen No 4. Largest berth, Nabrzee Polskie, is 1121 m long, maximum draught 11.0 m. Basen No 5. Largest berth, Nabrzee Rumuskie, is 886 m long, maximum draught 11⋅2 m. A Ro-Ro berth is situated on the SE side of the basin. Basen No 6 and 7. Nabrzee Wřgierskie on the SE side of Basen No 6 is 707 m long, maximum draught 8⋅8 m. Baltic Container Terminal. Situated on the N side of the W end of the inner harbour. It comprises two berths: Helskie No 1, 798 m long, maximum draught 10⋅3 m; Helskie No 2, 178 m long, with a depth of 8⋅5 m, and fitted with a Ro-Ro ramp.
Port Pónocny (9.111), 2 miles ESE of Nowy Port, is also administratively part of Gdask.
Function 1
9.79 Port Gdask and Nowy Port are large commercial areas, equipped with modern facilities to handle most types of vessel. The port handles general cargo, containers, fertilizer raw material, sulphur, ore, coal, timber and chemicals. In 1999 Gdask had a population of 459 000.
Topography 1
9.80 The coast between Sopot and Brzeno, about 3 miles SE, is low but rises gradually inland and attains a height of 131 m about 3¼ miles from the coast.
Port limits 1
9.81 The limits of the roadstead are as shown on the chart.
Port services Approach and entry
Repairs 1
2
9.73 Repairs of all kinds can be carried out. Largest floating dock: Length 127⋅0 m; breadth 28⋅2 m; lifting capacity of 4500 tonnes. Largest vessel; length 135⋅0 m, breadth 20⋅5 m. Largest ship lift: Length 50⋅0 m; breadth 17⋅2 m; lifting capacity 600 tonnes. Largest vessel, length 60⋅0 m; breadth 14⋅5 m. Major shipbuilding facility.
1
Traffic 1
Other facilities 9.74 Compass adjustment; deratting certificates; hospital; oily waste reception. 9.75 Fuel oil of all grades; water; provisions, ship and technical stores.
Maximum permitted draught 1
Communication 1
9.76 In summer there is a regular coastal service with ports in Gulf of Gdask. The nearest airport is at Gdask 20 km from Gdynia. 9.77 A life-saving motor vessel with diving apparatus and divers, and tugs with line throwing apparatus are available within a 50 mile radius from Gdynia.
1
2
GDAMSK General information 3
Charts 2688, 2680
Position 1
9.85 The maximum permitted draught for entry to Nowy Port is 10⋅2 m.
Vertical clearance
Rescue 1
9.84 Port of Gdask Authority S.A., 18 Zamknieta Street, 80 955 Gdask. Website: www.portgdansk.pl E-Mail:
[email protected]
Limiting conditions
Supplies 1
9.83 In 2003 the port, including Port Pónocny, was visited by 2710 vessels totalling over 33 million dwt.
Port Authority 1
1
9.82 The port is approached through a TSS and entered through a buoyed channel on the alignment of leading lights.
9.78 The Port of Gdask which includes Nowy Port (54°24′N, 18°40′E), lies in the SW corner of Gulf of Gdask.
361
9.86 Bridges. There are four bridges which span Martwa Wisa within the port boundaries, two of which are fixed bridges joining Wyspa Ostrów to the W bank. Most Siennicki, a road bridge, 7 cables SE of the S point of Wyspa Ostrów, has a vertical clearance of 7⋅0 m and a navigable width of 19⋅5 m, marked by dolphins on each side. Most Koejowy, a turntable railway bridge, about 5 cables E of Most Siennicki, has two central openings of about 14 m in width but these are spanned by overhead cables with a vertical clearance of 11⋅0 m. When closed it has a vertical clearance of 5⋅3 m. Overhead electric power lines cross the channels as follows (with positions from Westerplatte Monument (54°24′⋅4N, 18°40′⋅0E)): 9 cables S — safe overhead clearance 58 m. 2 miles S — safe overhead clearance 51 m. 2 miles SSW — safe overhead clearance 47 m. 3 miles SSE — safe overhead clearance 13 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Anchorage No 5, for tankers, lies E of Anchorage No 4 and has a minimum depth of 19⋅9 m.
Deepest and longest berth 1
9.87 There are a number of berths, each with a maximum draught of 10⋅2 m, which handle different types of cargo. The longer ones include Rudowe, Oliwskie and Wisane.
Submarine cables and pipelines 1
Abnormal water levels 1
9.88 The highest recorded water level exceeds the average (5⋅0 m) by 1⋅2 m during strong N winds or during flood waves on the Wisa. The lowest recorded water level is 1⋅0 m below the mean level and occurs during long lasting S winds. Information is available by radio or telephone from the Harbour Master.
Pilotage and tugs 1
Density of water 1
9.89 The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅002 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
9.90 A vessel not exceeding 225 m in length and 30 m in breadth.
2
Ice 1
9.91 Owing to the river outflow and currents offshore, the port and its approaches are usually always ice-free and even in the hardest winters navigation is unimpeded, making it one of the best winter ports in Baltic Sea. 9.92 Entry is dangerous in gales from the N, on account of the high seas off the harbour entrance. In these circumstances pilots are unable to board vessels outside and vessels should proceed to an appropriate anchorage. See 9.94.
1
General layout 1
Notice of ETA 9.93 Not later than 12 hours prior to arrival with confirmation 2 hours before arrival. For details see 9.11 and Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
2
Outer anchorages 1
2
3
9.94 There are five designated anchorage areas in the roadstead off Nowy Port and Port Pónocny, the limits of which are shown on the chart. The seabed in the roadstead is clear and level, consisting of hard sand on clay. Depths given are the minimum at mean water level. Anchorage No 1, for small vessels, lies NW of the buoyed inner approaches to Nowy Port. It has a minimum depth of 9⋅0 m. Anchorage No 2, for medium-sized vessels, lies NW of outer approach fairway to Nowy Port. It has a minimum depth of 10⋅5 m. Anchorage No 3, for tankers, lies SE of the outer approach fairway to Nowy Port. It has a minimum depth of 12⋅0 m. Anchorage No 4, for bulk carriers, lies on the N side of the approach to Port Pónocny. It has a minimum depth of 16⋅5 m. A foul patch with a least depth of 20 m over it lies in the S part of No 4 anchorage.
9.97 It is customary for vessels entering harbour to salute, by flag, on passing the war memorial at Westerplatte Monument (54°24′⋅4N, 18°40′⋅0E) (9.102).
Harbour
Arrival information
1
9.96 Pilotage, which should be ordered 2 hours in advance and is available for 24 hours, is compulsory for the following: Vessels of 50 m LOA and over. Vessels carrying dangerous cargo. Vessels overloaded. Vessels which are damaged and may cause pollution. to the environment. Pilots board in the following positions: Gdask (Nowy Port) 54°27′⋅7N, 18°41′⋅4E. Port Pónocny (Northern Port) 54°25′⋅8N, 18°53′⋅2E. Tugs. Vessels are required to use tugs within the Port of Gdask. The number required is laid down in the Port Regulations.
Salute
Local weather and sea state 1
9.95 Submarine cables and pipelines are laid in several places, as shown on the chart. Their positions are marked by white boards with red edges, one having a red diagonal stripe and the other a black anchor. See caution at 1.71.
9.98 Port Gdask stands on both banks of Martwa Wisa, which is the W end of the W branch of Rzeka Wisa (9.130), and the Rzeka Motawa; it includes Kana Kaszubski and Wyspa Ostrów (54°22′N, 18°39′E). The town of Nowy Port (54°24′N, 18°40′E), a suburb of Gdask, lies on the SW side of Kana Portowy, the artificial extension of Martwa Wisa to the sea, which is 150 m wide and 11 m deep, and forms the main harbour of Nowy Port. The harbour entrance lies between a short W and a long E breakwater, both extending NNW from the coast. The fairway width between the breakwaters is about 100 m. Development. A deep-sea container terminal is to be built on the N shore of the outer harbour (2003).
Ferries 1
9.99 A passenger ferry crosses Martwa Wisa from the S moat of Wisoujcie Fort (54°23′⋅7N, 18°40′⋅6E). A railway ferry taking goods wagons crosses Kana Kaszubski near the S end of Wyspa Ostrów. Ferry landing places are marked with warning signs with inscriptions of PROM (ferry).
Turning places 1
362
9.100 There are four turning places as follows: At the entrance of Wadysawa IV Basin, diameter 170 m. At the entrance to Basen Górniczy, diameter 180 m. Off the N point of Wyspa Ostrów, diameter 300 m. Off the S point of Wyspa Ostrów, diameter 200 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
times the depths in the vicinity of the E breakwater-head are less than shown on the chart.
Natural conditions 1
9.101 Currents in the roadstead off Nowy Port and off the harbour entrance usually follow the direction of the wind, setting at a rate of about 1 kn; exceptionally with winds from the W, a rate of 2 kn may be experienced. During calm conditions there is a weak NW flow. In the port entrance and within Kana Portowy there is a steady outflow from the river which rarely exceeds 1 kn and which is decreased with winds from the NW. Climatic table. See 1.284 and 1.293.
Useful marks 9.104 1
Principal marks 1
2
9.102 Landmarks: S. Jerzego Church (54°26′⋅4N, 18°34′⋅0E), at Sopot, with pointed tower. Disused lighthouse (red octagonal brick tower on white stone base with grey lantern, 37 m in height) (54°24′⋅4N, 18°39′⋅7E). Westerplatte Monument (pale granite monument, 24 m in height) (54°24′⋅4N, 18°40′⋅0E). Evangelical Church (twin spires), 5 cables SE of Westerplatte Monument. Chimney (54°22′⋅3N, 18°38′⋅5E). Water tower and chimney (54°21′⋅6N, 18°40′⋅8E). Major lights: Hel Light (54°36′⋅0N, 18°48′⋅8E) (9.18). Port Pónocny Light (54°24′⋅0N, 18°41′⋅8E) (9.18). Krynica Morska Light (54°23′⋅1N, 19°27′⋅0E) (9.18).
Basins and berths 1
2
Directions for entering harbour 1
2
3
4
(continued from 9.23) 9.103 From the vicinity of NP Light-buoy (safe water) (54°28′N, 18°42′E), the approach leads SW for about 2½ miles, through a fairway marked by buoys (lateral) passing between No 2 Anchorage and No 3 Anchorage and NW of an 8⋅4 m patch marked by M−NP Light-buoy (W cardinal), moored 2¼ miles NNE of the entrance. Thence the port is entered through the fairway, further marked by buoys (lateral), on the alignment of the following leading lights: Brzeÿno Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, red border, on white metal framework tower, 23 m in height) (54°24′⋅5N, 18°38′⋅4E). Rear light (black triangle, point down, on metal framework tower, 31 m in height) (330 m from front light). The alignment (196°) of these lights leads for 5½ cables through the N part of the approach fairway, thence: Westerplatte Leading Lights: Front light (two white triangles, point up, upper with red border, on white metal tower, 23 m in height) (54°24′⋅6N, 18°39′⋅8E). Rear light (black triangle, point down, on grey-black beacon ) (370 m from front light). The alignment (147¾°) of these lights leads SE for 6½ cables to a position close W of the E breakwater-head, whence the course is altered as required to enter harbour. Lights are displayed as follows: E breakwater (red octagonal tower, 13 m in height). W breakwater (green framework tower, 11 m in height). Caution. When entering or leaving harbour, it is not advisable to approach too closely to the E breakwater as at
Góra Donas Beacon (54°28′N, 18°26′E) (9.23). Sopot Pier (54°26′⋅9N, 18°34′⋅6E), extends 516 m to seaward; a 150 m spur extends SE from the pier; a light is displayed from a column, 4 m in height, at the pier head; in summer the pier is illuminated, the lights of which can be seen up to 6 miles offshore. Hotel with a green roofed cupola (close NW of Sopot Pier).
3
4
9.105 With positions from the Westerplatte Monument (54°24′⋅4N, 18°40′⋅0E). Basen WÞadysÞawa IV (4 cables W), three berths, the largest being WOC–1, length 590 m and maximum draught 9⋅4 m. Ro-Ro Terminal (5 cables ESE), maximum ship size: length 135 m; width 23⋅5 m; draught 7⋅4 m. Water depth 9⋅0 m. Kana Portowy (1 cable S), five berths, the longest being Obroców Westerplatte at 1434 m. Obroców Poczty Polskiej has maximum draughts up to 10⋅2 m. Martwa WisÞa (from the Wisoujcie Fort, 8 cables SE, to the N point of Wyspa Ostrów). Four berths, the largest being Wisane, length 1345 m, maximum depths between 8⋅4 and 10⋅2 m. Basen Górniczy (1¼ miles SSE). Three berths, the longest being Wřglowe at 911 m and the deepest Rudowe with maximum draughts between 4⋅9 and 10⋅2 m. Container Terminal (1½ miles SSW). Nabrzee Szczeciskie, length 225 m, water depth 9⋅1 m. KanaÞ Kaszubski (2 miles S). Four berths, the longest being Przemysowe with a length of 981 m and the deepest Chemików with maximum draughts up to 10⋅2 m. Martwa WisÞa (from Polski Hak, 2¾ miles S, to the railway bridge). Four berths, the largest being Flisaków with a length of 175 m and maximum draught of 6⋅7 m. Wyspa Ostrów (2¼ miles S). The berths and basins on the island are operated by the Gdask Repair Yard and North Shipyard. Rzeka MotÞawa (3 miles S) flowing through the oldest part of Port Gdask, is used by small vessels and local ferries. Polski Hak (54°21′⋅6N, 18°39′⋅9E) has berths used by deep-sea fishermen.
Port services Repairs 1
9.106 Repairs of all kinds can be carried out, divers and equipment for underwater work are available. Largest floating dock: Length 225⋅0 m; breadth 53⋅0 m; lifting capacity 36 000 tonnes. Largest vessel; length 280⋅0 m; breadth 43⋅0 m, 135 000 dwt. Major shipbuilding facilities.
Other facilities 1
363
9.107 Compass adjustment; deratting; hospital; oily waste reception.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Winds. Strong NE winds can cause seas which prevent cargo handling and severely restrict the operation of the port.
Supplies 1
9.108 Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions; technical and ships stores.
Arrival information Communications 1
9.109 Seasonal ferry services to other ports in Gulf of Gdask, Helsinki, Stockholm and Travemünde. International service from Gdask airport.
Notice of ETA 1
Outer anchorages
Inland waterway 1
9.110 An inland waterway, suitable for small craft leads E beyond Most Koejowy (54°21′⋅3N, 18°41′⋅5E), the turntable railway bridge, via the river system to Zalew Wilany (9.209), about 20 miles ESE. Several locks and bridges span the waterway and local knowledge is required.
1
PORT PÓNOCNY General information Charts 2688, 2680
Position 9.111 Port Pónocny (54°24′N, 18°43′E) also known as Northern Port, is an artificial harbour for bulk carriers and tankers, situated 2 miles ESE of the entrance to Nowy Port. It is administratively part of Gdask.
1
9.112 The port is equipped with modern facilities and equipment to handle large vessels carrying bulk solid and bulk liquid cargoes including ore, coal, gas and chemicals.
Approach and entry 1
9.113 The port is approached via the TSS, as shown on the chart, and entered through a dredged channel on the alignment of leading lights.
General layout 1
9.114 See 9.83. 2
Port Authority 1
9.115 See 9.84.
2
9.121 Port Pónocny is formed by two breakwaters extending ENE from an area of reclaimed land fronting the coast. The N breakwater is 8 cables long and terminates in an artificial island from which a spur leads SE for 5½ cables. The S breakwater, 7 cables SE of the N, is 3½ cables long. Midway between the head of the S breakwater and the head of SE spur of the N breakwater lies a detached breakwater, 2½ cables long, running SE. Port development. In 2005, construction continues of a grain terminal and a container terminal S of the root of Pirs Rudowy.
Turning place Limiting conditions
1
9.120 Berthing at Pirs Rudowy is allowed in the hours of daylight only. Tankers may only enter when visibility is greater than 12 miles.
Harbour
Traffic 1
9.119 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 50 m in length, It is prohibited for vessels to enter the dredged approach channel leading to Port Pónocny without the aid of a pilot and the use of a tug. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Pilot service is available 24 hours. Vessels awaiting pilots should use anchorages No 4 or No 5. Pilot boards 4 cables W of PP Light-buoy (safe water) (54°26′N, 18°54′E) or at the anchorage.
Regulations concerning entry
Function 1
9.118 Anchorage No 4 and 5, as described at 9.94, are used by vessels proceeding to Port Pónocny.
Pilotage and tugs 1
1
9.117 In addition to the ETA given by the REPHEL message, a further ETA should be sent 2 hours prior to arrival. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
9.116 Maximum draught. The maximum permissible draught for Port Pónocny is 15⋅0 m at mean water level. Deepest and longest berths. PIRS P in Basen Paliw Pynnych No 1 and PIRS R in Basen Paliw Pynnych No 2, see 9.128. Water level. The maximum recorded water level was 1⋅2 m above mean water level after strong N winds. The lowest was 1⋅0 m below and occurred during prolonged S winds. Up-to-date information on water levels can be obtained from the Harbour Master. Maximum size of vessel handled. Length 300 m, draught 15⋅0 m. Ice. See 9.91.
1
9.122 A turning place, 670 m in diameter, close SE of the entrance to Basen Paliw Pynnych, is dredged to a depth of 16⋅5 m.
Currents 1
2
364
9.123 The currents in the roads and off the entrance to the port depend on the force and direction of the wind. During E winds, the current sets W, winds from the W cause an E set, which can reach 1 kn. During calm weather, the slight NW gulf current is increased by the waters from Rzeka Wisa that flow through Wisa miaa and Przekop Wisy and follow the shore in a NW direction. Large vessels in particular should be aware of the effect of the current when transiting the dredged fairway which leads to the entrance.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Principal marks 1
3
9.124 Landmarks. Some or all of the landmarks listed at 9.102 might be seen on the approach to Port Pónocny. Major lights: Port Pónocny Light (blue four-sided tower with gallery, on Harbour Master’s building) (54°24′⋅0N, 18°41′⋅8E). Krynica Morska Light (54°23′⋅1N, 19°27′⋅0E) (9.18).
Port services
Other aid to navigation 1
9.125 Racon: Port Pónocny Light-buoy P1 (54°25′⋅1N, 18°49′⋅3E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Pirs Wřglowy, the coal berth, lies on the N side of Pirs LPG, about 2 cables S of the N breakwater. The berth can accommodate vessels up to 300 m long, with a maximum draught of 15⋅0 m. A light is displayed from a dolphin close off the pierhead. Basen Wewnřtrzny lies between the root of the N breakwater and Pirs Wřglowy. Maximum allowable draught is 4⋅4 m; entry and exit in daylight only.
1
9.129 Repairs. See 9.106. Supplies. See 9.108.
RZEKA WISA DELTA
Directions
General information
(continued from 9.23) 1
2
3
9.126 From the vicinity of PP Light-buoy (safe water) (54°26′N, 18°54′E) the track leads WSW for about 2¾ miles to P1 Light-buoy (starboard hand) which marks the start of the approach, passing (with positions from Port Pónocny Light (9.124)): SSE of No 5 Anchorage (6½ miles NE), thence: NNW of 16⋅5 m patch, marked by MG-A Light-buoy (N cardinal) (6 mile ENE), thence: NNW of 16⋅5 m patch, marked by MG-B Light-buoy (N cardinal) (5 mile ENE), thence: Port PóÞnocny Leading Lights: Front light (orange framework tower, 20 m in height) (54°23′⋅8N, 18°42′⋅2E). Rear light (orange framework tower, 45 m in height) (890 m from front light). The alignment (253½°) of these lights leads WSW for about 3¾ miles on the centreline of the approach channel, which is 250 m wide and dredged to a depth of 17 m, marked by light-buoys and light-beacons (lateral). Caution. Mariners are advised to be on a steady course before entering the dredged channel.
Chart 2688
Description 1
Rzeka WisÞa ©miaÞa Description 1
2
Useful marks 9.127 1
Detached breakwater, NW end; a light is displayed from a grey concrete tower (54°23′⋅9N, 18°43′⋅5E). Górki Wschodnie Light (54°22′⋅5N, 18°46′⋅7E) (9.135). N Breakwater, SE spur head light (grey concrete tower, 13 m in height) (54°24′⋅2N, 18°43′⋅9E).
1
2
9.131 Rzeka Wisa miaa (54°22′N, 18°47′E) is the middle arm of the Wisa delta; the river narrows at its entrance to a width of 45 m. On the E side a breakwater extends 2 cables NNW to Górki Wschodnie Light (54°22′⋅5N, 18°46′⋅7E). On the W side, a breakwater extends 1 cable N, and a submerged groyne, 3 cables W of the entrance, extends 2 cables NNE; its extremity is marked by a buoy (N cardinal). The coastal bank, on which there is a tongue-shaped sandbank with depths of less than 5 m over it, extends about 1½ miles NNW from the river mouth; the sandbank is subject to frequent changes after stormy weather.
Ferry 1
9.132 A ferry crosses the river close E of the pier at Sobieszewo.
Regulations
Basins and berths 9.128 Basen Paliw PÞynnych is a tanker basin, formed by a spur, 3 cables long, which runs SE from the N breakwater about 5¾ cables from its root. The basin is divided by a pier, with a length of 550 m, with berths on each side, PIRS P on the N side and PIRS R on the S side. Both berths are dredged to 16⋅5 m and can accommodate vessels up to 300 m in length. Lights are displayed from each side of the pier head and the spur head. Pirs Rudowy, the ore berth, lies on the N side of the S breakwater with a length of about 470 m and a maximum draught of 12⋅0 m. A light is displayed from a white column at the pierhead. Pirs LPG, 3 cables N of Pirs Rudowy, provides two berths for gas tankers. A light is displayed from the pierhead.
9.130 Between Nowy Port (54°24′N, 18°40′E) and Mikoszewo (9.145), about 12 miles ESE, is the wide delta of the Rzeka Wisa, intersected by numerous canals and dykes and marked in places by windmills. In some parts the level of the ground is a little below sea-level, but about 5 cables inland from the coast the land rises to a height of about 20 m and is densely wooded.
1
9.133 Entering or leaving Wisa miaa is only permitted in daylight between October and April, and vessels with draught greater than 4⋅0 m require permission from the Harbour Master’s Office in Gdask.
Local knowledge 1
9.134 Owing to the frequent changes in the channel due to stormy weather, up-to-date local knowledge is required. The Harbour Master at Gdask can supply information about the navigational conditions and depths.
Directions 1
365
9.135 From the vicinity of GW light-buoy (E cardinal), lit between May and September, moored about 1 mile N of Górki Wschodnie Lighthouse (red round concrete tower,
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
2
3
white gallery, 9 m in height) (54°22′⋅5N, 18°46′⋅7E) standing at the head of the E breakwater, vessels entering the river are advised to steer towards the E breakwater head, leaving it at least 50 m clear to port. Clearing marks. The alignment (178°) of Górki Zachodnie Beacon (triangulation beacon, square topmark), on the W bank of Wisa miaa about 1 mile S of the river entrance, with Górki Wschodnie Lighthouse, marks the W side of the entrance channel, clear of the sandbank farther W. The beacon is not easily seen from seaward. Thence the entrance channel, which lies E of the sandbank, passes between the breakwaters and leads S through a channel which is buoyed during the summer months. The number and position of the buoys varies with the changes in the channel. A light (green round tower, gallery) is displayed from the head of the W breakwater, and a beacon (round orange column, 16 m in height) and a light-beacon (green framework tower) stand on the W bank at the entrance. Shoal water with a depth of less than 0⋅5 m extends up to 50 m from this bank
Regulations 1
Approach 1
2
Rescue 1
9.136 A lifeboat is kept in readiness on the W bank near the mouth of the Wisa miaa.
Fishing ports 1
1
9.142 A passenger ferry connects wibno with Mikoszewo. When approaching the ferry, vessels should sound a prolonged blast and wait until the line has been removed, thence cross with caution. It is not permitted to cross the line when the ferry is underway.
Useful marks 9.143 1
Przekop WisÞy
Mikoszewo Beacon (triangulation beacon on a hill, 33 m in height) standing between Mikoszewo (9.145) and Przekop Wisy. Jantar Beacon (triangulation tower, rectangular topmark, 35 m in height), standing on a high dune close N of Jantar village (54°20′N, 19°02′E).
Fishing harbours
Description 1
9.141 SWB Light-buoy (safe water), ½ marks the approach to the river mouth, and is moved frequently to meet changes in the channel. On passing the light-buoy, a vessel should set course to pass 180 m N of the E breakwater head. Depths are variable between SWB Light-buoy and the entrance, and up to date local knowledge is required before proceeding into the river. The latest depths and directions for vessels are published in Polish Notices to Mariners. Caution. A stony shoal extends about 150 m NNE from the E breakwater head. A wreck lies 6 cables N of the entrance. Lights are displayed from both banks of the river and the channel between the breakwaters is marked by buoys on both sides.
Ferry 1
9.137 Górki Wschodnie (54°21′N, 18°48′E) is a fishing village on the E bank, and about 1½ miles within the river entrance. The small harbour for fishing vessels has three wooden piers with depths of 2⋅8 to 3⋅6 m alongside. There is a shipyard on the W bank opposite Górki Wschodnie, where seagoing auxiliary craft and small vessels are built. 9.138 Sobieszewo, a fishing village on the same side of the river and about 1 mile SE of Górki Wschodnie has a small wooden pier with a depth of about 4 m alongside.
9.140 Before entering or leaving Przekop Wisy permission must be obtained from the Harbour Master’s Office at Gdask.
9.139 Przekop Wisy (54°21′N, 18°57′E), the E entrance to the principal branch of Rzeka Wisa, is a cutting through the dunes, about 3 miles in length and 450 m wide near its seaward end. Owing to its outflow there is considerable silting in the mouth of the river which at times cause drying banks at the entrance, and the channel leading from seaward is therefore subject to frequent changes.
1
1
9.144 wibno (54°20′N, 18°56′E), a fishing harbour on the W bank, has a small basin with general depths between 2⋅0 to 2⋅3 m. There are three small piers and a boat slip. Rescue. There is a life-saving station at wibno equipped with a lifeboat and line throwing apparatus. 9.145 Mikoszewo (54°20′N, 18°58′E) is a fishing village on the E bank of the river opposite wibno.
GULF OF GDAMSK — EAST SIDE GENERAL INFORMATION
Zalew Wilany — Central and south-west parts (9.209). Baltiysk to Mys Taran (9.232).
Charts 2369, 2288, 2278
Area covered 1
9.146 This section describes the waters on the E side of Gulf of Gdask, from the Polish/Russian border, shown on the chart, to Mys Taran (54°58′N, 19°59′E). It is arranged as follows: Kaliningrad and approaches, including Baltiysk (9.150). Kaliningradskiy Zaliv (9.188).
Topography 1
2
366
9.147 From the international border to Baltiysk, about 13½ miles NE, the coast consists of a narrow strip of land known as Baltiyskaya Kosa which forms the NW side of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv. The land, fringed by a sandy beach, rises to heights of 15 m and 30 m and is wooded in places. From Baltiysk for about 9 miles NNE the appearance of the coast is similar to that of Baltiyskaya Kosa, and is
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
fringed by a narrow coastal bank free from rocks. Farther N the coast rises, and is steep, the narrow coastal bank being scattered with rocks. The land between Gora Bol’shaya (54°52′N, 20°00′E) and Mys Taran appears as a high yellowish shore.
Limiting conditions Controlling depth 1
Regulated areas 1
9.148 Most of the area to the NW and SW of Baltiysk lies in Regulated Area No 159, shown on the chart. Within this area there are two other areas, Nos 104 and 111, to which entry is prohibited. See also 1.29.
Seasonal maximum draught 1
Rescue 1
9.149 In the area covered by this section there are rescue craft stationed at Baltiysk (9.150), at a station 6 miles NNE of Baltiysk, and at Mys Taran (9.238).
1
Trim
Charts 2369, 2278
Description
Vertical clearance
9.150 Baltiysk (54°39′N, 19°54′E) is a naval harbour, situated at the S end of the peninsula forming the W side of Bukhta Primorskaya (9.204). Morskoy Kanal, 8 cables SW of Baltiysk, separates Baltiysk and Baltiyskaya Kosa (9.147), and is the only outlet from Kaliningradskiy Zaliv and Zalew Wilany to Gulf of Gdask. Kaliningrad (54°43′N, 20°31′E) is the principal city of Kaliningrad Oblast. It lies on both banks of Reka Pregolya, about 5 miles from its mouth, and it is connected to Baltiysk and Morskoy Kanal by Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal, which runs for 17½ miles through the N part of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv (9.188). The commercial port of Kaliningrad extends from the outer roadstead at Baltiysk to the road/rail bridge at Kaliningrad.
1
1
1
2
9.151 The limits of the outer roadstead of Kaliningrad are shown on the chart.
Approach and entry 1
1
9.152 The port is approached on the alignment of leading lights, through a safety fairway, which leads to the entrance of Morskoy Kanal.
9.153 In 2003 the port was visited by 3833 vessels totalling 18¼ million dwt.
2
Port Authority 1
9.154 Port of Kaliningrad, 7 Petra Velikogo Emb., Kaliningrad 236003, Russia. E-Mail:
[email protected]
9.160 At Baltiysk water levels may rise 0⋅9 m above, and fall 1⋅0 m below, the mean level, but such large fluctuations are unusual. Low levels occur with strong winds from the NE through E to SE; winds from the opposite directions cause higher levels; the amount of water flowing into the Baltic from the rivers is also a factor in water levels. In Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal the highest levels, apart from those caused by the very variable river floods in the spring, occur as a rule once a year. The lowest occur more frequently. In the mouth of Reka Pregolya (54°42′N, 20°23′E), the water may rise 1⋅8 m above mean level with strong W winds and fall 1⋅2 m below with continued E winds.
Ice
Traffic 1
9.159 Two power cables, with a physical vertical clearance of 50 and 60 m respectively and a safe vertical clearance of 45 m, span the channel between Posts 342 and 346.
Water levels
Port limits 1
9.157 The maximum length for vessels using Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal are as follows: Oil tankers — 140 m. Dry cargo ships — 170 m. 9.158 When navigating in Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal a vessel should not be trimmed by the head nor have a stern trim of more than 3⋅0 m.
General information
2
9.156 In Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal and at the commercial berths, seasonal variations in the maximum draught are as follows: February to May — 7⋅5 m. June to October — 7⋅8 m. November to January — 7⋅7 m.
Maximum length of vessel
KALININGRAD AND APPROACHES INCLUDING BALTIYSK
1
9.155 The controlling depth in Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal was 9⋅0 m (1996). See note on chart 2278.
9.161 At Port Baltiysk ice is broken up daily by an icebreaker and, unless fixed ice forms in Baltic Sea, navigation is unhindered. Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal freezes during the first half of January and thaws in March or April. In mild and moderate winters, when there are frequent ship movements, navigation is unhindered. In severe winters navigation is possible with the assistance of icebreaking tugs. In the spring, as soon as the ice in Kaliningradskiy Zaliv is in motion, it begins to drift out to sea and continues to do so for 3 or 4 days, requiring great caution at this time when entering harbour.
Current and sea state 1
367
9.162 With strong winds from the S, a coastal stream runs N along the seaward side of Baltiyskaya Kosa at a rate of as
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
much as 4 kn at times; similarly, strong N winds cause a S flowing stream. When this stream sets across the outflowing current from between the moles it raises a rough sea off the harbour entrance. Surge winds from the bay can cause the outflowing current to stop or reverse.
Arrival information
On account of the coastal current, speed should be maintained when entering and then reduced within the entrance so that the pilot may be taken onboard.
Tugs 1
Traffic regulations
Vessel Traffic Service 1
9.163 Kaliningrad VTS is a mandatory Ship Reporting System established for the control of traffic within the area of Baltiysk and Kaliningrad. It covers the waters in the approach to Baltiysk, bounded by a 7 mile radius from the head of the N Mole (54°39′⋅0N, 19°52′⋅3E), and Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal. For details of requirements and reporting points, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
1
Port radio 1
9.164 There is a port radio station at Kaliningrad. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
2
Outer anchorages and waiting area 1
2
3
4
9.165 There are four designated anchorage areas, the limits of which are shown on the chart, in the approaches to Baltisyk, centred as follows (positioned from Baltiysk Main Light (54°38′⋅4N, 19°53′⋅8E)): Area No 66 (4½ miles NW), on the N side of the safety fairway. Attention is drawn to two obstructions in the NW part of the area. Area No 68B (3½ miles WNW), close S of the safety fairway. Attention is drawn to an obstruction in the central SW part of the anchorage, close to its limit. Area No 68 (3¾ miles WNW), close SW of Area No 68B. Attention is drawn to obstructions lying in the central part on the NE limit, and in the central part of its SE side. Area No 68A (2¼ miles W), adjoining the SE limits of 68 and 68B. Two obstructions lie on its NW limit. For vessels awaiting clear entrance to the port, Waiting Area No 21 is established within Fairway No 35, 2¾ miles NW of Baltiysk Main Light, and SSW of the entrance leading line. In addition, within the harbour entrance, anchorage may be obtained, by vessels with a maximum draught of 3⋅5 m, in Area No 68C, centred 5 cables S of Baltiysk Main Light, close S of the channel. Komsomol’skiy Roadstead, situated to the NW of Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal between Posts No 146 and 152, is used for the short term anchorage of ships with draughts up to 5⋅0 m. Prohibited anchorages. Areas 159 and 161 are prohibited anchorage areas: see Appendix I.
3
4
2
9.166 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels except leisure craft. Vessels should send requests for pilots 24 hours in advance and confirm 4 hours before ETA. Pilots board 1⋅5 miles NW of the entrance to Baltiysk. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. If weather conditions prevent the pilot from boarding outside the harbour, the pilot vessel will lead the way in.
9.168 Arrival. Foreign vessels should only approach the port via Safety Fairway No 35, as shown on the chart. If permission to enter port has not been received vessels should proceed to anchor as instructed by the Duty Officer. When anchored, the VTS should be advised of the anchor position, as a bearing and distance from N Mole Light (54°39′⋅0N, 19°52′⋅3E). If a vessel has to leave the anchorage to ride out a storm within Russian waters, the Duty Officer Baltiysk should be advised, and his agreement obtained for the sea area to be used. Overtaking. In both Morskoy and Kaliningradskiy Kanal, it is prohibited to pass oil tankers and vessels carrying IMO Class 1 and 2 cargoes. Speed. Maximum speeds in the canal are as follows: Draught up to 4 m — 9 kn. Draught between 4 and 6 m — 8 kn. Draught between 6 and 7 m — 7 kn. Draughts of more than 7 m — 6 kn. Within Reka Pregolya the maximum speed allowed is 5 kn. Shell doors. Ro-Ro, Lo-Lo and other specialised vessels, having any kind of shell doors, should keep these doors closed and secured while underway in port waters. Under-keel clearance. The minimum under-keel clearance required whilst underway within the port is 0⋅4 m. Information on water level and depths may be obtained from the Port Director or the Pilot. Mooring in the canal. There are several wooden piers and dolphins along the canal. Vessels may not moor to them without the permission of the Harbour Master, Kaliningrad.
Pollution 1
9.169 Before entering port waters all overboard discharges from the bilge and sanitary system should be closed and sealed with an entry to that effect made in the ships log.
Harbours Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal 1
Pilotage 1
9.167 Tugs are available at Kaliningrad.
2
368
9.170 Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal joins Port Baltiysk to Port Kaliningrad and runs along the N coast of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv. With the exception of the entrance to Bukhta Primorskaya (9.204) the canal is separated from Kaliningradskiy Zaliv by dams of timber walls with stone fillings for nearly its whole length. The dams are planted with trees, bushes and reeds. There are several passages through the dams up to 30 m wide with depths of 0⋅5 to 2⋅5 m, used by fishing vessels. The least bottom width in the enclosed sections is 40 m and in the open sections 65 m. Caution. In the open stretches across the entrance to Primorskaya Bukhta and at the openings in the canal, cross currents may be experienced.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Major lights: Baltiysk Main Light — as above. Obzornyy Light (54°49′⋅7N, 19°57′⋅3E) (9.237). Mys Taran Light (54°57′⋅6N, 19°58′⋅9E) (9.237).
Baltiysk 1
9.171 The port, which is a naval base, is a wide basin, divided into two harbours, separated from Morskoy Kanal by breakwaters. In the E part of the inner port there are small docks.
Directions (continued from 8.13 or 8.302)
Port Kaliningrad 1
2
9.172 The commercial port of Kaliningrad is situated on the S bank of Reka Pregolya, 3¾ miles above its mouth. Kosse Island (54°42′⋅4N, 20°28′⋅0E) lies within the port area. The commercial seaport comprises: the N wall of Industrial Harbour; Basins No 1 and 2; Free Harbour and the river frontage between Industrial Harbour and the road/rail bridge. There is a total of 3000 m of quays. In addition there are a number of berths along Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal that can be used by commercial vessels and are administratively part of the port. Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Fishing Port is situated on the S bank of Reka Pregolya 2¾ miles above its mouth. It comprises the N wall of Timber Harbour, and the S wall of Industrial Harbour. There are 2500 m of quays. The out ports of Svetlyy and Pionerska are administratively part of the port.
Approach to Kaliningrad from west 1
2
3
Submarine cables 1
9.173 Submarine cables and/or pipelines are laid across Morskoy Kanal, within Baltiysk Harbour and in the first two miles of Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal; they are marked by notice boards prohibiting anchorage in the vicinity.
4
5
Signals 1
2
9.174 Traffic signals are displayed from the Pilot Watch Tower, which stands 1¼ cables W of Baltiysk Lighthouse. On the tower is a red mast with a red yard secured at right angles to the line of approach fairway. Day traffic signals are shown from the SW yardarm. By night, two white lights, disposed horizontally about 1⋅5 m apart, are displayed under the yard to indicate the position of the mast. See 1.139 for signals. Entry and exit prohibition signals are shown from Baltiysk Front Leading Light-beacon standing at the harbour entrance. For signals see 1.139. Pilot signal. A red rectangular flag displayed at the entrance light-beacon indicates that the vessel cannot be supplied with a pilot. When the channel entrance is closed on account of ice, the pilot signal and the traffic signals may be displayed simultaneously.
6
Entry 1
Climatic table 1
9.175 See 1.284 and 1.294. 2
Principal marks 1
2
9.176 Landmarks: Baltiysk Main Lighthouse (round white tower, red top, two galleries, 32 m in height) (54°38′⋅6N, 19°52′⋅8E). Water tower (54°42′N, 19°56′E). Gora Bol’shaya (54°52′N, 20°00′E) a wooded hill. Two chimneys (54°51′⋅5N, 19°56′⋅5E). Chimney(6 cables N of the above chimneys). Mys Taran (54°58′N, 19°59′E) (9.238).
9.177 From a position N of Rozewie (54°50′N, 18°20′E) (8.301), clear of a dangerous wreck (8.21) the track leads ESE for about 45 miles through open water, passing (with positions from Hel Lighthouse (9.18)): Over a gas pipeline between Baltic Beta platform (57 miles NNW) and Wadysawowo (see 9.16), thence: NNE of a wreck with a depth of 12 m over it (13½ miles NW), thence: NNE of the recommended tracks, shown on the chart, which are the approaches to the TSS which leads to Port Pónocny and Gdynia, thence: Baltiysk Leading Lights: Front light (red metal framework tower, daymark, square over trapezium, both white with black stripe, 21 m in height) (4 cables WNW of rear light). Rear light. Baltiysk Main Light (9.176). From the vicinity of 54°45′N, 19°35′E, the alignment (122°) of these lights, leads SE for about 12 miles, through Safety Fairway No 35, dredged to 10 m (1996), to the entrance of Morskoy Kanal, passing (with positions from N Mole Light (54°39′⋅0N, 19°52′⋅3E)): NE of Regulated Area No 111 (10 miles W), thence: SW of a platform (7 miles NW), thence: NE of two mooring buoys (4½ miles WNW), thence: Clear of No 1 Light-buoy (safe water) (5 miles NW), thence: NE of an obstruction, depth unknown, and another obstruction with a depth of 18 m over it, close SW, (2¾ miles W), thence: SW of wreck, with a depth of 7 m over it and an adjacent wreck, containing explosives, with a depth of 1 m over it, marked by a buoy (isolated danger) (1½ miles N), and: NE of wreck, with a depth of 12⋅4 m over it, and adjacent foul ground, with a depth of 13⋅3 m over it (1 mile SW).
3
369
9.178 Morskoy Kanal Leading Lights: Front light (54°38′⋅1N, 19°53′⋅8E), displayed from a causeway on the N side of the channel. Rear light (54°37′⋅9N, 19°54′⋅1E) (500 m SE of front light), displayed close E of No 68C anchorage. From a position 1 cable WSW of N Mole Light, the alignment (131¼°) of these lights leads SE for 1 mile through a buoyed channel, dredged to 10 m (1996), passing (with positions from Baltiysk Front Light (54°38′⋅6N, 19°53′⋅2E)): NE of an underwater obstruction, with a depth 1 m over it (2 cables SW), thence: SW of Baltiysk Inner Harbour breakwater (2 cables SE), thence: Initially, keeping Baltiysk front light astern, follow the channel, as shown on the chart, using the marks available, to the entrance of Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal and onto
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
the alignment (089°) of leading lights marking the centre of the channel.
E waterfront are 2⋅0 to 2⋅5 m, and on the N waterfront they are 2⋅5 to 2⋅7 m. The depth at the mole is 1⋅5 m. A channel 800 m long, with depths of 2⋅5 to 3⋅5 m, leads into the harbour. Water can be obtained in limited quantities.
Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal 1
2
9.179 Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal is marked on both sides with light-beacons, standing on concrete platforms erected on piles. At turns and in open water the edge of the channel is marked by buoys and light-buoys. Some stretches are marked by leading lights. On the S side of the channel, at intervals of 100 m, numbered white posts show the distance from the entrance to the canal. Turning areas. Within the Kaliningrad port area there are three turning places, as follows: A ferry turning area at the entrance to Basin No 3. At the entrance to Industrial Harbour between Posts 371 and 380. At the entrance to Free Harbour between Posts 388 and 393.
Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Fishing Port 1
Port Kaliningrad Commercial Seaport 1
Basins and berths Minnaya Gavan 1
9.180 Minnaya Gavan is situated on the N side of Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal, opposite Post 32. It has six floating quays, each 8⋅5 m in width.
2
Punkt Vostochnyy of Port Baltiysk 1
9.181 Punkt Vostochnyy (54°38′N, 19°57′E) is situated outside the channel on the N side of Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal opposite Post 40. It consists of a line of dolphins, aligned with the channel. A light is displayed from the E and W ends. The berth may be used as a lightening berth prior to transit of Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal. Oil tankers up to 150 m long with a draught of 6⋅7 m may use this berth. 9.182 Komsomol’skiy Settlement Harbour (54°39′⋅1N, 20°05′⋅3E) is situated on the N coast of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv at the entrance to Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal from Bukhta Primorskaya. In the E part of the harbour, on the N side of the channel, there are quays belonging to the fish factory. The quays, situated between Posts 126 and 135, are used as temporary moorings for ships.
9.186 Berths are as follows (with positions from Ostrovok Kosse (54°42′⋅4N, 20°28′⋅0E)): Industrial Harbour — N wall, known as Terminal 3, (3½ cables S), seven berths with depths alongside of 7⋅2 to 9⋅6 m. Basin No 1 (1½ cables SSE) is a small craft harbour. Basin No 2 (1¼ cables SSW) is under construction. Free Harbour (4 cables SE). On the W side, four berths with depths alongside of 7⋅8 to 9⋅6 m known as Terminal 2; on the E and N side there are six berths with depths alongside of 8⋅4 to 8⋅8 m, known as Terminal 1. Ro-Ro Complex (2 cables SW), Berths 18 − 20. River port (5 cables SE), Berths 0, 15 and 16, depths alongside reported to be less than 5 m.
Port services 1
Komsomol’skiy Settlement Harbour 1
9.185 Berths (with positions from Ostrovok Kosse (54°42′⋅4N, 20°28′⋅0E)): Timber Harbour-N wall (1 mile SW), Berths 25 — 31, with depths alongside of 5 to 7 m. Industrial Harbour-S wall (7½ cables SW), Berths 18 — 24, with depths alongside of 5 to 7 m.
2
9.187 Repairs. The port has a floating workshop. Minor hull repairs are possible. Other facilities. Compass adjustment; deratting certificates; DF calibration; hospital; oily waste reception. Supplies. Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions in limited quantities. Communications. There is regular communication by sea with other Baltic ports from both Kaliningrad and Baltiysk. There is an airport 15 km from Kaliningrad. Rescue. Fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at Baltiysk.
KALININGRADSKIY ZALIV INCLUDING BUKHTA PRIMORSKAYA
Svetlyy Town Harbour 1
9.183 Svetlyy Town Harbour (54°40′⋅6N, 20°09′⋅0E) is an outport of Kaliningrad Fishing Port. The length of the quay is 660 m; in the W part of the harbour there is a floating quay 9 m wide; on the E wall of the harbour a floating quay, 140 m long and 9 m wide, has been established. To the NE of this quay and at its end a floating dock has been established, the width of which is 25 m. There are facilities for handling coal; water may be obtained; there is a passage in the breakwater opposite the harbour into the bay.
General information Charts 2369, 2288, Russian Chart 25051 (see 1.34)
Description 1
Gavan’ Vzmor’ye 1
9.184 Gavan’ Vzmor’ye is situated in Seleniye Vzmor’ye, 3½ miles ENE of Svetlyy Town Harbour. The harbour is protected on the W by a partly ruined mole. The E and N sides of the harbour have a constructed waterfront along which there are quays. The depths along the quays on the
9.188 Kaliningradskiy Zaliv (54°35′N, 19°55′E) is the Russian NE part of a coastal lagoon which extends for some 40 miles NE-SW in the SE corner of Gulf of Gdask. It is divided by the Russian/Polish International Border. It is formed by a sandspit, the Russian part of which is called Baltiyskaya Kosa (9.147) and is connected to the sea by Morskoy Kanal (9.150) at Baltiysk.
Topography 1
370
9.189 The coastline of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv is generally low and marshy with only small stretches of higher ground. The NW coast of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv is formed by Baltiyskaya Kosa which is low and marshy. The headlands on the coast are inconspicuous, apart from Mys Glavnyy
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
2
3
(54°29′⋅7N, 19°44′⋅2E), a light-coloured sand bluff, 12 m in height. The N coast of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv is covered by cultivated pine forests, planted in strips separated by access roads. Rushes grow all along the coast. The S coast of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv is generally well defined owing to low clay cliffs on the foreshore, except for the bay E of Mys Severnyy (54°35′N, 20°00′E) which is low, marshy. From Ushakovo (54°37′N, 20°15′E) for about 6½ miles SW the coast is thickly grown with mixed forest, otherwise the coast is covered with scrub. About 1¾ miles SW of Mys Severnyy a point stands out against the general background of the coast, its slopes are covered with scrub, and the summit is thickly wooded; the village of Veseloye is situated near the point.
Submarine cable 1
Principal marks 1
2
Depths 1
9.190 Depths in the middle part of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv are between 3 to 4 m which decrease towards the coast. The greatest depths are between Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal (9.170) and Mys Severnny. The coastline of Kaliningradskiy Zaliv is fringed with sandy shoals with depths of less than 2 m, which vary in width from 4 to 8 cables.
1
9.191 The bottom is mainly mud and shell, but in places comprises mud and grey sand. 2
Pilotage 1
9.192 Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels proceeding between Baltiysk, ElblŅg (54°10′N, 19°24′E), and Kaliningrad, except for those vessels specially exempt. Pilots can be obtained from Baltiysk and Kaliningrad. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
3
International boundary 1
9.193 The international boundary between Poland and Russia runs between 54°27′⋅2N, 19°38′⋅6E and 54°26′⋅4N, 19°48′⋅5E and is marked by numbered conical buoys. The boundary and the alignment of these buoys are marked on each side of Zalew Wilany by a pair of beacons, the front in each case being an iron column with a triangle topmark, point up, and the rear a concrete block.
9.194 Water level variations depend on the prevailing winds. In Kaliningradskiy Zaliv the level may rise 1⋅2 m above normal with winds from the WSW, through W, to WNW and may fall 0⋅7 m below normal with winds from other directions.
9.200 1
1
Shchukinskiy Lighthouse (black and white metal framework tower, 29 m in height) (54°31′⋅6N, 19°44′⋅5E). Nasypnoy Lighthouse (54°36′⋅1N, 19°56′⋅0E). (Directions continue at 9.219).
Side channel 1
Current 1
9.199 From the vicinity of No 9 Light-buoy (starboard hand) (54°38′⋅5N, 20°02′⋅0E) in the open part of Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal, the track leads SW for about 16 miles to No 10 Light-buoy (54°27′N, 19°44′E), passing (with positions from Mys Severnyy (54°35′N, 20°00′E)): SE of a wreck with a depth of 2⋅3 m over it (2¼ miles NW), thence: SE of Ostrovok Nasypnoy (9.198) (2½ miles NW), thence: NW of an obstruction with a depth of 2⋅5 m over it (1¾ miles W), noting Otmel’ Veselovskaya, a rocky shoal which lies off the coast, thence: SE of an obstruction with a depth of 2⋅5 m over it (3¾ miles W), thence: NW of Krasnoflotskye Fairway Light-buoy (3¾ miles WSW) (9.203), thence: NW of Otmel’ Shchukinskaya, a rocky shoal area, with depths of less than 2 m over it, which extends for 2 miles N from the coast near Shchukino (54°28′N, 19°51′E), it is marked by Shchukino Light-buoy (W cardinal) (7¾ miles SW) moored on the NW edge of the shoal. From Ostrovok Nasypnoy to No 10 Light-buoy (54°27′N, 19°44′E), depths in the fairway are 3⋅5 to 4⋅0 m.
Useful marks
Water level 1
9.198 Landmarks: Two chimneys in Svetlyy (54°39′⋅8N, 20°07′⋅5E) (9.183). Church at Ushakovo (54°36′⋅8N, 20°15′⋅0E) (9.202). Church at Mamonovo (54°28′⋅0N, 19°56′⋅0E). Ostrovok Nasypnoy (54°36′⋅0N, 19°56′⋅1E), a round islet, covered with grass and scrub, the edge of which is strengthened by stones. Major lights: Baltiysk Light (54°38′⋅4N, 19°53′⋅8E) (9.176). Krynica Morska Light (54°23′⋅3N, 19°27′⋅2W) (9.18).
Directions
Seabed 1
9.197 A submarine cable is laid across Kaliningradskiy Zaliv from Shchukino (54°28′N, 19°51′E) NW to Baltiyskaya Kosa.
9.195 In Kaliningradskiy Zaliv the current, if any, sets generally W; during W gales this may reverse.
9.201 A channel about 40 miles in length connects Kaliningradskiy Zaliv with Kurshskiy Zaliv (10.54), by way of the rivers Pregolya and Dejma via Polessk (54°52′N, 21°07′E); small coasting vessels proceeding in ballast often take this route.
Harbours
Ice
Ushakovo
9.196 In winter Kaliningradskiy Zaliv is covered by ice and is closed for navigation.
9.202 General information. Ushakovo (54°37′N, 20°15′E) lies at the mouth of Reka Prokhladnaya. The entrance is
1
371
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
2
3
protected by two breakwaters and the width of the channel at the breakwater heads is 35 m. The harbour is used by local fishing vessels and may serve as shelter during heavy weather. Directions. The alignment (143½°) of a pair of leading marks leads through a dredged channel 4 cables in length to the harbour. The channel and harbour are very shallow and navigable by vessels with a draught of not more than 1⋅5 m. Berth. On the left bank of Reka Prokhladnaya there is a small basin. A wall strengthened with piles is situated near the S side of the basin. Depths alongside the wall are 1 to 1⋅5 m. The right bank of the river is partially strengthened and vessels may berth there.
2
Navigation in the bay is only practicable along the fairway from Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal to Primorsk Harbour. Depths in the fairway are from 3 to 4 m. Chimneys situated in the W part of Primorsk are prominent landmarks. Caution. Close W of the W breakwater lies a shoal with a least depth of 0⋅2 m over it. A submerged obstruction lies 1½ cables WNW of the end of the W breakwater. Facilities. Fresh water available.
ZALEW WI©LANY — CENTRAL AND SOUTH-WEST PARTS General information
Krasnoflotskye 1
2
9.203 General information. Krasnoflotskye (54°30′N, 19°56′E) is a small harbour near a village of that name. It is protected by two curved breakwaters. The length of the E breakwater is 104 m and the W breakwater 350 m. The width of the entrance channel between the breakwater heads is 40 m, with a depth of 2 m. It affords good shelter for small vessels during heavy weather. The NW part of the harbour is heavily silted. Directions. From the vicinity of a buoy (safe water), moored 3 miles NNW of the entrance, the alignment (166°) of leading lights leads into the harbour. Berths. At the S wall of the harbour there are jetties belonging to a fish factory with depths alongside of 1⋅8 to 2⋅5 m.
Chart 2369, Polish Chart 41 (see 1.34)
Description 1
Topography 1
Bukhta Primorskaya Description 1
1
9.205 The N and E coast of the bay are covered with stunted scrub, rushes and grass; the W coast is covered with forest, the land rising from S to N.
2
Depths 1
9.206 Depths in the central part of the bay vary from 3⋅3 to 3⋅9 m, gradually decreasing towards the coast. In the SE part of the bay there are sand and mud banks.
3
Seabed 1
9.207 The bottom of the bay is mainly mud mixed with sand, grey sand or shell. Along the coasts of the bay, especially the E coast, there is a lot of seaweed.
1
9.212 Water level variations depend on the prevailing winds. In Zalew Wilany the level may rise as much as 0⋅9 m with strong winds from the NE; during W winds the level may fall below normal.
Ice
Primorsk 9.208 Description. The harbour of Primorsk (54°44′N, 20°00′E) lies at the head of the bay to the W of the mouth of Reka Primorskaya. The harbour entrance is protected by two breakwaters extending S from the coast. Depths in the harbour are 2⋅5 to 4⋅5 m. The harbour and its approaches are dredged.
9.211 The average depths vary from 2⋅5 m in the SW to 4⋅7 m in the NW. In some parts the coastal reef extends up to 1½ miles from the coast with depths of less than 1⋅8 m over rocks. In other parts, reeds extend far from land. Fairway depths near the following marks are as follows: No 10 Light-buoy (54°27′⋅0N, 19°44′⋅0E) — 4⋅6 m. PAS Light-buoy (54°26′⋅5N, 19°43′⋅0E) — 3⋅5 m. FRO Light-buoy (54°23′⋅7N, 19°38′⋅7E) — 3⋅0 m. TOL Light-buoy (54°20′⋅8N, 19°29′⋅9E) — 2⋅5 m. ElblŅg Light-beacon (54°19′⋅5N, 19°25′⋅8E) — 2⋅5 m. Gdask Light-beacon (54°18′⋅1N, 19°17′⋅6E) — 2⋅0 m. Caution. Wrecks and other navigational obstructions are numerous, particularly in the areas off Frombork (54°22′N, 19°41′E) and Tolkmicko, 6 miles WSW, and it is therefore essential to keep to the marked fairways.
Water level
Harbours
1
9.210 The NW shore is densely wooded and bordered by marshes. The shore of the mainland is well cultivated and backed by high ground which in places approach close to the coast.
Depths
9.204 Bukhta Primorskaya (54°40′N, 20°00′E) is a large bay to the N of Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal. It is entered from Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal at either end of the dyke which partially closes the S end of the bay.
Topography 1
9.209 Zalew Wilany (54°25′N, 19°30′E) is the Polish SW part of the coastal lagoon adjoining Kaliningradskiy Zaliv (9.188). That part of the sandspit which bounds it to the W is known as Mierzeja Wilana. There is an inland waterway connection between Zalew Wilany and Gdask via Rzeka Szkarpawa, Przekop Wisy and Martwa Wisy.
1
372
9.213 During the winter period the lagoon is completely frozen; as soon as pedestrian traffic over the ice can begin, all navigation is prohibited except through Kaliningradskiy Kana, see 9.161. During this time icebreakers may only open the fairway through Zalew Wilany with special permission from the Harbour Master at ElblŅg.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
Pilotage 1
2
9.214 In Zalew Wilany and Rzeka ElblŅg, pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 40 m in length and is carried out in daylight only. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Traffic regulations 1
2
9.215 Local regulations which apply in Zalew Wilany include the following: Vessels must use the recommended tracks, as shown on the chart. Stopping and waiting is only allowed in the designated areas. Navigation is during daylight hours only. Vessels entering the Zalew Wilany from Kaliningrad Zaliv must give 12 hours notice to the Harbour Master at ElblŅg. For further details contact the Director of Marine Administration, Gdynia.
Rescue 1
9.216 A life-saving vessel which may also be used as a tug is kept at Tolkmicko (54°19′⋅3N, 19°31′⋅8E). A mobile life-saving station, equipped with line-throwing apparatus and radiotelephone is based at Sztutowo (54°20′N, 19°11′E).
Harbours Nowa PasÞřka 1
2
3
9.217 Landmark: Krynica Morska Lighthouse (54°23′⋅3N, 19°27′⋅2E) (9.18). Major light: Krynica Morska Light (54°23′⋅3N, 19°27′⋅2E).
Other aid to navigation 1
9.218 Racon: ElblŅg Light-beacon 54°19′⋅5N, 19°25′⋅8E.
1
2
Directions (continued from 9.200) 1
2
9.219 From No 10 Light-buoy (conical with a cross topmark) (54°27′N, 19°44′E), the main fairway, which is 60 m wide, leads SW for about 20 miles to the entrance of Rzeka Szkarpawa, with branch fairways leading off. The route is marked by spar buoys and the fairway junctions by the following: PAS Buoy (safe water). FRO Light-buoy (safe water). TOL Light-buoy (safe water). ElblŅg Light-beacon. Gdask Light-beacon.
1
2
9.220 Nowa Pasřka S Mole Light (54°25′⋅6N, 19°44′⋅7E) (9.221). Frombork W Mole Light (54°21′⋅7N, 19°40′⋅7E) (9.223). Tolkmicko W Mole Light (54°19′⋅7N, 19°31′⋅4E) (9.224). Suchacz N Mole Light (54°16′⋅9N, 19°25′⋅5E) (9.227).
9.222 Piaski (54°26′N, 19°36′E) has a shallow boat harbour divided into two parts by a pier. Piaski Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, red frame on red pipe construction) (54°25′⋅8N, 19°36′⋅0E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, red frame on red pipe construction) (145 m from front light). The alignment (304°) of the lights indicates the track from the main fairway to the harbour entrance. The inner section of the approach, from the PIA buoy (safe water), moored 2¼ miles SE of the pier, is dredged and marked by buoys (safe water). Depths within the harbour vary from 0⋅8 to 1⋅0 m.
Frombork
Useful marks 1
9.221 General information. Nowa Pasřka (54°26′N, 19°45′E) a fishing port, suitable only for small craft with a draught of 0⋅7 m, is situated on the SW bank of Rzeka Pasřka. It is connected to Stara Pasřka on the NE bank via a bridge spanning the river. Directions. From the PAS buoy, moored 1¼ miles NW of the harbour entrance, the buoyed approach fairway, 40 m wide, with a depth of 1⋅2 m, leads SE to the harbour entrance. At the entrance the channel narrows to 30 m with a depth of 1⋅0 m. Useful mark. Nowa Pasřka S Mole Light (white triangle, point up, on green and white framework tower). Berth. Concrete jetty on N shore, wooden jetty, 17 m long on S shore. Repairs. Marine railway with gantry. Supplies: provisions; fresh water.
Piaski
Principal marks 1
ElblŅg W Mole Light (54°17′⋅1N, 19°24′⋅5E) (9.230). ElblŅg Light-beacon (red metal framework tower, white top, on white stone base, 10 m in height) (54°19′⋅5N, 19°25′⋅8E). Vessels may pass on either side of this light-beacon at a distance of not less than 30 m. Gdask Channel Light-beacon (red round tower, white band, 11 m in height) (54°18′⋅1N, 19°17′⋅6E).
3
373
9.223 General information. Frombork (54°22′N, 19°41′E), a fishing port with a population of about 1500, lies at the mouth of Rzeka Struyna, the S arm of Rzeka Bauda. The port can be used by vessels up to 20 m in length with draughts not exceeding 1⋅5 m. Directions. From FRO Light-buoy (safe water), moored about 2¼ miles NNW of the port, the alignment (147½°) of Frombork Leading Lights leads to the harbour entrance: Front light (white framework tower, red bands, triangle daymark, point up) (54°21′⋅6N, 19°40′⋅9E). Rear light (church tower) (232 m SW of the front light). The approach fairway, marked by buoys, reduces to a width of 30 m and is dredged to a depth of 1⋅9 m over the inner 5 cables section. The port entrance is 16 m wide and the basin 45 m wide. Useful mark. Frombork W Mole Light (green mast). Caution. On a bearing of 185°, and at a distance of 100 m from the light marking the entrance to the port, there is an underwater obstacle in the form of two parallel
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
4
mounds of rocks stretching out over a distance of 100 m and aligned 245°. At mean water level there is a least depth of 0⋅5 m over the obstacle. Berths. There are berths on all sides of the basin with a 50 m length of the W wall set aside for yachts. Facilities: medical facilities. Supplies: provisions; fresh water. Communications. Ferry to Krynica Morska.
7
Tolkmicko 1
2
9.224 Description. Tolkmicko (54°20′N, 19°32′E) is a fishing port with a population of about 2500. Owing to heavy silting the maximum permitted draught is 1⋅2 m. Directions. From TOL Light-buoy (safe water), moored 1½ miles NW of the W mole, the alignment (144°) of Tolkmicko Leading Lights leads to the entrance: Front light (yellow triangle, point up, on the roof of a building) (54°19′⋅5N, 19°31′⋅6E). Rear light (on Tolkmicko church tower) (370 m SE of front light). The fairway, marked by pairs of buoys (lateral), is 30 m wide with a nominal depth of 1⋅3 m. Useful mark. Tolkmicko W Mole Light (green tower with gallery). Berths. On the E side of the basin there is a passenger wharf which can be used by yachts. Repairs. There is a small boat building yard. Other facilities: health centre. Supplies: provisions; fresh water.
Kadyny 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
9.226 Kadyny (54°18′⋅0N, 19°28′⋅5E), a small fishing village, has a small basin with a depth of 1⋅5 m which is no longer in use.
Suchacz 1
9.227 Suchacz (54°17′⋅0N, 19°25′⋅5E) is a small fishing port. Owing to heavy silting it can only be used by vessels with a draught less than 1⋅2 m. Width of the entrance is 16 m, depth in the approach is 1⋅4 m and in the basin 1⋅8 m. Useful mark. Suchacz N Mole Light (white framework tower, red bands).
Nadbrzeÿe 1
9.228 Nadbrzee (54°17′⋅1N, 19°25′⋅9E) is a brick built landing pier.
Kamienica
Krynica Morska 9.225 Description. Krynica Morska (54°23′N, 19°27′E), on Mierzeja Wilany, has two harbour basins 1½ cables apart, about 5 cables SW of Krynica Morska Lighthouse (9.18). The E basin, approached from the SE, is used by ferries and general traffic and the W basin, approached from the S, is used by fishing vessels. Directions for east basin. Tolkmicko Leading Lights: Front light (yellow triangle, point up, on the roof of a building) (54°19′⋅5N, 19°31′⋅6E). Rear light (on Tolkmicko church tower) (370 m SE of front light). From TOL Light-buoy (9.224), the alignment (144°), astern, of these lights, leads NNW along a fairway marked on its SW side by buoys, for 1¾ miles to KM-E light-buoy (E cardinal), moored 9 cables SE of the E basin centre pier. East Basin Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, on red pipe) (54°22′⋅8N, 19°26′⋅9E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on red and white beacon) (107 m from front light). The alignment (307°) of these lights leads to the harbour entrance through a buoyed channel, 50 m wide and dredged to 2⋅4 m, passing, NE of Mielizna Krynica, a shoal which extends 8 cables SE of the harbour. Directions for west basin. West Basin Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle, point up, on grey metal tower) (54°22′⋅6N, 19°26′⋅4E). Rear light (white triangle, point down, on grey square metal tower) (180 m from front light). The alignment (004°) of these lights marks the fairway which leads N for 3¼ miles from ElblŅg Light-beacon
(9.220) to the W harbour centre mole. The outer part of the approach is marked by buoys on the W side of the fairway and the inner part, which is dredged where it passes through Mielizna Krynica, by pairs of buoys (lateral). Berths. W basin length 90 m, width 20 m variable depths of 1⋅2 to 1⋅5 m, maximum draught 1⋅2 m. E basin, passenger and cargo quay, depths variable to 1⋅5 m. Other facilities: health centre. Supplies. Fresh water available in the E harbour. Communication. Summer ferry service to Tolkmicko, Frombork and ElblŅg.
1
9.229 Kamienica (54°15′⋅8N, 19°24′⋅5E) is a fishing village with a boat landing. Depth in the approach and in the dredged channel along the SW wall of the quay, length 35 m, is 1⋅8 m. Depths in the channel may be subject to change. The landing is accessible to vessels with lengths up to 8 m and draughts up to 1⋅2 m.
ElblŅg 1
2
3
374
9.230 General information. ElblŅg (54°10′N, 19°24′E), is a comparatively large industrial town situated, for the greater part, on the E bank of Rzeka ElblŅg, about 6 miles from its entrance to Zalew Wilany. The permitted draught for vessels entering the river is 1⋅5 m. ElblŅg can also be reached via Rzeka Nogat and thence through Kana ElblŅski. Port Authority. Harbour Master, Portowa 2 St, PL 82−300 ElblŅg. Directions. From the ElblŅg Light-beacon (54°19′⋅5N, 19°25′⋅8E) (9.220), which must be passed at a distance of at least 50 m, the fairway, 50 m wide and aligned 018°198°, is marked by spar buoys on the E side and leads SSW for about 2½ miles to the ElblŅg W Mole Light (green framework tower, white band with gallery, 10 m in height) (54°17′⋅1N, 19°24′⋅5E). Thence, keeping close to the W mole, which extends about 1½ miles farther NNE than the head of the E mole, proceed up the river to ElblŅg. There is a bridge at Nowakowo which is opened on request. Berths. There are both passenger and cargo berths at ElblŅg. Repairs. A full range of repairs can be carried out. Supplies: provisions; fresh water. Communications. The town is connected by the inland waterway with Gdask.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 9
KŅty 1
2
9.231 KŅty (54°21′N, 19°14′E) is a village with a small fishing harbour in which there are depths of between 1⋅0 and 1⋅5 m. From KŅty Light-buoy (safe water), moored 1½ miles ESE of the harbour entrance, the fairway leading WNW thence NW to the harbour is marked by buoys and has a least depth of 1⋅8 m. KŅty Leading Lights. The alignment (329°) of these lights mark the inner approaches to the harbour. Front light (U on red and white column) (54°20′⋅5N, 19°14′⋅2E). Rear light (red metal tower white top) (51 m from front light).
2
BALTIYSK TO MYS TARAN
Directions
General information Charts 2369, 2288
1
Route 1
9.232 From a position at the seaward end of the safety fairway the track leads generally NNE for about 17 miles to a position N of Mys Taran (54°58′N, 19°59′E).
Topography 1
9.233 See 9.147.
2
Hazards 1
9.234 Wrecks. Area No 329, about 1½ miles square, in which navigation is considered dangerous owing to the presence of wrecks, is established 3 miles SSW of Obzornyy Light (54°49′⋅7N, 19°57′⋅3E). Fishing. Fishing nets are laid off the coast between Baltiysk and Mys Taran, up to a distance of 5 miles offshore, throughout the year.
3
Current 1
9.235 The current N of Mys Taran usually sets W at a rate not exceeding 2 kn; S of the cape it sets N or S according to the direction of the wind.
4
Rescue 1
9.236 A lifeboat and line-throwing apparatus are kept at a village 6 miles NNE of Baltiysk and at Mys Taran.
5
Principal marks 1
Obzornyy Lighthouse (triangle point up on orange round tower, white bands, 22 m in height) (54°49′⋅7N, 19°57′⋅3E). Two chimneys (54°51′⋅5N, 19°56′⋅5E). Chimney (6 cables N of the above chimneys). Mys Taran Lighthouse (red octagonal tower on dwelling, 30 m in height) (54°57′⋅6N, 19°58′⋅9E). Major lights: Baltiysk Light (54°38′⋅4N, 19°53′⋅8E). Obzornyy Light — as above. Mys Taran Light — as above.
9.237 Landmarks: Baltiysk Lighthouse (54°38′⋅4N, 19°53′⋅8E) (9.176). Water tower (54°42′⋅4N, 19°56′⋅3E). Gora Bol’shaya (54°52′N, 20°00′E) (9.176).
375
9.238 From a position at the end of the safety fairway, seaward of No 1 Light-buoy (safe water) (54°41′⋅4N, 19°45′⋅1E), the recommended track shown on the chart leads N for about 15 miles, passing (with positions from Obzornyy Light (54°49′⋅7N, 19°57′⋅3E)): W of a lighted oil platform (8 miles SW), and an obstruction, 2 miles farther E, marked by a light-buoy (isolated danger), thence: W of an obstruction (6 miles SW), consisting of metal pipes on the seabed, marked by a buoy, thence: W of a wreck (3½ miles SSW) with a depth of 7⋅4 m over it, marked by a buoy (isolated danger). Another dangerous wreck lies farther inshore, marked by a buoy (isolated danger). Thence: W of Banka Rakiminskaya (1¾ miles S), marked by a buoy (isolated danger), thence: W of Banka Yanmarnaya (4 miles NW), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), moored 8 cables W and marking the 20 m depth contour, thence: Clear of an obstruction (target) (9 miles WNW), marked by a buoy (isolated danger), thence: W of reefs (5¼ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), moored 5 cables W on the 20 m depth contour, thence: W of an oil platform (6¼ miles N), with stranded wrecks close SW and NW, thence: W of an obstruction (7 miles N), marked by a buoy (W cardinal), moored to the NW on the 20 m depth contour, thence: Thence the track leads W passing: N of Mys Taran (8 miles N) a bold cliffy point, 33 m in height, which is easily identified when approaching from the NW, thence: N of the coastal reef (8¾ miles N), marked by a light-buoy (N cardinal). (Directions continue at 10.11)
Home
Contents
Index Chapter 10 - Gulf of Gdamsk to Gulf of RØga 19°
30´
30´
20°
21°
30´
30´
2277
30´
30´ Gotland 2288
2226
Ventspils 10.128
2223
57°
10.1 15
57°
Pºvilosta 10.122
Akmenrags
2289
Liepºja 10.88
30´
10.76
30´
BøtingÍ Terminal
2231
56°
56°
10.84
2276 2276
Klaip4da 10.14
2369
30´
10 .4
30´
55°
55°
2288
Mys Taran
0205
30´
19°
30´
Longitude 20° East from Greenwich
376
21°
30´
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 10 GULF OF GDASK TO GULF OF R GA GENERAL INFORMATION
high, bare dunes situated, respectively, about 17, 27½ and 40 miles NE of Zelenogradsk.
Charts 2288, 2223
Scope of chapter 1
10.1 The area covered by this chapter comprises the waters extending N and E from Mys Taran (54°58′N, 19°59′E), along the E shore of the Baltic Sea, to Oviu rags (57°34′N, 21°43′E) (11.9), about 165 miles N, in the W approach to Irbe Strait. It is arranged as follows: Mys Taran to Klaip da (10.4). Klaip da (10.14). Kurshskiy Zaliv (10.54). Klaip da to Liepja (10.76). Liepja (10.88). Liepja to Ventspils (10.115). Ventspils (10.128).
International boundary 1
Exercise areas 1
10.2 The MRCC for the area covered by this chapter are, for Russian waters at Kaliningrad (MRSC) (54°43′N, 20°31′E), for Lithuanian waters at Klaip da (55°43′N, 21°08′E) and for Latvian waters at Rga (56°58′N, 24°06′E). See 1.160, 1.161 and 1.162. Fully equipped rescue craft are stationed at Klaip da (10.14), Liepja (10.88) and Ventspils (10.128).
1
10.3 A number of former mined areas, shown on the chart, lie within the scope of this chapter. The areas are open to unrestricted surface navigation, but mines could still present a hazard for vessels anchoring, fishing or engaged in submarine or seabed operations. For further details see 1.8.
1
1
2
Chart 2288
Route 1
10.4 From a position N of Mys Taran (54°58′N, 19°59′E), the track leads NNE for about 53 miles to the approach fairway, about 8 miles W of Klaip da. 3
Topography 1
2
10.5 The partly wooded coast is steep near Mys Taran but decreases in steepness and height towards Zelenogradsk (54°58′N, 20°29′E), about 17 miles E. As a protection to the coast there are a number of groynes extending some distance from the shore in the vicinity, and up to 3 miles W of Svetlogorsk (54°57′N, 20°10′E). Between Zelenogradsk and Klaip da, some 52 miles NNE, is a narrow sandy peninsula called Kurshskaya Kosa S of latitude 55°16′N and KuriƳ Nerija to the N. It is formed by a chain of white dunes which, about 30 miles NE of Zelenogradsk, attain an elevation of about 66 m; these dunes, the greater part of which are covered with trees, can be seen from a considerable distance. There are
10.9 Due to the non-tidal nature of these waters, the Russian, Lithuanian and Latvian authorities are rigorous in their application of anti-pollution regulations. See 1.72.
Principal marks
MYS TARAN TO KLAIPWDA General information
10.8 Submarine cables and an oil pipeline are laid from the shore close to Mys Gvardeyskiy Light (54°57′⋅6N, 20°16′⋅2E) (10.10) as shown on the chart.
Pollution of the sea
Former mined areas 1
10.7 Firing practice areas. An extensive area, which may periodically be declared dangerous for navigation, is established N of Mys Taran. Details are given in Appendix I. See also 1.22. The Lithuanian authorities have established a firing practice area, which is temporarily hazardous to shipping, centred 16 miles SW of Klaip da, see also Appendix I.
Submarine cables and pipeline
Rescue 1
10.6 The approximate boundary between Russia and Lithuania is at 55°16′N, as shown on chart 259. See also 10.54.
4
377
10.10 Landmarks: Mys Taran Lighthouse (54°57′⋅6N, 19°58′⋅9E) (9.237). Primor’ye Church (54°56′⋅5N, 20°02′⋅2E). Svetlogorsk Church (54°56′⋅5N, 20°10′⋅0E). Tower (5 cables NW of Svetlogorsk Church). Mys Gvardeyskiy Lighthouse (black and white rectangle on framework tower, 40 m in height) (54°57′⋅6N, 20°16′⋅2E). Zelenogradsk Church (54°57′⋅5N, 20°29′⋅0E). Lesnoy Lighthouse (red column, white band on framework tower, 40 m in height) (55°01′⋅0N, 20°36′⋅8E). Rybachiy Lighthouse (red and white 4-sided truncated pyramid with platform, 24 m in height) (55°10′⋅4N, 20°50′⋅9E). Nidden Lighthouse (red round tower, white bands, with balcony, 29 m in height) (55°18′⋅2N, 21°00′⋅8E). Yuodkrante Church (55°32′⋅0N, 21°07′⋅0E). Yuodkrante Lighthouse (white rectangle on black square metal framework tower, 21 m in height) (55°33′⋅5N, 21°07′⋅2E). Chimney (55°41′⋅9N, 21°08′⋅5E). Major lights: Mys Taran Light (54°57′⋅6N, 19°58′⋅9E) (9.237). Mys Gvardeyskiy Light — as above. Lesnoy Light — as above. Rybachiy Light — as above. Nidden Light — as above. Yuodkrante Light — as above. Klaip dos Iplaukos Rear Light (55°43′⋅7N, 21°05′⋅9E) (10.40).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
Directions (continued from 9.238) 1
2
3
4
10.11 Caution. The 20 m depth contour approaches in places to within 1 mile of the coast and vessels approaching it in conditions of low visibility should therefore regard this depth as a danger line and keep well to seaward of it. From a position N of Mys Taran (54°58′N, 19°59′E), the track leads NNE, passing (with positions from Nidden Light (55°18′⋅2N, 21°00′⋅8E)): WNW of an obstruction with a depth of 20 m over it (37½ miles SW), thence: Clear of obstruction over which the depth is unknown (38 miles WSW), and two mooring buoys moored 3¾ miles farther WNW, thence: ESE of an obstruction over which the depth is unknown (36 miles W), thence: WNW of a lighted oil production platform (15 miles W), thence: WNW of two shoal patches with depths of less than 20 m over them (11 miles NNW). A wreck, with a depth of 15 m over it, lies 2 miles ENE of the patches. Thence: ESE of an obstruction, over which the depth is unknown (32 miles NW), thence: WNW of a wreck with a depth over it of 17 m (20½ miles N); another wreck, with a depth over it of 18 m, lies 3 miles NNE. Thence: To the approaches to Klaip da. (Directions continue for KlaipÌda at 10.40 and for the coastal passage at 10.82)
5
6
KLAIPWDA General information Charts 2276, 2288
Position
Chart 2288 (see 1.34)
10.14 Klaip da (55°43′N, 21°08′E) lies at the N end of KuriƳ Marios (10.54). The old part of the city stands mostly on the N bank of the river Dan (10.44) and the new town lies on the S side of the river.
Primor’ye
Function
1
Harbours
1
10.12 At Primor’ye (54°56′⋅5N, 20°02′⋅2E), there is a pier with depths of 3 m at its head and 2⋅4 m alongside its W side, rapidly diminishing towards the coast, at which vessels can lie only in calm weather. A shorter pier lies close E of the first and has a depth of 2 m alongside; it must only be approached from the E as fishing gear lies permanently W of it.
1
Pionerskiy 1
2
3
4
Anchorage. Anchorage area No 65, which lies partly within the limits of former mined area No 128, lies 2 miles E of the approach line, as shown on the chart. Directions. Pionerskiy Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe on 4-sided framework tower, 20 m in height) (54°57′⋅2N, 20°13′⋅3E). Rear light (similar daymark and tower, 16 m in height) (260 m from front light). The alignment (175½°) of these lights leads from seaward to a position about 1¼ cables E of N Molehead, passing No 1 Light-buoy (safe water), moored 1¾ miles N of the harbour. Berths. All depths alongside are as charted in 1997. The W side of the harbour has berthing space about 400 m long with depths of 4⋅8 to 6⋅6 m. In the SW corner is a floating workshop with a depth of 5 m. The S side of the harbour has about 190 m of berthing space with depths from 4⋅1 to 7⋅2 m. In the SE corner is a floating dock in a water depth of 8 m. The W side of S Mole has a berthing length of about 350 m with depths of 2⋅8 to 4⋅9 m. Supplies. Fresh water. Rescue. A lifeboat and a line-throwing apparatus are maintained at Pionerskiy.
10.13 General information. At Pionerskiy (54°58′N, 20°13′E) there is a fishing harbour protected by two moles; the N mole extends NE from Mys Kupal’nyj, and the S mole from the coast; a short mole extends E from the middle of the N mole and forms the N side of the harbour entrance, the S mole forming the S side. The harbour entrance is about 70 m wide. With strong onshore winds a heavy swell is experienced off the entrance. Pionerskiy N Mole Light (red square metal framework tower, 5 m in height) (54°57′⋅6N, 20°13′⋅2E) is displayed from the head of N Mole. Lights are also displayed from the head of the S mole and the spur on the N mole. A signal station from which traffic signals are shown is situated at the root of the S mole. In 1997 the minimum charted depth on the inner approach was 8⋅5 m; within the harbour depths vary from 5⋅6 to 10⋅2 m. Caution. Due to silting, depths at the harbour entrance and in the harbour are subject to continuous change.
10.15 Klaip da is the largest port in Lithuania. The large harbour is relatively well equipped to handle most types of vessel up to moderate/large size carrying bulk liquids, bulk raw products, containers and general cargo. Cargoes handled include oil products, metal, fertilizers, frozen products, timber, cereals, sugar, containers, cement and general cargo. In 2001 the population was about 192 400.
Topography 1
10.16 In the approaches to Klaip da there are few natural conspicuous points. The forest in the vicinity of the city is visible at a distance of 15 to 20 miles. Orlandu Kepure, a wooded hill, 26 m high, 3¾ miles N of the entrance to Klaip da Harbour, is not easily identified on account of the tall trees in its vicinity. The E bank of JrƳ Kanalas is generally industrialised, with many cranes on the quays, while the W side is tree-covered, with few buildings, and is designated a wildlife preservation area.
Port limits 1
10.17 Klaip da port limits are as shown on the chart.
Approach and entry 1
378
10.18 Klaip da is approached through a safety fairway on the alignment of leading lights, shown on the chart, and
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
entered between two moles, forming the harbour entrance, at the seaward end of the JrƳ Kanalas.
2
Traffic 1
10.19 In 2003, 4165 vessels totalling 37¼ million dwt used the port.
Local weather 1
Port Authority 1
Usually in winter, the ice is not solid and is easily overcome by ships, however, with W winds pushing the ice towards the coast it may present a serious problem for navigation in the vicinity of the port.
10.20 Klaip da State Sea Port Authority, J. Janonio 24, LT–5800, Klaip da. Website: www.portofklaipeda.lt E-Mail:
[email protected]
10.27 When there are storm winds from S, a steep sea forms at the entrance to JrƳ Kanalas which makes it difficult to control the ship. Movement of vessels within the harbour is prohibited with wind speeds of more than 40 kn.
Arrival information Vessel Traffic Service
Limiting conditions
1
Controlling depths 1
10.21 The approach fairway and JrƳ Kanalas fairway vary in depth, particularly during the floods in the spring and also after a continuance of N and NW gales. The channel is liable to shoaling and dredging is frequently carried out to maintain depths which are as follows: Approach fairway to the harbour entrance — 12⋅0 m. Harbour entrance to abreast Berth 72 — 10⋅5 m. Abreast Berth 72 to abreast Berth 118 — 10⋅0 m. Timber Harbour — 10.0 m.
Outer anchorages 1
Vertical clearance 1
10.22 A power cable crosses the channel between Kuri Nerija Spit and the S end of Kiauls Nugara, with a safe overhead clearance of 26 m. The same cable continues across to the S end of the Ferry terminal with a reduced safe overhead clearance of 12 m.
10.23 Water level variations are reported to reach as much as 0⋅9 m above and below mean level, though variations of about 0⋅6 m or greater are a rare occurrence; small variations of about 0⋅3 m are frequent. The level rises with strong winds from the W, through N, to NE, and fall with winds between E and S. A rise may sometimes be caused by strong NW or SW winds blowing in from the W part of Baltic Sea. Sometimes changes in the water level can be caused by the ‘Seiche’ effect.
1
2
3
Density of water 1
10.24 The density of the water in the harbour is 1⋅000 g/cm3.
1
10.30 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels entering, leaving, or shifting within Klaip da Harbour. Requests for pilots should be made through the agent, 12 hours in advance, with confirmation 4 hours before ETA. Pilots are available by day or night and board incoming vessels at No 1 Light-buoy (safe water) (55°44′N, 21°00′E), moored about 3 miles W of the harbour entrance on the Klaip dos Iplaukos leading line. The pilot station is situated at the entrance to Winter Harbour. In the event that the pilot is unable to board the vessel due to rough weather, the pilot vessel will proceed ahead of the incoming vessel to guide her through the entrance and board in the inner roadstead. The vessel following the pilot vessel must comply with the signals of the latter with regard to speed and steering. In conditions of poor visibility pilotage is carried out from a control centre, equipped with radar and VHF, at the N side of the harbour entrance. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Tugs
10.25 LOA 193 m, draught 10⋅5 m.
10.31 Requests for tug assistance entering the harbour should be made in plenty of time. Pilot will determine the number of tugs necessary.
Ice
Traffic regulations
Maximum size of vessels handled 1
10.29 There are two designated anchorage areas, shown on the chart, centred 6½ miles WNW and WSW respectively, of the harbour entrance. Depths are from 33 to 39 m. Within the harbour, anchor berths are notified by Klaip da Traffic.
Pilotage
Abnormal water levels 1
10.28 A mandatory traffic management system is in force, controlled by Klaip da Traffic. It applies to all vessels navigating within the area controlled by the Traffic Control Service. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
10.26 The part of the port S of the mouth of the river Dan
(10.44) and the KuriƳ Marios (10.54) are covered with ice every year for a long period. The part of the port situated to the N of the mouth of the river is seldom frozen, however the entrance to JrƳ Kanalas may be choked with drift ice for several days. If this ice remains for a long period port tugs will clear the fairway.
1
1
379
10.32 Speed. Within the port area, speed must not exceed 6 kn. Right of way. Vessels with draught exceeding 7⋅0 m with a pilot on board are permitted to use the main channel, and have priority over traffic crossing the channel. Tankers are required to berth with bows towards the port entrance, unless special permission is obtained.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
Harbour General layout 1
10.33 The harbour at Klaip da comprises that part of JrƳ Kanalas between the entrance and the S end of the suburb of Smelte, about 4½ miles SSE. It includes: iemos Uostas (Winter Harbour). Gamuklos Ůlanka (Factory Basin). The river Dan (10.44) from its entrance to the road bridge. MalkƳ Ůlanka (Timber Harbour).
Hazards 1
2
10.34 Swell. When there are storm winds from the W to WNW, a heavy swell enters JrƳ Kanalas; it runs along the shore and sometimes enters Winter Harbour. Ships alongside the waterfront or in the harbour should leave the quayside in advance and anchor in the inner or outer roadsteads as directed by the Harbour Master. Ferries. Self-propelled ferries ply across JrƳ Kanalas between Klaip da and KuriƳ Nerija (10.5). One ferry runs from a jetty on the left bank of the river Dan to a spit opposite the mouth of the river. A second ferry runs from a jetty near Berth 79 to a jetty opposite.
Klaip da − traffic signals (10.37)
Natural conditions 1
Measured distance 1
10.35 On the sea coast of KuriƳ Nerija (10.5), about 3 miles SSE of the harbour entrance to Klaip da, there is a measured distance of 2041 m. It is indicated, as shown on the chart, by two pairs of beacons on the shore, each pair in line bearing 090°. Offshore, the running course is 180°–000°, marked by buoys in line bearing 090° with each pair of beacons, as follows: No 1 Buoy (safe water) (55°40′⋅2N, 21°03′⋅7E). No 2 Buoy (safe water) (55°41′⋅4N, 21°03′⋅7E).
2
Principal marks 1
Turning circles 1
10.38 Discoloured water flowing out of KuriƳ Marios (10.54) is reported to extend 4 or 5 miles offshore. Its demarcation may give warning to the mariner of his approach to Klaip da in thick weather. Current. The prevailing current sets N across the entrance to the harbour and may attain a rate of 2 kn. Winds from the N, however, give rise to a S going current. The current in the harbour is usually out-flowing but when the coastal current is setting S, there is an in-going flow. The out-going current may attain a rate of 3 kn in the spring. Climatic table. See 1.284 and 1.295
10.36 There are two turning basins in JrƳ Kanalas (10.42): The first, with a diameter of 300 m, is located in the channel about 8 cables SE of the head of the S Mole, close W of Berths 5 and 6. The second, with a diameter of 500 m, is located close N of the International Ferry Terminal at the S end of the channel.
10.39 Landmarks: Radio mast (red lights) (55°46′⋅1N, 21°05′⋅9E). Chimney (55°41′⋅9N, 21°08′⋅5E). Major lights: Yuodkrante Light (55°33′⋅5N, 21°07′⋅2E) (10.10). Klaip dos Iplaukos Leading Lights (55°43′⋅7N, 21°05′⋅9E) (10.40). ventoji Light (56°01′⋅5N, 21°05′⋅0E) (10.81).
Directions (continued from 10.11)
Traffic signals 1
2
10.37 The signal station, a wooden tower painted yellow on a framework base, with a signal mast, stands on the N mole. Traffic signals (Diagram 10.37) regulating the entry and departure of vessels and movements within the port are shown at the signal station. There is also a signal mast standing on the NW corner of the floating dock, ½ cable S of River Dan . Signals indicating that basin trials are in progress, consisting of a black ball by day or a red light at night, are hoisted at the signal mast. When the signal is displayed, entrance to Winter Harbour and navigation in the vicinity of berths at the S end of Commercial Quay may be hampered by currents generated during basin trials.
Approach 1
2
380
10.40 It is reported that the harbour entrance moles can be readily identified on the radar display from a distance of about 10 to 12 miles; and also that some of the leading lights standing on the E side of JrƳ Kanalas are obscured by cranes. Caution. When entering, due allowance should be made for the current (10.38), which according to circumstances, sets N or S with considerable strength across the line of approach. From position 55°44′⋅7N, 20°43′⋅7E, the recommended track (096¼°- 276¼°), shown on the chart, leads 7 miles E, between the outer anchorages, to a point 5 miles W of the entrance.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
3
4
KlaipÌdos Iplaukos Leading Lights: Front light (white diamond and square, black stripe, on red framework tower, 29 m in height) (55°43′⋅7N, 21°05′⋅5E). Rear light (white round tower, black bands and black stripe, 37 m in height) (55°43′⋅7N, 21°05′⋅7E) (285 m from front light). The alignment (092½°) of these lights leads 5 miles E through the safety fairway to the harbour entrance, passing (with positions from front light): Clear of No 1 Fairway Light-buoy (safe water) (3½ miles W), thence: Between several wrecks, lying between 1½ and 2 miles WNW and WSW, as can be seen on the chart, thence: Between two light-buoys (lateral) 6 cables W of the harbour entrance.
are numbered sequentially from the harbour mouth and follow the N side of JrƳ Kanalas. Groups of berths are operated by different companies. They are as described below in those groups.
JørƳ Kanalas (Sea channel) 1
2
Useful marks 3
10.41 1
N Mole black S Mole black
Head round Head round
Light (white square column) (55°43′⋅8N, Light (white triangle column) (55°43′⋅6N,
marked 2B on 21°04′⋅7E) marked 1B on 21°04′⋅6E)
Entrance 1
2
3
4
5
10.42 JrƳ Kanalas is the channel within the harbour from the S Mole to the N end of Kiaules Nugara (see below), a distance of about 4 miles. The dredged channel varies in width from 100 to 120 m, and is marked on both sides by light-buoys, the numbers and positions of which may be seen on the chart. From a position 2½ cables W of Klaip dos Iplaukos front light (10.40) the recommended track (115¾°) leads ESE for about 4½ cables, to the vicinity of the oil terminal berths, then (129¼°) a further 4½ cables SE to the following alignment: Pagrindinis iaurinis/Pagrindinis Pietinis Leading Lights: Pagrindinis Pietinis Front Light (black square metal framework tower, white rectangle with black stripe, 47 m in height) (55°40′⋅2N, 21°09′⋅0E). Pagrindinis Pietinis Rear Light (similar daymark and structure, 68 m in height) (500 m from front light). The alignment (155¼°) of these leading lights leads SSE for about 2½ miles. Ferry Terminal Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle, black stripe, on grey framework tower,, 20 m in height) (55°39′⋅6N, 21°08′⋅6E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 30 m in height) (329 m from front light). The alignment (170°) of these lights leads from No 14 Light-buoy (port hand) (55°41′⋅0N, 21°08′⋅3E) for 1¼ miles to the ferry and Ro-Ro terminal serving the Baltic routes. Kiaulŗs Nugara is an islet standing on the N part of a shallow sandbank at the S end of JrƳ Kanalas. The sandbank is about 1½ miles long and about 3 cables wide, and the main channel passes W of the bank. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited S of the N end of the bank.
4
5
6
MalkƳ Ůlanka (Timber Harbour) 1
Basins and berths 1
10.43 General information. Lights are displayed from various piers and entrances, as may be seen on the chart. Berths
10.44 Berths No 1 to 3 are the oil terminal berths with a maximum draught of 10⋅5 m. Berths No 4 to 18 lie on Commercial Port Quay, the N pier of Winter Harbour, and its NE part. Depths alongside range from 7⋅5 to 11⋅0 m. These berths are equipped to handle general cargo. Berths No 19 to 26 comprise the SW part of Winter Harbour and Factory Basin. A 33 m wide floating dock is connected to the outer side of the S pier of Winter Harbour by a 9 m wide floating pier. Factory Basin has numerous metal obstructions on the quays which make approach difficult. Depths in Factory Basin vary from 2⋅0 to 3.1 m. River DanÌ flows through the city and enters JrƳ Kanalas about 2 miles SE of the main harbour entrance. It is navigable from its mouth to the road bridge, 2½ cables upstream, and has depths in the middle of the fairway from 4⋅7 to 5⋅0 m. The width of the fairway is 32 to 35 m. There are quays on both sides of the river with depths of 2⋅5 to 4⋅0 m alongside. Submarine high-tension cables, gas and water mains are laid across the river. Berths No 27 to 58 are occupied by a ship repair yard and incoporate a slip. Berths No 59 to 65 are used for shipbuilding. A slip and four floating docks, with lengths of about 65 m, are situated within the basin. A floating dock with a length of about 100 m is moored off berth 65. Berths No 66 to 72 include river alongside berths with depths of 7⋅2 m. Berth 72, at the S end of this section is a pier 195 m in length and 16 m wide which projects WNW from the bank. It has a maximum depth alongside of 12⋅0 m. A light is displayed from its head. These berths specialize in handling bulk cement and fertilizer. Berths No 80 to 106 provide about 2475 m of berthing space with depths alongside as follows: Berth 80, 8⋅8 to 10⋅1 m, used mainly for bunkering. Berth 81 is a floating jetty with depths of 6⋅0 and 7⋅5 m. Berths 83 to 88, draught up to 5⋅2 m. Berths 89 to 93, draught up to 5⋅5 m. Berths 94 to 104, draught up to 7⋅5 m. These berths are for general cargo. Berths No 107 to 122 are for fishing vessels. The quay is about 574 m long, with depths alongside of 4⋅0 to 6⋅4 m.
1
381
10.45 From the vicinity of No 17 Light-buoy (starboard hand), the harbour is entered in the white sector (159½°−161½°) of a light (red metal framework tower) (55°38′⋅9N, 21°09′⋅5E) standing on the W side of the harbour, at the N end of the container berths. Berths No 123 to 126 are part of a naval base. Berths No 127 to 128 are part of a container terminal with depths of 7 m alongside. Berths No 129 to 139 are part of a ship repair facility, comprising five piers projecting from the shore, and three floating docks. 10.46 International Sea Ferry Terminal is situated on the N end of the peninsula which forms the W side of Timber Harbour. It has a finger pier about 250 m long with a berth
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
on each side equipped with Ro-Ro ramps which can also handle railway wagons. There are depths alongside the piers of 9⋅5 to 10⋅0 m. The terminal serves the Baltic routes. Berths No 143 and 144. A container terminal, with a draught alongside of 10⋅4 m, provides two berths at the S end of this peninsula.
KURIƲ MARIOS AND KURSHSKIY ZALIV General information Chart 2288 (see 1.34)
Description 1
Mooring buoys 1
10.47 A number of mooring buoys are established on the E side of the buoyed channel adjacent to Baltija shipbuilding yard.
Port services
Topography 1
Repairs 1
2
10.48 Extensive repair facilities are available in Klaip da, including three repair yards and one shipbuilding yard, with a total of six floating docks. Repairs of all kinds can be carried out. Largest floating dock: length 216⋅0 m; breadth 41⋅5 m; lifting capacity 27 000 tonnes. Largest vessel; length 200⋅0 m; breadth 26⋅0 m; draught 6⋅0 m. Salvage work is carried out by the pilot vessels and tugs. Large salvage vessels can be ordered from Gdask and Liepja.
10.49 Hospital; oily waste and dirty ballast reception; deratting and issue of certificates.
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
10.60 Landmarks: Yuodkrante Lighthouse (55°33′⋅5N, 21°07′⋅2E) (10.10). Yuodkrante Church (55°32′⋅0N, 21°07′⋅0E) (10.10). Nidden Lighthouse (55°18′⋅2N, 21°00′⋅8E) (10.10). Rybachiy Lighthouse (55°10′⋅4N, 20°50′⋅9E) (10.10). Lesnoy Lighthouse (55°01′⋅0N, 20°36′⋅8E) (10.10). Major lights: Yuodkrante Light (55°33′⋅5N, 21°07′⋅2E) (10.10). Nidden Light (55°18′⋅2N, 21°00′⋅8E) (10.10). Rybachiy Light (55°10′⋅4N, 20°50′⋅9E) (10.10). Lesnoy Light (55°01′⋅0N, 20°36′⋅8E) (10.10).
West side Harbours 1
Rescue 1
10.59 The inland sea is frozen every winter usually from December to March. In January the ice is usually thin enough to be broken but in February and March navigation may be impeded, particularly in the S part.
Principal marks
10.51 There is an airport at Palanga, about 11 miles NNW of the harbour entrance. Regular ferry service to Mukran (54°29′N, 13°35′E) (8.29), and other ports in Baltic Sea and North Sea.
10.52 Vessels are not allowed to immobilise the ships fire fighting equipment, main engines, steering gear or anchors whilst in port. Ships with dangerous cargoes, and tankers lying in the port are to keep their main engines on immediate standby. The full text of regulations may be obtained from the Post Office on arrival.
10.58 The water level usually rises about 0⋅3 m with N winds and falls about 0⋅2 m with S winds. Large variations seldom occur.
Ice
Harbour regulations 1
10.57 There are no pilots for the inland sea and local knowledge is required.
Water level
10.50 Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Communications
10.56 There is a gradual increase in depths from 1⋅0 to 2⋅5 m in the N part and 3⋅0 to 5⋅5 m in the S part.
Local knowledge
Supplies 1
10.55 The coast on the mainland on the E side of the inland sea is low and for the most part wooded. The E side of KuriƳ Nerija/Kurshskaya Kosa peninsula, in contrast to its W side, is much indented.
Depths
Other facilities 1
10.54 KuriƳ Marios and Kurshskiy Zaliv together form the largest inland sea on this coast. KuriƳ Marios is that part of the sea N of approximately 55°16′N which lies within Lithuania. Kurshskiy Zaliv, which lies within Russia, is the S part. It is separated from the sea by a long, narrow, sandy peninsula described at 10.5.
10.53 A lifeboat and life-saving equipment are maintained at a station on the N side of the entrance to River Dan
(10.44).
382
10.61 Yuodkrante (55°32′N, 21°07′E) is a seaside resort on the W side of the inland sea, about 10 miles S of Klaip da. In the summer months it has regular communication by water with other places in the inland sea and the inland waterways. About 1½ miles N of the church there is a landing place with a depth of about 2⋅7 m and a small camber with a depth of 2 m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
1
1
1
Arlkiu Ragas (55°25′N, 21°07′E) is a prominent point about 8 miles S of Yuodkrante. 10.62 Nidden (55°18′N, 21°00′E) is a seaside resort and fishing village with similar communications to Yuodkrante. It has a small harbour, formed by two moles, which is about 24 m in width. There is a depth of 2 m at the quay on the S side. Nidden Church, is partly hidden from the W by dunes and trees. Water and provisions may be obtained from hotels N of the harbour. 10.63 Rybachiy (55°09′N, 20°51′E) is a village with similar communications to Nidden. There is a mole about 350 m in length with a depth of 2⋅4 m at its head. The shore in the vicinity of the mole is rocky. Rybachiy Church stands within the village. 10.64 Lesnoy (55°01′N, 20°37′E), a village with a church, is situated near the S end of Kurshskaya Kosa.
East side
South side Harbours 1
1
1
Offshore shoals 1
2
Harbours 1
1
1
10.65 Mysovka (55°12′N, 21°16′E) is a village at the mouth of Reka Mysovka. The entrance channel to the river may be used only at slow speed by vessels with a draught of not more than 1⋅5 m. 10.66 Matrosovo (55°01′N, 21°14′E) is a village near the mouth of Reka Matrosovo. 10.67 Nemoniem (54°59′N, 21°15′E) is a village on the S side near the mouth of Reka Nemoniem. The entrance channel to the river has a depth of 2⋅1 m.
Offshore banks 1
2
10.68 Offshore banks (positioned from Ventes Ragas (55°21′⋅5N, 21°11′⋅5E), a prominent point on the E side of the inland sea): Banka Kaliva (1½ miles WSW) lies at the S end of the N shallow part of the inland sea. It has depths over it of about 1⋅8 m. Banka Shteyn (2¾ miles SW) is a detached 1⋅8 m rocky patch. Banka Kamyowaja (8½ miles S), a shallow bank with depths of less than 1⋅3 m over it, extends N for about 5 miles, curving E towards the mainland at its N end.
Rivers 1
2
10.69 Reka Atmata (55°20′N, 21°15′E) flows into the inland sea about 2 miles E of Ventes Ragas (10.68). The banks fringing the shore N and S of the river mouth are overgrown with tall rushes. There are depths of 2⋅3 m in the approach channel to Reka Atmata and as far as Russ, about 6 miles upstream. Silting occurs in the mouth of the river after heavy ice movements. Reka Skirvit (55°15′N, 21°15′E), about 6½ miles SSE of Ventes Ragas, is protected by a mole extending about 5 cables WNW from its S side. A channel with a depth of 1⋅8 m leads through the entrance but it is liable to frequent silting.
10.70 Polessk a town with a sizeable population is situated 1¾ miles upstream from the mouth of Reka Dejma (10.74). 10.71 ZalØvnoye (54°55′N, 20°50′E) is a fishing village about 4 miles W of Polessk. 10.72 Kañhirskoye (54°56′N, 20°42′E) is a village with a small boat harbour, the entrance of which is shallow and rocky. 10.73 At the S end of the inland sea, the coastal bank is very rocky in several places and there are dangerous patches up to 3½ miles offshore some of which are as follows: Banka Tu’ordaja (54°58′N, 21°03′E), over which there is a depth of 1⋅6 m. A large rock with 1⋅2 m over it lies 2½ miles SSE. Banka Kamenistaja (54°55′N, 20°58′E) has a depth of 1⋅8 m over it; a dangerous rocky patch lies about 1¾ miles to the ENE. Banka Kurskaya (54°57′N, 20°38′E), has a depth of 1⋅4 m over it.
Rivers 1
10.74 Reka Dejma (54°54′N, 21°05′E), flows into the SE corner of the inland sea; there is a depth of 2⋅5 m in the channel leading to it. Reka Beek (54°58′N, 20°32′E) flows into the SW corner of Kurskiy Zaliv; the channel leading to it has a normal depth of 2⋅1 m, though frequently less.
Inland waterways 1
2
3
10.75 An extensive inland waterway system exists between Klaip da and Kaliningrad (9.150), via the numerous river systems E and S of KuriƳ Marios and Kurshskiy Zaliv. Kanal Korolya Vil’gel’ma (Karaleus Vilejs Kanalas) commences in Timber Harbour at the S end of JrƳ Kanalas (10.42), and connects with Reka Dreverna and Reka Min’ya respectively, the latter of which flows into Reka Atmata (10.69). The canal is crossed by a number of iron lift bridges with openings 9⋅4 m wide; it serves principally for the transport of timber which is brought down Reka Nemunas. Reka Nemunas flows into KuriƳ Marios and Kurshskiy Zaliv through several branches, amongst which are Atmata, Skirvit and Nemoniem; about 32 miles upstream is the town of Sovietsk, formerly Tilsit, and about 140 miles from Klaip da is the city of Káunas, formerly Kovno. From Kanal Korolya Vil’gel’ma the inland waterway leads through the rivers Min’ya, Atmata, Russ and Matrosovo; thence through Kanal Fridriksgraben, connecting the rivers Nemoniem and Dejma at Polessk; thence via the rivers Dejma and Pregolya to Kaliningrad.
KLAIPWDA TO LIEPJA General information Charts 2288, 2231
Route 1
383
10.76 From a position about 12 miles W of Klaip da (55°43′N, 21°08′E) the route leads N for about 43 miles to a position,
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
on the Liepja entry leading line, about 10 miles WSW of the main harbour entrance.
Depths 1
10.77 The coastal bank betwen Klaip da and Liepja extends in places up to 3 miles offshore; there are several wrecks, the positions of which are shown on the chart.
2
Topography 1
10.78 The coast between Klaip da (55°43′N, 21°08′E) and Palanga, 11 miles N, is hilly and wooded. Between Palanga and Liepja, about 35 miles N, the coast is low and uniform and is backed by sand dunes, partially bare or wooded. Scattered villages stand among the dunes, and on closing the land white sandy beaches can be seen in places. In the vicinity of Gora Tyupa (56°16′N, 21°00′E) (10.83), a chain of low hills, on some of which are a few trees, rises slightly above the flat wooded surroundings.
3
Useful marks 10.83 1
International boundary 1
leads N, passing (with positions from Papes Lighthouse (56°09′⋅3N, 21°01′⋅4E)): W of a dangerous wreck (15 miles S), thence; Clear of a wreck (16 miles SW), with a depth over it of 9 m, thence: W of 17⋅4 m patch at the edge of the coastal bank (9 miles W), thence: E of a dangerous wreck (22 miles WNW), thence; W of a wreck with a depth of 18⋅2 m over it (13 miles NNW), thence: Clear of a wreck (20¼ miles NW), with a depth over it of 18 m, and: W of Bernatu Seklis, part of the coastal bank with depths of less 10 m over it, extending up to 3 miles W of Bernati Light (14½ miles N), thence; W of a dangerous wreck (21 miles NNW), thence: To a position on the Liepaja entry leading line.
10.79 The approximate boundary between Latvia and Lithuania is at 56°04′N.
Gora Tyupa (56°16′N, 21°00′E), a hill about 34 m in height with a tower. Cathedral (56°33′⋅2N, 21°00′⋅7E). (Directions continue for Liepaja at 10.106 and for the coastal passage at 10.120)
BøtingÍ Oil Terminal Hazards 1
10.80 Explosives dumping grounds, shown on the chart, exist in deep water, well offshore, between latitudes 55°56′N and 56°32′N. A spoil ground, in which fishing is prohibited, is situated 2½ miles N of the entrance to Klaip da, extending about 1 mile from the coast. Its N and S limits are marked by light-buoys (special).
1
Principal marks 1
2
3
10.81 Landmarks: Radio mast (red obstruction lights) (55°46′⋅1N, 21°05′⋅8E). Church (55°53′N, 21°15′E). Palanga Church (55°55′N, 21°04′E), tall and red, with spire. Gora Biruta, 1 mile S of Palanga Church, a hill 17 m high. ventoji Lighthouse (red rectangle, white stripe on square metal framework tower, 37 m in height) (56°01′⋅5N, 21°05′⋅0E). Papes Lighthouse (white metal framework tower, 22 m in height) (56°09′⋅3N, 21°01′⋅4E). Bernti Lighthouse (red planking on framework tower, 21 m in height) (56°22′⋅9N, 20°58′⋅9E). Liepja Lighthouse (red round tower, white bands, 30 m in height) (56°31′⋅0N, 20°59′⋅5E). Major lights: Ůplaukimo Rear Light (55°43′⋅7N, 21°05′⋅9E) (10.40). ventoji Light — as above. Bernti Light — as above. Liepja Light — as above.
2
3
Harbours Palanga 1
Directions (continued from 10.11) 1
10.82 From a position about 12 miles W of Klaip da (55°43′N, 21°08′E), at the W end of the approach fairway, the track
Charts 2288, 2231 10.84 General information. Bting Oil Terminal (56°03′N, 20°58′E) consists of an SPM (CALM-type, for details see The Mariner’s Handbook) moored 3¾ miles from the coast in a depth of about 18 m. Traffic. In 2003 the terminal was used by 20 vessels totalling 2⋅3 million dwt. Port Authority: AB Mazeikiu Nafta, Bting Branch, Pasventupio Kelias 21, PO Box 48, LT−00309 Palanga, Republic of Lithuania. Website: www.nafta.lt E-Mail:
[email protected] Limiting conditions. Tankers up to 150 000 dwt are accepted; maximum draught is 16 m, minimum under-keel clearance required is 4 m. Arrival information. Compulsory pilotage and tugs; a tug remains in attendance while a tanker is secured to the SPM. An anchorage, shown on the chart, is established 8 miles SW of the SPM. A foul patch lies close to the W edge of the anchorage. Directions. A channel, in which anchoring and fishing are prohibited, leads 6½ miles ENE, from a position N of the anchorage, to the SPM. Caution. A light-buoy (special), marking a 15 m patch, lies 5 cables E of the SPM.
2
384
10.85 Description. At Palanga (55°55′N, 21°05′E) there is a small artificial harbour for vessels with a draught of 1⋅5 m. The village of Palanga stands on the N side of a wood which runs down to the coast and few of the houses are visible from seaward. The church, the castle S of it, and Gora Biruta (55°54′N, 21°04′E) are good landmarks. Directions. Due to the presence of a rocky patch, with a depth of 1⋅5 m over it, lying about 150 m from the head of the landing pier and about 2½ cables offshore, vessels
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
should approach from the N. It is inadvisable to lie at the pier during W winds. 1
ªventoji Harbour 1
2
10.86 Description. ventoji Harbour (56°02′N, 21°05′E), lies at the mouth of Reka ventoji. It consists of an outer and inner harbour formed by moles and is used only by fishing vessels. A pier, approximately 3 cables long, extends WNW from the S side of the entrance, The pierhead, which is in ruins, is protected on the N side by a number of dolphins which run N and E. The outer 100 m of the S side of the pier has water depths of 5⋅0 to 5⋅2 m alongside. A light (white octagonal pyramid, 3 m in height) is displayed from the head of the S inner mole. There are some high sand dunes S of the harbour. Berths. Vessels with a draught of 1⋅5 m can lie alongside the N mole in the outer harbour. The entrance to the inner harbour is shallow but within it on the S bank of the river are two dredged basins which are both liable to silting. The W basin has depths of 2⋅0 to 2⋅4 m.
2
10.87 Description. Papesciems, or Pape Harbour (56°09′N, 21°02′E), is at the seaward end of the outlet from Papes ezers. It is formed by a N mole and a S mole, 280 m and 300 m in length, respectively, with an entrance between the heads of the moles 68 m wide. The depth in the entrance is 2⋅5 m. Within the harbour the depth decreases rapidly to less than 1 m. The bottom is sand and stones. Hazard. The remains of two marine farms, charted as obstructions, lie respectively 1 mile WNW and 3 miles NW of the harbour entrance. Prohibited area. Entry is prohibited in an area, shown on the chart, centred 6 miles NNW of Papes Lighthouse.
1
Water level 1
Density of water
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
10.96 Dienvidu vrti, length 210 m, breadth 35 m and draught of 9⋅5 m. Vidjie vrti, length 170 m, breadth 30 m and draught of 6⋅9 m. Ziemeu vrti, length 80 m breadth 20 m and draught of 5⋅0 m.
Ice
General information
Arrival information
1
Port operations
10.88 Liepja (56°31′N, 21°01′E) is an important commercial town on the SW coast of Latvia. 10.89 Main exports and imports include, forest products, metal, peat, oil products and fertilizers. Different cargoes are transported to and from CIS countries by Ro-Ro vessels. In 2000 the population was 89 448.
1
1
10.90 The outer limits of the port are shown on chart 2231.
Approach and entry 10.91 The port is approached through a safety fairway, marked by leading lights and buoys, and entered via the Middle or South entrance of the outer harbour. Under normal conditions the approach to Liepja presents no difficulty in clear weather. When approaching in thick weather vessels should take soundings continuously and not approach into a depth of less than 20 m until position has been accurately determined.
10.98 The Port Authority should be consulted for the current practices in the port.
Vessel Traffic Service
Port limits
1
10.95 Varies with the location within the port and the prevailing weather.
LIEPJA
Function
1
10.94 With winds from the E, water level may fall up to 0⋅6 m, and with W winds it may rise up to 0⋅9 m, with regard to mean water level.
10.97 The average period of ice is from the first week of January to the beginning of March. Icebreakers are employed when necessary to keep the port open throughout the year.
Position
1
10.93 Liepja Special Economic Zone authority,Feniksa 4, LV−3401, Liepja. Website: www.liepaja-sez.lv E-Mail:
[email protected]
Limiting conditions
Chart 2289
1
10.92 In 2003, 2084 vessels totalling 9¼ million dwt visited the port.
Port Authority
1
Papesciems 1
Traffic
10.99 A mandatory VTS is in operation, which applies to all vessels, including those not bound for Liepja, navigating within the area bounded by the following coordinates: 56°35′N, 20°40′E: 56°27′N, 20°40′E and to the E along the parallels to the coastline. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Notice of ETA 1
10.100 Send ETA 48 and 24 hours prior to arrival, to Harbour Master and agent.
Outer anchorages 1
2
385
10.101 Mariners should note that numerous submarine cables exist in the area off Liepja. Anchoring, except in the designated areas, fishing, and underwater operations are prohibited within this area which is marked on the chart. The anchorage areas are as follows (positions centred from Liepja Light (56°31′⋅0N, 20°59′⋅5E)):
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
L3 (8 miles W), deep-draught vessels. Depths about 28 m. L2 (5 miles WNW), standard vessels. Depths about 15 m. L1 (3 miles WSW), small vessels. Depths about 8 to 10 m.
2
Pilotage and tugs 1
10.102 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 700 grt entering, leaving or moving within the harbour. Inward bound vessels should advise the Harbour Master and agent of their ETA 48 and 24 hours in advance and request a pilot through the VTS. Pilot boards 5 miles WSW of the harbour entrance, near ‘A’ Light-buoy, or where indicated by the VTS. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Tugs, including fire-fighting tugs, are available and the assistance of tugs for large vessels is essential.
3
4
Harbour
Entry
General layout 1
2
3
10.103 The outer harbour is formed by two moles and two breakwaters which provide three entrances: Vidjie Varti, the middle entrance. Ziemeu Varti, the N entrance. Dienvidu Varti, the S entrance. Within Priekosta (Outer harbour) are Kara ostas Kanls (Naval harbour), Brūvosta (Commercial harbour), Tirdzniecbas Kanls (Harbour Canal) and Ziemas osta (Winter harbour). Development. In 2002 it was reported that a new berth was to be introduced at the container terminal. Reconstruction of the port’s entrance and dredging of the main channel to permit entry of larger vessels is also being undertaken.
1
2
3
Natural conditions 1
10.104 Magnetic anomaly. A local magnetic anomaly is reported to exist in the vicinity of Liepja (56°31′N, 21°01′E). Current. The direction and rate of the current off Liepja depends on the direction and force of the wind. The rate may at times be as much as 2 kn. The current is predominantly N-going, running parallel to the coast. Climatic table. See 1.284 and 1.296.
4
Principal marks 1
Rear light (red trapezium, white stripe on pyramid, 30 m in height) (984 m from front light). From a position about 10 miles WSW of Liepja the alignment (067¾°) of these lights leads through the fairway, marked by light-buoys, to a position about 3 cables WSW of the middle entrance of the harbour where the dredged channels to the port commence, passing (with positions from the front light): SSE of L3 Anchorage (10 miles W), thence: Clear of A Light-buoy (safe water) (6 miles WSW) thence: SSE of L2 Anchorage (5 miles W), and: NNW of a wreck with a depth of 8 m over it (4¾ miles SW) which lies 2½ cables S of L1 Anchorage, thence; Between Nos 1 and 2 Light-buoys (lateral) (3 miles WSW), and: SSE of a wreck with a depth of 6⋅5 m over it (3 miles W), marked by a buoy (isolated danger), thence: To the harbour entrance as appropriate.
10.105 Landmarks: Chimney (56°31′N, 21°00′E). TV Tower 2 cables SSW of the chimney above. Major lights: Bernti Light (56°22′⋅9N, 20°58′⋅9E) (10.81). Liepja Light (56°31′⋅0N, 20°59′⋅5E) (10.81).
10.107 Middle entrance (VidÏjie vºrti). Vessels proceeding to the middle entrance continue on the Liepja Leading Line through a channel, 100 m wide, least reported depth 8⋅9 m (2001). Lights are displayed at the middle entrance. South entrance (Dienvidu vºrti). From a position 3 cables WSW of the middle entrance, a channel, with a depth of 10⋅4 m (2001), leads ESE for 3 cables on the alignment (112½°) of leading lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe on framework tower, 30 m in height) (56°31′⋅4N, 20°59′⋅7E). Rear light (similar to front light, 40 m in height) (422 m from front light). Lights are displayed at the S entrance. Caution. Because of the comparatively shallow depths in the dredged channels deep-draught vessels may not handle well at slow speed and may be considerably influenced by the current which sets at right-angles to the leading line. They should maintain sufficient speed in order to remain accurately on the leading line at all times. North entrance (Ziemequ vºrti). Entry through the N entrance is possible with special permission from Liepja Naval Base. Minimum charted depth is 5⋅6 m. Entry is made in the white sector (170¼°−171¼°) of a light (white round column with platform, 5 m in height) standing on the S mole, 5 cables from its head. A beacon stand at the head of the E breakwater.
Outer harbour directions 1
Directions
10.108 Once within the outer harbour there are additional leading lights to assist movement through the dredged channels, marked by buoys (lateral), to the Commercial Harbour and the Harbour Canal. Lights are displayed from the moleheads at the entrance to each berthing area, with the exception of the N entrance to the Commercial Harbour.
(continued from 10.83)
Berthing areas
Approach 1
10.106 Liepºja Leading Lights: Front light (white trapezium, black stripe on pyramid, 20 m in height) (56°32′⋅7N, 20°59′⋅9E).
Priekðosta 1
386
10.109 Priekosta, the outer harbour, with charted depths of 5⋅1 to 9⋅8 m, clay, in the middle of its N part, is contained on
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
the N by Ziemeu mols (North Mole), a mole extending WSW from the coast for about 1 mile; on the W by Ziemeu Vi lauzis and Dienvidu Vi lauzis, two detached breakwaters extending in a N/S direction for about 1¼ miles; on the S by Dienvidu mols (South Mole), a mole extending NW then W then N and forming a continuation of the quay on the S side of the channel between the old and new parts of the town. The harbour is liable to silt especially near the S entrance.
2
Other facilities. Compass adjustment; deratting; hospital; oily waste reception facilities. Supplies. Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Regular communication by sea with the principal Baltic and North Sea ports. Liepja Airport 2 km. Rescue. A lifeboat and line-throwing apparatus are maintained at Liepja.
LIEPJA TO VENTSPILS
Kara Ostas Kanºls 1
10.110 Kara Ostas KanŁls, the naval harbour, is entered between two moles on the E side of the Outer Harbour about 7 cables S of the root of the North Mole. A least depth of 8⋅2m (2002) is reported in the 3027 m long and 130 m wide channel. About 4 cables E of the entrance between the moles, the harbour is spanned by a swing bridge. A ferry crosses the naval harbour close E of the bridge. At the head of the harbour is a docking basin with a floating dock. On the N side of this basin are Nos 1 and 2 Docks and a slipway. A basin extends 4½ cables N about 5 cables from the head of the naval harbour and on its W side there are a number of pens.
General information Charts 2231, 2288, 2226
Route 1
Brūvosta 1
10.111 Brūvosta, the commercial harbour, is in the SE part of the Outer Harbour and is contained on the N by Sadal ais mols, and on the W by Iekejais Vi lauzis, a detached breakwater, and on the S by a wide quay; Aizsarg mols extends about 1 cable N from the end of the wide quay. On the E side of the harbour there is a floating pier and a wide pier extending W. The S entrance to the port has a depth of 10⋅5m (2002). In strong W or N winds the harbour provides little shelter and working cargo is rendered difficult or impossible.
Topography 1
TirdzniecØbas Kanºls 1
2
10.112 Tirdzniecbas Kanls, or Harbour Canal, consists of a channel 100 m wide between the old and new parts of town, it is entered between the S side of the commercial harbour and the inner part of the Dienvidu mols (South mole); it has depths of 6⋅4 to 7⋅9 m between its entrance and the road bridge, about 1½ miles SE; between the road bridge and the railway bridge, about 2½ cables farther E, there are depths of 3 to 4 m; E of the railway bridge the charted depths do not exceed 4 m. On the S side near the main lighthouse is a camber for fishing vessels, SE of which is the customs depot and the pilot lookout tower.
1
10.117 The area between Ventspils (57°24′N, 21°33′E) and Oviu 12 miles NNE, lies within a former mined area. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within this area.
Exercise areas 1
10.118 Former mine exercise areas, shown on the chart, are centred 13 miles SW and 20 miles W of Akmenrags Light (56°50′⋅0N, 21°03′⋅6E) (10.119), respectively. Within these areas anchoring and fishing are prohibited and surface navigation is not recommended.
Principal marks
10.113 Ziemas osta, or Winter Harbour, is SE of the S end of the Commercial Harbour, it is entered from Harbour Canal and has depths of 6 to 7m(2002).
1
Port services 1
10.116 The coast for about 6 miles N of Liepja is sandy and a chain of partly overgrown sand dunes borders the beach. Between the dunes and the woods, which mostly lie about 6 cables inland, there is cultivated ground which continues thence as far as Ventspils (57°24′N, 21°33′E). About 7½ miles NE of Akmenrags (56°50′N, 21°04′E) the dunes are about 18 m high. It is reported that N of Akmenrags Lighthouse a prominent yellow mark was observed on the point which, by day, was easier to distinguish at a considerable distance than the lighthouse.
Former mined area
Ziemas osta 1
10.115 From the approaches to Liepja (56°31′N, 21°01′E) to the approaches to Ventspils (57°30′N, 21°25′E), the route leads NNE for 62 miles. Offshore depths along this stretch of coast are variable and there are many detached shoals of less than 20 m up to 18 miles offshore. Several dangerous wrecks lie within about 10 miles of the coast. Dependent on draught, vessels proceeding between Liepja and Ventspils are recommended to keep well offshore.
10.114 Repairs of all kinds can be carried out. Largest drydock: Length 225⋅0 m; breadth 35⋅3 m; maximum capacity 20 000 dwt. Largest vessel: length 215⋅0 m; breadth 24⋅0 m; draught 9⋅0 m.
2
387
10.119 Landmarks: Liepja Lighthouse (56°31′⋅0N, 20°59′⋅5E) (10.81). Akmenrags Lighthouse (red round stone tower, 37 m in height) (56°50′⋅0N, 21°03′⋅6E). U ava Lighthouse (white round stone tower with balcony and lantern room, 19 m in height) (57°12′⋅6N, 21°25′⋅0E). Bunieku Beacon (white truncated pyramid, red bands, 26 m in height) (57°27′⋅8N, 21°37′⋅4E). A light-coloured sand dune in the vicinity of the beacon is readily distinguished against the dark background of trees. Ovi Lighthouse (57°34′⋅1N, 21°43′⋅0E) (11.14).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
3
Major lights: Liepja Light (56°31′⋅0N, 20°59′⋅5E) (10.81). Akmenrags Light — as above. U ava Light — as above. Ventspils Rear Light (57°23′⋅3N, 21°33′⋅1E) (10.156). West Branch Rear Light (57°24′⋅4N, 21°34′⋅6E) (10.157). Ovi Light (57°34′⋅1N, 21°43′⋅0E) (11.14).
Arrival information 1
10.124 Notice of ETA: 24 hours notice of arrival should be given to the agents. Anchorage may be obtained in position 56°54′⋅0N, 21°10′⋅5E. A disused submarine cable is landed 5 cables W of Pvilosta. Pilotage is compulsory, 24 hours notice required.
Harbour Directions (continued from 10.83) 1
2
3
10.120 From a position about 10 miles WSW of Liepja (56°31′N, 21°01′E), the track leads NNE for about 62 miles passing (with positions from Akmenrags Light (56°50′⋅0N, 21°03′⋅6E)): Clear of two dangerous wrecks (21½ and 20 miles SSW, respectively), thence: ESE of an obstruction over which the depth is unknown (16 miles SW), and: WNW of Akmenrags (10.119), close WNW of which lies a wreck with a depth of 3⋅8 m over it (1 mile NW). Depths of 20 m or less extend up to 5 miles WNW of Akmenrags. Thence: WNW of a wreck with a depth of 14⋅2 m over it (6 miles N), thence: Clear of a dangerous wreck (11 miles N), thence: Clear of a dangerous wreck (22 miles N), thence: WNW of Banka Somnitel’naya with a depth of 4⋅4 m over it, marked by a light-buoy (isolated danger) (30 miles NNE). An isolated 9⋅6 m patch lies 1¾ miles N. Thence: WNW of a dangerous wreck over which the depth is unknown (32 miles NNE). Thence to the approach fairways, or to the anchorages as required.
1
10.125 The harbour is formed by the mouth of Reka Saka and protected by breakwaters on each side extending about 305 m NW. The entrance, about 40 m wide, is subject to serious silting and is maintained by frequent dredging. Lights are displayed from each breakwater head.
Directions 1
2
10.126 Pvilosta Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, on framework tower, 10 m in height) (56°53′⋅3N, 21°10′⋅3E). Rear light (similar structure, 15 m in height) (162 m from front light). From the vicinity of 56°56′N, 21°07′E the alignment (144¼°) of the above lights leads into the harbour entrance passing clear of P Buoy (safe water) moored 1¼ miles of the entrance. Useful marks: Tower (56°53′⋅4N, 21°10′⋅1E) standing on the SW bank, 1½ cables inside the harbour entrance. Water tower (8 cables farther E)
Port services 1
10.127 Facilities: medical centre; bilge water reception. Supplies: fuel; fresh water; provisions. Communications: Liepja Airport, 50 km distant.
Useful mark 1
2
Position
Latvian Chart 2101 (see 1.34)
General information
Function
10.122 Position. Pvilosta (56°54′N, 21°11′E), a small commercial and fishing harbour, lies about 33 miles SSW of Ventspils and 5 miles NE of Akmenrags. Function. A fishing port that is also used for the transhipment of timber and other cargoes. Port Authority. Pvilostas Osta, 3 Dzintaru Str., Pvilosta, Liepjas rajons, LV–3466, Latvia.
Limiting conditions 1
General information Chart 2277 10.128 Ventspils (57°24′N, 21°33′E) lies at the mouth of the Reka Venta. The town is situated principally on the S and W banks of the river.
Pºvilosta
1
VENTSPILS
10.121 Jurkalne Church (57°00′N, 21°23′E). (Directions continue for Ventspils at 10.156 and for the approaches to the Gulf of RØga at 11.16)
10.123 Controlling depth. Minimum depths: In the shipping channel — 4⋅0 m. At the harbour entrance — 3⋅2 m. At the berths — between 3⋅7 and 4⋅3 m. Maximum vessel size. A vessel 80 m in length, beam 12m and draught of 3.5m. Ice. Pvilosta is an ice free port.
1
1
10.129 Ventspils is a large commercial port with modern facilities able to handle vessels of all types including tankers, bulk carriers and container carriers. The principal cargoes handled are oil, oil products, liquid chemicals, potassium, metal products, cotton, timber, general cargoes. In 2000 the population was 43 928.
Topography 1
10.130 The coast N of Ventspils is generally low and sandy whereas to the S of the port the coast is more elevated. A chain of sand dunes with trees in places stretches along the coastline, the latter being especially prominent about 2 miles N of Ventspils.
Port limits 1
388
10.131 The port limits are as shown on the chart.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
Approach and entry 1
10.132 The port is approached by means of safety fairways on the alignment of leading lights, from either W, used for the entry of large tonnage vessels, or NW. The harbour is entered between the moles which protect the outer harbour.
Outer anchorages 1
Traffic 1
1
No
Quarantine, gas and chemicals
6 miles N
Port Authority
Area V–2
Large vessels
8 miles NW
10.134 Port of Ventspils Authority, 19 Jana Street, LV–3601, Ventspils, Latvia. Website: www.vbp.lv E-Mail:
[email protected]
Area V–3
Tanker and dangerous goods.
4 miles NNW
Area V–4
Small vessels
2½ miles N
Limiting draughts 10.135 The permitted draughts in fresh water, at mean water level, for vessels entering Ventspils are as follows: 15⋅0 m in the outer harbour. 14⋅2 m to Quay 5 in the river. For berths beyond thr turning basin, advice should be sought fro the port authority.
Abnormal water levels 10.136 Water level rises with strong winds from SW through W, to NW, and falls with winds between N and SE. In the spring when the ice is in motion, the water level is generally from 1⋅2 to 1⋅5 m higher than usual; it may in places be as much as 2 m higher. At other times, a difference of 0⋅5 m above or below mean level seldom occurs, but a difference of 0⋅3 m is more frequent.
1
10.137 The dock density is 1⋅002 g/cm3. 2
Maximum size of vessel handled 10.138 Tankers — length 270 m, draught 15 m. Dry cargo vessels — length 230 m, draught 14⋅2 m.
Ice 1
10.139 Ice is usually only a hindrance to navigation in exceptionally severe winters; valid ice class certificates are then required. In normal winters, ice appears in February but it only remains on the coast and the sea remains ice free. In Reka Venta any ice formation is quickly broken up by tugs and carried out to sea by the current.
10.143 Submarine cables come ashore within 2 miles SSW of Ventspils harbour. They lie within an area in which anchoring and fishing are prohibited. Two submarine pipelines cross the river 1½ cables E of Quay No 4.
Pilotage
Density of water
1
Area V–5 Non-dangerous 3½ miles NW Caution. A foul patch exists in the NW section of V–3 anchorage. A spoil ground, marked by a light-buoy (special), lies adjacent to the NE corner of anchorage V–4. Anchoring in the outer roadstead is dangerous during W storm conditions and ships which are hove to under these circumstances are recommended to proceed to the vicinity of either Kolkasrags or Gotland.
Submarines cables 1
1
10.144 Pilotage, which is available 24 hours, is compulsory for all vessels over 70 m in length and for those carrying dangerous cargo, regardless of length. Pilot boards at Light-buoy B (57°28′⋅5N, 21°25′⋅9E) for the NW channel, or close to Light-buoy A (57°26′⋅3N, 21°25′⋅7E) for the W channel. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for further details. In all cases, when, because of weather conditions, the pilot cannot be embarked onboard, but entry to the port is possible, the pilot boat will lead the way in. If weather prevents a vessel being brought into harbour, or if a berth is not available, she must remain at sea or wait in the roadstead.
Tugs 1
10.145 The use of tugs is compulsory for all vessels over 90 m in length. The number used is at the discretion of the pilot.
Speed 1
Arrival information
10.146 Speed on entering the harbour is restricted to 5 kn. Between Quay No 7 and the V.I.Lenina Bridge it is restricted to 3 kn.
Vessel Traffic Management System 1
10.140 A mandatory system is in force within Ventspils port limits. It is operated by the Traffic Control Service. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
Harbour General layout 1
Notice of ETA 1
Position
Area V–1
Limiting conditions
1
Purpose
10.133 In 2003, 1800 vessels totalling 3½ million dwt used the port.
2
1
10.142 Vessels should contact the Traffic Control Service on arrival for permission to anchor. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Anchorage areas, shown on the chart, are centred from the harbour entrance as follows:
10.141 ETA must be sent 24 hours and 4 hours prior to arrival.
389
10.147 The outer harbour, which is formed by the curving N and S moles, protects the oil terminals on the SE side. The commercial harbour occupies that part of Reka Venta extending 2 miles upstream to a concrete railway bridge named V.I.Lenina Bridge.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
2
A new fishing harbour lies on the S side of the outer harbour and the old fishing harbour lies on the S side of Reka Venta 2½ cables inside its entrance. The channel through the outer harbour is 100 m wide and dredged to 15⋅2 m for a distance of 9 cables, thence to 13⋅9 m (1999) to the turning basin situated off the town quay about 1 mile from the river entrance.
Major lights: Ventspils Rear Light (57°23′⋅3N, 21°33′⋅1E) (10.156). West Branch Rear Light (57°24′⋅4N, 21°34′⋅6E) (10.157).
Directions (continued from 10.121)
Developments 1
1
10.148 In 2000 development projects included the construction of a Ro-Ro and a container terminal, construction of new berths, the reconstruction of old berths, the deepening and widening of the channels and increasing the depth alongside berths.
10.155 Caution. The depths in the channel and within the port entrance are liable to frequent change, due to silting, particularly after storms. Periodic dredging operations are carried out in the fairway. Banks of sand are liable to form off each molehead and care should be taken not to pass too close to either of them when entering harbour.
North-west channel Former mined area 1
10.149 The approaches to Ventspils lie within a former mined area, in which mines could present a hazard for vessels anchoring, fishing or engaged in submarine operations, except in the designated anchorages and fairways.
1
2
Signal station 1
10.150 There is a signal station on the S bank of Reka Venta at the entrance.
Ferry 1
3
10.151 The town ferry crosses the river in the vicinity of the river bend from Berth 17 on the S side to Berth 5 on the N side. 4
Turning basin 1
10.152 A turning basin, diameter about 1½ cables, used for turning large vessels with lengths up to 235 m, is situated opposite the town waterfront, 1 mile to the NE of the entrance to the outer port. The depths in the central part of the turning basin are 13⋅9 m (1999). Lights are displayed around the turning area, as shown on thechart.
5
Current 1
10.153 In the approaches to Ventspils, the current always sets along the coast either N or S and may attain a rate of 2 kn. The average rate of flow in the river is 1 kn increasing in the entrance to 2 kn. In the early spring when the ice begins to break up, the current attains a rate of 4 kn at which time great care is necessary when entering the river.
West channel 1
Principal marks 1
10.154 Landmarks: Bunieku Beacon (57°27′⋅8N, 21°37′⋅2E) (10.119). Ventspils Tower (white octagonal tower, with mast and yard, 20 m in height) (57°23′⋅7N, 21°32′⋅2E), used as a pilot lookout tower.
10.156 Ventspils Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle, white stripe, on framework tower, 25 m in height) (57°23′⋅7N, 21°32′⋅5E). Rear light (red rectangle, white stripe, on framework tower, 35 m in height) (5 cables from front light). From the vicinity of B Light-buoy (safe water) (57°28′⋅5N, 21°25′⋅9E) the alignment (143¾°) of the above lights leads SE for about 5 miles through a channel, marked by pairs of light-buoys (lateral), swept to a depth of 12⋅5 m (1999), passing (with positions from Ventspils Tower (57°23′⋅7N, 21°32′⋅2E)): SW of V–3 anchorage (4½ miles NNW), and: NE of V–5 anchorage (4½ miles NW), and: SW of a depth of 12 m, marked by a light-buoy (isolated danger) (4¼ miles NW), thence: SW of a wreck, with a least depth of 8⋅4 m, marked by light-buoys (E and W cardinal), thence: NE of an obstruction with a depth over it of 12⋅7 m, thence: NE of a wreck with a depth of 12⋅4 m over it and another wreck, with a depth of 8⋅3 m over it, (2½ miles NW), marked by a light-buoy (isolated danger), thence: SW of a wreck with a depth of 4⋅2 m over it, (2¼ miles NNW), marked by a light-buoy (W cardinal). Thence passing between the moleheads, from which the following lights are displayed: N Molehead (white round concrete tower, red lantern, 11 m in height) (57°24′⋅5N, 21°31′⋅6E). S Molehead (white round concrete tower, green lantern, 11 m in height) (57°24′⋅3N, 21°31′⋅5E).
2
390
10.157 West Leading Lights: Front light (black rectangle, yellow stripe on red framework tower, 15 m in height) (57°24′⋅5N, 21°33′⋅7E). Middle light (metal framework tower, 18 m in height) (425 m from front light). Rear light (57°24′⋅4N, 21°34′⋅6E). From the vicinity of A Light-buoy (safe water) (57°26′⋅3N, 21°25′⋅7E), the alignment (110°) of the above lights leads ESE for about 2¾ miles through the fairway, marked by two pairs of light-buoys, and swept to a depth of 16⋅8 m, to join the NW fairway about 1½ miles NW of
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 10
Ventspils Tower. It passes (with positions from Ventspils Tower): SW of the 12⋅4 m and 8⋅3 m wrecks (2½ miles NW) (10.156).
There are two bunker berths close S of Oil Pier No 1.
Zvejas Osta 1
Basins and berths
Port services
Outer harbour 1
10.158 There are 11 berths in the outer harbour with maximum permitted draughts of between 5⋅7 to 15⋅0 m. Lights are displayed from each quay.
1
Commercial harbour 1
10.160 Zvejas Osta (New Fishing Harbour) has, in addition to fishing berths, some commercial areas.
10.159 Cargo operation areas are mainly on the N bank of the river which provides approximately 3500 m of berthing space, with depths alongside between 8⋅4 to 15⋅2 m.
391
10.161 Repairs. Minor repairs only can be carried out. Divers are available. Other facilities. Deratting; hospital; oily waste reception; special salvage craft. Supplies. Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications are regularly maintained by sea with Rga and Liepja. Rga Airport, 200 km. Rescue. Life-saving equipment and a lifeboat are maintained at Ventspils.
Home
Contents
Index Chapter 11 - Gulf of RØga and western approaches
20°
21°
30´
22°
30´
23°
30´
24°
30´
25°
30´
Muhu
2816
30´
30´ 2215 Pärnu
2222
11.107
Saaremaa
12.7
S:rve Poolsaar
58°
Kihnu Saar
11. 100
11.116
11 .1 26
Roomassare 11.138
11.95
58°
5 11.9 Irbe Strait Ruhnu Saar
392
. 16 11
18
11.
6 .1
11.19
Bezimjanaja Shoal
11
SalacgrØva 11.92
Kolkasrags
0 11.2
Ovi+u
.2 11
30´
11.80
2277
30´
4
2228
Ventspils
2226
10.128
MÏrsrags
Skultes 11.89
2223
2239
RØga 11.41
57°
57°
2215
0205
20°
30´
21°
30´
Longitude 22° East from Greenwich
23°
30´
24°
30´
25°
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 11 GULF OF R GA AND WESTERN APPROACHES GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2215, 2223
2
Scope of the chapter 1
2
3
11.1 This chapter describes Gulf of Rga (57°45′N, 23°30′E), known to the Latvians as Rgas Jras Lcis and to the Estonians as Liivi laht, which is bounded on the S by the coast of Latvia, on the N by Saaremaa and Muhu, and on the E by the coasts of Latvia and Estonia. Also described are the western approaches through Irbe Strait, the principal entrance to Gulf of Rga, which leads E from Baltic Sea between Ovu and Saaremaa. The N entrance to Gulf of Rga, from Gulf of Finland, is by way of Väinameri (12.88). It is arranged as follows: Irbe Strait (11.8). South-west side — Kolkasrags to Rga (11.24). Rga (11.41). South-east side — Rga to Salacgrva (11.80). East side — Salacgrva to Pärnu laht (11.100). North-east side — Salacgrva to Väinameri (11.116). North-west side — Sõrve Poolsaar to Muhu (11.126).
3
Natural conditions 1
Seabed 1
11.2 In Gulf of Rga the seabed generally consists of mud and sand in the deepest parts near the centre. Towards the S part it is mostly sand, and towards the N and NW parts it is sand and rock.
Water level 1
2
11.3 Variations of water level in Gulf of Rga occur according to wind direction; S and SW winds cause highest levels and NE winds lowest. Variations seldom exceed 0⋅5 m but in autumn and winter they may reach 1⋅0 to 1⋅2 m.
Pollution 1
11.4 Due to the non-tidal nature of these waters, the Latvian and Estonian authorities are rigorous in the application of anti-pollution regulations. See 1.72.
3
Floating navigation aids 1
11.5 See caution (1.43) concerning the reliability of navigation aids. 4
Rescue 1
is located at Rga (56°58′N, 24°06′E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5. Rescue craft are stationed at the following Estonian Coastguard Stations: Pärnu (58°23′N, 24°29′E) (11.107). Sõrve Säär (57°55′N, 22°02′E) (11.9). Kuressaare (58°15′N, 22°29′E) (11.144). Ruhnu (57°48′N, 23°14′E) (11.25). Rescue craft and/or inshore rubber rescue boats are stationed at the following Latvian locations: Roja (57°30′N, 22°49′E) (11.33). Rga (56°58′N, 24°06′E) (11.41). Salacgrva (57°45′N, 24°22′E) (11.92). Kolka (57°45′N, 22°36′E) (11.22).
11.6 In the area covered by this chapter the MRCC for Estonian waters is located at Tallinn (59°27′N, 24°46′E), with MRSC located at Kuressaare (58°15′N, 22°29′E) and Kärdla (59°00′N, 22°45′E). The MRCC for Latvian waters
393
11.7 Local magnetic anomalies. The normal magnetic variation is increased/decreased by as much as 12° in the SE corner of Gulf of Rga. See chart 2215. Currents. In Gulf of Rga the currents are irregular; they set into the gulf from two directions, namely, S through Väinameri, and E through Irbe Strait. During a continuance of calm weather, the S-going current through Väinameri attains a rate of between ½ and ¾ kn. With strong W or SW winds the in-flow from Baltic Sea may become very strong and the E-going current on striking the E shore of the gulf is diverted N and flows into Väinameri from the S at a rate of between 1 and 1½ kn. In calm weather the current sets N or S along the E shore of the gulf according to the direction of the wind preceding the calm but its rate does not exceed ½ kn. Ice. In the normal winter, pack ice appears in Gulf of Rga in December; towards the latter part of the month there is fast ice along the shores and around Ruhnu Saar. The area of this fast ice increases during February and in severe winters nearly the whole gulf may be frozen almost to the middle where heavy pack ice accumulates. The ice sometimes forms very quickly especially in the S part of the gulf; ice pressure may set in without much warning, and sometimes against the direction of the wind. The ice begins to melt in March; by the end of that month the fast ice has usually disappeared from the shore but pack ice may be encountered. By the middle of April ice is usually found only in the N part of the gulf. In Irbe Strait, between January and April, the wind direction largely determines whether it becomes ice-bound; N winds drive the ice into the strait and S winds drive it away. In Gulf of Rga, so long as the ice is not in motion it is rarely dangerous to shipping, nevertheless vessels should be prepared to stop the engines quickly in the event of the intakes becoming clogged with brash ice. If, however, the ice begins to push and screw so that the floes place themselves vertically and push over one another it forms the so-called Torosse. According to reports, often very quickly the floes may stand from 9 to 12 m above the water and the danger becomes great. If the wind and current are in the same direction the speed of the ice movement can become as much as 8 kn; this gives rise to
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
great pressure to which any vessel, not specially constructed to resist ice, speedily succumbs. Icebreakers are employed as necessary throughout the winter months.
The coastal shelf is irregular and there are numerous rocks and several wrecks lying on it, both above and below water.
Outlying shoals IRBE STRAIT
1
General information Charts 2226, 2223
11.10 The outermost shoal in the approach to Irbe Strait is Bezimjanaja sklis (Beziymyannaya Shoal) (57°42′N, 21°00′E), a shoal with a least depth of 9⋅8 m over it; two light-buoys (cardinal), moored respectively one each on its W and E sides, mark the extent of the 20 m depth contour. Vinkova Sklis, with a least depth of 7⋅8 m over it, lying about 6 miles E of Bezimjanaja sklis is similarly marked by two light-buoys (cardinal).
Routes 1
2
3
4
11.8 Irbe Strait (Irbenskiy Strait) (57°43′N, 22°00′E), the main entrance to Gulf of Rga, is partially obstructed by numerous shoal patches, through which three fairways lead, as shown on the charts. Mariners should keep within the safety fairways and follow the recommended tracks when navigating in the strait. Main fairway. From the vicinity of No 1 Light-buoy (57°51′⋅0N, 21°37′⋅2E) the recommended track leads SE for 13½ miles to the vicinity of No 4 Light-buoy, thence it leads ENE for about 26 miles to a position N of Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E). Approach from west. From the vicinity of No 5 Light-buoy (57°39′⋅7N, 21°34′⋅6E) the recommended track leads E for 9½ miles to the vicinity of No 4 Light-buoy whence it merges with the main fairway to enter Gulf of Rga. From the same initial position another recommended track leads closer inshore along the S coast of the strait to a position N of Kolka Lighthouse. Caution. In clear weather navigation through Irbe Strait via the marked fairways presents few difficulties, however, in low visibility, continual sounding is recommended in view of the current which is variable according to conditions, see 11.7.
Current 1
11.11 In Irbe Strait between Ovu and Kolkasrags the current varies according to the strength and direction of the wind, attaining at times a rate of from 1 to 1½ kn. With continual W winds, the NW-going current often sets around Kolkasrags across the direction of the wind giving rise to a confused sea on and near the reef extending from the cape.
Fishing 1
11.12 Fishing is prohibited throughout the year in Irbe Strait, in an area bounded W by a line joining Loode Neem (57°58′N, 21°59′E) and Ovu, 25 miles SSW; and E by a line joining Kaavi Light (57°59′N, 22°12′E) and Kolkasrags, 19 miles SE.
Former mined area 1
11.13 Irbe Strait lies within a former mined area as shown on the chart. See 1.8.
Principal marks Topography 1
2
3
11.9 South shore. Ovu rags (57°34′N, 21°43′E), a low sandy point of light colouring with trees covering the coast in its vicinity, is the SW entrance point of Irbe Strait. The S coast of the strait is low and sandy. A short distance inland are sand hills of moderate height covered with trees. North shore. The N shore of Irbe Strait is formed by the S and SE coasts of Sõrve Poolsaar (57°56′N, 22°07′E). The coast is partly wooded, generally low, and in places swampy. For a description of the NW coast of Sõrve Poolsaar see Chapter 12. Sõrve Säär (57°54′N, 22°04′E), a narrow above-water spit, projects about 8 cables S from the S end of Sõrve Poolsaar. Vesitukimaa, a narrow islet, lies about 5 cables farther SW. Between Sõrve Säär and Mõntu sadam, about 3½ miles NE, the coast rises progressively and is interspersed with clumps of trees and bushes. Thence, to Anseküla, 9 miles farther NE, there is a range of densely wooded hills close to the coast which attains an elevation of 28 m, about 1½ miles NNW of Mõntu. Between this range and the coast there are a few villages.
1
2
3
4
394
11.14 Landmarks: Ovu Lighthouse (white round stone tower, 37 m in height) (57°34′⋅1N, 21°43′⋅0E). Irbe (Irbenskiy) Lighthouse (round black and white concrete tower, red bands, two balconies, 37 m in height) (57°45′⋅0N, 21°43′⋅5E). Miŷeż Lighthouse (white round concrete tower, 56 m in height) (57°36′⋅0N, 21°58′⋅4E). Sõrve Lighthouse (white round tower, black top, balcony and lantern, 52 m in height) (57°54′⋅6N, 22°03′⋅3E). Skragciema Lighthouse (white rectangle on metal framework tower, 27 m in height) (57°39′⋅4N, 22°13′⋅0E), fitted with a radar reflector. TV masts 57°37′⋅2N, 22°06′⋅5E. Saunagciema Beacon (white square metal framework tower, 21 m in height) (57°43′⋅7N, 22°27′⋅0E), a disused lighthouse. Kolka Church (57°45′⋅1N, 22°35′⋅6E) grey with red tower, the most prominent of two churches. Masts, close S of Kolka Church. Kolka Lighthouse (red round tower balcony and lantern room, 21 m in height) (57°48′⋅1N,
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
22°38′⋅0E), protected by a stone wall round the lower part of the lighthouse. Major lights: Ovu Light — as above. Sõrve Light — as above. Skragciema Light — as above. 3
Other aids to navigation 1
11.15 Racons: Ovu Lighthouse (57°34′⋅1N, 21°43′⋅0E). Irbe Lighthouse (57°45′⋅1N, 21°43′⋅4E). Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Directions
4
(continued from 10.121)
Outer approaches 1
11.16 Vessels with a draught of 10 m or more, approaching from the S are advised to keep W of Bezimjanaja sklis (57°42′N, 21°00′E) (11.10), thence steer ENE towards No 1 Light-buoy (57°51′⋅0N, 21°37′⋅2E) (11.17). 5
Inner approaches to main fairway 1
2
3
11.17 From a position W of Ovu rags (57°34′N, 21°43′E) (11.9) the track leads NNE for about 18 miles to No 1 Light-buoy (safe water) (57°51′⋅0N, 21°37′⋅2E), passing (with positions from Ovu Lighthouse (57°34′⋅1N, 21°43′⋅0E)): WNW of Ovu Sklis, part of the coastal bank extending about 5 miles NW from Ovu rags. It is generally sandy and shallow in places with a least depth of 4⋅8 m,, at its shoalest head. A dangerous wreck, and a wreck with a depth of 2⋅8 m over it, lie 1½ and 1¼ miles WNW of Ovu rags. Ovu Sklis is marked on its SW side by a buoy (W cardinal) (4 miles WNW) and on its N side by a buoy (N cardinal), (3 miles NW). Thence: BetweenWNW of No 5 Light-buoy (safe water) (7¾ miles NW), which marks the start of the W fairway, and Vinkova Sklis (10 miles NW) (11.10), marked on its E side by a light-buoy (E cardinal), passing clear of the dangerous wreck which lies in the middle of this passage,, and: ESE of Vinkova Sklis (10 miles NW) (11.10), marked on its E side by a light-buoy (E cardinal), thence: WNW of Petropavlovskas sklis and Mihailova sklis (10 miles N) (11.18). (Directions for the coastal passage N continue at 12.14)
6
West fairway 1
2
Main fairway 1
2
11.18 From the vicinity of No 1 Light-buoy (57°51′⋅0N, 21°37′⋅2E) (11.17) the recommended track (142¾°- 322¾°), marked by light-buoys (safe water) and with a least depth of 15⋅5 m, leads SE, for 13½ miles to No 4 Light-buoy (safe water) (57°40′⋅4N, 21°52′⋅4E), passing (with positions from Irbe Lighthouse (57°45′⋅0N, 21°43′⋅5E)): SW of Berezini Madal (3 miles NNE), a shoal patch with a least depth of 4⋅5 m over it, thence: SW of Rabotniku Madal (3½ miles NE), a shoal patch with a least depth of 5⋅4 m over it, thence:
NE of Irbe Lighthouse (11.14), which stands on the NE limit of Mihailova Sklis, a shoal area with a least depth of 5 m over it, marked on its S and E sides by buoys (cardinal), and: SW of Olavi Madal (4½ miles ENE), a shoal patch with a least depth of 4⋅2 m over it, thence: SW of a shoal (2½ miles E), with a least depth of 9⋅2 m over it, thence: SW of Ivanovska sklis (5½ miles E), a shoal patch with a least depth of 5 m over it. Thence, the recommended track (066°–246°) leads ENE for about 26 miles to No 8 Light-buoy (safe water), moored 2¾ miles N of Kolka Lighthouse (11.14), passing (with positions from Skragciema Lighthouse (57°39′⋅4N, 22°13′⋅0E)): SSE of Kääramadal (11 miles NNW), a rocky ridge which is steep-to on its E side. It lies on the SE side of Sõrve Madal which consists of sand, stones and rock and extends about 8 miles SW from Sõrve Poolsaar; its inner part dries. There are several other patches with depths of less than 5 m lying on Sõrve Madal including Sääre Laimadal, rock and gravel, near the centre of the reef. Thence: NNW of two wrecks with depths of 13⋅6 m and 9 m, over them (5 miles NNW), the latter marked by a light-buoy (isolated danger), thence: Clear of a wreck with a depth of 16 m over it (9 miles NNE), thence: NNW of a wreck with a depth of 15 m over it (12½ miles NE), thence: NNW of Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E), which stands on an artificial islet near the extremity of the reef extending about 3¾ miles NNE from Kolkasrags (57°46′N, 22°36′E), a low headland terminating in a sandy point with woods a short distance inland. It is the SE entrance point of Irbe Strait. A dangerous wreck lies on the NW extremity of the reef which is steep-to on its N and E sides. 11.19 From the vicinity of No 5 Light-buoy (11.17), moored 7¾ miles NW of Ovu Lighthouse (57°34′⋅1N, 21°43′⋅0E) (11.14), and clear of a dangerous wreck (s11.17), the recommended track (086¾°–266¾°), marked by light-buoys (safe water), leads E for about 10 miles to No 4 Light-buoy (57°40′⋅4N, 21°52′⋅4E) (11.18) passing (with positions from Irbe Lighthouse (57°45′⋅0N, 21°43′⋅5E)): N of a dangerous wreck (6 miles SSW), thence: Clear of ainikova Sklis, with a least depth of 7⋅8 m over it (5 miles S), thence: S of Ignatjeva Sklis (4½ miles S), with a least depth of 8 m over it, thence: N of a shoal, with a least depth of 6⋅6 m over it (6½ miles SSE), marked by a buoy (N cardinal). Thence the directions for the main route are followed.
Inshore fairway 1
2
395
11.20 From a position about 1 mile SE of No 5 Light-buoy (57°39′⋅7N, 21°34′⋅6E) (11.17) the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads generally E then ENE, in five legs, for 35 miles to the vicinity of Kolkasrags (57°46′N, 22°36′E), passing (with positions from Skragciema Lighthouse (57°39′⋅4N, 22°13′⋅0E)): N of Ovu Sklis, (19 miles W) (11.17), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
3
S of a wreck with a depth of 9⋅5 m over it (18 miles W), thence: N of a dangerous wreck (11¾ miles WSW), thence: NNW of an area of wrecks with a least depth of 1⋅5 m over it (6½ miles WSW), thence: NNW of Kolkasrags (13¾ miles ENE) (11.18), thence: NNW of several dangerous wrecks (1½ miles W), thence: NNW and N of Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E) (11.14), noting the dangerous wreck lying 6 cables NW of the lighthouse. (Directions continue for the approaches to RØga at 11.30, for the W approach to Pärnu laht at 11.99, and for th SW approaches to Väinameri at 11.131)
2
3
4
Anchorages, landings and harbours North shore 1
2
3
11.21 Vessels may obtain anchorage, sheltered from winds between W and N, and partly so from the SW, in a depth of about 16⋅5 m, gravel and sand, about 3½ miles SE of Sõrve Lighthouse (57°54′⋅6N, 22°03′⋅4E) (11.14), and also in a depth of about 9 m, about 2¼ miles closer inshore. The latter anchorage, about 7½ cables SSE of a dangerous wreck, should be approached with Sõrve Lighthouse bearing 305°, ahead, which leads about 5 cables NE of a 5 m patch, 1½ miles SE of the same lighthouse. Small vessels may obtain anchorage between Sõrve Säär and Vesitukimaa, in a depth of about 3 m, mud; the E entrance channel has a depth of 3⋅7 m but the W entrance channel has a depth of only 2⋅7 m; local knowledge is required. There is another anchorage between Vesitukimaa and another islet close NW, entering from the N; this is used as a winter anchorage as it is free from ice and is well sheltered; local knowledge is required. Caution. There is a stranded wreck between Vesitukimaa and Sõrve Säär, as shown on the chart. Landing. There is a boat pier close S of Sõrve Lighthouse; it has a depth of 1⋅5 m at its head.
5
6
SOUTH-WEST SIDE — KOLKASRAGS TO RGA General information Chart 2215
Route 1
South shore 1
2
11.22 There is a landing stage close to Miŷeż Lighthouse (57°36′⋅0N, 21°58′⋅4E) with a depth of 1⋅5 m alongside. The approach is easy with S winds and when there is no swell. There is also a landing stage at the mouth of the Irbe river, about 6 miles ENE of Miŷeż Lighthouse. On the S side of Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E) is a slip which serves as a landing stage with a depth of 2⋅4 m alongside. Rescue. An inshore rubber rescue boat is stationed at Kolka.
11.23 General information. Mõntu sadam (57°57′N, 22°08′E) is formed by a mole about 254 m in length, extending E and thence NE from the coast. There are depths of 5⋅5 m at the head of the mole decreasing to 2⋅7 m at its root; vessels may secure only to the outer part of the outer side of the mole where there is a depth of 4⋅6 m alongside. Within the
11.24 From a position about 5½ miles N of Kolksrags (57°46′N, 22°36′E) the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads about 62 miles SE to the approaches to the Daugava river.
Topography 1
2
Mõntu sadam 1
harbour there is a small pier with a depth of 2⋅1 m alongside. The approach channel to Mõntu has a least depth of 3⋅8 m. Anchorage. In fair weather, small vessels may obtain anchorage about 5 cables offshore E of Mõntu (57°57′N, 22°08′E) (11.23); larger vessels should remain about 1½ miles offshore. With strong winds from E it is dangerous to lie at the mole at Mõntu sadam. Anchorage off Mõntu becomes unsafe in these conditions. Winds from NE to E raise a choppy sea in the harbour. Directions. Mõntu Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, on metal framework tower, 10 m in height) (57°57′⋅1N, 22°07′⋅6E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 15 m in height) (209 m from front light). The alignment (298½°) of these lights, leads from seaward to the harbour, passing (with positions from the front light): NE of an obstruction (5½ miles SE), over which the depth is unknown, thence: SW of Kaavi Madal (2¾ miles E), containing a rock with an unknown depth over it; a buoy (E cardinal) is moored 7 cables E. thence: Clear of a wreck with a depth of 2⋅5 m over it (4 cables SE). Useful mark: Kaavi Lighthouse (red square tower, white band, 15 m in height) (57°58′⋅9N, 22°11′⋅7E), standing near Kaavi nina, a low point about 6½ miles NE of Sõrve Säär.
3
396
11.25 Coast. Between Kolksrags and the mouth of Daugava river the coast is mostly low and sandy, backed by low wooded hills and with low cliffs in places. There are a number of villages along this stretch of the coast. Between Sloka (56°58′N, 23°37′E) and the mouth of Lielupe river some 10 miles ENE, the beach is sandy and is fringed by low dunes covered with pine trees, behind which are the buildings of the seaside resort area of Rga. Ruhnu Saar (57°48′N, 23°14′E), belonging to Estonia, lies near the middle of Gulf of Rga, about 20 miles E of Kolkasrags. The W side of the island is low, but the E side is hilly and wooded, rising to a height of 30 m; on the NE and E coasts there are low steep reddish cliffs of sand and rock. Off the W side of the island are several islets and many rocks, both above and below water, which lie on the coastal bank. Gretagrund, a bank on the SSE side of the island, is separated from the coastal bank by a deep-water channel.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
Current 1
11.26 On the W side of Gulf of Rga the currents run according to the direction and force of the wind, attaining a rate of between ½ and 1 kn.
Former mined areas 1
11.27 Gulf of Riga contains several former mined areas, as shown on the chart. See 1.8.
4
Useful mark
Principal marks 1
2
3
4
11.28 Landmarks: Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E) (11.14). Ţipka Lighthouse (two red trapeziums on a white rectangle on metal framework tower, 30 m in height) (57°34′⋅2N, 22°39′⋅4E). Mrsrags Lighthouse (white concrete tower, 19 m in height) (57°22′⋅0N, 23°07′⋅2E). Engure Lighthouse (white framework tower, red top, 19 m in height) (57°10′⋅0N, 23°13′⋅7E). Ragaciems Lighthouse (red square on square metal framework tower, 30 m in height) (57°02′⋅1N, 23°29′⋅2E). Buuciema Lighthouse (red and white framework tower, 28 m in height) (56°59′⋅7N, 23°53′⋅2E). Daugavgrvas Lighthouse (white round concrete tower, black bands, balcony, 35 m in height) (57°03′⋅6N, 24°01′⋅3E). Major lights: Ţipka Light — as above. Mrsrags Light — as above. Engure Light — as above. Ragaciems Light — as above. Buuciems Light — as above. Daugavgrvas Light — as above.
11.31
Anchorages and harbours Anchorages 1
2
11.29 Racons: Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E). Daugavgrvas Lighthouse (57°03′⋅6N, 24°01′⋅3E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2. 2
Directions (continued from 11.20)
2
3
11.30 From the vicinity of No 8 Light-buoy (11.18), moored 3 miles N of Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E), the recommended track (136¼°–316¼°) leads SE, passing (with positions from Mrsrags Light (57°22′⋅0N, 23°07′⋅2E)): NE of a wreck (28 miles NNW), with a depth of 9⋅9 m over it, thence: SW of a dangerous wreck (26½ miles N), lying 4 miles W of Ruhnu Saar, thence: SW of Ruhnu Saar (26½ miles N) (11.25), and: SW of Gretagrund (23½ miles NNE); 8⋅6 m and 8⋅4 m shoal patches lie 2¼ and 3¼ miles SW, respectively, of Gretagrund, thence: SW of a 4⋅0 m patch (20¼ miles NE), thence: SW of a dangerous wreck, (11½ miles NNE), thence:
11.32 Coast. Anchorage may be obtained in depths of 18 to 27 m, with offshore winds, off any part of this coast. The usual anchorage is under the lee of Kolkasrags, about 2 miles offshore, sheltered from W or SW winds, in a depth of about 15 m, sand. Vessels must be ready to leave the anchorage should the wind shift to the E. Ruhnu Saar. Anchorage may also be obtained off the E side of Ruhnu Saar, sheltered from W and SW winds, either a little to the S of Ruhnu Lighthouse, over a bottom of sand and gravel or abreast a pier, from which a light is displayed, at Rinksu neem at the SE extremity of Ruhnu Saar, from 5 cables to 1¼ miles from the island in depths of 9 to 18 m, sand.
Roja
Other aids to navigation
1
Ruhnu Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 23°15′⋅6E) (11.97). (Directions for RØga continue at 11.67)
1
1
1
NE of Mrsrags, a low sandy point covered with pine trees. A rocky shelf on which the sea breaks fringes the point. Thence: NE of Mazlaides rava, a shoal patch (2½ miles SE). Farther S there are several other detached patches lying on the coastal bank which, off this part of the coast, extends in places up to 3 miles offshore. Thence: To the vicinity of B Light-buoy (safe water), moored 3¾ miles NW of Daugavgrvas Light (57°03′⋅6N, 24°01′⋅3E), at the seaward end of the approach fairway.
3
1
397
11.33 Description. Roja (57°30′N, 22°49′E) is a small fishing and yachting harbour at the mouth of Roja river. It is formed by two moles, each about 400 m in length, extending seaward from each side of the river mouth, and two outer breakwaters which form the outer harbour which has depths of about 5 m. A detached breakwater, in ruins and covered by water, lies 2½ cables offshore to the S of the harbour. The harbour is also used for the transhipment of timber and other cargoes. Port Authority. Roja Port Authority, 1 Ostas Str., Roja LV–3264. Maximum size of vessel handled: length 90 m, beam 15 m, draught 4⋅0 m. Anchorage, sheltered from offshore winds, may be obtained in the vicinity of the fairway buoy, in depths of 9 to 11 m. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 50 m in length. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). 11.34 Directions. From the vicinity of a light-buoy (safe water) (57°31′⋅6N, 22°49′⋅3E) the track leads 1 mile SSW from seaward through the breakwaters to the outer harbour. At night entrance is made in the white sector (213½°−216½°) of Roja Directional Light (red trianglular structure, 18 m in height). When entering vessels should keep close to the N mole.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
2
Berths. There are berths on each side, within the harbour, maximum draught 3⋅2 to 4⋅2 m. Other facilities: medical centre; bilge water reception facilities. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Rga Airport 150 km.
MÏrsraga Osta 1
2
1
2
3
11.35 General information. Mrsraga Osta (57°20′N, 23°08′E) is a small fishing and yachting harbour formed by two moles extending E from the mouth of a stream, the outlet from Engures Ezers, a large lake, lying from 1 to 1½ miles within the coast S of the harbour. Mrsrags village lies on the N bank of the stream. Mrsraga Osta is also used for the transhipment of timber and other cargoes. Port Authority. The Port Authority of Mrsrags, Talsu rajons, Mrsrags, LV–3284, Latvia. Maximum size of vessel handled: length 80 m, beam 12 m, draught 4.5 m. Anchorage may be obtained in the vicinity of the Fairway Light-buoy (safe water) (11.36). Pilotage is available, see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). 11.36 Directions. Mrsrags Leading Lights: Front light (red trapezium, white stripe, 9 m in height) (57°20′⋅1N, 23°08′E). Rear light (red trapezium, white stripe, 16 m in height) (199 m from the front light). From the vicinity of the Fairway Light-buoy (safe water) (57°20′⋅1N, 23°11′⋅1E) the alignment (270°) of these lights leads into the harbour, passing (with positions from the front light): N of a dangerous rock (8 cables ESE), marked by a buoy (isolated danger), thence: S of a wreck (8 cables ENE), with a depth of 4.2 m over it. The track also lies within a white sector (265¼°−267¾°) of a light (red round column with platform) shown from the root of the S mole. Berths. There are alongside wharves inside the harbour. Other facilities: medical centre; bilge water reception facilities. Supplies: fuel oil, fresh water, provisions. Communications. Rga Airport, 100 km.
2
Facilities. Hospital. Supplies. Fresh water. Communications. Rga Airport, 65 km. Charts 2215, 2239
Lielupe 1
2
3
4
1
2
11.39 General information. The river Lielupe flows nearly parallel with the coast SE of Ragaciems (57°02′N, 23°29′E), from Sloka towards the estuary of Daugava, see 11.41, but breaks into the gulf about 1¾ miles ENE of Buuciema Lighthouse (11.28). The depths across the bar at the mouth of Lielupe are liable to frequent change and only small craft can cross it. Lielupe (56°59′N, 23°55′E) has fishing and yacht berths and a wharf which is used for the transhipment and storage of cargo. Port Authority. Lielupe Port Authority, 11 Lau Str., Jrmala, LV–2010. Limiting conditions. Maximum vessel length is 70 m, maximum draught 4 m. Navigation of the Lielupe is not permitted above the Lielupe Railway bridge which is about 3 miles from the entrance. Vessel Traffic Service. Lielupe lies within Rga VTS area. For further information see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Anchorage may be obtained about 6 cables W of the Fairway Buoy. Pilotage. Pilotage is compulsory and 24 hours notice is required. Local knowledge is required. 11.40 Directions. Lielupe Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, red stripe, 8 m in height) (57°00′⋅2N, 23°56′⋅2E). Rear light (similar to front, 10 m in height) (97 m from front light). From the vicinity of the Fairway Buoy (safe water), moored on the leading line, 1¼ miles from the front light, the alignment (150¼°) of these lights leads to the mouth of the river. Repairs. Ship docking and repairs. Other facilities: medical centre, dirty bilge water reception. Supplies: fuel; fresh water. Communication. Rga Airport 10 km.
RGA
Engure 1
1
11.37 General information. Engure (57°10′N, 23°14′E) is a small fishing and yacht harbour formed by two moles extended by breakwaters. Port Authority. Engure Port Authority, 60b Jras Str., Engure, LV–3113. Maximum size of vessel handled: length 45m, beam 8m and draught ⋅7 m. Anchorage may be obtained in a position about 1½ miles NE of the seaward end of the N breakwater. 11.38 Directions. Engure Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, red stripe on metal framework tower, 5 m in height) (57°09′⋅8N, 23°13′⋅9E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure as above, 10 m in height) (127 m from front light). The alignment (270¼°) of these lights leads from seaward into the harbour.
General information Chart 2239
Position 1
11.41 Rga (56°58′N, 24°06′E), the capital of the Latvian Republic, stands on both banks of the Daugava river about 7 miles from its mouth. The old part of the town is situated in the centre of the city; N and E of it, separated from it by a canal spanned by several bridges, are two suburbs. Opposite the city, on the W bank of the river, are several other suburbs.
Function 1
398
11.42 Rga is a large manufacturing and commercial centre and has concentrated in it a large number of varied factories and works. The large harbour is well equipped to handle vessels and cargoes of almost all types, including bulk carriers, tankers and Ro-Ro vessels.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
Principal exports include grain, foodstuffs, cotton, metals, ores, coal and timber. Principal imports include fish, fruit, sugar, foodstuffs, metals, machinery and chemicals.
Vertical clearance 1
Topography 1
2
3
4
11.43 The Daugava river flows through a valley consisting of meadows and swamps interspersed with sand hills. In the river are many low islands and sand banks, partly covered with grass, but these and the low shores of the river are usually inundated when the ice melts in the spring. Within the limits of Rga harbour the river is divided into several streams and channels, the majority of which are built up by breakwaters and sea walls. Daugavgrvas Sala, an island, lies between the mouth of Lielupe and that of Daugava and is separated from the mainland by Buupe, an extension ENE of the lower reaches of Lielupe. Buupe is navigable by vessels with a draught of 3 m. Lo u kanls branches E from Buupe and joins Daugava about 1 mile SE of Buupe Light-beacon. This waterway is suitable for vessels with a draught of 2⋅5 m, but local knowledge is required. The town of Daugavgrva (57°02′N, 24°02′E), is situated 2½ cables SW of the E extremity of the island. On the opposite bank of Buupe is the town of Bolderja, the two towns being connected by a railway bridge. Mangau Pussala, on the NE side of Daugava, is low-lying except for a few sand dunes. SE of it is Vecadaugava, the old mouth of the river, now closed by a dam near the NE end and filled with reeds.
Deepest and longest berths 1
11.50 PM 21 in Pumui as baseins (11.73).
Water level 1
11.51 Water level may rise by up to 2 m during W winds and may fall by 1 m during E winds.
Density of water 1
11.52 The density of water in the harbour is 1⋅002 g/cm3.
Maximum size of vessel handled 1
11.53 LOA 240 m, with a deadweight of 86 864 tonnes.
Ice 1
Port limits 1
11.49 Overhead power lines cross the channels as follows (with positions from Kurpnieku Sala East Light-beacon (57°01′⋅7N, 24°05′⋅4E)): 6 cables S — (vertical clearance 52 m). 1½ miles SE — (vertical clearance 43 m).
11.44 The seaward limits of the port are shown on the chart. The port area occupies the lower reaches of Daugava from the river entrance to the town road bridge, about 8 miles upstream.
11.54 The navigation period of the port depends almost entirely on when Irbe Strait becomes ice-bound (see 11.7). During this period the port will only accept vessels with an appropriate ice classification. Navigation is maintained with the aid of icebreakers for as long as possible. In some years the port has been kept open throughout the year. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Ice signal. When the entrance to Daugava is dangerous on account of ice, a red flashing light, in addition to the main light, is displayed from Daugavgrvas Lighthouse. The entrance leading lights are extinguished if entry becomes impossible.
Approach and entry 1
11.45 The port is approached through a buoyed channel on the alignment of leading lights.
Arrival information Vessel Traffic Management System 1
Traffic 1
11.46 In 2003, the port was used by 4632 vessels totalling 2⋅9 million dwt.
Port Authority 1
11.47 Freeport of Rga Authority, 12 Kalpaka Boulevard, LV−1050 Rga. Website: www.freeportofriga.lv E-Mail:
[email protected]
Port radio 1
Limiting conditions
1
11.56 Rga Port Radio, call Rga Traffic, is incorporated in the VTS network system. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
Notice of ETA
Maximum draught 11.48 The maximum permitted draught, at MSL, for vessels entering Rga is as follows. From B Light-buoy (safe water) to Rn i South roads (57°02′⋅5N, 24°04′⋅2E): Vessels not exceeding 250 m in length — 12⋅2 m. In the Daugava channel from Rn i South roads to Berth PM 21 (4 miles farther SSE): Vessels not exceeding 230 m in length — 11⋅7 m.
11.55 A mandatory VTMS operates in the approaches to Rga. It applies to all vessels navigating in the area controlled by the VTS. The area covered by the VTS is all the waters of the port, including the inner and outer roadsteads, and all the waters within a radius of 10 miles from Daugavgrvas Light (57°03′⋅6N, 24°01′⋅3E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2).
1
11.57 Vessels must send an ETA at B Light-buoy, 24 hours and 4 hours prior to arrival.
Outer anchorages 1
399
11.58 A designated anchorage is established, SW of the recommended track as described at 11.30, centred 6 miles NW of Daugavgrvas Light (57°03′⋅6N, 24°01′⋅3E), with least depth 27 m, sand and mud.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
2
3
The roadstead is open to winds from SW, through N, to NE, and despite its moderate depth and good holding ground it is dangerous to anchor during such conditions especially in the autumn when these winds prevail. In addition, there is a heavy sea during N gales and vessels should therefore leave the roadstead in good time if a gale is expected from that quarter, proceeding either to seek cover in port or out to sea. The most frequent strong winds blow from the SW which raise little sea. Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of the diffusers 1½−2½ miles SW of the harbour entrance.
of a new harbour control centre. Further dredging to increase draughts is planned.
Former mined area 1
Natural conditions 1
Submarine pipelines and cables 1
2
11.59 Submarine pipelines cross the channels as follows (with positions from Kurpnieku sala East Light-beacon (57°01′⋅7N, 24°05′⋅4E)): 2 cables NW. 5½ cables SE. Submarine power cables cross the channel as follows with positions from the light-beacon: 5½ cables S 2½ miles S
2
11.60 Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant vessels entering or leaving Rga. Pilots are available 24 hours and normally board vessels in the vicinity of B Light-buoy (safe water) (57°06′⋅5N, 23°56′⋅9E), as shown on the chart. In adverse weather vessels should use VTS assistance to the inner roads where the pilot will board. For details see Admiralty List of Radio SignalsVolume 6 (2). Caution. It should be noted that the approach buoy may have dragged from its charted position during or after stormy weather.
1
Directions Approach 1
11.61 There are numerous tugs in the port. Icebreakers are available. 2
Harbour General layout 1
2
11.62 The Port of Rga comprises both banks of the Daugava river, from the entrance to the first bridge some 8 miles above. It includes the island of Kundzi sala and the secondary channels of Sarkandaugava and Mlgrvis. The entrance to the estuary of the river is protected by two breakwaters extending NW from Daugavgrva on the W side, and Mangau Pussala on the E side. Lights are displayed from the breakwater heads. The bar of the river extends about 1½ miles NW from the heads of the entrance breakwaters. The channel frequently changes in depth and direction through strong currents, N gales and drift ice. Dredging is normally carried out each year as soon as ice conditions permit.
11.67 DaugavgrØva Leading Lights: Front light (white trapezium, red stripe on red framework tower, 15 m in height) (57°03′⋅6N, 24°01′⋅3E). Rear light (white trapezium, red stripe, on square metal framework tower, 267 m in height) (549 m from the front light). From the vicinity of B Light-buoy (11.30), moored 3¾ miles NW of the front light, within the safety fairway, the alignment (141°) of the above lights leads to a channel, marked by numbered light-buoys (lateral), across the bar to the entrance. Note. When crossing the bar, care is necessary to keep exactly on the alignment of the leading lights, passing between the light-buoys moored close on either side of the leading line.
Entry and main channel 1
2
Development 1
11.66 Landmarks: Daugavgrvas Lighthouse (57°03′⋅6N, 24°01′⋅3E) (11.25). Water tower 57°02′⋅6N, 21°01′⋅8E. Tower 57°02′⋅7N, 21°02′⋅4E. Chimney 57°03′⋅0N, 24°03′⋅8E. Major light: Daugavgrvas Light − as above (continued from 11.31)
Tugs and icebreakers 1
11.65 Current in Daugava attains a rate of 2 kn. In the spring it flows NW across the bar at a rate of up to 3 kn but throughout the summer it is very weak. If all the sluice gates of the upstream hydroelectric power station are opened, the river can flow up to 3 kn. In the entrance channel a surface current due to wind, may set SE with W or NW winds at a rate of ¼ kn, or with E winds at a rate of 1kn. Climatic table. See 1.284 and 1.297.
Principal marks
Pilotage 1
11.64 The approaches to the port contain former mined areas as shown on the chart. See 1.8.
11.63 In 2001 it was reported that a comprehensive development programme is to be initiated, including completion of a container terminal, construction of a car terminal, refurbishmemnt of existing berths and construction
400
11.68 The fairway through Daugava river is marked by numbered light-buoys, the positions of which are shown on the chart, and by leading lights, described in the order used by vessels from Daugavgrva leading line as follows: RØnøýi Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle, white stripe, on square framework tower, 13 m in height) (57°02′⋅4N, 24°04′⋅6E). Rear light (red trapezium, white stripe on square framework tower, 22 m in height) (587 m from the front light). The alignment (128½°) of these lights leads from a position about 2 cables outside the harbour entrance, SE for about 2½ miles to Mangai Leading Line.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
3
4
5
Mangaqi Leading Lights: Front light (white trapezium over white triangle, point down, black stripe, on metal framework tower, 6 m in height) (57°03′⋅0N, 24°03′⋅7E). Rear light (white trapezium, black stripe, on metal framework tower, 9 m in height) (252 m from front light). The alignment (326°), astern, of these lights leads about 1 mile SE to Balts-Bazncas Leading Line. Baltºs-BaznØcas Leading Lights: Front light (white trapezium, black stripe on metal framework tower, 10 m in height) (57°01′⋅9N, 24°05′⋅2E). Middle light (white rectangle, black stripe, on white building, 16 m in height) (205 m from front light). Rear light (window of white church, red roof and white tower 18 m in height) (486 m from the front light). The alignment (357°), astern, of these lights leads about 2½ miles S to the vicinity of Eksportosta. Vessels proceeding farther S should keep in mid-channel as far as the first bridge or proceed as required for their allocated berth.
MØlgrºvis and Sarkandaugava 1
2
11.69 MØlgrºvis Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle, white stripe on white column, 12 m in height) (57°01′⋅3N, 24°07′⋅1E). Rear light (white mast, 21 m in height) (362 m from front light). From a position on Mangai Leading Line the alignment (116¾°) of these lights leads SE for about 1 mile. Vessels bound for Mlgrvis turn E then NE; those bound for Sarkandaugava Upe turn S onto Sarkandaugava Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle, white stripe on column, 12 m in height) (57°00′⋅6N, 24°07′⋅1E). Rear light (red trapezium, white stripe on column, 19 m in height). The alignment (165°) of these lights leads to the berths at Daudersala and Sarkandaugava.
Useful marks
4
5
Basins and berths General information 1
2
3
Daugavgrvas Osta, detached breakwater, S end (red round column, 5 m in height) (57°03′⋅1N, 24°02′⋅4E). Buupe Light-beacon (red round tower, 8 m in height) (57°03′⋅0N, 24°02′⋅6E). Mazilkniei Light-beacon (white column with forked widening at top and platform, 6 m in height) (57°02′⋅2N, 24°04′⋅8E). Kurpnieku sala East Light-beacon (red round column, 7 m in height) (57°01′⋅7N, 24°05′⋅4E). Krievu sala Light-beacon (white round column with forked widening on top, 6 m in height) (57°01′⋅6N, 24°05′⋅0E). Rutku sala Light-beacon (white round tower, 4 m in height) (57°01′⋅4N, 24°06′⋅5E). Jaunmlgrvis Light-beacon (red round column, stone base with forked widening at top, 6 m in height) (57°01′⋅3N, 24°06′⋅8E). Kurpnieku sala West Light-beacon (white square framework tower, 8 m in height) (57°01′⋅2N, 24°05′⋅2E).
11.71 In Rga berths are grouped according to the operator. The grouping often contains both alongside river berths and basins, as may be seen by the berth prefixes shown on the chart.
Anchorages 1
11.72 The best anchorage in the river is between the middle of the SW side of Mangau Pussala and Balts-Bazncas Rear Leading Light (11.68). However, with NW winds, a sea is raised in the river. Anchorage is prohibited abreast the S entrance to Sarkandaugava, between lines drawn W from Daugava Putnu Light-beacon (56°59′⋅4N, 24°05′⋅7E) and the Eksportnaya Quay Light-beacon (56°59′⋅1N, 24°05′⋅8E).
Berthing areas on Daugava 1
2
11.70 1
Kundzi sala Light-beacon (white round metal column with forked widening on top, 6 m in height) (57°00′⋅3N, 24°05′⋅8E). Krmeru Light-beacon (white framework tower, 8 m in height) (57°00′⋅2N, 24°05′⋅3E). Daugava Putnu Light-beacon (red round column, 7 m in height) (56°59′⋅4N, 24°05′⋅7E). Eksportosta Quay Light-beacon (white round column with forked widening on top, 6 m in height) (56°59′⋅1N, 24°05′⋅6E). Eksportosta Harbour Molehead Light-beacon (white round column with forked widening on top, 6 m in height) (56°58′⋅4N, 24°05′⋅5E). Podrags Light-beacon (white round column with forked widening on top, 6 m in height) (56°58′⋅3N, 24°05′⋅1E). Andrejosta Mole Light-beacon (white round column with forked widening on top, 6 m in height) (56°57′⋅6N, 24°05′⋅6E), at N end of passenger terminal.
3
4
401
11.73 Positioned from Kurpnieku sala East Light-beacon (57°01′⋅7N, 24°05′⋅4E). The draught quoted is the maximum permitted draught for that berth. Daugavgrvas Osta (2½ miles NW), containing three basins, namely Austrumu Baseins, Kara Osta and Ziemas Osta (Winter Harbour). The basins share a common entrance from Daugava, on the alignment (168½°) of Kara Osta Leading Lights (white rectangle black stripe) (57°03′⋅1N, 24°01′⋅9E)) standing on the W side of Kara Osta. Longest berthis DG1 with a length of 203 m and a draught of 10.8 m. Mangasalas Basin (2 miles NW), containing five berths. Berth MS13 is 195 m long with a draught of 6.2 m. Audupe (1½ miles NW). AU1, a single berth 195 m long with a draught of 4⋅2 m, stands at the mouth of the Audupe which joins Vecadaugava to the Daugava. Zvejas Osta, the fishing harbour (1 mile NW), contains two basins with 16 berths. ZO2 is 168 m long with a draught of 9⋅ 2m. Manga Shipyard (6 cables NW), comprises a basin and alongside berths. MKR1 is 175 m long (maximum length of vessel 150 m) with a draught of 9.0m.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
LP27 (4 cables SSW), on the W bank, is a T-shaped gas jetty 145 m long with a draught of 6⋅5 m. Krmeri (1 mile S), on the W bank, comprises a basin and alongside berths. KR20 is 115 m long with a draught of 4.7 m. Container Terminal (1¼ miles S), on the W side of Kundzi sala. KS32, KS33 and KS34 are each 150 m long with a draughts between 9⋅8 to 10⋅0 m. Pumui as baseins (2¾ miles S), is a basin open to the river. PM21 is 350 m long with a draught of 10⋅ 0m. Eksportosta (3½ miles S), is a long riverside quay and a basin. EO6 is 240 m long with a draught of 10⋅0 m. Ro u di!is (3½ miles S), on the W bank at the N end of Zunds, a creek. RD3 is 235 m with a draught of 5⋅0 m. "psala (3¾ miles S), is an island separated from the mainland by Zunds. KPS17 is 40 m long with a draught of 3.0 m. Andrejsala (3¾ miles S), consists of riverside berths. AS5 is 144 m long with a draught of 8⋅0 m. Andrejosta (4¼ miles S) is a basin. AO2 is 140m long with a draught of 4⋅5 m. Passenger Terminal (4¼ miles S), comprises the riverside berths of the Andrejosta. JPS2 is 217 m long with a draught of 8.0m. Custom Pier (4¾ miles SSW), designated MK3, is 240 m long with a draught of 7⋅8 m.
5
6
7
8
Other facilities 1
Supplies 1
2
1
11.78 There is regular communication by sea between Rga and all the principal Baltic and North Sea ports. Rga Airport is situated on the W side of Daugava opposite Eksportosta Quay.
Rescue 1
11.79 Fully equipped rescue craft and rubber rescue boats, for inshore use, are stationed at Rga.
SOUTH-EAST SIDE — RGA TO SALACGRVA General information Chart 2215
Route
Berthing areas — MØlgrºvis and Sarkandaugava
11.80 The recommended track from Rga (56°58′N, 24°06′E) leads N for about 37 miles to a position W of Salacgrva, as shown on the chart.
11.74
Topography
Vecmlgravis (3 cables E), are riverside berths on Mlgrvis. VM3 is 60 m long with a draught of 5.7m. Rga Shipyard (1 mile E), occupies the whole NW side of Mlgrvis from the entrance to Sarkandaugava to the bridge. It comprises basins, riverside berths and floating docks. RKR7 is 250 m long with draught of 7.6 m. Jaunmlgrvis (1¼ mile E) occupies the whole SE side of Mlgrvis and the N part of the E side of Sarkandaugavas Upe. JM15 is 181 m long with a draught of 5.8 m. Daudersala (1½ miles SE); there are berths on the W, N and NE sides of the peninsula. DS9 is 105 m long with a draught of 5⋅0 m. Sarkandaugava (1¾ miles SSE); SD5 is 165 m long with a draught of 9.0 m.
1
1
11.82 Fishing nets are laid within 3 miles of the coast and caution is necessary when navigating close inshore.
Local magnetic anomaly 1
11.83 See 11.7.
Former mined area 11.84 The route passes through a former mined area as shown on the chart. See 1.8.
Major light
Port services
11.85 1
Daugavgrvas Light (57°03′⋅6N, 24°01′⋅3E) (11.28).
Other aid to navigation
Repairs 11.75 Repairs of all kinds can be carried out; six floating docks and two slipways are available. Largest floating dock: Length 225⋅6 m; breadth 45⋅0 m; lifting capacity 30 000 tonnes. Largest vessel, length 215⋅0 m; breadth 28⋅0 m; draught 8⋅0 m.
11.81 From the mouth of Daugava river, the coast, which stretches about 16 miles NE and 37 miles N, is low and sandy, backed by sand dunes which are wooded in places. To the S of Salacgrva (57°45′N, 24°21′E) there are occasional low cliffs.
Fishing nets
1
1
11.77 Fuel oil; fresh water; provisions.
Communications
1
1
11.76 Deratting; hospital; oily waste reception; specialised salvage vessels.
1
11.86 Racon: Daugavgrvas Light − as above.
1
11.87 From the vicinity of B Light-buoy (57°06′⋅5N, 23°57′⋅0E) (11.30), the recommended track
Directions
402
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
(358¼°–178¼°), leads N for 37 miles to a point W of Salacgrva. The chart is sufficient guide. From this point the routes diverge, one route leading NNE to Pärnu laht, and a second NNW to Väinameri.
SalacgrØva 1
Useful marks 11.88 Ladinu Beacon (square metal framework tower, black and white bands, 23 m in height) (57°12′N, 24°21′E). L u Light-beacon (red metal framework tower, white bands, 23 m in height) (57°26′⋅6N, 24°23′⋅3E). Grintla Light-beacon (white square framework tower, black top, 21 m in height) (57°38′⋅3N, 24°22′⋅7E). (Directions continue for Pärnu laht at 11.104 and for the approaches to Väinameri at 11.120)
1
2
3
Harbours and river Skultes Osta 1
2
1
2
3
11.89 General information. Skultes Osta (57°19′N, 24°25′E) is a small fishing and commercial harbour. The entrance between the heads of the moles, each with a light, is 65 m wide. The channel has a depth of 6⋅5 m. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 24 vessels totalling 79 537 dwt. Port Authority. Skulte Port Authority, 41 Upes Street, LV–2161 Zvejniekciems,. Website: www.skulteport.lv E-Mail:
[email protected] Anchorage. In the roadsted within a radius of 5 cables of position 57°18′⋅5N, 24°21′⋅0E. Pilotage and tugs: Pilotage, provided by the Harbour Master, and the use of a tug, is compulsory for vessels greater than 200 gt. 11.90 Directions. From the vicinity of the fairway light-buoy (safe water) (57°19′⋅2N, 24°21′⋅8E), the channel, marked by light-buoys (lateral), leads 1½ miles E into the harbour, passing S of a dangerous wreck. The track is covered by the white sector (097½°−099½°) of Skultes Osta Direction Light (framework tower) (57°19′⋅0N, 24°24′⋅4E). The white, red and green lights are permanently displayed. Caution shoals are located approximately 400 m W of the entrance on both sides of the leading line. Useful mark. Beacon (red trapezium, white stripe on framework tower) standing about 250 m E of Skultes Osta Direction Light. Berths. S berth of ferroconcrete 75 m LOA, depth 6⋅5 m: N berth of ferroconcrete, 85 m LOA, depth 6⋅5 m. There are other smaller berths for fishing vessels and small craft. Repairs: Facilities: medical centre; dirty bilge water reception. Supplies: fuel (advance order); fresh water; provisions. Communications. Rga Airport, 60 km.
1
2
River Gauja 1
11.91 Tuja (57°30′N, 24°23′E) has a pier and a brickworks with a tall chimney. The depths at the head of the pier are 3⋅2 to 3⋅5 m. The approach to the pier is obstructed by three below-water rocks, the outer one lying almost in the centre of the approach fairway. Local knowledge is required.
11.94 The river Gauja, the mouth of which lies 9¼ miles NE of the mouth of the Daugava river (11.41), is connected to that river by a series of lakes and canals. At its entrance there is a depth of about 1⋅5 m on the bar but within the river there are depths of between 1⋅7 and 3⋅2 m.
CENTRAL PART — IRBE STRAIT TO PÄRNU LAHT General information Chart 2215
Route 1
Tuja 1
11.92 Description. Salacgrva (57°45′N, 24°21′E) is a small town at the mouth of the river Salaca. The Orthodox Church, a red building, the Lutheran Chapel, white with a green spire, and the white chimney of a sawmill in the old part of the town are prominent features. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 15 m in length. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 30 vessels totalling 79 606 dwt. Port Authority. Salacgrva Port Authority, 2 Sila Str., Salacgrva, LV–4033. Limiting conditions. The maximum length for vessels entering port is 115 m. The shipping channel has a depth of 5⋅5 m and alongside the piers have depths of 4 to 5 m. Anchorage may be obtained in the roadstead, 2 miles W of the harbour, in depths of 6 to 7 m, or alternatively, 3 miles SW of the harbour. 11.93 Directions. Salacgrva Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, on metal framework tower, 10 m in height) (57°45′⋅4N, 24°21′⋅2E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 18 m in height) (207 m from front light). From the vicinity of the fairway light-buoy (safe water), moored 2 miles WSW of the entrance, the alignment (072¼°) of these lights leads, in a channel marked by light-buoys (lateral), into the harbour. Berths: six available. Facilities: medical centre; bilge water reception facilities. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communications. Rga Airport, 100 km. Rescue. An inshore rubber rescue boat is stationed at Salacgrva.
11.95 From a position N of Kolka Light (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E) the route leads about 50 miles ENE to the approaches to Pärnu laht, passing NNW of Ruhnu Saar (57°48′N, 23°14′E) and SSE of Kihnu saar (58°08′N, 24°00′E).
Former mined area 1
403
11.96 Irbe Strait lies within a former mined area as shown on the chart. See 1.8.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
Landmarks 11.97 1
Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E) (11.14). Ruhnu Saar Lighthouse (red round tower with cupola and galleries, 40 m in height) (57°48′⋅1N, 23°15′⋅6E). Kihnu saar Lighthouse (white round metal tower, 28 m in height) (58°05′⋅8N, 23°58′⋅3E) standing on Pitkana ots, the S extremity of the island.
Other aid to navigation 1
2
3
11.98 Racon: Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 2.
Directions (continued from 11.20) 1
2
3
11.99 From the vicinity of No 8 Light-buoy (11.18), moored 3 miles N of Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E), the recommended track (080°) leads for about 50 miles to a position in the approaches to Pärnu laht, SE of Kihnu saar Lighthouse, where it joins the recommended track from S, passing: NNW of the shoal water which extends 3 miles NNW of Ruhnu Saar (57°48′N, 23°14′E) (11.25), thence: SSE of Kihnu madal, an extensive shoal with a least depth of 1⋅8 m over it, which lies 3 miles SW of Kihnu saar (58°08′N, 24°00′E). It is marked at its N limit by a buoy (N cardinal) and at its SW limit by a light-buoy (S cardinal). And: SSE and SE of Kihnu saar which lies on the NW side of the approaches to Pärnu laht and is low and wooded. It is surrounded by a rocky shelf on which there are many islets, foul rocky areas, and banks including Asalaid, two flat rocks above water surrounded by foul ground, which lies about 7 cables ESE of Pitkana ots, the S extremity of the island. An above-water reef lies 7½ cables farther ESE. Sillaid, a rocky ledge on which are some above-water rocks, lies on the SE side of the island about 7 cables offshore. Two rocks lie 5 cables SE of Sillaid. The S end of the coastal shoal is marked by a buoy (S cardinal) and the E side by a buoy (E cardinal). A wreck, with a depth of 7⋅8 m over it, lies 3¼ miles SE of Pitkana ots. Thence the route joins the recommended track to Pärnu laht. (Directions for Pärnu laht continue at 11.104)
4
5
Former mined areas 1
1
Directions 1
Chart 2215
Route 2
Topography 1
11.101 East side. The coast between Aina u (57°52′N, 24°22′E) and Treimani, about 3½ miles NNE, is low, stony and
11.103 Aina u Lighthouse (white octagonal tower, orange stripe, 18 m in height) (57°52′⋅0N, 24°21′⋅6E). Kihnu saar Lighthouse (58°05′⋅8N, 23°58′⋅3E) (11.97). Häädemeeste Light-beacon (white square metal framework tower, 28 m in height) (58°04′⋅4N, 24°29′⋅2E). (continued from 11.88)
General information
11.100 From the vicinity of 57°43′N, 23°55′E, about 14 miles W of Salacgrva (11.92), the track divides, one route leading NNW to Väinameri, the other leading NNE for about 35 miles to Pärnu.
11.102 The approaches to Pärnu laht are within a former mined area as shown on the chart. See 1.8.
Landmarks
EAST SIDE — SALACGRVA TO PÄRNU LAHT
1
backed by woods. The coast thence to Veskinina, about 2 miles N, is of moderate height, level, sandy and covered with pine woods extending to the beach. Thence to Laigiste nina and Lepanina, respectively about 2 and 3¼ miles farther NNE, it is somewhat indented and rocky in places. From Kabli (58°00′N, 24°27′E) to Jaagupi Nina, about 1½ miles N, the coast is wooded and of moderate height with a stony beach. Thence to Häädemeeste about 2½ miles farther NNE, the coast until within 1 mile of Häädemeeste is sandy and the pine woods extend to the beach. Saarenina, about 1½ miles NNW of Häädemeeste, is low, rocky and densely covered with trees. A reef, partly above water, surrounds the headland and extends up to 1½ miles SW. There are some above-water rocks about 5 cables W of the point. Pihinurme Mäed, some sand hills about 45 m high, lying 1¼ miles inland, provide a good landmark E of Pihinurme nina (58°09′N, 24°29′E). Võistesaar (58°12′N, 24°28′E), a grassy islet close offshore about 1½ miles N of Pikla nina, is connected at its NE end to the mainland by a below-water reef. Between Võistesaar and Suurnanina, about 2¼ miles N, a reef, partly above water, extends about 1 mile from the coast; 5 cables farther W is Künka madal, a reef with a depth of 2⋅8 m over it. West side. Kihnu saar (58°08′N, 24°00′E) (11.99), and Manilaid, (4 miles NNE) (11.106), together with their attendant dangers, bound the NW side of the approach to Pärnu laht. Rocks, above and below water, extend about 1 mile from the coast between Torila ots (58°14′N, 24°07′E) and Liu, some 5½ miles NE (11.104).
3
404
11.104 From the vicinity of 57°43′N, 23°55′E, about 14 miles W of Salacgrva (11.92), the recommended track (024°–204°) leads NNE for about 35 miles, passing (with positions from Kihnu saar Light (58°05′⋅8N, 23°58′⋅3E)): WNW of Tlais sklis, (18¾ miles SSE). Daragana sklis lies some 2¼ miles farther E. Thence: WNW of Randa sklis, (18¼ miles SSE), an extensive coastal bank with a least depth of 1⋅6 m over it, thence: WNW of a wreck, with a depth of 13 m over it, (15 miles SSE), thence: WNW of Pikola sklis, (14 miles SE), and Petrova sklis), (15 miles SE), thence: ESE of Kihnu saar and the dangers SE of it (11.99), and: WNW of Kiire madal, a detached rocky shoal with a depth of 5 m over it (12½ miles SE), thence: ESE of an 8 m patch (7¼ miles E), thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
4
5
6
7
Between a shoal (8 miles ENE), with a wreck close SW, with a least depth of 9⋅5 m over it, marked by a light-buoy (E cardinal), and a 9⋅2 m patch 5 cables E, thence: ESE of Sorgu saar (58°10′N, 24°12′E), an islet covered with grass and bushes with a small hill in the middle, 3 m high. It is fringed with rocks above and below water. On the E side of the island is a sandy bay where landing may be effected. Sorgu saar Light (red round brick tower, 16 m in height) stands on the islet. The foul ground extending about 3¼ miles S from Sorgu saar, and the wreck mentioned above are covered by the red sectors of both Sorgu saar Light and Kihnu Light. And: WNW of Pihinurme madal (14¼ miles ENE), a reef which forms the outer edge of the coastal bank extending over 2 miles offshore W of Pihinurme nina (11.101), thence: ESE of Kerese madal (11 miles NE), an extensive shoal, and: WNW of Pikla nina (15¾ miles ENE), the E entrance point of Pärnu laht. The coastal reef, parts of which are above water, extends about 1 mile SW from the shore. Thence: WNW of Irmgardi madal (14 miles NE), a shoal with a least depth of 4⋅6 m, marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: ESE of Liusäär (14¼ miles NNE), a reef extending 6 cables S, and 3 cables E of Liu. A light (white square metal framework tower, 28 m in height), is displayed from the point. Thence, onto the Pärnu approach leading line.
Pärnu and approaches Chart 2215 plan of Pärnu
General information 1
2
3
4
Useful marks 1
11.105 Aina u Church (57°51′⋅8N, 24°21′⋅5E), without spire. Church (58°04′⋅58N, 24°30′⋅0E), at Häädemeeste, white building with a black roof and black cupola. A second church, red building, green spire, stands 5 cables NE. (Directions for Pärnu continue at 11.111)
5
Limiting conditions 1 2
East approach to Kihnu väin 1
2
3
11.106 In the E approaches to Kihnu väin (11.123), there is a channel about 4 cables wide, with a least depth of 3⋅8 m, marked by buoys (cardinal), which leads between the shoal waters S of Manilaid and those extending E from Kakra saar. Local knowledge is required as the channel is somewhat tortuous. Manilaid (58°13′N, 24°07′E) is a low island, about 5 m high, covered with grass and bushes on which stands Manilaid Light-beacon (white round tower, red lantern, 8 m in height) (58°12′⋅2N, 24°06′⋅0E). The island is surrounded by foul ground and it is separated from Torila ots, on the mainland N of it, by a shallow channel. Anilaid, a low rocky islet, lies 2½ cables SE of Manilaid. Between them are some rocks with depths of less than 1⋅8 m over them. Kakra saar lies at the N end of, a narrow reef of sand and rock, partly above water, extending about 2½ miles NNE from Pilliots, the NE extremity of Kihnu saar.
11.107 Position. Pärnu (58°23′N, 24°29′E) is situated on each side of the mouth of Pärnu Jõgi, a river which flows into Pärnu laht (58°20′N, 24°25′E), a bay lying on the NE side of Gulf of Rga. Function. The town, of considerable commercial importance, is also a seaside resort and a coastal fishing base. The oldest and larger part of the town lies on the S bank of the river. In 2001 it had a population of 45 500. The principal industries are saw mills, flax spinning, weaving, leather and cloth works and engineering works. Principal exports are timber, wood pulp and flax. Principal imports are fertilisers, salt and coal. Topography. The coast of Pärnu laht near its entrance points is indented and rocky. Near its head it is smooth and sandy. Almost the whole of this stretch of coast is low and tree covered. Between Tahkunina (58°16′N, 24°30′E) and Pärnu are several villages. Low sand dunes lie close inland in the S part. The W shore of Pärnu laht is generally low and marshy, particularly near the N end, where several rivers flow into the head of the bay. The buildings in Pärnu are prominent and in particular Eliisabeti Church (58°23′N, 24°30′E) is easily identified. Port limits. The port limits include that part of Pärnu Jõgi from its mouth to the town bridge, about 1¾ miles upstream. The S limit is shown on the chart. Approach and entry. The port is approached along the recommended track on the alignment of leading lights, and entered through a dredged channel, also marked by leading lights. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 918 vessels totalling over 3 million dwt. Port Authority. Port of Pärnu Authority, Lootsi 6, 80012 Pärnu, Estonia. E-Mail:
[email protected] 11.108 Controlling draught. Vessels with a draught not exceeding 5⋅0 m may enter the port. Ice. Pärnu Harbour is ice-bound each year from November to April. The bay usually becomes ice-bound 7 days later than the harbour, and ice-free 11 days later than the river. This later thawing in the roadstead causes blockages in the mouth of the harbour when the ice in the river begins to move, thus the level in the river is raised so much, at times up to 3⋅7 m, that the low-lying areas in the vicinity are flooded and ice-floes are carried out to sea over the harbour breakwaters. In the autumn, the river often freezes up quite unexpectedly while the export trade is in full flow.
Arrival information 1
2
405
11.109 Port radio. There is a combined port radio station and pilot station. For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2). Notice of ETA is to be sent to the agent 24 hours and 12 hours in advance. Outer anchorages. Excepting for winds from S and SW, which can send in a heavy sea, the bay is otherwise well sheltered. Large vessels may obtain anchorage anywhere in
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
3
the middle of Pärnu laht, in depths of 5⋅5 to 8⋅7 m, sand and mud, with good holding ground. An anchorage area, the limits of which are shown on the chart, is established in the approach fairway to Pärnu, centred about 4½ miles SSW of the harbour entrance. The bottom in this area consists of sand and clay. Pilotage is compulsory and is available 24 hours. Pilot boards in the vicinity of 58°20′⋅0 N, 24°25′⋅7 E, as shown on the chart. Traffic regulations. Navigation in the approach channel is allowed by day and night, but only in one direction at a time. Priority is given to vessels leaving the harbour.
5
Port services
Harbour 1
2
3
11.110 General layout. Pärnu Harbour has depths of 3⋅7 to 6 m. The bottom is clay, with gravel in places, and is covered with sand. The entrance channel leading over the bar and between the breakwaters is liable to silting. It has a least width over the bottom of 53 m, with a least depth of 5⋅0 m on the outer leading line. Depths are maintained by periodic dredging. The banks of the river are low and are built up only in the area of the quays along the SE side which have depths alongside from 4⋅1 to 5⋅5 m. On the NW bank of Pärnu Jõgi, abreast the quays on the opposite bank, there are three piers, the E-most of which is in ruins; the two remaining piers are used by fishing vessels. A harbour for fishing vessels and small craft lies W of the quays at the mouth of Sauga Jõgi, which flows into the NW side of Pärnu Harbour about 4 cables below the town bridge. Storm signals. Storm signals are shown from the signal yard of a framework tower standing 4 cables NE of Pärnu Outer Rear Light-beacon. Climatic table. See 1.284 and 1.298.
1
Chart 2215
Anchorage 1
2
3
4
11.113 Small vessels may obtain anchorage about 1½ miles NNW of Treimani Church (57°55′⋅3N, 24°23′⋅5E) (no longer charted), in a depth of about 2 m, fine sand.
Ainaýu 1
2
1
11.112 Repairs. Minor repairs can be carried out. Supplies: fuel oil; fresh water; provisions. Communication is maintained regularly by sea with other Baltic and North Sea ports.
Anchorage and harbours
Directions (continued from 11.105) 11.111 Pärnu Approach Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe on square metal framework tower, 22 m in height) (58°22′⋅7N, 24°28′⋅0E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 34 m in height) (820 m from front light). From a position on the recommended track, clear of Irmgardi madal (11.104), the alignment (024°) of these lights leads NNE for about 9 miles to Pärnu Light-buoy (starboard hand), moored 8 cables SW of the E breakwater, thence: Pärnu Outer Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, red stripe on square framework tower, 14 m in height) (58°22′⋅7N, 24°28′⋅8E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 24 m in height) (380 m from front light). The alignment (039°) of these lights leads NE for about 1¼ miles, through a channel dredged to 5⋅0 m (1986) and marked by buoys (lateral); thence between the breakwater heads, from which lights are displayed, thence: Pärnu Inner Leading Lights: Front light (red rectangle, black stripe, on metal framework tower, 13 m in height) (58°23′⋅4N, 24°29′⋅2E).
Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 22 m in height) (230 m from front light). The alignment (026¼°) of these lights leads from the outer leading line into the harbour. Useful marks: Tahkuranna Church (58°14′⋅5N, 24°29′⋅0E) a red building with a white and green chequered cupola. E Breakwater Head Light (white mast, green band, concrete base, 4 m in height) (58°22′⋅0N, 24°27′⋅9E). W Breakwater Head Light (similar construction with red band, 1½ cables NW of the E light).
11.114 General information. Aina u (57°52′N, 24°22′E) lies close S of the boundary between Latvia and Estonia. Aina u harbour is protected on the NW by a detached breakwater about 2 cables in length, lying about 5 cables offshore and parallel with the coast, and on the S by a reef on which there are some drying rocks. The entrance channel, which has a least depth of 3⋅5 m, leads S of the breakwater. The harbour is suitable for vessels with a draught of less than 3 m. Directions. In bad weather the approach to Aina u is risky due to the off-lying shoals. The best approach is from NW between Pikola sklis and Petrova sklis, and thence between the fairway buoyage, passing S of the detached breakwater. Port services. Fresh provisions may be obtained but fresh water cannot be supplied at Aina u. Communications are maintained by sea with Rga and Pärnu.
Kihnu Harbour 1
11.115 Kihnu Harbour (58°09′N, 24°01′E), is situated on the E side of Kihnu saar. The S side of the harbour is protected by a mole which is prolonged by a pier extending ENE, thence N and thence NW; the depths on the outer side of the pier are from 0⋅9 to 2⋅5 m but the inner side is shoal. A light (white column on a concrete base, 4 m in height) is displayed from the head of the pier.
NORTH EAST SIDE — SALACGRVA TO VÄINAMERI General information Chart 2215
Route 1
406
11.116 From the vicinity of 57°43′N, 23°55′E, about 14 miles W of Salacgrva (11.92), the track leads NNW then N for
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
about 51 miles to the Virtsu pilot boarding position (58°31′N, 23°30′E).
Topography 1
2
3
4
11.117 East side. Kihnu saar and its surrounding dangers are described at 11.99 and Kihnu Väin at 11.123. Sõmeri poolsaar (58°21′N, 23°45′E) is low and covered with grass and some bushes. The coast to Pivarootsi, some 13½ miles NNW, is rocky with low steep bluffs; there is a ridge rising to an elevation of 35 m which runs parallel to the coast from 1 to 3 miles inland; clumps of trees extend in places to the coast. Paagi säär (58°26′N, 23°41′E) is situated about 5½ miles NNW of Sõmeri poolsaar. Selglaid (58°28′N, 23°39′E) is the largest of a group of islets, surrounded by foul ground, which lie on the coastal bank between Paagi säär and a point about 2 miles N of it; on the coast of the mainland in this vicinity are the ruins of a old stone mill which provides a good landmark. West side. Väike väin (58°33′N, 23°10′E) is a shallow strait from 1 to 2 miles wide, which separates Muhu (12.92) from the NE side of Saaremaa; passage through the strait is completely obstructed by an embankment which carries the road connecting the islands. The coast of Muhu SE of the embankment is lower than farther NW; it is marshy and partly wooded. Suurlaid (58°32′N, 23°16′E) is a low sandy islet covered with grass and fringed with reefs which is connected to the S side of Muhu by a ridge of sand. Võilaid is a flat grassy islet which lies close S of the SE end of Muhu.
5
6
Useful marks 1
Anchorages
Prohibited anchorage 11.118 Anchoring is prohibited, as shown on the chart, in the vicintiy of submarine cables in Suur väin and Suur väin.
Local magnetic anomoly 1
11.121 Sõmeri poolsaar Light (white octagonal concrete tower, 21 m in height) (58°21′⋅0N, 23°44′⋅3E). Viirelaid Lighthouse (58°32′⋅7N, 23°26′⋅6E) (12.102). Virtsu Lighthouse (58°34′⋅1N, 23°30′⋅1E) (12.102). (Directions for Väinameri continue in reverse at 12.106)
Anchorages and harbours
1
1
E of Kübassaare (10½ miles SW) (11.131), thence: Close W of a 7⋅2 m patch (6¾ miles S), which lies 4 miles W of Pöörilaid Light (white round concrete tower, 13 m in height) which stands on an islet of that name close WNW of Selglaid (11.117), thence: E of a 4⋅8 m patch (5½ miles SSW), which lies 3¾ miles E of Pühadekare, two rocks, each 2 m high. Together with other above-water rocks they lie near the S end of foul ground which extends about 1¾ miles S of Võilaid. The reefs N of Pühadekare are all connected at LW. Thence: Across a shoal area with a least depth over it of 6⋅6 m (4 miles S). Thence the recommended route leads NNW for 8 miles through Viire kurk and Suur väin, which separate the E side of Muhu from the mainland, and which leads to Väinameri (12.88). See Chapter 12.
11.119 Local deflection of the compass is reported to occur in the vicinity of Vaiste laht (58°19′N, 23°51′E) (11.125), as shown on the chart.
11.122 Small vessels may obtain anchorage 3 cables offshore, about 1½ miles NNW of Sõmeri poolsaar Light (58°21′⋅0N, 23°44′⋅3E). Anchorage may also be obtained about 4 cables NNW of Paagi säär (11.117) and 3 cables offshore, or about 2¾ miles N of the same point and 4 cables offshore. Farther N there are several inlets with depths of 1⋅5 to 2 m which are suitable for small craft. Local knowledge is required.
Kihnu väin Chart 2215
General information
Directions (continued from 11.88) 1
2
3
4
11.120 From the vicinity of 57°43′N, 23°55′E, about 14 miles W of Salacgrva (11.92), the recommended track leads 327° for about 18½ miles, passing (with positions from Kihnu saar Lighthouse (58°05′⋅8N, 23°58′⋅3E)): NE of Ruhnu Saar (28½ miles SW) (11.25), and: SW of the SW corner of Kihnu madal, marked by a light-buoy (S cardinal) (3 miles SW) (11.99). Thence the track leads 352° for about 22½ miles passing: W of a shoal with a depth of 7⋅4 m over it (9 miles W). Thence, with Sõmeri poolsaar Light (11.121),, standing on Veelaiu nina, the NW extremity of the headland, 20 m in height, bearing 090° distant 7½ miles, the track continues N for 10 miles to the Virtsu pilot boarding position through an area with isolated depths of less than 10 m, as can be seen on the chart, passing (with positions from Virtsu Light (58°34′⋅1N, 23°30′⋅1E)): W of Haapsi madal (10½ miles SSE), and Suurkäkk 2 miles farther E, and: E of a 7⋅6 m patch (10½ miles SSW), thence:
1
2
3
407
11.123 Description. Kihnu väin lies between the mainland NW of Torila ots (58°14′N, 24°08′E) on the N, and Kihnu saar (11.99) and the foul ground NW of it, on the S. Topography. The coast between Torila ots and Sõmeri poolsaar (11.117), about 13 miles WNW, is generally low and rugged with marshes in places. In parts it is covered by scrub. There is some high ground rising to an elevation of 28 m, 1¾ miles inland, about 8½ miles NW of Torila ots, which shows up well from seaward. At Vaiste (58°21′N, 23°52′E), the land between 1 and 3 miles inland reaches an elevation of 35 m and farther inland, about 8¾ miles NE of the S extremity of Sõmeri poolsaar, a hill rises to an elevation of about 40 m. Heinlaid (58°17′N, 24°00′E) and Kiveslaid, both of which are covered with grass, lie on the foul ground extending about 1¾ miles SSE from Tõstamaa nina (58°18′N, 24°00′E). Kõrklaid (58°21′N, 23°47′E) with the smaller Rootsiklaid close E of it, are two low islets covered with grass and shrubs fringed in places with above-water rocks. Between Räspa nina and Sõmeri poolsaar, about 2 miles farther W, the wide coastal bank is foul.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
4
1
2
Several islets stand on the foul ground NW of Kihnu saar. Sange saar, an islet covered with grass and shrubs, lies on a rocky shelf about 3¼ miles NW of Kihnu saar. Umalaid, which lies between Sange saar and Kihnu saar, is low, and about 1½ miles SW of it are Edikrava laid and Imutlaid. Submarine power cable is laid between Kihnu saar and the mainland, 1 mile NW of Torila ots (58°14′N, 24°08′E), as shown on the chart.
2
Approaches
1
11.124 West. Ipsi madal (58°15′⋅5N, 23°46′⋅5E), a shoal with a least depth of 2⋅2 m over it and which is marked on its N and S sides by buoys (cardinal), lies in the W approach to Kihnu väin. A shoal depth of 3⋅8 m, marked by a buoy (S cardinal), lies about 2 miles N of Ipsi madal. Aleksandri madal, marked by a buoy (N cardinal), lies about 2½ miles SE at the extremity of the foul ground extending NW from Kihnu saar. The passage N of Ipsi madal has a least charted depth of 7⋅8 m but a 4⋅4 m patch lies 2 miles inside the entrance. The passage S of Ipsi madal has a least charted depth of 5⋅2 m but a 3 m patch lies close inside the entrance. East. In the E approaches to Kihnu väin there is a channel S of Manilaid (11.106). Local knowledge is required.
Former mined areas
2
11.125 Tõstamaa laht, the shallow inlet E of Tõstamaa nina (58°18′N, 24°00′E), is obstructed by rocks on the W side. Värati laht is a small but well sheltered inlet, with a depth of about 3 m, on the W side of Tõstamaa nina. Vaiste laht is entered between Kastna nina (58°19′N, 23°55′E) and the foul ground, on which are some above-water rocks, extending about 3 miles SSE from Räspa nina, 3 miles NW of Kastna nina. There are depths of about 6 to 8 m in the entrance decreasing gradually to 3⋅7 m about 7½ cables from the head of the bay.
NORTH-WEST SIDE — SÕRVE POOLSAAR TO MUHU
1
1
Directions 1
2
3
Route 4
Topography 1
11.130 Racon. Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E) (11.14).
(continued from 11.20)
Charts 2215, 2223 11.126 From a position about 5½ miles N of Kolkasrags (57°46′N, 22°36′E), in the vicinity of the E end of Irbe safety fairway, the track leads about 41 miles NE, to a position in the approaches to Väinameri, about 8 miles SE of Kübassaare (11.131).
11.129 An area centred around 58°09′N, 22°52′E, shown on the chart, is a former dumping ground for explosives, now disused.
Other navigational aid
General information
1
11.128 Irbe Strait lies within a former mined area, as shown on the chart. See 1.8.
Dumping ground
Inlets 1
Laidunina (58°23′N, 23°05′E) is a low wooded point, fringed with rocks both above and below water, which extend about 2 miles SE. Paelaid, on the coastal bank about 3¾ miles NE of Laidunina, is a grassy islet surrounded by rocks; foul ground with a 1⋅6 m patch near its outer end extends about 2 miles SSE.
11.127 The NW side of Gulf of Rga is formed by the S and SE coasts of Saaremaa, the W and N coasts of which island are described in Chapter 12. The E coast of Sõrve Poolsaar is described at 11.9 and Suur Katel at 11.133. The coast between Roomassaare (58°13′N, 22°31′E) and Kübassaare poolsaar, about 29 miles NE, is generally low, attaining an elevation of not more than 12 m. It is indented by several bays, the points between being mostly flat and on them a few villages may be seen. Woods extend to the coast in places.
408
11.131 From the vicinity of No 8 Light-buoy (11.18), moored 3 miles N of Kolka Lighthouse (57°48′⋅1N, 22°38′⋅0E), the recommended track (043°) leads for about 41 miles to a position about 8 miles SE of Kübassaare Lighthouse (58°25′⋅7N, 23°18′⋅0E), where it joins the N-bound route for Väinameri (11.120), passing: SE of Allirahu (58°10′N, 22°48′E) on which stands Allirahu Lighthouse (red round metal column with balcony, 8 m in height). The islet is low, barren and rocky, fringed with rocks, and lies on the coastal bank about 4 miles SE of Vätta nina, on the SW side of the approaches to Sutu laht. A rocky ledge, awash in places, extends about 1 mile E from the islet. A reef with some rocks both above and below water extends about 2¼ miles S from Allirahu. Thence: SE of several detached shoal patches and rocks which extend up to 3¾ miles S and 3¼ miles SSE of Kõiguste-Allirahu (58°18′N, 22°58′E). Kõiguste-Allirahu Lighthouse (black and white framework tower, 16 m in height), stands on this islet. The islet is a rocky ledge above water and covered with grass. Thence: SE of Kübassaare poolsaar (58°25′⋅7N, 23°18′⋅0E), on which stands Kübassaare Lighthouse (white round concrete tower, black top, 18 m in height). The peninsula is wooded with a rugged coast and reeds in places. Its E side is steep in places, about 2 to 3 m high. From a distance of about 10 miles, its S extremity, on which there are tall trees, appears as an island. On the rocky ledge off the S end of the W arm of the peninsula, are two stranded wrecks, lying respectively, about 2 miles W and 1½ miles WSW, of Kübassaare Lighthouse. Udrikulaid is a low grassy islet, on which are a few buildings, lying close W of Kübassaare Lighthouse. Tudinasva, about 1 mile SSE of Kübassaare Lighthouse, is a reef above water which lies on a ridge with some above and below-water rocks on its inner part extending about 3 miles S and 2 miles SE from Kübassaare poolsaar.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
Thence the route merges with the route from the S (11.120).
4
Suur Katel
Useful marks
Charts 2215, 2223 (see 1.34)
General information 1
1
11.132 Description. Suur Katel (58°11′N, 22°24′E) is used as a loading place for vessels whose draught does not permit them to enter Kuressaare or Roomassaare harbours which lie in the NE part of the bay.
Topography 1
2
3
11.133 Between Laidunina (58°07′N, 22°16′E) and Loodenina, about 7 miles farther NE, the W and N shores of Suur Katel are sandy and mostly low, with woods in places. Near Jarve, about 3½ miles N of Laidunina, the coast rises steeply to a height of 9 m and is backed by woods. On the N shore of the bay, near the mouth of Nasva Jõgi which is about 64 m wide, the land is marshy. About 1 mile E of the river mouth the remains of a stone dam extend 3½ cables SSE from Loodenina. Abruka saar (58°10′N, 22°31′E) is low, sandy and its higher central part is covered with trees. The island is surrounded by rocks and at its N end is a village with a boat pier. Kasselaid, a low grassy islet, lies on foul ground 2½ cables SE of the E extremity of Abruka saar. Linnusitamaa, an above-water ridge of gravel and sand, lies about 2 cables E of the S extremity of Abruka saar with foul ground in between. Kirjurahu (58°06′N, 22°34′E), is awash about the middle of its length and is surrounded by shallow water. Vahase saar, close W of Abruka saar and very shallow between, is about 4 m high with some pine trees on its central part.
Landmark: 1
1
2
3
11.137 Anchorage may be obtained in Suur Katel, in depths of between 7 and 13 m, sand and mud, in the middle of the bay, being careful to avoid the wreck with a depth of 6⋅6 m over it (11.135), lying about 2¾ miles WSW of Vahase Light, and noting the spoil ground 2 miles SW of the light.
Roomassaare 1
2
3
11.134 Abruka Lighthouse (white round concrete tower, black bands, 36 m in height) (58°08′⋅9N, 22°31′⋅5E), and also the rear light for Abruka Leading Lights. 11.135 From a position SE of Kaavi Light (57°59′⋅0N, 22°11′⋅8E) (11.23) the approach to the pilot boarding place at Roomassaare leads generally NNE, passing (with positions from Abruka Lighthouse (58°08′⋅9N, 22°31′⋅5E)): ESE of Kaavi Madal (15½ miles SW), a rock, marked by a buoy (E cardinal), thence: WNW of Veiserahu (9 miles SSW), a rocky ridge with a least depth over it of 1⋅8 m, marked by light-buoys (cardinal), thence: ESE of Leeltserahu (8 miles SW), a group of rocks, marked by a buoy (E cardinal), noting a shallow patch, 2 miles E, with a depth of 8⋅2 m over it, thence: WNW of Kirjurahu madal (4½ miles S), a shoal marked by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: ESE of Merise madal (8½ miles SW), a shoal with a least depth of 1⋅5 m over it, and: WNW of the shoal ground extending about 1½ miles SSW of Vahase saar (1¾ miles WSW), marked at its extremity by a buoy (W cardinal), and:
11.136 Anseküla Lighthouse (white square concrete tower, black top, 22 m in height) (58°05′⋅9N, 22°13′⋅9E). Kirjurahu Beacon (red iron framework pyramid, 11 m in height) (58°06′⋅0 N, 22°33′⋅4 E), standing on the N part of the islet of the same name. Vahase saar Lighthouse (red tower, white stripe, 11 m in height) (58°08′⋅1N, 22°28′⋅0E). (Directions for Roomassaare continue at 11.140)
Anchorage
Directions 1
ESE of a wreck, with a depth of 6⋅6 m over it (4¼ miles WSW). Thence to the pilot boarding position.
1
2
1
409
11.138 General information. The harbour of Roomassaare (58°13′N, 22°31′E) lies at the S end of the peninsula of Roomassaare which is in the NE corner of Suur Katel. Principal exports are agricultural products, timber and stone. Imports are farming machinery and groceries. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 36 vessels totalling 94 665 dwt. Port Authority. Roomassaare Harbour, Roomassaare Tee 12, 93815 Kuressare. E-Mail:
[email protected] Maximum draught. Maximum permitted draught is 5⋅5 m. Ice. The area is usually closed to navigation by ice from the end of December to the beginning of March. Notice of ETA. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Anchorage may be obtained, by small vessels, in depths of about 4 m, gravel and sand, about 1 mile S of Roomassaare. Strong winds from SW or SE raise a considerable sea. Pilotage. Pilotage is compulsory. Pilot boards in position 58°08′N, 22°25′E. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details. Local knowledge is required. 11.139 Harbour layout. Roomassaare harbour is protected by a pier which extends SSE and thence E for a total distance of 2¼ cables, from the head of a stone dyke which itself extends about 2 cables SSW from the S end of Roomassaare. Submarine power cables. A submarine power cable, shown on the chart, is laid from the NE side of Abruka saar to the mainland. Wrecks. Stranded wrecks lie one on each side of the peninsula, respectively, about 6 cables W and 5 cables E of Roomassaare pierhead. 11.140 Directions — south-west approach. From the pilot boarding position, the initial approach to Roomassaare Harbour is from SW, by night, in a white sector (024°–043°) of Roomassaare Front Leading Light (58°12′⋅8N, 22°30′⋅4E). When clear of the NW edge of the coastal shoal around Abruka saar, the track then leads NE
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 11
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
towards the Fairway Light-buoy, moored about 9 cables S of Roomassaare Front Leading Light. Thence the alignment (351½°) of the following lights leads through a buoyed channel, 85 m wide and with a depth of 6 m, into the harbour: Front light (black rectangle, white stripe on red column), 7 m in height) (58°13′⋅2N, 22°30′⋅4E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 8 m in height) (107 m from front light). 11.141 Directions — east approach. From a position N of Allirahu (58°10′N, 22°48′E) (11.131) the approach, suitable for vessels with a draught of 3 m, leads W on the alignment (259¼°) of Abruka Leading Lights: Front light (round metal tower with planking, red upper, white lower part; 21 m in height) (58°09′⋅0N, 22°32′⋅1E). Rear light. Abruka Lighthouse (11.134) (670 m from front light). Thence the track leads NNW on the alignment (321½°) of Roomassaare Leading Lights: Front light (black rectangle, white stripe, on metal framework pyramid, 12 m in height) (58°12′⋅8N, 22°30′⋅4E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 30 m in height) (721 m from front light). This route passes several shallow detached shoal patches, rocks and obstructions, some of which are marked by buoys (cardinal). 11.142 Directions — south approach. An alternative approach to the Roomassaare leading line (321½°), may be made from the vicinity of a light-buoy (safe water), moored on the leading line about 7¾ miles from the front light, passing (with positions from Abruka Light): SW of a 3⋅2 m patch (4½ miles SE), marked by a buoy (isolated danger), thence: NE of a 2⋅7 m patch (4 miles SE), marked by buoys (cardinal) on the W and E sides, thence: NE of a 4⋅6 m patch (3¼ miles ESE), thence: SW of a dangerous rock (3 miles E), thence: NE of two dangerous rocks (2¼ miles E), which are close SW of a buoy (safe water) marking the change in direction between the Abruka and Roomassaare leading lines. Thence the directions for the E approach to Roomassaare should be followed. Berths. There are three quays at Roomassaare Harbour. No 1. Length 125 m, depth 5⋅4 m. No 2. Length 100 m, depth 5⋅4 m. No 3. Length 120 m, depth 3⋅4 m. Communication is maintained by sea with Tallinn and Pärnu.
Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 13 m in height) (420 m from the front light).
Kuressaare Harbour 1
Minor bays and anchorages Charts 2215, 2223 (see 1.34)
Sepamaa laht 1
1
2
11.146 Kasti laht (58°15′N, 22°38′E), lies 3 miles E of Sepamaa laht and is similar to it. Väike Tulpe saar (58°12′N, 22°36′E), lying off the W side of the entrance, is a low barren island, surrounded by foul ground. A rocky ridge, with depths of less than 1⋅8 m over it, extends about 2½ miles S.
Sutu laht 1
2
11.147 General information. Sutu laht (58°15′N, 22°45′E) is bounded on its SW side by Vätta poolsaar (58°14′N, 22°43′E) which reaches a height of about 12 m. There are some woods and several villages. Vätta nina is the S extremity of the peninsula. Sääretukk (58°16′N, 22°50′E), is a low rocky point at the E entrance to Sutu laht, on which stands Sääretukk Lighthouse (white square concrete tower, 15 m in height). The shores of the bay are fairly steep and sandy. Anchorage, which is sheltered, except in E and SE winds, may be obtained in Sutu laht, in depths of 5⋅5 to 11 m, sand, from 1½ to 2 miles from the head of the bay.
Kõiguste laht
Nasva 11.143 General information. Nasva (58°13′N, 22°23′E) is a small harbour about 3½ miles W of Roomaasaare. Directions. From the vicinity of a buoy (safe water) (58°11′⋅5N, 22°23′⋅2E), the alignment (013¼°) of the following lights leads through a channel, dredged to a depth of 4 m, to the head of the pier: Nasva Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, on red framework tower, 9 m in height) (58°13′⋅3N, 22°24′⋅0E).
11.145 Sepamaa laht (58°14′N, 22°32′E), suitable for small craft only, lies on the E side of Roomassaare. It is partially obstructed by shoals and the coast is marshy in places. Local knowledge is required.
Kasti laht
1
1
11.144 General information. Kuressaare Harbour (58°14′⋅7N, 22°28′⋅6E) lies at the NE head of Suur Katel. The harbour and its approach between Loodenina and Roomassaare, are partially obstructed by islets, rocks and sandbanks. On the W side is a narrow boat channel with a least depth of 1⋅5 m. At the head of the bay is a stone dam, about 2 cables in length, from which two piers, each about ½ cable in length, extend SE. Alongside the outer pier there is a depth of 1⋅8 m but there is little water at the inner pier. There is a small fishing boat harbour and repairs to such vessels can be effected. Fresh water is available.
2
410
11.148 General information. Kõiguste laht (58°20′N, 23°00′E), has a fishing pier with depths of 3⋅5 to 4 m alongside. There are some landing piers on the S side of an above-water spit about 1 mile from the head of the bay. The W shore is low-lying with reeds in places. The E shore of the bay is rocky and covered with scrub. Directions. The alignment (335½°) of the following beacons leads from SSE to Kõiguste pier: Front beacon (quadrangular pyramid framework tower, 10 m in height) (58°22′⋅2N, 22°58′⋅3E). Rear beacon (similar structure, 15 m in height) (1⋅1 mile from front beacon). Buoys (cardinal) mark dangers along the track.
Home
Contents
Index NOTES
411
Home
Contents
Index
Chapter 12 - Saaremaa, west and north coasts and Hiiumaa, including Väinameri 30´ 20´
40´
50´
21°
10´
20´
30´
40´
50´
22°
10´
20´
30´
40´
50´
23°
10´
20´
30´
40´
50´ 20´
Osmussaar
69
12. Through routes
10´
10´
Coastal/Other routes
69
12.
Tahkuna nina
61
12.
59°
59°
Vormsi
K:pu Poolsaar
2241
Hiiumaa Väinameri
412
50´
.2 12
50´
7 9 12.8
12.51 Sõru
1
12. 7
2.2 40´
2215
12.42
40´ Muhu
27 12.
Virtsu 12.115 Saaremaa
30´
30´
2223
Harilaiu Poolsaar
2222
0205
20´ 30´
20´ 40´
50´
21°
10´
20´
30´
40´
Longitude 22° East from Greenwich 30´
40´
50´
23°
10´
20´
30´
40´
50´
Home
Contents
Index
CHAPTER 12 SAAREMAA, WEST AND NORTH COASTS AND HIIUMAA, INCLUDING VÄINAMERI GENERAL INFORMATION Charts 2222, 2223, 2241
Navigational aids
Scope of the chapter 1
12.1 The area covered by this chapter comprises the coastal waters to the W and N of Saaremaa, the coast of Hiiumaa, and the waters of Väinameri which are bounded on the NW by Hiiumaa, on the SW by the N coast of Saaremaa and on the E by the mainland coast of Estonia. It is arranged as follows: West coasts of Saaremaa and Hiiumaa and the western approaches to Väinameri (12.5). North-west coast of Hiiumaa and Väinameri and approaches (12.58).
1
Rescue 1
2
Pollution of the sea 1
12.3 See caution at 1.43 concerning the reliability of navigational aids.
12.2 Due to the non-tidal nature of these waters, the Estonian authorities are rigorous in the application of pollution regulations. See 1.72.
12.4 The MRCC for the area covered by this chapter is located at Tallinn (59°27′N, 24°46′E) with MRSC located at Kuressaare (58°15′N, 22°29′E) and Kärdla (59°00′N, 22°45′E). For details see Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 5. Rescue craft are stationed at the following Estonian Coastguard Stations: Undva (58°31′N, 21°55′E) (12.32). Sõru (58°42′N, 22°31′E) (12.51). Kõpu (58°55′N, 22°15′E) (12.13). Tahkuna (59°06′N, 22°35′E) (12.65). Dirhami (59°13′N, 23°30′E) (12.72). Haapsalu (58°57′N, 23°30′E) (12.111).
WEST COAST OF SAAREMAA AND HIIUMAA, AND THE WESTERN APPROACHES TO VÄINAMERI SÕRVE POOLSAAR TO KÕPU POOLSAAR
GENERAL INFORMATION
General information
Charts 2222, 2223 (see 1.34)
1
Topography
Charts 2222, 2223 (see 1.34)
12.5 Saaremaa (58°25′N, 22°25′E) is composed chiefly of limestone and is thickly wooded. Generally flat and low, the island rises a little in the middle and on the N side. The coasts, which are heavily indented, are mainly low. Only in the N and on the E side of Tagamõisa poolsaar (12.10) are there high and rocky slopes. The highest point of the island is in the NW where a wooded hill rises above the surrounding plain. The island has numerous lakes and small rivers. Of the latter only Nasva (11.143) is navigable by small craft, whereas the others are small and shallow. Many dry completely in summer and some are merely the outlets of lakes and marshes.
Route 1
Topography 1
Currents 1
2
12.6 The current setting out of Gulf of Rga joins that flowing N along the W coast of Saaremaa. The current flowing W through Soela väin (58°40′N, 22°30′E) (12.42) divides, one branch flowing W along the N coast of Saaremaa and the other, NW along the SW coast of Hiiumaa; both branches join the main current running N from the SE part of Baltic Sea, the S branch near Kiipsaare nukk (58°30′N, 21°50′E) (12.14) and the N branch off the W end of Kõpu poolsaar (57°55′N, 22°15′E) (12.29). These currents are influenced by the direction and strength of the wind. In stormy weather, a strong current may be experienced in the vicinity of Kiipsaare nukk. Vessels navigating in this area are advised to keep in depths of more than 20 m.
12.7 From the vicinity of No 1 Light-buoy (57°51′⋅1N, 21°37′⋅2E) (11.17), moored 13 miles SW of Sõrve poolsaar, the track leads NNW for about 30 miles until clear of the shoals off Vilsandi, thence NNE for about 45 miles to a position NW of Põhja Ristnanina (58°56′⋅5N, 22°03′⋅0E), at the extremity of Kõpu poolsaar.
1
2
413
12.8 Sõrve säär to Mõldri. Loode neem is about 4½ miles NNW of the S end of Sõrve poolsaar, the W side of which is low and wooded. From Jämaja, about 3 miles NE of Loode neem, to the W entrance of Lou laht, 5 miles farther NNE, the coast is flat and rocky with a few hillocks covered by fir trees. 12.9 Mõldri to Elda poolsaar. Between Mõldri (58°10′N, 22°09′E) and Elda poolsaar (Meelaiuneem), about 13 miles NW, there are many small bays and inlets but there are no anchorages of any significance. The coast extending about 4 miles NW of Mõldri laht is low and consists of gravel with clay, sand and rock in places. About 4½ miles inland, a high sandy tree- covered ridge can be seen extending in a N-S direction. The coast between Roopa laht (58°16′N, 21°52′E) and Elda poolsaar, about 3 miles NNW, consists of gravel, sand and rock; behind it the land rises and is sparsely wooded; near Elda poolsaar it rises to a ridge about 13 m high.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
1
2
3
4
1
12.10 Elda poolsaar to Harilaiu poolsaar. Loonalaid (58°20′N, 21°47′E), a low inhabited island covered with grass and bushes and bordered by gravel, sand and rock, lies near the outer end of foul ground which extends 3½ miles NW from Elda poolsaar; on this foul ground are several other islets and above-water rocks. Salava and Nootamaa, lie about 5 cables S and 5 cables SW respectively, of Loonalaid. Both islets are low and covered with grass and bushes; foul and rocky ground extends about 1¾ miles SSW and 1 mile W from Salava. Vilsandi (58°23′N, 21°53′E) which is surrounded by reefs, shoals and islets, is in two parts joined by an isthmus; the E part consists of low meadowland; the W part is wooded and on its S side is a village. Vesiloo, an islet 4 m high, lies close off the N side of Vilsandi, 1 mile NE of the lighthouse. Harilaiu poolsaar (58°29′N, 21°52′E) is the low peninsula forming the W extremity of the larger Tagamõisa poolsaar which is connected to it by a narrow isthmus; it is composed of sand and shingle and in its N part is mostly lagoon; its SW part is covered with scrub. From a distance Harilaiu poolsaar appears as an island. The S side of Tagamõisa poolsaar, forming the NE shore of Kihelkonna laht, (12.24) is covered with boulders. Kurevere is a village, 7½ cables inland, about 5½ miles SE of the S extremity of Harilaiu poolsaar; the village stands on the S end of a rocky ridge, about 18 m high, which extends parallel with the coast for about 5½ miles; between the ridge and the coast is a low grassy strip of land with lakes and clumps of trees. Farther SE, towards Kihelkonna (58°22′N, 22°02′E), the NE shore of the bay is well wooded. The coastal bank is rocky; some of these rocks are above-water. 12.11 At Ristna (58°56′N, 22°03′E), the W end of Kõpu poolsaar which is fringed with reefs extending 7½ cables offshore, the coast is low and sandy with numerous boulders; the sandhills and trees commence 2½ cables inland.
2
3
4
5
6
Climatic table 1
12.12 For Ristna (58°56′N, 22°03′E), see 1.284 and 1.299.
7
Principal marks 1
12.13 Landmarks: Kõpu Lighthouse (white square stone tower, 36 m in height) (58°55′⋅0N, 22°12′⋅0E). Ristna Lighthouse (red round tower, 30 m in height) (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅3E). Beacon (tower, 25 m in height) (58°29′⋅8N, 21°50′⋅5E), a former lighthouse on Kiipsaare nukk. Major light: Kõpu Light — as above.
Directions
Useful marks 12.15 1
2
(continued from 11.17) 1
WSW of Laimadal (9½ miles S), over which the sea breaks in a fresh wind. Inshore of this shoal lies Põtkemaa madalad (Põtkelmaa Madalikud), a group of shoals. Thence: WSW of Innarahu (6 miles S), an islet surrounded by above and below-water rocks, thence: WSW of Loonapank (6½ miles SW), a rocky patch, thence: WSW of Sarõtsevi madal (Uuskuiv) (10 miles WSW), a rocky patch marked by a light-buoy (W cardinal). Numerous other patches lie closer inshore and near the coastal bank, which is extensive off the W side of Saaremaa. And: Clear, depending on draught, of two shoal patches, (about 15 miles WSW), with depths of 8⋅8 and 9⋅4 m over them, thence: Clear of a wreck with a depth of 11⋅2 m over it (10½ miles WSW), and: WSW of Laidupank (6 miles WSW). A wreck with a depth of 11⋅2 m over it lies on the S edge of Laidupank, about 5 cables SSE of its shoalest part. Thence: WSW and W of Suurkuiv (5 miles W), a dangerous rocky patch, marked by a buoy (W cardinal), and: Clear of, depending on draught, Mustpank (9½ miles W), thence: WNW of Harilaiu peenar (9 miles N), the coastal bank which lies N and W of Kiipsaare nukk, the NW point of Harilaiu poolsaar (12.10) on which stands a beacon (12.13). Tinarahu, a group of rocks below and above water, and Laevarahu, partly above water, lie on the coastal bank respectively within 1¾ miles NW and 1¼ miles WSW of Kiipsaare nukk. A stranded wreck and a wreck with a depth of 4 m over it lie 1 mile WSW and 2¼ miles W respectively, of Kiipsaare nukk. Thence: WNW of Kolga kuiv (58°54′N, 21°51′E), a shoal, and: WNW of Neupokojevi madal, about 1¼Ămiles N of Kolga kuiv. Depths of 10 m or less lie between these shoals and Lõuna Ristnanina, the S point of the W end of Kõpu poolsaar. Thence: NW of Põhja Ristnanina (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅0E), the NW-most point of Kõpu poolsaar. There are several other named and unnamed shoal patches within 6 miles S, W and N of Ristna, including Puumetsa madal, lying 1¾ miles NNE.
12.14 From the vicinity of No 1 Light-buoy (57°51′⋅0N, 21°37′⋅2E) (11.17) the track leads NNW for about 30 miles until clear of the shoals off Elda poolsaar (58°18′N, 21°50′E), thence NNE for about 45 miles to a position NW of Kõpu poolsaar (58°55′N, 22°15′E), passing (with positions from Vilsandi Light (58°23′⋅0N, 21°48′⋅8)):
414
Loode Lighthouse (white square concrete tower, red top, 15 m in height) (57°58′⋅4N, 21°59′⋅1E). Jämaja Church (58°00′⋅8N, 22°03′⋅2E) has a tall white tower with a pointed roof which is a good landmark when the sun is in the W. Anseküla Lighthouse (58°05′⋅9N, 22°13′⋅9E) (11.136). Lõu Lighthouse (white round tower, 9 m in height) (58°06′⋅3N, 22°10′⋅8E). Karala Lighthouse (red framework tower, 28 m in height) (58°16′⋅3N, 21°53′⋅8E). Vilsandi Lighthouse (white round stone tower, black lantern, 37 m in height) (58°23′⋅0N, 21°48′⋅8E). (Directions for coastal route continue at 12.65. Directions for the western approaches to Väinameri are given at 12.32 and 12.34)
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
Anchorages
Naistekivimaa, an islet close inshore, lies about 2½ miles WNW of Mõndelaid; dangerous rocks extend about 1 mile SE of the islet.
Kaunispe 1
2
12.16 Local knowledge is required. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in depths of 4 to 6 m, good holding ground, off Kaunispe, (58°02′⋅5N, 22°03′⋅5E); Jämaja Church (12.15) which stands 1¾ miles SSW makes a good mark. There are many above and below-water reefs extending up to 2 miles offshore S of Jämaja; N of Jämaja, a rocky reef, partly above water, extends about 7½ cables to 1½ miles from the coast. There is a small yacht harbour at Kaunispe.
Roopa laht 1
2
Lõu laht 1
2
3
12.17 Description. Lõu laht (58°05′N, 22°09′E) is a large bay on the NW side of Sõrve poolsaar; the shores are low and predominantly sandy; Karjalaid, the W entrance point shows up well from seaward. Except with strong NW winds it affords well-sheltered anchorage to small vessels in depths of about 6 to 7 m, mud and sand. Local knowledge is required. Directions. The alignment (103°) of Lõu Directional Light (58°06′⋅3N, 22°10′⋅8E) (12.15) in the white sector (102°–106°) of that light, with Anseküla Light (58°06′⋅0N, 22°14′⋅0E) (11.136), leads through a channel between the reefs from 2 to 3 cables wide and with a least depth of about 4 m, passing (with positions from Lõu Light): N of a reef (2 miles WSW), which extends about 7½ cables N from Oosla maa, a low grassy islet, and: S of a shoal depth of 2⋅9 m which lies at the extremity of shoal ground extending about 1¾ miles S from the islet of Kriimi (2¼ miles NW); a stranded wreck lies on the SW side of this shoal ground.
Atla laht 1
2
12.18 Anchorage for small vessels can be obtained in Ariste laht (58°09′N, 22°12′E), the coast of which is low and wooded. The bay is largely obstructed by rocks, reefs and shoals. Local knowledge is required. The directions for entering Ariste laht are the same as given for entering Lõu laht.
1
2
Mõldri laht 12.19 Description. Mõldri laht is the small bay close NW of Ariste laht (12.18); on the W side, reefs, partly above and below water, extend about 1½ miles S from the coast to within about 1¼ miles NW of Kriimi. Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels off Mõldri (58°10′N, 22°09′E), in a depth of about 5⋅5 m, shingle and rock. There is also a landing place for yachts. Local knowledge is required.
2
Pilguse laht 1
12.20 Pilguse laht, entered between Mõndelaid (58°14′N, 22°00′E), and Muhanina, a point about 1¾ miles SE, is shallow and obstructed by islets; foul ground extends about 1½ miles SW and 1 mile S of Mõndelaid; an above-water rock lies 7½ cables SSE of Mõndelaid.
12.23 Kuusnõmme laht (58°20′N, 21°56′E), which is suitable only for boats, is partially obstructed by islets and shoals, as are the approaches, where a chain of islets, rocks and reefs extends NW from the mainland on each side of the entrance to the bay, to the S side of Vilsandi. The village of Kuusnõmme stands among trees on the SE shore. Kuusnõmme poolsaar (58°21′N, 21°58′E) is thinly wooded in the middle and the low ground is interspersed with a number of small lakes. Farther inland the ground rises and forms a ridge covered with trees.
Kihelkonna laht 1
1
12.22 Description. Atla laht (58°19′N, 21°53′E) is a bay, the shores of which consist of gravel and numerous large rocks. At the head of the bay is the village of Atla, behind which is a ridge about 12 m high. The bay has depths of 3⋅1 to 4⋅3 m in the middle and there is a boat pier at the village. Eeriksaare is a low peninsula which separates Atla laht from Kuusnõmme laht (12.23) farther NE: the central part is wooded. Anchorage can be obtained by small craft near the head of Atla laht, in a depth of 4 m, sand, well sheltered from all winds. Local knowledge is required.
Kuusnõmme laht
Ariste laht 1
12.21 Description. Roopa laht, a narrow inlet, is entered about 1¾ miles SE of Seoginina (58°17′N, 21°50′E). The entrance lies between two above-water shingle spits each with rocks at their outer ends; in the middle of the entrance is a 0⋅9 m shoal, the passage W of which has a depth of 1⋅5 m. There is a boat landing place in the bay and small craft may obtain anchorage. Local knowledge is required. The village of Karala stands on high ground about 1 mile E of Roopa laht and is visible from seaward. Karala Light (12.15) stands near the village. At the head of the bay is the village of Austla with a wood to the W of it.
3
415
12.24 Description. Kihelkonna laht (58°23′N, 21°57′E) lies on the SW side of Tagamõisa poolsaar. It is open to NW winds but because it is protected by shoals in the approaches, heavy seas do not reach the anchorage. Ice seldom interferes with navigation but when ice conditions in Väinameri (12.88) prevent communication with the mainland, Kihelkonna laht is the only port in Saaremaa that remains open. Local knowledge is required. Anchorage. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in depths of between 5 and 6 m, mud and sand, about 5 cables S of the head of the pier at Jaagarahu, and also in a depth of 2⋅7 m about 1 mile farther SE, close E of an islet near the head of Kihelkonna laht. Prohibited anchorage. Due to the existence of submarine cables, anchoring and fishing is prohibited within the area, indicated on the chart, between Panganukk (58°23′⋅5N, 21°54′⋅5E), the NE extremity of Vilsandi, and the mainland coast 1½ miles ENE.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
4
1
1
2
Directions. From a position about 3½ miles W of Kiipsaare nukk (58°29′⋅8N, 21°50′⋅6E) (12.13) the alignment (109°) of the following marks leads into the bay: Front mark (white octagonal concrete tower, black stripe, 18 m in height) (58°22′⋅6N, 21°59′⋅9E). Rear mark (Kihelkonna church steeple) (1⋅6 miles from front mark). 12.25 Jaagarahu (58°24′⋅0N, 21°58′⋅5E), 2 miles E of the NE extremity of Vilsandi, has a pier, about 230 m long, with a depth of 4⋅9 m at its head and 3 m alongside the outer 60 m of its length. A channel with the least depth of 4⋅3 m leads to the head of the pier. In W and NW winds there is a choppy sea at the pier. Local knowledge is required. 12.26 Papisaare (58°22′N, 22°00′E) is a small peninsula near the head of Kihelkonna laht. Kiirasaare laht, the small bay SW of Papisaare, is partially obstructed by reefs and rocks; the shores of the bay are low and densely wooded. The greatest depth in the bay is about 3 m with sand bottom where there is an anchorage for small craft. Local knowledge is required. Berth. There is a small pier on the SW side of Papisaare with a depth of 1⋅8 m at the head of the pier, and about 1⋅2 m alongside.
2
APPROACHES TO SOELA VÄIN
1
3
Former mined area 1
1
Route
2
Topography 1
2
1
12.28 South side. The coast on the NW side of Saaremaa is mostly steep and high but there are low-lying areas in places. Uudepanga laht, entered between Kiipsaare nukk (58°29′⋅8N, 21°50′⋅6E) (12.14) and Undva nina, 2½ miles NE, has depths of about 20 m, sand and mud, in the E part to within 5 cables of the shore. The village of Kollinge is situated on the E side of the bay which is wooded. The coast between Panga pank (58°34′⋅3N, 22°17′⋅4E) and Pammana nina, the N point of Saaremaa, about 9½ miles ENE, is low and wooded and is bordered by large above-water rocks on a sandy and rocky beach. 12.29 North side. Kõpu poolsaar (57°55′N, 22°15′E) is a densely wooded peninsula projecting about 12 miles W from the W side of Hiiumaa; a range of hills runs the length of the peninsula and rises to a height of about 68 m at Tornimägi, on which stands Kõpu Lighthouse. About 1¼ miles ENE of Tornimägi is Andresemägi, a well-defined peak, 63 m high. A sandy ridge extends about 2 miles W from Tornimägi.
12.31 Landmarks: Beacon on Kiipsaare nukk (58°29′⋅8N, 21°50′⋅5E) (12.13). Kõpu Lighthouse (58°55′⋅0N, 22°12′⋅0E) (12.13). Ristna Lighthouse (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅3E) (12.13). Major light: Kõpu Light (58°55′⋅0N, 22°12′⋅0E) (12.13).
Directions Approach from south
Chart 2222 (see 1.34) 12.27 Soela väin (58°40′N, 22°30′E) can be approached from S when clear of Harilaiu peenar (12.14), or from N when clear of Neupokojevi madal (12.14). The track leads generally E for about 25 miles to the vicinity of a light-buoy (safe water) (58°41′⋅4N, 22°24′⋅2E), which marks the seaward end of the Soela väin channel.
12.30 The route transits a former mined area, see 1.8.
Principal marks
General information
1
The S coast of Kõpu poolsaar is high in places, the beaches consisting of sand and rock; where it is lower the trees almost reach the waters edge. Between Mardihansu (58°53′N, 22°27′E) and Õngu the shore is low, wooded and bordered with sand and rocks. Thence to Haldi, a village some 2½ miles S, the coast is wooded and fronted by farms. The S part of the W coast of Hiiumaa is so little above water that at first sight it appears as a chain of low islands. Between Haldi nina (58°48′⋅5N, 22°26′⋅2E) (12.41) and Tohvri neem about 6½ miles S, the SW coast is flat and composed of sand and rock with clumps of trees in places.
12.32 From a position WNW of Kiipsaare nukk (58°29′⋅8N, 21°50′⋅6E) (12.14) the route leads ENE to the W entrance to Soela väin, passing (with positions from Panga pank Light (58°34′⋅2N, 22°17′⋅4E)): NNW of Harilaiu peenar (16 miles WSW) (12.14), thence: NNW of Undva nina (12 miles WSW) which is low and sandy. A reef, above water in places, extends 1 mile NW from the point. Thence: NNW of Ninase pank (3 miles WSW), faced with cliffs at Tagaranna, thence: NNW of Panga pank, faced with cliffs rising steeply from the sea to a height of about 24 m, and on which stands a light (white trapezium planking on red framework tower, 30 m in height), thence: NNW of a dangerous wreck (6½ miles NNE), at the W entrance to Soela väin.
Useful marks 12.33 1
Merise nina Lighthouse (white square beacon, 10 m in height) (58°29′⋅8N, 22°08′⋅3E). Mustjala Church (58°28′⋅0N, 22°13′⋅6E), white stone building with dark roof. Sõru Lighthouse (red and white round tower, 16 m in height) (58°42′⋅2N, 22°29′⋅2E). (Directions for Soela väin continue at 12.49)
Approach from north 1
2
416
12.34 From a position W of Põhja Ristanina (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅5E) and clear of, depending on draught, the shoals extending 7½ miles WSW of the point (12.14) the route leads SE, passing (with positions from Kõpu Light (58°55′⋅0N, 22°12′⋅0E)): Clear of a shoal patch with a least depth of 6⋅4 m over it (8 miles SSW), thence: SW of Kuivalõuka kuiv (5 miles SSE), a shoal patch which lies on the outer edge of the coastal bank in
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
the approaches to Mardihansu laht. There are other detached shoal patches farther to seaward which may be seen on the chart. Thence: SW of Klaasirahu (7¼ miles SSE), a shoal patch which lies near the outer edge of the coastal bank, thence: SW of a dangerous wreck (10 miles SSE).
2
Useful marks
Mardihansu laht
12.35 1
Puski Church (58°54′⋅4N, 22°24′⋅5E). Beacon, standing on Haldreka nina (58°47′⋅3N, 22°26′⋅9E). (Directions for Soela väin continue at 12.49)
1
2
Anchorages and harbour Taga laht 1
2
3
Anchorage may be obtained with offshore winds, in depths of between 13 to 20 m, sand, between Laidu and the village of Ninase. Winds from the N or NW send a heavy sea into the bay, during which conditions a vessel should not remain at anchor. Small vessels may obtain anchorage, in a depth of about 3⋅4 m, sand, SE of Laidu where there is shelter from all winds.
12.36 Description. Taga laht is entered between Undva nina (58°31′N, 21°55′E) (12.32) and Ninase pank (12.32), about 9 miles ENE. From Undva nina, the coast rises as it trends E and forms cliffs of limestone, which at Suuriku pank, about 2¾ miles E, are precipitous. Thence, though continuing S at the same level, the land slopes more gently to the shore until, near the middle of the W side of Taga laht, are some white sandy cliffs known as Valge mägi; to the S of these cliffs the coast continues low to the head of the bay. The whole of this coast is wooded and in the NE part of Tagamõisa poolsaar there is a barren ridge which is a good landmark. The E shore of Taga laht is not high but is wooded. A stream flows into the bay from Kooru järv, a lake about 5 cables S of Merise nina (58°30′⋅0N, 22°08′⋅5E), on which stands a light, 3½ miles SW of Ninase pank. The village of Merise is close by the point and there are other villages near the E side of the bay, in the SE corner of which there is a pier. Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of between 15 to 18 m, sand and mud, with good holding ground, about 2½ miles SW of Merise nina, but clear of a dangerous wreck near the W side of the bay, and a marine farm 3 miles SW of Merise nina. The bay is open to the N but with adequate precautions vessels can lie here during strong N winds. Caution. The bay is a former mined area, see 1.8. Small vessels may anchor about 7½ cables offshore, on the E side at the head of the bay, in a depth of 5 m, sand and mud.
12.38 Anchorage may be obtained in depths of 5 to 6 m, well protected by shoals, in the N part of Mardihansu laht (58°52′N, 22°21′E). Local knowledge is required. Dangers. Kaljurahu, a rocky ledge awash in places, lies about 4 miles NW of Haldi nina (58°48′⋅5N, 22°26′⋅2E) (12.41). Another rocky ledge with a rock awash lies 1¼ miles SSW of Kaljurahu. There is also a rocky ridge to the S, with depths of 0⋅9 to 1⋅8 m over it, at the NW end of foul ground which extends 4 miles WNW from Haldi nina.
Ristna 1
12.39 Anchorage may be obtained about 2¼ miles S of Ristna Lighthouse (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅3E) (12.13), about 1 mile offshore, in depths of between 16 and 20 m, protected from NE winds.
Kaleste 1
12.40 Local knowledge is required. Anchorage, suitable for small vessels, may be obtained in a depth of about 5 m, sand, about 5 cables offshore in Kaleste laht (58°54′N, 22°07′E) but it is exposed to winds from W and SW. Landing can be effected close W of Kaleste. There is a boat harbour in a small inlet (58°55′⋅3N, 22°03′⋅7E) at Kalana, at the W entrance to Kaleste laht.
Haldi nina 1
12.41 A pier extends 140 m SSW from the S side of Haldi nina (58°48′⋅5N, 22°26′⋅2E) and there is a small yacht harbour.
SOELA VÄIN AND HIIU VÄIN
Küdema laht 1
12.37 Description. Küdema laht (58°32′N, 22°16′E) is entered between Ninase pank (12.32) and Panga pank (12.32), about 3 miles NE. The shores of Küdema laht are low, wooded and bordered by rocks and sand. In the gaps between the woods villages may be seen. The head of the bay is very low, sandy and rocky. Ninase, a small village, lies about 1½ miles SSE of Ninase pank. Laidu, a flat islet fringed by rocks, lies on the edge of the coastal bank extending from the E side of Küdema laht about 2¾ miles S of Panga pank.
General information Chart 2222, Estonian Charts 513, 515 (see 1.34)
Description 1
417
12.42 Soela väin (58°40′N, 22°30′E) is the W entrance to Hiiu väin. The sound is partially obstructed by numerous rocks, shoals and sandy islets. Navigation through it should not be attempted without local knowledge. Hiiu väin (58°42′N, 22°52′E) extends E from Soela väin to the central part of Väinameri, between Hiiumaa and Muhu.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
2
1
2
3
1
2
Caution. Vessels navigating in Hiiu väin are warned that Kõpu Light (12.13) is visible across the S part of Hiiumaa on several bearings.
however, becomes very strong with N or S winds and with strong SW, W or NW winds the E-going current may attain a rate of 4 kn in the fairway.
Topography
Submarine cable
12.43 North shore. Between Tärkma (58°42′N, 22°36′E), about 1 mile ENE of the S most point of Hiiumaa, and Jausa, 5½ miles NNE, the coast is low with marshes and extensive woods, the latter running down to the waters edge. Jausa laht, between the SW side of Kassari and the coast of Hiiumaa, has depths not exceeding 2⋅7 m and several streams flow into the bay. The entrance to the bay is fronted by numerous shoals. Kassari (58°48′N, 22°50′E) lies on the coastal bank on the NW side of Hiiu väin; the island is low and connected to the SE coast of Hiiumaa by two dams in which there are openings. A church with a spire stands at the N end of Kassari. Between Kassari and Salinõmme (58°50′N, 22°57′E), a peninsula about 2 miles E, the coast is low, sandy and wooded in places. There is a hillock about 13 m high on Salinõmme, and the village of Suuremõisa stands about 3 miles N of its S extremity. Soonlepa laht, which lies between Salinõmme and a point about 2¼ miles E, has depths of less than 3 m; there are several settlements on the shores of the bay and at its head is the mouth of a stream; the W side of the E entrance point is about 15 m high and wooded. 12.44 South shore. Parasmetsa laht (58°36′N, 22°40′E) lies between Pammana nina (12.28), the N-most point of Saaremaa, and Triigi nina, about 4¾ miles SE. Its shores are low and wooded and among the trees there are two villages. Between Pammana nina and a village about 3 miles SSE, there is a wooded ridge about 15 m high, which at the village rises to a wooded hill 22 m high. Between Tinuri nina (58°37′N, 22°48′E) (12.49) and a 15 m high ridge some 4 miles ESE, there are several villages and clumps of trees. The NW side of Muhu is from 20 to 24 m high with steep cliffs. Shoal water with depths of less than 5 m extends about 3½ miles from the NW side of Muhu.
1
Directions (continued from 12.33) 1
2
3
4
5
Limiting conditions 1
12.45 Vessels using Soela väin are limited to 40 m in length and 3 m draught. At the E end of Hiiu väin, the fairway leading to Väinameri, which passes between Viinakari (58°42′⋅5N, 23°04′⋅0E) (12.49) and Seanina (4 miles ESE) (12.49), is suitable for vessels with a draught of 3 m. Local knowledge is required.
6
Pilotage 1
12.46 Pilots board in the vicinity of the fairway light-buoy (safe water) (58°41′⋅4N, 22°24′⋅2E) for ports in Soela väin.
7
Current 1
12.47 In calm weather there is always a weak current running either in or out of Soela väin; the W-going current
12.48 A submarine cable is laid across Soela väin between Pammana nina (58°38′N, 22°34′E) and Emmaste, near the S extremity of Hiiumaa.
8
418
12.49 Emmaste Leading Lights: Front light (white round concrete tower, 11 m in height) (58°41′⋅4N, 22°33′⋅3E). Rear light (red rectangle on square framework tower, 19 m in height) (6 cables from front light). From the vicinity of the light-buoy (safe water) (58°41′⋅4N, 22°24′⋅2E) the alignment (089½°) of these lights leads E for about 3½ miles, passing (with positions from the front light): S of a dangerous underwater rock (4 miles W), which is covered by the red sector (074½°–086½°) of Sõru Light, thence: N of Raudrahu (3½ miles WSW), a group of rocks, both above and below water, lying near the W end of the coastal bank which extends about 4 miles W from the middle of Soela väin, thence: Sõru Leading Lights: Front light (white round tower, red top, 11 m in height) (58°42′⋅0N, 22°29′⋅5E). Rear light, Sõru Light (58°42′⋅2N, 22°29′⋅2E) (487 m from front light). The alignment (310½°), astern, of these lights leads SE for about 3 miles through a narrow fairway, marked by buoys (lateral), passing (with positions from the front light): NE of Suur kuiv (2½ miles SSE), an islet on which stands a tree, thence: NE of Väike kuiv (3 miles SSE), a rocky islet only visible at a distance of about 5 cables, thence: NE of Pihlalaid (3½ miles SSE), a low grassy islet. Thence, the recommended track, shown on the chart, leads 3 miles ESE to a buoy (safe water) (58°38′⋅6N, 22°41′⋅0E), from whence it leads about 19 miles ENE, further marked at intervals by buoys (safe water), to the S part of Väinameri, passing (with positions from Seanina Light (58°41′⋅0N, 23°11′⋅5E)): NNW of Triigi nina (58°36′⋅0N, 22°41′⋅5E) (12.54), thence: NNW of Tinuri nina (58°37′N, 22°48′E) which is about 13 m high and densely wooded, thence: NNW of Pikana nukk (10 miles WSW), on which stands Rannaküla Lighthouse (metal framework tower, white planking on three sides, 16 m in height), thence: NNE of Kõinastu laid (6 miles SW), a low, partially wooded island connected to the NW side of Muhu by a ridge of rock and sand, which dries in places; the NW side of the island is steep and about 3 m high and shows as a reddish strip. A beacon (white planking with black stripe on framework tower) stands at the N point of the island. Thence: SSE of Väinakari (4¼ miles WNW), a shoal patch with a least depth of 0⋅6 m over it, thence:
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
SSE of Viinakari (2 miles N), a shoal patch with a least depth of 1⋅2 m over it, thence: NNE of Seanina (58°41′N, 23°12′E) the N-most point of Muhu, on which stands Seanina Lighthouse (white square framework tower, black top, 16 m in height), thence: SSE of a dangerous wreck (2 miles NE).
2
Useful marks 12.50 Triigi Pier Light (58°35′⋅5N, 22°43′⋅1E) (12.54). Pühalepa Church (58°52′⋅5N, 22°57′⋅2E), with a spire. Ekumägi (58°36′⋅9N, 23°06′⋅1E), a hill, 21 m in height.
1
3
Anchorages, landings and harbours
shores are low and on them are several villages and clumps of trees; the S and W shores are well wooded. Landing. Triigi, about 1 mile SE of Triigi nina, the W entrance point of Triigi laht, has a pier which extends about 120 m E from the shore and has depths of 2⋅7 to 3⋅4 m at its head; the area around the head of the pier has been dredged to 4 m. The channel leading to the pier is marked by the alignment (231°) of leading lights (58°35′⋅5N, 22°43′⋅0E), and has a least depth of 3⋅5 m; two shoals with depths of less than 1⋅8 m over them lie about 70 m NW and 40 m S respectively, of the head of the pier. It dangerous to remain alongside in N winds due to the sea conditions created. There is a small yacht harbour in Triigi laht. Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of about 4⋅6 m, from 2 to 3 cables NE of Triigi Pier Light (white column, 5 m in height). Local knowledge is required.
Sõru 1
2
12.51 Description. Sõru (58°42′N, 22°31′E) is a village situated on the N side of Soela väin, about 1½ miles ESE of Tohvri neem, the SW point of Hiiumaa. Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of about 7⋅3 m, clay and mud, about 7 cables SE of the jetty E of Sõru. This anchorage is sheltered from the W by an extensive shallow ridge and from the E by numerous shoals, but the current sometimes runs with such strength as to lay vessels broadside to the wind. Anchorage may also be obtained from 2 to 3 cables SE of the jetty, in depths of 4 to 5 m, clay. Landing. A stone jetty, 180 m in length, extends S from the coast about 1 mile ESE of Sõru; there are depths of 1⋅7 to 2 m at its head. The channel through Soela väin passes about 2 cables SW of the head of the jetty. There is a small yacht harbour at Sõru which is protected by E and W breakwaters; at the head of each stands a light-beacon. Local knowledge is required.
Taaliku sadam 1
Orjaku 1
Pihlalaid 1
12.52 Anchorgae. At Pihlalaid (58°39′N, 22°33′E) (12.49), there is a sheltered anchorage for small craft in the small bay on the S side of the islet, in a depth of about 5⋅8 m, but in the approach from the W there is a depth of only 1⋅8 m. Local knowledge is required.
2
3
Soela 1
12.53 Anchorage, sheltered from W winds, may be obtained about 5 cables offshore, over a mud bottom, abreast the village of Soela (58°37′N, 22°35′E), which lies about 1½ miles SSE of Pammana nina on the S side of Soela väin. There is a yacht landing place at Soela.
Triigi laht 1
12.55 Description. At Taaliku sadam (58°36′N, 22°59′E), 5 miles NW of Orissaare, are the remains of a stone pier extending 1¼ cables from the coast. The village nearby stands on a bank with steep reddish cliffs about 13 m high covered with bushes. Anchorage may be obtained in a depth of 5 m, mud, about 2 cables N of the head of the ruined pier. There is a yacht landing place at Taaliku.
4
5
12.54 Description. Triigi laht (58°36′N, 22°45′E), the bay SE of Triigi nina, has depths of about 4⋅6 m in the middle; its
419
12.56 General information. Orjaku (58°47′N, 22°47′E), on the W side of Kassari, is a small harbour protected on its S side by a mole extending 2 cables W from the coast; off the SW side of the mole is a detached breakwater. There are depths of 3 to 4 m at the head of the mole. On the NE side of the harbour are two jetties, the S of which is about 55 m in length and has depths at its head and in the channel leading to it of 3 m. The coastal bank, with depths of less than 6 m, extends up to 3½ miles off the SE side of Hiiumaa. Foul ground containing numerous dangerous rocks, as shown on the chart, extends from W, through S to E, around Sääretirp, the S extremity of Kassari. Directions. Orjaku Leading Lights: Front light (white round tower, black stripe, 10 m in height) (58°47′⋅4N, 22°46′⋅3E). Rear light (similar structure and mark, 16 m in height) (540 m from front light). From a position on the recommended track, shown on the chart, 2 miles NW of Tinuri nina (58°37′N, 22°48′E) (12.49), the approach leads N for 4 miles to a position close E of a light-buoy (E cardinal), marking a dangerous wreck (58°42′⋅7N, 22°45′⋅6E), and on the alignment (003¾°) of these lights which leads a further 4 miles through a buoyed fairway to the entrance. Entry Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe on green column, 3 m in height) (58°47′⋅3N, 22°46′⋅1E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure) (460 m from front light).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
The alignment (342½°) of these lights leads past the W breakwater, from where a light is displayed, to the harbour. The alignment (059°) of a further set of leading lights leads to the berths. There is a small yacht harbour at Orjaku.
3
Orissaare 1
2
12.57 General information. Orissaare (58°33′N, 23°05′E) lies in Väike väin (11.117), NW of the embankment and on the NE coast of Saaremaa which is high and wooded. The SW coast of Muhu is high and rocky, rising to a height of about 24 m and covered with bushes. The harbour is protected on the NW side by an islet from which a pier extends in an E direction. The pier is partly in ruins but small vessels can secure on either side
4
within 70 m of its head, where there are depths of 2⋅0 to 2⋅7 m alongside. Directions. Orissaare Leading Lights: Front light (white triangle point up, black stripe on square framework tower, 7 m in height) (58°33′⋅4N, 23°06′⋅7E). Rear light (white triangle point down,similar structure, 11 m in height) (3 cables from front light). The alignment (130½°) of these lights leads through a channel, with a least depth of 2⋅6 m, from Hiiu väin into the harbour. Anchorage may be obtained, with good holding ground, in a depth of 2⋅7 m, mud, about 5 cables N of the pier at Orissaare. Note. A submarine cable is laid between Muhu and the harbour at Orissaare.
NORTH-WEST COAST OF HIIUMAA AND VÄINAMERI AND APPROACHES GENERAL INFORMATION Chart 2241
Topography 1
12.58 Hiiumaa (58°55′N, 22°30′E), a large island on the W side of Väinameri, is flat and marshy in the interior but the land rises gradually towards the N. The NW coast is low, and less wooded than the NE coast, the wooded hills of which attain an elevation of 25 m. For a description of Kõpu poolsaar see 12.29.
5
NORTH-WEST COAST OF HIIUMAA General information
Former mined area 1
12.59 Part of the waters described in this section are part of a former mined area, see 1.8.
Chart 2241 (see 1.34)
Route 1
Natural conditions 1
2
3
4
12.60 Magnetic anomalies. There are a number of areas, as shown on the chart, within which magnetic anomalies occur. Current. In that part of Gulf of Finland which forms the N approaches to Väinameri, the current runs WNW from Osmussaar (59°18′N, 23°22′E), (Baltic Pilot Volume III), at a rate of ¼ kn in calm weather, increasing to 1 kn with N winds. It divides into two S-going streams. The main W branch sets SSE through Harikurk (58°59′N, 23°07′E) (12.69) and with a N wind may attain a rate of 1½ kn. On entering the central part of the sound, the rate decreases though maintaining its direction. The E branch, S-going through Voosikurk (59°01′N, 23°24′E) (12.69), is scarcely perceptible in calm weather, though with N winds or after a strong W wind, it may attain a rate in excess of 1 kn; with a SSW wind the stream through Voosikurk sets N attaining rates up to 3 kn. In the S part of Väinameri, most of the S-going current branches W through Hiiu väin (58°48′N, 22°50′E) (12.42), in the direction of Soela väin, whilst a weaker part runs S towards Viire kurk (58°34′N, 23°28′E) (12.88), meeting the N flow from Gulf of Rga which, during S and SW winds, attains a rate of 1½ kn in the narrows; the S-going current is seldom completely obliterated by the N-going. The beginning of these currents is usually appreciable some hours before the change in direction of the wind; the N-going before SW and S winds, and the S-going current before NW, N, and in particular, before NE winds; a
change in the direction of the currents thus indicates the direction from which strong winds may be expected; when these winds cease or become weak the current usually ceases or changes to the opposite direction. Fog occurs frequently near the NW coast of Hiiumaa. In April, the month when it is most frequent, fog with visibility less than 1 mile, is reported in 35% of the observations from ships. See 1.278.
12.61 Inshore route. From a position NW of Põhja Ristnanina (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅0E) (12.14), clear of Neupokojevi madal (12.14), the track leads ENE for about 20 miles to a position NNW of Tahkuna nina (59°06′N, 22°35′E) (12.65). Traffic Separation Scheme. Directions for the TSS off Kõpu poolsaar (57°55′N, 22°15′E) are given at 2.21 and 2.22.
Topography 1
12.62 The NW coast of Hiiumaa between Palli nina (58°57′N, 22°19′E), 8 miles E of Ristna, and Tahkuna nina, 12 miles NE, is rugged in appearance and is fringed by rocky shoals which are extensive in places. Between Kootsaare nina and the peninsula of Tahkuna poolsaar, which is low and wooded, the coastal bank is foul and rocky.
Submarine cables 1
12.63 Two submarine cables land 8 cables S of Tahkuna nina Lighthouse (59°05′⋅5N, 22°35′⋅2E).
Principal marks 1
420
12.64 Landmarks: Ristna Lighthouse (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅3E) (12.13). Kõpu Lighthouse (58°55′⋅0N, 22°12′⋅0E) (12.13). Reigi Church (58°59′N, 22°30′E), standing on a high ridge in the SE corner of Reigi laht (12.67). Tahkuna nina Lighthouse (white round tower, 43 m in height) (59°05′⋅5N, 22°35′⋅2E). Major light: Kõpu Light (58°55′⋅0N, 22°12′⋅0E) (12.13).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
Directions (continued from 12.15) 1
2
3
4
12.65 From a position NW of Põhja Ristnanina, clear of Neupokojevi madal (12.14) and the obstruction which lies 1 mile N of the point, the track leads ENE to a position NNW of Tahkuna nina, passing (with positions from Tahkuna Light (59°05′⋅5N, 22°35′⋅2E)): NNW of Hiiumadal (10 miles WSW), an extensive offshore shoal. The shoal has several rocky pinnacles and the area is marked on its N, E and W sides respectively, by buoys (cardinal). With gales from seaward the sea on the shoal breaks and in calm weather the white stony bottom can be seen from some distance. Hiiumadal is covered by the red sector of Ristna Light (58°56′⋅4N, 22°03′⋅3E). Thence: SSE of Vinkovi madal (10 miles NW). Glotovi madal, marked on its N side by a light-buoy (N cardinal), lies 1¾ miles farther NNW. These are the outermost shoals off the NW coast of Hiiumaa. Thence: NNW of Tahkuna nina, the N extremity of Hiiumaa, which is low and covered with dense pine woods. The coast in the vicinity is sandy with large above-water rocks. A light (12.64) is displayed from the point. (Directions continue for the route across the approaches to Väinameri at 12.78. Directions for the N approaches to Väinameri are given at 12.79 and 12.81)
2
OUTER APPROACHES TO VÄINAMERI General information Chart 2241 Estonian Charts 513, 509 (see 1.34)
Routes 1
2
1
Luidja laht 1
2
1
2
Reigi laht 1
2
1
12.67 Description. Reigi laht is entered between Ninaots (59°00′N, 22°28′E) and Kootsaare nina, 2 miles NNE; it is partially obstructed by shoals. The village of Kõrgessaare stands among trees on a high hill on the SW side of the bay. Anchorage may be obtained by small craft, with a draught of not more than 1⋅7 m, in a depth of about 3⋅7 m, sand and stones; though open to NW winds, the holding ground is good. Local knowledge is required. 12.68 Kõrgessaare Pier, about 9 cables E of Ninaots, has a depth of 2⋅1 m at its head. Directions. The alignment (148¼°) of Kõrgessaare Leading Lights leads from seaward to the pier: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, 8 m in height) (58°59′⋅5N, 22°28′⋅1E).
12.69 Offshore route. From a position NNW of Tahkuna nina (59°06′N, 22°35′E) the route leads ENE for about 27 miles across the approaches to Väinameri to a position NNW of Osmussaar. Harikurk (58°59′N, 23°07′E) is the main channel into Väinameri from N, passing between Vormsi (59°00′N, 23°15′E) (12.71) and Harilaid (12.79). Voosikurk (59°01′N, 23°24′E), which should not be approached without local knowledge, is the narrow fairway leading through the channel between Seasaar, an islet covered with bushes about 7½ cables off the E side of Vormsi, and the mainland peninsula of Noarootsi (12.72). The shores on both sides are low, the E side being more wooded than the W side; the fairway leads to Haapsalu (12.111) and to the main channel through Väinameri S of Vormsi.
Topography
Anchorage and landings 12.66 Description. The shores of Luidja laht (58°57′N, 22°22′E) are low, sandy and wooded; the villages of Luidja and Paope lie on the S and SE sides respectively, of the bay. Külalaid, 3 miles NE of Palli nina (12.62), is a flat islet surrounded by a reef above-water in parts, which extends towards Luidja laht and to the shore SE. Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 5 m, clay and sand, near the head of the bay, but it is open to NW winds which send in heavy seas at times.
Rear light (similar daymark, 13 m in height) (220 m from front light). Caution. Close NW of the head of the pier are some submerged obstructions. Fresh water can be obtained at the pier.
3
1
2
421
12.70 West side. The NE coast of Hiiumaa is low and mostly wooded but at a short distance inland there are some slight ridges in places. Between Tahkuna nina (59°06′N, 22°35′E) and Kärdla, about 7 miles SE, the coast is low and densely wooded. 12.71 Vormsi (59°00′N, 23°15′E), an island which lies in the N part of Väinameri, is for the greater part wooded and in the middle it attains an elevation of about 12 m; in places on the N side the woods approach the waters edge. Kärrsläti nina, which is low, and Saksby nina, 1¾ miles WSW, are respectively, the N and NW points of Vormsi. Austurgrunne, about 1 mile E of Kärrsläti nina, is a narrow rocky ridge, mostly above water, extending 1¼ miles N from a position close inshore. The settlement of Förby (59°00′N, 23°10′E) is about 2 miles SSE of Saksby nina, and Suuremõisa is about 1½ miles ESE of Förby. The peninsula which forms the SW end of Vormsi is called Mõisaholm; the W and S coasts are low. Rumpo nina (58°57′N, 23°19′E) is the S point of Vormsi; Hullo laht lies about 2 miles NW of Rumpo nina. Pasilaid is a low grassy islet, surrounded by shoal water about 1 mile SW of Rumpo nina. 12.72 East side. Between Dirhami neem (59°13′N, 23°30′E), a steep, sandy, wooded point, and the N end of Noarootsi, about 7 miles S, the mainland coast is low and in places wooded. The highest point is about 2 miles S of Dirhami neem where it attains an elevation of about 18 m. Several villages stand on the elevated ground. On the shallow coastal bank there are several rocks and shoals with depths of less than 1⋅8 m over them. Noarootsi (59°01′N, 23°30′E) is joined to the mainland at its NE end by a low isthmus which is at times flooded by the sea. The N coast of the peninsula is low, mostly wooded and marshy in places.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
N of Tsernovi madal (22 miles ENE), thence: NNW of Osmussaar (59°18′N, 23°22′E). (Directions continue in Baltic Pilot Volume III)
Telise nina, the NW extremity of Noarootsi is similarly low and wooded. The whole of the N and W coasts of Noarootsi, as far as Ramsi, the W point about 3 miles SSW of Telisna nina, is bordered by extensive foul ground with rocks both above and below water.
Harikurk and approaches
Water level 1
12.73 Water level frequently falls 0⋅5 m below mean level in summer during continuous E winds.
1
Submarine cable 1
12.74 A submarine power cable crosses Voosikurk from Noarootsi (12.72), via Seasaar (59°01′N, 23°23′E), to Vormsi (12.71).
2
Pilotage 1
12.75 Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels in Väinameri. For vessels approaching from N, the pilot boards off Lehtma (59°08′N, 22°56′E), as shown on the chart. For vessels approaching from S, the pilot boards S of Virtsu (58°31′N, 23°30′E), as shown on the chart. See Admiralty List of Radio Signals Volume 6 (2) for details.
3
Natural conditions 1
12.76 Current. A considerable current, sometimes attaining a rate of 4 kn may flow through Voosikurk. It is dependent on wind changes and on the level of the sea in Gulf of Finland compared to the levels in Väinameri and Gulf of Rga. Haze. In the morning the coast of Hiiumaa is frequently obscured by haze, especially with N winds.
4
5
Landmarks 12.77 1
Tahkuna nina Lighthouse (59°05′⋅5N, 22°35′⋅2E) (12.64). Osmussaar Light (59°18′N, 23°22′E) (Baltic Pilot Volume III).
6
Directions (continued from 12.65)
Offshore route 1
2
12.78 From a position NNW of Tahkuna nina (59°06′N, 22°35′E) the track leads ENE, passing (with positions from Tahkuna nina Light): Clear of a shoal with a depth of 13⋅2 m over it (10 miles NNE), thence: N of Apollo madal (11 miles NNE), which consists of two rocky heads with a least depth of 6 m over them. They lie on the S side of an extensive shoal area with depths of less than 20 m over it. A light-buoy (N cardinal) is moored about 3 cables N of the W and deeper head. Thence:
7
8
422
12.79 From a position NNW of Tahkuna nina (59°06′N, 22°35′E), the track leads ESE to the vicinity of the pilot boarding position (59°08′⋅0N, 22°56′⋅5E), as shown on the chart, passing (with positions from Tahkuna nina Light): NNE of a dangerous wreck (6 miles NE), thence: SSW of Apollo madal (11 miles NE) (12.78), thence: NNE of an 8⋅2 m shoal (8½ miles ENE), marked by a buoy (N cardinal), thence: Vormsi N Leading Lights: Rear light (white square framework tower, black top, 35 m in height) (59°01′⋅2N, 23°07′⋅7E). Common Front and Rear (white tower, 24 m in height) (59°01′⋅7N, 23°07′⋅1E). The alignment (140°) of these leading lights leads SE for about 4¾ miles, passing (with positions from Vormsi Common Front and Rear Light (59°01′⋅7N, 23°07′⋅1E)): SW of Laine madal, a detached shoal, marked by a buoy (isolated danger) (8¼ miles NW). A light-buoy (W cardinal) is moored 1¼ miles W of Laine madal. It marks the N limit of the E side of the entrance to Harikurk. Thence: SW of a 4⋅4 m shoal patch (7¼ miles NW), marked by buoys (E and W cardinal). Several wrecks, as shown on the chart, lie close to the fairway in this vicinity. And: NE of Plagurahu (7 miles NW), the NE limit of a rocky shoal area on the W side of the entrance to Harikurk, marked by a light-buoy (E cardinal), thence: SW of Nordväina madal (6 miles N), a rocky shoal area at the NW limit of the coastal bank, marked by a buoy (N cardinal). Thence, the recommended track, 156°, shown on the national chart, leads SE for about 5¾ miles, passing (with positions from Vormsi Common Front and Rear Light (59°01′⋅7N, 23°07′⋅1E)): SW of Frisgrunne (2¼ miles N), the W side of the coastal bank N of Vormsi. It is marked by a buoy (W cardinal). Thence: SW of a wreck with a depth of 9⋅3 m over it (1 mile SW), thence: NE of Kadakalaid (4½ miles SW), consisting of two islets covered with bushes and surrounded by foul ground. The E, and larger of the islets, is about 8 m high. Thence: Vormsi S Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, 16 m in height) (59°01′⋅5N, 23°07′⋅1E). Common Front and Rear Light (59°01′⋅7N, 23°07′⋅1E). The alignment (003°), astern, of these lights leads S for about 2½ miles, passing (with positions from Harilaid Light (58°58′⋅1N, 23°05′⋅1E)): E of Harilaid (58°58′N, 23°05′E), a treeless islet about 3 m high, lying about 2 miles off the SW side of Vormsi. Harilaid Leading Lights (12.103) stand on the islet. Thence: W of Soolarahu, the S of two rocky shoals, each with a least depth of 0⋅6 m over them, lying near the S
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
edge of the coastal bank which is marked on its W side by a light-buoy (port hand) (2 miles SE).
channel is marked by buoys (lateral) and the second by buoys (safe water) and leads to the point where the recommended track divides, one branch leading to Haapsalu and the other to Rohuküla. (Directions for Haapsalu continue at 12.112, and for Rohuküla at 12.113.)
Useful marks 12.80 1
Paluküla Church (58°59′N, 22°48′E). The church is conspicuous and stands on a wooded hill about 1½ miles ESE of Kardla. Radio mast at Kardla (59°00′N, 22°46′E). (Directions for Väinameri continue at 12.103)
Anchorages and harbours Lehtma 1
Voosikurk and approaches 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12.81 Norrby Leading Lights: Front light (white round tower with gallery, 22 m in height) (59°01′⋅2N, 23°21′⋅1E). Rear light (red round tower, white base, 32 m in height) (5 cables from front light). From the vicinity of 59°14′⋅0N, 23°26′⋅5E, S of Osmussaar (Baltic Pilot Volume III), the alignment (192½°), of these lights leads SSW along the recommended track, passing (with positions from Norrby Front Light): Clear of a shoal with a depth of 6⋅2 m over it (10 miles NNE), thence: WNW of Hülgerahu (7 miles NE), an above-water rock. It lies on the coastal reef which extends 3½ miles NW from the shore and which is marked at its extremity by a buoy (W cardinal), thence: ESE of Savinovi madal (5¼ miles NNE), marked by a buoy (E cardinal) and Andrejevi madal, 7½ cables to the W, both lying near the outer edge of the coastal bank N of Voosikurk. There are several other shoals in the vicinity. And: WNW of Hanekivi madal (5¾ miles NNE), thence: WNW of a 3⋅6 m shoal (3¼ miles NNE), thence: Paslepa Leading Lights: Front light (white round tower with gallery, 10 m in height) (59°01′⋅1N, 23°26′⋅0E). Rear light (similar structure, 14 m in height) (550 m from front light). The alignment (137½°) of these lights, leads SE for about 1½ miles, passing (with positions from Paslepa Front Light): Close NE of a dangerous wreck (3 miles NW), marked by a buoy (isolated danger), thence: SW of Hallkivi madal (2½ miles NW), marked on its SW side by buoys (port hand), thence: NE of a patch with a depth of 1⋅3 m over it (1¾ miles NW), marked by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: Voosikurk Leading Lights: Front light. Uppholm Light (white rectangle, black stripe on square framework, 12 m in height) (58°58′⋅4N, 23°23′⋅5E). Rear light. Hobulaid N Light (similar daymark on red framework, 19 m in height) (1⋅4 miles from front light). The alignment (185°) of these lights, leads S for about 1 mile through a buoyed channel, thence: Paralepa Leading Lights: Front light, (white round tower with gallery, 16 m in height) (58°56′⋅1N, 23°29′⋅0E). Rear light (white round tower, black gallery, 34 m in height) (800 m from front light). The alignment (152½°) of these lights, leads SSE for about 3 miles passing ENE of Seasaar. The first part of the
2
3
12.82 General information. Lehtma sadam (59°04′N, 22°42′E) is the largest port in Hiiumaa and is used by fishing and commercial vessels and has facilities for yachts. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 65 vessels totalling 166 845 dwt. Pilots board at 59°05′⋅5N, 22°44′⋅0E. Directions. Lehtma sadam Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, 7 m in height) (59°03′⋅9N, 22°41′⋅3E). Rear light (similar daymark, 11 m in height) (100 m from front light). The alignment (272½°) of these lights leads from seaward into the port. Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels, in depths of 6⋅4 m, about 1 mile offshore E of Lehtma nina (59°04′⋅1N, 22°41′⋅8E), but the anchorage is open to N and E winds. Berths. There are three quays in Lehtma, total length 550 m, depth 4 m.
Kärdla reid 1
2
3
4
5
423
12.83 Description. Kärdla (59°00′N, 22°45′E) stands on the low and wooded banks of the mouth of a river of the same name, about 4 miles SSE of Lehtma nina (12.82). At the mouth of the river, which is fronted by a very shallow bar, there is a landing place for fishing vessels where provisions may be obtained. In summer, there is regular communication by sea with the mainland. Local knowledge is required. Directions for the anchorages. From the vicinity of Lehtma, Kärdla reid is approached on the alignment (161¼°) of Kärdla Leading Beacons: Front beacon (white square topmark, red iron structure, 8 m in height) (59°00′⋅4N, 22°45′⋅4E). Rear beacon (red square topmark, red iron structure, 9 m in height) (about 2 cables from front beacon). This alignment leads through a channel with a least depth of 4⋅3 m to the anchorage. Caution. Several rocks and shoals lie close to the leading line; a stranded wreck lies on the leading line 4 cables from the front beacon. The remains of a pier, with piles projecting above water, extend about 2 cables from the coast at Kärdla. Anchorage may also be obtained in Kärdla reid (59°04′N, 22°47′E), in depths of between 8 and 11 m, sand and mud, with Kardla Rear Beacon (59°00′⋅2N, 22°45′⋅6E), bearing 186°, distant 3 to 3½ miles. It is possible to anchor off this line of bearing and nearer to the buoy (N cardinal) which marks the NW corner of Võirahu. With E and especially N winds a heavy sea is experienced at these anchorages. Small craft may obtain anchorage in depths of between 3⋅7 to 4⋅9 m, sand, about 4 cables N and on the alignment of Kärdla W Leading Beacons; this anchorage is sheltered by the shoals from N winds.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
Suursadam reid 1
2
1
2
3
4
12.84 Description. Suursadam reid (59°02′N, 22°54′E) is bounded on the W by Võirahu and Vissulaid, an islet covered with grass and surrounded by rocks lying close offshore about 2¾ miles ENE of Kärdla, and on the E by Kakralaid (59°01′N, 22°58′E) a white islet of gravel and rocks, with reefs extending N and S from it. It is approached along the recommended tracks as shown on the Estonian chart. Local knowledge is required. Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 9 to 10 m, sand and mud, about 1¾ miles NE of Hiiessaare nina (59°00′N, 22°51′E). The anchorage is well-sheltered and the holding ground is good but NW and N winds raise a heavy swell. Small craft may obtain well-sheltered anchorage off Suursadam in a depth of 6⋅7 m, sand and mud, about 7½ cables W of Sääre nina (58°59′N, 22°57′E). 12.85 Suursadam (58°58′⋅5N, 22°54′⋅5E) is a fishing and leisure harbour in which there are depths of 2⋅4 to 3 m. Directions. From a position near the SE end of the Vormsi N leading line (12.79), the alignment of the following marks leads 4½ miles SW across a rocky bank to the Approach Leading Lights: Front mark: Hiiesaare Lighthouse (59°00′⋅1N, 22°50′⋅3E). Rear mark: Paluküla Church (1½ miles SW) (12.80). Approach Leading Lights: Front light (white trapezium, black stripe, on metal framework pyramid 7 m in height) (58°58′⋅6N, 22°55′⋅4E). Rear light (similar daymark, 11 m in height) (480 m from front light). The alignment (176°) of these lights leads 3¼ miles S, thence: Entry Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, 10 m in height) (58°58′⋅6N, 22°54′⋅5E). Rear light (similar daymark, 12 m in height) (90 m from front light). The alignment (230°) leads from the approach line into the harbour. Harbour. Within the harbour are two boat piers, one of which is partly in ruins. Water is available and small repairs to fishing craft can be carried out.
VÄINAMERI General information Estonian Chart 513 (see 1.34)
Description 1
Route 1
2
1
12.89 The main channel through Väinameri, which has a limiting draught of 4⋅7 m, runs from N to S through Harikurk, thence S across the central part of the sound towards Viirekurk; the channel is very narrow in places and local knowledge is required. Under normal circumstances passage through Väinameri presents no difficulties.
Topography 1
1
2
Rälby laht 1
12.88 Väinameri (58°52′N, 23°15′E) is the sound which connects Gulf of Finland with Gulf of Rga, via Harikurk at its N end, and Viirekurk at its S end. Soela väin, the W entrance, connects with Baltic Sea via Hiiu väin. It is described at 12.42. Viire kurk (58°34′N, 23°28′E) is the strait between Virtsu and the SE part of Muhu. Suur väin is a continuation of Viirekurk and separates the N part of Muhu from the mainland.
12.86 Description. Rälby laht (59°02′N, 23°16′E), about the middle of the N side of Vormsi, provides suitable anchorage for small craft in depths of between 3⋅0 and 6⋅4 m. There are several boat piers at the head of the bay. Local knowledge is required. Nordgrunne, a detached shoal area, with a least depth of 0⋅8 m, and Kipparirahu, the NE edge of the coastal bank N of Vormsi, on which there are several drying rocks, lie respectively 4 miles NNW and 3¾ miles NNE of Rälby laht.
1
Voosikurk
2
1
12.87 Anchorage for vessels according to their draught may be obtained in Voosikurk clear of the fairway; the holding ground is good and it is well sheltered. Local knowledge is required.
424
12.90 General. The shores of Väinameri are low; the coast of the mainland rises into hills about 25 m high and is covered with pine woods and some wooded pasture land. The islands in the N part of the sound are mainly covered with pine woods and those in the S part with deciduous trees. On Muhu and in the S part of Saaremaa, fields and marsh lands are visible. The coasts of the mainland and islands consist mainly of sand and clay, but limestone and limestone scree also frequently occur. 12.91 North-west side. The E side of Hiiumaa, forming the W side of the N part of Väinameri, attains an elevation of about 18 m in places. There are a number of villages interspersed by clumps of trees on the coast. The coast is fronted by islets and the coastal bank, with depths of less than 6 m, extends about 3½ miles from the coast in places. Hellamaa rahu, an islet, lies 5 cables SE of Tähva nina (58°57′N, 22°57′E), a point covered by bushes and surrounded by foul ground. At Vahtrepa (58°54′N, 23°01′E), close to the Hiiumaa coast SW of Vohilaid, there are some high woods. 12.92 South-west side. The island of Muhu (58°36′N, 23°16′E), is about 24 m high and partly wooded. From Seanina, the N point of Muhu, to Raugi (58°39′N, 23°19′E) the coast is from 20 to 24 m high with steep cliffs. 12.93 South-east side. The coast of the mainland S of Rohuküla, which forms the E side of the central part of Väinameri, is low and rocky and, in the hinterland, there are several villages and many windmills interspersed with clumps of trees. The coastline is fronted by islets and shoals extending up to 5 miles from the coast. Kuivarahu, is a reef awash in places extending about 2¾ miles SSE from a position about 7½ cables ESE of Rukkirahu. A channel with a least depth of 3 m leads between the S end of Kuivarahu and Sõmeri saar. Tauksi saar (58°49′N, 23°27′E) is a low islet with several hills and in the middle a prominent clump of trees.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
3
It is the largest off this part of the coast, situated about 5 miles SE of Rukkirahu. Between Tauksi saar and Suur Härjamaa, the outermost islets about 2 miles NW, are Sõmeri saar, Liia saar, Hanemaa and other islets, all of which are low and grassy. Between these islets and Kumari saar there are several shoals, some of which have depths of less than 1⋅8 m over them. The E side of the S end of Väinameri between Pikanina and Virtsu, about 8¾ miles S, is of a yellowish colour and slightly more elevated than the coast to the N.
Landmarks 1
Directions (continued from 12.80)
Buoyage 1
12.94 The direction of buoyage is as follows; Soela väin and Hiiu väin — from W to E. Harikurk to Viirekurk via Väinameri — from N to S. Voosikurk — from N to S. From the centre of Väinameri — W to E towards Rohuküla and Haapsalu, and S to N towards Sviby.
1
Pilotage 1
12.95 Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels in Väinameri. See 12.75.
2
Winter closure 1
12.96 Väinameri may be closed for navigation during the winter months, depending on weather conditions.
Ferries 1
12.97 Ferry tracks, shown on the chart, lead between the following: Virtsu (58°34′N, 23°30′E) — Kuivastu (58°35′N, 23°24′E). Rohuküla (58°55′N, 23°26′E) — Heltermaa (58°52′N, 23°04′E). Rohuküla — Sviby (58°58′N, 23°18′E).
3
1
Local magnetic anomalies 1
12.98 Local magnetic anomalies are reported to exist in Väinameri (58°52′N, 23°15′E).
Prohibited anchorage 1
12.99 In the area between the SE extremity of Vormsi (59°00′N, 23°15′E) and Pullapää nina (3 miles SE), anchoring is prohibited, due to submarine cables.
2
Seabed 1
12.100 The nature of the seabed at the N end of the Väinameri is composed mainly of fine sand with mud and stones in places. In the central part of the sound it is for the greater part sand, overlaid with mud, but near the shoals it is shingle and sand mixed with slate.
3
Water level 1
12.101 The water level in Väinameri usually rises with SW winds and sometimes even with winds from W and NW. With E or NE winds the level of the water nearly always falls below the mean; in exceptional cases it falls as much as 0⋅9 m below the normal level.
12.102 Rukkirahu Lighthouse (white round tower with gallery, 16 m in height) (58°54′⋅3N,23°21′⋅0E). Viirelaid Lighthouse (red round concrete tower, balcony and lantern, 13 m in height) (58°32′⋅7N, 23°26′⋅6E). Virtsu Lighthouse (red and white square tower, 18 m in height) (58°34′⋅1N, 23°30′⋅1E).
4
425
12.103 Harilaid Leading Lights: Front light (white sphere on white rectangle, 9 m in height) (58°58′⋅1N, 23°05′⋅1E). Rear light (white round concrete tower, 12 m in height) (190 m from front light). From a position on the recommended track, SSE of Harilaid (58°58′N, 23°05′E), the alignment (330¼°), astern, of these lights leads SSE for about 3½ miles, to the vicinity of a light-buoy (safe water), passing (with positions from Harilaid Front Light): ENE of Pujurderahu (1½ miles SW), a small islet that lies on shoal ground, on which there are several above-water reefs, extending about 2¾ miles SSE from a position about 5 cables N of the islet, thence: ENE of Vohilaid (4 miles SW), the largest islet off this stretch of coast, which is about 10 m high, and covered with grass and bushes, thence: ENE of Eerikulaid (3½ miles S), a reddish rock, about 4 m high; a buoy (starboard hand) is moored 4 cables NE. Thence: ENE of Hõralaid (4 miles S), an islet, 4 m in height, thence: WSW of a rock with a depth of 6⋅2 m over it (4 miles SE), thence: 12.104 Raugi Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle with black stripe, on framework tower, 25 m in height) (58°39′⋅2N, 23°18′⋅5E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 40 m in height) (755 m from front light). The alignment (163°) of these leading lights leads SSE through a buoyed channel, for about 15 miles across Väinameri, passing (with positions from Raugi front light): WSW of a dangerous rock, with a depth of 2⋅4 m over it (15 miles NNW), marked by a light-buoy (isolated danger), thence: ENE of a dangerous wreck (12 miles NNW), thence: ENE of Heinlaid (12 miles NW), a low islet in the middle of which is a tall clump of trees, and Kaevatsi laid, 1½ miles SW, thence: ENE of a dangerous wreck (11 miles NNW), thence: ENE of Langekare (10¼ miles NW), an above-water rock on which is a solitary tree. It lies on the extension of the coastal bank which continues SSE from the SE end of Hiiumaa to the N side of Muhu. Thence: ENE of Sihimadal, a shoal patch with a least depth of 4⋅4 m over it (8½ miles NNW), thence: ENE of a dangerous wreck (7½ miles NNW), marked by a buoy (isolated danger), thence: WSW of Kumari madal (7 miles NNW), an area of underwater rocks, with a least depth of 1⋅2 m over
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
them, marked by a light-buoy (port hand). They are the W-most shoals on the E side of the S part of the main channel through Väinameri. Thence: ESE of Kõverlaid (58°45′N, 23°10′E) a wooded islet about 4 m high, and Ahelaid about 1 mile SW. They lie at the extremity of a chain of islands, forming the NE side of Hiiu väin, which extends about 8 miles SE from Salinõmme; Saarnaki laid, the largest of these islands, lies 1¼ miles SE of Salinõmme. Thence: WSW of a rock with a depth of 4⋅6 m over it (5¾ miles NNW). Farther ENE lie Kumari saar, a grassy islet about 4 m high, on which stands a beacon; Tondirahu, which is covered with grass; Valgerahu, which is bare, and Sipelgarahu; which are two barren islets (6½ miles N). Thence: ENE of Unterneemani madal (5¾ miles NNW), a shoal patch with a dangerous rock, marked by a light-buoy (starboard hand) on its E side, thence: WSW of the shoal bank, with depths of between 0⋅8 and 3⋅7 m (4 miles N), which extends S from Kumari saar for about 7 miles, to within 7½ cables of the NE side of Muhu, thence: ENE of a rock with a depth of 4 m over it (3¼ miles NNW), thence: ENE of a buoy (safe water) (3¼ miles NNW), moored at the junction with the W approach through Hiiu väin, thence: WSW of a rock with a depth of 4⋅4 m over it (2¼ miles N), and: ENE of a rock with a depth of 4⋅8 m over it (1¾ miles NNW), thence: Clear of a light-buoy (safe water) (1¼ miles NNW), which marks the intersection of the leading lines, thence: 12.105 Kessu Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, red stripe, on red metal post, 9 m in height) (58°38′N, 23°25′E). Rear light (white rectangle, red stripe on yellow square framework tower, 18 m in height) (730 m from front light). The alignment (123°) of these lights leads SE for about 4½ miles between the coastal bank off the NE coast of Muhu and the extensive bank extending S from Kumari saar, passing (with positions from Kessu front light): NE of a reef with depths of less than 6 m over it (5 miles NW), which extends from 1 to 1½ miles off the N part of the E coast of Muhu thence: NE of Raugi madal (4 miles NW), on which there is a dangerous underwater rock, thence: NE of Kompassi madal (2¾ miles NW), on which there is a dangerous underwater rock with a depth of 4⋅2 m over it, thence: NE of a dangerous underwater rock with a depth of 2 m over it (2½ miles NW), marked on its NE side by a buoy (starboard hand), thence: SW of the SE extremity of the extensive bank extending S from Kumari saar (1¾ miles NW), marked by a buoy (port hand), thence: SW of Papirahu, a shoal on which are some above-water rocks which extends about 3¼ miles N of Kessu. At the N end lies Papilaid an islet about 6 m high, with three hillocks.
1
2
3
4
12.106 Thence, the recommended track (155°), shown on the chart, leads SSE for about 8½ miles to the Virtsu pilot boarding place (58°31′N, 23°30′E), passing (with positions from Virtsu Light (58°34′⋅1N, 23°30′⋅1E)): WSW of Kessu (4½ miles NNW), an island in the middle of Virtsu väin. It is about 15 m high and covered with dense pine woods. Thence: ENE of Lalli laht (5 miles NW), a shallow bay partially obstructed by a number of dangerous below-water rocks. The coastal bank off the bay is marked by two buoys (starboard hand). Thence: WSW of Kessu madal (2¾ miles NW), a shoal area with a least charted depth of 3 m, marked on its SW side by a light-buoy (port hand), thence: WSW of Kõbajalaid (1½ miles N), a group of above-water rocks, on the largest of which are some trees, thence: WSW of a wreck with a depth over it of 9⋅4 m (1½ miles WNW), thence: WSW of Virtsu, a peninsula fringed with rocks and connected to the mainland by a narrow isthmus at its N end; at the SW end are some tall trees which can be seen at about 8 miles. Thence: WSW of Uulutilaid (1¼ miles SSE), an islet covered with bushes, which lies on the foul ground extending 1¼ miles S from the S end of Virtsu, thence: ENE of Viirelaid (3 miles SW), a low grassy islet lying on the outer part of the coastal reef off the S end of Muhu. A reef, which dries in places, extends about 1½ miles S from Viirelaid.
Useful marks 1
12.107 Hullo Church (58°59′⋅4N, 23°15′⋅0E). Hobulaid Light (58°55′⋅9N, 23°23′⋅2E) (12.113). Water Tower (58°55′⋅0N, 23°28′⋅8E). Karuse Church (58°38′N, 23°42′E). Hanila Church (58°37′N, 23°35′E). (Directions for Gulf of RØga continue at 11.120)
Anchorages and harbours Harilaid 1
12.108 Anchorage, which is sheltered from N winds, may be obtained in depths of 7 to 9 m, mud and sand, 7½ cables SSE of Harilaid (58°58′N, 23°05′E) (12.79).
Sviby 1
2
426
12.109 Description. Sviby (58°58′⋅4N, 23°18′⋅3E) lies on the S side of Vormsi in Sviby laht. Local knowledge is required. Directions. Sviby Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe on red mast, 7 m in height) (58°58′⋅2N, 23°18′⋅7E). Rear light (similar daymark and mast, 11 m in height) (3 cables m from front light). The alignment (323¾°) of these lights leads from the Rohuküla leading line to Sviby harbour through a fairway marked by buoys (lateral).
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
Haapsalu laht 1
2
1
1
2
3
4
12.110 Description. Haapsalu laht, an extensive bay situated S of Noarootsi (59°01′N, 23°30′E) (12.72), is generally very shallow, but W of Haapsalu there are depths of 2 to 4 m. The coast on the SW side of Noarootsi is fronted by several flat islets covered with grass and bushes but S of Einby, a village 2½ miles SSE of Ramsi, the coast becomes swampy and is fronted by flats. The shores of the bay E of Haapsalu, are very low, marshy, covered with scrub, and wooded. At Eisterby, a village on the N side, NNE of the Haapsalu peninsula, there is a small boat pier. Pullapää nina (58°57′N, 23°27′E) is the low S entrance point of the bay. Pinukse nukk lies 7½ cables W of the point. Kajakarahu, an islet covered with grass, and Kubararahu, an above- water reef, lie respectively close W and about 2 cables NW, of the Haapsalu peninsula. 12.111 Haapsalu (58°57′N, 23°32′E), on the S shore of Haapsalu laht, stands partly on the mainland and partly on the small peninsula extending NW from it. The harbour is formed by two spits of land extending NW for about 1 mile from the peninsula. Local knowledge is required. 12.112 Directions (continued from 12.81). Vessels approaching from Voosikurk continue on the Paralepa Leading Line (152¾°) and then onto the alignment (094¼°) of Kajakarahu Leading Lights: Front light (red triangle, yellow stripe, on column, 8 m in height) (58°57′⋅2N, 23°30′⋅8E). Rear light (yellow sphere on red framework pyramid with yellow stripe, 13 m in height) (600 m from front light). This alignment, which forms part of the W approach from Väinameri, leads E from the entrance to Haapsalu laht. Holmi Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, 7 m in height) (58°57′⋅6N, 23°30′⋅7E). Rear light (similar daymark, 12 m in height) (400 m from front light). The alignment (073¼°) of these lights leads through a channel marked by buoys, thence: Tahu lights in line (049¾°) lead clear of the SW spit and to the harbour entrance: Front light (white rectangle, black stripe, 6 m in height) (58°58′⋅4N, 23°32′⋅1E). Rear light (similar daymark, 9 m in height) (200 m from front light). Anchorage, sheltered from all but W winds, may be obtained off the entrance to Haapsalu harbour, in depths of between 3⋅0 to 3⋅4 m. Berths. There are six quays in the harbour, with a total length of 430 m and a depth of 3 m. Communication by sea is maintained with other Estonian ports. Rescue. A lifeboat is stationed at Haapsalu.
Rohuküla 1
2
3
4
5
6
the ends of the N and S moles. Off the entrance of the S basin are the ruins of a detached breakwater and lying parallel to it, about one cable W, is a row of sunken piles with a depth of 1⋅2 m over them. A reef, with a depth of 2⋅4 m over it, extends 1½ cables from the head of the N mole. Local knowledge is required. Directions for west approach. Rohuküla Leading Lights: Front light (black triangle, point up, on white trapezium, black stripe, 10 m in height) (58°54′⋅5N, 23°25′⋅6E). Rear light (black diamond on white trapezium on red framework tower, 19 m in height) (440 m from front light). The alignment (090°) of these lights leads through a narrow channel, marked by light-buoys (lateral), with a least depth of 3⋅8 m, passing (with positions from Rohuküla front light): N of Rukkirahu (2¼ miles W), a low grassy islet on which stands a light (12.102), thence: S of Odrarahu (1 mile NW), a sandbank awash, at the S extremity of a reef, partly above-water, extending about 1 mile S from Hobulaid; it is marked by a buoy (S cardinal). Directions for north approach (continued from 12.81). From the buoy (safe water) (58°58′⋅5N, 23°26′⋅5E), marking the position the recommended track divides, the alignment (213¾°) of the following lights leads SSW for 2¾ miles: Front light. Hobulaid S Light (red hut, white base, 4 m in height) (58°56′⋅0N, 23°23′⋅2E), standing on Hobulaid. Rear light. Rukkirahu Light (58°54′⋅3N, 23°21′⋅1E) (12.102). Thence, from a light-buoy (port hand), moored 8 cables NNE of Hobulaid S Light, the track leads S for about 2 miles onto the alignment of Rohuküla Leading Lights (12.113). Anchorages. The roadstead off Rohuküla provides sheltered anchorage for vessels of suitable draught; alternatively, anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of about 6 m, mud, about 3 miles W of Rukkirahu. Berths. There are five quays in Rohuküla harbour with a total length of 480 m and a depth of 4⋅5 m. Supplies. Fuel oil; provisions; fresh water. Communication. A ferry service runs to Heltermaa and Sviby.
Matsalu laht 1
12.114 Matsalu laht is entered between Puise nina (58°46′N, 23°27′E), the N entrance point, and Pikanina, about 3 miles SE. It has depths of 3 m in its entrance gradually decreasing to 0⋅9 m about 4½ miles from its head; a rock with a depth of less than 1⋅8 m over it, and a similar shoal patch, lie respectively about 1½ miles SW and 1¼ miles S of Puisa nina. Both shores of the inlet are low. Chart 2215, Estonian 513
Virtsu 1
12.113 General information. Rohuküla (58°55′N, 23°26′E) is situated on the mainland, 2¼ miles SSW of Pullapää nina. The harbour consists of two basins separated by a central mole extending W from the coast. Lights are displayed at
427
12.115 General information. Virtsu Harbour (58°34′N, 23°31′E) lies on the NW side of the Virtsu peninsula. It is a commercial harbour and the terminal for the ferry service to Kuivastu. Traffic. In 2003 the port was used by 108 vessels totalling 276 374 dwt.
Home
Contents
Index CHAPTER 12
2
3
Local knowledge is required. Directions. The alignment (087¾°) of the following lights leads from the recommended track through Viirekurk to the harbour entrance: Virtsu Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, red stripe on framework tower, 8 m in height) (58°34′⋅6N, 23°31′⋅4E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 13 m in height) (290 m from front light). Anchorage. Good shelter may be obtained by small craft under the lee of the pier and in a position 5 cables NW of the pierhead, in a depth of 5 m, mud. Berths. A pier extends NNW from the coast for 1½ cables, thence NE for about ½ cable. A light is displayed from the pier head. There are four quays with a total length of 330 m and a depth of 4⋅5 m. Communication by sea is maintained with other ports in Estonia.
the N or S. There are two quays with a total length of 260 m and a depth of 5 m. Supplies. Fresh water is available. Communications are maintained by sea with other Estonian ports and by ferry with Virtsu. Estonian Chart 513
Heltermaa 1
2
Kuivastu 1
2
3
12.116 General information. Kuivastu Harbour (58°35′N, 23°23′E), on the E side of Muhu, is a commercial harbour and the terminal for the ferry service to Virtsu. Directions. The alignment (267¾°) of the following lights leads from the recommended track through Viirekurk into the harbour: Kuivastu Leading Lights: Front light (white rectangle, red stripe on square framework tower, 8 m in height) (58°34′⋅4N, 23°23′⋅4E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 12 m in height) (320 m from front light). Harbour. A stone pier extending ENE from the coast for 160 m with a short arm projecting S from its head forms a small basin. A light is displayed from the pierhead. A rough sea is experienced at the pier during winds from
3
4
428
12.117 Description. Heltermaa (58°52′N, 23°03′E), situated about 1½ miles NNW of the SE extremity of Hiiumaa, is protected by a pier extending N from the coast. At the berthing place near the N end of the pier there are depths of between 2 and 3 m but there is considerably less water near the root of the pier. Local knowledge is required. Directions. Heltermaa Leading Lights: Front light (white diamond, black stripe, on framework tower, 12 m in height) (58°51′⋅9N, 23°02′⋅9E). Rear light (similar daymark and structure, 18 m in height) (310 m from front light). From a position on the recommended track through Väinameri, 4 miles E of Heltermaa, the alignment (254¾°) of these lights leads to the vicinity of the pier through a fairway, marked by light-buoys and buoys (lateral), in which there is a least depth of 2⋅7 m about 1 mile from the harbour entrance. A light-beacon stands at the head of the pier. A rock awash lies about 1 mile offshore and 2½ cables N of the fairway. Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of about 4 m, mud, about 3 miles ENE of Heltermaa and about 5 cables N of the approach fairway, but care must be taken to avoid a shoal depth of 1⋅8 m which lies in this vicinity. Communications. A ferry service runs to Rohuküla.
Home
Contents
Index
APPENDIX I
RUSSIA — REGULATED AREAS The following areas, extracted from Russian Notices to Mariners, are restricted for various reasons, see 1.29. See also 1.8 for former mine danger areas. Geographical positions are those quoted in Russian Notices. Attention is drawn to notes on graduation and datum differences, if any, given on the relevant Admiralty charts. The areas, and the nature of the restrictions, are as follows, bounded by a line joining the points:
and the coastline joining i and v
Prohibited areas
Area No 161
Area No 104
54°38′⋅52N, 19°52′⋅53E
54°43′⋅60N, 19°56′⋅70E
54°38′⋅72N, 19°52′⋅82E
54°43′⋅60N, 19°53′⋅00E
54°38′⋅40N, 19°53′⋅43E
54°44′⋅10N, 19°53′⋅00E
54°38′⋅20N, 19°53′⋅12E
54°44′⋅10N, 19°57′⋅00E
Prohibited areas periodically dangerous due to firing practice and exercises
and the coastline joining i and iv
Area No 117
Area No 107
54°50′⋅0N, 19°25′⋅0E
54°38′⋅05N, 19°55′⋅66E
55°54′⋅0N, 19°03′⋅0E
54°38′⋅01N, 19°55′⋅38E
55°30′⋅0N, 20°15′⋅0E
54°38′⋅04N, 19′55′⋅34E
55°04′⋅0N, 20°15′⋅0E
and the coastline joining i and iii
54°57′⋅5N, 20°06′⋅0E
Area No 108
54°57′⋅5N, 19°55′⋅0E 54°50′⋅0N, 19°50′⋅0E
54°38′⋅12N, 19°55′⋅31E
Area No 117a
54°38′⋅14N, 19°55′⋅09E
54°50′⋅0N, 19°25′⋅0E
and the coastline N of i and ii
55°20′⋅0N, 19°15′⋅0E
Area No 109
55°20′⋅0N, 20°15′⋅0E
54°38′⋅41N, 19°54′⋅68E
55°04′⋅0N, 20°15′⋅0E
54°38′⋅40N, 19°54′⋅75E
54°57′⋅5N, 20°06′⋅0E 54°57′⋅5N, 19°55′⋅0E
54°38′⋅34N, 19°54′⋅74E
54°50′⋅0N, 19°50′⋅0E 54°38′⋅34N, 19°54′⋅65E
Area No 163
and the coastline joining i and iv
54°46′⋅4N, 19°39′⋅6E
Area No 111
55°00′⋅0N, 19°39′⋅6E
54°39′⋅00N, 19°33′⋅00E
55°00′⋅0N, 19°50′⋅7E
54°42′⋅00N, 19°33′⋅00E
54°46′⋅4N, 19°50′⋅7E Area No 161
54°42′⋅00N, 19°36′⋅50E
55°02′⋅0N, 19°39′⋅6E
54°39′⋅00N, 19°36′⋅50E
55°09′⋅5N, 19°45′⋅3E
Areas prohibited for anchoring, fishing and underwater operations
55°09′⋅5N, 20°00′⋅0E 55°02′⋅0N, 20°00′⋅0E
Area No 159
Area No 65
54°27′⋅60N, 19°38′⋅50E
54°50′⋅3N, 19°20′⋅3E
54°36′⋅00N,19°25′⋅00E
55°26′⋅0N, 19°03′⋅0E
54°45′⋅00N, 19°37′⋅00E
55°26′⋅0N, 19°47′⋅0E
54°57′⋅60N, 19°37′⋅00E
55°03′⋅0N, 19°35′⋅0E
54°57′⋅60N, 19°58′⋅60E
54°46′⋅4N, 19°35′⋅0E
429
Home
Contents
Index APPENDIX I
Area No 326
Area No 65a
55°09′⋅0N, 19°38′⋅1E
The area surrounding a wreck bounded by the coastline and the arc of a circle, radius 1 mile, centred 54°55′⋅55N, 19°55′⋅57E
55°03′⋅0N, 19°35′⋅0E
Area No 327
54°46′⋅4N, 19°35′⋅0E
The area surrounding a drilling platform bounded by a circle, radius 3 cables, centred 54°44′⋅45N, 19°46′⋅65E
54°50′⋅3N, 19°20′⋅3E 55°09′⋅0N, 19°10′⋅3E
Area No 65b 55°09′⋅0N, 19°10′⋅3E
Area No 328
55°26′⋅0N, 19°03′⋅0E
The area surrounding a drilling platform bounded by a circle, radius 3 cables, centred 55°18′⋅70N, 20°34′⋅85E
55°26′⋅0N, 19°47′⋅0E 55°09′⋅0N, 19°38′⋅1E
Area No 329
Area No 42 55°07′⋅6N, 20°08′⋅0E
54°46′⋅80N, 19°54′⋅35E
55°20′⋅0N, 20°08′⋅0E
54°47′⋅70N, 19°54′⋅35E
55°20′⋅0N, 20°30′⋅0E
54°47′⋅70N, 19°56′⋅60E
55°07′⋅6N, 20°30′⋅0E
54°46′⋅80N, 19°56′⋅60E
Areas with above and underwater navigational dangers
LITHUANIA — FIRING PRACTICE AREA An area, bounded by the following points, is frequently used for firing exercises, and declared temporarily dangerous to shipping and aircraft. 55°37′N, 20°46′E 55°34′N, 21°00′E 55°25′N, 21°00′E 55°22′N, 20°46′E 55°25′N, 20°42′E 55°34′N, 20°42′E.
430
Home
Contents
Index
APPENDIX II POLAND — REGULATED AREAS The following areas are periodically closed to navigation on account of military exercises. They are extracted from Polish Annual Notices to Mariners. See 1.30 for details. In addition to the above, Area Nos 3 and 14 are permanently closed for fishing, and Area No 15 is permanently closed to shipping and fishing. Geographical positions are those quoted in Polish Notices and are referred to WGS84. Areas are as follows, bounded by a line joining the points: Area No 6a
Area No 1a
54°35′⋅9N, 16°44′⋅9E
54°23′⋅9N, 18°59′⋅8E 54°27′⋅9N, 19°02′⋅8E
54°34′⋅1N, 16°44′⋅9E
54°27′⋅9N, 19°22′⋅9E
54°34′⋅1N, 16°41′⋅9E 55°35′⋅9N, 16°41′⋅9E
54°23′⋅9N, 19°21′⋅4E
Area No 6b
Area No 1b
54°28′⋅9N, 16°25′⋅9E
54°27′⋅9N, 19°02′⋅8E 54°32′⋅9N, 19°06′⋅6E
54°35′⋅4N, 16°08′⋅8E
54°32′⋅9N, 19°23′⋅1E
54°41′⋅0N, 16°16′⋅5E 55°32′⋅7N, 16°32′⋅6E
54°27′⋅9N, 19°22′⋅9E
Area No 10
Area No 2
54°47′⋅8N, 18°25′⋅9E
54°32′⋅9N, 18°34′⋅0E 54°33′⋅2N, 18°33′⋅7E
54°55′⋅7N, 18°34′⋅8E
54°37′⋅3N, 18°35′⋅6E
54°51′⋅9N, 18°43′⋅3E 54°44′⋅4N, 18°35′⋅3E
54°37′⋅2N, 18°36′⋅6E
Area No 11
54°33′⋅1N, 18°34′⋅6E
54°44′⋅4N, 18°35′⋅3E
Area No 3 54°32′⋅2N, 18°33′⋅8E
54°51′⋅9N, 18°43′⋅3E
54°32′⋅2N, 18°35′⋅3E
54°45′⋅5N, 18°57′⋅8E 54°38′⋅9N, 18°49′⋅8E
54°32′⋅8N, 18°35′⋅3E
Area No 12
54°32′⋅8N, 18°33′⋅6E
54°05′⋅7N, 14°44′⋅4E
Area No 4 54°40′⋅3N, 18°43′⋅3E
54°07′⋅1N, 14°50′⋅7E
54°39′⋅6N, 18°41′⋅6E
54°03′⋅1N, 14°53′⋅0E 54°01′⋅9N, 14°46′⋅7E
54°37′⋅7N, 18°44′⋅3E
Area No 13
54°38′⋅4N, 18°45′⋅7E
54°00′⋅5N, 14°27′⋅9E
Area No 5 54°36′⋅1N, 18°44′⋅3E
54°03′⋅7N, 14°27′⋅9E
54°38′⋅4N, 18°40′⋅9E
54°06′⋅4N, 14°36′⋅4E 54°02′⋅8N, 14°36′⋅4E
54°40′⋅0N, 18°41′⋅0E
Area No 14
54°36′⋅8N, 18°45′⋅7E
54°36′⋅8N, 18°46′⋅7E
Area No 6 54°32′⋅7N, 16°32′⋅6E
54°36′⋅1N, 18°44′⋅3E
54°41′⋅0N, 16°16′⋅5E
54°35′⋅2N, 18°44′⋅5E
54°47′⋅4N, 16°46′⋅4E
54°35′⋅2N, 18°46′⋅5E
54°35′⋅3N, 16°50′⋅7E
54°36′⋅4N, 18°47′⋅5E
431
Home
Contents
Index APPENDIX II
Area No 15 54°33′⋅1N, 18°33′⋅7E 54°33′⋅1N, 18°35′⋅3E 54°32′⋅8N, 18°35′⋅3E 54°32′⋅8N, 18°33′⋅7E
432
Contents
Index
Distance table - Falsterbo Kanal - Approaches to Gulfs of Finland / Bothnia
P1
8)
Home
) ce ce
en
40
159
179
177
104
188
183
115
174
169
56
25
275
77
111
193
209
191
278
117
146
187
205
187
51
336
288
301
164
259
241
261
208
434
306
330
316
258
340
235
195
280
59
183
177
117
66
74
225
234
292
391
417
333
355
255
340
322
273
233
184
253
374
302
253
266
134
226
208
216
176
234
234
259
25
346
275
295
181
269
251
221
181
109
218
303
52
403
319
341
241
326
308
358
218
170
239
360
14
86
48
94
207
200
184
137
146
259
273
353
443
73
434
319
363
420
252
210
220
74
175
157
188
164
102
265
209
197
73
122
183
269
318
182
206
216
241
223
111
71
183
136
274
173
138
131
159
323
247
194
207
93
170
152
173
150
107
233
204
175
70
108
161
264
48
132
29
211
205
133
82
89
249
251
309
408
34
390
276
319
376
86
225
291
ce tr
En
n m
rm
ha
ra
nd Sö
de
Sa
e
m
ci
ol
j?
kh
st
ils
er
y d Ys
Vi
ta
Ve
nt
Vä 166
sb
in
vi
k
ou
oc St
©w
sp
m ol kh
oc St
an
tr En
En rt
La m ol
St 57
an
an tr
(N so nd
Ar m oc
St
kh
oc
Rø
kh
nn
ol
e
ga Ri
No
rr
Li
kö
ho
pi
lm
a
ng
a ep
Kl
ºj
ai
Ka
pÍ
rls
da
kr
rls Ka
81
ce
232
Ka
433
on
tr
a
an
n m ha
238
lm
Gd
ar
am
Ba
sk
lti
Fa
ys
ls
k
te
rb
o
Ka
na
l ( S
en
tr
an
ce
)
(N
Note: For further information and notes on distances, see Admiralty Distance Tables North West Europe Table 1 f.
220
Home
Contents
Index
INDEX
Names without a paragraph number are for gazetteer purposes only Å = river; see proper name Aakirkeby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.109 Abbekås . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30 Abruka saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.141 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.134 Achterwasser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.133 Ädan Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137 Adelsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Ådkobb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Ädkobben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137 Adlergrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13 Ådskärsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262 Aggarö Lilla Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Aggarö Lilla Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Aggarön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Aggarösundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Äggskäret, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.85 Äggskäret, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.85 Agneudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.148 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.148 Ägnö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113 Ägnöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112 Ägnösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113 Ahelaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Ahlbeck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.123 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.200 Åhus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56 Ahvenanmeren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.246 Aina u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.114 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.105 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.103 Ajkesvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.239 Åklabben Lilla Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Akmenrags Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . 10.119 Ålandets Grund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.307 Ãlands Hav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 Ålandsbredan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Ålandskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Ålandskobb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.307 Ålbäcksgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Alböke Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.101 Albysjön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.104 Aleksandri madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.124 Alen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Alen Lilla Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.199 Aleskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100 Ålgårdsskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165 Ålgårdsudde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Älgen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Älgerören Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.254 Algersgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Älghornsudd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118 Älgö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112 Älgöfjärd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Älgögrundet, Östra Light . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Älgön, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Älgön, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Algsbåden, Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Alhällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Alholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.232 Ålkistan Kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.189 Ällebåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.209 Allegrogrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Allinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.83 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82 Allirahu: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.131 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.131 Allmänningsfrnd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.154 Ållonö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187
Almagrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24 Almasgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.142 Almindingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Almö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.217 Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.218 Almö-Lindö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.178 Almvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.83 Almviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.83 Alö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Ålö, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.108 Ålöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.269 Ålöhuvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.269 Alskären (59°11′⋅5N, 18°51′⋅5E) Alskärsklabb Beacon, Östra . . . . . . . . 7.298 Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.298 Altarskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Altwarp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.164 Aludden Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.177 Alunbruket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26 Alvaret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26 Alvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.218 Älvsnabben Monument . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41 Älvsnabben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Älvsnabben Hamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56 Älvvik Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.175 Älvviksgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.175 Amundsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.176 Andershof Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 8.101 Andervik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Anderviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Andrejevi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.81 Andrejosta Mole Light-beacon . . . . . 11.70 Andresemägi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 Andskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Anesbådar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.207 Ängjärnsudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.203 Ängö: Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82 Boat Harbour Leading Lights . . . . . 4.82 Ängsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.150 Ängsö-askarna (59°36′⋅4N, 18°46′⋅2E) Anholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.197 Anilaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.106 Ankargrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.74 Ankarudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.54 Anklam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.143 Anleger Von Vierow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.87 Anseküla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.136 Antilopgrund (55°24′⋅6N, 13°49′⋅0E) Apollo madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.78 Ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.181 Arholma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.252 Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.327 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Arholmaleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.327 Ariadnegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.100 Ariste laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.18 Arkö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.155 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.155 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157 Pilot Lookout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.203 Arköbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157 Arkona Riff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 Arkösund: channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.192 Arkösund: harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.202 Arlanda International Airport . . . . . . . 7.241 Arlkiu Ragas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.61 Armbågen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.257 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.257 Armbågen Östra Light-buoy . . . . . . . 7.257 Arnager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.110 Bugt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.110
434
Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.107 Arndt Monument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20 Ärnemar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.171 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.161 Arnholmsrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.322 Arnö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Arnöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.146 Arpö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.224 Arpökalv (56°07′⋅6N, 15°25′⋅6E) Arsballe Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Årsdale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.117 Havn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.128 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.128 Windmill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.117 Årskobben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.271 Årstaviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.234 Årsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.145 Ärtskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119 Ås Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.43 Asalaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 Åsand Bugt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92 Åsehorn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 4.126 Asenskallen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.311 Åsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Åshuvudet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.153 Äskeskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100 Askö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.299 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.315 Askö, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.111 Asköfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.29 Askörsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.310 Askrikefjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Askugrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.238 Asla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.225 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.225 Aspan Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.177 Äspeskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.213 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.212 Aspholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.191 Aspö, Tvären approaches . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Aspö: Karlskrona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.200 Pilot Lookout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.206 Aspöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Aspöja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Aspön: Dalarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Aspön: Mälaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Aspöskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Aspösten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.210 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.212 Asunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Atla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.22 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.22 Atmata, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.69 Åttan Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Aurgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.231 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.231 Austergrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.194 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.194 Austla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.21 Austurgrunne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.71 Ava . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.238 Avagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.238 Avanäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.237 Avbäran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Baabe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.76 Babina Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.227 Bådan, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.136 Badholmen Directional Light . . . . . . . 4.163 Baggahegna Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183 Baggensstäket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.115 Baggensfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103 Bagghusfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.362
Home
Contents
Index
Bakaregrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.98 Bakkebrædt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.106 Bakkegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.106 Bakkerne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.111 Båknahall Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.114 Båkören Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Baldersgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Baljan, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.247 Balkåkra Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 Balke Havn (55°02′⋅5N, 15°07′⋅0E) Bällstahamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.237 Bällstaviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.227 Bålsta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.124 Balt#-Bazncas Leading Lights . . . . . 11.68 Baltic Beta Production Platform . . . . . . 2.9 Baltiysk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.150 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.177 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.176 Baltiyskaya Kosa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.147 Banken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Barbena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.106 Barlastholmen: Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.77 Bårlösen (57°55′⋅6N, 16°35′⋅0E) Barneskärsgrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165 Barnsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110 Barösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.141 Barshagegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Barshageudd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Basareholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.267 Basen Barkowy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.209 Basen Stoczniowy Light . . . . . . . . . . 8.205 Basen Zimowy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.236 Baskemölla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51 Bastlagnö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Båtgåsknösen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43 Båtskärsbådan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.288 Bauda, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.223 Bedarö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.76 Bedarön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.76 Beek, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.74 Bejershamn (56°36′⋅3N, 16°24′⋅3E) Bengts backe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.198 Bengtsan, Yttre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Bengtsbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.106 Bennen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Berezini Madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Berg: Möja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.277 Berga Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.80 Berga Water Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95 Bergaholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.221 Berggrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Berghamn, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.108 Bergholmarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 Bergholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Bergholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.139 Bergholmen, Lilla Light . . . . . . . . . . . 7.177 Bergholmen Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 Bergholmsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.113 Bergkvara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31 N Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36 S Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36 Bergö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.279 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Bergö, Lilla Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26 Bergö, Lilla Beacon: Figeholm . . . . . 4.182 Bergö, Lilla: Tvären . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Bergö: Marsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.279 Bergs Oil Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.180 Bergsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.311 Bernti Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81 Bernatu Seklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.82 Berndshof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.163 Berteln, Stora Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.155 Beten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.265 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.265 Betens S Grund: Oxelösund . . . . . . . . 5.265 Bettysgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.111 Bezimjanaja sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10
INDEX
Bezymyannaya Shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10 Binger Windmill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.167 Binz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.36 Biruta, Gora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81 Biskopsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Biskopsstenarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.148 Björkfjärden, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Björkholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.42 Björknabben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.104 Björkö: Mälaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143 Björkö Lera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Björkö: Arholma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Björkö: Mysingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.40 Björkö: Sandhamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.129 Björköfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.362 Björköfjärden Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.121 Björköklack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Björkösundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143 Björkrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.104 Björkskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.108 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.159 Björkskärs Skärgård (59°22′⋅0N, 19°09′⋅0E) Björnö Ekleskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.110 Björnö, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.179 Björnsgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.164 Bjurögrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Bjurshagen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56 Bjursund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.113 Bjursundsström . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.114 Bjursundströmbron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.114 Blå Jungfrun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.113 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.119 Blåbärssundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.44 Blackan Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 Blackan, Vast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.182 Blackarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 Blackbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.142 Blacken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.185 Blacken, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Blackgrundet, M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.162 Blackhäll, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.188 Blak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.110 Blankaholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35 Bläse (57°54′⋅0N, 18°50′⋅5E) Bläsinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.202 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.202 Blekinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Blidö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262 Blidösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272 Blindan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Blixholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.231 Blockbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.111 Blocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Blockgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 Blockholmssundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.73 Blockhusudden Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.223 Blötberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269 Blötholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.321 Bobbin Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 Bockgrund Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.141 Bockholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.188 Bockholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.314 Bockholmssätra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 Bockholmssund Leading Lights . . . . . . 6.96 Nedre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.96 Övre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.96 Bockholmssund Östra Light . . . . . . . . . 6.96 Bockholmssundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 Bockö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.186 Bockstigen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.148 Boda Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Böda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.214 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.215 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.207 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.215 S Breakwater Head Light . . . . . . . . 4.215 Bödabukten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.214 Bodagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Bodilskirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.123
435
Bofjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Bogen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Bogesund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Bogölholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Bogstenen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Bokö Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.109 Bokö Light: Bokösund . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.314 Bokö, Östra (56°09′⋅4N, 14°58′⋅7E) Bokö: Stora Jättersön . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.120 Bokö-Oxnö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.314 Bokobben Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Boköfjärden (56°09′⋅0N, 14°59′⋅5E) Boköskär Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 4.127 Bokösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.314 Bolderja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43 Bollö, N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.226 Bollö, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.226 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.226 Bølshavn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99 Bol’shaya Gora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.176 Bolviksnäs Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Bonden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Bonden, Stora (59°27′⋅0N, 19°12′⋅0E) Bönsäcken Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Boo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114 Boön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.152 Borgehage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.101 Borgfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.65 Borgholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.105 Castle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.105 Hamn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 4.106 Inloop Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 4.106 Borgmästarholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.357 Borgö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.72 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.72 Borgsbredan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Bornholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 Bornholmsgat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Bornhuvud Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.93 Borrby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 Bosaflätt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.150 Bosjöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Boskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Böskaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Bosknösen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43 Bosögrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Bosön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.185 Bosösten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Botildas Knall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 Böttchergrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.52 Botten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Bottenholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.49 Botvaldvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.219 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.219 Botveskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.290 Brama Torowa No 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.224 Brama Torowa No 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.224 Brama Torowa No 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.224 Brama Torowa No 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.224 Bränd-Hallskärskobben Beacon . . . . . 7.299 Brandalsund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.26 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.26 Brandholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.289 Brandholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113 Brändö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.199 Brändö: Bråviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Brändösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.199 Brandskärgården . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.130 Brännäset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.363 Branta Knalln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72 Brantbåden (58°29′⋅3N, 17°14′⋅6E) Branten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Branten, Södertäljeviken . . . . . . . . . . . 6.93 Brantevik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50 Bräsken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.258 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.292 Bråtknösen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
Home
Contents
Index
Bråviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.175 Large vessel anchorage . . . . . . . . . 5.201 Bråviken Norra Leading Lights . . . . . 5.236 Bråviken Södra Leading Lights . . . . . 5.236 Bredäng (56°09′⋅4N, 15°54′⋅7E) Bredavik (56°07′N, 15°41′E) Bredbådan: Arholma . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Bredgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.94 Bredgrund, Inre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.101 Bredgrund, Östra: Skäggenäs . . . . . . . . 4.97 Bredgrund, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.101 Bredgrund, Öland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.208 Bredgrund: Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.99 Bredgrund: Kråkelund . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Bredgrund: Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 Bredhäll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 Bredmarsknösen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43 Bredsätra Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.207 Bredskär (59°50′⋅3N, 19°09′⋅6E) Bredstäk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35 Breidingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Briten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Briterne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.206 Britgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.208 Broa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.224 Brobygrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.190 Bröderna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Brödstycket Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Broens Odde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.112 Broens Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116 Broken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.185 Ö Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 V Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Bromdal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Bromma Airport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.241 Brunnsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.189 Brunsviksholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Brusan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.294 Bryggholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.144 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.145 Bryntostkobb Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . 7.136 Brzeg Kosa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.208 Brzeno Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 9.103 Buhskam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.52 Bukhta Primorskaya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.204 Bulan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43 Bullandö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.119 Bullegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.98 Bulleråsen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Bullerön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27 Buuciema Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28 Buupe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43 Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.70 Bunge Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.231 Bungenäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.229 Bungeör Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.229 Bungeör Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.229 Burgsvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.147 Hamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.150 Hamn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 2.149 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.148 Burgsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.147 Buskhyttan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.277 Bunieku Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.119 Busören . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.210 Bussan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Bussgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Bting Oil Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.84 Bykowo Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 8.227 Bylehamn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.338 Byrumsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Byttan, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.191 Byttan, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.191 Byxelkrok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.183 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.184 ainikova Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19 Capella Ecumenica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Chaupska Jama . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
INDEX
Chaupy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27 Chelminek N Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.228 S Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.228 Chelminek Wyspa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.231 Christiansø . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129 Great Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.130 Havn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.132 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.130 ChrzŅszczewska Wyspa . . . . . . . . . . . 8.275 Cisowo Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.272 Countries and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.164 Denmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.174 Estonia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.230 Germany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.182 Latvia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.222 Lithuania . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.214 Poland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.190 Port Services — Summary . . . . . . . 1.239 Principal ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.238 Russian Federation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.199 Sweden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.164 Custom House: Kättilö . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110 Cypel = point; see proper name Czapina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.264 Czopino Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.300 DŅbie, Jezioro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.264 Dalarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99 Askfatshamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99 Canal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.100 Hotellbryggan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.99 Vadviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.101 Dalarö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Dalarö Skans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Dalaröbryggan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.117 Dalgrensgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Dalskär Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36 Dämban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Damiaza . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.227 Dämman Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.71 Dämman Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Dammriff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.52 Dan , River . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.44 Dänholm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.102 Dänische Wiek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.78 Dansaren, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119 Danvikshem Outfall Lights . . . . . . . . 7.223 Danvikskanalen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.224 Danziger gatt: Ronneby apps. . . . . . . 3.178 Danziger Gatt: Landsort . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72 Daragana Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Dargen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.160 Darowko . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.288 Darowo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.288 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.272 Daugava river . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41 Daugava Putnu Light−beacon . . . . . . 11.70 Daugavgrvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.67 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28 Daugavgrvas Osta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.70 Daugavgrvas Sala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43 Dävensö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119 Davids Banke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42 Debina, Wyspa Light-beacon . . . . . . . 8.228 Degerhamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.27 Södra Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.27 Dejeudden Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Dejma, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.74 Delholmen, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153 Delholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153 Demmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.142 Deppo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Devin Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.101 Deviner See . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.107 Die Having . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.76 Digergrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.245 Digerhuvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.247
436
Dirhami neem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.72 Djauvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.151 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.151 Djupasund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.239 Bridge Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.240 Djupekås (56°04′⋅3N, 14°43′⋅2E) Djupesund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30 Djupsundet: Loftahammar . . . . . . . . . 5.117 Djupviksholmarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Djurgården . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.225 Djurgårdsbrunnskanalen . . . . . . . . . . 7.225 Djurgårdsbrunnsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.225 Djurön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.231 Djurönshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.231 Djurönäset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Djursholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187 Djursholmsudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Djursvik (56°26′⋅0N, 16°06′⋅8E) Duga Mielizna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 Dugi Ostrów . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.226 Dugi Ostrów Light-beacon . . . . . . . . 8.228 Döden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Doftskärsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Doftskärshällarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Dom Wypoczynkomy . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.302 Domace Cross Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.226 Domace Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 8.226 Donas Góra Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23 Dösen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Dragets kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81 Dragfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81 Draken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.268 Dreverna, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.75 Drigge Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.101 Drigge Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.101 Drottningskär: Karlskrona . . . . . . . . . 3.214 Fort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.212 Drottningskär: Örsbaken . . . . . . . . . . 5.287 Drummelberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 Dueodde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.108 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.105 Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.105 Dunsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.189 Duvnäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272 Dziwna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.279 Strait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.275 Dziwnów . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.275 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.274 Dolny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.278 Górny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.278 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.276 Dwirzyno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.296 Ebbaskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183 Eckelsudde (56°25′⋅5N, 16°23′⋅0E) Edesön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.91 Edikrava laid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Edsviken: Skeppsgården . . . . . . . . . . 5.123 Edsviken: Stocksundet . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.188 Eeriksaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.22 Eerikulaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.103 Egby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.207 Egelsholm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Einby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.110 Eisterby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.110 Ekenabben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.242 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.242 Ekenäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57 Ekenäsgrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.57 Ekensberg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.98 Ekerumshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Ekerumsrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Ekholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.323 Ekholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Ekholmsgrundet Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . 5.72 Ekholmsnässundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.181 Eknö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.352 Eknö Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27
Home
Contents
Index
Eknö, Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Vasträ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Eknö: Sandhamn Entrance . . . . . . . . . 7.138 Eknogrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Eknön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Eknösundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.145 Eknöudde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.352 Ekö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22 Ekö: Bråviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.197 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.197 Ekö: Storkläppen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100 Ekoknolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Ekön Lilla Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.177 Ekören Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.323 Ekskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35 Eksportosta Quay Light-beacon . . . . . 11.70 Eksportosta Harbour Molehead Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.70 Ekudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187 Ekumägi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50 Elba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.179 ElblŅg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.230 Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.220 Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.230 W Mole Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.230 ElblŅski, Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.230 Elda Poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 Eldena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.85 Sector Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.83 Eldgarnsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118 Eldsten Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.244 Elefanten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Elidasgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Eliisabeti Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.107 Elleholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.127 Ellidagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.52 Emmaste Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Emsfors Chimney . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.135 Eneholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.223 Enerumsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Eneskärsrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.108 Eneskärv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.152 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.147 Engelsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.106 Engelskagrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.186 Engelsmansgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 Engure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.37 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.38 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28 Engures Ezers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.35 Enholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Enköping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.154 Enrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.175 Enskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Enskär, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.346 Enskär: Rödlögaleden . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269 Enskär: Tvären . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.299 Ersholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Eskelen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.175 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.175 Espebådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Espebriten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.192 Espholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.190 Espskärsgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.139 Espskärsklubb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Essingebron: Stockholm . . . . . . . . . . 7.227 Essingen, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.218 Essingen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.218 Estbröte Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.98 Esten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.209 Estenäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.133 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.133 Esterön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.236 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.236 Ettergrundshällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5.192 Ettersundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Östra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Everöd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.75
INDEX
Ewa Peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.262 Fågelbrolandet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Fågelö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.182 Fågelöarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.137 Fågelöfjärd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.181 Fågelön Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Fågelön: Mälaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.88 Fagernäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272 Fagerö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.150 Fageröflisan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.127 Fagerön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.150 Fåglarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.82 Fäholmsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.97 Falholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.181 Falkenbergsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.93 Falkenhagen Leading Lights . . . . . . . 8.100 Falkens Grund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Fällbådan: Enskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.306 Fällbådan Norra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.135 Fållnäsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.33 Fallström . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112 Fälövsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.73 Faludden Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.185 Fångö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.139 Faran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Farfarsberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.194 Farfarsgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.138 Fårholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.159 Fårholmsrev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.290 Fårholmsrevet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.290 Färjestaden: Bråviken . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.211 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.212 Färjestaden: Kalmarsund . . . . . . . . . . . 4.59 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.60 Breakwater Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.60 Fårö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.237 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.244 Norsholm Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . 2.244 Fårö Missloper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.230 Fårö Norsholm Lighthouse . . . . . . . . 2.249 Fåröholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.185 Fårösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.223 N Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.231 Fårösund Södra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.229 Farstanäs Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 Farstanäset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Farstasundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.118 Farstaviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.118 Farstugrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.209 Fejans Hamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.303 Rescue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.303 Femöre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.260 Femörehuvud House and Beacon . . . 5.268 Fidogrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.162 Fifång . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Fifångsdjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.314 Figeholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.181 Finn, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.105 Finnalafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Finnboda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.223 Finnfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.161 Finnhällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.102 Finnhällorna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Finnkarten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100 Finnklabben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Finnknallen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.66 Finnrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.142 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.159 Fiskarfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.88 Fiskarstenarna Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Fitjakullen Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.175 Fjäderholmarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.222 Fjäderholmen Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.223 Fjäderholmsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.225 Fjälkinge backe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69 Fjärdgrund Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.290
437
Fjärdhällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.106 Fjärdholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.267 Fjärdholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.267 Fjaugen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.222 Fladingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Flädjan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.104 Flaggrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.210 Flaggskär (56°03′⋅7N, 15°43′⋅7E) Flarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.157 Fläskåsen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.189 Fläsket Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.98 Fläsklösa Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.27 Fläskö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Fläskö, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Fläskögrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Fläsköhällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Fläsklösa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.46 Fläsklösan (59°00′⋅6N, 18°17′⋅7E) Fläskösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Flåtarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.117 Flataskärv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.154 Flatbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Flaten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.188 Flatgarn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.145 Flatskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Flatvarp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.121 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.122 Flaxenvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.324 Fleringe Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.175 Flinta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.195 Flintagrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Flintasten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.189 Flisa Tall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.127 Flisan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.127 Flisbotten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Flisdjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Flisgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.208 Flisö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.108 Flisviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.146 Flivik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.37 Fliviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.37 Flötena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.194 Flötjen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.246 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.246 Flötskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.143 Flundrebådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.246 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.246 Flundregrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Flundreviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.178 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.178 Flutan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.136 Flytan: in Fårösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.229 Flytan: S of Hoburg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Folkeslundagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.198 Follingbo Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.161 Föra Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.101 Förby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.71 Fören Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Förö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Norra Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Södra Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Försänkningen, Östra Light . . . . . . . . 3.211 Försänkningen, Västra Light . . . . . . . 3.211 Forsbergsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Framnäsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187 Franska Knallen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90 Franska Stenarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Fredan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Frederiksø Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.130 Frederiksø Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.132 Fredriks Stenbrud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.117 Fredrikskyrkan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.212 Fredriksnäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.147 Freesendorfer Haken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.54 Freest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.126
Home
Contents
Index
Frenne Rede . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.126 Fridriksgraben Kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.75 Frisgrunne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.79 Fröholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Fröjel Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.153 Frombork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.223 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.223 W Mole Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.223 Frönäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35 Frugelöt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.162 Fudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51 Fulleröfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Funkön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.176 Furholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.345 Furillen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.222 Furö Oskarshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.142 Furö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.267 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.267 Furögrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.164 Furskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Furuholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Furuskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Furusund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.314 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.307 Furusundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Furusundsskaten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.313 Furusundsleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.304 Fyrken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Fyrudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.142 Combined Rescue Centre . . . . . . . . 5.144 Gäddan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.173 Gaddarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105 Gager Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.75 Gahlkow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.80 Gahlkower Haken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.83 Galeriowa Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.201 Galgeløkke Odde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102 Gålklubb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Gallbänkarna (56°40′⋅1N, 16°24′⋅4E) Gällnöport Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153 Gålö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Gälöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Gälön, Gälöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Gålön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.94 Galtbådan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22 Galtbrottet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157 Galten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Galten, Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.50 Galtryggen, Sölvesborg . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Galtryggen Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.190 Gamla Stan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.191 Gamlahamnen: Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84 Gamleby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.88 Gamlebyån . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.88 Gamlebyviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.80 Gammelknuven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.294 Gänsegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53 Gårdby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Gården, Inre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.59 Gården, Yttre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.59 Gårdgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47 Gardno, Jezioro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.315 Gårdsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.76 Gärdsholm, Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.159 Gärdslösa Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Garpahamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.226 Garpegrundet, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36 Garpen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19 Garpen: Oskarshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165 Gärskullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.211 Garz Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.64 Gåse Ytter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.188 Gåsefjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.244 Gåsfeten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.166 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.168 Gåsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33 Gåsholm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142
INDEX
Gåsholmen Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.127 Gasierzyno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.239 Gaski Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.272 Gåskobb Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.294 Gåsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.128 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.128 Gåsöb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.129 Gåsögrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.128 Gåsöleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.129 Gåsön, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.148 Gåssten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24 Gåsstensgrund: (56°23′⋅0N, 16°22′⋅5E) Gåsstensgrund: Kråkelund . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Gastaskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.221 Gastholmsgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139 Gasverkshamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.173 Gauja, river . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.94 Gavan’ Vzmor’ye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.184 Gävlehästen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Gdask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.78 Gdask Channel Light−beacon . . . . . 9.220 Gdask, Gulf of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Gdaska, Zatoka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Gdynia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.46 Harbour Breakwater Lights . . . . . . . 9.70 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.69 Gedebak Odde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.108 Genböte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Getå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.237 Geten (58°42′⋅7N, 17°49′⋅0E) Getfoten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.172 Getholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139 Getorskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.194 Getryggen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.109 Getskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.265 Gillburen Light-buoy; Kalmar . . . . . . . 4.82 Gillöga Skärgård (59°25′⋅0N, 19°21′⋅0E) Gimpelstenarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Ţipka Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28 Gisselholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.149 Gjaus Häll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.140 Gjusharan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125 Glavnyy, Mys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.189 Gebinka Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 Glewitzer Fähre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.105 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.105 Gliparna (59°27′⋅5N, 16°11′⋅4E) Gliparna Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Glotovi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.65 Glowe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.37 Gnisvärd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.155 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.155 Gnisvärdsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Gnitz Der . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.133 Gö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.178 Gobbin leading line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.66 Godnatt Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.209 Göholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.191 Göholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119 Göhren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20 Göjknösen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Gökalv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.178 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.178 Golm Der . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.152 Goorgóra Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 8.244 Gomorrön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.152 Gora = hill; see proper name Górki Wschodnie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.137 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.135 Górki Zachodnie Beacon . . . . . . . . . . 9.135 Görmitz Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.133 Gorsingeholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.156 Görviksgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110 Gösholms landgrund Light-buoy . . . . 6.190 Göta Kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.163 Gotland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.133 Gotska Sandön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.241
438
NW Point Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . 2.244 Göudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.178 Gowienica, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.238 Grabow Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 8.101 Grabówka, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.288 Grabowski, Ostrów; Light . . . . . . . . . 8.261 Gräddö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.352 Gräddö: Norrtäljeviken . . . . . . . . . . . 7.361 Gräddö-Asken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.352 Græsholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129 Grän . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Granfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Granfjärdsklack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Granhamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.291 Granhamnsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262 Granholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.175 Granholmen, Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Granholmen, Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.156 Granholmen: Valdemarsviken . . . . . . 5.126 Granholmen: (59°27′⋅7N, 16°22′⋅0E) Granholmsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31 Granitz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Granitz Jagdschloss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20 Granitzer Ort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 Granklubben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Grankullavik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.217 Grankullaviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.217 Hamn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 4.219 Grännäs (58°11′⋅8N, 16°36′⋅8E) Granö: Almviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.83 Granö: Arholma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.343 Gränöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113 Granösundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.362 Granskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.192 Granskärsredd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.347 Gränsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.74 kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.78 Gränsö Norra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.192 Gränsösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.192 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.192 Gräsgård . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.200 Gräsgårdshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.200 Gråsjälsbåden Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.167 Gråskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.311 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.311 Gråskär; Guövik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.188 Gråskärshäll Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Gräsknösen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.52 Grässkären . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Grässkären, Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Grässkärsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Grässkärsrevet Light-beacon . . . . . . . 5.184 Grautarne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.208 Grauten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.209 Grebygrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Greifswald . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.86 Bodden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.38 Greifswalder Oie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.46 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.51 Greifswalder Wieck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.85 Grekens grund Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Gretagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.30 Grimskalledjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.152 Grimskallen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.169 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.167 N Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165 W Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.162 Grimskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Grimskärsgrund Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Grinda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.147 Grindafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153 Grindö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Grindö, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Grindö, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Grintla Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.88 Grisblänkan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.49
Home
Contents
Index
Grisen Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.299 Griskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Griskobben Norra Beacon . . . . . . . . . 7.297 Griskobben Södra Beacon . . . . . . . . . 7.297 Grisselholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112 Grisselholmen, Fyrudden . . . . . . . . . . 5.143 Grisskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.49 Gristow Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.80 Gristower Wiek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.103 Grodzka, Wyspa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.255 Grogarnshuvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.183 Gröna Jägarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Grönborgen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.40 Gröndalshamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.192 Grönhögen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.43 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.43 Grönholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Grönö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.69 Grönö, Dalarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.110 Grönöknallen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.110 Grönskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.133 Grönsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.144 Grönsöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Grönsösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.144 Grönvållsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.44 Gropahålet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55 Gropviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.162 Gros Stresow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.64 Gross Stubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.65 Gross Zicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.46 Grötlingbogrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Grötlingboholm Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . 2.192 Gröttlan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.189 Grundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Grundudden (57°49′⋅6N, 19°03′⋅7E) Gryfia, Wyspa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.255 Grynge (57°22′⋅9N, 18°50′⋅1E) Grynghällar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Gryt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.145 Grytan Kalmarsunds Djupränna . . . . . . 4.54 Grytan: Hävringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.189 Grytan: Mälaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118 Gryten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Grytgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.208 Grytholmen: Gåsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34 Grytö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.126 Grysholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.223 Gubben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.109 Gubbholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56 Gubbö Kupa Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.137 Gudhjem Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97 Gudhjem N Harbour, see Nørresand Havn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96 Gudhjem S Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.97 Gudingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.112 Guldhällan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Gulf of Rga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Gullängsberget; cliff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.181 Gullängsberget; shoal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Gullholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.320 Gumman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47 Gummerholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81 Gunnarsö (57°15′⋅1N, 16°29′⋅6E) Gunnarsstenarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Gunnebo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.45 Gunnön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.128 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.149 Guövik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.187 Gupafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.310 Gusstäde (57°52′⋅3N, 18°45′⋅4E) Gustaf Dalén Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.171 Gustavsberg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.118
INDEX
Gustow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.106 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 Gvardeyskiy Mys Lighthouse . . . . . . 10.10 Gyrn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.118 Häädemeeste Light-beacon . . . . . . . 11.103 Haapsalu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.111 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.110 Haapsi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.120 Hackerstad Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Hadderev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.107 Hafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Haga, Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Hagby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51 Hagbygrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.198 Hagbygrundet: Kalmarsund . . . . . . . . . 4.53 Hagensche Wiek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.75 Hägerökarten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Hägersten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 Häggbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Hägnekubben Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.182 Håkanskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.291 Hakholmarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Håknäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.51 Håldämman Beacon: Bråviken . . . . . 5.199 Håldämman Beacon: Tvären . . . . . . . 5.308 Haldi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.41 Hällan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Hallarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.225 Hällevik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.105 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.105 Hälleviksviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.105 Hållfast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.119 Hallingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Hallingön Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.150 Hallkivi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.81 Hallnäsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.198 Hällorna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Halls Holme Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.27 Hallsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.28 Hållsfjärden, Yttre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.311 Hallshuk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.157 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.162 Hållsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.321 Halsöklabb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Halvkakssundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.173 Hammar (56°08′N, 15°48′E) Hammarbyleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.224 Hammarbyslussen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.219 Hammargrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.207 Hammarsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.238 Hammarskärsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 Hammarudd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Hammarudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.238 Hammer Odde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Hammeren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40 Hammerhavnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71 Harbour Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71 Hammershus Ruin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Hamngrund: Borgholm . . . . . . . . . . . 4.106 Hamnklabbshällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Hamnö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Hamnrudden Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.247 Hamnudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.247 Håmskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105 Händelön: Norrköping . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.231 Händelöp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.43 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.43 Händelöps Fiskehamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.43 Händelöpsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 Handskarna Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.244 Hanekivi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.81 Hanemaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.93 Hanila Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.107 Hanö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.99
439
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87 W Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.102 Hanöbanken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.94 Hanöbukten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Hanösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.92 Häradskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.129 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.97 Hargberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.304 Hargö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.181 Hargökalv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Harikurk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.69 Harilaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.79 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.103 Harilaiu peenar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Harilaiu poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Harkö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.352 Harö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183 Harön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.176 Leading Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.176 Harstena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.137 Hartsö Stångskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.306 Hartsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.304 Haruddsrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.175 Håskö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.139 Hasle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43 Hasle Havn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 2.56 Hässelbyholme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.117 Hässelbystrand Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . 6.92 Hässelbyverket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.120 Hasselö: Oxelösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.271 Hässelö: Fredriksnäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.148 Hasslö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.215 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.225 Hasslöbron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.217 Hasslögrund, Yttre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.101 Hästen Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.149 Hästgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.146 Hastholmen: Saxarfjärden . . . . . . . . . 7.162 Hastholmen, Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.217 Hästholmen Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.244 Hästholmsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.220 Hästkläpp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183 Hästö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Hästskär Beacon: Kockelskär . . . . . . 5.311 Hästskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.150 Hästskär, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.136 Hästskär, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.136 Hästskogrund Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Hatten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.98 Hattholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.264 Hattkullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.60 Haurevlar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.231 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.231 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.231 Hävringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.171 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.171 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.190 Havssvalget (59°49′⋅0N, 19°12′⋅0E) Heinicke Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.141 Heinlaid: Kihnu väin . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Heinlaid: Väinameri . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Hel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.37 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.36 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18 Helge å . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56 Helgenäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.112 Helgö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.94 Heligholmen Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . 2.185 Hellamaa rahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.91 Helligdomskipperne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72 Helligpeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68 Heltermaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.117 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.117 Hemstan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.255 Henriksnäsberg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16 Heringsdorf Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.200 Herr Peder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100
Home
Contents
Index
Herrhamraleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48 Herrsäten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.310 Herrvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.200 West Breakwater Head Light . . . . . 2.200 Hide (57°44′N, 18°53′E) Hiiessaare nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.84 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.85 Hiiu väin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.42 Hiiumaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.58 Hiiumadal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.65 Himmerfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Hjärthalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87 Hjortgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.209 Hjulsta Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.147 Hjulstabron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.139 Hjulstafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.147 Hobulaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.113 Hoburg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.143 Hoburgs Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Hoburgs Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Höby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.207 Hoby Östra Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 Höga Svedsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.148 Högaskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.178 Högby Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Högen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.142 Höggarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.175 Höggarn, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.175 Höggarn, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.178 Höggarnsbank, Lilla Light . . . . . . . . . 7.175 Höggarnsbank, Stora Light . . . . . . . . 7.175 Höggarnsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.156 Högholm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.188 Högholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.165 Högholmsgrund Light-buoy . . . . . . . . 6.188 Högholmsskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.188 Högklint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.158 Högmarsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.315 Högskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.339 Högsrum Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95 Hohendorf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.130 Højbratter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.107 Hojskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.208 Hökhallen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Hökö Gupa Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.310 Holmebåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.208 Holmen Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.178 Holmi Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 12.112 Holmudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.237 Hölö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.105 Hommelskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.104 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.102 Hommenabben Leading Lights . . . . . 3.235 Hommeskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.182 Hõralaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.103 Hörby Aero Light Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Hornbyklackar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.146 Horngrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Hornökultgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 Hornsberg: Stockholm . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.236 Hornsudde: Öland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.118 Hornsudde: Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Horssten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.254 Horvelsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Hörvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.122 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.122 Hossmogrund, Södra: Kalmarsund . . . 4.53 Hotellviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.117 Hötterskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.136 Hovaren Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.178 Hovgårdsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143 Hovmangrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.146 Hülgerahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.81 Hullo Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.107 Hullo laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.71 Hulterstad Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Hummelgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.258
INDEX
Hummelkläpp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Hummelnäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.150 Hundskärsknuv Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269 Hundudden, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.225 Hunö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16 Hunö Böte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16 Husaröleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262 Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272 Husaröknallen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112 Husby Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.213 Husgarn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.145 Hustegafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.182 Huvön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.320 Huvudet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Huvudskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24 Huvudskärs Hamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29 Huvudstabron: Stockholm . . . . . . . . . 7.227 Hvide-Mæhrn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.107 Hvideodde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42 Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42 Hyperionsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.219 Ibskirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.117 Icebreaking Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.116 Conduct of operations . . . . . . . . . . 1.132 International operations . . . . . . . . . 1.122 National organisations . . . . . . . . . . 1.116 Ship reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.129 Vessel suitability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.124 Idklubbsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Idö Stångskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Idö: Arholma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.340 Idö: Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.70 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.70 Idöbankär (57°40′N, 16°51′E) Idöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Idösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.70 Idskäret Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.298 Idskärsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.281 Idunagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.52 Ifö Kack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69 Igelstaviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.43 Igelstakajen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.46 Igelstabron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.55 Ignatjeva Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19 Ikorn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.322 Imutlaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Ina Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.227 Ina S Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.228 Ingarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112 Ingaröfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112 Ingboskäret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125 Ingmarsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.274 Inlängan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.246 Innarahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Innergrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 Innerholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.192 Innerkullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.248 Inre Runnögrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.126 Inre Triklubbsgrund Light-buoy . . . . . 6.18 Iski Nurt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.264 Iskie Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.227 Ipsi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.124 Irbe Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Irbe river . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.22 Irbe Strait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 Ire Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.161 Irmgardi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Isgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.193 Islingeviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.183 Isö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Ispe Bredgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.98 Ispeudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.97 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.97
440
Isskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Ivanovska sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Jaagarahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.25 Jaagupi Nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Jahnkenort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.142 Jämaja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15 Janshäll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32 Jantar Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.143 Järflotta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.59 Järknögrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.196 Järkön, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.196 Järkön, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Järnafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.30 Järnavik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.187 Järnberget Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.352 Järngrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.98 Järnklint Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Järnverk Chimneys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.171 Järnverkshamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.260 Jarosawiec Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . 8.300 Jarve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133 Jasmund peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Jastarnia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.41 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.42 Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.42 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18 Jastrzřbia Góra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.36 Jaunmlgrvis Light-beacon . . . . . . . . 11.70 Jausa laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.43 Jeppeskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Jertknallen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.101 Jezioro = lake; see proper name Johannisgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Joppö Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183 Jordmarken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.191 Julegård . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.105 Juliabåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.136 Jungfrufjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103 Jungfrugrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Jungfrun, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.188 Jungfrusalen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Jungfruskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Jungfrusund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.98 Jurkalne Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.121 Jru Kanalas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.42 Juten, Stora Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Jutholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90 Jutkobben, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.145 Jutkobben, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.144 Jutskär: Storklappen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.117 Jutskär: Viskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105 Kääramadal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Kaavi Madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.135 Kaavi nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.23 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.23 Kabli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Kabusa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Kadakalaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.79 Kadyny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.226 Kaevatsi laid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Kaggebofjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.123 Kaggen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 Kaggfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.40 Kagghamra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.40 Käglan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Kahtla Church (58°24′⋅3N, 23°00′E) Kajakarahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.110 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.112 Kaknäs Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.174 Kakralaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.84 Kakra saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.106 Kalana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.40 Kälebo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157
Home
Contents
Index
Kaleste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.40 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.40 Kalholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272 Kaliningrad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.150 Kaliningradskiy Morskoy Kanal . . . . 9.179 Kaliningradskiy Zaliv . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.188 Kaliva, Banka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68 Kaljurahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.38 Kalken Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.344 Kalkgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.52 Kalkgrund, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Källa Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.207 Kållafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.244 Källarmästaren Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.72 Kålläskar (56°04′⋅0N, 15°45′⋅7E) Kallinge airport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.273 Källskär, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Källskären . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.337 Källskärsrev Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.200 Källvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.120 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.310 Kålmålsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.117 Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64 Cathedral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.80 Leading Beacons; for Färjestaden . . 4.60 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82 Slott (Castle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51 Tredingsgrund Södra Beacon . . . . . . 4.60 Water Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51 Kalmarsand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.124 Kalmarsund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Kalmarsunds Djupränna . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Kalmarviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.124 Kälmö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Kalvholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30 Kålviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.191 Kalvö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Kalvön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Kamenistaja, Banka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.73 Kamie Pomorski . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.280 Cathedral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.276 Kamienica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.229 Kamienna Góra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.68 Kamieski, Zalew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.280 Kammen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Kamminke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.161 Kamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.140 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.141 Kampeløkkehavnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.94 Kampensbåde Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.269 Kamyowaja, Banka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68 Kana = canal; see proper name Kanalviken: Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.79 Kanan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.96 Kanholmen, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.151 Kanholmen, Norra Light . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Kanholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.151 Kanholmsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.108 Kanholmsgrund, Inre . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Känningen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Kap Arkona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Kapellön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Kapellskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.300 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.291 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.290 Kapellskärsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.307 Kapelludden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.191 Kapelludden Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.196 Kappelshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.177 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.174 Kappelshamnsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.171 Kapten Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.256 Kara Ostra Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 11.73 Karala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.21 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15 Kärdla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.83 Leading Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.83 reid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.83 Kårehamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.210
INDEX
Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.212 Kårholm Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.212 Karholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.148 Käringen Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.345 Käringhällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Käringholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.42 Karjalaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17 Karl Johansslussen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.223 Karlshagen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.129 Karlshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.129 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.156 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.152 Karlshamn-Gungvalla Aero Light . . . . 3.87 Karlskrona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.250 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.209 Water Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.206 Karlskrona angöring Light-buoy . . . . 3.208 Karlskrona Oil Harbour Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.266 Karlslund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.98 Karlslund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Karlsö Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Karlsro Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.239 Karnin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.140 Kårö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Kårö Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.37 Kärrsläti nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.71 Kärrsvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29 Karsibór . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.175 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.223 Karskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.261 Kärsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.121 Kartbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.189 Karten, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.67 Karten: Ljungskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Karthällan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.199 Karuse Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.107 Karvasen, Inre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.46 Karvasen, Yttre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.46 Karw Wielki . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.226 Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.229 Karwia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.298 Kåsaskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.220 Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.220 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.225 Kåsebåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.122 Kåseberga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31 N Breakwater Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31 Kåsehuvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Kasgård Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42 Kahirskoye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.72 Kaskär, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 Kasnevitz Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.64 Kassari . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.43 Kasselaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133 Kastbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47 Kastbåden: (58°43′⋅7N, 17°49′⋅3E) Kastellet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.145 Kasti laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.146 Kastlösa Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51 Kastna nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.125 Kaszubski, Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.98 Katthammarsvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.218 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.218 Kättilö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.139 Kattskär: Västerås . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.175 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.189 KŅty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.231 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.231 Katygrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.162 Káunas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.75 Kaunispe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.16 Kavaljeren Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.60 Kävershäll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95 Kerese madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Kiaulŗs Nugara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.42 Kesnäsudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206
441
Kessu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.106 madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.106 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.105 Kihelkonna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24 Kihnu madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 Kihnu saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.115 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.97 Kihnu Väin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Kiholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.93 Kiipsaare nukk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Kiirasaare laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.26 Kiire madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Kikut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.166 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.200 Killingholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.163 Kipparirahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.86 Kirjurahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.136 madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.135 Kittlarna: E of Fårö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.245 Kittlarna: near Slite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.221 Kiveslaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Kivik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53 Kiviksbredan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72 Klaasirahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.34 Klacknäsgrynnan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.111 Klacksten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157 Kläcksvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Klaip da . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14 Ferry Terminal Leading Lights . . . 10.42 N and S Mole Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 10.41 Klaip dos Iplaukos Leading Lights . . 10.40 Klanten, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.104 Klappervall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Klasgrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.186 Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 NV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Klasgrunden, Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Klashällen Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.265 Klatten, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.252 Klätten, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.257 Klein Zicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.46 Kleines Haff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.145 Kleinstubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.65 Klemenskirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43 Klevbrinken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.164 Klintbroviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.227 Klinte Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.153 Klintehamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.153 Klints Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21 Klippbanken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16 Klippgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36 Klitaskär Östra beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.295 Klockaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.125 Klockargrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22 Klostergrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 Klotet Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.208 Klövholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Klövholmsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Klovskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72 Klubb Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.166 Klubbdjupshamnen: Oskarshamn . . . 4.169 Knaakrücken Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.112 Knaakrücken Leading Lights . . . . . . . 8.119 Knallarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Knallen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.106 Knappen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36 Knöldjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.117 Knölen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Knolls Grund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Knudskirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43 Knuten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.128 Knutsgrund: Kråkelund . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22 Knutsgrund: Viskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105 Knuven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72
Home
Contents
Index
Kõbajalaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.106 Kobbfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262 Kobussören Leading Lights . . . . . . . . 7.352 Kockelhällan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.310 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.310 Kockelskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.311 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.311 Kodjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Kofferdihamnen Leading Lights . . . . 3.267 Kofoten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Kofotsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Koholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.147 Koholmen: Karlskrona . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.265 Koholmsgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.147 Kõiguste laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.148 Kõiguste−Allirahu Lighthouse . . . . . 11.131 Kõinastu laid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Kolberga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.172 Kolboda (56°31′⋅8N, 16°12′⋅4E) Koczewo Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.203 Koejowy, Most . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.86 Kolga kuiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Kolguskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Kölhalsen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Kolka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.22 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Kolka Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Kolkasrags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Kollicker Ort Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 Kollinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28 Kölö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.150 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.150 Koobrzeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.281 Cathedral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.284 E Breakwater Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.285 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.272 Kolsundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.157 Kompassi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.105 Komsomol’skiy Settlement Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.182 Konabbsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81 Kongemindet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Königshörn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.37 Konungsholmen (57°27′⋅5N, 16°43′⋅0E) Koön Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.98 Kooru järv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.36 Koos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.103 Haken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.103 Kootsaare nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.67 Kopina, Wyspa Light-beacon . . . . . . . 8.228 Köping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.195 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.204 Köping Church: Öland . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.101 Köpingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56 Köpman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.183 Köpmanholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Köpmansgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.255 Koppargrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.189 Kopparholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 W point leading light . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Kopparholman Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157 Kopparnageln Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Kopparstenarna Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Kõpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13 poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 Kõrgessaare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.67 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.68 Pier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.68 Kõrklaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Korolya Vil’gel’ma Kanal . . . . . . . . . 10.75 Korpen (58°50′⋅6N, 17°39′⋅9E) Korpen Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Korphålet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.189 Korphällan Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 5.72 Korpholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.269 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.269
INDEX
Korplint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.158 Korsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.161 Korsholmen: Dalarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90 Korsholmen, Finnfjärden . . . . . . . . . . 5.161 Korsholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.270 Korsholmen: Högmarsö . . . . . . . . . . . 7.315 Korskobben Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.256 Korsö Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.133 Korsodde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.102 Korsökobben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.143 Korstagsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.196 Korzysno Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.272 Kosa N and S Point Lights . . . . . . . . . 8.205 Kosa peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.194 Koserow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.200 Köskarvet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.104 Kosse Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.172 Kõverlaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Kråkan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.241 Kråkan, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.219 Kråkan: Borgholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.106 Kråkan: Kråkelund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Kråkelund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Kråkholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.322 Kråknabben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Kråkorna, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Kråkrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Kråkskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21 Kråkskärs Mellgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Krmeru Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.70 Krampö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Kränkan NO Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Kränkan, Norra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Krasnoflotskye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.203 Krepa Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.226 Krievu sala Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . 11.70 Kriimi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17 Kristianopel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42 Kristianopel Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19 Kristineberg: Oskarshamn . . . . . . . . . 4.159 Krogsmålaströmmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.126 Krokås . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.123 Krokås Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.123 Krokek Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.181 Kröken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.136 Krokholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Krokö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.70 Krokskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48 Kroksö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125 Królewic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.298 Krongrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51 Kronotrekant Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 Kröslin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.128 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.80 Krösliner See . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.128 Krummin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.137 Krumminer Wiek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.137 Krynica, Mielizna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.225 Krynica Morska . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.225 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18 Kubararahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.110 Kübassaare Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . 11.131 Kübassaare poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.131 Küdema laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.37 Kudoxafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262 Kuggaskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.246 Kuggeboda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.224 Kuggö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.137 Kuggskärsgrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110 Kuggviksskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Rear Leading Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Kuivalõuka Kuiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.34 Kuivarahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.93 Kuivastu Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.116 Kuivastu Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 12.116
442
Külalaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.66 Kullagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 Kullarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.152 Kullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.218 Kumari madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Kumari saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Kumlen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.189 Kumlet, Östra: Sölvesborg . . . . . . . . . . 3.84 Kummelberget; hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.181 Kundzi sala Light−beacon . . . . . . . . . 11.70 Kungsängen Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5.234 Kungsgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16 Kungshamn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . 5.185 Kungshamn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.175 Kungshamnsgrund Light-beacon . . . . 5.186 Kungshatt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.88 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.98 Kungsholmen: Karlskrona . . . . . . . . . 3.211 Breakwater Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.211 Fort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.212 Kungsholmen: Stockholm . . . . . . . . . 7.226 Kungsholmen: Saxarfjärden . . . . . . . . 7.153 Kungsholmen: Stora Jättersön . . . . . . 4.120 Kungsudden: (57°42′⋅4N, 16°45′⋅0E) Künka madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Kupa Klint Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Kupal’nyj Mys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 Kure Mølle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75 Kuressaare Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.144 Kurevere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Kurpnieku sala East Light-beacon . . . 11.70 Kurpnieku sala West Light-beacon . . 11.70 Kurön Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Kurshskaya Kosa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Kurshskiy Zaliv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54 Kuriu Marios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.54 Kuriu Nerija . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Kurskaya, Banka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.73 Kusön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.322 Kuusnõmme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.23 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.23 poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.23 Kuƺnica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.43 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23 Jama . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.43 Kvädö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.106 Kvädöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Kvarnhällan, Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . 7.49 Kvarnholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.139 Kvarnholmen: Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.64 Kvarnholmen: Stockholm . . . . . . . . . 7.223 Kvarsebo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Kvicksund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.185 Kvicksund Östra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.189 Kvicksund Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . . 6.190 Kvisslan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.118 Kvistholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.236 Kycklingarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90 Kycklingen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Kyllej (57°45′N, 18°57′E) Kyrkegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.117 Kyrkegrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.147 Kyrkfjärden: Karlskrona . . . . . . . . . . 3.237 Kyrkfjärden: Mälaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.97 Kyrkudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.246 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.246 Kyrkviken: Fårö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.238 Kyrkviken: Lidingö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.181 Kyrkviken: Möja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.276 Kyrkviken: Ornö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30 Labansgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Laboratorieholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . 3.267 L Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.88 Lacka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.304 Lacka Torn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.304 Ladebow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.84
Home
Contents
Index
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.83 Ladinu Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.88 Ladugårdslandsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.233 Laevarahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Låga Mellskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.271 Lägerholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69 Laggrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.208 Lågland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Lagnögrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Lagnöklubb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.325 Lagnöströmmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.161 Lagnöviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.324 Laidu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.37 Laidunina: Kõiguste laht . . . . . . . . . 11.127 Laidunina: Suur Katel . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133 Laidupank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Laigiste nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Laimadal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Laine madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.79 Ņki Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.227 Lakknallarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.152 Lalli laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.106 Lambarfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.120 Lambarön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118 Lammskär Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Landkobben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.261 Landsort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.165 Large vessel anchorage . . . . . . . . . 5.174 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.171 Landsort Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31 Landsorts Angöring Light-buoy . . . . . 5.173 Landsorts Bredgrund Light . . . . . . . . 5.171 Landtief Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.45 Långagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 Längan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Langård Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.194 Långaskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42 Långbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.292 Längden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.294 Langekare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Lången . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Långgarn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Långgrund (57°46′⋅4N, 16°53′⋅0E) Långgrund: Landsort approach . . . . . 5.173 Långhällsudde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.93 Långholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Långholmen: Stockholm . . . . . . . . . . 7.226 Långholmsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.156 Långkobb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.267 Långlöt Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Långnabbaudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.36 Langö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Långön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.309 Långören . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.228 Långören Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.238 Långören Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 3.235 Långörsudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.36 Langård Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.194 Langshammarshammaren . . . . . . . . . 2.239 Långskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.143 Långskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Långtarmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.130 Långvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.280 Långviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.328 Långvikskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Länjö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.158 Länna Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Lännerstasundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116 Länsman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.221 Lärbro Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.175 Lars Perssonsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Lars-Olsgrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165 Larsberg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.222 Lassakullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42 Lassan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.138 Bucht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.138 Lassebåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.153
INDEX
Lassegrunden (Färjestaden Ränna) Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.60 Lastberget Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.127 Laugrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.208 Laus Holmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Lauterbach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.69 S Pier Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.67 Lauterbach Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 8.70 Lauterhorn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.239 Lauterhornsudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.247 Lavergrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.245 awica = shoal; see proper name Laxgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Laxören . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 eba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.311 ebsko, Jezioro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.311 Ledgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Ledskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Leeltserahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.135 Lehtma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.82 nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.82 sadam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.82 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.82 Lekskären . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Lepanina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Lergrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.289 Lerskärsgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.289 Lerskäret Norra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.289 Lerviksudde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.323 Lesnoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.64 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Lesundsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.40 Libertus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.222 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.222 Lickershamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.180 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.180 Lidaholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.161 Lidingö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.181 Lidingöbron, Gamla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.216 Lidingöbron, Nya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.216 Lidingön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121 Lidingövarvet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.184 Lidöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.362 Lidön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.340 Lielupe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.39 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.40 Liepja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.88 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.106 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81 S Entrance Leading Lights . . . . . . 10.107 Lieper Winkel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.133 Lietzow Castle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 Liia saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.93 Liivi laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Liljeholmsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.216 Lilla = little; see proper name Lillberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Lillbriten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Lilles backe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.69 Lillgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Lillgrund: Simpevarp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.189 Lillgrund: Stora Jättersön . . . . . . . . . . 4.126 Lillgrund: Vitemölla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54 Lillhammarsgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Lillhammarsgrund Norra Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Lillö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.247 Lillpallarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Linasundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.43 No 5 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.72 Lindalen Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.155 Lindalen Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 7.155 Lindalssundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.155 Lindblomsgrund Light-buoy . . . . . . . 6.153 Lindelövsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.211 Lindesfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.162
443
Lindesk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.177 Lindgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54 Lindholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96 Lindholmen: Karlskrona . . . . . . . . . . 3.264 Lindholmsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96 Lindö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.215 Lindödjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.58 Lindökanalen: Norrköping . . . . . . . . . 5.238 Norra and Södra Lights in line . . . . 5.237 Linköping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.163 Linlandet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.204 Linnusitamaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133 Lisö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.34 Liss Lindo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.192 Listed Havn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.100 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.100 Listerhuvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.97 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Littlö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.127 Liu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Liusäär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Ljugarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.199 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.199 Ljugarnsudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.199 Ljunganabben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Ljungholmen Leading Lights . . . . . . . 3.120 Ljungskär Arpö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.224 Ljungskär Beacon: Kråkelund . . . . . . . 5.25 Ljungskär Light: Oxelösund . . . . . . . 5.265 Ljungskär: Fläskösund . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Ljungskär: Krakelund . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 Ljusberget Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.167 Ljusgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 Ljusklabb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Ljusterö, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.320 Lobber Ort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.46 Loch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53 Lo u kanls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43 Löderup (55°25′⋅6N, 14°06′⋅7E) Loftahammar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.116 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.118 Logegrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.199 Logen Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.199 Logrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.321 Lohme Hafen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.37 Löjtnantsknalt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.144 Löka: Möja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.278 Rescue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.278 Lökholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.273 Lökholmen: Verkebäcksviken . . . . . . . 5.40 Lökholmsdjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Lökskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Lökskäret Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.128 Lökviks norra häll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.76 Lönnbåden (58°44′N, 17°58′E) Lönö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.195 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.195 Lönshuvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.155 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.159 Lönshuvudfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.159 Loode Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15 Loode neem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 Loodenina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133 Loonalaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Loonapank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Loppan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.161 Lörby kladd Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.121 Lörgeh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.222 Lörjebacke Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.222 Löshuvud (58°39′⋅2N, 17°07′⋅1E) Löt Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.207 Löten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.130 Lõu Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15 Lõu laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17 Louddsbanken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.222 Lõuna Ristnanina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14
Home
Contents
Index
Lövgrund: Karlskrona W approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.221 Lövk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.150 Lövnäsudde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.190 Lovön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.121 Lövsgata Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Lövstafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.121 Lubin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.246 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.200 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.243 Lubmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.88 Luidja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.66 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.66 Lummelunda Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.163 Lundasund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.199 Lundbynäs Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Lunsaholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.231 Lunsen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.320 upawa, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.315 Luren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.306 Lusärna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.61 Lusärnafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.61 Lusärnagrund, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.74 Lusärnagrund, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.74 Lyckebyån . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.193 Lygna (59°32′⋅0N, 19°27′⋅0E) Lysberget Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.314 Madviken (56°07′⋅4N, 15°33′⋅4E) Magarna Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153 Mågeflak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89 Magnetic anomalies, local Bornholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36 Gåsfeten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.166 Gotland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.137 Gulf of Rga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 Gupafjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.169 Hävringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.169 Hiiumaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.60 Liepja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.104 Ljungskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14 Norra Fällbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.134 Oskarshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 Rotholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.86 Slätbaken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.154 Väinameri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.98 Vaiste laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.119 Magö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Mälarbron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.58 Mälaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.106 Målaren: Enskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.306 Malkvarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Mällsten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41 Malmgrund (57°47′⋅1N, 16°50′⋅5E) Malmögrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Malmölandet: Bråviken . . . . . . . . . . . 5.216 Maltzien Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 8.101 Mamonovo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.198 Mangai Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 11.68 Mangau Pussala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43 Månggrenarna Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.158 Manilaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.106 Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.106 Maków Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 8.225 Mannegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Mannen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26 Manskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.29 Månskulle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.189 Mansören . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Mårbärsskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.98 Marby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.237 Mardihansu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.38 Maren: Södertälje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.59 Märholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Mariacki Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.292 Mariagrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107
INDEX
Marieborg Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 5.239 Marmorbruket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.188 Marö Kupa Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.158 Marö Udde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.307 Marö: Bråviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.197 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.197 Marö: Furusund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.307 Marögrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Marrgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.292 Marsbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22 Marseholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.138 Marsgårdskulan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Marsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.66 Marskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Måsklubbshällan Norra Light . . . . . . 5.293 Marsö (57°39′⋅5N, 16°42′⋅0E) Märsön Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.148 Marsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.277 Mårtensholme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116 Mårtensskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Martwa Wisa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.98 Marviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.205 Marviken Power Station Chimney . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.181 Marvinsholm Castle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 Måsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113 Måsklubbarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31 Masknaggen Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . 4.97 Måsknuv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.31 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43 Måsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Matge Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.109 Matkroksgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Matrosovo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.66 Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.66 Matsalu laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.114 Matsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139 Matvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.185 Matvikshög Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.167 Mazilkniei Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . 11.70 Mazlaides rava . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.30 Meelaiuneem; see Elda poolsaar . . . . . 12.9 Mellanfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.282 Mellanhäll Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Mellankobben Light−beacon . . . . . . . . 7.92 Mellanskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Mellgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Mellgrundsknuv Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.270 Mellskärsgrund Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Melön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.108 Melskären . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.126 Melstapeln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 Melsted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.98 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.98 Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.98 Mem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.163 Light Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Merise madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.135 Merise nina Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . 12.33 Mrsraga Osta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.35 Mrsrags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.30 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.36 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28 village . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.35 Mesen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Metgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35 Mewia, Wyspa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.264 Mågeflak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89 Miagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110 Mihailova Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Midbredan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Midsjöbanken Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Midsommar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.165 Midsommargrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Midsundsgrundet, Norra Beacon . . . . . 4.60 Mie ån . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.129 Miřdzyzdroje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.166 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.200 Mielin Wyspa N Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.205
444
Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.222 S Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.229 Mieliski Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.222 Mielizna Bórzyska . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 Mielizna Osiecka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.242 Mielno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.270 Mierzeja Helska . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10 Mierzeja Wilana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.209 Mihailova sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Miŷeż Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Mikoszewo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.145 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.143 Mlgrvis Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 11.69 Millegarne Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.191 Millgrundsrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.108 Min’ya, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.75 Minnaya Gavan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.180 Minsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.149 Mittelgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.90 Mittgrunden: Kalmarsund . . . . . . . . . . 4.53 Mjölkö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.271 Mjölkö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.321 Mjölkön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.321 Mjölnareholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.264 Mjöö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.186 Myny Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.201 Mnichöw, Wyspa Light-beacon . . . . . 8.228 Möckleby, Norra Church . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Möcklösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.228 Möcklösundsbron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.232 Mögö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Misaholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.71 Möja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.275 Söderfjärd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262 Västerfjärd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262 Möjaleden, see Rödlögaleden . . . . . . 7.262 Mõldri laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.19 Møllebakke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.106 Møllebugt (55°04′⋅7N, 14°42′⋅9E) Möllegrund: Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.61 Møllenakke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73 Möllstorp: Öland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.49 Mölngrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58 Monchgut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Mõndelaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.20 Monkebüde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.162 Mönsterås . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.110 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.110 Mönsteråsredden Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.111 Mõntu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 sadam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.23 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.23 Moranviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.117 Mörbylånga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58 Mörkarfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.41 Mörkö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 Mörköfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32 Mörrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.127 Morsken Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269 Morskoy Kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.150 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.178 Mörtö-Bunsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24 Hut/House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24 Most = bridge; see proper name Motalaström: Norrköping . . . . . . . . . 5.216 Motawa, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.98 Mrzeyno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.295 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.272 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.295 Muhanina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.20 Muhu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.92 Mukran Ferry Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.29 Mukran N Mole Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.31 Mulaholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.178 Munken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.113
Home
Contents
Index
Munken Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Munsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.130 Muskholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.162 Muskö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.56 Mussehällar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Mustjala Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.33 Mustpank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Mynterhäll Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.167 Mys = Cape; see proper name Mysingeholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.40 Mysingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.32 Mysingsholmsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Mysovka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65 Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.65 Nacka Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.174 Nadbrzee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.228 Naistekivimaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.20 Nålsögat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.89 Nålsten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.219 Namdöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.103 När Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.185 Närgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Närkeviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.277 Närs Holme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Närshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.198 Näs Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Näset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.138 Näsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.121 Näskubben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Näslandet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 Sewage Outfall Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25 Näslandsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Nasrevet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.148 Nästensö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.186 Näsudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125 Näsudden, Burgsvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.148 Näsudden Light: Nyköping . . . . . . . . 5.294 Nasva . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.143 Jõgi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.143 Nasypnoy Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.200 Nåttarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Nättraby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.227 Nättraby Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.227 Nättrabyån . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.227 Natural conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.243 Climate and weather . . . . . . . . . . . 1.262 Climatic tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.284 Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.244 Ice conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.253 Maritime topography . . . . . . . . . . . 1.243 Seabed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.243 Meteorological conversion table and scales . . . . . 1.300 Sea and swell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.247 Sea level and tides . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.246 Sea water characteristics . . . . . . . . 1.249 Nävekvarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.208 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Nävekvarnsklint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.177 Nävelsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Navigation and regulations . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32 Admiralty charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32 Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 Foreign charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 Distress and rescue . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.153 Rescue services . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.156 Ship reporting systems . . . . . . . . 1.154 Navigational aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37 Buoyage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.42 Fixed marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37 Navigational dangers and hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 High speed ferries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Overhead cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
INDEX
Defensive minefields . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 Mine danger areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 Navigation in ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 Severe weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Coastal conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Floating hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Pilotage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.49 Deep sea pilots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.50 National pilotage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.51 Radio facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.59 Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.70 Danish regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.91 Estonian regulations . . . . . . . . . 1.114 German regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 1.93 International regulations . . . . . . . 1.70 Latvian regulations . . . . . . . . . . 1.111 Lithuanian regulations . . . . . . . . 1.113 Polish regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.98 Russian regulations . . . . . . . . . . 1.101 Swedish regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 1.86 Traffic separation schemes . . . . . 1.84 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.136 Traffic and operations . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 Exercise areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22 Fishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 Marine exploitation . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 Movement reporting systems . . . . . . 1.13 Special areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29 Submarines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 Nedjan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 Neksø, see Nexø . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.118 Nemoniem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.67 Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.67 Nemunas, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.75 Neuenkirchen Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.80 Neuensiener See . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.76 Neuhof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.107 Neupokojevi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Nexø . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.118 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122 Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.126 Nidden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.62 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.62 Niechorze Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.272 Nielsengrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Ninaots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.67 Ninase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.37 pank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.32 Nisselklabb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.106 Nittonfotsgrundet (59°15′⋅9N, 18°58′⋅2E) Noarootsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.72 Nöbbelöv Östra Church . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 Nockebybron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.115 Nogat, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.230 Nogersund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.106 Breakwater Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.106 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.106 Nootamaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Norderpall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Nordgrunne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.86 Nordmannen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.99 Nordperd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 Nordväina madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.79 Norje Böke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.115 Norje Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.117 Norjegryt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.117 Norr Skåle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Norra = north; see proper name Norrabåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.67 Norrängsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Norrbådan: Arholma . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Norrbådan: (59°45′⋅5N, 19°24′⋅7E) Norrby Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.81 Nørre-kås . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44 Nørresand Havn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96 Norrfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.150
445
Norrgärdesgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Norrgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72 Norrgryndan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.288 Norrhäll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Norrholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72 Norrklabb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51 Norrköping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.216 Händelöbron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.232 Norrmalm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.191 Norrören . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.124 Norrskär: Herrhamraleden . . . . . . . . . . 7.52 Norrskär: Ridöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Norrskären Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.292 Norrskäret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Norrskärshällar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.52 Norrsundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118 Norrtälje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.353 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.356 Water tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.356 Norrtälje Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.351 Norrtälje Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 7.357 Norrtäljenord Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . 7.351 Norrtäljerännan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.353 Norrtäljeviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.348 Norrviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.274 Norsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.239 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.249 Norsklint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.163 Norsten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Norstö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.120 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.127 Notholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 Notskär, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.119 Nowa Pasřka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.221 S Mole Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.221 Nowe Warpno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.245 Nowy Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.78 Nya Kanholmsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.151 Nyahamnen: Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84 Nybbleklack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.146 Nybrogrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.127 Nybyholm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.147 Nyckeln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Nyckelön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.185 Nygrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Nygrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.289 Nygrund: Häradskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110 Nygrund: Kalmarsund . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Nygrund: Mysingen approach . . . . . . . 7.26 Nygrund: Stora Jättersön . . . . . . . . . . 4.128 Nygrund: W of Nåttarö . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Nyker Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40 Nykirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43 Nyköping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.280 Water Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.262 Nyköping Ån . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.280 Nykvarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.326 Nykvarnsgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.321 Nykvarnsholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . 7.321 Nylarskirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.109 Nymö Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.73 Nymölla Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87 Nynäshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.57 Nynäsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.81 Nypgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.117 Nyrevsudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Nyttgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.117 Nyvarp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Oaxen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.38 Oaxen Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Öbolandet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.324 Obzornyy Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.237 Ödängla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.122 Oder Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.179 Oderhaff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.117 Odra, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.212 Odra Zachodina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.255 Odrarahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.113
Home
Contents
Index
Odrzana, awica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.179 Öja: Herrhamraleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48 Öja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.171 Oknö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.110 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.110 Oknö Hälludde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.145 Oknöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.154 Oknön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Okrřtowa, Wyspa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.255 Oksywski, Cypel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.48 Öland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Ölands Norra Grund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Ölands Norra Tredingsgrund (Postgrundet) Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.60 Ölands Norra Udde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.203 Ölands Norra Udde Light . . . . . . . . . . 4.205 Ölands Södra Grund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 Ölands Södra Udde Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19 Ölandsbron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.49 Ölandshamnen: Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.84 Ölandsrev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21 Ölandssten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.52 Olavi Madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Olsäng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42 Olsängs Yttre Kulle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21 Olskirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75 Olsklabb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Olsön, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.108 Olsösundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.108 Omböjningen Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Omgången . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Ön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.167 Õngu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 Önskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.296 Oosla maa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17 Örarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.117 Örarna Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.301 Örbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.142 Ördar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.229 Orissaare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.57 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.57 Orjaku . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.56 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.56 Orlandu Kepure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16 Orowo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.48 Orminge rör Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.43 Ormingelandet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121 Ormö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.126 Ormsta Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41 Örnarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.363 Örnäsu Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Örnavik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.125 Örngrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Örnhökaknösen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 Örnklubb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Ornö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30 Ornö Huvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 Ornöströmmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 Örö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19 Örö Sankor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Oron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165 Oron (55°57′⋅4N, 14°25′⋅2E) Orranäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15 Orren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.147 Örsankan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.29 Örsbaken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.282 Örsbaken Södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Örserum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.63 Orskär, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Örskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.106 Örskär: Hartsö Stångskär . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Örskären, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Örskären: Stora Vika . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35 Örskärsbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Ortholmen Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.152 Ortholmen Ytter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.161
INDEX
Osaknallen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 Oskar-Fredriksborg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Oskarshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.140 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.159 Water Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.116 Osmussaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.78 Össbygrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.198 Öster Skåle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Øster Mariekirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.117 Øster-Larskirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.77 Österbyklack Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . 6.189 Österflytan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.230 Östergarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.200 Östergarn Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.185 Östergrund: Söderarm . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.258 Österklintshällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51 Österknösarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.173 Österskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.325 Österskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137 Österskärsbådan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.292 Östersviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.273 Ostklüne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.144 Östra = eastern; see proper name Ostrovok Nasypnoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.198 Ostrów Grabowski Light . . . . . . . . . . 8.261 Ostrów, Wyspa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.98 Osttief Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.45 Osvallsgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Othem Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Otmel’ = Shoal, see proper name Ottenby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15 Ottenbylund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15 Ovädersudden Leading Lights . . . . . . 4.162 Oviu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Oviu rags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 Oviu Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 Oxdjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Östra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Oxelgrund (56°59′N, 16°44′E) Oxelö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.247 Oxelösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.245 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.262 Fishing harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.273 Järnverkshamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.260 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.270 Water Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.181 Oxelösunds Hamn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.265 Oxelösunds Fiskehamn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.266 Oxeltanden Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.311 Oxhagen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.146 Oxpelles Grunds Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 Oxudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.138 Paagi säär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.117 Paatsalu (58°32′N, 23°43′E) Paelaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.127 Pagrindinis Pietinis Leading Lights . . 10.42 Palanga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.85 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81 Pålkobb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.267 Pållagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Pallen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118 Palli nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.62 Palmer Ort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.59 Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.90 Pålnäsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.117 Pålsundet: Vaxholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.168 Pålsundet: W of Mörkö . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.30 Paluküla Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.80 Pammana nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28 Pampusfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.228 Pampushamnen Leading Lights . . . . . 5.237 Panga pank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.32
446
Panganukk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24 Paope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.66 Pape; see Papesciems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.87 Papesciems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.87 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81 Papes ezers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.87 Papilaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.105 Papirahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.105 Papisaare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.26 Paproto Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 8.222 Paralepa Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 12.81 Parasmetsa laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.44 Pärlaskärsbådan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . 7.289 Parnica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.262 Pärnu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.107 Approach Leading Lights . . . . . . 11.111 E and W Breakwater Head Lights 11.111 Inner Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 11.111 Jõgi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.107 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.107 Outer Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 11.111 Parolegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Parsřta, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.284 Påskallavik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.135 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.135 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.136 Paslan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.107 Paslan, Yttre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.108 Pasřka, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.221 Paslepa Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 12.81 Pata Eneskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.108 Pataholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.107 Pvilosta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.122 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.126 Pederskirke Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.109 Peene Die . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.142 Peenemünde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.127 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53 Peenemünder Haken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53 Peenestrom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.109 Penningskärsbåden Beacon . . . . . . . . 5.199 Per-Mattsbåden, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.66 Per-Mattsbåden, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.67 Per-Svenskobb Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . 7.297 Persholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 Persnäs Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.207 Persö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.311 Peskobben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28 Petropavlovskas Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 Petrova Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Piasek Dziewiczy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 Piaski . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.222 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.222 Piasnica Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.298 Piastowski Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.223 Pigbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.76 Pihinurme madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Pihinurme Nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Pihlalaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Pikana nukk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Pikanina: Saastna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.114 Pikla nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Pikola Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Pilgrundsklack Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . 6.150 Pilguse laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.20 Pilliots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.106 Piltholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.89 Piltholmsgrynnan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.106 Piltholmsknall Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Pinngrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.198 Pinukse nukk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.110 Pionerskiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 N Mole Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 Pipskärsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Pitkana ots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.97 Pivarootsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.117 Plagurahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.79
Home
Contents
Index
Plomgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.290 Ponia Wielka (54°21′N, 18°47′E) Putnica; river . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29 Podrags Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.70 Põhja Ristnanina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Polessk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.70 Police . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.232 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.227 Polski Hak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.105 Poudniowy, Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.71 Pomorska Zatoka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.165 Poniatowski Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.250 Pöörilaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.120 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.120 Pootsi (58°17′N, 24°07′E) Port Gdask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.98 Port Pónocny . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.111 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.126 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.124 Portgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Portholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153 Portklappen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.136 Portowy, Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.72 Portugals Udd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.126 Veckholms firing practice area . . . 6.126 Poseritz Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 Põtkelmaa Madalikud; see Põtkemaa madalad . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Põtkemaa madalad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Pottskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.190 Povlskirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.109 Prästfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Prästgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Prästgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96 Prästhällen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.267 Prästkobben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.254 Prästör . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.50 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.54 Pregolya, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.150 Prejaren: Arkö entrance . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157 Prejaren: Sandhamn Entrance . . . . . . 7.135 Prejbåden (56°04′⋅0N, 15°30′⋅2E) Prickgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.144 Prickhällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Primor’ye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Primorsk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.208 Primorskaya, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.208 Prokhladnaya, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.202 Prora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.33 Prorer Wiek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Przekop Mieleski . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.261 Przekop Wisy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.139 Przystán Karisbór . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.211 Puck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.45 Puck−Reda Leading Marks . . . . . . . . . 9.45 Pucka, Zatoka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 Puddeminer Wiek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.108 Puddingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Pühadekare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.120 Pühalepa Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.50 Puise nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.114 Pujurderahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.103 Pukavik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.126 Pukaviksbukten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.108 Pullapää nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.110 Punkt Vostochnyy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.181 Puski Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.35 Puumetsa madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Pysen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Quitzlaser Ort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 Quitzlasriff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 Råbockarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.195 Råbocken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.108 Rabotniku Madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18
INDEX
Rådmansö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.300 Radu Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.225 Rafflorna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.178 Ragaciems Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.28 Rågbåden Lilla Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Råggrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.111 Raghammer Odde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.108 Rågholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90 Rågholmsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Rågmoreknösar, Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.173 Rågneholm (56°59′N, 16°27′E) Rågödjup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.116 Rågrund: Karlskrona . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.240 Rakiminskaya, Banka . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.238 Rälby laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.86 Ramklövsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Rammskärskobb Beacon . . . . . . . . . . 7.299 Ramön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.110 Ramsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Ramsholmen, Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Ramsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.72 Ramsmora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.279 Ramsö (56°11′N, 15°33′E) Ramsösundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.169 Randa Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Randkløve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73 Rankaröfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.271 Rankarögrund Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.290 Rankarögrund, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.271 Rannaküla Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Rännbåden Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.191 Rånö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.38 Rånögrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Ranten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.173 Räspa nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.125 Råsumskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Raudrahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Raugi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.92 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.105 Rävenäset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.163 Ravlunda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Reclaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.247 Reda winoujcie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.179 Reda; river . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29 Reddevitzer Höft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.75 Redowski, Cypel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.48 Redu, Wyspa Light-beacon . . . . . . . 8.228 Rega, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.295 Regalcia, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.250 Regarn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Reigi Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.64 Reigi laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.67 Reinberg Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.99 Reka = river; see proper name Remmargrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.286 Remmargrund Lights in line: Söderarm N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.293 Remmargrund Norra Light . . . . . . . . . 7.293 Resarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.159 Resaröström . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.159 Resko, Jezioro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.296 Resko Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.296 Resmo Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.58 Revbådorna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Revengegrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24 Revet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Revet, Sandhamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.40 Revhaken Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Entrance Leading lights . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Revnabben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 Revsudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.104 Revsudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.104 Leading Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.104 Revviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.146 Rewa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.44 Rewa Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.44
447
Rewski, Cypel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 Richtgraben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.142 Riddarfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.226 Ridö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Ridö Pilskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.157 Ridöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Ridön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Riems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.80 Rga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.41 Rgas Jras Lcis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Riksdalerskäret Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Rimmö, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.159 Rindö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.158 Ringholm, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.73 Ringsö Röskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Ringsögrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.306 Ringsögrundet, Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Ringsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.308 Rinkaby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Firing Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.67 Rinksu neem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.32 Rn i Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.68 Risholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Risingehamn (56°29′⋅0N, 16°22′⋅7E) Risö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Ristna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13 Rø . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73 Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Rockegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.117 Röder (59°36′⋅0N, 19°27′⋅0E) Rödhällsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.175 Rödko . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36 Rödkobben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27 Rödlöga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.268 Rödlögaleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.262 Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.267 Rödskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.182 Rödstensfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.88 Rohuküla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.113 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.113 Roja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.33 Directional Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.34 river . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.33 Røkirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.77 Röko . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.267 Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.40 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.55 Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Rökogrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Romeleåsen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 Rone Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.192 Ronehamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.188 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.192 Entry Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 2.193 Harbour Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 2.193 Rönnbusken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.189 Rønne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44 Banke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31 Castle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.48 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 Rønne Approach Light-buoy . . . . . . . . 2.49 Ronneby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.170 Ronneby Kallinge Aero Light . . . . . . 3.167 Ronneby Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 3.177 Ronneby Water Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.167 Ronnebyhamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.170 Rönneholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.119 Rönnerev, Yttre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Rönneskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.226 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.219 Rönnfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.226 Rönnfjärdsleden Leading Lights . . . . 3.226 Rönnholmen, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Rönnholmen, Västra Light . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Ronnskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112
Home
Contents
Index
Rönnskäret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.125 Roomassaare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.138 SW approach Leading Lights . . . 11.140 E approach Leading Lights . . . . . 11.141 Roopa laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.21 Rootsiklaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Ropsten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.173 Röret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21 Rörsäng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42 Rörskäret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.143 Rörumsklabb (55°38′⋅3N, 14°18′⋅1E) Rosenklintsgrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.208 Rosgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.307 Rossviken Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 5.239 Rotholmen, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 Rotholmen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Rotholmen: Stockholm . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.98 Rövarskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Rowokó$ Goƕa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.300 Rowska, awica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.315 Rowy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.315 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.315 Roxen (58°44′N, 18°01′E) Rozewie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.301 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.300 Roztoka Odrzaska . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.225 Ruden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.46 E Mole Head Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.57 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53 N Directional Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53 Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.51 Rügen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Rugiagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.65 Rügischer Bodden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.59 Ruhnu Saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.97 Ruiny Stary Hel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.38 Rukkirahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.113 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.102 Rumpo nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.71 Rundeln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165 Rundskärsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.269 Runmaren, Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96 Runmaren, Västra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96 Runmarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.109 Runnö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.122 Fishing harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.139 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.139 Runnö Rödskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.125 Runnskär, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.269 Runnskärsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.269 Runö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.108 Runskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.204 Runsten Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Rusinowo Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.300 Russ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.69 Rute Missloper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.206 Rutegrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.206 Rutku sala Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . 11.70 Rutskirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.41 Rybachiy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.63 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.63 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Rybi Ostrów Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . 8.228 Rybitwia Mielizna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28 Ryck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.85 Ryssberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.78 Ryssgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.147 Ryssmasterna Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.320 Ryssudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.229 Rytterknaegten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 Rzeka = river; see proper name Rzucewo Cypel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.45 S Karet (55°55′⋅1N, 14°20′⋅4E) S. Jerzego Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.102 Saarenina: Pärnu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Sääre Laimadal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18
INDEX
Sääre nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.84 Saaremaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 Sääretirp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.56 Sääretukk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.147 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.147 Saarnaki laid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Sadno Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.274 Sagas Grund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.265 Sågviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.147 Saka, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.125 Saksby nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.71 Salacgrva . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.92 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.93 Salava . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Salene Bugt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.92 Sälgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Sälgrundet: Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.61 Salinômme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.43 Sällskapsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.58 Salsudd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Saltärna Light-structure . . . . . . . . . . . 3.190 Saltbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.208 Salthammer Odde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116 Salthammer Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.116 Saltknölen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.209 Saltkråkan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.106 Saltö Fiskehamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.272 Saltöhammar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.268 Saltor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.108 Saltsjöbaden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.117 Saltsjön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Saltsjön−Strömmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.212 Saltvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.173 Salvorev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.246 Salzboddengrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.83 Samsabådarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.150 Sanda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.243 Sandaholme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.161 Sandby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.198 Sanddynan (55°47′⋅0N, 14°20′⋅4E) Sandgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Sandhammaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 Sandhamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.146 Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.129 Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.145 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.144 Sandhamn: Karlskrona . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.40 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.40 Sandhamns Stångskär . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.143 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.143 Sandhamns-kobbarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112 Sandhamnsleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.121 Sandhamnssundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.144 Sandholmen Leading Lights . . . . . . . 6.193 Sandkås Odde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73 Sandkullen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.322 Sandö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110 Sandö Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.246 Sandö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.138 Sandö Sugga Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Sandöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.147 Sandögrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Sandön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.129 Sandryggen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Sandsänkan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.135 Sandskär: Nämdofjärden . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Sandskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.40 Sandudden Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.194 Sandvig Havn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93 Sandvik: Öland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.134 Windmill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.116 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.134 Sandviken Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.177 Sandviken: Bråviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.214 Sandviksfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Sandviksgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Sange saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123
448
Sänkbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.136 Sänket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72 Sankhällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Sankt Olofsholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.221 Sarbinowo Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.272 Sarbsko, Jezioro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.313 Sarkandaugava Leading Lights . . . . . 11.69 Sarkandaugava Upe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.69 Sarõtsevi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Sassnitz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.22 E Mole Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26 Reed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.24 Säter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Säterholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Sätra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.98 Sätrarev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.95 Sättekullarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.169 Sätterfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.325 Sauga Jõgi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.110 Saunagciema Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Sävgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.198 Savinovi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.81 Sävö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.306 Sävösund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.309 Sävsundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.309 Saxarfjärden, Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.316 Saxarfjärden, Västra Beacon . . . . . . . 7.152 Saxemara Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.179 Saxemara Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 3.175 Saxskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.161 Sæne Bugt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71 Schaabe, Die . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Scharlakansgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Schloss Insel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.120 Schmale Heide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Schumacher Grund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.52 Schwemmort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.132 Selaön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.144 Seanina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Seasaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.69 Seedorf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.76 Seehundsriff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 Segelholm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Segelskäret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272 Segerön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.157 Segerstad Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Segerstad Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.198 Selaön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.135 Selaön Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.144 Selglaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.117 Sellin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20 Selliner See . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.76 Senoren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.228 Seoginina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.21 Sepamaa laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.145 Severnyy, Mys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.189 Shchukino . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.199 Shchukinskaya, Otmel’ . . . . . . . . . . . 9.199 Shchukinskiy Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . 9.200 Shteyn, Banka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68 Siennicki, Most . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.86 Siggholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.273 Sihimadal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Skragciema Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Sildungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.207 Sillaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.99 Sillåsen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95 Sillekrok, Lilla Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . 4.129 Sillnäsudde Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87 Simlegaard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43 Simpbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Simpevarp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.186 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.189 Simpevarps Approach Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.189 Simpgrynnan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.76 Simpnäsgrynnan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336
Home
Contents
Index
Simpnäsklubb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.252 Simpnäsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.337 Simpströmmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Simrishamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 Sipelgarahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Sippsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Själberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Själeviksgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.127 Själgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Själhällan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Själhällarna: Bråviken . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.196 Själhällarna: Valdemarsviken . . . . . . . 5.126 Själsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.179 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.179 Inner Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 2.179 Själviksskären . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.146 Sjöängarna (56°36′⋅6N, 16°26′⋅0E) Sjöberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.111 Sjöboda Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.191 Sjöbodviken (57°14′N, 16°29′E) Sjösa Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.294 Skaftet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.44 Skaftviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.44 Skäggenäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.89 Skälevik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.137 Skalkaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 Skallen: Kalmarsund . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Skallen: SE of Utö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22 Skallen: Viskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105 Skallholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.265 Skallö, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 Skallö, Södra Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55 Skallöragrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183 Skallörev Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55 Skällösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.237 Skallskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Skälören . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.240 Skåne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Skåne Reef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.200 Skansgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Skansgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.51 Skansholmarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.74 Skanssundet: Himmerfjärden . . . . . . . . 6.24 Skanssundet: Nyköping . . . . . . . . . . . 5.294 Skansudde Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.154 Skåpehåle Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.114 Skäret, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.157 Skärlöv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.201 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.201 Skarp-Runmarö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.129 Skarvgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.229 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.229 Skavdö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26 Skavdösundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34 Skavsta Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.181 Skenalden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.208 Skenäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Skenholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.206 Skepna Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Skeppsbackasundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.110 Skeppsbrofjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.61 Skeppsgården . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.123 Skepskobben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28 Skiftesön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.188 Skillinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49 Skintosaflöten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Skirvit, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.69 Skivarp Church (55°25′N, 13°34′E) Skjutholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 Skolwiski Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.230 Skomakarskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51 Skorpan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Skorva . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32 Skorvan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Skoszewo Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 8.244
INDEX
Skötbådan 59°49′⋅8N, 19°10′⋅3E Skötkobben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.138 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.138 Skötrökan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28 Skraken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Skrakholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.108 Skrapan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43 Skrapan: Nyköping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Skrivaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.333 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.333 Skultes Osta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.89 Direction Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.90 Skurusundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116 Skvallran Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.311 Skvättan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.187 Skylgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Skyttens häll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.74 Sladö Ask Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100 Slagsta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.98 Slagsta Marina Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.99 Slagstaholme Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.97 Slånakullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.175 Slandö kalv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.165 Sländon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.164 Slätbaken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.150 Slätsänkan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.125 Slite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.210 Hamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.210 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Industrihamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.213 Lännahamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.216 Lanthamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.213 Sloka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.25 Slottsbredan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Slottsbryggan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187 Slottsholmen, Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.76 Slottsholmen, Södertälje Kanal . . . . . . 6.66 Supia, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.303 Supsk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.303 Supska, awica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.301 Slussbron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.57 Småholm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.190 Smällhålet Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Småbriten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Smedby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28 Smedens grund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Smedfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.111 Smelte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.33 Smidö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.110 Smöjen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.214 Smörasken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.27 Smörasken Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139 Snäckvikshamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.51 Snäppan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Snårestad Church (55°26′N, 13°41′E) Snesarboudde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Snipan (57°50′⋅5N, 18°34′⋅1E) Snogebæk Havn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.127 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.127 Snuggholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.139 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.139 Sobieszewo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.138 Söderåkra Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.35 Söderarm Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.281 Söderarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.252 Söderarmsleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.281 Söderbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.258 Söderbriten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Södergarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.185 Södergarnsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.185 Södergrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.206 Södergrundan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.135 Södergrynnan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.135 Söderhäll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Söderköping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.164 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Södermalm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.192 Södermöja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272
449
Södernäs Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Södero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Söderpall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Södertälje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.73 Södertälje Kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.43 Södertälje Sluss Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.71 Södertäljeviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.51 Södertörn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 Söderudd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.222 Södra Bergholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35 Södra Lunda Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.199 Södra Mellby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 Södra Midsjöbanken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Södra Möckleby Church . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26 Södra Särdelen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.109 Södra Skikgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.193 Soela väin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.42 Soen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22 Sollenkroka Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Sollenkroka ö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Solliden Castle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.95 Sollidsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.100 Solöfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.156 Solöudd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Solstadström . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.36 Sölvesborg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.77 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.89 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Sölvesborgsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.86 Sõmeri poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.117 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.121 Sõmeri saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.93 Sommargrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.175 Somnitel’naya, Banka . . . . . . . . . . . 10.120 Soolarahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.79 Soonlepa laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.43 Sopot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22 Mole Root Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23 Pier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.104 Söreskäret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40 Sörgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.189 Sorgu saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Sorteodde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96 Sõru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.51 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.33 Sõrve Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Sõrve Madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Sõrve Säär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 Sõrve Poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 Sose Odde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.110 Sötskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.188 Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.188 Sovdeborg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28 Sovietsk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.75 Sowia, Goƕa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.274 Spandowerhagener Wiek . . . . . . . . . . 8.126 Spanska Redden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22 Sparin: Mälaren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.127 Spårö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.69 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.63 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.68 Spårösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.69 Spättgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Spelhagen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.289 Stabogrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.320 Staboudde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.320 Stadsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.280 Städsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.104 Stagniess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.136 Stahlbrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.104 Stahlbrode Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 8.104 Stäket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.134 Stålbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.142 Stallarholmsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.157 Stångehamns Ö (57°13′⋅5N, 16°29′⋅5E) Stången . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.135 Stångskär Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.70
Home
Contents
Index
Stångskär: Karlskrona W approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.220 Stångskär: Landsort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.171 Stångskär: Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.66 Stångskärsgrund: Enskär . . . . . . . . . . 5.306 Stångskärsgrund: (58°32′⋅0N, 17°15′⋅8E) Stannkobben Leading Lights . . . . . . . 7.138 Stapeln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105 Stara Pasřka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.221 Stara wina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.211 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.205 Stärnö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.108 Stärnö Udde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.108 Stärnö Vindham . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.159 Ståtbådergrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Stathmos Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.74 Stavbofjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.30 Stavklint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.158 Stavskallen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.188 Stavsnäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Stegeborg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Stegeborgs Ruin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.160 Stegeholms kanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.85 Stein Hohe Schaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.133 Stein Ort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.101 Stein Riff (54°19′⋅3N, 13°30′⋅3E) Stejlebjerg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40 Stekö Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.177 Stenåsa Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.199 Stendörren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.111 Stendörren Östra Beacon . . . . . . . . . . 7.110 Stendörren Västra Seamark . . . . . . . . 5.313 Stenen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.189 Stengrund, Yttre (56°09′⋅8N, 16°01′⋅2E) Stengrund: Mönsterås . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.111 Stenholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.88 Stenklintarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72 Stenkobbsgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.268 Stenkyrka Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.163 Stenkyrkehuk Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.162 Stenshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.245 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.245 Stenshuvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 Stenskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Stenskärsbank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 Stensö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.61 Ängen Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 4.62 Inre Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.63 Långviken Leading Lights . . . . . . . . 4.62 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.62 Yttre Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.63 Stensögrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53 Stensöudde (56°38′⋅0N, 16°19′⋅1E) Stepnica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.235 Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.235 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.235 Kana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.237 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.225 Zatoka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.238 Stettiner Haff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.145 Stibybacke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.87 Stickskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.70 Stilleryd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.129 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.151 Stillerydviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.131 Stilo Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.300 Stjärnholmsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.287 Stockby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.188 Stockholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.190 Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.206 Arrival information . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.203 Basins and berths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.228 Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.215 Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.222 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.190 Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.210 Limiting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.196 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.219
INDEX
Port services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.238 Stockholms Skärgård . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Stocksundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.188 Stolpe Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.301 Stomsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.43 Stor-Andö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.310 Stor-Askören . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.363 Stora Aggarö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Stora Bockholm Leading Lights . . . . 5.139 Stora Baljan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.247 Stora Ekön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.172 Stora Gåsholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . 6.127 Stora Högholmen Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.140 Stora Husarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.107 Stora Jättersön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.120 Stora Kampåsen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Stora Karlsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.143 Stora Möja Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.267 Stora Nassa Skärgård (59°26′⋅0N, 19°13′⋅0E) Stora Rör . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.103 Stora Sandreholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.126 Stora Sandskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153 Stora Tärnskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.127 Stora Tärnskäret Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19 Stora Vika . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.33 Storbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.150 Storbosundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.42 Storegab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.110 Storgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.148 Storgrund: Arholma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.258 Storgrund: Söderarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.257 Störgrund: Timmernabben . . . . . . . . . 4.109 Storgrundet: N Öland . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.205 Storgrundet: Stora Jättersön . . . . . . . . 4.126 Storgrundsbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.294 Storharskobb Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.295 Storholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Storholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.186 Storkläppen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99 Störlanke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.135 Storö (59°21′N, 18°54′E) Storö: Blankaholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34 Storö: Påskallavik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.137 Storön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.252 Storön: (57°41′⋅9N, 16°35′⋅5E) Storpallarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Storpelles Holmes Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51 Storpellesholme (Storpellesholmarna) 7.51 Storrö (58°41′⋅4N, 17°32′⋅8E) Storskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Storugns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.176 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.176 Old Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.176 Störviksgrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.93 Stötbotten Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.159 Stöten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Strå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.232 Stralsund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.102 Strandgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53 Strandtorp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.101 Strängarna, Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.322 Strängnäs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.156 Strängnäsbron, Nya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.161 Strängnäsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.156 Streckelsberg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.166 Strelasund Die . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.59 Strelasundbrücke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.94 Stresomer Bucht (54°21′N, 13°35′E) Strömmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.206 Strömsholmen: Helgenäs . . . . . . . . . . 5.114 Strömsholmen: Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . 5.84 Strömsholmskanal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.86 Strömskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.148 Struck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.53 Strupdjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26 Strupö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28 Strupö Ljungskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
450
Struyna, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.223 Stubnitz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Studsvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.317 Stumholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.267 Stupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72 Stuphäll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Sturkö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.239 Sturkö Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.241 Styrbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 Styrjan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.261 Suchacz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.227 N Mole Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.227 Südperd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.46 Südkai Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.33 Suggan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Sundbyholmsön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.155 Sundersandsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.238 Sundsbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.209 Sunkobb Beacon, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . 7.295 Sunkobb Beacon, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . 7.295 Sutu laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.147 Sutudden Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 3.153 Suur Härjamaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.93 Suur Katel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.132 Suur väin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.88 Suuremõisa: Kassari laht . . . . . . . . . . 12.43 Suuremõisa: Vormsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.71 Suuriku pank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.36 Suurkäkk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.120 Suurkuiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Suurlaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.117 Suurnanina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Suursadam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.85 Suursadam reid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.84 Svältholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.154 Svaneke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.77 Havn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75 Svängen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.135 Svanhalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.41 Svanholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.182 Svansholmarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.60 Svanvik Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 3.176 Svanviksudde Leading Lights . . . . . . 3.177 Svärdsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Svarta Utterklabben Beacon . . . . . . . . 5.155 Svartahällsbådan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . 5.267 Svartaskärv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.153 Svartbådan Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.141 Svartbådan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Svartbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.109 Svarten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.138 Svartgrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137 Svartgrund: S of Sandhammaren . . . . . 3.18 Svarthäll Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.314 Svartingsskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.129 Svartö: Stora Jättersön . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.132 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.132 Svartören, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.111 Svartskär: Norrköping . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.236 Svartsvikskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.150 Svarvnäset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.175 Sveaviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.187 Svedjelandet Leading Lights . . . . . . . 7.301 Svedudden Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.343 Svensgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 Svenska Björn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.252 Svenska Högarna Light . . . . . . . . . . . 7.252 Svenska Stenarna Beacon . . . . . . . . . 7.260 Sventoji . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.86 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.81 Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.86 Sverigesholme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.114 Svetlogorsk Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Svetlyy Town Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.183 Sviby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.109 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.109
Home
Contents
Index
Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.109 Svindersviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.232 Svingrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.231 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.163 Svinö, Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.49 Svinskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185 Svinsundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.143 Svintaskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.188 Swarzewo Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18 Swarzewska . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29 wibno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.144 wiřta Křpa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.166 wiřta Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.228 wina Strait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.175 winoujcie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.175 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.200 Outer Leading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . 8.201 Syningsknallen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.66 Syrsan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.112 Sysneudd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.183 Szczecin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.248 Szczecinski, Zalew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.212 Szeroki Nurt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.226 Szkarpawa, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.209 Sztutowo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.216 Szwedow Góra Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18 Taaliku sadam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.55 Taga laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.36 Tagamõisa poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Tagaranna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.32 Taget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.173 Taggen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Tahkuna nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.65 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.64 Tahkunina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.107 Tahkuranna Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.111 Tahu Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.112 Tähva nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.91 Tlais Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.104 Tälleskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165 Tälleviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.239 Tallholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Tallklubben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Tallklubben Västra N Light-buoy . . . 6.191 Tallriken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.339 Tallskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.112 Tallskär, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.66 Tallskär, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.137 Tallskärshålet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.66 Green W Side Front Light . . . . . . . . 5.66 Red E Side Front Light . . . . . . . . . . 5.66 Tån . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Tångalund: Hasslö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.193 Tången, Yttre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.109 Tånghällan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.169 Taran Mys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.238 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.237 Tärkma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.43 Tårnrende . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129 Tärnkullen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.104 Tärnö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183 Tärnö Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183 Tärnskärsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.74 Taskobben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.139 Tat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.131 Tauksi saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.93 Tedarö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.148 Tedarön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.148 Tegelgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.144 Tegelhällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.108 Tegeltorp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.93 Teglkås . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.69 Tejn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95 Sector Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95 Telegrafberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.179 Telegrafholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.144
INDEX
Telise nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.72 Temman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.208 Tenösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.156 Thiessow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.74 Thiessow Haken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.65 Thiessower Steintrendel . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.52 Tiljandersknallt Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Tillingenabben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.109 Tillingeö Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 4.161 Timmerdalen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Timmerman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.255 Timmernabben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.109 Tinarahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14 Tinuri nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Tiofotsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Tistelö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.352 Tisterö Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.160 Tisterögrundet Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Tisterön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.155 Tjägö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272 Tjärhovet: Kalmar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.77 Tjärö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.188 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.188 Tjärven Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.252 Tjockö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.345 Tjocköfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.345 Tjurkö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.200 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.241 Tjurkösten Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.212 Tjuvnabbsrevet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.183 Tobaksgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Tobaksgrundet Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Toftagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Tohvri neem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 Tokenäsudde Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.178 Toklo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.87 Tollare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.116 Tolmicko . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.224 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.224 W Mole Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.224 Tomasklabb Östra Beacon . . . . . . . . . 7.296 Tomaskobb Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.296 Tomtbod Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.194 Tondirahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Tonnenbank Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.112 Tonnenbank Leading Lights . . . . . . . . 8.118 Toppvik Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.149 Tordmulen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28 Toresta Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.128 Torhamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.248 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.238 Torhamn Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.248 Torhamnsudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.228 Torila ots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Torkö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.224 Torksbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72 Tornbullshällan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.248 Tornimägi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29 Törnskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.314 Torö, Herrhamraleden . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.48 Torön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.161 Torpagrund Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.194 Torparudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.149 Torpet Östra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.191 Torrbänken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.90 Torrbogrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.184 Torrgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.145 Torrö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107 Torrö Stickskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.102 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Torrö Tallar (57°53′⋅5N, 16°48′⋅0E) Torrödjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105 Torröudd Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.102 Torsburgen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.185 Torsbyfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.156 Torshälla Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.189
451
Torshällahuvud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.185 Torsken Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Torskklabb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Torskklubbshällarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Torsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.104 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.104 Torsöviken, Östra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.104 Torsviviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.167 Tørt Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.110 Tõstamaa nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Tõstamaa laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.125 Tosteberga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.76 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.76 Tosteberga Furor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58 Tosteröbron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.160 Tosterön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.160 Trädgårdsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53 Trädskär Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103 Trälhavet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.156 Tranebergsbron: Stockholm . . . . . . . . 7.227 Tranholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.177 Trännö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.161 Trashallan Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.221 Tränsum Å . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.185 Trässöhällen Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.269 Trätbådan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.310 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.310 Trebrödersundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.76 Trehörningen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.76 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.76 Treimani . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Trendel Riff (54°18′⋅7N, 13°29′⋅0E) Tridingskobb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.269 Triigi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.54 laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.54 nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.54 Pier Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.54 Trindelen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49 Trollharan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.108 Trollholmshällan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.192 Tromper Wiek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Trosa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.323 Tröskeln Östra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.257 Tröskeln Västra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.257 Trulsör . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.272 Trutbådan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.293 Trzebiatów Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.274 Trzebie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.234 (N) Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.234 (S) Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.234 Trzřsacz Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.272 Tsernovi madal: S of Osmussaar . . . . 12.78 Tu’ordaja, Banka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.73 Tudinasva . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.131 Tuja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.91 Tullgarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32 Tullgarnsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32 Tullinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.104 Tullingesjön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.104 Tummen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21 Tunnholmen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26 Tunören Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.88 Tvären . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.316 Tvegöl Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.190 Tvegölja (56°09′⋅2N, 15°38′⋅8E) Tvetö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34 Tviklovan, Västra Beacon . . . . . . . . . 7.289 Tvikobb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.254 Tving Aero Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.167 Tviskäret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.138 Twelen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.134 Tynningö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.163 Tynningöudd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.161 Tyrken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.93 Tyupa, Gora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.83 Tyvö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.343 Tyvön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.343
Home
Contents
Index
Ückeritz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.136 Uddsundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.42 Udrikulaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.131 Uecker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.155 Ueckermünde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.155 W Mole Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.154 Ulahau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.237 Ullersgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.72 Ulvask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.177 Ulvhällsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.156 Ulvsunda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.227 Ulvsundasjön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.227 Umalaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Underås . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.164 Undva nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.32 Ungskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.247 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.247 Unterneemani madal . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Uppgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.149 Uppgrund: Oskarshamn . . . . . . . . . . . 4.165 Upplångö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30 Uppsala: channel to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.134 Ursulas grund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.173 Usedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.144 island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.112 Usedomer See . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.144 Ushakovo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.202 Ustka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.303 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.300 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.308 Utgrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21 Utgrunden Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19 Utgrundet (56°26′⋅1N, 16°10′⋅7E) Utholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.144 Utkiken Tower: Sandhamn Entrance racon . . . . . . . . 7.135 Utklippan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.208 Utklippan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.206 Utklippanshamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.249 Breakwater Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.249 Utlängan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.193 Utlängan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.218 Utmylingen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.208 Utnågrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.336 Utö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Firing Range Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23 Hamn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.95 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.96 Windmill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24 Utögrund: Karlskrona W approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.221 Utterklabbarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.199 Utterklabben Lilla Beacon . . . . . . . . . . 5.19 Uttorp (56°05′N, 15°42′E) Uudepanga laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28 Uulutilaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.106 Uuskuiv; see Sarõtsevi madal . . . . . . 12.14 U ava Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.119 Uznam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.175 V.I.Lenina Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.147 Väddö Kanal; Baltic Pilot Volume III . . . . . . . . . . . 7.363 Väderö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.176 Väderöbåden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.109 Väderön, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.109 Vadviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.101 Vågen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26 Vägga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.161 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.161 Sodra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.156 Väggö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.139 Vahase saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.133 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.136 Vahtrepa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.91 Väike kuiv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Väike Tulpe saar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.146 Väike väin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.117 Väinakari . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49
INDEX
Väinameri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.88 Vaiste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.123 Laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.125 Väjan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.118 Valar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.148 Vålarö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.313 Valbybodar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.152 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.152 Valdemarsvik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.125 Valdemarsviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.125 Valen Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.322 Valge mägi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.36 Valgerahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.104 Valkyriagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.221 Vallersvik Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.321 Valleviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.222 Vällinge Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.96 Vållö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.120 Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.122 Vållöromp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.120 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.129 Valöarna Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.152 Våmben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.144 Vämö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.209 Vämöviken Leading Lights . . . . . . . . 3.266 Vändburg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.197 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.197 Vånevik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.137 Vånevik, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.138 Vang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70 Havn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.70 Pier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.60 Vannenberga Furor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.58 Värati laht . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.125 Vårberget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 Vårby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.101 Oil Harbour Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.102 Vårbyfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.98 Vårdkasberget Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.71 Vargholmen, Strängnäsfjärden . . . . . . 6.161 Vargholmen, Kvicksund . . . . . . . . . . . 6.189 Varholmsudde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Väringen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.125 Värmdö-Garpen Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.164 Värmdölandet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Varslan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.29 Värtan, Lilla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.192 Värtan, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.186 Varvsholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.82 Varvsholmen Leading Lights . . . . . . . 2.153 Väsbyfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.98 Vässlingsö (58°10′⋅2N, 16°55′⋅7E) Västerås . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.169 Västerås djuphamn Light . . . . . . . . . . 6.181 Västerås Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.178 Västeråsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.169 Västeråsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.98 Västerbådan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.66 Västerbron: Stockholm . . . . . . . . . . . 7.226 Västergarn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.154 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.154 Västergrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43 Västerhålets Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.138 Västerholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.153 Västerholmsudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.273 Västerkobb Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.271 Vasterskär: Stora Jättersön . . . . . . . . . 4.127 Västerudden: Sandön . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.138 Västervik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.47 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.63 Djuphamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.75 Water tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.63 Västerviks angöring Light-buoy . . . . . 5.66 Västra = western; see proper name Västrumsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.44 Vätö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.352 Vätösundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.352 Vätta nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.131 Vätta poolsaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.147
452
Vättarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.282 Vattklubben Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Vattungarna (59°47′⋅0N, 19°16′⋅0E) Vaxängsfjärden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.157 Växelgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.320 Vaxholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.168 Vaxholms Kastell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Vaxholmsfjärden, Norra . . . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Vaxholmsfjärden, Södra . . . . . . . . . . . 7.166 Växlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.311 Växlet Norra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.311 Växlet Södra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Vecadaugava . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.43 Veckholms Firing Practice Area . . . . . 6.126 Veelaiu nina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.120 Veiserahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.135 Venta, Reka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.128 Ventes Ragas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.68 Ventlandsgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.44 Ventlinge Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.43 Ventspils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.128 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.156 N and S Molehead Lights . . . . . . 10.156 W Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.157 Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.154 Verkebäck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.46 Verkebäcksviken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.38 Verköhamnen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.271 Verkö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.211 Verkön . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.250 Veselovskaya, Otmel’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.199 Veseloye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.189 Vesiloo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Vesitukimaa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 Veskinina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Vester-Mariekirke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43 Vesterrende . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129 Vettekulla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.184 Vettskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 V I Lenina Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.147 Viad Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.26 Vialmsudd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.181 Vickleby Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.55 Vidinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.271 Viggbyholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.186 Viggsö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.147 Viinakari . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.49 Viire kurk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.88 Viirelaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.106 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.102 Vik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52 Vikasgrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.136 Vikbolandet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.150 Viksberg Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.93 Viksten Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.46 Viksten Nordvästra Light . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43 Viksten Sydöstra Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43 Vilm Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.63 Vilm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.65 Vilmgrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.68 Vilmnitz Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.64 Vilsandi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15 Vindalsö Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.137 Vindåsen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.97 Vindåsen, Stora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.110 Vindbådan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28 Vinden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.193 Vindhamn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 3.155 Vindö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Vindöström . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.120 Vinflytegrunden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.238 Vinkelgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 Vinkova Sklis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10 Vinkovi madal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.65 Vinö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 Vinö Bredhäll Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Vinökråkan Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 Vinterklasen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184
Home
Contents
Index
Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.271 Vinterklasen Rear Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5.267 Vinterskärsnbådarna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.51 Virtsu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.106 Harbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.115 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.115 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.102 Virudden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.186 Visby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.164 Approach Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.168 Cathedral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.167 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.168 N Breakwater Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.168 Visholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.159 Viskär: Slätbaken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.155 Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.155 Viskär: Torrödjupet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105 Vissjan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.193 Vissulaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.84 Vita Märren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.149 Vitaskär . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.186 Vitaskär Light-structure . . . . . . . . . . . 3.190 Vitemölla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54 Vittengen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.72 Vitudden Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.72 Vitvär (57°20′⋅6N, 18°43′⋅9E) Vivassen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.116 Vivstagrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.194 Vohilaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.103 Võilaid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.117 Võirahu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.83 Võistesaar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.101 Voosikurk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.69 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.81 Vormsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.71 N Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.79 S Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.79 Vorpommern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.38 Vretbo Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.152 Vretboklack Light-buoy . . . . . . . . . . . 6.153
INDEX
Warther Haken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.133 Warszów . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.197 West Branch Leading Lights . . . . . . 10.157 Westerplatte Leading Lights . . . . . . . 9.103 Westerplatte Monument . . . . . . . . . . . 9.102 Westklüne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.144 Wicko Mae, Jezioro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.243 Wicko Wielkie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.246 Wieck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.85 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.80 Hafen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.85 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.85 Wielki Zalew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.212 Wieprza, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.288 Wiltshiregrund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.70 Wittow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.15 Wisa, Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.130 Wisa miaa Rzeka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.131 Wilany Zalew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Wisoujcie Fort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.99 Wadysawowo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.24 Domu Rybaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.25 Wolgast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.120 Fähre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.123 Hafen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.120 Road Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.123 Wolin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.247 Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.166 Wusterhusen Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.80 Wyspa = island; see proper name
Yanmarnaya, Banka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.238 Yngsjö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55 Ystad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Båthamn Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . 3.25 Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
453
Ystads Redd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22 Yttergrund: Öland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.206 Ytterholm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.221 Ytterholm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.142 Ytterholmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.192 Ytterknuven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.169 Ytterön Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.238 Ytterösund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.235 Ytterskärsgrundet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.184 Yttre or Ytter = outer; see proper name Yuodkrante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.61 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Lighthouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Yxhammarskobben Light . . . . . . . . . . 7.139 Yxlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.309 Yxnö . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.161
Zagórze Leading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 8.244 Zalesie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.243 Zalew Wilany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.209 Zalvnoye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.71 Zalubin z Morzem Monument . . . . . 8.272 Zatoka = gulf; see proper name Zatoka Skoszewska . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.244 Zecherin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.132 Road Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.132 Zelenogradsk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 Zicker See . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.74 Zickersches Höft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.74 Ziegelgraben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.102 Ziegelgrabenbrücke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.97 Zinnowitz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.135 Church . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.200 Zudar peninsula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.59 uawy Light-beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.225 Zurawia Wyspa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.230 Zvejas Osta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.160
Home
Contents
Index
PUBLICATIONS OF THE UNITED KINGDOM HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE A complete list of Sailing Directions, Charts and other works published by the United Kingdom Hydrographic Office, together with a list of Agents for their sale, is contained in the “Catalogue of Admiralty Charts and Publications”, published annually. The list of Admiralty Distributors is also on the UKHO website (www.ukho.gov.uk), or it can be obtained from: The United Kingdom Hydrographic Office, Admiralty Way, Taunton, Somerset TA1 2DN
Produced in the United Kingdom for UKHO by Pindar plc
Home
Contents
Index
CD−ROM Instructions See Status, Disclaimer and Copyright at Explanatory Notes at Page vii. The CD−ROM below contains the following: Text of this volume in Portable Document Format (PDF). Software to install Adobe Acrobat Reader. A link to the UKHO website: www.ukho.gov.uk. Photographs in PDF, if they are available for the area covered by this volume. Avoid touching or scratching the silver side of the CD−ROM. To protect it from damage or loss, return it to the envelope after use. Place the CD−ROM in a compact disc drive.
The opening screen should appear within a few seconds. If the opening screen does not appear after 15 seconds, try the following: Double−left click: “My Computer”. Double−left click CD−ROM icon: NPxx (D:). Double−left click html file: “index”. The CD−ROM is designed to work with the following software: Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows ME Windows NT4.0 SP5 Windows XP
